Nissan - Altima - Workshop Manual - 2004 - 2004

B ENGINE SECTION ACC ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM A ACC C D E CONTENTS ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ...................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 2 REMOVAL ............................................................. 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 2 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 4 Accelerator Control ................................................... 4 PEDAL TRAVEL .................................................... 4 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 ACC-1 2005 Altima ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:18005 EBS00J8R REMOVAL 1. 2. a. b. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. Pull the connector lock back to unlock the connector from the accelerator pedal position sensor as shown. Pull up on the connector to disconnect it from the accelerator pedal position sensor as shown. LBIA0333E 3. Remove the upper accelerator pedal nuts and lower accelerator pedal bolt. LBIA0334E 4. Remove the accelerator pedal and accelerator position sensor assembly. ● For electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-571, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR" (QR25DE), EC-1286, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR" (VQ35DE). CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal assembly. ● Avoid impact from dropping during handling. ● Keep the pedal assembly away from water. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. LBIA0334E Revision: March 2005 ACC-2 2005 Altima ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ● Check that the accelerator pedal moves through the full specified distance of pedal travel. Pedal travel “A” A : 52.6 - 58.2 mm (2.07 - 2.29 in) ACC C LBIA0062E CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform the “Accelerator pedal released position learning”. Refer to EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" (QR25DE), EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" (VQ35DE). D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 ACC-3 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Accelerator Control PFP:00030 EBS00J8S PEDAL TRAVEL LBIA0062E Accelerator pedal - total travel “A” Revision: March 2005 52.6 - 58.2 mm (2.07 - 2.29 in) ACC-4 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION ACS AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS F AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)..... 2 Description ............................................................... 2 G H I J ACS L M Revision: March 2005 ACS-1 2005 Altima AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) Description PFP:18930 EKS008U9 Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" (QR engine models), EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" (VQ engine models). Revision: March 2005 ACS-2 2005 Altima C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SECTION AT AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE A B AT D E CONTENTS RE4F04B TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ................................ 8 Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ......................... 8 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 10 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 10 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine .................................................. 10 Precautions ............................................................ 10 Service Notice or Precautions ................................ 12 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 13 PREPARATION ......................................................... 14 Special Service Tools ............................................. 14 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 17 OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................. 18 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 18 Circuit Diagram ...................................................... 19 Cross-sectional View .............................................. 20 Hydraulic Control Circuit ........................................ 21 Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 22 Control System ....................................................... 31 Control Mechanism ................................................ 33 Control Valve .......................................................... 37 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 39 Introduction ............................................................ 39 OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 39 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 39 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 39 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 43 CONSULT-II Function (TCM) ................................. 43 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ........... 54 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION ............. 59 Introduction ............................................................ 59 Work Flow .............................................................. 63 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...... 65 A/T Fluid Check ...................................................... 65 A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 65 Stall Test ................................................................. 68 Revision: March 2005 Line Pressure Test .................................................. 71 Road Test ............................................................... 72 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 88 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 88 TCM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 98 CAN Communication ............................................ 101 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY .... 102 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 102 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 103 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 105 Description ............................................................ 105 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 105 Possible Cause ..................................................... 105 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 105 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 107 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 108 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT ...................................................................111 Description .............................................................111 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................111 Possible Cause ......................................................111 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ....................................................................111 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS .............................. 113 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 115 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 117 Description ............................................................ 117 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 117 Possible Cause ..................................................... 117 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 117 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ........................ 119 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 120 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 122 Description ............................................................ 122 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 122 Possible Cause ..................................................... 122 AT-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 122 Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ......................... 123 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 124 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................. 126 Description ............................................................ 126 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 126 Possible Cause ..................................................... 126 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 126 Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ......................... 128 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 131 Description ............................................................ 131 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 131 Possible Cause ..................................................... 131 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 131 Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ........................ 133 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 134 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 136 Description ............................................................ 136 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 136 Possible Cause ..................................................... 136 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 136 Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ........................ 138 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 139 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ................ 141 Description ............................................................ 141 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 141 Possible Cause ..................................................... 141 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 141 Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ........................ 143 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 148 Description ............................................................ 148 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 148 Possible Cause ..................................................... 148 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 148 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 150 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 151 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 153 Description ............................................................ 153 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 153 Possible Cause ..................................................... 153 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 153 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 155 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 156 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 161 Description ............................................................ 161 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161 Possible Cause ..................................................... 161 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 161 Revision: March 2005 Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 163 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 164 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ............... 167 Description ............................................................ 167 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 167 Possible Cause ..................................................... 167 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 167 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ........................... 169 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 170 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ............... 172 Description ............................................................ 172 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172 Possible Cause ..................................................... 172 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 172 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ........................... 174 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 175 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] ........................................................................ 177 Description ............................................................ 177 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 178 Possible Cause ..................................................... 178 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 178 Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ............................... 180 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 181 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ...................................................................... 183 Description ............................................................ 183 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 183 Possible Cause ..................................................... 183 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 183 Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ...................... 185 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 186 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 188 Description ............................................................ 188 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188 Possible Cause ..................................................... 188 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 188 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 190 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 191 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE).192 Description ............................................................ 192 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 192 Possible Cause ..................................................... 192 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 192 Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ......................... 194 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 195 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ................... 199 Description ............................................................ 199 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 199 Possible Cause ..................................................... 199 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 199 AT-2 2005 Altima Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ...................... 201 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 202 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR ............... 203 Description ........................................................... 203 Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ........................ 204 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 205 Component Inspection ......................................... 206 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) ..................................................................... 207 Description ........................................................... 207 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 207 Possible Cause .................................................... 207 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 207 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 208 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) ......................... 209 Description ........................................................... 209 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 210 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .............211 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC .......................211 1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On .............................................................. 215 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position. 217 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed .............................................. 218 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ............................ 219 5. Large Shock. N → R Position .......................... 221 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position. 223 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position ................................................................ 226 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ................. 229 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ..................................................... 232 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ......................... 235 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 .......................... 238 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ...................... 241 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ........... 243 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ................................ 245 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ................................................ 246 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ..................... 248 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → 33 , When A/T Selector Lever D → 3 ......................................................... 249 18. A/T Does Not Shift: 33 → 22 , When Selector Lever 3 → 2 Position ............................................ 250 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position ............................................ 251 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. 252 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP & 3 Position Switches Circuit Checks), and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Circuit Check .......................................... 252 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 258 Description ........................................................... 258 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 258 Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ................................ 259 Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............ 260 Component Inspection ......................................... 261 Revision: March 2005 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 263 Control Device ...................................................... 263 Control Cable ........................................................ 264 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 265 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators .......... 265 Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 267 Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ............. 267 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment . 267 Control Cable Adjustment ..................................... 268 Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ................ 268 AIR BREATHER HOSE .......................................... 270 Air Breather Hose - Air Duct Side ......................... 270 Air Breather Hose - Transaxle Side ...................... 271 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................... 273 Removal ............................................................... 273 Inspection ............................................................. 273 Installation ............................................................ 274 OVERHAUL ............................................................ 275 Components ......................................................... 275 Oil Channel ........................................................... 278 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 279 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 280 Disassembly ......................................................... 280 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ..................... 296 Manual Shaft ........................................................ 296 Oil Pump ............................................................... 299 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 303 Control Valve Upper Body .................................... 312 Control Valve Lower Body .................................... 316 Reverse Clutch ..................................................... 318 High Clutch ........................................................... 321 Forward and Overrun Clutches ............................ 326 Low & Reverse Brake ........................................... 333 Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub ...................................................... 335 Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer ................................................... 339 Band Servo Piston Assembly ............................... 344 Final Drive ............................................................ 349 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 354 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 354 Adjustment (1) ...................................................... 355 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 360 Adjustment (2) ...................................................... 367 Assembly (3) ......................................................... 369 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 376 General Specifications .......................................... 376 Shift Schedule ...................................................... 376 Stall Revolution ..................................................... 376 Line Pressure ....................................................... 377 Control Valves ...................................................... 377 Accumulator .......................................................... 377 Clutch and Brakes ................................................ 378 Final Drive ............................................................ 380 Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump ............................ 380 Input Shaft ............................................................ 381 Reduction Pinion Gear ......................................... 381 Band Servo ........................................................... 382 AT-3 2005 Altima A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Output Shaft ......................................................... 382 Bearing Retainer ................................................... 383 Total End Play ....................................................... 383 Reverse Clutch End Play ...................................... 383 Removal and Installation ...................................... 383 Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 383 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 383 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 384 Revolution Sensor ................................................ 384 Dropping Resistor ................................................. 384 Turbine Revolution Sensor (Power Train Revolution Sensor) ................................................................. 384 RE5F22A INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 385 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 385 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 386 PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 387 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 387 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ................................................. 387 Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement. 388 Precautions ........................................................... 389 Service Notice or Precautions .............................. 391 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 391 PREPARATION ....................................................... 392 Special Service Tools ........................................... 392 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 395 A/T FLUID ............................................................... 396 Changing A/T Fluid ............................................... 396 Checking A/T Fluid ............................................... 396 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 397 Cross-Sectional View ............................................ 397 Shift Mechanism ................................................... 398 TCM Function ....................................................... 415 Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................. 416 CAN Communication ............................................ 416 Line Pressure Control ........................................... 417 Shift Control .......................................................... 417 Lock-Up Control .................................................... 419 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 421 Introduction ........................................................... 421 OBD-II Function for A/T System ........................... 421 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II .......... 421 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............... 421 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 424 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 425 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 425 Fail-Safe ............................................................... 425 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair .................................................... 428 A/T Electrical Parts Location ................................. 433 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 434 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................. 435 Check Before Engine is Started ............................ 439 Check at Idle ......................................................... 439 Revision: March 2005 Cruise Test - Part 1 ............................................... 441 Cruise Test - Part 2 ............................................... 442 Cruise Test - Part 3 ............................................... 443 Shift Schedule ....................................................... 444 Symptom Chart ..................................................... 445 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ......... 452 CONSULT-II Function (TCM) ................................ 455 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ......... 461 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 464 Description ............................................................ 464 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 464 Possible Cause ..................................................... 464 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 464 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 465 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 466 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 467 Description ............................................................ 467 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 467 Possible Cause ..................................................... 467 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 467 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 468 DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR ............................. 469 Description ............................................................ 469 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 469 Possible Cause ..................................................... 469 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 469 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 470 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.471 Description ............................................................ 471 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 471 Possible Cause ..................................................... 471 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 471 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 472 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 473 Component Inspection .......................................... 475 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................................. 476 Description ............................................................ 476 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 476 Possible Cause ..................................................... 476 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 476 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 477 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 478 Component Inspection .......................................... 480 DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE ............................................................ 481 Description ............................................................ 481 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 481 Possible Cause ..................................................... 481 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 481 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTSP ............................ 482 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 483 Component Inspection .......................................... 485 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT ......................................................................... 486 Description ............................................................ 486 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 486 Possible Cause ..................................................... 486 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 486 AT-4 2005 Altima Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSC ........................... 487 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 488 Component Inspection ......................................... 489 DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT ............................... 490 Description ........................................................... 490 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 490 Possible Cause .................................................... 490 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 490 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSATC ....................... 491 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 492 Component Inspection ......................................... 493 DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE ........................................................... 494 Description ........................................................... 494 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 494 Possible Cause .................................................... 494 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 494 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 494 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................ 496 Description ........................................................... 496 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 496 Possible Cause .................................................... 496 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 496 Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ........................ 497 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 498 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 499 Description ........................................................... 499 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 499 Possible Cause .................................................... 499 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 499 Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ........................ 501 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 503 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 505 Description ........................................................... 505 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 505 Possible Cause .................................................... 505 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 505 Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ........................ 507 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 509 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION .................511 Description ............................................................511 On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................511 Possible Cause .....................................................511 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................511 Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ........................ 513 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 514 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION ................ 516 Description ........................................................... 516 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 516 Possible Cause .................................................... 516 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 516 Wiring Diagram — AT — 5THSIG ........................ 518 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 520 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 522 Description ........................................................... 522 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 522 Possible Cause .................................................... 522 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 522 Revision: March 2005 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 523 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 524 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) ................................. 525 Description ............................................................ 525 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 525 Possible Cause ..................................................... 525 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 525 Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/A ............................. 526 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 527 Component Inspection .......................................... 529 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ............... 530 Description ............................................................ 530 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 530 Possible Cause ..................................................... 530 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 530 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ........................... 531 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 532 Component Inspection .......................................... 534 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ............... 535 Description ............................................................ 535 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 535 Possible Cause ..................................................... 535 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 535 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ........................... 536 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 537 Component Inspection .......................................... 539 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C ............... 540 Description ............................................................ 540 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 540 Possible Cause ..................................................... 540 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 540 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/C .......................... 541 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 542 Component Inspection .......................................... 544 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON. 545 Description ............................................................ 545 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 545 Possible Cause ..................................................... 545 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 545 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/CS ........................ 546 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 547 Component Inspection .......................................... 549 DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D ............... 550 Description ............................................................ 550 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 550 Possible Cause ..................................................... 550 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 550 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/D .......................... 551 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 552 Component Inspection .......................................... 554 DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E ............... 555 Description ............................................................ 555 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 555 Possible Cause ..................................................... 555 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 555 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/E ........................... 556 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 557 Component Inspection .......................................... 559 AT-5 2005 Altima A B AT D E F G H I J K L M DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) ............................... 560 Description ............................................................ 560 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 560 Possible Cause ..................................................... 560 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 560 Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/B ............................. 561 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 562 Component Inspection .......................................... 564 DTC P0780 SHIFT ................................................... 565 Description ............................................................ 565 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 565 Possible Cause ..................................................... 565 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 565 Wiring Diagram — AT — SFTFNC ....................... 566 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 568 DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) .............. 569 Description ............................................................ 569 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 569 Possible Cause ..................................................... 569 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 569 Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/C ............................. 570 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 571 Component Inspection .......................................... 573 DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON .............................................. 574 Description ............................................................ 574 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 574 Possible Cause ..................................................... 574 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 574 Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/CS .......................... 575 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 576 Component Inspection .......................................... 578 DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT ... 579 Description ............................................................ 579 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 579 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 579 Possible Cause ..................................................... 579 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 579 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW .......................... 580 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 582 Component Inspection .......................................... 584 Position Indicator .................................................. 584 DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL ............ 585 Description ............................................................ 585 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 585 Possible Cause ..................................................... 585 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 585 Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN ........................ 586 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 588 Component Inspection .......................................... 589 DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................................. 590 Description ............................................................ 590 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 591 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on .... 591 Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 593 Revision: March 2005 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ....... 593 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 594 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) .......................... 595 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position.596 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 597 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 598 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 598 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 599 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 600 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 601 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ............................. 602 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition .................. 603 Lock-up Is Not Released ....................................... 604 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ................... 605 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear .............. 606 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear .............. 607 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear ............. 607 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear ............. 608 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 609 TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate ................. 610 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 612 Control Device ...................................................... 612 Control Cable ........................................................ 613 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 614 Description ............................................................ 614 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location .......... 614 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 615 Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............. 616 Component Inspection .......................................... 617 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 619 Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 619 Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ............. 619 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ... 619 ATF Cooler ............................................................ 620 ATF Cooler Valve .................................................. 620 Control Cable Adjustment ..................................... 621 Side cover ............................................................. 622 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 622 Terminal Cord Assembly ....................................... 622 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............................ 624 Removal ................................................................ 624 Inspection After Removal ...................................... 624 Installation ............................................................. 625 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 626 Components .......................................................... 626 Locations of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Thrust Washers ..................................................... 632 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 633 Disassembly .......................................................... 633 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 652 Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake .............. 652 One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1 ........... 658 Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake ....................... 660 Differential Gear Assembly ................................... 665 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 668 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 668 Adjustment ............................................................ 675 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 676 AT-6 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 692 General Specifications ......................................... 692 Shift Schedule ...................................................... 692 Stall Speed ........................................................... 694 Line Pressure ....................................................... 694 Time Lag .............................................................. 694 Shift Solenoid Valves ........................................... 694 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 695 Clutch and Brakes ................................................ 695 Final Drive ............................................................ 697 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 698 Turbine Revolution Sensor ................................... 698 Revolution Sensor ................................................ 698 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-7 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC PFP:00000 ECS0095J NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-188, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-126 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-131 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-136 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-141 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-153 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-111 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-122 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-161 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-183 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-105 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 P0750 AT-167 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-172 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-148 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-177 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 P0720 AT-117 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AT-188 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. Revision: March 2005 AT-8 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX [RE4F04B] P NO. INDEX FOR DTC A DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-105 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-111 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-117 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-122 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-126 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-131 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-136 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-141 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-148 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-153 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-161 P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-167 P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-172 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-177 P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-183 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-188 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-9 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ECS0095K The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ECS0095L The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM or ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precautions ● ECS0095M Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned off. SEF289H Revision: March 2005 AT-10 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. A B AT AAT470A D ● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or not. Refer to AT-32, "INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM" . E F G MEF040DA ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common SAT964I shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transaxle. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to AT-12, "ATF COOLER SERVICE" . After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Revision: March 2005 AT-11 2005 Altima H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] Service Notice or Precautions ECS0095N FAIL-SAFE The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major electrical input/output device circuit is damaged. Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of 1, 2 or D. The customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration. When the ignition key is turned ON following Fail-Safe operation, A/T check (position) indicator lamp blinks for about 8 seconds. [For “TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)”, refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .] The blinking of the A/T check (position) indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions. Always follow the “Work Flow” (Refer to AT-63, "Work Flow" ). The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows: ● The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor. ● During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated. TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ● External leaks in the hub weld area. ● Converter hub is scored or damaged. ● Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft. ● Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines. ● Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter. ● Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.) ● Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze. ● Internal failure of stator roller clutch. ● Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter). ● Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter. The torque converter should not be replaced if: ● The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles. ● The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged. ● Transaxle failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter. ● Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such as taxi, delivery or police use. ATF COOLER SERVICE If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" . OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS ● ● ● – – – A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the A/T check (position) indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on AT-44 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories. Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-41 to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when the A/T check (position) indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions. park/neutral position (PNP) switch A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up). Revision: March 2005 AT-12 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE4F04B] ● *: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-53, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" . Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ECS0095O When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-13 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RE4F04B] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ECS0095P The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV381054S0 (J-34286) Puller ● Removing differential side oil seals ● Removing differential side bearing outer race ● Removing idler gear bearing outer race a: 250 mm (9.84 in) b: 160 mm (6.30 in) NT414 ST33400001 (J-26082) Drift ● Installing differential side oil seal (RH side) ● Installing oil seal on oil pump housing a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. NT086 (J-34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 (J-34301-1) Oil pressure gauge 2 (J-34301-2) Hoses 3 (J-34298) Adapter 4 (J-34282-2) Adapter 5 (790-301-1230-A) 60° Adapter 6 (J-34301-15) Square socket Measuring line pressure AAT896 ST27180001 (J-25726-A) Puller Removing idler gear a: 100 mm (3.94 in) b: 110 mm (4.33 in) c: M8 x 1.25P NT424 ST23540000 (J-25689-A) Pin punch Removing and installing parking rod plate and manual plate pins a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia. b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. NT442 ST25710000 (J-25689-A) Pin punch Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of transaxle case a: 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. NT410 Revision: March 2005 AT-14 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RE4F04B] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV32101000 (J-25689-A) Pin punch ● Removing and installing manual shaft retaining pin ● Removing and installing pinion mate shaft lock pin A a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia. B AT NT410 KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) Clutch spring compressor ● Removing and installing clutch return springs ● Installing low and reverse brake piston a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) D E NT423 KV40100630 (J-26092) Drift ● Installing reduction gear bearing inner race ● Installing idler gear bearing inner race a: 67.5 mm (2.657 in) dia. b: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia. c: 38.5 mm (1.516 in) dia. G H NT107 ST30720000 (J-25405 and J-34331) Bearing installer F Installing idler gear bearing outer race a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. I J NT115 ST35321000 ( — Drift Installing output shaft bearing a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. ) K L NT073 — (J-34291-A) Shim setting gauge set ● Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil pump thrust washer ● Selecting side gear thrust washer NT101 ST33230000 (J-25805-01) Drift Installing differential side bearing inner race (RH side) a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. NT084 Revision: March 2005 AT-15 2005 Altima M PREPARATION [RE4F04B] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-34290) Shim selecting tool set Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim NT080 ST3306S001 (J-22888-D) Differential side bearing puller set 1 ST33051001 (J-22888-D) Puller 2 ST33061000 (J-8107-2) Adapter ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Preload gauge 1 GG91030000 (J-25765-A) Torque wrench 2 HT62940000 ( — ) Socket adapter 3 HT62900000 ( — ) Socket adapter Removing differential side bearing inner race a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. c: 130 mm (5.12 in) d: 135 mm (5.31 in) e: 100 mm (3.94 in) AMT153 Checking differential side bearing preload NT124 ST35271000 (J-26091) Drift Installing idler gear a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. NT115 — (J-39713) Preload adapter ● Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim ● Checking differential side bearing preload NT087 Revision: March 2005 AT-16 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RE4F04B] Commercial Service Tools ECS0095Q A Tool name Description Puller ● Removing idler gear bearing inner race ● Removing and installing band servo piston snap ring B AT NT077 Puller Removing reduction gear bearing inner race a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. D E NT411 Drift Installing needle bearing on bearing retainer a: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia. F G NT083 Drift H Removing needle bearing from bearing retainer a: 33.5 mm (1.319 in) dia. J NT083 Drift I Installing differential side bearing outer race (RH side) a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia. K L NT083 Power tool ● Removing transaxle assembly ● Removing transaxle oil pan ● Removing transaxle case and cover M PBIC0190E Revision: March 2005 AT-17 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] OVERALL SYSTEM A/T Electrical Parts Location PFP:00000 ECS0095R WCIA0535E Revision: March 2005 AT-18 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Circuit Diagram ECS0095S A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0136E Revision: March 2005 AT-19 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Cross-sectional View ECS0095T SCIA3174E 1. Band servo piston 2. Reverse clutch drum 3. 4. Oil pump 5. Brake band 6. Converter housing Reverse clutch 7. High clutch 8. Front planetary gear 9. Low one-way clutch 10. Rear planetary gear 11. Forward clutch 12. Overrun clutch 13. Low & reverse brake 14. Output gear 15. Idler gear 16. Forward one-way clutch 17. Pinion reduction gear 18. Final gear 19. Differential case 20. Input shaft 21. Torque converter 22. Side cover 23. Transaxle case Revision: March 2005 AT-20 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Hydraulic Control Circuit ECS0095U A B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0040E Revision: March 2005 AT-21 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Shift Mechanism ECS0095V CONSTRUCTION SAT998I 1. Torque converter 2. Oil pump 3. Input shaft 4. Brake band 5. Reverse clutch 6. High clutch 7. Front sun gear 8. Front pinion gear 9. Front internal gear 10. Front planetary carrier 11. Rear sun gear 12. Rear pinion gear 13. Rear internal gear 14. Rear planetary carrier 15. Forward clutch 16. Forward one-way clutch 17. Overrun clutch 18. Low one-way clutch 19. Low & reverse brake 20. Parking pawl 21. Parking gear 22. Output shaft 23. Idle gear 24. Output gear FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function Reverse clutch 5 R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 7 . High clutch 6 H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 10 . Forward clutch 15 F/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with forward one-way clutch 16 . Overrun clutch 17 O/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with rear internal gear 13 . Brake band 4 B/B To lock front sun gear 7 . Forward one-way clutch 16 F/O.C When forward clutch 15 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 13 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. Low one-way clutch 18 L/O.C To stop front planetary carrier 10 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. Low & reverse brake 19 L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 10 . CLUTCH AND BAND CHART Band servo Shift position Reverse clutch 5 High clutch 6 Forward clutch 15 Overrun clutch 17 2nd apply 3rd release 4th apply Forward oneway clutch 16 Low oneway clutch 18 Low & reverse brake 19 Remarks PARK POSITION P R Lockup O Revision: March 2005 O AT-22 REVERSE POSITION 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Band servo Shift position Reverse clutch 5 High clutch 6 Forward clutch 15 Overrun clutch 17 2nd apply 3rd release 4th apply Forward oneway clutch 16 Low oneway clutch 18 Low & reverse brake 19 A Lockup B NEUTRAL POSITION N D*4 1st O *1D 2nd O *1 A O *1 A *2C C *3C C 3rd O O 4th O C 1st O D 2nd O A 1st O O 2nd O O B AT B B B *5O O O B B 2 1 Remarks O B B O B O Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3 ⇔4 D Automatic shift 1⇔2⇐3 E Locks (held stationary) in 1st speed 1⇐2⇐3 F *1: Operates when selector lever is set in 3 position. *2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side. *3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts. *4: A/T will not shift to 4th when selector lever is set in 3 position. *5: Operates when selector lever is set in 3 position. O: Operates A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake. B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration. C: Operates but does not affect power transmission. D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-23 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] POWER TRANSMISSION P and N Positions SAT991I ● ● P position Similar to the N position, the clutches do not operate. The parking pawl engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked. N position Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the clutches do not operate. Revision: March 2005 AT-24 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] 11 Position A B AT D E F G H I J WCIA0355E ● Forward clutch ● Low one-way clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Overrun clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse brake. This is different from that of D1 , 21 , and 31 . K L Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. M Revision: March 2005 AT-25 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D1 and 21 Positions WCIA0356E ● Forward one-way clutch ● Forward clutch ● Low one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions (Engine brake) Revision: March 2005 Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these three clutches. D1 : Overdrive control switch OFF and throttle opening is less than 3/16 21 : Always engaged At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way clutch. AT-26 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D2 , 32 , 22 and 12 Positions A B AT D E F G H I J WCIA0357E ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Brake band Overrun clutch engagement conditions Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier. As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed. 32 : Gear selector lever is set in 3 position and throttle opening is less than 3/16 32 , 22 and 12 : Always engaged K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-27 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D3 and 33 Positions WCIA0358E ● High clutch ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions Revision: March 2005 Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch. This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed. D3 and 33 : Selector lever is set in 3 position and throttle opening is less than 3/16 AT-28 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] D4 Position A B AT D E F G H I J WCIA0360E ● High clutch ● Brake band ● Forward clutch (Does not affect power transmission) Engine brake Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch. This front carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes front internal gear (output) turn faster. At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-29 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] R Position WCIA0359E ● Reverse clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake Revision: March 2005 Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake. Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction. As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-30 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Control System ECS0095W A OUTLINE The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor (VHCL/S SE-1) Vehicle speed sensor (VHCL/S SE-2) 3 position switch ASCD control unit Stop lamp switch Turbine revolution sensor Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Overrun clutch control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CAN communication line control Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Overrun clutch solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve A/T check (position) indicator lamp B AT D E CONTROL SYSTEM F G H I J K L M LCIA0041E Revision: March 2005 AT-31 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] TCM FUNCTION The function of the TCM is to: ● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. ● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. ● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM Sensors and solenoid valves Input Output Function Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM. Engine speed signal Receives signal from ECM and controls lock-up control solenoid valve. A/T fluid temperature sensor Detects transaxle fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM. Revolution sensor (VHCL/S SE-1) Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM. Vehicle speed sensor (VHCL/S SE-2) Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution sensor (installed on transaxle) malfunctions. 3 position switch Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to D4 (overdrive) position, to the TCM. ASCD control unit Sends the cruise signal and D4 (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD control unit to TCM. Stop lamp switch Send the lock-up release signal to the TCM at time of D4 (lock-up). CAN communication In CAN communication, control units are connected to 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transaxle with less wiring. Shift solenoid valve A/B Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Line pressure solenoid valve Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Overrun clutch solenoid valve Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. A/T check (position) indicator lamp Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction. CAN communication In CAN communication, control units are connected to 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transaxle with less wiring. Revision: March 2005 AT-32 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Control Mechanism ECS0095X A LINE PRESSURE CONTROL TCM has various line pressure control characteristics to meet the driving conditions. An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics. Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation. B Normal Control AT The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable clutch operation. D E SAT003J F Back-up Control (Engine brake) If the selector lever is shifted to 2 position while driving in D4 (O/D) or D3 , great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to deal with this driving force. G H I SAT004J J During Shift Change The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock. K L M SAT005J At Low Fluid Temperature ● Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize shifting quality. Revision: March 2005 AT-33 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] ● The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transaxle fluid when temperature is low. SAT006J ● Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F). This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low temperature. SAT007J SHIFT CONTROL The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and the ECM (throttle opening). This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy. Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When set to ON, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the shift valve. The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the ECM (throttle opening) and revolution sensor to select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM. SAT008J Revision: March 2005 AT-34 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions A Gear position Shift solenoid valve D 1 , 21 , 11 D 2 , 22 , 12 D3 D4 (O/D) N-P A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Control of Shift Valves A and B B AT D E SAT009J Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B. The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward. F G LOCK-UP CONTROL H The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to an oil pressure signal which controls the lock-up piston. I Conditions for Lock-up Operation When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed. Selector lever D position 3 position Gear position D4 3 Vehicle speed sensor More than set value ECM (throttle opening) Less than set opening A/T fluid temperature sensor J K L More than 40°C (104°F) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control M The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the OFF period, and opens the circuit during the ON period. If the percentage of OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and pilot pressure remains high. SAT010J Revision: March 2005 AT-35 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock. OFF-time INCREASING ↓ Amount of drain DECREASING ↓ Pilot pressure HIGH ↓ Lock-up RELEASING SAT011J Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation AAT155A LOCK-UP RELEASED The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked. LOCK-UP APPLIED When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch piston applied. Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up. OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL) Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective. The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed. Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions SAT014J Selector lever position Gear position D D1 , D2 , D3 2 21 , 22 1 11 , 12 Revision: March 2005 AT-36 Throttle opening Less than 3/16 At any position 2005 Altima OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control A The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control (engine brake control). When this solenoid valve is ON, the pilot pressure drain port closes. When it is OFF, the drain port opens. During the solenoid valve ON pilot pressure is applied to the end face of the overrun clutch control valve. B AT SAT015J D Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation When the solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure is applied to the overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does not engage. When the solenoid valve is OFF, pilot pressure is not generated. At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun clutch to engage. In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times. E F G H I J K SAT016J Control Valve ECS0095Y FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES Valve name Function Pressure regulator valve, plug and sleeve plug Regulates oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Pressure modifier valve and sleeve Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, shift timing. Accumulator control valve Regulates accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions. Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions. Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral. Shift valve A Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B. Revision: March 2005 AT-37 2005 Altima L M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Valve name Function Shift valve B Simultaneously switches two oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A. Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with application of the brake band in D4 . (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during D4 .) “1” reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when down-shifting from the 1 position 12 to 11 . Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock. In 1 and 2 positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability. Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure. Torque converter clutch control valve, plug and sleeve Activates or inactivates the lock-up function. Also provides smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system. 1-2 accumulator valve and piston Dampens the shock encountered when 2nd gear band servo contracts, and provides smooth shifting. 3-2 timing valve Switches the pace that oil pressure is released depending on vehicle speed; maximizes the high clutch release timing, and allows for soft down shifting. Shuttle valve Determines if the overrun clutch solenoid valve should control the 3-2 timing valve or the overrun clutch control valve and switches between the two. Cooler check valve At low speeds and with a small load when little heat is generated, saves the volume of cooler flow, and stores the oil pressure for lock up. Revision: March 2005 AT-38 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Introduction PFP:00000 A ECS0095Z The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM (transaxle control B module) in combination with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T check (position) indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. AT For details, refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Function for A/T System" . OBD-II Function for A/T System ECS00960 The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II D E F ECS00961 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. G TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below. I MIL Items One trip detection Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 X Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 X Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor — DTC: P1705 X Except above J Two trip detection K X L The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) M ECS00962 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. ( With CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720, P0725, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. Revision: March 2005 AT-39 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown in the following page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. BCIA0030E If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. SAT015K If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”. SAT016K Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data 2 3 Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Revision: March 2005 AT-40 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as A described following. ● If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. ● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode B selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC AT related to OBD-II. For details, refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! . ● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) D ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes E ● Test values HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. Touch “ENGINE”. Touch “SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS”. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-41 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) WCIA0361E HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-55, "OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-65, "How to Erase DTC" . HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) 1. 2. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Revision: March 2005 AT-42 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 1. 2. ECS00963 The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking the lamp. ● If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" . (Or see EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .) When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp should go off. If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For details, refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! . CONSULT-II Function (TCM) A B AT D SAT964I ECS00964 E CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. TCM diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is displayed. Displays TCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. ECU PART NUMBER G Displays TCM input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR FUNCTION TEST F H Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". TCM part number can be read. I CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (AT-44, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" ), place check marks for results on the “Diagnostic Worksheet”, AT-60, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provide following the items. NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: – Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, – Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and – Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). 4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit. Revision: March 2005 AT-43 2005 Altima J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. Touch on CONSULT-II, touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)", and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis. If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-102, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY" . If result is NG, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . BCIA0029E 2. Touch “SELF DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. CONSULT-II performs “Real Time Diagnosis”. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. SAT987J SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” test mode) “A/T” Available by A/T check (position) indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2, TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on the gear position) from the switch. — P0705 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X P0720 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X — ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0731*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0732*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0733*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0734*1 Malfunction is detected when... ● PNP SW/CIRC Revolution sensor VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T OBD-II (DTC) “ENGINE” Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit — TCM self-diagnosis “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST VEH SPD SEN/ CIR AT Vehicle speed sensor (Meter) VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR — A/T 1st gear function — A/T 1ST GR FNCTN A/T 2nd gear function — ● A/T 2ND GR FNCTN A/T 3rd gear function — ● A/T 3RD GR FNCTN A/T 4th gear function — Revision: March 2005 ● A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-44 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” test mode) “A/T” TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC) Available by A/T check (position) indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2, A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. — P0744*1 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X ● TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from this sensor X P1705 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the ECM. X P0725 ● TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. X P0710 K ● The ECM-A/T communication line is open or shorted. X U1000 L ● TCM does not receive proper voltage signal from sensor X — M ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning — — ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning — — ● TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. — — Malfunction is detected when... “ENGINE” A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) ● — A/T TCC S/V FNCTN Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT SOLENOID/V A ● SFT SOL A/CIRC Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT SOLENOID/V B ● SFT SOL B/CIRC Overrun clutch solenoid valve OVERRUN CLUTCH S/ V ● O/R CLUCH SOL/ CIRC T/C clutch solenoid valve T/C CLUTCH SOL/V ● TCC SOLENOID/ CIRC Line pressure solenoid valve LINE PRESSURE S/V ● L/PRESS SOL/ CIRC Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] THROTTLE POSI SEN TP/SEN/CIRC A/T Engine speed signal ENGINE SPEED SIG “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST A B AT P0750 D P0755 E P1760 F P0740 G P0745 H I J A/T fluid temperature sensor BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN ATF TEMP SEN/ CIRC Engine control A/T COMM LINE — Turbine revolution sensor TURBINE REV TCM (RAM) CONTROL UNIT (RAM) — TCM (ROM) CONTROL UNIT (ROM) — TCM (EEP ROM) CONT UNIT(EEP ROM) Revision: March 2005 — AT-45 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” test mode) “A/T” OBD-II (DTC) Available by A/T check (position) indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2, This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen.) X — No failure has been detected. X X Malfunction is detected when... “ENGINE” Initial start INITIAL START TCM self-diagnosis ● — No failure (NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDICATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED**) ● “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST X: Applicable −: Not applicable *1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. *2: Refer to EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) Monitor item Item Display Vehicle speed sensor 1 (A/T) (Revolution sensor) VHCL/S SE·A/T [km/h] or [mph] Vehicle speed sensor 2 (Meter) VHCL/S SE·MTR [km/h] or [mph] Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] A/T fluid temperature sensor Battery voltage Engine speed THRTL POS SEN [V] FLUID TEMP SE [V] BATTERY VOLT [V] ENGINE SPEED [rpm] Turbine revolution sensor TURBINE REV Overdrive control switch OVERDRIVE SW [ON/OFF] Revision: March 2005 TCM Input signals X Main signals — X — X X X X Description Vehicle speed computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed. ● When racing engine in N or P with vehicle stationary, CONSULT-II data may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph). ● Vehicle speed computed from signal of vehicle speed sensor is displayed. ● Vehicle speed display may not be accurate under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when vehicle is stationary. ● Throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed ● A/T fluid temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● Signal voltage lowers as fluid temperature rises. ● Source voltage of TCM is displayed. ● Engine speed, computed from engine speed signal, is displayed. ● Engine speed display may not be accurate under approx. 800 rpm. It may not indicate 0 rpm even when engine is not running. ● Checks changing speed then performs oil pressure control and torque down control ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of 3 position switch is displayed. — — X — — AT-46 Remarks ● — X X Selection from menu 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Monitor item Item PN position (PNP) switch R position switch D position switch 2 position switch 1 position switch ASCD cruise signal ASCD OD cut signal Kickdown switch Stop lamp switch Display PN POSI SW [ON/OFF] R POSITION SW [ON/OFF] D POSITION SW [ON/OFF] 2 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] 1 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] ASCD·CRUIS E [ON/OFF] ASCD·OD CUT [ON/OFF] KICKDOWN SW [ON/OFF] TCM Input signals X ● X Vehicle speed Throttle position [Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Revision: March 2005 — ● X X X X — VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [mph] THROTTLE POSI [/8] — — — Status of ASCD cruise signal is displayed. ON ... Cruising state OFF ... Normal running state — — ● Selector lever position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● Vehicle speed data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● Throttle position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. X AT-47 ON/OFF status, computed from signal of kickdown SW, is displayed. ON/OFF status is displayed. ON ... Brake pedal is depressed. OFF ... Brake pedal is released. X F G H I Status of ASCD OD release signal is displayed. ON ... OD released OFF ... OD not released ● — — E ● — X ON/OFF state computed from signal of D position SW is displayed. ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1 position SW, is displayed. — — D ● — AT ON/OFF state computed from signal of R position SW is displayed. ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2 position SW, is displayed. ● X ON/OFF state computed from signal of PN position SW is displayed. ● ● X Remarks B — BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] SLCT LVR POSI Description ● X Selector lever position Main signals A Selection from menu J K ● This is displayed even when no kickdown switch is equipped. L M ● A specific value used for control is displayed if fail-safe is activated due to error. ● A specific value used for control is displayed if fail-safe is activated due to error. 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Monitor item Item Gear position Display TCM Input signals Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Shift solenoid valve A LINE PRES DTY [%] TCC S/V DUTY [%] — — Overrun clutch solenoid valve OVERRUN/C S/V [ON/OFF] Self-diagnosis display lamp [A/T check (position) indicator lamp] SELF-D DP LMP [ON/OFF] Torque converter slip ratio TC SLIP RATIO [0.000] Torque converter slip speed Voltage [V] Revision: March 2005 X TC SLIP SPEED [rpm] — — — ● Gear position data used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● Control value of line pressure solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. X ● Control value of shift solenoid valve A, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of shift solenoid valve B, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of overrun clutch solenoid valve computed by TCM from each input signal is displayed. ● Control status of A/T check (position) indicator lamp is displayed. ● Ratio of engine revolution to input shaft revolution of torque converter. ● Difference in revolution between input shaft revolution and torque converter input shaft revolution. ● Value measured by voltage probe is displayed. — — X — SHIFT S/V B [ON/OFF] — Description X SHIFT S/V A [ON/OFF] — Shift solenoid valve B Selection from menu GEAR — Line pressure duty Main signals X — X X — — — — — AT-48 Remarks ● Control value of solenoid is displayed even if solenoid circuit is disconnected. The OFF signal is displayed if solenoid circuit is shorted. ● Display does not indicate engine is stopped even if 0 rpm — this is not a malfunction. 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Monitor item Item Display TCM Input signals Main signals A Selection from menu Description B ● Frequency [Hz] — — DUTY-HI — — DUTY-LOW — — PLS WIDTH-HI — — PLS WIDTH-LOW — — Remarks Value measured by pulse probe is displayed. If measurement is impossible, "#" sign is displayed. "#" sign is also displayed at the final data value until the measurement result is obtained. ● Duty cycle value for measurement probe is displayed. ● Measured pulse width of measurement probe is displayed. AT D E F G X: Applicable —: Not applicable : Option H DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II CONSULT-II Setting Procedure CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to Data link connector, which is located in left side dash panel. I J K L LCIA0042E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine) Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 AT-49 2005 Altima M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 5. Touch “A/T”. BCIA0030E 6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”. BCIA0031E 7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.). SAT018K 8. Touch “START”. SAT589J Revision: March 2005 AT-50 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. A B AT SAT019K D ● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. E F G SAT591J H 10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. I J K SAT592J L M SAT593J Revision: March 2005 AT-51 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed. SAT594J 12. Touch “YES” or “NO”. SAT595J 13. CONSULT-II procedure ended. SAT596J SAT593J If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE Revision: March 2005 AT-52 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] DTC work support item Description Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed. 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed. 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Overrun clutch solenoid valve ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can be confirmed. ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● ● ● ● AT D Shift solenoid valve A E Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed. TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 Shift solenoid valve A ● ● 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 A ● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed. 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 Check item Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-53 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR CONSULT-II Setting Procedure CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located in left side dash panel. LCIA0042E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “A/T”. BCIA0030E 6. Touch “CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to LAN-16, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor" . BCIA0031E Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ECS00965 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST) Refer to EC-140, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" . Revision: March 2005 AT-54 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) A Refer to EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) B 1. CHECK A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. Move selector lever to P position. Start engine and warm it up to normal engine operating temperature. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) AT D E LCIA0043E Does A/T check (position) indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop procedure. Perform AT-215, "1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" before proceeding. F 5. G H I WCIA0458E J 2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Push and hold shift lock button. Depress the brake pedal, then move gear selector lever from P to 3 position. Wait 3 seconds. K L M WCIA0344E 5. 6. Move selector lever to 2 position. Release brake pedal. >> GO TO 3. LCIA0046E Revision: March 2005 AT-55 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] 3. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2 1. 2. 3. 4. Move selector lever to 1 position. Depress brake pedal. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it. The A/T check (position) indicator lamp will begin to flash. >> GO TO 4. LCIA0047E 4. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC CODE Check A/T check (position) indicator lamp. Refer to AT-56, "JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE" . >> DIAGNOSIS END WCIA0458E JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE A/T check (position) indicator lamp: All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others. LCIA0049E LCIA0050E All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-117, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . 2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others. LCIA0051E LCIA0052E Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . Revision: March 2005 Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-177, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]". AT-56 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] A/T check (position) indicator lamp: A 5th judgement flicker is longer than others. 4th judgement flicker is longer than others. B AT LCIA0053E LCIA0054E Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-167, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-172, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . 6th judgement flicker is longer than others. 7th judgement flicker is longer than others. D E LCIA0055E F LCIA0056E Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-183, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-148, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . 8th judgement flicker is longer than others. 9th judgement flicker is longer than others. G H I LCIA0057E LCIA0058E A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power source circuit is damaged. Þ Go to AT-111, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-122, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . J 10th judgement flicker is longer than others. 11th judgement flicker is longer than others. K L LCIA0059E Revision: March 2005 M LCIA0060E Turbine revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-203, "DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" . Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-161, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . AT-57 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] A/T check (position) indicator lamp: 12th judgement flicker is longer than others. LCIA0061E The ECM-A/T communication line is open or shorted. Þ Go to AT-188, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Flickers as shown below. Lamp turns off. LCIA0062E LCIA0063E Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, and 3 position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged. Þ Go to AT-252, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP & 3 Position Switches Circuit Checks), and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Circuit Check" . Battery power is low. Battery has been disconnected for a long time. Battery is connected conversely. (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.) t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second Revision: March 2005 AT-58 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION Introduction The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, ECM (throttle opening) or park/neutral position (PNP) switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc. PFP:00000 A ECS00966 B AT D SAT631IA E It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only, may not find the cause of the problems. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-63, "Work Flow" . F G H SAT632I I Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” like the example on page AT-61 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins for information. J K L SEF234G M Revision: March 2005 AT-59 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information from Customer KEY POINTS WHAT ........ Vehicle & A/T model WHEN ........ Date, Frequencies WHERE ..... Road conditions HOW .......... Operating conditions, Symptoms Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN Trans. model Engine Mileage Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position) ❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 3rd → 4th) ❏ Intermittent ( times a day) ❏ 2nd → 3rd ❏ No down-shift (❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st) ❏ Lockup malfunction ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lockup ❏ Any drive position) ❏ Noise or vibration ❏ No kickdown ❏ No pattern select ❏ Others ( A/T check (position) indicator lamp Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Revision: March 2005 ) Blinks for about 8 seconds. ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit AT-60 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Worksheet 1. ❏ Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints. AT-12 2. ❏ CHECK A/T FLUID AT-65 ❏ Leakage (Follow specified procedure) ❏ Fluid condition ❏ Fluid level 3. A B ❏ Perform STALL TEST and PRESSURE TEST. ❏ Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others. ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Reverse clutch ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Overrun clutch ❏ Forward one-way clutch AT-68, AT-71 ❏ Low & reverse brake ❏ Low one-way clutch ❏ Engine ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Clutches and brakes except high clutch and brake band are OK AT D E ❏ Pressure test — Suspected parts: 4. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-72 41. AT-74 Check before engine is started. F ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items. ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-105 ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-117 . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-122 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor, AT-203 . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-161 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-167 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-172 . ❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-177 . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-183 . ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) & 3 position switches circuit checks, and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit check AT-252 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199 . ❏ CAN communication line, AT-188 . ❏ Control unit (RAM), Control unit (ROM), AT-207 . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-209 . ❏ Battery ❏ Others G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-61 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] 42. 43. Check at idle AT-74 ❏ 1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-215 . ❏ 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position, AT-217 . ❏ 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed, AT-218 . ❏ 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-219 . ❏ 5. Large Shock. N → R Position, AT-221 . ❏ 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position, AT-223 . ❏ 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 or 1 Position, AT-226 . Cruise test AT-76 AT-81 Part-1 ❏ 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 , AT-229 . ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-232 . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 , AT-235 . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 , AT-238 . ❏ 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-241 . ❏ 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-243 . ❏ 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-245 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ), AT-246 . Part-2 AT-84 ❏ 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 , AT-248 . ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-232 . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 , AT-235 . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 , AT-238 . Part-3 4. AT-86 ❏ 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 When Gear Selector Lever D → 3, AT-249 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3 ), AT-246 . ❏ 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position, AT-250 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22 ), AT-246 . ❏ 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position, AT-251 . ❏ 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-252 . ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items. ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-105 ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-117 . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-122 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor, AT-203 . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-161 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-167 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-172 . ❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-177 . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-183 . ❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) & 3 position switches circuit checks, and throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit check, AT-252 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199 . ❏ CAN communication line, AT-188 . ❏ Control unit (RAM), Control unit (ROM), AT-207 . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-209 . ❏ Battery ❏ Others 5. ❏ For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-265 6. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-72 7. ❏ Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items. Refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! . ! Hyper-link Error !, ! Hyper-link Error ! ❏ DTC (P0731) A/T 1st gear function, AT-126 . ❏ DTC (P0732) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-131 . ❏ DTC (P0733) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-136 . ❏ DTC (P0734) A/T 4th gear function, AT-141 . ❏ DTC (P0744) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-153 . Revision: March 2005 AT-62 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] 8. 9. ❏ Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts. Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible symptoms and the component inspection orders.) AT-44 AT-54 ❏ Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories. AT-41 A B Work Flow ECS00967 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. AT In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, AT-60, "Information from Customer" and AT-61, "Diagnostic WorkD sheet" , to perform the best troubleshooting possible. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-63 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION [RE4F04B] WORK FLOW CHART SAT086JI *1: AT-60 *2: AT-61 *3: AT-12 *4: AT-65 *5: AT-68, AT-71 *6: AT-72 *7: AT-43 *8: AT-39 *9: AT-39 *10: AT-105 *11: AT-209 *12: AT-211 *13: AT-252 *14: AT-88 *15: AT-41 *16: AT-105 *17: AT-192 *18: EC-54 Revision: March 2005 AT-64 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION A/T Fluid Check PFP:00000 A ECS00968 FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK 1. 2. 3. Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating surface of converter housing and transaxle case. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D position and wait a few minutes. Stop engine. B AT D WCIA0053E 4. E Check for fresh leakage. F G H SAT288G I FLUID CONDITION CHECK Fluid color Suspected problem Dark or black with burned odor Wear of frictional material Milky pink Water contamination — Road water entering through filler tube or breather Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and tacky Oxidation — Over or under filling, — Overheating J K L SAT638A FLUID LEVEL CHECK M Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" . A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ECS00969 Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result. Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. 2. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. Revision: March 2005 AT-65 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 3. 4. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes or bypass valve. NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. SCIA2945E 5. 6. 7. 8. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: ● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ● Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ● Do not breath vapors or spray mist. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet hose. SCIA2955E SCIA2962E 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle. Remove the banjo bolts. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Perform AT-66, "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE NOTE: Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. Revision: March 2005 AT-66 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 3. 4. 5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: ● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ● Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ● Do not breath vapors or spray mist. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler inlet hose. A B AT SCIA2955E D E F G SCIA2965E 6. 7. H Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet hose. I Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid into the coffee filter. 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose. 10. Perform AT-67, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE" . 8. J K SCIA2966E A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. a. L Inspect the coffee filter for debris. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and the procedure is ended. M SCIA2967E Revision: March 2005 AT-67 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection procedure is ended. SCIA2971E A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Stall Test ECS0096A STALL TEST PROCEDURE 1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil. SAT647B 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature 3. 4. :50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) Set parking brake and block wheels. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test. ● It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine rpm on indicator. SAT513G 5. 6. 7. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D position. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot brake. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release throttle. ● During test, never hold throttle wide open for less than 5 seconds. Stall revolution : 2,300 - 2,750 rpm SAT514G Revision: March 2005 AT-68 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 8. 9. Move selector lever to N position. Cool off ATF. ● Run engine at idle for at least one minute. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R positions. A B AT LCIA0064E D JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST The test result and possible damaged components relating to each result are shown in the illustrations on next page. In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, refer to AT-64, "WORK FLOW CHART" . NOTE: Stall revolution is too high in D, 2 or 1 position: ● Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. ..... Low one-way clutch slippage ● Slippage occurs in the following gears: 1st through 3rd gears in 3 position and engine brake functions. 1st and 2nd gears in 2 position and engine brake functions with accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle). ..... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage Stall revolution is too high in R position: ● Engine brake does not function in 1 position. ..... Low & reverse brake slippage ● Engine brake functions in 1 position. ..... Reverse clutch slippage Stall revolution within specifications: ● Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing CAUTION: Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally. ● Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in D position. ..... High clutch slippage ● Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in D position. ..... Brake band slippage ● Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in D position, 2nd gear in 2 position, and 1st gear in 1 position. Stall revolution less than specifications: E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-69 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] ● Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter SAT499K Revision: March 2005 AT-70 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Line Pressure Test ECS0096B LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS A Location of line pressure test ports are shown in the illustration. ● Always replace pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts. B AT D SAT301FA LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. E Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature F :50 - 80°C (122 176°F) G H SAT647B 3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port. I J K SCIA5376E 4. Set parking brake and block wheels. ● Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure test is being performed at stall speed. M SAT513G Revision: March 2005 AT-71 L 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed. ● When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the stall test procedure. AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" : Refer to SDS, AT-377, "Line Pressure" SAT493G JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST Judgement Suspected parts Line pressure is low in all positions. Line pressure is low in particular position. ● Oil pump wear ● Control piston damage ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged ● Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve ● Clogged strainer ● Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch ● For example, line pressure is: − Low in R and 1 positions, but − Normal in D and 2 positions. Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit. Refer to AT-22, "CLUTCH AND BAND CHART" . ● A/T fluid temperature sensor damaged ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Open in dropping resistor circuit ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pilot valve sticking At idle Line pressure is high. Line pressure is low. At stall speed Road Test ECS0096C DESCRIPTION ● ● 1. 2. 3. The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of A/ T and analyze causes of problems. The road test consists of the following three parts: Check before engine is started Check at idle Cruise test SAT786A Revision: March 2005 AT-72 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] ● ● Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and items to check. Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found. Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test. Refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" and AT-211, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS" . A B AT SAT496G D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-73 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED 1. CHECK A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Park vehicle on flat surface. Move selector lever to P position. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Does A/T check (position) indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop ROAD TEST. Go to AT-215, "1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . LCIA0043E 2. CHECK A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP Does A/T check (position) OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET, AT-61 . Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . No >> 1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . 3. Go to AT-74, "2. CHECK AT IDLE" . WCIA0458E 2. CHECK AT IDLE 1. CHECK ENGINE START 1. Park vehicle on flat surface. 2. Move selector lever to P position. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 4. Turn ignition switch to START position. 5. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-217, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. LCIA0065E Revision: March 2005 AT-74 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK ENGINE START A 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC position. 2. Move selector lever to D, 1, 2 or R position. 3. Turn ignition switch to START position. 4. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-217, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 3. B AT D LCIA0066E E 3. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. 2. 3. Move selector lever to P position. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Release parking brake. F G H LCIA0043E 4. Push vehicle forward or backward. 5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward? 6. Apply parking brake. Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-218, "3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 4. I J K L SAT796A M 4. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. Start engine. 2. Move selector lever to N position. 3. Release parking brake. 4. Does vehicle move forward or backward? Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-219, "4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 5. LCIA0064E Revision: March 2005 AT-75 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK SHIFT LOCK 1. Apply foot brake. SAT797A 2. Move selector lever to R position. 3. Is there large shock when changing from N to R position? Yes or No Yes >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-221, "5. Large Shock. N → R Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. No >> GO TO 6. LCIA0068E 6. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. Release foot brake for several seconds. 2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-223, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT799A 7. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. Move selector lever to D, 2 and 1 positions and check if vehicle creeps forward. 2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-76, "3. CRUISE TEST" . No >> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. LCIA0069E 3. CRUISE TEST ● Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3. Revision: March 2005 AT-76 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] With CONSULT-II ● ● A Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result. Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per Shift Schedule. Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" B AT D SAT601J CONSULT-II Setting Procedure CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located in left side dash panel. E F G H I LCIA0042E 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. K L BCIA0029E 5. Touch “A/T”. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-77 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”. BCIA0031E 7. 8. Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”. See “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph Display”. SAT175K 9. Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”. 10. Touch “Start”. SAT973J 11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”. SAT134K Revision: March 2005 AT-78 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”. A B AT SAT135K D 13. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”. E F G SAT987J H I J K SAT974J 14. 15. 16. 17. Touch “DISPLAY”. Touch “PRINT”. Check the monitor data printed out. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3. L M SAT975J Revision: March 2005 AT-79 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Without CONSULT-II ● Throttle position sensor can be checked by voltage across terminals 41 (W) and 42 (B) of TCM. LCIA0097E Revision: March 2005 AT-80 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Cruise Test — Part 1 A 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature. ATF operating temperature 2. 3. 4. 5. B :50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) AT Park vehicle on flat surface. Set gear selector lever to D position. Move selector lever to P position. Start engine. D E F LCIA0043E 6. G Move selector lever to D position. H I J LCIA0045E K 7. 8. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal half-way. Does vehicle start from D1 ? L Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . Continue ROAD TEST. M SAT495G Revision: March 2005 AT-81 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 2. CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2 ) Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2 :Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-232, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT954I 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 :Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT955I 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D3 to D4 :Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-238, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT956I Revision: March 2005 AT-82 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U) A Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Read vehicle speed, throttle opening when lock-up duty becomes 94%. Specified speed when lock-up occurs B :Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-241, "12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D SAT957I E 6. CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP F Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Go to AT-243, "13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" . G 7. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 L/U TO D4 ) H 1. Release accelerator pedal. 2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Go to AT-245, "14. Lock-up Is Not Released" . Continue ROAD TEST. I J K SAT958I 8. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 1. 2. TO D3 ) L Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3 ? M Read gear position and engine speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go to AT-84, "Cruise Test — Part 2" . No >> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT959I Revision: March 2005 AT-83 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Cruise Test — Part 2 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. 2. 3. Confirm gear selector lever is in D position. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again. Does vehicle start from D1 ? Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-248, "16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT495G 2. CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 1. 2. 3. TO D4 TO D2 ) Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully? Read gear position and throttle opening. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-232, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT404H 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 :Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST. SAT960I Revision: March 2005 AT-84 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) AND ENGINE BRAKE A Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3 . Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? B Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go to AT-86, "Cruise Test — Part 3" . No >> Go to AT-238, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D SAT405H E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-85 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] Cruise Test — Part 3 1. VEHICLE SPEED (D4 ) POSITION 1. 2. Confirm gear selector lever is in D position. Using half-throttle, accelerate vehicle until it shifts into D4 . SAT812A 3. 4. 5. Release accelerator pedal. Move gear selector lever from D position to 3 position while driving in D4 . Does A/T shift from D4 to 3? Read gear position and vehicle speed. SAT813A LCIA0071E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-249, "17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → 33 , When A/T Selector Lever D → 3" . Continue ROAD TEST. 2. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. LCIA0071E Revision: March 2005 AT-86 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (33 1. 2. TO 22 ) A Move selector lever from 3 to 2 position while driving in 33 . Does A/T shift from 33 to 22 ? B Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-250, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: 33 → 22 , When Selector Lever 3 → 2 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. AT D LCIA0072E E 4. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE F Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST. G H I LCIA0072E 5. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (22 TO 11 ) J Move selector lever from 2 to 1 position while driving in 22 . Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position? Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-251, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST. 1. 2. K L M LCIA0073E 6. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . No >> Go to AT-252, "20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . Continue ROAD TEST. LCIA0073E Revision: March 2005 AT-87 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Chart Numbers are arranged in order of inspection. Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. Items Symptom Condition Torque converter is not locked up. ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Lock-up Engagement/ TCC Inoperative Torque converter clutch piston slip. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Lock-up point is extremely high or low. Shift Shock Sharp shock in shifting from N to D position. ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 Diagnostic Item PFP:00000 ECS0096D Reference Page 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 4. Engine speed signal AT-122 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111 6. Line pressure test AT-71 7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-148 8. Control valve assembly AT-265 9. Torque converter AT-280 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-148 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. Torque converter AT-280 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-148 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 1. Engine idling rpm EC-80 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111 5. Engine speed signal AT-122 6. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 7. Control valve assembly AT-265 8. Accumulator N-D AT-280 9. Forward clutch AT-326 AT-88 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Too sharp a shock in change from D1 to D2 . Condition 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Accumulator servo release AT-280 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111 6. Brake band AT-280 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Control valve assembly AT-265 4. High clutch AT-321 5. Brake band AT-280 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Control valve assembly AT-265 4. Brake band AT-280 5. Overrun clutch AT-326 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-183 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-265 ON vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-333 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Accumulator servo release AT-275 3. Brake band AT-280 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 ON vehicle ON vehicle Shift Shock ON vehicle OFF vehicle Gear change shock felt during deceleration by releasing accelerator pedal. Large shock changing from 12 to 11 in 1 position. Too high a gear change point from D1 to D2 , from D2 to D3 , from D3 to D4 . Gear change directly from D1 to D3 occurs. Improper Shift Timing Too high a change point from D4 to D3 , from D3 to D2 , from D2 to D1 . Kickdown does not operate when depressing pedal in D4 within kickdown vehicle speed. Revision: March 2005 A EC-93 OFF vehicle Too sharp a shock in change from D3 to D4 . Reference Page 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment OFF vehicle Too sharp a shock in change from D2 to D3 . Diagnostic Item ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle AT-89 B AT D E F G H I J K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Improper Shift Timing Symptom Condition Kickdown operates or engine overruns when depressing pedal in D4 beyond kickdown vehicle speed limit. ON vehicle Gear change from 22 to 23 in 2 position. ON vehicle Gear change from 11 to 12 in 1 position. ON vehicle Failure to change gear from D4 to D3 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Down Shift Failure to change gear from D3 to D2 or from D4 to D2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from D2 to D1 or from D3 to D1 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-183 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. Low & reverse brake AT-333 8. Overrun clutch AT-326 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 6. High clutch AT-321 7. Brake band AT-280 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 6. Low one-way clutch AT-280 7. High clutch AT-321 8. Brake band AT-280 AT-90 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Failure to change from D3 to 22 when changing lever into 2 position. AT-250 No Down Shift Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Does not change from 12 to 11 in 1 position. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from D1 to D2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Up Shift Failure to change gear from D2 to D3 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 Diagnostic Item Reference Page A 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-183 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. Control cable adjustment AT-268 8. Brake band AT-280 9. Overrun clutch AT-326 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-183 B AT D E G 6. Overrun clutch AT-326 7. Low & reverse brake AT-333 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 6. Brake band AT-280 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 3. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 6. High clutch AT-321 7. Brake band AT-280 AT-91 F H I J K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Failure to change gear from D3 to D4 . Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Vehicle will not run in D and 2 positions (but runs in 1 and R positions). Revision: March 2005 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111 6. Brake band AT-280 EC-93 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-183 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111 8. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 9. Brake band AT-280 10. Overrun clutch AT-326 1. Control cable adjustment AT-268 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. Reverse clutch AT-318 6. High clutch AT-321 7. Forward clutch AT-326 8. Overrun clutch AT-326 9. Low & reverse brake AT-333 ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-268 OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-280 ON vehicle OFF vehicle Vehicle will not run in R position (but runs in D, 2 and 1 positions). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. Reference Page 1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment No Up Shift A/T does not shift to D4 when driving with overdrive control switch ON. Diagnostic Item ON vehicle OFF vehicle AT-92 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Vehicle will not run in D, 1, 2 positions (but runs in R position). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Clutches or brakes slip somewhat in starting. OFF vehicle ON vehicle No creep at all. AT-223, AT-226 OFF vehicle Almost no shock or clutches slipping in change from D1 to D2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. Accumulator N-D AT-280 6. Reverse clutch AT-318 7. High clutch AT-321 8. Forward clutch AT-326 9. Forward one-way clutch AT-280 10. Low one-way clutch AT-280 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 4. Line pressure test AT-71 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. Accumulator N-D AT-280 8. Forward clutch AT-326 9. Reverse clutch AT-318 10. Low & reverse brake AT-333 11. Oil pump AT-299 12. Torque converter AT-280 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Control valve assembly AT-265 4. Forward clutch AT-326 5. Oil pump AT-299 6. Torque converter AT-280 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Accumulator servo release AT-275 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 6. Brake band AT-280 AT-93 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Almost no shock or slipping in change from D2 to D3 . Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Almost no shock or slipping in change from D3 to D4 . ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. High clutch AT-321 6. Forward clutch AT-326 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Control valve assembly AT-265 5. High clutch AT-321 6. Brake band AT-280 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 to D3 when depressing pedal. Slips/Will Not Engage ON vehicle OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 to D2 when depressing pedal. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D3 to D2 when depressing pedal. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 6. High clutch AT-321 7. Forward clutch AT-326 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. Brake band AT-280 8. Forward clutch AT-326 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 6. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111 7. Brake band AT-280 8. Forward clutch AT-326 9. High clutch AT-321 AT-94 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 or D3 to D1 when depressing pedal. Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage NOT USED Revision: March 2005 2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 6. Forward clutch AT-326 7. Forward one-way clutch AT-280 8. Low one-way clutch AT-280 A B AT D AT-65 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 5. Oil pump AT-299 6. High clutch AT-321 7. Brake band AT-280 8. Low & reverse brake AT-333 9. Torque converter AT-280 10. Parking components AT-275 1. Ignition switch and starter SC-13 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 1. Control cable adjustment AT-268 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Line pressure test AT-71 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 5. Engine speed signal AT-122 6. Oil pump AT-299 7. Torque converter AT-280 ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-268 OFF vehicle 2. Parking components AT-275 ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Vehicle moves when changing into P position or parking gear does not disengage when shifted out of P position. AT-65 AT-268 OFF vehicle Transaxle noise in P and N positions. 1. Fluid level 1. Fluid level Vehicle will not run in any position. Engine starts in positions other than P and N. Reference Page 2. Control cable adjustment ON vehicle Engine cannot be started in P and N positions. AT-217 Diagnostic Item AT-95 E F G H I J K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Vehicle runs in N position. AT-219 Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Vehicle braked when shifting into R position. OFF vehicle Excessive creep. NOT USED Engine stops when shifting lever into R, D, 2 and 1. ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Vehicle braked by gear change from D1 to D2 . Vehicle braked by gear change from D2 to D3 . Vehicle braked by gear change from D3 to D4 . Revision: March 2005 Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Control cable adjustment AT-268 2. Forward clutch AT-326 3. Reverse clutch AT-318 4. Overrun clutch AT-326 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 3. Line pressure test AT-71 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 6. High clutch AT-321 7. Brake band AT-280 8. Forward clutch AT-326 9. Overrun clutch AT-326 1. Engine idling rpm EC-80 1. Engine idling rpm EC-80 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-148 3. Control valve assembly AT-265 4. Torque converter AT-280 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Reverse clutch AT-318 3. Low & reverse brake AT-333 4. High clutch AT-321 5. Low one-way clutch AT-280 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-65 OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-280 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Overrun clutch AT-326 3. Forward one-way clutch AT-280 4. Reverse clutch AT-318 OFF vehicle OFF vehicle AT-96 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Condition 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 6. Reverse clutch AT-318 7. High clutch AT-321 8. Brake band AT-280 9. Low & reverse brake AT-333 10. Oil pump AT-299 11. Torque converter AT-280 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-65 OFF vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-280 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-267 2. Control cable adjustment AT-268 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-117, AT-199 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-183 8. Overrun clutch AT-326 9. Low & reverse brake AT-333 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Engine idling rpm EC-80 3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] adjustment EC-93 4. Line pressure test AT-71 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-161 6. Control valve assembly AT-265 7. Oil pump AT-299 8. Reverse clutch AT-318 9. High clutch AT-321 10. Brake band AT-280 11. Forward clutch AT-326 12. Overrun clutch AT-326 13. Low & reverse brake AT-333 14. Torque converter AT-280 OFF vehicle NOT USED ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Transaxle overheats. OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 A AT-65 Maximum speed not attained. Acceleration poor. Engine brake does not operate in “1” position. Reference Page 1. Fluid level ON vehicle Transaxle noise in D, 2, 1 and R positions. Diagnostic Item AT-97 B AT D E F G H I J K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle ATF shoots out during operation. White smoke emitted from exhaust pipe during operation. OFF vehicle ON vehicle NOT USED Offensive smell at fluid charging pipe. Engine is stopped at R, D, 2 and 1 positions. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference Page 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Reverse clutch AT-318 3. High clutch AT-321 4. Brake band AT-280 5. Forward clutch AT-326 6. Overrun clutch AT-326 7. Low & reverse brake AT-333 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Torque converter AT-280 3. Oil pump AT-299 4. Reverse clutch AT-318 5. High clutch AT-321 6. Brake band AT-280 7. Forward clutch AT-326 8. Overrun clutch AT-326 9. Low & reverse brake AT-333 1. Fluid level AT-65 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-148 3. Shift solenoid valve B AT-172 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-167 5. Control valve assembly AT-265 TCM Terminals and Reference Value ECS0096E PREPARATION AAT475A ● Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48 by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”. TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT WCIA0055E Revision: March 2005 AT-98 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] TCM INSPECTION TABLE A (Data are reference values.) Terminal No. 1 2 3 Wire color G/R W/B G/B Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 1.5 - 3.0V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Line pressure solenoid valve (with dropping resistor) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 4 - 14V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Torque converter clutch solenoid valve When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V Line pressure solenoid valve AT 5* L CAN-H — — — 6* P CAN-L — — — 10 11 12 19 20 R/Y R/Y LG/B R/Y BR/Y 25 B 26 PU/W 27 28 P/B Y/R Revision: March 2005 Power source Shift solenoid valve B E F With ignition switch ON. Battery voltage G With ignition switch OFF. 0V H When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 .) Battery voltage I When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 .) 0V When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in D1 or D2 .) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in D3 or D4 .) 0V K When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. Battery voltage L When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate. 0V Power source J Same as No. 10 Overrun clutch solenoid valve — — M — PNP switch 1 position When setting selector lever to 1 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V PNP switch 2 position When setting selector lever to 2 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V With ignition switch OFF. Battery voltage With ignition switch ON. Battery voltage Power source (Memory back-up) D or Shift solenoid valve A Ground B or AT-99 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Terminal No. Wire color Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 29 W CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. Revolution sensor When vehicle is parked. 450 Hz Under 1.3V or over 4.5V 30** BR/Y Data link connector (RX) — — 31** LG Data link connector (TX) — — 32 R 34 35 36 G G/W R/B Ignition switch ON. 4.5 - 5.5V Ignition switch OFF. 0V PNP switch D position When setting selector lever to D position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V PNP switch R position When setting selector lever to R position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to P or N position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V Sensor power PNP switch P or N position When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 38 G CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. Turbine revolution sensor When vehicle is parked. 39 40 240 Hz Under 1.3V or over 4.5V W/G Engine speed signal Refer to EC-120, "ECM INSPECTION TABLE" . PU/R Vehicle speed sensor When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine. (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) Fully-closed throttle: 0.5V Fully-open throttle: 4V — — 41 W Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] 42 B Sensor ground Revision: March 2005 — AT-100 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4F04B] Terminal No. Wire color Item 47 G A/T fluid temperature sensor 48 B Ground Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F). 1.5V When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F). 0.5V — — A B — AT *: These terminals are connected to the ECM. **: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector. CAN Communication ECS0096F D For details, refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-101 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN PFP:00000 ECS0096G BCWA0137E Revision: March 2005 AT-102 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 10 R/Y 19 R/Y 25 B 28 Y/R 48 B POWER SOURCE POWER SOURCE IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF 0V IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF 0V GROUND — POWER SOURCE (MEMORY BACKUP) B — AT IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE GROUND A — Diagnostic Procedure D — ECS0096H E 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. Voltage G : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. H I LCIA0094E J 2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 (Y/R) and ground. Voltage K : Battery voltage L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M WCIA0095E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28 ● Fuse ● Ignition switch Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-103 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to AT-102, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 AT-104 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Description ● ● PFP:32006 A ECS0096I The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transaxle range switch. The transaxle range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. B AT D WCIA0066E E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0096J Diagnostic trouble code PNP SW/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position. Possible Cause F ECS0096K Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure G H ECS0096L CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. K Turn ignition switch ON. L M BCIA0030E 2. 3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V Selector lever: 3 or D position BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 AT-105 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-106 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ECS0096M A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0221E Revision: March 2005 AT-107 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 26 27 34 35 36 PU/W P/B G G/W R/B PNP SWITCH 1 POSITION PNP SWITCH 2 POSITION PNP SWITCH D POSITION PNP SWITCH R POSITION PNP SWITCH P OR N POSITION WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN 1 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN 2 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN D POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN R POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN P OR N POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SETTING SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0096N 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 6. 2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. Revision: March 2005 AT-108 SAT701J 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the following item: ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch F29 terminals 1 (G) and 2 (R/L) and between terminals 3 (GY) and 4 (PU/W), 5 (P/B), 6 (G), 7 (R/L), 8 (G/W) and 9 (GY/R) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position B AT Terminal No. P 3-7 R 3-8 N 3-9 D 3-6 2 3-5 1 3-4 1-2 D 1-2 WCIA0459E E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G 4. CHECK MANUAL CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT Check PNP switch again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to test group 1. OK or NG OK >> Adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" . NG >> Repair or replace PNP switch. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I J Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Fuse ● Ignition switch Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 H AT-109 2005 Altima K L M DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE4F04B] 6. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26 (PU/W), 27 (P/B), 34 (G), 35 (G/W), 36 (R/B) and ground while moving selector lever through each position. Terminal No. Lever Position B= 0= 36 35 34 27 26 P, N B 0 0 0 0 R 0 B 0 0 0 D 0 0 B 0 0 2 0 0 0 B 0 1 0 0 0 0 B Battery voltage 0V WCIA0461E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. 7. CHECK DTC Perform AT-105, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-110 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description PFP:31940 A ECS0096O The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. B AT D SAT283HB E F G H SAT021J I CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Specification (Approximately) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V J 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ K On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0096P Diagnostic trouble code ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0710 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. Possible Cause ECS0096Q Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor M Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0096R CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. Revision: March 2005 L AT-111 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. BCIA0030E BCIA0031E 2. 3. Select "ECM INPUT SIGNALS" touch "START". Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.) ENG SPEED: 450 rpm or more VEHICLE SPEED: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POSI: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-112 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ECS0096S A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0139E Revision: March 2005 AT-113 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 42 47 B SENSOR GROUND G A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR Revision: March 2005 — — IGNITION ON AND ATF TEMPERATURE IS 20°C (68°F) 1.5V IGNITION ON AND ATF TEMPERATURE IS 80°C (176°F) 0.5V AT-114 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS0096T A 1. INSPECTION START B Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 6. AT 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. Voltage E :Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] :Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G H LCIA0090E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY I 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord F30 terminals 6 and 7 (component side) when A/T is cold. Temperature Resistance (Approx.) Cold [20°C (68°F)] 2.5kΩ K 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. L M WCIA0097E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-115 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4F04B] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. – Remove oil pan. Check the following items: A/T fluid temperature sensor Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown in figure. Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 20 (68) 25kΩ 80 (176) 0.3kΩ Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – SAT298F 6. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 (G) and ground while warming up A/T. Temperature Voltage (Approx.) Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V → 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. WCIA0462E 7. CHECK DTC Perform AT-111, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-116 2005 Altima DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description PFP:32702 A ECS0096U The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. B AT D LCIA0070E E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0096V Diagnostic trouble code VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT with CONSULT-II or P0720 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. Possible Cause ECS0096W Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Revolution sensor G H Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0096X CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. F Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. L M BCIA0030E BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 AT-117 2005 Altima DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value. If the check result is NG, go to AT-120, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T” with CONSULT-II. BCIA0030E BCIA0031E 4. 5. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-120, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-118 2005 Altima DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ECS0096Y A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0140E Revision: March 2005 AT-119 2005 Altima DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 29 42 W B REVOLUTION SENSOR DATA (DC) VEHICLE MOVING AT 20 KM/H (12 MPH). USE THE CONSULT-II PULSE FREQUENCY MEASURING FUNCTION. A CIRCUIT TESTER CANNOT BE USED TO TEST THIS ITEM. CAUTION: CONNECT THE DIAGNOSIS DATA LINK CABLE TO THE VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR. 450 HZ VEHICLE NOT MOVING. LESS THAN 1.3V OR GREATER THAN 4.5V SENSOR GROUND — Diagnostic Procedure — ECS0096Z 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LCIA0090E 2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II Start engine. ● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution sensor (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. LCIA0091E 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-117, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 AT-120 2005 Altima DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION A 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-121 2005 Altima DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL Description PFP:24825 ECS00970 The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00971 Diagnostic trouble code ENGINE SPEED SIG with CONSULT-II or P0725 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM. Possible Cause ECS00972 Check harness or connectors. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00973 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. BCIA0030E BCIA0031E 2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-122 2005 Altima DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ECS00974 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0141E Revision: March 2005 AT-123 2005 Altima DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA 39 W/G EC-120, "ECM INSPECTION TABLE" ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL Diagnostic Procedure ECS00975 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM Check P code. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Refer to EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . OK or NG OK (with CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 2. OK (without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 4. NG >> Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . ● 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”. Check engine speed changes according to throttle position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. SAT645J 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM ● Resistor and ignition coil Refer to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-124 2005 Altima DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) A Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 39 (W/G) and ground. Voltage B :0.6 (Idle speed) - 2.2V (3,000 rpm) AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. D E LCIA0099E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM ● Resistor and ignition coil Refer to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 6. CHECK DTC I Perform AT-122, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. J 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION K 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-125 L M 2005 Altima DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS00976 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00977 This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1 , 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open: 2* , 2, 3 and 3 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4* , 3, 3 and 4 positions to each gear position above *: P0731 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 1ST GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0731 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ECS00978 Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00979 CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. Revision: March 2005 AT-126 2005 Altima DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. A Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. B AT BCIA0030E 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) BCIA0031E If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) D E F G H I J K Vehicle condition Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists. Malfunction for P0731 exists. 8. 1→2→3→4 L 2→2→3→3 4→3→3→4 Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . SAT021J WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-127 2005 Altima M DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ECS0097A LCWA0010E Revision: March 2005 AT-128 2005 Altima DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 11 12 R/Y LG/B SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3 ) 0V WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4 ) A B AT D 0V E Diagnostic Procedure ECS0097B 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – – 2. F Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Terminal No. H Resistance (Approx.) 20 - 30Ω 2 1 G Ground I 5 - 20Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J WCIA0089E K 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B 2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. L – M WCIA0090E Revision: March 2005 AT-129 2005 Altima DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. SAT367H 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-126, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-130 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS0097C This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another B self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction AT such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0097D This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2 , 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4, 3* , 3 and 4 positions to each gear position above *: P0732 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 2ND GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0732 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause E F G H I J ECS0097E Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit K L Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0097F CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. Revision: March 2005 D AT-131 2005 Altima M DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. BCIA0030E 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 50 km/h (28 to 31 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 Selector lever: D position Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 45 to 50 km/h (28 to 31 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT134, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition SAT021J Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0732 exists. 4→3→3→4 8. BCIA0031E Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-132 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ECS0097G A B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCWA0011E Revision: March 2005 AT-133 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 12 LG/B SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4 ) 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0097H 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Shift solenoid valve B Check resistance to the terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve B Terminal No. 1 Ground Resistance (Approx.) 5 - 20Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. WCIA0091E 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . – Shift solenoid valve B 2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. WCIA0092E 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-134 SAT367H 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-131, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-135 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS0097I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0097J This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed: 1, 1, 4* and 4 positions to each gear position above *: P0733 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 3RD GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0733 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ECS0097K Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0097L CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. Revision: March 2005 AT-136 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. A Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. B AT BCIA0030E 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 60 to 75 km/h (37 to 47 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 60 to 75 km/h (37 to 47 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT139, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1→1→4→4 8. E F G BCIA0031E J K SAT021J L M Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-139, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-137 H I Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists. D 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ECS0097M LCWA0012E Revision: March 2005 AT-138 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 11 R/Y SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3 ) 0V A B AT Diagnostic Procedure ECS0097N D 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Shift solenoid valve A Check resistance to the terminal and ground. E Resistance (Approx.) F Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve A Terminal No. 2 Ground 20 - 30Ω G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. H WCIA0093E 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION I Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . – Shift solenoid valve A 2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. J K L M WCIA0094E 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-139 SAT367H 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-136, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-140 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS0097O This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another B self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits AT open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. D Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Specification Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON Approximately 4% ↓ Approximately 94% Line pressure solenoid valve duty Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) Approximately 24% ↓ Approximately 95% F G H On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0097P This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear position above *: P0734 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T 4TH GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0734 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ECS0097Q Check the following items. ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0097R CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before continuing. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. Revision: March 2005 AT-141 2005 Altima I J K L M DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. BCIA0030E 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. Accelerate vehicle to 55 to 65 km/h (34 to 40 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 55 to 65 km/h (34 to 40 MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT144, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0734 exists. 1→2→2→1 8. BCIA0031E SAT021J Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-142 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ECS0097S A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0142E Revision: March 2005 AT-143 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 1 2 11 12 G/R W/B R/Y LG/B LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR) SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING 1.5 - 3.0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING 0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING 4 - 14V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING 0V WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3 ) 0V WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE BE IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4 ) OV Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 ECS0097T TO D4 ) During AT-81, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 2. SAT988H 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Perform line pressure test. Engine Speed RPM Line Pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D, 2 and 1 Position R Position Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113) Stall 1,233 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278) Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: March 2005 AT-144 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – – 2. A Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Check resistance between two terminals. Solenoid valve Terminal No. Shift solenoid valve A 2 Shift solenoid valve B 1 B Resistance (Approx.) AT 20 - 30Ω Ground D 5 - 20Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. E WCIA0089E 4. CHECK VALVE OPERATION F Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B 2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 1. G H I J WCIA0090E K 5. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair control valve. 6. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 L M SAT367H TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-145 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Line pressure solenoid valves Check resistance to the terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve Terminal No. 4 Ground Resistance (Approx.) 2.5 - 5Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. WCIA0098E 8. CHECK VALVE OPERATION Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . – Line pressure solenoid valves 2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 1. WCIA0099E 9. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair control valve. SAT367H 10. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-146 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE4F04B] 11. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-141, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group. B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-147 2005 Altima DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ECS0097U The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed and the ECM (throttle opening). Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. SAT283HB CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Specification Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON Approximately 4% ↓ Approximately 94% On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0097V Diagnostic trouble code TCC SOLENOID/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0740 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS0097W Check the following items. ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0097X NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-148 2005 Altima DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and wait at least 1 second. A B AT BCIA0031E D WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-149 2005 Altima DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ECS0097Y LCWA0014E Revision: March 2005 AT-150 2005 Altima DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 3 G/B TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE WITH TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP 8 - 15V WITHOUT TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP 0V Diagnostic Procedure A B ECS0097Z AT 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground. Resistance E : 5 - 20Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. F G WCIA0100E H 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION I 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J K L M WCIA0101E 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 5 and TCM harness connector terminal 3. Refer to AT-150, "Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV" . Continuity should exist. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 AT-151 2005 Altima DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-148, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-152 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS00980 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check position indicator lamp is indicating another self- B diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits AT open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty D Specification Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON E Approximately 4% ↓ Approximately 94% On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS00981 This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows. In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear position above *: P0744 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code A/T TCC S/V FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause G H I J K ECS00982 Check the following items. ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit L M Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00983 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. Revision: March 2005 F AT-153 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive vehicle to decrease voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. BCIA0030E 4. – – – 5. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.) THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94% VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) Check that “GEAR” shows “4”. BCIA0031E For shift schedule, refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" . SAT021J WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-154 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ECS00984 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0143E Revision: March 2005 AT-155 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 1 2 3 G/R W/B G/B LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR) TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING 1.5 - 3.0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING 0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING 4 - 14V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING 0V WITH TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP 8 - 15V WITHOUT TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP 0V Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 ECS00985 TO D4 ) During AT-81, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 2. SAT988H 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Perform line pressure test. Engine Speed RPM Line Pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D, 2 and 1 Position R Position Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113) Stall 1,233 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278) Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 AT-156 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE A 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve. 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 B AT D SAT367H E TO D4 ) F Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. G 5. CHECK DTC H Perform AT-153, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. Check for proper lock-up. I 6. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. J Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Line pressure solenoid valve Check resistance to the terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve Terminal No. 4 Ground K Resistance (Approx.) L 2.5 - 5Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. M WCIA0098E Revision: March 2005 AT-157 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK VALVE OPERATION 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . – Line pressure solenoid valve 2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. WCIA0099E 8. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair control valve. SAT367H 9. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. 10. CHECK DTC Perform AT-153, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. Check for proper lock-up. 11. CHECK LOCK-UP During AT-81, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group. No >> GO TO 12. SAT989H Revision: March 2005 AT-158 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 12. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. – 2. A Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Check resistance to the terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal No. 5 B Ground AT 5 - 20Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. D WCIA0102E E 13. CHECK VALVE OPERATION F Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . – Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 1. G H I WCIA0101E J 14. CHECK CONTROL VALVE K 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Check control valves for sticking. – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter clutch relief valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair control valve. L M SAT367H 15. CHECK LOCK-UP Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 16. No >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-159 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE4F04B] 16. CHECK DTC Perform AT-153, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group. Revision: March 2005 AT-160 2005 Altima DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS00986 The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. B AT D SAT283HB E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Line pressure solenoid valve duty Specification Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) On Board Diagnosis Logic F Approximately 24% ↓ Approximately 95% G ECS00987 Diagnostic trouble code L/PRESS SOL/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS00988 Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Line pressure solenoid valve H I J Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00989 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. M BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-161 2005 Altima DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 2. Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second. BCIA0031E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-162 2005 Altima DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ECS0098A A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0144E Revision: March 2005 AT-163 2005 Altima DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 1 2 G/R W/B LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR) WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING 1.5 - 3.0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING 0V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING 4 - 14V WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0098B 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 4 and ground. Resistance : 2.5 - 5Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. WCIA0103E 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Line pressure solenoid valve • Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. WCIA0099E Revision: March 2005 AT-164 2005 Altima DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE AND DROPPING RESISTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 4 (G/R) and TCM harness connector terminal 2 (W/B). Resistance B : 10 - 15Ω AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. D WCIA0105E E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F Check the following items: ● Dropping resistor ● Check resistance between two terminals. Resistance G :10 - 15Ω Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● H I WCIA0362E J 5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 1. Refer to AT-163, "Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV" . K L Continuity should exist. 3. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M 6. CHECK DTC Perform AT-161, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: March 2005 AT-165 2005 Altima DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-166 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Description PFP:31940 A ECS0098C Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch, vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. B AT D SAT283HB E Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic F ECS0098D Diagnostic trouble code SFT SOL A/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0750 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS0098E Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Shift solenoid valve A G H I Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0098F CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. J K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. M BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-167 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Start engine. Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transaxle to shift 1 → 2 (“GEAR”). BCIA0031E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-168 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ECS0098G A B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCWA0017E Revision: March 2005 AT-169 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 11 R/Y SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D4 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D2 OR D3 ) 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0098H 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 2 and ground. Resistance : 20 - 30Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. WCIA0106E 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift solenoid valve A – Operation check • Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. WCIA0094E 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 2 and TCM harness connector terminal 11. Refer to AT-169, "Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A" . Continuity should exist. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 AT-170 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-167, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. B 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-171 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Description PFP:31940 ECS0098I Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch, vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. SAT283HB Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0098J Diagnostic trouble code SFT SOL B/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0755 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ECS0098K Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Shift solenoid valve B Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0098L CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-172 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Start engine. Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transaxle to shift 1 → 2 → 3 (“GEAR”). A B AT BCIA0031E D WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-173 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ECS0098M LCWA0018E Revision: March 2005 AT-174 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 12 LG/B SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1 OR D2 ) BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE BE IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4 ) 0V A B AT Diagnostic Procedure ECS0098N D 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 1 and ground. Resistance E F : 5 - 20Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H WCIA0107E 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION I Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift solenoid valve B – Operation check • Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. J K L M WCIA0092E 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord harness connector terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 12. Refer to AT-174, "Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B" . Continuity should exist. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 AT-175 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK DTC Perform AT-172, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-176 2005 Altima DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] PFP:22560 Description A ECS0098O The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls throttle position. This system also uses an electric throttle control actuator, which consists of a throttle control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM. B AT D LCIA0067E E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] Condition Specification Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-177 2005 Altima DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0098P Diagnostic trouble code TP SEN/CIRC A/T or P1705 with CONSULT-II, or 3rd judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the ECM. Possible Cause ECS0098Q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0098R CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Touch "SELECTION FROM MENU". Touch "THRTL POS SEN". Touch "START" Accelerator pedal condition THRTL POS SEN Fully released Less than 4.7V Partially depressed 0.1 - 4.6V Fully depressed 1.9 - 4.6V If the check result is NG, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. BCIA0030E 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Touch "SELECTION FROM MENU" Touch "VHCL SPEED SE" and "THRTL SEN 1". Touch "START". Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS 1: Approximately 3V or less Selector lever: D position If the check result is NG, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. BCIA0031E Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle Revision: March 2005 AT-178 2005 Altima DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] Selector lever: D position A B AT BCIA0030E D E F G BCIA0031E H WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-179 2005 Altima DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ECS0098S BCWA0145E Revision: March 2005 AT-180 2005 Altima DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 32 41 42 IGNITION SWITCH ON 4.5 -5.5V IGNITION SWITCH OFF 0V A R SENSOR POWER W THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] IGNITION ON AND ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED SLOWLY AFTER WARMING UP ENGINE FULLY CLOSED THROTTLE: 0.5V FULLY OPEN THROTTLE: 4V SENSOR GROUND — — B Diagnostic Procedure ECS0098T B AT D 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM E Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Refer to EC-128, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" OK or NG OK (with CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 2. NG >> Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC-542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . If CAN communication line is detected, GO TO AT-188, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ● 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II) K :Approximately 0.5V :Approximately 4V L M LCIA0090E AT-181 H J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit. Revision: March 2005 G I With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”. Voltage: Fully-closed throttle Fully-open throttle F 2005 Altima DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 (W) and 42 (B) while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly. Voltage: Fully-closed throttle valve :Approximately 0.5V Fully-open throttle valve :Approximately 4V (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit. LCIA0100E 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-182 2005 Altima DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS0098U The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled. B AT D SAT283HB E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0098V Diagnostic trouble code O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P1760 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause F ECS0098W Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Overrun clutch solenoid valve G H Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0098X CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Touch "MAIN SIGNALS". Touch "START". Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 MPH) with selector lever in D position. L M BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-183 2005 Altima DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 5. Release accelerator pedal completely with selector lever in 3 position. Verify operation of "OVERRUN/C S/V". BCIA0031E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-184 2005 Altima DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ECS0098Y A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0053E Revision: March 2005 AT-185 2005 Altima DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 20 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE BR/Y WHEN OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE OPERATES BATTERY VOLTAGE WHEN OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DOES NOT OPERATE 0V Diagnostic Procedure ECS0098Z 1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminal 3 (component side) and ground. Resistance : 20 - 30Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LCIA0092E 2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch solenoid valve – Operation check • Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. LCIA0093E 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 3 and TCM harness connector terminal 20. Refer to AT-185, "Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV" . Continuity should exist. 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 AT-186 2005 Altima DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK DTC A Perform AT-183, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. B 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-187 2005 Altima DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F04B] DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 ECS00990 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00991 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code A/T COMM LINE or U1000 with CONSULT-II and 12th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control unit. Possible Cause ECS00992 Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00993 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. BCIA0031E WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". Revision: March 2005 AT-188 2005 Altima DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Wait at least 6 seconds or start engine and wait at least 6 seconds. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . A B AT LCIA0075E D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-189 2005 Altima DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ECS00994 BCWA0146E Revision: March 2005 AT-190 2005 Altima DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS00995 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. The “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is detected. Yes or No Yes >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . No >> INSPECTION END B AT D E PCIA0061E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-191 2005 Altima DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) PFP:31940 Description ECS00996 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. SAT283HB SAT021J CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Specification (Approximately) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ ECS00997 Diagnostic trouble code BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. Possible Cause ECS00998 Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS00999 After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. Revision: March 2005 AT-192 2005 Altima DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. A B AT BCIA0030E D 3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH). E F G BCIA0031E WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. H Start engine. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH). Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . I J K L WCIA0056E M Revision: March 2005 AT-193 2005 Altima DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ECS0099A BCWA0147E Revision: March 2005 AT-194 2005 Altima DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 10 R/Y POWER SOURCE 19 R/Y POWER SOURCE 28 Y/R POWER SOURCE (MEMORY BACKUP) 42 B SENSOR GROUND 47 G A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR DATA (APPROX.) IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF 0V IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF 0V IGNITION ON BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE — A B AT — D IGNITION ON WITH ATF TEMPERATURE AT 20°C (68°F) 1.5V IGNITION ON WITH ATF TEMPERATURE AT 80°C (176°F) 0.5V Diagnostic Procedure E ECS0099B F 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) G With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. Voltage H :Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] :Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 2. J K LCIA0090E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to EC-159, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-195 M 2005 Altima DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals 10 (R/Y), 19 (R/Y), 28 (Y/R) and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. LCIA0094E 4. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal 28 (Y/ R) and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. WCIA0095E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminals 6 and 7 (component side) when A/T is cold. Temperature Resistance (Approx.) Cold 20°C (68°F) 2.5kΩ 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK (without CONSULT-II) >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. LCIA0095E Revision: March 2005 AT-196 2005 Altima DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. – • A Remove oil pan. Check the following items: A/T fluid temperature sensor Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown. Temperature °C (°F) B AT Resistance (Approx.) 20 (68) 2.5kΩ 80 (176) 0.3kΩ D Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open OK or NG OK (without CONSULT-II) >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – E SAT298F 8. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T. G H 3. 4. 5. Temperature Voltage (Approx.) Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V → 0.5V I Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 42 and ground. Refer to AT194, "Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS" . Continuity should exist. J WCIA0044E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. K 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to EC-159, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M 10. CHECK DTC Perform AT-192, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. Revision: March 2005 AT-197 2005 Altima DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4F04B] 11. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-198 2005 Altima DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR Description PFP:24814 A ECS0099C The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR. B AT D WCIA0463E E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0099D Diagnostic trouble code VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. Possible Cause F ECS0099E Check the following items. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Vehicle speed sensor G H Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0099F CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC Confirmation Procedure” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before continuing. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. K L M BCIA0030E 2. Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 16 MPH). BCIA0031E WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. Revision: March 2005 AT-199 2005 Altima DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16 MPH). Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . WCIA0058E Revision: March 2005 AT-200 2005 Altima DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ECS0099G A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0148E Revision: March 2005 AT-201 2005 Altima DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS0099H 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. LCIA0090E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. Voltage :Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SAT356JA 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" . ● Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-199, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-202 2005 Altima DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR Description PFP:31935 A ECS0099I The turbine revolution sensor detects forward clutch drum rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transaxle. The vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) is located on the output side of the automatic transaxle. With the two sensors, input and output rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting. B AT D LCIA0076E E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : TURBINE REV Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. : 10th judgement flicker Check items (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Turbine revolution sensor G DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before continuing. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25 MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds. WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in “D” and vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25 MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds. 3. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . H I J BCIA0030E AT-203 K L M BCIA0031E LCIA0096E Revision: March 2005 F 2005 Altima DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ECS0099J BCWA0149E Revision: March 2005 AT-204 2005 Altima DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC) A WHEN MOVING AT 20 KM/H (12 MPH), USE THE CONSULT-II PULSE FREQUENCY MEASURING FUNCTION.*1 38 G TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (SIGNAL) CAUTION: CONNECT THE DIAGNOSIS DATA LINK CABLE TO THE VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR. *1: A CIRCUIT TESTER CANNOT BE USED TO TEST THIS ITEM. WHEN VEHICLE IS PARKED. 42 B SENSOR GROUND B 240 Hz AT D UNDER 1.3V OR OVER 4.5V — Diagnostic Procedure — E ECS0099K F 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “TURBINE REV” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. G H I J K SAT740J Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check frequency between TCM terminal 38 and ground. Frequency L M : Approximately 240 Hz when driving 20 km/h (12 MPH) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. WCIA0108E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check harness for short or open between TCM and turbine revolution sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-205 2005 Altima DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-203, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminal for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection ECS0099L TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR ● Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) 1 2 No continuity 1 3 No continuity 2 3 2.4 - 2.8 kΩ LCIA0077E Revision: March 2005 AT-206 2005 Altima DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4F04B] DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) Description PFP:31036 A ECS0099M The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. B AT D SAT574J E On Board Diagnosis Logic ECS0099N Diagnostic trouble code CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM). Possible Cause ECS0099O Check TCM. G Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ECS0099P NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. F H I Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. Start engine. J K L BCIA0030E 3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. M BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 AT-207 2005 Altima DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS0099Q 1. INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Touch “ERASE”. 3. Perform AT-207, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" . 4. Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 AT-208 2005 Altima DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4F04B] DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) Description PFP:31036 A ECS0099R The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. B AT D SAT574J E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. Check item (Possible cause) ● F TCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. H With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. I 1. J BCIA0030E 3. K Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. L M BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 AT-209 2005 Altima DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4F04B] Diagnostic Procedure ECS0099S 1. CHECK DTC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position). 4. Touch “ERASE”. 5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds. Perform AT-209, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again? Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 AT-210 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC PFP:00007 A ECS0099T B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0150E Revision: March 2005 AT-211 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 26 27 34 35 36 PU/W P/B G G/W R/B Revision: March 2005 PNP SWITCH 1 POSITION PNP SWITCH 2 POSITION PNP SWITCH D POSITION PNP SWITCH R POSITION PNP SWITCH P OR N POSITION IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN 1 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN 2 POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN D POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN R POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN P OR N POSITION BATTERY VOLTAGE IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS 0V AT-212 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0151E Revision: March 2005 AT-213 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND) TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (APPROX.) 30 BR/Y DATA LINK CONNECTOR — — 31 LG DATA LINK CONNECTOR — — 32 R Revision: March 2005 SENSOR POWER IGNITION SWITCH ON 4.5 - 5.5V IGNITION SWITCH OFF 0V AT-214 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ECS0099U SYMPTOM: A/T check (position) indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to ON. A B 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. AT Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals 10 (R/Y), 19 (R/Y), and 28 (Y/R) and ground. Voltage D : Battery voltage E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. F LCIA0094E G 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE STEP 2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 (Y/R) and ground. Voltage H : Battery voltage I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. J K WCIA0095E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness) Refer to AT-102, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-215 M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals 25, 48 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Refer to AT-102, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . SAT515J 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness and fuse for short or open between ignition switch and A/T check (position) indicator lamp (Main harness) Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Harness for short or open between A/T check (position) indicator lamp and TCM OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-216 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position ECS0099V A SYMPTOM: ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P or N position. ● Engine can be started with selector lever in D, 2, 1 or R position. B 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT AT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F G WCIA0059E H 2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Check for short or open of park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2. Refer to SC-16, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. I J 3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM K Check starting system. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L M Revision: March 2005 AT-217 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed ECS0099W SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in P position. 1. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS Check parking components. Refer to AT-275, "OVERHAUL" and AT280, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SAT282F Revision: March 2005 AT-218 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ECS0099X A SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting N position. B 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II AT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F G WCIA0059E 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE H Check control cable. Refer to AT-264, "Control Cable" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. I 3. ADJUST CONTROL CABLE J Adjust control cable. K >> Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" . L M SCIA3156E 4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A Revision: March 2005 AT-219 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Disassemble A/T. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Overrun clutch assembly – Reverse clutch assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-220 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. Large Shock. N → R Position ECS0099Y A SYMPTOM: There is large shock when changing from N to R position. B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. AT D E WCIA0060E F 2. CHECK DAMAGED CIRCUIT G Check damaged circuit. >> Refer to AT-111, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-161, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" or AT-177, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. H I J K L LCIA0067E 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE M Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT494G Revision: March 2005 AT-221 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-222 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position ECS0099Z A SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting R position. B 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. AT D E SAT638A F 2. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION G Check stall revolution with selector lever in 1 and R positions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. OK in 1 position, NG in R position>> GO TO 3. NG in both 1 and R positions>> GO TO 4. H I SAT493G J 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Torque converter – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. Revision: March 2005 AT-223 2005 Altima K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Torque converter – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly – Low & reverse brake assembly – Low one-way clutch OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position. Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT494G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following item: – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. Revision: March 2005 AT-224 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. B AT D SAT171B E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Torque converter – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly – Low & reverse brake assembly – Low one-way clutch OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 9. CHECK SYMPTOM G H I J K L Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. M 10. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 F AT-225 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position ECS009A0 SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting D, 3, 2 or 1 position. 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 2. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION Check stall revolution with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT68, "Stall Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. SAT493G 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – Low & reverse brake assembly – Torque converter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. Revision: March 2005 AT-226 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. B AT D SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following item: – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G H I 6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION J 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. K L M SAT171B Revision: March 2005 AT-227 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – Low & reverse brake assembly – Torque converter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-228 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ECS009A1 A SYMPTOM: Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise test — Part 1. B 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-223, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . AT D 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-167, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-172, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" or AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . No >> GO TO 3. F G WCIA0061E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] I Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. J K L LCIA0067E 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE M Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT494G Revision: March 2005 AT-229 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – High clutch assembly – Torque converter – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT171B 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damage parts. 1. 2. Revision: March 2005 AT-230 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 8. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. B 9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION AT 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-231 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ECS009A2 SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed. A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 3, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 3. WCIA0059E 3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" and AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuits. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0067E Revision: March 2005 AT-232 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. B AT D SAT171B E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. F G H I J 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM K 1. 2. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L M 8. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. Revision: March 2005 AT-233 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-234 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ECS009A3 A SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed. B 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 3, 2 or 1 Position and 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 AT OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. D No >> Go to AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT E With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? F Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 3. G H I WCIA0059E J 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] K Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. L M LCIA0067E Revision: March 2005 AT-235 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. SAT171B 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – High clutch assembly – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-236 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION A 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-237 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ECS009A4 SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed. ● A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 3, 2 or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS With CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits? ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch ● Overdrive control switch ● A/T fluid temperature sensor ● Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) ● Shift solenoid valve A or B WCIA0059E Vehicle speed sensor·MTR Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-111, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-117, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-167, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-172, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" or AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . No >> GO TO 3. ● WCIA0062E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0067E Revision: March 2005 AT-238 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. B AT D SAT171B E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band – Torque converter – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F G H I J K L Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-239 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-240 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ECS009A5 A SYMPTOM: A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-148, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . No >> GO TO 2. AT D E WCIA0063E F 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] G Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. H I LCIA0067E J 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM K Remove control valve. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter relief valve – Torque converter clutch solenoid valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. L M 4. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: March 2005 AT-241 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-242 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ECS009A6 A SYMPTOM: A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds. B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-122, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . No >> GO TO 2. AT D E WCIA0064E F 2. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION G 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. H I J SAT171B 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM K Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. Revision: March 2005 AT-243 2005 Altima L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-244 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ECS009A7 A SYMPTOM: Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released. 1. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] CIR- B CUIT AT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC-542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F G LCIA0078E 2. CHECK SYMPTOM H Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. I J 3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-245 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ECS009A8 SYMPTOM: ● Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D4 to D3 . ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when A/T selector lever is in 3 position. ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting A/T from D to 2 position. 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT183, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . No >> GO TO 2. WCIA0065E 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. LCIA0067E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SAT171B Revision: March 2005 AT-246 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Overrun clutch assembly – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM B AT D E F Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. G H I 6. CHECK SYMPTOM J Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. K 7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION L 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-247 M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ECS009A9 SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2. 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-167, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-172, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" or AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . No >> GO TO 2. WCIA0061E 2. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> Go to AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-248 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → 33 , When A/T Selector Lever D → 3 ECS009AA A SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D4 to 33 when changing A/T selector lever from D → 3 position. B 1. CHECK 3 POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to 3 position switch circuit? AT Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to 3 position switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check 3 position switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . D E F WCIA0059E G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-249 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 18. A/T Does Not Shift: 33 → 22 , When Selector Lever 3 → 2 Position ECS009AB SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from 33 to 22 when changing selector lever from 3 to 2 position. 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> Go to AT-232, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . WCIA0059E Revision: March 2005 AT-250 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position ECS009AC A SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever from 2 to 1 position. B 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II AT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F G WCIA0059E 2. CHECK SYMPTOM H Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. I J K LCIA0073E 3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION L 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-251 M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ECS009AD SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 22 (12 ) to 11 . 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . No >> Go to AT-223, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP & 3 Position Switches Circuit Checks), and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Circuit Check ECS009AE SYMPTOM: A/T check (position) indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is good. WCIA0066E LCIA0079E LCIA0067E DESCRIPTION ● ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transaxle range switch. The transaxle range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. 3 position switch Revision: March 2005 AT-252 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] ● Detects the A/T selector lever in 3 position and sends a signal to the TCM. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls the throttle position. This system also uses an electric throttle control actuator, which consists of a throttle control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM. A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-253 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NOTE: The diagnostic procedure includes inspection for the 3 position switch circuit. 1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out P/N, R, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. SAT701J 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch – Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch F29 terminals 1 (G) and 2 (R/L) and between terminals 3 (GY) and 4 (PU/W), 5 (P/B), 6 (G), 7 (R/L), 8 (G/W) and 9 (GY/R) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position Terminal No. P 3-7 R 3-8 N 3-9 D 3-6 2 3-5 1 3-4 1-2 1-2 WCIA0459E If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step a. – If OK on step b, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" . – If NG on step b, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals. Refer to step a. – If OK on step d, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-267, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . – If NG on step d, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – Revision: March 2005 AT-254 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 3. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26 (PU/W), 27 (P/B), 34 (G), 35 (G/W), 36 (R/B) and ground while moving selector lever through each position. B AT Terminal No. Lever Position 36 35 34 27 26 P, N B 0 0 0 0 R 0 B 0 0 0 D 0 0 B 0 0 2 0 0 0 B 0 1 0 0 0 0 B D E F Voltage: B : Battery voltage 0 : 0V G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 4. H WCIA0461E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-255 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch – Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals 1 (G) and 2 (R/L), and between terminals 3 (G/Y) and 4 (PU/W), 5 (P/B), 6 (G), 7 (R/L), 8 (G/W) and 9 (GY/R) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position Terminal No. P 3-7 R 3-8 N 3-9 D 3-6 2 3-5 1 3-4 1-2 1-2 WCIA0459E If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step a. – If OK on step b, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" . – If NG on step b, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals. Refer to step a. – If OK on step d, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-267, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . – If NG on step d, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. – 5. CHECK 3 POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SW”. Check the signal of the 3 position switch is indicated properly. (Overdrive switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive “OFF”.) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT645J Revision: March 2005 AT-256 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4F04B] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the following items: ● 3 position switch M34. – Check for continuity between terminals 1 (L/W) and 2 (B) with selector lever in 3 position. ● Harness for short or open between meter and 3 position switch (Main harness) ● Harness of ground circuit for 3 position switch (Main harness) for short or open OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D WCIA0464E E 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] Perform throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] inspection. Refer to AT-177, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F ● 8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION G H 1. Perform TCM input/output inspection. Refer to AT-99, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE" OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Inspect TCM terminals and related wiring harnesses for damage or loose connections. Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-257 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:34950 ECS009AF The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder. Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ECS009AG LCIA0082E Revision: March 2005 AT-258 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ECS009AH A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0222E Revision: March 2005 AT-259 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ECS009AI SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT WCIA0465E SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Data are reference values. Terminal No. (Wire color) Item (+) (-) 1 (W) 8 (B) Power source 2 (L) 8 (B) Detent switch (key) 3 (L/W) 4 (R/G) 8 (B) 8 (B) Detention switch (for shift) Stop lamp switch 5 (P) 8 (B) Vehicle speed signal 6 (G) 8 (B) Ignition signal 7 (R/W) 8 (B) 9 (G/W) 10 (W/G) 8 (B) – 8 (B) 8 (B) Shift lock solenoid Condition Always Battery voltage When selector lever is not in "P" position with key inserted Battery voltage Except the above Approx. 0V When selector lever is not in "P" position Battery voltage When selector lever is in "P" position Approx. 0V When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage When brake pedal is released Approx. 0V — — Ignition switch: “ON” Battery voltage Ignition switch: “OFF” Approx. 0V When the brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage Ignition switch: "ON" and vehicle speed is less than 8 km/ h (5 MPH) Approx. 0V Always Approx. 0V Ground Key lock signal Judgement standard When the selector lever is set to a position other than the “P” position Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec. (Note) Except the above Approx. 0V When the selector lever is set to the“ P” position Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec. (Note) Except the above Approx. 0V Key unlock signal NOTE: Make sure that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms. Revision: March 2005 AT-260 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Component Inspection ECS009AJ SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID A Check operation by applying battery voltage to A/T device connector. CAUTION: Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged. B ● AT Connector No. Terminal No. M34 9 (Battery voltage) - 10 (Ground) D SCIA3117E DETENT SWITCH For Key: ● E Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device connector. Condition When selector lever is not in "P" position with key inserted. Connector No. Terminal No. M34 5-6 F Continuity Yes Except the above G No H SCIA3118E I DETENT SWITCH For Shift: ● Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device connector. Condition Connector No. Terminal No. M34 13 - 14 When selector lever is not in "P" position. Except the above J Continuity Yes K No L WCIA0345E KEY LOCK SOLENOID Key Lock Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and key lock solenoid connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness. ● Connector No. Terminal No. M26 1 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground) WCIA0455E Revision: March 2005 AT-261 2005 Altima M A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Key Unlock Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and key lock solenoid connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness. ● Connector No. Terminal No. M26 2 (Battery voltage) - 1 (Ground) WCIA0456E KEY SWITCH ● Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key lock solenoid connector. Condition Connector No. Terminal No. M26 3-4 Continuity Key inserted Key removed Yes No WCIA0457E STOP LAMP SWITCH ● Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch connector. Condition Connector No. Terminal No. E38 1-2 Continuity When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released Yes No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment" . WCIA0466E Revision: March 2005 AT-262 2005 Altima SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device PFP:34901 A ECS009AK B AT D E F G H I LCIA0084E J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-263 2005 Altima SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM [RE4F04B] Control Cable ECS009AL WCIA0367E Revision: March 2005 AT-264 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators PFP:00000 A ECS009AM REMOVAL 1. 2. Drain ATF from transaxle. Remove oil pan using power tools, and gasket. ● Do not reuse oil pan bolts. B AT D SAT031J 3. E Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. F G H WCIA0071E 4. 5. I Remove stopper ring from terminal cord assembly harness terminal body. Remove terminal cord assembly harness from transaxle case by pushing on terminal body. J K SAT995C L M Revision: March 2005 AT-265 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] 6. Remove control valve assembly by removing bolts I , X and ● . Bolt length, number and location are shown in the illustration. NOTE: Be careful not to drop manual valve and servo release accumulator return spring. 7. Disassemble and inspect control valve assembly if necessary. Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" . SAT004F 8. Remove servo release and N-D accumulators by applying compressed air if necessary. NOTE: Hold each piston with a rag. AAT279 INSTALLATION ● ● Set manual shaft in Neutral, then align manual plate with groove in manual valve. After installing control valve assembly, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all positions. SAT091J Revision: March 2005 AT-266 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. 2. 3. ECS009AN A Disconnect electrical connector. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. NOTE: Always use new sealing parts. B AT D LCIA0070E Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. 2. 3. ECS009AO E Disconnect electrical connector. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. NOTE: Always use new sealing parts. F G LCIA0076E Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. 2. H ECS009AP Remove control cable from manual shaft. Set manual shaft in N position. I J K SCIA3156E 3. 4. 5. 6. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both park/neutral position (PNP) switch and manual shaft as near vertical as possible. Reinstall any part removed. Check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-108, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SCIA3154E Revision: March 2005 AT-267 L 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] Control Cable Adjustment ECS009AQ Move selector lever from the P position to the 1 position. You should be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in the P position. CAUTION: Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut. 3. Secure the manual lever. 4. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration. Specified force 5. 6. : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb) Tighten control cable lock nut. Move selector lever from P to 1 position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. NOTE: ● Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position. ● Make sure that the transaxle is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position. Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement 1. 2. SCIA3157E ECS009AR Remove drive shaft assembly. Refer to FAX-11, "FRONT DRIVE SHAFT" . Remove oil seal, using Tool Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) NOTE: Do not reuse old seal. SCIA5377E 3. Install new oil seal. NOTE: ● Apply ATF before installing. SAT782 ● Install oil seals so dimension A is within specification Dimension A : −0.5 mm (−0.02 in) to 0.5 mm (0.02 in) AAT531A Revision: March 2005 AT-268 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4F04B] 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-269 2005 Altima AIR BREATHER HOSE [RE4F04B] AIR BREATHER HOSE Air Breather Hose - Air Duct Side PFP:31098 ECS009AS REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION QR25DE MODELS AIR BREATHER HOSE TO AIR DUCT SIDE LCIA0357E 1. Air cleaner to electronic throttle con- 2. trol actuator tube Air breather hose (air duct side) 3. Oil catch tank Removal 1. 2. Remove the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to, EM-17, "REMOVAL" . Remove the air breather hose from the oil catch tank. Revision: March 2005 AT-270 2005 Altima AIR BREATHER HOSE [RE4F04B] Installation A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not to crush or kink the air breather hose during installation NOTE: ● Be sure paint mark A can be seen in the clip when installing the air breather hose to the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. ● Be sure paint mark B is facing upwards and to the end of the radius in the oil catch tank tube. ● Insert air breather hose into oil catch tank until it reaches the point where the winding radius stops. B AT D E F G LCIA0360E Air Breather Hose - Transaxle Side ECS009AT H REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (OIL CATCH TANK TO AIR DUCT) I J K L M WCIA0368E 1. Transaxle assembly 2. Starter motor 4. Oil catch tank 5. Air breather hose (transaxle side) 3. Left front side member Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to, EM-17, "REMOVAL" . Revision: March 2005 AT-271 2005 Altima AIR BREATHER HOSE [RE4F04B] 2. 3. Disconnect the air breather hose air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube side and transaxle side of the oil catch tank. Remove the oil catch tank. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not crush or kink the air breather hose during installation. NOTE: ● The paint marks must face upwards on installation. ● Insert air breather hose (transaxle side) B into tube stopper when installing air breather hose to the oil catch tank. ● Insert air breather hose (transaxle side) A into the point where the radius stops on the air breather hose when installing to the transaxle. WCIA0369E Revision: March 2005 AT-272 2005 Altima REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F04B] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal PFP:00000 A ECS009AU 1. 2. 3. Remove battery and bracket. Remove air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" . B Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connectors. 4. Disconnect harness connectors of revolution sensor, ground, vehicle speed sensor, mass air flow sensor, AT and turbine revolution sensor. 5. Remove LH mounting bracket from transaxle and body. D 6. Disconnect control cable at transaxle side. 7. Remove drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "FRONT DRIVE SHAFT" . E 8. Drain ATF through drain plug. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . 9. Remove push clips and engine undercover. F 10. Disconnect fluid cooler piping. 11. Remove starter motor from transaxle. Refer to SC-17, "Removal LCIA0086E and Installation" . G 12. 13. 14. 15. Support engine. Remove upper transaxle to engine bolts. Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear cover plate and torque converter to drive plate bolts. NOTE: Rotate crankshaft for access to torque convertor bolts. H I J K WCIA0069E L 16. Support transaxle with a jack. 17. Remove lower transaxle to engine bolts. 18. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack. Inspection M ECS009AV Check the drive plate runout as shown. If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear. Refer to AT-376, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . SAT977H Revision: March 2005 AT-273 2005 Altima REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4F04B] Installation ECS009AW CAUTION: ● When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly during re-assembly. ● Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive train components. 1. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled. Distance “A” : 14 mm (0.55 in) or more SAT044A 2. Install torque converter bolts to drive plate. NOTE: With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that transaxle rotates freely without binding. WCIA0070E 3. Tighten transaxle to engine bolts. Bolt No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Number of bolts 4 1 1 2 2 1 Bolt length ″ ″ mm (in) 49 (1.93) 40 (1.57) 45 (1.77) 40 (1.57) 30 (1.18) 45 (1.77) Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 75 (7.7, 55) 35 (3.3, 26) 75 (7.7, 55) 43 (4.4, 32) 35 (3.6, 26) SCIA4358E 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: ● Check fluid level in transaxle. ● Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transaxle operates correctly. With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R position. A slight shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transaxle is shifted. ● Perform road test. Refer to AT-72, "Road Test" . SAT638A Revision: March 2005 AT-274 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 A ECS009AX B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0320E Revision: March 2005 AT-275 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] WCIA0370E Revision: March 2005 AT-276 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0371E Revision: March 2005 AT-277 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] Oil Channel ECS009AY SAT573K Revision: March 2005 AT-278 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE4F04B] Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ECS009AZ A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA4972E Revision: March 2005 AT-279 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY Disassembly 1. 2. PFP:31020 ECS009B0 Drain ATF through drain plug. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Remove torque converter. SAT008D 3. a. b. c. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as shown. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into one-way clutch outer race. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one- way clutch spline using screwdriver. Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace torque converter assembly. SAT009D 4. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube. SAT768J Revision: March 2005 AT-280 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 5. 6. Set manual shaft to position P. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch. A B AT SCIA3156E D 7. 8. Remove oil pan using power tools, and oil pan gasket. NOTE: Do not reuse oil pan bolts. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. NOTE: If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/ T. Refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" . E F G SAT003F H 9. a. Remove control valve assembly according to the following procedures. Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts I , X and ● . I J K L M SAT004F Revision: March 2005 AT-281 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] b. Remove snap ring from terminal body. SCIA0800E c. Push terminal body into transaxle case and draw out terminal cord assembly. SCIA0801E 10. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly. SAT005F 11. Remove return spring from servo release accumulator piston. SAT018DA 12. Remove servo release accumulator piston with compressed air. 13. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston. SAT019DA Revision: March 2005 AT-282 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 14. Remove N-D accumulator piston and return spring with compressed air. A B AT SAT020D 15. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston. 16. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transaxle case for damage. D E F G SAT023DA H 17. Check accumulator return springs for damage and free length. 18. Remove lip seals. I J K SAT006F L 19. Remove L & R oil tube and oil sleeve. M SAT862HA Revision: March 2005 AT-283 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 20. Remove converter housing according to the following procedures. a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts using power tools. b. Remove converter housing by tapping it lightly. SAT008F c. Remove O-ring from differential oil port. SAT235F 21. Remove final drive assembly from transaxle case. SAT228F 22. Remove differential side bearing outer race and side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case using Tool. Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) SCIA5378E 23. Remove differential side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case. SAT031D Revision: March 2005 AT-284 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 24. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter housing using Tool. Tool number A : KV381054S0 (J-34286) B AT SCIA5379E 25. Remove oil seal from converter housing using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage case. D E F G SAT032D H 26. Remove differential lubricant tube from converter housing. I J SAT063K 27. Remove oil pump according to the following procedures. a. Remove O-ring from input shaft. K L M SAT225F b. Remove oil pump assembly, baffle plate and gasket from transaxle case. SAT012F Revision: March 2005 AT-285 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump assembly. SAT013F 28. Remove brake band according to the following procedures. a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin using suitable tool. NOTE: Do not reuse anchor end pin. SAT014FA b. Remove brake band and strut from transaxle case. SAT196F CAUTION: To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the figure at left. NOTE: Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. SAT039D Revision: March 2005 AT-286 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns. A B AT SAT040D D 29. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) and reverse clutch according to the following procedures. a. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) with reverse clutch. E F G SAT549F b. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) from reverse clutch. H I J SAT566F c. K Remove needle bearings from high clutch drum and check for damage or wear. L M SAT567F d. Remove high clutch hub and front sun gear from transaxle case. SAT568F Revision: March 2005 AT-287 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] e. f. Remove front sun gear and needle bearing from high clutch hub and check for damage or wear. Remove bearing race from front sun gear and check for damage or wear. SAT019F 30. Remove needle bearing from transaxle case and check for damage or wear. SAT020F 31. Apply compressed air and check to see that low and reverse brake operates. SAT138F 32. Remove low one-way clutch and front planetary carrier assembly according to the following procedures. a. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver. SAT046D Revision: March 2005 AT-288 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] b. Remove low one-way clutch with a suitable hook made of wire. A B AT D E F G AAT889 c. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver. H I J SAT022F d. K Remove front planetary carrier with low and reverse brake piston and retainer. L M SAT023F e. Remove low and reverse brake spring retainer. NOTE: Do not remove return springs from spring retainer. SAT148F Revision: March 2005 AT-289 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] f. Check that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of the clockwise arrow and locks in the opposite direction. SAT048D g. h. Remove needle bearing, low and reverse brake piston and retainer from front planetary carrier. Check front planetary carrier, low one-way clutch and needle bearing for damage or wear. SAT024F i. Check clearance between planetary gears and planetary carrier with feeler gauge. Standard clearance Allowable limit : 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.0079 - 0.0276 in) : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) Replace front planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit. SAT025F 33. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear according to the following procedures. a. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly from transaxle case. SAT026F b. Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary carrier. SAT027F Revision: March 2005 AT-290 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. d. Remove needle bearings from rear planetary carrier assembly. Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle bearings for damage or wear. A B AT SAT028F e. D Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary carrier with feeler gauge. Standard clearance Allowable limit E : 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.0079 - 0.0276 in) : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) F Replace rear planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit. G SAT054D 34. Remove rear internal gear and forward clutch hub from transaxle case. H I J SAT029F K 35. Remove overrun clutch hub from transaxle case. L M SAT030F 36. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub and check for damage or wear. SAT031F Revision: March 2005 AT-291 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 37. Remove forward clutch assembly from transaxle case. SAT032F 38. Remove needle bearing from transaxle case. SAT033F 39. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following procedures. a. Remove side cover bolts. NOTE: ● Do not mix bolts A and B. ● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts. AAT850 b. Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer. NOTE: Be careful not to drop output shaft assembly. It might come out when removing side cover. SAT434D c. Remove adjusting shim. SAT440D Revision: March 2005 AT-292 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] d. Remove output shaft assembly. A B AT SAT035F NOTE: If output shaft assembly came off with side cover, tap cover with a soft hammer to separate. D E F G SAT435D e. H Remove needle bearing. I J K SAT036F 40. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following procedures. a. Set manual shaft to position P to fix idler gear. b. Unlock idler gear lock nut using a suitable punch. L M SAT037F Revision: March 2005 AT-293 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. Remove idler gear lock nut using suitable tool. NOTE: Do not reuse idler gear lock nut. SAT061D d. Remove idler gear using Tool. Tool number : ST27180001 (J-25726-A) SCIA5380E e. f. Remove reduction pinion gear. Remove adjusting shim from reduction pinion gear. SAT916D 41. Remove return spring from parking shaft with screwdriver. 42. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pawl from transaxle case. 43. Check parking pawl and shaft for damage or wear. WCIA0330E 44. Remove parking actuator support from transaxle case. 45. Check parking actuator support for damage or wear. SAT066D Revision: March 2005 AT-294 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 46. Remove side oil seal from transaxle case using suitable tool. A B AT SAT040F D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-295 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Manual Shaft PFP:00000 ECS009B1 COMPONENTS WCIA0324E REMOVAL 1. Remove detent spring from transaxle case. SAT042F 2. Drive out manual plate retaining pin using Tool. Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A) SCIA5381E Revision: March 2005 AT-296 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Drive and pull out parking rod plate retaining pin using Tool. Tool number 4. 5. A : ST23540000 (J-25689-A) Remove parking rod plate from manual shaft. Draw out parking rod from transaxle case using suitable tool. B AT SCIA5382E D 6. 7. Pull out manual shaft retaining pin using suitable tool. Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transaxle case. E F G SAT049F 8. Remove manual shaft oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the transaxle case. H I J SAT080D K INSPECTION ● Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary. L INSTALLATION 1. Install manual shaft oil seal using suitable tool. NOTE: Apply ATF to the outer surface of new oil seal M SAT081D Revision: March 2005 AT-297 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install manual shaft and manual plate. SCIA3287E 3. Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transaxle case using Tool. Tool number 4. : ST25710000 (J-25689-A) Install manual shaft retaining pin up to bottom of hole using Tool. Tool number : KV32101000 (J-25689-A) SCIA5383E 5. 6. Install parking rod to parking rod plate. Set parking rod assembly onto manual shaft and drive retaining pin using Tool. Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A) NOTE: Both ends of the pin should protrude. SCIA5384E 7. Drive manual plate retaining pin using Tool. Tool number : ST23540000 (J-25689-A) NOTE: Both ends of the pin should protrude. SCIA5385E 8. Install detent spring. Tighten detent spring bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . SAT042F Revision: March 2005 AT-298 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Oil Pump ECS009B2 A COMPONENTS B AT D E F SAT050FD G DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove seal rings. NOTE: Do not reuse seal rings. H I J SAT699H K 2. Loosen bolts in a crisscross pattern and remove oil pump cover. L M SAT051F 3. Remove inner and outer gear from oil pump housing. SAT092D Revision: March 2005 AT-299 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. SAT093D 5. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using suitable tool. SAT094D INSPECTION Oil Pump Housing, Oil Pump Cover, Inner Gear and Outer Gear Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary. Side Clearances Measure side clearance of inner and outer gears in at least four places around each outside edge. Maximum measured values should be within specified positions. Standard clearance : 0.030 - 0.050 mm (0.0012 - 0.0020 in) If clearance is less then specification, select inner and outer gear as a set so that clearance is within specifications. Inner and outer gear: Refer to AT-376, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump assembly except oil pump cover. SAT095D Revision: March 2005 AT-300 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing. Standard clearance Allowable limit A : 0.111 - 0.181 mm (0.0044 - 0.0071 in) : 0.181 mm (0.0071 in) B If not within allowable limit, replace whole oil pump assembly except oil pump cover. AT SAT096D D Seal Ring Clearance Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance Allowable limit : 0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) E If not within allowable limit, replace oil pump cover assembly. F G SAT097D ASSEMBLY 1. H Install new oil seal on oil pump housing. Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) I J K SCIA5386E 2. L Install new O-ring on oil pump housing. NOTE: Apply ATF to new O-ring. M SAT093D Revision: March 2005 AT-301 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Install inner and outer gears on oil pump housing. CAUTION: Be careful of the direction of inner gear SAT092D 4. a. b. Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly on oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape. Tighten bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten oil pump cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-299, "COMPONENTS" . SAT051F 5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove with petroleum jelly. CAUTION: ● Do not spread gap of the seal ring excessively while installing, The ring may be deformed. NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to new seal rings. SAT699H Revision: March 2005 AT-302 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Control Valve Assembly ECS009B3 A COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I J SAT537K 1. Oil strainer 2. O-ring 3. Snap ring 4. Terminal body 5. O-rings 6. Control valve lower body 7. Oil cooler relief valve spring 8. Check ball 9. Separating plate 10. Support plate 11. Steel ball 12. Control valve inter body 13. Pilot filter 14. Separating plate 15. Steel ball K L 16. Control valve upper body M DISASSEMBLY Disassemble upper, inter and lower bodies. Revision: March 2005 AT-303 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “ (in) ” a b c d e f g 13.5 (0.531) 58.0 (2.283) 40.0 (1.575) 66.0 (2.598) 33.0 (1.299) 78.0 (3.071) 18.0 (0.709) 6 3 6 11 2 2 1 mm Number of bolts f: Reamer bolt and nut. SAT704J 1. Remove bolts a , d and nut f and remove oil strainer from control valve assembly. AAT780 2. Remove solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve from control valve assembly. SAT062F Revision: March 2005 AT-304 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Remove O-rings from solenoid valves and terminal body. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. A B AT SCIA0804E D 4. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts b , c and nut f . E F G SAT064FA 5. Remove inter body from lower body. H I J SAT432D 6. K Turn over lower body, and remove accumulator support plate. L M SAT109D 7. 8. Remove bolts e , separating plate and separating gasket from lower body. Remove check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs from lower body. CAUTION: Be careful not to lose check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs SAT110DA Revision: March 2005 AT-305 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 9. Remove inter body from upper body. SAT065F 10. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in inter body and then remove them. CAUTION: Be careful not to lose steel balls. SAT705J 11. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body and then remove them. CAUTION: Be careful not to lose steel balls. SAT771J INSPECTION Lower and Upper Bodies CAUTION: Be careful not to lose these parts. NOTE: ● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in lower body. SCIA3290E Revision: March 2005 AT-306 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in upper body. A B AT SCIA3294E D Oil Strainer NOTE: Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage. E Shift Solenoid Valves “A” and “B”, Line Pressure Solenoid Valve, Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve and Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve ● ● ● ● ● ● Measure resistance. For shift solenoid valve A, refer to AT-170, "Diagnostic Procedure" . For shift solenoid valve B, refer to AT-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . For line pressure solenoid valve, refer to AT-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" . For torque converter clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" . For overrun clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-186, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F G H SAT283HB I Oil Cooler Relief Valve Spring ● ● J Check springs for damage or deformation. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-377, "Control Valves" . K L SAT138D ASSEMBLY 1. a. Install upper, inter and lower body. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their proper positions. SAT771J Revision: March 2005 AT-307 2005 Altima M REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] b. Install upper separating gasket, upper inter separating gasket and upper separating plate in order shown in illustration. SAT072F c. Install reamer bolts f from bottom of upper body. Using reamer bolts as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set. SAT073FA d. Install pilot filter. SAT074F e. Place lower body as shown in illustration (side of inter body face up). Install steel balls in their proper positions. SAT705J f. Install inter body on upper body using reamer bolts f as guides. CAUTION: Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel check balls. SAT076FA Revision: March 2005 AT-308 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] g. Install check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs in their proper positions in lower body. A B AT SAT110DA h. D Install lower separating gasket, lower inter separating gasket and lower separating plate in order shown in illustration. E F G BAT002 i. Install bolts e from bottom of lower body. Using bolts e as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set. H I J SAT078FA j. k. Temporarily install support plates on lower body. Install lower body on inter body using reamer bolts f as guides and tighten reamer bolts f slightly. K L M SAT126DA Revision: March 2005 AT-309 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install new O-rings to solenoid valves and terminal body. NOTE: Apply ATF to new O-rings SCIA0804E 3. Install and tighten bolts. Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “ ” mm (in) Number of bolts a b c d e f g 13.5 (0.53 1) 58.0 (2.28 3) 40.0 (1.57 5) 66.0 (2.59 8) 33.0 (1.29 9) 78.0 (3.07 1) 18.0 (0.70 9) 6 3 6 11 2 2 1 SAT704J a. Install and tighten bolts b to specified torque. b : 7 - 9 N-m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) SAT081FA Revision: March 2005 AT-310 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] b. Install solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve to lower body. A B AT SAT062F D c. Set oil strainer, then tighten bolts a , c , d and nuts f to specified torque. a, c, d, f : 7 - 9 N-m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) E F G SAT083FA d. Tighten bolts e to specified torque. e H : 3.4 - 4.4 N-m (0.35 - 0.45 kg-m, 30.4 - 39.1 in-lb) I J SAT084F K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-311 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Control Valve Upper Body ECS009B4 COMPONENTS NOTE: Apply ATF to all components before installation. SAT772J 1. Upper body 2. Cooler check valve 3. Return spring 4. Plug 5. Retainer plate 6. 1-2 accumulator valve 7. Return spring 8. Plug 9. Retainer plate 10. Torque converter clutch control valve 11. Return spring 12. Torque converter clutch control plug 13. Torque converter clutch control sleeve 14. Retainer plate 15. Torque converter relief valve 16. Return spring 17. Retainer plate 18. Return spring 19. Overrun clutch reducing valve 20. Plug 21. Retainer plate 22. Retainer plate 23. Return spring 24. Pilot valve 25. Retainer plate 26. Plug 27. 1-2 accumulator piston 28. Return spring 29. 1-2 accumulator retainer plate 30. Retainer plate 31. Plug 32. 1st reducing valve 33. Return spring 34. Retainer plate 35. Return spring 36. 3-2 timing valve Revision: March 2005 AT-312 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. A Remove valves at retainer plates. NOTE: Do not use a magnetic pick-up tool. B AT SCIA3294E a. D Use a screwdriver to remove retainer plates. E F G SAT553G b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs or sleeves. NOTE: Remove plugs slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out. H I J K SAT554G c. Place mating surface of valve body face down, and remove internal parts. NOTE: ● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down and lightly tap it with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves. L M SAT137D Revision: March 2005 AT-313 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] INSPECTION Valve Spring ● Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-377, "Control Valves" . Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. SAT138D Control Valves ● Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. ASSEMBLY NOTE: Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do not stand the control valve body upright. SAT139D 1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores. NOTE: ● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body. SAT140DA ● Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into their proper positions. SAT141D Revision: March 2005 AT-314 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 1-2 Accumulator Valve A Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2 accumulator retainer plate from opposite side of control valve body. Install return spring, 1-2 accumulator piston and plug. ● ● B AT SAT142D 1. Install retainer plates. ● While pushing plug or return spring using screwdriver, install retainer plate. D E F G SAT143D H Retainer Plate (Upper Body) Unit: mm (in) No. ● Name of control valve 22 Pilot valve 30 1st reducing valve 34 3-2 timing valve 17 Torque converter relief valve 9 1-2 accumulator valve 25 1-2 accumulator piston valve 21 Overrun clutch reducing valve 5 Cooler check valve 14 Torque converter clutch control valve Width A Length B I 21.5 (0.846) J 38.5 (1.516) K 6.0 (0.236) SAT086F 24.0 (0.945) L 28.0 (1.102) Install proper retainer plates. Refer to AT-312, "COMPONENTS" . Revision: March 2005 M AT-315 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Control Valve Lower Body ECS009B5 COMPONENTS SAT773J 1. Lower body 2. Retainer plate 3. Return spring 4. Piston 5. Parallel pin 6. Sleeve 7. Return spring 8. Pressure modifier valve 9. Retainer plate 10. Plug 11. Shift valve B 13. Manual valve 14. Pressure regulator valve 15. Return spring 16. Spring seat 17. Plug 18. Sleeve 19. Retainer plate 20. Return spring 21. Overrun clutch control valve 22. Plug 23. Retainer plate 24. Return spring 25. Accumulator control valve 26. Plug 27. Retainer plate 28. Shift valve A 29. Return spring 30. Retainer plate 31. Shuttle valve 32. Return spring 33. Plug 34. Plug 35. Retainer plate Revision: March 2005 AT-316 12. Return spring 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY A Remove valves at retainer plate. For removal procedures, refer to AT-316, "COMPONENTS" . B AT SCIA3290E INSPECTION Valve Springs D E Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-377, "Control Valves" . F Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. G H SAT138D Control Valves I Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage. ASSEMBLY Install control valves. For installation procedures, refer to AT-316, "COMPONENTS" . NOTE: Apply ATF to all components before installation. J K L SCIA3290E Retainer Plate (Lower Body) Unit: mm (in) No. ● Name of control valve and plug 19 Pressure regulator valve 27 Accumulator control valve 30 Shift valve A 23 Overrun clutch control valve 2 Pressure modifier valve 35 Shuttle valve 9 Shift valve B Width A Length B Type 6.0 (0.236) 28.0 (1.102) I — — II SAT089F Install proper retainer plates. Refer to AT-316, "COMPONENTS" . Revision: March 2005 AT-317 2005 Altima M REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Reverse Clutch ECS009B6 COMPONENTS WCIA0372E DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. Check operation of reverse clutch Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and install reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil hole. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. SCIA3316E 2. 3. Remove snap ring using screwdriver. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish plates. SCIA4886E 4. Remove snap ring from reverse clutch drum while compressing return springs using Tool. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: Be sure to set Tool directly over springs. ● Do not expand the snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return springs. ● 5. SCIA5387E Revision: March 2005 AT-318 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 6. 7. Remove reverse clutch piston from reverse clutch drum by turning it as shown. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. A B AT SCIA3319E INSPECTION Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.If damaged, replace. D E Reverse Clutch Drive Plates ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. F Thickness of drive plate: Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● G If not within wear limit, replace. H SAT162D I Reverse Clutch Dish Plates ● ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure thickness of dish plate. Thickness of dish plate ● J : 3.08 mm (0.1213 in) If deformed or fatigued, replace. K L SAT163D M Reverse Clutch Piston ● ● ● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure that air leaks past ball. ASSEMBLY 1. Install new D-ring and seal ring on piston. NOTE: ● Take care with the direction of new oil seal. ● Apply ATF to both parts. SCIA4887E Revision: March 2005 AT-319 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly. NOTE: ● Apply ATF to inner surface of the drum. SCIA3319E 3. Install return springs and spring retainer on piston using Tool. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: Be sure to set Tool directly over springs. ● SCIA5387E 4. 5. 6. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plates. NOTE: ● Take care with the order of the plates Install snap ring using screwdriver. SCIA4886E 7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate : 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in) : 1.2 mm (0.047 in) : Refer to AT-378, "REVERSE CLUTCH" . SCIA3321E Revision: March 2005 AT-320 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 8. Check operation of reverse clutch using compressed air. A B AT SCIA3316E D High Clutch ECS009B7 COMPONENTS E F G H I J WCIA0373E DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. 2. K Check operation of high clutch using compressed air. Apply compressed air to oil hole of input shaft with nylon cloth. NOTE: Stop up hole on opposite side of input shaft with nylon cloth. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: NOTE: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. L M SAT176D Remove seal rings from input shaft. NOTE: Do not reuse seal rings. SCIA4890E Revision: March 2005 AT-321 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. 4. Remove snap ring using screwdriver. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. SAT095F 5. Remove snap ring from high clutch drum while compressing return springs using Tool. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: Set Tool directly over springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove cancel force cover and return springs. ● 6. SCIA5388E 7. Remove piston from high clutch drum by turning it. SAT111F INSPECTION High Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs Check for deformation, replace if fatigue or damage. NOTE: Always replace the spring retainer and return springs as a set. High Clutch Drive Plates ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate: Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● If not within wear limit, replace. SAT162D Revision: March 2005 AT-322 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Seal Ring Clearance ● ● Standard clearance Allowable limit ● A Install new seal rings onto input shaft. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. : 0.08 - 0.23 mm (0.0031 - 0.0091 in) : 0.23 mm (0.0091 in) B AT If not within allowable limit, replace input shaft assembly. SAT187D D ASSEMBLY 1. Install return springs and cancel force spring on piston. E 2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly. NOTE: Apply ATF to inner surface of the drum F G H SAT111F 3. I Install snap ring while compressing return springs using Tool. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: Set Tool directly over return springs. J K L M SCIA5388E CAUTION: Do not align the snap ring gap with the spring retainer stopper. SAT113F 4. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. Revision: March 2005 AT-323 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] NOTE: Take care of the order and direction of plates. 5. Install snap ring using screwdriver. SAT095F 6. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard : 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in) Allowable limit : 2.8 mm (0.110 in) Retaining plate : Refer to AT-378, "HIGH CLUTCH" . : Refer to AT-378, "HIGH CLUTCH" . SCIA4892E 7. Check operation of high clutch. SAT196D 8. Install seal rings to input shaft. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to the new seal rings. ● Never reuse seal rings. SAT197D Revision: March 2005 AT-324 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] NOTE: Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading. A B AT SAT198D D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-325 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Forward and Overrun Clutches ECS009B8 COMPONENTS WCIA0374E Revision: March 2005 AT-326 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. d. A Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch. Install bearing retainer on forward clutch drum. Apply compressed air to oil hole of forward clutch drum. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. B AT SAT123F 2. 3. Remove snap ring for forward clutch. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for forward clutch. D E F G SAT203D 4. 5. H Remove snap ring for overrun clutch. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for overrun clutch. I J K SAT204D 6. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum while compressing return springs using Tool. Tool number L : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: ● Set Tool directly over return springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. M SCIA5389E 7. Remove spring retainer and return springs. NOTE: Do not remove return springs from the spring retainer. Revision: March 2005 AT-327 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 8. Remove forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston from forward clutch drum by turning it. SAT125F 9. Remove overrun clutch piston from forward clutch piston by turning it. SAT126F 10. Remove D-rings and seal rings from forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston. NOTE: Do not reuse D-rings and seal rings. SCIA3046E INSPECTION Snap Rings, Spring Retainer and Return Springs ● ● Always replace spring retainer and return springs as a set. Check for deformation, replace if fatigue or damage. Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Drive Plates ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate: Forward clutch Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) Overrun clutch Standard value : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● SAT162D If not within wear limit, replace. Revision: March 2005 AT-328 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Dish Plates ● ● Thickness of dish plate Forward clutch Overrun clutch ● A Check for deformation or damage. Measure thickness of dish plate. B : 2.7 mm (0.106 in) : 2.7 mm (0.106 in) AT If deformed or fatigued, replace. SAT163D D Forward Clutch Drum ● ● ● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole from outside of forward clutch drum. Make sure air leaks past ball. Apply compressed air to oil hole from inside of forward clutch drum. Make sure there is no air leakage. E F G SAT213D H Overrun Clutch Piston ● ● ● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side. Make sure that air leaks past ball. I J K SAT212D ASSEMBLY 1. Install new D-rings and seal rings on forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston. NOTE: ● Take care of the direction of the new seal rings. ● Apply ATF to both parts. M SCIA3046E Revision: March 2005 AT-329 L 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Install overrun clutch piston assembly on forward clutch piston by turning it slowly. NOTE: Apply ATF to inner surface of the forward clutch piston. SAT126F 3. Install forward clutch piston assembly on forward clutch drum by turning it slowly. NOTE: Apply ATF to inner surface of the drum. SAT125F 4. Install spring retainer assembly on overrun clutch piston. WCIA0375E NOTE: Align the mark on spring retainer assembly with check ball in overrun clutch piston. SAT133F Revision: March 2005 AT-330 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Install snap ring while compressing spring retainer assembly Using Tool. Tool number A : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: ● Set Tool directly over the spring retainer assembly. B AT SCIA5389E D NOTE: Do not align snap ring with the spring retainer assembly stopper. E F G SAT134F H 6. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for overrun clutch and install snap ring for the overrun clutch using screwdriver. NOTE: Take care of the order of the plates. I J K SAT204D 7. Measure clearance between overrun clutch retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Overrun clutch retaining plate L M : 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in) : 1.7 mm (0.067 in) Refer to AT-379, "OVERRUN CLUTCH" . SAT135F Revision: March 2005 AT-331 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 8. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate for forward clutch and install snap ring for the forward clutches using screwdriver. NOTE: Take care of the order of the plates. SAT203D 9. Measure clearance between forward clutch retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Forward clutch retaining plate : 0.45 - 0.85 mm (0.0177 - 0.0335 in) : 1.85 mm (0.0728 in) : Refer to AT-378, "FORWARD CLUTCH" . SAT228D 10. Check operation of forward clutch. 11. Check operation of overrun clutch. SAT123F Revision: March 2005 AT-332 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Low & Reverse Brake ECS009B9 A COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I WCIA0376E DISASSEMBLY 1. a. b. c. J Check operation of low & reverse brake. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transaxle case. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. K L M SAT147F 2. In order to remove piston, apply compressed air to oil hole of retainer while holding piston. NOTE: Apply compressed air gradually to allow the piston to come out evenly. SAT149F Revision: March 2005 AT-333 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Remove D-rings from piston and discard. SAT150F INSPECTION Low and Reverse Brake Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs ● ● Check for deformation, replace if fatigue or damage. Always replace the spring retainer and return springs as a set. Low and Reverse Brake Drive Plate ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 1.8 mm (0.071 in) Wear limit : 1.6 mm (0.063 in) ● If not within wear limit, replace. SAT162D ASSEMBLY 1. Install new D-rings on piston. NOTE: Apply ATF to both Parts SAT150F 2. Set and align piston with retainer using suitable tool. NOTE: This operation may be required in order to engage the protrusions of the piston to the return springs correctly. SAT323F Revision: March 2005 AT-334 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Install new driven plates, drive plates, retaining plate and dish plate on transaxle case. NOTE: Take care with the order and direction of the plates. A B AT SAT923H D 4. Install snap ring using screwdriver. E F G SAT546G 5. Measure clearance between driven plate and transaxle case. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. (front side) Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate H I : 1.7 - 2.1 mm (0.067 - 0.083 in) : 3.3 mm (0.130 in) Refer to AT-379, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" . J SAT155F Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub K ECS009BA COMPONENTS L M SAT975H Revision: March 2005 AT-335 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove overrun clutch hub and thrust washer from forward clutch hub. SAT157F 2. Remove forward clutch hub from rear internal gear. SAT251D 3. Remove bearing from rear internal gear. SAT252DA 4. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear. SAT253D Revision: March 2005 AT-336 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Remove bearing from forward one-way clutch. A B AT SAT254DA D 6. Remove forward one-way clutch from forward clutch hub. E F G SAT255D INSPECTION Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub ● H Check rubbing surfaces for wear or damage. I J K SAT256D Bearings and Forward One-Way Clutch ● ● L Check bearings for deformation and damage. Check forward one-way clutch for wear and damage. M SAT158FA Revision: March 2005 AT-337 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ASSEMBLY 1. Install forward one-way clutch on forward clutch. NOTE: Take care with the direction of the forward one-way clutch. SAT976H 2. Install bearing on forward one-way clutch. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to the bearing. SAT159FA 3. Install thrust washer on rear internal gear. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer. ● Align hooks of the thrust washer with holes of the rear internal gear. SAT160F 4. Install bearing on rear internal gear. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to the bearing. SAT161FA Revision: March 2005 AT-338 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Install thrust washer and overrun clutch hub. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer. ● Align hooks of the thrust washer with holes of the overrun clutch hub. ● Align protrusions of rear internal gear with the holes of the overrun clutch hub. A B AT SAT157F D 6. Install forward clutch hub on rear internal gear. NOTE: ● Check operation of the forward one-way clutch. ● Hold the rear internal gear and turn the forward clutch hub. ● Check forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlocking directions as shown, if incorrect check assembly of the forward one-way clutch. E F G AAT426 Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer ECS009BB H COMPONENTS I J K L M SAT291K Revision: March 2005 AT-339 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer. NOTE: Do not reuse seal rings. SAT164F 2. Remove output shaft bearing with screwdrivers. NOTE: ● Do not ruse output shaft bearing. ● Be careful not damage output shaft. SAT165F 3. Remove snap ring from bearing retainer using suitable tool. SAT166F 4. Remove needle bearing from bearing retainer suitable tool. SAT167F Revision: March 2005 AT-340 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Remove idler gear bearing inner race from idler gear using suitable tool. A B AT SAT168F D 6. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transaxle case using Tool. Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) E F G SCIA5390E 7. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing inner race from reduction pinion gear using suitable tool. H I J SAT169F 8. K Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from transaxle case using suitable tool. L M SAT319K INSPECTION Output Shaft, Idler Gear and Reduction Pinion Gear ● ● Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending. Check gears for wear, chips and cracks. Bearing NOTE: ● Make sure bearings roll freely and free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Revision: March 2005 AT-341 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ● Always replace roller bearing inner and outer races as a set. SPD715 Seal Ring Clearance ● ● Install new seal rings to output shaft. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of output shaft. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● ● ● If not within allowable limit, replace output shaft. Install new seal rings to bearing retainer. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bearing retainer. Standard clearance Allowable limit ● : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) SAT171F : 0.10 - 0.30 mm (0.0039 - 0.0118 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) If not within allowable limit, replace bearing retainer. ASSEMBLY 1. Press reduction pinion gear bearing inner race on reduction pinion gear using Tool. Tool number : KV40100630 (J-26092) SCIA5391E 2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transaxle case. Reduction pinion gear bearing outer race bolts : 109 - 123 N-m (11.1 - 12.5 kg-m, 80 - 90 ft-lb) SAT319K Revision: March 2005 AT-342 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 3. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear using Tool. Tool number A : KV40100630 (J-26092) B AT SCIA5392E 4. D Install idler gear bearing outer race on transaxle case using Tool. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405 and J-34331) E F G SCIA5393E 5. Press output shaft bearing on output shaft using Tool. Tool number : ST 35321000 ( — H ) I J SAT863D 6. K Press needle bearing on bearing retainer using suitable tool. L M SAT176F 7. Install snap ring to bearing retainer using suitable tool. SAT166F Revision: March 2005 AT-343 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 8. After packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly, carefully install new seal rings on output shaft and bearing retainer. SAT164F NOTE: Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading. SAT179F Band Servo Piston Assembly ECS009BC COMPONENTS WCIA0377E DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove band servo piston bolts using suitable tool. AAT879 Revision: March 2005 AT-344 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 2. Apply compressed air to oil hole in transaxle case to remove O/ D servo piston retainer and band servo piston assembly. NOTE: Hold band servo piston assembly with a rag or nylon waste. A B AT SAT093J 3. Apply compressed air to oil hole in O/D servo piston retainer to remove O/D servo piston from retainer. CAUTION: Hold O/D band servo while applying compressed air. D E F G AAT880 4. Remove D-ring from O/D servo piston. NOTE: Do not reuse D-ring. H I J AAT881 5. Remove O-rings from O/D servo piston retainer. NOTE: Do not reuse O-ring. K L M AAT882 6. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer by pushing it forward. SAT293D Revision: March 2005 AT-345 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 7. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring using suitable tool. SAT294D 8. Remove O/D servo return spring, band servo thrust washer and band servo piston stem from band servo piston. AAT883 9. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer. SAT296DA 10. Remove D-rings from band servo piston. SAT297D INSPECTION Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem ● Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage. Revision: March 2005 AT-346 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] Return Springs ● ● A Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-382, "Band Servo" . B AT AAT884 D ASSEMBLY 1. Install new D-rings to servo piston retainer. NOTE: ● Apply ATF to new D-rings. ● Pay attention to the position of each D-ring. E F G SAT297D 2. H Install band servo piston stem, band servo thrust washer, O/D servo return spring and spring retainer to band servo piston. I J K AAT883 3. L Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring using suitable tool. M SAT301D Revision: March 2005 AT-347 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. Install O-rings to servo piston retainer. NOTE: ● Apply ATF to the new O-rings. ● Pay attention to the position of the new O-rings. SAT296DA 5. Install band servo piston assembly to servo piston retainer by pushing it inward. SAT303D 6. Install new D-ring to O/D servo piston. NOTE: ● Apply ATF to the new D-ring. ● Pay attention to the position of the new D-ring. AAT881 7. Install new O-rings to O/D servo piston retainer. NOTE: ● Apply ATF to the new O-rings. ● Pay attention to the position of the new O-rings. AAT882 8. Install O/D servo piston to O/D servo piston retainer. AAT886 Revision: March 2005 AT-348 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 9. Install band servo piston assembly and 2nd servo return spring to transaxle case. NOTE: Apply ATF to O-ring of the band servo and transaxle case A B AT SAT865H 10. Install O/D servo piston assembly to transaxle case. NOTE: Apply ATF to O-ring of the O/D servo and transaxle case D E F G AAT885 11. Install O/D servo piston retainer to transaxle case using suitable tool. Refer to AT-303, "COMPONENTS" . H I J AAT879 Final Drive K ECS009BD COMPONENTS L M WCIA0327E Revision: March 2005 AT-349 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove final gear using suitable tool. SMT505B 2. Press out differential side bearings using Tool. Tool number Tool number : ST33051001 (J-22888-D) : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) CAUTION: Be careful not to mix up the right and left bearings. SCIA5394E 3. Remove differential side bearing outer race and side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case using Tool. Tool number :KV381054S0 (J-34286) SCIA5378E 4. Remove speedometer drive gear. SAT313D Revision: March 2005 AT-350 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 5. Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin using Tool. Tool number A : KV32101000 (J-25689-A) B AT SCIA5395E 6. 7. D Draw out pinion mate shaft lock pin. Remove pinion mate gears and side gears. E F G SAT316D INSPECTION Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case ● ● H Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears and pinion mate gears. Check washers for wear. I J K SAT544F Bearings ● ● L Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner race as a set. M SPD715 Revision: March 2005 AT-351 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] ASSEMBLY 1. Attach side gear thrust washers to side gears, then install pinion mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears in place. NOTE: Apply ATF to any parts during assembly. SMT839 2. Insert pinion mate shaft. CAUTION: When inserting, be careful not to damage pinion mate thrust washers. SMT087A 3. Measure clearance between side gear and differential case with washers following the procedure below using Tool: Tool number a. (J-39713) Set Tool and dial indicator on side gear. SCIA5396E b. Move side gear up and down to measure dial indicator deflection. Always measure indicator deflection on both side gears. Clearance between side gear and differential case with washer c. : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) If not within specification, adjust clearance by changing thickness of differential side gear thrust washers. Differential side gear thrust washers Revision: March 2005 : Refer to AT-380, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS" . AT-352 SMT611A 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE4F04B] 4. Install lock pin. using Tool Tool number A :KV32101000 (J-25689-A) NOTE: Make sure the pin is flush with case. B AT SCIA5395E D 5. Install speedometer drive gear on differential case. NOTE: Align the projection of speedometer drive gear with the groove of differential case. E F G SAT313D 6. Press on differential side bearings using Tool. Tool number H :ST33230000 (J-25805-01) I J SCIA5397E 7. Install final gear and tighten final gear bolts in a crisscross pattern to the specified torque using suitable tool. Refer to AT-349, "COMPONENTS" . K L M SAT546F Revision: March 2005 AT-353 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. PFP:00000 ECS009BE Install new differential side oil seals on transaxle case and converter housing using Tool. Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) SCIA5399E SAT182F 2. Install parking actuator support to transaxle case. Tighten parking actuator support bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT275, "Components" . NOTE: Pay attention to the direction of the parking actuator support. SAT183F 3. 4. Install parking pawl on transaxle case and fix it with parking shaft. Install return spring. WCIA0330E Revision: March 2005 AT-354 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] Adjustment (1) ECS009BF A DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD 1. 2. Install differential side bearing outer race without adjusting shim on transaxle case. Install differential side bearing outer race on converter housing using suitable tool. B AT D SAT870D 3. 4. E Place final drive assembly on transaxle case. Install transaxle case on converter housing. Tighten transaxle case bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . F G SAT008F 5. 6. Attach dial indicator on differential case at converter housing side. Insert Tool into differential side gear from transaxle case side. Tool number 7. 8. I (J-39713) J Move Tool up and down and measure dial indicator deflection. Select proper thickness of differential side bearing adjusting shim(s). Suitable shim thickness = Dial indicator deflection + Specified bearing preload Differential side bearing preload adjusting shim Bearing preload K L : Refer to AT-380, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS" . : 0.05 - 0.09 mm (0.0020 - 0.0035 in) M SCIA5400E Revision: March 2005 H AT-355 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 9. Remove converter housing from transaxle case. 10. Remove final drive assembly from transaxle case. 11. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transaxle case using Tool. Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) 12. Reinstall differential side bearing outer race and shim(s) selected from SDS table on transaxle case. 13. Reinstall converter housing on transaxle case and tighten transaxle case bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "OVERHAUL" . SCIA5378E 14. Measure turning torque of final drive assembly using Tool. Tool number (J-39713) NOTE: Turn the final drive assembly in both directions several times to seat the bearing rollers correctly ● Turning torque of final drive assembly (New bearing) ● ● : 0.78 - 1.54 N-m (8.0 - 15.7 kgcm, 6.9 - 13.6 in-lb) When old bearing is being used again, turning torque will be slightly less than above. Make sure torque is close to the specified range. SCIA5401E REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD 1. 2. a. Remove transaxle case and final drive assembly from converter housing. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim using the following procedures. Place reduction pinion gear on transaxle case as shown. SAT332DA b. c. Place idler gear bearing on transaxle case. Measure dimensions “B” “C” and “D” and calculate dimension “A”. A = D − (B + C) “A” : Distance between the surface of idler gear bearing inner race and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pinion gear. SAT333DA Revision: March 2005 AT-356 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] ● Measure dimension “B” between the end of reduction pinion gear and the surface of transaxle case using straightedge and depth gauge. NOTE: Measure dimension “B” in at least two places. A B AT SAT334DA D ● ● Measure dimension “C” between the surface of idler gear bearing inner race and the surface of transaxle case using straightedge and depth gauge. NOTE: Measure dimension “C” in at least two places. E F G SAT335D ● ● ● Measure dimension “D” between the end of reduction pinion gear and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pinion gear using straightedge and depth gauge. NOTE: Measure dimension “D” in at least two places. Calculate dimension “A”. H I A = D − (B + C) J SAT336DA d. e. Measure dimension “E” between the end of idler gear and the idler gear bearing inner race mating surface of idler gear using depth gauge. NOTE: Measure dimension “E” in at least two places. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim. L M Proper shim thickness = A − E − 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)* (*: Bearing preload) Reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim Revision: March 2005 SAT337D : Refer to AT-381, "REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS" . AT-357 K 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 3. 4. 5. Install reduction gear and reduction gear bearing adjusting shim selected in step 2-e on transaxle case. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear. Install idler gear on reduction gear using Tool. Tool number : ST35271000 (J-26091) NOTE: Press idler gear until idler gear fully contacts adjusting shim. SCIA5402E 6. Tighten idler gear lock nut to the specified torque using suitable tool. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . NOTE: Lock idler gear with parking pawl when tightening the lock nut. SAT189F 7. Measure turning torque of reduction pinion gear using Tool. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) NOTE: When measuring turning torque, turn the reduction pinion gear in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly. Turning torque of reduction pinion gear : 0.05 - 0.39 N-m (0.5 - 4.0 kg-cm, 0.43 - 3.47 in-lb) NOTE: If turning torque is out of specification, select the correct reduction pinion gear adjusting shim. 8. WCIA0378E After properly adjusting turning torque, clinch idler gear lock nut as shown. SAT699D Revision: March 2005 AT-358 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY ● ● A Measure clearance between side cover and the end of the output shaft bearing. Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that clearance is within specifications. B AT SAT341D 1. Install bearing retainer for output shaft using suitable tool. D E F G SAT191F 2. H Install output shaft thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer. I J K SAT438D 3. L Install output shaft on transaxle case. M SAT035F Revision: March 2005 AT-359 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 4. Measure dimensions “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” at side cover and then calculate dimension “A” using straightedge and depth gauge. ● Measure dimension “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” in at least two places. “A” A= : Distance between transaxle case fitting surface and adjusting shim mating surface. 1 − 2 : Height of gauge 2 5. Measure dimensions “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” and then calculate dimension “B” using straightedge and depth gauge. ● Measure “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” in at least two places. “B” B= : Distance between the end of output shaft bearing outer race and the side cover fitting surface of transaxle case. 2 − 3 2 6. SAT375F : Height of gauge Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that output shaft end play (clearance between side cover and output shaft bearing) is within specifications. Output shaft end play (A − B) Output shaft end play adjusting shims 7. SAT374F : 0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in) : Refer to AT-382, "OUTPUT SHAFT ADJUSTING SHIMS" . Install adjusting shim on output shaft bearing. SAT440D Assembly (2) 1. ECS009BG Apply anaerobic liquid gasket to transaxle case as shown. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . SAT441D Revision: March 2005 AT-360 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 2. Set side cover on transaxle case using suitable tool. A B AT SAT442D D 3. Tighten side cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . CAUTION: ● Do not mix bolts A and B. ● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts. E F G AAT850 4. 5. Remove paper rolled around bearing retainer. Install thrust washer on bearing retainer. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. H I J SAT033F 6. Install forward clutch assembly. NOTE: ● Align teeth of low and reverse brake drive plates before installing. ● Make sure that the bearing retainer seal rings have not spread. ● If forward clutch assembly is correctly seated, points 1 and 2 are at the same level. L M SAT194F Revision: March 2005 AT-361 K 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 7. Install thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust needle bearing. ● Pay attention to the direction of the thrust needle bearing as shown. SAT195F 8. Install overrun clutch hub. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust needle bearing. ● Align the teeth of overrun clutch drive plates before installing. SAT030F 9. Hold forward clutch hub and turn rear internal gear. ● Check overrun clutch hub for correct directions of lock and unlock. ● If not shown as illustrated, check installed direction of forward one-way clutch. SAT198F 10. Install forward clutch hub and rear internal gear assembly. NOTE: ● Align teeth of forward clutch drive plates before installing. ● Check the three hooks of the thrust washer are correctly aligned before installing. SAT199F Revision: March 2005 AT-362 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 11. Install rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear according to the following procedures. a. Install needle bearings on rear planetary carrier. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearings. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearings. A B AT SAT028F b. Install rear sun gear on rear planetary carrier. NOTE: Pay attention to direction of rear sun gear. D E F G SAT027F c. Install rear planetary carrier on transaxle case. H I J SAT026F 12. Install thrust needle bearing on front planetary carrier, then install them together on transaxle case. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing. L M SAT380F Revision: March 2005 AT-363 K 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 13. Install low and reverse brake piston according to the following procedures. a. Set and align return springs to transaxle case gutters as shown in illustration. SAT322F b. Set and align piston with retainer using suitable tool. SAT323F c. Install piston and retainer assembly on the transaxle case. NOTE: Align bracket to specified gutter in illustration as shown. SAT324F d. Check that each protrusion of piston is correctly set to corresponding return spring as follows. NOTE: ● Push piston and retainer assembly evenly and confirm they move smoothly. ● If they can not move smoothly, remove piston and retainer assembly and align return spring correctly as instructed in step “a”. SAT325F Revision: March 2005 AT-364 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] e. Push down piston and retainer assembly and install snap ring using Tool. Tool number A : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) B AT SCIA5404E D 14. Install low one-way clutch to front planetary carrier by turning carrier in the direction of the arrow shown. E F G SAT206F H 15. Install snap ring using screwdriver. NOTE: Forward clutch and bearing must be correctly installed for snap ring to fit into groove of transaxle case. I J SAT046D 16. Install needle bearing on transaxle case. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. K L M SAT020F 17. Install bearing race, needle bearing and high clutch hub on front sun gear. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. SAT019F Revision: March 2005 AT-365 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 18. Install needle bearing and high clutch drum on high clutch hub. SAT018F 19. Install needle bearing on high clutch drum. NOTE: ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing. SAT017F 20. Remove paper rolled around input shaft. 21. Install input shaft assembly in reverse clutch. NOTE: Align teeth of reverse clutch drive plates before installing. SAT016F 22. Install reverse clutch assembly on transaxle case. NOTE: Align teeth of high clutch drive plates before installing. SAT015F Revision: March 2005 AT-366 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] Adjustment (2) ECS009BH A When any parts listed below are replaced, adjust total end play and reverse clutch end play. Total end play Reverse clutch end play Transaxle case ● ● Overrun clutch hub ● ● Rear internal gear ● ● Rear planetary carrier ● ● Rear sun gear ● ● Front planetary carrier ● ● Front sun gear ● ● High clutch hub ● ● High clutch drum ● ● Oil pump cover ● ● Reverse clutch drum — ● Part name B AT D E F TOTAL END PLAY 1. G Adjust total end play “T1 ”. H I J SAT213F a. With original bearing race installed, place Tool onto oil pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder should rest on top of bearing race. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set screw. Tool number : — K L (J-34291-A) M WCIA0379E b. Install gauging plunger into cylinder. Tool number : — (J-34290) WCIA0380E Revision: March 2005 AT-367 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. d. With needle bearing installed on high clutch drum, place Tool legs on machined surface of transaxle case (with gasket). Then allow plunger to rest on needle bearing. Measure gap between cylinder and plunger. This measurement should give exact total end play. Total end play “T1 ” ● If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of bearing race as necessary. Available bearing race for adjusting total end play 2. : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) : Refer to AT-383, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" . SAT216F Adjust reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ”. SAT218F a. Place Tool on machined surface of transaxle case (with gasket). Then allow gauging cylinder to rest on reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw. Tool number : — (J-34291-A) WCIA0379E b. Install gauging plunger into cylinder, using Tool. Tool number : — (J-34290) WCIA0380E Revision: March 2005 AT-368 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] c. d. With original thrust washer installed on oil pump, place Tool legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Then allow plunger to rest on thrust washer. Measure gap between cylinder and plunger with feeler gauge. This measurement should give exact reverse clutch drum end play. Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” ● AT SAT221F D : Refer to AT-383, "THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM END PLAY" . Assembly (3) 1. 2. B : 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in) If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of thrust washer as necessary. Available thrust washer for adjusting reverse clutch drum end play A E ECS009BI Install anchor end pin and lock nut on transaxle case. Place brake band on outside of reverse clutch drum. Tighten anchor end pin just enough so that brake band is evenly fitted on reverse clutch drum. F G H I SAT196F 3. 4. J Place bearing race selected in total end play adjustment step on oil pump cover. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. Place thrust washer selected in reverse clutch end play step on reverse clutch drum. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. K L SAT013F 5. 6. Install oil pump assembly, baffle plate and gasket on transaxle case. Tighten oil pump bolts to the specified torque. SAT012F Revision: March 2005 AT-369 2005 Altima M ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 7. Install new O-ring to input shaft. NOTE: Apply ATF to new O-ring. SAT225F 8. a. Adjust brake band. Tighten anchor end pin to the specified torque using suitable tool. Anchor end pin b. c. : Refer to AT-380, "BRAKE BAND" . Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut. Lock nut : Refer to AT-380, "BRAKE BAND" . SAT014FA 9. Apply compressed air to oil holes of transaxle case and check operation of brake band. SAT397D 10. Install final drive assembly on transaxle case. SAT228F Revision: March 2005 AT-370 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 11. Install differential lubricant tube on converter housing. Tighten differential lubricant tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . A B AT SAT063K D 12. Install new O-ring on differential oil port of transaxle case. E F G SAT235F H 13. Install converter housing on transaxle case. NOTE: Apply locking sealant to mating surface of converter housing. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . I J K SAT371H NOTE: Tighten converter housing bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . L M SAT008F Revision: March 2005 AT-371 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 14. Install accumulator piston. a. Check contact surface of accumulator piston for damage. SAT406DA b. Install new O-rings on accumulator piston. NOTE: Apply ATF to new O-rings. Accumulator piston O-rings : Refer to AT-377, "O-RING" . SAT236FA c. Install accumulator pistons and return springs on transaxle case. NOTE: Apply ATF to inner surface of transaxle case. Return springs : Refer to AT-377, "RETURN SPRING" . SAT237FA 15. Install new lip seals for band servo oil holes on transaxle case. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to new lip seals. SAT006F 16. Install L & R oil tube and oil sleeve. Tighten L & R oil tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . SAT862HA Revision: March 2005 AT-372 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 17. Install control valve assembly. a. Insert manual valve into control valve assembly. NOTE: Apply ATF to manual valve. A B AT SAT005F b. c. d. e. Set manual shaft in Neutral position. Install control valve assembly on transaxle case while aligning manual valve with manual plate. Pass solenoid harness through transaxle case and install terminal body on transaxle case by pushing it. Install stopper ring to terminal body. D E F G SAT094J f. H Tighten bolts I , X and ● . Bolt length, number and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length “ X ● 40 (1.57) 33 (1.30) 43.5 (1.713) 5 6 2 I ” mm (in) Number of bolts I J K L M SAT004F Revision: March 2005 AT-373 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] 18. a. b. c. Install oil pan. Attach a magnet to oil pan. Install new oil pan gasket on transaxle case. Install oil pan on transaxle case. NOTE: ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. ● Tighten four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket. d. Tighten oil pan bolts and drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . 19. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch. a. Set manual shaft in P position. b. Temporarily install park/neutral position (PNP) switch on manual shaft. c. Move selector lever to N position. SAT003F SCIA3154E d. i. ii. e. f. Use a 4 mm (0.16 in) pin for this adjustment. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole. Rotate park/neutral position (PNP) switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into hole in park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch fixing bolts. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting park/neutral position (PNP) switch. SCIA3622E 20. Install A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube to transaxle case. Tighten A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" . SAT768J 21. Install torque converter. a. Pour ATF into torque converter. NOTE: ● Approximately 1 liter (1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 Imp qt) of fluid is required for a new torque converter. ● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained. SAT428DA Revision: March 2005 AT-374 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE4F04B] b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque converter with notches of oil pump. A B AT SAT429D c. D Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper position. Distance A E : 14 mm (0.55 in) or more F G SAT430D H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-375 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS009BJ Engine QR25DE Automatic transaxle model RE4F04B Automatic transaxle assembly Transaxle gear ratio Model code number 89X05 1st 2.785 2nd 1.545 3rd 1.000 4th 0.694 Reverse 2.272 Final drive 4.425 Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid* Recommended fluid Fluid capacity 9.2 (9.3/4, 8.1/8) (US qt, Imp qt) *: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Shift Schedule ECS009BK VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION Throttle position Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Shift pattern D1 → D2 D2 → D 3 D3 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 Comfort 52 - 60 (32 - 37) 97 - 105 (60 - 65) 153 - 161 (95 - 100) 149 - 157 (93 - 98) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 39 - 47 (24 - 29) Auto power 52 - 60 (35 - 40) 97 - 105 (60 - 65) 153 - 161 (95 - 98) 149 - 157 (93 - 98) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 39 - 47 (24 - 29) Comfort 28 - 36 (17 - 22) 57 - 65 (35 - 40) 121 - 129 (75 - 80) 61 - 69 (38 - 43) 32 - 40 (20 - 25) 15 - 23 (9 - 14) Auto power 38 - 46 (24 - 29) 72 - 80 (45 - 50) 121 - 129 (75 - 80) 61 - 69 (38 - 43) 43 - 51 (27 - 32) 15 - 23 (9 - 14) Full throttle Half throttle VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP Unit: km/h (MPH) Selector lever position Shift pattern D position 3 position Comfort Auto power Comfort Auto power Lock-up ″ON″ 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) Lock-up ″OFF″ 65 - 73 (41 - 46) 65 - 73 (41 - 46) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) NOTE: ● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D4 position. ● Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine. ● Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. Stall Revolution Revision: March 2005 ECS009BL Engine Stall revolution rpm QR25DE 2,300 - 2,750 AT-376 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Line Pressure ECS009BM A Line pressure Engine speed rpm kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D, 2 and 1 positions R position QR25DE QR25DE Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113) Stall 1,223 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278) B AT Control Valves ECS009BN CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS Unit: mm (in) Item Parts Upper body Lower body Part No.* Free length Outer diameter 23 Pilot valve spring 31742-80L13 38.98 (1.535) 8.9 (0.350) 7 1-2 accumulator valve spring 31742-80L15 20.5 (0.807) 6.95 (0.274) 28 1-2 accumulator piston spring 31742-80L14 55.26 (2.176) 19.6 (0.772) 33 1st reducing valve spring 31742-80X05 27.0 (1.063) 7.0 (0.276) 35 3-2 timing valve spring 31736-01X00 23.0 (0.906) 6.65 (0.262) 18 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-80L09 37.5 (1.476) 6.9 (0.272) 16 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-80L10 31.0 (1.220) 9.0 (0.354) 11 Torque converter clutch control valve 31742-80L16 56.98 (2.243) 6.5 (0.256) 3 Cooler check valve spring 31742-85X01 29.4 (1.157) 6.0 (0.236) 15 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-80L01 45.0 (1.772) 15.0 (0.591) 20 Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-80L00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 24 Accumulator control valve spring 31742-80L02 22.0 (0.866) 6.5 (0.256) 29 Shift valve A spring 31762-80L00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 32 Shuttle valve spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.008) 5.65 (0.222) 12 Shift valve B spring 31762-80L00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) 7 Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-80L03 30.5 (1.201) 9.8 (0.386) 3 Pressure modifier piston spring 31742-80L04 32.0 (1.260) 6.9 (0.272) — Oil cooler relief valve spring 31742-80L12 17.02 (0.670) 8.0 (0.315) Accumulator ECS009BO O-RING Unit: mm (in) Part No.* Inner diameter (Small) Part No.* Inner diameter (Large) Servo release accumulator 31526-41X03 26.9 (1.059) 31526-41X02 44.2 (1.740) N-D accumulator 31526-31X08 34.6 (1.362) 31672-21X00 39.4 (1.551) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. RETURN SPRING Unit: mm (in) Accumulator Part number* Free length Outer diameter Servo release accumulator 31605-85X00 62.8 (2.473) 21 (0.827) N-D accumulator 31605-31X02 43.5 (1.713) 27.0 (1.063) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 AT-377 E F G H I J K L *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. **: This part is for model code number ″88X02″. Accumulator D 2005 Altima M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Clutch and Brakes ECS009BP REVERSE CLUTCH Model code number 89X05 Number of drive plates 2 Number of driven plates 2 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard 1.8 (0.070) Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031) Allowable limit 1.2 (0.047) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 6.6 (0.260) 6.8 (0.268) 7.0 (0.276) 7.2 (0.283) 7.4 (0.291) 7.6 (0.299) 7.8 (0.307) Thickness of retaining plates 31537-89X00 31537-89X01 31537-89X02 31537-89X03 31537-89X04 31537-89X05 31537-89X06 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. HIGH CLUTCH Model code number 89X05 Number of drive plates 3 Number of driven plates 9*1 + 1*2 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard *1 *2 1.4 (0.055) 2.0 (0.079) Standard Clearance mm (in) 1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087) Allowable limit 2.8 (0.110) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.0 (0.118) 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) Thickness of retaining plates 31537-81X10 31537-81X11 31537-81X12 31537-81X13 31537-81X14 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. FORWARD CLUTCH Model code number 89X05 Number of drive plates 5 Number of driven plates Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Revision: March 2005 5 Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard 1.8 (0.071) Standard 0.45 - 0.85 (0.0177 - 0.0335) Allowable limit 1.85 (0.0728) AT-378 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) Thickness of retaining plates 31537-80L18 31537-80L17 31537-80L12 31537-80L13 31537-80L14 31537-80L15 31537-80L16 A B AT *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. OVERRUN CLUTCH Model code number D 89X05 Number of drive plates 3 Number of driven plates 5 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) E Standard 1.6 (0.063) Allowable limit 1.4 (0.055) Standard 1.8 (0.071) Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) Allowable limit F 1.7 (0.067) Thickness of retaining plates Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.0 (0.118) 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 31537-80L07 31537-80L08 31537-80L09 31537-80L10 31537-80L11 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. G H I LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Model code number 89X05 Number of drive plates 6 Number of driven plates 6 Drive plate thickness mm (in) Driven plate thickness mm (in) Clearance mm (in) J K Standard 1.8 (0.071) Allowable limit 1.6 (0.063) Standard 1.8 (0.071) Standard 1.7 - 2.1 (0.067 - 0.083) Allowable limit L 3.3 (0.130) Thickness mm (in) 2.0 (0.079) 2.2 (0.087) 2.4 (0.094) 2.6 (0.102) 2.8 (0.110) 3.0 (0.118) 3.2 (0.126) 3.4 (0.134) Thickness of retaining plates Part number* 31667-80L00 31667-80L01 31667-80L02 31667-80L03 31667-80L04 31667-80L05 31667-80L06 31667-80L07 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. CLUTCH AND BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS Unit: mm (in) Parts Part number* Free length Outer diameter Forward clutch (Overrun clutch) (22 pcs) 31505-80X02 21.4 (0.843) 10.3 (0.406) High clutch (18 pcs) 31505-89X04 20.0 (0.787) 8.3 (0.327) Low & reverse brake (24 pcs) 31505-89X02 21.6 (0.850) 6.6 (0.260) Revision: March 2005 AT-379 2005 Altima M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. BRAKE BAND Anchor end pin tightening torque N-m (kg-m, in-lb) 4.0 - 5.8 (0.4 - 0.6, 36 - 52) Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin Lock nut tightening torque 2.5 N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) 31 - 36 (3.2 - 3.7, 23 - 27) Final Drive ECS009BQ DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE Clearance between side gear and differential case with washer mm (in) 0.1 - 0.2 (0.004 - 0.008) DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.75 (0.0295) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.85 (0.0335) 0.90 (0.0354) 0.95 (0.0374) 38424-81X00 38424-81X01 38424-81X02 38424-81X03 38424-81X04 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 31438-80X00 31438-80X01 31438-80X02 31438-80X03 31438-80X04 31438-80X05 31438-80X06 31438-80X07 31438-80X08 31438-80X09 31438-80X10 31438-80X11 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. BEARING PRELOAD Differential side bearing preload mm (in) 0.05 - 0.09 (0.0020 - 0.0035) TURNING TORQUE Turning torque of final drive assembly N-m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.78 - 1.54 (8.0 - 15.7, 6.9 - 13.6) Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump ECS009BR PLANETARY CARRIER Clearance between planetary carrier and pinion washer mm (in) Standard 0.20 - 0.70 (0.0079 - 0.0276) Allowable limit 0.80 (0.0315) OIL PUMP Oil pump side clearance Revision: March 2005 mm (in) 0.030 - 0.050 (0.0012 - 0.0020) AT-380 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Inner gear Thickness mm (in) A Part number* 11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724) 11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720) 11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717) Thickness of inner gears and outer gears 31346-80L00 31346-80L01 31346-80L02 B Outer gear Thickness mm (in) Part number* 11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724) 11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720) 11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717) Clearance between oil pump housing and outer gear mm (in) Standard Oil pump cover seal ring clearance mm (in) Standard AT 31347-80L00 31347-80L01 31347-80L02 D 0.111 - 0.181 (0.0044 - 0.0071) Allowable limit 0.181 (0.0071) E 0.1 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. F Input Shaft ECS009BS SEAL RING CLEARANCE Input shaft seal ring clearance (in) Standard mm G 0.08 - 0.23 (0.0031 - 0.0091) Allowable limit 0.23 (0.0091) SEAL RING H Outer diameter mm (in) Inner diameter mm (in) Width mm (in) Part number* 26 (1.024) 22.4 (0.882) 1.971 (0.078) 31525-80X02 I *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Reduction Pinion Gear ECS009BT TURNING TORQUE J Turning torque of reduction pinion gear N-m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.05 - 0.39 (0.5 - 4.0, 0.43 - 3.47) REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number NO. K Thickness mm (in) Part number* 1 5.00 (0.1969) 31439-81X00 18 5.34 (0.2102) 31439-81X17 2 5.02 (0.1976) 31439-81X01 19 5.36 (0.2110) 31439-81X18 3 5.04 (0.1984) 31439-81X02 20 5.38 (0.2118) 31439-81X19 4 5.06 (0.1992) 31439-81X03 21 5.40 (0.2126) 31439-81X20 5 5.08 (0.2000) 31439-81X04 22 5.42 (0.2134) 31439-81X21 6 5.10 (0.2008) 31439-81X05 23 5.44 (0.2142) 31439-81X22 7 5.12 (0.2016) 31439-81X06 24 5.46 (0.2150) 31439-81X23 8 5.14 (0.2024) 31439-81X07 25 5.48 (0.2157) 31439-81X24 9 5.16 (0.2031) 31439-81X08 26 5.50 (0.2165) 31439-81X46 10 5.18 (0.2039) 31439-81X09 27 5.52 (0.2173) 31439-81X47 11 5.20 (0.2047) 31439-81X10 28 5.54 (0.2181) 31439-81X48 12 5.22 (0.2055) 31439-81X11 29 5.56 (0.2189) 31439-81X49 13 5.24 (0.2063) 31439-81X12 30 5.58 (0.2197) 31439-81X60 14 5.26 (0.2071) 31439-81X13 31 5.60 (0.2205) 31439-81X61 15 5.28 (0.2079) 31439-81X14 32 5.62 (0.2213) 31439-81X62 16 5.30 (0.2087) 31439-81X15 33 5.64 (0.2220) 31439-81X63 17 5.32 (0.2094) 31439-81X16 34 5.66 (0.2228) 31439-81X64 Revision: March 2005 AT-381 2005 Altima L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number* 35 5.68 (0.2236) 31439-81X65 50 4.70 (0.1850) 31439-85X06 36 5.70 (0.2244) 31439-81X66 51 4.72 (0.1858) 31439-83X11 37 5.72 (0.2252) 31439-81X67 52 4.74 (0.1866) 31439-83X12 38 5.74 (0.2260) 31439-81X68 53 4.76 (0.1874) 31439-83X13 39 5.76 (0.2268) 31439-81X69 54 4.78 (0.1882) 31439-83X14 40 5.78 (0.2276) 31439-81X70 55 4.80 (0.1890) 31439-83X15 41 5.80 (0.2283) 31439-81X71 56 4.82 (0.1898) 31439-83X16 42 5.82 (0.2291) 31439-81X72 57 4.84 (0.1906) 31439-83X17 43 5.84 (0.2299) 31439-81X73 58 4.86 (0.1913) 31439-83X18 44 5.86 (0.2307) 31439-81X74 59 4.88 (0.1921) 31439-83X19 45 4.60 (0.1811) 31439-85X01 60 4.90 (0.1929) 31439-83X20 46 4.62 (0.1819) 31439-85X02 61 4.92 (0.1937) 31439-83X21 47 4.64 (0.1827) 31439-85X03 62 4.94 (0.1945) 31439-83X22 48 4.66 (0.1835) 31439-85X04 63 4.96 (0.1953) 31439-83X23 49 4.68 (0.1843) 31439-85X05 64 4.98 (0.1961) 31439-83X24 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Band Servo ECS009BU RETURN SPRING Unit: mm (in) Return spring Part number* Free length Outer diameter 2nd servo return spring 31605-80L05 32.5 (1.280) 25.9 (1.020) OD servo return spring 31605-80L06 62.6 (2.465) 21.7 (0.854) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Output Shaft ECS009BV SEAL RING CLEARANCE Output shaft seal ring clearance (in) Standard mm 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) SEAL RING Outer diameter mm (in) Inner diameter mm (in) Width mm (in) Part number* 33.71 (1.327) 30.25 (1.191) 1.95 (0.077) 31525-80X09 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. END PLAY Output shaft end play mm (in) 0 - 0.15 (0 - 0.0059) OUTPUT SHAFT ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) 1.12 (0.0441) 1.16 (0.0457) 1.20 (0.0472) 31438-80X60 31438-80X61 31438-80X62 31438-80X63 31438-80X64 31438-80X65 31438-80X66 31438-80X67 31438-80X68 31438-80X69 31438-80X70 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 AT-382 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Bearing Retainer ECS009BW A SEAL RING CLEARANCE Standard Bearing retainer seal ring clearance mm (in) 0.10 - 0.30 (0.0039 - 0.0118) Allowable limit 0.30 (0.0118) B Total End Play Total end play ECS009BX mm (in) 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217) AT BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.4 (0.055) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 2.0 (0.079) 0.9 (0.035) 1.1 (0.043) 1.3 (0.051) 1.5 (0.059) 1.7 (0.067) 1.9 (0.075) D 31435-80X00 31435-80X01 31435-80X02 31435-80X03 31435-80X04 31435-80X05 31435-80X06 31435-80X09 31435-80X10 31435-80X11 31435-80X12 31435-80X13 31435-80X14 E F G *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. H Reverse Clutch End Play Reverse clutch end play ECS009BY mm (in) 0.61 - 1.00 (0.0240 - 0.0394) I THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM END PLAY Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.80 (0.0315) 0.95 (0.0374) 1.10 (0.0433) 1.25 (0.0492) 1.40 (0.0551) 1.55 (0.0610) 1.70 (0.0669) 1.85 (0.0728) J 31508-80X13 31508-80X14 31508-80X15 31508-80X16 31508-80X17 31508-80X18 31508-80X19 31508-80X20 K L *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Removal and Installation ECS009BZ Unit: mm (in) Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter 14 (0.55) Shift Solenoid Valves ECS009C0 Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) Solenoid Valves Solenoid valves ECS009C1 Resistance (Approx.) Ω Terminal No. Shift solenoid valve A 20 - 30 2 Shift solenoid valve B 5 - 20 1 Overrun clutch solenoid valve 20 - 30 3 Revision: March 2005 AT-383 2005 Altima M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4F04B] Line pressure solenoid valve 2.5 - 5 4 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 5 - 20 5 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ECS009C2 Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Specification (Approximately) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ Revolution Sensor ECS009C3 Condition Judgement standard When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 450 Hz (Approx.) CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. When vehicle parks. Under 1.3V or over 4.5V Dropping Resistor ECS009C4 10 - 15 Ω Resistance Turbine Revolution Sensor (Power Train Revolution Sensor) Condition ECS009C5 Judgement standard When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1 CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. *1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item. When vehicle parks. Revision: March 2005 240 Hz (Approx.) Under 1.3V or over 4.5V AT-384 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [RE5F22A] INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index PFP:00024 A ECS009C6 NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-464 . B DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) OBD-II AT Except OBD-II Reference page GST*1 CONSULT-II only “TRANSMISSION” A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 P0731 AT-496 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 P0732 AT-499 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 P0733 AT-505 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 P0734 AT-511 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN P0735 P0735 AT-516 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-522 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P0710 AT-476 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-464 ELEC TH CONTROL — P1726 AT-590 CONSULT-II ENG SPD INP PERFOR D — P0726 AT-494 P0711 P0711 AT-481 — P0826 AT-579 PC SOL A(L/PRESS) P0745 P0745 AT-525 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) P0775 P0775 AT-560 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) P0795 P0795 AT-569 PC SOL C STC ON P0797 P0797 AT-574 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-471 SHIFT P0780 P0780 AT-565 SHIFT SOL A P0750 P0750 AT-530 SHIFT SOL B P0755 P0755 AT-535 SHIFT SOL C P0760 P0760 AT-540 SHIFT SOL D P0765 P0765 AT-550 SHIFT SOL E P0770 P0770 AT-555 SFT SOL C STUCK ON P0762 P0762 AT-545 TCM POWER INPT SIG FLUID TEMP SEN MANUAL MODE SWITCH P0882 P0882 AT-585 TCM PROCESSOR — P0613 AT-469 TURBINE SENSOR P0717 P0717 AT-486 VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR — P0500 AT-467 VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T P0722 P0722 AT-490 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. Revision: March 2005 AT-385 2005 Altima E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [RE5F22A] DTC No. Index ECS009C7 NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-464 . DTC OBD-II Except OBD-II CONSULT-II GST*1 CONSULT-II only “TRANSMISSION” — P0500 VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR AT-467 — P0613 TCM PROCESSOR AT-469 P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-471 P0710 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-476 P0711 P0711 FLUID TEMP SEN AT-481 P0717 P0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-486 P0722 P0722 VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T AT-490 — P0726 ENG SPD INP PERFOR AT-494 P0731 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-496 P0732 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-499 P0733 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-505 P0734 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-511 P0735 P0735 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN AT-516 P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-522 P0745 P0745 PC SOL A(L/PRESS) AT-525 P0750 P0750 SHIFT SOL A AT-530 P0755 P0755 SHIFT SOL B AT-535 P0760 P0760 SHIFT SOL C AT-540 P0762 P0762 SFT SOL C STUCK ON AT-545 P0765 P0765 SHIFT SOL D AT-550 P0770 P0770 SHIFT SOL E AT-555 P0775 P0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) AT-560 P0780 P0780 SHIFT AT-565 P0795 P0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) AT-569 P0797 P0797 PC SOL C STC ON AT-574 — P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH AT-579 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page P0882 P0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG AT-585 — P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL AT-590 U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-464 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. Revision: March 2005 AT-386 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE5F22A] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ECS009C8 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ECS009C9 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-387 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE5F22A] Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement ● ECS009CA When replacing A/T assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and initialize TCM if necessary. TCM INITIALIZATION PATTERNS TCM A/T assembly Erasing EEPROM in TCM Remarks Not required Not required because the EEPROM in TCM is in the default state. Not replaced Replaced with new one Not replaced Replaced with old one Replaced with new or old one Replaced with new or old one Not replaced Required because data cannot be conformed to previous data written in the EEPROM in TCM. Required Replaced with new or old one NOTE: “Old one” is the TCM or A/T assembly that has been used on other vehicles. METHOD FOR TCM INITIALIZATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Set the vehicle following the items listed below. ● Ignition switch “ON”. ● Selector lever “P” or “N” position. ● Engine not running. ● Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH). ● Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V. ● Malfunction was not detected. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”. Touch “INITIALIZATION”. Initialize TCM following the direction in display. Revision: March 2005 AT-388 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE5F22A] Precautions ● ECS009CB A Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. B AT D SEF289H ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. E F G SEF291H ● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or not. AT-453, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE". H I J K MEF040DA L ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. M SEF217U ● ● ● ● ● Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Use paper rags not cloth rags during work. After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Revision: March 2005 AT-389 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE5F22A] ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transaxle. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to AT-396, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-396, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Revision: March 2005 AT-390 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RE5F22A] Service Notice or Precautions ECS009CC A ATF COOLER SERVICE If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bullitens for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement, refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" . B OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS ● ● ● ● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through AT the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem- D ories. Always perform the procedure on AT-422, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. E For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-668, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "HAR- F NESS CONNECTOR" . Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ECS009CD G When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses". ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-391 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RE5F22A] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ECS009CE The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J-34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 (J-34301-1) Oil pressure gauge 2 (J-34301-2) Hoses 3 (J-34298) Adapter 4 (J-34282-2) Adapter 5 (790-301-1230-A) 60° Adapter 6 (J-34301-15) Square socket Measuring line pressure AAT896 KV311J0010 (J-45542) Adapter Measuring line pressure SCIA3019E KV991J0060 (J-45404) Alignment tool Adjusting park/neutral position (PNP) switch SCIA3018E ST33290001 (J-34286) Puller ● Removing oil pump assembly ● Removing thrust roller bearing a: 250 mm (9.84 in) b: 160 mm (6.30in) NT414 ST33400001 (J-26082) Drift Installing differential side oil seals a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 74 mm (1.85 in) dia. NT086 KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) Clutch spring compressor Removing and installing return springs a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) NT423 Revision: March 2005 AT-392 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RE5F22A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST30720000 (J-25405) Drift ● Installing oil seal ● Installing tapered roller bearing A B a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. AT NT115 ST30612000 (J-25742-2) Drift Removing outer race and adjust shim a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia. b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. D E NT073 ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Preload gauge 1 GG91030000 (J-25765-A) Torque wrench 2 HT62940000 ( — ) Socket adapter 3 HT62900000 ( — ) Socket adapter Checking differential side bearing preload F G H NT124 I KV40102500 (J-28815) Drift Checking side differential bearing preload a: 60 mm (2.362 in) dia. b: 45 mm (1.772 in) J K WCIA0381E ST33061000 (J-8107-2) Drift ● Removing tapered roller bearing ● Installing manual valve oil seal L a: 38.0 mm (1.496 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. M NT073 KV38100500 ( — Drift Installing tapered roller bearing a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. b: 60 mm (2.362 in) dia. ) NT115 Revision: March 2005 AT-393 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RE5F22A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV40100621 (J-25273) Drift Installing outer race and adjust shim a: 76 mm (2.992 in) dia. WCIA0382E ST30022000 ( — Drift Installing outer race and adjust shim a: 56 mm (2.205 in) dia. b: 110 mm (4.331 in) dia. c: 15 mm (0.591 in) dia. ) WCIA0383E Revision: March 2005 AT-394 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RE5F22A] Commercial Service Tools ECS009CF A Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts B AT PBIC0190E Puller Removing tapered roller bearing D E NT077 Puller Removing tapered roller bearings a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. F G NT411 H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-395 2005 Altima A/T FLUID [RE5F22A] A/T FLUID Changing A/T Fluid PFP:KLE40 ECS009CG Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Checking A/T Fluid ECS009CH Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Revision: March 2005 AT-396 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Cross-Sectional View PFP:31036 A ECS009CI B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA2575E 1. Converter housing 2. 2nd brake 3. One-way clutch No. 2 4. Control valve assembly 5. Side cover 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. Forward clutch 8. Direct clutch 9. Transaxle case cover 10. B5 brake 11. Transaxle case 12. U/D clutch 13. U/D brake 14. Final gear 15. Differential case 16. Output shaft 17. Counter driven gear 18. Counter drive gear 19. Input shaft 20. Oil pump 21. One-way clutch No. 1 22. 2nd coast brake 23. Torque converter 24. Main rear planetary gear 25. Main front planetary gear 26. U/D rear planetary gear 27. U/D front planetary gear Revision: March 2005 AT-397 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Shift Mechanism ECS009CJ CONSTRUCTION SCIA2576E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-398 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Clutch and brake components Abbr. A Function Forward clutch 1 F/C Connect input shaft 20 to main rear internal gear 10 . Direct clutch 2 D/C Connect input shaft 20 to main sun gear 11 . U/D clutch 3 U/D.C Connect U/D sun gear 15 to U/D front planetary carrier 16 . 2nd coast brake 4 2nd C/B Lock main sun gear 11 . 2nd brake 5 2nd/B Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11 . 1st and reverse brake 6 1st & R/B Lock main front internal gear 13 . U/D brake 7 U/D.B Lock U/D sun gear 15 . B5 brake 8 B5/B Lock U/D rear planetary carrier 18 . One-way clutch No. 1 9 O.C1 Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11 , when 2nd brake 5 operations. One-way clutch No. 2 10 O.C2 Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear 13 . B AT D E CLUTCH AND BAND CHART Clutch Shift position F/C 1 D/C 2 Brake U/D.C 3 2nd C/ B 4 2nd/B 5 1st & R/B 6 F One-way clutch U/D.B 7 B5/B 8 O.C1 9 O.C2 10 Remarks G P PARK POSITION R REVERSE POSITION N NEUTRAL POSITION H I 1st 1⇔2 J 2nd 2⇔3 D Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔ 4⇔5 3rd 3⇔4 K L 4th 4⇔5 M 5th M5 5th Locks in 5th gear* M4 4th Locks in 4th gear* M3 3rd Locks in 3rd gear* M2 2nd Locks in 2nd gear* M1 1st Locks in 1st gear* : Operates : In transition between applied and released. *: Except when automated up/down shift control and up/down shift permission control are activated. Refer to AT-418, "MANUAL MODE" . Revision: March 2005 AT-399 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] POWER TRANSMISSION “N” position Since both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. “P” position ● ● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. The parking pole linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft mechanically. SCIA2577E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-400 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] “D” position 1st gear 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. ● A Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. B Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. AT Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise. One-way clutch No. 2 operates. (Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear.) Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear. D Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. E U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise. F U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.) U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise. G U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one. Final gear clockwise. During deceleration, main front internal gear clockwise due to rotation itself clockwise of main front small H planetary pinion gear, but driving force loses due to free of one-way clutch No. 2. Therefore, engine brake does not operate. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-401 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SCIA2585E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-402 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] “M1” position 1st gear 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. ● A Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. B Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and one. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. AT Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise. 1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.) Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear. D Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. E U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise. F U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.) U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise. G U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one. Final gear clockwise. During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, H engine brake operates. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-403 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SCIA2586E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-404 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] “D”, “M2” positions 2nd gear 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. ● A Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. B Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates. AT One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.) Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. D Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. E U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. F B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.) U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one. G Final gear clockwise. During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-405 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SCIA2587E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-406 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] “D”, “M3” positions 3rd gear A Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. B Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates. AT One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.) Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. D Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. E U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. U/D brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D sun gear.) U/D front planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of U/D front planetary pinion F gear. 15. U/D rear internal gear and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D front planetary carrier and one. 16. Final gear clockwise. G ● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-407 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SCIA2588E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-408 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] “D”, “M4” positions 4th gear 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. ● A Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. B Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates. AT One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.) Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. D Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. E U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.) U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one. F Final gear clockwise. During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-409 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SCIA2592E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-410 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] “D”, “M5” positions 5th gear A Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.) B Main rear planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and main rear planetary unit rotates clockwise as one. Main front large planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself for main rear planetary pinion gear and one, and main front planetary unit rotates clockwise as one. AT 6. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main front planetary unit and one. 7. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. 8. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. D 9. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.) 10. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one. 11. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one. E 12. Final gear clockwise. ● During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. F 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-411 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SCIA2593E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-412 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] “R” position 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. ● A Input shaft rotates clockwise. Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.) Main sun gear rotates clockwise. B Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and one. AT Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. 1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.) Main planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear. D Counter drive gear rotates counterclockwise for main planetary carrier and one. Counter driven gear rotates clockwise. U/D front internal gear rotates clockwise for counter driven gear and one. E U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. U/D sun gear rotates counterclockwise. F U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.) U/D rear internal gear rotates clockwise. G U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates clockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one. Final gear counterclockwise. During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, H engine brake operates. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-413 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SCIA2594E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 12. Main planetary carrier 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl Revision: March 2005 AT-414 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] TCM Function ECS009CK A The function of the TCM is to: ● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. ● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. ● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. B CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always AT controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS (or SIGNAL) PNP switch Throttle angle signal Throttle position signal Engine speed signal Engine torque signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Turbine revolution sensor Vehicle speed signal Manual mode switch signal Stop lamp switch signal Þ TCM ACTUATORS Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Engine brake control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-II communication line CAN communication line On board diagnosis Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Shift solenoid valve C Shift solenoid valve D Shift solenoid valve E Pressure control solenoid valve A Pressure control solenoid valve B Pressure control solenoid valve C A/T CHECK indicator lamp Þ D E F G CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM H I J K L M WCIA0445E Revision: March 2005 AT-415 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Input/Output Signal of TCM Control item Throttle angle signal(*5) Throttle position signal(*5) Revolution sensor Turbine revolution sensor (*1) (*5) Vehicle speed signal MTR ECS009CL Line pressure control Vehicle speed control Shift control Lock-up control Engine brake control Fail-safe function (*3) Self-diagnostics function X X X X X X X X(*2) X(*2) X X(*2) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Engine speed signals(*5) Input X(*4) Engine torque signals(*5) X X X X X PNP switch X X X X X X X(*4) Manual mode switch X X X X X Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X A/T fluid temperature sensor X Operation signal(*5) Overdrive cancel signal(*5) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X(*4) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ASCD TCM power supply voltage signal X Shift solenoid valve A/B/C/D/E Pressure control solenoid valve A Output Pressure control solenoid valve B X X X X X X X X X Pressure control solenoid valve C X X X (*5) X Self-diagnostics table *1: Spare for revolution sensor *2: Spare for throttle angle signal *3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function. *4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error. *5: CAN communications. CAN Communication ECS009CM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 AT-416 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Line Pressure Control ● ● ECS009CN The pressure control solenoid valve A controls linear line pressure by control signal from TCM and line pressure for clutches and brakes to reduce shift shock. This pressure control solenoid valve A controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state. A B AT D E F G SCIA2605E LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM controls the pressure control solenoid valve A current and thus controls the line pressure. Shift Control H I ECS009CO The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained. J K L M SCIA2610E Basically TCM programmed for economy mode, but TCM changes to several shift schedule automatically according to specified condition. Revision: March 2005 AT-417 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SPECIAL SHIFT MODE Upslope Mode When TCM detects upslope from load of engine torque and decrease of acceleration, this mode changes shift points in high-speed side according to the upslope degree and avoids busy shift of A/T. Downslope Mode When TCM detects downslope from increase of acceleration with accelerator full close, this mode operates moderate engine brake by changing shift points in high-speed side. Hot Mode Control This control lowers ATF temperature by changing shift points when the temperature is extremely high. MANUAL MODE Driver oneself can select favorite gear and enjoy sports driving of manual transmission sense by shifting lever from D position to manual mode position and + (up shift) / - (down shift). But lock-up control is operated automatically. Shift control is operated again by shifting from manual gear position to D position. Following control is operated when manual mode. Automated Up Shift Control In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, up shift operate automatically, if it becomes over a constant vehicle speed. Automated Down Shift Control In order to avoid the stall of the engine, down shift operate automatically, if it becomes under a constant vehicle speed. Up Shift Permission Control In order to avoid the stall of the engine, up shift is done only at over a constant vehicle speed. Down Shift Permission Control In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, down shift is done only at under a constant vehicle speed. UP/DOWN SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL This control learns the pressure to each clutch or brake in order to reduce shifting shock at each shifting (Up, Down, Manual down, Coast down). N-D SHIFT CONTROL This control improves the N-D shift quality due to controlling line pressure solenoid valve according to forward clutch piston stroke learned in N-D shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to forward clutch at N-D shift. N-D SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL This control learns the forward clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a forward clutch engaging time and a rotation change rate. N-R SHIFT CONTROL This control improves the N-R shift quality due to controlling shift pressure solenoid valve according to direct clutch piston stroke learned in N-R shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to direct clutch at N-R shift. N-R SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL This control learns the direct clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a direct clutch engaging time and a rotation change rate. TORQUE REDUCTION CONTROL This control improves the shift quality due to sending torque reduction request signal from TCM to ECM and cutting engine torque increase of shift at N-D shift, N-R shift and 1 ⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5. If accelerator pedal is depressed rapidly, this control establishes the upper limit value of engine torque and avoids engine flare at 2 ⇔ 3, 3 ⇔ 4 and 4 Þ 2 of clutch to clutch shift. Revision: March 2005 AT-418 2005 Altima A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Lock-Up Control ECS009CP The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the pressure control solenoid valve C, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases the torque converter clutch piston. Lock-up Operation Condition Table Selector lever D position M5 position M4 position M3 position Gear position 5 4 5 4 3 Lock-up × – × × × Slip lock-up × × – – – TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL Lock-up Control System Diagram A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA2612E Lock-up Released ● K In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the pressure control solenoid valve C and the lock-up apply pressure is drained. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. L Lock-up Applied ● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the pressure control solenoid valve C and lock-up apply pressure is generated. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. Revision: March 2005 AT-419 2005 Altima M A/T CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the pressure control solenoid valve C is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock. Half-Clutched State ● The current output from the TCM to the pressure control solenoid valve C is varied to steadily increase the pressure control solenoid valve C pressure. In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly. Slip Lock-up Control ● In the slip region, the pressure control solenoid valve C current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed. This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low degree of opening. Revision: March 2005 AT-420 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [RE5F22A] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 A ECS009CQ The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" . OBD-II Function for A/T System ECS009CR The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II D E F ECS009CS ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. G TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. I OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) J ECS009CT HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. ( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710 etc. These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-421 2005 Altima K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [RE5F22A] If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. SAT015K If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”. SAT016K Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-674, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority Items 1 Freeze frame data 2 3 Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as described following. ● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. ● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-669, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . ● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) Revision: March 2005 AT-422 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [RE5F22A] ● ● ● ● Freeze frame data 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values A B HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least AT 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “TRANSMISSION”. D Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. Touch “ENGINE”. E Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) F G H I J K L M WCIA0354E HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-463, "Erase self-diagnosis" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-763, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" . Revision: March 2005 AT-423 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [RE5F22A] HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel. 1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. 2. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-463, "Erase self-diagnosis" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) 3. Erase DTC with ECM. Refer to EC-682, "How to Erase DTC" . Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ECS009CU DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” without the engine running. This is a bulb check. ● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-685, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SEF217U Revision: March 2005 AT-424 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DTC Inspection Priority Chart PFP:00004 A ECS009CV If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. B NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-464 . AT Priority Detected items (DTC) 1 U1000 CAN communication line 2 Except above D Fail-Safe ECS009CW The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunction in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit. In fail-safe mode, a driving condition is selected according to the malfunctioning location, and line pressure is set at the maximum. For this reason, the customer will be subjected to uncomfortable “slipping” or “poor acceleration” of the vehicle. In that case, handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-429 ). E FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION G If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible. NOTE: Line pressure is set at the maximum in fail-safe mode. Although gear position differs depending on the type of fail-safe modes, CONSULT-II indicates “5th”. DTC Malfunction items H Fail-safe* I P0500 Vehicle speed signal No learning control. P0613 TCM processor Fail-safe mode 4 P0705 PNP switch Fail-safe mode 4 P0710 ATF temperature sensor circuit Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits lock-up control. P0711 ATF temperature sensor function Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits lock-up control. P0717 Turbine revolution sensor Fail-safe mode 1 P0722 Revolution sensor Uses vehicle speed signal from combination meter as a substitute. Inhibits learning control. P0726 Engine speed signal input circuit performance Fail-safe mode 1 P0731 1st gear function No 1st gear, no control for N-D shift. P0732 2nd gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0733 3rd gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0734 4th gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0735 5th gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0744 Lock-up function Fail-safe mode 1 P0745 Pressure control solenoid valve A Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. Revision: March 2005 F J K L M AT-425 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] DTC Malfunction items Fail-safe* Any one of fail-safe modes P0750 Shift solenoid valve A ● Fail-safe mode 1 ● Fail-safe mode 7. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping. Any one of fail-safe modes P0755 Shift solenoid valve B ● Fail-safe mode 1 ● Fail-safe mode 8 Any one of fail-safe modes P0760 P0762 Shift solenoid valve C ● Fail-safe mode 2 ● Fail-safe mode 5 ● Fail-safe mode 9 Fail-safe mode 2. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON Any one of fail-safe modes P0765 Shift solenoid valve D ● Fail-safe mode 1 ● Fail-safe mode 10. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping. Any one of fail-safe modes P0770 ● Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. ● Fail-safe mode 6. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. Shift solenoid valve E P0775 Pressure control solenoid valve B Fail-safe mode 3 P0780 Shift function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0795 Pressure control solenoid valve C Fail-safe mode 1 P0797 Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON Fail-safe mode 1 P0826 Manual mode switch No manual mode control. P0882 TCM power input signal Fail-safe mode 1 P1726 Electric throttle control ● The accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. ● No lock-up, no learning control. Any one of fail-safe modes U1000 CAN communication circuit ● Fail-safe mode 1 ● Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. ● No learning control. ● No lock-up, no learning control, no special shift mode control. *: For fail-safe modes 1 to 10, refer to AT-426, "Fail-safe mode list" . Fail-safe mode list Fail-safe mode Selector lever position*1 Pressure control solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve Gear A B C D E A B C 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF D position Manual mode: + (up shift) Fail-safe mode 1 Manual mode: - (down shift) R position Revision: March 2005 AT-426 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Fail-safe mode Selector lever Pressure control solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve Gear position*1 A B C D E A B C 3rd OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 4th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 5th OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF (2nd)*3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 4th OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 3rd OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Reverse*2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF D position Fail-safe mode 2 (CONSULT-II displays “8”) Manual mode: + (up shift) Manual mode: - (down shift) R position A B AT D position Manual mode: + (up shift) Fail-safe mode 3 Manual mode: - (down shift) R position D position Manual mode: + (up shift) Fail-safe mode 4 Manual mode: - (down shift) R position D E F D position Manual mode: + (up shift) Fail-safe mode 5 Manual mode: - (down shift) R position G H D position Manual mode: + (up shift) Fail-safe mode 6 Manual mode: - (down shift) R position I D position Manual mode: + (up shift) Fail-safe mode 7 Manual mode: - (down shift) R position 2nd Reverse *2 J K D position Fail-safe mode 8 (CONSULT-II displays “1”) Manual mode: + (up shift) Manual mode: - (down shift) R position D position Fail-safe mode 9 (CONSULT-II displays “8”) Manual mode: + (up shift) Manual mode: - (down shift) R position D position Fail-safe mode 10 (CONSULT-II displays “6”) Manual mode: + (up shift) Manual mode: - (down shift) R position *1: CONSULT-II indicates “5th”. *2: Reverse gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 3.342) *3: 3rd gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 2.301) Revision: March 2005 AT-427 2005 Altima L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ECS009CX INTRODUCTION The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed signal, throttle position sensor (accelerator pedal position sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc. SAT631IB It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the AT-429, "WORK FLOW" . SAT632I Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such errors, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on the example (Refer to AT-430 ) should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins. SEF234G Revision: March 2005 AT-428 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] WORK FLOW A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-430 ) and “Diagnostic Worksheet” (Refer to AT-430 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible. A B Work Flow Chart AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA0501E *1. AT-430 *2. AT-430 *3. AT-425 *4. AT-435 *5. AT-435, AT-437 *6. AT-438 *7. AT-455 *8. AT-421 *9. AT-424 *10. AT-464 *11. AT-590 *12. AT-591 *13. AT-610 *14. AT-445 *15. AT-422 *16. AT-464 *17. AT-590 *18. EC-669 Revision: March 2005 AT-429 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information From Customer KEY POINTS ● WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model ● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies ● WHERE..... Road conditions ● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN Trans. Model Engine Mileage Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. ❏ No up-shift ❏ Intermittent (times a day) (❏ Any position (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ No down-shift ❏ 2nd → 3rd (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ Particular position) ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th) ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st) ❏ Lock-up malfunction ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position) ❏ Noise or vibration ❏ No kick down ❏ No pattern select ❏ Others ( ) Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit A/T Check indicator lamp ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit Diagnostic Worksheet Chart 1 ❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-425 ❏ A/T fluid inspection 2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) ❏ State ❏ Amount AT-435 ❏ Stall test, time lag test and line pressure test ❏ Stall test ❏ Engine ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Direct clutch ❏ 1st and reverse brake 3 ❏ B5 brake ❏ One-way clutch No. 2 ❏ Oil pump ❏ Oil strainer ❏ Oil leak for each range circuit AT-435, AT437 ❏ Time lag test ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Direct clutch ❏ 1st and reverse brake ❏ One-way clutch No. 2 ❏ Oil pump ❏ Oil strainer ❏ Oil leak for “D” position circuit ❏ Oil leak for “R” position circuit ❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part: Revision: March 2005 AT-430 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] ❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-438 A Check before engine is started ❏ The A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-591 . ❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-439 B ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-467 . ❏ TCM processor. AT-469 . ❏ PNP switch. AT-471 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-476 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-481 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-486 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-490 . ❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-494 . ❏ 1st gear function. AT-496 . ❏ 2nd gear function. AT-499 . ❏ 3rd gear function. AT-505 . ❏ 4th gear function. AT-511 . ❏ 5th gear function. AT-516 . ❏ Lock-up function. AT-522 . ❏ Shift function. AT-565 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-525 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-560 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-569 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-530 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-535 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-540 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-550 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-555 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-574 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-545 . ❏ Manual mode switch circuit. AT-579 . ❏ TCM power input signal. AT-585 . ❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-590 . ❏ CAN communication. AT-464 . ❏ Battery ❏ Other 4-1. 4 AT D E F G H I J Idle inspection 4-2. ❏ Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position. AT-593 . ❏ In “ P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed. AT-593 . ❏ In “N” Position Vehicle Moves. AT-594 . ❏ Large Shock “N” to “D” Position. AT-595 . ❏ Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. AT-596 . ❏ Vehicle does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position. AT-597 . K AT-439 L Driving tests M Part 1 4-3. ❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-598 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-598 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-599 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-600 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5. AT-601 . ❏ A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up. AT-602 ❏ A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition. AT-603 . ❏ Lock-up Is Not Released. AT-604 . Revision: March 2005 AT-431 AT-441 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Part 2 ❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-598 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-598 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-599 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-600 . AT-442 Part 3 ❏ Cannot Be Changed To Manual Mode. AT-605 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear. AT-606 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear. AT-607 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear. AT-607 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear. AT-608 . ❏ Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. AT-609 . ❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items. AT-443 ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-467 . ❏ TCM processor. AT-469 . ❏ PNP switch. AT-471 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-476 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-481 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-486 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-490 . ❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-494 . ❏ 1st gear function. AT-496 . ❏ 2nd gear function. AT-499 . ❏ 3rd gear function. AT-505 . ❏ 4th gear function. AT-511 . ❏ 5th gear function. AT-516 . ❏ Lock-up function. AT-522 . ❏ Shift function. AT-565 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-525 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-560 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-569 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-530 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-535 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-540 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-550 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-555 . ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-574 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-545 . ❏ Manual mode switch circuit. AT-579 . ❏ TCM power input signal. AT-585 . ❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-590 . ❏ CAN communication. AT-464 . ❏ Battery ❏ Other 4 4-3 5 ❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction parts. 6 ❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-438 7 ❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts. See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection procedures.) AT-445 8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM. AT-463 Revision: March 2005 AT-432 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] A/T Electrical Parts Location ECS009CY A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0350E Revision: March 2005 AT-433 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Circuit Diagram ECS009CZ WCWA0223E Revision: March 2005 AT-434 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis ECS009D0 A A/T FLUID CHECK Fluid leakage and fluid level check Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" . ● B Fluid condition check Inspect the fluid condition. Fluid status Conceivable Cause AT Required Operation Varnished (viscous varnish state) Clutch, brake scorched Replace the A/T fluid and check the A/T main unit and the vehicle for malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler pipes, etc.) Milky white or cloudy Water in the fluid Replace the A/T fluid and check for places where water is getting in. Large amount of metal powder mixed in Unusual wear of sliding parts within A/T Replace the A/T fluid and check for improper operation of the A/T. D E SAT638A F STALL TEST Stall test procedure 1. 2. 3. G Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/ T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off. H I J SAT647B 4. K Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. L M SAT513G 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the accelerator pedal. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. Cool down the A/T fluid. Revision: March 2005 AT-435 SAT514G 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] CAUTION: Run the engine at idle for at least one minute. 10. Repeat step 5 through 9 with selector lever in “manual mode” and “R” positions. Stall speed: 2,430 - 2,730 rpm Judgement stall test Selector lever position D, M H O O H Stall rotation L H Possible cause R L H ● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) ● Forward clutch (slipping) ● One-way clutch No. 2 ● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) ● Direct clutch (slipping) ● 1st and reverse brake (slipping) ● Engine or torque converter one-way clutch ● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) ● B5 brake (slipping) ● Oil pump ● Oil strainer (clogging) ● Oil leak for each range circuit O: Stall speed within standard value position H: Stall speed higher than standard value L: Stall speed lower than standard value TIME LAG TEST Time lag test procedure 1. 2. 3. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/ T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Check the amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off. SAT647B 4. 5. 6. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. Engine start, apply foot brake. Measure time lag by using stopwatch from moment when shift lever is shifted in “N” to “D” position and “N” to “R” position until moment slightly shock can be felt. CAUTION: ● Make sure to take 3 measurement and take the average value. ● Make sure to keep interval for more than one minute between time lag tests. (That purpose is to remove clutch/brake pressure was left unfinished.) Revision: March 2005 AT-436 SAT513G 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Time lag: “N” to “D” position: “N” to “R” position: A Less than 0.7 sec. Less than 1.2 sec. B Judgement time lag test Result of time lag test Longer than standards “N” to “D” position Longer than standards “N” to “R” position Possible cause ● Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) ● Forward clutch (slipping) ● One-way clutch No. 2 ● Oil leak for “D” range circuit ● Line pressure is low ● Direct clutch (slipping) ● 1st and reverse brake (slipping) ● Oil leak for “R” range circuit ● Oil pump ● Oil strainer (clogging) AT D E F LINE PRESSURE TEST Line pressure test port G Location of line pressure test port is show in the figure. H I J SCIA2669E Line pressure test procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary. NOTE: The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off. After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug and install the oil pressure gauge [SST: (J34301-C)] and adapter [SST: (J45542)]. CAUTION: Make sure to check no oil leak after installing oil pressure gage. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. SAT513G Revision: March 2005 AT-437 2005 Altima L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] 6. 7. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and the stall speed. CAUTION: ● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during measurement. ● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer to AT-435, "STALL TEST" . After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure detection plug and tighten to the specified torque. :5.9 - 8.8 N·m (0.61 - 0.89 kg-m, 53 - 77 in-lb) SAT493G CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. Line pressure Line pressure Engine speed kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D, M positions R position At idle speed 333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57) 500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88) At stall speed 1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202) 1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287) Judgement of line pressure test Judgement Higher than standards both “D”, “M” and “R” positions Lower than standards both “D”, “M” and “R” positions Lower than standards only “D” position Lower than standards only “R” position Possible cause ● Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction ● Primary regulator valve malfunction ● Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction ● Primary regulator valve malfunction ● Oil pump malfunction ● B5 bake malfunction ● Oil leak for each range circuit malfunction ● Oil leak for “D” range circuit malfunction ● Forward clutch malfunction ● Oil leak for “R” range circuit malfunction ● Direct clutch malfunction ● 1st and reverse brake malfunction ROAD TEST Description ● ● 1. 2. 3. The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes. The road test is perform in the following three stages. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-439 . Check at idle. Refer to AT-439 . Cruise test ● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-441 , AT-442 , AT-443 . SAT786A Revision: March 2005 AT-438 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] ● ● Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items. Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are complete. A B AT SAT496G D Check Before Engine is Started ECS009D1 1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds? Yes >> 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Perform the self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics worksheet. Refer to AT456 , AT-461 . 3. Go to AT-439, "Check at Idle" . No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-591, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" . Check at Idle ECS009D2 1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 4. Turn ignition switch “START”. Does the engine start? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-593, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . E F G H I J K L 2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Turn ignition switch “ACC”. 2. Move selector lever in “D” or “R” position. 3. Turn ignition switch “START”. Does the engine start in either position? Yes >> Stop the road test and go to AT-593, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . No >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 AT-439 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Move selector lever to “P” position. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Disengage the parking brake. 4. Push the vehicle forward or backward. 5. Engage the parking brake. When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move? Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves when pushed in “P” position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Start the engine. 2. Move selector lever to “N” position. 3. Disengage the parking brake. Does vehicle move forward or backward? Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves in “N” position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “D” position. When the transaxle is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock? Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Large shock when shifted from N to D” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds. Does the vehicle creep backward? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in R position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS Inspect whether the vehicle moves forward when the transaxle is put into the “D” position. Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” positions? Yes >> Go to AT-441, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-442, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-443, "Cruise Test Part 3" . No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not move forward in D positions” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision: March 2005 AT-440 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Cruise Test - Part 1 ECS009D3 1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid. Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Move selector lever to “P” position. Start the engine. Move selector lever to “D” position. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle. B AT With CONSULT-II Read off the gear positions. Starts from D1? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-444 . D E F G With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. H 3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 J Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-444 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-444 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision: March 2005 AT-441 2005 Altima I K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] 5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-444 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 6. CHECK LOCK-UP When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U. ● Refer to AT-444 . With CONSULT-II Read the lock-up status. Does it lock-up? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD Does it maintain lock-up status? Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T hold does not lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate. With CONSULT-II Read the lock-up status. Does lock-up cancel? Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-442 ). No >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-442 ). Cruise Test - Part 2 ECS009D4 1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1 1. 2. Move selector lever the “D” position. Accelerate at half throttle. With CONSULT-II Read the gear position. Does it start from D1? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision: March 2005 AT-442 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 A Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the correct speed. ● Refer to AT-444 . B With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed. AT Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then conD tinue the road test. 3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the correct speed. ● Refer to AT-444 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. E F G H 4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE When the transaxle changes speed D2 → D3, return the accelerator pedal. Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake? Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-443 ). No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Cruise Test - Part 3 I J K ECS009D5 1. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION L Move to manual mode from D position. Does it switch to manual mode? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Continue road test and add check mark to “Cannot be changed to manual mode” on diagnostics worksheet. 2. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed? With CONSULT-II Read the gear position. Is downshifting correctly performed? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd, 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision: March 2005 AT-443 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position? Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Perform the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" , AT-461, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" . No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue trouble diagnosis. Shift Schedule ECS009D6 VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 100 % 67 (42) 105 (65) 170 (106) 241 (150) 230 (143) 160 (99) 92 (57) 45 (28) 90 % 67 (42) 105 (65) 170 (106) 241 (150) 230 (143) 160 (99) 92 (57) 45 (28) 80 % 65 (40) 100 (62) 152 (94) 227 (141) 178 (111) 142 (88) 86 (53) 45 (28) 70 % 53 (33) 80 (50) 125 (78) 185 (115) 147 (91) 137 (85) 68 (42) 38 (24) 60 % 46 (29) 71 (44) 106 (66) 156 (97) 108 (67) 78 (48) 46 (29) 22 (14) 50 % 43 (27) 67 (42) 97 (60) 145 (90) 98 (61) 68 (42) 40 (25) 18 (11) 40 % 38 (24) 60 (37) 89 (55) 130 (81) 89 (55) 56 (35) 30 (19) 13 (8) 30 % 33 (21) 50 (31) 70 (43) 108 (67) 68 (42) 45 (28) 25 (16) 12 (7) 20 % 23 (14) 35 (22) 49 (30) 77 (48) 49 (30) 32 (20) 22 (14) 8 (5) 10 % 17 (11) 29 (18) 39 (24) 58 (36) 44 (27) 32 (20) 22 (14) 8 (5) VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 50 % 190 (118) 137 (85) 15% 101 (63) 72 (45) 0-8% 73 (45) 70 (43) ● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. ● Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine. ● Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP Accelerator angle 0 - 10 % Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Gear position Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 45 (28) 42 (26) 5th 58 (36) 55 (34) ● Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. ● Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine. Revision: March 2005 AT-444 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] ● Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. A Symptom Chart ECS009D7 Numbers are arranged in order of inspection. Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble any RE5F22A model transaxle parts unless specified to do so in AT section. Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment ON vehicle With selector lever in D position, driving is not possible. OFF vehicle ON vehicle With selector lever in R position, driving is not possible. OFF vehicle No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 AT-435 4. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 5. Control valve assembly AT-622 6. Torque converter AT-624 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 8. B5 brake AT-660 9. One-way clutch No.2 AT-633 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 AT-621, AT619 3. TCM AT-452 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 6. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 7. Control valve assembly AT-622 8. Torque converter AT-633 9. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 10. 1st and reverse brake AT-633 11. B5 brake AT-660 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 AT-621, AT619 3. TCM AT-452 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 6. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 8. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-569 9. Control valve assembly AT-622 10. Accumulator AT-633 AT-445 D AT-621, AT619 AT-452 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment AT Reference page 3. TCM 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment B 2005 Altima E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Symptom Condition ON vehicle Time lag is large. (“N” →“ D” position) OFF vehicle ON vehicle Time lag is large. (“N” →“ R” position) OFF vehicle Engine does not start in “N”, “P” position. Engine starts in positions other than “N” or “P”. Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N” → “D”, “R”. Engine stall when vehicle slow down. Acceleration is extremely poor. Revision: March 2005 ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-494 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-486 4. TCM AT-452 5. Control valve assembly AT-622 6. Accumulator AT-633 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-494 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-486 4. TCM AT-452 5. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 6. Control valve assembly AT-622 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 8. 1st and reverse brake AT-633 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-4, SC-9 2. Control cable adjustment AT-621 3. PNP switch AT-471 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-4, SC-9 2. Control cable adjustment AT-621 3. PNP switch AT-471 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 4. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-569 5. Control valve assembly AT-622 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 4. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 5. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-569 6. Control valve assembly AT-622 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment AT-621, AT619 3. Engine speed signal AT-494 4. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 AT-446 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Symptom Condition ON vehicle Gear does not change from D1 → D2 or from M1 → M2 . Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 6. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 7. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 8. Control valve assembly AT-622 9. 2nd coast brake OFF vehicle Gear does not change from D2 → D3 or from M2 → M3 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Gear does not change from D3 → D4 or from M3 → M4 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Gear does not change from D4 → D5 or from M4 → M5 . OFF vehicle AT-652, AT658 10. 2nd brake AT-652 11. One-way clutch No.1 AT-658 12. One-way clutch No.2 AT-633 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 8. Control valve assembly AT-622 9. U/D brake AT-633 10. B5 brake AT-660 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 7. Control valve assembly AT-622 8. U/D clutch AT-633 9. U/D brake AT-633 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 6. Control valve assembly AT-622 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 8. 2nd coast brake 9. One-way clutch No.1 Revision: March 2005 Reference page AT-447 AT-652, AT658 AT-658 2005 Altima A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Symptom Condition ON vehicle In D or M range, does not downshift to 1st gear. Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 6. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 7. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 8. Control valve assembly AT-622 9. 2nd coast brake OFF vehicle ON vehicle In D or M range, does not downshift to 2nd gear. OFF vehicle ON vehicle In D or M range, does not downshift to 3rd gear. OFF vehicle ON vehicle In D or M range, does not downshift to 4th gear. OFF vehicle AT-652, AT658 10. 2nd brake AT-652 11. One-way clutch No.1 AT-658 12. One-way clutch No.2 AT-633 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 8. Control valve assembly AT-622 9. U/D brake AT-633 10. B5 brake AT-660 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 7. Control valve assembly AT-622 8. U/D clutch AT-633 9. U/D brake AT-633 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 6. Control valve assembly AT-622 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 8. 2nd coast brake 9. One-way clutch No.1 Revision: March 2005 Reference page AT-448 AT-652, AT658 AT-658 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Symptom Does not lock-up or lock-up is not released. Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Engine brake does not work. Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Stop lamp switch signal AT-610 3. ATF temperature sensor AT-476 4. TCM AT-452 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 7. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-569 8. Control valve assembly AT-622 9. Torque converter AT-624 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. TCM AT-452 3. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 4. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 5. Control valve assembly AT-622 6. 2nd coast brake OFF vehicle Shift point is high or low. ON vehicle ON vehicle Large shock. (“N” →“ D” position) OFF vehicle Revision: March 2005 Reference page AT-652, AT658 7. U/D brake AT-633 8. B5 brake AT-660 1. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 2. Engine speed signal AT-494 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-590 4. Revolution sensor AT-490 5. TCM AT-452 6. Control valve assembly AT-622 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-494 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-486 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-476 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 8. TCM AT-452 9. Control valve assembly AT-622 10. Accumulator AT-633 11. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 AT-449 2005 Altima A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Symptom Condition ON vehicle Large shock. (“N” →“ R” position) OFF vehicle Shock is too large when shift up. Shock is too large for coast down. Revision: March 2005 ON vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-494 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-486 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-476 5. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 6. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-560 7. TCM AT-452 8. Control valve assembly AT-622 9. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-633 10. 1st and reverse brake AT-633 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-494 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-486 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-476 5. TCM power input signal AT-585 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-560 13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-569 14. TCM AT-452 15. Control valve assembly AT-622 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-494 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-486 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-476 5. TCM power input signal AT-585 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-560 13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-569 14. TCM AT-452 15. Control valve assembly AT-622 AT-450 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Symptom Shock is too large for kick down. Condition ON vehicle ON vehicle Strange noise in “R”,“N” or“ D” position. OFF vehicle With selector lever in P position, vehicle does not enter parking condition or, with selector lever in another position, parking condition is not cancelled. Vehicle runs with transaxle in “ P” position. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-494 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-486 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-476 5. TCM power input signal AT-585 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-530 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-535 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-540 9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-550 10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-555 11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-525 12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-560 13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-569 14. TCM AT-452 15. Control valve assembly AT-622 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. Control valve assembly AT-622 3. Torque converter AT-633 4. Parking component AT-626 5. Gear system AT-633 1. PNP switch AT-471 2. Control cable adjustment AT-621 3. Control valve assembly AT-622 4. Parking component AT-626 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. PNP switch AT-471 ON vehicle 3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment Vehicle runs with transaxle in “N” position. ON vehicle AT-621, AT619 4. Line pressure test AT-437 1. Fluid level and state AT-435 2. PNP switch AT-471 3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment 4. Line pressure test Revision: March 2005 Reference page AT-451 AT-621, AT619 AT-437 2005 Altima A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ECS009D8 TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT WCIA0447E Revision: March 2005 AT-452 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] TCM INSPECTION TABLE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color A Data (Approx.) B When turning ignition switch ON. 1 L/B 0 - 1.5V A/T PV IGN relay AT When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V 3 L CAN-H – – 4 P CAN-L – – 5 L/Y 6 L/R 14 B 16 SB 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 P/B G/B L G OR/B G/R PU/W 27 Y/R 28 W Manual mode switch UP (+) Selector lever: + side 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Manual mode switch DOWN (-) Selector lever: - side 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Ground Manual mode switch AUTO Manual mode switch MANUAL Pressure control solenoid valve B ground Always Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position 0V Selector lever: Manual shift gate position Battery voltage Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral) 0V Other than the above Battery voltage When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V Selector lever: “P” and “R” position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V Power supply (Memory back-up) Revision: March 2005 G H J K Always When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. AT-453 L M PNP switch A Pressure control solenoid valve C ground F I Turbine revolution sensor power supply Shift solenoid valve D E 0V Revolution sensor power supply Shift solenoid valve B D Battery voltage 0V 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Terminal Wire color Item 29 B/W Revolution sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 119Hz 30 R Turbine revolution sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 371Hz Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and manual mode position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: “D” and manual mode position 0V 31 32 33 34 BR P/B R/B Y PNP switch B PNP switch C PNP switch PN Condition Data (Approx.) Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: “P” and “N” position Battery voltage Other than the above 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V Power supply 35 L/Y Pressure control solenoid valve A When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz 36 OR/B Pressure control solenoid valve B When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 37 38 39 40 41 42 R/B R/Y R/Y L/G R/Y LG Shift solenoid valve C Power supply (A/T PV IGN relay) Power supply (A/T PV IGN relay) Pressure control solenoid valve A ground Fluid temperature sensor When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 0.54 kΩ When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F) 0.5V 0.31 kΩ Fluid temperature sensor ground Revision: March 2005 Always AT-454 0V 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Terminal Wire color 43 PU/W 45 46 47 48 OR W/G BR/Y B Item Data (Approx.) Condition A Selector lever: “P” and “N” position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V PNP switch PA Pressure control solenoid valve C Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve E Ground Always B AT D E 0V CONSULT-II Function (TCM) ECS009D9 F CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. TCM diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is displayed. Displays TCM input/output data in real time. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. ECU PART NUMBER H Displays TCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR FUNCTION TEST I Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". J TCM part number can be read. After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-456 ), place check marks for results on the AT-430, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items. NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: – Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, – Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and – Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). 4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit. CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Revision: March 2005 G AT-455 2005 Altima K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] ● 1. 2. 3. For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located in driver instrument panel (lower). Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) LCIA0042E 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. 6. Touch “TRANSMISSION”. If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. BCIA0030E WORK SUPPORT MODE Work item Work item INITIALIZATION Condition Under the following conditions. ● Ignition switch “ON”. ● Selector lever “P” or “N” position. ● Engine not running. ● Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH). ● Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V. ● Malfunction was not detected. Usage Use to initialize TCM in a case of replacing transaxle or TCM. Refer to AT-388, "Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement" . SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE Operation procedure 1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Revision: March 2005 AT-456 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] 2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. NOTE: ● The details for “TIME” are as follow: – “CRNT”: Error currently detected with TCM. – “PAST”: Error detected in the past and memorized with TCM. ● Touch “F.F.DATA” on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen to display freeze frame data. Freeze frame data shows driving condition when malfunction is detected. For freeze frame data items, refer to AT-459, "Display item list" . A B AT SCIA2741E D Display item list X: Applicable TCM self-diagnosis —: Not applicable E OBD-II (DTC) MIL indicator Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... A/T CHECK indicator lamp*3 CAN COMM CIRCUIT “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-II *4 lamp*1 , “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications X VEH SPD SE/CIRMTR ● ECM detects a malfunction in vehicle speed sensor signal, after that TCM inputs the result by CAN communication. X P0500 P0500 TCM PROCESSOR ● TCM processor is malfunctioning. — P0613 — PNP SW/CIRC ● PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern X P0705 P0705 ● ATF TEMP SEN/ CIRC Normal voltage is not applied to ATF temperature sensor due to open, short, and so on. During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low. X P0710 P0710 ● FLUID TEMP SEN ● ATF temperature signal does not change. — P0711 P0711*2 ● Signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. X P0717 P0717 X P0722 P0722 TURBINE SENSOR VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T ENG SPD INP PERFOR ● Unexpected signal input during running. ● Signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. I K L Unexpected signal input during running. ● Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal or torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication. X P0726 P0726 M A/T 1ST GR FNCTN ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0731 P0731*2 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0732 P0732*2 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0733 P0733*2 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0734 P0734*2 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN ● A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0735 P0735*2 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN ● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. X P0744 P0744*2 AT-457 H J ● Revision: March 2005 G U1000*4 ● U1000 F 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC) MIL indicator Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) PC SOL A(L/ PRESS) Malfunction is detected when... ● Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. SHIFT SOL A SHIFT SOL B SHIFT SOL C SFT SOL C STUCK ON SHIFT SOL D ● TCM POWER INPT SIG ELEC TH CONTROL NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. X P0745 P0745 X P0750 P0750 X P0755 P0755 X P0760 P0760 X P0762 P0762*2 X P0765 P0765 X P0770 P0770 ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. X P0775 P0775 ● No rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor) and shifting time is long. X P0780 P0780*2 ● Shifting ends immediately. ● Condition in malfunction engine revs up usually shifting. ● Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. X P0795 P0795 ● ● Condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular. X P0797 P0797*2 ● Manual mode switch signal is incorrectly input due to open, short, and so on. — P0826 — ● Voltage supplied to TCM is too low. — P0882 P0882 ● The electric throttle control system for ECM is in a malfunction, after that TCM inputs the result by CAN commnication. X P1726 P1726 No NG item has been detected. — X X PC SOL C STC ON MANUAL MODE SWITCH lamp*1 , “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. SHIFT PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) lamp*3 “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-II ● SHIFT SOL E PC SOL B(SFT/ PRS) Condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular. A/T CHECK indicator ● *1: Refer to AT-424, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . *2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. *3: Indicate it when performing TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS). Refer to AT-461, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . *4: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-464 . DATA MONITOR MODE Operation procedure 1. 2. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Touch “DATA MONITOR”. NOTE: When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. Revision: March 2005 AT-458 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Display item list X: Standard —: Not applicable A Monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h) X X X VHCL/S SE-MTR* (km/h) X — X Monitored item (Unit) FLUID TEMP SE* (V) X — X FLUID TEMP* (°C) — — X COOLAN TEMP* (°C) — — X BATTERY VOLT* (V) X — X Remarks B Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM. D Displays status of engine coolant temperature. Signal input with CAN communication line. ENGINE SPEED* (rpm) X X X TURBINE REV* (rpm) X — X Turbine revolution computed from signal of turbine revolution sensor is displayed. OUTPUT REV* (rpm) — — X Output revolution computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed. PNP SW A* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW B* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW C* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW PA* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW PN (ON/OFF) X — X MANU MODE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X NON M-MODE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X UP SW* (ON/OFF) X — X G H I J K DOWN SW* (ON/OFF) X — X RANGE SLCT SW (ON/OFF) X — X Not mounted but displayed. BRAKE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X This means stop lamp switch signal via CAN communication line. CLSO THL POS (ON/OFF) X — X ASCD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X ASCD OD OFF (ON/OFF) X — X ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X TCS GEAR HOLD (ON/OFF) X — X TCS SFT CNG (ON/OFF) — — X Requests TCM for shift schedule change. LOCK-UP* (ON/OFF) — — X Always “ON” during lock-up, regardless of types. SLCT LVR POSI* — — X Displays “##” in manual mode or when unknown. MANU GR POSI — — X Displays “##” in non-manual mode or when unknown. AT-459 E F Signal input with CAN communication line. Revision: March 2005 AT L Signal input with CAN communication line. 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Monitor item selection Monitored item (Unit) ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks GEAR* — — X Indicates current gear position. Also when setting in P or N position, indicate by shift solenoid valves. Displays “##” in R position or when unknown. NEXT GR POSI — — X Displays “##” in R position or when unknown. REDCT DEM SIG (ON/OFF) — — X Displays status of engine torque reduction demand signal. TC SLIP RATIO — — X SLIP REV (rpm) — — X Difference between engine speed and torque converter input shaft speed. Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by the TCM. For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed. ACCELE ANGLE* (%) X X X PC SOL A OUT* (A) — — X PC SOL A MON* (A) — X X PC SOL B OUT* (A) — — X PC SOL B MON* (A) — X X PC SOL C OUT* (A) — — X PC SOL C MON* (A) — X X SFT SOL A OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL B OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL C OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL D OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL E OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL A MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL B MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL C MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL D MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL E MON* (ON/OFF) — X X ENGINE TORQUE* (Nm) — — X Signal input with CAN communication line. TRQ REDCT REQ* (Nm) — — X Torque reduction request TRQ LIMIT REQ* (Nm) — — X Torque limitation request WO AT REQ TRQ* (Nm) — — X Engine torque without A/T request G-RATE (G) — — X F-SAFE MODE (OK/1 to 10) — X X Numbers indicate types of fail-safe modes. Refer to AT-426, "Fail-safe mode list" . VDC SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X Signal input with CAN communication line. Revision: March 2005 AT-460 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS Monitored item (Unit) SHIFT SCHDULE MAIN SIGNALS — A SELECTION FROM MENU — X Voltage (V) — — X Frequency (Hz) — — X DUTY-HI (high) (%) — — X DUTY-LOW (low) (%) — — X PLS WIDTH-HI (ms) — — X PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms) — — X Remarks B The details for data of shift schedule are as follow: NOR: Normal mode UP1: Upslope 1 mode UP2: Upslope 2 mode (steeper than “UP1”) DOWN: Downslope mode HOT1: Hot 1 mode HOT2: Hot 2 mode (higher temperature than “HOT1”) AT D E Displays the value measured by the voltage probe. F The value measured by the pulse probe is displayed. G *: Also, the items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode of self-diagnostic results only if DTC is detected. For details, refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" . ACTIVE TEST MODE Test item H I Test item Condition Description SHIFT SOLENOID A SHIFT SOLENOID B Under the following conditions. SHIFT SOLENOID C ● Ignition switch “ON” ● Selector lever “P” or “N” position ● Engine not running ● Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH). PRESSURE CONTROL SOL A ● Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V. PRESSURE CONTROL SOL B ● Malfunction was not detected.* SHIFT SOLENOID D SHIFT SOLENOID E J Each shift solenoid operate ON/OFF by receiving the drive signal. K Each pressure control solenoid is activated by receiving the drive signal. L PRESSURE CONTROL SOL C *: Except when P0711, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P0735, P0744, P0762, P0780 or P0797 is detected. M NOTE: Approximately 10 seconds after the operation is begun, “TEST IS STOPPED” will be displayed. Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ECS009DA OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST) Refer to EC-763, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" . OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Refer to EC-685, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Description As a method for locating the suspect system, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction location is output and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC. Revision: March 2005 AT-461 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Diagnostic procedure 1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP 1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position. 3. Wait 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 5. Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO AT-591, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" . 2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE NOTE: After turning ignition switch “ON” (at step 6), perform within 2 seconds (while A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on.). 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Push shift lock release button. 3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position. 4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.) 5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.) 6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 7. Move the selector lever to the “N” position and release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.) 8. Move the selector lever to “D” position and depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.) 9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.) 10. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it. >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to AT-463, "Judgement self-diagnosis code" . If the system does not go into self-diagnostics, refer to AT-610, "TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate" . >> DIAGNOSIS END Revision: March 2005 AT-462 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [RE5F22A] Judgement self-diagnosis code When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by longer illumination of the indicator lamp. A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA2758E K Erase self-diagnosis ● ● In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after executing self-diagnostics or by erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II. L M Revision: March 2005 AT-463 2005 Altima DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE5F22A] DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 ECS009DB CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009DC This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units. Possible Cause ECS009DD Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009DE NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 6 seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-466, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-464 2005 Altima DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ECS009DF A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0187E Revision: March 2005 AT-465 2005 Altima DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Wire Item Terminal color Condition Data (Approx.) 3 L CAN H – – 4 P CAN L – – Diagnostic Procedure ECS009DG 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine. 2. Select “A/T” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CONSULT-II. 3. The “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is detected. Yes or No? Yes >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . No >> INSPECTION END SCIA2818E Revision: March 2005 AT-466 2005 Altima DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE5F22A] DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR Description PFP:24814 A ECS009DH The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009DI This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR” with CONSULT-II or 15th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● B AT D ECS009DJ E Harness or connectors (The signal circuit is open or shorted.) Combination meter ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor F DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009DK CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL/S SE-A/T: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more ACCELE ANGLE: 10 % or less If DTC is detected, go to AT-468, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L BCIA0030E M Revision: March 2005 AT-467 2005 Altima DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR [RE5F22A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS009DL 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle, and then make sure that the values of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” and “VHCL/S SE-MTR” are same. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 1. 2. 3. SCIA2922E 2. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 3. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-467, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-468 2005 Altima DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR [RE5F22A] DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR Description PFP:31036 A ECS009DM The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. B AT D SCIA2820E E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009DN This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TCM PROCESSOR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM processor is malfunctioning. Possible Cause F ECS009DO G TCM DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009DP NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-470, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-469 2005 Altima M DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR [RE5F22A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS009DQ 1. CHECK DTC With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-469, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . Is the “TCM PROCESSOR” displayed again? YES >> Replace TCM. NO >> Inspection End. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 AT-470 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE5F22A] DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Description ● ● ● PFP:32006 A ECS009DR The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. TCM judges the selector lever position by the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. Selector lever PNP switch A PNP switch B PNP switch C PNP switch PA PNP switch PN P ON OFF OFF ON ON R ON ON OFF OFF OFF N OFF ON OFF ON ON D OFF ON ON OFF OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ● D E This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected when PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern. F ECS009DT Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.] Park/neutral position (PNP) switch DTC Confirmation Procedure G ECS009DU NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. AT ECS009DS Possible Cause ● B H I J Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Move selector lever to each position. SLCT LVR POSI: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position Wait for at least 5 consecutive seconds at each position. If DTC is detected, go to AT-473, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-471 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ECS009DV WCWA0188E Revision: March 2005 AT-472 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 24 31 32 33 43 OR/B PNP switch A BR PNP switch B P/B PNP switch C R/B PNP switch PN PU/W PNP switch PA Data (Approx.) Selector lever: “P” and “R” position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and manual mode position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: “D” and manual mode position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: “P” and “N” position Battery voltage Other than the above 0V Selector lever: “P” and “N” position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Diagnostic Procedure Selector lever “PNP SW A” “PNP SW B” “PNP SW C” “PNP SW PA” “PNP SW PN” P ON OFF OFF ON ON R ON ON OFF OFF OFF N OFF ON OFF ON ON D OFF ON ON OFF OFF E H I Connector No. J K Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Move selector lever to “P“, “R”, “N”, or “D” position and check voltage between the TCM connector terminals and ground. L F57 M Terminal (Wire color) 24 (OR/B) Ground 31 (BR) Ground 32 (P/B) Ground 33 (R/B) Ground 43 (PU/W) - Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage SCIA2826E R 0V 0V Battery voltage N Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V D Battery voltage 0V 0V 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 D G SCIA2823E P AT F With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Move selector lever to “P”, “N”, “R” and “D” position and check the value of “PNP SW A”, “PNP SW B”, “PNP SW C”, “PNP SW PA” and “PNP SW PN”. Selector lever B ECS009DW 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A AT-473 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the PNP switch connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminals 2, 5 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage 2 (GY) - Ground F29 Battery voltage 5 (G) - Ground 5. 6. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminals 2, 5 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage 2 (GY) - Ground F29 SCIA2869E 0V 5 (G) - Ground 7. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PNP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector and PNP switch connector. Check continuity between TCM connector terminals 24, 31, 32, 43 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) 24 (OR/B) Ground 31 (BR) - Ground F57 32 (P/B) - Ground 43 (PU/W) Ground Condition Continuity Selector lever: “P” and “R” position Yes Other than the above No Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and manual mode position Yes Other than the above No Selector lever: “D” and manual mode position Yes Other than the above No Selector lever: “P” and “N” position Yes Other than the above No SCIA2827E 4. If OK, check the following. – Harness for short-circuit to ground or power source. – Open or short-circuit in the harness between combination meter and TCM. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 AT-474 2005 Altima DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH [RE5F22A] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch A, B, C, PA. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of PNP switch. ● PNP switch. Refer to AT-475, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 5. CHECK DTC D Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-471, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. E 6. CHECK TCM F 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection G H ECS009DX PNP SWITCH 1. Check continuity between PNP switch terminals while moving selector lever. Refer to the following table. I J K L SCIA2825E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If NG, check again with control cable disconnected. (Refer to Step 1 above.) If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . If NG on step 2, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals. (Refer to step 1 above.) If OK on step 4, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-619, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . If NG on step 4, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Revision: March 2005 AT-475 2005 Altima M DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description PFP:31940 ECS009DY The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009DZ This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0710 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage not applied to ATF temperature sensor due to open, short, and so on. When during running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009E0 Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) A/T fluid temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009E1 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Warm up engine so that engine coolant temperature is more than 50°C (122°F). COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F) Maintain the following conditions for at least 16 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to drive vehicle.) COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F) SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-478, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-476 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ECS009E2 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0189E Revision: March 2005 AT-477 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 41 Fluid temperature sensor R/Y 42 When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V .54 kΩ When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F) 0.5V .31 kΩ Fluid temperature sensor ground LG Data (Approx.) Always Diagnostic Procedure 0V ECS009E3 1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. Item name Fluid temperature sensor Condition Display value (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V SCIA2870E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42 while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-477, "Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS" . Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground) Temperature Voltage (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 4. Disconnect the TCM connector. 5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 AT-478 SCIA2871E 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground) B Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. AT D 4. SCIA2872E E F 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR G 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector F30 Terminal 4-8 Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. H I J SCIA2873E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY L Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-479 K M 2005 Altima DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal F30 4-8 Temperature Resistance 10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C (230°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace terminal cord assembly. Refer to AT622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . WCIA0448E 6. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-476, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection ECS009E4 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal F30 4-8 4. Temperature Resistance 10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C (230°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ If NG, repair and replace terminal cord assembly. Refer to AT622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . WCIA0448E Revision: March 2005 AT-480 2005 Altima DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE [RE5F22A] DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE Description PFP:31940 A ECS009E5 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009E6 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “FLUID TEMP SEN” with CONSULT-II or P0711 without CONSULT-II is detected AT when ATF temperature signal does not change. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009E7 D Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) A/T fluid temperature sensor E DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009E8 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 15 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.) VHCL SPEED SE-A/T: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-483, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J BCIA0030E K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. L M Revision: March 2005 AT-481 2005 Altima DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — FTSP ECS009E9 WCWA0190E Revision: March 2005 AT-482 2005 Altima DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 41 Fluid temperature sensor R/Y 42 When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V .54 kΩ When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F) 0.5V .31 kΩ Fluid temperature sensor ground LG Data (Approx.) Always Diagnostic Procedure ECS009EA With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. Fluid temperature sensor Condition Display value (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V F57 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground) G H Temperature Voltage (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 4. Disconnect the TCM connector. 5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 D F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42 while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-482, "Wiring Diagram — AT — FTSP" . Terminal (Wire color) AT E SCIA2870E Connector B 0V 1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Item name A AT-483 I J K L M SCIA2871E 2005 Altima DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) 41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground) Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ 4. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2872E 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector F30 Terminal 4-8 Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2873E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-484 2005 Altima DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE [RE5F22A] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. A Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal) F30 4-8 Temperature Resistance 10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C (230°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ B AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . D WCIA0448E E 6. CHECK DTC F Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-481, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. G 7. CHECK TCM H 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J Component Inspection ECS009EB A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal) F30 4-8 4. Temperature Resistance 10°C (50°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C 230(°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ K L M If NG, repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . WCIA0448E Revision: March 2005 AT-485 2005 Altima DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT Description ● ● PFP:31935 ECS009EC The turbine revolution sensor detects forward clutch drum rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transaxle. The revolution sensor is located on the output side of the automatic transaxle. With the two sensors, input and output rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting. Hall IC is installed in turbine revolution sensor, it itself handles in pulse of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to hall effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with input rpm speed. Size of output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed. SCIA2830E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009ED This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE SENSOR” with CONSULT-II or P0717 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. When unexpected signal input during running. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009EE Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Turbine revolution sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009EF CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 consecutive minute. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: Except 1st position If DTC is detected, go to AT-488, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-486 2005 Altima DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSC ECS009EG A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0191E Revision: March 2005 AT-487 2005 Altima DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 23 30 G R Data (Approx.) When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 371Hz Turbine revolution sensor power supply Turbine revolution sensor Diagnostic Procedure ECS009EH 1. CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. Monitor item TURBINE REV Condition During driving (lock-up ON) Specification Approximately matches the engine speed. SCIA2924E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start the engine. 2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 23 and 30. Data (Approx.) Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition F57 23 (G) - 30 (R) (ground) When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 371 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2925E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and turbine revolution sensor. ● Turbine revolution sensor. Refer to AT-489, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: March 2005 AT-488 2005 Altima DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK DTC A Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-486, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. B 4. CHECK TCM AT 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection D E ECS009EI TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove turbine revolution sensor. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity) Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at turbine revolution sensor tip [gap is within 5 mm (0.20 in)]. CAUTION: Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot change. Signal Voltage (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V F G H I SCIA2927E J If NG, replace turbine revolution sensor. K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-489 2005 Altima DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT PFP:31935 Description ● ● ECS009EJ The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. Hall IC is installed in revolution sensor, it itself handles in pulse of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to hall effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with vehicle speed. Size of output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed. SCIA2830E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009EK This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T” with CONSULT-II or P0722 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. When unexpected signal input during running. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009EL Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Revolution sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009EM CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR” value. If the check result is NG, go to AT-492, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive minutes. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If the check result is NG, go to AT-492, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-490 2005 Altima DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSATC ECS009EN A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0192E Revision: March 2005 AT-491 2005 Altima DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 22 29 L B/W Data (Approx.) When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 119Hz Revolution sensor power supply Revolution sensor Diagnostic Procedure ECS009EO 1. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-AT”. Monitor item VHCL/S SE-AT Condition Specification Approximately matches the speedometer reading. During driving SCIA2922E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start the engine. 2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 22 and 29. Connector Terminal (Wire color) F57 22 (L) - 29 (B/W) (ground) Data (Approx.) Condition When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 119 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2928E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and revolution sensor. ● Revolution sensor. Refer to AT-493, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: March 2005 AT-492 2005 Altima DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK DTC A Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-490, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. B 4. CHECK TCM AT 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection D E ECS009EP REVOLUTION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove revolution sensor. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity) Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at revolution sensor tip [gap is within 5mm (0.20 in)]. CAUTION: Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot change. Signal Voltage (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V F G H I SCIA2927E J If NG, replace revolution sensor. K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-493 2005 Altima DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE [RE5F22A] DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE Description PFP:31036 ECS009EQ The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009ER This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ENG SPD INP PERFOR” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal or torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009ES Harness or connectors (The signal circuit is open or shorted.) ECM DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009ET CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL/S SE-A/T: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 % SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-494, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E Diagnostic Procedure ECS009EU 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “ENGINE” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CONSULT-II. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II Function (TCM)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the DTC detected item, go to EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" . ● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-464, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-494 2005 Altima DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. While monitoring “ENGINE SPEED”, check for engine speed change corresponding to “ACCELE ANGLE”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit. ● Refer to EC-1287, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . 1. 2. 3. B AT D E SCIA2929E 3. CHECK DTC F Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-494, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. G H 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-495 2005 Altima DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 ECS009EV This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valve Gear position 1st A B C D E D ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) M1 ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009EW This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0731 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● ● ● ECS009EX Shift solenoid valve A (Off stick.) 2nd brake 2nd coast brake One-way clutch No.1 One-way clutch No.2 Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009EY CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st position [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 1st gear position BCIA0030E retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-498, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-496 2005 Altima DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ECS009EZ A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0193E Revision: March 2005 AT-497 2005 Altima DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 46 W/G Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V Shift solenoid valve A Diagnostic Procedure ECS009F0 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0750. Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following item: – 2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" . – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 3. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-496, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision: March 2005 AT-498 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS009F1 This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT Shift solenoid valve Gear position 2nd A B C D E D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) M2 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009F2 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 2ND GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0732 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● E F ECS009F3 G Shift solenoid valve A (On stick.) Shift solenoid valve B (On stick.) Shift solenoid valve C (Off stick.) Shift solenoid valve D (On stick.) Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) Pressure control solenoid valve C (On stick.) U/D brake 2nd coast brake 2nd brake One-way clutch No.1 One-way clutch No.2 B5 brake Hydraulic control circuit H I J K L M DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009F4 CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. Revision: March 2005 D AT-499 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 2nd position [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 2nd gear position BCIA0030E retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-503, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-500 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ECS009F5 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0194E Revision: March 2005 AT-501 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] WCWA0195E Revision: March 2005 AT-502 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 25 26 G/R PU/W Shift solenoid valve B Shift solenoid valve D 28 W Pressure control solenoid valve C ground 35 L/Y Pressure control solenoid valve A 37 R/B Shift solenoid valve C Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) Battery voltage B When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V E F L/G Pressure control solenoid valve A ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 45 OR Pressure control solenoid valve C When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage W/G AT D 40 46 A G H Shift solenoid valve A I When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V J Diagnostic Procedure ECS009F6 1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT K Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. ● “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L M 2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. ● “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-503 2005 Altima DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following item: – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – 2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" . – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-499, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision: March 2005 AT-504 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS009F7 This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT Shift solenoid valve Gear position 3rd A B C D E D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) M3 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009F8 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 3RD GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0733 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● H I J K ECS009FA WITH CONSULT-II 3. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 3rd position BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 F G Shift solenoid valve A (On stick.) Shift solenoid valve B (On stick.) Shift solenoid valve C (Off stick.) Shift solenoid valve D (Off stick.) Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) B5 brake U/D clutch U/D brake Hydraulic control circuit CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 2. E ECS009F9 DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. D AT-505 2005 Altima L M DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] 4. [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 3rd gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-506 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ECS009FB A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0196E Revision: March 2005 AT-507 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] WCWA0197E Revision: March 2005 AT-508 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 25 26 35 37 G/R PU/W L/Y R/B Shift solenoid valve B Shift solenoid valve D Pressure control solenoid valve A Data (Approx.) A When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz D When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage E When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V B AT Shift solenoid valve C F 40 46 L/G W/G Pressure control solenoid valve A ground Shift solenoid valve A When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V G H Diagnostic Procedure ECS009FC I 1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT J Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. ● “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K L 2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT M Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-509 2005 Altima DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following item: – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . – U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-505, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision: March 2005 AT-510 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS009FD This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT Shift solenoid valve Gear position 4th A B C D E D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) M4 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009FE This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 4TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0734 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● H I J K ECS009FG WITH CONSULT-II 3. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 4th position BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 F G Shift solenoid valve A (On stick.) Shift solenoid valve B (On stick.) Shift solenoid valve C (On stick.) Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) Forward and direct clutch assembly U/D clutch U/D brake 2nd coast brake One-way clutch No.1 Hydraulic control circuit CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 2. E ECS009FF DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. D AT-511 2005 Altima L M DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] 4. [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 4th gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-514, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-512 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ECS009FH A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0198E Revision: March 2005 AT-513 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 25 35 37 40 46 G/R L/Y R/B L/G W/G Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V Shift solenoid valve B Pressure control solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve C Pressure control solenoid valve A ground Shift solenoid valve A Diagnostic Procedure ECS009FI 1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-514 2005 Altima DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . B Check the following item: – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch AT Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . D – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . OK or NG E OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK DTC F Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-511, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-515 2005 Altima DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION Description ● ● PFP:31940 ECS009FJ This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fifth gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valve Gear position 5th A B C D E D OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) M5 OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009FK This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 5TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0735 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ECS009FL Shift solenoid valve B (Off stick.) Shift solenoid valve C (On stick.) Shift solenoid valve E (On stick.) Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) Pressure control solenoid valve B (On stick.) Forward and direct clutch assembly Direct clutch 2no coast brake One-way clutch No.1 Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009FM CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. Revision: March 2005 AT-516 2005 Altima DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) B If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. AT SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 5th position [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 5th gear position D BCIA0030E retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. E If DTC is detected, go to AT-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST F Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-517 2005 Altima DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 5THSIG ECS009FN WCWA0199E Revision: March 2005 AT-518 2005 Altima DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0224E Revision: March 2005 AT-519 2005 Altima DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 21 25 G/B G/R Pressure control solenoid valve B ground Data (Approx.) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V Shift solenoid valve B 35 L/Y Pressure control solenoid valve A When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz 36 OR/B Pressure control solenoid valve B When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V 37 40 47 R/B L/G BR/Y Shift solenoid valve C Pressure control solenoid valve A ground Shift solenoid valve E Diagnostic Procedure ECS009FO 1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: March 2005 AT-520 2005 Altima DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . B Check the following item: – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – 2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" . AT – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . OK or NG D OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK DTC E Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-516, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-521 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE5F22A] DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Description ● ● ● ECS009FQ This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● ECS009FP This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● PFP:31940 ECS009FR Shift solenoid valve D (Off stick.) Pressure control solenoid valve C (Off stick.) Torque converter clutch Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009FS CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to more than 100 km/h (62 MPH) and maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 5th position SLIP REV: Less than 100 rpm BCIA0030E ACCELE ANGLE: More than 5 % LOCK-UP: ON (Refer to AT-693, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP- 9J500 Models" .) [Vehicle speed: Constant speed of more than 100 km/h (62 MPH).] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-524, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-522 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ECS009FT A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0201E Revision: March 2005 AT-523 2005 Altima DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color Data (Approx.) 28 W Pressure control solenoid valve C ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 45 OR Pressure control solenoid valve C When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz Diagnostic Procedure ECS009FU 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0765. Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0795. Refer to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following item: – Torque converter clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-522, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision: March 2005 AT-524 2005 Altima DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) PFP:31940 Description ● ● A ECS009FV The pressure control solenoid valve A is normally high, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. The pressure control solenoid valve A regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. B AT D SCIA2831E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009FW This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL A(L/PRESS)” with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● G H Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Pressure control solenoid valve A I ECS009FY NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. J K WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 F ECS009FX DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E AT-525 2005 Altima DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/A ECS009FZ WCWA0202E Revision: March 2005 AT-526 2005 Altima DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 35 40 Data (Approx.) L/Y Pressure control solenoid valve A When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz L/G Pressure control solenoid valve A ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V B AT Diagnostic Procedure ECS009G0 1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. D With CONSULT-II After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “PC SOL A OUT” and “PC SOL A MON”. Monitor item ● PC SOL A OUT ● PC SOL A MON E F Display value (Approx.) Condition When releasing accelerator pedal with setting selector lever to “P” position. 1.00 A When depressing accelerator pedal fully setting selector lever to “P” position. 0.32 A G H SCIA2907E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Data (Approx.) 35 (L/Y) - 40 (L/G) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300 Hz J K SCIA2908E 2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40. Connector Terminal (Wire color) F57 35 (L/Y) - 40 (L/G) Resistance (Approx.) Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2909E Revision: March 2005 I L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. 1. 2. 3. A AT-527 2005 Altima M DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 3-6 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2910E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal F105 1-2 Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4326E 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve A. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-525, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-528 2005 Altima DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] 8. CHECK TCM A 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT Component Inspection ECS009G1 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal F105 1-2 4. Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) D E Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . F G SCIA4326E H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-529 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE5F22A] DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Description PFP:31940 ECS009G2 Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. The shift solenoid valve A is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid. ● ● Gear position Shift solenoid valve A D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M 3 D4 , M4 D5 , M 5 Reverse ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009G3 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL A” with CONSULT-II or P0750 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009G4 Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Shift solenoid valve A DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009G5 CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd position If DTC is detected, go to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-530 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ECS009G6 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0203E Revision: March 2005 AT-531 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE5F22A] TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 46 W/G Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V Shift solenoid valve A Diagnostic Procedure ECS009G7 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL A OUT” and “SFT SOL A MON”. Monitor item ● SFT SOL A OUT ● SFT SOL A MON Condition Indication When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. OFF SCIA2874E Without CONSULT-II 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) 46 (W/G) - Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2875E 2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 46 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) F57 46 (W/G) - Ground Resistance (Approx.) Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2877E Revision: March 2005 AT-532 2005 Altima DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 2 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω B AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. D WCIA0449E E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY F Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F100 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω I J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . K L SCIA4334E 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve A. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-530, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-533 2005 Altima M DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE5F22A] 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection ECS009G8 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F100 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4334E Revision: March 2005 AT-534 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE5F22A] DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Description PFP:31940 A ECS009G9 Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. The shift solenoid valve B is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. ● ● Gear position Shift solenoid valve B D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M3 D4 , M 4 D5 , M5 Reverse ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009GA This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL B” with CONSULT-II or P0755 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● B AT D E F ECS009GB Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Shift solenoid valve B G DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009GC CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd and 4th Þ 5th position If DTC is detected, go to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-535 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ECS009GD WCWA0204E Revision: March 2005 AT-536 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE5F22A] TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 25 G/R Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V A B Shift solenoid valve B AT Diagnostic Procedure ECS009GE 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. D With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL B OUT” and “SFT SOL B MON”. E F Monitor item ● SFT SOL B OUT ● SFT SOL B MON Condition Indication When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. OFF G H SCIA2879E I Without CONSULT-II 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Voltage (Approx.) 25 (G/R) - Ground When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. J K L SCIA2880E 2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 25 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) F57 25 (G/R) - Ground Resistance (Approx.) Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2881E Revision: March 2005 AT-537 2005 Altima M DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. WCIA0450E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F101 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4335E 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Check the following. Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve B. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . ● 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-535, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-538 2005 Altima DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE5F22A] 8. CHECK TCM A 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT Component Inspection ECS009GF SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F101 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. D E If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . F G SCIA4335E H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-539 2005 Altima DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C [RE5F22A] DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C Description PFP:31940 ECS009GG Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. ● ● Gear position Shift solenoid valve C D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M 3 D4 , M4 D5 , M 5 Reverse ON (Open) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009GH This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL C” with CONSULT-II or P0760 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009GI Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Shift solenoid valve C DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009GJ CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 3rd Þ 4th position If DTC is detected, go to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-540 2005 Altima DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/C ECS009GK A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0205E Revision: March 2005 AT-541 2005 Altima DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C [RE5F22A] TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 37 R/B Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V Shift solenoid valve C Diagnostic Procedure ECS009GL 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and “SFT SOL C MON”. Monitor item Condition Indication ● SFT SOL C OUT When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) ON ● SFT SOL C MON When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OFF SCIA2883E Without CONSULT-II 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) 37 (R/B) - Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 Battery voltage 0V SCIA2884E AT-542 2005 Altima DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Resistance (Approx.) F57 37 (R/B) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω B AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. D SCIA2885E E 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 4 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. I WCIA0451E J 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K 5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C M 1. 2. 3. L Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4338E Revision: March 2005 AT-543 2005 Altima DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C [RE5F22A] 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-540, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection ECS009GM SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4338E Revision: March 2005 AT-544 2005 Altima DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON Description PFP:31940 A ECS009GN This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON AT and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. D ● ● ● ● Gear position Shift solenoid valve C D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M3 D4 , M 4 D5 , M5 Reverse ON (Open) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “SFT SOL C STUCK ON” with CONSULT-II or P0762 without CONSULT-II is detected when condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular. ● F G Possible Cause ● E ECS009GO ECS009GP Shift solenoid valve C (On stick.) Hydraulic control circuit H DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009GQ CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 3rd Þ 4th position ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 % If DTC is detected, go to AT-547, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-545 2005 Altima DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/CS ECS009GR WCWA0206E Revision: March 2005 AT-546 2005 Altima DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 37 R/B Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V A B Shift solenoid valve C AT Diagnostic Procedure ECS009GS 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. D With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and “SFT SOL C MON”. E F Monitor item Condition Indication ● SFT SOL C OUT When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) ON ● SFT SOL C MON When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OFF G H SCIA2883E I Without CONSULT-II 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage 37 (R/B) - Ground When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 J K L 0V SCIA2884E AT-547 2005 Altima M DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Resistance (Approx.) F57 37 (R/B) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2885E 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 4 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. WCIA0451E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4338E Revision: March 2005 AT-548 2005 Altima DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C A Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . B AT 7. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E 8. CHECK DTC F Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-545, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Component Inspection G ECS009GT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F102 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. H I J If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . K L SCIA4338E M Revision: March 2005 AT-549 2005 Altima DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D [RE5F22A] DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D Description PFP:31940 ECS009GU Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. The shift solenoid valve D is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid. ● ● Gear position Shift solenoid valve D D1 , M 1 D2 , M 2 D3 , M 3 D4 , M4 D5 , M 5 Reverse OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009GV This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL D” with CONSULT-II or P0765 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009GW Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Shift solenoid valve D DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009GX CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 2nd Þ 3rd position If DTC is detected, go to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-550 2005 Altima DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/D ECS009GY A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0207E Revision: March 2005 AT-551 2005 Altima DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D [RE5F22A] TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 26 PU/ W Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V Shift solenoid valve D Diagnostic Procedure ECS009GZ 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL D OUT” and “SFT SOL D MON”. Monitor item ● SFT SOL D OUT ● SFT SOL D MON Condition Indication When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. OFF SCIA2888E Without CONSULT-II 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage 26 (PU/W) - Ground When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 0V SCIA2889E AT-552 2005 Altima DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 26 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Resistance (Approx.) F57 26 (PU/W) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω B AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. D SCIA2890E E 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. I WCIA0453E J 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K 5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D M 1. 2. 3. L Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F103 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4339E Revision: March 2005 AT-553 2005 Altima DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D [RE5F22A] 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve D. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-550, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection ECS009H0 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F103 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4339E Revision: March 2005 AT-554 2005 Altima DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E [RE5F22A] DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E Description PFP:31940 A ECS009H1 Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. The shift solenoid valve E is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. ● ● Gear position Shift solenoid valve E D1 M1 D 2 , M2 D3 , M3 D4 , M 4 D5 , M 5 Reverse OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ● ● – – ECS009H2 E This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL E” with CONSULT-II or P0770 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. F G Possible Cause ● ● AT D NOTE: The condition of shift solenoid valve E is ON (Open) with shifting D2 ⇔ D3 and D3 ⇔ D4 . On Board Diagnosis Logic B ECS009H3 Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Shift solenoid valve E H DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009H4 CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Move selector lever between “N” and “R”. SLCT LVR POSI: “N” ⇔ “R” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-555 2005 Altima DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/E ECS009H5 WCWA0208E Revision: March 2005 AT-556 2005 Altima DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E [RE5F22A] TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 47 BR/Y Data (Approx.) When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V A B Shift solenoid valve E AT Diagnostic Procedure ECS009H6 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. D With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL E OUT” and “SFT SOL E MON”. E F Monitor item ● SFT SOL E OUT ● SFT SOL E MON Condition Indication When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. OFF G H SCIA2895E I Without CONSULT-II 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector F57 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Voltage (Approx.) 47 (BR/Y) - Ground When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. J K L 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2896E 2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 47 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Resistance (Approx.) F57 47 (BR/Y) - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2897E Revision: March 2005 AT-557 2005 Altima M DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 5 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. WCIA0452E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F104 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4340E 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E Check the following. Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve E. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . ● 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-555, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-558 2005 Altima DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E [RE5F22A] 8. CHECK TCM A 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT Component Inspection ECS009H7 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F104 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. D E If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . F G SCIA4340E H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-559 2005 Altima DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) PFP:31940 Description ● ● ECS009H8 The pressure control solenoid valve B is normally high, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. The pressure control solenoid valve B controls linear shift pressure by control signal from TCM and controls 2nd coast brake directly under 2nd, 3rd, 4th and direct clutch directly under 5th and reverse. SCIA2831E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009H9 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)” with CONSULT-II or P0775 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009HA Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Pressure control solenoid valve B DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009HB NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-560 2005 Altima DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/B ECS009HC A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0209E Revision: March 2005 AT-561 2005 Altima DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color Data (Approx.) 21 G/B Pressure control solenoid valve B ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 36 OR/B Pressure control solenoid valve B When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz Diagnostic Procedure ECS009HD 1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “PC SOL B OUT” and “PC SOL B MON”. Monitor item Display value (Approx.) Condition ● PC SOL B OUT Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A ● PC SOL B MON Other than the above. 0.30 A SCIA2907E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36. Data (Approx.) Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition F57 36 (OR/B) - 21 (G/B) (Ground) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2911E 2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Resistance (Approx.) F57 36 (OR/B) - 21 (G/B) (Ground) Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2912E Revision: March 2005 AT-562 2005 Altima DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 7. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 3-7 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω B AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. D SCIA2913E E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY F Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal F106 1-2 Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) I J Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . K L SCIA4341E 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve B. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-560, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-563 2005 Altima M DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection ECS009HE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal F106 1-2 4. Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4341E Revision: March 2005 AT-564 2005 Altima DTC P0780 SHIFT [RE5F22A] DTC P0780 SHIFT Description ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS009HF This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. B This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – – ECS009HG This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT” with CONSULT-II or P0780 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When no rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor) and shifting time is long. When shifting ends immediately. When engine revs up unusually during shifting. Possible Cause ● ● ● ● ● ● Shift solenoid valve D (Off error.) Shift solenoid valve E (Off error.) Pressure control solenoid valve A (On/Off error.) Pressure control solenoid valve B (On/Off error.) Pressure control solenoid valve C (On/Off error.) Hydraulic control circuit H I J ECS009HI WITH CONSULT-II 3. 4. Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 60°C (140°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd Þ 3rd Þ 4th Þ 5th position (Vehicle speed: Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .) If DTC is detected, go to AT-568, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 F G CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 2. E ECS009HH DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. D AT-565 2005 Altima K L M DTC P0780 SHIFT [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SFTFNC ECS009HJ WCWA0210E Revision: March 2005 AT-566 2005 Altima DTC P0780 SHIFT [RE5F22A] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0211E Revision: March 2005 AT-567 2005 Altima DTC P0780 SHIFT [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 21 26 G/B PU/W Pressure control solenoid valve B ground Data (Approx.) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V Shift solenoid valve D 28 W Pressure control solenoid valve C ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 35 L/Y Pressure control solenoid valve A When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz 36 OR/B Pressure control solenoid valve B When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz 40 L/G Pressure control solenoid valve A ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 45 OR Pressure control solenoid valve C When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V 47 BR/Y Shift solenoid valve E Diagnostic Procedure ECS009HK 1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. ● “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) ● “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 3. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-565, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision: March 2005 AT-568 2005 Altima DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) PFP:31940 Description A ECS009HL ● ● ● ● The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake, and torque converter clutch. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lockup condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. B AT D SCIA2833E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS009HM This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)” with CONSULT-II or P0795 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009HN Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Pressure control solenoid valve C H J K WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 G ECS009HO NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 3. 4. 5. F I DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. E AT-569 2005 Altima DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/C ECS009HP WCWA0212E Revision: March 2005 AT-570 2005 Altima DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color Data (Approx.) 28 W Pressure control solenoid valve C ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 45 OR Pressure control solenoid valve C When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz Diagnostic Procedure B AT ECS009HQ 1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. D With CONSULT-II After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”. Monitor item A E F Display value (Approx.) Condition ● PC SOL C OUT Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A ● PC SOL C MON Other than the above. 0.20 A G H SCIA2907E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. Connector F57 J Data (Approx.) Terminal (Wire color) Condition 45 (OR) - 28 (W) (Ground) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. K 300 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. L SCIA2914E 2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Resistance (Approx.) F57 45 (OR) - 28 (W) (Ground) Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2915E Revision: March 2005 AT-571 I 2005 Altima M DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 2-5 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2916E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4342E 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . 7. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-569, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 AT-572 2005 Altima DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) [RE5F22A] 8. CHECK TCM A 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT Component Inspection ECS009HR PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω 4. D E If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . F G SCIA4342E H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-573 2005 Altima DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON Description ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS009HS This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake, and torque converter clutch. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lockup condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. SCIA2833E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009HT This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C STC ON” with CONSULT-II or P0797 without CONSULT-II is detected when condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular. Possible Cause ● ● ECS009HU Pressure control solenoid valve C (On stick.) Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009HV NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 4 consecutive minutes at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-576, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BCIA0030E WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: March 2005 AT-574 2005 Altima DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/CS ECS009HW A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0213E Revision: March 2005 AT-575 2005 Altima DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color Data (Approx.) 28 W Pressure control solenoid valve C ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 45 OR Pressure control solenoid valve C When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz Diagnostic Procedure ECS009HX 1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”. Monitor item Display value (Approx.) Condition ● PC SOL C OUT Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A ● PC SOL C MON Other than the above. 0.20 A SCIA2907E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. Data (Approx.) Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition F57 45 (OR) - 28 (W) (Ground) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2914E 2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Resistance (Approx.) F57 45 (OR) - 28 (W) (Ground) Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2915E Revision: March 2005 AT-576 2005 Altima DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 2-5 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω B AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. D SCIA2916E E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY F Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω I J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . K L SCIA4342E 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . 7. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-577 2005 Altima M DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON [RE5F22A] 8. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-574, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Component Inspection ECS009HY PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F107 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA4342E Revision: March 2005 AT-578 2005 Altima DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT Description PFP:34901 A ECS009HZ Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch signals to TCM. TCM sends the switch signals to combination meter by CAN communication line. Then manual mode switch position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-584, "Position Indicator" . CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Monitor Item MANU MODE SW NON M-MODE SW UP SW DOWN SW Condition (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF) (ON/OFF) ● ON Other than the above OFF Manual shift gate position OFF Other than the above ON Selector lever: + side ON Other than the above OFF Selector lever: - side ON Other than the above OFF ● ● D E F ECS009I1 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “MANUAL MODE SWITCH” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors manual mode, non manual mode, up or down switch signals, and judges as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs. Possible Cause AT Reference Value Manual shift gate position (neutral) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ECS009I0 B ECS009I2 Harness or connectors (These switches circuit is open or shorted.) Manual mode switch (built into A/T device) G H I J DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS009I3 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Move selector lever to “M” position (manual shift gate position). Shift selector lever into “+ side” and “- side”. Wait for at least 30 consecutive seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-582, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 AT-579 2005 Altima DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ECS009I4 WCWA0214E Revision: March 2005 AT-580 2005 Altima DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 5 6 16 19 L/Y L/R SB P/B Data (Approx.) Manual mode switch UP (+) Selector lever: + side 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Manual mode switch DOWN (-) Selector lever: - side 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Manual mode switch AUTO Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position 0V Selector lever: Manual shift gate position Battery voltage Manual mode switch MANUAL Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral) 0V Other than the above Battery voltage A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-581 2005 Altima DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS009I5 1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW”, “DOWN SW”. SCIA2917E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between the TCM connector terminals and ground. Connector No. Terminal (Wire color) 5 (L/Y) Ground 6 (L/R) Ground F56 16 (SB) Ground 19 (P/B) Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition Selector lever: + side 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: - side 0V Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position 0V Selector lever: Manual shift gate position Battery voltage Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral) 0V SCIA2918E Battery voltage Other than the above OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 AT-582 2005 Altima DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T DEVICE (MANUAL MODE SWITCH) 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check the continuity between TCM connector terminals 5, 6, 16, 19 and ground. Connector No. F56 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Selector lever: + side Yes Other than the above No 6 (L/R) Ground Selector lever: - side Yes Other than the above No Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position Yes Selector lever: Manual shift gate position No Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral) Yes Other than the above No 19 (P/B) Ground AT Continuity 5 (L/Y) Ground 16 (SB) Ground B D SCIA2919E E F G 4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I Check the following. ● Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T device (manual mode switch). ● Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of manual mode switch. ● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-584, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J K L 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-579, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. M 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-583 2005 Altima DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT [RE5F22A] Component Inspection ECS009I6 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check continuity between terminals. Item Position Manual mode (select) switch Auto UP switch DOWN switch Connector Continuity 11 - 12 Manual UP Terminal (Unit side) 3 - 11 M34 DOWN 8 - 11 Yes 7 - 11 WCIA0454E Position Indicator ECS009I7 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “TRANSMISSON” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II and read out the value of “MANU GR POSI”. 3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and make sure that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear). OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 1. 2. SCIA2920E 2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" . OK or NG OK >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-42, "A/T INDICATOR" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning system. Revision: March 2005 AT-584 2005 Altima DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL [RE5F22A] DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL Description PFP:31036 A ECS009I8 When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the selfdiagnostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS009I9 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. AT Diagnostic trouble code “TCM POWER INPT SIG” with CONSULT-II or P0882 without CONSULT-II is detected when voltage supplied to TCM is too low. Possible Cause ● ● B ECS009IA Harness or connectors (Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) A/T PV IGN relay DTC Confirmation Procedure D E ECS009IB CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. F G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. Start engine. Depress accelerator pedal or drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 20 consecutive seconds. TURBINE REV: More than 800 rpm If DTC is detected, go to AT-588, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K BCIA0030E L M Revision: March 2005 AT-585 2005 Altima DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN ECS009IC WCWA0225E Revision: March 2005 AT-586 2005 Altima DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL [RE5F22A] TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 1 14 L/B B Data (Approx.) A When turning ignition switch ON. 0 - 1.5V B When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V A/T PV IGN relay Ground Always AT 0V D When turning ignition switch ON. 27 Y/R Battery voltage Power supply (Memory back-up) E When turning ignition switch OFF. Battery voltage F When turning ignition switch ON. 34 Y Battery voltage Power supply G When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V H When turning ignition switch ON. 38 R/Y Battery voltage Power supply (A/T PV IGN relay) I Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V J When turning ignition switch ON. 39 R/Y Battery voltage Power supply (A/T PV IGN relay) K Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V L 48 B Ground Always 0V M Revision: March 2005 AT-587 2005 Altima DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL [RE5F22A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS009ID 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0 - 1.5V 27 (Y/R) - Ground 34 (Y) - Ground F57 Battery voltage 38 (R/Y) - Ground 39 (R/Y) - Ground 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0V 27 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage 34 (Y) - Ground 0V 38 (R/Y) - Ground 0V 39 (R/Y) - Ground 0V F57 SCIA2930E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following: ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27 ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39 ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R] ● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" ● A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-589, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 14 (B), 48 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA2933E Revision: March 2005 AT-588 2005 Altima DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL [RE5F22A] 4. CHECK DTC A Check again. Refer to AT-585, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. B 5. CHECK TCM AT 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection D E ECS009IE A/T PV IGN RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. Condition G Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes OFF No 3. F H If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay. SCIA1245E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-589 2005 Altima DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM Description PFP:23710 ECS009IF This DTC is displayed with other DTCs regarding ECM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTCs displayed. Refer to EC-716, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . When this DTC is detected, lock-up operation and learning control are canceled. Revision: March 2005 AT-590 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on PFP:00007 A ECS009IG SYMPTOM: A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”. B DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE AT Perform the self-diagnosis. Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES or NO YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-464, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. D E 2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-586, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN" . G Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0 - 1.5V H 27 (Y/R) - Ground 34 (Y) - Ground F57 Battery voltage 38 (R/Y) - Ground I 39 (R/Y) - Ground 3. 4. SCIA2930E Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-586, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN" . Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) F56 1 (L/B) - Ground 0V 27 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage 34 (Y) - Ground 0V 38 (R/Y) - Ground 0V 39 (R/Y) - Ground 0V F57 K L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following: ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27 ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39 ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R] ● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-589, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 J AT-591 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 14 (B), 48 (B) and ground. Refer to AT-586, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN" . 4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or the power source. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA2933E 5. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . 6. SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-592 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position ECS009IH A SYMPTOM: ● ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position. Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position. B DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM AT Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE E Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . F G 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> INSPECTION END In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed H I ECS009II SYMPTOM: J Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated, allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed. K DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . 3. SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-593 2005 Altima L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ECS009IJ SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . ● 4. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-594 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ECS009IK A SYMPTOM: A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. AT D 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. F 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM G Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Accumulator. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. H I J 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K L 5. CHECK SYMPTOM M Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-595 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position ECS009IL SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION Check the control cable and PNP switch position. ● Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT619, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – 1st and reverse brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . – Torque convertor. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-596 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position ECS009IM A SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. AT D 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION Check the control cable and PNP switch position. ● Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT619, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . E 3. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT G Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate pressure control solenoid valve A? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-525, "DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)" . NO >> GO TO 4. F H I 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM J Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . – Torque convertor. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. K L M 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-597 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ECS009IN SYMPTOM: Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-596, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check the line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-437, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the malfunctioning item. Refer to AT-438, "Judgement of line pressure test" . 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ECS009IO SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed. Revision: March 2005 AT-598 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1. B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be AT Started From D1" . 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL D Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. E 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS F Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. G 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – 2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 5. CHECK TCM J K L M 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ECS009IP SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed. Revision: March 2005 I AT-599 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" ,AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ECS009IQ SYMPTOM: ● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed. Revision: March 2005 AT-600 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1. B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be AT Started From D1" . 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL D Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. E 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS F Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. G 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. I J K 5. CHECK TCM L 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ECS009IR SYMPTOM: ● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed. Revision: March 2005 AT-601 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" ,AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ECS009IS SYMPTOM: A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. Revision: March 2005 AT-602 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. B AT 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E F Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. G 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Torque converter. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. I J 5. CHECK TCM K 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L M 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ECS009IT SYMPTOM: The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds. Revision: March 2005 D AT-603 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Torque converter. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Lock-up Is Not Released ECS009IU SYMPTOM: The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal. Revision: March 2005 AT-604 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. B AT 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E F Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. G 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Torque converter. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. I J 5. CHECK TCM K 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L M 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ECS009IV SYMPTOM: Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used. Revision: March 2005 D AT-605 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the manual mode switch circuit. Refer to AT-579, "DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> INSPECTION END A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear ECS009IW SYMPTOM: When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-606 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] 5. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear ECS009IX SYMPTOM: AT When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE D 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. F 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS G Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. J K L 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear ECS009IY SYMPTOM: When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear. Revision: March 2005 AT-607 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear ECS009IZ SYMPTOM: When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. Revision: March 2005 AT-608 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS A Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. B 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM AT Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – 2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" . – One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 4. CHECK TCM D E F G H 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K L Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ECS009J0 SYMPTOM: M No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate shift solenoid valve E, electric throttle control system? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-555, "DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E" , AT-590, "DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM" . NO >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 AT-609 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" . – U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" . – B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate ECS009J1 SYMPTOM: A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is good. DESCRIPTION ● ● ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. Stop lamp switch signal Detects the brake pedal state (stop lamp switch is ON or OFF) and sends a signal via CAN communication line to the TCM. Closed throttle position signal ECM judges throttle opening based on a signal from accelerator pedal position sensor, and sends the signal via CAN communication line to TCM. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK PARK/ NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: March 2005 AT-610 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [RE5F22A] 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT A Perform self-diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 3. CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. Refer to EC-669, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E 4. CHECK DATA MONITOR (WITH CONSULT-II) F With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II. 3. Depress or release accelerator pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling action of the “CLSD THL POS”. 4. Depress or release brake pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling action of the “BRAKE SW”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. G H I J SCIA2946E 5. CHECK TCM K 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-464, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the TCM. Revision: March 2005 AT-611 2005 Altima L M SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device PFP:34901 ECS009J2 WCIA0469E Revision: March 2005 AT-612 2005 Altima SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Control Cable ECS009J3 A B AT D E F G H WCIA0470E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-613 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE5F22A] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:34950 ECS009J4 The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder. Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ECS009J5 WCIA0468E Revision: March 2005 AT-614 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ECS009J6 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0186E Revision: March 2005 AT-615 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ECS009J7 SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT WCIA0465E SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Data are reference values. Terminal No. (Wire color) (+) (-) 1 (W) 8 (B) 2 (L) 8 (B) Item Power source Detent switch (key) 4 (R/G) 8 (B) Stop lamp switch 5 (P) 8 (B) Vehicle speed signal 6 (G) 8 (B) Ignition signal 7 (R/W) 8 (B) 8 (B) – 9 (G/W) 8 (B) 10 (W/G) 8 (B) Condition Shift lock solenoid Always Battery voltage The position when the key is inserted and the selector lever is set to a position other than the “P” position, or when it is shifted from the “R” to the “P” position Battery voltage Except the above Approx. 0V When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage When brake pedal is released Approx. 0V — — Ignition switch: “ON” Battery voltage Ignition switch: “OFF” Approx. 0V When the brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage Ignition switch: “ON” and vehicle speed is less than 8 km/ h (5 MPH) Approx. 0V Always Approx. 0V Ground Key lock signal Judgement standard When the selector lever is set to a position other than the “P” position Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec. (Note) Except the above Approx. 0V When the selector lever is set to the“ P” position Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec. (Note) Except the above Approx. 0V Key unlock signal NOTE: Make sure that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms. Revision: March 2005 AT-616 2005 Altima A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE5F22A] Component Inspection ECS009J8 SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID A Check operation by applying battery voltage to A/T device connector. CAUTION: Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged. B ● AT Connector Terminal M34 9 (Battery voltage) - 10 (Ground) D SCIA3117E DETENT SWITCH For Key: ● E Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device connector. Condition The position when the selector lever is set to a position other than the “P” position, or when it is shifted from the “R” to the “P” position Connector Terminal M34 5-6 F Continuity Except the above Yes G No H SCIA3118E I KEY LOCK SOLENOID Key Lock Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and key lock solenoid connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness. ● Connector Terminal M26 1 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground) J K L WCIA0455E Key Unlock Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and key lock solenoid connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness. ● Connector Terminal M26 2 (Battery voltage) - 1 (Ground) WCIA0456E Revision: March 2005 AT-617 2005 Altima M A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE5F22A] KEY SWITCH ● Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key lock solenoid connector. Condition Key inserted Connector Terminal M26 3-4 Continuity Yes Key removed No WCIA0457E STOP LAMP SWITCH ● Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch connector. Condition Connector Terminal E38 1-2 Continuity When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released Yes No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment" . WCIA0466E Revision: March 2005 AT-618 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE5F22A] ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. PFP:00000 A ECS009J9 Remove intake air duct. Disconnect electrical connector. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. NOTE: Do not reuse seal bolt. B AT D BBIA0272E Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. ECS009JA Remove battery and bracket. Disconnect electrical connector. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. NOTE: Do not reuse seal bolt. E F G H BBIA0273E Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove battery and bracket. Remove cable from range lever. Set range lever in neutral position. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number 5. 6. ECS009JB I J K : KV991J0060 (J-45404) Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. Adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on park/neutral position (PNP) switch body. L M SCIA5374E 7. 8. 9. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. Reinstall range lever and cable. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" . 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-475, "Component Inspection" . BBIA0274E Revision: March 2005 AT-619 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE5F22A] ATF Cooler ECS009JC REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove hose clamps and hoses from ATF cooler. Remove bolt from ATF cooler and remove ATF cooler. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Do not reuse sealing parts. BBIA0275E ATF Cooler Valve ECS009JD Refer to the figure for ATF cooler valve and hoses removal and installation information. SCIA2975E 1. ATF cooler valve assembly 2. Hose clamp 3. Heater hose 4. Heater pipe 5. Outlet water hose 6. Hose clip 7. ATF cooler assembly 8. Transaxle assembly 9. Control cable bracket 10. Inlet water hose Revision: March 2005 AT-620 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE5F22A] COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. A Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully opened at room temperature. Dimension “A”: More than 72.0 mm (2.835 in) A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face and valve shaft end face. B AT SCIA2711J 2. Submerge ATF cooler valve in a water-filled container, and then heat it up with temperature of over 82°C (180°F) for 10 minutes more. D E F G SCIA2993E H 3. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully closed. Dimension “A”: Less than 66.5 mm (2.618 in) A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face and valve shaft end face. I J K SCIA2711J Control Cable Adjustment ECS009JE Move selector lever from the P position to the D position. You should be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in the P position. CAUTION: Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut. 3. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration. Specified force 4. 5. M BBIA0279E : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb) Tighten control cable lock nut. Move selector lever from P to D position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. NOTE: ● Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position. ● Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position. Revision: March 2005 AT-621 L 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE5F22A] Side cover ECS009JF REMOVAL 1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . 3. Remove side cover bolts and side cover. NOTE: Do not reuse sealing bolts. SCIA4144E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . Control Valve Assembly ECS009JG REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" . Disconnect solenoid valve connectors. Disconnect control valve assembly bolts and remove control valve assembly. SCIA4151E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install bolts in sequence as shown. Refer to AT-626, "Components" for specified torque. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 55 (2.17) 2 B 50 (1.97) 2 C 16 (0.63) 2 SCIA4152E Terminal Cord Assembly ECS009JH REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove PNP switch. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" . Revision: March 2005 AT-622 2005 Altima ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE5F22A] 3. 4. Disconnect solenoid valve connectors. Remove terminal cord assembly. A B AT WCIA0238E D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-623 2005 Altima REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE5F22A] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal PFP:00000 ECS009JI CAUTION: When removing the transaxle assembly from engine, be sure to remove the crankshaft position sensor from the assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edge. 1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 2. Remove battery and bracket. 3. Remove air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . 4. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connectors. 5. Disconnect harness connectors of revolution sensor, ground, mass air flow sensor, and turbine revolution sensor. 6. Remove ATF cooler valve assembly bracket bolts. 7. Disconnect ATF cooler line retainers. 8. Disconnect ATF cooler lines from ATF cooler valve assembly. 9. Disconnect control cable at transaxle side. 10. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . 11. Remove push clips and engine undercover. 12. Remove upper transaxle to engine bolts. 13. Support engine using suitable tool. 14. Remove drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . 15. Remove crankshaft position sensor from transaxle. 16. Support transaxle with a suitable jack. 17. Remove starter motor from transaxle. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . 18. Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" . 19. Remove rear cover plate and torque converter to drive plate bolts. NOTE: Rotate crankshaft for access to torque converter to drive plate bolts. 20. Remove lower transaxle to engine bolts. 21. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack. 22. If replacing the transaxle as a unit, remove the LH transaxle mount from the transaxle case. BBIA0277E Inspection After Removal ECS009JJ Check the drive plate runout as shown. If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear. Refer to AT-692, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . CAUTION: Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear teeth. SAT977H Revision: March 2005 AT-624 2005 Altima REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE5F22A] Installation ECS009JK A CAUTION: ● When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly during re-assembly. ● Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive B train components. 1. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure disAT tance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled. Distance “A” : 14.0 mm (0.551 in) or more D E SAT044A 2. F Install the torque converter to drive plate. Torque converter to drive plate bolts : 49 - 58 N·m (5.0 - 5.9 kg-m, 37 - 42 ft-lb) G NOTE: With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that transaxle rotates freely without binding. H I WCIA0070E 3. 4. Tighten bolts securing transaxle. J Bolt No. Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 1 70 - 79 (7.2 - 8.0, 52 - 58) 55 (2.17) 2 41.2 - 52.0 (4.2 - 5.3, 31 - 38) 40 (1.57) 3 70 - 79 (7.2 - 8.0, 52 - 58) 55 (2.17) mm (in) K L Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. SCIA3017E ● ● ● ● Check fluid level in transaxle. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transaxle operates correctly. With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through N to D and to R position. A slight shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transaxle is shifted. When replacing the A/T assembly, initialize TCM. Refer to AT388, "Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement" . Perform road test. Refer to AT-438, "ROAD TEST" . SAT638A Revision: March 2005 AT-625 2005 Altima M OVERHAUL [RE5F22A] OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 ECS009JL WCIA0334E Revision: March 2005 AT-626 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE5F22A] 1. Adjust shim 2. O-ring 3. Differential gear assembly 4. O-ring 5. Tapered roller bearing 6. Tapered roller bearing 7. Outer race Compression spring 8. O-ring 9. 10. U/D brake piston assembly 11. U/D brake damper assembly 12. Snap ring 13. U/D brake band assembly 14. U/D clutch assembly 15. U/D gear assembly 16. Thrust needle roller bearing 17. Thrust bearing race 18. Seal ring 19. Transaxle case 20. B5 brake cushion plate 21. B5 brake disc 22. Snap ring 23. U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly 24. Thrust bearing race 25. U/D RR planetary carrier assembly 26. Thrust needle roller bearing 27. Adjusting shim 28. Thrust bearing race 29. B5 brake flange 30. B5 brake plate 31. O-ring 32. Snap ring 33. Return spring 34. B5 brake piston 35. Transaxle case cover A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-627 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE5F22A] WCIA0385E 1. Snap ring 2. 2nd brake plate 3. Return spring 4. O-ring 5. Oil pump assembly 6. Oil seal 7. 2nd brake piston 8. 2nd brake sleeve 9. Snap ring Revision: March 2005 AT-628 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE5F22A] 10. 2nd brake disc 11. 13. 2nd coast brake hub 14. Snap ring 2nd brake flange 12. One-way clutch No.1 A 15. 2nd coast brake plate 16. Snap ring 17. O-ring 18. 2nd coast brake piston 19. Return spring 20. 2nd coast brake disc 21. 2nd coast brake flange 22. Thrust washer 23. Thrust washer 24. Return spring 25. 1st and reverse brake piston 26. Thrust bearing race 27. Counter drive gear sub assembly B 28. One-way clutch outer race sub assem- 29. Thrust washer bly 30. Snap ring 31. Thrust bearing 32. O-ring 33. Snap ring 34. Planetary gear assembly 35. FR planetary ring gear assembly 36. Snap ring 37. 1st and reverse brake disc 38. 1st and reverse brake flange 39. 1st and reverse brake plate 40. 1st and reverse brake flange 41. One-way clutch No.2 42. Thrust bearing 43. Thrust bearing race 44. Thrust needle roller bearing 45. Seal ring 46. Forward and direct clutch assembly 47. Planetary sun gear sub assembly 48. Thrust bearing race 49. Thrust needle roller bearing 50. RR planetary ring gear assembly AT D E 51. Thrust needle roller bearing 52. Thrust bearing race F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-629 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE5F22A] WCIA0533E 1. Transaxle case cover 2. Seal ring 3. Forward clutch accumulator piston 4. Compression spring 5. Accumulator cover 6. O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. Range lever 9. Washer plate Revision: March 2005 AT-630 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE5F22A] 10. PNP switch 11. Lock washer 12. Parking lock pawl 13. Torsion spring No.1 14. Parking lock pawl shaft 15. Spring guide sleeve 16. Torsion spring No.2 17. Parking lockpin sub assembly 18. U/D brake apply tube sub assembly 19. Tube clamp 20. Oil reservoir plate 21. Oil cleaner magnet 22. Tube clamp 23. Differential gear lube apply tube 24. Seal ring 25. Thrust roller bearing 26. Straight screw plug 27. O-ring 28. Straight screw plug 29. Differential side oil seal 30. Torque converter 31. Transaxle housing 32. O-ring 33. O-ring 34. Spring washer 35. Hexagon bolt 36. Washer 37. ATF cooler assembly 38. gasket 39. Drain plug 40. Breather hose 41. O-ring 42. A/T fluid charging pipe 43. A/T fluid level gauge 44. Manual valve lever sub assembly 45. Parking lock rod sub assembly 46. Control valve assembly 47. Suction cover gasket 48. Suction cover 49. Side cover 50. Seal bolt 51. Governor apply gasket A B AT D E 52. Sensor clamp 53. Terminal cord assembly 54. Transaxle lube apply tube 55. Tube clamp 56. Tube clamp 57. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly 58. Bearing race 59. Seal ring 60. Seal bolt 61. Turbine revolution sensor 62. Differential side oil seal 63. Manual valve oil seal 64. O-ring 65. Anchor bolt 66. Revolution sensor 67. Seal bolt 68. Governor apply gasket 69. Transaxle case 70. Oil reserver plate 71. Oil strainer sub assembly 72. Manual detent spring sub assembly 73. Parking lock pawl braket 74. Governor apply gasket 75. Copper washer F G H 76. A/T fluid cooler tube I J K L M Revision: March 2005 AT-631 2005 Altima OVERHAUL [RE5F22A] Locations of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Thrust Washers ECS009JM WCIA0336E Revision: March 2005 AT-632 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] DISASSEMBLY Disassembly 1. 2. PFP:31020 A ECS009JN Drain ATF through drain plug. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Remove torque converter by transaxle case it firmly and turning while pulling straight out. B AT D SCIA4134E 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove A/T fluid level gauge. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe. Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe. Remove air breather hose. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube. E F G H SCIA4135E I 8. Remove turbine revolution sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the turbine revolution sensor and transaxle case. J K L SCIA4137E 9. Remove revolution sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the revolution sensor and transaxle case. M SCIA4136E Revision: March 2005 AT-633 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 10. Remove nut and range lever. SCIA4138E 11. Pry off the lock washer using flat blade screwdriver. NOTE: Do not reuse lock washer. SCIA4139E 12. Loosen nut and remove lock washer. 13. Remove washer plate. NOTE: Do not reuse washer plate. SCIA4140E 14. Remove PNP switch from transaxle case. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 20 (0.79) 1 B 33 (1.30) 1 SCIA4141E Revision: March 2005 AT-634 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 15. Remove hexagon bolt. 16. Remove ATF cooler assembly, washer and spring washer. 17. Remove O-rings from the ATF cooler assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse spring washer or O-rings. A B AT SCIA4142E D 18. Remove side cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage side cover and transaxle case. E F G SCIA4143E NOTE: Do not reuse seal bolts. H I J K SCIA4144E L M Revision: March 2005 AT-635 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 19. Disconnect solenoid connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA4146E 20. Remove sensor clamp tightening bolt. SCIA4148E 21. Remove sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage A/T fluid temperature sensor. SCIA4147E 22. Remove suction cover bolts. SCIA4150E Revision: March 2005 AT-636 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 23. Remove suction cover and suction cover gasket. NOTE: Do not reuse gasket. A B AT D SCIA4149E E 24. Remove control valve assembly tightening bolts from transaxle case. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 55 (2.17) 2 B 50 (1.97) 2 C 16 (0.63) 2 F G SCIA4152E 25. While holding control valve assembly, disconnect parking lock rod sub assembly from manual valve lever sub assembly and remove control valve assembly. NOTE: Shift position is “N”. H I J K SCIA4153E L 26. Remove governor apply gaskets. NOTE: Do not reuse gaskets. M SCIA4154E Revision: March 2005 AT-637 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 27. Remove terminal cord assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage solenoid connectors and A/T fluid temperature sensor. WCIA0471E 28. Remove oil pump assembly bolts from transaxle case. SCIA4156E SCIA4157E 29. Remove oil pump assembly, using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34280) SCIA5359E 30. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse oil seal. SCIA4396E Revision: March 2005 AT-638 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 31. Remove one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. 32. Remove thrust washer. A B AT SCIA4159E D 33. Remove transaxle housing tightening bolts from transaxle case. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 13 B 35 (1.38) 2 C 45 (1.77) 1 D* — 1 E F *:Torx bolt G SCIA4160E H I J SCIA5495E K 34. Remove transaxle housing using a soft hammer. L M SCIA4162E 35. Remove governor apply gasket. 36. Remove seal ring. NOTE: Do not reuse gasket or oil seal. SCIA4163E Revision: March 2005 AT-639 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 37. Remove tube clamp. SCIA4164E 38. Remove differential gear lube apply tube, using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube apply tube. Be careful not to damage transaxle housing. SCIA4165E 39. Remove oil reservoir plate. SCIA4166E 40. Remove oil cleaner magnets from oil reservoir plate. SCIA4167E 41. Remove differential gear assembly. SCIA4168E Revision: March 2005 AT-640 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 42. Remove oil strainer sub assembly. A B AT SCIA4169E D 43. Remove oil reservoir plate. E F G SCIA4170E 44. Remove tube clamp. H I J SCIA4171E 45. Remove U/D brake apply tube sub assembly, using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage U/D brake apply tube sub assembly. Be careful not to damage transaxle case. L M SCIA4172E 46. Disconnect manual detent spring sub assembly from manual valve lever sub assembly, using suitable tool. SCIA4174E Revision: March 2005 AT-641 K 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 47. Remove manual valve lever sub assembly from parking lock rod sub assembly. SCIA4175E 48. Remove parking lock rod sub assembly. SCIA4176E 49. Remove bolts for manual detent spring sub assembly. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 16.7 (0.657) 1 B 14.0 (0.551) 1 SCIA4177E 50. Remove manual detent spring sub assembly. SCIA4178E 51. Remove parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1. SCIA4179E Revision: March 2005 AT-642 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 52. Remove parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl. A B AT WCIA0420E D 53. Remove parking lockpin sub assembly. E F G SCIA4181E 54. Remove spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2. H I J SCIA4182E 55. Remove manual valve oil seal, using a flat blade screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case. NOTE: Do not reuse oil seal. L M SCIA4183E 56. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race from U/D gear assembly. WCIA0338E Revision: March 2005 AT-643 K 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 57. Remove U/D gear assembly. 58. Remove seal rings from U/D gear assembly. SCIA4185E 59. Remove U/D clutch assembly. SCIA4186E 60. Remove anchor bolt. SCIA4193E 61. Remove U/D brake band assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case. SCIA4187E 62. Remove U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing races. SCIA5505E Revision: March 2005 AT-644 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 63. Remove U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. 64. Remove thrust needle roller bearing adjust shims and thrust bearing race from U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. A B AT WCIA0339E D 65. Remove snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers. E F G SCIA4190E 66. Remove U/D brake damper assembly. 67. Remove O-rings from U/D brake damper assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. H I J SCIA4191E 68. Remove U/D brake piston assembly and compression spring. 69. Remove O-ring from U/D brake piston assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. K L M SCIA4192E 70. Remove transaxle case cover bolts from transaxle case. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 8 B 45 (1.77) 1 C 48 (1.89) 2 D* — 1 *:Stud bolt SCIA4194E Revision: March 2005 AT-645 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] WCIA0340E 71. Remove the transaxle case cover using a soft hammer. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case cover. SCIA4196E 72. Remove transaxle case cover. SCIA4197E 73. Remove governor apply gaskets from transaxle case. NOTE: Do not reuse gaskets. SCIA4198E Revision: March 2005 AT-646 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 74. Remove tube clamp. A B AT SCIA4199E D 75. Remove transaxle lube apply tube, using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage transaxle lube apply tube. Be careful not to damage transaxle case. E F G SCIA4200E 76. Remove forward and direct clutch assembly. 77. Remove thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and seal ring from forward and direct clutch assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse seal ring. H I J WCIA0384E K 78. Remove planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle roller bearings. L M SCIA5499E 79. Measure the inner diameter of planetary sun gear sub assembly bushing, using a suitable bore gauge. CAUTION: Measure at different places and take an average. If it is greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary sun gear sub assembly. Standard Allowable limit :22.200 - 22.226mm (0.8740 - 0.8750in) :22.276 (0.8770in) SCIA4255E Revision: March 2005 AT-647 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] SCIA4256E 80. Remove RR planetary ring gear assembly. 81. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race from RR planetary ring gear assembly. SCIA4203E 82. Remove planetary gear assembly. 83. Remove thrust bearing race from planetary gear assembly. SCIA4204E 84. Measure the inner diameter of planetary gear assembly bushing, using a suitable bore gauge CAUTION: Measure at different places and take an average. If it is greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary gear assembly. Standard Allowable limit :30.056 - 30.082mm (1.1833 - 1.1843in) :30.132 (1.1863in) SCIA4254E 85. Remove thrust bearing. SCIA4205E Revision: March 2005 AT-648 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 86. Remove snap ring, using flat blade screwdriver. A B AT SCIA4206E D 87. Remove 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake discs and 1st and reverse brake plates. ● INSPECTION – Check that the sliding surface of discs are not worn and burnt. If necessary, replace them. CAUTION: Replace new discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in A/T fluid. E F G SCIA4207E 88. Remove FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch No. 2. H I J SCIA4208E K 89. Make sure that the FR planetary ring gear assembly should turn freely counterclockwise and should lock clockwise. L M SCIA4414E 90. Remove snap ring, using a flat blade screwdriver. SCIA4209E Revision: March 2005 AT-649 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 91. Remove return spring. SCIA4210E 92. While pushing the piston by hand, apply compressed air (4Kg/ cm2 ) into the oil passage of transaxle case as shown and remove 1st and reverse brake piston. SCIA4211E 93. Remove O-rings from 1st and reverse brake piston. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. SCIA4212E 94. Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing race from counter drive gear sub assembly. SCIA4213E 95. Remove snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers. SCIA4214E Revision: March 2005 AT-650 2005 Altima DISASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 96. Remove counter drive gear sub assembly. A B AT SCIA4215E 97. Remove differential side oil seal from transaxle case and transaxle housing, using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and transaxle housing. NOTE: Do not reuse oil seals. D E F G SCIA4216E H I J SCIA4217E K 98. Remove outer race and adjust shim from transaxle case, using Tool. Tool number L : ST30612000 (J-25742-2) M SCIA5360E 99. Remove thrust roller bearing from transaxle housing, using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) NOTE: Do not reuse thrust roller bearing. SCIA5361E Revision: March 2005 AT-651 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake PFP:00000 ECS009JO COMPONENTS SCIA4384E 1. Return spring 2. Snap ring 3. O-ring 4. Oil seal 5. Oil pump assembly 6. 2nd brake piston 7. 2nd brake sleeve 8. O-ring 9. 2nd brake flange 10. 2nd brake plate 11. 2nd brake disc 12. Snap ring 13. 2nd coast brake piston 14. Return spring 15. Thrust washer 16. 2nd coast brake flange 17. 2nd coast brake plate 18. Snap ring 19. 2nd coast brake disc 20. Snap ring DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse old seal. SCIA4396E Revision: March 2005 AT-652 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 2. Remove thrust washer from oil pump assembly. A B AT SCIA4218E D 3. Remove snap ring, using a flat-bladed screwdriver. E F G SCIA4219E 4. Remove 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake disc and 2nd coast brake plate. H I J SCIA4220E 5. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool. Tool number 6. K : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) L Remove snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers. M SCIA5362E 7. Remove return spring. SCIA4222E Revision: March 2005 AT-653 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 8. 9. While pushing the 2nd coast brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown and remove 2nd coast brake piston. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the O-ring and 2nd coast brake piston. Remove O-rings from 2nd coast brake piston. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. SCIA4223E 10. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool. SCIA4224E 11. Remove 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates. SCIA4225E 12. Remove return spring. SCIA4226E 13. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly and 2nd brake piston. SCIA4227E Revision: March 2005 AT-654 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 14. While pushing the 2nd brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown in the figure and remove 2nd brake piston (With 2nd brake sleeve). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve. 15. Remove O-rings from 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve. NOTE: Do no reuse O-rings. A B AT SCIA4228E D INSPECTION ● Check that the sliding surface of disc and plate is not worn or burnt. If the disc or plate is worn or burnt, replace it NOTE: Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF. F ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. E Install new O-rings in 2nd brake sleeve and 2nd brake piston. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. Press 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve into oil pump assembly. G H I SCIA4229E J 4. Install snap ring, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly. K L M SCIA4227E 5. Place return spring on 2nd brake piston with the spring side up. SCIA4226E Revision: March 2005 AT-655 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 6. Install 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates. SCIA4225E 7. Install snap ring, using suitable tool. SCIA4224E 8. Install new O-rings in 2nd coast brake piston. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-rings. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. 9. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. 10. Press 2nd coast brake piston into oil pump assembly. SCIA4230E 11. Install return spring. SCIA4222E 12. Compress return spring, using Tool. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) 13. Install snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers. SCIA5362E Revision: March 2005 AT-656 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 14. Install 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake disc and 2nd coast brake plate. A B AT SCIA4220E D 15. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) E 16. Install snap ring, using suitable tool. F G SCIA5365E 17. Set a dial indicator as shown in the figure. H 2 18. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm ) into the oil passage as shown, measure 2nd brake piston stroke and check 2nd brake piston moves smoothly. Piston stroke I :1.10 - 1.50mm (0.0433 - 0.0591in) If 2nd brake piston stroke is out standards, select another flange. Refer to AT-695, "2ND BRAKE" . J SCIA5501E K 19. Set a dial indicator as shown in the figure. 20. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown, measure 2nd coast brake piston stroke and check 2nd coast brake piston moves smoothly. Piston stroke L :0.76 - 1.44mm (0.0299 - 0.0567in) M SCIA4233E 21. Install thrust washer facing the flat surface up. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SCIA4218E Revision: March 2005 AT-657 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 22. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush with the oil pump face, using Tool. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) NOTE: Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. ● SCIA5364E One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1 ECS009JP COMPONENTS SCIA4234E 1. Thrust washer 2. One-way clutch outer race sub assembly 4. Thrust washer 5. 2nd coast brake hub 3. One-way clutch No.1 DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove thrust washer from one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. SCIA4235E Revision: March 2005 AT-658 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 2. 3. Remove 2nd coast brake hub from one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. Remove thrust washer from 2nd coast brake hub. A B AT SCIA4236E 4. D Remove one-way clutch No.1 from one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. E F G SCIA4237E H ASSEMBLY 1. Install one-way clutch No.1 into the one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. CAUTION: Do not mistake the direction of one-way clutch No.1. I J K SCIA4238E 2. 3. Install thrust washer into 2nd coast brake hub. NOTE: ● Coat the thrust washer with grease. ● Align the tab of the washer with the hollow of the 2nd coast brake hub. Install 2nd coast brake hub into one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. NOTE: While turning the 2nd coast brake hub, slide it into one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. Revision: March 2005 AT-659 L M SCIA4236E 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 4. Coat the thrust washer with petroleum jelly. Align the tab of the washer with the hollow of the one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SCIA4235E INSPECTION ● Hold one-way clutch outer race sub assembly, and check that 2nd coast brake hub should turn freely clockwise and should lock counterclockwise. SCIA4239E Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake ECS009JQ COMPONENTS SCIA5441E Revision: March 2005 AT-660 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 1. Transaxle case cover 2. Seal ring 3. O-ring 4. Return spring 5. Snap ring 6. B5 brake piston 7. Seal ring 8. Bearing race 9. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly 10. Tube clamp 11. Forward clutch accumulator piston 12. Compression spring 13. Accumulator cover 14. O-ring 15. Seal ring 16. B5 brake cushion plate 17. B5 brake plate 18. B5 brake flange 19. Snap ring 20. B5 brake disc A B AT DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove tube clamps. D E F SCIA5502E 2. G Remove U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly, using suitable flat blade screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly and transaxle case cover. H I J SCIA4241E 3. Remove bearing race and seal rings from transaxle case cover. K L M WCIA0386E 4. 5. 6. Remove accumulator cover, compression spring and forward clutch accumulator piston. Remove O-ring from the accumulator cover. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. Remove seal ring from the forward clutch accumulator piston. NOTE: Do not reuse seal ring. SCIA4243E Revision: March 2005 AT-661 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 7. Remove snap ring, using suitable flat blade screwdriver. SCIA4244E 8. Remove B5 brake flange, B5 brake discs, B5 brake plates and B5 brake cushion plate. SCIA4245E 9. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation. 10. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool. SCIA5365E 11. Remove return spring. SCIA4247E 12. While pushing B5 brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown and remove B5 brake piston. SCIA4248E Revision: March 2005 AT-662 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 13. Remove O-rings from B5 brake piston. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. 14. Remove seal ring from transaxle case cover. NOTE: Do not reuse seal ring. A B AT D SCIA4249E E INSPECTION ● Check that the sliding surface of disc and plate is not worn or burnt. If the disc or plate is worn or burnt, replace it NOTE: Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF. ASSEMBLY 1. 3. 4. Install new seal ring in transaxle case cover. NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal ring. ● Apply ATF to seal ring. Install new O-rings in B5 brake piston. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-rings. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case cover with ATF. Press B5 brake piston into the transaxle case cover. 5. Place return spring on B5 brake piston. 2. F G H I J SCIA4249E K L M SCIA4247E 6. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool. Tool number 7. : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation. Install snap ring, using suitable tool. SCIA5365E Revision: March 2005 AT-663 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 8. 9. Install B5 brake cushion plate. CAUTION: Be sure direction of B5 brake cushion plate. Install B5 brake flange, B5 brake plates and B5 brake discs as shown. SCIA4245E 10. Install snap ring, using suitable flat blade screwdriver. SCIA4244E 11. Install new O-ring in accumulator cover. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. 12. Install new seal ring in forward clutch accumulator piston. NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal ring. ● Apply ATF to seal ring. 13. Install forward clutch accumulator piston, compression spring and accumulator cover in transaxle case cover. 14. Tighten accumulator cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-660, "COMPONENTS" . SCIA4243E 15. Install new seal rings and bearing race in transaxle case cover. NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. ● Refer to ASSEMBLY to select proper bearing race. WCIA0386E Revision: March 2005 AT-664 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 16. Install the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly, using suitable soft hammer. A B AT SCIA4252E D 17. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-660, "COMPONENTS" . E F G SCIA5502E 18. Set a dial indicator as shown. H 19. When applying compressed air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown, measure the B5 brake piston stroke and check the B5 brake piston moves smoothly. Piston stroke I :2.34 - 2.70mm (0.0921 - 0.1063in) If the B5 brake piston stroke is out standards, select another flange. Refer to AT-696, "B5 BRAKE" . J SCIA5503E Differential Gear Assembly K ECS009JR COMPONENTS L M SCIA4407E Revision: March 2005 AT-665 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] 1. O-ring 2. Tapered roller bearing 4. Tapered roller bearing 5. O-ring 3. Differential gear assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove O-rings from differential gear assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. SCIA4408E 2. Remove tapered roller bearings, using suitable puller and Tool. Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) NOTE: Do not reuse tapered roller bearings. SCIA5366E Revision: March 2005 AT-666 2005 Altima REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS [RE5F22A] ASSEMBLY 1. A Install new tapered roller bearings in differential gear assembly, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100500 ( — ) : ST33720000 (J-25405) B NOTE: Do not reuse tapered roller bearings. AT D E F G SCIA5368E 2. H Install new O-rings in differential gear assembly. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-rings. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. I J K SCIA4408E L M Revision: March 2005 AT-667 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. PFP:00000 ECS009JS Install new differential side oil seal into transaxle case as specified using Tool. Tool number Distance : ST33400001 (J-26082) : 3.0 - 4.0 mm (0.118 - 0.157 in) NOTE: Do not reuse differential side oil seal. ● Apply ATF to differential side oil seal. ● SCIA5369E SCIA4473E 2. Install counter drive gear sub assembly. SCIA4215E 3. Install snap ring using a snap ring pliers. SCIA4214E Revision: March 2005 AT-668 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 4. 5. 6. Install new O-rings in 1st and reverse brake piston. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-rings. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF. Install 1st and reverse brake piston in transaxle case. A B AT SCIA4212E D 7. Put return spring on 1st and reverse brake piston. E F G SCIA4210E 8. Install the snap ring into groove while compressing the return spring by hand with a flat-bladed screwdriver. H I J SCIA4209E 9. Put thrust bearing race and thrust bearing on counter drive gear sub assembly. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust and thrust bearing race. K L M SCIA4213E 10. Install FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch No.2. SCIA4208E Revision: March 2005 AT-669 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 11. Install 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake discs and 1st and reverse brake plates. SCIA4207E 12. Install snap ring using a flat-bladed screwdriver. SCIA4206E 13. Set a dial indicator as shown. 14. Applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) and measure the 1st and reverse brake piston stroke. Piston stroke : 1.39 - 2.21 mm (0.0547 - 0.0870 in) In a case that is out of reference, check the following items: ● Oil pressure leak ● Damage of O-ring ● Wear damage of disc SCIA4258E 15. Install thrust bearing. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing. SCIA4205E 16. Install planetary gear assembly. 17. Install thrust bearing race in planetary gear assembly. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing race. SCIA4204E Revision: March 2005 AT-670 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 18. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in RR planetary ring gear assembly. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing. 19. Install RR planetary ring gear assembly. A B AT SCIA4203E D 20. Install planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle roller bearing. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing. E F G SCIA5499E 21. Install forward and direct clutch assembly. 22. Install thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and new seal ring in forward and direct clutch assembly. NOTE: ● Do not reuse old seal ring. ● Apply ATF to seal ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race. H I J WCIA0384E K 23. Check the distance of “A”. Dimension “A” : 50.850 - 51.825 mm (2.0020 - 2.0404 in) L CAUTION: If the distance is out of standards, adjust with in standards again. M SCIA4259E 24. Install transaxle lube apply tube using a soft hammer. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend and damage transaxle lube apply tube. SCIA4260E Revision: March 2005 AT-671 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 25. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4199E 26. Install new governor apply gaskets in transaxle case. NOTE: ● Do not reuse gaskets. ● Apply petroleum jelly to gaskets. SCIA4198E 27. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case. SCIA4197E 28. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . CAUTION: Do not reuse seal bolts. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 8 B 45 (1.77) 1 C 48 (1.89) 2 D* — 1 SCIA4194E *:Stud bolt WCIA0340E Revision: March 2005 AT-672 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 29. Tighten anchor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . A B AT SCIA4193E 30. Install new O-ring in U/D brake piston assembly. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-rings. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. 31. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF. 32. Install compression spring and U/D brake piston assembly. D E F G SCIA4192E H 33. Install new O-rings in U/D brake damper assembly. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. 34. Install U/D brake damper assembly. I J SCIA4191E 35. Install snap ring using a snap ring pliers. CAUTION: If the snap ring is deformed, replace it. K L M SCIA4190E 36. Install thrust needle roller bearing adjust shim and thrust bearing race in U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to adjust shim, thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race. 37. Install U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. WCIA0339E Revision: March 2005 AT-673 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 38. Install U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing races. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races. SCIA5505E 39. Install U/D brake band assembly. SCIA4187E 40. Install U/D clutch assembly. SCIA4186E 41. Measure the U/D brake piston stroke applying and releasing the compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) as shown. CAUTION: Measure U/D brake piston stroke after assembling U/D clutch assembly. Piston Stroke : 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661 in) SCIA4263E SCIA4625E Revision: March 2005 AT-674 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 42. If the piston stroke is out of standards, select another U/D brake piston. Refer to AT-696, "U/D BRAKE" . A B AT SCIA4264E D Adjustment ECS009JT ADJUST PRELOAD OF TAPERED ROLLER BEARING 1. Install adjust shim and outer race in transaxle case using Tool. Tool number E : KV40100621 (J-25273) : ST30022000 ( — ) F G SCIA5370E 2. 3. H Install differential gear assembly in transaxle case. Install transaxle housing into transaxle case. I J K SCIA4265E 4. Tighten transaxle housing and transaxle case bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . CAUTION: Use old self-sealing bolts during preload checking and adjustment procedures. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 13 B 35 (1.38) 2 C 45 (1.77) 1 D* — 1 Revision: March 2005 AT-675 L M SCIA4267E 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] *:Torx bolt SCIA5495E 5. Measure turning torque of differential gear assembly using Tool. Tool number 6. : KV40102500 (J-28815) : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Turn differential gear assembly in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly. Turning torque (New bearing) : 0.7 - 1.2 N·m (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb) If the preload is not within specification, remove differential gear assembly from transaxle case. Re-select adjust shim. Refer to AT-697, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS" . Assembly (2) 1. 2. SCIA5371E ECS009JU Remove transaxle housing and differential gear assembly from transaxle case. Install U/D clutch assembly. SCIA4186E 3. 4. Install new seal rings in U/D gear assembly. NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply ATF to seal rings. Install U/D gear assembly. SCIA4185E Revision: March 2005 AT-676 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 5. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in U/D gear assembly. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race. A B AT WCIA0338E D a. Make sure that measurement ″E″ is within the specifications. Specification ″E″ : 1.269 - 1.645 mm (0.0500 - 0.0648 in) E F G SCIA5452E H NOTE: ″E″ is the height between the edge of the transaxle case and the roller part of thrust needle roller bearing. I J K SCIA5459E L M Revision: March 2005 AT-677 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] b. c. If measurement ″E″ is outside the specification, replace ″T″ with a one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-697, "U/D GEAR ASSEMBLY" . CAUTION: When adjusting ″T″, use ″S″ of thickness 0.81 mm (0.32 in). If all of ″T″ do not fit ″E″ within the specifications, replace ″S″ with a one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-697, "U/D RR PLANETARY RING GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY" . CAUTION: When adjusting ″S″, use ″T″ of thickness 0.80 mm (0.31 in). SCIA5488E d. Make sure that measurement ″E″ is within specifications. SCIA5452E 6. Install new manual valve oil seal into transaxle case until it is flush with the transaxle case face, using Tool. Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) NOTE: Do not reuse manual valve oil seal. ● Apply ATF to manual valve oil seal. ● SCIA5486E 7. 8. Install spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2 in transaxle case. Tighten spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2 torx bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4182E Revision: March 2005 AT-678 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 9. Install parking lockpin sub assembly. A B AT SCIA4181E D 10. Install parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl. E F G WCIA0420E 11. Install parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1. H I J SCIA4179E K 12. Install manual detent spring sub assembly. L M SCIA4178E 13. Temporary tightening the bolts. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 16.7 (0.657) 1 B 14.0 (0.551) 1 SCIA4177E Revision: March 2005 AT-679 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 14. Install parking lock rod sub assembly. SCIA4176E 15. Install manual valve lever sub assembly connect parking lock rod sub assembly to it. SCIA4175E 16. Connect manual detent spring sub assembly to manual valve lever sub assembly using a flat-bladed screwdriver and. SCIA4174E 17. Tighten manual detent spring sub assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4550E Revision: March 2005 AT-680 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 18. Install U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using a soft hammer. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage U/D brake apply tube sub assembly. A B AT SCIA4270E D 19. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . E F G SCIA4171E 20. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle case. 21. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" . H I J SCIA4170E 22. Install oil strainer sub assembly in transaxle case. 23. Tighten oil strainer sub assembly bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . K L M SCIA4169E 24. Install differential gear assembly. SCIA4168E Revision: March 2005 AT-681 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 25. Install new differential side oil seal into transaxle housing as specified using Tool. Tool number Distance : ST33400001 (J-26082) : 14.8 - 15.8 mm (0.583 - 0.622 in) NOTE: Do not reuse differential side oil seal. ● Apply ATF to differential side oil seal. ● SCIA5372E SCIA4474E 26. Install new thrust roller bearing in transaxle housing using Tool. Tool number :ST30720000 (J-25405) NOTE: Do not reuse thrust roller bearing. SCIA5373E 27. Install oil cleaner magnets on oil reservoir plate. SCIA4167E 28. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle housing. 29. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" . SCIA4166E Revision: March 2005 AT-682 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 30. Install differential gear lube apply tube using a soft hammer. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube apply tube. A B AT SCIA4272E D 31. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . E F G SCIA4164E 32. Install new governor apply gasket. NOTE: ● Do not reuse governor apply gasket. ● Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gasket. 33. Install new seal ring. NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal ring. ● Apply ATF to seal ring. H I J SCIA4163E 34. Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1281B) or equivalent to transaxle housing as shown. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle housing and transaxle case. L M WCIA0529E 35. Install transaxle housing in transaxle case. SCIA4160E Revision: March 2005 AT-683 K 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 36. Tighten transaxle housing bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" . NOTE: Do not reuse seal bolt. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 13 B 35 (1.38) 2 C 45 (1.77) 1 D* — 1 SCIA5495E *:Torx bolt 37. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush with oil pump face using Tool. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) NOTE: Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. ● SCIA5364E 38. Install thrust washer and one- way clutch outer race sub assembly in oil pump assembly. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SCIA4274E 39. Check the distance of “B”. “B” : 51.09 - 51.71 mm (2.0114 - 2.0358 in) CAUTION: If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards again. SCIA4275E Revision: March 2005 AT-684 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 40. Place oil pump assembly through the input shaft in horizontal position, and align the bolt holes of the oil pump assembly with transaxle case. Lightly press oil pump assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. A B AT SCIA4276E D 41. Tighten oil pump assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" . E F G SCIA4156E H I J SCIA4157E K 42. Set a dial indicator as shown, move the input shaft and measure the end play. End play L : 0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.00224 in) M SCIA4277E If end play is out of standards, select another thrust bearing race. Refer to AT-696, "FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY" . WCIA0386E Revision: March 2005 AT-685 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 43. Remove transaxle case cover. 44. Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1281B) or equivalent to transaxle case cover as shown. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle case cover and transaxle. WCIA0530E 45. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case. SCIA4197E 46. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . CAUTION: Do not reuse seal bolts. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 8 B 45 (1.77) 1 C 48 (1.89) 2 D* — 1 SCIA4194E *:Stud bolt WCIA0340E 47. Install new governor apply gasket. NOTE: ● Do not reuse governor apply gaskets. ● Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gaskets. SCIA4154E Revision: March 2005 AT-686 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 48. Install terminal cord assembly. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to break the solenoid connector and A/T fluid temperature sensor. NOTE: Apply ATF to O-ring. A B AT WCIA0471E 49. While holding control valve assembly, connect the parking lock rod sub assembly to manual valve lever sub assembly. NOTE: Shift position is “N”. D E F G SCIA4153E 50. Tighten control valve assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 55 (2.17) 2 B 50 (1.97) 2 C 16 (0.63) 2 H I J SCIA4152E 51. Install suction cover and new suction cover gasket in control valve assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse suction cover gasket. K L M SCIA4149E 52. Tighten new suction cover gasket and suction cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4150E Revision: March 2005 AT-687 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 53. Install sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor in control valve assembly. SCIA4147E 54. Tighten sensor clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4148E 55. Connect the solenoid connectors. SCIA4146E 56. Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1281B) or equivalent to side cover as shown. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from side cover and transaxle case. WCIA0531E Revision: March 2005 AT-688 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 57. Install side cover in transaxle case. A B AT SCIA4143E 58. Tighten side cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" . NOTE: Do not reuse seal bolt. D E F G SCIA4144E 59. Install new O-rings in ATF cooler assembly. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-rings. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. 60. Install ATF cooler assembly, washer and new spring washer. CAUTION: Do not reuse spring washer. 61. Tighten hexagon bolt specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . H I J SCIA4142E 62. Install PNP switch to manual valve lever sub assembly. 63. Temporary tightening the bolts. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 20 (0.79) 1 B 33 (1.30) 1 L M SCIA4141E 64. Install washer plate and lock washer. NOTE: Do not reuse washer plate and lock washer. 65. Tighten nut specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4140E Revision: March 2005 AT-689 K 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 66. Install Tool. Tool number : KV991J0060 (J-45404) 67. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. SCIA5374E 68. Tighten PNP switch bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4434E 69. Bend the lock washer using a flat-bladed screwdriver. SCIA4139E 70. Install range lever in manual valve lever sub assembly. 71. Tighten range lever nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . SCIA4138E 72. Install turbine revolution sensor in transaxle case. 73. Tighten turbine revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal bolt. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. SCIA4137E Revision: March 2005 AT-690 2005 Altima ASSEMBLY [RE5F22A] 74. Install revolution sensor in transaxle case. 75. Tighten revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" . NOTE: ● Do not reuse seal bolt. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. A B AT SCIA4136E 76. Install new O-ring in A/T fluid charging pipe. NOTE: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. 77. Install A/T fluid charging pipe in transaxle housing. 78. Install A/T fluid cooler tube. NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. 79. Tighten A/T fluid cooler tube union to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . 80. Install air breather hose. 81. Install A/T fluid level gauge. D E F G SCIA4135E H 82. Install drain plug in transaxle housing. 83. Tighten drain plug to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" . NOTE: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. 84. Install torque converter. I J K L SCIA4134E 85. Check the dimension of “C”. Dimension “C” : 14.0 mm (0.55 in) CAUTION: If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards again. SCIA4279E Revision: March 2005 AT-691 2005 Altima M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE5F22A] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS009JV Engine VQ35DE Automatic transaxle model RE5F22A Automatic transaxle model code number 9J500 8Y100 Stall torque ratio 1.8: 1 Transaxle gear ratio 1st 4.657 2nd 3.033 3rd 1.982 4th 1.342 5th 1.018 Reverse 5.114 Final drive 2.269 Recommended fluid Fluid capacity 2.440 Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF* 7.3 (7-3/4, 6-3/8) (US qt, Imp qt) CAUTION: ● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF. Do not mix with other fluid. ● Using automatic transaxle fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF will deteriorate driveability and automatic transaxle durability, and may damage the automatic transaxle, which is not covered by the warranty. *: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Shift Schedule ECS009JW VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS Accelerator angle Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 100 % 63 (39) 100 (62) 156 (97) 230 (143) 219 (136) 150 (93) 88 (55) 43 (27) 90 % 63 (39) 100 (62) 156 (97) 230 (143) 219 (136) 150 (93) 88 (55) 43 (27) 80 % 63 (39) 100 (62) 156 (97) 230 (143) 219 (136) 150 (93) 88 (55) 43 (27) 70 % 63 (39) 100 (62) 156 (97) 230 (143) 208 (129) 149 (93) 86 (53) 43 (27) 60 % 63 (39) 100 (62) 156 (97) 230 (143) 201 (125) 143 (89) 80 (50) 43 (27) 50 % 63 (39) 95 (59) 145 (90) 214 (133) 187 (116) 130 (81) 73 (45) 43 (27) 40 % 53 (33) 87 (54) 124 (77) 182 (113) 156 (97) 97 (60) 57 (35) 34 (21) 30 % 39 (24) 68 (42) 95 (59) 134 (83) 112 (70) 62 (39) 37 (23) 20 (12) 20 % 29 (18) 49 (30) 65 (40) 92 (57) 63 (39) 42 (26) 23 (14) 8 (5) 10 % 20 (12) 31 (19) 41 (25) 58 (36) 47 (29) 34 (21) 23 (14) 8 (5) Revision: March 2005 AT-692 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE5F22A] VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 8Y100 MODELS A Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 100 % 58 (36) 93 (58) 144 (89) 213 (132) 203 (126) 139 (86) 81 (50) 40 (25) 90 % 58 (36) 93 (58) 144 (89) 213 (132) 203 (126) 139 (86) 81 (50) 40 (25) 80 % 58 (36) 93 (58) 144 (89) 213 (132) 203 (126) 139 (86) 81 (50) 40 (25) 70 % 58 (36) 93 (58) 144 (89) 213 (132) 193 (120) 138 (86) 80 (50) 40 (25) 60 % 58 (36) 93 (58) 144 (89) 213 (132) 186 (116) 133 (83) 75 (47) 40 (25) 50 % 58 (36) 88 (55) 135 (84) 199 (124) 173 (108) 121 (75) 68 (42) 40 (25) 40 % 49 (30) 80 (50) 115 (71) 169 (105) 145 (90) 90 (56) 53 (33) 31 (19) 30 % 36 (22) 61 (38) 85 (53) 124 (77) 103 (64) 58 (36) 34 (21) 19 (12) 20 % 27 (17) 43 (27) 58 (36) 86 (53) 59 (37) 39 (24) 22 (14) 8 (5) 10 % 19 (12) 27 (17) 35 (22) 53 (33) 44 (27) 32 (20) 22 (14) 8 (5) VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP- 9J500 MODELS AT D E F G H I Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 50 % 230 (143) 207 (129) 15% 115 (71) 74 (46) 0-8% 70 (43) 67 (42) ● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. ● Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine. ● Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. J K L VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP 8Y100 MODELS M Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 50 % 213 (132) 192 (119) 15% 106 (66) 69 (43) 0-8% 65 (40) 62 (39) ● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. ● Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine. ● Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. Revision: March 2005 B AT-693 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE5F22A] VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP - 9J500 MODEL Accelerator angle Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Gear position 0 - 10 % Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 43 (27) 40 (25) 5th 56 (35) 53 (33) ● Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. ● Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine. ● Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP - 8Y100 MODELS Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle Gear position 0 - 10 % Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 40 (25) 37 (23) 5th 52 (32) 49 (30) ● Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. ● Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine. ● Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. Stall Speed ECS009JX Stall speed 2,430 - 2,730 rpm Line Pressure ECS009JY Line pressure Engine speed kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D, M positions R position At idle speed 333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57) 500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88) At stall speed 1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202) 1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287) Time Lag ECS009JZ Selector lever Time N to D position Less than 0.7 sec. N to R position Less than 1.2 sec. Shift Solenoid Valves ECS009K0 Shift solenoid valve Shift position D M5 Remarks A B C D E P OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) PARK POSITION R OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Open) REVERSE POSITION N OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) NEUTRAL POSITION 1st ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 1⇔2 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 2nd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 2⇔3 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Open) 3rd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 3⇔4 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Open) 4th OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 4⇔5 OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 5th OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 5th OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Revision: March 2005 AT-694 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5 Locks in 5th gear* 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE5F22A] Shift solenoid valve Shift position Remarks A B C D E A M4 4th OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Locks in 4th gear* M3 3rd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Locks in 3rd gear* M2 2nd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) Locks in 2nd gear* M1 1st ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Open) Locks in 1st gear* *: Except when automated up/down shift control and up/down shift permission control are actuated. Refer to AT-418, "MANUAL MODE" . Solenoid Valves Solenoid valves Terminal Shift solenoid valve A (B) 1 - Ground Shift solenoid valve B (GY) 1 - Ground (GY) 1 - Ground Shift solenoid valve D (L) 1 - Ground Shift solenoid valve E (G) 1 - Ground Pressure control solenoid valve A (G) 1-2 (B) 1-2 (L) 1-2 Pressure control solenoid valve B AT ECS009K1 Connector (Color) Shift solenoid valve C B Resistance (Approx.) 11 - 16 Ω 5.0 - 5.6 Ω Pressure control solenoid valve C D E F G Specified resistance at 20°C (68°F). Clutch and Brakes ECS009K2 H 2ND BRAKE Number of 2nd brake plates 4 Number of 2nd brake discs 4 Number of 2nd brake flange 1 Piston stroke mm (in) I J 1.10 - 1.50 (0.0433 - 0.0591) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) Thickness of 2nd brake flanges 31537-8Y011 31537-8Y012 31537-8Y013 K *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. L 2ND COAST BRAKE Number of 2nd coast brake plates 3 Number of 2nd coast brake discs 3 Number of 2nd coast brake flange 1 Piston stroke mm (in) Revision: March 2005 M 0.76 - 1.44 (0.0299 - 0.0567) AT-695 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE5F22A] B5 BRAKE Number of B5 brake plates 6 Number of B5 brake discs 6 Number of B5 brake flange 1 Number of B5 brake cushion plate 1 Piston stroke mm (in) 2.34 - 2.70 (0.0921 - 0.1063) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 5.0 (0.197) 5.1 (0.202) 5.2 (0.205) 5.3 (0.209) 5.5 (0.217) Thickness of B5 brake flanges 31667-8Y016 31667-8Y017 31667-8Y018 31667-8Y019 31667-8Y020 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. 1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE Number of 1st and reverse brake plates 4 Number of 1st and reverse brake discs 5 Number of 1st and reverse brake flanges 2 Piston stroke mm (in) 1.39 - 2.21 (0.0547 - 0.0870) FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY Thickness mm (in) 0.81 (0.0319) 0.90 (0.0350) 1.00 (0.0400) 1.10 (0.0430) 1.20 (0.0470) 1.30 (0.0510) 1.40 (0.0550) 1.50 (0.0590) Thickness of thrust washer races End play mm (in) Part number*2 31435 8Y060 31435 8Y061 31435 8Y062 31435 8Y063 31435 8Y064 31435 8Y065 31435 8Y066 31435 8Y067 0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.0224) *2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. U/D BRAKE Piston type Mark A — 63.7 (2.508) 31615 8Y005 B 1 64.2 (2.528) 31615 8Y004 C 2 64.7 (2.547) 31615 8Y003 D 3 65.2 (2.567) 31615 8Y002 E 4 65.7 (2.587) 31615 8Y001 Piston stroke Piston length mm (in) mm (in) Part number* 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 AT-696 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE5F22A] U/D RR PLANETARY RING GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY Thickness mm (in) 0.81 (0.0319) 0.90 (0.0350) 1.00 (0.0400) 1.10 (0.0430) 1.20 (0.0470) 1.30 (0.0510) 1.40 (0.0550) 1.50 (0.0590) 1.60 (0.0630) Thickness of adjust shims A Part number*2 31435 8Y0100 31435 8Y0101 31435 8Y0102 31435 8Y0103 31435 8Y0104 31435 8Y0105 31435 8Y0106 31435 8Y0107 31435 8Y0108 B AT D *2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. U/D GEAR ASSEMBLY Thickness mm (in) 0.80 (0.0310) 0.90 (0.0350) 1.00 (0.0400) 1.10 (0.0430) 1.20 (0.0470) 1.30 (0.0510) 1.40 (0.0550) 1.50 (0.0590) Thickness of thrust washers E Part number*2 31435 8Y021 31435 8Y068 31435 8Y069 31435 8Y070 31435 8Y071 31435 8Y072 31435 8Y073 31435 8Y074 F G *2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. H PLANETARY SUN GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY Inner diameter of planetary sun gear sub assembly bushing mm (in). Standard 22.200 - 22.226 (0.8740 - 0.8750) Allowable limit 22.276 (0.8770) I Standard 30.056 - 30.082 (1.1833 - 1.1843) J Allowable limit 30.132 (1.1863) PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY Inner diameter of planetary gear assembly bushing mm (in). Final Drive ECS009K3 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.05 (0.0413) 1.10 (0.0433) 1.15 (0.0453) 1.20 (0.0472) 1.25 (0.0492) 1.30 (0.0512) 1.33 (0.0524) 1.36 (0.0535) 1.39 (0.0547) 1.42 (0.0559) 1.45 (0.0571) Part number* Thickness 31438-8Y001 31438-8Y002 31438-8Y003 31438-8Y004 31438-8Y005 31438-8Y006 31438-8Y007 31438-8Y008 31438-8Y009 31438-8Y010 31438-8Y011 31438-8Y012 mm (in) 1.48 (0.0583) 1.51 (0.0594) 1.54 (0.0606) 1.57 (0.0618) 1.60 (0.0630) 1.65 (0.0650) 1.70 (0.0669) 1.75 (0.0689) 1.80 (0.0709) 1.85 (0.0728) 1.90 (0.0748) Part number* 31438-8Y013 31438-8Y014 31438-8Y015 31438-8Y016 31438-8Y017 31438-8Y018 31438-8Y019 31438-8Y020 31438-8Y021 31438-8Y022 31438-8Y023 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. TURNING TORQUE Turning torque of final drive assembly Revision: March 2005 0.7 - 1.2 N·m (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb) AT-697 K 2005 Altima L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE5F22A] A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ECS009K4 Condition ATF temperature Voltage (Approx.) Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.5V 0.31 kΩ Turbine Revolution Sensor ECS009K5 Condition Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body. Signal Voltage* (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V *: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance. Revolution Sensor ECS009K6 Condition Signal Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body. Voltage* (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V *: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance. Revision: March 2005 AT-698 2005 Altima J AIR CONDITIONER SECTION ATC AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 4 Contaminated Refrigerant ........................................ 4 General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 5 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ......................... 5 A/C Identification Label ............................................ 6 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 6 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ...................................................... 6 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 7 Precautions for Servicing Compressor ................... 10 Precautions for Service Equipment ........................ 10 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT ............ 10 ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ...................... 10 VACUUM PUMP ..................................................11 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET .....................................11 SERVICE HOSES ................................................11 SERVICE COUPLERS ........................................ 12 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE ...................... 12 CHARGING CYLINDER ...................................... 12 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 12 PREPARATION ......................................................... 13 Special Service Tools ............................................. 13 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 13 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 15 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 17 Refrigerant Cycle ................................................... 17 REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 17 Refrigerant System Protection ............................... 17 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ............. 17 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE .............................. 17 Component Layout ................................................. 18 LUBRICANT ............................................................. 19 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 19 LUBRICANT ........................................................ 19 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ........................... 19 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ............................... 21 Revision: March 2005 Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System ...... 21 System Construction .............................................. 21 OPERATION ....................................................... 21 TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER ............................................................... 22 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ..................................... 22 FAN SPEED CONTROL ..................................... 23 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL ................................. 23 MODE DOOR CONTROL ................................... 23 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL ........................... 23 Overview of Control system .................................... 23 Control Operation ................................................... 24 AUTO SWITCH ................................................... 25 TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ............................................... 25 FAN AUTO SWITCH ........................................... 25 FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH ..................................... 25 RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH ..................... 25 DEFROSTER SWITCH ....................................... 25 MODE DIAL ......................................................... 25 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 25 Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 26 System Description ................................................. 27 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION... 27 CAN Communication System Description .............. 27 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 28 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 28 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 28 SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 28 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 29 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 29 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 31 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 32 Wiring Diagram — A/C,A — ................................... 33 Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value... 37 INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL .......... 37 FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT ................................... 37 ATC-1 2005 Altima F G H I ATC K L M FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE ... 37 Operational Check .................................................. 39 CONDITIONS: ..................................................... 39 PROCEDURE: ..................................................... 39 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control ........................................................................... 41 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 41 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 41 LAN System Circuit ................................................ 42 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 43 Mode Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 46 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 46 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 47 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 48 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 48 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ...................................... 49 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 49 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 50 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 51 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 51 Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 52 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 52 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 53 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 54 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 54 Blower Motor Circuit ............................................... 55 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 55 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 56 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 57 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 57 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 61 Magnet Clutch Circuit ............................................. 62 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 62 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 63 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 63 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 66 Insufficient Cooling ................................................. 67 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 67 PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS .................... 68 PERFORMANCE CHART ................................... 70 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE ......................................................... 70 Insufficient Heating ................................................. 74 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 74 Noise ...................................................................... 75 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 75 Ambient Sensor Circuit ........................................... 76 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 76 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS... 76 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 76 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 78 In-vehicle Sensor Circuit ......................................... 78 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 78 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 79 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 80 Sunload Sensor Circuit ........................................... 81 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 81 SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS ............................. 81 Revision: March 2005 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................81 COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................83 Intake Sensor Circuit ...............................................84 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................84 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................84 CONTROL UNIT ........................................................87 Removal and Installation .........................................87 FRONT AIR CONTROL .......................................87 AMBIENT SENSOR ..................................................88 Removal and Installation .........................................88 REMOVAL ............................................................88 INSTALLATION ....................................................88 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR ..............................................89 Removal and Installation .........................................89 REMOVAL ............................................................89 INSTALLATION ....................................................89 SUNLOAD SENSOR .................................................90 Removal and Installation .........................................90 REMOVAL ............................................................90 INSTALLATION ....................................................90 INTAKE SENSOR ......................................................91 Removal and Installation .........................................91 REMOVAL ............................................................91 INSTALLATION ....................................................91 BLOWER UNIT ..........................................................92 Removal and Installation .........................................92 REMOVAL ............................................................92 INSTALLATION ....................................................92 BLOWER MOTOR .....................................................93 Removal and Installation .........................................93 REMOVAL ............................................................93 INSTALLATION ....................................................93 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ..........................................94 Removal and Installation .........................................94 FUNCTION ..........................................................94 REPLACEMENT TIMING ....................................94 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................94 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY .................95 Removal and Installation .........................................95 REMOVAL ............................................................95 INSTALLATION ....................................................95 HEATER CORE .........................................................96 Removal and Installation .........................................96 REMOVAL ............................................................96 INSTALLATION ....................................................96 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ............................................97 Removal and Installation .........................................97 REMOVAL ............................................................97 INSTALLATION ....................................................97 MODE DOOR MOTOR ..............................................98 Removal and Installation .........................................98 REMOVAL ............................................................98 INSTALLATION ....................................................98 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ...........................................99 Removal and Installation .........................................99 REMOVAL ............................................................99 INSTALLATION ....................................................99 ATC-2 2005 Altima FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER .................................. 100 Removal and Installation ...................................... 100 REMOVAL ......................................................... 100 INSTALLATION ................................................. 100 DUCTS AND GRILLES .......................................... 101 Removal and Installation ...................................... 101 REMOVAL ......................................................... 101 INSTALLATION ................................................. 102 REFRIGERANT LINES ........................................... 103 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ............... 103 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................ 103 Components ......................................................... 105 Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models .................................................. 107 REMOVAL ......................................................... 107 INSTALLATION ................................................. 107 Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models .................................................. 108 REMOVAL ......................................................... 108 INSTALLATION ................................................. 108 Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch . 108 REMOVAL ......................................................... 108 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................110 INSTALLATION ..................................................110 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 111 BREAK-IN OPERATION .................................... 111 Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose ......................................................................112 REMOVAL ..........................................................112 INSTALLATION ..................................................112 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose ......................................................................112 REMOVAL ......................................................... 112 INSTALLATION ................................................. 112 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 112 REMOVAL ......................................................... 112 INSTALLATION ................................................. 112 Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor .................................................................. 113 REMOVAL ......................................................... 113 INSTALLATION ................................................. 113 Removal and Installation for Condenser .............. 113 REMOVAL ......................................................... 113 INSTALLATION ................................................. 114 Removal and Installation for Evaporator .............. 114 REMOVAL ......................................................... 114 INSTALLATION ................................................. 115 Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve ...... 115 REMOVAL ......................................................... 115 INSTALLATION ................................................. 116 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks ............................ 116 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector ....................................................... 116 Dye Injection ......................................................... 116 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 117 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK DETECTOR ....................................................... 117 CHECKING PROCEDURE ............................... 118 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 120 Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ................ 120 COMPRESSOR ................................................ 120 LUBRICANT ...................................................... 120 REFRIGERANT ................................................. 120 ENGINE IDLING SPEED .................................. 120 BELT TENSION ................................................. 120 A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EJS002PJ The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) EJS002PK WARNING: ● CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier. ● Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ● The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed: – When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. – When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. – Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used. – Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. – Do not allow A/C lubricant to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. Contaminated Refrigerant EJS002PL If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: ● Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. ● Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. ● Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. ● If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility Revision: March 2005 ATC-4 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS ● does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. General Refrigerant Precautions Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● B EJS002PM WARNING: ● Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. ● Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ● Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). ● Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. ● Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ● Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ● Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. ● Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. ● A C D E F G H EJS002PN The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet I (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. ATC A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a K future service. Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period L of time cannot be removed . Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. M Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and HC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in R-12 A/C systems or HC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. Revision: March 2005 ATC-5 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS A/C Identification Label EJS002PO Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this identification label on the underside of hood. WJIA0713E Precautions for Refrigerant Connection EJS002PP A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations. ● Expansion valve to cooling unit ● Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit) ● Refrigerant pressure sensor FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ● ● The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics. The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections. SHA815E Revision: March 2005 ATC-6 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION A QR25DE B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA0981E Revision: March 2005 ATC-7 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS VQ35DE WJIA0982E CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or around, the connection. Revision: March 2005 ATC-8 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications O-ring size Part number* D New 8 92471 N8210 6.8 (0.268) 1.85 (0.0728) Former 10 J2476 89956 9.25 (0.3642) 1.78 (0.0701) 92472 N8210 10.9 (0.429) 2.43 (0.0957) 92475 71L00 11.0 (0.433) 2.4 (0.094) 92473 N8210 13.6 (0.535) 2.43 (0.0957) Former 92475 72L00 14.3 (0.563) 2.3 (0.091) New 92474 N8210 16.5 (0.650) 2.43 (0.0957) 92477 N8200 17.12 (0.6740) 1.78 (0.0701) 92195 AH300 21.8 (0.858) 2.4 (0.094) New 12 Former New SHA814E A Connection type 16 19 Former New 24 mm (in) W mm (in) B C D E *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. WARNING: Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is F less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. CAUTION: When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. G ● When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber. ● When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench. H ● After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture. ● When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for I connection. ● Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. ATC ● Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. ● Always replace used O-rings. ● When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not K to apply lubricant to threaded portion. Lubricant name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 L ● O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube. ● When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube. ● Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that M the O-ring is installed to tube correctly. Revision: March 2005 ATC-9 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS ● After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections. When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque. RHA861F Precautions for Servicing Compressor ● ● ● ● ● ● EJS002PQ Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering. When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" . Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner. After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour. After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation. [Gap between clutch disc and pulley is 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)] Precautions for Service Equipment EJS002PR RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance. Revision: March 2005 ATC-10 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS VACUUM PUMP A The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it. To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the hose-to-pump connection, as follows. ● Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump. ● For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the hose from the pump. ● If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate. Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended. B C D E F G RHA270D H MANIFOLD GAUGE SET Be certain that the gauge face indicates R-134a or 134a. Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant. I ATC K SHA533D SERVICE HOSES L Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described (colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses opposite the manifold gauge. M RHA272D Revision: March 2005 ATC-11 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS SERVICE COUPLERS Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur. Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve Clockwise Open Counterclockwise Close RHA273D REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME. RHA274D CHARGING CYLINDER Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EJS002PS When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision: March 2005 ATC-12 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EJS002PT The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B — (J-38873-A) Drive plate installer Installing pulley and drive plate C D E WJIA0367E KV99233130 (J-29884) Pulley puller Removing pulley F G LHA172 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment EJS002PU H Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its lubricant. Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubriI cant. Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant. ATC Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and compressor failure will result. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — ( — ) Refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) Container color: Light blue Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a) Fitting size: Thread size ● K large container 1/2 in -16 ACME S-NT196 KLH00-PAGS0 ( — ) Genuine NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS Type: Poly alkaline glycol oil (PAG), type DH-PS Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) vane rotary compressors (NISSAN only) Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz) S-NT197 K991J0130 (ACR2005-NI) ACR A/C Service Center Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging WJIA0293E Revision: March 2005 ATC-13 2005 Altima L M PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-41995) Electronic refrigerant leak detector Power supply: ● DC 12V (Battery terminal) AHA281A — (J-43926) Refrigerant dye leak detection kit Kit includes: (J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety goggles (J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector (J-41447) qty. 24 HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal) ZHA200H — (J-42220) Fluorescent dye leak detector Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal) For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system. Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles SHA438F — (J-41447) HFC-134a (R-134a) Fluorescent leak detection dye (Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle (Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.) SHA439F — (J-41459) HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce bottle For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak detection dye into A/C system. SHA440F — (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner For cleaning dye spills. SHA441F Revision: March 2005 ATC-14 2005 Altima PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39183-C) Manifold gauge set (with hoses and couplers) Identification: A ● The gauge face indicates R-134a. Fitting size: Thread size ● 1/2 in -16 ACME B C D RJIA0196E Service hoses ● (J-39500-72B) High side hose ● (J-39500-72R) Low side hose ● (J-39500-72Y) Utility hose S-NT201 (J-39500-20A) High side coupler ● (J-39500-24A) Low side coupler ● Low side hose: Blue with black stripe ● High side hose: Red with black stripe ● Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green with black stripe Hose fitting to gauge: ● 1/2 in -16 ACME F G Hose fitting to service hose: Service couplers ● E Hose color: ● M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached. H I S-NT202 — (J-39649) Vacuum pump (Including the isolator valve) Capacity: ● Air displacement: 4 CFM ● Micron rating: 20 microns ● Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz) Fitting size: Thread size ● 1/2 in -16 ACME ATC K S-NT203 Commercial Service Tools EJS002PV L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-15 2005 Altima PREPARATION Tool number Tool name Description J-41810-NI Refrigerant identifier equipment HFC 134a (R-134a) Checking refrigerant purity and system contamination RJIA0197E Power tool Removing bolts and nuts PBIC0190E J-44614 Clutch disc holding tool Holding clutch disc for removal and installation WHA230 Revision: March 2005 ATC-16 2005 Altima REFRIGERATION SYSTEM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Refrigerant Cycle PFP:KA990 A EJS002PW REFRIGERANT FLOW The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank, through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil is controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case. Refrigerant System Protection EJS002PX REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM then ceases to supply power to the A/C relay which disengages and stops the compressor when pressure on the high pressure side (as detected by refrigerant pressure sensor) is over approximately 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2 , 398 psi), or below approximately 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2 , 17.4 psi). B C D E PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 3,727 kPa (38 kg/ cm2 , 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the atmosphere. F G H I ATC K L M LJIA0015E Revision: March 2005 ATC-17 2005 Altima REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Component Layout EJS002PY WJIA0979E Revision: March 2005 ATC-18 2005 Altima LUBRICANT LUBRICANT Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor PFP:KLG00 A EJS002PZ The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: ● Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor ● Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) B C LUBRICANT Lubricant type Part number D : NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent : KLH00-PAGS0 E CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition ● Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm ● A/C switch: On ● Blower speed: Max. position ● Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).] ● Intake position: Recirculation ( ) ● Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the following table. F G H I Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. ATC Amount of Lubricant to be Added Lubricant to be added to system Part replaced m Amount of lubricant (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) K Remarks Evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Condenser 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Liquid tank 5 (0.2, 0.2) Add if compressor is not replaced. 30 (1.0, 1.1) Large leak — Small leak *1 In case of refrigerant leak ● *1: L M If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed. Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. Drain the lubricant from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. Drain the lubricant from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container. Revision: March 2005 ATC-19 2005 Altima LUBRICANT 7. 8. 9. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time. CAUTION: Do not add the 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor and not the liquid tank. RHA065DD Revision: March 2005 ATC-20 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System PFP:27500 A EJS002Q0 The LAN (local area network) system consists of front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and mode door motor. A configuration of these components is shown in the diagram below. B C D E WJIA0876E System Construction EJS002Q1 F A small network is constructed between the front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and mode door motor. The front air control and motors are connected by data transmission lines and motor power supply G lines. The LAN network is built through the ground circuits of the two motors. Addresses, motor opening angle signals, motor stop signals and error checking messages are all transmitted through the data transmission lines connecting the front air control and each motor. The following functions are contained in LCUs built into the air mix door motor, intake door motor, and the H mode door motor. ● Address ● Motor opening angle signals I ● Data transmission ● Motor stop and drive decision ATC ● Opening angle sensor (PBR function) ● Comparison ● Decision (front air control indicated value and motor opening angle comparison) K L M WJIA0877E OPERATION The front air control receives data from each of the sensors. It then sends air mix door, mode door and intake door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor LCU. The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subse- Revision: March 2005 ATC-21 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL quently, HOT/COLD, DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the front air control. WJIA0878E TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER Front air control data is transmitted consecutively to each of the door motors following the form shown in figure below. Start: Initial compulsory signal sent to each of the door motors. Address: Data sent from the front air control is selected according to data-based decisions made by the air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor. If the addresses are identical, the opening angle data and error check signals are received by the door motor LCUs. The LCUs then make the appropriate error decision. If the opening angle data is normal, door control begins. If an error exists, the received data is rejected and corrected data received. Finally, door control is based upon the corrected opening angle data. Opening angle: Data that shows the indicated door opening angle of each door motor. Error check: Procedure by which sent and received data is checked for errors. Error data is then compiled. The error check prevents corrupted data from being used by the air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor. Error data can be related to the following problems. ● Abnormal electrical frequency ● Poor electrical connections ● Signal leakage from transmission lines ● Signal level fluctuation Stop signal: At the end of each transmission, a stop operation, in-operation, or internal problem message is delivered to the front air control. This completes one data transmission and control cycle. WJIA0882E AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL) The air mix door is automatically controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is maintained at a predetermined value by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature and amount of sunload. Revision: March 2005 ATC-22 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL FAN SPEED CONTROL Blower speed is automatically controlled based on temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and air mix door position. With fan switch set to AUTO, the blower motor starts to gradually increase air flow volume. When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flowing. A B INTAKE DOOR CONTROL The intake door is automatically controlled by the: temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and ON-OFF operation of the compressor. MODE DOOR CONTROL The mode door is automatically controlled by the: temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature and amount of sunload. MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL C D E F G H I ATC WJIA0879E The ECM controls compressor operation using input signals from the throttle position sensor and front air control. Overview of Control system EJS002Q2 K L The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control and outputs. M Revision: March 2005 ATC-23 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL The relationship of these components is shown in the diagram below: WJIA0880E Control Operation EJS002Q3 WJIA0875E Revision: March 2005 ATC-24 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL AUTO SWITCH The compressor, intake door, air mix door, mode door and blower speed are automatically controlled so that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator. TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) A B Increases or decreases the set temperature. FAN AUTO SWITCH Automatically controls the blower speed. C FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH Manually controls the blower speed. In the off position, the compressor and blower are OFF, the intake door is set to the outside air position, and the air mode doors are set to the foot (80% foot and 20% defrost) position. RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH D E OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. DEFROSTER SWITCH F Positions the air mode doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position. The compressor remains ON until the ignition is turned OFF. G MODE DIAL Controls the air discharge through control of mode door. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH H This switch turns the rear window defogger ON and OFF. I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-25 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Discharge Air Flow EJS002Q4 WJIA1185E Revision: March 2005 ATC-26 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL System Description EJS002Q5 A SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION B C D E F RHA044GA G H I ATC K L M WJIA0760E CAN Communication System Description EJS002Q6 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 ATC-27 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00004 EJS002Q7 WORK FLOW SHA900E *1: ATC-39 SYMPTOM TABLE Reference Page Symptom ● A/C system does not come on. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C system. ATC-41 ● Air outlet does not change. ● Mode door motor does not operate normally. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. (LAN) ATC-46 ● Discharge air temperature does not change. ● Air mix door motor does not operate normally. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. (LAN) ATC-49 ● Intake door does not change. ● Intake door motor does not operate normally. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. (LAN) ATC-52 ● Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor. ATC-55 ● Magnet clutch does not engage. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch. ATC-62 ● Insufficient cooling. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling. ATC-67 ● Insufficient heating. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating. ATC-74 ● Noise. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise. ATC-75 Revision: March 2005 ATC-28 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EJS002Q8 A ENGINE COMPARTMENT QR25DE Models B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA0136E Revision: March 2005 ATC-29 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS VQ35DE Model WJIA0137E Revision: March 2005 ATC-30 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA1556E Revision: March 2005 ATC-31 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Circuit Diagram EJS002Q9 WJWA0129E Revision: March 2005 ATC-32 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — A/C,A — EJS002QA A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJWA0130E Revision: March 2005 ATC-33 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJWA0274E Revision: March 2005 ATC-34 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJWA0132E Revision: March 2005 ATC-35 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJWA0133E Revision: March 2005 ATC-36 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value EJS002QB A INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL ● Measure voltage between each terminal and body ground by following “FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE”. Refer to ATC-37, "FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE" . B C D WJIA0762E FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT E F G H WJIA0020E FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE Terminal No. Wire color Item 1 G 2 3 4 I Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Power supply for IGN — 12 Y/R Power supply for BAT — 12 B Ground — 0 G/Y Compressor ON signal Ignition switch — Compressor ON 0 OFF 5 ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-37 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal No. Wire color Item 5 L/R 8 Ignition switch Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Power supply for mode door motor, intake door motor, and air mix door motor — 12 LG In-vehicle sensor — 0-5 9 OR/B Ambient sensor — 0-5 10 OR Sunload sensor — 0-5 11 R/Y Light (-) — 0 12 R/L Light (+) 15 L/B A/C LAN signal 17 L/Y Fan control AMP. control signal Lighting switch 19 L/W Fan ON signal 20 W/L Power supply for IGN 21 G/W Water temperature sensor 22 GY Rear defrost ON signal 1st position 12 5.5 Any speed except high 2.5 - 3 High 9.- 10 Low 7.0 - 10.0 ON 0 OFF 5 Blower motor feed back L/W 0 — Fan speed 18 OFF Fan — 12 — — Defroster switch ON 0 OFF 5 24 B/Y Sensor ground — 0 25 R/W Intake sensor — 0-5 28 G/R Power supply for A/C ON signal 30 B Revision: March 2005 A/C PD cut — ATC-38 ON 4.6 OFF 0 — 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operational Check EJS002QC A The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. CONDITIONS: ● Engine running and at normal operating temperature. B PROCEDURE: 1. Check Blower C 1. 2. Turn fan dial clockwise, blower should operate on low speed. Continue turning fan dial clockwise, and continue checking blower speeds until all speeds are checked. 3. Leave blower on HI speed. If NG, go to ATC-55, "Blower Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. D E F WJIA0773E 2. Check Discharge Air 1. Turn mode switch clockwise five positions. G H I WJIA0774E 2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-26, "Discharge Air Flow" . NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (audio or visual inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF K L is selected. Intake door position is checked in the next step. If NG, go to ATC-46, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. M RHA654F 3. Check Recirculation 1. Press REC Revision: March 2005 ATC switch. ATC-39 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Recirculation indicator should illuminate. 2. Press REC switch a second time. 3. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound change slightly). If NG, go to ATC-52, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. 4. Check Temperature Decrease 1. Turn the temperature dial counterclockwise to "60". 2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets. If NG, go to ATC-67, "Insufficient Cooling" . If OK, continue with next check. WJIA0775E 5. Check Temperature Increase 1. Turn the temperature dial clockwise to "90". 2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets. If NG, go to ATC-74, "Insufficient Heating" . If OK, continue with next check. WJIA0772E 6. Check AUTO Mode 1. 2. Turn mode dial to AUTO position. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (audio or visual inspection). (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.) If NG, go to ATC-41, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" , then if necessary, ATC-62, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" . If all operational checks are OK (symptom can not be duplicated), go to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" and perform tests as outlined to simulate driving condition environment. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures. Revision: March 2005 ATC-40 WJIA0774E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control EJS002QD A SYMPTOM: ● A/C system does not come on. INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F WJIA0881E *1: ATC-41 *2: ATC-39 G *3: ATC-41 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION FRONT AIR CONTROL H The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. Signals from various switches and Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) are directly entered into front air control. I ATC K WJIA0762E L POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL (PTC) The PTC is built into the front air control. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE M SYMPTOM: ● A/C system does not come on. WJIA0793E Revision: March 2005 ATC-41 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect front air control connector M49. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminals 1 (G), 2 (Y/R), and 20 (W/L), and ground. Terminals (+) Connector - Terminal Wire colors M49-1 G M49-2 Y/R M49-20 W/L (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V WJIA1192E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [Nos. 12 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. ● If fuses are OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. ● If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. 2. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front air control connector M49 terminal 3 (B) and ground. Terminal (+) Continuity (-) Connector - Terminal Wire colors M49-3 B Body ground Yes OK or NG OK >> ● Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . ● Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WJIA1186E LAN System Circuit EJS002QE SYMPTOM: Mode door motor, intake door motor and/or air mix door motor do not operate normally. WJIA0883E Revision: March 2005 ATC-42 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR MOTORS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 5 (L/R) and ground. B Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-5 L/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . C D WJIA1187E 2. CHECK SIGNAL FOR DOOR MOTORS E F Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 15 (L/B) and ground. G Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground 5.5V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-15 L/B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . H I WJIA1196E ATC 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MOTOR Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground, and between intake door motor connector M58 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground. K L Terminals (+) Door motors Connector Terminal wire colors Mode M40-1 L/R Air mix M39-1 L/R Intake M58-1 L/R (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V M WJIA0038E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 ATC-43 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 4. CHECK SIGNAL FOR MOTOR Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground, and between intake door motor connector M58 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground. Terminals (+) Door motors (-) Connector Terminal wire colors Mode M40-3 L/B Air mix M39-3 L/B Intake M58-3 L/B Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 5.5V WJIA1188E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace harness or connector. 5. CHECK MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door motor connectors. Check continuity between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 2 (B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 2 (B) and ground, and between intake door motor connector M58 terminal 2 (B) and ground. Terminals (+) Door motors (-) Connector Terminal wire colors Mode M40-2 B Air mix M39-2 B Intake M58-2 B Continuity Body ground Yes WJIA0884E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace harness or connector. 6. CHECK MOTOR OPERATION Disconnect and reconnect the motor connectors and confirm the motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Returns to normal operation.) ● Motor connector contacts dirty or damaged NG >> (Does not operate normally.) ● GO TO 7. Revision: March 2005 ATC-44 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR OPERATION A 1. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor connector. Reconnect the mode door motor connector and air mix door motor connector, confirm the mode door motor and air mix door motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor operate normally.) ● Replace the intake door motor. refer to ATC-97, "Removal and Installation" NG >> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor do not operate normally.) ● GO TO 8. B C D 8. CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION 1. 2. Disconnect mode door motor connector. Reconnect the intake door motor connector, confirm the air mix door motor and intake door motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor operate normally.) ● Replace mode door motor. Refer toATC-98, "Removal and Installation" NG >> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor do not operate normally.) ● GO TO 9. 9. CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR AND MODE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION E F G H 1. Disconnect air mix door motor connector. 2. Reconnect mode door motor connector, confirm the intake door motor and mode door motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Intake door motor and mode door motor operate normally.) ● Replace air mix door motor. refer to ATC-99, "Removal and Installation" NG >> (Intake door motor and mode door motor do not operate normally.) ● Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-45 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Mode Door Motor Circuit EJS002QF SYMPTOM: ● Air outlet does not change. ● Mode door motor does not operate normally. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1648E *1 ATC-26, "Discharge Air Flow" *5 ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit" *9 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *2 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *6 ATC-84, "Intake Sensor Circuit" *10 ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" *3 ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" *7 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *4 ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" *8 ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" Revision: March 2005 ATC-46 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts A Mode door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Mode door motor (LCU) ● In-vehicle sensor ● Ambient sensor ● Sunload sensor ● Intake sensor B C D System Operation The front air control receives data from each of the sensors. The front air control sends air mix door, mode door and intake door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor LCU. The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCU's in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the front air control. E F G H I ATC K L WJIA0843E Mode Door Control Specification M WJIA0886E Revision: March 2005 ATC-47 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Mode Door Motor The mode door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. WJIA0042E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Mode door motor and/or air mix door motor does not operate normally. Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" . Revision: March 2005 ATC-48 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Air Mix Door Motor Circuit EJS002QG A SYMPTOM: ● Discharge air temperature does not change. ● Air mix door motor does not operate. B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA0840E *1 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *6 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *2 ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" *7 ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" *3 ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" *8 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *4 ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit" *9 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *5 ATC-52, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" *10 ATC-39, "Operational Check" Revision: March 2005 ATC-49 *11 ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Air mix door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Air mix door motor (LCU) ● In-vehicle sensor ● Ambient sensor ● Sunload sensor ● Intake sensor System Operation The front air control receives data from each of the sensors. The amplifier sends air mix door, mode door and intake door motor opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor LCU. The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the front air control. WJIA0841E Air Mix Door Control Specification WJIA0887E Revision: March 2005 ATC-50 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Air Mix Door Motor A The air mix door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by PBR built-in air mix door motor. B C D WJIA0044E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE E SYMPTOM: Discharge air temperature does not change. Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" . F G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-51 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Intake Door Motor Circuit EJS002QH SYMPTOM: ● Intake door does not change. ● Intake door motor does not operate normally. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1643E *1 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *5 ATC-84, "Intake Sensor Circuit" *2 ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" *6 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *3 ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" *7 ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" *4 ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit" *8 ATC-39, "Operational Check" Revision: March 2005 ATC-52 *9 ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts A Intake door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Intake door motor ● A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode motor and air mix door motor) ● In-vehicle sensor ● Ambient sensor ● Sunload sensor ● Intake sensor B C D System Operation The intake door control determines intake door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the front air control is set to DEFROST, or OFF, the front air control sets the intake door at the fresh position. E F G H I ATC K WJIA0806E Intake Door Control Specification L M WJIA0888E Revision: March 2005 ATC-53 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake door motor The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. Door position is then fed back to the front air control by PBR built-in air mix door motor. WJIA0047E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Intake door motor does not operate normally. Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" . Revision: March 2005 ATC-54 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Blower Motor Circuit EJS002QI A SYMPTOM: ● Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA1642E *1 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *4 ATC-89, "IN-VEHICLE SENSOR", see NO.7 *7 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *2 ATC-55, "Blower Motor Circuit", see No.1 *5 ATC-90, "SUNLOAD SENSOR", see NO.8 *8 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *3 ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit", see No.6 *6 ATC-91, "INTAKE SENSOR" *9 ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" Revision: March 2005 ATC-55 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Fan speed control system components are: ● Front air control ● A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode door motor, air mix door motor and intake door motor) ● In-vehicle sensor ● Ambient sensor ● Sunload sensor ● Intake sensor ● Fan control amp. System Operation WJIA0845E Automatic Mode In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air control based on inputs from the PBR, in-vehicle sensor, sunload sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor. When the air flow is increased, the duty ratio of the blower fan motor's drive signal is changed at 8% sec. to prevent a sudden increase in air flow. In addition to manual air flow control and the normal automatic air flow control, starting air flow control, low water temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature starting control are available. Starting Fan Speed Control Start Up From COLD SOAK Condition (Automatic mode) In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 56°C (133°F), the blower will not operate for a short period of time (up to 150 seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the ambient and engine coolant temperature. In the most extreme case (very low ambient) the blower starting delay will be 150 seconds as described above. After this delay, the blower will operate at low speed until the engine coolant temperature rises above 56°C (133°F), at which time the blower speed will increase to the objective speed. Start Up From Normal or HOT SOAK Condition (Automatic mode) The blower will begin operation momentarily after the A/C button is pushed. The blower speed will gradually rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective blower speed). Blower Speed Compensation Sunload Revision: March 2005 ATC-56 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low speed. The low speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of high sunload, the blower low speed is "normal" low speed (approx. 6V). During low or no sunload conditions, the low speed will drop to "low" low speed (approx. 5V). A Fan Speed Control Specification B C D WJIA0889E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Fan Control Amplifier E F The fan control amplifier is located on the cooling unit. The fan control amp. receives a gate voltage from the front air control to smoothly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 5 to the 12V range (approx.). G H I WJIA0049E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ATC SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under Starting Fan Speed Control. K L M WJIA0846E Revision: March 2005 ATC-57 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FAN CONTROL AMP. 1. 2. 3. Disconnect fan control amp. connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 3 (L/W) and ground. Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M64-3 L/W WJIA0855E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 7. 2. CHECK FAN FEEDBACK CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 (L/W) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-18 L/W (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. WJIA1190E 3. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN CONTROL AMP. 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 1 (B) and ground. Terminal Connector - Terminal Wire color M64-1 B Continuity Body ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Reconnect fan control amp. harness connector and GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 ATC-58 WJIA0856E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 4. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FAN CONTROL AMP. 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch ON. Turn fan dial to any position except OFF or AUTO. Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 2 L/Y and ground. B Terminal C (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M64-2 L/Y OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace fan control amp. 2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal. NG >> GO TO 5. D WJIA0847E E 5. CHECK FAN CONTROL AMP. CIRCUIT BETWEEN FAN CONTROL AMP. AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control and fan control amp. harness connectors. Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 2 (L/Y) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 17 (L/Y). F G H 4. Terminals Connector Terminal M64-2 Continuity Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color L/Y M49-17 L/Y I Yes WJIA0848E ATC Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-59 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 (Y/R) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-2 Y/R (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal. NG >> ● Check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. ● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace an necessary. WJIA1197E 7. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition OFF. Disconnect blower motor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between blower motor harness connector M62 terminal 1 (W/L) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M62-1 W/L (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. ● If OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. ● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: March 2005 ATC-60 WJIA0056E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 8. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN CONTROL AMP. 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between blower motor harness connector M62 terminal 2 (L/W) and fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 3 (L/W). B C Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M62-2 L/W M64-3 L/W Continuity D Yes WJIA0857E OK or NG OK >> Check blower motor. Refer to ATC-61, "Blower Motor" . 1. If NG, replace blower motor. 2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal. NG >> Repair harness or connector. E F COMPONENT INSPECTION Blower Motor G Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. ● Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit. H I ATC WJIA0059E K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-61 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Magnet Clutch Circuit EJS002QJ SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA0852E *1 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *5 ATC-84, "Intake Sensor Circuit" *2 ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" *6 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *10 ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" *3 ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" *7 ATC-62, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" *4 ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit" *8 ATC-70, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE" Revision: March 2005 ATC-62 *9 ATC-39, "Operational Check" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Front air control controls compressor operation by ambient temperature and signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control Front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by ambient sensor. When ambient temperature is greater than -2°C (28°F), the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when ambient temperature is less than -5°C (23°F). B C D RHA094GB E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON. F G H I ATC K L WJIA0854E 1. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY IN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR 1. 2. M Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E124 and compressor connector. Check continuity between compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B) and IPDM E/R harness connector E124 terminal 33 (Y/B). Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color F3-1 Y/B E124-33 Y/B Yes WJIA0722E If OK, check harness for short to ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 ATC-63 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect IPDM E/R harness connector. Start engine and press A/C switch. Check voltage between compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B) and ground. Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color F3-1 Y/B WJIA0063E OK or NG OK >> Check magnet clutch coil. 1. If NG, replace magnet clutch. Refer to ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" . 2. If OK, check compressor mounting points for looseness or corrosion and repair as necessary. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK FUSE IN IPDM E/R Check 10A fuse [No. 33 located at the IPDM E/R]. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace fuse and check IPDM E/R for short circuit. Replace if necessary. 4. CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector M18 and front air control connectors M49 and M50. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 9 (GY), 27 (G/Y), 28 (L/W) and front air control connector M50 terminal 22 (GY), and M49 terminals 4 (G/Y), 19 (L/W). Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M18-9 GY M50-22 GY M18-27 G/Y M49-4 G/Y M18-28 L/W M49-19 L/W Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 WJIA1198E ATC-64 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL A Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal 70 (W) and ground. B Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector- Terminal F54-70 Wire color W OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> 1. Repair harness or connector. 2. Confirm that magnet clutch operation is normal. C D WJIA0748E E 6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to ATC-66, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to ATC-113, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" 7. CHECK COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL Terminal (-) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-4 G/Y G H Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 4 (G/Y) and ground, with A/C compressor ON and with A/C compressor OFF. (+) F Body ground I Voltage (V) (Approx.) ATC Compressor ON: 0V Compressor OFF: 5V K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> ● When compressor is ON and voltage is not approx. 0V, Replace front air control. Refer to ATC87, "Removal and Installation" . ● When compressor is OFF and voltage is not approx. 5V, BCM is malfunctioning. WJIA0859E M 8. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS Check CAN communication circuits between BCM to ECM and between ECM to IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> ECM malfunctioning. NG >> Repair or replace component based on the result of diagnosis. Revision: March 2005 L ATC-65 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT INSPECTION Refrigerant Pressure Sensor The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the condenser. ● Refer to ATC-17, "Refrigerant pressure sensor" . BBIA0027E ● Make sure that the A/C refrigerant pressure and the sensor output voltage are within the specified range as shown in the A/C operating condition figure. SHA315F Revision: March 2005 ATC-66 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Insufficient Cooling EJS002QK A SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA1195E *1 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *3 ATC-70, "Test Reading" *5 ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" *2 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *4 EC-1327, "Component Description" *6 ATC-68, "PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS" *7 EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR) EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ) Revision: March 2005 ATC-67 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS WJIA0198E *1 ATC-70, "PERFORMANCE CHART" *3 *2 ATC-70, "PERFORMANCE CHART" Revision: March 2005 ATC-70, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE" ATC-68 *4 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA0749E *1 ATC-110, "INSTALLATION" *4 ATC-93, "Removal and Installation" Revision: March 2005 *2 ATC-55, "Blower Motor Circuit" ATC-69 *3 EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR) EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ) 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PERFORMANCE CHART Test Condition Testing must be performed as follows: Vehicle location Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place) Doors Closed Door windows Open Hood Open TEMP. Max. COLD Mode switch (Ventilation) set Intake switch (Recirculation) set Max. speed set (blower) speed Engine speed Idle speed Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements. Test Reading Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet Relative humidity % Discharge air temperature at center ventilator °C (°F) Air temperature °C (°F) 50 - 60 60 - 70 25 (77) 10.0 - 12.3 (50 - 54) 30 (86) 13.2 - 15.3 (56 - 60) 35 (95) 17.2 - 21.0 (63 - 70) 25 (77) 12.3 - 14.9 (54 - 59) 30 (86) 15.3 - 19.3 (60 - 67) 35 (95) 21.0 - 24.4 (70 - 76) Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table Ambient air Relative humidity % 50 - 70 Air temperature °C (°F) High-pressure (Discharge side) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Low-pressure (Suction side) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 30 (86) 1,220 - 1,500 (12.44 - 15.30, 176.9 - 217.5) 240 - 295 (2.45 - 3.01, 34.8 - 42.8) 35 (95) 1,360 - 1,690 (13.87 - 17.24, 197.2 - 245.1) 275 - 335 (2.81 - 3.42, 39.9 - 48.6) 40 (104) 1,500 - 1,830 (12.44 - 18.67, 176.9 - 265.4) 310 - 375 (3.16 - 3.83, 45.0 - 54.4) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE Whenever system's high and/or low side pressure is abnormal, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (normal) pressure range. Since the standard (normal) pressure differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table above. Revision: March 2005 ATC-70 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser. Excessive refrigerant charge in refrigeration cycle Air suction by cooling fan is insufficient. Insufficient condenser cooling performance ↓ 1. Condenser fins are clogged. Corrective action Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained. ● Clean condenser. ● Check and repair cooling fan as necessary. 2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan ● Both high and low-pressure sides are too high. ● Low-pressure pipe is not cold. When compressor is stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approximately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2 , 28 psi). It then decreases gradually thereafter. Engine tends to overheat. AC359A ● An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. ● Plates are sometimes covered with frost. Evacuate repeatedly and recharge system. Engine cooling systems malfunction. Check and repair each engine cooling system. Excessive liquid refrigerant on low-pressure side ● Excessive refrigerant discharge flow ● Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification. B C D Poor heat exchange in condenser (After compressor operation stops, high pressure decreases too slowly.) ↓ Air in refrigeration cycle ● A E F G H Replace expansion valve. I ↓ 1. Improper thermal valve installation ATC 2. Improper expansion valve adjustment K High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High-pressure side is too high and low-pressure side is too low. L Upper side of condenser and high-pressure side are hot, however, liquid tank is not so hot. High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor and condenser are clogged or crushed. ● Check and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. AC360A High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High Gauge indication High-pressure side is too low and low-pressure side is too high. AC356A Revision: March 2005 Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High and low-pressure sides become equal soon after compressor operation stops. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings Replace compressor. No temperature difference between high and low-pressure sides Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. Replace compressor. ATC-71 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle ● There is a big temperature difference between receiver drier outlet and inlet. Outlet temperature is extremely low. ● Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted. ● Temperature of expansion valve inlet is extremely low as compared with areas near liquid tank. ● ● Both high- and low-pressure sides are too low. Expansion valve inlet may be frosted. Probable cause Liquid tank inside is slightly clogged. High-pressure pipe located between receiver drier and expansion valve is clogged. Corrective action ● Replace desiccant assembly. ● Check lubricant for contamination. ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side Expansion valve and liquid tank are warm or only cool when touched. AC353A There is a big temperature difference between expansion valve inlet and outlet while the valve itself is frosted. Low refrigerant charge ↓ Leaking fittings or components Check refrigerant for leaks. Refer to Checking Refrigerant Leaks, ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" and ATC117, "Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector" . Expansion valve closes a little compared with the specification. ↓ ● 1. Improper expansion valve adjustment Remove foreign particles by using compressed air. ● Check lubricant for contamination. ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. ● Check thermo control amp. and intake sensor operation. ● Replace compressor. 2. Malfunctioning thermal valve 3. Outlet and inlet may be clogged. An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Low-pressure pipe is clogged or crushed. Air flow volume is not enough or is too low. Evaporator is frozen. Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative Gauge indication Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative. Refrigerant cycle ● ● Air conditioning system does not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air. The system constantly functions for a certain period of time after compressor is stopped and restarted. Probable cause Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically. ↓ Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet. ↓ Water is mixed with refrigerant. Corrective action ● Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. ● Replace desiccant assembly. AC354A Revision: March 2005 ATC-72 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action Leave the system at rest until no frost is present. Start it again to check whether or not the problem is caused by water or foreign particles. ● Low-pressure side becomes negative. Liquid tank or front/rear side of expansion valve's pipe is frosted or dewed. High-pressure side is closed and refrigerant does not flow. ↓ Expansion valve or liquid tank is frosted. AC362A ● If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and remove the particles with dry and compressed air (not shop air). ● If either of the above methods cannot correct the problem, replace expansion valve. ● Replace desiccant assembly. ● Check lubricant for contamination. A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-73 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Insufficient Heating EJS002QL SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1649E *1 ATC-39, "Operational Check" *4 ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *2 MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" *5 CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" *3 CO-9, "CHECKING RADIATOR CAP" *6 ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" Revision: March 2005 ATC-74 *7 MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Noise EJS002QM A SYMPTOM: Noise INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I ATC K L M SHA331F Revision: March 2005 ATC-75 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS *1 ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *3 ATC-19, "LUBRICANT" *2 ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *4 ATC-39, "Operational Check" Ambient Sensor Circuit *5 EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR) EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ) EJS002QN COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ambient Sensor The ambient sensor is attached to the front bumper reinforcement. It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which is then input into the front air control. WJIA0097E AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS The automatic amplifier includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33°C (0.6°F) per 100 seconds. As an example, consider stopping for a cup of coffee after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. WJIA0862E 1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ambient sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E1 terminal 1 (OR/B) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color E1-1 OR/B (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 RJIA0244E ATC-76 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M50. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and ambient sensor harness connector E1 terminal 2 (B). Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color M50-24 B/Y A B C Continuity Connector Terminal D Wire color Yes E1-2 B E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0863E F 3. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR G Refer to ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" . OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> Replace ambient sensor. H 4. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M49. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 9 (OR/B) and ambient sensor harness connector E1 terminal 1 (OR/B). Terminals Connector Terminal M49-9 Wire color OR/B ATC K Continuity Connector Terminal E1-1 L Wire color Yes OR/B WJIA0864E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 I ATC-77 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT INSPECTION Ambient Sensor After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector E1, measure resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ -15 (5) 12.73 -10 (14) 9.92 -5 (23) 7.80 0 (32) 6.19 5 (41) 4.95 10 (50) 3.99 15 (59) 3.24 20 (68) 2.65 25 (77) 2.19 30 (86) 1.81 35 (95) 1.51 40 (104) 1.27 45 (113) 1.07 WJIA0079E If NG, replace ambient sensor. In-vehicle Sensor Circuit EJS002QO COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle sensor The in-vehicle sensor is located on instrument lower panel. It converts variations in temperature of compartment air drawn from the aspirator into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. WJIA0203E Aspirator The aspirator is located on driver's side of heater and cooling unit. It produces vacuum pressure due to air discharged from the heater and cooling unit, continuously taking compartment air in the aspirator. WJIA0081E Revision: March 2005 ATC-78 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C RHA482A D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. E F G WJIA0871E 1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect in-vehicle sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 1 (LG) and ground. Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 5V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M32-1 LG OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. I ATC K L WJIA0082E 2. CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M50. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 2 (B/Y). Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M50-24 B/Y M32-2 B/Y Yes WJIA0865E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 H ATC-79 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Refer to ATC-89, "IN-VEHICLE SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> 1. Replace in-vehicle sensor. 2. Confirm system operation. 4. CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M49. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 8 (LG) and in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 1 (LG). Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color M49-8 LG Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color M32-1 LG Yes WJIA0866E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> Repair harness or connector. COMPONENT INSPECTION In-vehicle Sensor After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ -15 (5) 12.73 -10 (14) 9.92 -5 (23) 7.80 0 (32) 6.19 5 (41) 4.95 10 (50) 3.99 15 (59) 3.24 20 (68) 2.65 25 (77) 2.19 30 (86) 1.81 35 (95) 1.51 40 (104) 1.27 45 (113) 1.07 WJIA0085E If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor. Revision: March 2005 ATC-80 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Sunload Sensor Circuit EJS002QP A COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The sunload sensor is located on the right defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input into the front air control. B C D WJIA0086E SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS E The front air control also includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over a period of time. This prevents drastic swings in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in detected sunload. For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload detected by the sunload sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly. F G H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Sunload sensor circuit is open or shorted. I ATC K WJIA0869E 1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect sunload sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sunload sensor harness connector M65 terminal 1 (OR) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M65-1 OR (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 5V Revision: March 2005 M RJIA0254E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. ATC-81 L 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M50. Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and sunload sensor harness connector M65 terminal 2 (B/Y). Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M50-24 B/Y M65-2 B/Y Yes WJIA0868E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR Refer to ATC-83, "Sunload Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> 1. Replace sunload sensor. 2. Confirm system operation. 4. CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M49. Check continuity between front air control connector M49 terminal 10 (OR) and sunload sensor harness connector M65 terminal 1 (OR). Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color M49-10 OR Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color M65-1 OR Yes WJIA0867E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 ATC-82 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT INSPECTION Sunload Sensor A Measure voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 10 and ground. If NG, replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . B C D E F G WJIA0872E ● H When checking sunload sensor, select a place where sun shines directly on it. I ATC K L M SHA930E Revision: March 2005 ATC-83 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Intake Sensor Circuit EJS002QQ COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. After disconnecting intake sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ -15 (5) 12.34 -10 (14) 9.62 -5 (23) 7.56 0 (32) 6.00 5 (41) 4.80 10 (50) 3.87 15 (59) 3.15 20 (68) 2.57 25 (77) 2.12 30 (86) 1.76 35 (95) 1.47 40 (104) 1.23 45 (113) 1.04 WJIA0091E If NG, replace intake sensor. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. WJIA0870E Revision: March 2005 ATC-84 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake sensor connector M33 terminal 1 (R/W) and ground. Terminal Wire color M33-1 R/W B C (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 5V D (+) Connector - Terminal A WJIA0092E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. E 2. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL F 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M50. Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal 2 (B/Y). Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color M50-24 B/Y H Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color M33-2 B/Y I Yes WJIA0873E ATC If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. K 3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR L Refer to ATC-84, "Intake Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> 1. Replace intake sensor. 2. Confirm system operation. Revision: March 2005 ATC-85 M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 4. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M50. Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 25 (R/W) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal 1 (R/W). Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M33-1 R/W M50-25 R/W Yes WJIA0874E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control, Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 ATC-86 2005 Altima CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:27500 A EJS002QR FRONT AIR CONTROL Removal 1. 2. B Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . Remove the two screws and remove the front air control. C D E WJIA0763E F Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-87 2005 Altima AMBIENT SENSOR AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:27722 EJS002QS REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. Release the ambient sensor clip and remove the ambient sensor. WJIA0097E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-88 2005 Altima IN-VEHICLE SENSOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:27720 A EJS002QT REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the lower driver instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Remove the in-vehicle sensor screw and remove the in-vehicle sensor. B C D E WJIA0098E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-89 2005 Altima SUNLOAD SENSOR SUNLOAD SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:27721 EJS002QU REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the sunload sensor and garnish. Disconnect the connector. Release the sunload sensor tabs to remove it from the garnish. WJIA0099E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-90 2005 Altima INTAKE SENSOR INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:27723 A EJS002QV REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the evaporator. Refer to ATC-114, "Removal and Installation for Evaporator" . Release the intake sensor clip and then remove the intake sensor. CAUTION: Do not damage the evaporator core surface. B C D WJIA0100E E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-91 2005 Altima BLOWER UNIT BLOWER UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:27200 EJS002QX REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" Remove the ECM. Disconnect the blower motor, intake door motor and fan control amplifier connector. Remove the two bolts and one screw from the blower unit, then remove the blower unit. WJIA0101E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-92 2005 Altima BLOWER MOTOR BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27226 A EJS002QY REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "Removal and Installation" . Release the eight tabs attaching the blower motor to the blower unit case and then remove the blower motor. B C D E F G H WJIA0104E I INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-93 2005 Altima IN-CABIN MICROFILTER IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation PFP:27277 EJS002QZ FUNCTION Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean in either the recirculation mode or fresh mode by the in-cabin microfilter located in the blower unit. LJIA0012E REPLACEMENT TIMING Replace the in-cabin microfilter as described in the applicable maintenance schedule. Refer to MA-7, "SCHEDULE 1" and MA-10, "SCHEDULE 2" . The in-cabin microfilter caution label is attached inside the glove box. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the glove box pins. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Press in the sides of the glove box door to release the glove box door from the glove box housing. Disconnect the glove box damper cord to remove the glove box door. Disengage the two filter cover tabs to remove the filter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilter from the blower unit. Install the new in-cabin microfilter into the blower unit. CAUTION: ● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow in the correct orientation. ● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow side of the filter facing the rear of the vehicle. 7. Install the filter cover on the blower unit. LJIA0013E 8. Connect the glove box damper cord to the glove box door. 9. Press in the sides of the glove box door to install the glove box door into the glove box housing. 10. Install the glove box pins. Revision: March 2005 ATC-94 2005 Altima HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:27110 A EJS002R0 REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . 2. Drain the engine coolant from the cooling system. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (QR25DE), MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE). 3. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" . 4. Remove the fasteners and cowl top. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core pipes. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the pipe joint with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants into the system. 6. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the evaporator. Refer to ATC-103, "REFRIGERANT LINES" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the line joint with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants into the system. 7. Remove the steering member. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . 8. Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "BLOWER UNIT" . 9. Disconnect the mode door motor and air mix door motor connectors. 10. Remove the heater and cooling unit. B C D E F G H I ATC WJIA0106E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Fill the radiator with the specified water and coolant mixture. Refer to MA-16, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" (QR25DE), MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE). ● Recharge the A/C system. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-95 2005 Altima HEATER CORE HEATER CORE Removal and Installation PFP:27140 EJS002R1 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit. Refer to ATC-95, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY" . Remove the heater core pipe support screws and then remove the heater core pipe support. WJIA0185E 3. Remove the heater core cover screws and then remove the heater core cover. WJIA0127E 4. Remove the heater core. WJIA0186E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-96 2005 Altima INTAKE DOOR MOTOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27730 A EJS002R2 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the screws and then remove the intake door motor from the blower unit. B C D E WJIA0105E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-97 2005 Altima MODE DOOR MOTOR MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27731 EJS002R3 REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor connector. Remove the mode door motor screws and then remove the mode door motor. WJIA0109E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-98 2005 Altima AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27732 A EJS002R4 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the driver lower instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Disconnect the air mix door motor connector. Remove the air mix door motor screws and then remove the air mix door motor. B C D E WJIA0110E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-99 2005 Altima FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER Removal and Installation PFP:27761 EJS002R5 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Disconnect the fan control amplifier connector. Remove the screws from the fan control amplifier and then remove the fan control amplifier. WJIA0111E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-100 2005 Altima DUCTS AND GRILLES DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation PFP:27860 A EJS002R6 Ventilator Duct, Defroster Nozzle, Defroster Ducts, and Grilles B C D E F G H I WJIA0983E 1. Center defroster nozzle 2. Side defroster duct LH 3. Side ventilator grille LH 4. Center ventilator grille LH 5. Cluster lid D 6. Center ventilator grille RH 7. Side ventilator grille RH 8. Instrument panel 9. Ventilator duct 10. Side defroster duct CENTER ATC K 11. Side defroster duct RH REMOVAL Center Ventilator Grille RH, LH L 1. 2. 3. M Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . Remove the two center ventilator grille screws. Release the two tabs and then remove the center ventilator grille. LJIA0149E Side Ventilator Grille LH 1. Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Revision: March 2005 ATC-101 2005 Altima DUCTS AND GRILLES 2. Remove the side ventilator grille LH. LJIA0150E Side Ventilator Grille RH 1. 2. Remove the instrument lower cover RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Remove side ventilator grille RH. LJIA0151E Floor Duct 1. 2. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-35, "FLOOR TRIM" . Release the foam tape and slide the floor duct rearward to release it from the clips. WJIA0115E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-102 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure PFP:92600 A EJS002R7 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Remove the HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) or SAE J2201 (R-134a recovery equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. B C D Discharging Refrigerant E F G H I WJIA0614E ATC Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant K L M WJIA0615E Revision: March 2005 ATC-103 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Discharging, Evacuating, and Recharging the A/C System WJIA0530E *1 ATC-19, "CHECKING AND ADJUSTING" *3 ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" *2 ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" *4 ATC-68, "PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS" Revision: March 2005 ATC-104 *5 ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Components EJS002R8 A QR25DE Models B C D E F G H I ATC K L M WJIA0981E Revision: March 2005 ATC-105 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES VQ35DE Models WJIA0982E NOTE: Refer to ATC-6, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" . Revision: March 2005 ATC-106 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models EJS002R9 A B C D E F WJIA0182E REMOVAL G 1. 2. 3. 4. H 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the compressor connector. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of any contaminants. Remove the compressor bolts, then remove the compressor using power tools. I ATC INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation. ● After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Compressor bolts High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts Revision: March 2005 : 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) ATC-107 2005 Altima K L M REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models EJS002RA WJIA0117E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" . Remove the coolant pipe bracket bolt using power tools. Remove the compressor mounting stud. Disconnect the compressor connector. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of any contaminants. Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools, and then remove the compressor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Compressor (rear side) bolt Compressor (front side) bolt Compressor (front side) nut High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts : 56.9 - 65.7 N·m (5.8 - 6.8 kg-m, 42 - 48 ft-lb) : 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb) : 59.8 - 69.6 N·m (6.1 - 7.0 kg-m, 45 - 51 ft-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation. ● After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch EJS002RB REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to (QR25DE), ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models" (VQ35DE). Revision: March 2005 ATC-108 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 2. Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using Tool. Tool number 3. A : (J-44614) Remove the clutch disc. B C WHA228 D 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. E F G RHA072C 5. Remove the pulley assembly using Tool. ● Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the compressor shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter as shown. Tool number H I : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove. ATC WJIA1017E 6. 7. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. K L M WHA212 Revision: March 2005 ATC-109 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 8. Remove the three magnet coil screws and remove the magnet coil. WHA183 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before installation. Coil Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation. INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. WHA213 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : — (J-38873-A) WJIA1016E 4. Install the clutch disc on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down using the drive plate installer. WHA184 Revision: March 2005 ATC-110 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 5. Install the center bolt using Tool. Tool number Center bolt ● A : (J-44614) : 12 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the pulley rotates smoothly. B C WHA229 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION D Check the clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance E : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer and recheck the clearance. F G H I ATC K WHA194 BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-111 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose EJS002RC REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-105, "Components" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Low-pressure flexible hose (evaporator side) bolt Low-pressure flexible hose (compressor side) bolt Low-pressure flexible hose (in-line connection) bolt : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring on the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it for installation. ● After recharging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose EJS002RD REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-105, "Components" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. High-pressure flexible hose bolt : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it for installation. ● After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe EJS002RE REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to ATC-105, "Components" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 ATC-112 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES High-pressure pipe (evaporator side) bolt : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb) High-pressure pipe (condenser side) bolt : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) A CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. ● After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor B C EJS002RF REMOVAL 1. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Do not damage the condenser fins. D E F G WJIA0123E INSTALLATION H Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refrigerant pressure sensor : 9.8 - 11.7 N·m (1.0 - 1.2 kg-m, 7.3 - 8.6 ft-lb) CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Removal and Installation for Condenser EJS002RG I ATC REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" . CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe and hose with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. Remove the front fascia. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER" . K L M WJIA0124E Revision: March 2005 ATC-113 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 6. 7. Remove the mounting nuts from condenser mounting brackets. Remove the condenser. WJIA0125E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. High-pressure flexible hose and pipe bolt Condenser nuts : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) : 5.0 - 6.79 N·m (0.51 - 0.69 kg-m, 45 - 60 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them after installing them. ● When charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for Evaporator EJS003GE REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). NOTE: The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access the expansion valve. Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the expansion valve. Remove the center console side finisher RH. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" . Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Remove the ECM. ● Disconnect the ECM connector. ● Remove the wire harness from the ECM mounting bracket. ● Remove the two ECM mounting bracket nuts and disconnect WJIA0128E the ground wire. Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "BLOWER UNIT" . Revision: March 2005 ATC-114 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 10. Remove the heater core cover. A B C WJIA0127E D 11. Remove the evaporator cover. E F G WJIA0188E 12. Remove the evaporator. ● Remove the intake sensor. CAUTION: ● Mark the mounting position of the intake sensor. H I ATC WJIA0190E K INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve mounting bolts L : 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve M EJS003GF REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). NOTE: The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access the expansion valve. Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Revision: March 2005 ATC-115 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 4. Remove the expansion valve. WJIA0128E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve mounting bolts : 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Checking for Refrigerant Leaks EJS002RJ Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage, damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector or fluorescent dye leak detector. If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak detector, move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector EJS002RK 1. Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or TXV) leak. 2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, with the UV lamp for dye residue. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector. NOTE: Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection EJS002RL NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the A/C system or when the compressor has seized and has been replaced. 1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi). Revision: March 2005 ATC-116 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye into the injector tool (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the dye directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side service valve. Start the engine and switch the A/C ON and fan ON. While the A/C is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool (J-41459), refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from the low-pressure service valve. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the dye with the system lubricant. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from a few minutes to a few days for the dye to penetrate the leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector EJS002RM A B C D E PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK DETECTOR When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument is calibrated and set properly per the manufacturer's operating instructions. The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. F G H AHA281A 1. Position the leak detector probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked. I ATC K L SHA707EA 2. M When testing, circle each fitting completely with the leak detector probe. SHA706E Revision: March 2005 ATC-117 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 3. Move the leak detector probe along the component at approximately 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in)/sec. SHA708EA CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn engine OFF. 2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service ports. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. c. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above 16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. NOTE: At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) pressure. Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low side (evaporator drain hose to the compressor shaft seal). Refer to ATC-105, "Components" . Clean the component to be checked and move the leak detector probe completely around the connection/component. Perform a leak check for the following areas: ● Compressor ● High and low-pressure hose fittings, relief valve and shaft seal. ● Liquid tank ● Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Service valves NOTE: ● Check that all the service valve caps are secure on the service valves (to prevent leaks). ● After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe any residue from the valves to prevent any false readings by the leak detector. ● Cooling unit (evaporator) NOTE: ● With engine OFF, turn blower fan on high speed for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the cooling unit. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain hose. ● Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected leak, then repeat check as outlined above. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components. If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10. Start engine. Set the front air control as follows; A/C switch: ON Mode: face Intake position: Recirculation Revision: March 2005 ATC-118 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES d. e. 9. 10. Temperature: MAX cold Fan speed: High Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after stopping the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when pressure is high. A B C D SHA839E 11. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the A/C system, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 12. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the supply tank using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant identifier equipment. 13. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the A/C system using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant identifier equipment. 14. Discharge the A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 15. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm there are no refrigerant leaks. 16. Conduct the A/C performance test to ensure that the system works properly. Refer to ATC-70, "PERFORMANCE CHART" . E F G H I ATC K L M Revision: March 2005 ATC-119 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Service Data and Specifications (SDS) PFP:00030 EJS002RN COMPRESSOR Model CALSONIC KANSEI Type DKS-17D Displacement 175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3 ) / revolution Cylinder bore × stroke 30.5 mm (1.201 in) x 21.4 mm (0.84 in) Direction of rotation Clockwise (viewed from drive end) Drive belt Poly V LUBRICANT Model CALSONIC KANSEI (type DKS-17D) Name NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent Part number KLH00-PAGS0 Total in system 150 m Compressor (service part) charging amount Refer to ATC-19, "Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement" . Capacity (5.03 US fl oz, 5.3 lmp fl oz) REFRIGERANT Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity 0.50 ± 0.025 kg (1.10 ± 0.055 lb) ENGINE IDLING SPEED Refer to EC-80, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (QR25DE), EC-698, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (VQ35DE). BELT TENSION Refer to MA-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE), or MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ35DE). Revision: March 2005 ATC-120 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION AV AUDIO, VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4 PREPARATION ........................................................... 5 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5 AUDIO ......................................................................... 6 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 6 System Description .................................................. 7 BASE AND MIDLINE SYSTEM ............................. 7 BOSE® SYSTEM .................................................. 7 SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL (MIDLINE SYSTEM AND BOSE SYSTEM) .......... 8 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES (MIDLINE AND BOSE SYSTEM) ..... 8 Schematic ................................................................ 9 BASE SYSTEM ..................................................... 9 MIDLINE SYSTEM .............................................. 10 BOSE SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI) ......................11 BOSE SYSTEM (WITH NAVI) ............................. 12 Wiring Diagram -AUDIO- ........................................ 13 BASE SYSTEM ................................................... 13 MIDLINE SYSTEM .............................................. 16 BOSE SYSTEM .................................................. 19 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Except Bose) ......................................................... 26 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (BOSE) ................................................................... 27 Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp. ....................................................................... 29 Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch (With NAVI) ...................................................................... 31 AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ........................ 33 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (WITHOUT NAVI) ................................................ 33 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (WITH NAVI) ....................................................... 33 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE ........... 33 Revision: March 2005 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ..................................... 33 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 35 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE AND MIDLINE SYSTEM) .................................... 35 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BOSE SYSTEM) ............................................................ 35 FOR RADIO ONLY .............................................. 37 FOR CD ONLY .................................................... 38 Noise Inspection ..................................................... 38 TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE ........ 38 Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 38 Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI) ................... 40 Steering Switch Check (with NAVI) ......................... 41 AV Switch Check (With NAVI) ................................ 42 Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation System) .................................................................. 42 Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System) ................ 43 Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Speaker (Base or Midline System) ...................................................... 45 Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System) ............................... 47 Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker (BOSE System) ...................................................... 51 Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (BOSE System) ........................................................................ 55 Removal and Installation for Audio Unit ................. 57 Removal and Installation for Door Speaker ............ 57 Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker ....... 57 Removal and Installation for Rear Speaker ............ 57 Removal and Installation for Subwoofer Speaker... 57 Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp.... 58 Removal and Installation for AV Switch .................. 58 Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches ..................................................... 58 AUDIO ANTENNA .................................................... 59 System Description ................................................. 59 Wiring Diagram — W/ANT — ................................. 60 AV-1 2005 Altima F G H I J AV L M Location of Antenna ................................................ 61 Window Antenna Repair ......................................... 61 ELEMENT CHECK .............................................. 61 ELEMENT REPAIR ............................................. 62 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ............................................. 63 System Description ................................................. 63 TRAVEL DISTANCE ............................................ 63 TRAVEL DIRECTION .......................................... 63 MAP-MATCHING ................................................. 63 GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .......... 64 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 65 BIRDVIEW™ ....................................................... 65 MAP DISPLAY ..................................................... 66 FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH ..................... 67 “VIEW” MODE ..................................................... 72 “HEADING” MODE .............................................. 73 “NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE ................... 73 “SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ............... 73 “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ........... 73 “AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE ................................. 74 “AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE ...................... 74 “CLEAR MEMORY” MODE ................................. 74 “EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE ........................ 75 “GPS INFORMATION” MODE ............................. 75 “QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE... 75 “SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE ........................ 75 “TRACKING” MODE ............................................ 76 GUIDANCE VOLUME ......................................... 76 DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON ........ 76 TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2 ............................................... 77 FUEL ECONOMY ................................................ 77 MAINTENANCE .................................................. 77 ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION ..................... 77 WARNING INDICATIONS ................................... 78 CAN Communication System Description .............. 78 Component Parts Location ..................................... 79 Schematic ............................................................... 80 Wiring Diagram —NAVI— ....................................... 81 Wiring Diagram — COMM — ................................. 88 Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit .......................................................................... 90 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit .......................................................................... 92 Terminals and Reference Value for Display unit ..... 96 Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch ....... 98 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................ 99 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 101 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 101 DIAGNOSIS ITEM ............................................. 101 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) ................................. 101 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 101 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 103 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) ................................. 104 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 104 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 105 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ............................ 107 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 107 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 108 VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 108 Revision: March 2005 NAVIGATION ..................................................... 109 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 109 VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 110 HISTORY OF ERRORS ..................................... 110 DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS .......... 110 NAVIGATION ..................................................... 112 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR ........................ 114 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 114 AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 115 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit ........................................................... 116 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit ........................................................... 117 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit ........................................................................ 118 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch ................................................................... 120 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.121 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit.122 Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ... 123 Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit.123 Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit .......... 123 Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit ...... 124 Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ........ 124 Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit .... 124 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) ...................... 125 Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) .......................... 126 Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) ....................... 128 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) .................................. 130 CAN Communication Line Check ......................... 131 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is Not Inserted ....................................................... 131 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVDROM Map Malfunctioning or If It is Impossible to Load Data from DVD-ROM Map ........................... 131 If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning ..................................... 132 Operating Screen for Audio is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen ........................................... 132 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish) ............................................ 134 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish) ......................................... 135 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish) ....................................... 136 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) ................................................................... 137 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) ................................................................ 138 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) .............................................................. 139 NAVI Screen is Rolling .......................................... 140 Guide Sound is Not Heard .................................... 142 Screen is Not Shown ............................................ 143 FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown ............... 143 AV-2 2005 Altima Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ...................................................... 143 Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ............................................................. 143 Driving Distance or Average Speed Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ....................................... 144 WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown . 144 Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) ........................... 144 Audio Does Not Work ........................................... 145 Navigation System Does Not Activate ................. 145 Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored ............ 145 Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored ........ 145 Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct . 146 Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received. 146 Driving Test .......................................................... 146 Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction . 147 BASIC OPERATION ......................................... 147 VEHICLE MARK ............................................... 148 DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET ............. 148 VOICE GUIDE ................................................... 149 ROUTE SEARCH .............................................. 149 EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT .............................................. 150 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG ........ 153 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS ............. 153 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA ................................................................... 154 WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE ............................................................... 154 LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW .................................................... 154 ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION ................................ 154 NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED ............................................................. 154 CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN ........ 154 Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit ................. 155 Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit ..... 156 Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna ........... 156 Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch. 156 Removal and Installation of AV Switch ................. 156 Removal and Installation of Display Unit .............. 156 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit . 156 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS008RD The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EKS008RE When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" . Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Revision: March 2005 AV-4 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool PFP:00002 A EKS008RF Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts B C D PBIC0191E E F G H I J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-5 2005 Altima AUDIO AUDIO Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28111 EKS008RG WKIA1934E Revision: March 2005 AV-6 2005 Altima AUDIO System Description EKS008RH A BASE AND MIDLINE SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times ● through 15A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box] ● to audio unit terminal 6. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Audio signals are supplied ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15, and 16 ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of tweeter LH and RH. B C D E F BOSE® SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times ● through 15A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box] ● to audio unit terminal 6, and ● to Bose speaker amp. terminal 1. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is also supplied ● to speaker amp. terminal 17 ● through body ground B117. Audio signals are supplied ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15, and 16 ● to speaker amp. terminals 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, and 30. Audio signals are amplified by the speaker amp. The amplified audio signals are supplied ● through speaker amp. terminals 2, 3, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, and 19 ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of tweeter LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of subwoofer LH and RH. G H I J AV L M Satellite Radio Tuner (Pre-Wiring) The satellite radio tuner pre-wiring allows connection of a satellite radio tuner. Power is supplied at all times ● through 15A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 32. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 36. Ground is supplied through the case of the satellite radio tuner. Then audio signals are supplied ● through satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminals 21, 22, 23, and 24 ● to audio unit terminals 41, 42, 43, and 44. Revision: March 2005 AV-7 2005 Altima AUDIO SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL (MIDLINE SYSTEM AND BOSE SYSTEM) If activated, the radio output volume will be automatically adjusted to compensate for increased driving noises at higher driving speeds. The radio receives a vehicle speed signal from the combination meter, and selects the output volume. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES (MIDLINE AND BOSE SYSTEM) When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. Revision: March 2005 AV-8 2005 Altima AUDIO Schematic EKS008RI A BASE SYSTEM B C D E F G H I J AV L M LKWA0001E Revision: March 2005 AV-9 2005 Altima AUDIO MIDLINE SYSTEM WKWA1265E Revision: March 2005 AV-10 2005 Altima AUDIO BOSE SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI) A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1266E Revision: March 2005 AV-11 2005 Altima AUDIO BOSE SYSTEM (WITH NAVI) WKWA1267E Revision: March 2005 AV-12 2005 Altima AUDIO Wiring Diagram -AUDIO- EKS008RJ A BASE SYSTEM B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1268E Revision: March 2005 AV-13 2005 Altima AUDIO WKWA1269E Revision: March 2005 AV-14 2005 Altima AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1270E Revision: March 2005 AV-15 2005 Altima AUDIO MIDLINE SYSTEM WKWA1271E Revision: March 2005 AV-16 2005 Altima AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1272E Revision: March 2005 AV-17 2005 Altima AUDIO WKWA1273E Revision: March 2005 AV-18 2005 Altima AUDIO BOSE SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1274E Revision: March 2005 AV-19 2005 Altima AUDIO WKWA1275E Revision: March 2005 AV-20 2005 Altima AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1276E Revision: March 2005 AV-21 2005 Altima AUDIO WKWA1277E Revision: March 2005 AV-22 2005 Altima AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1278E Revision: March 2005 AV-23 2005 Altima AUDIO WITH NAVI WKWA1279E Revision: March 2005 AV-24 2005 Altima AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1280E Revision: March 2005 AV-25 2005 Altima AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Except Bose) Terminal No. Item Condition Signal input/ output Ignition switch Operation Voltage (V) (Approx.) EKS008RK Example of symptom + – 1 (L/R) Ground Audio sound signal front LH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. 2 (L/W) Ground Audio sound signal front LH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. 3 (L/B) Ground Audio sound signal front RH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. 4 (W/B) Ground Audio sound signal front RH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. 5 (G) Ground Antenna signal Input ON – 5.5V System does not work properly. 6 (Y/G) Ground Battery Input – – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 7 (R/Y) Ground Illumination control Input ON Lighting switch ON (1st position) 1V → 5V Audio unit illumination does not function when lighting switch is ON (position 1). 8 (R/L) Ground Light switch Input ON Lighting switch ON (1st position) 5.5V Audio unit illumination does not function when lighting switch is ON (position 1). Voltage increases as vehicle speed sensor rotates faster *9 (P) Ground Speed signal Input ON Vehicle speed sensor rotating 10 (PU) Ground ACC Input ON Ignition switch ACC or ON Battery voltage System does not work properly. 13 (B/Y) Ground Audio sound signal rear LH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker LH. 14 (G/Y) Ground Audio sound signal rear LH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker LH. 15 (R) Ground Audio sound signal rear RH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker RH. 16 (L) Ground Audio sound signal rear RH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker RH. – Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" . Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. – Remote control A *75 (G) – Remote control B – – – Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" . *76 (L) – Remote control ground – – – Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" . *74 (R/W) – – Speed dependent volume control does not function. *: With midline system Revision: March 2005 AV-26 2005 Altima AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (BOSE) EKS008RL A Terminal No. Item + – Ground Audio sound signal front LH (-) Ground Audio sound signal front LH (+) 3 (BR) Ground Audio sound signal front RH (-) 4 (Y) Ground Audio sound signal front RH (+) 5 (G) Ground 6 (Y/G) Ground 1 (B) 2 (W) 7 (R/Y) 8 (R/L) Ground Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch ON Operation Voltage (V) (Approx.) Example of symptom 5.5V No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. 5.5V No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. B Receive audio signal C ON Receive audio signal Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. E Output Antenna signal Input ON – 5.5V System does not work properly. F Battery Input – – Battery voltage System does not work properly. Illumination control Output ON Lighting switch ON (1st position) ON Lighting switch ON (1st position) Input ON Vehicle speed sensor rotating – – Input ON – – Input Ground Light switch Input 9 (P) (without NAVI) Ground Speed signal 9 (B) (with NAVI) Ground Ground 10 (PU) Ground ACC 11 – 12 (G/W) Ground Amp. ON/ OFF signal Output ON 13 (B/R) Ground Audio sound signal rear LH (-) Output 14 (BR) Ground Audio sound signal rear LH (+) 15 (B/W) Ground 16 (L) Ground 1V → 5V Audio unit illumination does not function when lighting switch is ON (position 1). 5.5V Audio unit illumination does not function when lighting switch is ON (position 1). Voltage increases as vehicle speed sensor rotates faster Speed dependent volume control does not function. D G H I J AV Revision: March 2005 Ground (Shield drain) – Ignition switch ACC or ON – Battery voltage – System does not work properly. 0V Interference and distortion heard from speakers. Ignition switch ACC or ON Battery voltage Amp. does not work properly. ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker LH. Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker LH. Audio sound signal rear RH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker RH. Audio sound signal rear RH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5.5V No sound from rear speaker RH. – AV-27 2005 Altima L M AUDIO Terminal No. + 42 (R) Signal input/ output Ignition switch Audio left channel sound signal from satellite radio tuner Input ON – 41 (G) Condition Item Operation Voltage (V) (Approx.) Example of symptom No sound from satellite radio tuner left channel. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 44 (B) 43 (W) Audio right channel sound signal from satellite radio tuner Input ON No sound from satellite radio tuner right channel. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 45 – Shield ground (audio signal) 46 – Shield ground (data) 48 (L) 49 (OR/L) Ground Ground Satellite radio tuner request to audio unit Audio RX – – – – – – – – – – Input ON Turn audio unit ON 5V ON Operate audio volume Input Satellite radio tuner does not operate properly. Satellite radio tuner audio information does not display properly. SKIA4403E 50 (W/L) Ground Audio TX Output ON Satellite radio tuner audio information does not display properly. Operate audio volume SKIA4402E 65 (B/R) (with NAVI) Ground Audio RX Input ON Operate audio volume Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E Revision: March 2005 AV-28 2005 Altima AUDIO Terminal No. + – Item Condition Signal input/ output Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) Operation Example of symptom A B 66 (BR) (with NAVI) Ground Audio TX Output ON Operate audio volume Audio does not operate properly. C SKIA4402E 67 (with NAVI) – 72 (L/W) (with NAVI) Ground 73 (R/W) (with NAVI) Ground 74 (R/W) (without NAVI) – 75 (G) (without NAVI) 76 (L) (without NAVI) Shield – Interference and distortion heard from speakers. 0V ON CD eject signal Input ON Operate EJECT button 0V → 5V CD will not eject from the audio unit. CD load signal Input ON Operate LOAD button 0V → 5V CD will not load into the audio unit. Remote control A – – – Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" . Steering wheel audio controls do not function. G – Remote control B – – – Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" . Steering wheel audio controls do not function. H – Remote control ground – – – Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" . Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp. Terminal No. Item Ignition switch Input – Operation Voltage (V) (Approx.) Example of symptom – Battery voltage System does not work properly. – 1 (Y/G) Ground Battery 2 (W) Ground Subwoofer RH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from subwoofer RH. 3 (L/W) Ground Subwoofer LH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from subwoofer LH. 9 (L) Ground Rear door speaker RH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear door speaker RH. 10 (R) Ground Rear door speaker RH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear door speaker RH. 11 (G/Y) Ground Rear door speaker LH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear door speaker LH. 12 (B/Y) Ground Rear door speaker LH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear door speaker LH. 13 (W/B) Ground Front door speaker RH and tweeter RH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. Front door speaker RH and tweeter RH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. Front door speaker LH and tweeter LH (+) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. 15 (L/W) Ground Ground Revision: March 2005 AV-29 F I J Condition Signal input/ output E EKS008RM + 14 (L/B) D – 2005 Altima AV L M AUDIO Terminal No. Item + – 16 (L/R) Ground Front door speaker LH and tweeter LH (-) 17 (B) Ground Ground Condition Signal input/ output Ignition switch Output ON – – Operation Receive audio signal – Voltage (V) (Approx.) 5 - 7.5V – Example of symptom No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. – 18 (B) Ground Subwoofer RH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 19 (L/B) Ground Subwoofer LH (-) Output ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from subwoofer LH. 23 (B/W) Ground Rear speaker RH (-) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear speaker RH. 24 (L) Ground Rear speaker RH (+) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear speaker RH. 25 (B/R) Ground Rear speaker LH (-) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear speaker LH. 26 (BR) Ground Rear speaker LH (+) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from rear speaker LH. 27 (BR) Ground Front speaker RH (-) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from front speaker RH. 28 (Y) Ground Front speaker RH (+) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from front speaker RH. 29 (B) Ground Front speaker LH (-) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from front speaker LH. 30 (W) Ground Front speaker LH (+) Input ON Receive audio signal 5 - 7.5V No sound from front speaker LH. 31 (G/W) Ground Amp. ON/OFF signal Input ON 10V System does not work properly. Revision: March 2005 – AV-30 5 - 7.5V No sound from subwoofer RH. 2005 Altima AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch (With NAVI) EKS008RN A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 1 (Y/R) Ground 2 (PU) 3 (R/L) 4 (R/Y) 5 (B) Ground Ground Ground Battery power ACC signal Illumination signal Signal input/ output Input Input Ignition switch Operation OFF – ACC – Lighting switch is ON (position 1). Input Illumination control signal Input Ground – Ground Condition OFF ON ON Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Battery voltage System does not work properly. Battery voltage System does not work properly. Battery voltage Turn lighting switch OFF. 3.0V or less Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Changes between 0 and 12V. – 0V AV switch illumination does not come on when lighting switch is ON (position 1). AV switch illumination cannot be controlled. B C D E F – G 6 (PU) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – H SKIA0175E 7 Shield ground – – – – – – I J 8 (LG) Ground Communication signal (-) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – AV SKIA0176E 10 (R) 11 (G) Ground Ground Remote control A Remote control B Input Input ON ON 12 (B/Y) – Remote control ground – – 13 (L/W) Ground CD EJECT signal Output ON Revision: March 2005 Press MODE switch 0V Press SEEK UP switch 0.75V Press VOL UP switch 2V Except for above 5V Press POWER switch 0V Press SEEK DOWN switch 0.75V Press VOL DOWN switch 2V Except for above 5V – – Pressed 0V Released 5V AV-31 L Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. CD eject does not function. 2005 Altima M AUDIO Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 14 (R/W) Ground Revision: March 2005 CD LOAD signal Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch ON Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Operation Pressed 0V Released 5V AV-32 CD load does not function. 2005 Altima AUDIO AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function EKS008RO It can check ON/OFF operation of each switch in the audio unit (without NAVI) or AV switch (with NAVI) and diagnose the input signals from the steering switch (with NAVI) (except TRIP on the steering wheel audio control switch). B STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (WITHOUT NAVI) 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC. Press and hold the “CLOCK” switch and turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. C D E F G H WKIA1935E 3. 4. 5. 6. Then the self-diagnosis initiates. I Initially, all display segments will be illuminated. Then the current software version will be displayed when the "TUNE UP" switch is pressed. Then a speaker check will occur when the "TUNE DOWN" switch is pressed. The audio unit will send a J series of three beeps to each speaker channel in the following sequence: FR→FL→RL→RR. This check will continue until any switch (except "TUNE UP", "TUNE DOWN" or volume) is operated. Press each audio unit switch (except "TUNE UP", "TUNE DOWN" or volume). When each switch is AV pressed, a series of three beeps will sound. NOTE: Steering wheel audio control switches (except base), "TUNE UP", "TUNE DOWN" and volume switches L are not included in this test. STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (WITH NAVI) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC. Within 10 seconds press and hold the switches “PAUSE/MUTE” and “PREV” simultaneously for 3 seconds. Then the self-diagnosis initiates. A single beep indicates selfdiagnosis mode is active. Press each switch and listen for beep. NOTE: TRIP button on steering wheel audio control switch and CD player LOAD and EJECT buttons are not included in this test and will not beep when pressed. M WKIA2679E EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE ● Turn ignition switch OFF. Then the self-diagnosis ends. On models without NAVI, pressing the volume switch will also exit the self-diagnosis mode. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ● It can check for continuity of the switches by sounding the beep(s) when each audio unit switch (without NAVI) or AV switch (with NAVI) and steering switch (with NAVI) is pressed. Revision: March 2005 AV-33 2005 Altima AUDIO ● It can check for harness continuity between AV switch and steering switch (with NAVI). Revision: March 2005 AV-34 2005 Altima AUDIO Trouble Diagnosis EKS008RP The majority of the audio troubles are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference, etc.). Check the inspection items below to diagnose the malfunction. MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE AND MIDLINE SYSTEM) Symptom B Possible cause ● Inoperative ● Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . Steering switch does not operate (with midline system) All speakers do not sound ● Noisy E Steering switch check. Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" . If above check is OK, replace audio unit. F ● Audio unit ● Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . ● Front door speaker/tweeter check. Refer to AV-43, "Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System)" . ● Rear speaker check. Refer to AV-45, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Speaker (Base or Midline System)" . ● Audio unit ● Speaker ● Audio unit ● Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.) One or several speakers do not sound Poor sound D Audio unit B+ power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . If above check is OK, replace audio unit. ● C Audio unit switch. Refer to AV-33, "STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (WITHOUT NAVI)" . If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Audio unit presets are lost when ignition switch is turned OFF A G H I J MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BOSE SYSTEM) Before proceeding on models with NAVI, confirm that other AV switch functions (except audio functions) operate. If not, refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-DiagnoAV sis)" . Symptom Possible cause ● Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . ● Audio communication line check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-42, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation System)" . ● AV switch check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-42, "AV Switch Check (With NAVI)" . Inoperative If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Steering switch does not operate ● Steering switch check. Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)" or AV-41, "Steering Switch Check (with NAVI)" . ● AV switch check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-42, "AV Switch Check (With NAVI)" . If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Audio information is not displayed on screen (with NAVI) ● Display unit check. Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . ● Audio unit ● BOSE speaker amp. power supply and ground circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . ● BOSE speaker amp. ON signal ● BOSE speaker amp. All speakers do not sound Revision: March 2005 AV-35 2005 Altima L M AUDIO Symptom One or several speakers do not sound Poor sound Noisy Revision: March 2005 Possible cause ● Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-47, "Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System)" . ● Rear door speaker check. Refer to AV-51, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker (BOSE System)" . ● Subwoofer check. Refer to AV-55, "Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (BOSE System)" . ● Audio unit ● BOSE speaker amp. ● Speaker ● Audio unit ● BOSE speaker amp. ● Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.) AV-36 2005 Altima AUDIO FOR RADIO ONLY Symptom No sound Noisy A Possible cause ● Audio unit ● Antenna feeder, wiring or connections ● Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections ● Audio unit ● Audio unit case ground ● Antenna feeder, wiring or connections ● Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections ● Noise prevention parts ● Electrical equipment ● Wire harness of each piece of electrical equipment ● Audio unit power circuit. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . ● Audio unit All radio stations stored in memory are deleted B C D NOTE: The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction. ● Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal. ● Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings. E F G H I J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-37 2005 Altima AUDIO FOR CD ONLY Symptom Possible cause CD cannot be inserted. CD cannot be ejected. ● CD The CD cannot be played. ● Audio unit The sound skips, stops suddenly, or is distorted. Noise Inspection EKS008RQ The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause. NOTE: The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical components, one by one. TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE Occurrence condition Occurs only when engine is ON. Possible cause A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of the noise varies with changes in the engine speed. ● Ignition components A whistling noise occurs while the engine speed is high. A booming noise occurs while the engine is running and the lighting switch is ON. ● Generator ● Fuel pump condenser ● Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction ● Motor case ground ● Motor ● Rear defogger coil malfunction ● Open circuit in printed heater ● Poor ground of antenna amplifier or antenna feeder line ● Ground wire of body parts ● Ground due to improper part installation ● Wiring connections or a short circuit The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. Noise only occurs when various electrical components are operating. A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the operation of various switches. The noise occurs when various motors are operating. The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when it is vibrating excessively. Power Supply Circuit Inspection EKS008RR 1. CHECK FUSES ● Check that the following fuses are not blown. Unit Audio unit AV switch (with NAVI) BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) Terminals Signal name Fuse No. 6 Battery power 31 10 Ignition switch ACC or ON 6 1 Battery power 19 2 Ignition switch ACC or ON 6 1 Battery power 31 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: March 2005 AV-38 2005 Altima AUDIO 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. A Disconnect audio unit, AV switch (with NAVI) or BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) connector. Check voltage between the audio unit and ground. B Terminal No. (+) Unit Connector Audio unit Terminal (wire color) (-) 6 (Y/G) Ground M43 10 (PU) Ground OFF ACC ON C Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage D SKIA1992E 3. Check voltage between AV switch (with NAVI) and ground. F Terminal No. (+) Unit Connector AV switch OFF ACC ON Terminal (wire color) (-) 1 (Y/R) Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 2 (PU) Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage G M98 H WKIA1936E 4. I Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) and ground. J Terminal No. (+) Unit BOSE speaker amp. (-) Connector Terminal (wire color) B127 1 (Y/G) Ground OFF ACC ON AV Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. L SKIA4311E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. E Inspect audio unit case ground. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) harness connector B127 terminal 17 (B) and AV switch (with NAVI) harness connector M98 terminal 5 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness, connector or audio unit case ground. WKIA1937E Revision: March 2005 AV-39 2005 Altima M AUDIO Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI) EKS008RS 1. CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE 1. 2. Disconnect steering switch connector M102. Check resistance between steering switch connector terminals. Terminal 18 14 Signal name 17 17 Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Condition Seek (down) Depress (station) down switch. 165 Power Depress power switch. Volume (down) Depress volume down switch. 487 Seek (up) Depress (station) up switch. 165 Mode Depress mode switch. Volume (up) Depress volume up switch. 0 0 487 WKIA1938E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" . 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect audio unit and spiral cable connector. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and audio unit harness connector terminal. Terminals Spiral cable Connector Audio Unit Terminal Connector 26 (G) M30 75 (G) 31 (L) M45 34 (R/W) 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 76 (L) Yes 74 (R/W) Check continuity between audio unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1939E Audio unit Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — 74 (R/W) M98 75 (G) Ground No 76 (L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. Revision: March 2005 AV-40 2005 Altima AUDIO 3. SPIRAL CABLE CHECK 1. 2. A Disconnect spiral cable connector. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminals. B Terminals Spiral cable Connector Terminal Connector Terminal 26 M30 C Continuity 11 31 M102 12 34 D Yes 10 OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-45, "SPIRAL CABLE" . Steering Switch Check (with NAVI) WKIA1940E E EKS008RT F 1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK 1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . 2. Operate steering switch. Does steering switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 2. G 2. CHECK HARNESS I 1. 2. 3. J H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV switch connector and spiral cable connector. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and AV switch harness connector terminal. AV Terminals Spiral cable Connector AV switch Terminal Connector Terminal (Wire color) 26 (G) M30 L 11 (G) 31 (B/Y) M98 34 (R) 4. Continuity 12 (B/Y) Yes 10 (R) M Check continuity between AV switch and ground. Terminals AV switch Connector WKIA1941E — Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 10 (R) M98 11 (G) Ground No 12 (B/Y) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. Revision: March 2005 AV-41 2005 Altima AUDIO 3. SPIRAL CABLE CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect spiral cable connector. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminals. Terminals Spiral cable Connector Terminal Continuity Connector 26 M30 31 34 Terminal 11 M102 12 Yes 10 WKIA1940E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-45, "SPIRAL CABLE" . 4. CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE Check resistance between steering switch connector terminals. Terminal Signal name Seek (down) 18 14 17 17 Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Condition Depress (station) down switch. 165 Volume (down) Depress volume down switch. 487 Seek (up) Depress (station) up switch. 165 Mode Depress mode switch. Volume (up) Depress volume up switch. 0 487 WKIA1938E OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" . AV Switch Check (With NAVI) EKS008RU 1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK 1. Perform AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . Does AV switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" . Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation System) EKS008RV 1. CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-126, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace malfunctioning part. ● Revision: March 2005 AV-42 2005 Altima AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System) EKS008RW A 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. B Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect speaker or tweeter connector. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and suspect speaker or tweeter harness connector terminal. C Terminals Audio unit Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal (Wire color) Connector 2 (L/W) 4 (W/B) E - (L/R) + (W/B) D103 3 (L/B) 2 (L/W) M1 4 (W/B) F - (L/B) + (L/W) 1 (L/R) Yes - (L/R) G + (W/B) M72 3 (L/B) 3. Terminal (Wire color) + (L/W) D3 1 (L/R) M43 D Continuity - (L/B) H Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and ground. Terminals WKIA1220E Audio unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) I Continuity — J 2 (L/W) 1 (L/R) M43 4 (W/B) Ground No AV 3 (L/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. L M Revision: March 2005 AV-43 2005 Altima AUDIO 2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect audio unit connector and front speaker or tweeter connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminal and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) Connector 2 (L/W) M43 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal 1 (L/R) M43 4 (W/B) 3 (L/B) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Door Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-44 SKIA4278E 2005 Altima AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Speaker (Base or Midline System) EKS008RX A 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and suspect speaker connector. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. B Terminals Audio unit Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal (Wire color) Connector 13 (B/Y) M44 C B22 + (G/Y) 15 (R) - (R) B25 3. D - (B/Y) 14 (G/Y) 16 (L) Continuity Terminal (Wire color) Yes E + (L) Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and ground. F Terminals Audio unit Connector — G Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 13 (B/Y) M44 14 (G/Y) H Ground No 15 (R) WKIA1942E I 16 (L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-45 2005 Altima AUDIO 2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect audio unit connector and rear speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal audio unit harness connector terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector 14 (G/Y) M44 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal 13 (B/Y) M44 16 (L) 15 (R) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Rear Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-46 SKIA4281E 2005 Altima AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System) EKS008RY A 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal B128 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. B C Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Speaker or tweeter Terminal (Wire color) Connector Connector 13 (W/B) 15 (L/W) E - (L/B) + (L/W) D3 16 (L/R) 13 (W/B) 15 (L/W) F - (L/R) + (W/B) M72 14 (L/B) Yes - (L/B) G + (L/W) M1 16 (L/R) 3. D + (W/B) D103 14 (L/B) B128 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) - (L/R) H Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal B128 and ground. Terminals WKIA2018E BOSE speaker amp. Connector Terminal (Wire color) I Continuity — J 13 (W/B) 14 (L/B) B128 15 (L/W) Ground No AV 16 (L/R) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. L M Revision: March 2005 AV-47 2005 Altima AUDIO 2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128 terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) Connector 13 (W/B) B128 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal 14 (L/B) B128 15 (L/W) 16 (L/R) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Door Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" . NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 AV-48 SKIA4283E 2005 Altima AUDIO 3. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. A Disconnect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal. B Terminals Audio unit Connector BOSE speaker amp. Terminal (Wire color) Connector 1 (B) 29 (B) 2 (W) M43 D 30 (W) B128 3 (BR) 4 (Y) 3. C Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 27 (BR) Yes E 28 (Y) Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and ground. F Terminals Audio unit Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — G 1 (B) 2 (W) M43 3 (BR) Ground H No SKIA4284E 4 (Y) I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-49 2005 Altima AUDIO 4. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector. Turn ignition switch ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal audio unit harness connector terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector 2 (W) M43 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal 1 (B) M43 4 (Y) 3 (BR) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp." . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-50 SKIA4278E 2005 Altima AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker (BOSE System) EKS008RZ A 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal B128 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. B C Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Speaker Terminal (Wire color) Connector Connector 9 (L) Continuity D Terminal (Wire color) + (G/Y) D302 10 (R) B128 - (B/Y) 11 (G/Y) D202 12 (B/Y) 3. E Yes + (G/Y) - (B/Y) F Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128 terminal and ground. G Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector — Continuity Terminal (Wire color) H 9 (L) B128 10 (R) Ground No WKIA1570E I 11 (G/Y) 12 (B/Y) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-51 2005 Altima AUDIO 2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128 terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector 9 (L) B128 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal 10 (R) B128 11 (G/Y) 12 (B/Y) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Rear Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" . NG >> GO TO 3. SKIA4314E Revision: March 2005 AV-52 2005 Altima AUDIO 3. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. A Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B128. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128 terminal. B Terminals Audio unit Connector BOSE speaker amp. Terminal (Wire color) Connector 13 (B/R) D 26 (BR) 15 (B/W) B128 16 (L) 3. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 25 (B/R) 14 (BR) M44 C 23 (B/W) Yes E 24 (L) Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and ground. F Terminals Audio unit Connector G Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — 13 (B/R) H 14 (BR) M44 15 (B/W) Ground No SKIA4315E I 16 (L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-53 2005 Altima AUDIO 4. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B128. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal at audio unit harness connector M44 terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector 14 (BR) M44 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal 13 (B/R) M44 16 (L) 15 (B/W) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp." . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-54 SKIA4316E 2005 Altima AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (BOSE System) EKS008S0 A 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector and suspect subwoofer connectors. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and subwoofer harness connector harness connector terminal. B C Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector B127 3. Subwoofer Continuity Terminal (Wire color) Connector Terminal (Wire color) 3 (L/W) B26 + (L/W) 19 (L/B) B26 - (L/B) 2 (W) B126 + (W) 18 (B) B126 - (B) D E Yes F Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and ground. G Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector — Continuity Terminal (Wire color) H 3 (L/W) B127 19 (L/B) Ground No WKIA1943E I 2 (W) 18 (B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-55 2005 Altima AUDIO 2. SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check the signal BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) Connector 18 (B) B127 19 (L/B) Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal 2 (W) B127 3 (L/W) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Subwoofer Speaker" . NG >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp." . Revision: March 2005 AV-56 WKIA1944E 2005 Altima AUDIO Removal and Installation for Audio Unit EKS008S1 A 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . Remove screws using power tool and slide audio/display assembly (with NAVI) or audio unit (without NAVI) forward. 4. Disconnect connectors and antenna cable and then remove audio unit. 5. Remove audio unit from brackets. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B C D WKIA1945E Removal and Installation for Door Speaker E EKS008S2 1. Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-30, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove screws and speaker. 3. Disconnect speaker connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I LKIA0057E Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker EKS008S3 J 1. Remove windshield garnish molding. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove tweeter speaker by gently prying away from A pillar. 3. Disconnect tweeter speaker connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AV L M LKIA0058E Removal and Installation for Rear Speaker EKS008S4 1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove screws and rear speaker. 3. Disconnect speaker connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal, noting the following: Rear speaker mounting screws: : 2.7 - 3.7 N·m (0.28 - 0.38 kg-m, 24 - 33 in-lb) Removal and Installation for Subwoofer Speaker 1. EKS008S5 Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 AV-57 2005 Altima AUDIO 2. Remove screws and subwoofer. 3. Disconnect subwoofer connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal, noting the following: Subwoofer mounting screws: : 2.7 - 3.7 N·m (0.28 - 0.38 kg-m, 24 - 33 in-lb) LKIA0059E Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp. EKS008S6 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove trunk trim and trunk lid finisher. Refer to EI-37, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Remove screws and amp. 5. Disconnect amp. connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal, noting the following: BOSE speaker amp. mounting screws: : 2.7 - 3.7 N·m (0.28 - 0.38 kg-m, 24 - 33 in-lb) LKIA0062E Removal and Installation for AV Switch 1. 2. 3. 4. EKS008S7 Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . Remove the four AV switch screws. Carefully remove the AV switch. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1946E Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches 1. 2. 3. 4. EKS008S8 Remove steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove steering wheel rear cover screws and remove steering wheel rear cover. Remove steering wheel switch assembly screws and steering wheel switches. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1226E Revision: March 2005 AV-58 2005 Altima AUDIO ANTENNA AUDIO ANTENNA System Description PFP:28200 A EKS008S9 With the ignition switch in ACC or ON, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the antenna amp. When the radio switch is turned ON, antenna signal is supplied ● through audio unit terminal 5 ● to the antenna amp. terminal 1. Then the antenna amp. is activated. The amplified radio signals are supplied to the audio unit through the antenna amp. B C D E F G H I J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-59 2005 Altima AUDIO ANTENNA Wiring Diagram — W/ANT — EKS008SA LKWA0017E Revision: March 2005 AV-60 2005 Altima AUDIO ANTENNA Location of Antenna EKS008SB A B C D E F WKIA1947E Window Antenna Repair EKS008SC G ELEMENT CHECK 1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on each side. H I J SEL250I ● AV When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger. L M SEL122R Revision: March 2005 AV-61 2005 Altima AUDIO ANTENNA 2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist. SEL252I 3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point. SEL253I ELEMENT REPAIR Refer to GW-54, "Filament Repair" . Revision: March 2005 AV-62 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description PFP:25915 A EKS008SD The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information). The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVDROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with a current-location mark. B C D WKIA1371E E By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can be used. The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its direction. F G H SEL684V TRAVEL DISTANCE Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function has been adopted. Adjustments can be made in extreme cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires. TRAVEL DIRECTION I J Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals AV from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately. Type Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) GPS antenna (GPS information) Disadvantage L ● Direction errors may accumulate when the vehicle is driven for long distances without stopping. M ● Correct direction cannot be detected when the vehicle speed is low. Advantage ● Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite accurately. ● Can detect the vehicle's travel direction (North/South/East/West). MAP-MATCHING Map-matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the method described in the position detection principle, with the road map data around the vehicle, read from the map DVD-ROM stored in the DVD-ROM drive. Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display must be corrected manually. CAUTION: The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVDROM. Revision: March 2005 AV-63 SEL685V 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● ● ● In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is currently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has been repositioned. If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong road can be avoided. If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority. Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and configuration of the road. Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map DVD-ROM, or when the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different due to repair. When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching function may find another road and position the current-location mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the current-location mark may leap to it. Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road data read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when there is an excessive gap between the current vehicle position and the position on the map, correction by map-matching is not possible. SEL686V SKIA0613E GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and controlled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 miles). The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimensions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calculated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satelSEL526V lites (two-dimensional positioning). Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions. ● In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position changes. ● There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning, which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning. ● Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna. ● Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped. Revision: March 2005 AV-64 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NAVI Control Unit ● ● A The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are built-in units that control the navigation functions. Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor, and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map. Location information is shown on liquid crystal display (display unit). B C D PKIA0248E DVD-ROM Drive E Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information can be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc. F G H PKIA0249E Map DVD-ROM ● ● The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information. To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format. Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used. Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor) ● ● The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle steering angle. The gyro is built into the navigation (NAVI) control unit. I J AV BIRDVIEW™ The BIRDVIEW™ provides a detailed and easily seen display of road conditions covering the vehicle's immediate to distant area. ● PLAN VIEW L M WKIA1948E Revision: March 2005 AV-65 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● BIRDVIEW™ WKIA1949E Description ● ● ● Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate distances (Wn, D, and Wd). Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six vertical grid lines indicate display depth and direction. Pushing the “ZOOM IN” button during operation displays the scale change and the view point height on the left side of the screen. The height of the view point increases or decreases when “ZOOM IN” or “ZOOM OUT” is selected. SKIA5613E MAP DISPLAY Function of each icon is as follows: 1. Azimuth indication. 2. Position marker. – The tip of the arrow shows the current location. The shaft of the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is traveling. 3. GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions). 4. Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale). WKIA1950E Revision: March 2005 AV-66 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH Display with Pushed “DEST” button ● A Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON) B C D SKIA3509E ● E Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF) F G SKIA3510E H The function of each icon is as follows: Mode Icon Easy Address Book × Favorite place can be saved to memory. Address/Street × × The destination can be searched from the address. Point of Interest (POI) × × The destination of favorite facility can be searched. Previous Dest. × The previous ten destinations stored in memory are displayed. Intersection × The destination can be searched from the intersection. City × The destination can be searched from city name. Map × The destination can be searched from the map. Phone Number × The destination can be set by entering the phone number. Home × Sets the home as a destination. Help × Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display. Country × Revision: March 2005 I Description Expert × J AV L M Select country (USA, CANADA) AV-67 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Display with Pushed “ROUTE” button ● Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON) SKIA4494E ● Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF) SKIA4495E The function of each icon is as follows: Mode Icon Description Easy Expert Quick Stop × × The selected facility is set as the destination or way point. (Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destination has been reached.) Where am I? × × Next, current and previous street names can be displayed. The following items can be selected. Cancel Guidance × × ● All Destinations ● Way point ● Not Cancel (Displayed only when the destination area has been set.) The following items can be selected. × Route Info.* ● Complete Route ● Turn List ● Route Simulation (Displayed only when the destination area has been set.) × Edit Route* Help × Change the destination or add the transit points of the route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and the recommended route is not followed.) Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display. *: When in Easy Mode, “Route Info.” and “Edit Route” are not displayed. Revision: March 2005 AV-68 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Display with Pushed “SETTING” button A The function of each icon is as follows: B C SKIA4496E D Icon Description Display Settings of display can be performed. Vehicle Electronic Systems Settings of vehicle electrical equipment can be performed. System Settings Settings of linguistic select, time adjusting and beep sound can be performed. Navigation Settings and adjusting of navigation can be performed. Short Menus Easy Mode and Expert Mode can be switched. Guidance Volume The volume and/or on/off of voice prompt can be controlled by the joystick. Help (only easy mode) Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display. E F G Display Settings H How To Perform Display Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “Display” with enter button. I J AV WKIA1951E Application Items L Icon Description Reference page Brightness/Contrast/Map Background Brightness, Contrast and Map Background can be set. AV-69 Display Off Display sleep mode ON/OFF can be switched. AV-69 Brightness/Contrast/Map Back ground How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Select “Brightness/Contrast/Map Background”. ● Brightness, Contrast and Background are shown at the lower part of the screen, and it can be set with the joystick. Display Off How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Select “Display Off”. ● When setting is turned on (Indicator light ON), the display will be under sleep mode. Revision: March 2005 AV-69 2005 Altima M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Vehicle Electronic Systems WKIA1952E Application Items Icon Description Remote Unlock Driver's Door First This option allows selection of which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation. Keyless Remote Response — Horn This option allows the horn chirp mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob to be changed. Keyless Remote Response — Lights This option allows the hazard flash mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob to be changed. Auto Re-Lock Time This option allows the length of time before doors auto re-lock to be set. Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights This option allows the sensitivity of the autolights to be set. Automatic Headlights Off Delay This option allows the length of time before the autolights turn off to be set. Speed Dependent Wiper This option allows the driving speed dependent wiper function to be turned on or off. Return All Settings Default All settings will return to the initial conditions. How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “Vehicle Electronic Systems”. System Settings How To Perform System Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “System Settings”. SKIA4536E Revision: March 2005 AV-70 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Application Items Icon Description Reference page Language/Unit Settings of language or unit can be performed. AV-71 Clock Settings of clock can be performed. AV-71 Beep Setting Settings of beep sound can be performed. AV-71 A B Language Setting C How To Perform Language Setting 1. Select "Language/Unit". ● Language setting can be switched. ● Unit setting can be changed. D E F SKIA2065E Clock Settings How To Perform Clock Setting 1. Select "Clock". ● Select the "Hours" or "Minutes" key and tilt the joystick to the left or the right to adjust the time. ● Turn ON and OFF daylight saving time. ● Select the "Auto Adjust" key. The time will be reset to the GPS time. ● Select the "Select Time Zone" key. The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear. G H I J SKIA2063E AV Beep Setting How To Perform Beep Setting 1. Select “Beep Setting”. ● When Beep Setting is on (indicator light on), a beep will sound if the button is pushed. NOTE: Items in exception of Beep Setting ON/OFF. ● An error beep. ● An interrupted-screen beep. L M SKIA4829E Revision: March 2005 AV-71 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Navigation Setting How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “NAVIGATION”. SKIA0551E Application Items Icon Description Reference page View Map display mode can be switched. AV-72 Heading Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the actual driving direction of the vehicle. AV-73 Nearby Display Icons* Icons of facilities can be displayed. Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety selections. AV-73 Save Current Location* Current vehicle location can be registered in Address Book. AV-73 Adjust Current Location* Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker also can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is not matched with the actual direction. AV-73 Auto Re-route On/Off* ON/OFF of Auto Re-route can be switched. AV-74 Avoid Area Setting* A particular area can be avoided when routing. AV-74 Clear Memory* Address Book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted. AV-74 Edit Address Book* Address Book can be edited. AV-75 GPS Information* The GPS data includes longitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea level) of the present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in which the vehicle is being driven. Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position. AV-75 Quick Stop Customer Setting* One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop. AV-75 Set Average Speed for Estimated Journey Time* Average vehicle speed can be set to calibrate estimated journey time for the destination. AV-75 Tracking On/Off* Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed. AV-76 *: Not displayed in easy mode. “VIEW” MODE 1. Select “Birdview™” or “Plan View” icon. ● To open the map screen display with Birdview™, select “Birdview™”. ● To open the map screen display with Plan View, select “Plan View”. SKIA0554E Revision: March 2005 AV-72 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM “HEADING” MODE ● ● A To display North up, select “North up”. To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”. B C SKIA0561E D “NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE ● Select an icon to display on the map screen. E F G SKIA0562E H “SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ● The current vehicle location can be registered in “Address Book”. NOTE: “Address Book” can store 50 items maximum. I J AV SKIA0556E “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE 1. 2. 3. Move marker to correct location. Select "SET" and the vehicle location mark will be located in current position. Select an icon “right” or “left” to calibrate the heading direction. (Arrow marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.) M SKIA0563E Revision: March 2005 AV-73 L 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4. Select “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the arrow mark. SKIA0564E “AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE ● ● To activate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “On”. To deactivate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “Off”. SKIA0558E “AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE ● Areas to avoid can be registered. SKIA2058E “CLEAR MEMORY” MODE ● To delete all the stored places in “Address Book”, “Avoid Area” and “Previous Destinations”, select “Yes”. SKIA3572E Revision: March 2005 AV-74 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM “EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE ● A Edit the items registered in Address Book. B C SKIA3511E D “GPS INFORMATION” MODE ● Latitude, longitude, altitude, astrometric state, and satellite location are displayed as GPS information. NOTE: Altitude is displayed only in three-dimensional status. E F G SKIA0555E H “QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE Select a category for the “Quick Stop” menu. NOTE: This only replaces the fifth position on the "QUICK STOP" menu when "ROUTE" is pressed. ● I J AV SKIA5820E “SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE ● ● Set the average vehicle speed to calibrate the estimated journey time for the destination. Set three items: “Freeway”, “Main Roads”, and “Ordinary Roads”. M SKIA0565E Revision: March 2005 AV-75 L 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM “TRACKING” MODE To delete the tracking marks on the map, select “Off”. ● To leave the tracking marks on the map, select “On”. NOTE: When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the memory. ● SKIA0559E GUIDANCE VOLUME Description Following guidance volume settings can be changed. SKIA4497E Activation/Deactivation Setting ● The voice prompt can be turned on/off by pressing the “Guidance Volume” button. Voice Volume Setting ● Volume of the voice can be controlled by tilting the joystick to left/right. DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON ● ● When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following items will display on the screen. Warning message (if there are any) →TRIP1→TRIP2→FUEL ECONOMY→MAINTENANCE→OFF. Display items Trip 1 or Trip 2 Fuel Economy Display/Setting contents Elapsed Time Displays driving time with a range of 0000:00:00 to 9999:59:59. Driving Distance [(km) or (miles)] Displays driving distance with a range of 00000.0 to 99999.9. Average speed [(km/h) or (MPH)] Displays average speed with a range of 000.0 to 999.9. Average Fuel Economy [(MPG) or (l/100km)] Displays fuel economy with ignition switch ON, average fuel economy each 30 seconds. Distance to Empty [(km) or (miles)] Displays possible driving distance with remaining fuel. Fuel Economy [(MPG) or (l/100km)] Displays fuel economy each approx. 100 ms. Engine oil Maintenance intervals of engine oil and setting of oil change cycle. Tire rotation Maintenance intervals of tire and setting of tire replacement cycle. Maintenance Revision: March 2005 AV-76 Reference page AV-77 AV-77 AV-77 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2 ● ● A Elapsed time, Driving distance and Average speed are displayed as Trip 1 information or Trip 2 information. The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by keeping pushing “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds. B C WKIA1953E D FUEL ECONOMY ● ● Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty, Fuel Economy are displayed as Fuel Economy information. The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by keeping pushing “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds. E F G WKIA1954E H MAINTENANCE ● Engine Oil and Tire Rotation are displayed as Maintenance information. I J AV WKIA1955E ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION ● Possible to set up interval of engine oil and tire rotation by tilting joystick right and left. M WKIA1956E Revision: March 2005 AV-77 L 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM WARNING INDICATIONS Warning signal (Door switch signal) is received from BCM through CAN communication line. WKIA1957E Warning indicators Warning lamps in instrument panel Warning detection and cancel conditions Detection condition DOOR OPEN Door Cancel condition Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of any of the doors is detected. Cases of malfunction Door is open Vehicle is stopped and all the doors lock. CAN Communication System Description EKS008SE Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 AV-78 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Component Parts Location EKS008SF A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKIA1958E Revision: March 2005 AV-79 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Schematic EKS008SG WKWA1282E Revision: March 2005 AV-80 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram —NAVI— EKS008SH A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1283E Revision: March 2005 AV-81 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM WKWA1284E Revision: March 2005 AV-82 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1285E Revision: March 2005 AV-83 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM WKWA1286E Revision: March 2005 AV-84 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1287E Revision: March 2005 AV-85 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM WKWA1288E Revision: March 2005 AV-86 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1289E Revision: March 2005 AV-87 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — COMM — EKS008SI WKWA1290E Revision: March 2005 AV-88 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2975E Revision: March 2005 AV-89 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output EKS008SJ Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom + – 1 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V – Ground Battery power Input OFF – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 4 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V – 6 (PU) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 8 (P) Voice guide signal ON Press the “GUIDE/ VOICE” button. 9 – Shield ground – – – – Audio noise interference. 14 – Shield ground – – – – Video display interference. ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 2 (Y/R) 3 (Y/R) 7 (L) Output Only route guide and operation guide are not heard. SKIA0171J 15 (B) 17 RGB signal (B: blue) Output NAVI screen looks yellowish. SKIA4979E 16 (Y) 14 RGB synchronizing signal Output ON Press the “MAP” button. NAVI screen is rolling. SKIA0164E 17 18 (R) – 17 Shield ground RGB signal (R: red) – Output – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Video display interference. – NAVI screen looks bluish. SKIA4977E 21 (W) 17 RGB signal (G: green) Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. NAVI screen looks reddish. SKIA4978E Revision: March 2005 AV-90 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + 25 (R/L) 26 (G) – Illumination signal 30 (B) Ground Ignition signal Signal input/ output Input Input Ignition switch Operation 28 (P) Reverse signal Ground Ground Vehicle speed signal Input Input Example of symptom B Lighting switch in 1st position Battery voltage Lighting switch is OFF 3V or less ON ON – Selector lever in R position 27 (G/W) A Voltage (Approx.) ON ON Selector lever not in R position Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Display unit illumination does not change when lighting switch is turned to 1st position.Navigation current location mark does not indicate the correct position. The navigation current-location mark moves strangely when the vehicle is moving backwards. Navigation current location mark does not indicate the correct position. When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) C D E F G H I PKIA1935E 43 – Shield ground – – – 44 (G) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON – – – J AV System does not work properly. L SKIA0175E M 45 (R) Ground Communication signal (–) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – SKIA0176E 66 67 Revision: March 2005 GPS signal Input ON Connector is not connected. AV-91 5V Navigation system GPS correction is not possible. 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output EKS008SK Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom System does not work properly. + – 1 (Y/R) Ground Battery Power Input OFF – Battery voltage 2 (L/W) Ground Power Supply (Inverter) Output ON – 9V 3 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V 4 (L/R) Ground Power Supply (Signal) Output ON – 9V 5 (P/B) Ground (Inverter) Ground – ON – 0V – Input Selector lever in R position Battery voltage Ground Reverse signal Selector lever not in R position 0V Impossible to gain direction of vehicle. 6 (G/W) ON Screen is not shown. – Screen is not shown. 7 (P/L) Ground (Signal) Ground – ON – 0V – 10 (PU) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 12 (G) Ground Ignition signal Input ON – Battery voltage Vehicle information setting is not possible. Lighting switch position 1st or 2nd Battery voltage Lighting switch position OFF 0V 14 (R/L) 16 (P) Illumination signal Ground Ground Vehicle speed signal Input Input OFF ON Display unit does not change when lighting switch is turned to 1st position. Value of vehicle speed information is not accurately displayed. When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) SKIA0168E 25 (L) – CAN-H – – – – – 26 (P) – CAN-L – – – – – 28 (PU) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ Output ON – System does not work properly. SKIA0175E 29 – Revision: March 2005 Shield ground – – – AV-92 – – 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + 30 (LG) – Ground Communication signal (–) Signal input/ output Input/ output Ignition switch Operation ON – A Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B System does not work properly. C D SKIA0176E E 32 (G) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – F SKIA0175E 33 Shield ground – – – – – – G H 34 (R) Ground Communication signal (–) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – I SKIA0176E J 36 (B/W) 37 Display Communication signal (DCU-DSP) Output ON Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. Press the “TRIP” button. SKIA4364E 37 – Shield ground 37 Display Communication signal (DSP-DCU) – – – – AV L – M 38 (L) Input ON Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. Press the “TRIP” button. SKIA4363E 39 – Shield ground – – – 40 (B/R) Ground Audio TX Communication signal Output ON Operate audio volume. – – Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4402E Revision: March 2005 AV-93 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item Signal input/ output Ignition switch Operation + – 41 – Shield ground – – – 42 (BR) Ground Audio RX communication signal Input ON Operate audio volume. Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom – – Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E 43 (Y) 41 RGB synchronizing signal Input ON Press the “MAP” button. NAVI screen is rolling. SKIA0164E 44 (R) 45 RGB signal (R: red) – Shield ground Input ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. NAVI screen looks bluish. SKIA4977E 45 46 (W) 45 RGB signal (G: green) – Input – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. – – NAVI screen looks reddish. SKIA4978E 47 48 (B) – 45 Shield ground RGB signal (B: blue) – Input – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. – – NAVI screen looks yellowish. SKIA4979E 49 50 (R/L) – 47 Shield ground RGB signal (R: red) – Output – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. – – NAVI screen looks bluish. SKIA4980E Revision: March 2005 AV-94 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + 51 (B) – RGB area (YS) signal 49 Signal input/ output Output Ignition switch Operation ON Press the“TRIP” button. A Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B RGB screen is not shown. C D SKIA0162E 52 (R/W) RGB signal (G: green) 47 Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. E Screen looks reddish. F SKIA4981E 53 (W) 49 Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal Input ON Operating screen for audio is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – G H SKIA4983E I 54 (B) RGB signal (B: blue) 47 Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Screen looks yellowish. SKIA4982E 55 (R) 49 Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal Input ON AV Operating screen for audio is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – 49 RGB synchronizing signal Output ON Press the “TRIP” button. NAVI screen is rolling. SKIA0164E Revision: March 2005 AV-95 L M SKIA4983E 56 (G) J 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for Display unit Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output EKS008SL Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom – + – 1 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V 2 (L/W) Ground Power supply (Inverter) Input ON – 9V Screen is not shown. 3 (L/R) Ground Power supply (Signal) Input ON – 9V Screen is not shown. ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 6 (R/W) RGB signal (G: green) 7 Input Screen looks reddish. SKIA4981E 7 8 (R) – Shield ground 21 Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal – Output – ON – – – Operating screen for audio is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – SKIA4983E 9 (B) RGB area (YS) signal 21 Input ON Press the “TRIP” button. RGB screen is not shown. SKIA0162E 11 (B/W) 23 Display communication signal (DCU-DSP) Input ON Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. – SKIA4364E 13 (P/B) Ground (Inverter) Ground – ON – 0V – 14 (P/L) Ground (Signal) Ground – ON – 0V – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 17 (R/L) 7 RGB signal (R: red) Input Screen looks bluish. SKIA4980E Revision: March 2005 AV-96 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + 18 (B) – RGB signal (B: blue) 7 Signal input/ output Input Ignition switch Operation ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. A Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B Screen looks yellowish. C D SKIA4982E E 19 (G) RGB synchronizing signal 21 Input ON Press the “TRIP” button. NAVI screen is rolling. F SKIA0164E 20 (W) 21 Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal Output ON Operating screen for audio is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – G H SKIA4983E 21 22 (L) – Shield ground 23 Display communication signal (DSP-DCU) – Output – ON – – – Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. – I J AV SKIA4363E 23 – Shield ground – – – – – L M Revision: March 2005 AV-97 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation EKS008SM Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom + – 1 (Y/R) Ground Battery power Input OFF – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 2 (PU) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 3 (R/L) Ground Illumination signal Lighting switch is ON (position 1). Input OFF Battery voltage AV switch illumination does not come on when lighting switch is ON (position 1). Turn lighting switch OFF. 3.0V or less Changes between 0 and 12V AV switch illumination cannot be controlled. 0V – Input ON Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. 4 (R/Y) Ground Illumination control signal 5 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 6 (PU) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON – System does not work properly. SKIA0175E 7 – Shield ground – – – 8 (LG) Ground Communication signal (-) Input/ output ON – – – System does not work properly. SKIA0176E 10 (R) 11 (G) 12 (B/Y) Ground Ground – Remote control A Remote control B Remote control ground Revision: March 2005 Input Input – ON ON – Press MODE switch 0V Press SEEK UP switch 0.75V Press VOL UP switch 2V Except for above 5V Press POWER switch 0V Press SEEK DOWN switch 0.75V Press VOL DOWN switch 2V Except for above 5V – – AV-98 Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EKS008SN A Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 L Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) B C Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 D SKIA5291E E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 F SKIA5292E G 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 H SKIA5291E 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 11 PU Ignition switch (ACC) I ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 J SKIA5292E ACC — AV Battery voltage L 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 M SKIA5291E 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 G/R Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: March 2005 AV-99 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 G/B Combination switch output 2 36 G/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 38 R Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN− H — — — 40 P CAN− L — — — 57 W Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage Revision: March 2005 AV-100 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM On Board Self-Diagnosis Function EKS008SO A DESCRIPTION ● ● ● Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually. Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen. CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the set value, and to display the History of Errors of the navigation system. B C DIAGNOSIS ITEM D Mode Description Self-diagnosis (DCU) Display control unit diagnosis. ● NAVI Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive) will not be diagnosed when no map DVD-ROM is in it. ● Analyzes connection between the NAVI control unit and the GPS antenna and operation of each unit. Self-diagnosis (NAVI) F On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale. Display diagnosis On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehi- Display diagnosis On NAVI C/U mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale. Vehicle signals On NAVI C/U mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed signal, light signal, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal. History of Errors Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (before turning ignition switch ON) are displayed in this mode. Time and location when/where the errors occurred are also displayed. Navigation Navigation Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude will be displayed. Speed Calibration Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring function will automatically compensate for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused by tire wear or low-pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire chains in inclement weather. Angle adjustment Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning angle of the car mark on the display. Initialize Location This mode is for initializing the current location. Use when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a trailer, etc. Display status of CAN communication. NOTE: Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown. Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) EKS008SP OPERATION PROCEDURE Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. Revision: March 2005 H I J Display Longitude & Latitude CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR 1. 2. G cle speed signal, light signalNOTE , ignition switch signal, and reverse signal. Vehicle signals CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT E AV-101 2005 Altima AV L M NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. WKIA2681E 4. The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. SKIA4207E 5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”. ● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode. ● A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the diagnosis. SKIA4208E 6. When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation screen will be shown. ● When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen will be shown. ● When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for the part will not appear on the screen. SKIA4209E Revision: March 2005 AV-102 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 7. On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows. Green Yellow Red Gray A : Not malfunctioning. : Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results. : Unit is malfunctioning. : Diagnosis has not been done. B If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by the malfunction of the highest priority. ● C WKIA1189E D 8. Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown. ● When the switch is green, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and adjustments are recommended. Follow the “confirmation/ adjustment” menu or refer to the service manual.” ● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the service manual for further details”. ● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown. “DCU is abnormal”. E F G SKIA4211E SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT Quick reference table 1. 2. 3. H Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table. Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV-88, "Wiring Diagram — COMM —" . Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again. J Screen switch Switch color DCU* Red × × Gray x DISPLAY Audio unit Navigation GPS antenna Diagnosis No. 1 x x 3 × × Self-Diagnosis Codes Possible cause Reference page 1 Display control unit malfunction Refer to AV-156 . 2 Display communication line between display control unit and display unit Refer to AV-128 . 3 Audio unit power supply and ground circuit Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit Refer to AV-125 . 4 NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit AV communication line between display control unit and NAVI control unit Refer to AV-125 . AV-103 L 4 *: DCU = Display control unit CAUTION: ● When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" . ● When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-143, "Screen is Not Shown" . Revision: March 2005 AV 2 × Diagnosis No. I 2005 Altima M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) EKS008SQ OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. WKIA2681E 4. The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. SKIA4207E 5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis (NAVI)”. ● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode. ● A bar graph will be shown on the screen to indicate progress of the diagnosis. SKIA4212E Revision: March 2005 AV-104 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 6. On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows. Green Yellow Red Gray A : Not malfunctioning. : Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results. : Unit is malfunctioning. : Diagnosis has not been done. B If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by the malfunction of the highest priority. ● C SKIA4214E D 7. Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown. ● When the switch is green, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and adjustments are recommended. Follow the “Confirmation and Adjustments” menu or refer to the service manual.” ● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the service manual for further details”. ● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown. SKIA4211E “Center Control Unit is abnormal”. ● When the switch is gray, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis for DVD-ROM DRIVER of NAVI was not conducted because no DVD-ROM was available.” SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT Quick reference table 1. 2. 3. Select an malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table. Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV-88, "Wiring Diagram — COMM —" . Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again. Screen switch Diagnosis No. Switch color Center control unit* Red × 1 Gray × 2 × 3 × 4 Yellow × GPS antenna × Reference page 1 NAVI control unit malfunction. Refer to AV-156 2 No map DVD-ROM is inserted in the NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-131 Revision: March 2005 AV-105 G H I J AV M 5 Self-diagnosis codes Possible cause F L *: Center Control unit = NAVI control unit CAUTION: ● When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" . ● When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-143, "Screen is Not Shown" . Diagnosis No. E 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Diagnosis No. Possible cause Reference page When “DVD-ROM error. Please check disc.” is shown. 1. Eject map DVD-ROM and check if it is compatible with the system. 3 2. Check ejected DVD-ROM for dirt, damage, and warpage. 3. If no error is found, insert a known good map DVD-ROM of the same type and perform self-diagnosis again. If same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If result is normal, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. 4 If “Error found in DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in control unit. Please perform diagnosis in accordance with service manual” is shown, carry out same inspection as diagnosis No. 3. Refer to AV-131 Refer to AV-131 GPS antenna system. 1. Visually check for a broken wire in the GPS antenna coaxial cable. 5 2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector, and make sure approximately 5V is supplied from the NAVI control unit. If not, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If 5V is supplied, replace the GPS antenna. If the connection is still malfunction after the replacement of the GPS antenna, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. Revision: March 2005 AV-106 Refer to AV-132 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation/Adjustment Mode EKS008SR OPERATION PROCEDURE A 1. 2. 3. B Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. C D E F G H WKIA2681E 4. I The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. J AV L SKIA4207E 5. 6. 7. When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial selfdiagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of each item will become possible. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals” and “Navigation” will become selective. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. M WKIA1959E Revision: March 2005 AV-107 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS LKIA0216E ● When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows. R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error ● : Screen looks bluish : Screen looks reddish : Screen looks yellowish When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-137, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)" , AV-138, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV139, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" . VEHICLE SIGNALS ● A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system. CAUTION: In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of lighting switch (normal setting). ● OFF: D (Day mode) ● ON: N (Night mode) Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed. LKIA0217E Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) – Light IGN Reverse Remarks Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position ON Lighting switch ON OFF Lighting switch OFF ON Ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch ACC ON Selector lever in R position OFF Selector lever in other than R position – Revision: March 2005 Condition – – Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position AV-108 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● ● ● ● If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . If light is NG, refer to AV-123, "Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . If IGN is NG, refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . If reverse is NG, refer to AV-124, "Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . A B NAVIGATION 1. 2. The initial confirmation/adjustment screen will be shown, and items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “History of Errors” and “Navigation” will become selective. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. C D E SKIA4226E F DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS G H I J AV SKIA0362E ● R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error ● L When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows. : Screen looks bluish : Screen looks reddish : Screen looks yellowish M When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-134, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)" , AV-135, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)" and AV-139, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" . Revision: March 2005 AV-109 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM VEHICLE SIGNALS ● A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system. CAUTION: In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of light switch (normal setting). ● OFF: D (Day mode) ● ON: N (Night mode) Unless mode is in above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed. LKIA0217E Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) – Light IGN Reverse ● ● ● Remarks Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position ON Lighting switch ON OFF Lighting switch OFF ON Ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch ACC ON Selector lever in R position OFF Selector lever in other than R position – ● Condition – – Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-121, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . If light is NG, refer to AV-123, "Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . If IGN is NG, refer to AV-123, "Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . If reverse is NG, refer to AV-124, "Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . HISTORY OF ERRORS SKIA0366E DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS The “Self-diagnosis” results indicate whether an error occurred during the period from when the ignition switch is turned to ON until “Self-diagnosis” is completed. Revision: March 2005 AV-110 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM If an error occurred before the ignition switch was turned to ON and does not occur again until the “Self-diagnosis” is completed, the diagnosis result will be judged normal. Therefore, those errors in the past which cannot be found by the “Self-diagnosis” must be found by diagnosing the “History of Errors”. The History of Errors displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of the following points. ● Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed when the GPS antenna substrate within the NAVI control unit has malfunctioned. ● Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current-location mark at the time when the error occurred. If the current-location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occurrence may be located correctly. ● The maximum number of occurrences which can be stored is 50. For the 51st and later occurrences, the displayed number remains 50. When a reproducible malfunction occurred but its cause cannot be identified because several errors are present, record the item, number and place (longitude/latitude) of error occurrence (or delete the History of Errors), then turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to reproduce the malfunction. Check the History of Errors to find the items which show an increased number of occurrences, and diagnose the item. Possible causes Error item Example of symptom A B C D E F Action/symptom Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal gyro. Gyro sensor disconnected ● ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Communication error between NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. GPS disconnected ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Angular velocity cannot be detected.) G H ● ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) I GPS receiving status remains gray. J Malfunctioning transmission wires to NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. GPS transmission cable malfunction ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. ● Malfunctioning receiving wires to NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. GPS input line connection error ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchronizing oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification GPS TCX0 over GPS TCX0 under ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference, or the control unit may have been subjected to excessively high or low temperatures. Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning. GPS ROM malfunction GPS RAM malfunction ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Revision: March 2005 AV-111 During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not performed. AV L ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. ● Location detection accuracy of the navigation system will deteriorate, depending on the error area in the memory, because GPS cannot make correct positioning. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) 2005 Altima M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Possible causes Error item Example of symptom Action/symptom Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning. ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. GPS RTC malfunction Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in NAVI control unit and GPS antenna. GPS antenna disconnected ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration. The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has decreased. Low voltage of GPS ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration. ● Correct time may not be displayed. ● After the power is turned on, the system always takes some time until GPS positioning becomes possible. (The GPS receiver starts positioning without re-collecting the whole satellite information when it judged the data stored in the receiver is correct.) ● Correct time of error occurrence may not be stored in the ″History of Errors″. ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. Malfunctioning NAVI control unit. DVD-ROM Malfunction DVD-ROM Read error DVD-ROM Response Error - Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot be read. ● The map of a particular location cannot be displayed. ● Specific guidance information cannot be displayed. ● Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty? – If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. – If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth. ● Map display is slow. ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● Guidance information display is slow. When NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom is judged intermittent, caused by vibration. ● System has been affected by vibration. ● NAVIGATION 1. 2. The navigation screen will be shown, and items “Display Longitude & Latitude”, “Speed Calibration”, “Angle Adjustment” and “Initialize Location” will become selective. Select each switch on “NAVIGATION” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. SKIA4576E Revision: March 2005 AV-112 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Display Longitude & Latitude ● A Able to confirm/adjust longitude and latitude. B C SKIA4575E D Angle adjustment ● E Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope. F G H SKIA0364E Speed Calibration ● During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires. I J AV SKIA0365E L Initialize Location ● This mode is for initializing the current location. Revision: March 2005 AV-113 M 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR EKS008SS OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. WKIA2681E 4. 5. The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. SKIA4207E 6. Display status of CAN communication. Item Content Error counter CAN_COMM OK/NG 0-50 CAN_CIRC_1 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_2 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_3 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_4 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_5 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_6 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_7 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_8 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_9 OK/UNKWN 0-50 SKIA4288E ● If the ignition is turned on and UNKWN is shown on the screen, the value of the counter will be up. (MAX50) Revision: March 2005 AV-114 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● ● The value of the counter does not change if the ignition changes to OFF. (MAX50) If the counter shows the value of 50 and UNKWN is shown, the value of 50 will not be changed. AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function A EKS008ST Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . B C D E F G H I J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-115 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS008SU 1. CHECK FUSE ● Make sure the following fuses of the NAVI control unit are not blown. Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 2 (Y/R), 3 (Y/R) Battery power 17 6 (PU) ACC power 6 Terminal (Wire color) B40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate case of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) 2 (Y/R), 3 (Y/R) B40 OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground 6 (PU) WKIA1372E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between NAVI control unit and fuse. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between the following NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) — B40 1 (B), 4 (B) Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. SKIA4291E Revision: March 2005 AV-116 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit EKS008SV 1. CHECK FUSE ● A Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown. B Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 1 (Y/R) Battery power 19 10 (PU) ACC power 6 Terminal (Wire color) M94 C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate case of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . E 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals D F Ignition switch position G (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) OFF ACC ON H 1 (Y/R) M94 Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground 10 (PU) I WKIA1373E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse. J 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT AV Check continuity between the following display control unit and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) — M94 3 (B) Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes L M OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. SKIA4293E Revision: March 2005 AV-117 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit 1. EKS008SW CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-117, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair malfunctioning part. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT Disconnect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R) and ground. Approx. 9V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. WKIA1227E 3. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2 (L/W), 4 (L/R) and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R). Terminals Display control unit Connector Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 2 (L/W) M94 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 2 (L/W) M93 4 (L/R) 3 (L/R) Yes Check continuity between display unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1229E Display unit Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — 2 (L/W) M93 3 (L/R) Ground No OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Repair harness. Revision: March 2005 AV-118 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4. 1. 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13 (P/B), 14 (P/L) and ground. B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. C D WKIA2079E 5. 1. 2. E CHECK HARNESS Disconnect display control unit connector. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13 (P/B), 14 (P/L) and display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 5 (P/B), 7 (P/L). F G Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Repair harness. H I WKIA2080E 6. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT J Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows. 1. Terminals Terminal (Wire color) — Ignition switch Continuity Connector M93 1 (B) Ground OFF Yes AV L OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness. M WKIA1228E Revision: March 2005 AV-119 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch EKS008SX 1. CHECK FUSE ● Make sure the following fuses of the AV switch are not blown. Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 1 (Y/R) Battery power 19 2 (PU) ACC power 6 Terminal (Wire color) M98 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate case of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect AV switch connector. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) 1 (Y/R) M98 OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground 2 (PU) WKIA1960E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open or short between AV switch and fuse. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between AV switch and ground as follows. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) — M98 5 (B) Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WKIA1961E Revision: March 2005 AV-120 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS008SY 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector, combination meter connector, display control unit connector and shift lock control unit connector. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector B41 terminal 28 (P) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 3 (P). Continuity should exist. 4. B C D Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector B41 terminal 28 (P) and ground. E Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1962E F 2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. G Connect NAVI control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector B41 terminal 28 (P) and ground. H Approx. 3.5V or more I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . J SKIA4295E AV 3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect combination meter connector, display control unit connector and shift lock control unit connector. Drive vehicle at a constant speed. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B41 terminal 28 (P) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 28 (P) - Ground : Refer to AV-90, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" . Revision: March 2005 AV-121 SKIA4615E 2005 Altima L M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit EKS008SZ 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector, combination meter connector, NAVI control unit connector and shift lock control unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (P) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 3 (P). Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (P) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1963E 2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (P) and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . SKIA4297E 3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect combination meter connector, NAVI control unit connector and shift lock control unit connector. Drive vehicle at a constant speed. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (P) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 16 (P) - Ground : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" . Revision: March 2005 AV-122 SKIA4616E 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS008T0 1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. A Turn the ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals B Lighting switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) B41 25 (R/L) Ground C 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and IPDM E/R. Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit D SKIA4298E EKS008T1 E F 1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit and ground. Terminals G Lighting switch position H (+) Terminal (Wire color) (–) Connector M94 14 (R/L) Ground 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 0V I OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R. Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit J SKIA4299E AV EKS008T2 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. L Disconnect NAVI control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector B41 terminal 26 (G) and ground. M Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and fuse. SKIA4300E Revision: March 2005 AV-123 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit EKS008T3 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 12 (G) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse. WKIA1230E Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS008T4 1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-98, "BACK-UP LAMP" . 2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals Selector lever position (+) Terminal (Wire color) (–) Connector B41 27 (G/W) Ground R-position Other than Rposition Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal SKIA4302E and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and back-up lamp position relay. Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit EKS008T5 1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-98, "BACK-UP LAMP" . Revision: March 2005 AV-124 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL A With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between display control unit and ground. B Terminals Selector lever position (+) Terminal (Wire color) (–) Connector M94 6 (G/W) Ground R-position Other than R-position Battery voltage Approx. 0V C OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal SKIA4303E and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and back-up lamp position relay. D E AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) EKS008T6 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-116, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 1. G H 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. J Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B41 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 44 (G) M95 45 (R) 4. Continuity AV Terminal (Wire color) 32 (G) Yes L 34 (R) Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals M SKIA4444E NAVI control unit Connector B41 Continuity — Terminal (Wire color) 44 (G) Ground No 45 (R) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 AV-125 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU 1. Replace NAVI control unit. 2. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) EKS008T7 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check system of power supply and ground circuit audio unit. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect audio unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit. Terminals Display control unit (+) Audio unit (–) Terminal (Wire color) Connector Connector 40 (B/R) M95 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 65 (B/R) M45 42 (BR) 66 (BR) Yes Check continuity between display control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1192E Display control unit(+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity (–) 40 (B/R) M95 42 (BR) Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 AV-126 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. A Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 (BR) and ground. B Approx. 3.5V or more. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . D WKIA1770E E 4. CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector. Connect audio unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 (B/R) and ground. G H Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . I J WKIA1771E AV 5. CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 40 (B/R) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 40 (B/R) - Ground M : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 L AV-127 SKIA4447E 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 6. CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 (BR) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 42 (BR) - Ground : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . SKIA4448E Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) EKS008T8 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Terminals Display control unit Connector Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 36 (B/W) M95 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 11 (B/W) M93 38 (L) Yes 22 (L) Check continuity between display control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA2019E Display control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity — 36 (B/W) M95 38 (L) Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 (B/W) and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . WKIA1377E Revision: March 2005 AV-128 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground. B C Approx. 3.5V or more. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . E SKIA4453E F 4. CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 36 (B/W) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 36 (B/W) - Ground G H I : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . J SKIA4452E AV 5. CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) L 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 38 (L) - Ground : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . Revision: March 2005 M AV-129 SKIA4453E 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) EKS008T9 1. CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector and AV switch connector. Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch. Terminals Display control unit Connector AV switch Terminal (Wire color) Connector 28 (PU) M95 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 6 (PU) M98 30 (LG) Yes 8 (LG) Check continuity between display control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1964E Display control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity — 28 (PU) M95 30 (LG) Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU 1. Replace AV switch. 2. Connect display control unit connector and AV switch connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-130 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM CAN Communication Line Check EKS008TA 1. CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION 1. 2. A Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-101, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" . Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-114, "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR" . B content Item 3. C Error counter Normal condition Error (Example) CAN_COMM OK NG 0-50 CAN_CIRC_1 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_2 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_3 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_4 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_5 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_6 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_7 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_8 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_9 OK UNKWN 0-50 D SKIA4288E E F G Record each item display description (OK/NG/UKNWN) displayed on the following CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet. H CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet Diagnosis item Screen display Diagnosis item Screen display CAN_COMM OK NG CAN_CIRC_5 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_1 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_6 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_2 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_7 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_3 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_8 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_4 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_9 OK UNKWN I J AV >> After filling in CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is Not Inserted L EKS008TB 1. CHECK DVD-ROM Make sure identified DVD-ROM map is inserted. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Insert identified DVD-ROM map. If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVD-ROM Map Malfunctioning or If It is Impossible to Load Data from DVD-ROM Map EKS008TC 1. CHECK 1: DVD-ROM Remove inserted DVD-ROM map to check that it is identified. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace identified DVD-ROM map. Revision: March 2005 AV-131 2005 Altima M NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. CHECK 2: DVD-ROM Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace DVD-ROM map. 3. CHECK 3: DVD-ROM Insert same DVD-ROM to make sure same diagnosis result is found as last self-diagnosis. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Replace DVD-ROM map. If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning EKS008TD 1. CHECK GPS ANTENNA Check cable for GPS antenna for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" . 2. CHECK BY REPLACEMENT OF GPS ANTENNA Replace with other functional GPS antenna to try self-diagnosis again. Result of self-diagnosis; Found same result? Yes >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . No >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" . Operating Screen for Audio is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen EKS008TE 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R) and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9 (B), 20 (W), 8 (R). Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1965E Revision: March 2005 AV-132 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. A Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 (R) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 55 (R) - 49 B : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . D SKIA4305E E 3. CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 53 (W) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 53 (W) - 49 G : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . I WKIA1773E J 4. CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL 1. 2. Press the “TRIP” button. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 (B) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 51 (B) - 49 AV : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . L OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . M SKIA4306E Revision: March 2005 AV-133 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish) EKS008TF 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. When the screen looks bluish. Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B40 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 18 (R) M95 17 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 44 (R) Yes 45 Terminals NAVI control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4349E Terminal (Wire color) B40 18 (R) Ground No 17 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 18 (R) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks bluish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 18 (R) and 17. 18 (R) - 17 : Refer to AV-90, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit" . OK or NG SKIA4629E OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-134 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish) EKS008TG 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. When the screen looks reddish. B C Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B40 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 21 (W) M95 17 D Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 46 (W) E Yes 45 F Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B40 Continuity — SKIA4350E Terminal (Wire color) G 21 (W) Ground No 17 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. H 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL I 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 21 (W) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks reddish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 21 (W) and 17. 21 (W) - 17 J AV L : Refer to AV-90, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit" . M OK or NG SKIA4630E OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-135 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish) EKS008TH 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. ● When the screen looks yellowish. Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B40 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 15 (B) M95 17 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 48 (B) Yes 45 Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B40 Continuity — SKIA4351E Terminal (Wire color) 15 (B) Ground No 17 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 15 (B) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks yellowish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 15 (B) and 17. 15 (B) - 17 : Refer to AV-90, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit" . OK or NG SKIA4631E OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-136 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) EKS008TI 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. When the screen looks bluish. B C Terminals Display control unit Connector M95 Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 50 (R/L) M93 47 D Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 17 (R/L) E Yes 7 F Terminals Display control unit Connector M95 Continuity — SKIA4353E Terminal (Wire color) G 50 (R/L) Ground No 47 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. H 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL I 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks bluish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 50 (R/L) and 47. 50 (R/L) - 47 J AV L : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . M OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and SKIA4697E Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-137 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) EKS008TJ 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. When the screen looks reddish. Terminals Display control unit Connector M95 Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 52 (R/W) M93 47 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 6 (R/W) Yes 7 Terminals Display control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4354E Terminal (Wire color) M95 52 (R/W) Ground No 47 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks reddish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 52 (R/W) and 47. 52 (R/W) - 47 : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and SKIA4698E Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-138 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) EKS008TK 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS A 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. ● When the screen looks yellowish. B C Terminals D Display control unit Connector M95 Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 54 (B) M93 47 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) E 18 (B) Yes 7 F Terminals Display control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4355E Terminal (Wire color) M95 54 (B) Ground G No 47 H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. I 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. ● J Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks yellowish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 54 (B) and 47. 54 (B) - 47 AV L : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . M OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and SKIA4356E Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-139 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM NAVI Screen is Rolling EKS008TL 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B40 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 16 (Y) M95 14 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 43 (Y) Yes 41 Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA2020E NAVI control unit Connector Continuity — Terminal (Wire color) B40 16 (Y) Ground No 14 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. 2. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector M95 terminals 16 (Y) and 14 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 16 (Y) - 14 : Refer to AV-90, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . SKIA4358E Revision: March 2005 AV-140 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. B Terminals Display control unit Connector Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 56 (G) M95 4. C Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 19 (G) M93 49 D Yes 21 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. E Terminals WKIA2021E Display control unit Connector M95 Continuity — F Terminal (Wire color) 56 (G) Ground No 49 G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. H 4. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminals 19 (G) and 21 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 19 (G) - 21 J : Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 I AV-141 AV L WKIA2022E M 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Guide Sound is Not Heard EKS008TM 1. CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING NOTE: Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction. ● While driving in the dark pink route, voice guide does not operate. ● Is volume setting not switched ON? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up. 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and audio unit. Terminals NAVI control unit Connector Audio unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 7 (L) B40 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 71 (L) M45 8 (P) Yes 69 (P) Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1193E NAVI control unit Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — 7 (L) B40 8 (P) Ground No Ok or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. 3. CHECK VOICE GUIDE 1. 2. 3. Connect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B40 terminal 7 (L) and 8 (P) with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 7 (L) - 8 (P) : Refer to AV-90, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: March 2005 AV-142 SKIA4362E 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Screen is Not Shown EKS008TN 1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK A Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-118, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown 1. B C EKS008TO CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL D Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. E 2. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE F Check display communication line. Refer to AV-128, "Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit)" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) H EKS008TP 1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL I Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. J AV 2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) EKS008TQ 1. CHECK SPEEDOMETER Confirm that speedometer is functioning. Is speedometer functioning? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" . 2. CHECK FUEL GAUGE Confirm that fuel GAUGE is functioning. Is fuel gauge functioning? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . Revision: March 2005 G AV-143 2005 Altima L M NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Driving Distance or Average Speed Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) EKS008TR 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown EKS008TS 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) EKS008TT 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-120, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Revision: March 2005 AV-144 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS A AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-115, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. B 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT C Check display control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-117, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. D E 4. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE Check communication line. Refer to AV-130, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)" . OK or NG OK >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Audio Does Not Work F G EKS008TU H Refer to AV-35, "Trouble Diagnosis" . Navigation System Does Not Activate EKS008TV 1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK I Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-116, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" . J OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. AV Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored EKS008TW 1. CHECK BATTERY POWER L Check NAVI control unit battery power. Refer to AV-116, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check NAVI control unit battery power system harness. Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored EKS008TX 1. CHECK BATTERY POWER Check display control unit battery power. Refer to AV-117, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check display control unit battery power system harness. Revision: March 2005 AV-145 2005 Altima M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct EKS008TY 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-104, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. HISTORY OF ERRORS DIAGNOSIS Was any error stored in AV-110, "HISTORY OF ERRORS" of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode? YES or NO YES >> AV-110, "DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS". NO >> AV-146, "Driving Test". Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received EKS008TZ 1. CHECK ENVIRONMENT Check if any metal object that intercepts radio waves or an object that emits radio waves (such as a portable phone) is located near the GPS antenna. Check if the vehicle is shielded by a building. OK or NG OK >> ● System is not malfunctioning. The GPS antenna may not be able to receive radio waves from the GPS satellite if it is shielded by metal object or an object emitting radio waves is placed near it. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-104, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" . OK or NG OK >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Driving Test EKS008U0 1. DRIVING TEST 1 1. Scroll the map screen to display the area to make correction. Press “ENTER” and select “CURRENT LOCATION CORRECTION”. 2. Correct direction of the vehicle mark. 3. Perform the distance correction of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode. Note: Normally, adjustment is not necessary because this system has automatic distance correction function. However, when a tire chain is fitted, adjustment in accordance with the tire diameter ratio must be made. 4. Are symptoms malfunctioning to the AV-147, "Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction" after driving the vehicle? YES or NO YES >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system. NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 AV-146 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. DRIVING TEST 2 A Did any malfunction occur when the proper test in the following test patterns is performed? ● Test pattern B Driving test finds the difference between the symptoms monitored with and without each sensor. – Test pattern 1: Test method with no GPS location correction Disconnect GPS antenna connector (GT5) connected to the NAVI control unit. Accurately adjust the current location and the direction, then drive the vehicle. C – Test pattern 2: Test method with no map-matching Accurately adjust the current location and the direction. Eject the map DVD-ROM from the NAVI control unit with ignition switch turned to OFF, then drive the vehicle. After driving, insert the map DVD-ROM back D in the unit, display the track of the vehicle on the map screen and compare it with the actual road configuration. ● Sample tests E – Perform test pattern 1. F – Perform test pattern 1 & 2. Compare the track of the vehicle on the map screen and the actual road configuration. For fairly accurate G tracking, plotting shall be made every several hundred meters (feet). – Perform test pattern 1 & 2. Drive on a road of which distance is accurately known (by utilizing distance posts on a highway). Calculate H the rate of change (increased/decreased) of the distance by comparing with the actual distance. Correction = A/B A: Distance shown on the screen I B: Actual distance YES or NO YES >> ● If adjustment is insufficient, perform adjustment again. J ● If any error is found in the map, please contact map data supplier. Refer to Navigation System Owner's Manual for contact information. ● Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . AV NO >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system. ● Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction EKS008U1 L BASIC OPERATION Symptom Cause Remedy No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK side. Adjust the display brightness. No guide sound is heard. Audio guide volume is too low or too high. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume. Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is driving on a dark pink route. System is not malfunctioning. Screen is too dark. Motion of the image is too slow. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle reaches the proper temperature. Small black or bright spots appear on the screen. Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (display unit). System is not malfunction. Revision: March 2005 AV-147 M 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM VEHICLE MARK Symptom Cause Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Name of the place varies with the screen. Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming to complex. In some cases and in some locations, the display contents may differ. The same place name, street name, etc. may not be displayed every time on account of the data processing. System is not malfunctioning. Vehicle mark is not positioned correctly. Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its ignition switch is turned to OFF. Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS satellite signal receiving condition. Screen will not switch to nighttime mode after the lighting switch is turned ON. The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH SCREENS” when the last time the screen dimming setting is done. Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjustment function. Perform screen dimming and select the nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”. Map screen will not scroll in accordance with the vehicle travel. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current location. Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current location. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the map screen stays gray. GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the vehicle is in or behind a building. Move the vehicle out to an open space. GPS satellite signal cannot be received because an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument panel. Do not place anything in the center on top of the display. GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by moving the vehicle. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the map screen stays gray. Current location is not determined. Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fitted or the system has been used on another vehicle. Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30 minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If advancement or retard still occur, perform the distance adjustment by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis function. Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is always deviated to the same position.) As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be released once a year. Vehicle location accuracy is low. Remedy DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET Symptom Cause Remedy Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road. Passing point is not searched when re-searching the route. The vehicle has already passed the passing point, or the system judged so. To include the passing points that have been passed into the route again, set the route again. Route information will not be displayed. Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route searching. Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route. Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON. Route information is not available on the dark pink route. System is not malfunctioning. Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. (On the display, only guide signs related to the recommended route will be shown.) Drive on the recommended route. After the route searching, no guide sign will appear as the vehicle goes near the entrance/exit to the toll road. Revision: March 2005 AV-148 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Symptom Cause Remedy Automatic route searching is not possible. Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no recommended route is available. Drive on a road to be searched. Or re– search the route manually. In this case, however, the whole route will be searched. Performed automatic detour search (or detour search). However, the result is the same as that of the previous search. Performed search with every condition considered. However, the result is the same as that of the previous search. System is not malfunctioning. Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop at more than five points, perform sharing in several steps. When setting the route, the starting point cannot be selected. The current vehicle location is always set as the starting point of a route. System is not malfunctioning. Some menu items cannot be selected. The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then operate the system. A B C D E VOICE GUIDE Symptom Voice guide will not operate. Voice guide does not match the actual road pattern. Cause F Remedy Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction. System is not malfunctioning. The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or research the route. Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON. Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON. Voice guide may vary with the direction to which the vehicle is turned and the connection of the road to other roads. Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules. G H I J ROUTE SEARCH Symptom No route is shown. Indicated route is intermittent. Cause Remedy No road to be searched is found around the destination. Find wider road (orange road or wider) nearby and reset the destination and passing points onto it. Take care of the traveling direction when there are separate up and down roads. Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point. Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ time of the day) is set at the area around the current location or the destination. Turn the time-regulating search conditions OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the search conditions OFF. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning. used for the search(Note) Therefore, the route to the current location or the passing points may be intermittent. When the vehicle has passed the recommended route, it is deleted from the screen. Revision: March 2005 A recommended route is controlled by each section. When the vehicle has passed the passing point 1, then the map data from the starting point up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data may remain undeleted in some areas.) AV-149 System is not malfunctioning. 2005 Altima AV L M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Symptom Detouring route is recommended. Cause Remedy In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route may be recommended. Set the route closer to the basic route (gray route). A detour route may be shown when some traffic regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area around the starting point or the destination. Slightly move the starting point or the destination, or set the passing point on the route of your choice. In the area where highways (gray routes) are used for the search, left turn has priority around the current location and the destination (passing points). For this reason, the recommended route may be detouring. System is not malfunctioning. Landmarks on the map do not match the actual ones. This can be happen due to omission or error in the map data. As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be released once a year. Wait until the latest map has become available. Recommended route is far from the starting point, passing points, and destination. Starting point, passing points, and destination of the route guide were set far from the desired points because route searching data around these area were not stored. Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If this road is one of the highways (gray routes), an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as the recommended route. NOTE: Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.) EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction. SEL698V Revision: March 2005 AV-150 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) Y–intersections At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, an error in the direction of travel deduced by the sensor may result in the current-location mark appearing on the wrong road. A B C ELK0192D Spiral roads D When driving on a large, continuous spiral road (such as loop bridge), turning angle error is accumulated and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. E ELK0193D Straight roads When driving on a long, straight road and slow curve without stopping, map-matching does not work effectively enough and distance errors may accumulate. As a result, the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location when the vehicle is turned at a corner. Road configuration ELK0194D Zigzag roads When driving on a zigzag road, the map may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. F G If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. H I J ELK0195D Roads laid out in a grid pattern AV When driving where roads are laid out in a grid pattern, or where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the map may be matched to them by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. L ELK0196D M Parallel roads When two roads are running in parallel (such as highway and sideway), the map may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. ELK0197D Revision: March 2005 AV-151 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display In a parking lot SEL709V Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map, matching may place the vehicle mark on a nearby road. When the vehicle returns to the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location. When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. Turntable When the ignition switch is OFF, the navigation system cannot get the signal from the gyroscope (angular speed sensor). Therefore, the displayed direction may be wrong and the correct road may not be easily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a turntable with the ignition OFF. Place SEL710V Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads where tires may slip easily, accumulated mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road. Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when travelling on banked roads, or in other cases where the vehicle turns when tilted, an error in the turning angle will occur, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the road. If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. Road not displayed on the map screen When driving on new roads or other roads not displayed on the map screen, map matching does not function correctly and matches the location to a nearby road. When the vehicle returns to a road which is on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. SEL699V Map data Different road pattern (Changed due to repair) If the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different, map matching does not function correctly and matches the location to a nearby road. The vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. ELK0201D Vehicle Use of tire chains Revision: March 2005 When tire chains are used, the mileage is not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. AV-152 Drive the vehicle for a while. If the distance still deviates, adjust it by using the distance adjustment function. (If the tire chain is removed, recover the original value.) 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Just after the engine is started Continuous driving without stopping Precautions for driving Abusive driving Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A If the vehicle is driven just after the engine is started when the gyroscope (angular speed sensor) correction is not completed, the vehicle can lose its direction and may have deviated from the correct location. Wait for a short while before driving after starting the engine. When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and the current-location mark may deviate from the correct road. Stop and adjust the orientation. Spinning the wheels or engaging in other kinds of abusive driving may result in the system being unable perform correct detection, and may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road. If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. If the accuracy of location settings is poor, accuracy may be reduced when the correct road cannot be found, particularly in places where there are many roads. Enter in the road displayed on the screen with an accuracy of approx. 1mm. Caution: Whenever possible, use detailed map for the correction. B C D E Position correction accuracy How to correct location F G SEL701V Direction when location is corrected H If the accuracy of location settings during correction is poor, accuracy may be reduced afterwards. Perform direction correction. I SEL702V CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG J In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direcAV tion correction. ● When location correction has not been done – If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, or if the current-location mark becomes out of place, it may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. L The position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received. ● When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been towed – Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when travelling with the ignition OFF, for M example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected. CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current location. ● When map-matching has been done – If the current location and the current-location mark are different when map-matching is done, the currentlocation mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on a road. ● When GPS location correction has been done – If the current location and the current-location mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measurements, the current-location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which is not on a road. Revision: March 2005 AV-153 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA The navigation system moves the current-location mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the location mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea. WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually. Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the vehicle mark to deviate. LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW ● ● The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some distance for the function to work. Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until some special feature is found. ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION ● ● ● The GPS accuracy has an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the current-location mark may not be on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done. The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-matching location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used. GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped. NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen. CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows. ● ● ● ● ● The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel. The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the (flat) map display. The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more distant areas. Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases and in some locations, the display contents may differ. The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times. Revision: March 2005 AV-154 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit EKS008U2 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M SKIA0389E Revision: March 2005 AV-155 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit EKS008U3 CAUTION: ● Do not strike the NAVI control unit while loading the trunk and do not place heavy objects on it. Doing so could cause improper operation or damage the system. ● To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove trunk floor carpet and trunk side finisher LH. 3. Remove retaining nuts. 4. Disconnect connectors. 5. Remove screws and brackets from NAVI control unit. 6. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1966E Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna 1. 2. 3. 4. EKS008U4 Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Remove bolts. Disconnect GPS antenna connector and remove GPS antenna. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1967E Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch EKS008U5 Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" . Removal and Installation of AV Switch EKS008U6 Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" . Removal and Installation of Display Unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008U7 Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . Remove the audio/display assembly screws. Disconnect connectors and remove audio/display assembly. Remove screws and remove display unit from brackets. Installation is in reverse order of removal. WKIA1945E Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit 1. 2. EKS008U8 Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Revision: March 2005 AV-156 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove daytime light control unit (Canada models only). Remove the screws and lower the display control unit. Disconnect connectors and remove display control unit. Installation is in reverse order of removal. A B C WKIA1968E D E F G H I J AV L M Revision: March 2005 AV-157 2005 Altima NAVIGATION SYSTEM Revision: March 2005 AV-158 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION BCS BODY CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ........................... 3 System Description .................................................. 3 BCM FUNCTION ................................................... 3 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION..... 3 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL .................... 6 BCM STATUS CONTROL ..................................... 6 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY..... 7 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R ........................................................................ 7 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................................................... 7 CAN Communication System Description ................ 8 Schematic ................................................................. 9 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 11 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 11 ITEMS OF EACH PART ...................................... 12 WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 13 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULTII (Self-Diagnosis) ................................................... 13 Configuration .......................................................... 14 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 14 READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE ............ 14 WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE .......... 16 Removal and Installation of BCM ........................... 20 REMOVAL ........................................................... 20 INSTALLATION ................................................... 20 F G H I J BCS L M Revision: March 2005 BCS-1 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS008R5 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: March 2005 BCS-2 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description ● PFP:284B2 A EKS008R6 BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION B BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. C COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. 2. Description ● BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. ● BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). Operation description ● BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. ● If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. ● At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. D E F G H I J BCS L M LIIA1323E 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch ● BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the following table. Revision: March 2005 BCS-3 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) LIIA1324E NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) ● When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. ● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. ● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. Revision: March 2005 BCS-4 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) A B C D E F G H LIIA1325E I 5. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. J Operation mode ● Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: BCS Normal status ● When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status L M Revision: March 2005 BCS-5 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ● When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 10 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. WKIA4000E CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status ● With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. ● Control by BCM is being operated properly. ● When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. ● Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status ● This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. ● It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. ● Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status ● With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. ● With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. ● Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status Revision: March 2005 BCS-6 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ● ● ● ● – – – – – – – – – ● ● BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. CAN communication is not active. When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Key switch and key lock solenoid Hazard switch Door lock/unlock switch Front door switch (LH, RH) Rear door switch (LH, RH) Trunk switch and trunk release solenoid Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) front door key cylinder switch LH When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. Status of combination switch reading function is changed. A B C D E F SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY ● ● ● Power door lock system. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" . Remote keyless entry system. Refer to BL-46, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" . Power window system. Refer to GW-15, "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM" . G Sunroof system. Refer to RF-10, "SUNROOF" . NOTE ● Room lamp timer. Refer to LT-115, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" . ● Warning chime system. Refer to DI-45, "WARNING CHIME" . ● Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to LT-72, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS" . NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. ● H I J SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R ● ● ● ● ● ● Panic system. Refer to BL-46, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" . BCS Vehicle security system. Refer to BL-84, "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM" . NVIS (NATS) system. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Headlamp, daytime running lamp, tail lamp, fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer L to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" , LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" , LT-100, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS" , LT-60, "FRONT FOG LAMP" or LT-44, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM" . M Front wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-4, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM" . Rear window defogger system. Refer to GW-42, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" . MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM System Remote keyless entry system Input Keyfob Output ● All door locking actuators ● Trunk lid opener actuator ● Turn signal lamp (LH, RH) Power door lock system Front power door lock/unlock switch (LH, RH) All door locking actuators Power supply (IGN) to power window and sunroof Ignition power supply Power supply to power window and sunroof system Power supply (BAT) to power window and sunroof Battery power supply Power supply to power window and sunroof system Revision: March 2005 BCS-7 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Input ● Key switch and key lock solenoid ● Keyfob ● All door switches ● Key fob ● Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Panic alarm Vehicle security system Auto light system Battery saver control ● Trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid ● Auto light sensor ● Combination switch ● Ignition switch ● Combination switch Output IPDM E/R ● IPDM E/R ● Security indicator lamp IPDM E/R IPDM E/R Headlamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Tail lamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Fog lamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Turn signal lamp Combination switch Hazard lamp Room lamp timer Hazard switch ● Key switch and key lock solenoid ● Keyfob ● Main power window and door lock/unlock switch ● Front door switch LH ● All door switches ● Key switch and key lock solenoid ● Front door switch LH ● Combination switch ● Key switch and key lock solenoid ● Front door switch LH ● Combination switch ● Combination meter Key warning chime Light warning chime Vehicle-speed-sensing intermittent wiper ● Turn signal lamp ● Combination meter ● Turn signal lamp ● Combination meter Interior room lamp Combination meter (warning buzzer) Combination meter (warning buzzer) IPDM E/R Rear window defogger Rear window defogger switch IPDM E/R Air conditioner switch signal A/C control unit ECM Blower fan switch signal A/C control unit ECM CAN Communication System Description EKS008R7 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 BCS-8 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Schematic EKS008R8 A B C D E F G H I J BCS L M WIWA0416E Revision: March 2005 BCS-9 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) WIWA0417E Revision: March 2005 BCS-10 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS008R9 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Content B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. C Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. D The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. E Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0002E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. J BCS L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 BCS-11 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 4. Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. LKIA0169E ITEMS OF EACH PART NOTE: CONSULT-II will only display systems the vehicle possesses. Diagnostic test mode (Inspection by part) CONSULT-II display System and item Power door lock system DOOR LOCK Rear defogger WORK SUPPORT SELF− DIAG RESULTS ECU PART NUMBER ACTIVE TEST × × REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Room lamp timer INT LAMP × × × Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × × × Headlamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper WIPER × × Turn signal lamp Hazard lamp FLASHER × × Blower fan switch signal Air conditioner switch signal AIR CONDITIONER × Combination switch COMB SW × BCM BCM NVIS (NATS) IMMU Interior lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER Trunk TRUNK Vehicle security system THEFT ALM Retained power control RETAINED PWR Oil pressure switch SIGNAL BUFFER Panic system PANIC ALARM Revision: March 2005 × DATA MONITOR × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × CONFIGURATION CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR × × × BCS-12 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. A Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. B C D LKIA0169E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. E Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". F G H BCIA0031E Display Item List Item I Description RESET SETTING VALUE Return a value set with WORK SUPPORT of each system to a default value in factory shipment. CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) EKS008RA J 1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK BCS CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Connect to CONSULT-II, and select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. L 2. Select “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 3. Check display content in self-diagnostic results. M CONSULT-II display code Diagnosis item INITIAL DIAG TRANSMIT DIAG ECM U1000 IPDM E/R METER/M&A I-KEY Contents displayed No malfunction>>Inspection End. Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 BCS-13 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Configuration EKS008RB DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: ● READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. ● WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: ● When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. ● Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. ● If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. ● Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 BCS-14 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 4. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. A B C LKIA0169E D 5. Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. E F G BCIA0031E 6. H Touch “L31 (SPEC1)” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation (Early production)" in GI section. I J BCS LKIA0498E 7. Touch “READ CONFIGURATION” on “CONFIGURATION” screen. L M LKIA0172E Revision: March 2005 BCS-15 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . LKIA0504E 9. Touch “BACK” on “READ CONFIGURATION” screen. LKIA0500E WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E Revision: March 2005 BCS-16 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A B C BCIA0029E D 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . E F G BCIA0030E H 4. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. I J BCS LKIA0169E 5. L Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. M BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 BCS-17 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 6. Touch “L31 (SPEC1)” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation (Early production)" in GI section. LKIA0498E 7. Touch “WRITE CONFIGURATION” on “CONFIGURATION” screen. LKIA0172E 8. Touch "YES”. For canceling, touch "NO". LKIA0175E 9. Using the following flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list. Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULTII "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set or changed. ITEM SET VAL KEYLESS ENTRY WITH ⇔ WITHOUT AUTO LIGHT WITH ⇔ WITHOUT DTRL WITH ⇔ WITHOUT THEFT ALARM WITH ⇔ WITHOUT NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation (Early production)" in GI section. 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. Revision: March 2005 BCS-18 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 11. Touch “OK” on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. A B C LKIA0484E D 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. E F G LKIA0398E 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. H I J BCS L M LKIA0509E 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. LKIA0400E Revision: March 2005 BCS-19 2005 Altima BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation of BCM EKS008RC REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to BCS-14, "Configuration" . 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove driver lower instrument panel. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove screws (2) and release BCM from steering member. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. LIIA1559E INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: ● When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to BCS-14, "Configuration" . ● When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Revision: March 2005 BCS-20 2005 Altima I BODY SECTION BL BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions for work ................................................ 4 Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis ................. 4 PREPARATION ........................................................... 5 Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 6 Work Flow ................................................................ 6 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 6 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 7 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 7 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 7 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 7 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 8 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 8 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 8 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 8 DOORS ................................................................. 8 TRUNK .................................................................. 9 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 9 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 9 SEATS ................................................................... 9 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 9 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 10 HOOD ....................................................................... 12 Fitting Adjustment .................................................. 12 FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT AND LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................. 12 SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................... 12 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly .......... 13 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control ..... 14 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSTALLATION ................................................... 14 Hood Lock Control Inspection ................................ 15 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 16 Revision: March 2005 BL-1 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 16 System Description ................................................. 17 WITH LEFT FRONT ONLY FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM ....................... 17 WITH LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM .............................. 17 OUTLINE ............................................................. 17 KEY–TRAP PREVENTIVE FUNCTION .............. 18 Schematic ............................................................... 19 Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — ............................... 20 FIG. 1 ................................................................... 20 FIG. 2 ................................................................... 21 FIG. 3 ................................................................... 22 FIG. 4 ................................................................... 23 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ............... 24 Work Flow ............................................................... 24 CONSULT–II Function (BCM) ................................ 25 CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE .................................................................. 25 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 27 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 27 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 28 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 28 Door Switch Check ................................................. 30 Key Switch (Insert) Check ...................................... 32 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left front only power window anti–pinch system) .......................... 33 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti–pinch system) .................. 36 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check ... 38 Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH and Rear LH/ RH) ......................................................................... 39 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left front only power window anti-pinch system) ................................................................... 40 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti–pinch system) .................. 41 Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With left and right front power window anti–pinch 2005 Altima F G H BL J K L M system) ................................................................... 43 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left and right front power window anti– pinch system) ......................................................... 44 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ..................... 46 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 46 System Description ................................................. 47 INPUTS ............................................................... 47 OPERATED PROCEDURE ................................. 47 CAN Communication System Description .............. 48 Schematic ............................................................... 49 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — ............................... 50 FIG. 1 ................................................................... 50 FIG. 2 ................................................................... 51 FIG. 3 ................................................................... 52 FIG. 4 ................................................................... 53 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................ 54 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 55 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ......................... 55 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 55 CONSULT-II Application Items ............................... 56 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 56 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ................................. 58 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 58 Trouble Diagnoses .................................................. 59 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 59 Keyfob Battery and Function Check ....................... 61 Door Switch Check ................................................. 62 Key Switch (Insert) Check ...................................... 64 Trunk Release Solenoid Check .............................. 65 Check Hazard Function .......................................... 67 Check Horn Function .............................................. 67 Check Headlamp Function ..................................... 67 Check Room Lamp, Step Lamp and Ignition Key Illumination Function ................................................... 67 ID Code Entry Procedure ....................................... 68 KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II ............ 68 KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II ..... 70 Keyfob Battery Replacement .................................. 71 DOOR ........................................................................ 72 Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 72 FRONT DOOR .................................................... 72 REAR DOOR ....................................................... 72 STRIKER ADJUSTMENT .................................... 73 Removal and Installation ........................................ 73 Door Weatherstrip ................................................... 74 FRONT DOOR LOCK ............................................... 75 Component Structure .............................................. 75 Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 75 EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT ........ 75 Removal and Installation ........................................ 75 REMOVAL ........................................................... 75 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 76 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 76 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 76 REAR DOOR LOCK .................................................. 77 Components ........................................................... 77 Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 77 EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT ........ 77 Revision: March 2005 Removal and Installation of Door Lock ...................77 REMOVAL ...........................................................77 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................78 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................78 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................78 TRUNK LID ................................................................79 Fitting Adjustment ...................................................79 LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT .....................................................80 SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ....................80 Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Assembly ...80 Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Lock ............80 LOCK REMOVAL .................................................80 STRIKER REMOVAL ...........................................81 LOCK AND STRIKER INSTALLATION ...............81 Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Weatherstrip...81 TRUNK LID OPENER ...............................................82 Wiring Diagram — TLID — .....................................82 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................83 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM...84 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...84 System Description .................................................86 DESCRIPTION ....................................................86 POWER SUPPLY ................................................86 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM .....................................................................86 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION ..................................................................86 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION...87 PANIC ALARM OPERATION ...............................87 CAN Communication System Description ..............87 Schematic ...............................................................88 Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — ..............................89 FIG. 1 ...................................................................89 FIG. 2 ...................................................................90 FIG. 3 ...................................................................91 FIG. 4 ...................................................................92 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................93 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ........93 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................94 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ..........94 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM .......................96 Trouble Diagnosis ...................................................97 WORK FLOW ......................................................97 Preliminary Check ...................................................98 Symptom Chart .......................................................99 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check .... 100 Door Switch Check ............................................... 101 TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID SWITCH CHECK ............................... 103 TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH) SIGNAL ................................................ 104 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK ............... 105 FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK ..................................... 106 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK ..... 106 VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK ................................................................. 106 DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK ............ 106 BL-2 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ...................................................................... 107 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 107 System Description .............................................. 108 System Composition ............................................ 108 ECM Re-communicating Function ....................... 109 Wiring Diagram — NATS — ..................................110 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 111 CONSULT-II .......................................................... 111 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........ 111 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION ...................................................................112 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS..113 NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART .....................................................113 Work Flow .............................................................114 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................115 SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 ..........................115 SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 ..........................116 DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM ...................116 Diagnostic Procedure 1 .........................................117 Diagnostic Procedure 2 .........................................118 Diagnostic Procedure 3 .........................................119 Diagnostic Procedure 4 ........................................ 120 Diagnostic Procedure 5 ........................................ 121 Diagnostic Procedure 6 ........................................ 124 How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU ................... 125 HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ............. 126 Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — ........................... 126 Trouble Diagnoses ............................................... 127 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ............................ 127 BODY REPAIR ........................................................ 128 Body Exterior Paint Color ..................................... 128 Body Component Parts ........................................ 129 UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS .............. 129 BODY COMPONENT PARTS ........................... 131 Corrosion Protection ............................................ 133 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 133 ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX .................................. 134 UNDERCOATING .............................................. 135 Body Sealing ........................................................ 136 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 136 Body Construction ................................................ 139 BODY CONSTRUCTION .................................. 139 Body Alignment .................................................... 140 BODY CENTER MARKS ................................... 140 PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS ................. 141 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 142 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................ 143 UNDERBODY ................................................... 145 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ....................... 147 REAR BODY ..................................................... 149 Handling Precautions for Plastics ......................... 151 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS . 151 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS ...................... 152 Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel ....... 154 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES ................................................ 154 Foam Repair ......................................................... 156 URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS ................ 156 FILL PROCEDURES ......................................... 156 Replacement Operations ...................................... 157 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 157 HOODLEDGE ................................................... 160 HOODLEDGE (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT) ..... 161 FRONT SIDE MEMBER .................................... 162 FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT) ............................................................... 164 FRONT PILLAR ................................................. 165 CENTER PILLAR .............................................. 168 OUTER SILL ..................................................... 169 REAR FENDER ................................................. 170 REAR PANEL .................................................... 171 REAR FLOOR REAR ........................................ 172 REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION ................. 173 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS003H8 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for work ● ● EIS003H9 After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their operation. Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it. Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis EIS003HA When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. Revision: March 2005 BL-4 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EIS003HB The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit E F Repairing the cause of noise G H SIIA0994E BL — (J-43241) Remote Keyless Entry Tester Used to test keyfobs J K LEL946A L Commercial Service Tool EIS003HC (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name M Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E Revision: March 2005 BL-5 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS00486 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to BL-10, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: March 2005 BL-6 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. F LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● G Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: H removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. BL tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. K looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to BL-8, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) L ● Revision: March 2005 BL-7 2005 Altima M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS00487 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: March 2005 BL-8 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING A B C D Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. E F OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS G H BL When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J K L UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: March 2005 BL-9 2005 Altima M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS00488 LIWA0276E Revision: March 2005 BL-10 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H BL J K L M SBT844 Revision: March 2005 BL-11 2005 Altima HOOD HOOD Fitting Adjustment PFP:F5100 EIS003HG LIIA1526E FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT AND LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. Loosen the hood lock and adjust the height by rotating the bumper rubber until the hood becomes 1 to 1.5 mm (0.04 to 0.059 in) higher than the fender. Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position it by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and striker for looseness, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. Remove the hood lock, and adjust the surface height difference of the hood and fender according to the fitting standard dimension, by rotating RH and LH bumper rubbers. Install the hood lock temporarily, and align the hood striker and lock so that the centers of striker and lock become vertical viewed from the front, by moving the hood lock laterally. Revision: March 2005 BL-12 2005 Altima HOOD 3. 4. 5. Check that the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx. 3 kg (29 N). CAUTION: Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or higher. Move the hood lock up and down so that the striker and lock are engaged firmly with the hood closed. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. A B C PIIA0181E Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly D EIS003HH E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1527E 1. Remove the nuts on the hood to remove the hood assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 BL-13 2005 Altima HOOD Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control EIS003HI LIIA1528E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core upper support and hood ledge. Remove the screws and the hood opener. Remove the grommet from the dash lower, and pull the hood lock cable into the passenger compartment. CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage (peeling) the outside of the hood lock cable. LIIA1558E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Pull the hood lock cable through the hole in the lower dash and into the engine compartment. Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.94 in) or more. Check that the cable is not offset from the grommet, and push the grommet into the panel hole securely. Apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly. PIIA0173E Revision: March 2005 BL-14 2005 Altima HOOD 4. 5. Install the cable securely to the lock. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood opener operation. A B C PIIA0174E Hood Lock Control Inspection D EIS003HJ CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. 1. Check that the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height. 2. While operating the hood opener, carefully check that the front end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also check that the hood opener returns to the original position. E F G H PIIA0175E 3. BL Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points shown in the figure. J K L PIIA0176E M Revision: March 2005 BL-15 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 EIS003HK LIIA1870E Revision: March 2005 BL-16 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM System Description EIS003HL A Power is supplied at all time ● to BCM terminal 70 ● through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 57 ● to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3. With ignition key inserted, power is supplied ● through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 ● to BCM terminal 37. B C D WITH LEFT FRONT ONLY FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of the BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and F14. E When the door is unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied ● through terminal 19 of main power window and door lock/unlock switch through body grounds M57, M61 and F14 F ● to BCM terminal 46 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17. When the door is locked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied G ● through terminal 19 of main power window and door lock/unlock switch through body grounds M57, M61 and F14 ● to BCM terminal 45 H ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 18. When the door is unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied ● through terminal 19 power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through body grounds M57, M61 and BL F14 ● to BCM terminal 46 J ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 20. When the door is locked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied ● through terminal 19 of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through body grounds M57, M61 K and F14 ● to BCM terminal 45 ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 18. L When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 8 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and F14. M When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 7 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and F14. WITH LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH as power window serial link. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH output to key cylinder lock/unlock switch, central lock/unlock switch and power window UP/DOWN control by key cylinder switch as DATALINE (power window serial link) to BCM. OUTLINE Functions available by operating the central switches on driver's door and passenger's door ● ● Interlocked with the locking operation of central switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked. Interlocked with the unlocking operation of central switch, door lock actuators of all doors are unlocked. Revision: March 2005 BL-17 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Functions available by operating the key cylinder switch on driver's door ● ● ● Interlocked with the locking operation of door key cylinder, door lock actuators of all doors are locked. When door key cylinder is unlocked, front door lock assembly LH (actuator) is unlocked. When door key cylinder is unlocked for the second time within 5 seconds after the first operation, door lock actuators on all doors are unlocked. Key–trap preventive function When door lock switch LH or RH is operated to lock doors with ignition key put in key cylinder and any door open, all door lock actuators are locked and then unlocked. KEY–TRAP PREVENTIVE FUNCTION Time chart LIIA0165E Revision: March 2005 BL-18 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Schematic EIS003HM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA1027E Revision: March 2005 BL-19 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — EIS003HN FIG. 1 WIWA0420E Revision: March 2005 BL-20 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM FIG. 2 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0421E Revision: March 2005 BL-21 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM FIG. 3 WIWA1017E Revision: March 2005 BL-22 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM FIG. 4 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIWA0386E Revision: March 2005 BL-23 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM Terminal Wire Color 7 W/L 8 EIS003HO Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (unlock) OFF (neutral) → ON (unlocked) 5V → 0V P/L Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (lock) OFF (neutral) → ON (locked) 5V → 0V 12 P/L Front door switch RH Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) 0V → Battery voltage 13 R/W Rear door switch RH Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) 0V → Battery voltage 22 Y/G Power window serial link Item — LIIA0166E 37 B/R Key switch (insert) Key inserted (ON) → Key removed from IGN key cylinder (OFF) Battery voltage → 0V 45 BR Lock switch signal Door lock and unlock switch (unlocked → locked) Battery voltage → 0V 46 P Unlock switch signal Door lock and unlock switch (locked → unlocked) Battery voltage → 0V 47 SB Front door switch LH Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) 0V → Battery voltage 48 R/B Rear door switch LH Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) 0V → Battery voltage 57 W Battery power supply — Battery voltage 59 G/W Front door lock assembly LH (actuator) (unlock) Driver door lock knob (locked → unlocked) 0V → Battery voltage 65 Y/R All door lock actuator (lock) Driver door lock knob (neutral → lock) 0V → Battery voltage G/R Front door lock actuator RH and Rear door lock actuators LH/RH (unlock) Door lock and unlock switch (locked → unlocked) 0V → Battery voltage 66 67 B 70 W/B Ground — — Battery power supply — Battery voltage Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EIS003HP Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to BL-17, "System Description" . Perform BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check. Refer to BL-28, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to BL-28, "Symptom Chart" . Does power door lock system operate normally? OK: GO TO 6, NG: GO TO 4. INSPECTION END. Revision: March 2005 BL-24 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM CONSULT–II Function (BCM) EIS003HQ A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. C D E CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT–II and CONSULTII CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ON ignition switch. F G H BL BBIA0002E 2. J Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. K L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 BL-25 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 4. Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. LKIA0099E Revision: March 2005 BL-26 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM DATA MONITOR Operation procedure 1. 2. 3. A Touch "DOOR LOCK" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitor all items. SELECTION FROM MENU Select and monitor the item. 4. 5. 6. B C Touch "START". If "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the desired monitor item. If "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items are monitored. During monitoring, touching "COPY" can start recording the monitor item status. D E Display item list Monitor item "OPERATION" Content IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. KEY ON SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. F CDL LOCK SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. CDL UNLOCK SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. KEY CYL LK-SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder. KEY CYL UN-SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder. DOOR SW–DR "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW–AS "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW–RR "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW–RL "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. G H BL ACTIVE TEST Operation procedure J 1. 2. 3. 4. K Touch "DOOR LOCK" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. During the operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation. L Display item list Test item Content ALL D/LK MTR This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched. DR D/UN MTR This test is able to check front door lock assembly LH (actuator) unlock operation. These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched. NON DR D/UN This test is able to check door lock actuators [except front door lock assembly LH (actuator)] unlock operation.These actuators unlock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched. Revision: March 2005 BL-27 2005 Altima M POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Symptom Chart EIS003HR Symptom Malfunctioning system Power window system Door switch check. Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch Check" . Key reminder door function does not operate properly. Key switch (Insert) check. Refer to BL-32, "Key Switch (Insert) Check" . — If above systems are "OK", replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Power door lock does not operate with door lock and unlock switch on main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH Door lock and unlock switch check. Refer to BL33, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left front only power window anti–pinch system)" . With left front only anti– pinch system. Door lock and unlock switch check. Refer to BL36, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti–pinch system)" . With left and right front anti–pinch system. Power door lock does not operate with driver door lock knob switch. Door lock actuator check –Driver–. Refer to BL38, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check" . — Specific door lock acutuator does not operate. Door lock actuator check (passenger, Rear LH/ RH).Refer to BL-39, "Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH and Rear LH/RH)" . — Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check. Refer to BL-40, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left front only power window anti-pinch system)" . With left front only anti– pinch system. Power door lock does not operate with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation. Door lock and unlock switch check. Refer to BL41, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti–pinch system)" . Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check. Refer to BL-44, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left and right front power window anti–pinch system)" . If above systems are "OK", replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . With left and right front anti–pinch system. — BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS003HS 1. CHECK FUSE ● Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link. Component Parts BCM Terminal No. (SIGNAL) Ampere No. 57 (BAT power supply) 10A 21 70 (BAT power supply) 50A f Location Fuse block (J/B) Fuse and fusible link box NOTE: Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: March 2005 BL-28 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 57, 70 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) ( + ) Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage C ( – ) 57 (W) M20 Signal name B Ground 70 (W/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. D LIIA1252E E F 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector M20 G H Continuity (+) (-) 67 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. BL LIIA1040E J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-29 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Switch Check EIS003HT 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR ● : ON : ON : ON : ON When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF PIIA6222E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground. Connector M18 M19 Terminals (Wire color) Item (+) Front door switch RH 12 (P/L) Rear door switch RH 13 (R/W) (–) Ground Front door switch LH 47 (SB) Rear door switch LH 48 (R/B) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage LIIA1177E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 BL-30 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L) 1 (R/B) - 48 (R/B) 1 (R/W) - 13 (R/W) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH) or B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B18 (Rear LH) or B116 (Rear RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48. : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist C D Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH) or B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B18 (Rear LH) or B116 (Rear RH) terminal 1 and ground. 2 (SB or P/L) - Ground 1 (R/B or R/W) - Ground : Continuity should not exist : Continuity should not exist B E LIIA1350E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. H Disconnect door switch harness. Check continuity between door switch connector terminals. Terminals (Wire color) Front door switch LH/RH 2 – Ground Rear door switch LH/RH 1 – Ground Condition Continuity Open Yes Closed No Open Yes Closed No OK or NG OK >> Check door switch case ground condition. NG >> Replace door switch. BL J K LIIA0550E L M Revision: March 2005 BL-31 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Key Switch (Insert) Check EIS003HU 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder : KEY ON SW : ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder : ● KEY ON SW : OFF LIIA0169E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Connector M18 Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) 37 (B/R) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0567E 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector. Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid connector terminals 3 and 4. Terminals 3–4 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. Refer to PS9, "STEERING COLUMN" . LIIA1044E Revision: March 2005 BL-32 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M26 terminal 4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. 37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R) 37 (B/R) - Ground B C : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> Check the following: ● 10A fuse [No. 21, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. D LIIA1255E E Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left front only power window anti–pinch system) F EIS003HV 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK : CDL LOCK SW ● H BL : ON When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK : CDL UNLOCK SW : ON J K PIIA6538E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M19 terminals 45, 46 and ground. Connector Terminal (+) 46 (P) (–) Ground M19 45 (BR) Ground Condition M Voltage (V) (Approx.) Door lock/unlock switch is neutral. Battery voltage Door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK. 0 Door lock/unlock switch is neutral. Battery voltage Door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK. 0 LIIA1351E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 BL-33 L 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D6 terminal 19 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 19 and body ground. ● Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Connector Terminals Continuity D6 19 (B) – Ground Yes LIIA0174E ● Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH Connector Terminals Continuity D105 19 (B) – Ground Yes LIIA1587E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: March 2005 BL-34 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH 1. 2. ● A Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Terminals 17 – 19 18 – 19 Condition Continuity Neutral No Unlock Yes Neutral No Lock Yes B C D E LIIA0176E F ● Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH Terminals 18 – 19 19 – 20 Condition Continuity Neutral No Lock Yes Neutral No Unlock Yes G H BL LIIA1588E OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-35 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti– pinch system) EIS003HW 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK : CDL LOCK SW ● : ON When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK : CDL UNLOCK SW : ON PIIA6538E Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove key from ignition key cylinder. 2. Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/ unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. 3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. Terminal (Wire color) Connector M18 (+) (–) 22 (Y/G) Ground Signal (Reference value) LIIA0166E PIIA6379E OK or NG OK >> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for "MULTI REMOTE ENT" with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "ACTIVE TEST" . When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . PIIA3080E Revision: March 2005 BL-36 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK ANTI-PINCH SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT A Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. Connector Terminal M18 22 (Y/G) Connector Terminal Continuity D7 14(Y/G) Yes D105 11(Y/G) Yes B C Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11. D LIIA1353E E F G H LIIA1354E OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock BL switch RH. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-37 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check EIS003HX 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (actuator) "ALL D/LK MTR", "DR D/UN MTR" in ACTIVE TEST mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL27, "ACTIVE TEST" . ALL D/LK MTR DR D/UN MTR : ON/OFF : ON/OFF WIIA0107E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and ground. Connector M20 Terminal Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (+) (–) 59 (G/W) Ground Driver door lock knob is turned to UNLOCK. 0 → Battery voltage 65 (Y/R) Ground Driver door lock knob is turned to LOCK. 0 → Battery voltage LIIA1355E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and front door lock assembly LH (actuator) connector D51 terminals 1, 3 and body ground. Connector Terminal Connector 59 (G/W) M20 65 (Y/R) 59 (G/W), 65 (Y/R) D51 Terminal Continuity 3 (G/W) Yes 1 (Y/R) Yes Ground No LIIA1356E OK or NG OK >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (actuator). Refer to BL-75, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: March 2005 BL-38 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH and Rear LH/RH) EIS003HY 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door lock actuators "ALL D/LK MTR", "NON DR D/UN" in ACTIVE TEST mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "ACTIVE TEST" . ALL D/LK MTR DR D/UN MTR B C : ON/OFF : ON/OFF D WIIA0107E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. Connector M20 Terminal F Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (+) (–) 65 (Y/R) Ground Driver door lock knob is turned to LOCK. 0 → Battery voltage 66 (G/R) Ground Door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK. 0 → Battery voltage E G H BL LIIA1357E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. J 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS K Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and front door lock actuator RH, rear door lock actuator LH/RH connector D151, D205 and D305 terminals 1, 3 and body ground. Connector M20 Terminal Connector Terminal Continuity 65 (Y/R) D151, D205, D305 1(Y/R) Yes 3(G/R) Yes 66 (G/R) 65 (Y/R), 66 (G/R) Ground L M No LIIA1358E OK or NG OK >> Replace front door lock actuator RH or rear door lock actuator LH/RH. Refer to BL-75, "Removal and Installation" (front) or BL-77, "Removal and Installation of Door Lock" (rear). NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: March 2005 BL-39 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left front only power window anti-pinch system) EIS003HZ 1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW", "KEY CYL UN-SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK: KEY CYL LK-SW ● : ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: KEY CYL UN-SW : ON LIIA0188E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminals 7, 8 and ground. Connector Terminal (+) 7 (W/L) (–) Ground M18 8 (P/L) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is neutral. 5 Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is turned to UNLOCK. 0 Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is neutral. 5 LIIA1359E Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is turned to LOCK. 0 OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND HARNESS Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D50 terminal 3 and body ground. Connector Terminals Continuity D50 3 (B) – Ground Yes LIIA1471E Revision: March 2005 BL-40 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. A 3. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) B Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector terminals. Terminals 1–3 2–3 Condition Continuity Key is turned to LOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to UNLOCK Yes Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to LOCK. Yes OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-75, "Removal and Installation" . C D E LIIA1586E Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti– pinch system) EIS003I0 1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL F G H With CONSULT-II Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch ("LOCK SW DR/AS", "UNLK SW DR/AS") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK : BL LOCK SW DR/AS : ON ● When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK : UNLK SW DR/AS J : ON K L LIIA0172E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground. Connector M18 M Terminal (+) (–) 22 (Y/G) Ground Condition Voltage (V) — LIIA0166E LIIA1360E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 BL-41 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 11 and body ground. Connector Terminals Continuity D7 11 (B) – Ground Yes LIIA0179E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. 22 (Y/G) — 14 (Y/G) : Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1353E 4. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminals. Terminals 5 – 11 4 – 11 Condition Continuity Key is turned to LOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to UNLOCK Yes Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to LOCK. Yes OK or NG LIIA1472E OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Revision: March 2005 BL-42 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With left and right front power window anti–pinch system) EIS003I1 A 1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch ("LOCK SW DR/AS", "UNLK SW DR/AS") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK : LOCK SW DR/AS ● B C : ON When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK : UNLK SW DR/AS D : ON E F LIIA0172E G Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground. Connector Terminal (+) Condition (–) H Voltage (V) (Approx.) BL M18 22 (Y/G) Ground — J LIIA0166E LIIA1360E K OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. L 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D106 terminal 7 and body ground. ● Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH Connector Terminals Continuity D106 7 (B) – Ground Yes LIIA1475E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: March 2005 BL-43 2005 Altima M POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH 1. 2. ● Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between switch terminals 7 and 11. Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH Terminals 7 – 11 Condition Continuity Neutral No Lock Yes Unlock Yes LIIA1476E OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left and right front power window anti–pinch system) EIS003I2 1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW", "KEY CYL UN-SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK : KEY CYL LK-SW ● : ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: KEY CYL UN-SW : ON LIIA0188E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH GROUND HARNESS Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D50 terminal 3 and body ground. Connector Terminals Continuity D50 3 (B) – Ground Yes LIIA1471E Revision: March 2005 BL-44 2005 Altima POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. A 3. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH B Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector terminals. Terminals Condition Continuity Key is turned to LOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to UNLOCK. Yes 1–3 Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to LOCK. Yes 2–3 C D E OK or NG LIIA1586E OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-75, "Removal and Installation" . F 4. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER HARNESS G Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 5 and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D50 terminals 1, 2 and body ground. H Connector Terminal Connector 4 (P/L) D7 5 (W/L) 4 (P/L), 5 (W/L) D50 Terminal Continuity 2 (P/L) Yes 1 (W/L) Yes Ground BL No J LIIA1590E K OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. L M Revision: March 2005 BL-45 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28596 EIS003I3 LIIA2219E Revision: March 2005 BL-46 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM System Description EIS003I4 A INPUTS Power is supplied at all times ● to BCM terminal 70 ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box). Power is supplied at all times ● to key switch terminal 3 and ● to BCM terminal 57 ● through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the key switch is ON (ignition key is inserted in key cylinder), power is supplied ● through key switch terminal 4 ● to BCM terminal 37. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47. ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● to front door switch LH case ground. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through front door switch RH terminal 2 ● to front door switch RH case ground. When the rear door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 13 ● through rear door switch RH terminal 1 ● to rear door switch RH case ground. When the rear door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 48 ● through rear door switch LH terminal 1 ● to rear door switch LH case ground. Keyfob signal is inputted to BCM. The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the ● power door lock ● trunk lid opener ● interior lamp ● panic alarm ● hazard and horn reminder ● keyless power window down (open) B C D E F G H BL J K L M OPERATED PROCEDURE Power Door Lock Operation BCM receives a LOCK signal from keyfob. BCM locks all doors with input of LOCK signal from keyfob. When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver's door will be unlocked. Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be unlocked. Hazard and Horn Reminder BCM output to IPDM E/R for hazard and horn reminder signal as DATA LINE (CAN H line and CAN L line). The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode). Revision: March 2005 BL-47 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Operating function of hazard and horn reminder C mode S mode Remote controller operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp flash Twice Once Twice — Horn sound Once — — — How to change hazard and horn reminder mode With CONSULT-II Hazard and horn reminder can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET". Without CONSULT-II Refer to Owner's Manual for instructions. Interior Lamp Operation When the following input signals are both supplied: ● door switches OPEN (when all the doors are closed); ● driver's door LOCKED; Remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and ignition illumination (for 30 seconds) with input of UNLOCK signal from keyfob. For detailed description, refer to LT-117, "ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION" . Panic Alarm Operation When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob. The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob. For detailed description, refer to BL-84, "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM" . Trunk Lid Opener Operation When a TRUNK OPEN signal is sent with key OFF (ignition key removed from key cylinder) from keyfob, power is supplied ● through BCM terminal 53 ● to trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 3. When power and ground are supplied, trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid opens trunk lid. Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation When keyfob unlock switch is turned ON with ignition switch OFF, and the switch is detected to be on continuously for 3 seconds, the driver's door and passenger's door (with left and right front power window anti-pinch system) power windows are simultaneously opened. Power window is operated to open and the operation continues as long as the keyfob unlock switch is pressed. CAN Communication System Description EIS003I5 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 BL-48 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Schematic EIS003I6 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA1029E Revision: March 2005 BL-49 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — EIS003I7 FIG. 1 WIWA0422E Revision: March 2005 BL-50 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FIG. 2 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0423E Revision: March 2005 BL-51 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FIG. 3 WIWA0424E Revision: March 2005 BL-52 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FIG. 4 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA1018E Revision: March 2005 BL-53 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EIS003I8 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Terminal Wire Color 1 R/Y Ignition key illumination When doors are unlocked using keyfob (OFF → Unlock) 11 PU Ignition switch (ACC or ON) Ignition switch (ACC or ON position) 12 P/L Front door switch RH Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V 13 R/W Rear door switch RH Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V 22 Y/G Power window serial link Item Condition Battery voltage → 0V Battery voltage — LIIA0166E 37 B/R 38 R Ignition key switch (insert) Key inserted → Key removed from key cylinder Ignition switch (ON or START) Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery voltage → 0V Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 47 SB Front door switch LH 48 R/B Rear door switch LH 53 P 56 P/B 57 W 59 G/W Driver door lock actuator Door lock & unlock switch (Neutral → Unlock) 0V → Battery voltage 62 R/W Step lamp LH and RH When doors are unlocked using keyfob (OFF → Unlock) Battery voltage → 0V 63 R Room lamp When doors are locked using keyfob → Unlocked using keyfob (Lamp switch in "DOOR" position) Battery voltage → 0V 65 Y/R Door lock actuators Door lock & unlock switch (Neutral → Lock) 0V → Battery voltage 66 G/R Passenger and rear doors lock actuator Door lock & unlock switch (Neutral → Unlock) 0V → Battery voltage 67 B 70 W/B Revision: March 2005 Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V Trunk release solenoid When trunk lid release solenoid is operated using keyfob (OFF → ON) 0V → Battery voltage Battery saver (Interior lamp) Battery saver operates → Does not operate (ON → OFF) Battery voltage → 0V — Battery voltage Battery power supply Ground — — Battery power supply — Battery voltage BL-54 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS003I9 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. C Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure D E EIS003IA “MULTI REMOTE ENT” CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. F G H BL BBIA0002E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. J K L M BCIA0029E 5. Touch “BCM”. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 BL-55 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. LIIA0194E 7. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available. BCIA0031E CONSULT-II Application Items EIS003IB “MULTI REMOTE ENT” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position. PANIC BTN Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch. KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch. UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch. LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch. DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. LK/UN BTN ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob. TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. Active Test Test Item Description INT LAMP This test is able to check interior lamp illumination operation. The interior lamp illumination is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. IGN ILLUM This test is able to check ignition illumination operation. The ignition illumination is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Revision: March 2005 BL-56 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Test Item Description FLASHER RIGHT(CAN) This test is able to check right hazard reminder operation. The right hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. FLASHER LEFT(CAN) This test is able to check left hazard reminder operation. The left hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. HORN This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activate for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. HEAD LAMP(HI) This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. TRUNK/BACK DOOR This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation. The trunk is unlocked when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. A B C D Work Support Test Item Description E REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode. REMO CONT ID REGIST Keyfob ID code can be registered. REMO CONT ID ERASUR Keyfob ID code can be erased. MULTI ANSWER BACK SET Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed when “MODE SET” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. AUTO LOCK SET Auto locking function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when "MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. PANIC ALRM SET Panic alarm operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. TRUNK OPEN SET Trunk lid opener operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. PW DOWN SET Keyless power window down (open) operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. F G H BL J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-57 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Hazard and horn reminder mode MODE 1 (C mode) MODE 2 (S mode) MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 6 Keyfob operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp flash Twice Once Twice — — — Twice Once Twice — — Once Horn sound Once — — — — — — — Once — Once — Auto locking function mode Auto locking function MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 5 minutes Nothing 1 minutes MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 0.5 seconds Nothing 1.5 seconds MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 0.5 seconds Nothing 1.5 seconds MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 3 seconds Nothing 5 seconds Panic alarm operation mode Keyfob operation Trunk open operation mode Keyfob operation Power window down operation mode Keyfob operation Trouble Diagnosis Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EIS003IC Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-47, "System Description" . Confirm that power door lock system operates normally. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" . Perform BCM power supply and ground circuit check. Refer to BL-58, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" . Refer to trouble diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-59, "Trouble Diagnoses" . Inspection End. BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS003ID 1. CHECK FUSE ● Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link. Component Parts BCM Terminal No. (SIGNAL) Ampere No. Location 57 (BAT power supply) 10A 21 70 (BAT power supply) 50A f Fuse and fusible link box 11 (ACC power supply) 10A 6 Fuse block (J/B) 38 (IGN power supply) 10A 1 Fuse block (J/B) Fuse block (J/B) NOTE: Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: March 2005 BL-58 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connectors M18, M20 terminals 11, 38, 57, 70 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) Signal name Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) 11 (PU) ACC power supply ACC Battery voltage 38 (R) IGN power supply ON Battery voltage 57 (W) Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage 70 (W/B) Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage ( + ) B C ( – ) M18 Ground M20 D LIIA1274E E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT H Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. BL Terminals (Wire color) Connector M20 Continuity (+) (-) 67 (B) Ground J Yes OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. K LIIA1040E Trouble Diagnoses EIS003IE L SYMPTOM CHART NOTE: ● Always check the "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" before troubleshooting. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" . ● Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob. Refer to BL-61, "Keyfob Battery and Function Check" . ● The panic alarm operation and trunk lid opener operation of remote keyless entry system do not activate with the ignition key inserted in the ignition key cylinder. ● Use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241 (follow instructions on tester) to check operation of keyfob before replacing keyfob. Symptom Reference page Diagnoses/service procedure 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) All function of remote keyless entry system do not operate. NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. Revision: March 2005 BL-61 BL-59 BL-68 2005 Altima M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered. Door lock or unlock does not function. (If the power door lock system does not operate manually, check power door lock system. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" .) Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. Room lamp, ignition illumination and step lamp operation do not activate properly. Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not activate when panic alarm button is continuously pressed. Trunk lid does not open when trunk opener button is continuously pressed. Revision: March 2005 Reference page BL-61 NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Key switch (insert) check BL-64 3. Door switch check BL-62 4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. BL-68 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) BL-61 NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. BL-68 1. Hazard reminder check BL-67 2. Horn reminder check BL-67 3. Door switch check BL-62 4. Replace BCM. BCS-20 1. Room lamp operation check BL-67 2. Ignition illumination operation check BL-67 3. Step lamp operation check BL-67 4. Door switch check BL-62 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) BL-61 NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Vehicle security operation check. Refer to Vehicle security system. BL-84 3. Key switch (insert) check BL-64 4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. BL-68 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) BL-61 NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Trunk release solenoid check BL-65 3. Key switch (insert) check BL-64 4. Replace BCM. BCS-20 BL-60 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Keyfob Battery and Function Check EIS003IF 1. CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY A Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−). Voltage B : 2.5V - 3.0V NOTE: Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace battery. Refer to BL-71, "Keyfob Battery Replacement" . C D SEL237W E 2. CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION F With CONSULT-II Check keyfob function in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. When pushing each button of keyfob, the corresponding monitor item should be turned as follows. Condition G Monitor item Pushing LOCK LK BUTTON/SIG : ON Pushing UNLOCK UN BUTTON/SIG : ON Pushing TRUNK TRUNK BTN/SIG : ON Pushing PANIC PANIC BTN : ON Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK at the same time LK/UN BTN ON : ON H BL LIIA0195E Without CONSULT-II Check keyfob function using Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241. OK or NG OK >> WITH CONSULT-II: Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . OK >> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-59, "SYMPTOM CHART" . NG >> WITH CONSULT-II: Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-59, "SYMPTOM CHART" . NG >> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Replace keyfob. Refer to BL-70, "KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-61 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Door Switch Check EIS003IG 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR ● : ON : ON : ON : ON When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF PIIA6222E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground. Connector M18 M19 Terminals (Wire color) Item (+) Front door switch RH 12 (P/L) Rear door switch RH 13 (R/W) (–) Ground Front door switch LH 47 (SB) Rear door switch LH 48 (R/B) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) DOOR Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage LIIA1177E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 BL-62 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 1 (R/B) - 48 (R/B) 1 (R/W) - 13 (R/W) 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH) or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear LH) or B116 (rear RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48. : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist C D Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH) or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear LH) or B116 (rear RH) terminal 1 and ground. 1 (R/B or R/W) - Ground 2 (SB or P/L) - Ground : Continuity should not exist : Continuity should not exist B E LIIA1350E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. H Disconnect door switch harness. Check continuity between door switch connector terminals. Terminals (Wire color) Front door switch LH/RH 2 – Ground Rear door switch LH/RH 1 – Ground Condition Continuity Door Open Yes Door Closed No Door Open Yes Door Closed No OK or NG OK >> Check door switch case ground condition. NG >> Replace door switch. BL J K LIIA0550E L M Revision: March 2005 BL-63 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Key Switch (Insert) Check EIS003IH 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW : ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder: ● KEY ON SW : OFF LIIA0169E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Terminal (Wire color) Connector M18 (+) (–) 37 (B/R) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0567E 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector. Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid connector terminals 3 and 4. Terminals 3–4 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. LIIA1044E Revision: March 2005 BL-64 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M26 terminal 4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. 37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R) 37 (B/R) - Ground B C : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> Check the following: ● 10A fuse [No. 21, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. Trunk Release Solenoid Check D LIIA1255E E F EIS003II 1. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER G Check trunk release operation with trunk lid opener switch. NOTE: First check trunk lid opener cancel switch position. Refer to BL-82, "TRUNK LID OPENER" . Does trunk lid open? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check trunk release solenoid and the circuit. H BL 2. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR OPERATION J With CONSULT-II 1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II. 2. Select “TRUNK/BACK DOOR” and touch “ON”. K Trunk release solenoid should operate. NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. OK or NG OK >> Trunk lid opener actuator circuit is OK. NG >> Check harness for open or short between BCM and trunk lid opener actuator. L M LIIA0196E Revision: March 2005 BL-65 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 3. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid connector. 2. While pressing keyfob release button, check voltage between trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid harness connector B32 terminal 3 and ground. 3 (P) - Ground 3. : Battery voltage should exist. Check continuity between trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid harness connector B32 terminal 4 and ground. 4 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace trunk release solenoid. NG >> Check the following: 1. Harness for open or short between BCM and trunk release solenoid 2. Harness for open or short between trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid and ground 3. Replace BCM LIIA1512E Revision: March 2005 BL-66 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Check Hazard Function EIS003IJ 1. CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP A Does hazard indicator flash with hazard switch? Yes or No Yes >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK. No >> Check “hazard indicator.” Refer to LT-72, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS" . B C Check Horn Function EIS003IK First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM". 1. CHECK HORN FUNCTION Does horn sound with horn switch? Yes or No Yes >> Horn circuit is OK. No >> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-36, "HORN" . Check Headlamp Function D E F EIS003IL First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM". G 1. CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION H Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch ON? Yes or No Yes >> Headlamp operation circuit is OK. No >> Check headlamp circuit. Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR BL CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" . Check Room Lamp, Step Lamp and Ignition Key Illumination Function EIS003IM 1. CHECK ROOM LAMP, STEP LAMP AND IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION FUNCTION When room lamp switch is in DOOR position, open the front door LH or RH. J K Room lamp, Step lamp and ignition key illumination should illuminate. OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> Check interior lamp circuits. Refer to LT-115, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" . L M Revision: March 2005 BL-67 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ID Code Entry Procedure EIS003IN KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II NOTE: ● If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. ● When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five ID codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than five codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. ● Entry of a maximum of five ID codes is allowed. When more than five codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. ● Even if the same ID code that is already in memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an additional code. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. BBIA0002E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “BCM”. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 BL-68 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. A B C LIIA0194E D 7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”. E F G BCIA0031E 8. The items shown on the figure can be set up. “REMO CONT ID CONFIR” Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or not. ● “REMO CONT ID REGIST” Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code. NOTE: Register the ID code when keyfob or BCM is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required. ● “REMO CONT ID ERASUR” Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code. H ● BL J LIIA0207E K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-69 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II LIIA1513E Revision: March 2005 BL-70 2005 Altima REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM NOTE: ● If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) five times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. ● When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. ● If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfobs, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code entry” for each new keyfob. ● Entry of maximum five ID codes is allowed. When more than five ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. ● Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an additional code. Keyfob Battery Replacement EIS003IO A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1514E Revision: March 2005 BL-71 2005 Altima DOOR DOOR Fitting Adjustment PFP:80100 EIS003IP WIIA0716E a. Flush + 0.5, -1.0 mm (+0.02, -0.04 in) b. Flush + 1.0, -0.5 mm (+0.04, -0.02 in) c. 4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.18 ± 0.04 in) d. 4.6 ± 1.0 mm (0.18 ± 0.04 in) FRONT DOOR Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end 1. 2. Remove the front fender. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT FENDER" . Loosen the bolts. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust. REAR DOOR Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end 1. 2. Remove the center pillar upper and lower garnish. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" . Accessing from inside the vehicle, loosen the nuts. Open the rear door, and raise the rear door at rear end to adjust. Revision: March 2005 BL-72 2005 Altima DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT 1. A Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. B C LIIA1516E Removal and Installation D EIS003IQ CAUTION: ● When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to protect the door and body. ● When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment. ● Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply "body grease". 1. Remove the door window and module assembly. Refer to GW-34, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove the door harness. 3. Remove the check link cover. 4. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar. E F G H BL J LIIA1517E 5. Remove the door-side nuts and bolts, and the door assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K L M LIIA1518E Revision: March 2005 BL-73 2005 Altima DOOR Door Weatherstrip EIS003IR WIIA0718E 1. Glued area Revision: March 2005 2. Clip (Driver side: Yellow, Passenger side: Blue) BL-74 3. Weatherstrip 2005 Altima FRONT DOOR LOCK FRONT DOOR LOCK Component Structure PFP:80502 A EIS003IS B C D E F G LIIA1519E Inspection and Adjustment 1. EIS003IT Remove the front door window and front door module assembly. Refer to GW-34, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT H BL Rotate the bushing to adjust so that the clearance between the bushing and rod becomes as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Be careful not to make the clearance 0 mm (0 in) or the rod will be pressed continuously. ● J K L SBT978 Removal and Installation EIS003IU REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. M Remove the front door window and front door module assembly. Refer to GW-34, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . Separate the key cylinder rod and exterior handle rod connection (on the handle) if equipped. Remove the screws (TORX T30) and the door lock assembly. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector. LIIA0116E Revision: March 2005 BL-75 2005 Altima FRONT DOOR LOCK 5. Remove the exterior handle bolts, move the exterior handle assembly backward, and then remove it from the panel in front of the exterior handle escutcheon. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. SIIA0342E Disassembly and Assembly EIS003IV DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Be sure to remove or install the actuator with the door lock assembly removed. 1. Remove the screws and actuator from the door lock assembly. 2. Pull the actuator straight downward to separate it from the door lock assembly. SIIA0343E ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Align the actuator pivot with the cutout on the knob lever of the door lock assembly, then assemble the actuator. Move the knob lever and the actuator pivot toward the lock-on direction, and check that it engages securely. Revision: March 2005 BL-76 2005 Altima REAR DOOR LOCK REAR DOOR LOCK Components PFP:82502 A EIS003IW B C D E F G H BL LIIA1520E Inspection and Adjustment EIS003IX J Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-30, "DOOR FINISHER" . EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT K Rotate the bushing to adjust so that the clearance between the bushing and rod becomes as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to make the clearance 0 mm (0 in) or the rod will be pressed continuously. L M SBT978 Removal and Installation of Door Lock EIS003IY REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-30, "DOOR FINISHER" . Revision: March 2005 BL-77 2005 Altima REAR DOOR LOCK 2. 3. Remove the screws (TORX T30) and the door lock assembly. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector. LIIA0117E 4. Remove the exterior handle bolts, and move the handle backward to disengage it from the panel in front of the exterior handle escutcheon, then remove the handle. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. SIIA0345E Disassembly and Assembly EIS003IZ DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Be sure to remove or install the actuator with the door lock assembly removed. 1. Remove the screws and the actuator from the door lock assembly. 2. Pull the actuator straight downward to separate it from the door lock assembly. SIIA0346E ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Align the actuator pivot with the cutout on the knob lever of the door lock assembly, then assemble the actuator. Move the knob lever and the actuator pivot toward the lock-on direction, and check that it engages securely. Revision: March 2005 BL-78 2005 Altima TRUNK LID TRUNK LID Fitting Adjustment PFP:H4300 A EIS003J0 B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA2207E Revision: March 2005 BL-79 2005 Altima TRUNK LID 1. Trunk lid assembly 2. Rear window glass 3. Body side outer 4. Rear combination lamp 5. Rear bumper fascia a. 7.3 mm (0.29 in) b. 3.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.14 ± 0.04 in) c. flush + 0.5/ -1.0 mm (+ 0.02/-0.04 in) d. 5.4 mm (0.21 in) e. 8.2 ± 1.5 mm (0.3 ± 0.06 in) LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. With the striker released, loosen the trunk lid hinge bolts and close the trunk lid. Make the lateral clearance and the clearance to the rear window glass equal, and open the trunk lid to tighten the bolts to the specified torque. SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. Loosen the striker bolts. Raise the striker to the top position, and temporarily tighten the upper bolt at the position. Close the trunk lid lightly and adjust the surface height, then open the trunk lid to finally tighten the striker bolts. Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Assembly EIS003J1 WIIA0544E 1. 2. Remove the trunk lid finisher. Refer to EI-37, "TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" . Disconnect the connectors in the trunk lid, and remove the harness clamps to pull the harness out of the trunk lid. 3. Remove the bolts and the trunk lid assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installing, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts. Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Lock EIS003J2 LOCK REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the trunk lid finisher. Refer to EI-37, "TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" . Separate the key cylinder rod. After removing the harness connector, remove the bolts and the trunk lid lock. LIIA1523E Revision: March 2005 BL-80 2005 Altima TRUNK LID STRIKER REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. A Remove the trunk rear plate and trunk rear finisher. Refer to EI37, "TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" . Remove the bolts and the trunk lock support from the vehicle. After removing the harness connector, remove the bolts, and the striker from the trunk lock support. B C LIIA1524E D LOCK AND STRIKER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Install the trunk lid lock and striker. After installing, close the trunk lid lightly. Perform the lock and surface height adjustment. Refer to BL-79, "Fitting Adjustment" . After installing, check the operation. Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Weatherstrip E F EIS003J3 G H BL J K L LIIA0118E 1. 2. 3. Install the weatherstrip from the front with the vehicle center mark aligned to the weatherstrip mark. At rear side, align the weatherstrip seam to the center of the striker. After installing, pull the weatherstrip lightly to check for looseness. CAUTION: The weatherstrip should fit tightly onto the corners and trunk lid rear plate. Revision: March 2005 BL-81 2005 Altima M TRUNK LID OPENER TRUNK LID OPENER Wiring Diagram — TLID — PFP:84640 EIS003J4 WIWA1019E Revision: March 2005 BL-82 2005 Altima TRUNK LID OPENER Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EIS003J5 A Terminal Wire Color 30 R/B*1, L/R*2 53 P Trunk opener output 70 W/B Battery power supply Item Trunk lid opener switch Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) OFF → ON Battery voltage → 0V When trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid is operated using keyfob trunk release button (OFF → ON) — 0V → Battery voltage B C Battery voltage NOTE: *1: Without trunk lid opener cancel switch. *2: With trunk lid opener cancel switch. D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-83 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28491 EIS003J6 LIIA1397E Revision: March 2005 BL-84 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1872E Revision: March 2005 BL-85 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM System Description EIS003J7 DESCRIPTION Setting the vehicle security system Disarmed phase ● When the vehicle is being driven or when doors or trunk lid is open, the vehicle security system is set in the disarmed phase on the assumption that the owner is inside or near the vehicle. Pre-armed phase and armed phase ● The vehicle security system turns into the "pre-armed" phase when trunk lid and all doors are closed and locked by electronic key. The security indicator lamp illuminates for 30 seconds. Then, the system automatically shifts into the "armed" phase. Canceling the set vehicle security system When one of the following operations is performed, the armed phase is canceled. 1. Unlock the doors with the key or the keyfob. 2. Open the trunk lid with the key or the keyfob. When the trunk lid is closed after opening the trunk lid with the keyfob, the system returns to the armed phase. Activating the alarm operation of the vehicle security system Make sure the system is in the armed phase. When one of the following operations is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the head-lamps for about 50 seconds. 1. Any door is opened before unlocking door with key or keyfob. 2. Door is unlocked without using key or keyfob. 3. Trunk lid is opened without using key or keyfob. POWER SUPPLY Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to security indicator lamp terminal 1 ● through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 ● to BCM terminal 57 ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 11. INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors and trunk lid. To activate the vehicle security system, BCM must receive signals indicating the doors and trunk lid are closed and the doors are locked. When a door is open, BCM terminal 12, 13, 47 or 48 receives a ground signal from each door switch. When front door LH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 14 of main power window and door lock/unlock switch. When front door RH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 11 of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. The IPDM E/R then sends a signal to the BCM through the CAN SYSTEM. When the trunk lid is open, BCM terminal 42 receives a ground signal ● from terminal 1 of the trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid ● through body grounds B7 and B19. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION The vehicle security system is triggered by ● opening a door ● opening the trunk lid Revision: March 2005 BL-86 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM unlocking door without using the key or keyfob. The vehicle security system will be triggered once the system is in armed phase ● when BCM receives a ground signal at terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 (door switch), 42 (trunk lamp and trunk release solenoid switch). Power is supplied at all times ● to horn relay terminal 1 ● through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in fuse and fusible link box). When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently ● to headlamp high relay ● from IPDM E/R terminal 51 ● to horn relay terminal 2. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds, but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. ● A B C D E VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door or the trunk lid must be unlocked with the key or keyfob. When the key is used to unlock the driver door, BCM terminal 22 receives signal ● from terminal 14 of the main power window and door lock/unlock switch. When the key is used to unlock the trunk lid, BCM terminal 41 receives a ground signal from terminal 1 of the trunk key cylinder switch (unlock switch). When the BCM receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob, the vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase) F G H PANIC ALARM OPERATION Remote keyless entry system may or may not operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as required. BL When the remote keyless entry system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently ● to headlamp high relay ● from IPDM E/R terminal 51 J ● to horn relay terminal 2. The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob. K CAN Communication System Description EIS003J8 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" L M Revision: March 2005 BL-87 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Schematic EIS003J9 WIWA1020E Revision: March 2005 BL-88 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — EIS003JA A FIG. 1 B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA1021E Revision: March 2005 BL-89 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FIG. 2 WIWA1022E Revision: March 2005 BL-90 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FIG. 3 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA1023E Revision: March 2005 BL-91 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FIG. 4 WIWA0427E Revision: March 2005 BL-92 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EIS003JB A Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ignition switch (ACC or ON) Ignition switch (ACC or ON position) Battery voltage P/L Front door switch RH Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V R/W Rear door switch RH Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V Terminal Wire Color 11 PU 12 13 Item B C 22 Y/G Power window serial link D — E LIIA0166E 23 G/OR Security indicator output OFF → ON Battery voltage → 0V Ignition key switch (insert) Key inserted → Key removed from key cylinder Battery voltage → 0V 37 B/R 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 41 L/B G Trunk key cylinder Unlocked → Neutral Trunk switch Trunk lid closed (OFF) → Trunk lid open (ON) 0V → 5V Battery voltage → 0V 42 PU/W 47 SB Front door switch LH Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V 48 R/B Rear door switch LH Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0V 57 W Battery power supply — 67 B Ground — 0 70 W/B Battery power supply — Battery voltage Wire Color Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) 22 R/L Parking. license, and tail lamps OFF → ON 0V → Battery voltage 27 L/W Headlamp high (RH) OFF → ON 0V → Battery voltage 28 G Headlamp high (LH) OFF → ON 0V → Battery voltage 38 B Ground — 0 48 L CAN-H — — 49 P CAN-L — — 51 G/W ON → OFF 0V → Battery voltage 60 B — 0 Revision: March 2005 BL-93 BL J EIS003JC Terminal Ground H Battery voltage Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Horn relay F K L M 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS003JD CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 BL-94 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 4. Touch "THEFT ALM" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. ● WORK SUPPORT, DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the vehicle security system. A B C LIIA0034E D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-95 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM Data Monitor Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch. KEY CYL UN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. TRNK OPN MTR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk opener motor. TRNK OPNR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk opener switch. TRUNK KEY SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk key cylinder switch. LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH. UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH. LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob. Active Test Test Item Description THEFT IND This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. HEADLAMP This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation. The headlamps will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. HORN This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation. The horns will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Work Support Test Item Description SECURITY ALARM SET This mode can confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting. THEFT ALM TRG The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” on CONSULT-II screen. Revision: March 2005 BL-96 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis EIS003JE A WORK FLOW B C D E F G H BL J LIIA0123E ● ● “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” Diagnosis. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" . “REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” Diagnosis. Refer to BL-46, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" . K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-97 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Preliminary Check EIS003JF The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED in the following flow chart. LIIA1525E After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart. Revision: March 2005 BL-98 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Symptom Chart EIS003JG A PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure SYMPTOM AII items Vehicle security system cannot be set by ···· Lock/unlock switch Diagnostic Procedure 1 (Door and trunk lamp and trunk release solenoid switch check) Refer to BL-101, "Door Switch Check" . B If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. C Diagnostic Procedure 7 (Door lock/unlock switch check) Refer to BL-106, "DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK" . If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. 1 Driver door outside key Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Door key cylinder switch check) Refer to BL-106, "FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK" . If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. Security indicator does not turn “ON”. Diagnostic Procedure 2 (Security indicator lamp check) Refer to BL-103, "TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID SWITCH CHECK" . 2 Any door is opened. F Diagnostic Procedure 1 (Door and trunk room lamp switch check) Refer to BL-101, "Door Switch Check" . H If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Diagnostic Procedure 5 (Vehicle security horn alarm check) Refer to BL-106, "VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK" . Horn alarm 3 E G If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. *1 Vehicle security system does not alarm when ···· D Vehicle security alarm does not activate. Head lamp alarm BL If the above systems are “OK”, check horn system. Refer to WW-36, "HORN" . Diagnostic Procedure 6 (Head lamp alarm check) Refer to BL-106, "VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK" . J If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Driver door outside key 4 Vehicle security system cannot be canceled by ···· Trunk lid key Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Door key cylinder switch check) Refer to BL-106, "FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK" . K If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. L Diagnostic Procedure 4 (Trunk lid key cylinder switch check) Refer to BL-104, "TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH) SIGNAL" . If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Keyfob Check remote keyless entry function. If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. *1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase. Revision: March 2005 BL-99 2005 Altima M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS003JH 1. CHECK FUSE Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link. Component Parts Terminal No. (SIGNAL) Ampere No. 11 (ACC power supply) 10A 6 Fuse block (J/B) 57 (BAT power supply) 10A 21 Fuse block (J/B) 70 (BAT power supply) 50A f BCM Location Fuse and fusible link box NOTE: Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connectors M20 terminals 57, 70 and M18 terminal 11 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) ( + ) M18 Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) ACC power supply ACC Battery voltage Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage ( – ) 11 (PU) 57 (W) Signal name Ground M20 70 (W/B) LIIA1396E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector M20 Continuity (+) (-) 67 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: March 2005 BL-100 LIIA1040E 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Door Switch Check EIS003JI 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR ● C : ON : ON : ON : ON D When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR E : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF PIIA6222E M18 M19 Terminals (Wire color) Item (+) (–) Condition F G Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground. Connector B H Voltage (V) (Approx.) BL Front door switch RH 12 (P/L) Rear door switch RH 13 (R/W) Front door switch LH 47 (SB) Rear door switch LH 48 (R/B) Ground Door Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage J LIIA1177E K OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. L M Revision: March 2005 BL-101 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH) or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear LH) or B116 (rear RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48. 1 (R/B) - 48 (R/B) 1 (R/W) - 13 (R/W) 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L) 4. : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist : Continuity should exist Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH) or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear LH) or B116 (rear RH) terminal 1 and ground. 1 (R/B or R/W) - Ground 2 (SB or P/L) - Ground LIIA1350E : Continuity should not exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. Disconnect door switch harness. Check continuity between door switch connector terminals. Terminals Rear door switch LH/RH 1 – Ground Front door switch LH/RH 2 – Ground Condition Continuity Door Open Yes Door Closed No Door Open Yes Door Closed No OK or NG OK >> Check door switch case ground condition. NG >> Replace door switch. Revision: March 2005 BL-102 LIIA0550E 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID SWITCH CHECK EIS003JJ 1. CHECK TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check “TRNK OPN MNTR” in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. When trunk lid is open When trunk lid is closed B : TRNK OPN MNTR ON : TRNK OPN MNTR OFF C D E WIIA0108E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 42 (PU/W) and ground. Refer to BL-90, "FIG. 2" . OK or NG OK >> Trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. F G H BL LIIA1393E 2. CHECK TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID J 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid. Check continuity between trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid connector B32 terminals 1 and 2. L Connector Terminals B32 1−2 Condition Continuity Closed No Open Yes OK or NG OK >> Check the following: ● Trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid and BCM NG >> Replace trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid. Revision: March 2005 BL-103 M LIIA1394E 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH) SIGNAL EIS003JK 1. TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH) SIGNAL CHECK With CONSULT-II Check trunk key cylinder switch (“TRUNK KEY SW”) in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. ● When key in key cylinder is at “NEUTRAL” position, TRUNK KEY SW: OFF When key is at “UNLOCK” position, ● TRUNK KEY SW: ON WIIA0109E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 41(L/B) and ground. Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral 5 Unlocked 0 OK or NG OK >> Trunk key cylinder switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA1395E 2. CHECK TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH) 1. 2. Disconnect trunk key cylinder switch connector. Check continuity between trunk key cylinder switch connector B34 terminals 1 and 2. Condition Continuity Neutral No Unlocked Yes OK or NG OK >> Check the following: ● Trunk key cylinder switch ground circuit ● Harness for open or short between trunk key cylinder switch and BCM NG >> Replace trunk key cylinder switch. Revision: March 2005 BL-104 LIIA0055E 2005 Altima VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK EIS003JL 1. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP ACTIVE TEST A With CONSULT-II Check "THEFT IND” in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II. B C D LIIA0044E Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect BCM. 2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 23 and ground. Terminal (Wire color) Connector M18 (+) (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) 23 (G/OR) Ground Battery voltage E F G H OK or NG OK >> Security indicator lamp is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. BL LIIA0523E 2. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK J Check indicator lamp condition. Refer to BL-89, "FIG. 1" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace indicator lamp. K L 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and security indicator lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and security indicator lamp harness connector M14 terminal 2 and ground. 23 (G/OR) - 2 (G/OR) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the following: ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1873E Revision: March 2005 BL-105 2005 Altima M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK EIS003JM 1. FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) OPERATION Check door key cylinder switch with key. Do doors lock/unlock when using the key? YES >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is OK. NO >> Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) circuit. Refer to BL-106, "FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK" . VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK EIS003JN 1. CHECK HORN OPERATION Check if horn sounds with horn switch. Does horn operate? YES >> Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and horn relay. NO >> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-36, "HORN" . VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK EIS003JO 1. CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION Check if headlamps operate with lighting switch. Do headlamps come on when turning switch ON? YES >> Headlamp alarm is OK. NO >> Check headlamp system. Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" . DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK EIS003JP 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Check if power door lock operates with door lock/unlock switch. Do doors lock/unlock when using each door lock/unlock switch? YES >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK. NO >> Refer to BL-106, "DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK" . Revision: March 2005 BL-106 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28591 A EIS003JQ B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1874E Revision: March 2005 BL-107 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) System Description EIS003JR NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) has the following immobilizer functions: ● Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose IDs have been registered into the ECM and BCM, allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NVIS (NATS) registered key is prevented by NVIS (NATS). NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS (NATS). ● All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS (NATS) registered. If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS) components. ● The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position. NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system. ● When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the ON position. ● NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software. When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs can be carried out. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. ● When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID, it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner. System Composition EIS003JS The immobilizer function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following: ● NATS ignition key ● NATS antenna amp. located in the ignition key cylinder ● Body control module (BCM) ● Engine control module (ECM) ● Security indicator lamp NOTE: The communication between ECM and BCM uses the CAN communication system. PIIA1121E Revision: March 2005 BL-108 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) ECM Re-communicating Function EIS003JT The following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of ECM and BCM, but only when the ECM has been replaced with a new one which has never been energized on-board. (In this step, initialization procedure by CONSULT-II is not necessary.) NOTE: ● When registering new Key IDs or replacing the ECM other than brand new, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. ● If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before work. ● Distinguish keys with unregistered key ID from those with registered ID. 1. Install ECM. 2. Using a registered key (*1), turn ignition switch to ON. *1: To perform this step, use the key that has been used before performing ECM replacement. 3. Maintain ignition switch in ON position for at least 5 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 5. Start engine. If engine can be started, procedure is completed. If engine cannot be started, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS and initialize control unit. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-109 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Wiring Diagram — NATS — EIS003JU WIWA1024E Revision: March 2005 BL-110 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EIS003JV A Terminal Wire Color 21 P 23 G/OR Item Condition NATS antenna amp. Ignition switch (OFF → ON) Security indicator lamp Goes OFF → illuminates (Every 2.4 seconds) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Just after turning ignition switch ON: Pointer of tester should move. Battery voltage → 0 C Just after turning ignition switch ON: Pointer of tester should move. NATS antenna amp. Ignition switch (OFF → ON) R Ignition switch (ON or START) Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 57 W Battery power supply — Battery voltage 67 B Ground — 0 70 W/B Battery power supply — Battery voltage 25 Y/B 38 CONSULT-II B D E F EIS003JW CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE G CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications H 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. BL J K BBIA0002E L 3. Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II. Program card : NATS (AEN04A-1) or later M PBR455D 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START”. Revision: March 2005 BL-111 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 6. Select “NATS V.5.0”. LEL661 7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. SEL728W For further information, see the “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”. CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE Description C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all NATS ignition keys are necessary. [(NATS ignition key/ BCM/ ECM] SELF-DIAG RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart. Refer to BL-113, "NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART" . NOTE: ● When any initialization is performed, all IDs previously registered will be erased and all NATS ignition keys must be registered again. ● The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen. ● In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Revision: March 2005 BL-112 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS A B C D E F WEL125A NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART G Detected items (NATS program card screen terms) P No. Code (Self-diagnostic result of “ENGINE” ECM INT CIRC-IMMU P1613 The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU communication line is detected. BL-116 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU (In rare cases, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.) BL-117 DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID verification between key ID and IMMU is NG. BL-118 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal. BL-121 ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM P1611 The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is NG. System initialization is required. BL-119 LOCK MODE DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG Revision: March 2005 P1610 — Malfunction is detected when..... Reference page When the starting operation is carried out five or more times consecutively under the following conditions, NVIS (NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the engine from being started. ● Unregistered ignition key is used. ● IMMU or ECM is malfunctioning. Any engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble codes have been detected in ECM. BL-113 H BL J K L M BL-120 BL-114 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Work Flow EIS003JX LIIA1152E Revision: March 2005 BL-114 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Trouble Diagnoses EIS003JY A SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 Self-diagnosis related item Symptom Displayed “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on CONSULT-II screen. CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU [P1612] ● Security indicator lighting up* ● Engine cannot be started DIFFERENCE OF KEY [P1615] CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY [P1614] ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM [P1611] Security indicator lighting up* Diagnostic Procedure (Reference page) PROCEDURE 1 (BL-117 ) PROCEDURE 2 (BL-118 ) PROCEDURE 5 (BL-121 ) PROCEDURE 3 (BL-119 ) LOCK MODE [P1610] PROCEDURE 4 (BL-120 ) DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG WORK FLOW (BL-114 ) System (Malfunctioning part or mode) Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. — Open circuit in battery voltage line of BCM circuit C1 Open circuit in ignition line of BCM circuit C2 Open circuit in ground line of BCM circuit C3 Open or short circuit between BCM and ECM communication line C4 C D E ECM B BCM A Unregistered key D BCM A Malfunction of key ID chip E5 Communication line between ANT/ AMP and BCM: Open circuit or short circuit of battery voltage line or ground line BL-115 F G H BL E1 J E2 K Open circuit in power source line of ANT/ AMP circuit E3 Open circuit in ground line of ANT/ AMP circuit E4 NATS antenna amp. E6 BCM A System initialization has not yet been completed. F ECM B LOCK MODE D Engine trouble data and NVIS (NATS) trouble data have been detected in ECM — *: When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position. Revision: March 2005 B 2005 Altima L M NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 Non self-diagnosis related item Symptom Security indicator does not light up*. Diagnostic Procedure (Reference page) PROCEDURE 6 (BL-124 ) System (Malfunctioning part or mode) Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram Security indictor lamp — Open circuit between Fuse and BCM — BCM A *: CONSULT-II self-diagnostic results display screen “no malfunction is detected”. DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM WIIA0550E Revision: March 2005 BL-116 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Diagnostic Procedure 1 EIS003JZ Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “BCM” with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of “BCM”. Refer to BL-111, "CONSULT-II" . 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS A B C Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. NOTE: In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . D E F PIIA1260E 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR BCM 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 and ground. 70 (W/B) – Ground H : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following: ● 50A fusible link (letter f , located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM connector Ref. Part No. C1 BL J LIIA1279E K 3. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ON SIGNAL L 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 38 and ground. 38 (R) – Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following: ● 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM connector Ref. part No. C2 Revision: March 2005 M : Battery voltage BL-117 LIIA0527E 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR BCM 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 67 and ground. 67 (B) – Ground : Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Ref. part No. C3 LIIA1040E 5. REPLACE BCM 1. 2. Replace BCM. Ref. part No. A Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Does the engine start? Yes >> BCM is malfunctioning. No >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B ● Perform initialization or re-communicating function. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. ● For re-communicating function, refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Diagnostic Procedure 2 EIS003K0 Self-diagnostic results: “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . PIIA1261E Revision: March 2005 BL-118 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II A Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs. For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/ NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows message on the screen. Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with reregistered NATS ignition key? Yes >> ● Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D No >> ● BCM is malfunctioning. ● Replace BCM. Ref. part No. A ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation SEL297W Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Diagnostic Procedure 3 EIS003K1 Self-diagnostic results: “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen B C D E F G 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. NOTE: “ID DISCORD IMM-ECM”: Registered ID of BCM is in discord with that of ECM. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . H BL J K PIIA1262E L 2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> ● Start engine. (END) ● System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. F No >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Revision: March 2005 BL-119 M SEL297W 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Diagnostic Procedure 4 EIS003K2 Self-diagnostic results: “LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . PIIA1264E 2. ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds. 3. Return the key to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles). 5. Start the engine. Does engine start? Yes >> System is OK (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”). No >> GO TO 3. 3. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows the message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> System is OK. No >> GO TO 4. SEL297W Revision: March 2005 BL-120 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 4. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN Replace BCM. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows the message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> System is OK. BCM is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. A No >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. A 1. 2. Diagnostic Procedure 5 B C D SEL297W EIS003K3 Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen E F G 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . H BL J PIIA1263E 2. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. INSTALLATION Check NATS antenna amp. installation. Refer to BL-125, "How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reinstall NATS antenna amp. correctly. L M 3. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key. Does the engine start? Yes >> ● Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning. ● Replace the ignition key. Ref. part No. E5 ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. No >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 BL-121 K 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR NATS ANTENNA AMP. Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M27 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (W/L) – Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace fuse or harness. Ref. part No. E3 LIIA1280E 5. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 1 Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M27 terminal 2 and ground with analog tester. 2 (P) – Ground Before inserting key into ignition key cylinder Voltage: Battery voltage After inserting key into ignition key cylinder : Pointer of tester should move for approx. 30 seconds, then return to battery voltage. Just after turning ignition switch ON : Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage. LIIA1281E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> ● Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Revision: March 2005 BL-122 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 6. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 2 A Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M27 terminal 4 and ground with analog tester. 4 (Y/B) – Ground Before inserting key into ignition key cylinder Voltage: Battery voltage After inserting key into ignition key cylinder : Pointer of tester should move for approx. 30 seconds, then return to battery voltage. Just after turning ignition switch ON : Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage. B C D LIIA1282E E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> ● Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. G H 7. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. BL Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NATS antenna amp. connector. Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. connector M27 terminal 3 and ground. 3 (B) – Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> ● NATS antenna amp. is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. E6 NG >> ● Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Revision: March 2005 J BL-123 K L LIIA1283E 2005 Altima M NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Diagnostic Procedure 6 EIS003K4 “SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” 1. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] NOTE: Refer to BL-107, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. 2. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF. Check the security indicator lamp. Security indicator lamp should light up. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector. Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector M14 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (Y/R) – Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1400E 4. CHECK BCM (NATS CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. Connect security indicator lamp connector. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and ground. 23 (G/OR) – Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> BCM is malfunctioning. ● Replace BCM. Ref. part No. A ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation LIIA0523E Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. NG >> Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and BCM (NATS control unit). ● Indicator lamp condition Revision: March 2005 BL-124 2005 Altima NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU EIS003K5 A NOTE: ● If NVIS (NATS) IMMU is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”. B C D SEL096WA E F G H BL J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-125 2005 Altima HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — PFP:96401 EIS003K6 LIWA0399E Revision: March 2005 BL-126 2005 Altima HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Trouble Diagnoses EIS003K7 A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver. Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original, hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is at fault, not vehicle related. 1. ILLUMINATION CHECK B C Turn ignition switch OFF. Does red light (LED) of transmitter illuminate when any button is pressed? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. ● ● D E F SEL442U G 2. TRANSMITTER CHECK Check transmitter with Tool*. *:For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. OK or NG OK >> Receiver or hand-held transmitter malfunction, not vehicle related. NG >> Replace transmitter with sun visor assembly. H BL 3. POWER SUPPLY CHECK J 1. 2. 3. Disconnect transmitter connector. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between transmitter harness connector R2 terminal 1 Y/R and body ground. K Battery voltage should exist. L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> ● Check 10A fuse [No. 19 located in the fuse block (J/ B)] ● Harness for open or short between fuse and transmitter M LIIA1535E 4. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check continuity between transmitter harness connector R2 terminal 2 (B) and body ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace transmitter with sun visor assembly. NG >> Repair harness. LIIA1875E Revision: March 2005 BL-127 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR BODY REPAIR Body Exterior Paint Color PFP:60100 EIS003K8 LIIA0126E Color code Component Description Paint type Hard clear coat 1 Bumper fascia 2 3 4 A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 QX3 Sonoma Sunset Code Red Majestic Blue Coral Sand Mystic Emerald Smoke Super Black Sheer Silver Polished Pewter Satin White 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2S 2M 2M 3P X X X X X X X X X X Body Body color A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 BQX3 Radiator grille Center Black AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 Outer Chrome Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Outside mirror Body Body color A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 QX3 Base Black AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 Body Body color A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 QX3 Base Black AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 Side guard molding 5 Door sash Black tape X X X X X X X X X X 6 Outside handle Body color A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 QX3 7 Rear Spoiler Body color A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 QX3 8 Trunk lid finisher Body color A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 QX3 9 Center mudguard Body color A15 A20 BW9 C12 DY2 K11 KH3 KY1 KY2 QX3 2S: Solid Color with Clear, 2M: Metallic with Clear, 3P:3-Coat Pearl Revision: March 2005 BL-128 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Body Component Parts EIS003K9 A UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1668E Revision: March 2005 BL-129 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 2nd crossmember assembly Front floor) Transmission control reinforcement Front floor reinforcement RH/LH Lower dash assembly Upper dash Front cowl top Cowl top extension bracket RH/LH Center cowl top Cowl top reinforcement RH/LH Cowl top extension Cowl top side brace RH/LH Front side member assembly RH/LH Side member closing plate assembly RH/LH Lower front hoodledge assembly RH/LH Lower rear hoodledge RH/LH Upper hoodledge RH/LH Front hoodledge reinforcement RH/LH Hoodledge reinforcement gusset RH/LH Rear hoodledge reinforcement RH/LH Side cowl top RH/LH Front side member extension reinforcement RH/LH Front side member front extension RH/LH Front inner sill reinforcement RH/LH Inner sill RH/LH Inner sill extension RH/LH Front side member center extension RH/LH Front side member rear extension RH/LH Fuel tank protector RH/LH Rear side member assembly RH/LH Rear side member extension assembly RH/ LH Rear center crossmember Rear seat bracket Inner rear seatbelt anchor reinforcement Rear seat crossmember assembly Rear seat crossmember reinforcement Rear parking brake bracket Front floor reinforcement assembly Rear floor front extension Rear floor front Rear floor side LH Rear floor rear Rear floor side RH Revision: March 2005 BL-130 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR BODY COMPONENT PARTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1669E Revision: March 2005 BL-131 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. Standard roof Front roof rail assembly Front roof bow Center roof bow assembly Rear roof rail assembly Roof (if equipped with sunroof) Roof reinforcement assembly (if equipped with sunroof) Hood assembly Upper inner front pillar RH/LH Lower inner front pillar RH/LH Front fender RH/LH Front pillar upper hinge brace assembly RH/LH Front pillar lower reinforcement RH/LH Front pillar lower hinge brace assembly RH/LH Front outer sill reinforcement RH/LH Sill outer reinforcement assembly RH/LH Front body side outer assembly RH/LH Front door assembly RH/LH Rear door assembly RH/LH Fuel door assembly Fuel filler base assembly Rear body side outer assembly RH/LH Rear pillar inner reinforcement RH/LH Outer rear wheel house RH/LH Rear outer sill reinforcement RH/LH Center pillar reinforcement RH/LH Inner center pillar RH/LH Front pillar outer reinforcement RH/LH Roof side outer reinforcement assembly RH/LH Rear wheelhouse outer extension assembly RH/LH Rear wheelhouse inner assembly RH/LH Rear seatback side support assembly RH/LH Rear pillar inner RH/LH Rear fender corner assembly RH/LH Parcel shelf side RH/LH Parcel shelf assembly RH/LH Rear panel assembly Trunk lid assembly Revision: March 2005 BL-132 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Corrosion Protection EIS003KA DESCRIPTION A To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-corrosive measures. B ANTI-CORROSIVE PRECOATED STEEL (GALVANNEALED STEEL) To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anticorrosive precoated steel sheet has been adopted replacing conventional zinc-coated steel sheet. Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance with cationic electrodeposition primer. C D E PIIA0093E Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory. F G PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION PRIMER A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrodeposition primer, which provide excellent corrosion pro- H tection, are employed on all body components. CAUTION: Confine paint removal during welding operations to an absolute BL minimum. J K PIIA0095E Nissan Genuine Service Parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory. Revision: March 2005 BL-133 2005 Altima L M BODY REPAIR ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas of the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long shelf life. LIIA0005E Revision: March 2005 BL-134 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR UNDERCOATING The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chipping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating which is rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable. A Precautions in undercoating B 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three way catalyst which are subjected to heat). Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts which become hot. Do not undercoat rotating parts. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating. C D E F G H BL J K L LIIA0129E M Revision: March 2005 BL-135 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Body Sealing EIS003KB DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant which has been applied to these areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant. WIIA0402E Revision: March 2005 BL-136 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0406E Revision: March 2005 BL-137 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR WIIA0130E Revision: March 2005 BL-138 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Body Construction EIS003KC A BODY CONSTRUCTION B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0131E Revision: March 2005 BL-139 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Body Alignment EIS003KD BODY CENTER MARKS A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications. LIIA1365E Revision: March 2005 BL-140 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS A mark has been placed on each body panel to indicate the parts matching positions. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle structure (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0132E Revision: March 2005 BL-141 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR DESCRIPTION ● ● ● ● ● ● All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual. When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself to make sure there is no free play. When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending. Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes. An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side is symmetrically the same value. The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of "X", "Y" and "Z". PIIA0104E Revision: March 2005 BL-142 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR ENGINE COMPARTMENT MEASUREMENT A B C D E F G H BL J WIIA0705E K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-143 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR MEASUREMENT POINTS WIIA0403E Revision: March 2005 BL-144 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR UNDERBODY MEASUREMENT A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA0087E Revision: March 2005 BL-145 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR MEASUREMENT POINTS WIIA0404E Revision: March 2005 BL-146 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MEASUREMENT A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1369E Revision: March 2005 BL-147 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR MEASUREMENT POINTS WIIA0405E Revision: March 2005 BL-148 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR REAR BODY MEASUREMENT A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1371E Revision: March 2005 BL-149 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR MEASUREMENT POINTS LIIA0066E Revision: March 2005 BL-150 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Handling Precautions for Plastics EIS003KE A HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS Abbreviation PE Material name Polyethylene Heat resisting temperature °C (°F) Resistance to gasoline and solvents 60 (140) Gasoline and most solvents are harmless if applied for a very short time (wipe up quickly). Flammable Other cautions B C PVC Polyvinyl Chloride 80 (176) Same as above. Poison gas is emitted when burned. EPM/ EPDM Ethylene Propylene (Diene) rubber 80 (176) Same as above. Flammable TPO/ TPR Thermoplastic Olefine/ Thermoplastic Rubber 80 (176) Same as above. Flammable D E PP Polypropylene 90 (194) Same as above. Flammable, avoid battery acid. UP Polyester thermoset 90 (194) Same as above. Flammable PS Polystyrene 80 (176) Avoid solvents. Flammable ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene resin 80 (176) Avoid gasoline and solvents. AES Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene 80 (176) Same as above. PMMA Polymethyl Methacrylate 85 (185) Same as above. AAS Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene 85 (185) Same as above. AS Acrylonitrile Styrene 85 (185) Same as above. EVA Polyvinyl Ethyl Acetate 90 (194) Same as above. ASA Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate 100 (222) Same as above. PPO/ PPE Polyphenylene Oxide/ Polyphenylene Ether 110 (230) Same as above. PC Polycarbonate 120 (248) Same as above. PAR Polyacrylate 180 (356) Same as above. LLDPE Lenear Low Density PE 45 (100) Gasoline and most solvents are harmless. PUR Polyurethane 90 (194) Same as above. TPU Thermoplastic Urethane 110 (230) Same as above. PPC Polypropylene Composite 115 (239) Same as above. Flammable POM Polyacetal 120 (248) Same as above. Avoid battery acid. PBT+P C Polybutylene Terephthalate+Polycarbonate 120 (248) Same as above. Flammable PA Polyamide (Nylon) 140 (284) Same as above. Avoid immersing in water. PBT Polybutylene Terephthalate 140 (284) Same as above. FRP Fiber Reinforced Plastics 170 (338) Same as above. PET Polyethylene Terephthalate 180 (356) Same as above. PEI Polyetherimide 200 (392) Same as above. F G H BL Flammable J K Flammable L Avoid battery acid. 1. When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics (influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them. 2. Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials, characteristics. Revision: March 2005 BL-151 2005 Altima M BODY REPAIR LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS LIIA0088E Revision: March 2005 BL-152 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL WIIA0543E J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-153 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel EIS003KF High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight. Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below: HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES Tensile strength 373 N/mm2 (38kg/mm2 ,54klb/sq in) Nissan/Infiniti designation SP130 Major applicable parts ● Front side member assembly ● Upper hoodledge ● Upper pillar hinge brace assembly ● Rear side member extension ● Other reinforcements ● Front bumper reinforcement ● Rear bumper reinforcement 2 785-981 N/mm (80-100kg/mm2 114-142klb/sq in) SP150 SP130 is the most commonly used HSS. SP150 HSS is used only on parts that require much more strength. Read the following precautions when repairing HSS: 1. Additional points to consider ● The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heating is not recommended since it may weaken the component. When heating is unavoidable, do not heat HSS parts above 550°C (1,022°F). Verify heating temperature with a thermometer. (Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropriate.) PIIA0115E ● When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong, pulling may cause deformation in adjacent portions of the body. In this case, increase the number of measuring points, and carefully pull the HSS panel. PIIA0116E ● When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible. Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas due to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum margin of 50 mm (1.97in). PIIA0117E Revision: March 2005 BL-154 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR ● When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possible in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to heat. If spot welding is impossible, use M.I.G. welding. Do not use gas (torch) welding because it is inferior in welding strength. A B C PIIA0144E D ● ● 2. The spot weld on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary steel panel. Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a low speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bit durability and facilitate the operation. SP150 HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/ mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2 , 114 to 142 klb/sq in), used as reinforcement in the door guard beams, is too strong to repair. When these HSS parts are damaged, the outer panels also sustain substantial damage; therefore, the assembly parts must be replaced. E F G PIIA0145E H Precautions in spot welding HSS This work should be performed under standard working conditions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS: ● The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according to the metal thickness. BL J PIIA0146E ● The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no gaps. K L M PIIA0147E Revision: March 2005 BL-155 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR ● Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch. Unit:mm Thickness (t) Minimum pitch (l) 0.6 (0.024) 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 10 (0.39) or over 12 (0.47) or over 18 (0.71) or over 20 (0.79) or over 27 (1.06) or over 31 (1.22) or over PIIA0148E Foam Repair EIS00489 During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators. URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures. FILL PROCEDURES 1. – – – – Fill procedures after installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. Clean area in which foam was removed. Install service part. Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service part. LIIA1081E 2. – – – – Fill procedures before installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. Clean area in which foam was removed. Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side. NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. Install service part. NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times. LIIA1082E Revision: March 2005 BL-156 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Replacement Operations EIS003KG DESCRIPTION A This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section. B Technicians are also encouraged to read Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the original functions and quality of the vehicle can be maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) contains additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Technicians should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repairs. Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures may not apply in some regions or countries. C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: March 2005 BL-157 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR The symbols used in this section for cutting and welding / brazing operations are shown below. PIIA0149E Revision: March 2005 BL-158 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR ● Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is at position A due to the construction of the vehicle. Refer to BL165, "FRONT PILLAR" . A B C PIIA0150E D ● Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer front pillar over 60 mm above inner front pillar cut position. E F G PIIA0151E ● H Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this will permit service part to be accurately cut at joint position. BL J K PIIA0152E ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as follows. Mark cutting lines. A: Cut position of outer pillar B: Cut position of inner pillar Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar. Cut outer pillar along groove of jig. (At position A) Remove jig and cut remaining portions. Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner. L M PIIA0153E Revision: March 2005 BL-159 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR HOODLEDGE ● Work after radiator core support has been removed. LIIA1529E Revision: March 2005 BL-160 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR HOODLEDGE (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT) ● A Work after radiator core support has been removed. B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1530E Revision: March 2005 BL-161 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR FRONT SIDE MEMBER ● Work after hoodledge and radiator core support have been removed. LIIA0136E Revision: March 2005 BL-162 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1372E Revision: March 2005 BL-163 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT) ● Work after radiator core support has been removed. LIIA1373E Revision: March 2005 BL-164 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR FRONT PILLAR ● A Work after rear hoodledge reinforcement has been removed. B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1374E Revision: March 2005 BL-165 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR LIIA1375E Revision: March 2005 BL-166 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1376E Revision: March 2005 BL-167 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR CENTER PILLAR LIIA1377E Revision: March 2005 BL-168 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR OUTER SILL A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA0142E Revision: March 2005 BL-169 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR REAR FENDER LIIA1378E Revision: March 2005 BL-170 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR REAR PANEL A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA0144E Revision: March 2005 BL-171 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR REAR FLOOR REAR ● Work after rear panel has been removed. LIIA0145E Revision: March 2005 BL-172 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION ● A Work after rear panel and rear end crossmember have been removed. B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA0146E Revision: March 2005 BL-173 2005 Altima BODY REPAIR Revision: March 2005 BL-174 2005 Altima F BRAKES SECTION BR BRAKE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5 BRAKE PEDAL .......................................................... 6 Inspection and Adjustment ....................................... 6 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 REMOVAL ............................................................. 7 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7 BRAKE FLUID ............................................................ 8 Checking Brake Fluid Level ..................................... 8 Changing Brake Fluid ............................................... 8 Bleeding Brake System ............................................ 8 BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE ...................................... 9 Hydraulic Circuit ....................................................... 9 Front Brake Piping and Hose ................................... 9 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSTALLATION ................................................... 10 Rear Brake Piping and Hose .................................. 10 REMOVAL ........................................................... 10 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 Inspection ................................................................11 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 12 On-board Inspection ............................................... 12 LEAK INSPECTION ............................................ 12 Components ........................................................... 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 13 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 13 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 14 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 14 BRAKE BOOSTER ................................................... 15 On-vehicle Service ................................................. 15 OPERATING CHECK .......................................... 15 AIRTIGHT CHECK .............................................. 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 15 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 16 INSTALLATION ................................................... 16 VACUUM LINES ....................................................... 17 Removal and Installation ........................................ 17 Inspection ............................................................... 18 VISUAL INSPECTION ......................................... 18 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION ............................. 18 CLZ25VD CLZ25VE BR-1 G H I J K L FRONT DISC BRAKE ............................................... 19 Component ............................................................. 19 On-vehicle Service ................................................. 19 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 19 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE PAD ..................................................................... 20 Removal and Installation ........................................ 20 REMOVAL ........................................................... 20 INSTALLATION ................................................... 21 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 21 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 21 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 22 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 23 Brake Burnishing Procedure ................................... 24 FRONT DISC BRAKE ............................................... 25 Component ............................................................. 25 On-board Inspection ............................................... 26 Revision: March 2005 BR 2005 Altima M PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 26 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ................... 26 REMOVAL ........................................................... 26 INSTALLATION .................................................... 26 Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor ............................................................... 28 REMOVAL ........................................................... 28 INSTALLATION .................................................... 28 Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly ... 29 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 29 CALIPER INSPECTION ...................................... 29 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 30 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 30 Brake Burnishing .................................................... 31 REAR DISC BRAKE ................................................. 32 Component ............................................................. 32 On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 33 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 33 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE Revision: March 2005 PAD ......................................................................33 Removal and Installation .........................................34 REMOVAL ............................................................34 INSTALLATION ....................................................34 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................35 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................35 CALIPER INSPECTION .......................................36 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................36 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ...............................37 Brake Burnishing .....................................................38 DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE .............................39 Inspection ................................................................39 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......40 General Specifications ............................................40 Disc Brake ...............................................................40 Brake Pedal ............................................................41 Control Valve ...........................................................41 Brake Booster .........................................................41 BR-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EFS0045J The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. C WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or BR harness connectors. Precautions for Brake System EFS0045K Always use new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder, disc brake caliper and wheel cylinder, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. SBR686C ● Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. ● Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis BR-3 H I J K L EFS0045L When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" . ● Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . ● For trouble diagnoses of models with ABS, refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . ● For trouble diagnoses of models with TCS even if the diagnostic items are related to the ABS system, refer to BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . Revision: March 2005 G 2005 Altima M PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EFS004M6 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name — (J-46532) Brake and clutch pedal height measurement tool Measuring brake pedal height LFIA0227E Commercial Service Tools EFS0045M Tool name Description 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing each brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) S-NT360 Brake fluid pressure gauge Measuring brake fluid pressure NT151 Power tool Loosening nuts, bolts, and screws PBIC0190E PBIC0191E Revision: March 2005 BR-4 2005 Altima Symptom Revision: March 2005 × × × Shake × Shimmy, Shudder × × BR-5 × × × × WHEEL HUB SUSPENSION TIRES ROAD WHEEL STEERING × DRIVE SHAFT Rotor thickness variation Rotor rust Rotor deflection Rotor deformation Rotor runout Rotor damage Rotor imbalance Shims damaged Noise Pads - uneven wear Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-19, BR-38 BR-24' BR-24 BR-22, BR-37 BR-22, BR-37 BR-22, BR-37 BR-19, BR-32 BR-22, BR-37 BR-19, BR-32 BR-19, BR-33 BR-19, BR-32 Reference page Pads - damaged NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 EFS0045N A Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. B C × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2005 Altima D E BR G H I J K L M BRAKE PEDAL BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment PFP:46501 EFS0045O Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from dash reinforcement panel using Tool. Adjust if necessary. Tool : — (J-46532) Free height "H" Refer to BR-41, "Brake Pedal" . Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch and ASCD switch "C1, C2" 0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.0291 - 0.0772 in) Pedal height (with engine running, brake pedal force 490 N {50 kgf, 110 lbf}) "H" M/T vehicle : More than 84 mm (3.31 in) A/T vehicle : More than 90.3 mm (3.55 in) Pedal play 3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in) WFIA0022E 1. 2. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch (if equipped) by turning 45° counterclockwise. Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut. CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. Lock nut 3. 4. 5. 6. : 16 - 21 N·m (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb) SBR229E With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch (if equipped) in until threaded ends contact rubber stops. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch (if equipped) contacting the rubber stops, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C1 , C2 ) between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification. Check the pedal play. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Revision: March 2005 BR-6 2005 Altima BRAKE PEDAL Removal and Installation EFS0045P A B C D E BR WFIA0308E 1. Clevis Pin 2. Stop lamp switch 4. Snap pin 5. Brake pedal assembly 3. G ASCD cancel switch REMOVAL H WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube. 1. Remove the instrument lower cover on driver side. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . 2. Remove the stop lamp switch from the pedal assembly. 3. Remove ASCD switch (if equipped) from pedal assembly. 4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster. 5. Remove mounting nuts from the pedal assembly and carefully remove the brake pedal from the brake booster. J K INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check brake pedal for following items. ● Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper ● Clevis pin deformation ● Crack of any welded portion ● Brake pedal bend L M SBR997 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment" . Revision: March 2005 I BR-7 2005 Altima BRAKE FLUID BRAKE FLUID Checking Brake Fluid Level ● ● ● ● PFP:KN100 EFS0045Q Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between Max and Min lines on reservoir tank. Visually check around the reservoir tank for leaks. If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system for leaks. LFIA0096E Changing Brake Fluid EFS0045R CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder. 2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector. 4. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 5. Loosen the air bleeder, depress the pedal slowly to the full stroke and then release it. Repeat the procedure every 2 or 3 seconds until the new brake fluid comes out, then close the air bleeder while depressing the pedal. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . Bleeding Brake System EFS0045S CAUTION: ● Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation. ● Fill reservoir with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system. ● Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid. ● Do not loosen the connecting portion of the actuator during air bleeding. 1. For models with ABS, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connectors or battery ground cable. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification. Air bleeder valve 8. 9. : 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb) Repeat steps 2. through 7. until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. Bleed the brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order: Right rear brake → Left front brake → Left rear brake → Right front brake Revision: March 2005 BR-8 SBR419C 2005 Altima BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE Hydraulic Circuit PFP:46210 A EFS0045T B C D E BR G H I J WFIA0120E K Front Brake Piping and Hose EFS0045U REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. ● Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. SBR419C Revision: March 2005 BR-9 2005 Altima L M BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE 3. 4. 5. Remove the flare nut connecting the brake tube and hose, then withdraw the lock spring. Remove the connecting bolt and disconnect the brake hose from the cylinder body. Remove lock spring from the mounting portion of the brake tube and the mounting portion of the strut. WFIA0087E INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Attach the brake hose to the cylinder body, then temporarily tighten the connecting bolt by hand. CAUTION: ● Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body. ● The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the fitting is disconnected. 2. Attach the brake hose to the strut, then secure it with a lock spring. 3. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand, then secure it with a lock spring. 4. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts. Flare nut Connecting bolt 5. 6. : 14.8 - 17.6 N·m (1.5 - 1.7 kg-m, 11 - 12 ft-lb) : 16.7 - 19.6 N·m (1.7 - 1.9 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb) Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. Bleed air. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . SBR686C Rear Brake Piping and Hose EFS0045V REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. ● Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. SBR419C Revision: March 2005 BR-10 2005 Altima BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE 3. 4. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring. Remove connecting bolt and disconnect brake hose from cylinder body. A B C WFIA0088E D INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . E ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand. CAUTION: BR ● Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body. ● The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the fitting is disconnected. G 2. Attach the brake hose with a lock spring, then tighten the connecting bolt to the specified torque. Tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench to the specified torque. H Flare nut : 14.8 - 17.6 N·m (1.5 - 1.7 kg-m, 11 - 12 ft-lb) Connecting bolt : 16.7 - 19.6 N·m (1.7 - 1.9 kg-m, I 13 - 14 ft-lb) 3. 4. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . Inspection J SBR686C EFS0045W CAUTION: If leakage occurs around hose and tube connections, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for leaks, cracks, distortion, deformation, without interfering with other parts or loosening connecting parts, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. 2. Apply a stepping force of 784 N (80 kgf, 176 lbf) to the brake pedal with the engine running and keep it for about 5 seconds, then check each part for leaks. L M SBR389C Revision: March 2005 BR-11 K 2005 Altima BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER On-board Inspection PFP:46010 EFS0045X LEAK INSPECTION Check for leaking in master cylinder installation surface, the reservoir tank installation surface, the reservoir hose connections, and the brake tube connections. Components EFS0045Y WFIA0037E 1. Reservoir cap 2. O-ring 3. Reservoir tank 4. Seal 5. Cylinder body 6. O-ring 7. Piston stopper 8. Secondary piston assembly 9. Primary piston assembly 10. Stopper cap Removal and Installation EFS0045Z CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Revision: March 2005 BR-12 2005 Altima BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove air cleaner and inlet duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-120, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE). Remove clutch fluid reservoir without disconnecting hose and position aside. Refer to CL-8, "CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER" . Connect a vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal to empty fluid from the master cylinder. Remove the harness connector of the brake fluid master cylinder level sensor. Remove brake pipe flare nuts. Disconnect fluid level sensor. Remove master cylinder nuts and master cylinder. Remove reservoir tank and seals, if necessary. INSTALLATION A B C D E CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Plug all ports on master cylinder with fingers to prevent air suction while releasing brake pedal. ● Have driver depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air comes out of master cylinder. ● Install the brake lines to master cylinder. ● Tighten flare nuts to specification. Refer to BR-9, "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE" . ● Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . BR G H I WFIA0026E J Disassembly and Assembly EFS00460 DISASSEMBLY 1. Bend claws of stopper cap outward. K L M SBR938A 2. 3. 4. Remove piston stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder. Remove piston assemblies. If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly, gradually apply compressed air through fluid outlet. Remove the reservoir tank. SBR231C Revision: March 2005 BR-13 2005 Altima BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Master Cylinder Inner Wall ● Check the inner wall of the cylinder for damage, abrasion, corrosion and pin holes. If defective, replace the master cylinder. Piston ● Check for deformation of or scratches on piston cups. ASSEMBLY 1. Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston assembly. ● Pay attention to alignment of secondary piston slit with piston stopper mounting hole of cylinder body. SBR354C 2. Install stopper cap. Before installing stopper cap, ensure that claws are bent inward. SBR940A 3. 4. 5. Push reservoir tank seals into cylinder body. Push reservoir tank into cylinder body. Install piston stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder. SBR435B Revision: March 2005 BR-14 2005 Altima BRAKE BOOSTER BRAKE BOOSTER On-vehicle Service PFP:47200 A EFS00461 OPERATING CHECK 1. 2. Stop engine and depress brake pedal several times. Check that pedal stroke does not change. Depress brake pedal, then start engine. If pedal goes down slightly, operation is normal. CAUTION: Depress brake pedal in 5 second intervals. B C D BRA0037D E AIRTIGHT CHECK ● ● Start engine, and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress brake pedal several times slowly. The pedal should go further down the first time, and then it should gradually rise thereafter. Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. CAUTION: Depress brake pedal in 5 second intervals. BR G H SBR365AA I Removal and Installation EFS00462 J K L M WFIA0248E Revision: March 2005 BR-15 2005 Altima BRAKE BOOSTER 1. Master cylinder 2. Reservoir tank 3. Brake booster 4. Gasket 5. Nut 6. Lock nut REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes during removal of booster. ● Replace clevis pin if damaged. ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Take care not to damage brake booster mounting bolt thread when installing. Due to the acute angle of installation, the threads can be damaged with the dash panel. 1. Remove air cleaner and inlet duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). 2. Remove clutch fluid reservoir without disconnecting hose and position aside. Refer to CL-9, "CLUTCH RESERVOIR TANK" . 3. Remove the brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-12, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Remove vacuum hose from the brake booster. Refer to BR-17, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . 6. Remove the brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 7. Remove the nuts on the brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 8. Remove brake booster assembly from the engine compartment side. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Check 1. 2. 3. Apply vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.69 inHg) to brake booster with a hand vacuum pump. Add preload of 19.6 N (2 kg, 4.4 lb) to output rod. Check output rod length. Specified length : 10.275 - 10.525 mm (0.4045 - 0.4144 in) SBR208E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Adjust the length of the input rod by loosening the lock nut so that the dimensions shown match the standard value. Standard value ● ● ● : 125 mm (4.92 in) Tighten the lock nut temporarily and when installing the booster assembly in the vehicle. Adjust the height and play of the brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment" . Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . SBR237EA Revision: March 2005 BR-16 2005 Altima VACUUM LINES VACUUM LINES Removal and Installation PFP:41920 A EFS00463 B C D E BR G H I WFIA0409E 1. Clamp 2. Check valve inclusion position stamp 3. 4. Vacuum piping ⇐ Brake booster J Vacuum hose CAUTION: ● Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct orientation. Refer to the stamp or label to confirm correct installation. The brake booster will not operate normally if the hose is installed in the wrong direction. ● Insert the vacuum hose at least 24 mm (0.94 in). ● Never use lubricating oil during assembly. K L M SBR225B Revision: March 2005 BR-17 2005 Altima VACUUM LINES Inspection EFS00464 VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deteriorate. CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Use a hand-held vacuum pump to check. When connected to booster side: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of (–66.7 kPa) [(–500 mmHg), (–19.69 inHg)] When connected to engine side: No vacuum will be applied SBR844B Revision: March 2005 BR-18 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VD] FRONT DISC BRAKE Component PFP:41000 A EFS00465 B C D E BR G WFIA0318E 1. Main pin 2. Pin boot 3. Torque member fixing bolt 4. Torque member 5. Shim cover 6. Inner shim 7. Inner pad 8. Pad retainer 9. Outer pad 10. Outer shim 11. Connecting bolt 12. Copper washer 13. Main pin bolt 14. Bleed valve 15. Cylinder body 16. Piston seal 17. Piston 18. Piston boot H I WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ● When cylinder body is open, do not depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out. ● It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ● Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on rotor. Always replace shims when replacing pads. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . On-vehicle Service EFS00466 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Remove a wheel with the vehicle lifted up, and then check the thickness of the pad from the inspection hole of the cylinder body. If necessary, check it with a micrometer. Standard pad thickness Pad wear limit : 11 mm (0.43 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) BRA0010D Revision: March 2005 BR-19 2005 Altima J K L M FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VD] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE PAD Removal ● ● 1. 2. If shims are rusted or show peeling of the rubber coat, replace them with new shims. Whenever the brake pads are replaced, the inner shim, the outer shim and the shim cover have to be replaced as a set. Remove master cylinder reservoir cap. Remove pin bolt, using power tool. SBR976B 3. Suspend the cylinder body with wire. Then remove pads with retainers, inner and outer shims and pad return springs. SBR932C Installation 1. Apply Molykote AS880N grease between pad plate and shim, shim and shim cover, and shim cover and piston. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . 2. Attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad and attach the outer shim to the outer pad. 3. Apply grease to the contact surface of pad retainer with the pads, then attach the pad retainer and pads to the torque member. Make sure the upper pad retainer end is inserted through the loop on the audible wear indicator as shown. 4. Install the cylinder body to the torque member. 5. Insert a main pin bolt (on the lower side) and tighten it to specification. Refer to BR-19, "Component" . 6. Inspect fluid level, then install master cylinder reservoir cap. 7. Check the brakes for drag. CAUTION: LFIA0226E Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . Removal and Installation EFS00467 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove master cylinder reservoir cap. Connect the vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder. Depress the brake pedal and drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder. Revision: March 2005 BR-20 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VD] 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove connecting bolt and torque member fixing bolts, using power tool. Remove the brake caliper. Remove brake rotor. Separate brake caliper from torque member as required. A B C WFIA0243E D INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . E ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install brake rotor. 2. Install the brake caliper to torque member and tighten main pin bolt to specification, if required. Refer to BR BR-19, "Component" . CAUTION: When installing the cylinder body in the vehicle, wipe oil from the seating surface of the knuckle G spindle washer and the mounting surface of the cylinder body. 3. Install brake cylinder body to steering knuckle and tighten torque member bolts. 4. Install brake hose to caliper and tighten connecting bolt. H CAUTION: ● The copper washer of the connecting bolt has to be replaced every time the fitting is disconnected. I ● Correctly attach the brake hose to the projecting portion of the cylinder body. 5. Inspect brake fluid level, then install master cylinder reservoir J cap. 6. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . WFIA0244E K CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . L Disassembly and Assembly EFS00468 DISASSEMBLY 1. Push out piston with piston boot using compressed air. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of piston. M SBR772 Revision: March 2005 BR-21 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VD] 2. Remove piston seal with a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or score cylinder wall. WFIA0029E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Caliper CYLINDER BODY CAUTION: Use brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oil. ● Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. ● Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. TORQUE MEMBER Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if necessary. PISTON CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. SLIDE PIN, PIN BOLT AND PIN BOOT Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if any of the conditions are observed. Rotor VISUAL INSPECTION Check rotor for roughness, cracks or chips. RUNOUT 1. Secure rotor to wheel hub with at least two nuts (M12 x 1.25). 2. Check runout using a dial indicator. Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring runout. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" . 3. Change relative positions of rotor and wheel hub so that runout is minimized. Maximum runout 4. : 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) If the runout is still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe (“MAD, DL-8700”, “AMMCO 700 and 705” or equivalent). Revision: March 2005 BR-22 SBR219C 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VD] THICKNESS Check thickness using a micrometer. Thickness variation (At least 8 positions) A : Maximum 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) B If thickness variation exceeds the specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. Rotor thickness repair limit : 22.0 mm (0.866 in) C ASSEMBLY 1. Apply rubber grease to new piston seal and insert seal into groove on cylinder body. D E BR SBR574 G H I J WFIA0030E 2. K With piston boot fitted to piston, insert piston boot into groove on cylinder body and install piston. L M WFIA0031E 3. Make sure piston boot is properly installed. WFIA0032E Revision: March 2005 BR-23 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VD] Brake Burnishing Procedure EFS00469 Burnish the brake contact surfaces according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal/foot pressure so that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. Revision: March 2005 BR-24 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VE] FRONT DISC BRAKE Component PFP:41000 A EFS004M9 B C D E BR G H I J WFIA0335E 1. Union bolt 2. Copper washer 3. Brake hose 4. Sliding pin bolt 5. Sliding pin 6. Cap 7. Air bleeder 8. Cylinder body 9. Sliding pin boot 10. Piston seal 11. Piston 12. Piston boot 13. Torque member 14. Inner shim cover 15. Inner shim 16. Inner pad 17. Pad retainer 18. Pad retainer 19. Outer pad 20. Outer shim 21. Outer shim cover 22. Torque member bolts L M CAUTION: ● Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. ● While the brake pad and cylinder body are separated, the piston may suddenly jump out, so do not depress the brake pedal. ● It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of the caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is not under tension. ● Do not damage piston boot. ● If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. ● Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads. ● Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid. Revision: March 2005 BR-25 K 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VE] ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "Brake Burnishing" . On-board Inspection EFS004MA PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard pad thickness Pad wear limit : 9.5 mm (0.374 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) BRA0010D Removal and Installation of Brake Pad EFS004MB REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. Hang the cylinder body with a wire then remove the pads, pad retainers, and shims from the torque member. CAUTION: When removing the pad retainer from the torque member, lift the pad retainer in the direction shown by the arrow (shown in the figure) so as not to deform it. SBR556E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Apply Molykote AS880N grease between pad plate and shim, shim and shim cover, and shim cover and piston. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. CAUTION: ● When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown in the figure. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach the cylinder body to the torque member. NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston. CAUTION: ● By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the PFIA0273E master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of the reservoir tank. Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to the specified torque. Sliding pin bolt 5. 6. : 22 – 31 N·m (2.3 – 3.1 kg-m, 17 – 22 ft-lb) Check brake for drag. Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . Revision: March 2005 BR-26 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VE] CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "Brake Burnishing" . A B C D E BR G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BR-27 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VE] Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor EFS004MC REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Changing Brake Fluid" . Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove caliper assembly. Remove disc rotor. ● Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. ● Align marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor. 2. Install caliper assembly to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. Torque member bolts : 137 - 176 N·m (14 - 17 kg-m, 101 - 129 ft - lb) CAUTION: When attaching the caliper assembly to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle washers and caliper assembly attachment surfaces. PFIA0411E 3. Install brake hose to the caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Union bolt : 16.7 - 19.6 N·m (1.7 - 1.9 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts. ● Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the caliper assembly attachment part. ● PFIA0404E 4. 5. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "Brake Burnishing" . Revision: March 2005 BR-28 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VE] Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly EFS004MD A DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. CAUTION: When removing the pad retainer from the torque member, lift it in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure so that it does not deform. B C D SBR556E 2. 3. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in the piston. E BR G H MAA0272D 4. I Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a srewdriver or suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. J K PFIA0269E CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body M CAUTION: ● Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. ● Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there are any non-standard conditions. ● Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: ● Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. ● Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Revision: March 2005 L BR-29 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VE] Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use Nissan Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. SFIA0156E 2. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. SFIA0157E 3. 4. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot pistonside lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. PFIA0272E 5. 6. Attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad and the outer shim to the outer pad. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, fix disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions. Revision: March 2005 BR-30 2005 Altima FRONT DISC BRAKE [CLZ25VE] 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. A Standard value (measured at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge) Runout limit : 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) (with it attached to the vehicle) or less 3. CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle endplay is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" . If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. B C BRA0013D D Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness does not meet specification, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness Minimum thickness Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) E : 28 mm (1.10 in) : 26 mm (1.02 in) : 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or less BR G SBR020B Brake Burnishing H EFS004ME Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BR-31 2005 Altima REAR DISC BRAKE REAR DISC BRAKE Component PFP:44000 EFS0046A WFIA0322E 1. Connecting bolt 2. Brake hose 3. 4. Cap 5. Air bleeder 6. Copper washer Sliding pin 7. Cylinder body 8. Piston seal 9. Piston 10. Piston boot 11. Retaining ring 12. Inner shim cover 13. Inner shim 14. Inner pad 15. Pad retainer 16. Outer pad 17. Outer shim 18. Outer shim cover 19. Sliding pin boot 20. Torque member bolts 21. Torque member WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. CAUTION: ● While removing cylinder body, never depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out. ● It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is not under tension. ● Do not damage piston boot. ● Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads. ● Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-38, "Brake Burnishing" . Revision: March 2005 BR-32 2005 Altima REAR DISC BRAKE On-Vehicle Service EFS0046B A PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard pad thickness Pad wear limit B : 8.0 mm (0.315 in) : 1.5 mm (0.059 in) C D BRA0010D REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE PAD Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. E Remove master cylinder reservoir cap. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. Remove bottom sliding pin bolt. Hang cylinder body with a wire, and remove pads, pad retainers, shims from torque member. BR G H I J K L M SBR042C Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease between pad plate and shim, shim and shim cover, and shim cover and piston. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach the cylinder body to the torque member. NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston. CAUTION: By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of the reservoir tank. Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to the specified torque. Revision: March 2005 BR-33 2005 Altima REAR DISC BRAKE Sliding pin bolt 6. 7. 8. : 38 – 48 N·m (3.9 – 4.8 kg-m, 25 – 35 ft-lb) Inspect brake fluid level, then install master cylinder reservoir cap. Check brake for drag. Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-38, "Brake Burnishing" . Removal and Installation EFS0046C REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove master cylinder reservoir cap. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . Remove connecting bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, and remove cylinder body. WFIA0246E 5. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: ● Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged. ● Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug. ● Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the star wheel on the adjuster assembly in the direction shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes. ● Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor. ● Remove wheel nut and rotor. WFIA0018E INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. ● Align marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. Torque member bolts 3. : 71.6 – 97.0 N·m (7.3 – 9.8 kg-m, 53 – 71 ft-lb) CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten connecting bolt to the specified torque. Connecting bolt : 16.7 – 19.6 N·m (1.7 – 1.9 kg-m, 13 – 14 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for connecting bolts. ● Revision: March 2005 BR-34 2005 Altima REAR DISC BRAKE Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Add new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . 5. Install master cylinder reservoir cap. 6. Adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" . 7. Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-38, "Brake Burnishing" . ● Disassembly and Assembly 2. 3. B C EFS0046D DISASSEMBLY 1. A Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member and cylinder. Remove sliding pin boot from torque member. D E Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. BR G H SBR028A 4. I Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from connecting bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. WARNING: Do not place your finger in front of piston. J K BRD0041D 5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. M PFIA0269E Revision: March 2005 BR-35 L 2005 Altima REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: ● Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. ● Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace cylinder body. ● Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use Nissan Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. SFIA0156E 2. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. SFIA0157E Revision: March 2005 BR-36 2005 Altima REAR DISC BRAKE 3. Apply a brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston boot. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. A B C PFIA0272E D 4. Fix piston boot with retaining ring. CAUTION: ● Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove. ● Do not reuse the retaining ring. E BR G SFIA0158E 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Attach the sliding pin bolt and sliding pin boot to the torque member. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the rear of the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown in the figure. After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the torque member. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. H I J K L PFIA0273E DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection M Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. 2. Using wheel nuts, fix disc rotor to the wheel hub in two or more positions. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. Measurement position Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) : At a point 10 mm (0.39 in) from outer edge of the disc. : 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) or less CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle endplay is 0 mm (0 in). BRA0013D Revision: March 2005 BR-37 2005 Altima REAR DISC BRAKE 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is not within specification, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness Minimum thickness Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) : 9.0 mm (0.350 in) : 8.0 mm (0.310 in) : 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or less SBR020B Brake Burnishing EFS0046E Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. Revision: March 2005 BR-38 2005 Altima DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE Inspection PFP:46400 A EFS0046F CAUTION: ● Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder. ● Use new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on paint areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Connect Tool to air bleeders of front and rear brakes on either LH and RH side. B C D E BR SBR822BA 2. 3. Applied pressure (Front brake) Output pressure (Rear brake) 4. G Bleed air from the Tool. Check fluid pressure by depressing brake pedal. : 7,355 kPa (75 kg/cm2, 1,067 psi) H : 5,100 - 5,492 kPa (52 - 56 kg/cm2, 739 - 796 psi) If output pressure is out of specification, replace dual proportioning valve. Bleed air after disconnecting the Tool. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . I SBR823BA J K L M Revision: March 2005 BR-39 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 EFS0046G Unit: mm (in) Brake model CLZ25VD disc brake CLZ25VE disc brake 57.2 (2.25) 57.2 (2.25) 125.6 × 46 × 11 (4.94 × 1.81 × 0.43) 111.0 × 62.5 × 9.5 (4.37 × 2.46 × 0.37) 296 × 24 (11.7 × 0.94) 320 × 28 (12.6 × 1.10) Cylinder bore diameter Front brake Pad Length × width × thickness Rotor outer diameter × thickness Brake model AD9V disc brake Cylinder bore diameter Rear brake 34.9 (1.3740) Pad Length × width × thickness 89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.31) Rotor outer diameter × thickness 292 × 9 (11.5 × 0.35) Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter Control valve Screw in type 30 × 0.4 (1.18 × 0.02) Booster model M215T Brake booster Diaphragm diameter 23.81 (15/16) Primary 230 (9.06) Secondary 205 (8.07) Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Recommended brake fluid Disc Brake EFS004M7 Unit: mm (in) Brake model Pad wear limit Rotor repair limit CLZ25VD CLZ25VE AD9V 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) 1.5 (0.059) Maximum runout 0.07 (0.0028) 0.07 (0.0028) 0.07 (0.0028) Minimum thickness 22.0 (0.866) 26.0 (1.02) 8.0 (0.31) Minimum thickness Maximum thickness variation (At least 8 positions) Revision: March 2005 0.015 (0.0006) BR-40 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Brake Pedal EFS0046I Unit: mm (in) A B C D E BR G H WFIA0022E Free height “H”* M/T 164.1 - 174.1 (6.46 - 6.85) A/T 173.1 - 183.1 (6.81 - 7.21) Clearance “C1 or C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD switch I 0.74 - 1.96 (0.0291 - 0.0772) *: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad J Control Valve EFS0046J Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Applied pressure (front) 7,355 (75, 1,067) Output pressure (rear) 5,100 - 5,492 (52 - 56, 739 - 796) Brake Booster K EFS0046K L Unit: mm (in) Output rod length 10.275 - 10.525 (0.4045 - 0.4144) Clevis length Revision: March 2005 M 130 (5.12) BR-41 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: March 2005 BR-42 2005 Altima F BRAKES SECTION BRC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS ABS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................... 5 Description ............................................................... 5 PURPOSE ............................................................. 5 OPERATION ......................................................... 5 Fail Safe ................................................................... 5 Hydraulic Circuit ....................................................... 5 System Components ................................................ 6 Control Unit .............................................................. 6 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) .......... 6 ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION ............................. 6 Wheel Sensors ......................................................... 7 CAN Communication System Description ................ 7 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 8 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ....................................................... 8 INTRODUCTION ................................................... 8 WORK FLOW ........................................................ 9 CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 10 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ................... 10 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location....11 Schematic .............................................................. 12 Wiring Diagram — ABS — ..................................... 13 CONSULT–II Function (ABS) ................................. 16 ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE ................................................................. 16 SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 16 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE .............. 18 DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE ......................... 19 DATA MONITOR MODE ..................................... 20 ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ............................. 20 Revision: March 2005 ACTIVE TEST MODE ......................................... 21 Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II) ................... 21 SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 22 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) .................................. 22 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) ................. 23 Preliminary Check .................................................. 23 Ground Circuit Check ............................................. 25 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND ....................................... 25 Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II) ..... 25 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 25 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ........................................................................ 27 CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) (With 5-speed A/T) ....... 27 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 27 Wheel Sensor or Rotor ........................................... 27 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 27 ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay ...................................................................... 30 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 30 Motor Relay or Motor .............................................. 33 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 33 Abnormal Battery Voltage ....................................... 34 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 34 Controller Failure .................................................... 36 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 36 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 37 1. ABS Works Frequently ....................................... 37 2. Unexpected Pedal Action ................................... 37 3. Long Stopping Distance ...................................... 38 4. ABS Does Not Work ........................................... 38 5. Pedal Vibration and Noise .................................. 39 6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .................................. 40 7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 41 BRC-1 2005 Altima BRC G H I J K L M WHEEL SENSORS ................................................... 42 Removal and Installation ........................................ 42 SENSOR ROTOR ...................................................... 43 Removal and Installation ........................................ 43 REMOVAL ........................................................... 43 INSTALLATION .................................................... 43 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)... 44 Removal and Installation ........................................ 44 REMOVAL ........................................................... 44 INSTALLATION .................................................... 44 TCS/ABS PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 45 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 45 Precautions for Brake System ................................ 45 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 45 PREPARATION ......................................................... 46 Special Service Tool ............................................... 46 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 46 GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................... 47 Description .............................................................. 47 PURPOSE ........................................................... 47 ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) OPERATION .................................................................... 47 TCS (TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM) OPERATION .................................................................. 47 Fail Safe ................................................................. 47 Hydraulic Circuit ..................................................... 48 System Components .............................................. 48 Control Unit ............................................................. 49 ABS FUNCTION .................................................. 49 TCS FUNCTION .................................................. 49 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit ............................... 49 ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION ........................... 49 Wheel Sensors ....................................................... 50 CAN Communication System Description .............. 50 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 51 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 51 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 51 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 52 CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 53 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET .................... 53 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 54 Schematic ............................................................... 55 Wiring Diagram — TCS — ..................................... 56 CONSULT–II Function (ABS) ................................. 59 ECU (ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE ......................................................... 59 SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 59 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE ............... 61 DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE .......................... 62 DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 63 Revision: March 2005 ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ..............................64 ACTIVE TEST MODE ..........................................65 Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II) ...................65 FUNCTION ..........................................................65 SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE .......................66 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) ...................................66 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) .................67 Preliminary Check ...................................................67 Ground Circuit Check ..............................................69 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND ........................................69 ABS WARNING LAMP, TCS OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP ON/OFF TIMING...69 Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II) ......69 Symptom Chart .......................................................70 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ........................................................................71 CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ......................................71 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71 Wheel Sensor or Rotor ...........................................71 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71 ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay .......................................................................74 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................74 Motor Relay or Motor ..............................................77 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................77 Abnormal Battery Voltage .......................................78 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................78 Controller Failure ....................................................80 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................80 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .............81 1. ABS Works Frequently ........................................81 2. Unexpected Pedal Action ....................................81 3. Long Stopping Distance ......................................82 4. ABS Does Not Work ...........................................82 5. Pedal Vibration and Noise ..................................83 6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ...................................84 7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ................................................85 8. During ABS/TCS Control, Vehicle Behavior is Jerky .......................................................................85 WHEEL SENSORS ...................................................87 Removal and Installation .........................................87 SENSOR ROTOR ......................................................88 Removal and Installation .........................................88 REMOVAL ............................................................88 INSTALLATION ....................................................88 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) ...89 Removal and Installation .........................................89 REMOVAL ............................................................89 INSTALLATION ....................................................89 BRC-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [ABS] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EFS0046S The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. BRC ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for Brake System EFS0046T CAUTION: ● Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. ● Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is detected, replace part with a new one. ● Before working, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect electrical connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery terminals. ● Always torque brake lines when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or SBR686C replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EFS0046U When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision: March 2005 BRC-3 2005 Altima H I J K L M PREPARATION [ABS] PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EFS0046V The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-45741) ABS active wheel sensor tester Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensor WFIA0101E Commercial Service Tools EFS0046W Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) S-NT360 Revision: March 2005 BRC-4 2005 Altima GENERAL INFORMATION [ABS] GENERAL INFORMATION Description PFP:00000 A EFS0046X PURPOSE The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) consists of electronic and hydraulic components. It allows for control of braking force so that locking of the wheels can be avoided. The ABS: ● Ensures proper tracking performance through steering wheel operation. ● Enables obstacles to be avoided through steering wheel operation. ● Ensures vehicle stability by preventing flat spins. ● ● C D OPERATION ● B When the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 MPH) this system does not work. The ABS has self-test capabilities. The system turns on the ABS warning lamp for 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON. The system performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches 6 km/h (4 E MPH). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABS performs a self-test. This is a normal part of the selftest feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS warning lamp will come on. BRC During ABS operation, a mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal condition. Fail Safe EFS0046Y If trouble occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp in the combination meter comes on. At the same time, the vehicle stops the ABS control and braking becomes the same as that of a vehicle without ABS. Hydraulic Circuit G EFS0046Z H I J K L M SBR984D 1. Inlet solenoid valve 4. Pump 7. Outlet valve 2. Outlet solenoid valve 5. Motor 8. Bypass check valve 3. Reservoir 6. Inlet valve 9. Damper Revision: March 2005 BRC-5 2005 Altima GENERAL INFORMATION [ABS] System Components EFS00470 WFIA0249E Control Unit EFS00471 The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the solenoid valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp to turn on. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the control unit, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation. WFIA0267E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) EFS00472 The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) contains: ● An electric motor and pump ● Two relays ● Eight solenoid valves, each inlet and outlet for — LH front — RH front — LH rear — RH rear ● ABS control unit These components control the hydraulic circuit that increases, holds or decreases hydraulic pressure to all or individual wheels. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly. ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION Normal brake operation Revision: March 2005 Inlet solenoid valve Outlet solenoid valve OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) BRC-6 Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is directly transmitted to the caliper via the inlet solenoid valve. 2005 Altima GENERAL INFORMATION [ABS] ABS operation Pressure hold ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Hydraulic circuit is shut off to hold the caliper brake fluid pressure. A Pressure decrease ON (Closed) ON (Open) Caliper brake fluid is sent to the reservoir via the outlet solenoid valve. Then it is pushed up to the master cylinder by the pump. B Pressure increase OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is transmitted to caliper. Wheel Sensors EFS00473 The front wheel sensors consist of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a magnet around which a coil is wound. The front wheel sensors are installed on the front of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed increases. C D E BRC LBR333 The rear wheel sensors consist of wheel hubs with a series of internal magnets and a sensor element. The rear wheel sensors are installed on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed increases. G H I J WFIA0033E CAN Communication System Description EFS0062B K Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-7 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00000 EFS00474 INTRODUCTION The ABS has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls operation of the actuator. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS controlled vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information. SEF233G SEF234G Revision: March 2005 BRC-8 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] WORK FLOW A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M LFIA0197E Revision: March 2005 BRC-9 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] CLARIFY CONCERN ● ● ● A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern. Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what conditions. Use the information to reproduce the symptom while driving. It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what type of trouble the customer is having. SBR339B EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET LFIA0198E Revision: March 2005 BRC-10 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EFS00475 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFIA0268E Revision: March 2005 BRC-11 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Schematic EFS00476 WFWA0092E Revision: March 2005 BRC-12 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Wiring Diagram — ABS — EFS00477 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0084E Revision: March 2005 BRC-13 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] WFWA0152E Revision: March 2005 BRC-14 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0093E Revision: March 2005 BRC-15 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] CONSULT–II Function (ABS) EFS00478 CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. ABS diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed. Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results. Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. FUNCTION TEST ECU PART NUMBER Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read. ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE Ignore the ECU part number displayed in the "ECU PART NUMBER" screen. Refer to the parts catalog to order the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. BBIA0002E 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Stop vehicle with engine running and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 BRC-16 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] 6. Touch “ABS”. A B C BCIA0030E D 7. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. ● The screen shows the detected malfunction and how many times the ignition switch has been turned since the malfunction. E BRC G BCIA0031E H 8. 9. Make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures. After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the self-diagnostic results stored in the control unit by touching “ERASE”. 10. Check ABS warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. I J K WFIA0044E L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-17 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE Diagnostic item Diagnosed condition Diagnostic item is detected when... RR RH SENSOR-1 [C1101]*1 Open ● Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is open. RR LH SENSOR-1 [C1102]*1 Open ● Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is open. FR RH SENSOR-1 [C1103]*1 Open ● Circuit for front right wheel sensor is open. FR LH SENSOR-1 [C1104]*1 Open ● Circuit for front left wheel sensor is open. RR RH SENSOR-2 [C1105]*1 Short ● Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is shorted. RR LH SENSOR-2 [C1106]*1 Short ● Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is shorted. FR RH SENSOR-2 [C1107]*1 Short ● Circuit for front right wheel sensor is shorted. FR LH SENSOR-2 [C1108]*1 Short ● Circuit for front left wheel sensor is shorted. ABS SENSOR [C1115] Abnormal signal ● Teeth damage on sensor rotor or improper installation of wheel sensor. ● Actuator solenoid valve relay is ON, even if control unit sends off signal. ● Actuator solenoid valve relay is OFF, even if control unit sends on signal. Reference Page BRC-27 MAIN RELAY [C1114] Abnormal FR LH IN ABS SOL [C1120] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) FR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1121] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) FR RH IN ABS SOL [C1122] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) FR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1123] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR LH IN ABS SOL [C1124] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1125] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR RH IN ABS SOL [C1126] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1127] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) BATTERY VOLT [ABNORMAL] [C1109] High or Low ● Power source voltage supplied to ABS control unit is abnormally high or low. BRC-34 CONTROLLER FAILURE*2 [C1110] Control Unit ● Function of calculation in ABS control unit has malfunctioned. BRC-36 PUMP MOTOR [C1111] Abnormal ● Circuit for actuator motor is open or shorted. ● Actuator motor relay is stuck. CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] (With 5-speed A/T) CAN Communication Failure ● CAN communication line is open or shorted. BRC-30 BRC-33 BRC-27 *1: Be sure to confirm the ABS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON after repairing the shorted sensor circuit, but the lamp goes out when driving the vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for one minute in accordance with SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE. Revision: March 2005 BRC-18 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] *2: When “CONTROLLER FAILURE” is displayed, check to see if the ABS warning lamp is burned out, and check the circuit between the ABS warning lamp and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for open or short. Then check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and circuit. A DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE 1. 2. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. C D E BBIA0002E 3. 4. BRC Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. G H I BCIA0029E 5. J Touch “ABS”. K L M BCIA0030E 6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”. BCIA0031E 7. 8. Touch “SETTING” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM” screen. Touch “AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG” on “SET RECORDING CONDITION” screen. Revision: March 2005 BRC-19 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] 9. Touch “START” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”. DATA MONITOR MODE MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION FR RH SENSOR FR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR Drive vehicle. (Each wheel is rotating.) Displays computed vehicle speed from wheel sensor signal. Almost the same speed as speedometer. STOP LAMP SW Turn ignition switch ON and depress brake pedal. Depress the pedal: ON Release the pedal: OFF FR RH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL FR LH IN SOL FR LH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL Ignition switch is turned ON or engine is running. Operating conditions for each solenoid valve are indicated. ABS is not operating: OFF Displays ON/OFF condition of ABS actuator relay. When turning ignition switch ON, ABS actuator relay is operated. ACTUATOR RLY MOTOR RELAY Ignition switch is turned ON or engine is running. ABS is not operating: OFF ABS is operating: ON WARN LAMP Warning lamp is turned on: ON Warning lamp is turned off: OFF BATTERY VOLT Power supply voltage for control unit ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ● ● 1. 2. When conducting active test, vehicle must be stationary. When ABS warning lamp stays on, never conduct active test. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. BBIA0002E 3. 4. Start engine. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 BRC-20 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] 5. Touch “ABS”. A B C BCIA0030E D 6. Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. E BRC G BCIA0031E 7. H Select active test item by touching screen. I J K WFIA0045E 8. 9. Touch “START”. Carry out the active test by touching screen key. L ACTIVE TEST MODE TEST ITEM CONDITION M JUDGEMENT Brake fluid pressure control operation FR RH SOL FR LH SOL RR RH SOL RR LH SOL Ignition switch is turned ON. IN SOL OUT SOL UP (Increase): OFF OFF KEEP (Hold): ON OFF DOWN (Decrease): ON ON ABS actuator motor ON: Motor runs OFF: Motor stops ABS MOTOR NOTE: Active test will automatically stop ten seconds after the test starts. (TEST IS STOPPED is displayed.) Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II) EFS00479 When a problem occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp on the instrument panel comes on. To activate the self-diagnostic results mode, ground the self-diagnostic (check) terminal located on data link connector. The location of the malfunction is indicated by the ABS warning lamp flashing. Revision: March 2005 BRC-21 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Turn ignition switch OFF. Ground terminal 9 of data link connector with a suitable harness. Turn ignition switch ON while grounding terminal 9. Do not depress brake pedal. Do not start engine. BBIA0002E 5. 6. 7. 8. After 3.0 seconds, the ABS warning lamp starts flashing to indicate the malfunction code No. (See NOTE.) Verify the location of the malfunction with the malfunction code chart. Refer to BRC-25, "Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II)" . Then make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures. After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the malfunction codes stored in the control unit. Refer to BRC-23, "HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)" . Repeat the self-diagnostic procedure to verify that the malfunction codes have been erased. WFIA0267E 9. Disconnect data link connector terminal 9 from ground. The self-diagnostic results mode is now complete. 10. Verify that the ABS warning lamp remains off after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. 11. After making certain that the ABS warning lamp does not come on, test the ABS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly. NOTE: The indication terminates after five minutes. However, when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON, the indication starts flashing again. HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the ABS warning lamp flashes on and off. When several malfunctions occur at one time, up to three code numbers can be stored; the latest malfunction will be indicated first. The indication begins with the start code 12. After that, a maximum of three code numbers appear in the order of the latest one first. The indication then returns to the start code 12 and the sequence is repeated (the indication will stay on for five minutes at the most). Refer to BRC-25, "Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II)" . SBR457D Revision: March 2005 BRC-22 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect data link connector terminal 9 from ground (ABS warning lamp will stay lit). Within 12.5 seconds, ground the data link connector terminal 9 three times. Each terminal ground must last more than 1 second. The ABS warning lamp turns off after the erase operation has been completed. Perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Only the start code should appear, no malfunction codes. B C ABR256 Preliminary Check D EFS0047A E 1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Low fluid level may indicate brake pad wear or leakage from a brake line. Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination? OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair. GO TO 2. BRC G H SBR451D I 2. CHECK BRAKE LINE J Is leakage present at or around brake lines, tubes or hoses, or are any of these parts cracked or damaged? OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair. GO TO 3. K L SBR389C 3. CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATION Check brake booster for operation and air tightness. Refer to BR-15, "AIRTIGHT CHECK" . Is brake booster airtight and functioning properly? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace. GO TO 4. SBR058C Revision: March 2005 BRC-23 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] 4. CHECK BRAKE PADS AND ROTORS Check brake pads and rotors. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT DISC BRAKE" and BR-32, "REAR DISC BRAKE" . Are brake pads and rotors functioning properly? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace. SBR059C 5. RECHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank. Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination? OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Add brake fluid as necessary. SBR451D 6. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Does warning lamp turn on when ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . WFIA0267E 7. CHECK WARNING LAMP DEACTIVATION Does warning lamp turn off when engine is started? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . 8. DRIVE VEHICLE Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Does warning lamp remain off after vehicle has been driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Revision: March 2005 BRC-24 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Ground Circuit Check EFS0047B A ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND ● Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminals 16 (B) and 19 (B) and ground. B Continuity should exist. C D SFIA0296E Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II) Code No. (No. of LED flashes) Malfunctioning part EFS0047C Reference page 12 Self-diagnosis could not detect any malfunctions. 18 Sensor rotor malfunction BRC-27 Front right sensor BRC-27 25, 26 Front left sensor BRC-27 31, 32 Rear right sensor BRC-27 35, 36 Rear left sensor BRC-27 41 Actuator front right outlet solenoid valve BRC-30 42 Actuator front right inlet solenoid valve BRC-30 45 Actuator front left outlet solenoid valve BRC-30 46 Actuator front left inlet solenoid valve BRC-30 51 Actuator rear right outlet solenoid valve BRC-30 52 Actuator rear right inlet solenoid valve BRC-30 55 Actuator rear left outlet solenoid valve BRC-30 56 Actuator rear left inlet solenoid valve BRC-30 57* Power supply (Abnormal voltage) BRC-34 61 Actuator motor or motor relay BRC-33 63 Solenoid valve relay BRC-30 71 Control unit BRC-36 CAN communication circuit (CAN initialize, Bus-off, Receive) BRC-27 21, 22 77 (With 5-speed A/T) — BRC G H I J K L M *: Under voltage that is too low, the control unit will disable the ABS. It does not set the ABS in fail-safe condition. Instead, the ABS becomes a conventional brake system. After the power supply has resumed, the warning lamp goes off, making it possible for the ABS to be re-engaged. Symptom Chart EFS0047D Symptom Malfunctioning part ABS warning lamp stays on when ignition switch is turned ON. Control unit power supply circuit Warning lamp bulb circuit Control unit or control unit connector Solenoid valve relay stuck Power supply for solenoid valve relay coil ABS warning lamp stays on, during self-diagnosis. Control unit ABS warning lamp does not come on when ignition switch is turned on. Fuse, warning lamp bulb or warning lamp circuit Control unit Revision: March 2005 Reference page BRC-41 — BRC-25 E BRC-40 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Symptom ABS warning lamp does not come on during self-diagnosis. Malfunctioning part Control unit Reference page — Pedal vibration and noise. — BRC-39 Long stopping distance. — BRC-38 Unexpected pedal action. — BRC-37 ABS does not work. — BRC-38 ABS works frequently. — BRC-37 Revision: March 2005 BRC-26 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS PFP:00000 CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) (With 5-speed A/T) A EFS0047E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. U1000 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 77 C 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-1 D Check the self-diagnosis results. Malfunction codes Diagnostic trouble codes 77 U1000 E Are any items other than above indicated in self-diagnosis results? YES >> Repair as necessary. NO >> GO TO 2. BRC 2. CHECK THE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 with the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness and connector for open and shorted circuit. 3. Check the connector housing for disconnected, loose, bent, and collapsed terminals. Is inspection result OK? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. GO TO 3. G H I 3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-2 1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and turn the ignition switch ON. 2. After erasing the self-diagnosis result, start the engine to perform the self-diagnosis again. Is inspection result OK? YES >> System is OK. NO >> Refer to BRC-27, "CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) (With 5-speed A/T)" . Wheel Sensor or Rotor J K L EFS0047F DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104, C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 or C1115 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 21, 22, 25, 26, 31, 32, 35, 36 or 18 NOTE: Wheel position should be identified by code No. except code No. 18 (sensor rotor). 1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: March 2005 BRC-27 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect connector from wheel sensor of malfunction code No. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch. NOTE: The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding. 4. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal. NOTE: If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and retest. Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 6. 3. CHECK TIRE Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). 4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Is axial end play within specifications? YES >> If diagnosing a front wheel sensor, GO TO 5. If diagnosing a rear wheel sensor, GO TO 6. NO >> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "WHEEL HUB" . Then retest. 5. CHECK SENSOR ROTOR Check sensor rotor for tooth damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace sensor rotor. Refer to BRC-43, "Removal and Installation" . 6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No. Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair the circuit. WFIA0319E Revision: March 2005 BRC-28 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 7. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No. Check continuity between both wiring harness ends. Sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector - terminal Front LH Front RH Rear LH Rear RH Wire color Wheel sensor Connector - terminal B Continuity C Wire color E125 - 6 G E18 - 1 G E125 - 7 R E18 - 2 R E125 - 4 B E117 - 1 B E125 - 5 W E117 - 2 W E125 - 9 P B123 - *1 P E125 - 8 L B123 - *2 L E125 - 3 PU B122 - *1 PU E125 - 1 LG B122 - *2 LG D Yes E BRC *1: Terminal 1 (early production) or terminal 2 (late production). *2: Terminal 2 (early production) or terminal 1 (late production). G Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-29 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay EFS0047G DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1114, C1120, C1121, C1122, C1123, C1124, C1125, C1126 or C1127 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 41, 42, 45, 46, 51, 52, 55, 56 or 63 1. INSPECTION START Solenoid valve relay inspection. WFIA0252E >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check 30A [h ] fusible link (ABS ACTR) for ABS solenoid valve relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fusible link OK? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 7. 3. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse No. 49. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fuse OK? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 9. Revision: March 2005 BRC-30 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 4. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does warning lamp activate again? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Inspection End. B C 5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT D Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair harness and connectors. E 6. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. BRC 1. 2. G H I SFIA0300E J 7. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK Replace fusible link. Does the fusible link blow out when ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Inspection End. K L 8. CHECK RELAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. NO >> ● Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 BRC-31 M SFIA0301E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 9. REPLACE FUSE Replace fuse. Does the fuse blow when the ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse. If NG, repair harness or connectors. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 BRC-32 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] Motor Relay or Motor EFS0047H A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1111 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 61 B 1. INSPECTION START C ABS motor relay inspection. D E BRC G H I J K WFIA0253E L >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M Check 30A [g ] fusible link (ABS MTR) for ABS motor relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fusible link OK? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 6. 3. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connectors. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does warning lamp activate again? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 BRC-33 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 4. CHECK MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. SFIA0303E 5. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. If NG, repair harness or connectors. 6. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK Replace fusible link. Does the fusible link blow when the ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Inspection End. 7. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. NO >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. Abnormal Battery Voltage SFIA0304E EFS0047I DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1109 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 57 Revision: March 2005 BRC-34 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 1. INSPECTION START A ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit inspection. B >> GO TO 2. C D WFIA0207E E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, BRC disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does warning lamp activate again? G YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Inspection End. 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H 1. 2. I Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY) and ground. Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 5. J K SFIA0306E L 4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. If NG, repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse 49 for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fuse OK? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Revision: March 2005 BRC-35 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 6. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check continuity between battery and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY). Does continuity exist? YES >> Check battery. Refer to SC-4, "BATTERY" . NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse. If NG, repair harness or connectors. Controller Failure EFS0047J DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1110 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 71 1. INSPECTION START ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit inspection. >> GO TO 2. WFIA0206E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connectors. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does warning lamp activate again? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Inspection End. 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage. Refer to BRC-34, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" . Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair. 4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check the self-diagnosis results. Malfunction code 71 Diagnostic trouble code C1110 Are the above items indicated in self-diagnosis results? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspect the system according to the indicated code No. Revision: March 2005 BRC-36 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS 1. ABS Works Frequently PFP:99999 A EFS0047K 1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE B Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BR-39, "Inspection" . Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" . C D 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR E 1. 2. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections. Perform wheel sensor check. Refer to BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" . Are wheel sensors functioning properly? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair. BRC G 3. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Is axial end play within specifications? YES >> Go to BRC-37, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NO >> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "WHEEL HUB" . 2. Unexpected Pedal Action H I EFS0047L J 1. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL K Check brake pedal travel. Is brake pedal travel excessive? YES NO >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" . >> GO TO 2. L M SBR540A 2. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and verify that the braking force is sufficient when the ABS is not operating. After the inspection, reconnect the connector. NOTE: Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" . Revision: March 2005 BRC-37 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION Ensure warning lamp remains off while driving. Is warning lamp turned off? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELFDIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . WFIA0267E 4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS 1. 2. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections. Perform wheel sensor check. Refer to BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" . Are wheel sensors functioning properly? YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NO >> Repair as necessary. 3. Long Stopping Distance EFS0047M 1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Drive vehicle and check to see if stopping distance is still long. NOTE: Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Is stopping distance still long? YES >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" . NO >> Go to BRC-37, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NOTE: Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. 4. ABS Does Not Work EFS0047N 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION Turn ignition switch ON. Does the ABS warning lamp activate? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . NO >> Go to BRC-40, "6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" . NOTE: ABS does not work when vehicle speed is under 10 km/h (6 MPH). Revision: March 2005 BRC-38 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 5. Pedal Vibration and Noise EFS0047O A 1. INSPECTION START B Pedal vibration and noise inspection. >> GO TO 2. C D E SAT797A 2. CHECK SYMPTOM BRC 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom appear only when engine is started? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . NO >> GO TO 3. G H 3. RECHECK SYMPTOM Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamp) are operated? YES >> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary. >> Go to BRC-37, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NO NOTE: ABS may operate and cause vibration under any of the following conditions. ● Applying brake gradually when shifting or operating clutch. ● Low friction (slippery) road. ● High speed cornering. ● Driving over bumps and potholes. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-39 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS0047P 1. INSPECTION START Warning lamp circuit inspection. >> GO TO 2. SFIA0308E 2. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse No. 14 for ABS warning lamp. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fuse OK? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. 3. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Does the ABS warning lamp activate? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC44, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> GO TO 4. WFIA0267E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and combination meter connector M24. 2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Repair harness or connectors. NO >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-12, "How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis" . WFIA0254E Revision: March 2005 BRC-40 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] 7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS0047Q A 1. INSPECTION START B ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) inspection. >> GO TO 2. C D E SFIA0311E 2. CHECK WARNING LAMP BRC 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Connect suitable wire between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Does ABS warning lamp activate? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair combination meter. Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and combination meter. If NG, repair harness or connector. G H I SFIA0312E J 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 BRC-41 2005 Altima K L M WHEEL SENSORS [ABS] WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation PFP:47910 EFS0047R LFIA0078E CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires making the sensor inoperative. CAUTION: Pull out the sensor being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten mounting bolts and nuts to the specified torque. ● Check if foreign objects such as iron fragments are adhered to the pick-up part of the sensor or to the inside of the hole for mounting the sensor, or if a foreign object is caught in the surface of the mounting for the rotor. If something wrong is found, fix it and then install the sensor. Revision: March 2005 BRC-42 2005 Altima SENSOR ROTOR [ABS] SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation PFP:47970 A EFS0047S NOTE: The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" . B REMOVAL 1. 2. C Remove the front wheel hub. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller. D E BRC LFIA0079E INSTALLATION G Install the sensor rotor using a hammer and a wooden block. ● Always replace sensor rotor with new one. H I J LFIA0083E K L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-43 2005 Altima ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [ABS] ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation PFP:47660 EFS0047T LFIA0085E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect negative battery cable. Remove windshield wiper motor and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" . Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Changing Brake Fluid" . Disconnect harness connectors from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Disconnect brake pipes. NOTE: Make note of pipe mounting locations. Remove nuts and bolts for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and remove from vehicle. INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installation of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake fluid. Then bleed air from system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . 1. Position ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) in vehicle. 2. Install and tighten ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) nuts and bolts. 3. Install brake pipes to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), then tighten flare nuts. Refer to BRC-5, "Hydraulic Circuit" . 4. Connect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connectors. 5. Install windshield wiper motor and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "INSTALLATION" . 6. Reconnect battery cable. Revision: March 2005 BRC-44 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [TCS/ABS] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EFS0047U The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. BRC ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for Brake System EFS0047V CAUTION: ● Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. ● Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is detected, replace part with a new one. ● Before working, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect electrical connector of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery terminals. ● Always torque brake lines when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or SBR686C replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" . WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EFS0047W When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision: March 2005 BRC-45 2005 Altima H I J K L M PREPARATION [TCS/ABS] PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EFS00629 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-45741) ABS active wheel sensor tester Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensor WFIA0101E Commercial Service Tools EFS0062A Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) S-NT360 Revision: March 2005 BRC-46 2005 Altima GENERAL INFORMATION [TCS/ABS] GENERAL INFORMATION Description PFP:00000 A EFS0047Z PURPOSE The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) consists of electronic and hydraulic components. It allows for control of braking force so that locking of the wheels can be avoided. The ABS: ● Ensures proper tracking performance through steering wheel operation. ● Enables obstacles to be avoided through steering wheel operation. ● Ensures vehicle stability by preventing flat spins. ● ● C D ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) OPERATION ● B When the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 MPH) this system does not work. The ABS has self-test capabilities. The system turns on the ABS warning lamp for 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON. The system performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches 6 km/h (4 E MPH). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABS performs a self-test. This is a normal part of the selftest feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS warning lamp will come on. BRC During ABS operation, a mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal condition. TCS (TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM) OPERATION ● ● ● ● ● This system is designed to limit wheel slip during acceleration by changing the transmission shift schedule (with A/T) and cutting fuel to selected engine cylinders. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects drive wheel slip by comparing wheel speed signals from all 4 wheels. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) will then determine the desired torque reduction needed to minimize wheel spin. The torque reduction by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) may result in a combination of transmission shift timing adjustments (with A/T) and fuel cutoff. The torque reduction is sent from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) through the CAN (Controller Area Network) lines to the TCM (with A/T) and the ECM. The ECM will cut fuel and/or the TCM will change transmission shift schedule to achieve torque reduction. The TCS will be enabled when the TCS ON/OFF switch is in the ON position (TCS OFF indicator not illuminated), and if the catalytic converter temperature is within the normal operating range. During TCS operation, the system informs the driver of system operation by flashing the SLIP indicator lamp. This system has a self-diagnostic function. When the ignition switch is initially turned ON, the SLIP indicator lamp and TCS OFF indicator lamp will illuminate. If the ABS/TCS system is operating correctly, both indicator lamps will go out as soon as the engine starts. The TCS ON/OFF switch cancels the TCS function. The TCS OFF indicator lamp then illuminates to indicate that the TCS system is not operating. This system utilizes a fuel-cut function to control drive torque. If fuel cut continues for an extended period of time during high-speed operation, the catalyst may melt and deteriorate. During continued TCS operation, the system will sometimes suspend the drive torque control function, preventing catalyst damage. Fail Safe EFS00480 If trouble occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp in the combination meter will turn on. At the same time, the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) will disable ABS control, and braking becomes the same as that of a vehicle without ABS. Revision: March 2005 BRC-47 2005 Altima G H I J K L M GENERAL INFORMATION [TCS/ABS] Hydraulic Circuit EFS00481 SBR984D 1. Inlet solenoid valve 4. Pump 7. Outlet valve 2. Outlet solenoid valve 5. Motor 8. Bypass check valve 3. Reservoir 6. Inlet valve 9. Damper System Components EFS00482 WFIA0255E Revision: March 2005 BRC-48 2005 Altima GENERAL INFORMATION [TCS/ABS] Control Unit EFS00483 A ABS FUNCTION The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in the system, the warning lamp is turned on. In this condition, the ABS will be disabled, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation. B C D WFIA0267E TCS FUNCTION E Drive wheel slippage is determined by comparing speed signals from all 4 wheels. When the wheel slip becomes excessive, the TCS operates, causing the SLIP indicator lamp to flash. At the same time, a signal requesting a change in the shift schedule will be sent to the TCM (with A/T) and a fuel-cut signal is sent to the ECM. When the TCS ON/OFF switch is used to cancel TCS function, the TCS OFF indicator lamp will light. (TCS does not activate.) In case of a malfunction in the TCS, both the SLIP indicator lamp and the TCS OFF indicator lamp will light, while shutting down the TCS system operation. The vehicle will operate in the same way as a vehicle not equipped with TCS. ABS Actuator and Electric Unit BRC G H WFIA0270E EFS00484 The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) contains: ● An electric motor and pump ● Two relays ● Eight solenoid valves, each inlet and outlet for — LH front — RH front — LH rear — RH rear ● ABS control unit These components control the hydraulic circuit. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) directs the actuator to increase, hold or decrease hydraulic pressure to all or individual wheels. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly. ABS operation Inlet solenoid valve Outlet solenoid valve OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is directly transmitted to caliper via the inlet solenoid valve. Pressure hold ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) Hydraulic circuit is shut off to hold the caliper brake fluid pressure. Pressure decrease ON (Closed) ON (Open) Caliper brake fluid is sent to reservoir via the outlet solenoid valve. Then it is pushed up to the master cylinder by pump. Pressure increase OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is transmitted to caliper. Revision: March 2005 J K L M ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION Normal brake operation I BRC-49 2005 Altima GENERAL INFORMATION [TCS/ABS] Wheel Sensors EFS00485 The front wheel sensor units consist of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a magnet around which a coil is wound. The front wheel sensors are installed on the front of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed increases. LBR333 The rear wheel sensor units consist of wheel hubs with a series of internal magnets and a sensor element. The rear wheel sensors are installed on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed increases. WFIA0033E CAN Communication System Description EFS00486 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 BRC-50 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00000 A EFS00487 INTRODUCTION The ABS/TCS has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/ TCS controlled vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information. B C D SEF233G E BRC G H SEF234G I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-51 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] WORK FLOW WFIA0257E Revision: March 2005 BRC-52 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] CLARIFY CONCERN ● ● ● A A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern. Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what conditions. Use the information to reproduce the symptom while driving. It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what type of trouble the customer is having. B C SBR339B D EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET E BRC G H I J K L M LFIA0198E Revision: March 2005 BRC-53 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EFS00488 WFIA0271E Revision: March 2005 BRC-54 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] Schematic EFS00489 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0087E Revision: March 2005 BRC-55 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] Wiring Diagram — TCS — EFS0048A WFWA0088E Revision: March 2005 BRC-56 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0151E Revision: March 2005 BRC-57 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] WFWA0094E Revision: March 2005 BRC-58 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] CONSULT–II Function (ABS) EFS0048B A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. ABS diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed. B Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results. C Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. FUNCTION TEST ECU PART NUMBER D Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". E ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read. ECU (ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE Ignore the ECU part number displayed in the "ECU PART NUMBER" screen. Refer to the parts catalog to BRC order the ECU. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be G detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. I J K BBIA0002E L 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Stop vehicle with engine running and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. M BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 BRC-59 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] 6. Touch “ABS”. BCIA0030E 7. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. ● The screen shows the detected malfunction and how many times the ignition switch has been turned since the malfunction. BCIA0031E 8. 9. Make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures. After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the self-diagnostic results stored in the control unit by touching “ERASE”. 10. Check ABS warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. WFIA0044E Revision: March 2005 BRC-60 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE Diagnostic item Diagnosed condition Diagnostic item is detected when... RR RH SENSOR-1 [C1101]*1 Open ● Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is open. RR LH SENSOR-1 [C1102]*1 Open ● Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is open. FR RH SENSOR-1 [C1103]*1 Open ● Circuit for front right wheel sensor is open. FR LH SENSOR-1 [C1104]*1 Open ● Circuit for front left wheel sensor is open. RR RH SENSOR-2 [C1105]*1 Short ● Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is shorted. RR LH SENSOR-2 [C1106]*1 Short ● Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is shorted. FR RH SENSOR-2 [C1107]*1 Short ● Circuit for front right wheel sensor is shorted. FR LH SENSOR-2 [C1108]*1 Short ● Circuit for front left wheel sensor is shorted. ABS SENSOR [C1115] Abnormal signal ● Teeth damage on sensor rotor or improper installation of wheel sensor. ● Actuator solenoid valve relay is ON, even if control unit sends off signal. ● Actuator solenoid valve relay is OFF, even if control unit sends on signal. Reference Page B C D BRC-71 E BRC G MAIN RELAY [C1114] Abnormal FR LH IN ABS SOL [C1120] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) FR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1121] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) FR RH IN ABS SOL [C1122] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) FR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1123] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for front right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR LH IN ABS SOL [C1124] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1125] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR RH IN ABS SOL [C1126] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) RR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1127] Abnormal (Open, Short) ● Circuit for rear right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted. (An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.) BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] [C1109] High or Low ● Power source voltage supplied to ABS control unit is abnormally high or low. BRC-78 CONTROLLER FAILURE*2 [C1110] Control Unit ● Function of calculation in ABS control unit has malfunctioned. BRC-80 PUMP MOTOR [C1111] Abnormal ● Circuit for actuator motor is open or shorted. ● Actuator motor relay is stuck. Revision: March 2005 A BRC-61 H I J BRC-74 K L M BRC-74 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] Diagnostic item Diagnosed condition Diagnostic item is detected when... ENG SIG 1 [C1130] Abnormal ● Fuel cut control abnormal. ENG SIG 2 [C1131] Abnormal ● Electric throttle control abnormal. ENG SIG 3 [C1132] Abnormal ● ECM CAN communication abnormal. ENG SIG 4 [C1133] Abnormal ● ECM communication to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) abnormal. A/T SYSTEM (With A/T) [C1135] Abnormal ● A/T data from TCM abnormal or not present. CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] CAN Communication Failure ● CAN communication line is open or shorted. Reference Page BRC-71 *1: Be sure to confirm the ABS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON after repairing the shorted sensor circuit, but the lamp goes out when driving the vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for one minute in accordance with SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE. *2: When "CONTROLLER FAILURE" is displayed, check to see if the ABS warning lamp is burned out, and check the circuit between the ABS warning lamp and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for open or short. Then check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and circuit. DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. BBIA0002E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 BRC-62 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] 5. Touch “ABS”. A B C BCIA0030E D 6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”. E BRC G BCIA0031E 7. 8. 9. H Touch “SETTING” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM” screen. Touch “AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG” on “SET RECORDING CONDITION” screen. Touch “START” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”. I DATA MONITOR MODE MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J FR RH SENSOR FR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR Drive vehicle. (Each wheel is rotating.) Displays computed vehicle speed from wheel sensor signal. Almost the same speed as speedometer. STOP LAMP SW Turn ignition switch ON and depress brake pedal. Depress the pedal: ON Release the pedal: OFF ENGINE SPEED Engine is running. (rpm) Engine speed: 0 - 8,000 (rpm) FR RH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL FR LH IN SOL FR LH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL Ignition switch is turned ON or engine is running. Operating conditions for each solenoid valve are indicated. ABS is not operating: OFF K Displays ON/OFF condition of ABS actuator relay. When turning ignition switch ON, ABS actuator relay is operated. ACTUATOR RLY MOTOR RELAY Ignition switch is turned ON or engine is running. ABS is not operating: OFF ABS is operating: ON ABS WARN LAMP Warning lamp is turned on: ON Warning lamp is turned off: OFF BATTERY VOLT Power supply voltage for control unit GEAR (With A/T) Revision: March 2005 L A/T gear position signal detected by TCM via ECM is displayed. Gear position: P, N: N.P 1st: 1 2nd: 2 3rd: 3 4th: 4 BRC-63 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION OFF SW ON/OFF condition of signal from TCS switch is displayed. TCS OFF S/W (all the time switch is pressed): ON TCS OFF S/W (released): OFF ● TCS OFF condition is displayed. ● The condition of malfunctioning TCS is displayed. OFF LAMP SLIP LAMP SLCT LVR POSI (With A/T) TCS OFF indicator “OFF”: OFF TCS OFF indicator “ON”: ON The TCS functioning state is displayed by detecting rear wheel slip. SLIP indicator “ON”: ON SLIP indicator “OFF”: OFF A/T selector lever position is displayed. Park: P Reverse: R Neutral: N 4th: 4 3rd: 3 2nd: 2 1st: 1 ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ● ● 1. 2. When conducting active test, vehicle must be stationary. When ABS warning lamp stays on, never conduct active test. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. BBIA0002E 3. 4. Start engine. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen. BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 BRC-64 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] 5. Touch “ABS”. A B C BCIA0030E D 6. Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. E BRC G BCIA0031E 7. H Select active test item by touching screen. I J K WFIA0045E 8. 9. Touch “START”. Carry out the active test by touching screen key. L ACTIVE TEST MODE TEST ITEM CONDITION M JUDGEMENT Brake fluid pressure control operation FR RH SOL FR LH SOL RR RH SOL RR LH SOL Ignition switch is turned ON. IN SOL OUT SOL UP (Increase): OFF OFF KEEP (Hold): ON OFF DOWN (Decrease): ON ON ABS actuator motor ON: Motor runs OFF: Motor stops ABS MOTOR NOTE: Active test will automatically stop ten seconds after the test starts. (TEST IS STOPPED is displayed.) Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II) EFS0048C FUNCTION When a problem occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp on the instrument panel comes on. When a problem occurs in the TCS, the TCS OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp on the instrument panel come on. Revision: March 2005 BRC-65 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] To activate the self-diagnostic results mode, ground the self-diagnostic (check) terminal located on data link connector. The location of the malfunction is indicated by the ABS warning lamp or SLIP indicator lamp flashing. SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Turn ignition switch OFF. Ground terminal 9 of data link connector with a suitable harness. Turn ignition switch ON while grounding terminal 9. Do not depress brake pedal. Do not start engine. BBIA0002E 5. 6. 7. 8. After 3.0 seconds, the SLIP indicator lamp starts flashing to indicate the malfunction code No. (See NOTE.) Verify the location of the malfunction with the malfunction code chart. Refer to BRC-61, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE" . Then make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures. After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the malfunction codes stored in the control unit. Refer to BRC-67, "HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)" . Repeat the self-diagnostic procedure to verify that the malfunction codes have been erased. Disconnect the data link connector terminal 9 from ground. The self-diagnostic results mode is now complete. 10. Verify that the ABS warning lamp, TCS OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp remain off after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. 11. After making certain that the ABS warning lamp, TCS OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp do not come on, test the ABS/TCS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly. NOTE: The indication terminates after five minutes. However, when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON, the SLIP indication starts flashing again. The TCS OFF indicator lamp and ABS warning lamp remain lighted. WFIA0272E 9. WFIA0273E HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) 1. 2. 3. Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the ABS warning lamp or SLIP indicator lamp flashes on and off. When several malfunctions occur at one time, up to three code numbers can be stored; the latest malfunction will be indicated first. The indication begins with the start code 12. After that, a maximum of three code numbers appear in the order of the latest one first. The indication then returns to the start code 12 and the sequence is repeated (the indication will stay on for five minutes at the most). Revision: March 2005 BRC-66 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] 4. Refer to BRC-61, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE" . A B C SBR457D D HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) 1. Disconnect data link connector terminal 9 from ground (ABS warning lamp will stay lit). 2. Within 12.5 seconds, ground the data link connector terminal 9 three times. Each terminal ground must last more than 1 second. The ABS warning lamp turns off after the erase operation has been completed. 3. Perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Only the start code should appear, no malfunction codes. After the erase operation is completed, it is necessary to repeat the self-diagnostic procedure to verify that malfunction codes no longer appear. Only the start code (12) should be indicated when erase operation is completed and system is functioning normally. NOTE: The TCS OFF indicator lamp and ABS warning lamp remain on. Preliminary Check E BRC G SBR631D H I EFS0048D 1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL J Low fluid level may indicate brake pad wear or leakage from brake line. Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination? OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair. GO TO 2. K L M SBR451D 2. CHECK BRAKE LINE Is leakage present at or around brake lines, tubes or hoses, or are any of these parts cracked or damaged? OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair. GO TO 3. SBR389C Revision: March 2005 BRC-67 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] 3. CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATION Check brake booster for operation and air tightness. Refer to BR-15, "AIRTIGHT CHECK" . Is brake booster airtight and functioning properly? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace. GO TO 4. SBR058C 4. CHECK BRAKE PADS AND ROTORS Check brake pads and rotors. Refer to BR-19, "FRONT DISC BRAKE" and BR-32, "REAR DISC BRAKE" . Are brake pads and rotors functioning properly? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace. SBR059C 5. RECHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank again. Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination? OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Add brake fluid as necessary. SBR451D 6. CHECK WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR LAMPS ACTIVATION Do ABS warning lamp, TCS OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn on when ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . WFIA0273E Revision: March 2005 BRC-68 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] 7. CHECK WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR LAMPS DEACTIVATION A Do lamps turn off when engine is started? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . B 8. DRIVE VEHICLE C Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute. Do warning lamp and indicator lamps remain off after vehicle has been driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Ground Circuit Check D E EFS0048E ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND ● Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminals 16 (B) and 19 (B) and ground. BRC Continuity should exist. G H SFIA0296E I ABS WARNING LAMP, TCS OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP ON/OFF TIMING ×: ON –: Lamp OFF J ABS warning lamp TCS OFF indicator lamp SLIP indicator lamp Remarks When the ignition switch is OFF – – – – After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 0.5 seconds × × × – Ignition switch ON Approx. 0.5 seconds later – – – Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds after the engine start. When the TCS OFF switch turns ON (TCS function OFF). – × – – × × × – × × – When the TCS/ABS control unit is malfunctioning (power supply or ground malfunction). – × × – Condition TCS/ABS malfunction When the TCS is malfunctioning. K M Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II) Code No. (No. of LED flashes) Malfunctioning part EFS0048F Reference page 12 Self-diagnosis could not detect any malfunctions. 18 Sensor rotor malfunction BRC-71 21, 22 Front right sensor BRC-71 25, 26 Front left sensor BRC-71 31, 32 Rear right sensor BRC-71 35, 36 Rear left sensor BRC-71 Actuator front right outlet solenoid valve BRC-74 41 Revision: March 2005 BRC-69 L — 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] Code No. (No. of LED flashes) Malfunctioning part Reference page 42 Actuator front right inlet solenoid valve BRC-74 45 Actuator front left outlet solenoid valve BRC-74 46 Actuator front left inlet solenoid valve BRC-74 51 Actuator rear right outlet solenoid valve BRC-74 52 Actuator rear right inlet solenoid valve BRC-74 55 Actuator rear left outlet solenoid valve BRC-74 56 Actuator rear left inlet solenoid valve BRC-74 57* Power supply (Abnormal voltage) BRC-78 61 Actuator motor or motor relay BRC-77 63 Solenoid valve relay BRC-74 71 Control unit BRC-80 77 CAN communication circuit (CAN initialize, Bus-off, Receive) BRC-71 83 CAN ATMSG1 receive timeout BRC-71 84 CAN TRQDNINH fault BRC-71 86 CAN ETCOK fault BRC-71 87 CAN FCOK fault BRC-71 88 CAN CANOK fault BRC-71 *: Under voltage that is too low, the control unit will disable the ABS. It does not set the ABS in fail-safe condition. Instead, the ABS becomes a conventional brake system. After the power supply has resumed, the warning lamp goes off, making it possible for the ABS to be re-engaged. Symptom Chart EFS0048G Symptom Malfunctioning part Control unit power supply circuit Warning lamp bulb circuit ABS warning lamp stays on when igniControl unit or control unit connector tion switch is turned ON. Solenoid valve relay stuck Power supply for solenoid valve relay coil ABS warning lamp stays on, during self-diagnosis. Control unit ABS warning lamp does not come on when ignition switch is turned on. Fuse, warning lamp bulb or warning lamp circuit Control unit ABS warning lamp does not come on during self-diagnosis. Control unit Reference page BRC-85 — BRC-84 — Pedal vibration and noise. — BRC-83 Long stopping distance. — BRC-82 Unexpected pedal action. — BRC-81 ABS does not work. — BRC-82 ABS works frequently. — BRC-81 Revision: March 2005 BRC-70 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS PFP:00000 CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) A EFS0048H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1130, C1131, C1132, C1133, C1135 or U1000 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 77, 83, 84, 86, 87 or 88 B 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-1 C Check the self-diagnosis results. 77, 83, 84, 86, 87 or 88 D Diagnostic trouble codes Malfunction codes C1130, C1131, C1132, C1133, C1135 or U1000 E Are any items other than above indicated in self-diagnosis results? YES >> Repair as necessary. NO >> GO TO 2. BRC 2. CHECK THE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 with the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness and connector for open and shorted circuit. 3. Check the connector housing for disconnected, loose, bent, and collapsed terminals. Is inspection result OK? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. GO TO 3. G H I 3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-2 J 1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and turn the ignition switch ON. 2. After erasing the self-diagnosis result, start the engine to perform the self-diagnosis again. Is inspection result OK? YES >> System is OK. NO >> Refer to BRC-50, "CAN Communication System Description" . Wheel Sensor or Rotor K EFS0048I L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104, C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 or C1115 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 21, 22, 25, 26, 31, 32, 35, 36 or 18 NOTE: Wheel position should be identified by code No. except code No. 18 (sensor rotor). 1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunction code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: March 2005 BRC-71 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect connector from wheel sensor of malfunction code No. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch. NOTE: The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding. 4. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal. NOTE: If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and retest. Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 6. 3. CHECK TIRE Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). 4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Is axial end play within specifications? YES >> If diagnosing a front wheel sensor, GO TO 5. If diagnosing a rear wheel sensor, GO TO 6. NO >> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Then retest. 5. CHECK SENSOR ROTOR Check sensor rotor for tooth damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace sensor rotor. Refer to BRC-43, "Removal and Installation" . 6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No. Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair the circuit. WFIA0319E Revision: March 2005 BRC-72 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] 7. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No. Check continuity between both wiring harness ends. Sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector - terminal Front LH Front RH Rear LH Rear RH Wire color Wheel sensor Connector - terminal B Continuity C Wire color E125 - 6 G E18 - 1 G E125 - 7 R E18 - 2 R E125 - 4 B E117 - 1 B E125 - 5 W E117 - 2 W E125 - 9 P B123 - *1 P E125 - 8 L B123 - *2 L E125 - 3 PU B122 - *1 PU E125 - 1 LG B122 - *2 LG D Yes E BRC *1: Terminal 1 (early production) or terminal 2 (late production). *2: Terminal 2 (early production) or terminal 1 (late production). G Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-73 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay EFS0048J DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1114, C1120, C1121, C1122, C1123, C1124, C1125, C1126 or C1127 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 41, 42, 45, 46, 51, 52, 55, 56, or 63 1. INSPECTION START Solenoid valve relay inspection. WFIA0261E >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check 30A [h ] fusible link (ABS ACTR) for ABS solenoid valve relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fusible link OK? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 7. 3. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse No. 49. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fuse OK? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 9. Revision: March 2005 BRC-74 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] 4. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does warning lamp activate again? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Inspection End. B C 5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT D Refer to BRC-69, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair harness and connectors. E 6. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. BRC 1. 2. G H I SFIA0300E J 7. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK Replace fusible link. Does the fusible link blow when the ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Inspection End. K L 8. CHECK RELAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. NO >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 BRC-75 M SFIA0301E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] 9. REPLACE FUSE Replace fuse. Does the fuse blow when the ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse. If NG, repair harness or connectors. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 BRC-76 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] Motor Relay or Motor EFS0048K A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1111 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 61 B 1. INSPECTION START C ABS motor relay inspection. D E BRC G H I J K WFIA0262E L >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M Check 30A [g ] fusible link (ABS MTR) for ABS motor relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fusible link OK? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 6. 3. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does ABS warning lamp activate again? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 BRC-77 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] 4. CHECK MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. SFIA0303E 5. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BRC-69, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. If NG, repair harness or connectors. 6. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK Replace fusible link. Does the fusible link blow when the ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Inspection End. 7. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors. NO >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. Abnormal Battery Voltage SFIA0304E EFS0048L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1109 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 57 Revision: March 2005 BRC-78 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] 1. INSPECTION START A ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit inspection. B >> GO TO 2. C D WFIA0208E E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, BRC disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does warning lamp activate again? G YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Inspection End. 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H 1. 2. I Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY) and ground. Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 5. J K SFIA0306E L 4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND Refer to BRC-69, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" . Is ground circuit OK? YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. If NG, repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse 49 for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fuse OK? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Revision: March 2005 BRC-79 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] 6. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check continuity between battery and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY). Does continuity exist? YES >> Check battery. Refer to SC-4, "BATTERY" . NO >> Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse. If NG, repair harness or connectors. Controller Failure EFS0048M DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1110 Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 71 1. INSPECTION START ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and ground circuit inspection. >> GO TO 2. WFIA0263E 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector. 2. Repeat self-diagnosis. Does warning lamp activate again? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Inspection End. 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage. Refer to BRC-78, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" . Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair. 4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check the self-diagnosis results. Malfunction code 71 Diagnostic trouble code C1110 Are the above items indicated in self-diagnosis results? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspect the system according to the indicated code No. Revision: March 2005 BRC-80 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS 1. ABS Works Frequently PFP:99999 A EFS0048N 1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE B Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BR-39, "Inspection" . Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" . C D 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR E 1. 2. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections. Perform wheel sensor check. Refer to BRC-71, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" . Are wheel sensors functioning properly? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair. BRC G 3. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Is axial end play within specifications? YES >> Go to BRC-81, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NO >> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . 2. Unexpected Pedal Action EFS0048O 1. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL H I J K Check brake pedal travel. Is brake pedal travel excessive? YES >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" . NO >> GO TO 2. L M SBR540A 2. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and verify that the braking force is sufficient when the ABS is not operating. After the inspection, reconnect the connector. NOTE: Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" . Revision: March 2005 BRC-81 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] 3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION Ensure warning lamp remains off while driving. Is warning lamp turned off? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELFDIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . WFIA0267E 4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS 1. 2. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections. Perform wheel sensor check. Refer to BRC-71, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" . Are wheel sensors functioning properly? YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NO >> Repair as necessary. 3. Long Stopping Distance EFS0048P 1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Drive vehicle and check to see if stopping distance is still long. NOTE: Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Is stopping distance still long? YES >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" . NO >> Go to BRC-81, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NOTE: Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. 4. ABS Does Not Work EFS0048Q 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION Turn the ignition switch ON. Does the ABS warning lamp activate? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . NO >> Go to BRC-84, "6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" . NOTE: ABS does not work when vehicle speed is under 10 km/h (6 MPH). Revision: March 2005 BRC-82 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] 5. Pedal Vibration and Noise EFS0048R A 1. INSPECTION START B Pedal vibration and noise inspection. >> GO TO 2. C D E SAT797A 2. CHECK SYMPTOM BRC 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom appear only when engine is started? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . NO >> GO TO 3. G H 3. RECHECK SYMPTOM Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamp) are operated? YES >> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary. >> Go to BRC-81, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" . NO NOTE: ABS may operate and cause vibration under any of the following conditions. ● Applying brake gradually when shifting or operating clutch. ● Low friction (slippery) road. ● High speed cornering. ● Driving over bumps and potholes. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-83 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] 6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS0048S 1. INSPECTION START Warning lamp circuit inspection. >> GO TO 2. WFIA0264E 2. CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse No. 14 for warning lamp. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Is fuse OK? YES >> GO TO 3 NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. 3. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Does the ABS warning lamp activate? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC44, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> GO TO 4. WFIA0267E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and combination meter connector M24. 2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Repair harness or connectors. NO >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-12, "How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis" . WFIA0254E Revision: March 2005 BRC-84 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] 7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS0048T A 1. INSPECTION START B ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) inspection. >> GO TO 2. C D E WFIA0265E 2. CHECK WARNING LAMP BRC 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Connect suitable wire between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground. Does warning lamp activate? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair combination meter. Check the following. ● Harness connector E125 ● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and combination meter. If NG, repair harness or connector. G H I SFIA0312E J 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation" . 8. During ABS/TCS Control, Vehicle Behavior is Jerky EFS0048U 1. ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION Perform data monitor with CONSULT-II for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 BRC-85 2005 Altima K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] 3. ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again. NO >> WITH A/T, GO TO 4. WITH M/T, GO TO 5. 4. TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform TCM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 5. 5. CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace the connector terminal. 6. CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION Check the CAN communication system. Refer to BRC-50, "CAN Communication System Description" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Reconnect the connectors, and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Revision: March 2005 BRC-86 2005 Altima WHEEL SENSORS [TCS/ABS] WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation PFP:47910 A EFS0048V B C D E BRC LFIA0078E CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires making the sensor inoperative. CAUTION: Pull out the sensor being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten mounting bolts and nuts to the specified torque. ● Check if foreign objects such as iron fragments are adhered to the pick-up part of the sensor or to the inside of the hole for mounting the sensor, or if a foreign object is caught in the surface of the mounting for the rotor. If something wrong is found, fix it and then install the sensor. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 BRC-87 2005 Altima SENSOR ROTOR [TCS/ABS] SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation PFP:47970 EFS0048W NOTE: The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" . REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the front wheel hub. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller. LFIA0079E INSTALLATION Install the sensor rotor using a hammer and a wooden block. ● Always replace sensor rotor with new one. LFIA0083E Revision: March 2005 BRC-88 2005 Altima ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [TCS/ABS] ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation PFP:47660 A EFS0048X B C D E BRC G H I LFIA0085E REMOVAL J 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K 6. Disconnect negative battery cable. Remove windshield wiper and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" . Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Changing Brake Fluid" . Disconnect harness connectors from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Disconnect brake pipes. NOTE: Make note of pipe mounting locations. Remove nuts and bolts for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and remove from vehicle. INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installation of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake fluid. Then bleed air from system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" . 1. Position ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) in vehicle. 2. Install and tighten ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) nuts and bolts. 3. Install brake pipes to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), then tighten flare nuts. Refer to BRC-5, "Hydraulic Circuit" . 4. Connect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connectors. 5. Install windshield wiper and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "INSTALLATION" . 6. Reconnect battery cable. Revision: March 2005 BRC-89 2005 Altima L M ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [TCS/ABS] Revision: March 2005 BRC-90 2005 Altima C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SECTION CL CLUTCH A B CL D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART ....................... 4 CLUTCH PEDAL ........................................................ 5 Components ............................................................. 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 5 On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment ..................... 6 CLUTCH FLUID .......................................................... 7 Air Bleeding Procedure ............................................ 7 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 8 Components ............................................................. 8 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ............................... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 CLUTCH RESERVOIR TANK .................................. 9 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 9 DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 9 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................. 9 ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 9 OPERATING CYLINDER ...........................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 Revision: March 2005 INSTALLATION ................................................... 11 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 11 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 11 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 12 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 12 CLUTCH PIPING ....................................................... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM ........................... 14 Removal and Installation (5 M/T models) ............... 14 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 14 INSTALLATION ................................................... 15 Removal and Installation (6 M/T models) ............... 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 16 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL... 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 REMOVAL ........................................................... 18 INSTALLATION ................................................... 18 Inspection and Adjustment after Removal .............. 19 CLUTCH DISC .................................................... 19 CLUTCH COVER ................................................ 19 FLYWHEEL ......................................................... 19 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 20 Clutch Control System ............................................ 20 Clutch Master Cylinder ........................................... 20 Clutch Operating Cylinder ...................................... 20 Clutch Disc ............................................................. 20 Clutch Cover ........................................................... 20 Clutch Pedal ........................................................... 20 CL-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions PFP:00001 ECS00939 Recommended fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. ● When removing and installing clutch piping, use Tool. ● Use new brake fluid to clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and operating cylinder. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. It will ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system. WARNING: After cleaning clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Do not use compressed air. ● Revision: March 2005 CL-2 SBR686C 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS0093A The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name ST20630000 (J-26366) Clutch aligning bar B Installing clutch cover and clutch disc a: 15.8 mm (0.622 in) dia. b: 22.9 mm (0.902 in) dia. c: 45.0 mm (1.772 in) CL D NT405 ST20050240 ( — ) Diaphragm spring adjusting wrench Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring of clutch cover a: 150 mm (5.91 in) b: 25 mm (0.98 in) NT404 E F G Commercial Service Tools ECS0093B Tool name Description 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing clutch piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) H I J NT360 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts K L PBIC0190E M Revision: March 2005 CL-3 2005 Altima Symptom Revision: March 2005 Clutch grabs/chatters Clutch pedal spongy 1 Clutch noisy 2 3 4 CL-4 CL-9 OPERATING CYLINDER PISTON CUP (Damaged) CL-19 CL-19 CL-19 CL-19 CL-19 CL-19 CL-19 CL-19 CLUTCH DISC (Dirty or burned) CLUTCH DISC (Oily) CLUTCH DISC (Worn out) CLUTCH DISC (Hardened) CLUTCH DISC (Lack of spline grease) DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Damaged) DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Out of tip alignment) PRESSURE PLATE (Distortion) FLYWHEEL (Distortion) NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 2 2 2 4 5 2 5 5 5 5 2 2 5 3 5 6 6 CL-19, "FLYWHEEL" CL-19 CLUTCH DISC (Lining broken) EM-71, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-219, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE) CL-5 MASTER CYLINDER PISTON CUP (Damaged) CL-19 1 CLUTCH DISC (Runout is excessive) Clutch does not disengage CL-19 1 CLUTCH DISC (Out of true) 1 2 CL-12 1 RELEASE BEARING (Worn, dirty or damaged) Clutch slips 2 ENGINE MOUNTING (Loose) CL-7 CLUTCH LINE (Air in line) SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause) CL-6 Reference page CLUTCH PEDAL (Inspection and adjustment) NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 ECS0093C Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. 2 7 2005 Altima CLUTCH PEDAL CLUTCH PEDAL Components PFP:46540 A ECS0093D B CL D E F G WCIA0436E 1. Clutch pedal bracket 2. Clutch interlock switch 3. Bushing 4. Assist spring 5. Bushing 6. Snap pin 7. Stopper rubber 8. Clutch pedal 9. Stopper bolt 10. ASCD clutch switch H 11. Clevis pin Removal and Installation ECS0093E I Refer to CL-5, "Components" . INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● J Inspect clutch for bending, damage and welding cracks. Replace if necessary. Make sure that the assist spring and return spring have not lost their spring. Replace if necessary. K L M Revision: March 2005 CL-5 2005 Altima CLUTCH PEDAL On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment 1. a. b. c. d. 2. a. b. ECS0093F Check to see if the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch pedal. If the pin is not free, check that the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt is not applying pressure to the clutch pedal causing the pin to bind. To adjust, loosen the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt lock nut and turn the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt. Tighten the lock nut. Verify that the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch pedal. If the pin is still not free, remove the pin and check for deformation or damage. Replace the pin if necessary. Leave the pin removed for step 2. Check the clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement. With the clutch pedal clevis pin removed, manually move the pedal up and down to determine if it moves freely. If any sticking is noted, replace the related parts (clutch pedal, pedal bracket, assist spring and bushing). Reassemble the pedal and re-verify that the clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the pedal. WCIA0146E 3. Adjust the clearance “C” while fully depressing the clutch pedal (with the clutch interlock switch) as shown. Clearance “C” 4. a. b. : 0.1 - 1.0 mm (0.004 - 0.039 in) Check the clutch hydraulic system components (clutch master cylinder, clutch operating cylinder, Clutch withdrawal lever and clutch release bearing) for sticking or binding. If any sticking or binding is noted, repair or replace the related parts as necessary. If the hydraulic system was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" . NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or power bleeder will not purge all of the air from the system. SCL800 Revision: March 2005 CL-6 2005 Altima CLUTCH FLUID CLUTCH FLUID Air Bleeding Procedure PFP:00017 A ECS0093G NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or B power bleeder will not purge all the air from the system. ● Bleed air according to the following procedure. ● Carefully monitor fluid level at reservoir tank during bleeding operation. CL ● When bleeding the air from the clutch fluid, first bleed the air from the operating cylinder air bleed valve and then from the bleed connector air bleed valve. 1. Top off reservoir with new recommended brake fluid. D 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to the air bleeder valve on the clutch operating cylinder. E F G WCIA0199E 3. 4. 5. 6. Fully depress the clutch pedal several times. With clutch pedal depressed, open the bleeder valve to release air. Close the bleeder valve. Repeat steps 3 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of the air bleeder valve. Air bleeder valve 7. H I : 5.9 - 9.8 N·m (0.6 - 1.0 kg-m, 52 - 87 in-lb) Perform steps 1 through 6 for bleeding air from the air bleeder valve on the bleed connector. J K L LCIA0102E Revision: March 2005 CL-7 2005 Altima M CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER Components PFP:30610 ECS0093H WCIA0429E 1. Clutch master cylinder 2. Return spring 3. Piston assembly 4. Push rod 5. Stopper 6. Stopper ring 7. Dust cover 8. Clevis 9. Hose clamp 10. Hose 11. Reservoir cap 12. Reservoir tank 13. Bracket 14. Nipple 15. Pin CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ECS0093I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove clutch line using a flare nut wrench. Remove hose clamp and hose from clutch master cylinder. Remove snap pin from clevis pin, then remove clevis pin from push rod and clevis. Remove the clutch master cylinder nuts, then remove the clutch master cylinder from the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Check position of clevis and push rod. If measurement is outside standard length, adjust position of clevis and push rod. Length “L” 2. : 119.5 mm (4.70 in) Connect the clutch line to the master cylinder assembly, and hand-tighten the flare nut. SCIA5158E 3. Install the master cylinder assembly, tighten the nuts to specification. Clutch master cylinder nuts 4. 5. : 7.8 – 10.8 N·m (0.8 – 1.6 kg-m, 9 – 12 ft-lb) Install clutch reservoir tank hose and hose clamp to the clutch master cylinder assembly. Tighten the clutch line flare nut to specification using a flare nut torque wrench. Revision: March 2005 CL-8 2005 Altima CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER Clutch line flare nut 6. 7. 8. : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 – 1.8 kg-m, 11 – 13 ft-lb) A Attach clevis and clevis pin to clutch pedal. Attach snap pin to clevis pin. Inspect and adjust the clutch pedal and bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-6, "Onvehicle Inspection and Adjustment" and CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" . CLUTCH RESERVOIR TANK ECS0093J REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove the clamp, then remove the hose from the clutch reservoir tank. Remove the clutch reservoir tank to bracket nuts, then remove the clutch reservoir tank from the vehicle. B CL D E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Install the clutch reservoir tank and nuts to the bracket and hand-tighten. Install the hose and clamp to the clutch reservoir tank. Tighten the clutch reservoir tank nuts to specified torque. Reservoir tank bracket bolts Reservoir tank to bracket nuts (for QR25DE engine models) (for VQ35DE engine models) F G : 5.1 – 6.5 N·m (0.52 – 0.66 kg-m, 46 – 57 in-lb) : 2.9 – 5.9 N·m (0.3 – 0.6 kg-m, 26 – 52 in-lb) : 5.1 – 6.5 N·m (0.52 – 0.66 kg-m, 46 – 57 in-lb) Disassembly and Assembly H ECS0093K DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the push rod lock nut “A”, then remove clevis and lock nut “A” if necessary. CAUTION: Clutch pedal height is controlled with position of clevis and push rod. Remove the dust cover. Remove the stopper ring and stopper, and remove the push rod from the cylinder body. During removal, keep the push rod depressed, to prevent the piston inside master cylinder from popping out. Remove the piston assembly from the cylinder body. J K L SCL725 M INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Inspect for the following, and replace parts as necessary. ● Damage, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner wall ● Damage and deformation of the reservoir tank ● Weak spring ● Crack and deformation of the dust cover ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Apply rubber lubricant to the sliding part of piston assembly, and insert piston assembly. After installing stopper to push rod, install a new stopper ring while keeping piston assembly depressed by hand, so that piston assembly will not pop out. CAUTION: Stopper ring cannot be reused. Always use a new stopper ring to assemble. Install dust cover. Install nipple and pin to cylinder body. Install clevis to push rod. Revision: March 2005 I CL-9 2005 Altima CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER 6. Check and adjust position of clevis on push rod. After adjusting “L”, tighten lock nut to the specified torque. Length “L” Lock nut “A” tightening torque : 119.5 mm (4.70 in) : 7.8 - 11.8 N·m (0.8 - 1.2 kg-m, 69 - 104 in-lb) SCIA5158E Revision: March 2005 CL-10 2005 Altima OPERATING CYLINDER OPERATING CYLINDER Removal and Installation PFP:30620 A ECS0093L B CL D E F G WCIA0196E 1. Cylinder body 2. Piston spring 3. Piston cup 4. Piston 5. Push rod 6. Dust cover 7. Air bleeder 8. Union bolt 9. Copper washer 10. Clutch hose H I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Drain brake fluid from hydraulic clutch system. CAUTION: Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove union bolt and clutch hose from operating cylinder. Remove operating cylinder mounting bolts, and remove cylinder from vehicle. J K L M WCIA0197E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Install the clutch hose without twisting it. ● The copper washer of the union bolt cannot be reused. Always use a new copper washer when installing the clutch hose. ● After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" . Disassembly and Assembly ECS0093M DISASSEMBLY ● Remove dust cover, and remove piston assembly from cylinder body. Revision: March 2005 CL-11 2005 Altima OPERATING CYLINDER INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Inspect for following, and replace parts as necessary. ● Damage, foreign material, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner surface, piston, and sliding part of piston cup ● Weak spring ● Crack and deformation of dust cover ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. ● Apply recommended rubber grease to piston cup and piston before assembly. Revision: March 2005 CL-12 2005 Altima CLUTCH PIPING CLUTCH PIPING Removal and Installation PFP:30650 A ECS0093N REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuel filter mounting bracket. Remove air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-120, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE). Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic clutch system. CAUTION: Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Remove flare nut using a flare nut wrench. Remove clutch hose and clutch tube. B CL D WCIA0437E E INSTALLATION 1. When installing clutch hose to bracket, face lock plate in the correct direction as shown to secure clutch hose. CAUTION: Install clutch hose without twisting or bending it. F G H SCL730 2. Tighten flare nut to the specification, using a flare nut wrench. Flare nut 3. : 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb) J CAUTION: Be careful not to damage flare nut and clutch tube. Install clutch hose to operating cylinder, and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque. Clutch hose union bolt 4. I K : 17 - 20 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 ft-lb) L After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" . M WCIA0197E Revision: March 2005 CL-13 2005 Altima CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM Removal and Installation (5 M/T models) PFP:30502 ECS0093O LCIA0030E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove manual transaxle from vehicle. Refer to MT-17, "Removal and Installation" . Move withdrawal lever enough to remove release bearing, and remove release bearing from withdrawal lever. Remove withdrawal lever retainer spring. Pull out withdrawal lever and remove dust cover. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor aligning function. Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally. Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked. SCL733 Revision: March 2005 CL-14 2005 Altima CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: ● Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas. ● Apply grease to the specified points as shown. B CL D E SCL815 Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and holder spring frictional surfaces. ● Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to the grooves on contact surfaces of the withdrawal lever ball pin and inner surface of release bearing; make sure that grease is flush with grooves. ● Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to release bearing frictional surface. After grease application, install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation. CAUTION: ● Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides smoothly by operating withdrawal lever. ● Be careful with the orientation of the installation. ● F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CL-15 2005 Altima CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM Removal and Installation (6 M/T models) ECS00BT2 WCIA0408E 1. Snap spring 2. Release bearing non-separate type 4. Withdrawal lever 5. Dust cover 3. Holder spring CAUTION: When installing the holder spring pay attention to the direction of the bearing retainer. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove manual transaxle from vehicle. Refer to MT-81, "Removal and Installation" . Move withdrawal lever enough to remove release bearing from input shaft, then remove release bearing from withdrawal lever. Remove withdrawal lever snap spring. Pull out withdrawal lever and remove dust cover. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor aligning function. Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally. Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked. SCL733 Revision: March 2005 CL-16 2005 Altima CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: ● Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas. ● Apply grease to the specified points as shown. B CL D E SCL815 Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and holder spring frictional surfaces. ● Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to the grooves on contact surfaces of the withdrawal lever ball pin and inner surface of release bearing; make sure that grease is flush with grooves. ● Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to release bearing frictional surface. After grease application, install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation. CAUTION: ● Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides smoothly by operating withdrawal lever. ● When assembling, make sure that both ends of the snap spring touch the end face of the withdrawal lever. ● Be careful with the orientation of the installation. ● F G H I J K PCIB0837E L M Revision: March 2005 CL-17 2005 Altima CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL Removal and Installation PFP:30100 ECS0093P WCIA0147E 1. Flywheel 2. Clutch disc 4. Washer 5. Main drive shaft 3. Clutch cover CAUTION: ● Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent. ● When installing, do not get grease from the main drive shaft onto the clutch disc friction surface. ● If the flywheel needs to be removed, align the dowel pin with the smallest hole of the flywheel. Refer to EM-78, "ASSEMBLY" in CYLINDER BLOCK (QR25DE), EM-227, "ASSEMBLY" in CYLINDER BLOCK (VQ35DE). REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the manual transaxle from the vehicle. Refer to MT-17, "Removal and Installation" (5 M/T), MT81, "Removal and Installation" (6 M/T). Evenly loosen the bolts holding the clutch cover, using power tool. Then remove the clutch cover and the clutch disc. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not allow grease to contaminate clutch facing. ● Install the clutch cover and disc using Tool. Tool number ● : ST20630000 (J-26366) Tighten the clutch cover bolts in two steps using the numerical order as shown. First step Final step : 10 - 20 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 7 - 14 ft-lb) : 35 - 44 N·m (3.5 - 4.5 kg-m, 26 - 32 ft-lb) WCIA0472E Revision: March 2005 CL-18 2005 Altima CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL Inspection and Adjustment after Removal ECS0093Q A CLUTCH DISC ● Check clutch disc for wear of facing. Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) B CL D SCL229 ● Check clutch disc for backlash of spline and runout of facing. Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of disc) Runout limit Distance of runout check point (from hub center) ● E : 1.0 mm (0.039 in) F QR25DE: 1.0 mm (0.039 in) VQ35DE: 0.7 mm (0.028 in) QR25DE: 230 mm (9.06 in) VQ35DE: 240 mm (9.45 in) Check clutch disc for burns, discoloration or oil or grease leakage. Replace if necessary. G SCL221 H CLUTCH COVER ● Check clutch cover installed on vehicle for unevenness of diaphragm spring toe height. Uneven limit ● I : 1.0 mm (0.039 in) If out of limit, adjust the height using Tool. Tool number : ST20050240 ( J — ) K PCIB0276E FLYWHEEL ● ● Check contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. Repair flywheel with emery paper. Check the flywheel runout. Refer to EM-97, "MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL)" (QR25DE), EM-243, "FLYWHEEL RUNOUT (M/T)" (VQ35DE). M SCL349 Revision: March 2005 CL-19 L 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Clutch Control System PFP:00100 ECS0093R Type of clutch control Hydraulic Clutch Master Cylinder ECS0093S Unit: mm (in) Inner diameter 15.87 (5/8) Clutch Operating Cylinder ECS0093T Unit: mm (in) Engine Inner diameter QR25DE VQ35DE 19.05 (3/4) 17.46 (11/16) Clutch Disc ECS0093U Engine QR25DE VQ35DE Model 240 250 240 mm × 160 mm × 3.5 mm (9.45 in × 6.30 in × 0.138 in) 250 mm × 170 mm × 3.2 mm (9.84 in × 6.69 in × 0.126 in) 8.1 mm (0.319 in) with 5,884 N (600 kg, 1,323 lb) 7.4 mm (0.291 in) with 8,340 N (850 kg, 1875 lb) Facing size (Outer dia. × inner dia. × thickness) Thickness of disc assembly With load Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head 0.3 mm (0.012 in) Facing runout limit 1.0 mm (0.039 in) 0.7 mm (0.028 in) Distance of runout check point (from the hub center) 230 mm (9.06 in) 240 mm (9.45 in) Maximum spline backlash (at outer edge of disc) 1.0 mm (0.039 in) Clutch Cover ECS0093V Engine QR25DE VQ35DE Model 240 250 5,884 N (600 kg, 1,323 lb) 8,340 N (850 kg, 1,875 lb) 38 mm (1.50 in) 40.5 (1.59 in) Set load Set height Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height 1.0 mm (0.039 in) Clutch Pedal ECS0093W Unit: mm (in) Clearance “C” between pedal stopper rubber and clutch interlock switch threaded end while clutch pedal is fully depressed. Revision: March 2005 CL-20 0.1 - 1.0 (0.004 - 0.039) 2005 Altima B ENGINE SECTION CO ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM A CO C D E CONTENTS QR25DE PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 3 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 3 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 5 Special Service Tools ............................................... 5 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 5 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .......................... 6 Troubleshooting Chart .............................................. 6 COOLING SYSTEM .................................................... 7 Cooling Circuit .......................................................... 7 System Drawing ....................................................... 8 ENGINE COOLANT .................................................... 9 System Check .......................................................... 9 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ............ 9 CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ......................... 9 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS..... 9 CHECKING RADIATOR CAP ................................ 9 CHECKING RADIATOR ...................................... 10 Refilling Engine Coolant ......................................... 10 RADIATOR .................................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 INSPECTION .......................................................11 COOLINGFAN .......................................................... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 13 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 13 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 13 Revision: March 2005 WATER PUMP .......................................................... 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 15 INSTALLATION ................................................... 15 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 15 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING ...... 16 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 17 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 WATER CONTROL VALVE ....................................... 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 REMOVAL ........................................................... 18 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 19 INSTALLATION ................................................... 19 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 20 Capacity .................................................................. 20 Thermostat ............................................................. 20 Water Control Valve ................................................ 20 Radiator .................................................................. 20 VQ35DE G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 21 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 21 Precautions for Liquid Gasket ................................ 21 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ........ 21 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE... 21 PREPARATION ......................................................... 23 Special Service Tools ............................................. 23 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 23 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS ........................ 24 Troubleshooting Chart ............................................ 24 COOLING SYSTEM .................................................. 26 Cooling Circuit ........................................................ 26 System Drawing ..................................................... 27 CO-1 F 2005 Altima ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 28 System Check ........................................................ 28 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ........... 28 CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ....................... 28 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS ... 28 CHECKING RADIATOR CAP .............................. 28 CHECKING RADIATOR ...................................... 29 Refilling Engine Coolant ......................................... 29 RADIATOR ................................................................ 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 30 REMOVAL ........................................................... 30 INSTALLATION .................................................... 30 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 31 PREPARATION ................................................... 31 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 31 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 32 INSPECTION ....................................................... 34 Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan .......... 35 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 35 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 35 COOLINGFAN ........................................................... 36 Removal and Installation ........................................ 36 REMOVAL ........................................................... 36 Revision: March 2005 INSTALLATION ....................................................36 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................36 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................36 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................36 WATER PUMP ...........................................................37 Removal and Installation .........................................37 REMOVAL ............................................................37 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................39 INSTALLATION ....................................................39 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING .......42 Removal and Installation .........................................42 REMOVAL ............................................................42 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................42 INSTALLATION ....................................................43 WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING ...................44 Removal and Installation .........................................44 REMOVAL ............................................................44 INSTALLATION ....................................................44 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......45 Capacity ..................................................................45 Thermostat ..............................................................45 Radiator ..................................................................45 CO-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EBS00J7B The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along CO with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00M84 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket sealing. Tool number ● ● H : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as shown in the figure. In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove it. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. I J K WBIA0566E L LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper. ● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. M PBIC0003E Revision: March 2005 CO-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] 3. Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool. Tool number 4. : WS39930000 ( — ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. ● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove. WBIA0567E As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of service manual. ● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. ● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation. ● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. ● Revision: March 2005 CO-4 SEM159F 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00J7D The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those tools illustrated here. CO Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket C D S-NT052 EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter E Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator filler neck: a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) G S-NT564 KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter F Removing chain tensioner cover and water pump cover H I NT046 — (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant J K WBIA0539E Commercial Service Tools EBS00J7E Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts M PBIC0190E Revision: March 2005 CO-5 L 2005 Altima OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS [QR25DE] OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00012 EBS00J7F Symptom Poor heat transfer Check items Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt Thermostat stuck closed Coolant circulation Damaged fins Dust contamination or rock clogging — Mechanical damage Clogged radiator cooling tube Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.) Cooling fan does not operate Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rotation Engine cooling fans — Damaged fan blades Cooling system parts malfunction Damaged radiator shroud — — — Improper coolant mixture ratio — — — Poor coolant quality — Periodic maintenance Cooling hose — Loose clamp Cracked hose Water pump Radiator cap Poor sealing Loose Poor sealing Coolant leaks O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting Insufficient coolant Radiator Cracked radiator tank Cracked radiator core Reservoir tank Overflowing reservoir tank Exhaust gas leaks into cooling system Cracked reservoir tank Cylinder head deterioration Cylinder head gasket deterioration High engine rpm under no load Abusive driving Driving in low gear for extended time Driving at extremely high speed — Overload on engine Except cooling system parts malfunction Powertrain system malfunction Installed improper size wheels and tires — Dragging brakes Improper ignition timing Blocked radiator grille Installed car brassiere Blocked bumper Blocked or restricted air flow Blocked radiator Blocked condenser Mud contamination or paper clogging — Installed large fog lamp Revision: March 2005 CO-6 2005 Altima COOLING SYSTEM [QR25DE] COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Circuit PFP:21020 A EBS00J7G CO C D E F G H I WBIA0143E J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-7 2005 Altima COOLING SYSTEM [QR25DE] System Drawing EBS00M85 PBIC0280E Revision: March 2005 CO-8 2005 Altima ENGINE COOLANT [QR25DE] ENGINE COOLANT System Check PFP:KQ100 A EBS00M86 WARNING: ● Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pres- CO sure fluid escaping from the radiator. ● Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way. C CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ● Improper attachment ● Leaks ● Cracks ● Damage ● Loose connections ● Chafing ● Deterioration D E F CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ● ● G Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool. Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little. H I SMA412B J CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Tool number K : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Testing pressure L : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. M WBIA0568E CHECKING RADIATOR CAP 1. Inspect the radiator cap. ● Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket. ● Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer. NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. Revision: March 2005 CO-9 2005 Altima ENGINE COOLANT [QR25DE] 2. Pull the negative-pressure valve to open it and check that it closes completely when released. ● Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of the radiator cap negative-pressure valve. ● Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and closing conditions of the negative-pressure valve. SMA967B 3. Check radiator cap relief pressure using Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Standard: 78 – 98 kPa (0.8 – 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 – 14 psi) Limit: 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi) ● ● When connecting the radiator cap to the tester, apply water or coolant to the cap seal surface. Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the standard values. WBIA0570E CHECKING RADIATOR Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. ● Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ● When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with the air hose pointed vertically downward. ● 5. 6. Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. Check for leaks. Refilling Engine Coolant EBS00M87 Changing the engine coolant is part of the required maintenance of the engine. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Revision: March 2005 CO-10 2005 Altima RADIATOR [QR25DE] RADIATOR Removal and Installation PFP:21400 A EBS00T3Y CO C D E F G H I WBIA0146E 1. Radiator 2. Bracket 3. Mounting rubber 4. A/T oil cooler hose (if equipped) 5. Radiator hose (lower) 6. Radiator fan assembly 7. Reservoir tank 8. Radiator hose (upper) 9. Radiator filler cap J WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by turning it all the way. K L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain the coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. Remove fresh air duct. Refer to EM-17, “Removal and Installation”. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses. Remove the A/T fluid cooler hoses, if equipped. ● Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. Disconnect the reservoir tank hose. Revision: March 2005 CO-11 M 2005 Altima RADIATOR [QR25DE] 6. 7. 8. Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to release the lock, as shown. CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not pull lock tabs excessively. Remove the cooling fan assemly to radiator bolts. Remove the radiator. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and radiator core when removing. PBIC1216E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ● Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”. INSPECTION Radiator 1. a. b. c. d. Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows: ● Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ● When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, point the hose vertically downward. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. Stop washing when no more dirt flows off the radiator. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, point the air hose vertically downward. e. 2. a. Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. Inspect radiator for leaks as follows: Apply pressure using Tool. ● Specified pressure value : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp. Attach a hose to the oil cooler as well (A/T model only). SLC933 b. Check for leakage. SLC934 Revision: March 2005 CO-12 2005 Altima COOLINGFAN [QR25DE] COOLINGFAN Removal and Installation PFP:21060 A EBS00T3Z WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur form high pressure CO coolant escaping from the radiator REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. Remove air cleaner duct assembly. Refer to EM-17, “Removal and Installation”. Disconnect radiator upper hose. Disconnect fan motor connectors. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. D E INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. ● Cooling fan is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-421, DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE”. F Disassembly and Assembly G EBS00T40 H I J K L M WBIA0362E 1. Fan blade 2. Fan shroud 3. Fan motor DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove fans from fan motors. Remove fan motors from fan shroud. ASSEMBLY Install in the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: March 2005 CO-13 2005 Altima WATER PUMP [QR25DE] WATER PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:21020 EBS00J7O KBIA0154E 1. Water pump 4. Water pipe 2. Gasket 3. Water pump housing WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL 1. Drain coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" . CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove engine undercover using power tools. 3. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Remove engine cover using power tools. 5. Remove engine coolant reservoir. 6. Remove IPDM E/R (set aside). Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . 7. Remove RH wheel and tire assembly. 8. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . 9. Remove engine ground strap. 10. Remove the water pump. NOTE: If necessary, the generator and exhaust manifold catalytic convertor assembly must be removed to remove the water pipe. CAUTION: ● Handle the water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts. ● Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as an assembly. Revision: March 2005 CO-14 2005 Altima WATER PUMP [QR25DE] INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● A Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rusting on the water pump body and vane. Check that there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by hand. If the water pump does not perform properly, replace the water pump assembly. CO C KBIA0155E D INSTALLATION ● ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When inserting water pipe end to cylinder block, apply a neutral detergent to O-ring. Then insert it immediately. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● E F After installing the water pump, check for leaks using the radiator cap tester. Refer to CO-11, "INSPECTION" . G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-15 2005 Altima THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [QR25DE] THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING Removal and Installation PFP:21200 EBS00J7P WBIA0010E 1. Thermostat 2. Engine coolant inlet 3. Water control valve 4. Engine coolant outlet 5. Heater hose 6. Engine coolant temperature sensor 7. Heater pipe 8. Electric throttle control actuator inlet hose 9. Electric throttle control actuator outlet hose WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" . 2. Remove radiator lower hose from the engine coolant inlet side. 3. Remove engine coolant inlet and thermostat. Revision: March 2005 CO-16 2005 Altima THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [QR25DE] INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● ● Place a thread so that it is caught in the valves of the thermostat. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and the falls from the thread. Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount. NOTE: The full-open lift amount standard temperature for the thermostat is the reference value. After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. Thermostat Standard Values Valve opening temperature 80.5 – 83.5°C (177 – 182°F) Valve lift More than 8 mm / 95°C (0.315 in / 203°F) Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F) or higher A CO C SLC252B D E F INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install the engine coolant temperature sensor. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of the flange part fitting securely inside the rubber ring. ● Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. The position deviation may be within the range of ±10°. ● If necessary, to install the heater pipe, first apply a mild detergent to the O-ring and then quickly insert the pipe into the housing. G H I J PBIC0157E K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-17 2005 Altima WATER CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] WATER CONTROL VALVE Removal and Installation PFP:21230 EBS00J7Q WBIA0010E 1. Thermostat 2. Engine coolant inlet 3. Water control valve 4. Engine coolant outlet 5. Heater hose 6. Engine coolant temperature sensor 7. Heater pipe 8. Electric throttle control actuator inlet hose 9. Electric throttle control actuator outlet hose WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL CAUTION: Perform when the engine cold. 1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" . 2. Remove the upper radiator hose, heater pipe, electric throttle control actuator inlet hose, and heater hose. 3. Remove the engine coolant outlet. 4. Remove the water control valve. Revision: March 2005 CO-18 2005 Altima WATER CONTROL VALVE [QR25DE] INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● ● Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the water control valve. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and the falls from the thread. Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount. NOTE: The full-open lift amount standard temperature for the water control valve is the reference value. After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. A CO C SLC252B D Standard values Water Control Valve Standard Value Valve opening temperature 93.5° - 96.5°C (200° - 206°F) Full-open lift amount More than 8 mm / 108°C (0.315 in / 226° F) Valve closing temperature 90°C (194° F) or higher E F INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install the engine coolant temperature sensor. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Install the water control valve with the whole circumference of the flange part fitting securely inside the rubber ring. ● Install the water control valve with the up-mark facing up and the frame center part facing upwards. The position deviation may be within the range of ±10°. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-19 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Capacity PFP:00030 EBS00J7R (US gal, Imp gal) Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level) 7.6 (2, 1 5/8) Thermostat EBS00J7S Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F) Valve lift More than 8 mm / 95°C (0.315 in / 203°F) Water Control Valve EBS00J7T Valve opening temperature 93.5-96.5°C (200-206°F) Valve lift More than 8 mm / 108°C (0.315 in / 226°F) Radiator EBS00J7U 2 Unit: kPa (kg / cm , psi) Cap relief pressure Standard 78 - 98 (0.8 - 1.0, 11 - 14) Limit 59 (0.6, 9) Leakage test pressure Revision: March 2005 157 (1.6, 23) CO-20 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ35DE] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EBS00J7V The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along CO with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00M88 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket sealing. Tool number ● ● H : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as shown in the figure. In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove it. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. I J K WBIA0566E L LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper. ● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. M PBIC0003E Revision: March 2005 CO-21 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ35DE] 3. Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool. Tool number 4. : WS39930000 ( — ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. ● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove. WBIA0567E As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of service manual. ● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. ● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation. ● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. ● Revision: March 2005 CO-22 SEM159F 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ35DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00J7X The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name WS39930000 ( — ) Tube pressure CO Pressing the tube of liquid gasket C D S-NT052 EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter E F G Removing chain tensioner cover and water pump cover H I NT046 — (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant J K WBIA0539E Commercial Service Tools EBS00J7Y Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts L M PBIC0190E Revision: March 2005 CO-23 2005 Altima OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS [VQ35DE] OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00012 EBS00J7Z Symptom Check items Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt Thermostat stuck closed Poor heat transfer — Dust contamination or paper clogging Damaged fins — Physical damage Clogged radiator cooling tube Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.) Cooling fan does not operate Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rotation Fan assembly — Damaged fan blades Cooling system parts malfunction Damaged radiator shroud — — — Improper coolant mixture ratio — — — Poor coolant quality — Coolant viscosity — Cooling hose Loose clamp Cracked hose Water pump Radiator cap Poor sealing Loose Poor sealing Coolant leaks O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting Insufficient coolant Radiator Cracked radiator tank Cracked radiator core Reservoir tank Overflowing reservoir tank Revision: March 2005 CO-24 Exhaust gas leaks into cooling system Cracked reservoir tank Cylinder head deterioration Cylinder head gasket deterioration 2005 Altima OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS [VQ35DE] Symptom Check items High engine rpm under no load Abusive driving Driving in low gear for extended time A CO Driving at extremely high speed — Overload on engine Installed improper size wheels and tires Except cooling system parts malfunction C Powertrain system malfunction — D Dragging brakes Improper ignition timing Blocked bumper E — Installed car brassiere Blocked radiator grille Blocked or restricted air flow Blocked radiator Blocked condenser Mud contamination or paper clogging F — — G Blocked air flow Installed large fog lamp H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-25 2005 Altima COOLING SYSTEM [VQ35DE] COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Circuit PFP:21020 EBS00J80 WBIA0558E 1. Cylinder block (RH) 2. Oil cooler 3. Cylinder head (RH) 4. Water pump 5. Radiator 6. Water inlet 7. Thermostat 8. Cylinder head (LH) 9. Cylinder block (LH) Revision: March 2005 CO-26 2005 Altima COOLING SYSTEM [VQ35DE] System Drawing EBS00M89 A CO C D E F G H WBIA0562E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-27 2005 Altima ENGINE COOLANT [VQ35DE] ENGINE COOLANT System Check PFP:KQ100 EBS00M8A WARNING: ● Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. ● Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ● Improper attachment ● Leaks ● Cracks ● Damage ● Loose connections ● Chafing ● Deterioration CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ● ● Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool. Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little. SMA412B CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Testing pressure : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. WBIA0568E CHECKING RADIATOR CAP 1. Inspect the radiator cap. ● Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket. ● Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer. NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. Revision: March 2005 CO-28 2005 Altima ENGINE COOLANT [VQ35DE] 2. Pull the negative-pressure valve to open it and check that it closes completely when released. ● Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of the radiator cap negative-pressure valve. ● Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and closing conditions of the negative-pressure valve. A CO C SMA967B D 3. Check radiator cap relief pressure using Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) E Standard: 78 – 98 kPa (0.8 – 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 – 14 psi) Limit: 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi) ● ● When connecting the radiator cap to the tester, apply water or coolant to the cap seal surface. Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the standard values. F G WBIA0570E CHECKING RADIATOR H Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. ● Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ● When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with the air hose pointed vertically downward. ● 5. 6. Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. Check for leaks. Refilling Engine Coolant J K L EBS00M8B Changing the engine coolant is part of the required maintenance of the engine. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Revision: March 2005 I CO-29 2005 Altima M RADIATOR [VQ35DE] RADIATOR Removal and Installation PFP:21400 EBS00T52 WBIA0282E 1. Radiator 2. Radiator upper clip 3. Mounting rubber 4. A/T fluid cooler hose (if equipped) 5. Radiator hose (lower) 6. Radiator fan assembly 7. Reservoir tank 8. Radiator hose (upper) 9. Radiator cap 10. Radiator core connection 11. Radiator drain plug WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain the coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-22, “Changing Engine Coolant”. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. Remove fresh air duct. Refer to EM-120, “Removal and Installation”. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses. Remove the A/T fluid cooler hoses, if equipped. ● Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. Disconnect the reservoir tank hose. Revision: March 2005 CO-30 2005 Altima RADIATOR [VQ35DE] 6. 7. 8. Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to release the lock, as shown. CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not pull lock tabs excessively. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly to radiator bolts. Remove the radiator assembly. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and radiator core when removing. A CO C PBIC1216E D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ● Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to MA-22, “Changing Engine Coolant”. E Installation of Radiator Upper Clip ● 1. 2. 3. Install radiator upper clip on radiator core connection with the following procedure: Install the rubber on mounting pin of radiator core. Align the radiator upper clip with the radiator core connection, then insert the radiator upper clip straight into the radiator core connections until a click is heard. After connecting the radiator upper clip, use the following method to make sure it is fully connected. ● Visually confirm that the two radiator upper clips are connected to the radiator core connections. ● Move the radiator upper clip and the radiator forward and backward to make sure they are securely connected. Disassembly and Assembly F G H PBIC1241E I EBS00T53 J K L M SLC882AB Revision: March 2005 CO-31 2005 Altima RADIATOR [VQ35DE] PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. Attach the spacer to the tip of the Tool. Spacer specification: 1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick x 18 mm (0.71 in) wide x 8.5 mm (0.335 in) long. Make sure that when Tool is closed dimension H′′ is approx. 7.6 mm (0.299 in). Adjust dimension H′′ with the spacer, if necessary. SLC655CB DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the tank using Tool. Tool number : KV99103520 ( — ) SLC903-A ● Grip the crimped edge and bend it upwards so that Tool slips off. CAUTION: Do not bend excessively. SLC893 ● 2. In areas where the Tool cannot be used, use a suitable tool to bend the edge up. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage tank. Remove sealing rubber. SLC930 Revision: March 2005 CO-32 2005 Altima RADIATOR [VQ35DE] 3. 4. Make sure the edge stands straight up, using a suitable tool. Remove oil cooler from tank (if equipped). A CO C SLC931 D ASSEMBLY 1. Install the oil cooler (if equipped). NOTE: Pay attention to direction of conical washer. E F G SLC894 2. H Clean the contact portion of the tank. I J K SLC932 3. Install sealing rubber by pushing it in with your fingers. CAUTION: Be careful not to twist sealing rubber gasket. L M SLC917A Revision: March 2005 CO-33 2005 Altima RADIATOR [VQ35DE] 4. Crimp tank in specified sequence using Tool. Tool number : KV99103510 ( — ) SLC904-A SLC896 ● In the locations where Tool cannot be used use a suitable tool. SLC897 5. Make sure that the rim is completely crimped down. Standard height “H” 6. : 8.0 – 8.4 mm (0.315 – 0.331 in) Confirm that there is no leakage. Refer to CO-35, “INSPECTION”. SLC554A Revision: March 2005 CO-34 2005 Altima RADIATOR [VQ35DE] INSPECTION 1. A Apply pressure using Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Specified pressure value WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp. CAUTION: Attach a hose to the oil cooler as well (if equipped). 2. CO : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) C SLC933-A Place radiator in water filled tank and check for leakage. D E F G SLC934 H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-35 2005 Altima COOLING FAN [VQ35DE] COOLING FAN Removal and Installation PFP:21140 EBS00T54 WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur form high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-22, “Changing Engine Coolant”. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. Remove air cleaner duct assembly. Refer to EM-120, “Removal and Installation”. Disconnect radiator upper hose. Disconnect fan motor connectors. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. ● Cooling fan is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-1111, “DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE”. Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan EBS00T55 WBIA0362E 1. Fan blade 2. Fan shroud 3. Fan motor DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove fan blade. Remove fan motor from fan shroud. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: March 2005 CO-36 2005 Altima WATER PUMP [VQ35DE] WATER PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:21020 A EBS00J85 CO C D E F WBIA0067E CAUTION: ● When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt. ● Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. ● After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove undercover, using power tools. Drain coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" . CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 3. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Reposition IPDM/ER aside. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . 5. Remove RH wheel and tire and the splash shield. 6. Remove drive belts. 7. Remove idler pulley, then the power steering and generator adjusting bars. 8. Support engine and remove the front engine insulator and bracket. Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" . 9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. 10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. 11. Remove the chain tensioner assembly. a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab. PBIC0846E Revision: March 2005 CO-37 2005 Altima G H I J K L M WATER PUMP [VQ35DE] b. Insert the stopper pin into the tensioner body hole to hold the lever and keep the stopper tab released. NOTE: An allen wrench [(2.5 mm (0.98 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example. SLC444B c. d. e. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide. Keep the slack guide pressed and hold the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through the lever and into the tensioner body hole Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise. PBIC0848E 12. Remove chain tensioner. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside chain case. PBIC0849E 13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water pump sprocket. PBIC0850E Revision: March 2005 CO-38 2005 Altima WATER PUMP [VQ35DE] 14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm (1.97 in)] into water pumps upper and lower bolt holes until they reach the timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out the water pump. ● Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area. ● Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain. 15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump. A CO C JLC357B D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. 2. Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. E F G SLC943A INSTALLATION 1. 2. H Install new O-rings to water pump. Apply engine oil and coolant to the O-rings as shown. ● Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side. I J K PBIC0855E L 3. Install the water pump. CAUTION: Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings when installing the water pump. ● Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. ● Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. Water pump bolts M 8.5 – 10.7 N·m (0.86 – 1.10 kg-m, 75 – 95 in-lb) SLC031B 4. Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of chain tensioner and from installation area of rear timing chain case. Revision: March 2005 CO-39 2005 Altima WATER PUMP [VQ35DE] 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that the timing chain on the timing chain tensioner side is loose. NOTE: When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner. PBIC0848E 6. Install the timing chain tensioner. Timing chain tensioner bolts 7. 7.0 – 9.3 N·m (0.71 – 0.95 kg-m, 62 – 82 in-lb) Remove the stopper pin. SLC448B 8. a. Install chain tensioner and water pump cover. Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the front cover. SLC446B b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent, to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SLC447B 9. Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" . 10. Install idler pulley. Idler pulley bolts : 25 - 31 N·m (2.5 - 3.2 kg-m, 18 - 23 ft-lb) 11. Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 CO-40 2005 Altima WATER PUMP [VQ35DE] ● ● Refill engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" . After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. A CO C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-41 2005 Altima THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [VQ35DE] THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING Removal and Installation PFP:21200 EBS00J86 WBIA0068E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove engine undercover using power tool. Drain coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" . CAUTION: Perform when engine is cool. Remove drive belts. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" . Remove water drain plug on water pump side of the engine. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Disconnect lower radiator hose. Remove engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly. ● Do not disassemble engine coolant inlet and thermostat. Replace them as a unit, if necessary. SLC962AA INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. 2. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift. Thermostat Valve opening temperature Valve lift 3. Standard Values 82°C (180°F) 8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F) Then check if valve closes at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. SLC949A Revision: March 2005 CO-42 2005 Altima THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING [VQ35DE] INSTALLATION 1. 2. A Install thermostat with jiggle valve facing upward. ● After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and check for leaks. ● Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment. Use a rag to absorb coolant. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CO C SLC948A D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-43 2005 Altima WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING [VQ35DE] WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation PFP:11060 EBS00J87 WBIA0281E 1. Water outlet 2. Gasket 3. O-ring 4. Heater pipe 5. Water connector 6. Water bypass pipe 7. Engine coolant temperature sensor 8. Washer REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove engine undercover using power tools Drain coolant from drain plugs on radiator and both sides of cylinder block. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. Remove engine cover using power tool. Remove air duct and air cleaner case assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . Remove radiator upper hose and heater hose. Remove connector(s) from heater pipe. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector on water outlet. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water connector, and water bypass pipe nuts and bolts. INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Securely insert each hose, and install a clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge. ● When inserting a water pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring. ● Refill engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" . Revision: March 2005 CO-44 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Capacity PFP:00100 A EBS00J88 (US gal, Imp gal) Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level) CO 8.2 (2 1/8, 1 3/4) Thermostat EBS00J89 Valve opening temperature C 82°C (180°F) Valve lift 8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F) Radiator EBS00J8A D Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Cap relief pressure Standard 78 – 98 (0.8 – 1.0, 11 – 14) Limit 59 (0.6, 9) Leakage test pressure E 157 (1.6, 23) F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 CO-45 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Revision: March 2005 CO-46 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION DI DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 COMBINATION METERS ........................................... 4 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 4 System Description .................................................. 4 UNIFIED CONTROL METER ................................ 4 HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/ TRIP METER ........................................................ 4 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 5 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 5 TACHOMETER ..................................................... 5 FUEL GAUGE ....................................................... 5 SPEEDOMETER (WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T)..... 6 SPEEDOMETER (WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T) ....................................................................... 6 CAN Communication System Description ................ 6 Combination Meter ................................................... 7 CHECK .................................................................. 7 Schematic ................................................................ 8 Wiring Diagram — METER — .................................. 9 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter .......................................................................11 Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter .........11 SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ...........................11 HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE ........11 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 12 Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 12 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 13 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 14 DIAGNOSIS RESULTS ....................................... 14 Fuel System ........................................................... 14 FUEL GAUGE ..................................................... 15 LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP ............................. 15 Tachometer System ............................................... 16 Engine Coolant Temperature System .................... 16 Vehicle Speed System ........................................... 17 WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T ............................. 17 Revision: March 2005 WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T ...................... 17 The Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value or Varies ............................................ 18 The Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL Position... 18 Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 18 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK ................ 18 Removal and Installation of Combination Meter ..... 18 TRIPLE METERS ...................................................... 19 System Description ................................................. 19 TRIPLE METER .................................................. 19 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....... 19 FUEL CONSUMPTION GAUGE ......................... 19 OIL PRESSURE GAUGE .................................... 19 VOLTMETER ....................................................... 19 Wiring Diagram — 3METER — .............................. 21 Terminals and Reference Value for Triple Meter ... 23 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter ...................................................................... 23 Meter/Gauges Operation ........................................ 24 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ........................... 24 HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE ....... 24 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 25 Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 25 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 26 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 26 Fuel Consumption Gauge Inspection ..................... 27 Oil Pressure Sensor Inspection .............................. 27 Removal and Installation of Triple Meters .............. 29 REMOVAL ........................................................... 29 INSTALLATION ................................................... 29 Disassembly and Assembly for Triple Meters ......... 29 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 29 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 29 WARNING LAMPS .................................................... 30 System Description ................................................. 30 OUTLINE ............................................................. 30 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ................... 30 LOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL WARNING LAMP... 30 AIR BAG WARNING LAMP ................................. 30 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP ............................. 30 DI-1 2005 Altima F G H I J DI L M LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP ................. 30 LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ............ 30 CHARGE WARNING LAMP ................................ 31 BRAKE WARNING LAMP ................................... 31 TRUNK WARNING LAMP ................................... 31 DOOR WARNING LAMP ..................................... 31 ASCD SET INDICATOR LAMP ........................... 31 CRUISE INDICATOR LAMP ................................ 31 ABS WARNING LAMP ........................................ 31 TCS OFF WARNING LAMP ................................ 31 SLIP WARNING LAMP ........................................ 32 AT CHECK WARNING LAMP (5-SPEED A/T MODELS) ............................................................ 32 A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP (4SPEED A/T MODELS) ........................................ 32 CAN Communication System Description .............. 32 Schematic ............................................................... 33 Wiring Diagram — WARN — .................................. 34 Terminals And Reference Value For BCM .............. 38 Work Flow ............................................................... 38 Preliminary Check .................................................. 38 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 38 Trouble Diagnosis For Door Warning Lamp ........... 39 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON) ............................................................. 39 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal) ................................................ 40 Component Inspection ............................................ 41 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ................................... 41 A/T INDICATOR ........................................................ 42 Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — ................................. 42 4-SPEED A/T ....................................................... 42 5-SPEED A/T ....................................................... 43 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate ........................... 44 WARNING CHIME ..................................................... 45 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 45 System Description ................................................. 45 FUNCTION .......................................................... 45 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME ...................... 46 LIGHT WARNING CHIME ................................... 46 Revision: March 2005 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ...........................46 CAN Communication System Description ..............46 Major Component Parts and Function ....................46 Wiring Diagram — CHIME — .................................47 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................49 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................50 Preliminary Check ...................................................50 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .............................................50 CONSULT–II Function (BCM) .................................51 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE ...51 DATA MONITOR ..................................................52 ACTIVE TEST ......................................................52 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ...........................53 All Warnings Are Not Operated ...............................53 Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) ..........................................................................54 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate ..................55 Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................57 Seat Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................58 BOARD COMPUTER ................................................60 System Description .................................................60 FUNCTION ..........................................................60 OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATION .....60 DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION ........60 TRIP DISTANCE ..................................................60 TRIP TIME ...........................................................60 AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION ......................60 AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED ..............................60 HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION ...........60 CAN Communication System Description ..............61 Schematic ...............................................................62 Wiring Diagram — B/COMP — ...............................63 Trouble Diagnoses ..................................................66 SEGMENT CHECK ..............................................66 PRELIMINARY CHECK .......................................66 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE .................................66 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................67 AMBIENT SENSOR .............................................67 DI-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTION PRECAUTION PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EKS008OV The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis B C D E F G EKS008OW When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" . ● Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . H I J DI L M Revision: March 2005 DI-3 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS COMBINATION METERS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 EKS008OX WKIA3380E System Description EKS008OY UNIFIED CONTROL METER ● ● ● ● Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled by the unified meter control unit, which is built into the combination meter. Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.* *The record of the odometer is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter is erased when the battery cable is disconnected. Odo/trip meter segments can be checked in diagnosis mode. Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode. HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER ● The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit are processed by the combination meter and the mileage is displayed. Revision: March 2005 DI-4 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS ● Depressing the odometer/trip switch toggles the mode in the following order. A B C D E F SEL175W ● ● The odo/trip meter display mode toggling and trip display resetting can be identified by the amount of time that elapses from pressing the odo/trip meter switch to releasing it. When resetting with trip A displayed, only trip A display is reset (Trip B operates the same way). H POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 21. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 22. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 37. Ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminals 23, 25, and 28 ● through body grounds M57, M61, and F14. I J DI L WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE M The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter for water temperature gauge with CAN communication line. TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter for tachometer with CAN communication line. FUEL GAUGE The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied ● to combination meter terminal 35 ● from terminal 2 of the fuel level sensor unit ● through terminal 5 of the fuel level sensor unit and ● through body grounds M57, M61, and F14. Revision: March 2005 G DI-5 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS SPEEDOMETER (WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T) The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter for speedometer with CAN communication line. SPEEDOMETER (WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T) The vehicle speed sensor provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter for speedometer indication. CAN Communication System Description EKS008OZ Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 DI-6 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS Combination Meter EKS008P0 A CHECK B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKIA3175E Revision: March 2005 DI-7 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS Schematic EKS008P1 WKWA3002E Revision: March 2005 DI-8 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS Wiring Diagram — METER — EKS008P2 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA1252E Revision: March 2005 DI-9 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS WKWA3003E Revision: March 2005 DI-10 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter EKS008P3 A Condition Ignition switch Operation or condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery power supply — — Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START ON — Battery voltage B Ground — — 0 25 B Ground — — 0 26 L CAN-H — — — 27 P CAN-L — — — 28 B Ground — — 0 Terminal Wire color 21 Y/R 22 GY 23 35 Item G/B Fuel level sensor signal 36 37 B C D E Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . ON — L/Y Vehicle speed signal (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) ON Speedometer operated [When vehicle speed is approx. 20 km/h (12 MPH)] 240 Hz PU Ignition switch ACC or ON ON — Battery voltage F G Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter EKS008P4 SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ● ● Odo/trip meter (board computer) segment operation can be checked in self-diagnosis mode. Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode. H I HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the odometer/trip meter to “trip A” or “trip B”. J NOTE: If the diagnosis function is activated with the trip meter A displayed, the mileage on the trip meter A will indicate 000.0 miles, but the actual trip mileage will be retained. (Trip B operates the same way.) DI Turn the ignition switch OFF. While pushing the odo/trip meter switch, turn the ignition switch ON again. Check that the trip meter displays "000.0". L Push the odo/trip meter switch at least 7 times within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. M Revision: March 2005 DI-11 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS 6. All the segments on the odo/trip meter illuminate, and simultaneously the low-fuel warning lamp indicator illuminates. At this time, the unified meter control unit is turned to diagnosis mode. NOTE: If any of the segments is not displayed, replace the combination meter. WKIA1867E 7. Push the odo/trip meter switch. Each meter/gauge should indicate as shown in the figure while pushing odo/trip meter switch. (At this time, the low-fuel warning lamp goes off). LKIA0480E How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EKS008P5 Confirm the trouble symptom or customer complaint. Perform diagnosis according to diagnosis flow. Refer to DI-12, "Diagnosis Flow" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the trouble symptom. Refer to DI14, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . Does the meter operate normally? Yes: Go to 5. No: Go to 2. Inspection End. Diagnosis Flow EKS008P6 1. WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check that warning lamps (such as MIL and oil pressure warning lamp) illuminate. Do warning lamps illuminate? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check ignition power supply system of combination meter. Refer to DI-13, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" . Revision: March 2005 DI-12 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS OPERATION CHECK A Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . Does self-diagnosis function operate? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check battery power supply of combination meter and ground system. Refer to DI-13, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" . B C 3. ODO/TRIP METER OPERATION CHECK Check segment display status of odo/trip meter. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . Is the display normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . D E 4. FUEL WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION CONFIRMATION During fuel warning lamp check, confirm illumination of fuel warning lamp. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . Does fuel warning lamp illuminate? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . 5. METER CIRCUIT CHECK Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EKS008P7 1. CHECK FUSES Check for blown combination meter fuses. Combination meter I J DI Power source Fuse No. Battery 19 Ignition switch ON or START 14 Ignition switch ACC or ON 6 L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: March 2005 G H During meter circuit check, confirm meter illumination. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . Is the display normal? YES >> Go to diagnosis results. Refer to DI-14, "DIAGNOSIS RESULTS" . NO >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . Unit F DI-13 2005 Altima M COMBINATION METERS 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 21 (Y/R), 22 (GY), 37 (PU) and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) 21 (Y/R) M24 22 (GY) OFF ACC ON START Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground 37 (PU) WKIA1870E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between combination meter and fuse. 3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminals 23 (B), 25 (B), 28 (B) and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) (–) 23 (B) M24 25 (B) Ground Yes WKIA1871E 28 (B) OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground harness. Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom EKS008P8 DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Trouble phenomenon Possible cause Refer to DI-16, "Tachometer System" . Tachometer indication is irregular. Fuel warning lamp indication is irregular. Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . Fuel gauge indication is irregular. Water temperature gauge indication is irregular. Refer to DI-16, "Engine Coolant Temperature System" . Indication is irregular for the speedometer and odo/trip meter. Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" . Indications are irregular for more than one gauge. Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . A/T position indication is irregular. Refer to DI-42, "A/T INDICATOR" . Fuel System EKS008P9 The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction. Revision: March 2005 DI-14 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS FUEL GAUGE ● ● Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank flows and the pointer may fluctuate. If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the pointer will move slowly. A B LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank flows and the warning lamp ON timing may change. C 1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check meter, fuel level sensor unit and terminals (meter-side, unit-side, harness-side) for looseness or damaged terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D E F 2. CONTINUITY INSPECTION BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 35 (G/B) and fuel level sensor unit harness connector B16 terminal 2 (G/B). Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 35 (G/B) and ground. G H I Terminals (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) Continuity Connector Terminal (Wire color) WKIA1873E M24 35 (G/B) B16 2 (G/B) Yes M24 35 (G/B) — Ground No DI OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. L 3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION OF FUEL LEVEL SENSOR M Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector B16 terminal 5 (B) and ground. Terminals (+) Connector B16 Terminal (Wire color) 5 (B) (–) Ground Continuity Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 J WKIA2029E DI-15 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS 4. FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION Check components. Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation For All Models Except PZEV" or FL-8, "Removal and Installation For PZEV Models Only" . 5. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and check whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the internal components in the fuel tank. OK or NG OK >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Install the fuel level sensor unit properly. Tachometer System EKS008PA 1. VISUAL INSPECTION Check if tachometer fluctuates when the engine starts. Is the fluctuation acceptable? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2. ENGINE SPEED INSPECTION 1. 2. Select "ENGINE" on CONSULT-II. Using "ENG SPEED" on "DATA MONITOR", compare the value of "DATA MONITOR" with tachometer pointer of combination meter. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . SKIA4367E 3. ECM SYSTEM INSPECTION Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-128, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (QR25DE) or EC-750, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (VQ35DE). OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Go to ECM trouble diagnosis. Refer to EC-99, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (QR25DE) or EC-716, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (VQ35DE). Engine Coolant Temperature System EKS008PB 1. ECM SYSTEM INSPECTION Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-128, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (QR25DE) or EC-750, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (VQ35DE). OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Go to ECM trouble diagnosis. Refer to EC-99, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (QR25DE) or EC-716, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (VQ35DE). Revision: March 2005 DI-16 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS Vehicle Speed System EKS008PC A WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T 1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-59, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for the displayed DTC. WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T C D 1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUITS 1. 2. 3. B Remove vehicle speed sensor. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate vehicle speed sensor while checking voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 36 (L/Y) and ECM harness connector F54 terminal 67 (B). E F Terminals (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) M24 Connector Terminal (Wire color) F54 67 (B) 36 (L/Y) G Voltage (Approx.) H 0.5V OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> GO TO 2. I J DI WKIA1872E 2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1. 2. 3. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect vehicle speed sensor connector. Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor terminals + and -. Terminals (+) (–) Component Terminal Component Terminal Vehicle speed sensor + Vehicle speed sensor – M Resistance value (Approx.) 250Ω PKIA0555E OK or NG OK >> Check harness or connector between combination meter, vehicle speed sensor and ECM. NG >> Replace vehicle speed sensor. Revision: March 2005 DI-17 2005 Altima COMBINATION METERS The Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value or Varies EKS008PD 1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE FLUCTUATION Test drive vehicle to see if gauge fluctuates only during driving or before or after stopping. Does the indication value vary only during driving or before or after stopping? Yes >> The pointer fluctuation may be caused by fuel level change in the fuel tank. Condition is normal. No >> Ask the customer about the situation when the symptom occurs in detail, and perform the trouble diagnosis. The Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL Position EKS008PE 1. OBSERVE FUEL GAUGE Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to FULL position? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2. IDENTIFY FUELING CONDITION Was the vehicle fueled with the ignition switch ON? YES or NO YES >> Be sure to fuel the vehicle with the ignition switch OFF. Otherwise, it will take a long time to move to FULL position because of the characteristic of the fuel gauge. NO >> GO TO 3. 3. OBSERVE VEHICLE POSITION Is the vehicle parked on an incline? YES or NO YES >> Check the fuel level indication with vehicle on a level surface. NO >> GO TO 4. 4. OBSERVE FUEL GAUGE POINTER During driving, does the fuel gauge pointer move gradually toward EMPTY position? YES or NO YES >> Check the components. Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . NO >> The float arm may interfere or bind with any of the components in the fuel tank. Electrical Components Inspection EKS008PF FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK ● ● For removal, refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation For All Models Except PZEV" or FL-8, "Removal and Installation For PZEV Models Only" . Check the resistance between terminals 2 and 5. Float position mm (in) Terminal 2 5 Resistance value (Approx.) Full (1) 82.7 (3.3) 4.5 – 5.5Ω 1/2 (2) 200.3 (7.9) 31.5 – 5.5Ω Empty (3) 325.0 (12.8) 80.0 – 83.0Ω Removal and Installation of Combination Meter WKIA2030E EKS008PG For removal and installation procedure, refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . Revision: March 2005 DI-18 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS TRIPLE METERS System Description PFP:24845 A EKS00A7L TRIPLE METER ● ● Fuel consumption gauge, oil pressure gauge and voltmeter are controlled by the triple meter. Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode of combination meter. B C D WKIA3176E E POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to triple meter terminal 1 and ● to combination meter terminal 21. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to triple meter terminal 2 and ● to combination meter terminal 22. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to triple meter terminal 6 and ● to combination meter terminal 37. Ground is supplied ● to triple meter terminals 3 and 4 and ● to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and F14. F G H I J DI FUEL CONSUMPTION GAUGE The fuel consumption gauge displays the average fuel consumption according to signal from the combination meter. Average fuel consumption is calculated by signals from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) (with TCS or 5-speed A/T) or vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) and the ECM. L OIL PRESSURE GAUGE M The oil pressure gauge indicates engine oil pressure. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through triple meter terminal 9 ● to oil pressure sensor terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● through triple meter terminal 11 ● to oil pressure sensor terminal 3. Triple meter receives oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor ● through oil pressure sensor terminal 2 ● to triple meter terminal 10. VOLTMETER When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. While the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage of about 13 to 15 volts. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied Revision: March 2005 DI-19 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to triple meter terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● to triple meter terminals 3 and 4 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and F14. ● Revision: March 2005 DI-20 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS Wiring Diagram — 3METER — EKS00A7N A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA1837E Revision: March 2005 DI-21 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS WKWA1838E Revision: March 2005 DI-22 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS Terminals and Reference Value for Triple Meter EKS00A7O A Terminal No. Wire color 1 Y/R 2 GY Condition Ignition switch Operation or condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START ON — Battery voltage Ground ON — 0 Item B C 3 4 B 6 PU ACC power supply ACC — Battery voltage 7 Y Meter serial communication ON — — 9 W Oil pressure sensor power supply ON — 5.5 When ignition switch is in the ON position. (Engine stopped) 0.5 10 G Oil pressure sensor signal ON Engine running. [When the oil pressure is 60 psi (4.22 kg/ D E 2.5 F cm2 )] 11 SB Oil pressure sensor ground ON — Engine oil pressure is below 4.52 psi (0.318 kg/cm2 ) 12 P/L Oil pressure warn out ON Engine oil pressure is above 6.5 psi (0.457 kg/cm2 ) 0 G 0.5 Battery voltage Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter Terminal No. Wire color 4 Y 21 22 Condition EKS00A7P I Ignition switch Operation or condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Meter serial communication ON — — Y/R Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage GY Ignition switch ON or START ON — Battery voltage Ground ON — 0 Item H J DI 23 25 B L 28 37 PU Ignition switch ACC or ON ON — Battery voltage M Revision: March 2005 DI-23 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS Meter/Gauges Operation EKS00A7R SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode of combination meter. HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the odometer/trip meter to “trip A” or “trip B”. NOTE: If the diagnosis function is activated with the trip meter A displayed, the mileage on the trip meter A will indicate 000.0 miles, but the actual trip mileage will be retained. (Trip B operates the same way.) Turn the ignition switch OFF. While pushing the odo/trip meter switch, turn the ignition switch ON again. Check that the trip meter displays "000.0". Push the odo/trip meter switch at least 7 times within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. All the segments on the odo/trip meter illuminate, and simultaneously the low-fuel warning lamp indicator illuminates. At this time, the unified meter control unit is turned to diagnosis mode. Push the odo/trip meter switch. Each meter/gauge should indicate as shown in the figure while pushing odo/trip meter switch. WKIA3176E Revision: March 2005 DI-24 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EKS00A7T A Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Perform diagnosis according to diagnosis flow. Refer to DI-25, "Diagnosis Flow" . According to the symptom chart, repair or replace the cause of the symptom. Does the triple meter operate normally? If so, go to 5. If not, go to 2. Inspection End. Diagnosis Flow B EKS00A7U C 1. CHECK VOLTMETER OPERATION Turn ignition switch ON. Does voltmeter display battery voltage? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check ignition power supply system of triple meter. Refer to DI-26, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" . 2. CHECK METER CIRCUIT D E F Check indication of each meter/gauge in self-diagnosis mode. Refer to DI-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . OK or NG OK >> Go to DI-26, "Symptom Chart" . NG >> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Triple Meters" . G H I WKIA3176E J DI L M Revision: March 2005 DI-25 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EKS00A7V 1. CHECK FUSES Check for blown triple meter fuses. Unit Triple meter Power source Fuse No. Battery 19 Ignition switch ACC or ON 6 Ignition switch ON or START 14 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect the triple meter connector. Check voltage between triple meter harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) 1 (Y/R) OFF ACC ON START Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage LKIA0527E M99 2 (GY) Ground 6 (PU) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between triple meter and fuse. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99 terminals 3 (B), 4 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check harness or connector. LKIA0528E Symptom Chart EKS00A7W Trouble phenomenon Possible cause Fuel consumption gauge is irregular. Refer to DI-27, "Fuel Consumption Gauge Inspection" . Oil pressure gauge is irregular. Refer to DI-27, "Oil Pressure Sensor Inspection" . Voltmeter is irregular. Revision: March 2005 ● Refer to SC-21, "CHARGING SYSTEM" . ● Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Triple Meters" . DI-26 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS Fuel Consumption Gauge Inspection EKS00A7Z 1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS A Perform the ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-754, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the applicable parts. B C 2. CHECK METER SERIAL COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter and triple meter connectors. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 terminal 4 (Y) and triple meter connector M99 terminal 7 (Y). D E Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 terminal 4 (Y) and ground. F Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Triple Meters" . NG >> Repair harness or connector between combination meter and triple meter. LKIA0529E G H Oil Pressure Sensor Inspection EKS00A80 1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. I Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 10 (G) and ground. J Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Voltage (Approx.) When ignition switch is in ON position. (Engine stopped.) 0.5V (–) DI L LKIA0530E M99 10 (G) Ground Engine running. [When the oil pressure is 60 psi (4.22 2.5V kg/cm2 )] M OK or NG OK >> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Triple Meters" . NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY Check voltage between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 9 (W) and ground. Approx. 5.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Triple Meters" . LKIA0531E Revision: March 2005 DI-27 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS 3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect triple meter and oil pressure sensor connectors. Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 9 (W) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F106 terminal 1 (W). Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 9 (W) and ground. Continuity should not exist. WKIA3178E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector between triple meter and oil pressure sensor. 4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 10 (G) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F106 terminal 2 (R/L). Continuity should exist. 2. Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 10 (G) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector between triple meter and oil pressure sensor. WKIA3179E 5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 11 (SB) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F106 terminal 3 (B). Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace oil pressure sensor. NG >> Repair harness or connector between triple meter and oil pressure sensor. WKIA3180E Revision: March 2005 DI-28 2005 Altima TRIPLE METERS Removal and Installation of Triple Meters EKS00A83 A REMOVAL To remove triple meters, remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . INSTALLATION B Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly for Triple Meters EKS00A84 DISASSEMBLY 1. C Remove the triple meter screws as shown, then separate from bezel of cluster lid D. D E F LKIA0597E ASSEMBLY G Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. H I J DI L M Revision: March 2005 DI-29 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS WARNING LAMPS System Description PFP:24814 EKS008PH OUTLINE With ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 22. Ground is supplied ● to seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 and ● to trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 4 ● through body grounds B7 and B19, ● to brake fluid level switch terminal 2 and ● to washer fluid level sensor terminal – ● through body grounds E15 and E24, ● to fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and F14. MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP The malfunction indicator lamp is controlled by the ECM. During prove out or when an engine control malfunction occurs, the ECM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the malfunction indicator lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates. LOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL WARNING LAMP When the washer fluid level is low, ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 15 ● from washer fluid level sensor terminal +. When power and ground are supplied, the low washer level warning lamp illuminates. AIR BAG WARNING LAMP During prove out or when an air bag malfunction occurs, the ground path is interrupted ● from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit terminal 15 ● to combination meter terminal 20. SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP When the driver seat belt is unfastened, ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 11 ● from seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1. When power and ground are supplied, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates. LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP The amount of fuel in the fuel tank is determined by the fuel level sensor in the fuel tank. A signal is sent ● to combination meter terminal 35 ● from fuel level sensor unit terminal 2. The fuel level sensor will illuminate the low fuel level warning lamp when the fuel level is low. When power and ground are supplied, the low fuel level warning lamp illuminates. LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP Low oil pressure warning lamp is controlled by the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). Low oil pressure causes oil pressure switch terminal + to provide ground to IPDM E/R terminal 57. The IPDM E/R then signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the low oil pressure warning lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the low oil pressure warning lamp illuminates. Revision: March 2005 DI-30 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS CHARGE WARNING LAMP A During prove out or when a generator malfunction occurs, ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 14 ● from generator terminal L. When power and ground are supplied, the charge warning lamp and brake lamp illuminate. B BRAKE WARNING LAMP When the parking brake is applied or if the brake fluid level is low, ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 17 ● from parking brake switch terminal 1 or ● to combination meter terminal 19 ● from brake fluid level switch terminal 1. When power and ground are supplied, the brake warning lamp illuminates. C D E TRUNK WARNING LAMP Trunk warning lamp is controlled by the BCM. When the trunk is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 53 ● through trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 3 ● through trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 4 ● to body grounds B7 and B19. The BCM then signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the trunk warning lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the trunk warning lamp illuminates. DOOR WARNING LAMP Door warning lamp is controlled by the BCM. When one of the doors is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminals 12, 13, 47 or 48. The BCM then signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the door warning lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the door warning lamp illuminates. ASCD SET INDICATOR LAMP The ASCD set indicator lamp is controlled by the ECM. When the ASCD system is turned on and the speed is set, the ECM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the SET indicator lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the set indicator lamp illuminates. F G H I J DI L CRUISE INDICATOR LAMP The cruise indicator lamp is controlled by the ECM. When the ASCD system is turned on, the ECM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the cruise indicator lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the CRUISE indicator lamp illuminates. ABS WARNING LAMP When an ABS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 16 ● from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) terminal 21. When power and ground are supplied, the ABS warning lamp illuminates. TCS OFF WARNING LAMP When TCS OFF switch is in OFF position or a TCS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 12 ● from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) terminal 5. When power and ground are supplied, the TCS OFF warning lamp illuminates. Revision: March 2005 DI-31 2005 Altima M WARNING LAMPS SLIP WARNING LAMP When TCS is in operation or a TCS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 13 ● from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) terminal 2. When power and ground are supplied, the SLIP warning lamp illuminates. AT CHECK WARNING LAMP (5-SPEED A/T MODELS) The AT CHECK warning lamp is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module). When an A/T system malfunction occurs, the TCM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the AT CHECK warning lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the AT CHECK warning lamp illuminates. A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP (4-SPEED A/T MODELS) The A/T check (position) indicator lamp is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module). When an A/T system malfunction occurs, the TCM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the A/T check (position) indicator lamp. When power and ground are supplied, the A/T check (position) indicator lamp illuminates. CAN Communication System Description EKS008PI Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 DI-32 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS Schematic EKS008PJ A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA3004E Revision: March 2005 DI-33 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram — WARN — EKS008PK WKWA3005E Revision: March 2005 DI-34 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA1841E Revision: March 2005 DI-35 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS WKWA1256E Revision: March 2005 DI-36 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA1257E Revision: March 2005 DI-37 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS Terminals And Reference Value For BCM EKS008PL Condition Terminal 12 13 Wire color P/L R/W Item Front door switch RH Rear door switch RH Ignition switch OFF OFF Voltage (V) (Approx.) Operation Front door switch RH Rear door switch RH ON (open) 0 OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0 OFF (closed) Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 47 SB 48 53 R/B P Front door switch LH Rear door switch LH Trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid OFF OFF OFF Front door switch LH Rear door switch LH Trunk lamp switch ON (open) 0 OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0 OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0 OFF (closed) Battery voltage Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008PM Check the trouble symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to DI-30, "System Description" . Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-38, "Preliminary Check" . Referring to Trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the incident. Refer to DI-39, "Trouble Diagnosis For Door Warning Lamp" . Does warning lamp system operate normally? If it operates normally, go to step 6. If not, go to step 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check EKS008PN INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown BCM fusible link. Unit Power source Fusible link BCM Battery f Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fusible link. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: March 2005 DI-38 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM connector. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 (W/B) and ground. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Terminals B Ignition switch position C D (+) Terminal (Wire color) (–) OFF Connector M20 70 (W/B) Ground Battery voltage WKIA1874E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK F Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 (B) and body ground. Refer to PG-28, "GROUND CIRCUIT" . G Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) M20 67 (B) Ground Continuity H Yes I OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check harness ground circuit. LIIA0915E Trouble Diagnosis For Door Warning Lamp Symptom Door warning lamp does not illuminate with any of doors open. Door warning lamp illuminates constantly. EKS008PP DI Diagnostic procedure and repair order ● Check front door switches. Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch Check" . ● Check rear door switches. Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch Check" . L If the above systems work properly, replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON) EKS008PQ 1. CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT SIGNAL Activate IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS OF IPDM E/R Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and perform self-diagnosis of IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" . Self-diagnostic results content No malfunction detected>>GO TO 3. Malfunction detected>>Go to PG-18, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" in "IPDM E/R". Revision: March 2005 J DI-39 2005 Altima M WARNING LAMPS 3. CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT SIGNAL Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II. Operate ignition switch with "OIL P SW" of "DATA MONITOR" and check operation status. When ignition switch is in ON position (Engine stopped) When engine running : OIL P SW CLOSE : OIL P SW OPEN OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . LKIA0403E 4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and oil pressure switch connector. Check the following. QR25DE models Continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminal 57 (P/L) and oil pressure switch harness connector F19 terminal + (P/L). Continuity should exist. VQ35DE models without triple meter Continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminal 57 (P/L) and oil pressure switch harness connector F106 terminal + (R/L). WKIA3381E Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-41, "OIL PRESSURE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace oil pressure switch. Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal) EKS008PR NOTE: For oil pressure inspection, refer to LU-8, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" (QR25DE) or LU-21, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" (VQ35DE). Revision: March 2005 DI-40 2005 Altima WARNING LAMPS 1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and oil pressure switch connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminal 57 (P/L) and ground. B C Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D LKIA0247E 2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH E Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-41, "OIL PRESSURE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace oil pressure switch. F Component Inspection EKS008PS G OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Check continuity between the oil pressure switch and body ground. Condition Oil pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) H Continuity Engine stopped Less than 29 (0.3, 4) Yes Engine running More than 29 (0.3, 4) No I J ELF0044D DI L M Revision: March 2005 DI-41 2005 Altima A/T INDICATOR A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — PFP:24814 EKS008PT 4-SPEED A/T WKWA1258E Revision: March 2005 DI-42 2005 Altima A/T INDICATOR 5-SPEED A/T A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA3006E Revision: March 2005 DI-43 2005 Altima A/T INDICATOR A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate EKS008PU 1. TCM CONTROL UNIT SYSTEM INSPECTION Perform TCM self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-44, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" (4speed A/T) or AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" (5-speed A/T). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to TCM trouble diagnosis. 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS INSPECTION Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-11, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . OK or NG OK >> A/T indicator is OK. NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . Revision: March 2005 DI-44 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 A EKS008PV B C D E F G H I WKIA3382E System Description EKS008PW J FUNCTION Item Description DI Ignition key warning chime Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with key in ignition key cylinder and ignition switch “OFF” or “ACC” position. Light warning chime Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with lighting switch in the 1st or 2nd position and the key removed from the ignition switch. Seat belt warning chime Sounds warning chime for approximately 6 seconds after ignition switch is turned “ON” when driver seat belt is unfastened. NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime should be performed at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following. 1. Seat belt warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Light warning chime Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through body grounds M57, M61, and F14. Revision: March 2005 DI-45 2005 Altima L M WARNING CHIME When the proper signal, or combination of signals, is received by the combination meter, the warning chime will sound. IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME Power is supplied ● through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 ● to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● through front door switch LH case ground. With the key inserted in the ignition switch, and the driver door open, the ignition key warning chime will sound. LIGHT WARNING CHIME With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver door open, and the lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when headlamp battery saver control operates (for 5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.] Signal is supplied ● from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16 ● to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● through front door switch LH case ground. With these conditions, when power and ground are supplied, the light warning chime sounds. SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME With the driver seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH ON), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. Ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 11 ● through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1 ● through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 ● through body grounds B7 and B19. With these conditions, when power and ground are supplied, the seat belt warning chime sounds. CAN Communication System Description EKS008PX Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Major Component Parts and Function Components EKS008PY Functions BCM Intermittently operates the warning chime by signals from the ignition switch, key switch and key lock solenoid, lighting switch, front door switch LH and seat belt buckle switch LH. Warning chime Generates intermittent sounds by signals from the BCM. Revision: March 2005 DI-46 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME Wiring Diagram — CHIME — EKS008PZ A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA1259E Revision: March 2005 DI-47 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME WKWA1260E Revision: March 2005 DI-48 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EKS008Q0 A Terminal No. 2 Condition Wire color L Item Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch Measurement method ON — Voltage (V) (Approx.) B C SKIA1119J D E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON — F SKIA1119J G 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON — H SKIA1119J I 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 ON — J SKIA1119J DI 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 ON L — SKIA1119J 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting switch and wiper switch are OFF. 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting switch and wiper switch are OFF. 34 G/R Combination switch output 3 ON — 5V or more 35 G/B Combination switch output 2 ON — 5V or more 36 G/W Combination switch output 1 ON — 5V or more 37 B/R Key switch signal OFF 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 47 SB Front door switch LH signal Revision: March 2005 OFF 5V or more 5V or more Key is removed. 0 Key is inserted. Battery voltage Driver door DI-49 ON (open) 0 OFF (closed) 5V 2005 Altima M WARNING CHIME Terminal No. Wire color 67 B 70 W/B Condition Ignition switch Measurement method Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground OFF — 0 Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage Item How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008Q1 Confirm the trouble symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-45, "System Description" . Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to DI-50, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the warning chime operate normally? Yes: Go to 6. No: Go to 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check EKS008Q2 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown BCM fusible link. Unit Power source Fusible link BCM Battery f Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fusible link. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 (W/B) and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) M20 70 (W/B) Ground Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fusible link. Revision: March 2005 DI-50 WKIA1874E 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME 3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK A Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 (B) and ground. B Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Ground Continuity C Yes D OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check harness ground circuit. LIIA0915E E CONSULT–II Function (BCM) EKS008Q3 CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST BUZZER SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION F Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. G Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. H Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. I BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. J CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be DI detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the L ignition switch ON. M BBIA0002E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 DI-51 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME 3. Touch “BCM”. BCIA0030E 4. 5. Touch “BUZZER” or “BCM”. Select “DATA MONITOR” “ACTIVE TEST” or “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. WKIA2555E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch “ALL SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all selected test item related signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the specified item. 4. 5. 6. If “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch the item desired to monitor. If “ALL SIGNALS” is selected, all selected test item related signals are monitored. Touch “START”. During monitoring, touching “COPY” will print the monitored item status. Data Monitor Item Monitored item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. LIGHT SW 1ST Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of combination switch (lighting switch). BUCKLE SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt buckle switch LH. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. During the operation check, touching “OFF” deactivates the operation. Revision: March 2005 DI-52 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME Active Test Item (IGN KEY WARN ALM) Test item A Malfunction detecting condition This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. CHIME B Active Test Item (LIGHT WARN ALM) Test item Malfunction detecting condition C This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. CHIME Active Test Item (SEAT BELT WARN TEST) D Test item Malfunction detecting condition This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime sounds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. CHIME SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. E F Touch “BCM” on “DIAGNOSIS ITEM SELECTION” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Self-diagnostic results are displayed. G Display Item List Items to be displayed CONSULT-II display Description H CAN communication CAN communication [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. CAN communication system CAN communication system 1 to 6 [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN system. Combination switch Diagnosis 1 - 5 systems open circuit Malfunction is detected in combination switch system. I All Warnings Are Not Operated EKS008Q4 J 1. CHIME OPERATION INSPECTION Select “BUZZER” on CONSULT-II, and perform “LIGHT WARN ALM”, "IGN KEY WARN ALM", or "SEAT BELT WARN TEST" active test. Does chime sound? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NO >> GO TO 2. DI L M WKIA1876E 2. BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II, and perform BCM self-diagnosis. Self-diagnostic results content No malfunction detected>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . CAN communication or CAN communication system>> Check BCM CAN communication system. Go to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Diagnosis 1 - 5 systems open circuit>> Malfunction in combination switch system. Go to LT-90, "Combination Switch Reading Function" according to self-diagnostic results. Revision: March 2005 DI-53 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) EKS008Q5 1. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "DOOR SW-DR" when the front door switch LH is operated. When front door LH is opened When front door LH is closed : DOOR SW-DR ON : DOOR SW-DR OFF LKIA0335E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 (SB) and ground. When front door LH is opened When front door LH is closed : Approx. 0V : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 2. WKIA1515E 2. CONTINUITY INSPECTION OF DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector M19 and front door switch LH connector B8. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 (SB) and front door switch LH harness connector B8 terminal 2 (SB). Terminals (+) (–) Continuity Connector Terminal (Wire color) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M19 47 (SB) B8 2 (SB) 4. WKIA1516E Yes Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 (SB) and ground. Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M19 47 (SB) Ground Continuity No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 DI-54 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCH A Check front door switch LH. When front door switch LH is released When front door switch LH is pushed : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist B C OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace front door switch LH. D WKIA1517E Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate EKS008Q6 1. CHECK FUSE Check if the key switch and key lock solenoid (key detection) switch fuse is blown. Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" . Is the fuse blown? YES >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION E F G H With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. Does warning chime sound? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Go to DI-53, "All Warnings Are Not Operated" or DI-54, "Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)" . I J DI L M Revision: March 2005 DI-55 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME 3. KEY SWITCH INSPECTION With CONSULT-II With “BUZZER” on the data monitor, insert the key into the ignition cylinder to check ON/OFF operation. Switch operation CONSULT-II display Ignition switch (key in switch) KEY ON SW Ignition switch (key out of switch) Operation status ON OFF SKIA1960E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/ R) and ground. Terminals (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) M18 37 (B/R) Ground Key is inserted Battery voltage Key is removed 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 4. LKIA0255E 4. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector. Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4. Terminals 3 Condition 4 Continuity Key is inserted Yes Key is removed No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. Revision: March 2005 DI-56 PKIA2503E 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME 5. BCM AND KEY SWITCH CONTINUITY INSPECTION 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM connector M18. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M26 terminal 4 (B/R). B Continuity should exist. 3. C Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and ground. D Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA2032E E 6. KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION F Check voltage between key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M26 terminal 3 (W) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Check harness for open between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse. H I WKIA1784E Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate EKS008Q7 J 1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION Check key warning chime and seat belt warning chime functions. DI Do key warning chime and seat belt warning chime sound? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to DI-53, "All Warnings Are Not Operated" or DI-54, "Key Warning Chime and Light Warning L Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)" . 2. DATA MONITOR INSPECTION M With "BUZZER" on the data monitor, confirm “LIGHT SW 1ST” turns ON/OFF when lighting switch and front fog switch are operated. Switch operation CONSULT-II display Headlamp switch (1st position) Headlamp switch (OFF) Operation status ON LIGHT SW 1ST OFF OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 DI-57 WKIA1877E 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME 3. INSPECTION BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II, and perform BCM self-diagnosis. Self-diagnostic results content No malfunction detected>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . CAN communication or CAN communication system>> Check BCM CAN communication system. Go to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Diagnosis 1 - 5 systems open circuit>> Malfunction in combination switch system. Go to LT-90, "Combination Switch Reading Function" according to self-diagnostic results. Seat Warning Chime Does Not Operate EKS008Q8 1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION 1. With key removed from the ignition switch and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. 2. Return lighting switch to OFF position, and insert key into ignition switch. Does warning chime sound for both steps? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to DI-53, "All Warnings Are Not Operated" . 2. DATA MONITOR INSPECTION With "BUZZER" on the data monitor, confirm “BUCKLE SW ” when the seat belt buckle switch LH is operated. Switch operation CONSULT-II display Seat belt buckle switch LH (unfastened) Seat belt buckle switch LH (fastened) Operation status ON BUCKLE SW OFF OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. WKIA1878E 3. COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 11 (OR) and ground. Terminals (+) Condition Connector Terminal M24 11 (OR) (–) Seat belt is fastened Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery voltage Ground Seat belt is unfastened 0V WKIA1880E OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 DI-58 2005 Altima WARNING CHIME 4. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector. Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH terminals 1 and 2. Terminals 1 Condition 2 B Continuity Seat belt is fastened No Seat belt is unfastened Yes C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace seat belt buckle switch LH. WKIA1143E E 5. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 11 (OR) and seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector P2 terminal 1 (OR). F G Continuity should exist. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 11 (OR) and ground. H Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1881E J 6. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector. Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector P2 terminal 2 (B) and ground. DI Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. M WKIA2722E Revision: March 2005 I DI-59 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER BOARD COMPUTER System Description PFP:24810 EKS008Q9 FUNCTION The board computer can indicate the following items. ● Outside air temperature ● DTE (distance to empty) (without NAVI) ● Trip distance ● Trip time (without NAVI) ● Average fuel consumption (without NAVI) ● Average vehicle speed (without NAVI) OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATION The outside air temperature indication is displayed while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Signal is supplied ● through ambient sensor terminal 1 ● to combination meter (board computer) terminal 33. Indication range is between -30 and 55°C (-22 and 131°F). When outside temperature is less than 3°C (37°F), display shows ICY. In this case, the display will change to the outside air temperature mode even though the display is showing a different mode. When outside temperature is more than 55°C (131°F), indication will be blank. The indicated temperature is not affected by engine heat. It changes only when one of the following conditions exists. ● When vehicle speed is more than 20 km/h (12 MPH). ● The ignition switch has been turned OFF for more than 3.5 hours. ● When outside air temperature is less than the indicated temperature. DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION The range indication provides the driver with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The range is calculated by signals from the fuel level sensor unit (fuel remaining), ECM (fuel consumption) and vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) or the ABS actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5speed A/T). The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. When fuel remaining is less than approximately 10 (2 5/8 US gal, 2 1/4 Imp gal), the indication will blink as a warning. If the fuel remaining is less than approximately 8 (2 1/8 US gal, 1 3/4 Imp gal), the indication will show "---". In this case, the display will change to the DTE mode even though the display is showing a different mode. When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, DTE mode will display "---" until the vehicle is driven 500 miles (804.5 km). TRIP DISTANCE Trip distance is calculated by signal from the vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) or the ABS actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/T). If trip distance is reset, trip time will be reset at the same time. TRIP TIME Trip time displays cumulative ignition switch ON time. If trip time is reset, trip distance will be reset at the same time. AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION Average fuel consumption indication is calculated by signals from the vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5speed A/T) or the ABS actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/T) and the ECM (fuel consumption). The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED Average vehicle speed indication is calculated by running distance and running time. The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. If average vehicle speed is reset, average fuel consumption will be reset at the same time. After resetting, the display will show "---" for 30 seconds. HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION Indication can be changed in the following order by momentarily depressing the board computer switch or the board computer steering switch. Revision: March 2005 DI-60 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER Outside air temperature → dte (without NAVI) → Average fuel consumption (without NAVI) → Average vehicle speed (without NAVI) → Trip time (without NAVI) → Trip distance. Holding the switch for more than 0.8 second will reset the indication of the currently displayed mode (trip distance, trip time, average vehicle speed or average fuel consumption). NOTE: After the display changes automatically, the indication can be changed to the last mode by pushing the board computer switch or the board computer steering switch. CAN Communication System Description EKS008QA A B C Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . D E F G H I J DI L M Revision: March 2005 DI-61 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER Schematic EKS008QB WKWA3007E Revision: March 2005 DI-62 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER Wiring Diagram — B/COMP — EKS008QC A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA1350E Revision: March 2005 DI-63 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER WKWA3008E Revision: March 2005 DI-64 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA1262E Revision: March 2005 DI-65 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER Trouble Diagnoses EKS008QD SEGMENT CHECK The board computer segment display can be checked by entering combination meter self-diagnostic mode. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . PRELIMINARY CHECK LKIA0061E *1 DI-66, "DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" *2 DI-7, "CHECK" DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE Symptom Outside air temperature display is not displayed properly. (It may take a short time to steady the indication after ignition switch is turned ON.) NOTE: If the meter is powered up with the ambient sensor disconnected, outside air temperature display will show "---" even if the sensor is reconnected. In this case, with the sensor connected, disconnect and reconnect the battery, then the correct temperature will be displayed. DTE (distance to empty) is not displayed properly.) Revision: March 2005 Possible cause Repair order 1. Ambient sensor 1. Check ambient sensor. 2. Ambient sensor circuit 2. Check harness for open or short between ambient sensor and board computer. 3. Vehicle speed sensor signal (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) 4. ABS actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/ T) 3. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor. 4. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis. 1. Average fuel consumption display 1. Make sure fuel consumption is displayed properly. If NG, check fuel consumption display. 2. Fuel tank gauge signal circuit. 2. Make sure fuel gauge operates properly. If NG, check fuel gauge. Refer to DI-14, "Fuel System" . DI-66 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER Symptom Trip distance is not indicated properly. Trip time is not indicated properly. Average fuel consumption is not displayed properly. Possible cause Repair order 1. Vehicle speed sensor signal circuit (without TCS or 5speed A/T) 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/ T) 1. Fuse 1. Trip distance display 2. Fuel consumption signal A 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis. 1. 10A fuse [No. 19 located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify battery voltage is present at combination meter terminal 21. C 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) or perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis (with TCS or 5-speed A/T). D 2. Check CAN lines for open or short between ECM and combination meter. Average vehicle speed is not indicated properly. 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) or perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis (with TCS or 5-speed A/T). 1. Trip distance display 2. Trip time display B E F 2. Make sure trip time is displayed properly. If NG, check trip time display. G Electrical Components Inspection EKS008QE AMBIENT SENSOR After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ -15 (5) 12.73 -10 (14) 9.92 -5 (23) 7.80 0 (32) 6.19 5 (41) 4.95 10 (50) 3.99 15 (59) 3.24 20 (68) 2.65 25 (77) 2.19 30 (86) 1.81 35 (95) 1.51 40 (104) 1.27 45 (113) 1.07 I J DI L M WJIA0079E If NG, replace ambient sensor. Revision: March 2005 H DI-67 2005 Altima BOARD COMPUTER Revision: March 2005 DI-68 2005 Altima B ENGINE SECTION EC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A EC C D E CONTENTS QR INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 15 DTC No. Index ....................................................... 15 Alphabetical Index .................................................. 17 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 21 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 21 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T .......................................................................... 21 Precaution .............................................................. 21 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 24 PREPARATION ......................................................... 25 Special Service Tools ............................................. 25 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 26 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 28 System Diagram ..................................................... 28 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 29 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 31 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) .................................................................... 32 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ..................... 33 Input/output Signal Chart ....................................... 33 System Description ................................................ 33 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 34 System Description ................................................ 34 Component Description .......................................... 35 CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 36 System Description ................................................ 36 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 37 Description ............................................................. 37 Component Inspection ........................................... 40 Removal and Installation ........................................ 41 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ....................... 41 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) ...................................................................... 44 System Description ................................................ 44 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 45 Component Inspection ........................................... 48 Revision: March 2005 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................. 50 Description .............................................................. 50 Component Inspection ............................................ 50 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ........................................................................ 52 Description .............................................................. 52 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 53 Introduction ............................................................. 53 Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 53 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 54 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 67 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 70 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................... 75 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 75 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 80 Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ................................. 81 VIN Registration ..................................................... 92 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 93 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................. 93 Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 93 Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 95 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 99 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 99 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 105 Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 107 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 108 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 112 Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 117 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 118 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 120 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 120 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 128 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 140 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 142 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 146 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 148 Description ............................................................ 148 Testing Condition .................................................. 148 EC-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M Inspection Procedure ............................................ 148 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 149 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 158 Description ............................................................ 158 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 158 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 159 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 159 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 160 Ground Inspection ................................................ 164 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 166 Description ............................................................ 166 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 166 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 167 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 168 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 169 Description ............................................................ 169 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 169 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 170 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 171 Component Inspection .......................................... 172 Removal and Installation ...................................... 172 DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ..................... 173 Description ............................................................ 173 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 173 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 173 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 173 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 175 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 176 Component Inspection .......................................... 177 Removal and Installation ...................................... 177 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 178 Component Description ........................................ 178 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 178 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 178 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 178 Overall Function Check ........................................ 180 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 181 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 182 Component Inspection .......................................... 184 Removal and Installation ...................................... 186 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 187 Component Description ........................................ 187 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 187 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 187 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 187 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 189 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 190 Component Inspection .......................................... 192 Removal and Installation ...................................... 193 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 194 Component Description ........................................ 194 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 194 Revision: March 2005 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 194 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 196 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 197 Component Inspection .......................................... 198 Removal and Installation ....................................... 198 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 199 Component Description ........................................ 199 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 199 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 200 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 201 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 202 Component Inspection .......................................... 203 Removal and Installation ....................................... 203 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 204 Component Description ........................................ 204 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .204 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 204 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 204 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 206 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 207 Component Inspection .......................................... 210 Remove and Installation ....................................... 210 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 211 Description ............................................................ 211 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 211 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 211 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 212 Component Inspection .......................................... 213 Removal and Installation ....................................... 213 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 214 Component Description ........................................ 214 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 214 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 214 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 215 Component Inspection .......................................... 216 Removal and Installation ....................................... 216 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 217 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 217 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 217 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 217 Component Inspection .......................................... 218 Removal and Installation ....................................... 218 DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 219 Component Description ........................................ 219 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .219 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 219 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 219 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 221 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 222 Component Inspection .......................................... 223 Removal and Installation ....................................... 224 DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 225 Component Description ........................................ 225 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .225 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 225 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 226 EC-2 2005 Altima Overall Function Check ........................................ 226 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 228 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 229 Component Inspection ......................................... 231 Removal and Installation ...................................... 232 DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 233 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 235 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 236 DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 240 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 240 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 240 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 242 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 243 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 246 Component Description ........................................ 246 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 246 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 246 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 248 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 249 Component Inspection ......................................... 250 Removal and Installation ...................................... 250 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 251 Component Description ........................................ 251 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 251 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 251 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 252 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 253 Component Inspection ......................................... 254 Removal and Installation ...................................... 254 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 255 Component Description ........................................ 255 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 255 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 255 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 255 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 257 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 258 Component Inspection ......................................... 261 Remove and Installation ....................................... 261 DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 262 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 262 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 262 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 263 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 269 Component Description ........................................ 269 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 269 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 269 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 270 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 271 Component Inspection ......................................... 272 Removal and Installation ...................................... 272 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 273 Component Description ........................................ 273 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 273 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 273 Revision: March 2005 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 273 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 275 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 276 Component Inspection .......................................... 278 Removal and Installation ...................................... 279 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 280 Component Description ........................................ 280 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 280 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 280 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 282 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 283 Component Inspection .......................................... 285 Removal and Installation ...................................... 286 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 287 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 287 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 287 Overall Function Check ........................................ 288 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 288 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 292 System Description ............................................... 292 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 292 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 293 Overall Function Check ........................................ 293 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 294 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 298 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 298 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 299 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 300 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 306 Description ............................................................ 306 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 306 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 307 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 307 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 308 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 309 Component Inspection .......................................... 311 Removal and Installation ...................................... 311 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 312 Component Description ........................................ 312 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 312 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 312 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 312 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 314 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 315 Component Inspection .......................................... 317 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 319 Component Description ........................................ 319 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 319 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 319 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 320 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 320 Component Inspection .......................................... 321 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EC-3 2005 Altima A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SENSOR .................................................................. 322 Component Description ........................................ 322 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 322 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 322 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 323 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 324 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 325 Component Inspection .......................................... 327 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 328 Component Description ........................................ 328 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 328 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 328 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 329 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 330 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 331 Component Inspection .......................................... 334 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 335 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 335 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 336 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 337 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 343 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 343 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 344 Overall Function Check ........................................ 345 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 346 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 353 Component Description ........................................ 353 On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 353 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 353 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 354 Removal and Installation ...................................... 354 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 355 Component Description ........................................ 355 On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 355 Overall Function Check ........................................ 355 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 356 Removal and Installation ...................................... 356 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......... 357 Component Description ........................................ 357 On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 357 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 357 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 358 Removal and Installation ...................................... 358 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 359 Description ............................................................ 359 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 359 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 359 Overall Function Check ........................................ 359 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 360 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 361 Description ............................................................ 361 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 361 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 361 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 362 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 363 Description ............................................................ 363 Revision: March 2005 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 363 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 363 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 364 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 365 Component Description ........................................ 365 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .365 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 365 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 365 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 366 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 367 Component Inspection .......................................... 369 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 370 Component Description ........................................ 370 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 370 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 370 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 371 DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ........ 373 Description ............................................................ 373 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .373 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 373 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 373 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 374 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 375 Component Inspection .......................................... 377 Removal and Installation ....................................... 377 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 378 Component Description ........................................ 378 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 378 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 378 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 379 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 380 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 382 Component Description ........................................ 382 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .382 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 382 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 382 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 383 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 384 Component Inspection .......................................... 385 Removal and Installation ....................................... 385 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR ............................................................. 386 Component Description ........................................ 386 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 386 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 386 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 387 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION .............................................................. 388 Description ............................................................ 388 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 388 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 388 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 389 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 390 Component Inspection .......................................... 393 Remove and Installation ....................................... 393 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR EC-4 2005 Altima RELAY .................................................................... 394 Component Description ........................................ 394 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 394 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 394 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 394 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 396 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 397 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........ 399 Component Description ........................................ 399 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 399 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 399 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 400 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 401 Component Inspection ......................................... 402 Removal and Installation ...................................... 403 DTC P1146 HO2S2 ................................................. 404 Component Description ........................................ 404 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 404 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 404 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 405 Overall Function Check ........................................ 405 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 407 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 408 Component Inspection ......................................... 410 Removal and Installation .......................................411 DTC P1147 HO2S2 ................................................. 412 Component Description ........................................ 412 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 412 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 412 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 413 Overall Function Check ........................................ 413 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 415 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 416 Component Inspection ......................................... 418 Removal and Installation ...................................... 419 DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ................ 420 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 420 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 421 Description ........................................................... 421 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 422 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 422 Overall Function Check ........................................ 423 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 425 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 427 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 432 Component Inspection ......................................... 432 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 434 Component Description ........................................ 434 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 434 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 434 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 435 Remove and Installation ....................................... 435 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 436 Component Description ........................................ 436 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 436 Revision: March 2005 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 436 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 437 Remove and Installation ....................................... 437 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 438 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 438 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 438 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 439 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 440 DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 443 Component Description ........................................ 443 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 443 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 443 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 443 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 445 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 446 Removal and Installation ...................................... 447 DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 448 Component Description ........................................ 448 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 448 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 448 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 448 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 450 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 451 Removal and Installation ...................................... 452 DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 453 Component Description ........................................ 453 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 453 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 453 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 453 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 455 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 456 Removal and Installation ...................................... 459 DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 460 Component Description ........................................ 460 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 460 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 460 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 460 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 462 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 463 Removal and Installation ...................................... 466 DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 467 Component Description ........................................ 467 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 467 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 467 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 467 Overall Function Check ........................................ 468 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 470 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 471 Removal and Installation ...................................... 472 DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 473 Component Description ........................................ 473 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 473 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473 EC-5 2005 Altima A EC C D E F G H I J K L M DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 474 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 476 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 477 Removal and Installation ...................................... 481 DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 482 Component Description ........................................ 482 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 482 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 482 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 483 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 485 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 486 Removal and Installation ...................................... 490 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 491 Description ............................................................ 491 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 491 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 492 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 492 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 493 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 494 Component Inspection .......................................... 497 Removal and Installation ...................................... 497 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 498 Component Description ........................................ 498 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 498 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 498 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 498 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 500 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 501 Component Inspection .......................................... 502 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 504 Component Description ........................................ 504 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 504 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 504 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 504 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 506 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 508 Component Inspection .......................................... 509 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 511 Component Description ........................................ 511 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 511 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 511 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 512 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 513 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 515 Component Inspection .......................................... 520 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 522 Component Description ........................................ 522 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 522 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 522 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 523 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 524 Component Description ........................................ 524 Revision: March 2005 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .524 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 524 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 524 Overall Function Check ......................................... 525 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 526 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 528 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE . 532 Component Description ........................................ 532 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .532 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 532 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 532 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 533 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 534 Component Inspection .......................................... 535 Removal and Installation ....................................... 536 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 537 Description ............................................................ 537 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .537 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 537 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 537 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 538 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 539 Component Inspection .......................................... 540 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 542 Component Description ........................................ 542 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .542 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 542 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 542 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 544 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 545 Component Inspection .......................................... 547 Removal and Installation ....................................... 548 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 549 Component Description ........................................ 549 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .549 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 549 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 549 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 551 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 552 Component Inspection .......................................... 556 Remove and Installation ....................................... 556 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 557 Component Description ........................................ 557 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .557 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 557 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 557 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 559 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 560 Component Inspection .......................................... 563 Remove and Installation ....................................... 563 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 564 Component Description ........................................ 564 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EC-6 2005 Altima . 564 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 564 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 565 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 566 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 567 Component Inspection ......................................... 571 Remove and Installation ....................................... 571 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 572 Component Description ........................................ 572 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 573 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 578 Component Inspection ......................................... 581 Removal and Installation ...................................... 582 VIAS ........................................................................ 583 Description ........................................................... 583 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 584 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 585 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 587 Component Inspection ......................................... 590 Removal and Installation ...................................... 591 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 592 Component Description ........................................ 592 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 592 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 593 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 594 Component Inspection ......................................... 597 Removal and Installation ...................................... 597 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 598 Description ........................................................... 598 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 598 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 599 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 600 Component Inspection ......................................... 603 Removal and Installation ...................................... 604 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 605 Component Description ........................................ 605 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 606 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 607 Removal and Installation ...................................... 609 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 610 Description ........................................................... 610 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 610 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ..........................................611 Component Description .........................................611 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..611 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 612 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 614 ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 620 Component Description ........................................ 620 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 620 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 621 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 622 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 623 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 623 Revision: March 2005 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 625 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 625 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 625 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 625 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 625 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 625 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 625 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 625 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 625 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 625 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 625 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 626 Injector .................................................................. 626 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 626 A EC C D E VQ INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 627 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 627 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 630 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 635 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 635 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T ........................................................................ 635 Precaution ............................................................ 635 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 638 PREPARATION ....................................................... 639 Special Service Tools ........................................... 639 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 641 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 642 System Diagram ................................................... 642 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 643 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 645 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) .................................................................. 646 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .................... 647 Input/Output Signal Chart ..................................... 647 System Description ............................................... 647 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 648 System Description ............................................... 648 Component Description ........................................ 649 CAN COMMUNICATION ......................................... 650 System Description ............................................... 650 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 651 Description ............................................................ 651 Component Inspection .......................................... 656 Removal and Installation ...................................... 657 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 657 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) .................................................................... 660 System Description ............................................... 660 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 661 Component Inspection .......................................... 663 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 665 Description ............................................................ 665 Component Inspection .......................................... 665 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM- EC-7 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M NATS) ...................................................................... 667 Description ............................................................ 667 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 668 Introduction ........................................................... 668 Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 668 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 669 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 685 OBD System Operation Chart .............................. 687 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 693 Basic Inspection ................................................... 693 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 698 Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ............................... 700 VIN Registration ................................................... 711 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 711 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 711 Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 712 Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 714 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 716 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 716 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 722 Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 724 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 725 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 729 Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 736 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 738 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 740 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 740 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 750 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 763 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 766 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 770 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 772 Description ............................................................ 772 Testing Condition .................................................. 772 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 772 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 773 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 782 Description ............................................................ 782 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 782 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 783 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 783 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 784 Ground Inspection ................................................ 789 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 790 Description ............................................................ 790 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 790 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 790 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 791 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 792 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ........................ 793 Description ............................................................ 793 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 793 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 794 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 794 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 795 Revision: March 2005 Component Inspection .......................................... 796 Removal and Installation ....................................... 796 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.797 Description ............................................................ 797 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .797 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 797 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 798 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 799 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 802 Component Inspection .......................................... 804 Removal and Installation ....................................... 805 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 806 Component Description ........................................ 806 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .806 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 806 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 807 Overall Function Check ......................................... 808 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 809 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 810 Component Inspection .......................................... 812 Removal and Installation ....................................... 814 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 815 Component Description ........................................ 815 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .815 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 815 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 816 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 817 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 818 Component Inspection .......................................... 820 Removal and Installation ....................................... 821 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 822 Component Description ........................................ 822 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 822 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 822 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 823 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 824 Component Inspection .......................................... 825 Removal and Installation ....................................... 825 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 826 Component Description ........................................ 826 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 826 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 827 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 828 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 829 Component Inspection .......................................... 830 Removal and Installation ....................................... 830 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 831 Component Description ........................................ 831 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .831 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 831 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 832 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 833 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 834 Component Inspection .......................................... 837 Removal and Installation ...................................... EC-8 2005 Altima DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ..................................... 838 Component Description ........................................ 838 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 838 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 839 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 839 Component Inspection ......................................... 840 Removal and Installation ...................................... 840 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ....................................... 841 Component Description ........................................ 841 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 841 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 841 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 842 Component Inspection ......................................... 843 Removal and Installation ...................................... 843 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................ 844 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 844 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 844 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 844 Component Inspection ......................................... 845 Removal and Installation ...................................... 845 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 .................................... 846 Component Description ........................................ 846 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 846 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 846 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 847 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 848 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 851 Component Inspection ......................................... 854 Removal and Installation ...................................... 855 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 .................................... 856 Component Description ........................................ 856 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 856 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 856 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 857 Overall Function Check ........................................ 857 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 859 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 862 Component Inspection ......................................... 865 Removal and Installation ...................................... 867 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................................. 868 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 868 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 868 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 870 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 872 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................................. 879 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 879 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 879 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 881 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 883 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 890 Component Description ........................................ 890 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 890 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 890 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 892 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 893 Revision: March 2005 Component Inspection .......................................... 894 Removal and Installation ...................................... 894 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 895 Component Description ........................................ 895 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 895 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 895 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 896 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 897 Component Inspection .......................................... 898 Removal and Installation ...................................... 898 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 899 Component Description ........................................ 899 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 899 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 899 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 900 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 901 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 902 Component Inspection .......................................... 905 Removal and Installation ...................................... 905 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 906 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 906 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 906 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 907 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 916 Component Description ........................................ 916 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 916 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 916 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 917 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 918 Component Inspection .......................................... 920 Removal and Installation ...................................... 920 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 921 Component Description ........................................ 921 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 921 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 921 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 921 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 923 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 924 Component Inspection .......................................... 927 Removal and Installation ...................................... 927 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ........ 928 Component Description ........................................ 928 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 928 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 928 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 930 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 933 Component Inspection .......................................... 936 Removal and Installation ...................................... 936 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION ................................. 937 Description ............................................................ 937 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 939 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 939 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 939 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 941 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 942 EC-9 2005 Altima A EC C D E F G H I J K L M DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ...... 945 Description ............................................................ 945 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 946 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 946 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 946 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 947 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 948 Component Inspection .......................................... 949 Removal and Installation ...................................... 951 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR ...................... 952 Component Description ........................................ 952 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 952 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 953 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 955 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 956 Component Inspection .......................................... 957 Removal and Installation ...................................... 958 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ........................................................................ 959 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 959 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 959 Overall Function Check ........................................ 960 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 961 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 964 System Description ............................................... 964 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 964 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 964 Overall Function Check ........................................ 965 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 966 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 969 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 969 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 970 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 971 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 977 Description ............................................................ 977 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 977 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 978 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 978 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 979 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 981 Component Inspection .......................................... 983 Removal and Installation ...................................... 983 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 984 Component Description ........................................ 984 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 984 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 984 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 985 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 986 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 987 Component Inspection .......................................... 989 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 991 Component Description ........................................ 991 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Revision: March 2005 .991 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 991 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 992 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 992 Component Inspection .......................................... 993 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 994 Component Description ........................................ 994 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .994 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 994 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 995 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 996 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 997 Component Inspection .......................................... 999 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 1000 Component Description ....................................... 1000 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1000 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1000 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1001 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1002 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1003 Component Inspection ......................................... 1007 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 1008 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1008 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1009 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1010 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 1016 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1016 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1017 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1018 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1019 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 1025 Component Description ....................................... 1025 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1025 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1025 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1026 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1026 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 1027 Component Description ....................................... 1027 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1027 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1027 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1028 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1028 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......... 1029 Component Description ....................................... 1029 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1029 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1029 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1030 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1030 DTC P0500 VSS ..................................................... 1031 Description ........................................................... 1031 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1031 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1031 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1031 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1032 EC-10 2005 Altima DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1033 Description ..........................................................1033 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1033 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1033 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1034 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1035 Description ..........................................................1035 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1035 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1035 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1036 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................1037 Component Description .......................................1037 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1037 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1037 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1037 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1038 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1039 Component Inspection ........................................1041 DTC P0605 ECM ...................................................1042 Component Description .......................................1042 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1042 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1042 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1043 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER .................................................................1045 Description ..........................................................1045 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1045 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1045 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1045 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1047 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1050 Component Inspection ........................................1052 Removal and Installation .....................................1052 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................1053 Component Description .......................................1053 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1053 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1053 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1054 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1055 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....................................................................1057 Component Description .......................................1057 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1057 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1057 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1057 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1058 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1061 Component Inspection ........................................1064 Removal and Installation .....................................1065 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR ...........................................................1066 Component Description .......................................1066 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1066 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1066 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1067 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Revision: March 2005 FUNCTION .............................................................1068 Description ...........................................................1068 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1068 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1068 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1069 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1070 Component Inspection .........................................1073 Remove and Installation ......................................1073 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY ....................................................................1074 Component Description .......................................1074 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1074 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1074 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1074 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1076 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1077 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........1079 Component Description .......................................1079 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1079 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1079 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1080 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1081 Component Inspection .........................................1082 Removal and Installation .....................................1083 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ....................................1084 Component Description .......................................1084 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1084 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1084 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1085 Overall Function Check .......................................1085 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1087 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1090 Component Inspection .........................................1093 Removal and Installation .....................................1095 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ....................................1096 Component Description .......................................1096 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1096 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1096 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1097 Overall Function Check .......................................1097 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1099 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1102 Component Inspection .........................................1105 Removal and Installation .....................................1107 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ...1108 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1108 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .........................1109 Description ...........................................................1109 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1109 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1109 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1109 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ...........1110 Description ...........................................................1110 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1110 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1110 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1110 EC-11 2005 Altima A EC C D E F G H I J K L M DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE .......1111 Description ...........................................................1111 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1112 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1113 Overall Function Check .......................................1113 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1115 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1117 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ..........................1122 Component Inspection .........................................1122 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................1123 Component Description .......................................1123 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1123 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1123 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1124 Removal and Installation .....................................1124 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................1125 Component Description .......................................1125 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1125 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1125 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1126 Removal and Installation .....................................1126 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1127 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1127 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1127 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1128 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1129 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1132 Component Description .......................................1132 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1132 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1132 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1132 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1134 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1137 Removal and Installation .....................................1139 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1140 Component Description .......................................1140 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1140 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1140 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1140 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1142 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1145 Removal and Installation .....................................1147 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1148 Component Description .......................................1148 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1148 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1148 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1148 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1150 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1153 Removal and Installation .....................................1156 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1157 Component Description .......................................1157 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1157 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1157 Revision: March 2005 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1157 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1159 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1162 Removal and Installation ......................................1165 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1166 Component Description .......................................1166 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1166 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1166 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1166 Overall Function Check ........................................1167 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1169 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1172 Removal and Installation ......................................1174 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1175 Component Description .......................................1175 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1175 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1175 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1176 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1178 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1181 Removal and Installation ......................................1186 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1187 Component Description .......................................1187 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1187 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1187 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1188 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1190 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1193 Removal and Installation ......................................1198 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION .................................1199 Description ...........................................................1199 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1201 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1201 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1201 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1203 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1204 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............................. 1206 Description ........................................................... 1206 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1206 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1207 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1207 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1208 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1210 Component Inspection ......................................... 1213 Removal and Installation ...................................... 1213 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 1214 Component Description ....................................... 1214 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1214 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 1214 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1215 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1216 EC-12 2005 Altima Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1217 Component Inspection ........................................1218 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ...............1220 Component Description .......................................1220 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1220 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1220 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1221 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1222 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1223 Component Inspection ........................................1226 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ....................1227 Component Description .......................................1227 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1227 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1227 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1228 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1229 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1231 Component Inspection ........................................1236 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ...1238 Component Description .......................................1238 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1238 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1238 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1239 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH .....................................1240 Component Description .......................................1240 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1240 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1240 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1240 Overall Function Check .......................................1241 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1242 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1245 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1248 Component Description .......................................1248 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1248 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1248 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1248 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1249 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1250 Component Inspection ........................................1251 Removal and Installation .....................................1252 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ...............................1253 Description ..........................................................1253 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1253 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1253 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1253 Wiring Diagram ...................................................1254 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1255 Component Inspection ........................................1257 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .......................1258 Component Description .......................................1258 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1258 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1258 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1259 Revision: March 2005 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1260 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1261 Component Inspection .........................................1263 Removal and Installation .....................................1264 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................1265 Component Description .......................................1265 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1265 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1265 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1266 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1267 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1268 Component Inspection .........................................1271 Removal and Installation .....................................1271 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................1272 Component Description .......................................1272 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1272 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1272 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1273 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1274 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1275 Component Inspection .........................................1278 Removal and Installation .....................................1278 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................1279 Component Description .......................................1279 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1279 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1279 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1280 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1281 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1282 Component Inspection .........................................1286 Removal and Installation .....................................1286 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................1287 Component Description .......................................1287 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1288 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1293 Component Inspection .........................................1298 Removal and Installation .....................................1299 VIAS .......................................................................1300 Description ...........................................................1300 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1301 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1302 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1303 Component Inspection .........................................1306 Removal and Installation .....................................1307 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ..............................................1308 Component Description .......................................1308 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1308 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1309 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1310 Component Inspection .........................................1315 Removal and Installation .....................................1315 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ...........................................1316 Description ...........................................................1316 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EC-13 2005 Altima A EC C D E F G H I J K L M 1316 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1317 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1318 Component Inspection .........................................1321 Removal and Installation .....................................1321 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT 1322 . System Description ..............................................1322 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1322 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1323 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1324 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................1327 Component Description .......................................1327 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1328 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1329 Removal and Installation .....................................1331 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ...............................1332 Description ...........................................................1332 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1332 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1332 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .........................................1333 Component Description .......................................1333 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1333 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1334 Revision: March 2005 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1336 Component Inspection ......................................... 1341 ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 1343 Component Description ....................................... 1343 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 1343 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1344 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1345 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 1346 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 1346 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ... 1348 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 1348 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 1348 Calculated Load Value ......................................... 1348 Mass Air Flow Sensor .......................................... 1348 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 1348 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 1348 EGR Temperature Sensor .................................... 1348 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater ................... 1348 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ......................... 1348 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ...................... 1349 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 1349 Throttle Control Motor .......................................... 1349 Injector ................................................................. 1349 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 1349 EC-14 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [QR] INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index PFP:00024 A UBS002NS NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 ECM*3 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) C Reference page U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-166 U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-166 P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-169 P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-173 P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-173 P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-178 P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-187 P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-187 P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-194 P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-194 P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-199 P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-199 P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-204 P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-204 P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-211 P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR EC-214 P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-217 P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-219 P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-225 P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-233 P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-240 P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-246 P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-251 P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-251 P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-255 P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-255 P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-262 P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-262 P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-262 P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-262 P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-262 P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-269 P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-269 P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-273 Revision: March 2005 EC-15 D E — 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [QR] DTC*1 CONSULT-II Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 Reference page GST*2 ECM* P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-280 P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-287 P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-292 P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-298 P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-306 P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-306 P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-312 P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-319 P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-322 P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-328 P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-335 P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-343 P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-353 P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-355 P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-357 P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-357 P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 EC-359 P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-361 P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM EC-363 P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-365 P0605 0605 ECM EC-370 P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-105 P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-111 5 P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT* AT-117 P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-122 P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-126 P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-131 P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-136 P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-141 P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-148 P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-153 P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-161 P0750 0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC AT-167 P0755 0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC AT-172 P1031 1031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-373 P1032 1032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-373 P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC EC-378 P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-382 P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-386 P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-388 P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR EC-394 P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR EC-394 Revision: March 2005 EC-16 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [QR] DTC*1 CONSULT-II Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 A Reference page GST*2 ECM* P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-399 P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) EC-404 P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) EC-412 P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-420 P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-421 P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-434 P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING EC-436 P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-438 P1271 1271 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-443 P1272 1272 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-448 P1273 1273 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-453 P1274 1274 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-460 P1276 1276 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-467 P1278 1278 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-473 P1279 1279 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-482 P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-491 P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-498 P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-504 P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-511 P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-522 P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-52 P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-177 P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-524 P1760 1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-183 P1800 1800 VIAS S/V CIRC EC-532 P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-537 P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-542 P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-542 P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-549 P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-549 P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-557 P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-564 EC C D E F G H I J K L M *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. Alphabetical Index UBS002NR NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Revision: March 2005 EC-17 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [QR] ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*2 ECM*3 Reference page A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 EC-443 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 EC-448 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 EC-453 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 EC-460 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 EC-467 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 EC-473 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 EC-482 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 EC-373 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 EC-373 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 AT-126 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 AT-131 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 AT-136 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 AT-141 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-153 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-542 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-542 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-549 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 EC-549 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-564 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 EC-511 ASCD SW P1564 1564 EC-504 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 EC-522 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-111 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-537 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 EC-166 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 EC-166 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-273 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 EC-420 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-280 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-434 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 EC-436 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-262 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 EC-262 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 EC-262 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 EC-262 ECM P0605 0605 EC-370 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 EC-378 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 EC-199 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 EC-199 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 EC-211 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-421 Revision: March 2005 EC-18 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [QR] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST* 2 ECM*3 Reference page ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 AT-122 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-386 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 EC-388 ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-399 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 EC-394 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 EC-394 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 EC-335 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 EC-292 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 EC-298 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 EC-319 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 EC-322 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 EC-328 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 EC-343 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 EC-251 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 EC-251 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 EC-246 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 EC-353 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 EC-355 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 EC-357 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 EC-357 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-233 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-240 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-219 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-225 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 EC-404 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 EC-412 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-173 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-173 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 EC-194 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 EC-194 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 EC-214 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-169 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 EC-382 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 EC-361 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 EC-363 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-269 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 EC-269 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-161 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 EC-178 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 EC-187 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 EC-187 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-262 Revision: March 2005 EC-19 2005 Altima A EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [QR] DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) NATS MALFUNCTION CONSULT-II GST*2 ECM*3 Reference page P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 BL-107 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 AT-183 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-524 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-105 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 EC-306 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 EC-306 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 EC-491 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-365 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 EC-438 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 AT-167 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 AT-172 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-148 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 EC-217 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-255 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-255 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-204 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-204 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-557 TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 AT-177 P0420 0420 EC-287 P0720 0720 AT-117 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 EC-359 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 EC-312 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 EC-498 VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 EC-532 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT* 5 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. Revision: March 2005 EC-20 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [QR] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A UBS00IIV The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS002NU The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precaution ● ● ● ● UBS002NV Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable. SEF289H Revision: March 2005 EC-21 2005 Altima H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [QR] ● ● ● – – – – – – ● Do not disassemble ECM. If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the initial ECM values. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values. Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. If the battery is disconnected, the following emissionrelated diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. Diagnostic trouble codes 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes Freeze frame data 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values PBIB1164E When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure. SEC406D ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs. Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc. Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-120 . Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents. Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS). Revision: March 2005 EC-22 PBIB0090E MEF040D 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [QR] ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. A EC C SEF217U D ● ● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. E F G H I J SEF348N ● ● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. K L M BBIA0081E Revision: March 2005 EC-23 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [QR] ● ● ● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily. Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown. SEF709Y ● – – – – When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location. Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units. Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller. Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis SEF708Y UBS002NW When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision: March 2005 EC-24 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A UBS002NX The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter EC Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) C D S-NT564 KV10117100 (J-36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut E F S-NT379 KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench G Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors a: 22 mm (0.87 in) H I S-NT636 (J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit Checking fuel pressure J K LEC642 (J-44321-6) Fuel pressure adapter Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector type fuel lines. L M LBIA0376E (J-44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 LEM054 (J-45488) Quick connector release Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine room. PBIC0198E Revision: March 2005 EC-25 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT825 KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT826 Commercial Service Tools Tool name (KentMoore No.) UBS002NY Description Leak detector i.e.:(J-41416) Locating the EVAP leak S-NT703 EVAP service port adapter i.e.:(J-41413-OBD) Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port S-NT704 Fuel filler cap adapter i.e.: (J-41416) Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure S-NT815 Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor S-NT705 Revision: March 2005 EC-26 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR] Tool name (KentMoore No.) Description A Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below. a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor EC C AEM488 Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. Anti-seize lubricant i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) D E S-NT779 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-27 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram PFP:23710 UBS002NZ PBIB2585E Revision: March 2005 EC-28 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS002O2 A INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Knock sensor Engine knocking condition Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas 1 Heated oxygen sensor 2* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Vehicle speed sensor*2 Vehicle speed Air conditioner switch*2 Air conditioner operation Battery Battery voltage*3 ECM function Actuator EC C D Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injector E F G *1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. H SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below. ● During warm-up ● When starting the engine ● During acceleration ● Hot-engine operation ● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models) ● High-load, high-speed operation ● During deceleration ● During high engine speed operation Revision: March 2005 EC-29 2005 Altima J K L M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL) SEF503YB The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-443, "DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. ● Deceleration and acceleration ● High-load, high-speed operation ● Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit ● Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature ● High engine coolant temperature ● During warm-up ● After shifting from N to D (A/T models) ● When starting the engine MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. Revision: March 2005 EC-30 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] FUEL INJECTION TIMING A EC C SEF337W D Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. E F G FUEL SHUT-OFF Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds. Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS002O3 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor I Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Knock sensor Engine knocking Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Vehicle speed sensor*1 Vehicle speed Battery Battery voltage*2 ECM function Actuator J K Ignition timing control Power transistor L M *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2 The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. ● At starting ● During warm-up ● At idle Revision: March 2005 H EC-31 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] At low battery voltage ● During acceleration The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. ● Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS002O5 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Neutral position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Vehicle speed sensor* Vehicle speed Fuel cut control Fuel injector *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled. NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-29 . Revision: March 2005 EC-32 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL [QR] AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL Input/output Signal Chart Sensor 1 PFP:23710 A UBS00IIX Input Signal to ECM Air conditioner switch* Air conditioner ON signal Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation 1 Vehicle speed sensor* Vehicle speed Battery Battery voltage*2 ECM function Actuator EC C Air conditioner cut control Air conditioner relay E F *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. System Description D UBS00IIY This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off. ● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. ● When cranking the engine. ● At high engine speeds. ● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. ● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. ● When engine speed is excessively low. ● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-33 2005 Altima AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [QR] AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description PFP:18930 UBS0034F INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor ASCD brake switch Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Brake pedal operation Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch (A/T models) Gear position Combination meter* Vehicle speed TCM* Powertrain revolution ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. SET OPERATION Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) ACCEL OPERATION If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. ● CANCEL switch is depressed ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models) ● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models) If CRUISE switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. COAST OPERATION When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing CRUISE switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. ● Brake pedal is released. ● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models) ● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models) Revision: March 2005 EC-34 2005 Altima AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [QR] ● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) A Component Description UBS0034G ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-504 . EC ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-511 . C ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-511 . STOP LAMP SWITCH D Refer to EC-511 . ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR E Refer to EC-386 . ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-620 . F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-35 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [QR] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 UBS002O6 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail. Revision: March 2005 EC-36 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description PFP:14950 A UBS00CF3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC C D E F G PBIB2037E The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-37 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING BBIA0293E NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. Revision: March 2005 EC-38 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0413E Revision: March 2005 EC-39 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR] Component Inspection UBS00CF4 EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B . 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C . 3. Release blocked port B . 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C . 5. Block port A and B . 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. PBIB1212E FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing. SEF445Y 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: Vacuum: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-306 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-246 . EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-312 . EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-322 . Revision: March 2005 EC-40 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR] EVAP SERVICE PORT A Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. EC C SEF462UC Removal and Installation D UBS00CF5 EVAP CANISTER E Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. F G H I J K BBIA0246E EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. L M PBIB1384E How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS00CF6 CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: ● Do not start engine. ● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak. ● Revision: March 2005 EC-41 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. Turn ignition switch ON. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. PEF838U 6. 7. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. PEF917U 8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . SEF200U WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter. SEF462UC Revision: March 2005 EC-42 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [QR] 3. Apply battery voltage to the terminal of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system. A EC C BBIA0526E 4. 5. 6. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-43 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR] ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description PFP:00032 UBS00CFA PBIB1387E From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: ● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. ● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. ● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. – Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . – Disconnect battery ground cable. ● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. ● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. ● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. ● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Revision: March 2005 EC-44 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CFB A SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor C attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG D OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. F G H PBIB1213E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I Replace EVAP canister with a new one. J >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. L >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE M Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. Revision: March 2005 EC-45 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR] SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. PBIB1213E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace filler neck tube. Revision: March 2005 EC-46 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR] 7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC 8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE C Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. D 9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I E Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. F G 10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. H I J K SEF665U L M Revision: March 2005 EC-47 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR] Component Inspection UBS00CFC REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. c. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0248E Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. a. b. c. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel gauge retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Revision: March 2005 EC-48 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [QR] d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. A EC C D E F BBIA0248E G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-49 2005 Altima POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [QR] POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description PFP:11810 UBS0034D SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PBIB0492E This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. PBIB1588E Component Inspection UBS0034E PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. PBIB1589E Revision: March 2005 EC-50 2005 Altima POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [QR] PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. 2. A Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. EC C S-ET277 D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-51 2005 Altima NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) [QR] NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Description ● ● ● PFP:25386 UBS00IIT If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system SEF543X and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual, IVIS/NVIS. Revision: March 2005 EC-52 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 A UBS002OD The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979 C D 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979 Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. E ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data SRT code SRT status Test value CONSULT-II × × × × × × — GST × × × — × × × ECM × ×* — — — × — G H *: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-107 .) Two Trip Detection Logic I UBS002OE When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. ×: Applicable MIL DTC 1st trip Items 1st trip DTC 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying — — — × — × — — × — — × — — × — — — — — × — × × — Blinking Blinking Lighting up Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected × — — Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected — — One trip detection diagnoses (Refer to EC-107 .) — Except above — When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. EC-53 J K —: Not applicable 2nd trip Lighting up Revision: March 2005 F 2005 Altima L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS00IIS EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 ×: Applicable —: Not applicable SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*6 — — 1 × EC-166 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*6 — — 2 — EC-166 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — Flashing*7 EC-61 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 × EC-169 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × 2 × EC-173 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × 2 × EC-173 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — 2 × EC-178 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — 1 × EC-187 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — 1 × EC-187 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — 2 × EC-194 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — 2 × EC-194 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-199 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-199 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-204 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-204 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 1 × EC-211 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-214 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-217 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — × 2 × EC-219 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-225 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-233 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-240 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-246 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — 2 × EC-251 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — 2 × EC-251 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-255 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-255 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-262 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-262 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-262 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-262 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-262 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — 2 — EC-269 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — 2 — EC-269 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-273 Revision: March 2005 EC-54 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page A EC ECM*3 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-280 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-287 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-292 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-298 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — 2 × EC-306 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — 2 × EC-306 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — 2 × EC-312 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — 2 × EC-319 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — 2 × EC-322 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — 2 × EC-328 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-335 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 × 2 × EC-343 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-353 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-355 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — 2 × EC-357 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — 2 × EC-357 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-359 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-361 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-363 PW STP SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-365 ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-370 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × AT-105 P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-111 P0720 0720 — — 2 × AT-117 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — 2 × AT-122 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — — 2 × AT-126 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — — 2 × AT-131 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — — 2 × AT-136 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — — 2 × AT-141 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × AT-148 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × AT-153 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × AT-161 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 — — 1 × AT-167 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 — — 1 × AT-172 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 × × 2 × EC-373 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 × × 2 × EC-373 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — 2 × EC-378 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — 2 × EC-382 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — 1 × EC-386 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — 1 × EC-388 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — 1 × EC-394 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — 1 × EC-394 Revision: March 2005 EC-55 2005 Altima C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — 1 × EC-399 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × 2 × EC-404 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × 2 × EC-412 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-420 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-421 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-434 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-436 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — 1 × EC-438 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 — × 2 × EC-443 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 — × 2 × EC-448 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 — × 2 × EC-453 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 — × 2 × EC-460 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 — × 2 × EC-467 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 × × 2 × EC-473 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 × × 2 × EC-482 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — 2 × EC-491 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — 2 × EC-498 ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 — EC-504 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — 1 — EC-511 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — 1 — EC-522 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 P1615 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — BL-84 TPV SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — 1 × AT-177 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — 2 × EC-524 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 — — 2 × AT-183 VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 — — 2 — EC-532 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-537 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-542 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-542 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-549 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-549 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-557 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-564 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Made II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. *6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-61, "How to Display SRT Status" . DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. Revision: March 2005 EC-56 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required A driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecEC utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-65, "HOW C TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ D component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. 1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the E vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-100, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli- F cated, the item requires repair. How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. WITH CONSULT-II WITH GST CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) NO TOOLS The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be 0. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. PBIB0911E FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or Revision: March 2005 EC-57 2005 Altima G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-57, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data 2 3 Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. Revision: March 2005 EC-58 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] SRT Item A The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Corresponding DTC No. Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” 1 Priority* CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420 EVAP SYSTEM 1 EVAP control system P0442 2 EVAP control system P0456 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P1278, P1279 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater P1031, P1032 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038 HO2S HO2S HTR 2 EC C D E F *1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-II. SRT Set Timing G SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below. H Example Self-diagnosis result All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 Ignition cycle ← ON → OFF ← ON → Diagnosis ← ON → P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — P1402 NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL “ON”) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” OFF OFF ← ON → OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above Revision: March 2005 EC-59 2005 Altima I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: ● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. ● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. ● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. ● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. SRT Service Procedure If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. Revision: March 2005 EC-60 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2320E *1 EC-57 *2 EC-61 *3 EC-62 How to Display SRT Status WITH CONSULT-II Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. WITH GST Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) NO TOOLS Revision: March 2005 EC-61 SEF949Z 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds. 2. SRT status is indicated as shown below. ● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously. ● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds. PBIB2317E How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. WITH CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table on EC-59, "SRT Item" . WITHOUT CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. Revision: March 2005 EC-62 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] Driving Pattern A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2314E Revision: March 2005 EC-63 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: ● Sea level ● Flat road ● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) ● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: ● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). ● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V). ● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V). Pattern 2: ● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. Pattern 3: ● Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure. ● Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH). Pattern 4: ● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steadystate driving. ● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for PBIB2244E more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. ● Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON. Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For quick acceleration in low altitude areas For high attitude areas [over 1,219m (4,000 ft)]: ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) 1st to 2nd 24 (15) 24 (15) 24 (15) 2nd to 3rd 28 (18) 40 (25) 40 (25) 3rd to 4th 48 (30) 57 (36) 64 (40) 4th to 5th 62 (39) 64 (40) 75 (45) Gear change Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear Revision: March 2005 EC-64 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Gear km/h (MPH) 1st 50 (30) 2nd 90 (55) 3rd — 4th — 5th — A EC C D TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen. Test value (GST display) Item Self-diagnostic test item CATALYST Three way catalyst function EVAP SYSTEM DTC Test limit Conversion 01H Max. 1/128 02H 81H Min. 1 P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm P1271 41H 8EH Min. 5 mV P1272 42H 0EH Max. 5 mV P1273 43H 0EH Max. 0.002 P1274 44H 8EH Min. 0.002 P1278 45H 8EH Min. 0.004 P1276 46H 0EH Max. 5 mV P1276 47H 8EH Min. 5 mV P1279 48H 8EH Min. 0.004 P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500 ms P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10 mV P1032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV P1031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV TID CID P0420 01H P0420 EVAP control system (Small leak) A/F sensor 1 HO2S Heated oxygen sensor 2 A/F sensor 1 heater HO2S HEATER Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater G I 2 With CONSULT-II The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). EC-65 F H HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC Revision: March 2005 E 2005 Altima J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”. 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” twice. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) SCIA5334E With GST The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST. NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" , skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-42, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) 3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). No Tools NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Revision: March 2005 EC-66 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] 2. 3. Perform AT-42, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to A EC-68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. EC ● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. – Diagnostic trouble codes C – 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes – Freeze frame data – 1st trip freeze frame data D – System readiness test (SRT) codes – Test values – Others E Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS002OH F DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-623, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. G H I SEF217U J ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION The on board diagnostic system has the following 3 functions. K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-67 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function Mode I Ignition switch in ON position BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. Engine stopped Engine running Mode II Ignition switch in ON position SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) ● One trip detection diagnoses This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. Engine stopped When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut MIL Flashing Without DTC When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-61, "How to Display SRT Status" . HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. ● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Revision: March 2005 EC-68 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). A EC C PBIB0092E D How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. 3. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-68, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. E F DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" . G DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING MIL H Condition ON When the malfunction is detected. OFF No malfunction I These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code. J K L M SEF952W Revision: March 2005 EC-69 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back-up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC69, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. ● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses. OBD System Operation Chart UBS002OI RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS ● ● ● ● ● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-53, "Two Trip Detection Logic" . The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip. SUMMARY CHART Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-72 . For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-74 . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. Revision: March 2005 EC-70 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision: March 2005 EC-71 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”) Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: ● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F). ● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) ● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. ● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction. ● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. ● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision: March 2005 EC-72 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF393SD *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. Revision: March 2005 EC-73 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [QR] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” AEC574 ● ● ● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”). Revision: March 2005 EC-74 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Basic Inspection PFP:00018 A UBS002OM 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. EC C D E F G H I J SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-75 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. PBIA8513J 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 . 1. 2. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-76 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80 . E M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G SEF174Y OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. H I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. K L 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. M Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-77 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0005E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF174Y OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision: March 2005 EC-78 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80 . EC M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19 NG >> GO TO 16. C D BBIA0005E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. F G 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● I J 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . L M >> GO TO 4. 19. INSPECTION END Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" . 2. INSPECTION END No >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-79 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check UBS002O7 IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF058Y With GST Check idle speed in “Service $01” with GST. IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. Method A 1. 2. 3. Slide the harness protector off the ignition coil No.1 to clear the wires. Attach timing light to the wires. Check ignition timing. BBIA0089E Method B 1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil. BBIA0004E 2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire. BBIA0076E Revision: March 2005 EC-80 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] A EC C SEF166Y D 3. Check ignition timing. E F G BBIA0005E Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment UBS002O8 H PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery ● Ignition system ● Engine oil and coolant levels ● Fuses ● ECM harness connector ● Vacuum hoses ● Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Fuel pressure ● Engine compression ● Throttle valve ● Evaporative emission system On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Revision: March 2005 EC-81 2005 Altima I J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] OVERALL SEQUENCE PBIB2061E Revision: March 2005 EC-82 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] DETAILED PROCEDURE A 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for EC scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections C Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks D Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. F Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature G indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H I SEF976U Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J 5. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-83 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. PBIA8513J 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 . 1. 2. M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-84 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80 E M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 . G M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. K L 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. M Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-85 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80 M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0005E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 . M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision: March 2005 EC-86 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80 . EC M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) C OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (With GST)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 16. D BBIA0005E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. F G 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● I J 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . L M >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-87 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. 1. 2. 3. 20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With GST 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. Revision: March 2005 EC-88 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-445, "Wiring Diagram" . A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 4 2 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 EC C D E Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM and A/F sensor 1. 2. GO TO 4. G H 22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. F Reconnect ECM harness connector. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . I >> GO TO 23. J 23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . K >> GO TO 24. L 24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-89 M 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 25. CHECK CO% With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”. 5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. 6. Check CO%. 1. 2. 3. 4. Idle CO: 0.3 − 9.5% and engine runs smoothly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. SEF172Y 26. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 0.3 − 9.5% and engine runs smoothly. 7. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. SEF982UA 27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. >> GO TO 31. 28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 1. 2. Stop engine. Replace A/F sensor 1. With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 30. Revision: March 2005 EC-90 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models). C NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 D MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. E 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. G 1. 2. 3. 30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With GST 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. Revision: March 2005 EC-91 2005 Altima H I J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer toEC-95, "Fuel Pressure Check" ● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-178, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" and EC-187, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . ● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . ● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-199, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" and EC-211, "DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 33. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 32. 32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" and EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 4. 33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . >> GO TO 4. VIN Registration UBS00IIU DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" . Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. PBIB2242E Revision: March 2005 EC-92 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS002O9 A DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. EC OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C D Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS002OA DESCRIPTION E Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. F OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Idle Air Volume Learning G H UBS002OB DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: ● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. ● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. I J PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. ● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) ● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F) ● PNP switch: ON ● Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. ● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) ● Vehicle speed: Stopped ● Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/ T” system indicates less than 0.9V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. Revision: March 2005 EC-93 2005 Altima K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. SEF452Y 6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. SEF454Y 7. 8. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Refer to EC-80 . ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing MBIB0238E M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 2. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-94 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. A EC C D SEC897C 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Refer to EC-80 . ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) E F G 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: – Engine stalls. – Erroneous idle. Fuel Pressure Check 3. 4. 5. K L M Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. SEF214Y Revision: March 2005 J UBS002OC FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. I EC-95 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. BBIA0229E FUEL PRESSURE CHECK Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because L31 models do not have fuel return system. Method A CAUTION: ● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. ● Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside. ● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/ C, etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in manifold vacuum. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. ● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). ● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. ● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. ● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. 3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . ● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. ● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. ● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. 4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. ● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. ● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. ● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. ● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). ● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. PBIB0669E ● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. ● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. Revision: March 2005 EC-96 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] ● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in). Tightening torque: A 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kgm, 9 - 13 in-lb) Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage. BBIA0077E Start engine and check for fuel leakage. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. ● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. ● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. EC ● 5. 6. 7. 8. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) C D E F 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. ● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging ● Fuel filter for clogging ● Fuel pump ● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. G H I Method B CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. ● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . ● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. ● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. ● Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in the figure. ● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. ● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. BBIA0436E 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. ● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. Revision: March 2005 EC-97 2005 Altima J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [QR] At idling: 7. 8. 9. Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. Check the following. ● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging ● Fuel filter for clogging ● Fuel pump ● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" Revision: March 2005 EC-98 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction PFP:00004 A UBS002OJ INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine. EC C D MEF036D It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. E F G H SEF233G I A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on EC-100 . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the example on EC-104 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. J K L SEF234G M Revision: March 2005 EC-99 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] WORK FLOW Overall Sequence PBIB2267E Revision: March 2005 EC-100 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Detailed Flow A 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when EC the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-103, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . >> GO TO 2. C 2. CHECK DTC* 1 1. Check DTC*1 . D 1 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC* is displayed. – Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.) – Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .) Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-108 .) 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? – E F G 1 Symptom is described, DTC* is displayed>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5. H 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON). DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. K >> GO TO 5. 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM L Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 J EC-101 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1 , and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”. If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-105, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble diagnosis order. NOTE: ● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected. ● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC*1 detected? Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> Check according to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. 7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE With CONSULT-II Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-149, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Are they within the SP value? Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 8. SEF601Z 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Detect malfunctioning part according toEC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Is malfunctioning part detected? Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Detect malfunctioning system according toEC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. >> GO TO 10. Revision: March 2005 EC-102 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection EC is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Is malfunctioning part detected? C Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-142, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-120, "ECM Termi- D nals and Reference Value" . 11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. 3. E Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . F G >> GO TO 12. 12. FINAL CHECK H When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG I NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10. NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6. OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and EC-65, "How to Erase DTC" .) 2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC63, "Driving Pattern" . 3. INSPECTION END *1: Include 1st trip DTC. *2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Description There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples: ● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. ● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. Revision: March 2005 EC-103 SEF907L 2005 Altima J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Worksheet Sample MTBL0017 Revision: March 2005 EC-104 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS002OK A If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. NOTE: If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC U1000 and U1001. Refer to EC-166 . Priority 1 Detected items (DTC) ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line ● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor ● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor ● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor ● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor ● P0128 Thermostat function ● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor ● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor ● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor ● P0605 ECM ● P1229 Sensor power supply ● P1610-P1615 NATS ● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-105 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Priority 2 3 Detected items (DTC) ● P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● P0138 P0139 P1146 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring ● P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve ● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor ● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system ● P0550 power steering pressure sensor ● P0705-P0725, P0740-P0755, P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves ● P1031 P1032 A/F sensor 1 heater ● P1065 ECM power supply ● P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ● P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 A/F sensor 1 ● P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve ● P1805 Brake switch ● P0011 Intake valve timing control ● P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function ● P0300 - P0304 Misfire ● P0420 Three way catalyst function ● P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK) ● P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK) ● P0731-P0734 A/T function ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1148 Closed loop control ● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) ● P1564 ASCD steering switch ● P1572 ASCD brake switch ● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor Revision: March 2005 EC-106 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Fail-safe Chart UBS002OL A When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULTII display) Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above EC D E 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. F P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. P1121 Electric throttle control actuator (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction:) ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. I (When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. J (When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. ● C P1122 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1124 P1126 Throttle control relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Revision: March 2005 Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-107 2005 Altima G H K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Symptom Matrix Chart UBS002ON SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 Ignition Throttle position sensor circuit Knock sensor circuit Revision: March 2005 AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 4 4 2 EC-598 4 EC-95 2 EC-592 4 4 EC-37 4 4 4 1 1 1 EC-75 2 EC-386, EC-388 , EC-394 , EC-399 EC-50 1 1 1 1 EC-75 2 2 2 2 2 EC-572 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-159 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-178, EC-187 , EC-178 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-199, EC-211 2 EC-557, EC-255 , EC-204 , EC-434 , EC-436 2 3 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 EC-108 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 Reference page 2 Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit A/F sensor 1 circuit BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Fuel pump circuit EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION Fuel EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM 2 3 2 1 EC-564, EC-542 , EC-549 , EC-438 2 2 2 2 2 EC-443, EC-448 , EC-453 , EC-460 , EC-467 ,EC-473 ,EC-482 3 EC-269 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] SYMPTOM HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-273 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-280 Warranty symptom code Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 Power steering pressure sensor circuit ECM 2 2 3 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit 3 3 2 3 VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3 Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 3 2 Electrical load signal circuit 2 2 3 3 3 Reference page C D E EC-359 F G EC-365 3 3 EC-370, EC-378 3 EC-382 1 PNP switch circuit Air conditioner circuit 3 EC EC-583 3 3 3 3 3 EC-524 3 3 3 3 4 EC-605 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-610 3 2 ATC-28, MTC-28 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-109 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER Fuel ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA FL-12 Fuel tank Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EC-593, EM-32 5 5 Vapor lock — Valve deposit Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) Air — 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 — Air duct EM-17 Air cleaner EM-17 Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor —electric throttle control actuator) Electric throttle control actuator 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-17 5 5 EM-19 Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket Cranking EM-19 Battery Generator circuit Engine Reference page SC-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SC-21 Starter circuit 3 SC-9 Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-75 PNP switch 4 MT-13 or AT-105 Cylinder head Cylinder head gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 3 EM-59 Cylinder block Piston 4 Piston ring Connecting rod 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-75 Bearing Crankshaft Revision: March 2005 EC-110 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] SYMPTOM Valve mechanism HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA EC Reference page D E Timing chain EM-48 Camshaft EM-37 Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-48 5 Intake valve 3 C F G EM-59 Exhaust valve Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket H 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-24, EX3 5 Three way catalyst Lubrication Cooling Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 EM-26, LU10 , LU-11 , LU-5 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7 Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-11 Thermostat 5 CO-16 Water pump Water gallery CO-14 5 5 5 5 5 Cooling fan 5 2 5 Coolant level (low)/Contaminated coolant NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) 5 5 J K CO-7 CO-11 L CO-9 1 1 BL-107 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. Revision: March 2005 I EC-111 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS002OO BBIA0405E Revision: March 2005 EC-112 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0406E Revision: March 2005 EC-113 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] BBIA0296E BBIA0407E Revision: March 2005 EC-114 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0091E Revision: March 2005 EC-115 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] BBIA0453E Revision: March 2005 EC-116 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS002O0 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2027E Refer to EC-28, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. Revision: March 2005 EC-117 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Circuit Diagram UBS002OP BBWA1211E Revision: March 2005 EC-118 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M WBWA0108E Revision: March 2005 EC-119 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS002OQ PBIB1192E ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS00CC6 PREPARATION 1. ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection, remove glove box. BBIA0450E 2. 3. 4. Remove ECM harness protector. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with lever as far as it will go as shown at right. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. ● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. ● Data is for comparison and may not be exact. SEC406D ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-120 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Body ground A EC Approximately 5V C [Engine is running] 2 R A/F sensor 1 heater ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D PBIB1584E 3 R Throttle control motor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E 0 - 14V F [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Released G PBIB0534E H 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 Y Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed I PBIB0533E J [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) K 7 - 10V 11 G Intake valve timing control solenoid valve L [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed 2,500 rpm M PBIB1790E [Engine is running] 12 P Power steering pressure sensor ● [Engine is running] ● Revision: March 2005 Steering wheel is being turned Steering wheel is not being turned EC-121 0.5 - 4.0V 0.4 - 0.8V 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 4.0V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 13 W PBIB0525E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0526E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 3.0V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 14 W PBIB0527E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0528E 15 W Knock sensor [Engine is running] ● 16 35 Idle speed Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L Approximately 2.5V A/F sensor 1 Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V EC-122 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] 22 23 41 42 R/Y R/B R/L R/W ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC (11 - 14V) C NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 PBIB0529E D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm F PBIB0530E G [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● 25 P/B Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater H 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under on load I [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped. [Engine is running] ● 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve Idle speed [Engine is running] ● J BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) K Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm 0 - 1.0V L 32 W EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 34 Y/G Intake air temperature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. Revision: March 2005 EC-123 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 45 PU/R ● Idle speed ● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) PBIB0520E 47 R Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 R Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W Throttle position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0.9 - 1.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. EC-124 1.4 - 1.7V 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 61 62 80 81 L/R Y/R G/Y G/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.1V EC NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 A C PBIB0521E D 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] ● ● E Warm-up condition Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. F PBIB0522E [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G Approximately 0V H Approximately 5V I [Engine is running] 67 68 B G/R Sensor ground Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R Throttle position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released J Less than 4.75V K [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 0.36V L [Engine is running] 70 73 W Y Refrigerant pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON (Compressor operates.) [Engine is running] 1.0 - 4.0V M Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. [Engine is running] 74 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-125 Approximately 0V 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TERMINAL NO. 82 83 85 WIRE COLOR B G OR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA link connector DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 86 P CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.3V 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 OR Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.8V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 G/Y ASCD steering switch CRUISE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● SET/COAST switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 GW PNP switch OR Throttle control motor relay Revision: March 2005 Gear position is P or N [Ignition switch: ON] ● 104 0.28 - 0.48V Except the above gear position More than 2.0V Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 2V Approximately 3V Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V A/T models BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) M/T models Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V EC-126 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Ignition switch: ON] 106 107 W P/L Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released EC 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Engine is running] More than 4.3V C Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. D Approximately 0V E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F [Ignition switch: ON] 108 109 G/B*1 G/R*2 R ASCD brake switch ● Brake pedal: Depressed ● Clutch pedal: Depressed (M/T) [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Fully released ● Clutch pedal: Released (M/T) [Ignition switch: OFF] 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Ignition switch [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) A few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF G H 0 - 1.0V I BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J [Ignition switch: ON] ● 114 B/OR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0V K [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 115 116 B 117 OR EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 W/L Power supply for ECM (Back-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ECM ground ● Idle speed Body ground M : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) *1: A/T models *2: M/T models Revision: March 2005 EC-127 L 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) UBS002OS FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit. Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*1 Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. *1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. 1. Diagnostic trouble codes 2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes 3. Freeze frame data 4. 1st trip freeze frame data 5. System readiness test (SRT) codes 6. Test values Revision: March 2005 EC-128 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION A DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE INPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS Item WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DTC*1 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 × DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) × × × × × Mass air flow sensor × × × Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × A/F sensor 1 × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × Vehicle speed sensor × × × Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × Throttle position sensor × × × Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × EVAP control system pressure sensor × × × Intake air temperature sensor × × × Knock sensor × Refrigerant pressure sensor × × Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal) × × Air conditioner switch × × × × ACTIVE TEST SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT EC C D × × × × × E F × G H I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × × Stop lamp switch × × × Power steering pressure sensor × × × Battery voltage × × Load signal × × Fuel level sensor × × × ASCD steering switch × × × ASCD brake switch × × × Revision: March 2005 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION EC-129 J K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Injector × × × Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × × × × × × × × × × × × OUTPUT Item ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION DATA MONITOR (SPEC) WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 Throttle control motor relay × Throttle control motor × EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve × FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 Air conditioner relay Fuel pump relay × SRT STATUS × × Cooling fan relay × × × A/F sensor 1 heater × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × × × × × × Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × × × VIAS control solenoid valve × × × × × × EVAP canister vent control valve × × Calculated load value DTC WORK SUPPORT X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-57 . INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 4. Touch “START” (NISSAN BASED VHCL). BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 EC-130 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] 5. Touch “ENGINE”. If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . A EC C BCIA0030E Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. D 6. E F G BCIA0031E H WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE I FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value K EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system L ● IGN SW ON ● ENGINE NOT RUNNING ● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). ● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM ● M FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). ● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” ● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION. NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. VIN REGISTRATION Revision: March 2005 ● IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM EC-131 J When registering VIN in ECM 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" . Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data Freeze frame data item* DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] Description ● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● One mode in the following is displayed. “Mode 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction “Mode 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) “Mode 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control “Mode 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] ● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. FUEL SYS-B1 L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] ● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VEHICL SPEED [km/ h] or [mph] ● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] ● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. *: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS ×: Applicable MAIN SIGNALS Description ● ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × Revision: March 2005 ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the signals of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. EC-132 Remarks ● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed drops below the idle rpm. ● If the signal is interrupted while the engine is running, an abnormal value may be indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] MAIN SIGNALS Description ● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. ● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. × × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ● COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F] × × A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × HO2S2 (B1) [V] × HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN] × × BATTERY VOLT [V] × × ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × THRTL SEN 1 [V] × THRTL SEN 2 [V] × FUEL T/TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] × VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [MPH] × × INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] × × EVAP SYS PRES [V] FUEL LEVEL SE [V] × The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed. ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed. ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN... means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. ● The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. ● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the revolution sensor signal. ● The intake air temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated. × ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. × ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. ● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. × × CLSD THL POS [ON/ OFF] × × ● EC ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. ● When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circulated, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. D E G ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. H I J ● ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. K L M ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal. EC-133 C F The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed. ● START SIGNAL [ON/ OFF] Revision: March 2005 ● × VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. A Remarks 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS AIR COND SIG [ON/ OFF] × × P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] × × Monitored item [Unit] PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/ OFF] × Description ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. ● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering pressure sensor as determined by the power steering pressure sensor signal is indicated. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. ON... Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position. OFF... Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch are OFF. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch. × LOAD SIGNAL [ON/ OFF] × × IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] × × HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch signal. BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current airflow divided by peak airflow. ● Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor. ● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The opening becomes larger as the value increases. ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle. ● The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signal) is indicated. ● The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases. ● The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON... VIAS control solenoid valve is operating. OFF... VIAS control solenoid valve is not operating. INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × IGN TIMING [BTDC] × CAL/LD VALUE [%] MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s] PURG VOL C/V [%] INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA] INT/V SOL (B1) [%] VIAS S/V [ON/OFF] Revision: March 2005 EC-134 Remarks ● When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS AIR COND RLY [ON/ OFF] × FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF] × Description ● The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON... Closed OFF... Open VENT CONT/V [ON/ OFF] ● THRTL RELAY [ON/ OFF] × ● COOLING FAN [HI/LOW/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [mile] ● Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET... Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT... Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully. ● Distance traveled while MIL is activated. ● Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value increases. ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is displayed. ● The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CRUISE switch signal. CANCEL SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal. RESUME/ACC SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/ACCEL switch signal. SET SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/ COAST switch signal. AC PRESS SEN [V] VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph] Revision: March 2005 × C D E F Indicates the condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals). HI... High speed operation LOW... Low speed operation OFF... Stop Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%] EC Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● IDL A/V LEARN [YET/ CMPLT] A Remarks EC-135 G H I J K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS BRAKE SW1 SW [ON/OFF] BRAKE SW2 SW [ON/OFF] Description ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch switch signal (M/T models). ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT...Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT...Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the input signal from the TCM. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. VHCL SPD CUT [NON/CUT] LO SPEED CUT [NON/CUT] AT OD MONITOR [ON/OFF] AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF] CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF] SET LAMP [ON/OFF] Remarks ● For M/T models always “OFF” is displayed. ● For M/T models always “OFF” is displayed. ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to be measured. ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones. They are the same figures as an actual piece of data which was just previously measured. Voltage [V] Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%] ● DUTY-HI DUTY-LOW Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width measured by the probe. PLS WIDTH-HI PLS WIDTH-LOW DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS ENG SPEED [rpm] × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × Revision: March 2005 MAIN SIGNALS × Description ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS). ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed. EC-136 Remarks ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] ECM INPUT SIGNALS Monitored item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description ● B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. A Remarks ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. EC C D NOTE: ● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. E ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item TEST ITEM CONDITION ● FUEL INJECTION IGNITION TIMING POWER BALANCE COOLING FAN ENG COOLANT TEMP FUEL PUMP RELAY VIAS SOL VALVE PURG VOL CONT/V ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II. JUDGEMENT If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel injector ● A/F sensor 1 ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. G ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Timing light: Set ● Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. ● Harness and connectors ● Compression ● A/C switch OFF ● Fuel injector ● Shift lever N ● Power transistor ● Cut off each injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Spark plug ● Ignition coil ● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors ● Turn the cooling fan ON and OFF with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan relay ● Cooling fan motor ● Harness and connectors ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Fuel injector Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel pump relay Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and OFF using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Ignition switch: ON ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF with CONSULT-II and listen for operating sound. ● Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. ● Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Engine runs rough or dies. Cooling fan moves and stops. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. EC-137 F H I J K L 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] TEST ITEM FUEL/T TEMP SEN VENT CONTROL/V V/T ASSIGN ANGLE CONDITION JUDGEMENT ● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Change intake valve timing using CONSULT-II. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve ● Harness and connectors ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode For details, refer to EC-58, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode Test mode EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM Test item Condition PURGE FLOW P0441 EC-292 EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-298 EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-343 PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-491 Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC. A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 A/F SEN1 HO2S2 Reference page A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278 EC-467 EC-473 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279 EC-482 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-225 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-404 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-412 *: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to L31 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens. Revision: March 2005 EC-138 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) Description A CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. EC 1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): ● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. C In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording D Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If E “STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed. PBIB1593E The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and F “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL. 2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): G ● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. H DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. SEF707X I Operation 1. 2. “AUTO TRIG” ● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected. ● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .) “MANU TRIG” ● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. Revision: March 2005 EC-139 2005 Altima J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] PBIB0197E Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS002OT DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual. SEF139P FUNCTION Diagnostic service Function Service $01 READINESS TESTS This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-57, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . Service $03 DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. Revision: March 2005 EC-140 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Diagnostic service Function This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) ● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03) ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01) ● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02) ● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) ● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07) A EC C Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. D Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. E This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve can be closed. In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function. Service $08 Service $09 — (CALIBRATION ID) ● Low ambient temperature ● Low battery voltage ● Engine running ● Ignition switch OFF ● Low fuel temperature ● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system F G H This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. I INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover. Turn ignition switch ON. J K L BBIA0002E 4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) SEF398S Revision: March 2005 EC-141 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] 5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. SEF416S CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor UBS002OU Remarks: ● Specification data are reference values. ● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Tachometer: Connect ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer indication. MAS A/F SE-B1 ● See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . B/FUEL SCHDL ● See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . A/F ALPHA-B1 ● See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up A/F SEN1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine: After warming up ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) VEH SPEED SE BATTERY VOLT ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2*1 THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2*1 VEHICLE SPEED CLSD THL POS ● Revision: March 2005 Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. More than 70°C (158°F) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF EC-142 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL LOAD SIGNAL IGNITION SW HEATER FAN SW BRAKE SW CONDITION ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) INJ PULSE-B1 IGN TIMING ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW PURG VOL C/V INT/V TIM (B1) Revision: March 2005 Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Shift lever: P or N (A/T model) Neutral (M/T model) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel is being turned. ON Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION A EC C D E ON → OFF → ON Heater fan is operating. ON Heater fan is not operating OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec F G H I Idle 10° - 20° BTDC 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC Idle 10% - 35% 2,500 rpm 10% - 35% Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s Idle (Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting) 0% 2,000 rpm 20 - 30% Idle −5° - 5°CA 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA J EC-143 K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine INT/V SOL (B1) AIR COND RLY VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 60% Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON Idle OFF More than 5,000 rpm ON ● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions OFF VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Air conditioner switch: OFF COOLING FAN ON Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F) MID Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HI ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V ● Engine: Idle ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating The preset vehicle speed is displayed. CRUISE switch: Pressed ON MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL SW ● CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACC SW ● HO2S2 HTR (B1) AC PRESS SEN VEH SPEED SE SET SW ● Revision: March 2005 Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON ON OFF Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON. 0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile) 1.0 - 4.0V RESUME/ACCEL switch: Released OFF SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF EC-144 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) CONDITION ● Brake pedal: Fully released ● Clutch pedal: Fully released (M/T) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ● Clutch pedal: Fully depressed (M/ T) A ON OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch is pressed at first time → second time ON → OFF ● MAIN switch: ON ASCD is operating ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD is not operating OFF ● CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON EC OFF Brake pedal: Fully released BRAKE SW2 (STOP lamp switch) SET LAMP Ignition switch: ON ● SPECIFICATION C D E *1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-145 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS002OV The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position (A/T models) or with shift lever in 1st position (M/T models). The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF. PBIB0198E ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. SEF241Y Revision: March 2005 EC-146 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2099E Revision: March 2005 EC-147 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description PFP:00031 UBS002OW The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: ● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction) ● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) ● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition ● UBS002OX Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) ● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) ● Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) ● Transmission: Warmed-up*1 ● Electrical load: Not applied*2 ● Engine speed: Idle *1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. *2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead. ● Inspection Procedure UBS002OY NOTE: Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SEB1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to EC-149, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF601Z Revision: March 2005 EC-148 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IJ0 A OVERALL SEQUENCE EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2318E Revision: March 2005 EC-149 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] PBIB2509E Revision: March 2005 EC-150 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] DETAILED PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” 1. 2. 3. Start engine. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-148, "Testing Condition" . Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. NOTE: Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value even a little. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3. EC C D E PBIB2369E 2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” F Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19. G H I PBIB2332E J 3. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. K L M PBIB2332E 4. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop the engine. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-151 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] 5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL 1. 2. Stop the engine. Change engine oil. NOTE: This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving condition. >> INSPECTION END 6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-95, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-95 . GO TO 8. NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – 2. Check the following. Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube Clogged fuel filter Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-598 .) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-95 .) If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10. PBIB0133E Revision: March 2005 EC-152 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – – 2. A Check the following. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-572 .) Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-592 .) Intake air leakage Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-59 .) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.) EC C D >> GO TO 11. 11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” E 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 12. F G 12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION H Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1. ● For DTC P1271, refer to EC-443, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1272, refer to EC-448, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1273, refer to EC-453, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1274, refer to EC-460, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1276, refer to EC-467, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1278, refer to EC-474, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1279, refer to EC-483, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. I J K L 13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC. M >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 15. Revision: March 2005 EC-153 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] 15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Stop the engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. >> GO TO 16. 16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . 17. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. PBIB2332E 18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – – – 2. – – – Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following. Engine oil level is too high Engine oil viscosity Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive Noise from engine Noise from transmission, etc. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. Valve clearance malfunction Intake valve timing control function malfunction Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc. >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30. 19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20. Revision: March 2005 EC-154 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] 20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” A Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. EC OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21. C DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR 21. 1. 2. Stop the engine. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and then reconnect it again. D E >> GO TO 22. 22. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” F 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-187 . 2. GO TO 29. NG >> GO TO 23. 23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” G H I Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29. J K L PBIB2370E 24. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. M Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> GO TO 29. Revision: March 2005 EC-155 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] 25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 27. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26. 26. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27. 27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30. PBIB2370E 28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct ● Looseness of oil filler cap ● Disconnection of oil level gauge ● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve ● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket ● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts ● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc. >> GO TO 30. 29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . Revision: March 2005 EC-156 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [QR] 30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” A Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within the SP value. EC OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-157 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT [QR] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description PFP:00006 UBS002P0 Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of Intermittent Incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations STEP in Work Flow 2 3 or 4 Situation The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than 0 or [1t]. The symptom described by the customer does not recur. 5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. 10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. Diagnostic Procedure UBS002P1 1. INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “CIRCUIT INSPECTION”, “Ground Inspection”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-158 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [QR] POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram PFP:24110 A UBS00ELQ EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1213E Revision: March 2005 EC-159 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 109 R Ignition switch Idle speed 111 W/B 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● B B ECM ground 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Engine is running] ● 0 - 1.0V A few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 115 116 Body ground [Ignition switch: OFF] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ECM relay (Self shutoff) DATA (DC Voltage) Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Body ground BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00ELR 1. INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0015E Revision: March 2005 EC-160 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [QR] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse EC C >> Repair harness or connectors. 4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . E F G H BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. I 5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I J 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. L Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. M 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-161 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [QR] 7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB2028E 8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 18. PBIB1630E 9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 12. PBIB1191E Revision: March 2005 EC-162 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [QR] 10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 11. D 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness or connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI 1. 2. 3. H Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. J K 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L Check the following. ● Harness or connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK 15A FUSE 1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R. 2. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. Revision: March 2005 EC-163 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [QR] 15. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer toEC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 17. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Ground Inspection UBS00ELS Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: ● Remove the ground bolt or screw. Revision: March 2005 EC-164 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [QR] Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. A ● Clean as required to assure good contact. ● Reinstall bolt or screw securely. ● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. EC ● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. C For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-28, "Ground Distribution" . ● D E F G H PBIB1870E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-165 2005 Altima DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QR] DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 UBS002P4 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name U1000*1 1000*1 U1001*2 DTC detecting condition ● CAN communication line 1001*2 UBS002P5 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control units. ECM cannot communicate for more than the specified time. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted) *1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. UBS002P6 Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-166 2005 Altima DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002P7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1214E Revision: March 2005 EC-167 2005 Altima DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002P8 Go to LAN-4, "PRECAUTIONS" . Revision: March 2005 EC-168 2005 Altima DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QR] DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL Description PFP:23796 A UBS002P9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Vehicle speed sensor* Vehicle speed Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve *: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. C D E F G H I PBIB0540E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. J K L CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002PA Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V SOL (B1) Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Idle −5° - 5°CA 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 60% EC-169 2005 Altima M DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QR] On Board Diagnosis Logic Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. P0011 0011 Intake valve timing control performance UBS002PB Detecting condition There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree. Possible cause ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● Intake valve control solenoid valve ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft ● Timing chain installation ● Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for intake valve timing control FAIL-SAFE MODE ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002PC CAUTION: Always drive at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC382 . ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED 500 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 120°C (158 - 248°F) Selector lever P or N position 4. 5. 6. SEF174Y Let engine idle for 10 seconds. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,800 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F) Selector lever 1st or 2nd position Driving location uphill Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.) 7. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-170 2005 Altima DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QR] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS002PD 1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP EC 1. 2. Start engine. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to LU-8 . C D E PBIA8559J F 2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G Refer to EC-172 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H 3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) I Refer to EC-278 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). J 4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) K Refer to EC-285 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). L 5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) M Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. PBIB0565E Revision: March 2005 EC-171 2005 Altima DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL [QR] 6. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned. OK or NG OK >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48 . NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT Refer to EM-44, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean lubrication line. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158 . For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-275 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-282 for CMP sensor (PHASE). >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IJ1 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as follows. Terminal Resistance 1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F) 1 or 2 and ground (Continuity should not exist.) If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E 4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Removal and Installation PBIB2275E UBS00IJ2 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" . Revision: March 2005 EC-172 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR] DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER Description PFP:226A0 A UBS002PM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater C Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air D The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION E Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Above 3,600 OFF ● Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load F ON G CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002PN H Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 HTR (B1) CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm I ON J OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0037 0037 P0038 0038 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high UBS002PO K DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater M DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002PP NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Revision: March 2005 EC-173 L 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR] 4. 5. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-176, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above. Revision: March 2005 EC-174 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002PQ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1215E Revision: March 2005 EC-175 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. ● 25 P/B Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under on load [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped. [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. Diagnostic Procedure UBS002PR 1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0414E 4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0112E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-176 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER [QR] 3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 25 and HO2S2 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors. D 4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER E Refer to EC-177, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. F 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002PS HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. I Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F) 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 J K 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. L M SEF249Y Removal and Installation UBS002PT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" . Revision: March 2005 EC-177 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 UBS002PU The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. SEC266C CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002PV Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CONDITION ● ● See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW SPECIFICATION Idle 10% - 35% 2,500 rpm 10% - 35% Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition A) P0101 0101 UBS002PW A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem B) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Intake air temperature sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Intake air temperature sensor UBS002PX Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. Revision: March 2005 EC-178 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed. EC With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF174Y F With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. I J K L M SEF243Y Revision: March 2005 EC-179 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] 7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check PBIB0199E UBS002PY PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “Service $01” with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “Service $01”. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. If NG, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF534P Revision: March 2005 EC-180 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002PZ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1216E Revision: March 2005 EC-181 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0.9 - 1.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.4 - 1.7V [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shutoff) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS002Q0 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? A or B A >> GO TO 3. B >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK Check the following for connections. Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. ● Revision: March 2005 EC-182 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] 3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. E F 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. G Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. H I J BBIA0009E 3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. K Voltage: Battery voltage L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. M PBIB2315E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-183 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-216, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-321, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-184, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002Q1 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Revision: March 2005 EC-184 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] 4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.4 - 1.7 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* A EC C 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4 PBIB2371E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. D If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. E F G H Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. I Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition Voltage V K Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.4 - 1.7 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* J L 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4 PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-185 2005 Altima M DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [QR] Removal and Installation UBS002Q2 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-186 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR] DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 A UBS002Q3 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. EC C D PBIB1604E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002Q4 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CONDITION ● ● See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW F SPECIFICATION Idle 10% - 35% 2,500 rpm 10% - 35% G H ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s I J On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002Q5 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0102 0102 P0103 0103 K Trouble diagnosis name Mass air flow sensor circuit low input Mass air flow sensor circuit high input DTC detecting condition Possible cause An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002Q6 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-187 2005 Altima L M DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR] 2. 3. 4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to next step. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-188 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002Q7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1216E Revision: March 2005 EC-189 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0.9 - 1.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.4 - 1.7V [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS002Q8 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103 P0102 >> GO TO 2. P0103 >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connections. Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. ● Revision: March 2005 EC-190 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR] 3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. E F 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. G Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. H I J BBIA0009E 3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. K Voltage: Battery voltage L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. M PBIB2315E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-191 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR POEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-192, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IJ3 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.4 - 1.7 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4 PBIB2371E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Revision: March 2005 EC-192 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [QR] a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. A EC C D Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. E Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition Voltage V Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.4 - 1.7 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* F G H 0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4 PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation J K L M UBS002QA MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-193 I 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR] DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS002QB The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. PBIB1604E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3 25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 *: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS002QC DTC detecting condition P0112 0112 Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0113 0113 Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air temperature sensor UBS002QD NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-197, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y Revision: March 2005 EC-194 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-195 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002QE BBWA1217E Revision: March 2005 EC-196 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002QF 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY G 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. H I J BBIA0009E 3. K Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M PBIB2321E 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-197 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [QR] 4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-198, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002QG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). PBIB1604E SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS002QH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-198 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR] DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS002QI The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D SEF594K E Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 Resistance F kΩ G H *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002QJ I J These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition P0117 0117 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0118 0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause K ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor M FAIL-SAFE MODE When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Revision: March 2005 EC-199 L 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR] Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002QK NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-202, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-200 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002QL A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1218E Revision: March 2005 EC-201 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002QM 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0410E 3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0080E 3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-202 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [QR] 4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR A Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. EC 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002QN ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. E Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. F G H PBIB2005E I Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) 2. Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 J K If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS002QO ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR M Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Revision: March 2005 L EC-203 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR] DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS002ZQ Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002ZR Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T) 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *1: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. thus it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002ZS These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0122 0122 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) P0123 0123 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002ZT NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-204 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR] 2. 3. 4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF058Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-205 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002ZU BBWA1219E Revision: March 2005 EC-206 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR R A ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 D More than 0.36V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V F [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 H Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● ● ● 91 OR Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) Engine stopped Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) I More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] J Approximately 5V K Diagnostic Procedure UBS002ZV 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-207 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0006E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check the following. Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ● ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-206 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-542 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-208 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. A Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. F 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. H Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-210, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. L M 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. E Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-209 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [QR] Component Inspection UBS002ZW THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set shift lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1), 69 (TP sensor 2) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Remove and Installation PBIB1060E UBS002ZX ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: March 2005 EC-210 2005 Altima DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QR] DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Description PFP:22630 A UBS002QP NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or EC P0118. Refer to EC-199 . COMPONENT DESCRIPTION C The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. D E SEF594K F < Reference data> G Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 Resistance kΩ H I *: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic Trouble diagnosis name P0125 0125 L DTC detecting condition ● Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control ● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Thermostat M UBS002QR CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 K UBS002QQ This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. J EC-211 2005 Altima DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QR] 2. 3. 4. 5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. If DTC is detected, go to EC-212, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS002QS 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-213, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-212 2005 Altima DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [QR] Component Inspection UBS002QT A ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. EC C D PBIB2005E E Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 F G If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation H UBS002QU ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-213 2005 Altima DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QR] DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS002QV The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. PBIB1604E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3 25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 *: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0127 0127 Trouble diagnosis name Intake air temperature too high UBS002QW DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Intake air temperature sensor UBS002QX CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. a. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-214 2005 Altima DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QR] b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. ● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-215, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF189Y D WITH GST E Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS002QY F 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I J BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. K 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-216, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). M 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-196, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-215 2005 Altima DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [QR] Component Inspection UBS002QZ INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). PBIB1604E SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS002R0 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-216 2005 Altima DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [QR] DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:21200 A UBS002R1 Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. EC This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open. DTC No. P0128 0128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. Thermostat function DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause C ● Thermostat ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat ● Engine coolant temperature sensor UBS002R2 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. ● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 68°C (154°F). 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 68°C (154°F). If it is below 68°C (154°F), go to following step. If it is above 68°C (154°F), stop engine and cool down the engine to less than 68°C (154°F), then retry from step 1. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. VHCL SPEED SE E F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. D H I J K 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF176Y L WITH GST M Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS002R3 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-218, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-217 2005 Altima DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [QR] Component Inspection UBS002R4 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB2005E Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS002R5 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Revision: March 2005 EC-218 2005 Altima DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR] DTC P0138 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A UBS002RW The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002RX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM SPECIFICATION F 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V G CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 MNTR (B1) Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. H Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH I On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002RY J The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. K L PBIB1848E DTC No. P0138 0138 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002RZ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Revision: March 2005 EC-219 2005 Altima M DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR] 4. 5. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above. Revision: March 2005 EC-220 2005 Altima DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002S1 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1220E Revision: March 2005 EC-221 2005 Altima DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V Diagnostic Procedure UBS002S2 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-222 BBIA0414E 2005 Altima DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR] 3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check HO2S2 harness connector for water. F Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. G 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 H Refer to EC-223, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. I 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002S3 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1783E Revision: March 2005 EC-223 2005 Altima L M DTC P0138 HO2S2 [QR] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB2029E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS002S4 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" . Revision: March 2005 EC-224 2005 Altima DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] DTC P0139 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A UBS002S5 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002S6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM SPECIFICATION F 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V G CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 MNTR (B1) Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly H Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly LEAN ←→ RICH I On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002S7 J The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. K L SEF302U DTC No. P0139 0139 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow response Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time. EC-225 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks 2005 Altima M DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002S8 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at lest 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II. PBIB2374E 6. a. b. NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until ″COMPLETED″ is displayed. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). Return to step 1. Overall Function Check UBS002S9 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-226 2005 Altima DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C PBIB1197E D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-227 2005 Altima DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002SA BBWA1220E Revision: March 2005 EC-228 2005 Altima DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● C 0 - Approximately 1.0V D Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E Diagnostic Procedure UBS002SB 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-229 2005 Altima DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-233 or EC-240 . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. BBIA0009E 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-230 BBIA0414E 2005 Altima DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-231, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. F G 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END I Component Inspection UBS002SC HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. J Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. K L M PBIB1783E Revision: March 2005 EC-231 2005 Altima DTC P0139 HO2S2 [QR] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB2029E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS002SD HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" . Revision: March 2005 EC-232 2005 Altima DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 A UBS002SE With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calcu- EC lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor Input Signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. P0171 0171 Fuel injection system too lean ECM function Fuel injection control Actuator D Fuel injector DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Intake air leaks ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 E F ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Mass air flow sensor ● Incorrect PCV hose connection DTC Confirmation Procedure G H UBS002SF NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to SEF215Z (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Revision: March 2005 EC-233 2005 Altima I J K L M DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition 7. 8. When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be BBIA0009E detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC236, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. Revision: March 2005 EC-234 2005 Altima DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002SG A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1221E Revision: March 2005 EC-235 2005 Altima DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002SH 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 BBIA0409E Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-236 2005 Altima DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. A Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-96, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . EC At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the instruction of FUEL PRESSURE CHECK. C 5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E at idling: at 2,500 rpm: F 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec G With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST. at idling: at 2,500 rpm: H 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or grounds. Refer to EC-178 . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-237 2005 Altima DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. PBIB0133E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. PBIB1986E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . 7. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors. Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E Revision: March 2005 EC-238 2005 Altima DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-239 2005 Altima DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 UBS002SI With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor Input Signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. P0172 0172 Fuel injection system too rich ECM function Fuel injection control DTC detecting condition ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) Actuator Fuel injector Possible cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel injector ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Mass air flow sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002SJ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-243, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to SEF215Z (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition 7. When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Revision: March 2005 EC-240 2005 Altima DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] 8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-243, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to ECBBIA0009E 243, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). D E F G H I K When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). EC-241 C J 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-243, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. Revision: March 2005 A 2005 Altima L M DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002SK BBWA1221E Revision: March 2005 EC-242 2005 Altima DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002SL 1. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D E PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G 1. 2. H 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 I J BBIA0409E Continuity should exist. 4. L Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminal 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 K EC-243 2005 Altima M DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-598 .) OK or NG OK >> Replace fuel pressure regulator. NG >> Repair or replace. 5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. at idling at 2,500 rpm : 1.0- 4.0 g·m/sec : 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST. at idling at 2,500 rpm : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec : 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or grounds. Refer to EC-178 . Revision: March 2005 EC-244 2005 Altima DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [QR] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. F G H I PBIB1986E J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . K 7. CHECK INJECTOR Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. The injector harness connectors should remain connected. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. 6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. 1. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-245 2005 Altima L M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR] DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00CCN The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. BBIA0391E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0181 0181 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance UBS00CCO DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Fuel tank temperature sensor UBS00CCP NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. If the result is NG, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. If the “COOLANT TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If the “COOLANT TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal is less than 60°C (140°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-246 SEF475Y 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-247 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CCQ BBWA1222E Revision: March 2005 EC-248 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CCR 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F 2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G 1. 2. H 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J BBIA0391E 4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. K L Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M PBIB0932E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F59, M71 ● Harness connectors B2, M12 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-249 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [QR] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B2,M12 ● Harness connectors M70, F58 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground. >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to, EC-250, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CCS FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00CCT FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-250 2005 Altima DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR] DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00CCU The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D BBIA0391E E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 F G *: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use ground other than ECM, such as ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00CCV DTC detecting condition J Possible cause P0182 0182 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0183 0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Fuel tank temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CCW NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-253, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-251 2005 Altima K L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CCX BBWA1222E Revision: March 2005 EC-252 2005 Altima DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CCY 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F 2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. H I J BBIA0391E K 3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M PBIB0932E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M59, M71 ● Harness connectors B2, M12 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-253 2005 Altima DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [QR] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M70, F58 ● Harness connectors B2, M12 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. 6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to, EC-254, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CCZ FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 If NG, replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00CD0 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-254 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR] DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS002TF Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002TG Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* F SPECIFICATION G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002TH H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0222 0222 P0223 0223 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. I Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) J K L FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002TI NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-255 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR] 2. 3. 4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-256 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002TJ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1223E Revision: March 2005 EC-257 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● ● ● 91 OR Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) Engine stopped Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CVD 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-258 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0006E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check the following. ● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-389 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-544 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-259 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-261, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-260 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [QR] Component Inspection UBS00CVE A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Remove and Installation EC C D E PBIB1060E F G UBS002TM ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-261 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR] DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE PFP:00000 On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002U3 When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Engine speed ECM function On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0300 0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected P0301 0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected P0302 0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. P0303 0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. No. 1 cylinder misfires. No. 4 cylinder misfires. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Improper spark plug ● Insufficient compression ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● The injector circuit is open or shorted ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leak ● The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted ● Lack of fuel ● Drive plate or flywheel ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Incorrect PCV hose connection UBS00CVF CAUTION: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. Revision: March 2005 EC-262 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. A Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-263, "Diagnostic Procedure" C . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performD ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain E time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the feaze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition F G When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). H When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). I The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. Engine speed Time J Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CVG 1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE M 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (manifold) and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace it. Revision: March 2005 EC-263 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR] 3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? PBIB0133E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 9. 4. CHECK INJECTOR Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-592 . PBIB1986E Revision: March 2005 EC-264 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR] 5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustibles. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. EC C D E BBIA0229E CAUTION: ● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken. NOTE: When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. H J K L M 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-572 . Revision: March 2005 G I Spark should be generated. 1. 2. 3. F EC-265 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR] 7. CHECK SPARK PLUG Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-19 . NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 8. SEF156I 8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-19 . 9. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-59, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" . Standard: 1,190 kPa (12,1 kg/cm2 , 172 psi)/300 rpm Minimum: 990 kPa (10,1 kg/cm2 , 144 psi)/300 rpm Difference between each cylinder: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. 10. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. Install all removed parts. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. Revision: March 2005 EC-266 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR] 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-598, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP EC ASSEMBLY" .) ● Fuel lines (Refer to FL-3, "Checking Fuel Lines" .) C ● Fuel filter for clogging >> Repair or replace. D 12. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Perform EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . E Items Specifications Target idle speed Ignition timing A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Follow the EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . H 13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 J K L BBIA0409E M Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. Revision: March 2005 EC-267 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE [QR] 15. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST. 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec: 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. 16. CHECK CONNECTORS Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or grounds. Refer to EC-178, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" and EC-187, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace it. 17. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Repair or replace. 18. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 19. 19. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-268 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR] DTC P0327, P0328 KS Component Description PFP:22060 A UBS002U6 The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. EC C D BBIA0412E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002U7 The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition P0327 0327 Knock sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● P0328 0328 Knock sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● DTC No. F Possible Cause Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Knock sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002U8 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-271, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-269 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002U9 BBWA1224E Revision: March 2005 EC-270 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 15 EC WIRE COLOR W ITEM Knock sensor CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 2.5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS002UA 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . D E F G H BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. I 2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. J Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. K L Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. M 3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-271 BBIA0412E 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [QR] 4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EC-272, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002UB KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. SEF478Y Removal and Installation UBS002UC KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-75, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . Revision: March 2005 EC-272 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR] DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description PFP:23731 A UBS002UD The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. EC C D PBIB0562E E F G H PBIB2382E I CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002UE Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENG SPEED CONDITION J SPECIFICATION ● Tachometer: Connect ● Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer indication. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. On Board Diagnosis Logic K UBS002UF L DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0335 0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit ● ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking. The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause M ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Signal plate UBS002UG NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-273 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-276, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-274 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002UH A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1225E Revision: March 2005 EC-275 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.0V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 14 W PBIB0527E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 3.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0528E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002UI 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-276 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR] 2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0015E 3. E Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage F 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0664E H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK CKP (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground. >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-277 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR] 6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). 8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the signal plate. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002UJ CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E Revision: March 2005 EC-278 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [QR] 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) A Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ EC 2 (+) - 3 (-) 6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). C PBIB0564E D Removal and Installation UBS002UK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EM-75, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-279 2005 Altima DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR] DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description PFP:23731 UBS002UL The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. PBIB0562E PBIB2382E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0340 0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit UBS002UM ● ● Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM during engine running. ● Camshaft (Intake) ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .) The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .) ● Dead (Weak) battery The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002UN NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-280 2005 Altima DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR] 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-283, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-283, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF013Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-281 2005 Altima DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002UO BBWA1226E Revision: March 2005 EC-282 2005 Altima DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 4.0V D NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 13 W E PBIB0525E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB0526E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002UP I 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Turn ignition switch to START position. J Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) K 2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-283 2005 Altima DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR] 3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0410E 3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0664E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connector F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground. >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-284 2005 Altima DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR] 7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) E Refer to EC-285, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). F 9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) G Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. H I J PBIB0565E 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002UQ CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. 2. 3. 4. M Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E Revision: March 2005 EC-285 2005 Altima DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [QR] 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation UBS002UR CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EM-37, "CAMSHAFT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-286 2005 Altima DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR] DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:20905 A UBS00CVH The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. EC C D PBIB2377E E DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0420 0420 Catalyst system efficiency below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly. Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. Possible cause ● Three way catalyst (manifold) ● Exhaust tube ● Intake air leaks ● Fuel injector ● Fuel injector leaks ● Spark plug ● Improper ignition timing DTC Confirmation Procedure F G H UBS00CVI NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 12. 10. Wait 5 seconds at idle. K L M SEF189Y PBIB1784E Revision: March 2005 I EC-287 2005 Altima DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR] 11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “IMCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (it will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest step 1. PBIB1785E 12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF535Z Overall Function Check UBS00CVJ Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Open engine hood. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 74 and ground. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds. If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V PBIB1197E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CVK 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: March 2005 EC-288 2005 Altima DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR] 2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. E F 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK G Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. H 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING I Check for ignition timing. Refer to EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . Items Target idle speed Ignition timing Specifications A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) J K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the Basic Inspection. L 5. CHECK INJECTORS 1. 2. 3. M Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-593 . Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform EC-594 . MBIB0030E Revision: March 2005 EC-289 2005 Altima DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. BBIA0229E Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken. NOTE: When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 7. ● 7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-572 . Revision: March 2005 EC-290 2005 Altima DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [QR] 8. CHECK SPARK PLUG A Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-19 . NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 9. EC C D SEF156I 9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. E Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. F Spark should be generated. G OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26 . H 10. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Disconnect ignition coil assembly harness connector. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip)>>GO TO 11. NG (Drips)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. I J K 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M Trouble is fixed>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold). Revision: March 2005 EC-291 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description PFP:14950 UBS00CD1 NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123 P2127, P2128, P2138, first perform trouble diagnosis for other DTC. PBIB1026E In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CD2 Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined. DTC No. P0441 0441 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system incorrect purge flow Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC-292 Possible cause ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube ● Blocked rubber tube ● Cracked EVAP canister ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Blocked purge port ● EVAP canister vent control valve 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CD3 A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. C WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) D E F G Selector lever Suitable position Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,800 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 10.0 msec Engine coolant temperature More than 0°C H I J K PBIB0826E 7. If TESTING is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC294, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS00CD4 Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. Revision: March 2005 EC-293 2005 Altima L M DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 5. 6. 7. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch ON Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Shift lever Any position other than P, N or R PBIB1109E 8. 9. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. If NG, go to EC-294, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CD5 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister. 2. CHECK PURGE FLOW With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. 1. BBIA0016E 5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. PURG VOL CONT/V 100% 0% VACUUM Should exist. should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB1786E Revision: March 2005 EC-294 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 3. CHECK PURGE FLOW A Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE C EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . 4. Start engine and let it idle. Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. D 5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine. 1. 2. 3. Vacuum should not exist. 6. E Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. F 4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE G 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it. I 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT 1. 2. J Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B . Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C . K L M SEF367U 3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. SEF368U Revision: March 2005 EC-295 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1786E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452, EC-322 P0453, EC-328 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-317 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. Revision: March 2005 EC-296 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it. EC C 13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. D >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-297 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00CD6 This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. PBIB1026E DTC No. P0442 0442 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure) Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. EC-298 Possible cause ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CD7 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. C D E WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. G H I SEF475Y J K L M PBIB0829E 6. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-300, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. SEC763C Revision: March 2005 EC-299 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-63 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-63 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON. 5. Select Service $07 with GST. – If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-300, "Diagnostic Procedure" . – If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-294 . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CD8 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: March 2005 EC-300 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . EC NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. C D BBIA0016E E F G H SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. I 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK J With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● K L M Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: March 2005 EC-301 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) BBIA0526E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following, EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. ● Revision: March 2005 EC-302 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. C No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. 1. D PBIB1213E E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. F G H 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. K 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. PBIB1786E Revision: March 2005 EC-303 2005 Altima L M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-250, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision: March 2005 EC-304 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. C CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE 21. Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube. D E 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE F Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. G 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. I 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: March 2005 EC-305 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description UBS00CD9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Vehicle speed signal*2 Vehicle speed ECM function Actuator EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CDA Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Idle (Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting) 0% 2,000 rpm 20 - 30% EC-306 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CDB A DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P0444 0444 P0445 0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC C D UBS00CDC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. E F WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-309, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J SEF058Y K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-307 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CDD BBWA1227E Revision: March 2005 EC-308 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 45 PU/R ● Idle speed ● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting D E EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E F Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● G Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) PBIB0520E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CDE I 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M BBIA0017E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF206W Revision: March 2005 EC-309 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1786E 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-310 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Component Inspection UBS00CDF A EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) EC Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No C D PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition E F Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No G H PBIB0150E Removal and Installation UBS00CDG I EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-311 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 UBS00CDH The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnoses. PBIB1263E BBIA0526E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CDI Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0447 0447 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open UBS00CDJ DTC detecting condition An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve UBS00CDK NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-312 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] 2. 3. 4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-315, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF058Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-313 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CDL BBWA1228E Revision: March 2005 EC-314 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 117 EC WIRE COLOR OR A ITEM EVAP canister vent control valve CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C UBS00CDM D 1. INSPECTION START 1. Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. E F 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G 1. 2. 3. 4. H I J PBIB1787E K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-315 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. BBIA0526E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0080E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness connectors F55, B105 ● IPDM E/R harness connectors E122 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-316 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. D E 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE F Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. G 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CDN EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M PBIB1033E 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Revision: March 2005 EC-317 J PBIB1787E 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] 7. 8. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. PBIB1033E 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. Revision: March 2005 EC-318 PBIB1034E 2005 Altima DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:22365 A UBS00CUU The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. EC C D E BBIA0526E F G H PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CUV J Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic K UBS00CUW NOTE: If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-438 . DTC No. P0451 0451 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor performance Revision: March 2005 I DTC detecting condition ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP control system pressure sensor EC-319 Possible cause L M ● Harness or connectors ● EVAP control system pressure sensor 2005 Altima DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CUX NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds. NOTE: Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-320, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF194Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CUY 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-320 2005 Altima DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER 1. A Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. EC C D BBIA0526E 2. E Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. F 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR G Refer to EC-321, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. H I 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-324 . J >> INSPECTION END K Component Inspection UBS00CUZ EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-321 PBIB1200E 2005 Altima L M DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00CDO The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0526E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CDP Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CDQ NOTE: If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-438 . DTC No. P0452 0452 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor low input Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-322 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CDR A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I PBIB1199E J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-323 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CDS BBWA1229E Revision: March 2005 EC-324 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. A EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 W EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V D 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E ● Idle speed C [Engine is running] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CDT 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I J BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. K 2. CHECK CONNECTOR L 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. M BBIA0526E 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-325 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-326 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. H I 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END K Component Inspection UBS00CDU EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-327 PBIB1200E 2005 Altima L M DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00CDV The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0526E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CDW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CDX NOTE: If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-438 . DTC No. P0453 0453 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor high input Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-328 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Rubber hose to EVAP canister vent control valve 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CDY A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-331, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Wait at least 10 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-331, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I PBIB1199E J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-329 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CDZ BBWA1229E Revision: March 2005 EC-330 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. A EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 W EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V D 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E ● Idle speed C [Engine is running] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CE0 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I J BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. K 2. CHECK CONNECTOR L 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. M BBIA0526E 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-331 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-332 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. H I 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE J Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. K 11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M Revision: March 2005 EC-333 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 12. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 13. No >> GO TO 15. PBIB1213E 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CE1 EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. ● 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-334 PBIB1200E 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A UBS00CE2 This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. EC C D E F G PBIB1026E DTC No. P0455 0455 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system gross leak detected DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. Possible cause ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. Revision: March 2005 EC-335 H 2005 Altima I J K L M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CE3 CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: ● Make sure that EVAP hose are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until reteaching sound is heard. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. SEF475Y PBIB0829E 7. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-337, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-300 . SEC763C Revision: March 2005 EC-336 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] WITH GST A NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-63 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-63 . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON. 5. Select SERVICE $07 with GST. ● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-337, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-300 . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-294 . Diagnostic Procedure EC C D UBS00CE4 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. E F G H I SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION J Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard. K L 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. M 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: March 2005 EC-337 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control is installed properly. Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation" ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. 8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0016E SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10. Revision: March 2005 EC-338 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● EC C D Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. E 4. F G H SEF200U I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-339 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) BBIA0526E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. 1. 2. 3. 4. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. Revision: March 2005 PBIB1786E EC-340 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. EC C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. E 13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. F G H 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. I J K L PBIB1786E 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE M Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-250, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Revision: March 2005 EC-341 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check refueling EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 20. >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube. 20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-342 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A UBS00CE5 This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak EC diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. C If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. D E F G H PBIB1026E DTC No. P0456 0456 Trouble diagnosis name Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check) Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP system does not operate properly. ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-343 I 2005 Altima J K L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CE6 NOTE: ● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. ● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. ● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. – Fuel filler cap is removed. – Refilled or drained the fuel. – EVAP component parts is/are removed. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then PBIB1953E start from step 1). Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0837E 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-346, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: ● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-75, "Basic Inspection" . Revision: March 2005 EC-344 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. Overall Function Check UBS00CE7 WITH GST Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. ● Do not start engine. ● 1. A Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi). Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. EC C D E F G BBIA0016E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the pressure pump and a hose. Also set the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect GST and select Service $08. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close). Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) SEF462UI Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-346, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step. Disconnect GST. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual. Revision: March 2005 EC-345 2005 Altima H I J K L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CE8 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: March 2005 EC-346 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. EC C D BBIA0016E E F G SEF916U NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-347 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: March 2005 EC-348 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. A Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. EC Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E BBIA0526E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● F G Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. H 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. I J K SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE L Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation" ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision: March 2005 EC-349 M 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1213E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection ● >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB1786E Revision: March 2005 EC-350 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. A EC C Vacuum should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. E 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-117, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. F G 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-250, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. K 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision: March 2005 EC-351 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [QR] 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-352 2005 Altima DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR] DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00CE9 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D PBIB1218E E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00CEA NOTE: If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. DTC No. P0460 0460 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit noise DTC detecting condition Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. F G Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor H I J DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CEB NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-354, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-353 K 2005 Altima DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CEC 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO DI-7, "CHECK" . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00CED FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" Revision: March 2005 EC-354 2005 Altima DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR] DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00CEE The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D PBIB1218E E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00CEF NOTE: If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer toEC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. DTC No. P0461 0461 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. F G Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (the CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor H I J Overall Function Check UBS00CEG Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" . TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-II L M NOTE: Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. Revision: March 2005 K EC-355 2005 Altima DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR] 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. If NG, go to Diagnostic Procedure EC-356 . SEF195Y WITH GST NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to Diagnostic Procedure, EC-356 . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CEH 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO DI-7, "CHECK" . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00CEI FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-356 2005 Altima DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR] DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00CEJ The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter. sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D PBIB1218E E On Board Diagnostic Logic UBS00CEK NOTE: If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit. One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel level sensor ground circuit. This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0462 0462 Fuel level sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0463 0463 Fuel level sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. F G Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor H I J DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CEL NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch ON. K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. M Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-358, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-357 2005 Altima DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CEM 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO DI-7, "CHECK" . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00CEN FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-358 2005 Altima DTC P0500 VSS [QR] DTC P0500 VSS Description PFP:32702 A UBS002WL NOTE: If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN C communication line. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS002WM DTC detecting condition Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) E ● Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted) F ● Vehicle speed sensor ● Combination meter ● P0500 0500 Vehicle speed sensor The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. D Possible cause G DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002WN CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-360, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 6,000 rpm (A/T models) 1,800 - 6,000 rpm (M/T models) COOLAN TEMP/S B/FUEL SCHDL More than 70°C (158°F) 6.0 - 31.8 msec (A/T models) 5.0 - 31.8 msec (M/T models) Selector lever Suitable position PW/ST SIGNAL OFF 6. SEF196Y If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-360, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS002WO Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. Revision: March 2005 I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. H EC-359 2005 Altima K L M DTC P0500 VSS [QR] WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-360, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS002WP 1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK COMBINATION METER Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-360 2005 Altima DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [QR] DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 A UBS002WQ NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC dis- EC played. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0506 0506 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected UBS002WR DTC detecting condition The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more. Possible cause F ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak G DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002WS NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-625, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. J L M SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC-361 I K Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-362, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 H 2005 Altima DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002WT 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-362 2005 Altima DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [QR] DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 A UBS002WU NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC dis- EC played. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0507 0507 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected UBS002WV DTC detecting condition The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause F ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak ● PCV system G UBS002WW NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" , before conducting “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-625, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-364, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J L M SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 I K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. H EC-363 2005 Altima DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS002WX 1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 3. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-364 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR] DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Component Description PFP:49763 A UBS00C7X Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. EC C D BBIA0415E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C7Y Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine F SPECIFICATION Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel is being turned. ON G On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C7Z The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-438 . DTC No. P0550 0550 Trouble diagnosis name Power steering pressure sensor circuit DTC detecting condition An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure H I Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Power steering pressure sensor J UBS00C80 K NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-365 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C81 BBWA1945E Revision: March 2005 EC-366 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 12 P A Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel is being turned [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel is not being turned DATA (DC Voltage) C 0.5 - 4.0V 0.4 - 0.8V D [Engine is running] 67 68 B G/R Sensor ground Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V E Approximately 5V F Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C82 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . I J K BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-367 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0415E 3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SEF479Y 3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models). Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 32 (A/T models). Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and ECM ● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and TCM (A/T models) >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-368 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [QR] 5. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 6. CHECK PSP SENSOR Refer to EC-369, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace PSP sensor. E F 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END H Component Inspection UBS00C83 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and let it idle. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the following conditions. Condition I J Voltage Steering wheel is being turned fully. 0.5 - 4.5V Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V K L MBIB0025E M Revision: March 2005 EC-369 2005 Altima DTC P0605 ECM [QR] DTC P0605 ECM Component Description PFP:23710 UBS002WY The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002WZ This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. DTC No. P0605 0605 Trouble diagnosis name Engine control module DTC detecting condition A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. Possible cause ● ECM FAIL-SAFE MODE ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected. Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. ● ECM deactivates ASCD operation. Malfunction A DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002X0 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-370 2005 Altima DTC P0605 ECM [QR] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC C D SEF058Y E With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. F PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. K Diagnostic Procedure UBS002X1 1. INSPECTION START L With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-370 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. M With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select Service $04 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-370 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-371 2005 Altima DTC P0605 ECM [QR] 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-372 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR] DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description PFP:22693 A UBS00C84 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor ECM function Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control EC Actuator Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C85 C D E Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F S1 HTR (B1) CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Engine: After warming up, idle the engine On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1031 1031 P1032 1032 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit low Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit high F 0 - 100% UBS00C86 G DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater I J UBS00C87 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. With CONSULT-II WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-375, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above. Revision: March 2005 H EC-373 2005 Altima K L M DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C88 BBWA1233E Revision: March 2005 EC-374 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. A EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 2 R A/F sensor 1 heater ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D PBIB1584E E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C89 F 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I J BBIA0437E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-375 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR] 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0409E 3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. Revision: March 2005 EC-376 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [QR] 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Component Inspection EC UBS00C8A AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER C Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F) D Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. E Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. F G H I PBIB1684E Removal and Installation J UBS00C8B AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR HEATER K Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . L M Revision: March 2005 EC-377 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR] DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description PFP:23710 UBS002X7 Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning value memory, etc. PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1065 1065 Trouble diagnosis name ECM power supply circuit UBS002X8 DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.] ● ECM ECM back-up RAM system does not function properly. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002X9 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-378 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002XA A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1234E Revision: March 2005 EC-379 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 121 WIRE COLOR W/L ITEM Power supply for ECM (Back-up) CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002XB 1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. MBIB0026E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E20, F32 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R ● IPDM E/R harness connector E124 ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-380 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [QR] 4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-378 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. EC C With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select Service $04 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. See EC-378 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END D 1. 2. 3. 4. E F G 5. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H I J K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: March 2005 EC-381 2005 Altima DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description PFP:23796 UBS002XK Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. PBIB1842E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002XL Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load INT/V SOL (B1) SPECIFICATION Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 25% - 60% On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1111 1111 Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit UBS002XM DTC detecting condition An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve UBS002XN NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-384, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-382 2005 Altima DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002XO A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1235E Revision: March 2005 EC-383 2005 Altima DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 10V 11 G Intake valve timing control solenoid valve [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed 2,500 rpm PBIB1790E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002XP 1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0018E 4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0192E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART Check the following. Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-384 2005 Altima DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] 3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-385, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. F G 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002XQ I INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as follows. Terminal Resistance 1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F) 1 or 2 and ground (Continuity should not exist.) J K L If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E 4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Removal and Installation PBIB2275E UBS002XR INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" . Revision: March 2005 EC-385 2005 Altima M DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [QR] DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS002XS Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002XT This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1121 1121 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control actuator DTC detecting condition A) Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction. B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range. C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open. Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Malfunction A ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CVM NOTE: ● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds. 4. Shift shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T). 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 7. Shift shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds. 8. Shift shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T). 9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. 10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-386 2005 Altima DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [QR] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds. Shift shift lever to N, P position (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC C D SEF058Y E With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS002XV F 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY G 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. H I J BBIA0079E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K 1. 2. 3. L Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . M >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-387 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR] DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description PFP:16119 UBS002XW NOTE: If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or P1126. Refer to EC-386 or EC-394 . Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002XX This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1122 1122 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control performance problem DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) ● Electric throttle control actuator Electric throttle control function does not operate properly. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002XY NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine is running. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-390, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-388 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002XZ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1236E Revision: March 2005 EC-389 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Throttle control motor power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is released PBIB0534E 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 Y Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is fully depressed PBIB0533E 104 OR [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002Y0 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-390 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. A Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 3. EC C D MBIB0028E 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II E 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. H I 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I L 1. 2. M Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB1171E Revision: March 2005 EC-391 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR] 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK FUSE 1. Disconnect 10A fuse. 2. Check 10A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist BBIA0079E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: March 2005 EC-392 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [QR] 11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D BBIA0079E E 12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-393, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 14. F G 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 14. 1. 2. 3. I REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR J Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002Y1 L THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. M Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E Remove and Installation UBS002Y2 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: March 2005 EC-393 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR] DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description PFP:16119 UBS002Y3 Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002Y4 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002Y5 These self-diagnoses have one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1124 1124 P1126 1126 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor relay circuit short Throttle control motor relay circuit open DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted) ● Throttle control motor relay ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open) ● Throttle control motor relay ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON. ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002Y6 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y Revision: March 2005 EC-394 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR] With GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. EC Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF058Y F With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-395 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002Y7 BBWA1237E Revision: March 2005 EC-396 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 104 EC WIRE COLOR R OR ITEM Throttle control motor power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay Diagnostic Procedure C D UBS002Y8 1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. H I PBIB1171E 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II J 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. L 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-397 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [QR] 4. CHECK FUSE 1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. MBIB0028E 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-398 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR] DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS002Y9 The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002YA C This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1128 1128 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor. Possible cause D ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor) E FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. F Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002YB NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-401, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-399 2005 Altima M DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002YC BBWA1238E Revision: March 2005 EC-400 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is released D E PBIB0534E 0 - 14V F [Ignition switch: ON] 5 Y Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal is fully depressed G PBIB0533E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS002YD 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS I 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . K L M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-401 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist BBIA0006E 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-402, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002YE THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E Revision: March 2005 EC-402 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [QR] Removal and Installation UBS002YF A ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-403 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] DTC P1146 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS002YW The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002YX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine: After warming up ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002YY The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB2370E DTC No. P1146 1146 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-404 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CVN NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR ” mode with CONSULT-II 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of COSULT-II. C D E F SEF174Y G H I J K PBIB2372E NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until ″COMPLETED″ is displayed. 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00CVO Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-405 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-406 PBIB1197E 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002Z1 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1220E Revision: March 2005 EC-407 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V Diagnostic Procedure UBS002Z2 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-408 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-240 . No >> GO TO 3. F 1. 2. 3. G H I BBIA0009E K 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-409 J BBIA0414E 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-410, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002Z3 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1783E Revision: March 2005 EC-410 2005 Altima DTC P1146 HO2S2 [QR] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB2029E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS002Z4 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" . Revision: March 2005 EC-411 2005 Altima G H I J K L M DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] DTC P1147 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS002Z5 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002Z6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Engine: After warming up ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002Z7 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB2030E DTC No. P1147 1147 Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-412 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks 2005 Altima DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CVP NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F SEF174Y G H I J K PBIB2373E NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until ″COMPLETED″ is displayed. 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00CVQ Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-413 2005 Altima DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models). The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-414 PBIB1197E 2005 Altima DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002ZA A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1220E Revision: March 2005 EC-415 2005 Altima DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● 0 - Approximately 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V Diagnostic Procedure UBS002ZB 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-416 2005 Altima DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-233 . No >> GO TO 3. F 1. 2. 3. G H I BBIA0009E K 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-417 J BBIA0414E 2005 Altima DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-418, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS002ZC HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1783E Revision: March 2005 EC-418 2005 Altima DTC P1147 HO2S2 [QR] 6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB2029E “HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1197E procedure. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS002ZD HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" . Revision: March 2005 EC-419 2005 Altima G H I J K L M DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL [QR] DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:22690 UBS002ZE This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 Trouble diagnosis name Closed loop control function DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.] ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. Revision: March 2005 EC-420 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Description PFP:00000 A UBS00ELG SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTE: EC If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Cooling Fan Control Sensor C Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Battery Battery voltage*1 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Actuator D Cooling fan control IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) E F *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. G The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MID/LOW/OFF]. Cooling Fan Operation H I J K L M PBIB2313E Revision: March 2005 EC-421 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] Cooling Fan Relay Operation The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. Cooling fan relay Cooling fan speed 1 2 3 Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF Low (LOW) OFF ON OFF Middle (MID) OFF OFF ON High (HI) ON OFF ON COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Motor The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows. Cooling fan motor terminals Cooling fan speed Middle (MID) High (HI) (+) (−) 1 3 and 4 2 3 and 4 1 and 2 3 1 and 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002ZJ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Air conditioner switch: OFF COOLING FAN SPECIFICATION Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F) MID Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HI On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002ZK If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. Revision: March 2005 EC-422 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● ● P1217 1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat) Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). Possible cause A ● Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) ● IPDM E/R ● Cooling fan ● Radiator hose Radiator ● Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method. ● ● Radiator cap ● Engine coolant is not within the specified range. ● Water pump ● Thermostat EC C D For more information, refer toEC-432, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" . 1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO" . 2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. Overall Function Check E F G UBS00E46 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Turn ignition switch ON. K L M SEF621W 4. 5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. If the results are NG, go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF646X Revision: March 2005 EC-423 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . If NG, go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-424 SEF621W 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002ZM A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1239E Revision: March 2005 EC-425 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] BBWA1240E Revision: March 2005 EC-426 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00E47 1. INSPECTION START A Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. EC C 2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION With CONSULT-II Start engine and let it idle. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-429, "PROCEDURE A" .) D 1. 2. E F G SEF784Z 3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION H Without CONSULT-II 1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-429, "PROCEDURE A" .) I J K 4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK L Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-9, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . ● Hose ● Radiator ● Water pump Revision: March 2005 EC-427 M SLC754A 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] 5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP Apply pressure to cap with a tester. Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace radiator cap. SLC755A 6. CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. 2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. Valve opening temperature: Valve lift: 82°C (180°F) [standard] More than 8 mm/95°C (0.31 in/203°F) 3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace thermostat SLC343 7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-432, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-432, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-428 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] PROCEDURE A A 1. CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E123. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 15 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC C Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. D E PBIB1681E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the following. ● 40A fusible link ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery G H >> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 16 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-429 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] 4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. BBIA0078E 2. Check voltage between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 1, 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1670E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. 40A fusible link ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and battery ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 8 Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 12 Refer to Wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-430 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] 7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminals 3, 4 and ground. Refer to Wiring diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D BBIA0078E E 8. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. F Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 13 Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminals 10, 14 Refer to Wiring Diagram. G Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H I 9. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS Refer to EC-432, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. J K 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-431 2005 Altima L M DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step OFF 1 Inspection item ● Blocked radiator ● Blocked condenser ● Blocked radiator grille ● Blocked bumper 2 ● 3 4 UBS002ZO Equipment Standard Reference page ● Visual No blocking Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-14, "ANTIFREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO" . ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck See CO-10, "Refilling Engine Coolant" . ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See CO-9, "CHECKING RADIATOR CAP" . (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) — ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See CO-9, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot See CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" , and CO-11, "RADIATOR" . ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-421 ). OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature gauge ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — ● Coolant overflow to reservoir tank ● Visual No overflow during driving and idling See CO-10, "Refilling Engine Coolant" . OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator ● Visual Should be initial level in reservoir tank See CO-9, "CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL" . OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) SeeEM-59, "CYLINDER HEAD" . 12 ● Cylinder block and pistons ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston See EM-75, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" . Component Inspection UBS002ZP COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 1. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. SEF734W Revision: March 2005 EC-432 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [QR] Cooling fan speed Middle (MID) High (HI) Cooling fan motor terminals (+) (−) 1 3 and 4 2 3 and 4 1 and 2 3 1 and 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 A EC C Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-433 2005 Altima DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [QR] DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS002ZY Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002ZZ The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1225 1225 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance problem Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) UBS00300 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-435, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-434 2005 Altima DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00301 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E BBIA0079E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Remove and Installation UBS00302 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR I Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-435 2005 Altima DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [QR] DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00303 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00304 The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1226 1226 Trouble diagnosis name Closed throttle position learning performance problem DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) UBS00305 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-437, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-436 2005 Altima DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00306 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E BBIA0079E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Remove and Installation UBS00307 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR I Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-437 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR] DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16119 UBS0030G This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1229 1229 Trouble diagnosis name Sensor power supply circuit short DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.) (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) (EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1) ● Power steering pressure sensor ● Refrigerant pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0030H NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-440, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-438 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0030I A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1241E Revision: March 2005 EC-439 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 R Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 68 G/R Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS0030J 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-440 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR] 2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0811E H 3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS I Check the following. ● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 90 APP sensor terminal 2 EC-551 48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-324 49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-606 68 PSP sensor terminal 1 EC-366 J K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 4. CHECK COMPONENTS M Check the following. ● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-609 .) ● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-369 .) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-334 .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning component. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-556, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-441 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [QR] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-442 2005 Altima DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00C65 The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C66 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C67 K To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low. DTC No. P1271 1271 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00ELH NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-443 2005 Altima M DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. 4. 5. 6. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. SEF581Z ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Shift lever Suitable position 7. NOTE: ● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. ● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-444 2005 Altima DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C6A A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1242E Revision: March 2005 EC-445 2005 Altima DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C6B 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0411E 3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E Revision: March 2005 EC-446 2005 Altima DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse EC C >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 F G H Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation L M UBS00C6C AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-447 2005 Altima DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00C6D The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C6E Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C6F To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high. DTC No. P1272 1272 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00ELI NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-448 2005 Altima DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. 4. 5. 6. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-451, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. A EC C SEF581Z D ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec COOLANT TEMP/S Less than 70°C (158°F) Shift lever Suitable position 7. E NOTE: ● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. ● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-451, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST F G H Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-449 2005 Altima DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C6I BBWA1242E Revision: March 2005 EC-450 2005 Altima DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C6J 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. K Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M BBIA0411E 3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E Revision: March 2005 EC-451 2005 Altima DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00C6K AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-452 2005 Altima DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00C6L The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C6M I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C6N To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted lean side or rich side. When the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected. DTC No. P1273 1273 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 lean shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/ F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a specified period. DTC Confirmation Procedure ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks M UBS00ELJ WITH CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Revision: March 2005 EC-453 L Possible Cause NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. 1. 2. K 2005 Altima DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-456, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB2035E WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Select “Service $03” with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected. 7. Select “Service $04” with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. 11. Select “Service $07” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-456, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-454 BBIA0009E 2005 Altima DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C6Q A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1242E Revision: March 2005 EC-455 2005 Altima DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C6R 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. BBIA0411E Revision: March 2005 EC-456 2005 Altima DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF215Z F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-233 . No >> GO TO 4. G H I J BBIA0009E K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-457 2005 Altima DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0411E 4. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1683E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-458 2005 Altima DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 EC C D Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. E F 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER H Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. I J 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. K L Removal and Installation UBS00C6S AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-459 M 2005 Altima DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00C6T The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C6U Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C6V To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to the lean side or rich side. When the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected. DTC No. P1274 1274 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 rich shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a specified period. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel Injector UBS00ELK NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-460 2005 Altima DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C PBIB2035E D WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Select “Service $03” with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected. 7. Select “Service $04” with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. 11. Select “Service $07” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G H BBIA0009E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-461 2005 Altima DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C6Y BBWA1242E Revision: March 2005 EC-462 2005 Altima DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C6Z 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 K Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) L >> GO TO 3. M BBIA0411E Revision: March 2005 EC-463 2005 Altima DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-240 . No >> GO TO 4. BBIA0009E 4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness connector for water. Water should not exit. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. BBIA0411E Revision: March 2005 EC-464 2005 Altima DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 5. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. C D PBIB1683E E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse F G H >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 J K L Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. Revision: March 2005 EC-465 2005 Altima M DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00C70 AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-466 2005 Altima DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00C71 The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C72 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C73 K To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control. DTC No. P1276 1276 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 UBS00ELL CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-467 2005 Altima M DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 4. 5. 6. If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 1,750 - 2,600 rpm Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec COOLANT TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) Shift lever D position with OD ON (A/T models) 5th position (M/T models) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. 7. SEF576Z Release accelerator pedal fully. NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. SEF577Z 8. 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF578Z Overall Function Check UBS00ELM Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Revision: March 2005 EC-468 2005 Altima DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 8. 9. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed. If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-469 2005 Altima DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C76 BBWA1242E Revision: March 2005 EC-470 2005 Altima DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C77 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. K Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M BBIA0411E 3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E Revision: March 2005 EC-471 2005 Altima DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00C78 AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" Revision: March 2005 EC-472 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00C79 The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C7A I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C7B K To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. L DTC No. P1278 1278 Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition ● The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. EC-473 M Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel Injector ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ELN NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. PBIB0756E 7. a. b. 8. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. PBIB1925E 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-477, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0758E WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “Service $01” with GST. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following. ● Intake air leaks Revision: March 2005 EC-474 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Exhaust gas leaks A ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Injectors EC ● Incorrect PCV hose connection ● PCV valve ● Mass air flow sensor C Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. D Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. E Select “Service $07” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-477, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-475 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C7E BBWA1242E Revision: March 2005 EC-476 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] B/Y OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR/L 56 A A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V D 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C7F 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 K Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) L >> GO TO 3. M BBIA0411E Revision: March 2005 EC-477 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: March 2005 EC-478 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF215Z F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-233 , EC-240 . No >> GO TO 6. G H I J BBIA0009E K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-479 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 6. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0411E 4. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1683E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-480 2005 Altima DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 EC C D Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. E F 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER H Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. I J 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-184, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. K L 11. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-50, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. M 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00C7G AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-481 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00C7H The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C7I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C7J To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signals computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. P1279 1279 Trouble diagnosis name Air-fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 circuit slow response Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition ● The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. EC-482 Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel Injector ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ELO A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. C D E F G PBIB0756E 7. a. b. 8. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. H I J K PBIB1925E L 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-486, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M PBIB0758E WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “Service $01” with GST. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following. ● Intake air leaks Revision: March 2005 EC-483 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Fuel Injector ● Incorrect PCV hose connection ● PCV valve ● Mass air flow sensor Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. Select “Service $07” with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-486, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Revision: March 2005 EC-484 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C7M A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1242E Revision: March 2005 EC-485 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR/L [Engine is running] B/Y 56 OR 75 W/L DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V 2 - 3V 2 - 3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C7N 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. BBIA0411E Revision: March 2005 EC-486 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. E F 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-487 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF215Z Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-233 , EC-240 . No >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-488 BBIA0009E 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 6. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0411E E 4. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. G H PBIB1683E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-489 2005 Altima DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 [QR] 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 5 35 6 56 2 75 Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-184, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 11. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-50, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00C7O AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-490 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description A UBS00CEO SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed*2 EC ECM function Actuator C D EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve E F *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM though CAN communication line. G This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. H I COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. J K L SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CEP Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load PURG VOL C/V Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Idle (Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting) 0% 2,000 rpm 20 - 30% EC-491 2005 Altima M DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1444 1444 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve UBS00CEQ DTC detecting condition The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) UBS00CER NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. PBIB0839E 6. 7. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC494, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-494, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-492 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CES A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1227E Revision: March 2005 EC-493 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 45 PU/R ● Idle speed ● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) PBIB0520E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CET 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0017E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0080E Revision: March 2005 EC-494 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR- D CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. I Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. J K L BBIA0526E 2. Check connectors for water. M Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-495 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1786E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-497, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. YES or NO YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> GO TO 13. PBIB1213E Revision: March 2005 EC-496 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER A Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. C 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection E >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. F 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CEU H EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II I Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No J K L PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition M Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E Removal and Installation UBS00CEV EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: March 2005 EC-497 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 UBS00CEW The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnoses. PBIB1263E BBIA0526E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CEX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1446 1446 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve close UBS00CEY DTC detecting condition EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister is saturated with water UBS00CEZ CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. Revision: March 2005 EC-498 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. 6. 7. a. b. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. Repeat next procedures 3 times. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-501, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. Repeat next procedure 20 times. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. A EC C D E F G H I PBIB0972E 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-501, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-499 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00CF0 BBWA1228E Revision: March 2005 EC-500 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 117 EC WIRE COLOR OR A ITEM EVAP canister vent control valve CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C UBS00CF1 1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE D 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. Check the rubber tube for clogging. F G H BBIA0526E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. I J 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-502, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. K L 3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER M 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 6. PBIB1213E Revision: March 2005 EC-501 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. BBIA0526E 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CF2 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Revision: March 2005 EC-502 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [QR] 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. 4. A EC C PBIB1033E D 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Condition VENT CONTROL/V ON No OFF Yes 7. 8. E Air passage continuity between A and B F Operation takes less than 1 second. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 5 again. G PBIB1787E H Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. I Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. J K L PBIB1033E 3. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes 4. 5. M Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Operation takes less than 1 second. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. Revision: March 2005 EC-503 PBIB1034E 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR] DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description PFP:25551 UBS00320 ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. PBIB2533E Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00321 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION MAIN SW ● CANCEL SW ● RESUME/ACC SW SET SW ● ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION CRUISE switch: Pressed ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACCEL switch: Released OFF SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00322 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-370 . DTC No. P1564 1564 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD steering switch DTC Detecting Condition ● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● ASCD steering switch ● ECM UBS00323 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-504 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR] 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. Press CRUISE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press RESUME/ACCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-508, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF058Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-505 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00324 BBWA1243E Revision: March 2005 EC-506 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR EC ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 G/Y A ASCD steering switch CRUISE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● SET/COAST switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed C Approximately 0V D Approximately 4V Approximately 0V E Approximately 1V F Approximately 2V G Approximately 3V H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-507 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00325 1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. 1. 2. Switch CRUISE switch Monitor item MAIN SW SET/COAST switch SET SW RESUME/ ACCEL switch RESUME/ACC SW CANCEL switch CANCEL SW 1. 2. Condition Indication Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF SEC006D Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button. Switch CRUISE switch SET/COAST switch RESUME/ACCEL switch CANCEL switch Condition Voltage [V] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4.0 Pressed Approx. 2.0 Released Approx. 4.0 Pressed Approx. 3.0 Released Approx. 4.0 Pressed Approx. 1.0 Released Approx. 4.0 PBIB0311E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 19 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-508 BBIA0243E 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. D Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 20. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. F 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch ● Harness connectors M71, F59 H I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH J Refer to EC-509, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. K L 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00326 ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect ASCD steering switch. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 1 and 2 with pushing each switch. Switch CRUISE switch SET SW/COAST switch RESUME/ACCEL switch Revision: March 2005 Condition Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 660 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 1,480 Released Approx. 4,000 EC-509 SEC008D 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [QR] Switch CANCEL switch Condition Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 250 Released Approx. 4,000 If NG, replace ASCD steering switch. Revision: March 2005 EC-510 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 A UBS00327 When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. EC C D BBIA0087E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00328 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW2 (STOP lamp switch) CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON ● Brake pedal: Fully released ● Clutch pedal: Fully released (M/T) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ● Clutch pedal: Fully depressed (M/T) ON G OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic F SPECIFICATION H I UBS00329 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-370 . ● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. 1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-511 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition ● A) P1572 1572 When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to ECM at the same time. ASCD brake switch ● B) ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.) (M/T models) ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD brake switch ● ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation (M/T models) ● ECM DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0032A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be detected. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Press CRUISE switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights up. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position If DTC is detected, go to EC-515, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to the following step. PBIB2386E 5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Depress the brake pedal for more than 5 seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned condition. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-515, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-512 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0032B A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1244E Revision: March 2005 EC-513 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 G/B* 1 G/R*2 ● Brake pedal: Depressed ● Clutch pedal: Depressed (M/T) ASCD brake switch Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Fully released ● Clutch pedal: Released (M/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) *1: A/T models *2: M/T models Revision: March 2005 EC-514 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS0032C 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. EC 1. 2. C M/T models CONDITION INDICATION When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed OFF When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON D E A/T models CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal: Depress OFF When brake pedal: Fully released ON 1. 2. SEC011D F Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. G M/T models H CONDITION When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V I Battery voltage A/T models CONDITION When brake pedal: Depress When brake pedal: Fully released J VOLTAGE Approximately 0V MBIB0061E Battery voltage K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-515 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal: Released OFF When brake pedal: Depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal: Released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V When brake pedal: Depressed Battery voltage PBIB1677E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 13. 3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0087E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION When clutch pedal: Released When clutch pedal: Depressed VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 PBIB0857E EC-516 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0088E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. G H PBIB0799E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. Revision: March 2005 EC-517 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0087E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. PBIB0857E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-518 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. EC 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. D E F BBIA0049E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. G H Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. I J PBIB0117E K 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse L M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. Revision: March 2005 EC-519 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E28, M7 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS0032D ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed. Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, "CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC024D Revision: March 2005 EC-520 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed. EC Continuity Should not exist. C Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. D PBIB0118E E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-521 2005 Altima DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [QR] DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description PFP:31036 UBS0032E The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0032F This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-359, "DTC P0500 VSS" ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-370, "DTC P0605 ECM" DTC No. P1574 1574 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD vehicle speed sensor DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The combination meter circuit is open or shorted.) ● TCM ● Combination meter ● Vehicle speed sensor ● ECM ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0032G CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH). If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-523, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-522 2005 Altima DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS0032H 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. EC C 2. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT” Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. D E 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-523 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Component Description PFP:32006 UBS0032I When the shift lever position is P (A/T models only) or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0032J Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Shift lever: P or N (A/T model) Neutral (M/T model) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1706 1706 Trouble diagnosis name Park/neutral position switch UBS0032K DTC detecting condition The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.] ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch UBS0032L CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal P or N position ON Except the above position OFF 3. 4. 5. If NG, go to EC-528, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 3.0 - 31.8 msec VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-528, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-524 SEF212Y SEF213Y 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] Overall Function Check UBS0032M Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Condition (Gear position) Except the above position 3. EC Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. P or N position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T) A C Voltage V (Known good data) Approx. 0 D A/T: Battery voltage M/T: Approximately 5V E If NG, go to EC-528, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0043E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-525 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0032N AT MODELS WBWA0109E Revision: March 2005 EC-526 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] MT MODELS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1246E Revision: March 2005 EC-527 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 GW PNP switch Gear position is P or N [Ignition switch: ON] ● Except the above gear position Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V A/T models BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) M/T models Approximately 5V UBS00CVR 1. CONFIRM THE TRANSMISSION TYPE Which type of transmission (A/T or M/T) is on the vehicle? A/T or MT A/T >> Go to EC-528, "PROCEDURE A" . M/T >> Go to EC-531, "PROCEDURE B" . PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START. Does starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" . 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter harness connector M24. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter terminals 39, 40 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester under the following conditions. Condition (Shift position) Voltage P position BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) N position BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Except the above position Approximately 0 V WBIA0640E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-528 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0439E E 4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G H PBIB1881E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● 10A fuse ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminals 7, 9 and combination meter terminals 39, 40. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-529 2005 Altima M DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] 7. CHECK PNP SWITCH Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace PNP switch. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END 9. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 11. REPLACE CONBINATION METER Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace combination meter 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-530 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [QR] PROCEDURE B A 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3 NG >> GO TO 2. D BBIA0438E E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground G >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. H 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. J 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K 4. CHECK PNP SWITCH L Refer to MT-13, "POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace PNP switch. M 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-531 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description PFP:14955 UBS00C7P The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator. BBIA0022E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00C7Q Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Idle OFF More than 5,000 rpm ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00C7R The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. P1800 1800 Trouble diagnosis name VIAS control solenoid valve circuit DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● VIAS control solenoid valve An excessively low or high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00C7S NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-534, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-532 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00C7T A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1256E Revision: March 2005 EC-533 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve Idle speed [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00C7U 1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0022E 4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0173E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R connector E122 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and VIAS control solenoid valve >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-534 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] 3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E Refer to EC-535, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. F 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00C7V VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS SOL VALVE Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes J K L M Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2505E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2532E Revision: March 2005 I EC-535 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [QR] Removal and Installation UBS00C7W VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: March 2005 EC-536 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR] DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description PFP:25320 A UBS0032P Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0032Q Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW C CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0032R E The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1805 1805 Trouble diagnosis name Brake switch DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. F G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Vehicle condition Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration DTC Confirmation Procedure J UBS0032S WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Turn ignition switch ON. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M PBIB1952E WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 I EC-537 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0032T BBWA1247E Revision: March 2005 EC-538 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Depressed Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D UBS0032U 1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Brake pedal Stop lamp Fully released Not illuminated Depressed Illuminated F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. H 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A I Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. J K L BBIA0049E 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0117E Revision: March 2005 EC-539 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E28, M7 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-540, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS0032V STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0049E Revision: March 2005 EC-540 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Conditions Continuity Brake pedal fully released Should not exist. Brake pedal depressed A EC Should exist. If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again. C PBIB0118E D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-541 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR] DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS002TV The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002TW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002TX These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-438 . DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2122 2122 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input Possible cause An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) P2123 2123 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002TY NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Revision: March 2005 EC-542 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR] Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. A WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC C D SEF058Y E WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-543 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002TZ BBWA1249E Revision: March 2005 EC-544 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 82 83 WIRE COLOR B G EC ITEM Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) 91 OR Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 0V D [Engine is running] ● ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V Idle speed E [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released G 0.28 - 0.48V H [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 2.0V I [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V K Diagnostic Procedure UBS002U0 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-545 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0811E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● Harness for open or short between TCM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-546 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR G Refer to EC-571, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. H 9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. I Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J K >> INSPECTION END 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CVS ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) Revision: March 2005 MBIB0023E EC-547 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [QR] 4. 5. 6. 7. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation UBS002U2 ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: March 2005 EC-548 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 A UBS00308 The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM E receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00309 F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF G H I *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0030A J These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2127 2127 P2128 2128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● K Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) M FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0030B NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. Revision: March 2005 EC-549 L 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-550 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0030C A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1250E Revision: March 2005 EC-551 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 82 83 WIRE COLOR ITEM R Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) B Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) G Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] ● ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V Idle speed 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 OR Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 2.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS0030D 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-552 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0812E H 3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor M >> Repair or replace open circuit. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check the following. ● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-544 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-396 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-553 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] 6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 83. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-554 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] 12. CHECK APP SENSOR A Refer to EC-556, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. EC 13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY C 1. 2. 3. 4. D Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . E >> INSPECTION END 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-555 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [QR] Component Inspection UBS00CVT ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Remove and Installation UBS0030F ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: March 2005 EC-556 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR] DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS002T7 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002T8 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* F SPECIFICATION G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002T9 H This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0221 0221 Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2. I Possible cause Harness or connector (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor J K FAIL-SAFE MODE L When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002TA NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-557 2005 Altima M DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR] 2. 3. 4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-560, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-558 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002TB A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1251E Revision: March 2005 EC-559 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W Throttle position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R Throttle position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● ● ● 91 OR Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) Less than 4.75V Engine stopped Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T) More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS002TC 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-560 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0006E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check the following. ● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-400 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-544 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-561 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-562 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [QR] Component Inspection UBS002TD A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set shift lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1), 69 (TP sensor 2) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Remove and Installation EC C D E PBIB1060E UBS002TE F G ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-563 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS002TN The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS002TO Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS002TP This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-438 . DTC No. P2138 2138 Trouble diagnosis name Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance problem DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2. Possible cause ● Harness or connector (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2 ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: March 2005 EC-564 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS002TQ A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-567, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-565 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS002TR BBWA1248E Revision: March 2005 EC-566 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR EC ITEM CONDITION 47 R Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] 82 B Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Sensor ground (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) ● 83 G DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Engine is running] D Approximately 0V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition E Approximately 0V Idle speed F 90 R Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 OR Sensor power supply (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V G [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released H 0.28 - 0.48V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed I More than 2.0V J [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W A Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V K [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V L Diagnostic Procedure UBS002TS 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-567 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0811E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB2039E Revision: March 2005 EC-568 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] 5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. D 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor F >> Repair or replace open circuit. 7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III G Check the following. ● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal H Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-566 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-400 I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR K Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 9. L 9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR M 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-569 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] 10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 83. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● Harness for open or short between TCM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-571, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. Revision: March 2005 EC-570 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [QR] 15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. A Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C >> INSPECTION END 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00CVU ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. F Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. G H I MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Remove and Installation J K UBS002TU L ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: March 2005 EC-571 M 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description PFP:22448 UBS0032W IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON-OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. BBIA0004E Revision: March 2005 EC-572 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0032X A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1252E Revision: March 2005 EC-573 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) A few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G Revision: March 2005 Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] EC-574 DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1253E Revision: March 2005 EC-575 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.1V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 62 81 Y/R G/R PBIB0521E Ignition signal No. 1 Ignition signal No. 2 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] ● ● Warm-up condition Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0522E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: March 2005 EC-576 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1254E Revision: March 2005 EC-577 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.1V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 61 80 L/R G/Y Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 4 PBIB0521E 0 - 0.2V [Engine is running] ● ● Warm-up condition Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB0522E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00E43 1. CHECK ENGINE START Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that all circuits do not produce a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB0133E Revision: March 2005 EC-578 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] 3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A Without CONSULT-II Let engine idle. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB1204E PBIB0521E F OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. G 4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H I Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-159, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . J K MBIB0034E 5. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1, condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-579 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connector E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser ● Harness for open or short between condenser and ground >> Repair or replace open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK CONDENSER Refer to EC-581, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace condenser. 8. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0004E 5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. PBIB0138E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connector E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-580 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] 10. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 11. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. E Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 12. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EC-581, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor. I J 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L Component Inspection UBS0032Z IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ M 1 and 3 2 and 3 Except 0 PBIB0847E CONDENSER 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-581 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [QR] 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2. Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F) PBIB0794E Removal and Installation UBS00330 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EM-29, "IGNITION COIL" . Revision: March 2005 EC-582 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] VIAS Description PFP:14956 A UBS00331 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position Battery Battery voltage* Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature ECM function EC Actuator C VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve D E *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. F G H I J K PBIB0843E When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suction efficiency and higher torque generation. The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector. Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction resistance under high speeds. Revision: March 2005 EC-583 2005 Altima L M VIAS [QR] COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Power Valve The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve. BBIA0022E VIAS Control Solenoid Valve The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator. BBIA0022E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V UBS00332 CONDITION ● Revision: March 2005 Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Idle OFF More than 5,000 rpm ON EC-584 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00333 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1255E Revision: March 2005 EC-585 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve ● [Engine is running] ● Revision: March 2005 Idle speed Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm EC-586 DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00334 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. EC C D E PBIB0844E 3. F Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves. G H BBIA0023E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves. I J K L M BBIA0023E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2. NG (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-587 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] 2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE With CONSULT-II Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Start engine and let it idle. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and check vacuum existence under the following conditions. 1. 2. 3. VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum ON Should exist. OFF Should not exist. PBIB0844E OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. 3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Start engine and let it idle. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions. Condition Vacuum 12V direct current supply Should exist. No supply Should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0845E 4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE 1. 2. Stop engine. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-117, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair hoses or tubes. SEF109L Revision: March 2005 EC-588 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] 5. CHECK VACUUM TANK A Refer to EC-590, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace vacuum tank. EC 6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. D E F BBIA0022E 4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. G H Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. I J PBIB0173E K 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R connector E122 ● 10A fuse ● Harness continuity between fuse and VIAS control solenoid valve L M >> Repair harness or connectors. 8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-589 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] 9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-590, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00335 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS SOL VALVE Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2505E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2532E VACUUM TANK 1. 2. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum pump. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B . PBIB0846E Revision: March 2005 EC-590 2005 Altima VIAS [QR] Removal and Installation UBS00336 A VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-591 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR] INJECTOR CIRCUIT Component Description PFP:16600 UBS00337 The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. SEF375Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00338 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM B/FUEL SCHDL CONDITION ● See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/ T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load INJ PULSE-B1 Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec EC-592 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00339 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1257E Revision: March 2005 EC-593 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] 22 23 41 42 R/Y R/B R/L R/W ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed (11 - 14V) NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 PBIB0529E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB0530E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS0033A 1. INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-594 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. F G H I PBIB1986E J OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-595 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR] 3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect injector harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0024E 4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0582E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness connectors F12, F101 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-596 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [QR] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F12, F101 ● Harness for open or short between injector and ECM EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 7. CHECK INJECTOR Refer to EC-597, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injector. D E 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END G Component Inspection UBS0033B INJECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect injector harness connector. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. H Resistance: 11.6 - 14.9Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] I J K PBIB1727E Removal and Installation UBS0033C INJECTOR L Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . M Revision: March 2005 EC-597 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR] FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Description PFP:17042 UBS00E44 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Battery Battery voltage* ECM Function Actuator Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. Engine running and cranking Operates. When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds. Except as shown above Stops. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the furl tank. BBIA0081E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0033H Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY CONDITION ● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION ON OFF EC-598 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0033I A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1258E Revision: March 2005 EC-599 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] ● 114 B/OR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON Diagnostic Procedure BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS0033J 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers. Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. BBIA0025E 2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0450E 4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 114 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB2032E Revision: March 2005 EC-600 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR] 3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC C Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 13. D E WBIA0079E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the following. ● Harness or connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM G H >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. J K L BBIA0026E 5. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB0624E Revision: March 2005 EC-601 2005 Altima M FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR] 6. CHECK 15A FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect 15A fuse. 3. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuse. 7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness or connectors E33, B3 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 10. CHECK CONDENSER Refer to EC-603, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace condenser. Revision: March 2005 EC-602 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR] 11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B3 terminal 4, “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC C D Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. BBIA0391E E 12. CHECK FUEL PUMP F Refer to EC-603, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace fuel pump. G H 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Component Inspection I J UBS0033K FUEL PUMP 1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. K L M BBIA0391E 2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 1 and 3. Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] SEC918C Revision: March 2005 EC-603 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [QR] CONDENSER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance: Above 1MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)] PBIB0794E Removal and Installation UBS0033L FUEL PUMP Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-604 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:92136 A UBS0033S The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. EC C D WBIA0441E E F G H SEF099X I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-605 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS0033T BBWA1259E Revision: March 2005 EC-606 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM 49 R Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) 67 B Sensor ground CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed D Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 70 W Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON (Compressor operates.) Diagnostic Procedure E 1.0 - 4.0V F UBS0033U 1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. A G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V I OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. J PBIB1188E K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-607 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. Stop engine. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. WBIA0441E 5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0085E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-608 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [QR] 6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation H UBS0033V REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to ATC-113, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" ,MTC-99, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-609 2005 Altima ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [QR] ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description PFP:25350 UBS0033W The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Diagnostic Procedure UBS0033X 1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect CONSULT-II or GST and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. Select "LOAD SIGNAL" and check indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Rear window defogger switch ON ON Rear window defogger switch OFF OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0103E 2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II Check "LOAD SIGNAL" indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Lighting switch ON at 2nd position ON Lighting switch OFF OFF OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0103E 3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM Refer to GW-42, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" . >> INSPECTION END 4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" orLT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-610 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 A UBS0033Y When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal) Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. EC C D BBIA0087E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0033Z Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW2 (STOP lamp switch) CONDITION ● ● ● Brake pedal: Fully released ● Clutch pedal: Fully released (M/T) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ● Clutch pedal: Fully depressed (M/T) Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION F ON G OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-611 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00340 BBWA1260E Revision: March 2005 EC-612 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR EC ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 101 R/G A Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Depressed DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D [Ignition switch: ON] 1 108 G/B* G/R*2 ● Brake pedal: Depressed ● Clutch pedal: Depressed (M/T) ASCD brake switch Approximately 0V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Fully released ● Clutch pedal: Released (M/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) *1: A/T models *2: M/T models F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-613 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00341 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. 1. 2. M/T models CONDITION INDICATION When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed OFF When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON A/T models CONDITION INDICATION When brake pedal: Depressed OFF When brake pedal: Fully released ON 1. 2. SEC011D Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. M/T models CONDITION When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage A/T models CONDITION When brake pedal: Depressed When brake pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V MBIB0061E Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 EC-614 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION EC INDICATION When brake pedal: Released OFF When brake pedal: Depressed ON C D SEC013D E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION When brake pedal: Released F VOLTAGE Approximately 0V When brake pedal: Depressed G Battery voltage H MBIB0060E I OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13. J 3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M BBIA0087E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION When clutch pedal: Released When clutch pedal: Depressed VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 PBIB0799E EC-615 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0088E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB0799E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. Revision: March 2005 EC-616 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0087E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. G H PBIB0857E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-617 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0049E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. PBIB0117E 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. Revision: March 2005 EC-618 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [QR] 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E28, M7 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH D Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. E 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-619 2005 Altima ASCD INDICATOR [QR] ASCD INDICATOR Component Description PFP:24814 UBS00342 ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. ● CRUISE indicator is illuminated. ● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00343 Specification data are reference value. MONITOR ITEM CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP Revision: March 2005 CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch is pressed at first time → second time ON → OFF ● MAIN switch: ON ASCD is operating ON ● When vehicle is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD is not operating OFF EC-620 2005 Altima ASCD INDICATOR [QR] Wiring Diagram UBS00344 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1261E Revision: March 2005 EC-621 2005 Altima ASCD INDICATOR [QR] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00345 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. ASCD INDICATOR CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch is pressed at first time → second time ON → OFF ● MAIN switch: ON ASCD is operating ON ● When vehicle is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD is not operating OFF OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or U1001is not displayed. Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001, refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION Does combination meter operate normally? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-622 2005 Altima MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR [QR] MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram PFP:24814 A UBS00ELP EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1232E Revision: March 2005 EC-623 2005 Altima MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR [QR] BBWA1262E Revision: March 2005 EC-624 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure PFP:00030 A UBS0034H Approximately 350 kPa (3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi) Fuel pressure at idle EC Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Target idle speed UBS0034I No-load*1 [in P or N position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T)] 700±50 rpm Air conditioner: ON In P or N position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T) 800 rpm or more*2 Ignition timing In P or N position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T) 15°± 5° BTDC C D *1: Under the following conditions: E ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) ● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position F *2: It refrigerant pressure is low, the idle speed may not be increased. Calculated Load Value UBS0034J Conditions G Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST) At idle 10 - 35 At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35 Mass Air Flow Sensor H UBS0034K Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) Output voltage at idle I 0.9 - 1.2V* 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle* 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm* Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) J *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS0034L Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 0.31 - 0.37 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) L UBS0034M M Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater UBS0034N Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater UBS0034O Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS00CV1 Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" . Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS00CV2 Refer to EC-285, "Component Inspection" . Revision: March 2005 K EC-625 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR] Throttle Control Motor UBS00CV3 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω Injector UBS00CV4 Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.6 - 14.9Ω Fuel Pump UBS00CV5 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Revision: March 2005 0.2 - 5.0Ω EC-626 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index PFP:00024 A UBS00HZG NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-790 U1001 4 1001* CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-790 P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-793 P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 EC-793 P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-797 P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-797 P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-797 P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-797 P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-806 P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-815 P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-815 P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-822 P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-822 P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-826 P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-826 P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-831 P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-831 P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-838 P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR EC-841 P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-844 P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-846 P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-856 P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-846 P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-856 P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-868 P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-879 P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 EC-868 P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 EC-879 P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-890 P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-895 P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-895 P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-899 P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-899 P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-906 P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-906 Revision: March 2005 EC-627 — 2005 Altima C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-906 P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-906 P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-906 P0305 0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE EC-906 P0306 0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE EC-906 P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-916 P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-916 P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-921 P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-928 P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 EC-928 P0400 0400 EGR SYSTEM EC-937 P0403 0403 EGR VOL CON/V CIR EC-945 P0405 0405 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-952 P0406 0406 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-952 P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-959 P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-959 P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-964 P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-969 P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-977 P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-977 P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-984 P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-991 P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-994 P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-1000 P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-1008 P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-1016 P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-1025 P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-1027 P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-1029 P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-1029 5 P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* EC-1031 P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-1033 P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM EC-1035 P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-1037 P0605 0605 ECM EC-1042 P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-471 P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-476 P0711 0711 FLUID TEMP SEN AT-481 P0717 0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-486 P0722 0722 VHCL SPEED SEN·AT*5 AT-490 P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-496 P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-499 Revision: March 2005 EC-628 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-505 P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-511 P0735 0735 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN AT-516 P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-522 P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-525 P0750 0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC AT-530 P0755 0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC AT-535 P0760 0760 SHIFT SOL C AT-540 P0762 0762 SFT SOL C STUCK ON AT-545 P0765 0765 SHIFT SOL D AT-550 P0770 0770 SHIFT SOL E AT-555 P0775 0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) AT-560 P0780 0780 SHIFT AT-565 P0795 0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) AT-569 P0797 0797 PC SOL C STC ON AT-574 P0882 0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG AT-585 P1031 1031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-1045 P1032 1032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-1045 P1051 1051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-1045 P1052 1052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-1045 P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-1053 P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-1057 P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-1066 P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-1068 P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR EC-1074 P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR EC-1074 P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-1079 P1136 1136 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 EC-1057 P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) EC-1084 P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) EC-1096 P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-1108 P1166 1166 HO2S2 (B2) EC-1084 P1167 1167 HO2S2 (B2) EC-1096 P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-1108 P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-1109 P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-1110 P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-1111 P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-1123 P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING EC-1125 P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-1127 P1271 1271 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-1132 P1272 1272 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-1140 Revision: March 2005 EC-629 2005 Altima A EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P1273 1273 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-1148 P1274 1274 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-1157 P1276 1276 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-1166 P1278 1278 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-1175 P1279 1279 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-1187 P1281 1281 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-1132 P1282 1282 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-1140 P1283 1283 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-1148 P1284 1284 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-1157 P1286 1286 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-1166 P1288 1288 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-1175 P1289 1289 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-1187 P1402 1402 EGR SYSTEM EC-1199 P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-1206 P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-1214 P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-1220 P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-1227 P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-1238 P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-667 P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-1240 P1800 1800 VIAS S/V CIRC EC-1248 P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-1253 P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1258 P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1258 P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1265 P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1265 P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-1272 P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-1279 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. Alphabetical Index UBS00HZF NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . DTC*1 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 2 GST* Reference page ECM*3 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 EC-1132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 EC-1140 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 EC-1148 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 EC-1157 Revision: March 2005 EC-630 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Reference page A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 EC-1166 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 EC-1175 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 EC-1187 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1281 1281 EC-1132 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1282 1282 EC-1140 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1283 1283 EC-1148 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1284 1284 EC-1157 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1286 1286 EC-1166 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1288 1288 EC-1175 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1289 1289 EC-1187 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 EC-1045 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 EC-1045 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 EC-1045 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 EC-1045 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 AT-496 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 AT-499 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 AT-505 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 AT-511 A/T 5HT GR FNCTN P0735 0735 AT-516 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-522 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-1258 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-1258 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-1265 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 EC-1265 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-1279 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 EC-1227 ASCD SW P1564 1564 EC-1220 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 EC-1238 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-476 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-1253 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 EC-790 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 EC-790 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-921 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 EC-1108 CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 EC-1108 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-928 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 EC-928 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-1123 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 EC-1125 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-906 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 EC-906 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 EC-906 Revision: March 2005 EC-631 A ECM*3 2005 Altima EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* Reference page ECM*3 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 EC-906 CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 EC-906 CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 EC-906 ECM P0605 0605 EC-1042 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 EC-1053 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 EC-826 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 EC-826 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 EC-838 EGR SYSTEM P0400 0400 EC-937 EGR SYSTEM P1402 1402 EC-1199 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0405 0405 EC-952 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0406 0406 EC-952 EGR VOL CON/V CIR P0403 0403 EC-945 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-1111 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-1066 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 EC-1068 ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-1079 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 EC-1074 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 EC-1074 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 EC-1008 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 EC-964 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 EC-969 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 EC-991 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 EC-994 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 EC-1000 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 EC-1016 FLUID TEMP SEN P0711 0711 AT-481 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 EC-895 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 EC-895 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 EC-890 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 EC-1025 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 EC-1027 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 EC-1029 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 EC-1029 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-868 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 EC-868 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-879 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 EC-879 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-846 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-856 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 EC-1084 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 EC-1096 Revision: March 2005 EC-632 2005 Altima INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Reference page HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 EC-846 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 EC-856 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 EC-1084 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 EC-1096 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-797 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-797 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 EC-797 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 EC-797 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 EC-822 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 EC-822 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 EC-841 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-793 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 EC-793 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 EC-1057 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 EC-1057 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 EC-1033 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 EC-1035 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-916 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 EC-916 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-525 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 EC-806 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 EC-815 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 EC-815 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-906 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-667 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-1240 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) P0775 0775 AT-560 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) P0795 0795 AT-569 PC SOL C STC ON P0797 0797 AT-574 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-471 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 EC-977 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 EC-977 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 EC-1206 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-1037 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 EC-1127 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 AT-530 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 AT-535 SFT SOL C STUCK ON P0762 0762 AT-545 SHIFT P0780 0780 AT-565 SHIFT SOL C P0760 0760 AT-540 Revision: March 2005 EC-633 A ECM*3 2005 Altima EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC [VQ] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* Reference page ECM*3 SHIFT SOL D P0765 0765 AT-550 SHIFT SOL E P0770 0770 AT-555 TCM POWER INPT SIG P0882 0882 AT-585 TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 EC-1109 TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-1110 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 EC-844 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-899 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-899 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-831 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-831 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-1272 TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 AT-486 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-959 P0430 0430 EC-959 P0500 0500 EC-1031 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 EC-984 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 EC-1214 VHCL SPEED SEN·AT*5 P0722 0722 AT-490 VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 EC-1248 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 5 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. Revision: March 2005 EC-634 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A UBS00IIZ The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS00HZI The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precaution ● ● ● ● UBS00HZJ Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable. SEF289H Revision: March 2005 EC-635 2005 Altima H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [VQ] ● ● ● – – – – – – ● Do not disassemble ECM. If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. If the battery is disconnected, the following emissionrelated diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. Diagnostic trouble codes 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes Freeze frame data 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. PBIB1164E SEC406D ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs. Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc. Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-740 . Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents. Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS). Revision: March 2005 EC-636 PBIB0090E MEF040D 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ] ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. A EC C SEF217U D ● ● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. E F G H I J SEF348N ● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in the figure. K L M SEC893C Revision: March 2005 EC-637 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ] ● ● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. BBIA0081E ● ● ● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily. Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown. SEF709Y ● – – – – When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location. Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units. Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller. Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis SEF708Y UBS00HZK When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision: March 2005 EC-638 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A UBS00HZL The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter EC Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) C D S-NT564 KV10117100 (J-36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut E F S-NT379 KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench G Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors a: 22 mm (0.87 in) H I S-NT636 (J-44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 J K LEM054 (J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit Checking fuel pressure L M LEC642 (J-44321-6) Fuel pressure adapter Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector type fuel lines. LBIA0376E (J-45488) Quick connector release Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine room PBIC0198E Revision: March 2005 EC-639 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT825 KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester S-NT826 Revision: March 2005 EC-640 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ] Commercial Service Tools UBS00HZM A Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Leak detector i.e.: (J-41416) Locating the EVAP leak EC C S-NT703 EVAP service port adapter i.e.: (J-41413-OBD) Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port D E F S-NT704 Fuel filler cap adapter i.e.: (MLR-8382) Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure G H S-NT815 Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor I J S-NT705 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below. a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor K L AEM488 M Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. Anti-seize lubricant i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) S-NT779 Revision: March 2005 EC-641 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram PFP:23710 UBS00HZT PBIB2270E Revision: March 2005 EC-642 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS00HZW A INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Engine speed*3 Piston position EC Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Knock sensor Engine knocking condition C D Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injector E 3 Battery Battery voltage* Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Air conditioner switch*2 Air conditioner operation Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed F G *1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. I J VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below. ● During warm-up ● When starting the engine ● During acceleration ● Hot-engine operation ● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models) ● High-load, high-speed operation ● During deceleration ● During high engine speed operation Revision: March 2005 EC-643 2005 Altima K L M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL) SEF503YB The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-1132, "DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. ● Deceleration and acceleration ● High-load, high-speed operation ● Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit ● Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature ● High engine coolant temperature ● During warm-up ● After shifting from N to D (A/T models) ● When starting the engine MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. Revision: March 2005 EC-644 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] FUEL INJECTION TIMING A EC C SEF179U D Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. E F G FUEL SHUT-OFF Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds. Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS00HZX INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) I Input Signal to ECM Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Knock sensor Engine knocking Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Wheel ECM function Actuator Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor sensor*1 J K Ignition timing control Power transistor L M Vehicle speed *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Firing order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. ● At starting ● During warm-up ● At idle ● At low battery voltage Revision: March 2005 H EC-645 2005 Altima ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] During acceleration The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. ● Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS00I00 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed ECM function Fuel cut control Actuator Fuel injector *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine speed over is 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled. NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-643 . Revision: March 2005 EC-646 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL [VQ] AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL Input/Output Signal Chart Sensor 1 PFP:23710 A UBS00HZZ Input Signal to ECM Air conditioner switch* Air conditioner ON signal Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature ECM function Actuator EC C 2 Battery Battery voltage* Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed Air conditioner cut control Air conditioner relay D E *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. System Description F UBS00IIW This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF. ● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. ● When cranking the engine. ● At high engine speeds. ● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. ● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. ● When engine speed is excessively low. ● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-647 2005 Altima AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [VQ] AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description PFP:18930 UBS00IG4 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor ASCD brake switch Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Brake pedal operation Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Combination meter* Vehicle speed TCM* (A/T models) Powertrain revolution ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. SET OPERATION Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) ACCEL OPERATION If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. ● CANCEL switch is pressed ● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T) ● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T) ● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed ● TCS system is operated When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp. ● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/ ACCELERATE switch. ● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly. If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. Revision: March 2005 EC-648 2005 Altima AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [VQ] COAST OPERATION When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing CRUISE switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. ● Brake pedal is released ● Clutch pedal is released (M/T) ● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T) ● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) Component Description A EC C D UBS00IG5 ASCD STEERING SWITCH E Refer to EC-1220 . ASCD BRAKE SWITCH F Refer to EC-1227 , and EC-1333 . ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH G Refer to EC-1227 , and EC-1333 . STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-1253 . H ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-1066 , EC-1068 , EC-1074 and EC-1079 . I ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-1343 . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-649 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [VQ] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 UBS00I01 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail. Revision: March 2005 EC-650 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description PFP:14950 A UBS00IFV SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC C D E F G PBIB1631E The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-651 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS) PBIB2502E Revision: March 2005 EC-652 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0525E Revision: March 2005 EC-653 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS) PBIB2504E Revision: March 2005 EC-654 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0525E Revision: March 2005 EC-655 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00IFW EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B . 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C . 3. Release blocked port B . 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C . 5. Block port A and B . 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. PBIB1212E FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing. SEF445Y 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-983 . FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-898 . EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-989 . EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-999 . Revision: March 2005 EC-656 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] EVAP SERVICE PORT A Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. EC C SEF462UA Removal and Installation D UBS00IFX EVAP CANISTER E Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. F G H I J BBIA0246E EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE K 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve clockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. L M PBIB1384E How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS00IFY CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: ● Do not start engine. ● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak. ● WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. Revision: March 2005 EC-657 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. PEF838U 6. 7. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. PEF917U 8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . SEF200U WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. 2. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter. SEF462UA Revision: March 2005 EC-658 2005 Altima EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM [VQ] 3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system. A EC C D BBIA0526E 4. 5. 6. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SER MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-659 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [VQ] ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description PFP:00032 UBS00IFZ PBIB1387E From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: ● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. ● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. ● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. – Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to Fuel Pressure Release, EC-714 . – Disconnect battery ground cable. ● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. ● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. ● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. ● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Revision: March 2005 EC-660 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IG0 A SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor C attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG D OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. F G H PBIB1213E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I Replace EVAP canister with a new one. J >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. L >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE M Refer to EC-663, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. Revision: March 2005 EC-661 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [VQ] SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. PBIB1213E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace filler neck tube. Revision: March 2005 EC-662 2005 Altima ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [VQ] 7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A Refer to EC-663, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. EC 8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE C Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. D 9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I E Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. F G 10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. H I J K SEF665U Component Inspection UBS00IG1 L REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. c. 3. 4. a. b. c. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Revision: March 2005 EC-663 2005 Altima M ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) [VQ] d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0248E Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel gauge retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0248E Revision: March 2005 EC-664 2005 Altima POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [VQ] POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description PFP:11810 A UBS00IG2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC C D E F G SEC921C This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. H I J K L PBIB1588E Component Inspection UBS00IG3 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. PBIB1589E Revision: March 2005 EC-665 2005 Altima M POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [VQ] PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. 2. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. S-ET277 Revision: March 2005 EC-666 2005 Altima NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) [VQ] NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Description ● ● ● PFP:25386 A UBS00I05 If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on EC “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SysC tem-NATS)" . Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” D mode with CONSULT-II. When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system SEF543X and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. E Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and all NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual, IVIS/NVIS. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-667 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 UBS00I02 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979 Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data SRT code SRT status Test value CONSULT-II × × × × × × — GST × × × — × × × ECM × ×* — — — × — *: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-724 .) Two Trip Detection Logic UBS00I03 When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. ×: Applicable MIL DTC 1st trip Items —: Not applicable 1st trip DTC 2nd trip 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying — — — × — × — — × — — × — — × — — — — — × — × × — Blinking Lighting up Blinking Lighting up Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 is being detected × — — Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 is being detected — — One trip detection diagnoses (Refer to EC-669 .) — Except above — When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. Revision: March 2005 EC-668 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS00I04 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 EC ×:Applicable —: Not applicable CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 — — 1 (A/T) 2 (M/T) × (A/T) — (M/T) EC-790 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 — — 2 — EC-790 C D E NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — Flashing*7 EC-685 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 × EC-793 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — — 2 × EC-793 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × 2 × EC-797 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × 2 × EC-797 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 × × 2 × EC-797 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 × × 2 × EC-797 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — 2 × EC-806 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — 1 × EC-815 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — 1 × EC-815 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — 2 × EC-822 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — 2 × EC-822 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-826 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-826 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-831 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-831 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 1 × EC-838 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-841 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-844 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — × 2 × EC-846 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-856 HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 — × 2 × EC-846 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × 2 × EC-856 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-868 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-879 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — — 2 × EC-868 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — 2 × EC-879 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-890 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — 2 × EC-895 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — 2 × EC-895 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-899 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-899 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-906 Revision: March 2005 A Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-669 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-906 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-906 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-906 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-906 CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — 2 × EC-906 CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — 2 × EC-906 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — 2 — EC-916 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — 2 — EC-916 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-921 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-928 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — — 2 × EC-928 EGR SYSTEM P0400 0400 × × 2 × EC-937 EGR VOL CON/V CIR P0403 0403 — — 1 × EC-945 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0405 0405 — — 2 × EC-952 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0406 0406 — — 2 × EC-952 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-959 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × × 2 × EC-959 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-964 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-969 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — 2 × EC-977 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — 2 × EC-977 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — 2 × EC-984 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — 2 × EC-991 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — 2 × EC-994 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — 2 × EC-1000 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-1008 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 × 2 × EC-1016 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-1025 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-1027 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — 2 × EC-1029 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — 2 × EC-1029 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-1031 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-1033 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-1035 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-1037 ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-1042 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 1 × AT-471 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-476 FLUID TEMP SEN P0711 0711 — — 2 × AT-481 P0717 0717 — — 1 × AT-486 VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T* P0722 0722 — — 1 × AT-490 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — — 1 × AT-496 TURBINE SENSOR 6 Revision: March 2005 EC-670 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page A EC ECM*3 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — — 1 × AT-499 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — — 1 × AT-505 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — — 1 × AT-511 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN P0735 0735 — — 1 × AT-516 A/T TCC S/U FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 1 × AT-522 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 1 × AT-525 SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 — — 1 × AT-530 SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 — — 1 × AT-535 SHIFT SOL C P0760 0760 — — 1 × AT-540 SFT SOL C STUCK ON P0762 0762 — — 1 × AT-545 SHIFT SOL D P0765 0765 — — 1 × AT-550 SHIFT SOL E P0770 0770 — — 1 × AT-555 PC SOL B (SFT/PRS) P0775 0775 — — 1 × AT-560 SHIFT P0780 0780 — — 1 × AT-565 PC SOL C (TCC&SFT) P0795 0795 — — 1 × AT-569 PC SOL C STC ON P0797 0797 — — 1 × AT-574 TCM POWER INPT SIG P0882 0882 — — 1 × AT-585 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 × × 2 × EC-1045 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 × × 2 × EC-1045 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 × × 2 × EC-1045 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 × × 2 × EC-1045 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — 2 × EC-1053 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — 2 × EC-1057 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — 1 × EC-1066 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — 1 × EC-1068 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — 1 × EC-1074 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — 1 × EC-1074 ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — 1 × EC-1079 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 — — 2 × EC-1057 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × 2 × EC-1084 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × 2 × EC-1096 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-1108 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 × × 2 × EC-1084 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 × × 2 × EC-1096 CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — 1 × EC-1108 TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — 2 — EC-1109 TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — 2 — EC-1110 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-1111 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-1123 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-1125 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — 1 × EC-1127 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 — × 2 × EC-1132 Revision: March 2005 EC-671 2005 Altima C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL lighting up Reference page ECM*3 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 — × 2 × EC-1140 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 — × 2 × EC-1148 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 — × 2 × EC-1157 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 — × 2 × EC-1166 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 × × 2 × EC-1175 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 × × 2 × EC-1187 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1281 1281 — × 2 × EC-1132 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1282 1282 — × 2 × EC-1140 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1283 1283 — × 2 × EC-1148 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1284 1284 — × 2 × EC-1157 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1286 1286 — × 2 × EC-1166 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1288 1288 × × 2 × EC-1175 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1289 1289 × × 2 × EC-1187 EGR SYSTEM P1402 1402 × × 2 × EC-1199 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — 2 × EC-1206 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — 2 × EC-1214 ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 — EC-1220 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — 1 — EC-1227 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — 1 — EC-1238 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 P1615 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — EC-667 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — 2 × EC-1240 VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 — — 2 — EC-1248 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-1253 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-1258 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-1258 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-1265 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-1265 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-1272 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-1279 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC need CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. *7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-677, "How to Display SRT Status" . DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, Revision: March 2005 EC-672 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd A trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-682, "HOW EC TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-669, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. C 1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. D When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-717, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupliE cated, the item requires repair. How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. With CONSULT-II With GST CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) No Tools The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. F G H I J K L M PBIB0911E Revision: March 2005 EC-673 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-754, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data 2 3 Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. Revision: March 2005 EC-674 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] SRT Item A The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Priority*1 CATALYST 3 EVAP SYSTEM HO2S HO2S HTR Three way catalyst function Corresponding DTC No. P0420, P0430 3 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 2 EVAP control system P0442 3 EVAP control system P0456 3 A/F sensor 1 P1278, P1288 A/F sensor 1 P1279, P1289 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146, P1166 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147, P1167 A/F sensor 1 heater P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 3 EGR function P0400 1 EGR function P1402 3 EGR SYSTEM Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” EC C D E F G *1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-II. H SRT Set Timing SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below. Example Self-diagnosis result All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 J Ignition cycle ← ON → OFF ← ON → Diagnosis ← ON → P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” OFF OFF ← ON → P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — P1402 NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL ON) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above Revision: March 2005 EC-675 I 2005 Altima K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: ● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. ● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. ● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. ● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. SRT Service Procedure If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. Revision: March 2005 EC-676 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2320E *1 EC-673 *2 EC-677 *3 EC-678 How to Display SRT Status WITH CONSULT-II Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown in the figure. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. WITH GST Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) Revision: March 2005 EC-677 SEF713Y 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] NO TOOLS A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds. 2. SRT status is indicated as shown below. ● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously. ● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds. PBIB2317E How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. WITH CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table on EC-675, "SRT Item" . WITHOUT CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. Revision: March 2005 EC-678 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] Driving Pattern A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2273E Revision: March 2005 EC-679 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: ● Sea level ● Flat road ● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) ● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: ● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). ● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V). ● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V). Pattern 2: ● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. Pattern 3: ● The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times. Pattern 4: ● Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes. ● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. ● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. 1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle. 2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times. – During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. *3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. ● SEF414S Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON. Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. Revision: March 2005 EC-680 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and high altitude areas [over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]: Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH) 1st to 2nd 21 (13) 21 (13) 24 (15) 2nd to 3rd 37 (23) 26 (16) 40 (25) 3rd to 4th 53 (33) 44 (27) 64 (40) 4th to 5th 63 (39) 58 (36) 72 (45) EC C Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted sped limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or los of vehicle control. Gear km/h (MPH) 1st 55 (35) 2nd 105 (65) 3rd — 4th — 5th — A D E F G H TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen. I J Test value (GST display) Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test limit Conversion 01H Max. 1/128 02H 81H Min. 1 P0430 03H 02H Max. 1/128 P0430 04H 82H Min. 1 EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) CATALYST Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) EVAP SYSTEM Revision: March 2005 TID CID P0420 01H P0420 EC-681 2005 Altima K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) HO2S A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) HO2S HEATER Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) EGR SYSTEM EGR function Test value (GST display) Test limit Conversion 8EH Min. 5mV 0EH Max. 5mV 43H 0EH Max. 0.002 44H 8EH Min. 0.002 P1278 45H 8EH Min. 0.004 P1276 46H 0EH Max. 5mV P1276 47H 8EH Min. 5mV P1279 48H 8EH Min. 0.004 P1281 4CH 8FH Min. 5mV P1282 4DH 0FH Max. 5mV P1283 4EH 0FH Max. 0.002 P1284 4FH 8FH Min. 0.002 P1288 50H 8FH Min. 0.004 P1286 51H 0FH Max. 5mV P1286 52H 8FH Min. 5mV P1289 53H 8FH Min. 0.004 P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10mV TID CID P1271 41H P1272 42H P1273 P1274 P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500 ms P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV P0158 24H 07H Max. 10mV P0159 21H 87H Min. 10 mV/500 ms P1167 22H 87H Min. 10 mV P1166 23H 07H Max. 10 mV P1032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV P1031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV P1052 59H 11H Max. 5 mV P1051 5AH 91H Min. 5 mV P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV P0058 2FH 0BH Max. 20 mV P0057 30H 8BH Min. 20 mV P0400 31H 8CH Min. 1°C P0400 32H 8CH Min. 1°C P0400 33H 8CH Min. 1°C P0400 34H 8CH Min. 1°C P1402 35H 0CH Max. 1°C HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC WITH CONSULT-II The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). Revision: March 2005 EC-682 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4. A 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “TRANSMISSION”. EC 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” C twice. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. D 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) E F G H I J K L M PBIB2274E WITH GST The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST. NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-423, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased) 3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). No Tools NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Revision: March 2005 EC-683 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] 2. 3. Perform AT-424, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-686, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. ● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. – Diagnostic trouble codes – 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes – Freeze frame data – 1st trip freeze frame data – System readiness test (SRT) codes – Test values Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. Revision: March 2005 EC-684 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS00I06 A DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-1346 . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. EC C D SEF217U ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION E The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function Mode I Ignition switch in ON position BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. F G Engine stopped H Engine running Mode II Ignition switch in ON position MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) ● One trip detection diagnoses I J K This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. L Engine stopped M When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut MIL Flashing Without DTC When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-677, "How to Display SRT Status" . Revision: March 2005 EC-685 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. ● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. NOTE: Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this 10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For the details, refer to EC-677, "How to Display SRT Status" . Fully release the accelerator pedal. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). NOTE: Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly. PBIB0092E How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. 3. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-686, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-1346 . DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING MIL Condition ON When the malfunction is detected. OFF No malfunction. This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidenRevision: March 2005 EC-686 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code. A EC C D E F PBIA3905E A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) G H I How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) J The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC686, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. ● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses. K OBD System Operation Chart L UBS00I07 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS ● ● ● ● ● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-668, "Two Trip Detection Logic" . The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip. Revision: March 2005 EC-687 2005 Altima M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] SUMMARY CHART Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-690 . For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-692 . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. Revision: March 2005 EC-688 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision: March 2005 EC-689 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”) Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: ● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F). ● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) ● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. ● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction. ● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. ● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision: March 2005 EC-690 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF393SD *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. Revision: March 2005 EC-691 2005 Altima ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM [VQ] EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” AEC574 ● ● ● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART). Revision: March 2005 EC-692 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Basic Inspection PFP:00018 A UBS00I0B 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. EC C D E F G H I J SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-693 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. PBIA8513J 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . 1. 2. A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-694 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . E A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) 1. 2. F Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) G SEF174Y OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. K L 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. M Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-667, "Description" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 H EC-695 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" . A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0032E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) SEF174Y OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision: March 2005 EC-696 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 16. D BBIA0032E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. F G 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● I J 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. K Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-667, "Description" . L M >> GO TO 4. 19. INSPECTION END Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" . 2. INSPECTION END No >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-697 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check UBS00HZN IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF058Y With GST Check idle speed in “Service $01” with GST. IGNITION TIMING Method A 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. BBIA0196E 2. Check ignition timing. BBIA0032E Method B 1. Remove No.1 ignition coil. BBIA0196E Revision: March 2005 EC-698 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 2. Connect No.1 ignition coil and spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire. A EC C BBIA0082E D E F G SEF166Y 3. Check ignition timing. H I J BBIA0032E K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-699 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment UBS00HZO PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery ● Ignition system ● Engine oil and coolant levels ● Fuses ● ECM harness connector ● Vacuum hoses ● Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Fuel pressure ● Engine compression ● EGR volume control valve operation ● Throttle valve ● Evaporative emission system On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while selector lever is in N position. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Revision: March 2005 EC-700 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] OVERALL SEQUENCE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2086E Revision: March 2005 EC-701 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] DETAILED PROCEDURE 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Head lamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-702 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. EC C D E PBIA8513J 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . F A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) G H SEF058Y I Without CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . J K A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-703 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer toEC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) SEF174Y OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-704 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) C OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11. D BBIA0032E E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . F >> GO TO 12. G 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING H Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. I 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. J K L 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . M A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" . A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) SEF174Y OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision: March 2005 EC-705 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" . A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 16. BBIA0032E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-706 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. EC Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T). NOTE: C Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: D Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. E 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END F NG >> GO TO 21. 1. 2. 3. 20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION G With GST Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. 1. 2. 3. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-707 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-1134, "Wiring Diagram" . Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 4 2 4 24 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM and A/F sensor 1. 2. GO TO 4. 22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 23. 23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 24. 24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-708 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 25. CHECK CO% A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DOWN” and “Qd”. 5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. 6. Check CO%. 1. 2. 3. 4. EC C D Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly. E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. SEF172Y F 26. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. G H I J 7. K SEF982UA L M 27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. >> GO TO 31. 28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 1. 2. Stop engine. Replace A/F sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank. With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29. With GST>>GO TO 30. Revision: March 2005 EC-709 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 1. 2. 3. 30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With GST Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T). NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 1. 2. 3. 31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-714, "Fuel Pressure Check" . ● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-806 and EC815 . ● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-1308 . ● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC826 and EC-838 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 33. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 32. Revision: March 2005 EC-710 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC A After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-682, "How to Erase DTC" and AT-422, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" . EC >> GO TO 4. C 33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . D E >> GO TO 4. VIN Registration UBS00IIO DESCRIPTION F VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). G OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II H 1. 2. 3. 4. I Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" . Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. J K L PBIB2242E Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00HZP DESCRIPTION M Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS00HZQ DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. Revision: March 2005 EC-711 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00HZR DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: ● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. ● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. ● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) ● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) ● PNP switch: ON ● Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. ● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) ● Vehicle speed: Stopped ● Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/ T” system indicates less than 0.9V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. SEF217Z Revision: March 2005 EC-712 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. A EC C SEF454Y D 7. 8. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. Rev up the engine 2 or 3 times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) Ignition timing A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) E F G MBIB0238E H Without CONSULT-II NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 2. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. SEC897C Revision: March 2005 EC-713 2005 Altima I J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] 12. Rev up the engine 2 or 3 times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) Ignition timing A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform “Idle Air Volume Learning” all over again: ● Engine stalls. ● Erroneous idle. Fuel Pressure Check UBS00HZS FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. SEF214Y Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. BBIA0229E FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. Revision: March 2005 EC-714 2005 Altima BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE [VQ] Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. ● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, A etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: EC Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because L31 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . C 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . ● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. D ● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. ● Keep fuel hose connections clean. E 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. ● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. F ● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. G 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. H 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. LBIA0377E ● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. I At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) ● 7. 8. 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. Check the following. ● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging ● Fuel filter for clogging ● Fuel pump ● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Revision: March 2005 EC-715 2005 Altima J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction PFP:00004 UBS00I08 INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine. MEF036D It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. SEF233G A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on EC-717 . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the example on EC-721 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Revision: March 2005 EC-716 SEF234G 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] WORK FLOW Overall Sequence A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2267E Revision: March 2005 EC-717 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Detailed Flow 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-720, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DTC*1 1. Check DTC*1 . 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed. – Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.) – Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .) Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-725 .) 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? – Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5. 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON). DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 5. 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-718 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A 1 1 Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”. If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-722, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble diagnosis order. C NOTE: ● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected. ● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC ConfirmaE tion Procedure. Is DTC*1 detected? Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> Check according to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION G Perform EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. H 7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE I With CONSULT-II Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-773, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Are they within the SP value? Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 8. J K L SEF601Z M 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Is malfunctioning part detected? Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. >> GO TO 10. Revision: March 2005 EC-719 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Is malfunctioning part detected? Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-766, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-740, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" . 11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. 3. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 12. 12. FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10. NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6. OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-422, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .) 2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC679, "Driving Pattern" . 3. INSPECTION END *1: Include 1st trip DTC. *2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Description There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples: ● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. ● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. Revision: March 2005 EC-720 SEF907L 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Worksheet Sample A EC C D E F G H I J K L M MTBL0017 Revision: March 2005 EC-721 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS00I09 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. NOTE: If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790 . Priority 1 Detected items (DTC) ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line ● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor ● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor ● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor ● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor ● P0128 Thermostat function ● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor ● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● P0403 EGR volume control valve ● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor ● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor ● P0605 ECM ● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P1229 Sensor power supply ● P1610 - P1615 NATS ● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor Revision: March 2005 EC-722 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Priority 2 3 Detected items (DTC) A ● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● P0405 P0406 EGR temperature sensor ● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring ● P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve ● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor ● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor ● P1031 P1032 P1051 P1052 A/F sensor 1 heater ● P1065 ECM power supply ● P1111 P1136 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ● P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) ● P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 P1281 P1282 P1283 P1284 P1286 P1288 P1289 A/F sensor 1 ● P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve ● P1805 Brake switch ● P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control ● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function ● P0300 - P0306 Misfire ● P0400 P1402 EGR system ● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function ● P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system ● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system ● P0710 - P0882 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1148 P1168 Closed loop control ● P1211 TCS control unit ● P1212 TCS communication line ● P1564 ASCD steering switch ● P1572 ASCD brake switch ● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-723 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Fail-safe Chart UBS00I0A When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. P1121 Electric throttle control actuator (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction:) ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. (When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. (When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Revision: March 2005 Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-724 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Symptom Matrix Chart UBS00I0C A SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 Incorrect idle speed adjustment Ignition EGR BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Fuel pump circuit EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION Fuel EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 4 EC 3 4 2 C Reference page E F EC-1316 4 EC-714 2 EC-1308 4 4 EC-651 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 EC-700 1 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-700 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-1287 EGR system Main power supply and ground circuit 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 Mass air flow sensor circuit 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 EC-937, EC-1199 3 EC-783 2 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 EC-826, EC-838 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 Knock sensor circuit 2 Revision: March 2005 2 EC-725 EC-1132, EC-1140 , EC-1148 , EC-1157 , EC-1166 , EC-1175 , EC-1187 EC-831, EC-899 , EC-1123 , EC-1125 , EC-1272 Throttle position sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit I J K L EC-806, EC-815 1 A/F sensor 1 circuit 2 EC-945 2 H EC-1066, EC-1068 1 2 G EC-665 Electric throttle control actuator EGR volume control valve circuit D 2 EC-1127 , EC-1258 , EC-1265 , EC-1279 1 3 EC-916 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-921 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-928 Warranty symptom code Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 ECM 2 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit 3 2 3 3 PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 EC-1031 EC-1037 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1042, EC-1053 3 EC-1057 3 EC-1240 1 Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 EC-1248 3 Electrical load signal circuit ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 3 3 VIAS control solenoid valve circuit Air conditioner circuit 3 3 4 EC-1327 3 2 2 3 3 4 3 Reference page 3 3 EC-1332 3 3 3 2 ATC-28, MTC-28 BRC-8 or BRC-51 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) Revision: March 2005 EC-726 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER A Fuel ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA EC Fuel tank Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 F 5 5 5 5 5 5 — EM-120 Air cleaner EM-120 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 EM-122 1 1 Generator circuit SC-21 1 3 Signal plate 6 EM-224 PNP switch 4 AT-471 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Cylinder head gasket EM-200 3 Cylinder block Piston Piston ring 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-224 Connecting rod Bearing Crankshaft Valve mechanism Timing chain EM-161 Camshaft EM-182 Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 Intake valve 5 5 EM-161 5 3 EM-200 Exhaust valve Revision: March 2005 EC-727 L SC-9 5 4 K SC-4 Starter circuit Cylinder head I J 5 EM-122, EM-129 1 H EM-120 5 Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket Battery G — 5 Air duct Electric throttle control actuator Engine E — 5 Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor — electric throttle control actuator) Cranking D EM-147 Valve deposit Air Reference page FL-12 5 Vapor lock Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) C 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] 5 5 5 BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) 5 EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION 5 Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE AC IDLING VIBRATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AA HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT Exhaust ENGINE STALL Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 5 5 5 Reference page EM-134, EX-6 Three way catalyst Lubrication Cooling Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-138, LU-24 , LU23 , LU-27 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-20 Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-30 Thermostat 5 CO-42 Water pump Water gallery CO-37 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-44 Cooling fan 5 CO-31 Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant 5 CO-28 NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) 1 1 BL-107 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. Revision: March 2005 EC-728 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS00I0D A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0454E Revision: March 2005 EC-729 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] BBIA0527E Revision: March 2005 EC-730 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] A EC C D E F PBIB1686E G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-731 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] BBIA0455E Revision: March 2005 EC-732 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0457E Revision: March 2005 EC-733 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] BBIA0458E Revision: March 2005 EC-734 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0459E Revision: March 2005 EC-735 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS00HZU SE-R MODELS PBIB2501E Refer to EC-642, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. Revision: March 2005 EC-736 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] EXCEPT SE-R MODELS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2503E Refer to EC-642, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. Revision: March 2005 EC-737 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Circuit Diagram UBS00I0E BBWA1584E Revision: March 2005 EC-738 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1590E Revision: March 2005 EC-739 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS00I0F PBIB1192E ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS00I0G PREPARATION 1. 2. ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection, remove glove box. Remove ECM harness connector. BBIA0450E 3. 4. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown at right. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. ● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. ● Data is for comparison and may not be exact. SEC406D ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Body ground Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 2 W A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E Revision: March 2005 EC-740 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) A EC 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Released C D PBIB1104E 0 - 14V E [Ignition switch: ON] 5 Y Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F PBIB1105E G [Engine is running] 6 R/L ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) H 0 - 1.0V I [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm [Engine is running] 10 Y Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) K 7 - 12V L [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm M PBIB1790E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V 11 R/L Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB1790E Revision: March 2005 EC-741 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 12 W Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel: Being turned [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel: Not being turned [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V Approximately 10V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 13 W PBIB1041E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB1042E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 4.0V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 14 W PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB1040E 15 W Knock sensor [Engine is running] ● 16 OR 35 W/R 56 LG/R 75 LG 17 18 19 20 P/B LG L L/W Idle speed Approximately 2.5V Approximately 3.1V [Engine is running] A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V EGR volume control valve Revision: March 2005 [Engine is running] ● Idle speed EC-742 0.1 - 14V 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC (11 - 14V) C NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 21 22 23 L/W R/Y R/B Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 SEC984C D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm F SEC985C G Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 24 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed H I PBIB1584E [Engine is running] 25 P/B ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) J 0 - 1.0V K [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm [Engine is running] ● 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve W EVAP control system pressure sensor Revision: March 2005 Idle speed Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm [Ignition switch: ON] EC-743 L M BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 32 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 4.0V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 33 R/Y PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm PBIB1040E 34 Y/G Intake air temperature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed (11 - 14V) NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 40 41 42 PU/R R/L R/W Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEC985C [Engine is running] 44 W Electronic controlled engine mount-1 ● [Engine is running] ● Revision: March 2005 Idle speed Except the above EC-744 0 - 3.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A BATTERY VOLTAGE EC (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 PU/R C Idle speed SEC990C EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) F SEC991C G 47 R Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 R Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V H I [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W Throttle position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed K Less than 4.75V L [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed P/L EGR temperature sensor M [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm [Ignition switch: ON] 54 1.0 - 1.2V 1.6 - 2.0V Less than 4.5V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● EGR system is operating 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] 55 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – Revision: March 2005 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load EC-745 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. 57 58 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION OR/B Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] PU 76 BR 77 G/W A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PU/W L/R Y/R Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V [Engine is running] 60 61 62 DATA (DC Voltage) Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0 - 0.3V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm SEC987C [Engine is running] 63 W/R Electronic controlled engine mount-2 ● Idle speed [Engine is running] ● Except the above BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 3.0V [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 67 68 B R Sensor ground Sensor power supply (PSP sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 0.36V [Engine is running] 70 73 W Y Refrigerant pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON (Compressor operates.) [Engine is running] EC-746 1.0 - 4.0V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] 74 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – EC 0 - Approximately 1.0V C After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load D [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] 79 80 81 GY/R GY G/R Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E 0 - 0.3V F NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle G SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V H [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm I SEC987C J [Engine is running] 82 B Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V K [Engine is running] 83 85 G OR Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) Data link connector ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected Approximately 0V L Approximately 5V - Battery voltage (11 - 14V) 86 P CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V Output voltage varies with the communication status 90 R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 OR Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V Output voltage varies with the communication status. [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 Revision: March 2005 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed EC-747 More than 2.0V 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 G/Y ASCD steering switch MAIN switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● SET/COAST switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 102 104 G/R (A/T) G/W (M/T) OR Brake pedal: Slightly depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● PNP switch Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) [Ignition switch: ON] ● Shift lever: Except above DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 3V Approximately 2V Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: ON] 106 107 W P/L Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Engine is running] More than 4.3V Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. [Ignition switch: ON] 108 109 G/B (A/T) G/R (M/T) R ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed (M/T) ASCD brake switch [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released (M/T) 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Revision: March 2005 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] Ignition switch [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 Approximately 0V More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF EC-748 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113 B/OR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON EC 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D 115 116 B B ECM ground 117 OR EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 W/L Power supply for ECM (Backup) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● Idle speed C Body ground E F : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-749 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) UBS00I0H FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit. Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.* Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. *: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ● Diagnostic trouble codes ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values Revision: March 2005 EC-750 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION A DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE INPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS Item WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION ACTIVE TEST SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × × Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × × Mass air flow sensor × × × Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × A/F sensor 1 × × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × × Wheel sensor × × × Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × Throttle position sensor × × × Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × EVAP control system pressure sensor × × × Intake air temperature sensor × × × EGR temperature sensor × × × Knock sensor × Refrigerant pressure sensor × × Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal) × × × × × C D × E F × G H I J × × Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × × Stop lamp switch × × × Power steering pressure sensor × × × Battery voltage × × Load signal × × Air conditioner switch Fuel level sensor × × × ASCD steering switch × × × ASCD brake switch × × × ASCD clutch switch × × × Revision: March 2005 EC EC-751 K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Fuel injector × × × Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × × × × × × × × × × × Item WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 Throttle control motor relay × Throttle control motor × EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve × FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 Air conditioner relay Fuel pump relay OUTPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION DATA MONITOR (SPEC) × × Cooling fan relay × × × × EGR volume control valve × × × × A/F sensor 1 heater × × × × × × × × × × Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × × × VIAS control solenoid valve × × × × × × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EVAP canister vent control valve × Electronic controlled engine mount × Calculated load value SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT × × × X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-674 . INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E Revision: March 2005 EC-752 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A EC C BCIA0029E D 5. Touch “ENGINE”. If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . E F G BCIA0030E 6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. H I J BCIA0031E K WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item WORK ITEM FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE CONDITION ● USAGE FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value Revision: March 2005 EC-753 2005 Altima L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] WORK ITEM EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CONDITION USAGE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system ● IGN SW ON ● ENGINE NOT RUNNING ● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). ● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM ● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). ● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” ● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION. NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. VIN REGISTRATION ● IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM When registering VIN in ECM TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" . Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data Freeze frame data item* DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] Description ● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● One mode in the following is displayed. “Mode2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction “Mode3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) “Mode4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control “Mode5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] ● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] ● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VEHICL SPEED [km/ h] or [mph] ● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. FUEL SYS-B1 FUEL SYS-B2 L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] Revision: March 2005 EC-754 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Freeze frame data item* Description A B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] ● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EC *: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. C DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS ×: Applicable MAIN SIGNALS Description ● ENG SPEED [rpm] MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × × × B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. ● Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. ● ● COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F] × × A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × A/F SEN1 (B2) [V] × HO2S2 (B1) [V] × HO2S2 (B2) [V] × HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN] × HO2S2 MNTR (B2) [RICH/LEAN] × VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] × × BATTERY VOLT [V] × × ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × THRTL SEN 1 [V] × THRTL SEN 2 [V] × FUEL T/TMP SE [°C] or [°F] × Revision: March 2005 ● × A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. Remarks ● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed drops below the idle rpm. ● If the signal is interrupted while the engine is running, an abnormal value may be indicated. ● The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed. ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed. ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. ● The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. ● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed. EC-755 When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. E F G H ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. I ● When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. J The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. ● D K L ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● ACCEL SEN2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. ● THRTL SEN2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] × × EGR TEMP SEN [V] × × EVAP SYS PRES [V] Monitored item [Unit] Description ● The intake air temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated. ● The signal voltage of EGR temperature sensor is displayed × ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. FUEL LEVEL SE [V] × ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. START SIGNAL [ON/OFF] ● × × Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF] ● × × Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal. AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF] ● × × Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] × × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. ● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (determined by the signal voltage of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is indicated. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position. OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch are OFF. PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × × LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch signal. HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from heater fan switch signal. BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current air flow divided by peak air flow. ● Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor. ● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The opening becomes larger as the value increases. INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × × INJ PULSE-B2 [msec] IGN TIMING [BTDC] × CAL/LD VALUE [%] MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s] PURG VOL C/V [%] Revision: March 2005 EC-756 Remarks ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description ● EGR VOL CON/V [step] × ● INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA] ● INT/V TIM (B2) [°CA] INT/V SOL (B1) [%] ● INT/V SOL (B2) [%] AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF] ● The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ● The control condition of the electronic controlled engine mount (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. IDLE: Idle condition TRVL: Driving condition ● ● VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. I/P PULLY SPD [rpm] ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the turbine revolution sensor signal. VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [MPH] ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the revolution sensor signal. HO2S2 HTR (B2) [ON/OFF] Revision: March 2005 H I J L The control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. HI: High speed operation MID: Middle speed operation LOW: Low speed operation OFF: Stop HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] G The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON: Closed OFF: Open ● COOLING FAN [HI/MID/LOW/OFF] F K Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals. × E Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● THRTL RELAY [ON/OFF] D The control condition of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is operating. OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not operating. × C Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle. ● × EC The opening becomes larger as the value increases. The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases. ENGINE MOUNT [IDLE/TRVL] FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF] Indicates the EGR volume control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● VIAS S/V [ON/OFF] A Remarks EC-757 M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS Description ● Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already been performed successfully. ● Distance traveled while MIL is activated. ● A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value increases. ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is displayed. ● The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch signal. CANCEL SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal. RESUME/ACC SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal. SET SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/ COAST switch signal. BRAKE SW1 [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal. BRAKE SW2 [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. AT OD MONITOR [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the input signal from the TCM. AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. IDL A/V LEARN [YET/CMPLT] TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [mile] A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%] A/F S1 HTR (B2) [%] AC PRESS SEN [V] VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph] VHCL SPD CUT [NON/CUT] LO SPEED CUT [NON/CUT] CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF] SET LAMP [ON/OFF] Revision: March 2005 EC-758 Remarks 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] ECM INPUT SIGNALS Monitored item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description A Remarks Voltage [V] Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%] ● DUTY-HI Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width measured by the probe. DUTY-LOW PLS WIDTH-HI ● Only # is displayed if item is unable to be measured. ● Figures with #s are temporary ones. They are the same figures as an actual piece of data which was just previously measured. PLS WIDTH-LOW EC C D NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. E DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item ECM input signals Monitored item [Unit] Main signals Description ● ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed. ● Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. ● A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). ● × F Remarks The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. G ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. H ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. I ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. J ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. K NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item TEST ITEM CONDITION ● FUEL INJECTION IGNITION TIMING POWER BALANCE L ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Timing light: Set ● Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. ● A/C switch: OFF ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● JUDGEMENT If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Engine runs rough or dies. Cut off each injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-759 CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel injector ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. ● Harness and connectors ● Compression ● Fuel injector ● Power transistor ● Spark plug ● Ignition coil 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] TEST ITEM CONDITION ● COOLING FAN* ● ● ENG COOLANT TEMP FUEL PUMP RELAY EGR VOL CONT/V VIAS SOL VALVE ENGINE MOUNTING PURG VOL CONT/V FUEL/T TEMP SEN VENT CONTROL/V V/T ASSIGN ANGLE ● JUDGEMENT ● Harness and connectors ● Cooling fan motor ● IPDM E/R ● Harness and connectors ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Fuel injector Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel pump relay EGR volume control valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● EGR volume control valve Solenoid valve makes the operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve ● Harness and connectors ● Electronic controlled engine mount ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve ● Harness and connectors ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve Ignition switch: ON Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW” and “OFF” using CONSULT-II. Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and OFF using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Change the EGR volume control valve opening step using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Ignition switch: ON ● Turn electronic controlled engine mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with the CONSULT-II. ● Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. ● Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-II. Cooling fan moves and stops. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Electronic controlled engine mount makes the operating sound. Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. ● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Change intake valve timing using CONSULT-II. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. *: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode For details, refer to EC-674, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. Revision: March 2005 EC-760 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode Test mode EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM A/F SEN1 Test item Condition PURG FLOW P0441 EC-964 EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-969 EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-1016 PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-1206 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 EC-1166 A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 EC-1166 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/1279 EC-1175, EC-1187 Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC. A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/1289 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 HO2S2 EGR SYSTEM Reference page A EC C D EC-1175, EC-1187 EC-856 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-1084 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-1096 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-856 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 EC-1084 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 EC-1096 EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-937 EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-1199 E F G *: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to L31 models but appears in DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode screens. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-761 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) Description CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): ● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... SEF705Y xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed. The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual. 2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): ● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. SEF707X Revision: March 2005 EC-762 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Operation 1. 2. A “AUTO TRIG” ● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected. EC ● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- C nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to "INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS" in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .) D “MANU TRIG” ● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for furE ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. F G H I J K L M PBIB0197E Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS00I0I DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual. SEF139P Revision: March 2005 EC-763 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Service $01 READINESS TESTS This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-674, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . Service $03 DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) ● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03) ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01) ● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02) ● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) ● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07) Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, the EVAP canister vent control valve can be closed. In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function. Service $08 Service $09 — (CALIBRATION ID) ● Low ambient temperature ● Low battery voltage ● Engine running ● Ignition switch OFF ● Low fuel temperature ● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle. BBIA0002E Revision: March 2005 EC-764 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) A EC C SEF398S D 5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. E F G SEF416S H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-765 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor UBS00I0J Remarks: ● Specification data are reference values. ● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . A/F ALPHA-B1 A/F ALPHA-B2 See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) ● Engine: After warming up ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V EGR TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) VEH SPEED SE BATTERY VOLT ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CLSD THL POS AIR COND SIG P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL ● ● ● ● ● Revision: March 2005 Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Engine: After warming up, idle the engine More than 70°C (158°F) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5 V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF Steering wheel: Not being turned (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel: Being turned ON EC-766 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up IGN TIMING CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW PURG VOL C/V EGR VOLCON/V INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2) INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) VIAS S/V Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION A Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF EC ON → OFF → ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec C D 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec Idle 13° - 18° BTDC 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC Idle 5% - 35% 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s E F G H I 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — Idle 0 step Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step Idle −5° - 5°CA 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50% 1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON Except above conditions OFF J EC-767 K L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] MONITOR ITEM AIR COND RLY ENGINE MOUNT CONDITION ● ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON Idle (with vehicle stopped) IDLE Except above conditions TRVL ● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions OFF VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Air conditioner switch: OFF COOLING FAN ON Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F) MID Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HI ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: After warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH) Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2) ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V ● Engine: Idle ● Air conditioner switch: ON ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating. The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW Ignition switch: ON MAIN switch: Pressed ON ● MAIN switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) I/P PULLY SPD VEHICLE SPEED AC PRESS SEN VEH SPEED SE CANCEL SW RESUME/ACC SW SET SW ● ● ● Revision: March 2005 Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON ON Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON. 0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile) 1.0 - 4.0V EC-768 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 BRAKE SW2 CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION A Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ON Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON ON → OFF ● Ignition switch: ON MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time ● MAIN switch: ON ASCD is operating ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD is not operating OFF EC C D *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-769 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I0K The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF. PBIB0198E ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. SEF241Y Revision: March 2005 EC-770 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB1594E Revision: March 2005 EC-771 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description PFP:00031 UBS00I0L The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: ● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction) ● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) ● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition ● UBS00I0M Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) ● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) ● Transmission: Warmed-up*1 ● ● Electrical load: Not applied*2 ● Engine speed: Idle *1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). *2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead. ● Inspection Procedure UBS00I0N NOTE: Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to EC-773, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF601Z Revision: March 2005 EC-772 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I0O A OVERALL SEQUENCE EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2268E Revision: March 2005 EC-773 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] PBIB2548E Revision: March 2005 EC-774 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] DETAILED PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. 3. Start engine. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-772, "Testing Condition" . Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. NOTE: Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value even a little. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3. EC C D E PBIB2369E 2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” F Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19. G H I PBIB2332E J 3. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. K L M PBIB2332E 4. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop the engine. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-775 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] 5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL 1. 2. Stop the engine. Change engine oil. NOTE: This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving condition. >> INSPECTION END 6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-714, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-714 . GO TO 8. NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – 2. Check the following. Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube Clogged fuel filter Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-1316 .) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-714 .) If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10. PBIB0133E Revision: March 2005 EC-776 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – – 2. A Check the following. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-1287 .) Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-1308 .) Intake air leakage Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-200 .) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.) EC C D >> GO TO 11. 11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” E 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 12. F G 12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION H Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1. ● For DTC P1271, P1281, refer to EC-1132, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1272, P1282, refer to EC-1140, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1273, P1283, refer to EC-1148, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1274, P1284, refer to EC-1157, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1276, P1286, refer to EC-1166, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1278, P1288, refer to EC-1176, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1279, P1289, refer to EC-1188, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. I J K L 13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC. M >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 15. Revision: March 2005 EC-777 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] 15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Stop the engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. >> GO TO 16. 16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . 17. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. PBIB2332E 18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – – – 2. – – – – Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following. Engine oil level is too high Engine oil viscosity Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive Noise from engine Noise from transmission, etc. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. EGR valve stuck Valve clearance malfunction Intake valve timing control function malfunction Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc. >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30. Revision: March 2005 EC-778 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] 19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20. EC C D 20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21. 21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. E F G Stop the engine. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and then reconnect it again. >> GO TO 22. H I 22. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-815 . 2. GO TO 29. NG >> GO TO 23. J K L 23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” M Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29. PBIB2370E Revision: March 2005 EC-779 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] 24. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> GO TO 29. 25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 27. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26. 26. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27. 27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30. PBIB2370E Revision: March 2005 EC-780 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE [VQ] 28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct EC ● Looseness of oil filler cap ● Disconnection of oil level gauge ● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve C ● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket D ● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts ● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc. E >> GO TO 30. F 29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . G H 30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-781 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT [VQ] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description PFP:00006 UBS00I0P Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations STEP in Work Flow 2 3 or 4 Situation The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t]. The symptom described by the customer does not recur. 5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. 10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I0Q 1. INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , "INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , "HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS", “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-782 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [VQ] POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram PFP:24110 A UBS00I0R EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1554E Revision: March 2005 EC-783 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 109 R Ignition switch Idle speed 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● 111 W/B B B ECM ground 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 115 116 Body ground [Ignition switch: OFF] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ECM relay (Self shut-off) DATA (DC Voltage) More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Body ground BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00I0S 1. INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0015E Revision: March 2005 EC-784 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [VQ] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . E F G H BBIA0437E I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. L 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. M 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-785 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [VQ] 7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-1287, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB1915E 8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 12. PBIB1630E 9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 12. PBIB1191E 10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 11. Revision: March 2005 EC-786 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [VQ] 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness or connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VII 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. F G 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. ● Harness or connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK 15A FUSE J 1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R. 2. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. K L 15. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-787 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [VQ] 16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 17. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-788 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT [VQ] Ground Inspection UBS00I0T A Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti- EC cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: C ● Remove the ground bolt or screw. ● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. D ● Clean as required to assure good contact. ● Reinstall bolt or screw securely. ● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. ● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the E wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. F For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-28, "Ground Distribution" . G H I J K PBIB1870E L M Revision: March 2005 EC-789 2005 Altima DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [VQ] DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 UBS00I0U CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name U1000*1 1000*1 U1001*2 DTC detecting condition ● CAN communication line 1001*2 UBS00I0V ● ECM cannot communicate to other control units. ECM cannot communicate for more than the specified time. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted) *1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. (A/T) The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. (M/T) *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. UBS00I0W Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-792, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-790 2005 Altima DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I0X A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1264E Revision: March 2005 EC-791 2005 Altima DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I0Y Go to LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . Revision: March 2005 EC-792 2005 Altima DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL [VQ] DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL Description PFP:23796 A UBS00I0Z SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Piston position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed ECM function Intake valve timing control Actuator EC Intake valve timing control solenoid valve *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN Communication line C D E F G H I PBIB1389E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. J K L CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I10 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2) INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Idle −5° - 5°CA 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50% EC-793 2005 Altima M DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL [VQ] On Board Diagnosis Logic Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. UBS00I11 Detecting condition P0011 0011 (Bank 1) P0021 0021 (Bank 2) Intake valve timing control performance There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree. Possible cause ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● Intake valve control solenoid valve ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft ● Timing chain installation ● Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for intake valve timing control FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Detected items Intake valve timing control Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I12 CAUTION: Always drive at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P1111 or P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111 or P1136. Refer to EC-1057 . ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) COOLAN TEMP/S 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F) B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.38 msec Shift lever P or N position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T) 4. 5. 6. PBIB0164E Let engine idle for 10 seconds. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-795, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F) Shift lever 1st or 2nd position Driving location uphill Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.) Revision: March 2005 EC-794 2005 Altima DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL [VQ] 7. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-795, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I13 EC 1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP 1. 2. Start engine. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. KG >> Go to LU-21, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" . C D E F PBIA8559J 2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G Refer to EC-796, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H 3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) I Refer to EC-927, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). J K 4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EC-936, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). L M 5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. SEC905C Revision: March 2005 EC-795 2005 Altima DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL [VQ] 6. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned. OK or NG OK >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" . NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT Refer to EM-187, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean lubrication line. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-923 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-930 for CMP sensor (PHASE). >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IIP INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as follows. Terminal Resistance 1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] 1 or 2 and ground (Continuity should not exist.) If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E 4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Removal and Installation PBIB2275E UBS00IIQ INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" . Revision: March 2005 EC-796 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00I14 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater C Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION Engine speed rpm E Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Above 3,600 OFF Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. F ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ON G CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I15 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) H CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: After warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm P0037 0037 (Bank 1) P0057 0057 (Bank 2) P0038 0038 (Bank 1) P0058 0058 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high Revision: March 2005 I ON J OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. D UBS00I16 DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) EC-797 K Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater L M 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I17 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11.0V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-802, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-798 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I18 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1663E Revision: March 2005 EC-799 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 25 P/B ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● Revision: March 2005 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. EC-800 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1664E Revision: March 2005 EC-801 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 6 R/L ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: after warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I19 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-802 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] 2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC C D E F G H I BBIA0467E 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. K Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. L M PBIB0541E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-803 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] 4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0037, P0038 25 1 1 P0057, P0058 6 1 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER Refer to EC-804, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I1A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 1 and 4 5.0 - 7.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 2 and 1, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 3 and 1, 2, 4 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. PBIB0542E Revision: March 2005 EC-804 2005 Altima DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER [VQ] Removal and Installation UBS00I1B A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-805 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 UBS00I1C The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. PBIB1604E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I1D Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CONDITION SPECIFICATION See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW Idle 5% - 35% 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition A) P0101 0101 UBS00I1E A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem B) Revision: March 2005 A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. EC-806 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Intake air temperature sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Intake air temperature sensor 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I1F A Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed. C D With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G SEF174Y H With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. I PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. K L M SEF243Y Revision: March 2005 EC-807 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] 7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V Shift lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check PBIB0199E UBS00I1G PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select Service $01 with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. If NG, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF534P Revision: March 2005 EC-808 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I1H A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1271E Revision: March 2005 EC-809 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 1.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.6 - 2.0V [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00I1I 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? A or B A >> GO TO 3. B >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connection. Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. ● Revision: March 2005 EC-810 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G 1. 2. H Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J BBIA0035E 3. K Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. M PBIB2261E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-811 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-825, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-993, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-812, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I1J MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Revision: March 2005 EC-812 2005 Altima DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] 4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm A EC C 1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4* PBIB2371E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. D If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. E F G H Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. I Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition Voltage V K Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm J L 1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4* PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-813 2005 Altima M DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR [VQ] Removal and Installation UBS00I1K MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-814 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 A UBS00I1L The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. EC C D PBIB1604E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I1M Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CONDITION F SPECIFICATION See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW Idle 5% - 35% 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% G H ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s I J On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I1N These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0102 0102 P0103 0103 Trouble diagnosis name Mass air flow sensor circuit low input Mass air flow sensor circuit high input K DTC detecting condition Possible cause An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Revision: March 2005 Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-815 2005 Altima L M DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I1O NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-818, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-818, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to next step. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-818, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-816 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I1P A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1271E Revision: March 2005 EC-817 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 1.2V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. 1.6 - 2.0V [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00I1Q 1. INSPECTION START Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103 P0102 >> GO TO 3. P0103 >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connection. Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. ● Revision: March 2005 EC-818 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G 1. 2. H Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J BBIA0035E 3. K Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. M PBIB2261E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-819 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [VQ] 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-812, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I1R MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm 1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4* PBIB2371E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Revision: March 2005 EC-820 2005 Altima DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR [VQ] a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. A EC C D Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. E Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition Voltage V Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm F G H 1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4* PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation J K L M UBS00I1S MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-821 I 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00I1T The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. PBIB1604E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. UBS00I1U Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0112 0112 Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0113 0113 Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Intake air temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause UBS00I1V NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-824, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-822 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I1W A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1272E Revision: March 2005 EC-823 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I1X 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0035E 3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and ground. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SEF040S Revision: March 2005 EC-824 2005 Altima DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E Refer to EC-825, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). F 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I1Y INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. I Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. J Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 K If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). L PBIB1604E M SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00I1Z MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-825 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00I20 The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 Resistance kΩ *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I21 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause P0117 0117 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0118 0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Engine coolant temperature sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. Revision: March 2005 EC-826 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I22 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-829, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF058Y F WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-827 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I23 BBWA1273E Revision: March 2005 EC-828 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I24 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. G 2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. H I J BBIA0036E 3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. K L Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M PBIB0080E Revision: March 2005 EC-829 2005 Altima DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-830, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I25 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB2005E Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00I26 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-44, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" . Revision: March 2005 EC-830 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00I27 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I28 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION F SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I29 H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0122 0122 P0123 0123 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. I Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) J K L FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode M The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: March 2005 EC-831 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I2A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-834, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-832 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I2B A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1555E Revision: March 2005 EC-833 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] 91 OR Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V Approximately 5V UBS00I2C 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-834 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0233E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-833 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-1267 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-835 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [VQ] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-837, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-836 2005 Altima DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I2D A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set Shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation EC C D E PBIB1170E F G UBS00I2E ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-837 2005 Altima DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00I2F NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or P0118. Refer to EC-826, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" . The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I2G This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0125 0125 Trouble diagnosis name Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition ● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. EC-838 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Thermostat 2005 Altima DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I2H A CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-839, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF174Y G WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I2I 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . H I J K L BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-840, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-839 2005 Altima M DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For circuit, refer to EC-828, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I2J ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB2005E Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00I2K ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-44, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" . Revision: March 2005 EC-840 2005 Altima DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00I2L The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. EC C D PBIB1604E E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance F kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349 G *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0127 0127 Trouble diagnosis name Intake air temperature too high UBS00I2M DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure J Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Intake air temperature sensor K UBS00I2N NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. a. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-841 2005 Altima L M DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [VQ] b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. ● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-842, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF189Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I2O 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-843, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-823, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-842 2005 Altima DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I2P A INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 EC If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). C D PBIB1604E E F G SEF012P Removal and Installation H UBS00I2Q MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-843 2005 Altima DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [VQ] DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:21200 UBS00I2R Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open. DTC No. P0128 0128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. Thermostat function DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Thermostat ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat ● Engine coolant temperature sensor UBS00I2S NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. ● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F). If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step. If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-844, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF176Y WITH GST 1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I2T 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-845, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-844 2005 Altima DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I2U A ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Check resistance as shown in the figure. EC C D PBIB2005E E Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 F G If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. H SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00I2V ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I Refer to CO-44, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-845 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00I2W The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I2X Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I2Y The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB1848E DTC No. P0138 0138 (Bank 1) P0158 0158 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-846 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I2Z NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-851, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF174Y WITH GST F Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-847 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I30 BANK 1 BBWA1276E Revision: March 2005 EC-848 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – C 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. D E [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-849 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1556E Revision: March 2005 EC-850 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 W A ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – C D 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. E [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V F UBS00I31 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . I J K BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-851 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] 2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. BBIA0467E Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-852 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] 3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 2 1 P0158 55 2 2 C Continuity should exist. 2. D Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 2 1 P0158 55 2 2 F Continuity should not exist. G 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER I Check heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connectors for water. Water should not exist. J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 L Refer to EC-854, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. M 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-853 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I32 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. SEF174Y 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. SEF662Y 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB2163E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-854 2005 Altima DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 [VQ] 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. A (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. EC If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or C check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. D 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. F Removal and Installation UBS00I33 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 G Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-855 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00I34 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I35 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I36 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. SEF302U DTC No. P0139 0139 (Bank 1) P0159 0159 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow response Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time. EC-856 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I37 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J K PBIB2374E 9. a. b. NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-862, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00I38 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-857 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-862, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-858 PBIB1607E 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I39 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1276E Revision: March 2005 EC-859 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-860 Approximately 0V 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1556E Revision: March 2005 EC-861 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 W ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00I3A 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-862 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BBIA0035E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-868, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-879, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-863 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. BBIA0467E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-864 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0139 74 2 1 P0159 55 2 2 C Continuity should exist. 2. D Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0139 74 2 1 P0159 55 2 2 F Continuity should not exist. G 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I Refer to EC-865, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. J 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I3B HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. SEF174Y Revision: March 2005 EC-865 2005 Altima M DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. SEF662Y 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB2163E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision: March 2005 EC-866 2005 Altima DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 [VQ] Removal and Installation UBS00I3C A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-867 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 UBS00I3D With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) A/F sensor 1 DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name ECM function Fuel injection control DTC detecting condition P0171 0171 (Bank 1) P0174 0174 (Bank 2) Fuel injection system too lean ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) Actuator Fuel injector Possible cause ● Intake air leaks ● A/F sensor 1 ● Fuel injector ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Mass air flow sensor ● Incorrect PCV hose connection DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I3E NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF968Y Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition Revision: March 2005 When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). EC-868 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 7. 8. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 BBIA0035E should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition A EC C D E F G H I J When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). K When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-869 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I3F BANK 1 BBWA1557E Revision: March 2005 EC-870 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1558E Revision: March 2005 EC-871 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I3G 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: March 2005 EC-872 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0235E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 E G H I J Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 K Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 L M Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-873 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idling: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-1316, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) ● Fuel lines (Refer to MA-24, "Checking Fuel Lines" ) ● Fuel filter for clogging >> Repair or replace. 6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-806 . 7. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. With GST Install all removed parts. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK (P0171)>>GO TO 9. OK (P0174)>>GO TO 11. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-806 . Revision: March 2005 EC-874 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 8. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-875 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 9. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I 1. 2. 3. Without CONSULT-II Stop engine. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101 Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0472E 4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. PBIB2595E Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. With triple meters Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 1 23 3 3 22 5 7 21 Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 Without triple meters Continuity should exist. 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . Revision: March 2005 EC-876 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 10. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II A Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound. EC C D PBIB2596E E With triple meters Harness connector F101 terminal Cylinder (+) (–) 1 6 1 3 6 3 5 6 7 F G Without triple meters H Harness connector F101 terminal Cylinder (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 I J Operating sound should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . K 11. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR L 1. 2. M Start engine. Listen to injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound. Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . PBIB1986E Revision: March 2005 EC-877 2005 Altima DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 12. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 2. Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-878 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 A UBS00I3H With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu- EC lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor A/F sensor 1 DTC No. P0172 0172 (Bank 1) P0175 0175 (Bank 2) Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too rich ECM function Fuel injection control Actuator Fuel injector D DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● A/F sensor 1 ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Mass air flow sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure E F UBS00I3I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF968Y Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition 7. 8. When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. Revision: March 2005 EC-879 2005 Altima I J K L M DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] If engine starts, go to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go BBIA0035E to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc. Revision: March 2005 EC-880 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I3J A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1557E Revision: March 2005 EC-881 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1558E Revision: March 2005 EC-882 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I3K 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D E PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-883 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0235E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-884 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. A Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . EC At idling: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. C D 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-1316, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) E F >> Repair or replace. 6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR G With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: H at idling at 2,500 rpm I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-806 . J 7. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR K With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. L 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm M OK or NG OK (P0172)>>GO TO 9. OK (P0175)>>GO TO 11. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-806 . Revision: March 2005 EC-885 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 8. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. PBIB0133E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . Revision: March 2005 EC-886 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 9. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I 1. 2. 3. A Without CONSULT-II Stop engine. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101 Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D E BBIA0472E 4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F G H I PBIB2595E J Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K With triple meters L Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 1 23 3 3 22 5 7 21 Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 M Without triple meters Continuity should exist. 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . Revision: March 2005 EC-887 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 10. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound. PBIB2596E With triple meters Harness connector F101 terminal Cylinder (+) (–) 1 6 1 3 6 3 5 6 7 Without triple meters Harness connector F101 terminal Cylinder (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 Operating sound should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . 11. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR 1. 2. Start engine. Listen to injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound. Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . PBIB1986E Revision: March 2005 EC-888 2005 Altima DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION [VQ] 12. CHECK INJECTOR A 1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. 6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 13. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC C D E F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-889 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00I3L The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. BBIA0391E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0181 0181 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance UBS00I3M DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Fuel tank temperature sensor UBS00I3N NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. If the result is NG, go to EC-893, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-893, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-890 SEF174Y 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [VQ] WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-891 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I3O BBWA1559E Revision: March 2005 EC-892 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I3P 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. G 2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. H I J BBIA0391E 3. K Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M PBIB0932E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B2, M12 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-893 2005 Altima DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR [VQ] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B2, M12 ● Harness connectors M70, F58 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. 6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I3Q FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove fuel level sensor unit. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00I3R FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-894 2005 Altima DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00I3S The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D BBIA0391E E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 F G *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00I3T DTC detecting condition J Possible cause P0182 0182 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0183 0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Fuel tank temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I3U NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-897, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-895 2005 Altima K L M DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I3V BBWA1559E Revision: March 2005 EC-896 2005 Altima DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I3W 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0437E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. G 2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. H I J BBIA0391E 3. K Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M PBIB0932E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B2, M12 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-897 2005 Altima DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR [VQ] 4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors B2, M12 ● Harness connectors M70, F58 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector. 6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I3X FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove fuel level sensor unit. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 PBIB0931E Removal and Installation UBS00I3Y FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-898 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00I3Z Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I40 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION F SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I41 H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0222 0222 P0223 0223 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. I Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) J K L FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode M The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: March 2005 EC-899 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I42 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-902, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above. Revision: March 2005 EC-900 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I43 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1591E Revision: March 2005 EC-901 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] 91 OR Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V Approximately 5V UBS00I44 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-902 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0233E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0082E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-901 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-1267 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-903 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [VQ] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-837, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-904 2005 Altima DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I45 A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set Shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation EC C D E PBIB1170E F G UBS00I46 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-905 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE PFP:00000 On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I47 When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Engine speed ECM function On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0300 0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. P0301 0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires. P0302 0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected P0303 0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. P0305 0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire detected No. 5 cylinder misfires. P0306 0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire detected No. 6 cylinder misfires. No. 2 cylinder misfires. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Improper spark plug ● Insufficient compression ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● The injector circuit is open or shorted ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leak ● The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted ● Lack of fuel ● Signal plate ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Incorrect PCV hose connection UBS00I48 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. Revision: March 2005 EC-906 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. A Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-907, "Diagnostic Procedure" C . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performD ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain E time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition F G When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). H When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). I The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. Engine speed Time J Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I49 1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE M 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace it. Revision: March 2005 EC-907 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? PBIB0133E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 10. Revision: March 2005 EC-908 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 4. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I 1. 2. 3. A Stop engine. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0472E E 4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F G H PBIB2595E I Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K With triple meters Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 1 23 3 3 22 5 7 21 Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 L M Without triple meters Continuity should exist. 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . Revision: March 2005 EC-909 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 5. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound. PBIB2596E With triple meters Harness connector F101 terminal Cylinder (+) (–) 1 6 1 3 6 3 5 6 7 Without triple meters Harness connector F101 terminal Cylinder (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 Operating sound should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-III 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected. Start engine. Listen to injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound. Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 . PBIB1986E Revision: March 2005 EC-910 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. EC C D E BBIA0229E F G H I Spark should be generated. CAUTION: ● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken. NOTE: When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 8. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1287, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . Revision: March 2005 K L M 8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II 1. 2. 3. J EC-911 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 9. CHECK SPARK PLUG Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26 . NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 10. SEF156I 10. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26 . 11. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-200, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" . Standard: 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2 , 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum: 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2 , 142 psi)/300 rpm Difference between each cylinder: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. 12. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. Install all removed parts. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. Revision: March 2005 EC-912 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-1316, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) ● Fuel lines (Refer to MA-24, "Checking Fuel Lines" ) ● Fuel filter for clogging EC C >> Repair or replace. 14. CHECK IGNITION TIMING D Check the following items. Refer to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . Items E Specifications Target idle speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) Ignition timing A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Follow the EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-913 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 15. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0235E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM and A/F sensor 1. 16. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1. Revision: March 2005 EC-914 2005 Altima DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE [VQ] 17. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A With CONSULT-II Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: EC at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: C at idling at 2,500 rpm D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-806, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . E 18. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART F Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace. G 19. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC H Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I J >> GO TO 20. 20. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: March 2005 EC-915 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [VQ] DTC P0327, P0328 KS Component Description PFP:22060 UBS00I4A The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. BBIA0067E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I4B The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected condition P0327 0327 Knock sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0328 0328 Knock sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Knock sensor DTC No. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause UBS00I4C NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-918, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-916 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I4D A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1585E Revision: March 2005 EC-917 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 15 WIRE COLOR W ITEM Knock sensor CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I4E 1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. BBIA0067E Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F26, F301 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-918 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [VQ] 4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR A Refer to EC-920, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor. EC 5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS C Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . D E F G BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. H 6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. I Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. 3. Also check for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. K L 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F26, F301 ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground M >> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-919 2005 Altima DTC P0327, P0328 KS [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I4F KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. PBIB2327E Removal and Installation UBS00I4G KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-224, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . Revision: March 2005 EC-920 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [VQ] DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description PFP:23731 A UBS00I4H The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. EC C D PBIB0562E E F G H PBIB2326E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I4I I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENG SPEED CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0335 0335 Trouble diagnosis name Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit UBS00I4J DTC detecting condition ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking. ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running. ● J Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause L ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Signal plate UBS00I4K NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-921 K 2005 Altima M DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [VQ] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-924, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-924, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-922 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I4L A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1286E Revision: March 2005 EC-923 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 1.6V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 13 W PBIB1041E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 1.4V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. PBIB1042E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I4M 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-924 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [VQ] 2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. EC C D BBIA0461E 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 (A/T models) or 1 (M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H PBIB2328E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 (A/T models) or 3 (M/T models) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-925 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [VQ] 6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EC-927, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). 8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the signal plate. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-926 2005 Altima DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I4N A CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. EC C D E PBIB0563E 5. F Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] G 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) H I PBIB0564E Removal and Installation UBS00I4O CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) J Refer to EM-138, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" . K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-927 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description PFP:23731 UBS00I4P The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. PBIB0562E PBIB2326E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0340 0340 (Bank 1) P0345 0345 (Bank 2) DTC detecting condition ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit UBS00I4Q ● ● Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during engine running. ● Camshaft (Intake) ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .) The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .) ● Dead (Weak) battery The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I4R NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 EC-928 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-933, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-933, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF058Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-929 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I4S BANK 1 BBWA1560E Revision: March 2005 EC-930 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 4.0V D NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 33 R/Y E PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB1040E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-931 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1288E Revision: March 2005 EC-932 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 4.0V D NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 14 W E PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G PBIB1040E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I4T I 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Turn ignition switch to START position. J Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) K 2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-933 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] 3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BBIA0462E Voltage: Battery voltage 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SEF481Y 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1) ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F58, M70 ● Harness connectors F301, F26 (bank 1) ● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground ● >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-934 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] 7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 (bank 1) or 14 (bank 2) and CMP sensor (PHASE) EC terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1) ● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ECM F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 9. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EC-936, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). H I 10. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) J Check the following. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end ● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. K L M SEC905C 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-935 2005 Altima DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I4U CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation UBS00I4V CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EM-182, "CAMSHAFT" . Revision: March 2005 EC-936 2005 Altima DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION Description PFP:14710 A UBS00I4W SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position voltage*2 Battery Battery Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner operation Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Electrical load*1 ECM function Actuator EC C D EGR volume control EGR volume control valve E F Electrical load signal Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed TCM*1 (A/T models) Gear position, shifting signal G *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions. ● Engine stopped ● Engine starting ● Engine idling ● Low engine coolant temperature ● Excessively high engine coolant temperature ● High engine speed ● Wide open throttle ● Low battery voltage I J K L M PBIB1843E Revision: March 2005 EC-937 2005 Altima DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] COMPONENT DESCRIPTION EGR volume control valve The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. SEF552W EGR Temperature Sensor The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. SEF599K EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014 *: This data is reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. When EGR system is operating. Voltage: 0 - 1.5V SEF068X Revision: March 2005 EC-938 2005 Altima DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I4X A Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EGR TEMP SEN EGR VOL CON/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No load SPECIFICATION Less than 4.5V Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step EC C D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I4Y If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sensor under the condition that calls for EGR, a low-flow malfunction is diagnosed. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0400 0400 EGR function (Close) No EGR flow is detected under the condition that calls for EGR. DTC Confirmation Procedure E Possible cause Harness or connectors (The EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EGR volume control valve stuck closed ● Dead (Weak) battery ● EGR passage clogged ● EGR temperature sensor and circuit ● Exhaust gas leaks F G H UBS00I4Z CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. ● P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II even though DTC work support test result is NG. TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine immediately. ● For best results, perform the test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or higher. I J K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Confirm “COOLAN TEMP/S” value is within the range listed below. COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F) If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. SEF013Y When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step. Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and then stop vehicle with engine running. Revision: March 2005 EC-939 2005 Altima M DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] 7. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 8. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,800 rpm Vehicle speed More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 4.0 - 9.0 msec Shift lever Suitable position 8. SEF845Y If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC942, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check engine coolant temperature in Service $01 with GST. Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F) If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. Start engine and let it idle monitoring the engine coolant temperature value. When the engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Engine speed: 1,200 - 2,800 rpm Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) Shift lever: Suitable position Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-942, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-940 2005 Altima DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I50 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1561E Revision: March 2005 EC-941 2005 Altima DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 17 18 19 20 WIRE COLOR P/B LG L L/W ITEM EGR volume control valve CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) 0.1 - 14V 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00I51 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM 1. 2. Start engine. Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks. PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace exhaust system. Revision: March 2005 EC-942 2005 Altima DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] 2. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0249E E 4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H PBIB0627E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal EGR volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-943 2005 Altima DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] 5. CHECK EGR PASSAGE Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace EGR passage. 6. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. 7. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUIT Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P 0405, P0406. Refer to EC-953, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-944 2005 Altima DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ] DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Description PFP:14710 A UBS00I52 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position voltage*2 Battery Battery Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner operation Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Electrical load*1 ECM function Actuator EC C D EGR volume control EGR volume control valve E F Electrical load signal Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed TCM*1 (A/T models) Gear position, shifting signal G *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions. ● Engine stopped ● Engine starting ● Engine idling ● Low engine coolant temperature ● Excessively high engine coolant temperature ● High engine speed ● Wide open throttle ● Low battery voltage I J K L M PBIB1843E Revision: March 2005 EC-945 2005 Altima DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ] COMPONENT DESCRIPTION EGR volume control valve The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. SEF552W CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I53 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EGR VOL CON/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No load SPECIFICATION Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I54 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0403 0403 Trouble diagnosis name EGR volume control valve circuit DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EGR volume control valve An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I55 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm 10 times. If DTC is detected, go to EC-948, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-946 2005 Altima DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I56 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1669E Revision: March 2005 EC-947 2005 Altima DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 17 18 19 20 WIRE COLOR P/B LG L L/W ITEM EGR volume control valve CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) 0.1 - 14V 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I57 1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0249E 4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0627E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-948 2005 Altima DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal EGR volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 EC C D E Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F 4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE G Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. H I 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I58 K EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. M Revision: March 2005 EC-949 2005 Altima DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 3. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)] 4. 5. 6. If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. SEF605Y 7. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF015Y 8. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening steps. If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. SEF560W Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-950 2005 Altima DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 3. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. A Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)] 4. 5. 6. If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF. EC C D E F G SEF605Y 7. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position. H I J SEF560W Removal and Installation K UBS00I59 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Refer to EM-126, "EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE" . L M Revision: March 2005 EC-951 2005 Altima DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR Component Description PFP:14710 UBS00I5A The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. SEF599K EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. When EGR system is operating. Voltage: 0 - 1.5V SEF068X On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0405 0405 P0406 0406 Trouble Diagnosis Name EGR temperature sensor circuit low input EGR temperature sensor circuit high input Revision: March 2005 UBS00I5B DTC Detecting Condition An excessively low voltage from the EGR temperature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant temperature is low. An excessively high voltage from the EGR temperature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant temperature is high. EC-952 Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is shorted.) ● EGR temperature sensor ● Malfunction of EGR function ● Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is open.) ● EGR temperature sensor ● Malfunction of EGR function 2005 Altima DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I5C NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0405 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 50°C (122°F). If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool the engine down. Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF174Y F With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0406 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F). H I With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm. Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to 50 step and check “EGR TEMP SEN” indication. “EGR TEMP SEN” indication should decrease to less than 1.0V. If the check result is NG, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to the following step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,800 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 4 - 9 msec Shift lever Suitable position 8. J K L SEF015Y If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0164E With GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select Service $01 with GST and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. Revision: March 2005 EC-953 2005 Altima M DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR [VQ] Engine speed 1,200 - 2,800 rpm Vehicle speed More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) Shift lever Suitable position 4. 5. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-954 2005 Altima DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I5D A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1562E Revision: March 2005 EC-955 2005 Altima DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I5E 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0505E 3. Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. PBIB2329E Revision: March 2005 EC-956 2005 Altima DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector. D 4. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E Refer to EC-957, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EGR temperature sensor. F 5. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE G Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. H 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I5F EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. K L M PBIB2330E Revision: March 2005 EC-957 2005 Altima DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR [VQ] 4. EGR temperature °C (°F) Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.011 - 0.014 If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. SEF068X Removal and Installation UBS00I5G EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EM-126, "EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE" . Revision: March 2005 EC-958 2005 Altima DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [VQ] DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:20905 A UBS00I5H The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. EC C D PBIB2377E E DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0420 0420 (Bank 1) P0430 0430 (Bank 2) DTC detecting condition ● Catalyst system efficiency below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly. Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. Possible cause ● Three way catalyst (manifold) ● Exhaust tube ● Intake air leaks ● Fuel injector ● Fuel injector leaks ● Spark plug ● Improper ignition timing DTC Confirmation Procedure F G H UBS00I5I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. Revision: March 2005 I EC-959 K L M SEF189Y 2005 Altima DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [VQ] 8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. 10. Wait 5 seconds at idle. SEF533Z 11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1. SEF534Z 12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-961, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF535Z Overall Function Check UBS00I5J Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Open engine hood. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds. If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to EC-961, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0 PBIB1108E Revision: March 2005 EC-960 2005 Altima DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I5K 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM A Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). D E F G PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. J K 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check the following items. Refer to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . Items L Specifications Target idle speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) Ignition timing A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . Revision: March 2005 EC-961 2005 Altima DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [VQ] 5. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-1309 . Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform EC-1310, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1172E 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. BBIA0229E Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken. NOTE: When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 7. ● Revision: March 2005 EC-962 2005 Altima DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION [VQ] 7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and EC the grounded metal portion. Spark should be generated. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1287 . D 8. CHECK SPARK PLUG E Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type)" . NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 9. F G SEF156I H 9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. I J Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26 . K 10. CHECK INJECTOR L 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Reconnect all injector harness connectors. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold). Revision: March 2005 EC-963 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description PFP:14950 UBS00I5L NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform trouble diagnosis for other DTC. PBIB1026E In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I5M Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined. DTC No. P0441 0441 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system incorrect purge flow DTC detecting condition EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube ● Blocked rubber tube ● Cracked EVAP canister ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Blocked purge port ● EVAP canister vent control valve UBS00I5N CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. Revision: March 2005 EC-964 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. EC Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. C If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) D Shift lever Suitable position Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 9.0 msec Engine coolant temperature 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) E F G H I PBIB0826E 7. If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC966, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS00I5O J K Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. L Lift up drive wheels. Start engine (TCS switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch ON Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Shift lever Any position other than P, N or R M PBIB1109E 8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. Revision: March 2005 EC-965 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 9. If NG, go to EC-966, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I5P 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister. 2. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . Start engine and let it idle. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. PURG VOL CONT/V 100% Vacuum Should exist. 0% Should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB1678E 3. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. 6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle. Vacuum should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-966 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPO- EC RATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG C OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it. 1. 2. 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT 1. 2. D Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B . Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C . E F G SEF367U H 3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. I J K SEF368U 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE L With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. M PBIB1678E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Revision: March 2005 EC-967 2005 Altima DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-995 , P0453 EC-1001 . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it. 13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-968 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A UBS00I5Q This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister EC purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. D E F G H PBIB1026E DTC No. P0442 0442 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure) Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. EC-969 I Possible cause J ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. K ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. L ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks M 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I5R NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0829E 6. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-971, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. SEC763C Revision: March 2005 EC-970 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] WITH GST A NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-679 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-679 . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 5. Select Service $07 with GST. ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-971, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0441, EC-966 . Diagnostic Procedure EC C D UBS00I5S 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN E 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. F G H SEF915U I 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. J K 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION L Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. M 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-656, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: March 2005 EC-971 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0506E SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: March 2005 EC-972 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. A Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. EC Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E BBIA0526E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. F G ● H I J K SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE L Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-657, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision: March 2005 EC-973 M 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1213E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection ● >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB1678E Revision: March 2005 EC-974 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. A EC C Vacuum should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. E 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. F G 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. K 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision: March 2005 EC-975 2005 Altima DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-660, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-663, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-976 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description A UBS00I5T SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed ECM function Actuator C D EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve E F *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. H I COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. J K L SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I5U Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load PURG VOL C/V Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-977 2005 Altima M DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0444 0444 P0445 0445 UBS00I5V Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve UBS00I5W NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-981, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-978 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I5X A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1563E Revision: March 2005 EC-979 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● 45 PU/R Idle speed EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve SEC990C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) SEC991C [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: March 2005 EC-980 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I5Y 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A CUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D E BBIA0507E 4. F Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. H PBIB0148E I 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness connectors F44, F101 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R J K L >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-981 2005 Altima M DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F101, F44 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB1678E 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-982 2005 Altima DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I5Z A EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) EC Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No C D PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition E F Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No G H PBIB0150E Removal and Installation UBS00I60 I EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-983 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 UBS00I61 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis. PBIB1263E BBIA0526E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I62 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0447 0447 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open Revision: March 2005 UBS00I63 DTC detecting condition An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. EC-984 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I64 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-987, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-985 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I65 BBWA1665E Revision: March 2005 EC-986 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 117 EC WIRE COLOR OR A ITEM EVAP canister vent control valve CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C UBS00I66 D 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. E F 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. 2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. 4. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G H I J PBIB1679E K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-987 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. BBIA0526E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0152E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness connectors F55, B105 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-988 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. D E 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE F Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. G 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I67 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M PBIB1033E 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Revision: March 2005 EC-989 J PBIB1679E 2005 Altima DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 8. Perform step 6 again. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. PBIB1033E 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. Revision: March 2005 EC-990 PBIB1034E 2005 Altima DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:22365 A UBS00I68 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. EC C D E BBIA0526E F G H PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I69 J Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic K UBS00I6A NOTE: If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-1127 . DTC No. P0451 0451 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor performance Revision: March 2005 I DTC detecting condition ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP control system pressure sensor EC-991 Possible cause L M ● Harness or connectors ● EVAP control system pressure sensor 2005 Altima DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I6B NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds. NOTE: Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-992, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF194Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I6C 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-992 2005 Altima DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER 1. A Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. EC C D BBIA0526E 2. E Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. F 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR G Refer to EC-993, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. H I 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-996 . J >> INSPECTION END K Component Inspection UBS00I6D EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-993 PBIB1173E 2005 Altima L M DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00I6E The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0526E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I6F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I6G NOTE: If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-1127 . DTC No. P0452 0452 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor low input Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-994 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I6H A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-997, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F G SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-997, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K PBIB1110E L M Revision: March 2005 EC-995 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I6I BBWA1666E Revision: March 2005 EC-996 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. A EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 W EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V D 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E ● Idle speed C [Engine is running] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I6J 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . G H I J BBIA0437E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. M BBIA0526E Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-997 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-998 2005 Altima DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. H I 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END K Component Inspection UBS00I6K EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-999 PBIB1173E 2005 Altima L M DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 UBS00I6L The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0526E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I6M Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I6N NOTE: If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-1127 . DTC No. P0453 0453 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor high input Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-1000 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to vehicle frame 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I6O A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1003, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F G SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 10 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1003, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K PBIB1110E L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1001 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I6P BBWA1666E Revision: March 2005 EC-1002 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. A EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 W EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V D 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E ● Idle speed C [Engine is running] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I6Q 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . G H I J BBIA0437E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. M BBIA0526E Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-1003 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0138E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1004 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. EC Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. C 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. D 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors B105, F55 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. H I 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE J Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. K 11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-1007, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M Revision: March 2005 EC-1005 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 12. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 13. No >> GO TO 15. PBIB1213E 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1006 2005 Altima DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00I6R A Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. EC Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. C EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: ● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. D E PBIB1173E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1007 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00I6S This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. PBIB1026E DTC No. P0455 0455 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system gross leak detected DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. Possible cause ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. Revision: March 2005 EC-1008 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I6T A CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait C at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is D placed on flat level surface. ● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. F G H I J K PBIB0829E 7. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-1010, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442 EC-971, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEC763C Revision: March 2005 EC-1009 2005 Altima L M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-679 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-679 . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 5. Select Service $07 with GST. ● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-1010, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-971 . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-966 . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I6U 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-656, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: March 2005 EC-1010 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORA- EC TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. C NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE D Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. E >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE F Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-657, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. G H 8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP I To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SER MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. J K L BBIA0506E M SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10. Revision: March 2005 EC-1011 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: March 2005 EC-1012 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. A Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. EC Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E BBIA0526E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace. F G ● H I J SEF200U K 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB1678E Revision: March 2005 EC-1013 2005 Altima L M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. PBIB1678E 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Revision: March 2005 EC-1014 2005 Altima DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC 18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE C Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-660, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. D E 19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE F G H Refer to EC-663, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. I 21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1015 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00I6V This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. PBIB1026E DTC No. P0456 0456 Trouble diagnosis name Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check) Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP system does not operate properly. ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-1016 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I6W NOTE: ● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. ● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. ● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. – Fuel filler cap is removed. – Refilled or drained the fuel. – EVAP component parts is/are removed. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. C D E F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1). Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. H I J K L M PBIB0837E 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1019, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: ● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" . ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. Revision: March 2005 EC-1017 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] Overall Function Check UBS00I6X WITH GST Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. ● Do not start engine. ● 1. Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi). Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. BBIA0506E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the pressure pump and a hose. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect GST and select Service $08. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close). Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-1019, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step. Disconnect GST. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual. Revision: March 2005 EC-1018 SEF462UI 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I6Y 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. EC C D SEF915U E 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION F Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. G 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION H Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. I J 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-656, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1019 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0506E SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: March 2005 EC-1020 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. A Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. EC Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) C D E BBIA0526E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. NOTE: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. F G ● H I J SEF200U K 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE L Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-657, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision: March 2005 EC-1021 M 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1213E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection ● >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB1678E Revision: March 2005 EC-1022 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. A EC C Vacuum should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. E 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. F G 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. K 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. M 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision: March 2005 EC-1023 2005 Altima DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM [VQ] 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-660, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-663, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1024 2005 Altima DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00I6Z The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D BBIA0081E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I70 NOTE: If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790 . When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. DTC No. P0460 0460 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit noise DTC detecting condition Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. F G Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor H I J DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I71 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1026, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1025 K 2005 Altima DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I72 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-14, "Fuel System" . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00I73 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1026 2005 Altima DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00I74 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D BBIA0081E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I75 NOTE: If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. DTC No. P0461 0461 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. F G Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor H I J Overall Function Check UBS00I76 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" . TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-II L M NOTE: Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. 6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 K EC-1027 2005 Altima DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [VQ] 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII. Touch ON and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) and stop it. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. If NG, go to EC-1028, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to EC-1028, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I77 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-14, "Fuel System" . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00I78 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1028 2005 Altima DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 A UBS00I79 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. EC C D BBIA0081E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I7A NOTE: If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. DTC No. P0462 0462 P0463 0463 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit low input Fuel level sensor circuit high input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause G ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor UBS00I7B J K L WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1030, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 H I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch ON. 1. 2. 3. 4. F EC-1029 2005 Altima DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I7C 1. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-16, "Tachometer System" . 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00I7D FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1030 2005 Altima DTC P0500 VSS [VQ] DTC P0500 VSS Description PFP:32702 A UBS00I7E NOTE: If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the or “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communiC cation line. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00I7F DTC detecting condition Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) E ● Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted) F ● Wheel sensor ● Combination meter ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● P0500 0500 Vehicle speed sensor The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. D Possible cause DTC Confirmation Procedure G UBS00I7G CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-1032, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,600 - 6,000 rpm (A/T, 6M/T) 1,800 - 6,000 rpm (5M/T) COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 4.4 - 31.8 msec (A/T) 5.3 - 31.8 msec (M/T) Shift lever Except P or N position (A/T) Except Neutral position (M/T) PW/ST SIGNAL OFF 6. SEF196Y If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1032, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS00I7H Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. Revision: March 2005 EC-1031 2005 Altima K L M DTC P0500 VSS [VQ] WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-1032, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I7I 1. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models with TCS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. (models without TCS) or BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" 2. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1032 2005 Altima DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [VQ] DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 A UBS00I7J NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. EC The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0506 0506 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected UBS00I7K DTC detecting condition The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure E Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak F UBS00I7L NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-1348, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). G H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1034, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1033 2005 Altima DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I7M 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1034 2005 Altima DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [VQ] DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 A UBS00I7N NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. EC The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0507 0507 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected UBS00I7O DTC detecting condition The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more. E Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak ● PCV system F G DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I7P NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-1348, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). H I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. K Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1036, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1035 2005 Altima DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I7Q 1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 3. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1036 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Component Description PFP:49763 A UBS00I7R Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. EC C D BBIA0241E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I7S Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine F SPECIFICATION Steering wheel: Not being turned (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel: Being turned ON G On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I7T The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-1127 . DTC No. P0550 0550 Trouble diagnosis name Power steering pressure sensor circuit DTC detecting condition An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure H I Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Power steering pressure sensor J UBS00I7U K NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1039, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1037 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I7V BBWA1586E Revision: March 2005 EC-1038 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 12 W A Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel: Bbeing turned [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel: Not being turned DATA (DC Voltage) C 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V D [Engine is running] 67 68 B R Sensor ground Sensor power supply (PSP sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V E Approximately 5V F Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I7W 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . H I J K BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1039 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0241E 3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SEF479Y 3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK PSP SENSOR Refer to EC-1041, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace PSP sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-1040 2005 Altima DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR [VQ] 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I7X POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. C Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and let it idle. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the following conditions. Condition D Voltage Steering wheel: Being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V Steering wheel: Not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V E F MBIB0126E G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1041 2005 Altima DTC P0605 ECM [VQ] DTC P0605 ECM Component Description PFP:23710 UBS00I7Y The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I7Z This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. DTC No. P0605 0605 Trouble diagnosis name Engine control module DTC detecting condition A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. Possible cause ● ECM FAIL-SAFE MODE ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected. Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. ● ECM deactivates ASCD operation. Malfunction A DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I80 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1043, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1042 2005 Altima DTC P0605 ECM [VQ] PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1043, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC C D SEF058Y E With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. F PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1043, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. K Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I81 1. INSPECTION START L With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1042 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. M With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select Service $04 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1042 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-1043 2005 Altima DTC P0605 ECM [VQ] 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1044 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description PFP:22693 A UBS00I82 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air ECM function Actuator Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control EC Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater C The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode D UBS00I83 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% F On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1031 1031 (Bank 1) P1051 1051 (Bank 2) P1032 1032 (Bank 1) P1052 1052 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name E SPECIFICATION UBS00I84 DTC detecting condition Possible cause G Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit low Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit high The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater I UBS00I85 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. With CONSULT-II WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1050, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y Revision: March 2005 EC-1045 H 2005 Altima J K L M DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1046 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I86 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1274E Revision: March 2005 EC-1047 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 2 W A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: March 2005 EC-1048 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1564E Revision: March 2005 EC-1049 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 24 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I87 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1050 2005 Altima DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0235E 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. Revision: March 2005 EC-1051 2005 Altima M DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER [VQ] 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Component Inspection UBS00I88 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. PBIB1684E Removal and Installation UBS00I89 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1052 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [VQ] DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description PFP:23710 A UBS00I8A Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning value memory, etc. EC C D PBIB1164E E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1065 1065 Trouble diagnosis name ECM power supply circuit UBS00I8B DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.] ● ECM ECM back-up RAM system does not function properly. DTC Confirmation Procedure G UBS00I8C NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F H I Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1055, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF058Y M WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1053 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I8D BBWA1667E Revision: March 2005 EC-1054 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 121 EC WIRE COLOR W/L A ITEM Power supply for ECM (Back-up) CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C UBS00I8E 1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY D 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G MBIB0026E H 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E124 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M Revision: March 2005 EC-1055 2005 Altima DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY [VQ] 4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1053 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select Service $04 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-1053 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1056 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description PFP:23796 A UBS00I8F Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. EC C D PBIB1842E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I8G Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50% G H On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1111 1111 (Bank 1) P1136 1136 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit F SPECIFICATION UBS00I8H DTC detecting condition An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Possible cause I ● Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve J K DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I8I NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1061, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SEF058Y WITH GST Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1057 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I8J BANK 1 BBWA1565E Revision: March 2005 EC-1058 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D 7 - 12V 11 R/L Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1) E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. F PBIB1790E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1059 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1566E Revision: March 2005 EC-1060 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D 7 - 12V 10 Y Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2) E [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. F PBIB1790E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure G UBS00I8K 1. INSPECTION START H Which malfunction (P1111 or P1136) is duplicated? P1111 or P1136 P1111 >> Go to EC-1062, "PROCEDURE FOR P1111" . P1136 >> Go to EC-1063, "PROCEDURE FOR P1136" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1061 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] PROCEDURE FOR P1111 1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BBIA0065E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0192E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness connectors F44, F101 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-1062 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F101, F44 ● Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-1064, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. D E 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END G PROCEDURE FOR P1136 1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. I J K BBIA0065E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0192E Revision: March 2005 EC-1063 L 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 10 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-1064, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I8L INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as follows. Terminal Resistance 1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] 1 or 2 and ground ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist.) If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Revision: March 2005 EC-1064 PBIB0193E 2005 Altima DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. A EC C PBIB2275E D Removal and Installation UBS00I8M INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1065 2005 Altima DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [VQ] DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00I8N Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I8O This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1121 1121 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control actuator DTC detecting condition A) Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction. B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range. C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open. Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Malfunction A ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I8P NOTE: ● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds. 4. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T). 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 7. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds. 8. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T). 9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. 10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1067, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1066 SEF058Y 2005 Altima DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR [VQ] With GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EC Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds. Shift selector lever to P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/ T). Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1067, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF058Y F With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I8Q 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. G H I J K BBIA0242E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. L Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . M >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1067 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [VQ] DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description PFP:16119 UBS00I8R NOTE: If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or P1126. Refer to EC-1066 or EC-1074 . Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I8S This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1122 1122 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control performance problem DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) ● Electric throttle control actuator Electric throttle control function does not operate properly. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I8T TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1070, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1068 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I8U A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1567E Revision: March 2005 EC-1069 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Released PBIB1104E 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 Y Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed PBIB1105E 104 OR [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I8V 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1070 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [VQ] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. A Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 3. EC C D MBIB0028E 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II E 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. H I 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I L 1. 2. M Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB1171E Revision: March 2005 EC-1071 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [VQ] 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK FUSE 1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist BBIA0233E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: March 2005 EC-1072 2005 Altima DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION [VQ] 11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D BBIA0242E E 12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-1073, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 14. F G 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I 14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. J Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I8W L THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. M Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E Remove and Installation UBS00I8X ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1073 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [VQ] DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00I8Y Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I8Z Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I90 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1124 1124 P1126 1126 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor relay circuit short Throttle control motor relay circuit open DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted) ● Throttle control motor relay ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open) ● Throttle control motor relay ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON. ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I91 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1077, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y Revision: March 2005 EC-1074 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [VQ] With GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. EC Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1077, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF058Y F With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1075 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I92 BBWA1568E Revision: March 2005 EC-1076 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 104 EC WIRE COLOR R OR ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay Diagnostic Procedure C D UBS00I93 1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. H I PBIB1171E 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II J 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. L 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1077 2005 Altima DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY [VQ] 4. CHECK FUSE 1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. MBIB0028E 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1078 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [VQ] DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00I94 The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I95 C This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1128 1128 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor. Possible cause D ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor) E FAIL-SAFE MODE F When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I96 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. G H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1081, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1079 2005 Altima M DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I97 BBWA1569E Revision: March 2005 EC-1080 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 BR Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Released D E PBIB1104E 0 - 14V F [Ignition switch: ON] 5 Y Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed G PBIB1105E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I98 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS I 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . K L M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1081 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [VQ] 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist BBIA0233E 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-1082, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I99 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB0095E Revision: March 2005 EC-1082 2005 Altima DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR [VQ] Removal and Installation UBS00I9A A ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1083 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00I9B The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I9C Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I9D The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB2376E DTC No. P1146 1146 (Bank 1) P1166 1166 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-1084 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I9E NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J K PBIB2372E NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1090, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00I9F Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-1085 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-1090, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1086 PBIB1607E 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I9G A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1276E Revision: March 2005 EC-1087 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-1088 Approximately 0V 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1556E Revision: March 2005 EC-1089 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00I9H 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1090 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-879 . No >> GO TO 3. F 1. 2. 3. G H I BBIA0035E J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1091 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. BBIA0467E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1092 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1146 74 2 1 P1166 55 2 2 C Continuity should exist. 2. D Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1146 74 2 1 P1166 55 2 2 F Continuity should not exist. G 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I Refer to EC-1093, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. J 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I9I HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. SEF174Y Revision: March 2005 EC-1093 2005 Altima M DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1672E 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB2163E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision: March 2005 EC-1094 2005 Altima DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 [VQ] Removal and Installation UBS00I9J A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1095 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00I9K The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00I9L Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I9M The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB2162E DTC No. P1147 1147 (Bank 1) P1167 1167 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring Revision: March 2005 DTC detecting condition The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-1096 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00I9N NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J K PBIB2373E NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1102, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00I9O Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: March 2005 EC-1097 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-1102, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1098 PBIB1607E 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00I9P A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1276E Revision: March 2005 EC-1099 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-1100 Approximately 0V 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1556E Revision: March 2005 EC-1101 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00I9Q 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1102 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-868 . No >> GO TO 3. F 1. 2. 3. G H I BBIA0035E J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1103 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. BBIA0467E 4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1104 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1147 74 2 1 P1167 55 2 2 C Continuity should exist. 2. D Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1147 74 2 1 P1167 55 2 2 F Continuity should not exist. G 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 I Refer to EC-1105, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. J 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00I9R HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. SEF174Y Revision: March 2005 EC-1105 2005 Altima M DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1672E 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB2163E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Revision: March 2005 EC-1106 2005 Altima DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 [VQ] Removal and Installation UBS00I9S A HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1107 2005 Altima DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL [VQ] DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:22690 UBS00I9T These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 (Bank 1) P1168 1168 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Closed loop control function DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. The closed loop control function for bank 2 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.] ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. Revision: March 2005 EC-1108 2005 Altima DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT [VQ] DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT Description PFP:47850 A UBS00I9U The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM. EC Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I9V C Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this selfdiagnosis. D DTC No. P1211 1211 Trouble diagnosis name TCS control unit DTC detecting condition ECM receives a malfunction information from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● TCS related parts UBS00I9W TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. E F G Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1109, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I J SEF058Y K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00I9X L Go to BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . M Revision: March 2005 EC-1109 2005 Altima DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE [VQ] DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:47850 UBS00I9Y NOTE: If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00I9Z Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this selfdiagnosis. DTC No. P1212 1212 Trouble diagnosis name TCS communication line DTC detecting condition ECM can not receive the information from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” continuously. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Dead (Weak) battery UBS00IA0 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1110, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IA1 Go to BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1110 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Description PFP:00000 A UBS00IA2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTE: EC If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Cooling Fan Control Sensor C Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Battery Battery voltage*1 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Actuator D Cooling fan control IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) E F *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. G The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF]. The ECM control cooling fan relays through CAN communication line. H Cooling Fan Operation I J K L M PBIB2375E Revision: March 2005 EC-1111 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] Cooling Fan Relay Operation The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. Cooling fan relay Cooling fan speed 1 2 3 Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF Low (LOW) OFF ON OFF Middle (MID) OFF OFF ON High (HI) ON OFF ON COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Motor The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows. Cooling fan motor terminals Cooling fan speed Middle (MID) High (HI) (+) (−) 1 3 and 4 2 3 and 4 1 and 2 3 1 and 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IA3 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Air conditioner switch: OFF COOLING FAN Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature is between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature is between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F) MID Engine coolant temperature is 105°C (221°F) or more HI EC-1112 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IA4 A If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is EC indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● ● P1217 1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat) Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). Possible cause C ● Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) ● Cooling fan ● IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) ● Radiator hose Radiator ● Engine coolant level was not added to the system using the proper filling method. ● ● Radiator cap ● Engine coolant is not within the specified range. ● Water pump ● Thermostat D E F For more information, refer to EC-1122, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" . 1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO" . 2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. Overall Function Check G H I UBS00IA5 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. J K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Turn ignition switch ON. M SEF621W Revision: March 2005 EC-1113 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] 4. 5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. If the results are NG, go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF646X WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" If NG, go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1114 SEF621W 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IA6 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1668E Revision: March 2005 EC-1115 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] BBWA1571E Revision: March 2005 EC-1116 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IA7 1. INSPECTION START A Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. EC C 2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION With CONSULT-II Start engine and let it idle. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1119, "PROCEDURE A" .) D 1. 2. E F G SEF784Z 3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION H Without CONSULT-II 1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1119, "PROCEDURE A" .) I J K 4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK L Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-28, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . ● Hose ● Radiator ● Water pump Revision: March 2005 EC-1117 M SLC754A 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] 5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP Apply pressure to cap with a tester. Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace radiator cap. SLC755A 6. CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. 2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. Valve opening temperature: Valve lift: 82°C (180°F) [standard] More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F) 3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace thermostat SLC343 7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-830, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-1122, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1118 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] PROCEDURE A A 1. CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E123. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 15 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC C Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. D E PBIB1681E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the following. ● 40A fusible link ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery G H >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121, E124. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 16, 38, 60 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1119 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] 4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. BBIA0066E 2. Check voltage between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 1, 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1670E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● 40A fusible link ● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 8 Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 12 Refer to Wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1120 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] 7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0066E 2. E Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminals 3, 4 and ground. Refer to Wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. F 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. G 8. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. H Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 13 Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminals 10, 14 Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. J 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K 9. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS L Refer to EC-1122, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. M 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-1121 2005 Altima DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE [VQ] Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step OFF 1 Inspection item ● Blocked radiator ● Blocked condenser ● Blocked radiator grille ● Blocked bumper 2 ● 3 ● 4 ● UBS00IA8 Equipment Standard Reference page ● Visual No blocking — Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-14 Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck CO-28 Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-28 (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-28 ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot CO-42 ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-1111 ). OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature gauge ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — ● Coolant overflow to reservoir tank ● Visual No overflow during driving and idling CO-28 OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator ● Visual Should be initial level in reservoir tank CO-28 OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) EM-200 12 ● Cylinder block and pistons ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston EM-224 *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-24, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" . Component Inspection UBS00IA9 COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 1. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. Cooling fan speed Middle (MID) High (HI) Cooling fan motor terminals (+) (−) 1 3 and 4 2 3 and 4 1 and 2 3 1 and 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 SEF734W Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. Revision: March 2005 EC-1122 2005 Altima DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00IAA Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IAB The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F DTC No. P1225 1225 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance problem Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) G UBS00IAC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H I J Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1124, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1123 2005 Altima DTC P1225 TP SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IAD 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0242E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00IAE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1124 2005 Altima DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00IAF Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IAG The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F DTC No. P1226 1226 Trouble diagnosis name Closed throttle position learning performance problem DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) G UBS00IAH NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. H I J Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1126, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1125 2005 Altima DTC P1226 TP SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IAI 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0242E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00IAJ ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1126 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [VQ] DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16119 A UBS00IAK This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. EC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P1229 1229 Sensor power supply circuit short ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high. ● Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.) (EVAP control system pressure sensor is shorted.) (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1) C D E ● Power steering pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refrigerant pressure sensor F FAIL-SAFE MODE G When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IAL NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. H I J K Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1127 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IAM BBWA1303E Revision: March 2005 EC-1128 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 48 R Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 R Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 68 R Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 90 R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V C D E Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IAN 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . F G H I J BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1129 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [VQ] 2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0811E 3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal 90 Sensor terminal APP sensor terminal 2 Reference Wiring Diagram EC-1128 48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-996 49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-1328 68 PSP sensor terminal 3 EC-1038 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK COMPONENTS Check the following. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-993, "Component Inspection" .) ● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-66, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .) ● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-1041, "Component Inspection" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning component. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-1263, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-1130 2005 Altima DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY [VQ] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. A Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E >> INSPECTION END F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1131 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00IAO The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IAP Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IAQ To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low. DTC No. P1271 1271 (Bank 1) P1281 1281 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IAR NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-1132 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 3. 4. 5. 6. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-1137, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. A EC C SEF581Z D ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Shift lever Suitable position 7. E NOTE: ● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. ● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-1137, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F G WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1133 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IAS BANK 1 BBWA1267E Revision: March 2005 EC-1134 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] W/R LG/R 75 LG DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR 56 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1135 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1572E Revision: March 2005 EC-1136 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] PU BR 77 G/W DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V OR/B 76 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IAT 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1137 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BBIA0235E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1138 2005 Altima DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00IAU AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1139 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00IAV The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IAW Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IAX To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high. DTC No. P1272 1272 (Bank 1) P1282 1282 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IAY NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-1140 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 3. 4. 5. 6. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-1145, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. A EC C SEF581Z D ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Shift lever Suitable position 7. E NOTE: ● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. ● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-1145, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F G WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1141 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IAZ BANK 1 BBWA1267E Revision: March 2005 EC-1142 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] W/R LG/R 75 LG DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR 56 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1143 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1572E Revision: March 2005 EC-1144 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] PU BR 77 G/W DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V OR/B 76 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IB0 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1145 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BBIA0235E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1146 2005 Altima DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00IB1 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1147 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00IB2 The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IB3 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IB4 To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted LEAN side or RICH side. DTC No. P1273 1273 (Bank 1) P1283 1283 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 lean shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a specified period. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks UBS00IB5 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-1148 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1153, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF968Y D WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected. 7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. 11. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1153, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E F G H BBIA0035E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1149 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IB6 BANK 1 BBWA1267E Revision: March 2005 EC-1150 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] W/R LG/R 75 LG DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR 56 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1151 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1572E Revision: March 2005 EC-1152 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] PU BR 77 G/W DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V OR/B 76 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IB7 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 K Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. L M BBIA0234E Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-1153 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-868 . No >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-1154 BBIA0035E 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0235E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. H PBIB1683E I 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse J K L >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M Revision: March 2005 EC-1155 2005 Altima DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00IB8 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1156 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00IB9 The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IBA I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IBB K To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to the LEAN side or RICH side. DTC No. P1274 1274 (Bank 1) P1284 1244 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 rich shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a specified period. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector UBS00IBC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 EC-1157 2005 Altima M DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1162, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF968Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected. 7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. 11. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1162, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1158 BBIA0035E 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IBD A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1267E Revision: March 2005 EC-1159 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR [Engine is running] W/R 56 LG/R 75 LG DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V EC-1160 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1572E Revision: March 2005 EC-1161 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 2.6V OR/B [Engine is running] PU 76 BR 77 G/W DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IBE 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. BBIA0234E Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-1162 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF968Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172 or P0175. Refer to EC-879 . No >> GO TO 4. G H I J BBIA0035E K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1163 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0235E 3. Check harness connector for water. Water should not exit. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. 5. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB1683E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1164 2005 Altima DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER M Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00IBF AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1165 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00IBG The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IBH Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IBI To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control. DTC No. P1276 1276 (Bank 1) P1286 1286 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition ● Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/ F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IBJ CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. Revision: March 2005 EC-1166 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. 5. 6. If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-1172, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. EC Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. C ENG SPEED 1,750 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec Shift lever D position (A/T) 5th position (M/T) D E If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. SEF576Z F 7. Release accelerator pedal fully. NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. G H I SEF577Z 8. 9. J Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1172, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L SEF578Z Overall Function Check UBS00IBK Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position. Set D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for 5 times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for 5 times. Revision: March 2005 EC-1167 2005 Altima M DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 8. 9. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1172, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1168 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IBL A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1267E Revision: March 2005 EC-1169 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V OR [Engine is running] W/R 56 LG/R 75 LG DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) Revision: March 2005 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V EC-1170 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1572E Revision: March 2005 EC-1171 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 2.6V OR/B [Engine is running] PU 76 BR 77 G/W DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IBM 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1172 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0235E 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1173 2005 Altima DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00IBN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1174 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00IBO The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IBP I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION J Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IBQ To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P1278 1278 (Bank 1) P1288 1288 (Bank 2) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response Revision: March 2005 ● The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. EC-1175 K L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor 2005 Altima M DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IBR NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. PBIB0756E 7. a. b. 8. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. PBIB1925E 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1181, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0758E Revision: March 2005 EC-1176 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “Service $01” with GST. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. EC Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following. C ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure D ● Lack of fuel ● Fuel injector ● Incorrect PCV hose connection E ● PCV valve ● Mass air flow sensor Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. G Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. Select “Service $07” with GST. H If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1181, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1177 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IBS BANK 1 BBWA1267E Revision: March 2005 EC-1178 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] W/R LG/R 75 LG DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR 56 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1179 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1572E Revision: March 2005 EC-1180 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] PU BR 77 G/W DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V OR/B 76 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IBT 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 K Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. L M BBIA0234E Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-1181 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: March 2005 EC-1182 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF968Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. BBIA0035E Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-868, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-879, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 6. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1183 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0235E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1683E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1184 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER M Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-812, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-1185 2005 Altima DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 11. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-665, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00IBU AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1186 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00IBV The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IBW I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IBX To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ration A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P1279 1279 (Bank 1) P1289 1289 (Bank 2) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response Revision: March 2005 ● The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. EC-1187 K L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor 2005 Altima M DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IBY NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. PBIB0756E 7. a. b. 8. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. PBIB1925E 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1193, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0758E Revision: March 2005 EC-1188 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “Service $01” with GST. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. EC Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following. C ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure D ● Lack of fuel ● Fuel injector ● Incorrect PCV hose connection E ● PCV valve ● Mass air flow sensor Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. G Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. Select “Service $07” with GST. H If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1193, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1189 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IBZ BANK 1 BBWA1267E Revision: March 2005 EC-1190 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] W/R LG/R 75 LG DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V OR 56 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1191 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] BANK 2 BBWA1572E Revision: March 2005 EC-1192 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] PU BR 77 G/W DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V OR/B 76 A A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IC0 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 K Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. L M BBIA0234E Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 EC-1193 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: March 2005 EC-1194 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF968Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. BBIA0035E Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-868, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-879, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 6. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1195 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0235E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1683E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1196 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER M Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-820, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. Revision: March 2005 EC-1197 2005 Altima DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 [VQ] 11. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-665, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00IC1 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" Revision: March 2005 EC-1198 2005 Altima DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION Description PFP:14710 A UBS00IC2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position voltage*2 Battery Battery Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner operation Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Electrical load*1 ECM function Actuator EC C D EGR volume control EGR volume control valve E F Electrical load signal Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed TCM*1 (A/T models) Gear position, shifting signal G *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions. ● Engine stopped ● Engine starting ● Engine idling ● Low engine coolant temperature ● Excessively high engine coolant temperature ● High engine speed ● Wide open throttle ● Low battery voltage I J K L M SEF551W Revision: March 2005 EC-1199 2005 Altima DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] COMPONENT DESCRIPTION EGR Volume Control Valve The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. SEF552W EGR Temperature Sensor The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. SEF599K EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. When EGR system is operating. Voltage: 0 - 1.5V SEF068X Revision: March 2005 EC-1200 2005 Altima DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IC3 A Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EGR TEMP SEN EGR VOL CON/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● No load SPECIFICATION Less than 4.5V Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step EC C D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IC4 If the EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition that does not call for EGR, a high-flow malfunction is diagnosed. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P1402 1402 EGR function (Open) EGR flow is detected under the condition that does not call for EGR. DTC Confirmation Procedure Harness or connectors (The EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EGR volume control valve leaking or stuck open ● EGR temperature sensor : −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)* : Less than 4.8V WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. Revision: March 2005 G EC-1201 H I J K L If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine coolant temperature or EGR temperature with a fan or means other than SEF202Y ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. *: Although CONSULT-II screen displays “–10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temperature, ignore it. 1. 2. 3. F UBS00IC5 NOTE: ● Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F). Therefore, it will be better to turn ignition switch ON (start engine) at the engine coolant temperature below 30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation procedure. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). ● Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must be verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of range below, the test cannot be conducted. COOLAN TEMP/S EGR TEMP SEN E Possible cause 2005 Altima M DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] 4. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take 60 seconds or more.) PBIB1600E 5. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition OFF and cool the engine coolant temperature to the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Retry from step 1. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC1204, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Turn ignition switch ON and select Service $01 with GST. Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Check that voltage between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. Stop engine. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1204, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1671E Revision: March 2005 EC-1202 2005 Altima DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IC6 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1561E Revision: March 2005 EC-1203 2005 Altima DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 17 18 19 20 WIRE COLOR P/B LG L L/W ITEM EGR volume control valve CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] 54 P/L EGR temperature sensor DATA (DC Voltage) 0.1 - 14V Less than 4.5V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● EGR system is operating 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00IC7 1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0249E 4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0627E Revision: March 2005 EC-1204 2005 Altima DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION [VQ] 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R EC C >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal EGR volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 D E F G H Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I 4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE J Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. K L 5. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-957, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EGR temperature sensor. M 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1205 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description UBS00IC8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank 2 ECM function Actuator EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve Vehicle speed Wheel sensor* *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. SEF337U CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IC9 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load PURG VOL C/V Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION Idle 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-1206 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ICA A DTC No. P1444 1444 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve DTC detecting condition The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) EC C D UBS00ICB NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. E F WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. G H I J K L PBIB0839E 6. 7. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC1210, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1210, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1207 2005 Altima M DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00ICC BBWA1563E Revision: March 2005 EC-1208 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D [Engine is running] ● Idle speed E 45 PU/R EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve SEC990C BATTERY VOLTAGE F (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● G Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). H SEC991C [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] I 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J K : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1209 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ICD 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0507E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0148E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness connectors F44, F101 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-1210 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors F101, F44 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. D E F G BBIA0526E 2. Check connectors for water. H Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. I 6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. K L 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. M PBIB1678E Revision: March 2005 EC-1211 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-1213, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 11. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 12. No >> GO TO 14. PBIB1213E 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. Revision: March 2005 EC-1212 2005 Altima DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ICE EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II C Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) D Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No E F PBIB0149E G Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. H Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No I J PBIB0150E Removal and Installation UBS00ICF EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE K Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1213 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 UBS00ICG The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis. PBIB1263E BBIA0526E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ICH Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1446 1446 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve close Revision: March 2005 UBS00ICI DTC detecting condition EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. EC-1214 Possible cause ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister is saturated with water 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ICJ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. 6. 7. a. b. A Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. Repeat next procedures 3 times. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1217, "Diagnostic ProceSEF058Y dure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. Repeat next procedure 20 times. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. C D E F G H I J K PBIB0972E 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1217, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. M Revision: March 2005 EC-1215 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00ICK BBWA1665E Revision: March 2005 EC-1216 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 117 EC WIRE COLOR OR A ITEM EVAP canister vent control valve CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C UBS00ICL 1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE D 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. F G H BBIA0526E 3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. I J 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-1218, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. K L 3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 6. PBIB1213E Revision: March 2005 EC-1217 2005 Altima M DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ICM EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1033E Revision: March 2005 EC-1218 2005 Altima DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE [VQ] 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V A Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes EC C Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 5 again. PBIB1679E D Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. E Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. F G H PBIB1033E I 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition J Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes K Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. L If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. Revision: March 2005 EC-1219 PBIB1034E 2005 Altima M DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [VQ] DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description PFP:25551 UBS00ICN ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. PBIB2533E Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ICO Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION MAIN SW ● CANCEL SW ● RESUME/ACC SW SET SW ● ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION MAIN switch: Pressed ON MAIN switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ICP This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-1042. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition ● P1564 1564 ASCD steering switch ● ● Revision: March 2005 Possible Cause An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range. Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● ASCD steering switch ● ECM ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON. EC-1220 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ICQ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1223, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST C D E F Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1221 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00ICR BBWA1660E Revision: March 2005 EC-1222 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 G/Y ASCD steering switch MAIN switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● SET/COAST switch: Pressed Diagnostic Procedure C Approximately 0V D Approximately 4V Approximately 0V E Approximately 1V F Approximately 3V G Approximately 2V UBS00ICS 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . H I J K L BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1223 2005 Altima M DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [VQ] 2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. 1. 2. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch Monitor item MAIN SW CANCEL SW RESUME/ACC SW Condition Indication Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF SEC006D SET/COAST switch 1. 2. SET SW Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch Condition Voltage [V] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 1 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 3 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 2 Released Approx. 4 PBIB0311E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 19 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. BBIA0243E Revision: March 2005 EC-1224 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [VQ] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. D Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 20. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. F 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch H I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH J Refer to EC-1226, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace steering wheel. K L 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1225 2005 Altima DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00ICT ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable). Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch Revision: March 2005 Condition Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 250 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 1,480 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 660 Released Approx. 4,000 EC-1226 PBIB2331E 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 A UBS00ICU When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. EC C D BBIA0087E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ICV Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW2 (Stop lamp switch) CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON F SPECIFICATION Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ON Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON G H On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ICW This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-1042 ● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. 1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition ● A) P1572 1572 When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to ECM at the same time. ASCD brake switch ● B) Revision: March 2005 ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving EC-1227 I J K L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.) (M/T models) ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD brake switch ● ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation (M/T models) ● ECM 2005 Altima M DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ICX CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be detected. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine (TCS switch OFF). Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights up. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1231, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Depress the brake pedal for more than five seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned vehicle speed. 6. PBIB2386E If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1231, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1228 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00ICY A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1587E Revision: March 2005 EC-1229 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/G Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 108 G/B (A/T) G/R (M/T) ASCD brake switch Revision: March 2005 ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed (M/T) Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released (M/T) EC-1230 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ICZ 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. A/T models CONDITION EC C INDICATION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON D M/T models E CONDITION INDICATION Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. A/T models CONDITION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Brake pedal: Fully released F G H VOLTAGE I Approximately 0V Battery voltage M/T models J CONDITION VOLTAGE MBIB0061E Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V K Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models)>>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models)>>GO TO 8. L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1231 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB1677E 3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0087E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Clutch pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 PBIB0857E EC-1232 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0088E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. G H PBIB0799E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-1236, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. Revision: March 2005 EC-1233 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0087E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. PBIB0857E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1234 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A Refer to EC-1236, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. EC 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. D E F BBIA0049E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. G H Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. I J PBIB0117E K 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery L M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. Revision: March 2005 EC-1235 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E28, M7 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-1236, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ID0 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Clutch pedal: Fully released Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, "CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC024D Revision: March 2005 EC-1236 2005 Altima DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed EC Continuity Should not exist. C Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. D PBIB0118E E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1237 2005 Altima DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [VQ] DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description PFP:31036 UBS00ID1 The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ID2 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-1031, "DTC P0500 VSS" ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-1042, "DTC P0605 ECM" DTC No. P1574 1574 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD vehicle speed sensor DTC Detecting Condition ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● Combination meter ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Wheel sensor ● TCM (A/T models) ● ECM UBS00ID3 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). If DTC is detected, go to EC-1239, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1238 2005 Altima DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ID4 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-425, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. EC C 2. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models with TCS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. (models without TCS) or BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" D E 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION F Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1239 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Component Description PFP:32006 UBS00ID5 When the shift position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ID6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON Shift lever: Except above OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1706 1706 Trouble diagnosis name Park/neutral position switch UBS00ID7 DTC detecting condition The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.] ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch ● Combination meter (A/T models) ● TCM (A/T models) UBS00ID8 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal P or N position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T) ON Except the above position OFF 3. 4. 5. If NG, go to EC-1245, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6375 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 31.8 msec VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Shift lever Suitable position 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1245, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1240 SEF212Y SEF213Y 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] Overall Function Check UBS00ID9 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Condition (Shift lever) Except the above position 3. EC Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. P or N position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T) A C Voltage (Known good data) Approx. 0V D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E If NG, go to EC-1245, "Diagnostic Procedure" . MBIB0043E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1241 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IDA A/T MODELS BBWA1589E Revision: March 2005 EC-1242 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/R A PNP switch Shift lever: P or N [Ignition switch: ON] ● Shift lever: Except above DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1243 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] M/T MODELS BBWA1588E Revision: March 2005 EC-1244 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 G/W A PNP switch Shift lever: Neutral [Ignition switch: ON] ● Shift lever: Except above DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure D UBS00IDB A/T MODELS E 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM Refer to AT-425, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F G 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 33 and combination meter terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. J 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. K 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between TCM and combination meter M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: March 2005 EC-1245 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace. 7. REPLACE COMBINATION METER Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . >> INSPECTION END M/T MODELS 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3 NG >> GO TO 2. 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connector F58, M70 ● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground ● >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1246 2005 Altima DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH [VQ] 4. CHECK PNP SWITCH A Refer to MT-77, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace PNP switch. EC 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1247 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description PFP:14955 UBS00IDC The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve actuator. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator. BBIA0045E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IDD Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION 1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON Except above conditions OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IDE The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. P1800 1800 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition VIAS control solenoid valve circuit An excessively low or high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● VIAS control solenoid valve UBS00IDF NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1250, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1248 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IDG A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1573E Revision: March 2005 EC-1249 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 29 Y/G VIAS control solenoid valve Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm. 0 - 1.0V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IDH 1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0045E 4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0173E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R connector E122 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1250 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] 3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E Refer to EC-1251, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. F 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IDI VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS SOL VALVE Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes I J K L M Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2505E With GST Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2532E Revision: March 2005 EC-1251 2005 Altima DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE [VQ] Removal and Installation UBS00IDJ VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-129, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1252 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description PFP:25320 A UBS00IDK Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IDL Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW C CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IDM E The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1805 1805 Trouble diagnosis name Brake switch DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. F G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Vehicle condition Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration DTC Confirmation Procedure I J UBS00IDN WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Turn ignition switch ON. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1255, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1253 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IDO BBWA1574E Revision: March 2005 EC-1254 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/G A Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D UBS00IDP 1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Brake pedal Stop lamp Fully released Not illuminated Slightly depressed Illuminated G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. H 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. I Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. J K L BBIA0049E 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0117E Revision: March 2005 EC-1255 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E28, M7 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-1257, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1256 2005 Altima DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00IDQ A STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0049E 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Conditions Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed 3. E Continuity F Should not exist. Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again. G PBIB0118E H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1257 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00IDR The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IDS Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IDT These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-1127 . DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2122 2122 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input Possible cause An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) P2123 2123 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: March 2005 EC-1258 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IDU A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1261, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1259 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IDV BBWA1284E Revision: March 2005 EC-1260 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 82 B Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 0V D [Engine is running] 83 G A Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E 90 R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 OR Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V G [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 2.0V H [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V I More than 4.3V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IDW 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . K L M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1261 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0811E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1262 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [VQ] 6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. C 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK APP SENSOR G Refer to EC-1263, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. H 9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. I Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J K >> INSPECTION END 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IDX ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) Revision: March 2005 MBIB0023E EC-1263 2005 Altima DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR [VQ] 4. 5. 6. 7. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation UBS00IDY ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1264 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 A UBS00IDZ The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM E receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IE0 F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF G H I *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IE1 J These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2127 2127 P2128 2128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● K Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) ● ELectric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: March 2005 EC-1265 2005 Altima L M DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IE2 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1268, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1266 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IE3 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1302E Revision: March 2005 EC-1267 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR ITEM R Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) B Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 82 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 83 G Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 OR Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 2.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 4.3V UBS00IE4 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1268 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0812E H 3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to wiring diagram. J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-1267 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-1274 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1269 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [VQ] 6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-905, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 83. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1270 2005 Altima DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR [VQ] 12. CHECK APP SENSOR A Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. EC 13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY C 1. 2. 3. 4. D Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . E >> INSPECTION END 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IE5 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR H 1. 2. 3. I Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. J K MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation M UBS00IE6 ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1271 L 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00IE7 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IE8 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IE9 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2135 2135 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance problem DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2. Possible cause ● Harness or connector (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: March 2005 EC-1272 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IEA A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1275, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1273 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IEB BBWA1575E Revision: March 2005 EC-1274 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR R A ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 W ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 D More than 0.36V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V F [Engine is running] 66 B Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Ignition switch: ON] 69 R ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 H Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] 91 OR Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine stopped ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure I More than 0.36V J Approximately 5V UBS00IEC K 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1275 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0233E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-1274 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-1267 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: March 2005 EC-1276 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [VQ] 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. A Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. F 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. E Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR L Refer to EC-1278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. M 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1277 2005 Altima DTC P2135 TP SENSOR [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00IED THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T). Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation PBIB1170E UBS00IEE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1278 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 A UBS00IEF The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM E receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IEG F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF G H I *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00IEH This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-1127 . DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P2138 2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2 ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. EC-1279 K L Harness or connector (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted) FAIL-SAFE MODE Revision: March 2005 J 2005 Altima M DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00IEI NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1282, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: March 2005 EC-1280 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IEJ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1283E Revision: March 2005 EC-1281 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR ITEM R Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) B Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 82 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 83 G Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 OR Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 98 W/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 2.0V [Ignition switch: ON] 106 W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure More than 4.3V UBS00IEK 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1282 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0028E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB0811E H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM J >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L 1. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 5. M PBIB0812E Revision: March 2005 EC-1283 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] 5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 1 EC-1281 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-1274 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-1278, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 9. 9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1284 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] 10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 83, APP sensor terminal 4 EC and ECM terminal 82. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. D E 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. H Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. J K 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM L M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-1286, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. Revision: March 2005 EC-1285 2005 Altima DTC P2138 APP SENSOR [VQ] 15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IEL ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.65 - 0.87V Fully depressed More than 4.3V Fully released 0.28 - 0.48V Fully depressed More than 2.0V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation UBS00IEM ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1286 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description PFP:22448 A UBS00IEN IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. C D E BBIA0244E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1287 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IEO BBWA1576E Revision: March 2005 EC-1288 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) R/G R/G Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 A More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C 0 - 1.5V D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1289 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] BBWA1311E Revision: March 2005 EC-1290 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION C [Engine is running] 60 61 62 DATA (DC Voltage) PU/W L/R Y/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0 - 0.3V D NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 E SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V F [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. G SEC987C H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1291 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] BBWA1312E Revision: March 2005 EC-1292 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION C [Engine is running] 79 80 81 DATA (DC Voltage) GY/R GY G/R ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0 - 0.3V D NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 E SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V F [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. G SEC987C H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IEP I 1. CHECK ENGINE START Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4. J K 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION L With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. M PBIB0133E Revision: March 2005 EC-1293 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] 3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II Let engine idle. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 1. 2. PBIB1186E SEC986C OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. 4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-783, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . MBIB0034E Revision: March 2005 EC-1294 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] 5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0044E E 4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. G H PBIB0624E 6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 7. L 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1295 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] 8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK CONDENSER Refer to EC-1298, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace condenser. 10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BBIA0244E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB0138E 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F43, F201 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32 >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1296 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] 12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. C D 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors F43, F201 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground F >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. G Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. H I 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. J 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the following. Harness connectors F43, F201 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM ● L >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M 16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EC-1298, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor. 17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1297 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] Component Inspection UBS00IEQ IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ 1 and 3 2 and 3 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Except 0 If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. PBIB0847E BBIA0229E Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken. NOTE: When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. ● CONDENSER 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Revision: March 2005 EC-1298 2005 Altima IGNITION SIGNAL [VQ] 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance A : Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)] EC C PBIB0794E D Removal and Installation UBS00IER IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EM-144, "IGNITION COIL" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1299 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] VIAS Description PFP:14956 UBS00IES SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Battery Battery voltage* ECM function VIAS control Actuator VIAS control solenoid valve *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. PBIB1822E When the engine is running at medium speed, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore closes the power valve. Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the total length of passage A and passage B. This long intake manifold provides increased amount of intake air, which results in improved suction efficiency and higher torque. When engine is running at low or high speed, the ECM sends the OFF signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve and the power valve is opened. Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the length of passage B. This shortened intake manifold length results in enhanced engine output due to reduced suction resistance under high speeds. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Power Valve The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve. BBIA0045E Revision: March 2005 EC-1300 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] VIAS Control Solenoid Valve A The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve actuator. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator. EC C BBIA0045E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IET E Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up D SPECIFICATION 1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON Except above conditions OFF F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1301 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IEU BBWA1313E Revision: March 2005 EC-1302 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 29 Y/G A VIAS control solenoid valve Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C 0 - 1.0V D [Engine is running] ● Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IEV 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves. E F G H I J BBIA0252E Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev engine up to 3,600 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2. NG (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3. K 1. 2. L M BBIA0046E Revision: March 2005 EC-1303 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] 2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Start engine and let it idle. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check vacuum existence under the following conditions. BBIA0253E VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum ON Should exist. OFF Should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. 3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE 1. 2. 3. 4. Without CONSULT-II Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Start engine and let it idle. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2. BBIA0254E 5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions. Condition Vacuum 12V direct current supply Should exist. No supply Should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-1304 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] 4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE A 1. 2. Stop engine. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair hoses or tubes. EC C D SEF109L E 5. CHECK VACUUM TANK Refer to EC-1306, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace vacuum tank. F G 6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J K BBIA0045E 4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB0173E Revision: March 2005 EC-1305 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● IPDM E/R connector E122 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-1306, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IEW VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS SOL VALVE Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2505E Revision: March 2005 EC-1306 2005 Altima VIAS [VQ] Without CONSULT-II A Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes EC C Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2532E D VACUUM TANK 1. 2. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum tank. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B. E F G PBIB0846E Removal and Installation H UBS00IEX VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE I Refer to EM-129, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1307 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] INJECTOR CIRCUIT Component Description PFP:16600 UBS00IEY The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. SEF375Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IEZ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM B/FUEL SCHDL INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 CONDITION SPECIFICATION See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . ● Engine: After warming up ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No-load Revision: March 2005 Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec EC-1308 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IF0 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1577E Revision: March 2005 EC-1309 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed (11 - 14V) NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 21 22 23 L/W R/Y R/B Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. SEC985C BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed (11 - 14V) NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 40 41 42 PU/R R/L R/W Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm SEC985C : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IF1 1. INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 7. Revision: March 2005 EC-1310 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1311 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] 3. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I 1. 2. 3. Without CONSULT-II Stop engine. Disconnect harness connector F44, F101. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0472E 4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. PBIB2595E Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. With triple meters Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 1 23 3 3 22 5 7 21 Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 Without triple meters Continuity should exist. 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-1312 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and fuse ● Harness for open or short between harness connector F101 and injector EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 5. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound. E F G H PBIB2596E I With triple meters Cylinder Harness connector F101 terminal (+) (–) 1 6 1 3 6 3 5 6 7 J K Without triple meters Cylinder L Harness connector F101 terminal (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 M Operating sound should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: March 2005 EC-1313 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-III 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected. Start engine. Listen to injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound. Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1986E 7. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect injector harness connector. BBIA0237E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB0582E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness connectors F44, F101 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1314 2005 Altima INJECTOR CIRCUIT [VQ] 9. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. D 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. Harness connectors F101, F44 ● Harness for open or short between injector and ECM ● F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 11. CHECK INJECTOR H Refer to EC-1315, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace injector. I 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END K Component Inspection UBS00IF2 INJECTOR 1. 2. L Disconnect injector harness connector. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. Resistance: 11.5 - 15.5Ω [at 10 - 88°C (50 - 190°F)] M PBIB1727E Removal and Installation UBS00IF3 INJECTOR Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1315 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [VQ] FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Description PFP:17042 UBS00IF4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Battery Battery voltage* ECM Function Actuator Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. Engine running and cranking Operates. When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds. Except as shown above Stops. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the furl tank. BBIA0081E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IF5 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY CONDITION ● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions Revision: March 2005 SPECIFICATION ON OFF EC-1316 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IF6 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1578E Revision: March 2005 EC-1317 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113 B/OR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. Diagnostic Procedure BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00IF7 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers. Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. BBIA0510E 2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1187E Revision: March 2005 EC-1318 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [VQ] 3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC C Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 14. D E PBIB1926E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM G H >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: J K Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. L 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. M PBIB0624E 6. CHECK 15A FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect 15A fuse. 3. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuse. Revision: March 2005 EC-1319 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [VQ] 7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E33, B3 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK CONDENSER Refer to EC-1321, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace condenser. 11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Disconnect harness connectors E33, B3 Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B3 terminal 4, “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. Revision: March 2005 EC-1320 BBIA0391E 2005 Altima FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT [VQ] 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E33, B3 ● Harness for open or short between “fuse level sensor unit and fuse pump” and harness connector B3 ● Harness for open or short between “fuse level sensor unit and fuse pump” and ground EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 13. CHECK FUEL PUMP D Refer to EC-1321, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace fuel pump. E 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Component Inspection G UBS00IF8 H FUEL PUMP 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 1 and 3. I Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] J K SEC918C L CONDENSER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance M : Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)] PBIB0794E Removal and Installation UBS00IF9 FUEL PUMP Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: March 2005 EC-1321 2005 Altima ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT [VQ] ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT System Description Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed PFP:11270 UBS00IFA ECM function Engine mount control Actuator Electronic controlled engine mount *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The control system has 2-step control [Soft/Hard] Vehicle condition Engine mount control Idle (with vehicle stopped) Soft Except above conditions Hard CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IFB Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENGINE MOUNT CONDITION ● Revision: March 2005 Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Idle (with vehicle stopped) IDLE Except above conditions TRVL EC-1322 2005 Altima ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IFC A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1579E Revision: March 2005 EC-1323 2005 Altima ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 44 W Electronic controlled engine mount-1 ● Idle speed (with vehicle stopped) [Engine is running] ● Except above conditions [Engine is running] 63 W/R Electronic controlled engine mount-2 ● Idle speed (with vehicle stopped) [Engine is running] ● Except above conditions Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 3.0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 3.0V UBS00IFD 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and touch “ON/OFF” on the CONSULT-II screen. 3. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount and rear electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5 seconds according to the switching condition of “ENGINE MOUNTING”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. SEC237C 3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Without CONSULT-II 1. Make sure that gear position is P or N. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Change the engine speed from idle to more than 1,000 rpm and then return to idle (with vehicle stopped). 4. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount and rear electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5 seconds when changing engine speed. It is better to hear the operating sound around the left side front wheel house. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 EC-1324 2005 Altima ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT [VQ] 4. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front and rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector. EC C D BBIA0528E 3. Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. G H SEC920C I 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E20, F32 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open and short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND L SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and electronic engine mount terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal Front electronic controlled engine mount terminal Rear electronic controlled engine mount terminal 44 1 1 63 2 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1325 2005 Altima M ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT [VQ] 7. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT Visually check front and rear electronic controlled engine mount. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace front or rear electronic controlled engine mount. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1326 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:92136 A UBS00IFE The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. EC C D WBIA0441E E F G H SEF099XA I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1327 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IFF BBWA1580E Revision: March 2005 EC-1328 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 49 R Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Engine is running] D Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 70 W Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON. (Compressor operates.) Diagnostic Procedure E 1.0 - 4.0V F UBS00IFG 1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. A G Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V I OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. J K PBIB1188E 2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L 1. 2. 3. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0437E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: March 2005 EC-1329 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. WBIA0441E 3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0188E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1330 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR [VQ] 7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. C 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor E F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation H UBS00IFH REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR I Refer to ATC-113, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1331 2005 Altima ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL [VQ] ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description PFP:25350 UBS00IFI The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IFJ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Rear window defogger switch: ON and/or Lighting switch: 2nd position ON Rear window defogger switch and lighting switch: OFF. OFF Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IFK 1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. Select "LOAD SIGNAL" and check indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Rear window defogger switch: ON ON Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0103E 2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II Check "LOAD SIGNAL" indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON Lighting switch: OFF OFF OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0103E 3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM Refer to GW-42, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" . >> INSPECTION END 4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" TEM -" . or LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYS- >> INSPECTION END Revision: March 2005 EC-1332 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 A UBS00IFL When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. EC C D BBIA0087E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IFM Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) BRAKE SW2 (Stop lamp switch) CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released ON Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1333 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IFN BBWA1581E Revision: March 2005 EC-1334 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/G A Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D [Ignition switch: ON] 108 G/B (A/T) G/R (M/T) ASCD brake switch ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed (M/T) Approximately 0V E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) ● Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released (M/T) G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1335 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IFO 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. A/T models CONDITION INDICATION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON M/T models CONDITION INDICATION Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. A/T models CONDITION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Brake pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage M/T models CONDITION VOLTAGE MBIB0061E Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG (M/T models)>>GO TO 3. NG (A/T models)>>GO TO 8. Revision: March 2005 EC-1336 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION EC INDICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON C D SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Fully released E F VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Brake pedal: Slightly depressed G Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13. H I PBIB1677E 3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. K L M BBIA0087E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. CONDITION Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Clutch pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 PBIB0857E EC-1337 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0088E 4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB0799E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-1341, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. Revision: March 2005 EC-1338 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0087E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. G H PBIB0857E 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E21, F34 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: March 2005 EC-1339 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-1341, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0049E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. PBIB0117E 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 16. Revision: March 2005 EC-1340 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] 16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E28, M7 ● Harness connectors M71, F59 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH D Refer to EC-1341, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. E 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00IFP ASCD BRAKE SWITCH H 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Continuity J Should exist. Should not exist. K If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D L ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Clutch pedal: Fully released Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed M Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, "CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC024D Revision: March 2005 EC-1341 2005 Altima ASCD BRAKE SWITCH [VQ] STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. PBIB0118E Revision: March 2005 EC-1342 2005 Altima ASCD INDICATOR [VQ] ASCD INDICATOR Component Description PFP:24814 A UBS00IFQ ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. EC CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. C ● CRUISE indicator is illuminated. ● SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. D SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00IFR E Specification data are reference value. MONITOR ITEM CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time ● MAIN switch: ON ASCD is operating ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD is not operating OFF ON → OFF F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1343 2005 Altima ASCD INDICATOR [VQ] Wiring Diagram UBS00IFS BBWA1582E Revision: March 2005 EC-1344 2005 Altima ASCD INDICATOR [VQ] Diagnostic Procedure UBS00IFT 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. MONITOR ITEM CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time ON → OFF ● MAIN switch: ON ASCD is operating ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD is not operating OFF EC C D OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. E 2. CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION F G H Does combination meter operate normally?. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to DI-7, "Combination Meter" . I J 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1345 2005 Altima MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR [VQ] MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram PFP:24814 UBS00IFU BBWA1583E Revision: March 2005 EC-1346 2005 Altima MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR [VQ] A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1320E Revision: March 2005 EC-1347 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) PFP:00030 UBS00IG6 Approximately 350 (3.57, 51) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing UBS00IG7 Target idle speed No-load*1 [in P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T)] A/T: 675±50 rpm M/T: 625±50 rpm Air conditioner: ON In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T) 700 rpm or more Ignition timing In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T) 15° ± 5° BTDC *1: Under the following conditions: ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) ● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Calculated Load Value UBS00IG8 Conditions Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) At idle 5 - 35 At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35 Mass Air Flow Sensor UBS00IG9 Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.2V* 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm* Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS00IGA Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 0.295 - 0.349 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) UBS00IGB Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 EGR Temperature Sensor UBS00IIR Temperature °C (°F) Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.011 - 0.014 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] UBS00IGC 2.3 - 4.3Ω Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater UBS00IGD Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Revision: March 2005 5.0 - 7.0Ω EC-1348 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ] Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS00IGE A Refer to EC-927, "Component Inspection" . Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS00IGF EC Refer to EC-936, "Component Inspection" . Throttle Control Motor UBS00IGG Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] C Approximately 1 - 15Ω Injector UBS00IGH Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 -140°F)] D 11.1 - 14.5Ω Fuel Pump UBS00IGI Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] E Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EC-1349 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ] Revision: March 2005 EC-1350 2005 Altima I BODY SECTION EI EXTERIOR & INTERIOR A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions .............................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..... 5 Work Flow ................................................................ 5 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7 DOORS ................................................................. 7 TRUNK .................................................................. 8 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8 SEATS ................................................................... 8 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9 CLIP AND FASTENER ..............................................11 Description ..............................................................11 FRONT BUMPER ..................................................... 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 16 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 FRONT GRILLE ........................................................ 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 UPPER FRONT GRILLE ..................................... 18 LOWER FRONT GRILLE .................................... 18 COWL TOP ............................................................... 19 Removal and Installation ........................................ 19 Revision: March 2005 FRONT FENDER ...................................................... 20 Removal and Installation ........................................ 20 FENDER PROTECTOR ............................................ 21 Removal and Installation ........................................ 21 MUDGUARD ............................................................. 22 Removal and Installation ........................................ 22 LICENSE LAMP FINISHER ...................................... 23 Removal and Installation ........................................ 23 REAR AIR SPOILER ................................................ 24 Removal and Installation ........................................ 24 REMOVAL ........................................................... 24 INSTALLATION ................................................... 25 DRIP MOLDING ........................................................ 26 Removal and Installation ........................................ 26 ROOF SIDE MOLDING ............................................. 27 Removal and Installation ........................................ 27 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ..................................... 28 Removal and Installation ........................................ 28 FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................. 28 REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................... 28 SIDE GUARD MOLDING .......................................... 29 Removal and Installation ........................................ 29 REMOVAL ........................................................... 29 INSTALLATION ................................................... 29 DOOR FINISHER ...................................................... 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 30 FRONT DOOR .................................................... 30 REAR DOOR ....................................................... 31 BODY SIDE TRIM ..................................................... 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH ................. 33 CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH .................. 33 REAR PILLAR FINISHER ................................... 33 DASH SIDE FINISHER ....................................... 33 REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER .......................... 34 Removal and Installation ........................................ 34 FLOOR TRIM ............................................................ 35 Removal and Installation ........................................ 35 HEADLINING ............................................................ 36 Removal and Installation ........................................ 36 EI-1 2005 Altima F G H EI J K L M TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER ...... 37 Removal and Installation ........................................ 37 Revision: March 2005 EI-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EIS003MB The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – ● B C D E F G EIS003MC When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may H get in the way with cloth. When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape. Keep removed parts protected with cloth. EI If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it. If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque. J After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly. Remove stains in the following way. K Water-soluble stains: Dip a cloth in warm water, and squeeze tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth. Oil stain: Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the L stain with the cloth. Next, dip the soft cloth in fresh water, and then squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely. Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth. Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine. M Revision: March 2005 EI-3 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EIS003MD The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear Locating the noise SBT839 — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit Repairing the cause of noise SBT840 Commercial Service Tools EIS003ME (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E Revision: March 2005 EI-4 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Work Flow PFP:00000 A EIS003MF B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to EI-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. EI ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer J is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when K defining the noise. – Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping – Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. M – Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. – Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. – Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. – Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. – Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: March 2005 EI-5 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: ● Close a door. ● Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. ● Rev the engine. ● Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. ● At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). ● Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: ● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. ● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. ● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. ● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. ● Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to EI-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. ● ● Revision: March 2005 EI-6 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0058Y A B C D E F G Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL H Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing EI 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield J 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by K pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. L CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. M CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Revision: March 2005 EI-7 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: March 2005 EI-8 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic Worksheet EIS003MH A B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIWA0276E Revision: March 2005 EI-9 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SBT844 Revision: March 2005 EI-10 2005 Altima CLIP AND FASTENER CLIP AND FASTENER Description ● ● PFP:76906 A EIS003MI Clips and fasteners in EI section correspond to the following numbers and symbols. Replace any clips and/or fasteners which are damaged during removal or installation. Symbol No. Shapes B Removal & Installation C C101 D SBF302H SBF367BA C103 E F G SBT095 SBF423H H C203 EI SBF258G LIIA0236E J C205 K MBT080A SBF638CA L C206 M MBF519B MBF520B SBF104B SBF147B CE103 Revision: March 2005 EI-11 2005 Altima CLIP AND FASTENER Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation CE107 SBF411H SBF767B SBF174D SBF175DA SBF648B SBF649B SBF151D SBF259G SBF145B SBF085B SBF078B SBF992G CE117 CF110 CF118 CG101 CS101 Revision: March 2005 EI-12 2005 Altima CLIP AND FASTENER Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation A B CR103 C SBF768B SBF770B D Metal Clip E WBT072 WBT073 F G H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-13 2005 Altima FRONT BUMPER FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation PFP:F2022 EIS003MJ WIIA0497E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. Front bumper supports 2. Energy absorbing foam 3. Lower radiator grille (if equipped) 4. Upper radiator grille 5. Fog lamp (if equipped) 6. Front bumper fascia 7. Front bumper reinforcement Remove front fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "FENDER PROTECTOR" . Remove engine under cover. Remove upper front (and lower front if equipped) radiator grille. Refer to EI-18, "FRONT GRILLE" . Remove fog lamp if equipped. Refer to LT-70, "Removal and Installation" . Remove front bumper fascia clips and screws, then remove front bumper fascia. Remove energy absorbing foam. Revision: March 2005 EI-14 2005 Altima FRONT BUMPER 7. Remove front bumper reinforcement. 8. Remove front bumper supports. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-15 2005 Altima REAR BUMPER REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation PFP:H5022 EIS003MK WIIA0492E Revision: March 2005 EI-16 2005 Altima REAR BUMPER 1. Remove LH and RH rear combination lamps. Refer to LT-114, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP" . 2. Remove LH and RH splash shields (if equipped). 3. Remove rear bumper fascia. 4. Remove energy absorbing foam. 5. Remove rear bumper reinforcement. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-17 2005 Altima FRONT GRILLE FRONT GRILLE Removal and Installation PFP:62310 EIS003ML WIIA0494E 1. Clip 2. Upper front grille 4. Lower front grille 5. Bumper fascia 3. Screw UPPER FRONT GRILLE Removal 1. 2. Remove the upper clips. Release the lower tabs from the bumper fascia, then remove the upper front radiator grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LOWER FRONT GRILLE Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove engine under cover. Remove the upper screws. Release the lower tabs from the bumper fascia, then remove the lower front radiator grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-18 2005 Altima COWL TOP COWL TOP Removal and Installation PFP:66100 A EIS003MM B C D E F LIIA0068E Remove both the right and left wiper arms. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" . 2. Release the clips and remove the cowl top seal. 3. Release the clips and remove the cowl top cover. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G 1. H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-19 2005 Altima FRONT FENDER FRONT FENDER Removal and Installation PFP:63100 EIS003MN LIIA0151E 1. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EI-14, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Remove center mud guard. Refer to EI-22, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Remove front fender. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-20 2005 Altima FENDER PROTECTOR FENDER PROTECTOR Removal and Installation PFP:63840 A EIS003MO B C D E F G H EI LIIA0075E 1. Remove screw from center mudguard. 2. Remove pushpins. 3. Remove fender protector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-21 2005 Altima MUDGUARD MUDGUARD Removal and Installation PFP:63854 EIS003MP WIIA0495E 1. Remove screws. 2. Remove center mudguard. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-22 2005 Altima LICENSE LAMP FINISHER LICENSE LAMP FINISHER Removal and Installation PFP:84810 A EIS003MQ B C D E F LIIA0070E 1. Remove trunk lid finisher (if equipped). 2. Remove nuts. 3. Remove license lamp finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-23 2005 Altima REAR AIR SPOILER REAR AIR SPOILER Removal and Installation PFP:K6030 EIS0058X All except SE-R model LIIA2204E 1. Rear air spoiler assembly 4. High mounted stop lamp harness 2. Gasket 3. Nut SE-R model WIIA0498E 1. Clips 2. Rear air spoiler assembly 3. Foam tape REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove trunk lid finisher (if equipped). Refer to EI-37, "TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" . Disconnect high mounted stop lamp connector. For all models except SE-R, remove the nuts and carefully lift the rear air spoiler from the gaskets. For SE-R models, using a trim stick, carefully release the clips and pry foam tape free from trunk lid surface. CAUTION: Use care not to damage painted surfaces during removal of, or releasing adhesive backed foam tapes. Revision: March 2005 EI-24 2005 Altima REAR AIR SPOILER 5. Release the high mounted stop lamp harness grommet from trunk lid, then remove rear air spoiler. A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: ● Before installing rear air spoiler, clean the surface where it will be mounted with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. ● Before installing, be sure there are no gaps or waves in the foam tape where the surfaces meet. ● During installation, be sure grommet of high mounted stop lamp harness is fully seated into trunk lid opening prior to final rear air spoiler placement. B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-25 2005 Altima DRIP MOLDING DRIP MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:76810 EIS003MR LIIA0076E 1. Using a trim stick or equivalent, disconnect drip moulding starting at the front working rearward. 2. Remove drip molding. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Insert drip molding onto clips starting at rear working forward. Revision: March 2005 EI-26 2005 Altima ROOF SIDE MOLDING ROOF SIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:73854 A EIS003MS B C D E F LIIA0209E 1. Lift and twist roof side molding up from rear edge. 2. Disconnect clips, and remove roof side molding. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Engage roof molding clips starting at the rear. G H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-27 2005 Altima DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:82820 EIS003MT LIIA0071E FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation 1. Open windows fully. 2. Remove screw on front edge. 3. Lift and twist from rear side, disconnect clips from flange and pull molding out backwards. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation 1. Open windows fully. 2. Lift and twist from rear side, and disconnect clips from flange. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-28 2005 Altima SIDE GUARD MOLDING SIDE GUARD MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:76840 A EIS003MU B C D E F LIIA0072E G REMOVAL CAUTION: Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints. ● Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape. 1. Heat molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun. 2. Using a trim stick, gently lift an end of the molding and cut away tape to remove molding. 3. Remove all remaining traces of tape and adhesive. H EI J INSTALLATION On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200 or C-100 or equivalent. ● The repair parts are also attached with double-faced adhesive tape. ● To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new doublefaced tape to the molding. 1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. 2. Using a heat gun, heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F). 3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface. 4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lb-f) to press molding to door surface. NOTE: For maximum adhesion, allow vehicle to set without washing for 24 hours after installation. ● Revision: March 2005 EI-29 2005 Altima K L M DOOR FINISHER DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation PFP:80900 EIS003MV FRONT DOOR LIIA0077E 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove step lamp lens and disconnect step lamp. Remove screw cover and pull cup mat. Remove screws. Disconnect and remove switch plate. ● Remove screw beneath switch plate. 5. Remove door finisher. 6. If necessary, remove inner corner cover from door finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-30 2005 Altima DOOR FINISHER REAR DOOR A B C D E F LIIA0078E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove screw cover. Remove screws. Disconnect and remove switch plate. Remove door finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H EI J K L M Revision: March 2005 EI-31 2005 Altima BODY SIDE TRIM BODY SIDE TRIM Removal and Installation PFP:76913 EIS003MW CAUTION: ● Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes. ● When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar garnish. LIIA0079E 1. Front pillar garnish 2. Dash side finisher 3. Front kicking plate 4. Center pillar lower garnish 5. Rear kicking plate 6. Rear body side welt 7. Rear pillar finisher 8. Seat belt shoulder anchor cover 9. Center pillar upper garnish 10. Front body side welt Revision: March 2005 EI-32 2005 Altima BODY SIDE TRIM CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH Removal and Installation A 1. Remove front and rear kicking plate. 2. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH Removal and Installation C 1. Remove seat belt shoulder anchor. Refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . 2. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to EI-33, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH" . 3. Remove bolt covers and bolts. 4. Remove center pillar upper garnish. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D E REAR PILLAR FINISHER Removal and Installation 1. Remove bolt cover and bolt. 2. Remove rear pillar finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F DASH SIDE FINISHER Removal and Installation G 1. Remove front kicking plate. 2. Remove dash side finisher. CAUTION: Insert screw driver rolled with cloth between panel on vehicle and clips (as indicated with arrow), and disconnect clips. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H EI J K SIIA0810E L M Revision: March 2005 EI-33 2005 Altima REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER Removal and Installation PFP:79910 EIS003MX LIIA0080E 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove rear seat. Refer to SE-22, "REAR SEAT" . Remove rear seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to SB-5, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt" . Remove rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . If equipped, remove high mounted stop lamp and disconnect connectors. SIIA0820E 5. Remove halo trim. 6. Remove rear parcel shelf trim. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-34 2005 Altima FLOOR TRIM FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation PFP:74902 A EIS003MY B C D E F G H EI WIIA0496E 1. Carpet 4. Service mat brackets 2. Driver foot rest (if equipped) 3. J Rear seat cushion hooks 1. Remove front seats. Refer to SE-15, "FRONT SEAT" . 2. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-22, "REAR SEAT" . 3. Remove lower body side trim. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . 4. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . 5. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-4, "SEAT BELTS" . 6. Remove service mat brackets. 7. Remove driver foot rest (if equipped). 8. Remove rear seat cushion hooks. 9. Remove carpet. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-35 K L M 2005 Altima HEADLINING HEADLINING Removal and Installation PFP:73910 EIS003MZ LIIA0082E 1. Headlining 2. Assist grips 3. Sunroof welt 4. Sunvisors 5. Map lamp 6. Storage compartment 7. Sunvisor clips 8. Dome lamp CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance. 1. Remove front and center pillar garnish. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove front and rear door welts. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . 4. Remove assist grips. 5. Remove interior lamp. 6. Remove map lamp. 7. Remove storage bin. 8. Remove sunvisors and clips. 9. Remove windshield garnish molding. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . 10. Remove sunroof welt (if equipped). 11. Remove clips attached to roof. 12. Open left rear door and remove headlining through door opening. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EI-36 2005 Altima TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER Removal and Installation PFP:84920 A EIS003N0 B C D E F G H EI J WIIA0493E 1. Trunk room lamp 2. Trunk floor carpet 3. Hole cover 4. Spare tire cover 5. Trunk floor board, RH 6. Trunk floor board, LH 7. Box assembly 8. Trunk side finisher, RH 9. Trunk side finisher, LH 10. Trim clip 11. Trim clip (2 piece) 12. Trunk net hook 13. Trunk net hook 14. Trunk net 15. Trunk net, RH 16. Trunk net, LH 17. Trunk finisher, rear 18. Rear trunk plate 19. Trim clip 20. Trunk lid finisher (if equipped) 21. Trim clip Revision: March 2005 EI-37 K L M 2005 Altima TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER Revision: March 2005 EI-38 2005 Altima B ENGINE SECTION EM ENGINE MECHANICAL A EM C D E CONTENTS QR25DE PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 5 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 5 Precautions for Draining Coolant ............................. 5 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping .............. 5 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ............. 5 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ......................................................................... 5 Precautions for Assembly and Installation ............... 5 Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ......................... 6 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 6 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 6 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 6 PREPARATION ........................................................... 8 Special Service Tools ............................................... 8 Commercial Service Tools .......................................11 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 13 NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise ................... 13 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. ..................................................... 14 DRIVE BELTS ........................................................... 15 Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 15 Tension Adjustment ................................................ 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 15 REMOVAL ........................................................... 15 INSTALLATION ................................................... 16 Removal and Installation of Drive Belt Auto-tensioner ..................................................................... 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSTALLATION ................................................... 16 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ............................... 17 Removal and Installation ........................................ 17 REMOVAL ........................................................... 17 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT ...... 18 Revision: March 2005 INTAKE MANIFOLD ................................................. 19 Removal and Installation ........................................ 19 REMOVAL ........................................................... 19 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 21 INSTALLATION ................................................... 21 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 23 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST .......................................................................... 24 Removal and Installation ........................................ 24 REMOVAL ........................................................... 24 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 25 INSTALLATION ................................................... 25 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ................................. 26 Removal and Installation ........................................ 26 REMOVAL ........................................................... 26 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 27 INSTALLATION ................................................... 27 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 28 IGNITION COIL ......................................................... 29 Removal and Installation ........................................ 29 REMOVAL ........................................................... 29 INSTALLATION ................................................... 29 SPARK PLUG ........................................................... 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 30 REMOVAL ........................................................... 30 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 30 INSTALLATION ................................................... 31 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ........................ 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 REMOVAL ........................................................... 32 INSTALLATION ................................................... 33 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 34 ROCKER COVER ..................................................... 35 Removal and Installation ........................................ 35 REMOVAL ........................................................... 35 INSTALLATION ................................................... 35 CAMSHAFT .............................................................. 37 Removal and Installation ........................................ 37 REMOVAL ........................................................... 37 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 39 EM-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M INSTALLATION .................................................... 42 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................... 44 INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE ............................................. 44 Valve Clearance ...................................................... 45 INSPECTION ....................................................... 45 ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 46 TIMING CHAIN .......................................................... 48 Removal and Installation ........................................ 48 REMOVAL ........................................................... 49 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 52 INSTALLATION .................................................... 52 OIL SEAL .................................................................. 56 Removal and installation of Valve Oil Seal ............. 56 REMOVAL ........................................................... 56 INSTALLATION .................................................... 56 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ............. 57 REMOVAL ........................................................... 57 INSTALLATION .................................................... 57 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal .............. 58 REMOVAL ........................................................... 58 INSTALLATION .................................................... 58 CYLINDER HEAD ..................................................... 59 On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 59 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ......... 59 Removal and Installation ........................................ 61 REMOVAL ........................................................... 62 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 62 INSTALLATION .................................................... 63 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 64 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 64 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 65 Inspection After Disassembly ................................. 66 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ........................ 66 VALVE DIMENSIONS .......................................... 66 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE .............................. 66 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ......................... 66 VALVE SEAT CONTACT ..................................... 68 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT ........................... 68 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ......................... 69 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ............................... 69 ENGINE ASSEMBLY ................................................ 71 Removal and Installation ........................................ 71 REMOVAL ........................................................... 72 INSTALLATION .................................................... 73 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 73 CYLINDER BLOCK ................................................... 75 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 75 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 76 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 78 How to Select Piston and Bearing .......................... 83 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 83 HOW TO SELECT A PISTON ............................. 83 HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING ...................................................................... 84 Revision: March 2005 HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING .................86 Inspection After Disassembly ..................................89 CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE ....................89 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ...........90 PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ...........90 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE .....................91 PISTON RING END GAP ....................................91 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION .......91 CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ........92 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ...........................................92 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION ......................93 INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING .......................................................................93 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE ...94 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL ......................................................................95 OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN ......95 OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT .................................................................95 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ....................................95 OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING .............................................................96 OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING ...............96 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING ................97 OUTER DIAMETER OF LOWER CYLINDER BLOCK BOLT .......................................................97 OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLT ....................................................................97 MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL) ...............................................................97 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......99 Standard and Limit ..................................................99 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................99 DRIVE BELTS ......................................................99 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD ...................................................................99 SPARK PLUG ......................................................99 CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 100 VALVE ................................................................ 100 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING ......... 103 CYLINDER BLOCK ............................................ 104 PISTON, PISTON RING, AND PISTON PIN ...... 105 CONNECTING ROD .......................................... 105 CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 106 MAIN BEARING ................................................. 107 CONNECTING ROD BEARING ......................... 108 VQ35DE PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 109 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 109 Precautions for Drain Coolant ............................... 109 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ........... 109 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly .......... 109 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ...................................................................... 109 EM-2 2005 Altima Precautions for Assembly and Installation ........... 109 Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ......................110 Precautions for Liquid Gasket ...............................110 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......110 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..110 PREPARATION ........................................................112 Special Service Tools ............................................112 Commercial Service Tools .....................................115 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................117 NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise .................117 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. ....................................................118 DRIVE BELTS ..........................................................119 Checking Drive Belts .............................................119 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ............................. 120 Removal and Installation ...................................... 120 REMOVAL ......................................................... 120 INSTALLATION ................................................. 120 CHANGING AIR CLEANER ELEMENT ............ 120 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR ........................ 122 Removal and Installation ...................................... 122 REMOVAL ......................................................... 123 INSTALLATION ................................................. 124 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ......................... 126 Removal and Installation ...................................... 126 REMOVAL ......................................................... 127 INSTALLATION ................................................. 127 INTAKE MANIFOLD ............................................... 129 Removal and Installation ...................................... 129 REMOVAL ......................................................... 130 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 131 INSTALLATION ................................................. 131 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............. 132 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST ....................................................................... 134 Removal and Installation ...................................... 134 REMOVAL ......................................................... 135 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 136 INSTALLATION ................................................. 136 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ............................... 138 Removal and Installation ...................................... 138 REMOVAL ......................................................... 138 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 141 INSTALLATION ................................................. 141 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............. 143 IGNITION COIL ....................................................... 144 Removal and Installation ...................................... 144 REMOVAL ......................................................... 144 INSTALLATION ................................................. 144 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) ........... 145 Removal and Installation ...................................... 145 REMOVAL ......................................................... 145 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 146 INSTALLATION ................................................. 146 Revision: March 2005 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ...................... 147 Removal and Installation ...................................... 147 REMOVAL ......................................................... 147 INSTALLATION ................................................. 148 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 149 ROCKER COVER ................................................... 150 Removal and Installation ...................................... 150 REMOVAL ......................................................... 150 INSTALLATION ................................................. 151 FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE ............................... 152 Removal and Installation ...................................... 152 REMOVAL ......................................................... 153 INSTALLATION ................................................. 157 TIMING CHAIN ........................................................ 161 Components ......................................................... 161 POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET . 163 Removal ............................................................... 164 Inspection ............................................................. 171 Installation ............................................................ 172 CAMSHAFT ............................................................ 182 Removal and Installation ...................................... 182 REMOVAL ......................................................... 183 INSTALLATION ................................................. 184 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 187 Inspection after Installation ................................... 190 INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE ........................................... 190 Valve Clearance ................................................... 191 CHECKING ....................................................... 191 VALVE ADJUSTING .......................................... 194 OIL SEAL ................................................................ 195 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal ........... 195 REMOVAL ......................................................... 195 INSTALLATION ................................................. 195 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ........... 195 REMOVAL ......................................................... 195 INSTALLATION ................................................. 197 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal ............ 198 REMOVAL ......................................................... 198 INSTALLATION ................................................. 198 CYLINDER HEAD ................................................... 200 On-Vehicle Service ............................................... 200 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ....... 200 Removal and Installation ...................................... 201 REMOVAL ......................................................... 201 INSTALLATION ................................................. 204 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 212 DISASSEMBLY ................................................. 213 ASSEMBLY ....................................................... 213 Inspection After Disassembly ............................... 215 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ...................... 215 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE ............................ 215 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ....................... 215 VALVE SEAT CONTACT ................................... 217 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT ......................... 217 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ....................... 218 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ............................. 218 EM-3 2005 Altima A EM C D E F G H I J K L M ENGINE ASSEMBLY .............................................. 219 Removal and Installation ...................................... 219 REMOVAL ......................................................... 220 INSTALLATION .................................................. 222 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 222 CYLINDER BLOCK ................................................. 224 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 224 DISASSEMBLY ................................................. 225 ASSEMBLY ....................................................... 227 Inspection ............................................................. 234 PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ........ 234 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ................... 234 PISTON RING END GAP .................................. 235 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ..... 235 CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING DIAMETER (BIG END) ...................................... 236 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ......................................... 236 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION .................... 237 INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUS- Revision: March 2005 ING ..................................................................... 237 PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE . 237 CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 239 BEARING CLEARANCE .................................... 239 DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT (A/T) .......................... 243 FLYWHEEL RUNOUT (M/T) .............................. 243 OIL JET .............................................................. 244 OIL JET RELIEF VALVE .................................... 244 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 245 Standard and Limit ................................................ 245 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................... 245 DRIVE BELT ...................................................... 246 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD ................................................................. 246 SPARK PLUG .................................................... 246 CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 247 VALVE ................................................................ 247 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING ......... 251 CYLINDER BLOCK ............................................ 251 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN ...... 252 CONNECTING ROD .......................................... 253 CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 254 AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING ............................. 255 CONNECTING ROD BEARING ......................... 255 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS .................. 256 BEARING CLEARANCE .................................... 256 EM-4 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EBS00J49 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EM with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. C WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. F Precautions for Draining Coolant ● EBS00J4A Drain coolant when engine is cooled. G Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ● ● ● Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area. Release fuel pressure before any removal or disassembly. After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage. Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EBS00J4C EBS00J4D Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and replace if necessary. Precautions for Assembly and Installation ● H When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful operations. Use maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces. Cover openings of engine system with tape or equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials. Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly. When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, follow the specifications. Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ● EBS00J4B EBS00J4E Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts. When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, follow the specifications. Always replace the old with a new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring. Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction and blockage. Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust. Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well. Bleed the air trapped within the system after draining the coolant. Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections. After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems for leakage or rattles. Revision: March 2005 EM-5 2005 Altima I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ● – – – – ● ● ● EBS00J4F Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts. Cylinder head bolts Lower cylinder block bolts Connecting rod cap bolts Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angular tightening) Do not use a torque value for final tightening. The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step. Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil. Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00J4G REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and remove the sealant using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap (1) the cutter where the RTV Silicone Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the cutter (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. PBIC0002E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface. ● Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . PBIC0003E Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified location. Tube presser ● ● ● ● ● WS39930000 ( – ) If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of this manual. Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component. If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. Do not retighten after the installation. Revision: March 2005 EM-6 EMA0622D 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] ● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . A EM C SEM159F D CAUTION: Follow all specific instructions in this manual. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-7 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00J4H The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case S-NT046 ST0501S000 Engine stand assembly 1. ST05011000 ( — ) Engine stand 2. ST05012000 ( — ) Base Disassembling and assembling NT042 KV10106500 ( — ) Engine stand shaft NT028 KV10115300 ( — ) Engine sub-attachment ZZA1078D KV10116200 (J-26336-B) Valve spring compressor 1. KV10115900 (J-26336-20) Attachment Disassembling valve mechanism NT022 KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Angle wrench Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder head, etc. S-NT014 KV10107902 (J-38959) Valve oil seal puller Removing valve oil seal S-NT011 Revision: March 2005 EM-8 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR25DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10115600 (J-38958) Valve oil seal drift Installing valve oil seal Use side A. a: 20 (0.79) dia. d: 8 (0.31) dia. b: 13 (0.51) dia. e: 10.7 (0.421) dia. c: 10.3 (0.406) dia. f: 5 (0.20) dia. Unit: mm (in) A EM C S-NT603 EM03470000 (J-8037) Piston ring compressor Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore D E S-NT044 ST16610001 (J-23907) Pilot bushing puller Removing crankshaft pilot bushing F G H S-NT045 WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket I J S-NT052 16441 6N210 (J-45488) Quick connector release Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room (Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Part No. 16441 6N210) K L PBIC0198E KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in) NT636 KV10117100 (J-36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor For 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut NT379 Revision: March 2005 EM-9 2005 Altima M PREPARATION [QR25DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 LEM054 — (J-46535) Drive belt tension releaser Releasing drive belt tension WBIA0536E Revision: March 2005 EM-10 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR25DE] Commercial Service Tools EBS00J4I A Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Pulley holder Crankshaft pulley removing and installing a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. b: 8 mm (0.31 in) dia. EM C D NT628 Crank puller Crankshaft pulley removing E F ZZA0010D Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plug G H S-NT047 Valve seat cutter set Finishing valve seat dimensions I J S-NT048 Piston ring expander Removing and installing piston ring K L S-NT030 Valve guide drift M Removing and installing valve guide Intake & Exhaust: a: 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia. b: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia. S-NT015 Valve guide reamer 1: Reaming valve guide inner hole 2: Reaming hole for oversize valve guide Intake & Exhaust: d1 : 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia. d2 : 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia. S-NT016 Revision: March 2005 EM-11 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR25DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new heated oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.) a: J-43897-18 [18 mm (0.71 in) dia.] for zirconia heated oxygen sensor b: J-43897-12 [12 mm (0.47 in) dia.] for titania heated oxygen sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E TP55 Torx® plus Bit Removing and installing M/T flywheel bolts LBIA0284E E20 Torx® Socket (J-45816) Removing and installing A/T drive plate bolts LBIA0285E Revision: March 2005 EM-12 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QR25DE] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise PFP:00003 A EBS00J4J EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0069E Revision: March 2005 EM-13 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [QR25DE] Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. EBS00J4K 1. Locate the area where noise occurs. 2. Confirm the type of noise. 3. Specify the operating condition of engine. 4. Check specified noise source. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Operating condition of engine Location of noise Top of engine Rocker cover Cylinder head Type of noise Front of engine Timing chain cover Front of engine Reference page After warmup When starting When idling When racing While driving Ticking or clicking C A — A B — Tappet noise Valve clearance EM-45 Rattle C A — A B C Camshaft bearing noise Camshaft journal clearance Camshaft runout EM-40 EM-39 — Piston pin noise Piston and piston pin clearance Connecting rod bushing clearance EM-92 EM-92 A Piston slap noise Piston-to-bore clearance Piston ring side clearance Piston ring end gap Connecting rod bend and torsion EM-91 EM-91 EM-91 EM-91 Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small end) Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end) EM-92 EM-92 EM-96 EM-95 Slap or knock Crankshaft pulley Cylinder block (Side of engine) Oil pan Source of noise Before warmup — Slap or rap A A — — — B B B B Check item Knock A B C B B B Connecting rod bearing noise Knock A B — A B C Main bearing noise Main bearing oil clearance Crankshaft runout Timing chain cracks and wear Timing chain tensioner operation Tapping or ticking A A — B B B Timing chain and chain tensioner noise Squeaking or fizzing A B — B — B Drive belts (Sticking or slipping) Drive belts deflection Creaking A B A B A B Drive belts (Slipping) Idler pulley bearing operation Squall Creak A B — B A B Water pump noise Water pump operation A: Closely related B: Related Revision: March 2005 C: Sometimes related EM-48 EM-15 CO-7 —: Not related EM-14 2005 Altima DRIVE BELTS [QR25DE] DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts PFP:02117 A EBS00J4L EM C D E F G SBIA0234E NOTE: On vehicles not equipped with A/C, there is an idler pulley in the position for the drive belt routing. WARNING: Inspect the drive belt only when the engine is stopped. ● Make sure that the stamp mark of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the usable range. NOTE: ● Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold. ● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be A. ● Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. ● If the indicator is out of allowable use range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Tension Adjustment ● H I J K EBS00J4M Belt tension is not manually adjustable, it is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto-tensioner. L Removal and Installation EBS00J4N REMOVAL 1. While securely holding the hexagonal part in pulley center of drive belt auto-tensioner, move in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) using Tool. Tool number 2. ● 3. : — M (J-46535) CAUTION: ● Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. ● Do not loosen the auto-tensioner pulley bolt. (Do not turn it counterclockwise.) If turned counterclockwise, the complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit, WBIA0561E including pulley. Insert a rod approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) in diameter through the rear of tensioner into retaining boss to lock tensioner pulley. Leave tensioner pulley arm locked until belt is installed again. Loosen auxiliary drive belt from water pump pulley in sequence, and remove it. Revision: March 2005 EM-15 2005 Altima DRIVE BELTS [QR25DE] INSTALLATION 1. Hook the auxiliary drive belt onto all of the pulleys except for the water pump pulley. Hook the drive belt onto water pump pulley last. CAUTION: Confirm belts are completely set on the pulleys. 2. Release tensioner, and apply tensions to belt. CAUTION: ● Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. ● Do not loosen the auto-tensioner pulley bolt. (Don't turn it counterclockwise. If turned counterclockwise, the complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit, including pulley. 3. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise several times to equalize tension between each pulley. 4. Confirm tensions of belt at indicator is within the allowable use range. Refer to EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" . Removal and Installation of Drive Belt Auto-tensioner EBS00J4O SBIA0235E REMOVAL CAUTION: The complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit, including the pulley. 1. Remove the front RH engine cover. 2. Remove the drive belt EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . ● Insert a rod approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) in diameter through the rear of tensioner into the retaining boss to lock tensioner pulley. 3. Remove the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner, with power tool. CAUTION: Do not loosen the auto-tensioner pulley bolt. (Don't turn it counterclockwise. If turned counterclockwise, the complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit, including pulley. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● If there is damage greater than peeled paint, replace drive belt auto-tensioner units ● Install the drive belt auto-tensioner carefully so not to damage the water pump pulley. ● Do not swap the pulley between the new and old auto-tensioner units Revision: March 2005 EM-16 2005 Altima AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT [QR25DE] AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation PFP:16500 A EBS00J4P EM C D E F G H I J LBIA0068E K 1. Resonator 4. Mass air flow sensor 7. Air cleaner case mounting bracket 2. Air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube 3. Grommet 5. Air cleaner case (upper) 6. Air cleaner case (lower) 8. Resonator in fender L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electronic throttle control actuator and the fresh air intake tube. Remove air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper), with mass air flow sensor attached. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle the mass air flow sensor with care: ● Do not shock it. ● Do not disassemble it. ● Do not touch the internal sensor. Remove the resonator in the fender, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-17 2005 Altima M AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT [QR25DE] CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 1. 2. 3. 4. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and raise the air cleaner case (upper). Remove the air cleaner element. Install a new air cleaner element. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-18 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] INTAKE MANIFOLD Removal and Installation PFP:14003 A EBS00J4Q EM C D E F G H I J WBIA0472E K 1. Cylinder head assembly 2. PCV hose 3. Intake manifold collector 4. Gasket 5. Electric throttle control actuator 6. Intake manifold support 7. Vacuum reservoir tank 8. VIAS control solenoid valve 9. Intake manifold L 10. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid M REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot. 1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 2. Drain coolant when engine is cooled. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" . 3. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove air cleaner case and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Disconnect the following components at the intake side: ● PCV hose ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Brake booster vacuum hose Revision: March 2005 EM-19 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] 6. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. ● Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number : — (J-45488) WBIA0148E a. Remove quick connector cap. LBIA0090E b. c. d. 7. a. b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as WBIA0473E shown. ● Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. ● Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. ● Avoid fire and sparks. ● Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. When removing fuel hose quick connector at vehicle piping side, perform as follows. Remove quick connector cap. Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. (The figure is shown for reference only.) ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte etc. from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-20 SFE562A 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] Do not remove the remaining retainer on tube. A ● When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one. Retainer color: Green. ● To keep clean the connecting portion and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags or something similar. EM 8. Loosen mounting bolts diagonally, and remove the electric throttle control actuator. CAUTION: C Handle carefully to avoid any damage. 9. Disconnect intake manifold collector harness, and vacuum hose. CAUTION: D Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. 10. Remove intake manifold collector mounting bolts on the support, using power tools. 11. Loosen the mounting bolts and nuts in the order shown to E remove the intake manifold collector, using power tools. ● F G WBIA0018E H 12. Loosen the bolts in the order shown to remove the intake manifold assembly, using power tools. I J K WBIA0019E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL L Surface Distortion ● Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect surface distortion of intake manifold collector and intake manifold surface. M Standard : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) WBIA0020E INSTALLATION ● Install the intake manifold bolts and nuts in the reverse order of removal, following the tightening sequences below. Revision: March 2005 EM-21 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] Tightening Intake Manifold Bolts and Nuts ● Tighten in numerical order as shown. CAUTION: After tightening No.5, retighten the No.1 mounting bolt to specification. WBIA0021E Tightening Intake Manifold Collector Bolts and Nuts ● Tighten in numerical order as shown. CAUTION: After tightening No.7, retighten the No.1 mounting bolt to specification. LBIA0069E Installation of Electric Throttle Control Actuator: ● Tighten the mounting bolts of electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps. ● After installation perform procedure in EM-23, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" . CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (ENGINE SIDE) 1. 2. 3. 4. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and there is no damage to them. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube tip end. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ● Insert fuel tube into quick connector until the top spool on fuel tubes is inserted completely and the second level spool is positioned slightly below the quick connector bottom end. CAUTION: ● Hold at position "A" as shown, when inserting the fuel tube into the quick connector. ● Carefully align to center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to the O-ring inside the quick connector. ● Insert the fuel tube until you hear a “click” sound and KBIA0272E actually feel the engagement. ● To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step. Before clamping the fuel hose with the hose clamp, pull the quick connector hard by hand, holding at the "A" position, as shown. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come off of the fuel tube. NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb). Revision: March 2005 EM-22 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [QR25DE] 5. 6. Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint. ● Direct arrow mark on quick connector cap to upper side (fuel hose side). Install fuel hose to hose clamp. A EM C KBIA0298E D CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (VEHICLE PIPING SIDE) 1. 2. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and there is no damage to them. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ● Insert fuel tube until a click is heard. ● Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint. Direct arrow mark on quick connector cap upper side. ● Install fuel hose to hose clamp. E F G H PBIC0662E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. ● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . ● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-23 2005 Altima EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [QR25DE] EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation PFP:14004 EBS00J4R PBIC0279E 1. Exhaust manifold and three way cat- 2. alyst assembly Exhaust manifold gasket 4. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor Heated oxygen sensor 5. 3. Exhaust manifold cover (upper and lower) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the engine undercover using power tools. Disconnect the electrical connector of heated oxygen sensor 1 or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, and unhook the harness from the bracket and middle clamp on the cover. Remove the heated oxygen sensor 1 or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 using Tool. Tool numbers : — (J-44626) : KV10117100 (J-36471-A) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor. ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Remove the lower exhaust manifold covers. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the upper exhaust manifold cover. ● 4. 5. 6. Revision: March 2005 EM-24 WBIA0474E 2005 Altima EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [QR25DE] 7. 8. Loosen the nuts in the sequence as shown, on the exhaust manifold and three way catalyst. Remove the exhaust manifold and three way catalyst assembly and gasket. Discard the gasket. A EM C WBIA0022E D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ● Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of exhaust manifold fitting surface. Limit E : 0.7 mm (0.0276 in) F G KBIA0046E H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following. I Tightening Exhaust Manifold Nuts ● Tighten the nuts in the numerical order shown, to specification. After tightening No.5, retighten No.1 and then No.3 to specification. J K L WBIA0023E Installation of A/F Sensors and Heated Oxygen Sensors Clean the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor threads with the Tool, then apply the anti-seize lubricant to the threads before installing the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensors. Tool number a: J-43897 - 18 b: J-43897 - 12 CAUTION: Do not over-tighten the A/F sensors and heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the A/F sensors and heated oxygen sensors, resulting in a malfunction and the MIL coming on. Revision: March 2005 EM-25 2005 Altima M OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [QR25DE] OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Removal and Installation PFP:11110 EBS00J4S WBIA0218E 1. Oil dipstick tube 2. Oil pan, upper 3. Cylinder block 4. Oil filter 5. Oil pickup screen 6. Drain plug 7. Oil pan, lower 8. Rear plate cover REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 1. Remove the engine under covers on both sides, using power tool. 2. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" . 3. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Remove power steering hose bracket from rear of collector. 5. Support the engine from above and underneath with suitable hoist and floor jack. 6. Remove the front suspension member for clearance to remove the oil pan. Refer to FSU-15, "REMOVAL" . 7. Remove the lower oil pan bolts. Loosen the bolts in the order shown, using power tool. LBIA0070E Revision: March 2005 EM-26 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [QR25DE] 8. Remove the lower oil pan using Tool. NOTE: Tap gently to cut sealant around the pan; do not damage the mating surface using Tool. Tool number A EM : KV10111100 (J-37228) C WBIA0475E D 9. Remove the oil pickup screen. 10. Remove rear plate cover, and four engine-to transaxle bolts, using power tool. E 11. Loosen the upper oil pan bolts in the order shown to remove upper oil pan, using power tool. F G H LBIA0072E 12. Remove upper oil pan using Tool. NOTE: Tap gently to cut sealant around the pan; do not damage the mating surface using Tool. Tool number I J : KV10111100 (J-37228) K WBIA0475E L INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● Clean the oil pickup screen to remove any foreign material. M INSTALLATION 1. a. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Paying attention to the following. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent, to the upper oil pan. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" , and EM-6, "Precautions for Liquid Gasket" . ● Install the two new O-rings in the upper oil pan. SBIA0253E Revision: March 2005 EM-27 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [QR25DE] b. Tighten the upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown. ● Bolt No.10,11,18 indicate a double tightening in the sequence of bolt No.s 1, 2, 3. NOTE: Refer below for specified bolt sizes: M6 × 20 mm (0.79 in): No.19, 20 M8 × 25 mm (0.98 in): No.1, 3, 4, 9 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in): No.2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 17 M8 x100 mm (3.97 in): No.12, 13, 14, 15, 16 LBIA0073E c. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent to the lower oil pan. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" , and EM-6, "Precautions for Liquid Gasket" SBIA0254E d. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in the numerical order shown. ● Wait at least 30 minutes after the oil pans are installed before filling the engine with oil. LBIA0074E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● Check for any engine oil leaks with the engine at operating temperature and running at idle. Revision: March 2005 EM-28 2005 Altima IGNITION COIL [QR25DE] IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation PFP:22448 A EBS00J4T EM C D E F WBIA0024E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. G Remove the engine cover. Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil. Remove the ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it. I J INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-29 2005 Altima SPARK PLUG [QR25DE] SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation PFP:22401 EBS00J4U WBIA0024E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the spark plug with a suitable spark plug wrench. Temperature range NGK Standard type PLFR5A-11 Hot type PLFR4A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 SEM294A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal conditions. The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Frequent engine starts. ● Low ambient temperatures. The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Extended highway driving. ● Frequent high engine revolution. ● Revision: March 2005 EM-30 2005 Altima SPARK PLUG [QR25DE] Do not use a wire brush for cleaning the spark plugs. Replace as necessary. A EM C SMA773C D If plug is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time : less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) : less than 20 seconds E Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Gap (nominal) F : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) G H SMA806CA I INSTALLATION ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-31 2005 Altima FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QR25DE] FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation PFP:16600 EBS00J4V WBIA0147E 1. Fuel hose 2. Intake manifold 3. Sub-harness 4. Fuel tube 5. Clip 6. O-ring 7. Fuel injector 8. Insulator CAUTION: ● Apply new engine oil to parts before installing the parts, as shown above. ● Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the fuel hose quick connector at the fuel tube side. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . CAUTION: ● Prepare a container and cloth for catching any spilled fuel. ● This operation should be performed in a place that is free from any open flames. Revision: March 2005 EM-32 2005 Altima FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QR25DE] While hoses are disconnected seal their openings with vinyl bag or similar material to prevent foreign material from entering them. A Remove the intake collector. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Disconnect sub-harness for injector at engine front side, and remove it from bracket. EM Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, then remove fuel tube and fuel injectors as an assembly. Remove the fuel injectors from the fuel tube. C ● Release the clip and remove the fuel injector. ● Pull fuel injector straight out of the fuel tube. ● Be careful not to damage the nozzle. D ● Avoid any impact, such as dropping the fuel injector. ● Do not disassemble or adjust the fuel injector. ● 4. 5. 6. 7. KBIA0239E E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. a. Install new O-rings on the fuel injector. ● Lubricate the O-rings lightly with new engine oil. ● Be careful not to scratch it during installation. Also be careful not to twist or stretch the O-ring. If the O-ring was stretched while it is attached, do not insert it into the fuel tube immediately. Install the fuel injector into the fuel tube with the following procedure: ● Do not reuse the clip, replace it with a new one. ● Insert the new clip into the clip mounting groove on fuel injector. ● Insert the clip so that projection "A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. ● Insert it while matching it to the axial center. ● Insert fuel injector so that projection "B" of fuel injector matches notch "B" of the clip. ● Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on the clip. ● Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. Install fuel tube assembly. Insert the tip of each fuel injector into intake manifold. F G H I J K L M KBIA0240E b. Tighten the bolts in two steps in the numerical order as shown. Fuel tube assembly bolts Step 1 : 9.3 - 10.8 N·m (0.95 - 1.1 kg-m, 83 - 95 in-lb.) Step 2 : 20.6 - 26.5 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb.) KBIA0239E Revision: March 2005 EM-33 2005 Altima FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [QR25DE] CAUTION: ● After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage. 5. Install the intake collector. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . 6. Connect the fuel hose quick connector. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . 7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. ● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . ● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Revision: March 2005 EM-34 2005 Altima ROCKER COVER [QR25DE] ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation PFP:13264 A EBS00J4W EM C D E F WBIA0153E 1. PCV valve 4. Rocker cover gasket 2. Oil filler cap 3. G Rocker cover H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the PCV hose and breather hose from the rocker cover. Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown using power tool. Remove the rocker cover. Remove the oil filler cap and PCV valve if necessary, to transfer to the new rocker cover. I J K L WBIA0025E M INSTALLATION 1. Apply RTV Silicone Sealant to the joint part of the cylinder head and camshaft bracket following the steps below: Revision: March 2005 EM-35 2005 Altima ROCKER COVER [QR25DE] Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Refer to illustration “a” to apply sealant to joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. Refer to illustration “b” to apply sealant in a 90° degree angle to the illustration “a”. Install the rocker cover. ● The rocker cover gasket must be securely installed in the groove in the rocker cover. ● a. b. 2. WBIA0164E 3. Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two steps, in the numerical order as shown. Rocker cover bolt tightening 1st step Rocker cover bolt tightening 2nd step : 1.0 - 2.9 N·m (0.1 - 0.3 kg-m, 9 - 26 in-lb) : 7.4 - 9.3 N·m (0.75 - 0.95 kg-m, 65 - 82 in-lb) WBIA0071E 4. 5. Connect the PCV hose and breather hose to the rocker cover. If necessary, install the oil filler cap and PCV valve and lubricate the PCV valve O-ring with new engine oil. Install the ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 EM-36 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation PFP:13001 A EBS00J4X EM C D E F G H I J WBIA0304E K 1. Camshaft brackets (1 - 5) 2. Washer 3. Front cover (partial view) 4. Chain guide 5. Chain tensioner 6. O-ring(s) 7. Chain tensioner spring 8. Chain tensioner plunger 9. IVT control solenoid valve 10. IVT control cover 11. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 12. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 13. Valve lifter 14. Camshaft (EXH) 15. Camshaft (INT) 16. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) M REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front right side tire and wheel using power tool. Remove the RH splash shield using power tool. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "REMOVAL" . Remove the coolant overflow reservoir tank. Disconnect variable timing control solenoid harness connector. Revision: March 2005 L EM-37 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 7. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown. WBIA0027E ● Remove the IVT control cover by cutting the sealant using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) WBIA0475E 8. a. b. Set the No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke with the following procedure: Open the splash cover on RH under cover. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise, and align mating marks for TDC with timing indicator on front cover, as shown. KBIA0190E c. At the same time, make sure that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets are lined up with the yellow links in the timing chain, as shown. ● If not, rotate crankshaft pulley one more turn to line up the mating marks to the yellow links, as shown. KBIA0115E 9. Pull the timing chain guide out between the camshaft sprockets through front cover. Revision: March 2005 EM-38 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 10. Remove camshaft sprockets with the following procedure. CAUTION: ● Do not rotate the crankshaft or camshaft while the timing chain is removed. It causes interference between valve and piston. NOTE: ● Chain tension holding work is not necessary. Crankshaft sprocket and timing chain do not disconnect structurally while front cover is attached. a. Line up the mating marks on camshaft sprockets with the yellow links in the timing chain, and paint an indelible mating mark on the sprocket and timing chain link plate. b. Push in the tensioner plunger and hold. Insert a stopper pin into the hole on tensioner body to hold the chain tensioner. Remove the timing chain tensioner. ● Use a wire with 0.5 mm (0.02 in) diameter for a stopper pin. c. Secure the hexagonal part of camshaft with a suitable tool. Loosen the camshaft sprocket mounting bolts and remove the camshaft sprockets. A EM C KBIA0049E D E F G KBIA0048E H 11. Loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in the order as shown, and remove the camshaft brackets and camshafts. ● Remove No.1 camshaft bracket by slightly tapping it with a rubber mallet. 12. Remove the valve lifters. ● Check mounting positions, and set them aside in the order removed. I J K WBIA0028E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. 2. 3. L Put the camshaft on a V-block supporting the No.2 and No.5 journals. Set the dial gauge vertically on the No.3 journal. Turn camshaft in one direction by hand, and measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauge total indicator reading. Standard M : Less than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) PBIC0038E Revision: March 2005 EM-39 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] Camshaft Cam Height 1. Measure the camshaft cam height. Standard intake cam height Standard exhaust cam height 2. : 45.665 - 45.855 mm (1.7978 - 1.8053 in) : 43.975 - 44.165 mm (1.7313 - 1.7388 in) If wear is beyond the limit, replace the camshaft. PBIC0039E Camshaft Journal Clearance Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal ● Measure the outer diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard No.1 outer diameter Standard No.2, 3, 4, 5, outer diameter : 27.935 - 27.955 mm (1.0998 - 1.1006 in) : 23.435 - 23.455 mm (0.9226 - 0.9234 in) PBIC0040E Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket ● Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts to the specified torque following the tightening pattern as shown. Refer to Step 4 of EM-42, "INSTALLATION" , of ″CAMSHAFT″ for the specified torque sequence. SBIA0255E ● Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter of camshaft bracket. Standard No.1 Standard No.2, 3, 4, 5 : 28.000 - 28.021 mm (1.1024 - 1.1032 in) : 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 in) PBIC0041E Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance ● (Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal) Standard ● : 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in) When out of the specified range above, replace either or both the camshaft and the cylinder head assembly. Revision: March 2005 EM-40 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] NOTE: Inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. If the camshaft bracket is out of specification, replace the whole cylinder head assembly. A Camshaft End Play 1. Standard end play 2. 3. EM Install a dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play with the dial gauge while moving the camshaft forward and backward (in direction to axis). C : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in) If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again. If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head assembly. D PBIC0042E E Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. 2. 3. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Install the camshaft sprocket on the camshaft. Measure camshaft sprocket runout while turning the camshaft by hand. Runout 4. F G : Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) If it exceeds the specification, replace camshaft sprocket. H I KBIA0181J J Valve Lifter ● Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or cracks, replace as necessary. K L M KBIA0182E Valve Lifter Clearance Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter ● Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter. Valve lifter outer diameter ● : 33.965 - 33.980 mm (1.3372 - 1.3378 in) If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter. JEM798G Revision: March 2005 EM-41 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] Valve Lifter Bore Inner Diameter ● Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore of cylinder head. Standard ● : 34.000 - 34.021 mm (1.3386 - 1.3394 in) If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly. PBIC0043E Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance ● (Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) – (outer diameter of valve lifter) Standard ● : 0.020 - 0.056 mm (0.0008 - 0.0022 in) If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly. INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install the valve lifter. ● Install them in the same position from which they were removed. Install the camshafts. ● The distinction between the intake and exhaust camshafts is in a difference of shapes of the back end: Intake: Signal plate for the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Exhaust: Cone end shape KBIA0246E ● Install camshafts so that the dowel pins on the front side are positioned as shown. KBIA0051E 3. Install camshaft brackets. ● Install by referring to identification mark on upper surface mark. ● Install so that identification mark can be correctly read when viewed from the exhaust side. SBIA0256E Revision: March 2005 EM-42 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] Install No. 1 camshaft bracket as follows. – Apply sealant to No.1 camshaft bracket as shown. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . CAUTION: ● After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive sealant leaking from part “A” (both on right and left sides). ● A EM C SBIA0257E D ● ● Apply sealant to camshaft bracket contact surface on the front cover backside. Apply sealant to the outside of bolt hole on front cover. E F G SBIA0258E ● H Position the No.1 camshaft bracket near the mounting position, and install it without disturbing the sealant applied to the surfaces. I J K SBIA0259E 4. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts in four steps in the order as shown. L Step 1 (bolts 9 - 11) : 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8) : 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 3 (bolts 1 - 11) : 5.9 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Step 4 (bolts 1 - 11) : 9.0 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.2 kg-m, 80 - 104 in-lb) CAUTION: After tightening camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive sealant from the parts listed below. ● Mating surface of rocker cover. ● Mating surface of front cover, when installed without the front cover. Revision: March 2005 EM-43 M SBIA0255E 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 5. Install camshaft sprockets. ● Install them by lining up the mating marks on each camshaft sprocket with the ones painted on the timing chain during removal. ● Before installation of chain tensioner, it is possible to re-match the marks on timing chain with the ones on each sprocket. CAUTION: ● Aligned mating marks could slip. Therefore, after matching them, hold the timing chain in place by hand. ● Before and after installing chain tensioner, check again to make sure that mating marks have not slipped. Camshaft sprocket mounting bolts 6. 7. 8. a. b. c. KBIA0115E : 128 - 156 N·m (13 - 16 kg-m, 94 - 115 ft-lb) Install chain tensioner. CAUTION: ● After installation, pull the stopper pin off completely, and make sure that the tensioner is fully released. Install chain guide. Install IVT control cover with the following procedure. Install IVT control solenoid valve to intake valve timing control cover. Install O-ring to front cover side. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant to the positions as shown in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SBIA0260E d. Install IVT control cover. ● Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown. 9. Check and adjust valve clearances. Refer to EM-45, "Valve Clearance" . 10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. KBIA0085E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION EBS00J4Y INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE CAUTION: ● Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT II and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to EC-169, "DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL" . ● Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil. 1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "ENGINE OIL" . 2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while checking. a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors if practical. 3. Remove IVT control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-37, "CAMSHAFT" . Revision: March 2005 EM-44 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 4. 5. 6. 7. Crank engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from IVT control cover oil hole. End cranking after checking. A WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.). EM CAUTION: ● Engine oil may squirt from IVT control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to preC vent engine oil from splashing on worker, engine components and vehicle. KBIA2683E ● Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components D such as drive belts or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil. Clean oil groove between oil strainer and IVT control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from E IVT control cover oil hole. Refer to LU-5, "LUBRICATION SYSTEM" . Remove components between IVT control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check each oil groove for clogging. F ● Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to LU-5, "LUBRICATION SYSTEM" . After inspection, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Valve Clearance EBS00J4Z INSPECTION ● 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform this inspection as follows after removal, installation, or replacement of the camshaft or any valverelated parts, or if there are any unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). Warm up the engine, then stop it. Remove front RH engine under cover using power tool. Remove the rocker cover using power tool. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation" . Turn crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to align TDC identification mark (without paint mark) with timing indicator. G H I J K L KBIA0190E 5. At this time, check that the both intake and exhaust cam lobes of No. 1 cylinder face outside. ● If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. KBIA0400J Revision: March 2005 EM-45 2005 Altima M CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 6. By referring to the figure (locations indicated with black arrow), measure valve clearances with a feeler gauge at locations marked X as shown in the table below. ● No.1 cylinder compression TDC. Cylinder Valve Measurable No.1 INT No.2 EXH INT × × × EXH No.3 INT No.4 EXH INT EXH x KBIA0248E ● Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between valve and camshaft. Valve clearance standard: Cold Intake : 0.24 - 0.32 mm (0.009 - 0.013 in) Exhaust : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) Hot* Intake : 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) Exhaust : 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) 7. 8. *Reference data at approximately 80°C (176°F) CAUTION: If inspection was carried out with cold engine, check that values with fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. Turn crankshaft one complete revolution (360°) and align mark on crankshaft pulley with pointer. By referring to the figure (locations indicated with black arrow), measure valve clearances with a feeler gauge at locations marked X as shown in the table below. ● No.4 cylinder compression TDC. Cylinder Valve No.1 INT Measurable EXH No.2 INT EXH x No.3 INT × KBIA0185E No.4 EXH INT EXH x × KBIA0249E 9. If out of specifications, adjust as follows. ADJUSTMENT ● ● 1. 2. 3. Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter. The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-37, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are outside the standard. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters with a micrometer. KBIA0057E Revision: March 2005 EM-46 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [QR25DE] 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. A ● Valve lifter thickness calculation. t = t1 + (C1 - C2) t = Thickness of replacement valve lifter. t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter. EM C1 = Measured valve clearance. C2 = Standard valve clearance. ● Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp C marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark 696 indicates a thickness of 6.96 mm (0.2740 in) Available thickness of valve lifter: 26 sizes with a range of D 6.96 to 7.46 mm (0.2740 to 0.2937 in), in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in), when assembled at the factory. Install the selected valve lifter. E Install camshaft. Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. Check that valve clearances for cold engine are within specificaKBIA0119E F tions, by referring to the specified values. After completing the repair, check valve clearances again with the specifications for warmed engine. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between the valve and camshaft. Make sure the values are within specifications. G Valve clearance standard: Cold Intake : 0.24 - 0.32 mm (0.009 - 0.013 in) Exhaust : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) Hot* Intake : 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) Exhaust : 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in) H I *: Reference data at approximately 80°C (176°F) J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-47 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] TIMING CHAIN Removal and Installation PFP:13028 EBS00J50 WBIA0305E 1. Oil rings 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 4. Chain tensioner 5. Spring 6. Chain tensioner plunger 7. Timing chain slack guide 8. Timing chain 9. Front cover 10. Chain guide 11. IVT solenoid valve 12. IVT cover 13. Engine mounting bracket 14. Crankshaft pulley bolt 15. Crankshaft pulley 16. Front oil seal 17. Balancer unit timing chain tensioner 18. Oil pump drive spacer 19. Crankshaft sprocket 20. Timing chain tension guide 21. Balancer unit timing chain 22. Balancer unit CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation. Revision: March 2005 EM-48 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. A Support the engine and transaxle assembly with suitable tools. Remove RH splash shield. Remove the upper and lower oil pan, and oil strainer. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" . Remove generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal" . Remove engine cover. Disconnect variable timing control solenoid harness connector. Remove engine ground. Remove the coolant overflow reservoir tank. Position the RH engine compartment fuse and relay box aside. Remove the RH engine mount and bracket. Refer to EM-71, "Removal and Installation" . Loosen bolts in the numerical order as shown. EM C D E F G WBIA0027E H a. Remove the IVT (intake valve timing) control cover using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) I J K WBIA0475E 12. Pull chain guide between camshaft sprockets out through front cover. L 13. Set the No.1 cylinder at TDC on the compression stroke with the following procedure: a. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise and align the mating marks to the timing indicator on the front cover. M KBIA0190E Revision: March 2005 EM-49 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] b. At the same time, make sure that the mating marks on the camshaft sprockets are lined up as shown. ● If not lined up, rotate the crankshaft pulley one more turn to line up the mating marks to the positions as shown. KBIA0115E 14. Remove crankshaft pulley with the following procedure: a. Hold the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool, then loosen the crankshaft pulley bolt, and pull the pulley out about 10 mm (0.39 in). KBIA0077E b. Attach suitable pulley puller in the M 6 (0.24 in diameter) thread hole on crankshaft pulley, and remove crankshaft pulley using a suitable puller. KBIA0078E 15. Remove the front cover with the following procedure: a. Loosen the bolts in the reverse order as shown, and remove them. b. Remove the front cover. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the mounting surface. 16. If the front oil seal needs to be replaced, lift it out with a screwdriver to remove it. WBIA0032E Revision: March 2005 EM-50 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] 17. Remove timing chain with the following procedure: a. Push in the tensioner plunger. Insert a stopper pin into the hole on the tensioner body to hold the chain tensioner. ● Use a wire of 0.5 mm (0.02 in) diameter as a stopper pin. b. Remove the chain tensioner. A EM C KBIA0048E c. Secure hexagonal part of the camshaft with a wrench and loosen the camshaft sprocket bolt and remove the camshaft sprocket for both camshafts. CAUTION: ● Do not rotate the crankshaft or camshafts while the timing chain is removed. It can cause damage to the valve and piston. D E F G KBIA0049E H 18. Remove the chain slack guide, tension guide, timing chain, and oil pump drive spacer. 19. Remove the timing chain tensioner for the balancer unit with the following procedure: a. Lift the tensioner lever up, and release the ratchet claw for installation. b. Push tensioner sleeve in, and hold it. c. Matching the hole on lever with the one on body, insert a stopper pin to secure tensioner sleeve. d. Remove the timing chain tensioner for the balancer unit. 20. Remove timing chain for balancer unit and crankshaft sprocket. I J K KBIA0121E L 21. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown, and remove balancer unit. ● Use Torx socket (size E14) CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble balancer unit. M KBIA0122E Revision: March 2005 EM-51 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Timing Chain Check the timing chain for cracks or serious wear. If a defect is detected, replace it. PBIC0282E Balancer Unit Bolt Outer Diameter ● ● ● Measure outer diameters (d1, d2) at the two positions as shown. Measure d2 within the range A. If the value difference (d1 - d2) exceeds the limit (a dimension difference is large), replace it with a new one. Limit : 0.15 mm (0. 0059 in) or more KBIA0126E INSTALLATION NOTE: ● There may be two color variations of the link marks (link colors) on the timing chain. ● There are 26 links between the gold/yellow mating marks on the timing chain; and 64 links between the camshaft sprocket gold/yellow link and the crankshaft sprocket orange/blue link, on the timing chain side without the tensioner. 1. Make sure the crankshaft key points straight up. 2. Install the balancer unit and tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown: CAUTION: ● When reusing a bolt, check its outer diameter before installation. Refer to EM-52, "Balancer Unit Bolt Outer Diameter" . Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) CAUTION: ● Check tightening angle with an angle wrench or a protractor. Do not make judgment by visual check alone. ● Apply new engine oil to threads and seating surfaces of bolts. Balancer unit bolts Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 (Loosen in reverse order or tightening) KBIA0122E : 45.2 - 51.0 N·m (4.6 - 5.2 kg-m, 34 - 37 ft-lb) : 90° - 95° degrees rotation (Target: 90° degrees) : 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb) WBIA0154E Revision: March 2005 EM-52 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] Step 4 Step 5 3. : 45.2 - 51.0 N·m (4.6 - 5.2 kg-m, 34 - 37 ft-lb) : 90° - 95° degrees rotation (Target: 90° degrees) A EM Install the crankshaft sprocket and timing chain for the balancer unit. ● Make sure that the crankshaft sprocket is positioned with mating marks on the block and sprocket meeting at the top. ● Install it by lining up mating marks on each sprocket and timing chain. C D E KBIA0123E 4. 5. Install timing chain tensioner for balancer unit. NOTE: Chain guide and tensioner move freely with the staking pin as the axle. Therefore, bolt hole position of the three points could be changed during removal. If points change, temporarily tighten the two bolts on the chain guide and move the tensioner to match the bolt holes. ● Be careful not to let mating marks of each sprocket and timing chain slip. ● After installation, make sure the mating marks have not slipped, then remove stopper pin and release tensioner. F G H KBIA0124E Install timing chain and related parts. ● Install by lining up mating marks on each sprocket and timing chain as shown. NOTE: Before installing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of mating mark on timing chain for that of each sprocket for alignment. CAUTION: For the above reason, after the mating marks are aligned, keep them aligned by holding them with a hand. ● Before and after installing chain tensioner, check again to make sure that mating marks have not slipped. ● After installing chain tensioner, remove stopper pin, and make sure the tensioner moves freely. ● To avoid skipped teeth, do not move crankshaft and camshaft until front cover is installed. J K L M SBIA0265E Revision: March 2005 EM-53 I 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] 6. Install new front oil seal to front cover, using suitable tool ● Install new oil seal in until it is flush with front end surface of front cover. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to cause damage to circumference of oil seal. SBIA0266E 7. a. b. c. Install front cover with the following procedure: Install O-rings to cylinder head and cylinder block. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to positions specified in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Make sure the mating marks on the timing chain and each sprocket are still aligned. Then install the front cover. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the front oil seal during installation with the front end of the crankshaft. SBIA0267E d. e. Tighten front cover bolts in the numerical order as shown. After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified torque. Front cover bolts : 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb) 8. CAUTION: Wipe off any excess sealant leaking at the surface for installing the oil pan. Install the chain guide between the camshaft sprockets. KBIA0083E Revision: March 2005 EM-54 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [QR25DE] 9. a. b. c. d. Install IVT cover with the following procedure: Install IVT solenoid valves to IVT cover. Install new oil rings to the intake camshaft sprocket insertion points on IVT control cover backside. Install new O-ring to front cover. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT cover as shown. ● Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to positions specified in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . A EM C D E SBIA0260E e. Tighten the IVT cover bolts in the numerical order as shown. IVT cover bolts F : 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9-10 in-lb) G H KBIA0085E I 10. Insert crankshaft pulley by aligning with crankshaft key. ● Tap its center with a plastic hammer to insert. ● Do not tap the belt hook. 11. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolts. ● Secure crankshaft pulley with a pulley holder to tighten the bolt. ● Perform angle tightening with the following procedure: a. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of bolts. b. Tighten to initial specifications:· Crankshaft pulley bolt initial tightening J K L : 37.3 - 47.1 N·m (3.8 - 4.8 kg-m, 28 - 34 ft-lb) c. Apply a paint mark on the front cover, mating with any one of six easy to recognize stamp marks on bolt flange. d. Turn crankshaft pulley bolt another 60° to 66° degrees [Target: 60° degrees]. ● Check vertical mounting angle with movement of one stamp mark. 12. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. M SBIA0268E Revision: March 2005 EM-55 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [QR25DE] OIL SEAL Removal and installation of Valve Oil Seal PFP:00100 EBS00J51 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-37, "REMOVAL" . Remove valve lifter. Refer to EM-37, "REMOVAL" . Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead center. This prevents valve from dropping inside cylinder. CAUTION: When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front cover with the timing chain. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool. Tool number : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) WBIA0477E 5. Remove valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959) WBIA0478E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip. Press in valve oil seal to the position shown using Tool. Tool number : KV10115600 (J-38958) WBIA0479E 3. Installation of the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-56 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [QR25DE] Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal EBS00J52 A REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the following parts: ● Engine under cover using power tools. ● Drive belts. Refer to EM-15, "DRIVE BELTS" . ● Crankshaft pulley. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" . Remove front oil seal from front cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch front cover. EM C D INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. E F G SBIA0266E H ● Install new oil seal in the direction shown. I J K SEM715A 2. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. L M Revision: March 2005 EM-57 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [QR25DE] Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal EBS00J53 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the transaxle. Refer to MT-17, "Removal and Installation" (M/T), AT-273, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (A/T). Remove flywheel (MT) or drive plate (AT). Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear oil seal retainer. WBIA0204E INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable drift. ● Install new oil seal in the direction shown. SEM715A ● Press fit new oil seal straight using a suitable drift, to avoid causing burrs or tilting. SBIA0280E ● Press in the new oil seal to the specified depth as shown. SBIA0281E 2. Installation of the remaining components in reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-58 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service PFP:11041 A EBS00J54 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Warm up the engine to full operating temperature. EM Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the ignition coil and spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" . C Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-ll). Disconnect the fuel injector harness connector to avoid any residual fuel injection during the measurement. D Install the compression tester with the adapter into the spark plug hole. E F G KBIA0130E H ● Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 in) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal. I J K SEM387C 7. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to the “START” position to crank over the engine. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. L Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / rpm M Standard Minimum 1,250 (12.8, 181.3) / 250 1,060 (10.8, 153.7) / 250 Difference limit between cylinders 100 (1.0, 14) / 250 CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine cranking speed. ● If the engine speed is out of specified rpm range, check the battery. Check engine speed again with a fully charged battery. ● If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again. ● If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. ● If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. ● If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. Revision: March 2005 EM-59 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] ● 8. If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the head gasket is leaking. In such a case, replace the cylinder head gasket. Install spark plug, ignition coil and harness connectors. Revision: March 2005 EM-60 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] Removal and Installation EBS00J55 A EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0225E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. Oil filler cap 4. PCV valve 5. Rocker cover 6. Rocker cover gasket 7. Valve spring retainer O-ring 8. Valve collet 9. 10. Valve spring 11. Valve oil seal 12. Valve guide 13. Spark plug tube 14. Cylinder head bolt Revision: March 2005 EM-61 15. Cylinder head gasket 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 16. Valve seat (EXH) 17. Valve (EXH) 19. Valve seat (INT) 20. Cylinder head 18. Valve (INT) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-48, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the camshafts. Refer to EM-37, "CAMSHAFT" . Remove spark plugs. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front suspension member refer to FSU-15, "FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER" . Position the power steering pump and reservoir aside. Disconnect the A/C compressor and position it out of the way with wire. Remove cylinder head loosening bolts in the order as shown, using power tool. If necessary to transfer to new cylinder head or remove for reconditioning, remove the intake manifold collector, intake manifold, and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-64, "Disassembly and Assembly" . WBIA0033E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts ● Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts with new ones. Limit (d1 - d2) ● : 0.23 mm (0.0091 in) or less If reduction of outer diameter appears in a position other than d2, use it as d2 point. KBIA0189E Revision: March 2005 EM-62 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] INSTALLATION A 1. Install a new cylinder head gasket. 2. Follow the steps below to tighten the cylinder head bolts in the numerical order as shown. CAUTION: ● If cylinder head bolts are re-used, check their outer diameters before installation. Refer to EM-62, "Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts" . Step a Step b Step c Step d Step e : 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb) : Loosen to 0 N·m in the reverse order of tightening. : 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb) : 75° clockwise : 75° clockwise EM C D KBIA0058E E Apply new engine oil to the threads and the seating surfaces of bolts. CAUTION: Check and confirm the tightening angle by using angle wrench or protractor. Avoid judgment by visual inspection without the tool. ● Tool number F G : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) H WBIA0033E I J K L WBIA0155E 3. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. M Revision: March 2005 EM-63 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] Disassembly and Assembly EBS00J56 WBIA0310E 1. Valve collet 2. Valve spring retainer 3. Valve spring (with valve spring seat) 4. Valve oil seal 5. Valve guide 6. Cylinder head 7. Valve seat (INT) 8. valve (INT) 9. Valve (EXH) 10. Valve seat (EXH) 11. Spark plug 12. Spark plug tube CAUTION: ● When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. ● Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces when installing the cylinder head, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft pulley and camshaft bracket. ● Attach tags to valve lifters so all parts are assembled in their original position. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove the valve lifter. ● Confirm installation point. Remove the valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool. Tool number 3. 4. : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) CAUTION: Do not remove valve spring seat from valve spring. Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve. ● Inspect valve guide clearance before removal. Refer to EM66, "VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE" . ● Confirm installation point. Remove valve oil seal using Tool. Revision: March 2005 EM-64 WBIA0477E 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] Tool number 5. 6. 7. 8. : KV10107902 (J-38959) A When valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-68, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . When valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-66, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . Remove spark plug using suitable tool. Remove spark plug tubes, if necessary using suitable tool. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage cylinder head. ● Do not remove spark plug tube if not necessary. Once removed, the spark plug tube cannot be reused because of deformation. EM C WBIA0478E D ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Tool number 4. E Install valve guide. Refer to EM-66, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . Install valve seat. Refer to EM-68, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . Install new valve oil seal using Tool. F : KV10115600 (J-38958) Install valve. ● Install larger diameter to intake side. G H WBIA0479E I 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a. b. c. Install valve spring. ● Install smaller pitch (valve spring seat side) to cylinder head side. ● Confirm the identification color of the valve spring: Intake: blue Exhaust: yellow Install valve spring retainer. Install valve collet using Tool. ● Compress valve spring with valve spring compressor. Install valve collet with magnet hand. ● Tap stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to check its installed condition. Install valve lifter. Install spark plug tube. Remove old liquid gasket from cylinder head side mounting hole. Apply liquid gasket all around on spark plug tube with a 12 mm (0.47 in) width from edge of spark plug tube on the press fit side. ● Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Press fit spark plug tube so that height is to ″H″ as shown. Press fit height ″H″ standard value J K L WBIA0072E M : 38.55 - 38.65 mm (1.518 - 1.522 in) SBIA0252E CAUTION: ● When press fitting be careful not to deform spark plug tube. ● After press fitting, wipe off any protruding liquid gasket on top surface of cylinder head. Revision: March 2005 EM-65 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 10. Install spark plug using suitable tool. Inspection After Disassembly EBS00J57 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION 1. 2. Wipe off oil and remove water scale deposits, old gasket, old sealer, and carbon with a scraper. CAUTION: Use care not to allow gasket debris to enter passages for oil or water. At each of several locations on bottom surface of cylinder head, measure distortion in six directions. Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less PBIC0075E VALVE DIMENSIONS Check dimensions of each valve. Refer to EM-100, "VALVE" . SEM188A VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE Perform this inspection before removing the valve guide. 1. Make sure that the valve stem diameter is within the specification. 2. Push the valve out by approximately 15 mm (0.59 in) toward the combustion chamber side to measure the valve's run-out volume (in the direction of dial gauge) with dial gauge. 3. Half of the run-out volume accounts for the valve guide clearance. Intake valve clearance Exhaust valve clearance : 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 0.0021 in) or less : 0.030 - 0.063 mm (0.0012 0.0025 in) or less PBIC0077E VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized (0.2 mm, 0.008 in) valve guide. Revision: March 2005 EM-66 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. A EM C SEM008A D 2. Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2.2 ton-force) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool. E F G SEM931C 3. Intake and exhaust valve guide hole diameter (Service) 4. H Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable reamer. : 10.175 - 10.196 mm (0.4006 - 0.4014 in) I Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. J K SEM932C 5. Press valve guide from camshaft side to dimensions as shown. L M PBIC0078E Revision: March 2005 EM-67 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 6. Apply finish to valve guide using suitable reamer. Intake and exhaust : 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 0.2369 in) SEM932C VALVE SEAT CONTACT NOTE: After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within specifications, perform this procedure: ● Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve contact on the seat surface. ● Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference. ● If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has NG conditions even after the re-check, replace the valve seat. SBIA0322E VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT NOTE: When valve seat is removed, replace with an oversized [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] valve seat. 1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in the cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this. 2. Ream cylinder head recess diameter for service valve seat. Intake Exhaust ● : 37.000 - 37.016 mm (1.4567 - 1.4573 in) : 32.000 - 32.016 mm (1.2598 - 1.2605 in) Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center. This will enable the valve seat to fit correctly. SEM795A 3. Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. SEM008A 4. Use valve seats cooled well with dry ice. Force fit valve seat into cylinder head. CAUTION: Avoid directly touching the cold valve seats. Revision: March 2005 EM-68 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] 5. Finish the seat to the specified dimensions using suitable tool. CAUTION: When using valve seat cutter, firmly grip the cutter handle with both hands. Then, press on the contacting surface all around the circumference to cut in a single drive. Improper pressure on the cutter or cutting many different times may result in a defective valve seat. A EM C SEM934C D Grind to obtain the dimensions indicated as shown. Standard D1 dia. D2 dia. D3 dia. D4 dia. D5 dia. D6 dia. E : 33.5 mm (1.3189 in) : 35.1 - 35.3 mm (1.382 - 1.390 in) : 39.0 - 39.2 mm (1.535 - 1.543 in) : 28 mm (1.10 in) : 29.9 - 30.1 mm (1.177- 1.185 in) : 33.5 - 33.7 mm (1.319 - 1.327 in) F G SBIA0226E 6. 7. Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting. Check again for normal contact. H VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS Set try square along the side of the valve spring and rotate the spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of the spring and the try square. Limit I : 1.9 mm (0.0748 in) J K PBIC0080E L VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD Check valve spring pressure with valve spring seat installed at specified spring height. Replace if not within specifications. CAUTION: Do not remove the valve spring seat. SEM113 Revision: March 2005 EM-69 2005 Altima M CYLINDER HEAD [QR25DE] STANDARD Free height Installation height Installation load Height during valve open Load with valve open Revision: March 2005 INTAKE (identification color: blue) EXHAUST (identification color: yellow) 44.84 - 45.34 mm (1.7654 - 1.7850 in) 45.28 - 45.78 mm (1.7827 - 1.8024 in) 35.30 mm (1.390 in) 35.30 mm (1.390) 151 - 175 Nm (15.4 - 17.8 kg-force, 34 - 39 lb-force) 151 - 175 Nm (15.4 - 17.8 kg-force, 34 - 39 lb-force) 24.94 mm (0.9819 in) 26.39 mm (1.0390 in) 358 - 408 N (36.5 - 41.6 kg-force, 80 - 92 lb-force) 325 - 371 N (33.1 - 37.8 kg-force, 73-83 lb-force) EM-70 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] ENGINE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:10001 A EBS00J58 EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0221E 1. LH transaxle mounting insulator (A/T) 2. LH transaxle mounting bracket (M/T) 3. LH transaxle mounting insulator (M/T) 4. RH engine mounting insulator Rear engine mounting insulator (orient by direction mark) Front suspension member 7. Front engine mounting insulator (orient by direction mark) Revision: March 2005 5. EM-71 6. 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] WARNING: ● Place chocks at the front and back of the rear wheels. ● For engines not equipped with slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts as described in the parts catalog. CAUTION: ● Do not start working until the exhaust system and coolant are cool. ● If items or work required are not covered by the engine main body section, refer to the applicable sections. ● Use the correct supporting points for lifting and jacking. Refer to GI-40, "LIFTING POINT" . ● In removing the drive shaft, be careful not to damage the grease seals on the transaxle. ● Before separating the engine and transaxle, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the assembly. ● Be sure not to damage the edge of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) or the ring gear teeth. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Disconnect the fuel rail at the fuel hose quick connector (engine side). Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Drain the engine oil. Refer to MA-18, "Changing Engine Oil" . Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the engine hood assembly. Refer to BL-13, "Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly" . Remove the battery, battery hold downs, and battery tray. Disconnect the engine room harness from the engine side and position it aside. Disconnect the engine harness ground connections. Access the connector through the glove box opening. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector. Remove the air duct and air cleaner case assembly. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the heater hoses. Remove engine cover using power tool. Remove the engine coolant reservoir tank, radiator and radiator fan assembly. Refer to CO-11, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect and set aside the IPDM/ER and remove the IPDM/ER bracket. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . Remove the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal" . Remove the engine under covers and splash shield using power tool. Dismount the A/C compressor with piping connected and secure with wire to the radiator support. Disconnect the engine wiring harness retainers and ground strap. Remove clutch operating cylinder from transaxle, and move it aside (M/T models). Disconnect the transaxle shift controls. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the left and right drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" . Dismount the power steering pump with piping connected and position it aside with wire. Install engine slingers into front left cylinder head and rear right cylinder head. ● Use alternator bracket bolt holes for the front slinger. ● Use the proper slingers and bolts as described in the Parts Catalog. Slinger bolts front Slinger bolts rear Revision: March 2005 : 51.0 - 64.7 N·m (5.2 - 6.5 kg-m, 38 - 47 ft-lb) : 24.5 - 31.4 N·m (2.5 - 3.2 kg-m, 18 - 23 ft-lb) EM-72 SBIA0271E 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] 25. Support engine and transaxle assembly with engine lifting equipment from the top with the vehicle raised on a hoist. A 26. Remove RH engine mounting insulator and bracket. 27. Remove LH transaxle mounting insulator through-bolts. EM 28. Lower the engine and transaxle assembly from the engine compartment. 29. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . 30. Separate engine and transaxle. C INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0036E ● ● Do not allow oil to get on mounting insulators. Be careful not to damage mounting insulators. If parts have a direction mark (arrow) this indicates front of the vehicle, and the parts must be installed according to the identification mark. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. Revision: March 2005 EM-73 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [QR25DE] ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. After cooling down engine, again check oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluids* Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage — Leakage — Fuel Exhaust gas *Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. Revision: March 2005 EM-74 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CYLINDER BLOCK Disassembly and Assembly PFP:11010 A EBS00J59 EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0481E 1. Cylinder block 2. O-ring 3. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 4. Knock sensor 5. Oil pressure switch 6. Lower cylinder block 7. Lower cylinder block bolt 8. Snap ring 9. Connecting rod 10. Connecting rod bearing 11. Connecting rod bearing cap 12. Connecting rod bearing cap bolt 13. Piston 14. Oil ring 15. Second ring 16. Top ring 17. Piston pin 18. Main thrust bearing 19. Main bearing upper 20. Crankshaft 21. Main bearing lower 22. Crankshaft rear oil seal 23. Pilot converter (A/T only) 24. Crankshaft signal plate 25. Drive plate 26. Reinforcement plate 27. Flywheel 28. Cylinder block heater (if equipped) Revision: March 2005 EM-75 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the engine and transaxle as an assembly from the vehicle, and separate the transaxle from the engine. Refer to EM-71, "Removal and Installation" . Mount the engine on a suitable engine stand. Drain any remaining engine oil and coolant from the engine. Remove the following components and associated parts. ● Exhaust manifold and three way catalyst assembly. Refer to EM-24, "Removal and Installation" . ● Intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-19, "Removal and Installation" . ● Intake manifold and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-19, "Removal and Installation" . ● Ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" . ● Rocker cover. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation" . ● Front cover, timing chain, and balancer unit. Refer to EM-48, "Removal and Installation" . ● Cylinder head. Refer to EM-61, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the knock sensor. CAUTION: Carefully handle the sensor and do not drop the sensor. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS). CAUTION: ● Avoid impacts such as a dropping. ● Do not disassemble. ● Keep it away from metal particles. ● Do not place sensor close to magnetic materials. WBIA0482E 7. 8. Remove the flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (A/T models). Hold the crankshaft with a stopper plate and use a suitable tool to remove the bolts. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the flywheel contact surface for the clutch disc. NOTE: ● The flywheel two-block construction allows movement in response to transmission side pressure, or when twisted in its rotational direction, therefore, some amount of noise is normal. KBIA0062E Remove pilot converter using Tool (A/T models). WBIA0483E Revision: March 2005 EM-76 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 9. a. Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies. A Position the crankshaft and corresponding connecting rod, to be removed, to the bottom dead center stroke. b. Remove the connecting rod cap. Number the cap so it can be assembled in the same position. EM c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push the piston and connecting rod assembly out of the top of the cylinder block. Number the piston and rod so it can be assembled in the same C position. ● Before removing the piston and connecting rod assembly, PBIC0259E check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-90, D "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" . 10. Remove the connecting rod bearings. If reusing, number them so they can be assembled in the same position and direction. E CAUTION: ● When removing them, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order. 11. Remove the piston rings from the piston. F ● Use a piston ring expander. CAUTION: ● When removing the piston rings, be careful not to damG age the piston. ● Be careful not to damage piston rings by expanding them excessively, if reusing them. H ● Before removing the piston rings, check the piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-91, "PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE" . PBIC0087E I 12. Remove the piston from the connecting rod as follows. a. Using a snap ring pliers, remove the two snap rings. J K L PBIC0260E b. M Heat the piston to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F) with a heat gun, or equivalent. PBIC0261E Revision: March 2005 EM-77 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] c. Push out piston pin with a punch of an outer diameter of approximately 19 mm (0.75 in). PBIC0262E 13. Remove the lower cylinder block bolts. ● Before loosening the lower cylinder block bolts, measure the crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-89, "CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE" . ● Loosen them in the order as shown to remove them. WBIA0037E 14. Remove the lower cylinder block. ● Cut the Silicone RTV Sealant and remove the lower cylinder block from the cylinder block, using Tool. Seal cutter KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mounting surface. SBIA0275E 15. Remove the crankshaft. CAUTION: ● Do not damage or deform the signal plate while mounted on the crankshaft. ● When setting the crankshaft on a flat surface, use a block of wood to avoid interference between the signal plate and the surface. ● Do not remove signal plate unless it is necessary. 16. Pull the rear oil seal out of the rear end of the crankshaft. CAUTION: Do not to damage the crankshaft or cylinder block when removing the rear oil seal. NOTE: When replacing the rear oil seal without removing the cylinder block, use a screwdriver to pull it out from between crankshaft and block. 17. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder block and lower cylinder block. CAUTION: Identify and number the bearings, if reusing them, so that they are assembled in the same position and direction. ASSEMBLY 1. Using compressed air, clean out the coolant and oil passages in the cylinder block, the cylinder bore and the crankcase to remove any foreign material. Revision: March 2005 EM-78 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CAUTION: Use approved safety glasses to protect your eyes. 2. Install the drain plugs on the cylinder block. ● Apply Silicone RTV Sealant. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Replace the copper washers with new ones. A EM C D WBIA0159E 3. a. b. Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings. Remove dust, dirt, and oil from the bearing mating surfaces of the cylinder block and lower cylinder block. Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 main bearing journal on the cylinder block. ● Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside). E F G PBIC0264E c. 4. Install the main bearings paying attention to their position and direction. ● The main bearing with an oil hole and groove goes on the cylinder block. The one without them goes on the lower cylinder block. ● Only the main bearing (on the cylinder block) for No. 3 journal has different specifications. ● Before installing the bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing friction surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it. SBIA0277E ● When installing, align the bearing stopper to the notch. ● Make sure that the oil holes on the cylinder block and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned. Install the signal plate to the crankshaft. Signal plate bolts a. b. 5. Revision: March 2005 EM-79 I J K L M : 12 - 14 N·m (1.22 - 1.43 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb) Position the crankshaft and signal plate using a positioning dowel pin, and tighten the bolts to specification. Remove the dowel pin. CAUTION: Be sure to remove dowel pin before installing the crankshaft. NOTE: Dowel pins for the crankshaft and signal plate are supplied as a set for each. Install the crankshaft onto the cylinder block. ● While turning the crankshaft by hand, check that it turns smoothly. H SBIA0278E 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 6. Install the lower cylinder block. ● Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to positions as shown. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . NOTE: Cylinder block and lower cylinder block are machined together. Neither of them can be replaced separately. CAUTION: After the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied, the lower cylinder block installation must be finished within 5 minutes. 7. a. b. Tighten lower cylinder block bolts in the numerical order as shown and according to the following steps: Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of the bolts. Tighten bolts No. 1 - 10 only in the order as shown, to specification below. First tightening, bolts 1 - 10 only c. : 36.3 - 42.2 N·m (3.7 - 4.3 kgm, 27 - 31 ft-lb) Tighten bolts No. 1 - 10 only in the order as shown, to specification below. CAUTION: Check tightening angle. Do not make judgment by visual inspection. Tool number : 60° - 65° degrees rotation (target: 60° degrees) Tighten bolts No. 11 - 22 only in the order as shown, to specification below. Third tightening, bolts 11 - 22 only ● ● ● 8. KBIA0063E : KV 10112100 (BT-8653-A) Second tightening, bolts 1 - 10 only d. WBIA0160E : 19.6 - 24.5 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 15 - 18 ft-lb) Wipe off completely any protruding Silicone RTV Sealant on the exterior of engine. Check crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-89, "CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE" . After installing the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft can be rotated smoothly by hand. WBIA0484E Install the rear oil seal. ● Press the oil seal between cylinder block and crankshaft with a suitable drift. ● Be careful not to touch the grease on the oil seal lip. ● Be careful not to cause scratches or burrs when pressing in the rear oil seal. SBIA0280E Revision: March 2005 EM-80 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] ● Press in rear oil seal to the position as shown. A EM C SBIA0281E D 9. a. b. c. Install the piston to the connecting rod. Assemble the components in their original positions. Using a snap ring pliers, install the snap ring to the grooves of the piston's rear side. ● Insert the piston pin snap ring fully into groove. Install the piston to the connecting rod. ● Using a heat gun, heat the piston [approximately 60° - 70 C° (140° - 158 °F)] until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excessive force. From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and the connecting rod. ● Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the oil holes and the cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown. Install the piston pin snap ring into the front of the piston. ● Check that the connecting rod moves smoothly. E F G H I PBIC0099E 10. Using a piston ring expander, install the piston rings. Assemble the components in their original positions. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the piston. ● Position each ring with the gap as shown, referencing the piston front mark as the starting point. ● Install the top ring and the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward. Stamped mark : A (top ring) : 2A (second ring) K L M PBIC0100E 11. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the connecting rod cap. Assemble the components in their original positions. ● When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing friction surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean the back. ● When installing, align the connecting rod bearing stopper protrusion with the notch of the connecting rod to install. ● Check the oil holes on the connecting rod and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned. PBIC0266E Revision: March 2005 EM-81 J 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 12. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft. Assemble the components in their original positions. Tool number : EM03470000 Rotate the crankshaft so the pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed is at the bottom dead center position. ● Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and crankshaft pin. ● Match the cylinder position number with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod for installation. ● Using a piston ring compressor, install the piston with the front WBIA0485E mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big end. 13. Install the connecting rod caps. Assemble the components in their original positions. ● Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting rod with those on the cap to install. ● SBIA0282E 14. Tighten the connecting rod bolt as follows: Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of the connecting rod bolts. CAUTION: Check tightening angle. Do not make judgment by visual inspection. Tool number Stage 1 Stage 2 : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) : 18.6 - 20.6 N·m (1.9 - 2.1 kg-m, 14 - 15 ft-lb) : Rotate bolts 85° - 95° degrees (target 90° degrees) WBIA0163E Check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-90, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" . ● After tightening the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. 15. Install flywheel (M/T Models), or drive plate (A/T Models). ● Install drive plate, reinforcement plate and pilot converter as shown. ● Using a drift with 33 mm (1.30 in) diameter, push pilot converter into the end of the crankshaft. ● KBIA0075E Revision: March 2005 EM-82 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 16. Install the knock sensor. ● Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor. ● Install the knock sensor with the connector facing lower left by 45° as shown. ● Do not tighten the bolts while holding the connector. ● Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other parts. Knock sensor bolt A EM C : 15.7 - 26.5 N·m (1.6 - 2.7 kg-m, 12 - 19 ft-lb) KBIA0069E D CAUTION: If the knock sensor is dropped, replace it with new one. 17. Install the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Crankshaft position sensor bolt E : 5.4 - 7.3 N·m (0.55 - 0.75 kg-m, 48 - 65 in-lb) F 18. Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. How to Select Piston and Bearing EBS00J5A DESCRIPTION Selection points Between cylinder block to crankshaft G Selection parts Selection items Main bearing grade (bearing thickness) Main bearing Selection methods Determined by match of cylinder block bearing housing grade (inner diameter of housing) and crankshaft journal grade (outer diameter of journal) Between crankshaft to connecting rod Connecting rod bearing Connecting rod bearing grade (bearing thickness) Combining service grades for connecting rod big end inner diameter and crankshaft pin outer diameter determine connecting rod bearing selection Between cylinder block to piston Piston and piston pin assembly (The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly) Piston grade (piston outer diameter) Piston grade = cylinder bore grade (inner diameter of bore) *Between piston to connecting rod — J K — HOW TO SELECT A PISTON When New Cylinder Block is Used: Check the cylinder bore grade on rear left side of cylinder block, and select a piston of the same grade. Revision: March 2005 I L — *For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference. ● The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts. ● For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table. ● For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the selective fitting parts, refer to the text. ● H EM-83 2005 Altima M CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] If there is a corrected stamp mark on the cylinder block, use it as a correct reference. ● SBIA0283E WBIA0074E When a Cylinder Block is Reused: 1. 2. Measure the cylinder block bore inner diameter. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the cylinder bore inner diameter of the "Piston Selection Table". Select the piston of the same grade. Piston Selection Table Unit: mm (in) Grade number (Mark) 2 (or no mark) 3 Inner diameter of cylinder bore 89.010-89.020 (3.5043-3.5047) 89.020-89.030 (3.5047-3.5051) Outer diameter of piston 88.990-89.000 (3.5035-3.5039) 89.000-89.010 (3.5039-3.5043) NOTE: ● The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. ● The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected. Only 0 grade is available. HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used: 1. Apply big end inside diameter grade stamped on connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". SBIA0282E Revision: March 2005 EM-84 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 2. 3. 4. Apply pin diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side to the column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". Apply the symbol obtained to connecting rod bearing grade table to select. A EM C KBIA0073E D When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused: 1. Measure dimensions of the big end inner diameter of connecting rod and outer diameter of crankshaft pin individually. 2. Apply the dimension measured to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table" below. Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table E F G H I J K L M KBIA0147E Revision: March 2005 EM-85 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table Grade Upper / Lower thickness mm (in) Identification color 0 1 2 3 1.499 / 1.495 (0.0590 / 0.0589) 1.503 / 1.499 (0.0592 / 0.0590) 1.507 / 1.503 (0.0593 / 0.0592) 1.511 / 1.507 (0.0595 / 0.0593) Black Brown Green Yellow Undersize Bearing Usage Guide ● ● When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearing, use undersize (US) bearing. When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Bearing Undersize Table Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 1.624 - 1.632 (0.0639 - 0.0643) CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, do not damage the fillet R (All crankshaft pins). KBIA0148E HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used: 1. "Main Bearing Selection Table" rows correspond to bearing housing grade on rear left side of cylinder block. ● If there is a corrected stamp mark on the cylinder block, use it as a correct reference. SBIA0283E 2. Apply journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side to column in "Main Bearing Selection Table". KBIA0073E 3. 4. Find value at crossing of row and column in "Main Bearing Selection Table". CAUTION: ● There are two main bearing selection tables. One is for odd-numbered journals (1, 3, and 5) and the other is for even-numbered journals (2 and 4). Make certain to use the appropriate table. This is due to differences in the specified clearances. Apply the symbol obtained to "Main Bearing Grade Table" to select. NOTE: ● Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower. Revision: March 2005 EM-86 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused: 1. 2. 3. Measure inner diameter of cylinder block main bearing housing and outer diameter of crankshaft journal. Apply measurement in above step 1 to the "Main Bearing Selection Table". Follow steps 3 and 4 in “When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used”. Main Bearing Selection Table (No.1, 3, and No.5 journals) A EM C D E F G H I J K L M KBIA0149E Revision: March 2005 EM-87 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Main Bearing Selection Table (No.2,and 4 journals) KBIA0150E Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals) Unit: mm (in) Grade number Thickness Identification color (UPR / LWR) 0 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) Black 1 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) Brown 2 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779- 0.0780) Green 3 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) Yellow 4 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) Blue 5 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) Pink 6 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) Purple 7 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) Orange Revision: March 2005 EM-88 Remarks Grade and color are the same for upper and lower bearings. 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 UPR 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) LWR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) UPR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) LWR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) UPR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) LWR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) UPR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) LWR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) UPR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) LWR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) UPR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) LWR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) UPR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) LWR 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) Black / Brown A Brown / Green EM Green / Yellow Yellow / Blue Grade and color are different for upper and lower bearings. C D Blue / Pink Pink / Purple E Purple / Orange F Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (U.S.) bearing when oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification. ● When using undersize (U.S.) bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with the bearing installed and grind journal until oil clearance falls within specification. Bearing Undersize Table ● G H Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 2.106 - 2.114 (0.0829 - 0.0832) I CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use an undersize bearing (all journals). J KBIA0148E Inspection After Disassembly EBS00J5B CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE ● ● L Using a dial gauge, measure the clearance between the thrust bearings and the crankshaft arm when the crankshaft is moved fully forward or backward. Standard Limit M : 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace the thrust bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace the crankshaft. PBIC0268E Revision: March 2005 K EM-89 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ● Measure side clearance between connecting rod and crankshaft arm using a feeler gauge. Standard Limit ● : 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in) : 0.50 mm (0.0197 in) If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace the connecting rod bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace the crankshaft also. KBIA0071E PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE Diameter of Piston Pin Bore ● Measure the diameter of piston pin bore using an inside micrometer. Refer to EM-105, "Available Piston" . PBIC0116E Outer Diameter of Piston Pin ● Measure outer diameter of piston pin using a micrometer. Refer to EM-105, "Piston Pin" . PBIC0117E Piston to Piston Pin Clearance (Piston pin clearance) = (Piston pin bore diameter) – (Outer diameter of piston pin) Standard ● ● ● : 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in) If clearance exceeds specification, replace either or both of piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each parts. Refer to piston selection table to replace piston/piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-83, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" . Refer to connecting rod bearing selection table to replace connecting rod. Refer to EM-84, "HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING" . Revision: March 2005 EM-90 WBIA0074E 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] NOTE: ● The connecting rod small end grade and piston pin hole (piston pin) grade are provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected. Only 0 grade is available. ● Refer to EM-92, "CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)" for the values for each grade at the plant. ● Regarding marks on piston head, Refer to EM-83, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" . A EM C SBIA0282E D PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ● ● Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove using a feeler gauge. Refer to EM-105, "Available Piston" . If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly. E F G SEM024AA H PISTON RING END GAP ● ● ● Check if inner diameter of cylinder bore is within specification. Refer to EM-94, "PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" . Insert piston ring until middle of cylinder with piston, and measure gap using a feeler gauge. Refer to EM-105, "Available Piston" . If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring. I J K SEM822B L CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ● Check with connecting rod aligner. Refer to EM-105, "CONNECTING ROD" . M SEM003F Revision: March 2005 EM-91 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] ● If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. SEM038F CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ● Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified torque, measure the connecting rod big end inner diameter using an inside micrometer. Refer to EM-105, "CONNECTING ROD" . PBIC0119E CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End) ● Measure inner diameter of bushing. Refer to EM-105, "CONNECTING ROD" PBIC0120E Outer Diameter of Piston Pin ● Measure outer diameter of piston pin. Refer to EM-105, "Piston Pin" . PBIC0117E Revision: March 2005 EM-92 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End) A (Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Outer diameter of piston pin) Standard ● ● : 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in) EM If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly. If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the "Piston Selection Table" to select the piston corresponding to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Refer to EM-83, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" . C SBIA0282E Factory Installed Parts Grading: ● Service parts apply only to grade 0. D E Unit: mm (in) Grade 0 1 Connecting rod small end inner diameter 20.000 - 20.006 (0.7874 - 0.7876) 20.006 - 20.012 (0.7876 - 0.7879) Piston pin outer diameter 19.989 - 19.995 (0.7870 - 0.7872) 19.995 - 20. 001 (0.7872 - 0.7874) Piston pin bore diameter 19.993 - 19.999 (0.7871- 0.7874) 19.999 - 20.005 (0.7874 - 0.7876) F G WBIA0074E H CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION ● ● Using a scraper, remove gasket on the cylinder block surface, and also remove oil, scale, carbon, or other contamination. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket debris to enter the oil or coolant passages. Measure the distortion on the block upper face at some different points in 6 directions. Limit ● I J K : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) If out of the distortion limit, replace the cylinder block. PBIC0121E L INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING ● ● Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-78, "ASSEMBLY" . Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of the main bearing housing. Standard ● : 58.944 - 58.967 mm (2.3206 - 2.3215 in) If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and lower cylinder block assembly. NOTE: These components cannot be replaced as a single unit because they were processed together. Revision: March 2005 M EM-93 PBIC0269E 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE Inner Diameter of Cylinder Bore ● ● ● Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-ofround and taper at 6 different points on each cylinder. (X and Y directions at A, B and C). The Y axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine. NOTE: When determining cylinder bore grade, measure cylinder bore at B position. Refer to EM-104, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . If the measured value rebore exceeds the limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone the inner wall. An oversize piston is provided. When using an oversize piston, rebore the cylinder so that the clearance of the piston cylinder satisfies the standard. Over size (OS) SBIA0284E : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) Outer Diameter of Piston ● Measure piston skirt diameter using a micrometer. Refer to EM105, "Available Piston" . PBIC0125E ● Measure point (distance from the top): 42 mm (1.65 in) Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance Calculate by outer diameter of piston skirt and inner diameter of cylinder (direction X, position B). (Clearance) = (Inner diameter of cylinder) – (Outer diameter of piston skirt). ● Standard Limit ● : 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in) : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in) If it exceeds the limit, replace piston/piston pin assembly. Reboring Cylinder Bore 1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”. Rebored size calculation: D = A + B - C D: Bored diameter A: Piston diameter as measured B: Piston-to-bore clearance (standard value) C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) 2. 3. ● ● Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted in final assembly. Cut cylinder bores. When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a time. Revision: March 2005 EM-94 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] 4. 5. ● Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. A OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL ● EM Measure outer diameter of crankshaft journals. Standard : 54.955 - 54.979 mm (2.1636 - 2.1645 in) C OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN ● Measure outer diameter of crankshaft pin. Standard D : 44.956 - 44.974 mm (1.7699 - 1.7706 in) E F PBIC0270E G OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT ● ● ● Measure the dimensions at four different points as shown on each journal and pin using a micrometer. Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in dimensions between "X" and "Y" at "A" and "B". Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between "A" and "B" at "X" and "Y". Limit Out-of-round (X - Y) Taper (A - B) H I : 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) : 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) J PBIC0128E CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ● ● ● K Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on both ends of the crankshaft. Place a dial gauge straight up on the No. 3 journal. While rotating the crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on the dial gauge, the total indicator reading. Limit L M : Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in) PBIC0271E Revision: March 2005 EM-95 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING Method of Measurement ● Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Using a inside micrometer measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing. (Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod bearing) – (Outer diameter of crankshaft pin) Standard Limit ● : 0.028 - 0.045 mm (0.0011 - 0.0018 in) : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard, grind crankshaft pin and use undersized bearing. Refer to EM-84, "HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING" . PBIC0119E Method of Using Plastigage ● ● ● ● Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of each bearing completely. Cut the Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never rotate the crankshaft. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearings, and using the scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width. EM142 NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the method by calculation. OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING Method of Measurement ● Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and bearing cap. Measure the main bearing inner diameter with the bearing cap bolt tightened to the specified torque. (Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of main bearing) – (Outer diameter of crankshaft journal) Standard: No. 1, 3, and 5 journals No. 2 and 4 journals Limit ● : 0.012 - 0.022 mm (0.0005 - 0.0009 in) : 0.018 - 0.028 mm (0.0007 - 0.0011 in) : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) If the measured value exceeds the limit, select main bearings referring to the main bearing inner diameter and crankshaft journal outer diameter, so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Refer to EM-86, "HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING" . Method of Using Plastigage ● ● ● ● Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely. Cut the Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Tighten the main bearing bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never rotate the crankshaft. Remove the bearing cap and bearings, and using the scale on the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width. EM142 Revision: March 2005 EM-96 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the "Method by Calculation". A CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING ● Standard ● EM When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. C : There must be crush height. If the standard is not met, replace main bearings. D SEM502G E OUTER DIAMETER OF LOWER CYLINDER BLOCK BOLT ● ● ● ● Perform only with M10 (0.39 in) bolts. Measure outer diameters (d1, d2) at two positions as shown. Measure d2 at a point within area A as shown. When the value of d1- d2 exceeds the limit (a large difference in dimensions), replace the bolt with a new one. Limit F G : 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) H I PBIC0272E J OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLT ● ● Measure outer diameter (d) at position as shown. When “d” exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace the bolt with a new one. Limit K L : 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) or less M PBIC0273E MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL) NOTE: ● Inspection for double mass flywheel only. ● Do not disassemble double mass flywheel. Flywheel Deflection ● Measure deflection of flywheel contact surface to the clutch with a dial gauge. Revision: March 2005 EM-97 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [QR25DE] ● Measure runout at 210 mm (8.27 in) dia. Limit ● Measure axial displacement at 250 mm (9.84 in) dia. Limit ● : 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less under no load : 1.3 mm (0.051 in) or less under 100N (22.48 lb) force When measured value exceeds the limit, replace the flywheel with a new one. SBIA0287E Movement Amount in Rotation Direction ● 1. ● 2. 3. 4. Check the movement amount in the following procedure. Install a bolt to clutch cover mounting hole, and place a torque wrench on the extended line of the flywheel center line. Tighten bolt to keep it from loosening at a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb). Put a mating mark on circumferences of the two flywheel masses without applying any load (measurement standard points). Apply a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb) in each direction, and mark the movement amount on the mass on the transmission side. Measure dimensions of movement amounts A and B on circumference of the flywheel on the transmission side. Standard ● : 35 mm (1.38 in) or less When measured value is outside the standard, replace flywheel. Revision: March 2005 EM-98 SBIA0288E 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00030 A EBS00J5C GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Cylinder arrangement Displacement cm3 Bore and stroke (in3 In-line 4 EM 2,488 (151.82) ) mm (in) 89.0 x 100 (3.50 x 3.94) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-3-4-2 Compression Number of piston rings C 2 Oil D 1 Compression ratio 9.5:1 Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / 250 rpm Standard 1,250 (12.8, 181.3) Minimum 1,060 (10.8, 153.7) Differential limit between cylinders E F 100 (1.0, 14) G H Valve timing I PBIC0187E Unit: degree a b c d e f 224° 244° 0° 64° 3° 41° J K DRIVE BELTS Tension of drive belts Auto adjustment by auto tensioner L INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD Unit: mm (in) Description Surface distortion Limit Intake manifold collector 0.1 (0.004) Intake manifold 0.1 (0.004) Exhaust manifold 0.3 (0.012) M SPARK PLUG Unit: mm (in) Make Type NGK Standard PLFR5A-11 Hot PLFR4A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 Gap (nominal) Revision: March 2005 1.1 (0.043) EM-99 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] CYLINDER HEAD Unit: mm (in) PBIC0283E Description Limit Head surface distortion 0.1 (0.004) VALVE Valve Dimensions Unit: mm (in) SEM188 Valve head diameter “D” Valve length “L” Valve stem diameter “d” Valve seat angle “α” Intake 35.5 - 35.8 (1.398 - 1.409) Exhaust 30.5 - 30.8 (1.201 - 1.213) Intake 97.16 (3.8252) Exhaust 98.82 (3.8905) Intake 5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354) Exhaust 5.955 - 5.970 (0.2344 - 0.2350) Intake 45°15′ - 45°45′ Exhaust Valve margin “T” Intake 1.1 (0.043) Exhaust 1.3 (0.051) Valve Clearance Unit: mm (in) Cold* (reference data) Hot Intake 0.24 - 0.32 (0.009 - 0.013) 0.32 - 0.40 (0.013 - 0.016) Exhaust 0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013) 0.33 - 0.41 (0.013 - 0.016) *: Approximately 20°C (68 °F) Revision: March 2005 EM-100 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Available Valve Lifter A EM C D KBIA0119E Thickness mm (in) Identification mark (Stamp) 6.96 (0.2740) 696 6.98 (0.2748) 698 7.00 (0.2756) 700 7.02 (0.2764) 702 7.04 (0.2772) 704 7.06 (0.2780) 706 7.08 (0.2787) 708 7.10 (02795) 710 7.12 (0.2803) 712 7.14 (0.2811) 714 7.16 (0.2819) 716 7.18 (0.2827) 718 7.20 (0.2835) 720 7.22 (0.2843) 722 7.24(0.2850) 724 7.26 (0.2858) 726 7.28 (0.2866) 728 7.30(0.2874) 730 7.32 (0.2882) 732 7.34 (0.2890) 734 7.36 (0.2898) 736 7.38 (0.2906) 738 7.40 (0.2913) 740 7.42 (0.2921) 742 744 (0.2929) 744 7.46 (0.2937) 746 E F G H I J K L M Valve Spring Free height standard mm (in) Pressure standard N (kg, lb) at height mm (in) Out-of-square Intake 44.84 - 45.34 (1.7654 - 1.7850) Exhaust 45.28 - 45.78 (1.7827 - 1.8024) Intake and Exhaust mm (in) Installation height mm (in) Revision: March 2005 151 - 175 (15.4 - 17.8, 34 - 39) at 35.30 (1.390) 1.9 (0.0748) Intake 35.30 (1.390) Exhaust 35.30 (1.390) EM-101 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Installation load N (kg - force, lb - force) Height during valve open mm (in) Load with valve open N (kg - force, lb - force) Intake 151 (15.4 - 17.8, 34 - 39) Exhaust 151 (15.4 - 17.8, 34 - 39) Intake 24.94 (0.9819) Exhaust 26.39 (1.0390) Intake 358 - 408 (36.5 - 41.6, 80 - 92) Exhaust 325 - 371 (33.1 - 37.8, 73 - 83) Valve Lifter Unit: mm (in) Description Standard Valve lifter outer diameter 33.965 - 33.980 (1.3372 - 1.3378) Lifter lifter bore inner diameter 34.000 - 34.021 (1.3386 - 1.3394) Clearance between lifter and lifter guide 0.020 - 0.056 (0.0008 - 0.0022) Valve Guide Unit: mm (in) PBIC0184E Description Valve guide Outer diameter Inner diameter (Finished size) Standard Service 10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950) 10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029) 6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369) 9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935) Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter Interference fit of valve guide 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014) 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023) Standard Valve guide clearance Projection length “L” Revision: March 2005 Intake 0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) or less Exhaust 0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025) or less Intake 10.1 - 10.3 (0.398 - 0.406) Exhaust 10.0 - 10.4 (0.394 - 0.409) EM-102 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Valve Seat Unit: mm (in) A EM C D PBIC0284E Description Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D) Valve seat interference fit Standard Service Intake 36.500 - 36.516 (1.4370 - 1.4376) 37.000 - 37.016 (1.4567 - 1.4573) Exhaust 31.500 - 31.516 (1.2402 - 1.2408) 32.000 - 32.016 (1.2598 - 1.2605) Intake F 0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044) Exhaust Valve seat outer diameter (d) E 0.084 - 0.116 (0.0033 - 0.0046) Intake 36.597 - 36.613 (1.4408 - 1.4415) 37.097 - 37.113 (1.4605 - 1.4611) Exhaust 31.600 - 31.616 (1.2441 - 1.2447) 32.100 - 32.116 (1.2638 - 1.2644) G CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING Unit: mm (in) H Standard Camshaft runout [TIR*] Less than 0.04 (0.0016) I J K L SEM671 Cam height “A” Intake 45.665 - 45.855 (1.7978 - 1.8053) Exhaust 43.975 - 44.165 (1.7313 - 1.7388) Outer diameter of camshaft journal No. 1 27.935 - 27.955 (1.0998 - 1.1006) No. 2, 3, 4, 5 23.435 - 23.455 (0.9226 - 0.9234) Inner diameter of camshaft bracket No.1 28.000 - 28.021 (1.1024 - 1.1032) No.2, 3, 4, 5 23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260) Camshaft journal clearance 0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034) Camshaft end play 0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074) Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] Less than 0.15 (0.0059) *: Total indicator reading Revision: March 2005 EM-103 2005 Altima M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] CYLINDER BLOCK Unit: mm (in) PBIC0281E Surface distortion Limit 0.1 (0.004) Standard Cylinder bore Inner diameter Grade No. 2 89.010 - 89.020 (3.5043 - 3.5047) Grade No. 3 89.020 - 89.030 (3.5047 - 3.5051) Wear limit 0.2 (0.008) Out-of-round (X − Y) Less than 0.015 (0.0006) Taper (C − A) Less than 0.01 (0.0004) Main journal inner diameter grade (Without bearing) Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 Difference in inner diameter between cylinders Standard Revision: March 2005 58.944 - 58.945 (2.3206 - 2.3207) 58.945 - 58.946 (2.3207 - 2.3207) 58.946 - 58.947 (2.3207 - 2.3207) 58.947 - 58.948 (2.3207 - 2.3208) 58.948 - 58.949 (2.3208 - 2.3208) 58.949 - 58.950 (2.3208 - 2.3209) 58.950 - 58.951 (2.3209 - 2.3209) 58.951 - 58.952 (2.3209 - 2.3209) 58.952 - 58.953 (2.3209 - 2.3210) 58.953 - 58.954 (2.3210 - 2.3210) 58.954 - 58.955 (2.3210 - 2.3211) 58.955 - 58.956 (2.3211 - 2.3211) 58.956 - 58.957 (2.3211 - 2.3211) 58.957 - 58.958 (2.3211 - 2.3212) 58.958 - 58.959 (2.3212 - 2.3212) 58.959 - 58.960 (2.3212 - 2.3213) 58.960 - 58.961 (2.3213 - 2.3213) 58.961 - 58.962 (2.3213 - 2.3213) 58.962 - 58.963 (2.3213 - 2.3214) 58.963 - 58.964 (2.3214 - 2.3214) 58.964 - 58.965 (2.3214 - 2.3215) 58.965 - 58.966 (2.3215 - 2.3215) 58.966 - 58.967 (2.3215 - 2.3215) 58.967 - 58.968 (2.3215 - 2.3216) Less than 0.03 (0.0012) EM-104 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] PISTON, PISTON RING, AND PISTON PIN Available Piston A Unit: mm (in) EM C D PBIC0188E Piston skirt diameter “A” Standard E Grade No. 1 88.980 - 88.990 (3.5031 - 3.5035) Grade No. 2 88.990 - 89.000 (3.5035 - 3.5039) Grade No. 3 89.000 - 89.010 (3.5039 - 3.5043) 0.20 (0.0079) oversize (service) 89.180 - 89.210 (3.5110 - 3.5122) “H” dimension G 42 (1.65) Piston pin bore diameter Grade No. 0 19.993 - 19.999 (0.7871 - 0.7874) Grade No. 1 19.999 - 20.005 (0.7874 - 0.7876) Standard Piston clearance to cylinder block F H 0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012) Limit 0.08 (0.0031) I Piston Ring Unit: mm (in) Side clearance End gap Standard Limit Top 0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031) 0.11 (0.0043) 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.10 (0.0039) Oil ring 0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053) — Top 0.21- 0.31 (0.0083 - 0.0122) 0.54 (0.0213) 2nd 0.32 - 0.47 (0.0126 - 0.0185) 0.67 (0.0264) Oil (rail ring) 0.20 - 0.60 (0.0079 - 0.0236) 0.95 (0.0374) K L M Piston Pin Unit: mm (in) Piston pin outer diameter Grade No.0 19.989 - 19.995 (0.7870 - 0.7872) Grade No.1 19.995 - 20.001 (0.7872 - 0.7874) Piston to piston pin clearance (Standard) Piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance 0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002) Standard 0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007) CONNECTING ROD Unit: mm (in) Center distance 143.00 - 143.10 (5.63 - 5.63) Bend [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.15 (0.0059) Torsion [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.30 (0.0118) Connecting rod small end inner diameter Revision: March 2005 22.000 - 22.012 (0.7874 - 0.7879) EM-105 J 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Connecting rod small end inner diameter* Grade No. 0 20.000 - 20.006 (0.7874 - 0.7876) Grade No. 1 20.006 - 20.012 (0.7876 - 0.7879) Connecting rod big end inner diameter Side clearance 48.000 - 48.013 (1.8898 - 1.8903) Standard 0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138) Limit Connecting rod bearing housing 0.50 (0.0197) Grade No. 0 Grade No. 1 Grade No. 2 Grade No. 3 Grade No. 4 Grade No. 5 Grade No. 6 Grade No. 7 Grade No. 8 Grade No. 9 Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C 48.000 - 48.001 (1.8898 - 1.8898) 48.001 - 48.002 (1.8898 - 1.8898) 48.002 - 48.003 (1.8898 - 1.8899) 48.003 - 48.004 (1.8899 - 1.8899) 48.004 - 48.005 (1.8899 - 1.8899) 48.005 - 48.006 (1.8899 - 1.8900) 48.006 - 48.007 (1.8900 - 1.8900) 48.007 - 48.008 (1.8900 - 1.8901) 48.008 - 48.009 (1.8901 - 1.8901) 48.009 - 48.010 (1.8901 - 1.8902) 48.010 - 48.011 (1.8902 - 1.8902) 48.011 - 48.012 (1.8902 - 1.8902) 48.012 - 48.013 (1.8902 - 1.8903) *: After installing in connecting rod CRANKSHAFT Unit: mm (in) SEM715 SEM645 Pin journal dia. “DP” Revision: March 2005 Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U 44.974 - 44.973 (1.7706 - 1.7706) 44.973 - 44.972 (1.7706 - 1.7705) 44.972 - 44.971 (1.7705 - 1.7705) 44.971 - 44.970 (1.7705 - 1.7705) 44.970 - 44.969 (1.7705 - 1.7704) 44.969 - 44.968 (1.7704 - 1.7704) 44.968 - 44.967 (1.7704 - 1.7704) 44.967 - 44.966 (1.7704 - 1.7703) 44.966 - 44.965 (1.7703 - 1.7703) 44.965 - 44.964 (1.7703 - 1.7702) 44.964 - 44.963 (1.7702 - 1.7702) 44.963 - 44.962 (1.7702 - 1.7702) 44.962 - 44.961 (1.7702 - 1.7701) 44.961 - 44.960 (1.7701 - 1.7701) 44.960 - 44.959 (1.7701 - 1.7700) 44.959 - 44.958 (1.7700 - 1.7700) 44.958 - 44.957 (1.7700 - 1.7700) 44.957 - 44.956 (1.7700 - 1.7699) EM-106 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] Main journal dia. “Dm” grade Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 54.979 - 54.978 (2.1645 - 2.1645) 54.978 - 54.977 (2.1645 - 2.1644) 54.977 - 54.976 (2.1644 - 2.1644) 54.976 - 54.975 (2.1644 - 2.1644) 54.975 - 54.974 (2.1644 - 2.1643) 54.974 - 54.973 (2.1643 - 2.1643) 54.973 - 54.972 (2.1643 - 2.1642) 54.972 - 54.971 (2.1642 - 2.1642) 54.971 - 54.970 (2.1642 - 2.1642) 54.970 - 54.969 (2.1642 - 2.1641) 54.969 - 54.968 (2.1641 - 2.1641) 54.968 - 54.967 (2.1641 - 2.1641) 54.967 - 54.966 (2.1641 - 2.1640) 54.966 - 54.965 (2.1640 - 2.1640) 54.965 - 54.964 (2.1640 - 2.1639) 54.964 - 54.963 (2.1639 - 2.1639) 54.963 - 54.962 (2.1639 - 2.1639) 54.962 - 54.961 (2.1639 - 2.1638) 54.961 - 54.960 (2.1638 - 2.1638) 54.960 - 54.959 (2.1638 - 2.1637) 54.959 - 54.958 (2.1637 - 2.1637) 54.958 - 54.957 (2.1637 - 2.1637) 54.957 - 54.956 (2.1637 - 2.1636) 54.956 - 54.955 (2.1636 - 2.1636) Center distance “r” EM C D E F G 49.60 - 50.04 (1.9528 - 1.9701) Out-of-round (X − Y) Standard Less than 0.005 (0.0002) Taper (A − B) Standard Less than 0.005 (0.0002) Runout [TIR*] Limit Free end play A H Less than 0.05 (0.002) Standard 0.10 - 0.26 (0.0039 - 0.0102) Limit I 0.30 (0.0118) *: Total indicator reading J MAIN BEARING Unit: mm (in) K L M SEM685D Grade number Thickness Identification color (UPR / LWR) 0 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) Black 1 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) Brown 2 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) Green 3 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) Yellow 4 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) Blue 5 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) Pink 6 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) Purple 7 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) White Revision: March 2005 EM-107 Remarks Grade and color are the same for upper and lower bearings. 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 UPR 1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778) LWR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) UPR 1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779) LWR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) UPR 1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780) LWR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) UPR 1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781) LWR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) UPR 1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783) LWR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) UPR 1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784) LWR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) UPR 1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785) LWR 1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786) Black / Red Red / Green Green / Yellow Grade and color are different for upper and lower bearings. Yellow / Blue Blue / Pink Pink / Purple Purple / Orange Undersize Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 2.106 - 2.114 (0.0829 - 0.0832) Main journal diameter Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. Bearing Clearance Unit: mm (in) Standard Main bearing oil clearance No.1, 3, and 5 0.012 - 0.022 (0.0005 - 0.0009) No.2 and 4 0.018 - 0.028 (0.0007 - 0.0011) Limit 0.1 (0.004) CONNECTING ROD BEARING Grade number Thickness mm (in) Identification color (mark) 0 1.499 - 1.495 (0.0590 - 0.0589) Black 1 1.503 - 1.499 (0.0592 - 0.0590) Brown 2 1.507 - 1.503 (0.0593 - 0.0592) Green 3 1.511 - 1.507 (0.0595 - 0.0593) Yellow Undersize Unit: mm (in) Size U.S. Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 1.624 - 1.632 (0.0639 - 0.0643) Crank pin journal diameter Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. Bearing Clearance Unit: mm (in) Connecting rod bearing clearance Revision: March 2005 Standard 0.028 - 0.045 (0.0011 - 0.0018) Limit 0.10 (0.0039) EM-108 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ35DE] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EBS00J5D The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EM with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. C WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. F Precautions for Drain Coolant ● EBS00J5E Drain coolant when engine is cooled. G Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ● ● ● Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area. Release fuel pressure before disassembly. After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage. Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EBS00J5G EBS00J5I Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification. When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, do exactly as specified. Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring. Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction and blockage. Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust. Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well. Release air within route after draining coolant. Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections. Revision: March 2005 EM-109 I J K L EBS00J5H Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and replace if necessary. Precautions for Assembly and Installation ● H When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or uninstructed operations. Exercise maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces. Cover openings of engine system with tape or the equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials. Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly. When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be used where noted in the step. Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ● EBS00J5F 2005 Altima M PRECAUTIONS [VQ35DE] ● After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems for leakage. Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ● – – – – ● ● ● EBS00J5J Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts: Cylinder head bolts Main bearing cap bolts Connecting rod cap nuts Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angular tightening) Do not use a torque value for final tightening. The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step. Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil. Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00MXT REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and remove the sealant using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ● In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap (1) the cutter where the RTV Silicone Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the cutter (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface. ● Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . PBIC0003E Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified location. Tube presser ● ● ● ● ● WS39930000 ( – ) If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of this manual. Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component. If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. Do not retighten after the installation. Revision: March 2005 EM-110 WBIA0567E 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ35DE] ● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . A EM C SEM159F D CAUTION: Follow all specific instructions in this manual. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-111 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ35DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00J5L The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST0501S000 ( — ) Engine stand assembly 1 ST05011000 ( — ) Engine stand 2 ST05012000 ( — ) Base Disassembling and assembling NT042 Engine and transmission assembly removal KV101J0010 (J-47242) Engine support table WBIA0658E KV10106500 ( — ) Engine stand shaft NT028 KV10117000 (J-41262) Engine sub-attachment KV10117000 has been replaced with KV10117001 (KV10117000 is no longer in production, but it is usable). NT373 KV10117001 ( — ) Engine sub-attachment Installing on the cylinder block NT372 ST10120000 (J-24239-01) Cylinder head bolt wrench Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt a: 13 (0.51) dia. b: 12 (0.47) c: 10 (0.39) Unit: mm (in) NT583 Revision: March 2005 EM-112 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ35DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10116200 (J-26336-A) Valve spring compressor 1 KV10115900 (J-26336-20) Attachment Disassembling valve mechanism A EM C NT022 KV10107902 (J-38959) Valve oil seal puller Removing valve oil seal D E S-NT011 (J-39386) Valve oil seal drift F Installing valve oil seal G H NT024 EM03470000 (J-8037) Piston ring compressor Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore I J NT044 ST16610001 (J-23907) Pilot bushing puller Removing crankshaft pilot bushing K L NT045 — (J-47128) Seal installer Installing rear main seal M LBIA0452E KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case NT046 Revision: March 2005 EM-113 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ35DE] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description WS39930000 ( — Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket ) NT052 KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Angle wrench Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder head, etc. NT014 — (J-44626) Air fuel sensor Socket Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio A/F sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in) LBIA0444E KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in) NT636 KV10117700 (J-44716) Ring gear stopper Removing and installing crankshaft pulley NT822 KV10109300 Pulley holder a: 68 mm (2.68 in) b: 8 mm (0.31 in) NT628 Revision: March 2005 EM-114 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ35DE] Commercial Service Tools EBS00J5M A (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (BT-3373-F) Belt tension gauge Checking drive belt tension EM C AMA126 Power tool D Loosening bolts and nuts E F PBIC0190E Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plug G H NT047 Valve seat cutter set Finishing valve seat dimensions I J NT048 Piston ring expander Removing and installing piston ring K L NT030 Valve guide drift Removing and installing valve guide Intake & Exhaust: a = 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia. b = 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia. NT015 Valve guide reamer Reaming valve guide 1 or hole for oversize valve guide 2 Intake & Exhaust: d1 = 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia. d2 = 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia. NT016 Revision: March 2005 EM-115 2005 Altima M PREPARATION [VQ35DE] (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.) a = J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for zirconia oxygen sensor b = J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for titania oxygen sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 KV991J0100 (J-46531) T55 Torx® Bit Removing and installing A/T drive plate and M/T flywheel bolts LBIA0286E Revision: March 2005 EM-116 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [VQ35DE] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise PFP:00003 A EBS00J5N EM C D E F G H I J K L M SEM706G Revision: March 2005 EM-117 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [VQ35DE] Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. 1. 2. 3. 4. EBS00J5O Locate the area where noise occurs. Confirm the type of noise. Specify the operating condition of engine. Check specified noise source. Repair or replace the identified part as necessary. Operating condition of engine Location of noise Top of engine Rocker cover Cylinder head Crankshaft pulley Cylinder block (Side of engine) Oil pan Front of engine Timing chain cover Front of engine Type of noise Source of noise Reference page Before warmup After warmup When starting When idling When racing While driving Ticking or clicking C A — A B — Tappet noise Valve clearance EM-191 Rattle C A — A B C Camshaft bearing noise Camshaft journal clearance Camshaft runout EM-182 Slap or knock — A — B B — Piston pin noise Piston and piston pin clearance Connecting rod bushing clearance EM-200 A Piston slap noise Piston-to-bore clearance Piston ring side clearance Piston ring end gap Connecting rod bend and torsion EM-224 Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small end) Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end) EM-224 Slap or rap A — — B B Check item Knock A B C B B B Connecting rod bearing noise Knock A B — A B C Main bearing noise Main bearing oil clearance Crankshaft runout EM-224 B Timing chain and chain tensioner noise Timing chain cracks and wear Timing chain tensioner operation EM-161 C Drive belts (Sticking or slipping) Drive belts deflection Tapping or ticking A A — B B Squeaking or fizzing A Creaking A B A B A B Drive belts (Slipping) Idler pulley bearing operation Squall Creak A B — B A B Water pump noise Water pump operation A: Closely related B: Related Revision: March 2005 B — C: Sometimes related B — EM-119 CO-37 —: Not related EM-118 2005 Altima DRIVE BELTS [VQ35DE] DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts PFP:02117 A EBS00J5P EM C D E F LBIA0076E 1. 2. 3. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one. Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway between pulleys as shown. Rotate the crankshaft pulley two times then check the belt tension using Belt Tension Gauge (BT3373-F or equivalent). NOTE: Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. Belt Deflection and Tension Used belt Power steering pump Limit After adjustment 7 (0.28) 4.2 - 4.6 (0.17 - 0.18) 11 (0.43) 7.3 - 8.0 (0.29 - 0.31) Applied pushing force Unit: mm (in) Tension adjustment* I Unit: N (kg, lb) Used belt New belt New belt Limit After adjustment 3.7 - 4.1 (0.15 - 0.16) 294 (30, 66) 730 - 818 (74.5 - 83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.5 - 94.5, 188 - 208) 6.5 - 7.2 (0.26 - 0.28) 196 (20, 44) 495 - 583 (50.5 - 59.5, 111 - 131) 603 - 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.4) 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) — *: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt. Revision: March 2005 H J Deflection adjustment Alternator and air conditioning compressor G EM-119 2005 Altima K L M AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT [VQ35DE] AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation PFP:16500 EBS00J5Q WBIA0524E 1. Resonator 2. Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube 3. Grommet 6. Air cleaner case (lower) 4. Mass air flow sensor 5. Air cleaner case (upper) 7. Air cleaner case mounting bracket 8. Resonator in fender REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator and at the fresh air intake tube. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ● Do not shock it. ● Do not disassemble it. ● Do not touch its sensor. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CHANGING AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 1. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and lift up the air cleaner case (upper). Revision: March 2005 EM-120 2005 Altima AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT [VQ35DE] 2. 3. 4. Remove the air cleaner element. Install a new air cleaner element. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A EM C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-121 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR [VQ35DE] INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR Removal and Installation PFP:14010 EBS00J5R WBIA0592E Revision: March 2005 EM-122 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR [VQ35DE] 1. Electric throttle control actuator 2. Intake manifold collector (upper) 3. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve 4. Intake manifold collector (lower) 5. Power valve 6. VIAS control solenoid valve 7. Vacuum tank 8. Service port 9. Fuel hose 10. Gasket 11. EGR temperature sensor 12. EGR tube (to lower intake manifold collector) 13. EGR volume control valve 14. EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) 15. EGR volume control valve bracket 16. Intake manifold collector (lower) support bracket 17. EGR volume control valve cover EM C REMOVAL D WARNING: ● To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot. ● The gasket for intake manifold collector (upper) is secured together with intake manifold collector (lower) bolt. Thus, when replacing only the upper gasket the lower gasket must also be replaced. 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . 3. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 4. Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air intake tube as an assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 6. Disconnect the following: ● Power brake booster vacuum hose ● Coolant hoses from the intake manifold collector ● Swirl control vacuum lines to power valve and intake manifold collector upper ● Fuel injector electrical connectors ● PCV hose ● Electric throttle control actuator electrical connector ● EVAP canister purge hose ● EGR temperature sensor electrical connector CAUTION: ● Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. 7. Remove the EGR tube (to lower intake manifold collector) nuts. WBIA0326E 8. Disconnect the power steering hose bracket from the rear of the intake manifold collector. 9. Remove the EVAP canister purge volume solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside. 10. Remove the VIAS control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside. 11. Remove the vacuum tank. 12. Remove the intake manifold collector support bracket from the back of the intake manifold collector using power tool. Revision: March 2005 A EM-123 2005 Altima E F G H I J K L M INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR [VQ35DE] 13. Loosen the intake manifold collector bolts in the order as shown using power tool, and remove the intake manifold collector and gasket. WBIA0285E 14. If necessary, remove the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the order as shown and remove the electric throttle control actuator. CAUTION: ● Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator. ● Do not disassemble. SEM711G 15. If necessary, remove the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the order as shown, using power tool and remove the intake manifold collector. CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator, if installed. SEM712G 16. If necessary, remove power valve bolts in the order as shown and remove the power valve. NOTE: The power valve must be held in the closed position during installation. 17. If necessary remove the following components: ● Vacuum tank ● VIAS control solenoid valve ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve SEM714G INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: NOTE: After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows: 1. Perform the ″Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning″ when harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 2. Perform the ″idle Air Volume Learning″ when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Revision: March 2005 EM-124 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR [VQ35DE] ● If necessary, install power valve bolts in the order as shown. Power valve bolts A : 17.6 - 21.6 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb) EM C SEM714G ● D If necessary, tighten the intake manifold collector pipe bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector pipe bolts : 17.6 - 21.6 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb) E F G SEM712G ● If necessary, install the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the order as shown. Install gasket with three protrusions facing down. Electric throttle control actuator bolts H : 7.2 - 9.6 N·m (0.74 - 0.97 kg-m, 64 - 84 in-lb) I J SEM711G ● K Install the intake manifold collector bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector bolts : 17.6 - 21.6 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb) L M SEM713G Revision: March 2005 EM-125 2005 Altima EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ35DE] EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Removal and Installation PFP:14710 EBS00J5S WBIA0591E 1. Gasket 2. EGR temperature sensor 3. EGR tube (to lower intake manifold collector) 4. EGR volume control valve 5. EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) 6. EGR volume control valve bracket 7. Coolant lines 8. EGR volume control valve cover Revision: March 2005 EM-126 2005 Altima EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ35DE] REMOVAL A Remove the engine cover using power tool. Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air intake tube as an assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . EM 3. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . CAUTION: C Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. 4. Disconnect the EGR temperature sensor electrical connector D and bracket. 5. If necessary, remove the EGR temperature sensor. 6. Disconnect the EGR volume control valve electrical connector. E 7. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector) bolts at the intake manifold collector. 8. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector) bolts at the F EGR volume control valve and remove the tube. 9. Loosen the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve fitting. G 10. If necessary remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) as folWBIA0326E lows: a. Remove the front cowl grille. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and H Installation" . b. Remove the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . I c. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve fitting. d. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1). J e. Remove the RH heat shield. f. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to exhaust manifold fitting. 11. Disconnect the coolant lines at the EGR volume control valve. K 12. Remove the EGR volume control valve bolts and the valve. 1. 2. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. L M Revision: March 2005 EM-127 2005 Altima EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE [VQ35DE] ● Install the RH heat shield bolts. RH heat shield bolts : 5.1 - 6.5 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) LBIA0346E Revision: March 2005 EM-128 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [VQ35DE] INTAKE MANIFOLD Removal and Installation PFP:14003 A EBS00J5T EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0166E 1. Electric throttle control actuator 2. Intake manifold collector (upper) 3. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve 4. Intake manifold collector (lower) 5. Power valve 6. VIAS control solenoid valve 7. Fuel tube 8. Fuel damper 9. Vacuum tank Revision: March 2005 EM-129 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [VQ35DE] 10. Intake manifold 11. Service port 13. O-ring 14. Fuel damper 12. Gasket REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot. 1. Remove the engine cover with power tool. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air intake tube as an assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 5. Disconnect fuel tube quick connector at vehicle piping side. 6. To remove the quick connector cap, hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. NOTE: If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. SFE562A ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the tube during removal or installation. ● Do not remove the remaining retainer on the tube ● When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one. ● To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials entering, cover the ends of the fuel tubes with plastic bags or something similar. 7. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose, the coolant hoses from the electric throttle control actuator, the swirl control vacuum lines, the fuel injectors electrical connectors, and the PCV hose. CAUTION: ● Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. PBIC0163E 8. Disconnect the electric throttle control actuator electrical connectors. 9. Remove the cowl top grille and the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . 10. Disconnect the power steering hose bracket. 11. Remove the vacuum tank from the back of the intake manifold collector. 12. Remove the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator by loosening the four bolts in a diagonal pattern. CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator. Revision: March 2005 EM-130 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [VQ35DE] 13. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, and remove the intake manifold collector with power tool. 14. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the intake manifold. Remove the fuel injector O-rings and use new O-rings for installation. A EM C WBIA0285E D 15. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, and remove the intake manifold with power tool. E F G WBIA0043E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL H Surface Distortion ● Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of both the intake manifold and the intake manifold collector. I Standard : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) J K WBIA0052E INSTALLATION L Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Follow the procedures below for specific tightening sequences and procedures. ● Install intake manifold bolts in two stages in the numerical order as shown. M Stage 1 Stage 2 : 5- 10 N·m (0.5 - 1.0 kg-m, 44 - 86 in-lb) : 26 - 31 N·m (2.7 - 3.2 kg-m, 20 - 23 ft-lb) SEM950F Revision: March 2005 EM-131 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [VQ35DE] ● Seat the fuel injectors into the intake manifold with new O-rings. Tighten the fuel rail bolts as shown, in two stages: Stage 1 Stage 2 : 9.3 - 10.8 N·m (0.95 - 1.1 kg-m, 83 - 95 in-lb) : 20.6 - 26.5 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb) WBIA0167E ● Install the intake manifold collector bolts in the numerical order as shown. Intake manifold collector bolts : 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb SEM713G ● Tighten the bolts of the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator assembly equally and diagonally to specification. Intake manifold collector pipe bolts : 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb) NOTE: After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows: 1. Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 2. Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . ● Install the quick connector as follows: – Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector and that there is no damage. – Align the center to insert the quick connector straight onto the fuel tube. – Insert the fuel tube until a click is heard. – Install the quick connector cap on the quick connector joint. Align the arrow mark on the quick connector cap to the upper side. – Install the fuel hose into the hose clamp. PBIC0662E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. Revision: March 2005 EM-132 2005 Altima INTAKE MANIFOLD [VQ35DE] NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. A CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. ● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC- EM 711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . ● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-133 2005 Altima EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [VQ35DE] EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation PFP:14004 EBS00J5U WBIA0267E 1. Exhaust manifold (RH bank) Exhaust manifold (LH bank) 3. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) 4. Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 5. 2) Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) 6. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 7. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (front) (bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (front) (bank 2) Revision: March 2005 2. 8. EM-134 2005 Altima EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [VQ35DE] REMOVAL A WARNING: ● Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down. ● When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up EM slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to EM-220, "REMOVAL" . 1. Remove the front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Remove the engine undercover. C 3. Remove the inner wheel well splash shields. 4. Remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" . D 6. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" . 7. Remove the RH and LH three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown. E F G PBIC1174E 8. a. b. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2). Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the bracket and middle clamp. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors using Tool. Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) : — (J-44626) WBIA0288E EM-135 I J CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors. ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 9. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst heat shields with power tool. 10. Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by loosening the bolts first and then removing the nuts and through bolts. 11. Remove the exhaust manifolds. Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. Revision: March 2005 H 2005 Altima K L M EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [VQ35DE] WBIA0289E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ● Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating surfaces. Limit : 0.15mm (0.006 in) PBIC1173E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. Exhaust manifold nuts : 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.3 kg-m, 21 - 24 lb-ft) CAUTION: ● When using the heated oxygen sensor wrench, tighten to the middle of specified torque range, because the length of the Tool may increase the actual tightness. Do not tighten to the maximum specified torque range. Tool numbers ● WBIA0277E Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold threads using the oxygen sensor thread cleaner tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool numbers ● : KV10114400 (J-38365) : — (J-44626) : J-43897-18 : J-43897-12 Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage. WBIA0278E Revision: March 2005 EM-136 2005 Altima EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST [VQ35DE] ● Install the RH and LH three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown. Three way catalyst support bolts A : 19 - 25 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb) EM C PBIC1174E ● Exhaust manifold heat shield bolts ● D Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts. : 5.1 - 6.5 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) E Install the three way catalyst heat shield bolts. Three way catalyst heat shield bolts : 6.7 - 9.8 N·m (0.69 - 0.99 kg-m, 60 - 86 in-lb) F G H I J LBIA0346E K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-137 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [VQ35DE] OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Removal and Installation PFP:11110 EBS00J5V WBIA0593E 1. Gasket 2. Upper oil pan 3. O-ring 4. Oil pressure switch (non SE-R) / Oil pressure sensor (SE-R) 5. Relief valve 6. Oil cooler 7. Oil cooler connection 8. Oil filter 9. Gasket 10. Oil strainer 11. Gasket 12. Drain plug 13. Lower oil pan 14. Rear plate cover 15. 16. Heated oxygen sensor (bank 2) harness clamp Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (4 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (5 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (5 17. 18. A/T & M/T) A/T) A/T) shield 19. Oil pan baffle REMOVAL WARNING: ● You should not remove the oil pan until the exhaust system and cooling system have completely cooled off. ● When removing the front and rear engine through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to step 37 in EM-220, "REMOVAL" . CAUTION: When removing the upper oil pan from the engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Be careful not to damage sensor edges or signal plate teeth. 1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-4, "WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY" . 2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the oil dipstick. 4. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT"MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 5. Remove the engine undercover. Revision: March 2005 EM-138 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [VQ35DE] 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. A Remove the A/C drive belt. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" . Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove coolant pipe bolts. EM Remove the A/C compressor with piping attached, and position it out of the way securely with wire. CAUTION: Do not pull on or crimp the A/C lines and hoses. C Disconnect the coolant lines from the engine oil cooler and plug them to prevent coolant loss. Remove the oil filter and engine oil cooler from the upper oil pan. Remove the oil pressure switch/sensor, and the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the upper oil pan. D Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the heated oxygen sensors and air flow ratio (A/F) sensors and remove the two catalytic con- E vertors from the exhaust manifolds using power tool. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the rear plate cover from the upper oil pan. F G H SEM717G I 18. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown. Remove the lower oil pan. J K L WBIA0258E a. M Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan. Tool number : KV10111100 (J37228) Be careful not to damage the mating surface. Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan. ● ● b. WBIA0566E Revision: March 2005 EM-139 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [VQ35DE] 19. Remove the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. SEM469G 20. Remove the upper oil pan. a. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, using power tool. LBIA0358E b. c. Insert an appropriate size tool into the notch (1) of the upper oil pan as shown. Pry off the upper oil pan by moving the tool up and down (2) as shown. SEM155F 21. Remove the O-ring seals from the bottom of the cylinder block and oil pump housing, use new O-rings for installation. WBIA0327E Revision: March 2005 EM-140 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [VQ35DE] 22. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. 23. Remove the oil strainer. A EM C WBIA0328E D 24. If re-installing the original oil pan, remove the old sealant from the mating surfaces using a scraper. ● Also remove the old sealant from mating surface of the cylinder block. ● Remove the old sealant from the bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off the old sealant. E F G MEM108A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL H Clean oil strainer if any object is attached. INSTALLATION I CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. 1. Install oil strainer tighten bolt to specified torque. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . J 2. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the front cover gasket and the rear oil seal retainer gasket as shown. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . K L M SEM964E 3. Install the front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket as shown. WBIA0328E Revision: March 2005 EM-141 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [VQ35DE] 4. Apply a bead of sealant to the cylinder block mating surface of the upper oil pan to a limited portion as shown. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Be sure the sealant is applied to a limited portion as shown, and the sealant is 4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) or 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide. ● Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating. SEM185FA SEM159F 5. Install new O-rings on the cylinder block and oil pump body. WBIA0327E 6. Install the upper oil pan. Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown. ● Upper oil pan bolts ● : 19.0 - 25.0 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 -18 ft-lb) Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. LBIA0359E 7. Install the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. Refer to EM-222, "INSTALLATION" . SEM469G Revision: March 2005 EM-142 2005 Altima OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER [VQ35DE] 8. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the lower oil pan. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Be sure the sealant is 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide. ● Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant. A EM C SEM159F 9. D Install the lower oil pan. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order as shown. Lower oil pan bolts ● E : 7.2 - 10.8 N·m (0.74 - 1.1 kg-m, 64 - 95 in-lb) Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. F G WBIA0261E H 10. Install rear plate cover. Rear plate cover bolt : 6.37 - 7.45 N·m (0.65 - 0.75 kg-m, 57 - 65 in-lb) I 11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. J SEM717G K INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● Start the engine and check for leaks. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" . Inspect the engine oil level. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" . L M Revision: March 2005 EM-143 2005 Altima IGNITION COIL [VQ35DE] IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation PFP:22448 EBS00J5W WBIA0264E 1. Ignition coil 4. Rocker cover (left bank) 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover (right bank) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the engine cover with power tool. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner assembly and air intake tubes. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly and the front cowl panel. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the intake manifold collector, gasket, and throttle body. Refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the six ignition coils. CAUTION: Do not shock it. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-144 2005 Altima SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) [VQ35DE] SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) Removal and Installation PFP:22401 A EBS00J5X EM C D E F G H I WBIA0264E 1. Ignition coil 4. Rocker cover (left bank) 2. Spark plug 3. J Rocker cover (right bank) REMOVAL K 1. 2. 3. L 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the engine cover, with power tool. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner assembly and air intake tubes. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly and the front cowl panel. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the intake manifold collector, gasket, and throttle body. Refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the six ignition coils. Remove the six spark plugs with a suitable tool. ● If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to MA-26, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type)" . SEM294A Revision: March 2005 EM-145 2005 Altima M SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) [VQ35DE] INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Frequent engine starts ● Low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Extended highway driving ● Frequent high engine revolution Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. SMA773C If plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time : less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) : less than 20 seconds Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) SMA806CA INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-146 2005 Altima FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [VQ35DE] FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation PFP:16600 A EBS00J5Y EM C D E F G H I J WBIA0263E K 1. O-ring 2. Fuel injector 3. Fuel tube assembly 4. Insulator 5. Fuel damper 6. Fuel damper CAUTION: ● Apply new engine oil when installing the parts as specified to do so. ● Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown. L REMOVAL M 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the engine cover using power tool. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air intake tube as an assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot. Disconnect fuel tube quick connector at vehicle piping side. Refer to step 5 of EM-130, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose, the coolant hoses from the electric throttle control actuator, the swirl control vacuum lines, the fuel injectors electrical connectors, and the PCV hose. CAUTION: ● Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. Disconnect the electric throttle control actuator electrical connector and coolant hoses. Revision: March 2005 EM-147 2005 Altima FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [VQ35DE] 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Remove the cowl top grille and the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the power steering hose bracket. Remove the vacuum tank from the back of the intake manifold collector. Remove the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator, by loosening the four bolts in a diagonal pattern. CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, and remove the intake manifold collector using power tool. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the intake manifold. Remove the fuel injector O-rings and use new O-rings for installation. WBIA0285E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install the fuel rails with fuel injectors attached. NOTE: ● Carefully install new O-rings, including the one used with the fuel damper. ● Lubricate O-rings by lightly coating with new engine oil. ● Be careful not to damage the O-rings and surfaces for O-ring sealing surfaces. Do not expand or twist O-rings. ● Discard old clips; replace with new ones. ● Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. ● Position clips in grooves on the fuel injectors. SEF703X ● Align the protrusions of the fuel tube assembly with those of the fuel injectors. ● After properly inserting the fuel injectors onto the fuel tube assembly, check that the fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors, and the flanges of the fuel tube assembly are fully engaged with the clips. Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts as shown, in two steps: 1st step 2nd step : 9.3 - 10.8 N·m (0.95 - 1.1 kg-m, 6.2 - 7.9 ft-lb) : 20.6 - 26.5 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb) CAUTION: After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage. ● WBIA0255E Revision: March 2005 EM-148 2005 Altima FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE [VQ35DE] 3. Install the intake manifold collector bolts in the numerical order as shown. Intake manifold collector bolts A : 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb EM C SEM713G 4. Tighten the bolts of the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator assembly diagonally to specification. Intake manifold collector pipe bolts 5. 6. 7. : 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb) D E After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator. ● Perform "Throttle Control Closed Position Learning" when the harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . ● Perform "Idle Air Volume Learning" when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Attach the quick connector. Refer to EM-131, "INSTALLATION" . Installation of remaining components is in the reverse of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION F G H Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. ● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . ● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-149 2005 Altima ROCKER COVER [VQ35DE] ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation PFP:13264 EBS00J5Z WBIA0222E 1. Rocker cover (left bank) 2. PCV valve 3. Rocker cover (right bank) 4. Rocker cover gasket (right bank) 5. Rocker cover (left bank) 6. Oil filler cap REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the engine cover, using power tool. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner assembly and air intake tubes. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly and the front cowl panel. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . Remove the intake manifold collector using power tool. Remove gasket and the electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the six ignition coils. Refer to EM-144, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the two intake valve timing control solenoid valves and gaskets. Refer to EC-1065, "INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" . Revision: March 2005 EM-150 2005 Altima ROCKER COVER [VQ35DE] 7. Remove RH and LH rocker covers from cylinder head. ● Follow the loosening sequence for each side rocker cover bolts as shown. A EM C D E F G LBIA0078E INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Apply sealant to the areas on the front corners. Refer to EM163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" . ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two stages and in the numerical order as shown. H I J Rocker cover bolts Stage 1 : 0.96 - 2.96 N·m (0.10 - 0.30 kg-m, 9 - 26 in-lb) Stage 2 : 7.33 - 9.33 N·m (0.75 - 0.95 kg-m, 65 - 82 in-lb) K L M WBIA0039E Revision: March 2005 EM-151 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE Removal and Installation PFP:13599 EBS00J60 LBIA0371E Revision: March 2005 EM-152 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] 1. Timing chain tensioner 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Timing chain tensioner 14. IVT control valve cover - right 15. Chain tensioner cover 16. RH engine mounting bracket 17. Water hose clamp 18. Water pump cover 19. IVT control valve cover - left 20. Front oil seal 21. Crankshaft pulley 22. Idler pulley 23. Idler pulley bracket 24. Front timing chain case 25. Timing tension guide 26. Collared O-ring 27. Seal ring A EM C NOTE: ● This section describes procedures for removal/installation procedure of the front timing chain case and timing chain related parts without removing the oil pan (upper) from the vehicle. ● When oil pan (upper) needs to be removed or installed, or when rear timing chain case is removed or installed, remove oil pans (upper and lower) first. Then remove front timing chain case, timing chain related parts, and rear timing chain case in this order, and install in reverse order of removal. Refer to EM161, "TIMING CHAIN" . ● Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" for component parts location. D E F REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove lower and upper oil pans. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . Remove engine cover using power tool. Remove the upper air cleaner case, mass air flow sensor and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM120, "REMOVAL" . Remove the engine coolant reservoir. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" . G H I J K L M WBIA0339E 5. 6. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the IPDM E/R and position aside. Remove the bracket. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . 7. Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-4, "WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY" . 8. Remove the engine undercover. 9. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 10. Remove the drive belts and idler pulley. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" . 11. Recover the A/C system R134a and remove the A/C compressor. Refer to ATC-103, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" . 12. Remove engine oil cooler pipe bolts. Revision: March 2005 EM-153 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] 13. Remove the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank with lines attached and position them aside. Refer to PS-20, "Removal and Installation" 14. Remove the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" . 15. Disconnect the engine harness and position aside. 16. Remove the A/C low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-112, "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose" or MTC-98, "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC). 17. Support the engine and remove the RH engine mounting insulator, mount and bracket. Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" . 18. Remove the chain tensioner cover and water pump cover, using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) PBIC0846E 19. Remove the IVT control covers, right and left. Loosen the IVT control cover bolts in the order as shown. NOTE: The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. 20. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . 21. Remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-122, "Removal and Installation" . WBIA0260E 22. Remove the six ignition coils. NOTE: Note locations for installation. 23. Remove the six spark plugs. WBIA0347E Revision: March 2005 EM-154 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] 24. If necessary, remove the rocker covers. Loosen the rocker covers bolts in the order as shown. NOTE: Necessary only when removing secondary timing chains. A EM C D E F G LBIA0078E 25. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves. ● Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. H I J WBIA0169E 26. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. K L M SEM918G b. Check that intake and exhaust camshaft lobes on No. 1 cylinder (right bank of engine) are located as shown. ● If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. SEM418G Revision: March 2005 EM-155 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] 27. Lock the drive plate (A/T), flywheel (M/T) attached to the starter bolt hole using Tool. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool. SEM485GA SEM541G 28. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt using Tool and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position. Tool number : KV10109300 WBIA0386E b. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery. EMQ0477D 29. Remove the front timing chain case. a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. WBIA0290E Revision: March 2005 EM-156 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] b. c. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as shown. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. ● Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. CAUTION: ● Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. ● After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or warp under a load. A EM C SEM156F D 30. Remove the water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from the front timing chain case using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) E Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ● Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. 31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover. ● F G H SEM829E 32. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. I J K L SEM428G M INSTALLATION 1. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length. PBIC1101E Revision: March 2005 EM-157 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] 2. Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply new engine oil to the oil seal edges. NOTE: Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. SEM715A a. Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the face with front timing chain case using suitable drift. CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. NOTE: Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. PBIC0790E 3. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. PBIC1133E 4. Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case. 5. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts. Revision: March 2005 EM-158 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 – 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in) 6. A Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 – 22 : 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) 7. a. EM Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. ● Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. C SEM730G D Install IVT control valve covers as follows: Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). E F G KBIA1315E b. c. H Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . I J SEM437G ● ● Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control covers. Tighten the intake valve timing control cover bolts in the order as shown. Intake valve timing control cover bolts L M : 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) SEM728G Revision: March 2005 EM-159 K 2005 Altima FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE [VQ35DE] 8. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover and the chain tensioner cover. Water pump cover bolts Chain tensioner cover bolts ● : 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb) : 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb) Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SEM744GA 9. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. ● Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. ● Apply a paint mark for the second step of angle tightening. Step 1 Step 2 : 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) : 60° - 65° degrees clockwise SEM531G SEM963E 10. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 11. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-160 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] TIMING CHAIN Components PFP:13028 A EBS00J61 EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0170E Revision: March 2005 EM-161 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 1. Timing chain tensioner 2. Internal chain guide 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 11. Slack guide 3. Timing chain tensioner 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Timing chain tensioner 14. IVT control valve cover - right 15. Chain tensioner cover 16. RH engine mounting bracket 17. Water hose clamp 18. Water pump cover 19. IVT control valve cover - left 20. Front oil seal 21. Crankshaft pulley 22. Idler pulley 23. Idler pulley bracket 24. Front timing chain case 25. Rear timing chain case 26. Water drain plug 27. Tension guide 28. O-ring Revision: March 2005 EM-162 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET ● ● A Refer to EM-110, "LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE" . Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant. EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0171E CAUTION: ● After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. Revision: March 2005 EM-163 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] ● ● ● ● ● ● When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley. Before disconnecting fuel hose, release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Before removing the upper oil pan, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Be careful not to damage sensor edges. Do not spill engine oil or coolant on drive belts. Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. EBS00J62 Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the battery. Drain the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" . Remove engine cover with power tool. Remove the intake air duct with the air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor. Remove the engine coolant reservoir. Disconnect the fuel rail quick connector at the vehicle piping side. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the cowl top grille and the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front RH wheel and tire with power tool. Remove the engine undercovers with power tool. Remove the inner fender splash shield with power tool. Remove the drive belts and idler pulley. Recover the A/C system R134a and remove the A/C compressor. Refer to ATC-103, "REFRIGERANT LINES" . Dismount the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank. Tie them down with wire to reposition them out of the way. Remove the lower and upper oil pans. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the A/C high pressure line. Refer to ATC-103, "REFRIGERANT LINES" . Remove the alternator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the engine harness and set aside. Support the engine and remove the RH engine mount and bracket. Remove the IVT control covers, right and left. Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown. NOTE: The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . SEM423G 23. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: Revision: March 2005 EM-164 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. A EM C SEM727G D b. Check that intake and exhaust cam nose on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right) are located as shown. ● If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. E F G SEM418G 24. Set the ring gear stopper using the bolt hole. CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting the stopper. H I J SEM541G K L M SEM485GA 25. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Set the ring gear stopper using the bolt hole. CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear when setting the stopper. SEM541G Revision: March 2005 EM-165 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] SEM485GA b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt using pulley holder and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position. PBIC0885E c. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery. EMQ0477D 26. Remove the front timing chain case. a. Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown. WBIA0290E b. c. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as shown. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. ● Use seal cutter or an equivalent tool to cut liquid gasket for removal. CAUTION: ● Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. ● After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or warp under a load. SEM156F Revision: March 2005 EM-166 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose. Disconnect the electric throttle control actuator. Disconnect the coolant hoses at the electric throttle control actuator. Disconnect the PCV hose. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid vacuum hose. A EM 32. Remove the intake manifold collector. Loosen the bolts and nuts in the numerical order as shown. C D E WBIA0285E 33. Remove the six ignition coils. 34. Remove the six spark plugs. 35. Remove the engine oil dipstick. F G H I J K L WBIA0048E 36. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves. ● Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. WBIA0169E Revision: March 2005 EM-167 2005 Altima M TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 37. Remove the rocker covers. Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown. LBIA0078E 38. Place paint marks on the timing chain and sprockets to indicate the correct position of the components for installation. 39. Remove the internal chain guide. SEM740G 40. Remove the timing chain tensioner and slack side chain guide. Revision: March 2005 EM-168 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] a. Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to release (coaxial structure with lever). A EM C SEM732G D b. Insert stopper pin into tensioner body hole to hold lever, and keep the tab released. An Allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example. c. Insert plunger into tensioner body by pressing the slack side chain guide. d. Keep the slack side chain guide pressed and hold it by pushing the stopper pin through the lever hole and body hole. e. Remove the bolts and remove the timing chain tensioner. 41. Remove primary timing chain and crankshaft sprocket. CAUTION: After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. E F G SEM733G H 42. Attach a suitable stopper pin to the right and left camshaft chain tensioners (for secondary timing chains). I J K SEM923G L 43. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket bolts. ● Apply paint to the timing chain and camshaft sprockets for alignment during installation. ● Secure the hexagonal portion of the camshaft using a wrench to loosen the bolts. M WBIA0172E Revision: March 2005 EM-169 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 44. Remove the secondary timing chains with camshaft sprockets. a. Rotate camshaft slightly, and slacken timing chain of timing chain tensioner -side. b. Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between timing chain and chain tensioner plunger. Remove cam sprocket and secondary timing chain with timing chain removed from guide groove. CAUTION: Chain tensioner plunger can move, while stopper pin is inserted in tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during removal. ● Intake camshaft sprocket is two-for-one structure of primary and secondary sprockets. ● Handle the intake sprockets as an assembly. CAUTION: ● Avoid impact or dropping the intake sprockets. ● Do not disassemble the intake sprockets (never loosen bolts A and B as shown). SEM922G SEM734G 45. Remove the chain tension guide. 46. Remove the rear timing chain case. CAUTION: ● Do not remove the plate metal cover for the oil passage. ● After removing the chain case, do not apply any load to the case that might bend it. KBIA1307E a. b. Loosen and remove the rear timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. Cut the sealant with an appropriate tool and remove the rear timing chain case. WBIA0078E 47. Remove O-rings to cylinder head and cylinder block. Revision: March 2005 EM-170 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 48. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front and rear timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. A EM C SEM428G D 49. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts. CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces. E F G SEM161F H 50. Use a scraper to remove all the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the water pump cover, chain tensioner cover and IVT control covers. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. I J K WBIA0173E 51. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover. L M SEM829E Inspection EBS00J63 Check for cracks and any excessive wear of the timing chain. Replace the timing chain as necessary. Revision: March 2005 EM-171 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] Installation EBS00J64 NOTE: The figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, the components installed. WBIA0280E 1. a. 1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (intake) 3. Mating mark (copper link) 4. Mating mark (punched) 5. Secondary timing chain tensioner 6. Mating mark (gold link) 7. Secondary timing chain 8. Camshaft sprocket (exhaust) 9. Tensioner guide 10. Water pump 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Primary timing chain 14. Slack guide 15. Primary timing chain tensioner 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key Install rear timing chain case as follows: Install O-rings on cylinder block. PBIC0788E b. Install O-rings on cylinder head. Revision: March 2005 EM-172 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] A EM C SEM447G 2. 3. a. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the rear timing chain case. Refer to EM-163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" . Align the rear timing chain case and water pump assembly with the dowel pins (RH and LH) on the cylinder block and install the case. Make sure the O-rings stay in place during installation. Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown. There are two bolt lengths used. Follow the chart below for proper bolt length specifications. Bolt position 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 4, 5, 11 - 26 b. Bolt length 20 mm (0.79 in) 16 mm (0.63 in) After all bolts are initially tightened, retighten them to the specification in the numerical order as shown. Rear timing chain case bolts D E F G SEM735G H : 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 -10 ft-lb) I 4. 5. 6. Install the timing chain tension guide. Position the crankshaft so No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. ● Make sure that the dowel pin hole, dowel pin and crankshaft key are located as shown. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side): at cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side): at cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key: at cylinder head side of RH bank. CAUTION: Hole on small diameter side must be used for intake camshaft sprocket dowel pin. Do not misidentify (ignore big diameter side). J K L KBIA1073E M Install the secondary timing chains and camshaft sprockets. CAUTION: Matching marks between the timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all matching mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. ● Push the sleeve of the secondary chain tensioner and keep it pressed in with a stopper pin. SEM430G Revision: March 2005 EM-173 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] a. b. Align the matching marks on the secondary timing chain (gold link) with the ones on the intake and exhaust sprockets (stamped), and install them. ● Matching marks for the intake sprocket are on the back side of the secondary sprocket. ● There are two types of matching marks, round and oval types. They should be used for the RH and LH banks, respectively. RH bank: use round type. LH bank: use oval type. Align the dowel pin and pin hole on the camshaft with the groove and dowel pin on the sprocket, and install them. ● On the intake side, align the pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with the dowel pin on the back side of the camshaft sprocket, and install them. ● On the exhaust side, align the dowel pin on the camshaft front end with the pin groove on the camshaft sprocket, and install them. ● Bolts for the camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of the dowel pins. PBIC0886E ● It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating marks during and after installation. To make the matching easier, make a mating mark on the sprocket teeth in advance with paint. SEM811G 7. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts. ● Secure the camshaft using a wrench at the hexagonal portion to tighten the bolts. WBIA0172E 8. Pull the stopper pins out from the secondary timing chain tensioners. SEM923G Revision: March 2005 EM-174 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 9. Install the crankshaft sprocket on the crankshaft. ● Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face the front of the engine. A EM C SEM929E 10. Install the primary timing chain. ● Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with the copper link on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the orange one on the timing chain, as shown. ● When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft using a wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks. ● During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary timing chains. D E F G H I J WBIA0279E K 11. Install the internal chain guide. L M SEM740G Revision: March 2005 EM-175 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 12. Install the slack guide. ● Do not overtighten the slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when the bolts are tightened to specification. SEM741G 13. Install the timing chain tensioner for the slack guide. ● When installing the chain tensioner, push in the sleeve and keep it pressed in with the stopper pin. ● Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of the chain tensioner. ● After installation, pull out the stopper pin while pressing the slack guide. 14. Reconfirm that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. SEM733G 15. Install new O-rings on the rear timing chain case. SEM435G 16. Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges. ● Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. Suitable drift Outer diameter Inner diameter : 59 mm (2.32 in) : 49 mm (1.93 in) CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. SEM715A Revision: March 2005 EM-176 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] ● ● Using a suitable drift, press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with timing chain case end face. Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and seal lip is not inverted. A EM C PBIC0790E D 17. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case. Refer to EM-163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" . ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. E F 18. Install the rear case pin into dowel pin hole on front timing chain case. 19. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in order as shown. G Bolt position 1, 2 : 25.5 - 31.4 N·m (2.6 - 3.2 kg-m, 18.8 - 23.1 ft-lb) 3 - 22 : 11.8 - 13.7 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 8.7 - 10.1 ft-lb) H I SEM730G 20. After installing the front timing chain case, check the surface height difference between the following parts on the oil pan mating surface. ● If not within specification, repeat the installation procedure. J K L M SEM746G Front timing chain case to rear timing chain case Oil pump to cylinder block Rear timing chain case to cylinder block Revision: March 2005 : (–0.14) - 0.14 mm [(–0.0055) - 0.0055 in] : (–0.36) - (–0.10) mm [(–0.0142) - (–0.0039) in] : (–0.24) - 0.14 mm [(–0.0094) - 0.0055 in] EM-177 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 21. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). KBIA1315E b. c. Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers. Use Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SEM437G ● ● Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control covers. Tighten in the numerical order as shown. SEM728G 22. Install the water pump cover and the chain tensioner cover. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SEM744GA Revision: March 2005 EM-178 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 23. Install the RH and LH rocker covers. Rocker cover tightening procedure: ● Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two stages in the numerical order as shown. Stage 1 Stage 2 A EM : 0.96 - 2.96 N·m (0.1 - 0.3 kg-m, 9 - 26 in-lb) : 7.33 - 9.33 N·m (0.75 - 0.95 kg-m, 65 - 82 in-lb) C SEM748G D E F G SEM749G 24. Install the IVT control solenoid valve bank 1 and bank 2. IVT control solenoid valve bolts H : 10 - 12 N·m (1.0 - 1.3 kg-m, 87 - 112 in-lb) I 25. Install the engine oil dipstick. J WBIA0169E K 26. Install the six spark plugs to their original positions. Spark plugs (6) : 20 - 29 N·m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb) L 27. Install the six ignition coils to their original positions. Ignition coils (6) M : 6.37 - 7.54 N·m (0.65 - 0.76 kg-m, 57 - 66 in-lb) WBIA0048E Revision: March 2005 EM-179 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] 28. Install the intake manifold collector. Tighten the bolts and nuts in numerical order as shown. Intake manifold collector bolts : 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-lb, 13 - 15 ft-lb) 29. Connect the EVAP purge volume control solenoid hose. 30. Connect the PCV hose. 31. Connect the coolant hoses to the electric throttle control actuator. 32. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose. 33. Connect the electric throttle control actuator harness electrical connector. SEM713G 34. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two stages. ● Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. ● Apply a paint mark for the second stage of angle tightening. Stage 1 Stage 2 : 39 - 49 N·m (4.0 - 5.0 kg-m, 29 - 36 ft-lb) : 60° - 65° degrees clockwise SEM531G SEM963E 35. Remove the ring gear stopper. SEM541G Revision: March 2005 EM-180 2005 Altima TIMING CHAIN [VQ35DE] A EM C SEM485GA 36. Install the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . 37. Install the RH engine mount and bracket. D Engine mount to frame bolts (2) Engine mount bracket to front cover bolts (2) Engine mount bracket to front cover nut (1) Engine mount to bracket nuts (2) : 66 - 74 N·m (6.7 - 7.6 kg-m, 49 - 54 ft-lb) : 79 - 90 N·m (8.0 - 9.2 kg-m, 58 - 66 ft-lb) : 10 - 15 N·m (1.0 - 1.6 kg-m, 87 - 138 in-lb) : 49 - 58 N·m (5.0 - 6.0 kg-m, 37 - 43 ft-lb) 38. Reposition and reconnect the engine harness. 39. Install the alternator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" . 40. Install the upper and lower oil pans. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . 41. Install the power steering pump. Refer to PS-20, "Removal and Installation" . 42. Install the A/C compressor and recharge the system. Refer to ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models" . 43. Install the idler pulley and the drive belts. Refer to EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" . 44. Install the inner fender splash shield and the engine undercovers. 45. Install the RH wheel and tire. Refer to WT-4, "WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY" . 46. Install the windshield wiper assembly and the cowl top grille. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . 47. Install the fuel hose quick connector to the fuel tube at the vehicle piping side. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" . 48. Install the engine coolant reservoir. 49. Install the intake air duct with the air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor. 50. Install engine cover. 51. Refill the engine with oil and coolant. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes for the Silicone RTV Sealant to set before filling the engine with fluids to avoid leaks. 52. Install the battery. 53. Activate the fuel system. Check for any leaks when the system is repressurized and correct as necessary. 54. Start the engine and check all systems for leaks or improper operation. Correct as necessary. ● After starting engine, keep idling for three minutes. Then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure oil chamber of the chain tensioners. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. Revision: March 2005 EM-181 2005 Altima E F G H I J K L M CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation PFP:13001 EBS00J65 WBIA0094E 1. Oil filler cap 2. Rocker cover (LH) 3. Camshaft bracket (LH) 4. Camshaft (INT) 5. PCV valve 6. Cylinder head 7. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 8. Spark plug 9. Valve 10. Valve spring seat 11. Valve spring 13. Valve collet 14. Valve lifter 15. Camshaft (EXH) 16. Tensioner sleeve 17. Tensioner spring 18. Chain tensioner 19. 20. PCV hose 21. Oil catcher IVT control solenoid valve 12. Valve spring retainer CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation. Revision: March 2005 EM-182 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. A Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" . Remove the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" . If necessary, remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (RH and LH bank) from cylinder head back side. CAUTION: ● Handle carefully to avoid dropping an shocks. ● Do not disassemble. ● Do not allow metal powder to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip. ● Do not place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism. EM C D KBIA1046E 4. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves. ● Discard the IVT control solenoid valve gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. E F G H WBIA0169E 5. I Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft brackets and the camshafts. ● Mark the camshafts, camshaft brackets, and bolts so they are placed in the same position and direction for installation. ● Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the numerical order as shown. J K SEM856E L M SEM857E 6. Remove valve lifters. NOTE: Identify installation positions to ensure proper installation. Revision: March 2005 EM-183 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] 7. Remove secondary timing chain tensioner from cylinder head ● Remove secondary tensioner with its stopper pin attached. NOTE: Stopper pin was attached when secondary timing chain was removed. SEM444G INSTALLATION 1. Before installation, remove any old Silicone RTV Sealant from component mating surfaces using a scraper. ● Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt holes and threads. ● Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces. SEM161F 2. Before installing the front cam bracket, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the mating surface using a scraper. ● Do not scratch or damage the mating surface. SEM892E 3. Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. ● The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder center line as shown. SEM532G Revision: March 2005 EM-184 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] 4. Install camshaft chain tensioners on both sides of cylinder head. Camshaft chain tensioner bolts A : 7 - 10 N·m (0.7 - 1.0 kg-m, 62 - 89 in-lb) EM C SEM444G D 5. 6. Install valve lifters. NOTE: Install them in original positions. Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets. ● Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange. E F G H SEM652F ● I Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are present on the new camshafts components for proper placement and direction of the components. J Paint marks Bank RH LH ● INT/EXH ID mark Drill mark INT RE EXH M1 M2 Yes Yes No RE No No Yes INT LH Yes Yes No EXH LH No No Yes K SEM653F Position the camshafts: RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock. LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock. M KBIA1072E Revision: March 2005 EM-185 L 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] 7. Before installing camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 camshaft bracket. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SEM446G ● ● Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant. Refer to EM-110, "LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE" . PBIC0915E ● ● Install camshaft brackets in their original positions and direction. Align the stamp marks as shown. If checking and adjusting any part of valve assembly or camshaft, check valve clearance according to the reference data. Refer to EM-191, "Valve Clearance" . Valve clearance (cold) Intake Valve clearance (cold) Exhaust : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) : 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) SEM564G Revision: March 2005 EM-186 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] ● Tighten the camshaft brackets in the three steps, in numerical order as shown. 1 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Tighten No.s 7 to 10, then tighten 1 to 6 in order as shown. 2 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Tighten in numerical order as shown. 9.02 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.20 kg-m, 79.9 - 104.2 in-lb) 3 A EM C Tighten No. 1 -6 in the numerical order as shown. D SEM885EA E F G SEM886EA 8. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of No. 1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. Standard ● H I : – 0.14 (– 0.0055 in) If measurement is outside the specified range, re-install camshaft and camshaft bracket. J K EMQ0044D L 9. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets. IVT control solenoid valve bolts : 10 - 12 N·m (1.0 - 1.3 kg-m, 87 - 112 in-lb) M WBIA0169E 10. If necessary, install camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (RH and LH bank.) 11. Install the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" . 12. Install the timing chains. Refer to EM-172, "Installation" . INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Visual Check Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear. Replace if necessary. Revision: March 2005 EM-187 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] Camshaft Runout 1. 2. 3. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown. Set dial gauges vertically to No. 3 journal as shown. Turn camshaft in one direction slowly by hand, measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauges. ● Runout is the largest indicator reading after one full revolution. Camshaft Runout Standard Limit 4. : Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) PBIC0929E If actual runout exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Cam Lobe Height 1. 2. Measure camshaft cam lobe height as shown. Refer to EM-251, "CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING" . If wear has reduced the lobe height below specifications, replace the camshaft. SEM549A Camshaft Journal Clearance Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal ● Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal as shown. Standard outer diameter, No.1 Standard outer diameter, No.2, 3, 4 : 25.935 - 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 in) : 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 in) SEM012A Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket 1. Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with specified torque. 2. Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter "A" of camshaft bearing. Standard inner diameter No.1 Standard inner diameter No.2, 3, 4 : 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 in) : 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 in) SEM862E Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal) Revision: March 2005 EM-188 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] Standard No.1 Standard No.2, 3, 4 Limit ● : 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in) A : 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 in) EM : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) When out of the specified range, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTICE: Inner diameter of camshaft bracket is manufactured together with cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head assembly. D Camshaft End Play 1. 2. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Install dial gauge in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure end play when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis) as shown. Standard Limit ● ● E : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in) : 0.24 mm (0.0094 in) F If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again. If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head. G SEM864E Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. 2. 3. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown. Install camshaft sprocket on camshaft. Measure camshaft sprocket runout. Runout 4. C H I J : Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) If sprocket runout exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket. K PBIC0930E L Valve Lifter ● Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or cracks, replace as necessary. M KBIA0182E Revision: March 2005 EM-189 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] Valve Lifter Clearance Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter ● Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter. Refer to EM-248, "Valve Lifter" . ● If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter. JEM798G Valve Lifter Bore Diameter ● Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore of cylinder head. Refer to EM-248, "Valve Lifter" . ● If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly. SEM867E Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance ● (Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) – (outer diameter of valve lifter) Refer to EM-248, "Valve Lifter" . ● If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly. Inspection after Installation EBS00M8E INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE CAUTION: ● Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT II and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to. ● Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil. 1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-20, "OIL LEVEL" . 2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while checking. a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors if practical. 3. Remove IVT control solenoid valve. 4. Crank engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from IVT control cover oil hole. End cranking after checking. WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.). CAUTION: ● Engine oil may squirt from IVT control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to prevent engine oil from splashing on worker, engine components and vehicle. KBIA2686E Revision: March 2005 EM-190 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belts or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil. A Clean oil groove between oil strainer and IVT control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from IVT control cover oil hole. Remove components between IVT control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check EM each oil groove for clogging. ● Clean oil groove if necessary. C After inspection, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. ● 5. 6. 7. Valve Clearance EBS00J66 D CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance. Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the air duct with air cleaner case, collectors, hoses, wires, harnesses, and connectors. 2. Remove the intake manifold collectors. 3. Remove the ignition coils and spark plugs. 4. Remove the rocker covers. ● E F G SEM713A 5. H Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. ● Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. I J K SEM727G ● L Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown. M SEM418G Revision: March 2005 EM-191 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] 6. Check only the valves as shown. Crank Position Valve No. 1 Valve No. 2 Valve No. 3 Valve No. 6 No. 1 TDC Intake Exhaust Exhaust Intake ● ● Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft. Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement lifter size. Valve Clearance for Checking (cold) Intake Exhaust : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) : 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) SEM893E SEM139D KBIA0185E 7. 8. Turn crankshaft 240°. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Revision: March 2005 EM-192 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] 9. Check only those valves as shown. Crank Position Valve No. 2 Valve No. 3 Valve No. 4 Valve No. 5 No. 3 TDC Intake Intake Exhaust Exhaust A EM C D E F G SEM894E 10. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above. 11. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 12. Check only those valves as shown. H Crank Position Valve No. 1 Valve No. 4 Valve No. 5 Valve No. 6 No. 5 TDC Exhaust Intake Intake Exhaust I J K L M SEM958E 13. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following components. If the valve clearances are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. ● Intake manifold collectors ● Rocker covers ● All spark plugs ● All ignition coils Revision: March 2005 EM-193 2005 Altima CAMSHAFT [VQ35DE] VALVE ADJUSTING CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. NOTE: ● Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not used). ● The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances. 1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer, as shown. SEM754G 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Use the equation below to calculate the replacement valve lifter thickness. Valve lifter thickness calculation equation: t = t1 + (C1 - C2) t = thickness of the replacement lifter t1 = thickness of the removed lifter C1 = measured valve clearance C2 = standard valve clearance ● The thickness of the new valve lifter can be identified by the stamp mark on the reverse side (inside the lifter). ● Available thickness of the valve lifter (factory setting): SEM755G 7.88 - 8.36 mm (0.3102 - 0.3291 in), in 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) increments, in 25 sizes (intake / exhaust). Refer to EM-248, "Valve Lifter" . Value lifter thickness: Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 in) Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 in) Install the selected replacement valve lifter. Install the camshaft. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. Valve Clearance Cold Hot* (reference data) Intake 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) 0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in) * Approximately 80°C (176°F) Revision: March 2005 EM-194 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [VQ35DE] OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal PFP:00100 A EBS00MXS REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove camshaft relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to EM-183, "REMOVAL" . Remove valve lifters. Refer to EM-183, "REMOVAL" . Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool. CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes. Tool numbers ● EM C : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109230 ( — ) D E Compress valve spring using Tool attachment, adapter. Remove valve collet with magnet hand. WBIA0578E F 4. Remove valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959) G H I WBIA0489E 5. Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent valve from dropping into cylinder. CAUTION: When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front cover with the timing chain. J K INSTALLATION 1. 2. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip. Press in valve oil seal to height "H" using Tool to specified height. Tool number : — L (J-39386) M NOTE: Dimension "H": height measured before valve spring seat installation. Intake and exhaust 3. : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal WBIA0490E EBS00J68 REMOVAL 1. 2. a. Remove the following parts: ● Engine under cover ● Drive belts. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" . ● Radiator fan. Refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" . Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 EM-195 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [VQ35DE] b. Set the ring gear stopper using the bolt hole. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear when setting the stopper. SEM541G SEM485GA c. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt using pulley holder and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position. PBIC0885E d. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery. EMQ0477D 3. Remove front oil seal from front cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front cover or crankshaft. SEM829E Revision: March 2005 EM-196 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [VQ35DE] INSTALLATION 1. Suitable drift Outer diameter Inner diameter EM : 59 mm (2.32 in) : 49 mm (1.93 in) C CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. 2. A Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it flush with front of mounting surface using a suitable tool. ● Install new oil seal in the direction as shown. SEM715A Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. ● Apply a paint mark for the second step of angle tightening. E ● Step 1 Step 2 D F : 39 - 49 N·m (4.0 - 5.0 kg-m, 29 - 36 ft-lb) : 60° - 65° degrees clockwise G SEM531G H I J SEM963E 3. Remove Tool attached to the bolt hole. Tool number K L : KV10117700 (J-44716) M WBIA0270E WBIA0271E Revision: March 2005 EM-197 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [VQ35DE] 4. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal EBS00J69 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the transaxle. Refer to MT-81, "Removal and Installation" (M/T), AT-273, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (RE4F04B), or AT-624, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (RE5F22A). Remove flywheel (M/T) or drive plate (A/T). Remove rear oil seal with a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block. PBIC2932E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Apply new engine oil to new rear oil seal joint surface and seal lip. Install rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. SEM715A ● Press in rear oil seal to the position as shown. SBIA0281E ● Install new rear oil seal using Tool. Tool number : — (J-47128) CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block. ● Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting. ● Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip. LBIA0454E 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 EM-198 2005 Altima OIL SEAL [VQ35DE] CAUTION: ● When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed corA rectly during re-assembly. ● Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drivetrain components. EM C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-199 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service PFP:11041 EBS00J6A CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to EM-145, "Removal and Installation" . Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7). ● Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/rpm 9. a. b. ● ● ● – – Standard Minimum Difference limit between cylinders 1,275 (13.0, 185)/300 981 (10.0, 142)/300 98 (1.0, 14)/300 SEM387C If compression in one or more cylinders is low: Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. Retest compression (steps 5 - 8). If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the valve and/or valve seat. Refer to EM-247, "VALVE" . If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace as necessary. If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other: The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. Revision: March 2005 EM-200 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] Removal and Installation EBS00J6B A EM C D E F G H I J K L WBIA0215E 1. Oil filler cap 2. Oil catcher 3. Rocker cover 4. PCV hose 5. IVT control solenoid valve 6. PCV valve 7. Tensioner sleeve 8. Spring 9. Chain tensioner M 10. Valve 11. Cylinder head 12. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 13. Spark plug 14. Valve spring seat 15. Valve spring 16. Valve spring retainer 17. Valve collet 18. Valve lifter 19. Camshaft (EXH) 20. Camshaft (INT) 21. Camshaft bracket 22. Spark plug tube REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" . Remove the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 EM-201 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 3. 4. Remove the intake manifold using power tool. ● Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown. Remove the coolant outlet housing. WBIA0043E 5. Remove rear timing chain case bolts using power tool. ● Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown. SEM442G 6. Remove rear timing chain case using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) SEM279G 7. Remove the O-rings from the front of the cylinder heads. ● Discard the O-rings and use new O-rings for installation. SEM447G Revision: March 2005 EM-202 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 8. Remove the O-rings from the cylinder block. ● Discard the O-rings and use new O-rings for installation. A EM C SEM534G D 9. Remove the IVT control valves. ● Discard the IVT control valve gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. E F G WBIA0169E H 10. Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts and the camshaft brackets. ● Mark the camshaft brackets so they are placed in the same position and direction for installation. ● Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the numerical order as shown. I J K SEM856E L M SEM857E 11. Remove the RH and LH cylinder head bolts, with power tool. ● The bolts should be loosened gradually in three stages. ● Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown. SEM859E Revision: March 2005 EM-203 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] SEM860E 12. Remove cylinder heads and gaskets. ● Discard the cylinder head gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. SEM863E INSTALLATION 1. Before installing the rear timing chain case, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from mating surface using a scraper. ● Also remove old sealant from mating surface of cylinder block. SEM891E ● Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt hole and thread. SEM161F Revision: March 2005 EM-204 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 2. Before installing the front cam bracket, remove the old RTV Silicone Sealant from the mating surface using a scraper. ● Do not scratch the mating surface. A EM C SEM892E D 3. Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. ● The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder center line as shown. E F G SEM532G 4. H Install new gaskets on the cylinder heads. CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately or valves will strike piston heads. I J K SEM445G 5. Inspect the cylinder head bolts before installing the cylinder heads. CAUTION: Cylinder head bolts are tightened by degree rotation tightening method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts with new ones. Limit (d1 - d2) ● M : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new engine oil. SEM957E Revision: March 2005 EM-205 L 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 6. Install the cylinder heads on the cylinder block. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in the five stages in the numerical order as shown. SEM879EA ● Tightening procedure: Cylinder head bolts Step a : 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb) Step b :Loosen in the reverse order of tightening Step c : 32.9 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb) Step d : 90° degrees rotation clockwise Step e : 90° degrees rotation clockwise SEM877EA SEM878EA 7. Install camshaft chain tensioners on both sides of cylinder head. Camshaft chain tensioner bolts : 7 - 10 N·m (0.7 - 1.0 kg-m, 62 - 89 in-lb) SEM444G Revision: March 2005 EM-206 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 8. Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets. ● Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange. A EM C SEM652F D ● Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are present on the new camshaft components for proper placement. Bank RH LH ● INT/EXH ID mark Drill mark E Paint marks M1 M2 INT RE Yes Yes No EXH RE No No Yes INT LH Yes Yes No EXH LH No No Yes F G SEM653F Position the camshafts: RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock. H I J KBIA1072E 9. Before installing camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 journal head. ● Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Refer to EM-163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" . L M SEM446G Revision: March 2005 EM-207 K 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] ● ● Install camshaft brackets in their original positions and direction. Align the stamp marks as shown. If any part of valve assembly or camshaft is replaced, check and adjust the valve clearance. Refer to EM-191, "Valve Clearance" . Valve clearance (cold) Intake Valve clearance (cold) Exhaust ● : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) : 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the camshaft bracket bolts with new engine oil before installation. SEM564G 10. Tighten the camshaft brackets in the following three steps in the numerical order as shown. 1 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Tighten No.s 7 to 10, then tighten 1 to 6 in order as shown. 2 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Tighten in numerical order as shown. 3 9.02 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.20 kg-m, 79.9 - 104.2 in-lb) Tighten No. 1 -6 in the numerical order as shown. SEM885EA SEM886EA 11. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets. IVT control solenoid valve bolts : 10 - 12 N·m (1.0 - 1.3 kg-m, 87 - 112 in-lb) WBIA0169E Revision: March 2005 EM-208 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 12. Install the new O-rings on the cylinder block. A EM C SEM534G D 13. Install the new O-rings on the cylinder head. E F G SEM447G 14. Apply sealant to the specified portion of the rear timing chain case. Refer to EM-110, "LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE" . H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-209 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . SEM411G ● Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. Revision: March 2005 EM-210 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 15. Align rear timing chain case with dowel pins, then install on cylinder head and block. 16. Tighten rear chain case bolts in two stages. a. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. b. Retighten bolts in numerical order as shown. 17. Install the coolant outlet housing. A EM C D E F G SEM448G 18. Install the intake manifold with a new gasket. ● Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown. Step 1 Step 2 H : 5 - 10 N·m (0.5 - 1.0 kg-m, 44 - 86 in-lb) : 26 - 31 N·m (2.7 - 3.2 kg-m, 20 - 23 ft-lb) I J SEM950F 19. Install the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" . 20. Install the timing chains. Refer to EM-172, "Installation" . K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-211 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] Disassembly and Assembly EBS00J6C WBIA0216E 1. Cylinder head (right bank) 2. Spark plug 3. Valve lifter 4. Valve collet 5. Valve spring retainer 6. Valve spring 7. Valve oil seal 8. Valve guide 9. Valve seat (INT) 10. Valve (INT) 11. Valve (EXH) 12. Valve seat (EXH) 13. Cylinder head (left bank) 14. Intake manifold 15. Valve spring seat 16. Spark plug tube Revision: March 2005 EM-212 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] CAUTION: ● When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting A surfaces with new engine oil. ● Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surface when installing cylinder head, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft pulley, and camshaft bracket. EM ● Attach tags to valve lifters so as not to mix them up. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. C Remove spark plug. Remove valve lifter. ● Identify installation positions, and store them without mixing them up. Remove valve collet. ● Compress valve spring and remove valve collet with magnet hand using Tool. CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes. Tool numbers D E : KV10109220 ( — ) : KV10116200 (J-26336-A) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) F G WBIA0578E 4. 5. 6. Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat. Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve. ● Identify installation positions, and store them without mixing them up. Remove valve oil seals using Tool. Tool number H I : KV10107902 (J-38959) J K WBIA0489E 7. 8. 9. If valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-217, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . If valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-215, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . Remove spark plug tube, as necessary. ● Using pair of pliers, pull spark plug tube out of cylinder head. CAUTION: ● Take care not to damage cylinder head. ● Once removed, spark plug tube will be deformed and cannot be reused. Do not remove it unless absolutely necessary. ASSEMBLY 1. 2. When valve guide is removed, install it. Refer to EM-215, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . When valve seat is removed, install it. Refer to EM-217, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . Revision: March 2005 EM-213 2005 Altima L M CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 3. Install valve oil seals using Tool. Tool number : — (J-39386) Height "H' (Without valve spring seat installed) Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) 4. 5. 6. Install valve spring seat. Install valves. ● Install it in the original position. NOTE: Larger diameter valves are for intake side. WBIA0490E Install valve spring (uneven pitch type). ● Install narrow pitch end (paint mark) to cylinder head side (valve spring seat side). ● Intake side and exhaust side valve springs are different. Install them referring to the following paint mark collar. Paint mark collar Intake : Blue Exhaust : White SEM085D 7. 8. Install valve spring retainer. Install valve collet. ● Compress valve spring with valve spring compressor, attachment and adapter using Tool. Install valve collet with magnet hand. CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes. ● Tap valve stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to check its installed condition. WBIA0578E 9. Install valve lifter. ● Install it in the original position. 10. Install spark plug tube. ● Press-fit spark plug tube as follows: a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to cylinder head mounting hole. b. Apply sealant to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47 in) from edge of spark plug tube press-fit side. Use Genuine High Strength Locking Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . c. Press-fit spark plug tube so that its height “H” is as specified in the figure using suitable drift. Standard press-fit height “H” : 38.1 - 39.1 mm (1.500 - 1.539 in) CAUTION: When press-fitting, take care not to deform spark plug tube. ● After press-fitting, wipe off liquid gasket protruding onto cylinder-head upper face. 11. Install spark plug. ● Revision: March 2005 EM-214 PBIC2638E 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] Inspection After Disassembly EBS00J6D A CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION Clean the surface of the cylinder head. Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of cylinder head surface. Check along six positions as shown. EM Head surface distortion Limit Standard : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) : Less than 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) C If beyond the specified limit, resurface or replace it. The limit for cylinder head resurfacing is determined by the cylinder block resurfacing. Resurfacing Limit Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”. Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”. The maximum limit : A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in) D SEM861E F After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates freely by hand. If resistance is felt, cylinder head must be replaced. Nominal cylinder head height E : 126.3 - 126.5 mm (4.972 - 4.980 in) G VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE 1. H Measure valve deflection as shown. (Valve and valve guide mostly wear in this direction.) Valve deflection limit (dial gauge reading) Intake : 0.24 mm (0.0094 in) Exhaust : 0.28 mm (0.0110 in) I J SEM178F 2. a. b. If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance. Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter. Check that clearance is within specification. Valve to valve guide clearance standard Intake : 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 - 0.0021 in) Exhaust : 0.040 - 0.073 mm (0.0016 - 0.0029 in) Valve to valve guide clearance limit Intake : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in) Exhaust : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) c. L M SEM938C If it exceeds the limit, replace valve or valve guide. VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized [0.2 mm (0.008 in)] valve guide. Revision: March 2005 EM-215 K 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. SEM008A 2. Drive out the valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2.2 US ton) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool. SEM931C 3. Ream cylinder head valve guide hole. Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts), intake and exhaust : 10.175 - 10.196 mm (0.4006 - 0.4014 in) SEM932C 4. Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil and press new valve guide from camshaft side into the cylinder head to the dimensions as shown. Projection "L" : 12.6 - 12.8 mm (0.496 - 0.504 in) SEM950E Revision: March 2005 EM-216 2005 Altima CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 5. Using a valve guide reamer, apply a reamer finish to the valve guide. Intake and exhaust finished size A : 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 - 0.2369 in) EM C SEM932C D VALVE SEAT CONTACT ● ● ● ● After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within specifications, perform this procedure. Apply prussian blue onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve contact on the surface. Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference. If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has N.G conditions even after the re-check, replace valve seat. E F G SBIA0322E VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT 1. 2. H Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this. Ream cylinder head recess for service valve seat. Oversize Intake Exhaust I : 0.5 mm (0.020 in) : 38.500 - 38.516 mm (1.5157 - 1.5164 in) : 32.700 - 32.716 mm (1.2874 - 1.2880 in) J K SEM795A 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center. This will enable valve seat to fit correctly. Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom. Cut or grind valve seat using suitable tool to the specified dimensions. Refer to EM-247, "VALVE" . After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound. Check valve seating condition. Seat face angle “α” Contacting width “W” for intake Contacting width “W” for exhaust : 45° 15' - 45° 45' degrees/minutes : 1.09 - 1.31 mm (0.0429 - 0.0516 in) : 1.29 - 1.51 mm (0.0508 - 0.0594 in) SEM892B Revision: March 2005 EM-217 2005 Altima L M CYLINDER HEAD [VQ35DE] 8. Use a depth gauge to measure the distance between the mounting surface of the cylinder head spring seat and the valve stem end. If the distance is shorter than specified, repeat step 5 to adjust it. If it is longer, replace the valve seat with a new one. Valve seat resurface limit “L” intake Valve seat resurface limit “L” exhaust : 41.07 - 41.67 mm (1.6169 - 1.6405 in) : 41.00 - 41.60 mm (1.6142 - 1.6378 in) SEM621F VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS Set try square along the side of valve spring and rotate the spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of spring and try square. Out-of-square limit : Less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in) PBIC0080E VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD Check valve spring pressure at specified spring height. Standard Limit : 166 - 188 N (16.9 - 19.2 kg, 37.3 = 42.3 lb) at height 37.0 mm (1.457 in) : 373 - 418 N (38.0 - 42.6 kg, 83.9 - 94.0 lb) at height 27.2 mm (1.071 in) If it is not within specifications, replace the spring. SEM113 Revision: March 2005 EM-218 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [VQ35DE] ENGINE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:10001 A EBS00J6E EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0220E 1. LH transaxle mounting insulator (A/ T) Revision: March 2005 2. LH transaxle mounting bracket (M/T) 3. EM-219 LH transaxle mounting bracket (M/T) 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [VQ35DE] 4. RH engine mounting insulator 7. Front engine mounting insulator (electrically controlled with automatic transaxle) 5. Rear engine mounting insulator 6. (electrically controlled with automatic transaxle) Front suspension member WARNING: ● Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels. ● For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts as described in the NISSAN Parts Catalog. CAUTION: ● Do not start working until exhaust system and coolant are cool. ● If items or work required are not covered by the engine main body section, refer to the applicable sections. ● Use the correct supporting points for lifting and jacking. Refer to GI-40, "LIFTING POINT" . ● In removing the drive shafts, be careful not to damage any transaxle grease seals. ● Before separating the engine and transaxle, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). ● Do not damage the edge of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) or the ring gear teeth. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the engine cover, and the engine under cover using power tool. Drain engine oil. MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" Drain coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the following parts: Remove hood assembly. Refer to BL-13, "Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly" . Remove front tower bar using power tools. Remove battery and tray using power tools. Remove air inlet duct. Remove air intake duct and air cleaner case assembly with mass air flow sensor. Remove power brake booster vacuum hose. Remove drive belts. Remove radiator assembly, coolant reservoir, and system hoses. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" . 14. Remove windshield wiper assembly. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . 15. Disconnect engine room harness from the engine side and set it aside. Disconnect engine harness ground connections. 16. Disconnect heater hoses. 17. Remove the front wheel and tires. 18. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . 19. Discharge and recover the R134a refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . 20. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools. 21. Disconnect fuel hose quick connection at vehicle piping side. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" . 22. Disconnect the transaxle shift controls. 23. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . 24. Remove the front exhaust tube using power tools. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" . 25. Disconnect reservoir tank for the power steering from engine compartment bracket and position it aside. 26. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 EM-220 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [VQ35DE] 27. Disconnect the power steering pump, without disconnecting the piping, from the engine and move it aside and secure with wire. A 28. Position a suitable transmission jack under the engine and transaxle assembly. 29. Install engine slingers into front of left bank cylinder head and rear of right bank cylinder head. EM C D SEM807G E F G H SEM808G 30. For additional safety, secure the engine in position with a hoist. 31. Disconnect the LH transaxle mount and the RH engine mount. 32. Carefully lower the engine and transaxle assembly with the transmission jack, avoiding interference with the vehicle body. CAUTION: ● Before and during this procedure, always check if any harnesses are left connected. ● Avoid any damage to, or any oil/grease smearing or spills onto the engine mounting insulators. 33. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). 34. Separate the engine and transaxle and mount the engine on a suitable engine stand. Revision: March 2005 EM-221 I J K L SEM471G 2005 Altima M ENGINE ASSEMBLY [VQ35DE] INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LBIA0086E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas. Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to specified level, if necessary. Summary of the inspection items: Revision: March 2005 EM-222 2005 Altima ENGINE ASSEMBLY [VQ35DE] Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Item Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Working fluid Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage — Leakage — Fuel Exhaust gas A EM C *Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-223 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] CYLINDER BLOCK Disassembly and Assembly PFP:11010 EBS00J6F WBIA0217E 1. Rear oil seal retainer 2. Cylinder block 3. Knock sensor 4. Upper main bearing 5. Lower main bearing 6. Water drain plug (LH side) 7. Water drain plug (RH side) 8. Water drain plug (water pump side) 9. Main bearing cap 10. Main bearing beam 11. Crankshaft 12. Pilot bushing or pilot converter 13. Flywheel with signal plate (M/T) 14. Drive plate with signal plate (A/T) 15. Flywheel reinforcement 16. Drive plate reinforcement 17. Oil ring set 18. Piston pin 19. Connecting rod bearing 20. Connecting rod 21. Piston 22. Top ring 23. Second ring 24. Cylinder block heater (Canada only) 25. Oil jet 26. Key Revision: March 2005 EM-224 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] CAUTION: ● Apply new engine oil to parts as marked in illustrations before installation. A ● Place removed parts such as bearings and bearing caps in their proper order and direction. ● When installing the connecting rod nuts, and main bearing cap bolts, apply new engine oil to the threads and mating surfaces EM ● Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the signal plate teeth on the drive plate. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. C Remove the engine assembly. Refer to EM-219, "ENGINE ASSEMBLY" . Install the engine on the engine stand. Remove the knock sensor. CAUTION: Carefully handle sensor avoiding shocking it. Drain the engine of all coolant and oil. Remove the oil pan. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" . Remove the cylinder head. Refer to EM-201, "Removal and Installation" . Remove drive plate. Fix crankshaft with a ring gear stopper, and remove bolts. ● Loosen bolts in diagonal order. CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble drive plate. ● Never place the drive plate with signal late facing down. ● When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or scratch it. ● Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from becoming magnetized. D E F G H I J SEM760G 9. Remove pilot bushing (M/T) or converter (A/T) using Tool. Tool number K : ST16610001 (J-23907) L M SEM005G 10. Cut away liquid gasket and remove rear oil seal retainer using Tool. Refer to EM-110, "REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING" . Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mounting surface. ● If rear oil seal retainer is removed, replace it with a new one. NOTE: Rear oil seal and retainer form a single part and are handled as an assembly. ● Revision: March 2005 EM-225 SEM830E 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 11. Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies. a. Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be removed onto the bottom dead center. b. Remove the connecting rod cap. c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push the piston and connecting rod assembly out to the cylinder head side. ● Before removing the piston and connecting rod assembly, check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-253, "CONNECTING ROD" . PBIC0086E 12. Remove the connecting rod bearings. CAUTION: ● When removing the connecting rod side bearings, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order. 13. Remove the piston rings from the piston. ● Use a piston ring expander. CAUTION: ● When removing the piston rings, be careful not to damage the piston. Do not expand the rings excessively. ● Be careful to mark the rings if they are to be reused so they are installed in their original position. ● Before removing the piston rings, check the piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-234, "PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE" . PBIC0087E 14. Remove the piston from the connecting rod as follows. a. Using a snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring. PBIC0088E b. Heat the pistons to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F). SEM965A Revision: March 2005 EM-226 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] c. Push out the piston pin with a suitable tool, with an outer diameter approximately 20 mm (0.8 in). A EM C EMM0072D D 15. Remove the rear oil seal retainer from the cylinder block. ● Insert a screwdriver or similar tool between the rear end of the crankshaft counter weight and rear oil seal retainer, and separate the liquid gasket to remove. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface. NOTE: When replacing the rear oil seal during on-vehicle service, it is necessary to remove the oil pan. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . 16. Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown and remove the main bearing beam, bearing caps and crankshaft. ● Before loosening the main bearing cap bolts, measure the crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-239, "CRANKSHAFT" . E F G H I SEM842E 17. Remove the oil jets. 18. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder block and main bearing caps. ● When removing them, note the direction and position. Keep them in the correct order for installation. J K L M PBIC0898E ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Blow out the coolant and oil passages and cylinder bore to remove any foreign materials. CAUTION: Use goggles to protect your eyes. Apply liquid gasket and install each plug into the cylinder block. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Revision: March 2005 EM-227 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 3. Install the oil jets. ● Insert the oil jet dowel pin into the cylinder block dowel pin hole, and tighten the bolts. PBIC0898E 4. a. b. 5. Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings. Remove dust, dirt, and oil on the bearing mating surfaces of the cylinder block and the main bearing cap. Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 journal housing on the cylinder block and the main bearing cap. ● Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside). ● Install bearing with a projection on one end on cylinder block and bearing with a projection at center on cap. Align each projection with mating notch. PBIC0807E Set the upper main bearings in their proper positions on the cylinder block. ● Confirm the correct main bearings are used. Refer to EM-237, "PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" . SEM175F 6. Instructions for the re-use of the main bearing cap bolts. ● A plastic zone tightening method is used for tightening the main bearing cap bolts. Measure d1 and d2 as shown. ● For d2, select the minimum diameter in the measuring area. ● If the difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts for assembly. Limit (d1 - d2) : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) SEM177F Revision: March 2005 EM-228 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 7. After installing the crankshaft, lower main bearings, main bearing caps, main bearing beam, and bearing cap bolts. Tighten the bearing cap bolts in the numerical order as shown. A EM C SEM851E D a. Make sure that the front marks on the main bearing beam faces the front of the engine. b. Prior to tightening all the bearing cap bolts, place the bearing beam in its proper position by shifting the crankshaft in the axial position. c. After tightening the bearing cap bolts, make sure the crankshaft turns smoothly. d. Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new engine oil. e. Tighten the bolts in two stages: CAUTION: Measure the tighten angle in stage 2 with an angle wrench. Do not measure visually. Stage 1 Stage 2 : 32 - 38 N·m (3.3 - 3.9 kg-m, 24 - 28 ft-lb) : 90° - 95° degrees clockwise Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) E F G SEM456G H I J PBIC0096E 8. Measure crankshaft end play. ● If beyond the limit, replace the bearing with a new one. Standard Limit L : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) M SEM852E Revision: March 2005 EM-229 K 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 9. Install the rear oil seal retainer. ● Apply sealant to rear oil seal retainer as shown. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Rear oil seal retainer bolts : 8.2 - 9.3 N·m (0.83 - 0.95 kg-m, 72 - 82 in-lb) PBIC0922E 10. Install the piston to the connecting rod. a. Using suitable snap ring pliers, install the snap ring into the pingroove of the piston rear side. ● Insert it fully into groove to install. PBIC0099E b. Install the piston to the connecting rod. ● Heat the piston until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excess force [approx. 60° - 70°C (140° to 158°F)]. From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and through the connecting rod. SEM965A ● Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the oil holes and the cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown. SEM838F Revision: March 2005 EM-230 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] c. Install the snap ring into the front of the piston pin-groove. ● After installing, check that the connecting rod pivots smoothly on the pin. A EM C PBIC0088E D 11. Using a piston ring expander, install the piston rings. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the piston. ● When the piston rings are not replaced, remount the rings in their original positions. ● When replacing the piston rings, those without punchmarks can be mounted either side up. ● Position each ring with the gap as shown, referring to the piston front mark. ● Install the top ring and the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward. If the ring is not stamped it can face in either direction. E F G SEM757G H I J K PBIC0808E 12. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the connecting rod cap. ● When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing surface (crankshaft side). Do not apply oil to the back surface (connecting rod and cap side), but thoroughly clean it. ● When installing, align the connecting rod bearing protrusion with the notch of the connecting rod to install. ● Check that the oil holes on the connecting rod and on the corresponding bearing are aligned. L M PBIC0101E Revision: March 2005 EM-231 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 13. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly into the corresponding cylinder. ● Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed onto the bottom dead center. ● Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and crankshaft pin. ● Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install. ● Install the piston with the front mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine, using a suitable tool. PBIC0102E CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin and cylinder wall, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big end. 14. Install the connecting rod cap. ● Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting rod with those on the cylinder cap for installation. ● Install the piston connecting rod assembly and cap so that the front mark on the cap and piston are facing the front of the engine. ● Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces with new engine oil. SEM457G 15. Check the connecting rod cap bolts before reusing, then install in their original position in the connecting rod. The bolts should screw in smoothly by hand. ● Measure the outer diameter of the connecting rod cap bolt as shown. Outer diameter "d" of the connecting rod bolt Standard : 7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150 in) Limit : 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) SEM538G 16. Tighten the connecting rod nuts in two stages: Stage 1 Stage 2 : 19 - 21 N·m (1.9 - 2.1 kg-m, 14 - 15 ft-lb) : 90° - 95° degrees clockwise CAUTION: Always use either an angle wrench or protractor. Avoid tightening based on visual check alone. Tool number ● ● ● : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of the connecting rod bolts and nuts. SEM953E After tightening the nuts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. Check the connecting rod side clearance. If beyond the limit, replace the connecting rod and/or crankshaft. Connecting rod side clearance: Standard : 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in) Limit : 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) Revision: March 2005 EM-232 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 17. Install the knock sensor. ● Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor. ● Install the knock sensor with the connector facing the rear of the engine. ● Do not tighten the bolts while holding the connector. ● Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other parts. CAUTION: If any impact by dropping occurs to the knock sensor, replace it with new one. Knock sensor bolt A EM C PBIC0810E D : 16 - 26 N·m (1.6 - 2.7 kg-m, 12 - 20 in-lb) E 18. Install the pilot bushing (M/T) or converter (A/T) as shown. F G H SEM163B I 19. Install the flywheel (M/T), if equipped. ● When installing flywheel to crankshaft, be sure to correctly align crankshaft side dowel pin and flywheel side dowel pin hole. Flywheel bolts J : 83 - 93 N·m (8.5 - 95 kg-m, 61 - 69 ft-lb) K L SEM916G M 20. Install the drive plate (A/T), if equipped. ● Install the drive plate and reinforce plate in the direction as shown. ● Align dowel pins of crankshaft rear and drive plate with pin holes of each part. ● Secure the crankshaft using a ring gear stopper. ● Tighten the drive plate bolts in one or two steps. Drive plate bolts : 83 - 93 N·m (8.5 - 95 kg-m, 61 - 69 ft-lb) PBIC0910E 21. 22. 23. 24. Install the cylinder head. Refer to EM-201, "Removal and Installation" . Install the timing chain. Refer to EM-172, "Installation" . Install the oil pan. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the engine from the stand and install the engine assembly into the vehicle. Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 EM-233 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 25. Assembly of the remaining parts is in the reverse order of disassembly. 26. Fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes for the sealant to set-up before filling the engine with fluids and running it. Inspection EBS00J6G PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE Inner Diameter of Piston Pin Hole ● Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole "dp". Standard diameter "dp" Grade No. 0 : 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 - 0.8661 in) Grade No. 1 : 21.999 - 22.005 mm (0.8661 - 0.8663 in) AEM023 Outer Diameter of Piston Pin ● Measure outer diameter of piston pin "Dp". Standard diameter "Dp" Grade No. 0 : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in) Grade No. 1 : 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 - 0.8662 in) AEM024 Piston and Piston Pin Interference Fit Standard Interference Fit = "Dp" – "dp" Standard ● : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) - 0.006 mm (0.0002 in) = - 0.0004 mm (-0.0001 in) If clearance is exceeds specification, replace either or both of piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each part. SEM838F PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ● Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove with feeler gauge. Standard Side Clearance Top ring : 0.045 - 0.080 mm (0.0018 - 0.0031 in) 2nd ring : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) Oil ring : 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 in) Maximum Limit Top ring Revision: March 2005 : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) SEM024AA EM-234 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 2nd ring Oil ring ● : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) :— A If out of specification, replace piston ring assembly. If clearance exceeds maximum limit with new rings, replace piston EM PISTON RING END GAP ● Insert piston ring until it is in the middle of the cylinder bore and measure the end gap. Standard Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Limit: Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring ● C : 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 in) : 0.33 - 0.48 mm (0.0130 - 0.0189 in) : 0.20 - 0.50 mm (0.0079 - 0.0197 in) D E : 0.54 mm (0.0213 in) : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) : 0.95 mm (0.0374 in) SEM599A F If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring. G CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION Bend Torsion : Limit 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length : Limit 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length H I J SEM038F ● K If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. L M SEM003F Revision: March 2005 EM-235 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING DIAMETER (BIG END) ● Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing installed. After tightening the connecting rod nut to the specified torque, measure the connecting rod bearing housing big end inner diameter using an inside micrometer. Standard : 55.000 - 55.013 mm (2.1654 - 2.1659 in) PBIC0119E CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End) ● Measure inner diameter of piston pin bushing. Standard Grade No. 0 : 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 - 0.8664 in) Grade No. 1 : 22.006 - 22.012 mm (0.8664 - 0.8666 in) PBIC0120E Outer Diameter of Piston Pin ● Measure outer diameter of piston pin. Standard Grade No. 0 : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in) Grade No. 1 : 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 -0.8662 in) PBIC0117E Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End) (Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Outer diameter of piston pin) Standard Limit ● ● : 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.007 in) : 0.030 - mm (0.0012 in) If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly. If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the Table for Selective Fitting for Piston to select the piston corresponding to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Refer to EM-237, "PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" . Revision: March 2005 EM-236 SEM457G 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] Factory installed parts grading: ● Service parts apply only to grade 0. A Unit: mm (in) Grade 0 1 Connecting rod small end inner diameter 22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664) 22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666) Piston pin outer diameter 21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659) 21.995 - 22. 001 (0.8659 - 0.8662) Piston pin hole diameter 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) 21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663) EM C SEM838F D CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION Using a scraper, remove any old gasket material on the cylinder block surface, and remove any oil, scale, carbon, or other contamination. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket flakes to enter the oil or coolant passages. Measure the distortion on the block upper face at different points in six directions. ● ● Distortion limit E F G : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) SEM123C If out of specification, resurface the cylinder block. The allowable amount of resurfacing is dependent on the amount of any cylinder head resurfacing. The resurfacing limit is [amount of cylinder head resurfacing] + [amount of cylinder head resurfacing] = 0.2 mm (0.008 in). ● Cylinder block height I : 214.95 - 215.05 mm (8.4626 - 8.4665 in) INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING J Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of the main bearing housing. ● ● Standard K : 63.993 - 64.017 mm (2.5194 - 2.5203 in) If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and main bearing caps as an assembly. NOTE: These components cannot be replaced as a single unit, because they were processed together. ● L M SEM845E PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE 1. Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper. The X axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine. Cylinder bore inner diameter Grade No. H Standard inner diameter No. 1 95.500 - 95.510 mm (3.7598 - 3.7602 in) No. 2 95.510 - 95.520 mm (3.7602 - 3.7606 in) No. 3 95.520 - 95.530 mm (3.7606 - 3.7610 in) Wear limit 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) SEM843E Revision: March 2005 EM-237 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] If it exceeds the limit, rebore all cylinders. Replace cylinder block if necessary. Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y) Taper (Difference between A and C) : limit 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) : limit 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) SEM321AA 2. Check for scratches and seizure. If seizure is found, hone it. ● If both cylinder block and piston are replaced with new ones, select piston of the same grade number punched on cylinder block rear position. These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. SEM756G 3. Measure piston skirt diameter. Piston diameter “A” Measuring point “a” (Distance from the top) : Refer to EM-252, "PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN" . : 41.0 mm (1.61 in) SEM258C 4. Check that piston-to-bore clearance is within specification. Piston-to-bore clearance at “B” ● : 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in) The piston-to-bore clearance is measured at the "B" level in the cylinder as shown. SEM321AA 5. 6. Determine piston oversize according to amount of cylinder wear. Oversize pistons are available for service. Refer to EM-252, "PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN" . Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”. Rebored size calculation where, D A Revision: March 2005 :D=A+B−C : Bored diameter : Piston diameter as measured EM-238 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] B C : Piston-to-bore clearance : Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) A 7. Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted after boring. EM 8. Cut cylinder bores. ● When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. ● Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameC ter at a time. 9. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance. 10. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. D ● Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. CRANKSHAFT 1. 2. E Check the crankshaft main and pin journals for scoring, wear, or cracks. Measure the journals for taper and out-of-round. Standard Out-of-round (X Y) Taper (A - B) F : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) G : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) H SEM316A 3. a. b. c. Measure crankshaft runout. Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on the both ends of the crankshaft. Place a dial gauge straight up on the No. 3 journal. While rotating the crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on the dial gauge. Runout limit (total indicator reading) I J K : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) SEM346D L BEARING CLEARANCE ● Use either of the following two methods, however method "A" gives more reliable results and so is the preferred method. Method A (Using Bore Gauge and Micrometer) Main Bearing 1. Set the main bearings in their proper positions on the cylinder block and the main bearing cap. 2. Install the main bearing caps and bearing beam to the cylinder block. Tighten all bolts in the numerical order as specified. Refer to EM-224, "Disassembly and Assembly" . SEM175F Revision: March 2005 EM-239 2005 Altima M CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 3. Measure the inner diameters "A" of each main bearing as shown. SEM845E 4. 5. Measure the outer diameters "Dm" of each crankshaft main journal as shown. Calculate the main bearing clearance. Main bearing clearance = "A" - "Dm" Standard Limit ● ● ● : 0.035 - 0.045 mm (0.0014 - 0.0018 in) : 0.065 mm (0.0026 in) If it exceeds the limit, replace the bearing. If clearance cannot be adjusted using any standard bearing grade, grind crankshaft journal and use an undersized bearing. AEM033 When grinding the crankshaft journal, confirm that the "L" dimension in the fillet role is more than the specified limit. "L" : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) SEM964 6. a. If the crankshaft or the cylinder block is replaced with a new one, select thickness of the main bearings as follows: The grade number of each cylinder block main journal is punched on the respective cylinder block. These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. If measured diameter is out of the grade punched, decide suitable grade from available main bearings. SEM756G Revision: March 2005 EM-240 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] b. The grade number of each crankshaft main journal is punched on the crankshaft end. These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. If measured diameter is out of grade punched, decide the suitable grade from available main bearings. A EM C SEM452G D c. Select the main bearing suitable thickness according to the following table: E F G H I J K L M PBIC0814E Connecting Rod Bearing (Big End) 1. 2. Install the connecting rod bearing to the connecting rod and cap. Install the connecting rod cap to the connecting rod. Tighten to specification. Refer to EM-224, "Disassembly and Assembly" . Revision: March 2005 EM-241 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 3. Measure the inner diameter "C" of each connecting rod (big end) as shown. AEM027 4. 5. Measure the outer diameter "Dp" of each crankshaft pin journal. Calculate the connecting rod bearing clearance. Connecting rod bearing clearance = C - Dp Standard Limit 6. 7. 8. : 0.034 - 0.059 mm (0.0013 - 0.0023 in) : 0.070 mm (0.0028 in) If the calculated clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace the bearings. If the clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard of any bearing, grind the crankshaft journal and use undersized bearings. AEM034 If the crankshaft is replaced with a new one, select the connecting rod bearings according to the following table: Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Number (Identification Color) Crankshaft pin journal grade number Connecting rod bearing grade number 0 0 (black) 1 1 (brown) 2 2 (green) These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. SEM452G Method B (Using Plastigage) ● ● ● ● Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of each bearing completely. Cut a Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod cap, and tighten the connecting rod nuts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Never rotate the crankshaft. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearings, and using the scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width. SEM142 NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is same as that described in "Method A (Using Bore Gauge and Micrometer)". Revision: March 2005 EM-242 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT (A/T) A Runout (Total Indicator Reading): Drive plate (A/T) torque converter surface Ring gear : less than 0.35mm (.0138 in) EM : less than 0.5mm ((.0197 in) CAUTION: ● The signal plate is built into the drive assembly. Be careful not to damage the signal plate, particularly the teeth. ● Check the drive plate and signal plate for deformation or cracks. ● Keep any magnetized objects away from the signal plate, particularly the teeth. C SEM849EB D E F G H SEM760G FLYWHEEL RUNOUT (M/T) I NOTE: ● This inspection is for double mass flywheel only. ● Do not disassemble the double mass flywheel. J Flywheel Deflection ● ● Measure the deflection of the flywheel contact surface to the clutch with a dial gauge. Measure the runout at 210 mm (8.27 in) diameter. Limit ● ● K : 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less under no load L When measured value exceeds the limit, replace the flywheel with a new one. Measure axial displacement at 250mm (9.84 in) diameter. Limit : 1.3mm (.051 in) or less under 100N (22.48 lb) force M SBIA0287E Movement Around in Rotation Direction Check the movement amount with the following procedure: 1. Install a bolt to clutch cover mounting hole and place a torque wrench on the extended line of the flywheel center line. ● Tighten the bolt at a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb) to keep it from loosening. 2. Put a mating mark on the circumference of the two flywheel masses without applying any load (measurement standard points). 3. Apply a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb) in each direction, and mark the movement amount on the mass on the transaxle side. Revision: March 2005 EM-243 2005 Altima CYLINDER BLOCK [VQ35DE] 4. Measure dimensions of movement amounts A and B on the circumference of the flywheel on the transaxle side. Flywheel movement in rotation direction ● : 20.22 mm (0.796 in) or less When the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the flywheel. WBIA0224E OIL JET ● ● ● Check nozzle for deformation and damage. Blow compressed air from nozzle, and check for clogs. If it is not satisfied, replace oil jet. OIL JET RELIEF VALVE ● ● Using a clean plastic stick, press check valve in oil jet relief valve. Make sure that valve moves smoothly with proper reaction force. If it is not satisfied, replace oil jet relief valve. EMU0468D Revision: March 2005 EM-244 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00100 A EBS00J6H GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Cylinder arrangement Displacement 3 cm Bore and stroke (in3 V-6 EM 3,498 (213.45) ) mm (in) 95.5 x 81.4 (3.76 x 3.205) Valve arrangement C DOHC Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Compression Number of piston rings 2 Oil D 1 Number of main bearings 4 Compression ratio E 10.0:1 Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/300 rpm Standard 1,275 (13.0, 185) Minimum 981 (10.0, 142) Differential limit between cylinders F 98 (1.0, 14) G H Cylinder number I J SEM713A K L Valve timing (IVTC - OFF) M PBIC0187E Unit: degree a b c d e f 240° 238° - 6° 64° 8° 52° Revision: March 2005 EM-245 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] DRIVE BELT LBIA0076E Deflection adjustment Unit: mm (in) Used belt Alternator and air conditioning compressor Power steering pump After adjustment 7 (0.28) 4.2 - 4.6 (0.17 - 0.18) 11 (0.43) 7.3 - 8 (0.29 - 0.30) Unit: N (kg, lb) Used belt New belt Limit Applied pushing force Tension adjustment* New belt Limit After adjustment 3.7 - 4.1 (0.15 - 0.16) 294 (30, 66) 730 - 818 (74.5 - 83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.5 - 94.5, 188 - 208) 6.5 - 7.2 (0.26 - 0.28) 196 (20, 44) 495 - 583 (50.5 - 59.5, 111 - 131) 603 - 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.4) 98 (10, 22) — *: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt. INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD Unit: mm (in) Item Surface distortion Limit Intake manifold collector 0.1 (0.004) Intake manifold 0.1 (0.004) Exhaust manifold 0.3 (0.012) SPARK PLUG Make Type NGK Standard type PLFR5A-11 Hot type PLFR4A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 Gap (nominal) Revision: March 2005 1.1 mm (0.043 in) EM-246 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] CYLINDER HEAD Unit: mm (in) A EM C D PBIC0924E Head surface distortion Normal cylinder head height "H" Standard Limit Less than 0.03 (0.0012) 0.1 (0.004) — 126.3 - 126.5 (4.972 - 4.980) E F VALVE Valve Dimensions Unit: mm (in) G H I J SEM188 Intake Valve head diameter “D” Valve length “L” Valve stem diameter “d” 37.0 - 37.3 (1.4567 - 1.4685) Exhaust K 31.2 - 31.5 (1.228 - 1.240) Intake 96.46 (3.7976) Exhaust 9681 (3.8114) L Intake 5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354) Exhaust 5.945 - 5.960 (0.2341 - 0.2346) M Intake Valve seat angle “α” Valve margin “T” 45°15′ - 45°45′ Exhaust Intake 1.15 - 1.45 (0.0453 - 0.0571) Exhaust 1.45 - 1.75 (0.0571 - 0.0689) Valve margin “T” limit More than 0.5 (0.020) Valve stem end surface grinding limit Less than 0.2 (0.008) Valve Clearance Unit: mm (in) Cold Hot* (reference data) Intake 0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013) 0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015) 0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017) *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Revision: March 2005 EM-247 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Valve Spring Free height Pressure mm (in) 46.52 (1.8315) N (kg, lb) at height mm (in) Out-of-square Standard 184 - 208 (18.8 - 21.2, 41.4 - 46.8) at 37.0 (1.457) Limit 407 - 459 (41.5 - 46.8, 91.5 - 103.2) at 28.2 (1.110) mm (in) Less than 2.0 (0.079) Valve Lifter Unit: mm (in) Valve lifter outer diameter 33.977 - 33.987 (1.3377 - 1.3381) Lifter lifter bore diameter 34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392) Clearance between lifter and lifter guide 0.013 - 0.039 (0.0005 - 0.0015) SEM758G Identification Mark Thickness mm (in) 788C 7.88 (0.3102) 790C 7.90 (0.3110) 792C 7.92 (0.3118) 794C 7.94 (0.3126) 796C 7.96 (0.3134) 798C 7.98 (0.3142) 800C 8.00 (0.3150) 802C 8.02 (03.157) 804C 8.04 (0.3165) 806C 8.06 (0.3173) 808C 8.08 (0.3181) 810C 8.10 (0.3189) 812C 8.12 (0.3197) 814C 8.14 (0.3205) 816C 8.16 (0.3213) 818C 8.18 (0.3220) 820C 8.20 (0.3228) 822C 8.22 (0.3236) 824C 8.24 (0.3244) 826C 8.26 (0.3252) 828C 8.28 (0.3260) 830C 8.30 (0.3268) 832C 8.32 (0.3276) 834C 8.34 (0.3283) 836C 8.36 (0.3291) Revision: March 2005 EM-248 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Valve Guide Unit: mm (in) A EM C D SEM950E Valve guide Outer diameter Valve guide Inner diameter (Finished size) Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter Standard Service 10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950) 10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029) 6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369) 9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935) Interference fit of valve guide Valve to valve guide clearance Valve deflection E 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014) F 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023) Standard Limit Intake 0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) 0.08 (0.0031) Exhaust 0.040 - 0.073 (0.0016 - 0.0029) 0.1 (0.004) Intake — 0.24 (0.0094) Exhaust — 0.28 (0.0110) Projection length “L” G 12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504) H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EM-249 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Valve Seat Unit: mm (in) SEM021EB SEM621F Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D) Valve seat interference fit Valve seat outer diameter (d) Standard Service Intake 38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967) 38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164) Exhaust 32.200 - 32.216 (1.2677 - 1.2683) 32.700 - 32.716 (1.2874 - 1.2880) Intake 0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044) Exhaust 0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038) Intake 38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005) 38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202) Exhaust 32.280 - 32.296 (1.2709 - 1.2715) 32.780 - 32.796 (1.2905 - 1.2912) Intake 5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236) 5.05 - 5.15 (0.1988 - 0.2028) Exhaust 5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236) 4.95 - 5.05 (0.1949 - 0.1988) Height (h) Depth (H) Depth (L) Revision: March 2005 5.9 - 6.1 (0.232 - 0.240) Intake 41.07 - 41.67 (1.6169 - 1.6405) Exhaust 41.00 - 41.60 (1.6142 - 1.6378) EM-250 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING Unit: mm (in) Camshaft journal to bearing clearance Standard Limit No. 1 0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034) No. 2, 3, 4 0.035 - 0.076 (0.0014 - 0.0030) 0.15 (0.0059) Inner diameter of camshaft bearing No. 1 26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244) No. 2, 3, 4 23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260) Outer diameter of camshaft journal No. 1 25.935 - 25.955 (1.0211 - 1.0218) No. 2, 3, 4 23.445 - 23.465 (0.9230 - 0.9238) — Camshaft runout [TIR*] Less than 0.02 (0.0008) 0.05 (0.0020) Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] Less than 0.15 (0.0059) — 0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074) 0.24 (0.0094) Camshaft end play A EM C — D E F *: Total indicator reading G H I J SEM671 Cam lobe height “A” Intake and exhaust 44.465 - 44.655 (1.7506 - 1.7581) Wear limit of cam lobe height 0.2 (0.008) K CYLINDER BLOCK Unit: mm (in) L M SEM022EA Standard Surface distortion Less than 0.03 (0.0012) Limit 0.10 (0.0039) Standard Cylinder bore Inner diameter Grade No. 1 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602) Grade No. 2 95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 - 3.7606) Grade No. 3 95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 - 3.7610) Wear limit 0.20 (0.0079) Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y) Revision: March 2005 Less than 0.015 (0.0006) EM-251 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Taper (Difference between A and C) Main journal inner diameter grade (Without bearing) Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 Difference in inner diameter between cylinders Standard Less than 0.015 (0.0006) 63.993 - 63.994 (2.5194 - 2.5194) 63.994 - 63.995 (2.5194 - 2.5195) 63.995 - 63.996 (2.5195 - 2.5195) 63.996 - 63.997 (2.5195 - 2.5196) 63.997 - 63.998 (2.5196 - 2.5196) 63.998 - 63.999 (2.5196 - 2.5196) 63.999 - 64.000 (2.5196 - 2.5197) 64.000 - 64.001 (2.5197 - 2.5197) 64.001 - 64.002 (2.5197 - 2.5198) 64.002 - 64.003 (2.5198 - 2.5198) 64.003 - 64.004 (2.5198 - 2.5198) 64.004 - 64.005 (2.5198 - 2.5199) 64.005 - 64.006 (2.5199 - 2.5199) 64.006 - 64.007 (2.5199 - 2.5200) 64.007 - 64.008 (2.5200 - 2.5200) 64.008 - 64.009 (2.5200 - 2.5200) 64.009 - 64.010 (2.5200 - 2.5201) 64.010 - 64.011 (2.5201 - 2.5201) 64.011 - 64.012 (2.5201 - 2.5202) 64.012 - 64.013 (2.5202 - 2.5202) 64.013 - 64.014 (2.5202 - 2.5202) 64.014 - 64.015 (2.5202 - 2.5203) 64.015 - 64.016 (2.5203 - 2.5203) 64.016 - 64.017 (2.5203 - 2.5203) Less than 0.03 (0.0012) PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN Available Piston Unit: mm (in) SEM882E Piston skirt diameter “A” Standard Grade No. 1 95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 - 3.7594) Grade No. 2 95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 - 3.7598) Grade No. 3 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602) 0.20 (0.0079) oversize (Service) 95.680 - 95.710 (3.7669 - 3.7681) “a” dimension Piston pin hole diameter 41.0 (1.614) Grade No. 0 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) Grade No. 1 21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663) Piston-to-bore clearance to cylinder block Revision: March 2005 0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012) EM-252 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Piston Ring Unit: mm (in) Side clearance End gap Standard Limit Top 0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031) 0.11 (0.0043) 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.1 (0.004) Oil ring 0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053) — Top 0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130) 0.54 (0.0213) 2nd 0.33 - 0.48 (0.0130 - 0.0189) 0.80 (0.0315) Oil (rail ring) 0.20 - 0.50 (0.0079 - 0.0197) 0.95 (0.0374) A EM C D Piston Pin Unit: mm (in) Piston pin outer diameter Grade No. 0 21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659) Grade No. 1 21.995 - 22.001 (0.8659 - 0.8662) Interference fit of piston pin to piston Piston pin to connecting rod bushing oil clearance E 0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002) Standard 0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007) Limit F 0.030 (0.0012) *: Values measured at ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F) G CONNECTING ROD Unit: mm (in) Center distance 144.15 - 144.25 (5.6752 - 5.6791) Bend [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.15 (0.0059) Torsion [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.30 (0.0118) Connecting rod small end inner diameter Piston pin bushing inner diameter* I 23.980 - 24.000 (0.9441 - 0.9449) Grade No. 0 22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664) Grade No. 1 22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666) Connecting rod big end inner diameter J 55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659) Standard Side clearance H 0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138) Limit K 0.40 (0.0157) *: After installing in connecting rod L M Revision: March 2005 EM-253 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] CRANKSHAFT Unit: mm (in) SEM645 Main journal dia. “Dm” grade Pin journal dia. “Dp” SEM715 Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 59.975 - 59.974 (2.3612 - 2.3612) 59.974 - 59.973 (2.3612 - 2.3611) 59.973 - 59.972 (2.3611 - 2.3611) 59.972 - 59.971 (2.3611 - 2.3611) 59.971 - 59.970 (2.3611 - 2.3610) 59.970 - 59.969 (2.3610 - 2.3610) 59.969 - 59.968 (2.3610 - 2.3609) 59.968 - 59.967 (2.3609 - 2.3609) 59.967 - 59.966 (2.3609 - 2.3609) 59.966 - 59.965 (2.3609 - 2.3608) 59.965 - 59.964 (2.3608 - 2.3608) 59.964 - 59.963 (2.3608 - 2.3607) 59.963 - 59.962 (2.3607 - 2.3607) 59.962 - 59.961 (2.3607 - 2.3607) 59.961 - 59.960 (2.3607 - 2.3606) 59.960 - 59.959 (2.3606 - 2.3606) 59.959 - 59.958 (2.3606 - 2.3605) 59.958 - 59.957 (2.3605 - 2.3605) 59.957 - 59.956 (2.3605 - 2.3605) 59.956 - 59.955 (2.3605 - 2.3604) 59.955 - 59.954 (2.3604 - 2.3604) 59.954 - 59.953 (2.3604 - 2.3603) 59.953 - 59.952 (2.3603 - 2.3603) 59.952 - 59.951 (2.3603 - 2.3603) Grade No. 0 51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462) Grade No. 1 51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460) Grade No. 2 51.956 - 51.962 (2.0445 - 2.0457) Center distance “r” 40.36 - 40.44 (1.5890 - 1.5921) Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y) Standard Less than 0.002 (0.0001) Taper (Difference between A and B) Standard Less than 0.002 (0.0001) Runout [TIR*] Limit Less than 0.10 (0.0039) Standard End play 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Limit 0.30 (0.0118) *: Total indicator reading Revision: March 2005 EM-254 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING A EM C D SEM175F Grade number 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 Thickness “T” mm (in) Width “W” mm (in) Identification color (UPR/LWR) 0 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) Black 1 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) Brown 2 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) Green 3 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Yellow 4 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Blue 5 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) Pink 6 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Purple 7 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) White UPP 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) LWR 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) UPR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) LWR 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) UPR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) LWR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) UPR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) LWR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) UPR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) LWR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) UPR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) LWR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) UPR 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) LWR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Remarks E F Grade is the same for upper and lower bearings. H Brown/Black I 19.9 - 20.1 (0.783 - 0.791) Green/Brown J Yellow/Green Blue/Yellow Grade is different for upper and lower bearings. L Purple/Pink M White/Purple Unit: mm (in) Thickness 2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843) Main journal diameter “Dm” Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. CONNECTING ROD BEARING Grade number Thickness “T” mm (in) Identification color (mark) 0 1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592) Black 1 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Brown 2 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Green Revision: March 2005 K Pink/Blue Undersize 0.25 (0.0098) G EM-255 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Undersize Unit: mm (in) Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643) Crank pin journal diameter “Dp” Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS Unit: mm (in) Drive plate deflection [TIR]* - on torque converter mount surface Drive plate deflection [TIR]* - on ring gear Less than 0.35 (0.0138) 0.5 (0.0197) Flywheel runout [TIR]* limit Less than 0.45 (0.0177) Flywheel axial displacement limit measured at 250mm (9.84 in) Less than 1.3 (0.051) or less under 100N (22.48 lb) force. *: Total indicator reading BEARING CLEARANCE Unit: mm (in) Standard Main bearing clearance Connecting rod bearing clearance 0.035 - 0.045 (0.0014 - 0.0018)* Limit 0.065 (0.0026) Standard 0.034 - 0.059 (0.0013 - 0.0023)* Limit 0.070 (0.0028) *: Actual clearance Revision: March 2005 EM-256 2005 Altima B ENGINE SECTION EX EXHAUST SYSTEM A EX C D E CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Special Service Tool ................................................. 2 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE) ................................. 3 Checking Exhaust System ....................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 4 Inspection After Installation ...................................... 5 EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE) .................................. 6 Checking Exhaust System ........................................ 6 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 Inspection After Installation ...................................... 8 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EX-1 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EBS00J8J The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors: a: 22 mm (0.87 in) S-NT636 Commercial Service Tools EBS00J8K (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below): a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for zirconia oxygen sensor b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for titania oxygen sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts PBIC0190E Revision: March 2005 EX-2 2005 Altima EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE) EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE) Checking Exhaust System PFP:20100 A EBS00J8L Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting components for incorrect attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, or deterioration. EX C D SMA211A E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 EX-3 2005 Altima EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE) Removal and Installation EBS00J8M WBIA0209E 1. Rear muffler 2. Rear muffler bracket (ground strap) 3. Center exhaust tube 4. Center exhaust tube hanger 5. Exhaust manifold 6. Front exhaust tube 7. Front exhaust tube spring 8. Front exhaust tube hanger 9. Seal bearing 10. Gasket Revision: March 2005 EX-4 2005 Altima EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE) CAUTION: ● Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat A resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. ● Perform the procedure with the exhaust system fully cooled down because the system will be hot just after the engine is turned off. EX ● Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edges. ● If the insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the insulator, clean and inspect the insulator. C ● When installing the insulator avoid large gaps or interference between the insulator and each exhaust pipe. ● Remove deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid D exhaust gas leaks. ● Temporarily tighten the exhaust manifold side mounting nuts and the vehicle side mounting bolts. Check each part for any interference, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. E ● When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or excessive extension in up/down and right/left directions. ● Tighten the mounting bolts without causing interference with the flange. F ● Insert the seal bearing in the direction as shown. Tighten the mounting bolt with the big end of the spring facing the flange as shown. G H I WBIA0210E Inspection After Installation ● ● EBS00J8N With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and abnormal noise. Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration. J K L M Revision: March 2005 EX-5 2005 Altima EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE) EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE) Checking Exhaust System PFP:20100 EBS00J8O Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting components for incorrect attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, or deterioration. SMA211A Revision: March 2005 EX-6 2005 Altima EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE) Removal and Installation EBS00J8P A EX C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0588E 1. RH rear muffler 2. LH rear muffler 3. RH rear muffler bracket with ground strap 4. LH rear muffler bracket 5. Center exhaust tube hanger 6. Center exhaust tube 7. Front exhaust tube 8. Front exhaust tube hanger 9. LH exhaust manifold 10. RH exhaust manifold Revision: March 2005 11. Gasket EX-7 2005 Altima EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE) CAUTION: ● Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. ● Perform the procedures with the exhaust system fully cooled down because the system will be hot just after the engine is turned off. ● Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edge. ● Always replace the exhaust gaskets with new ones for installation. ● If any insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the insulator, clean and inspect them. ● When installing the insulator avoid large gaps or interference between the insulator and the exhaust pipe. ● Remove any deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid exhaust gas leakage. ● Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the mounting bolts on the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. ● When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or any over extension in up/down and right/ left directions. Inspection After Installation ● ● EBS00J8Q With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and unusual noises. Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration. Revision: March 2005 EX-8 2005 Altima D DRIVELINE/AXLE SECTION FAX FRONT AXLE A B C FAX E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ................................... 5 On-vehicle Service ................................................... 5 FRONT WHEEL BEARING ................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 REMOVAL ............................................................. 7 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 8 DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 8 ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 9 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ............................................. 11 Removal and Installation ........................................ 11 REMOVAL ........................................................... 11 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 15 DISSASSEMBLY ................................................. 16 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 18 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 19 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 24 Drive Shaft .............................................................. 24 Wheel Bearing (Front) ............................................ 24 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FAX-1 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions PFP:00001 EDS001D3 CAUTION: ● When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. ● After installing removed suspension parts, check the wheel alignment. ● Do not jack up at lower links. Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft. ● Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. ● Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts. ● Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the service location. ● Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. ● Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. ● Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths. Revision: March 2005 FAX-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS001D4 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B HT72520000 (J25730-A) Ball joint remover Removing tie-rod outer end and lower ball joint a: 33 mm (1.30 in) b: 50 mm (1.97 in) r: R11.5 mm (0.453 in) C NT546 KV38106700 (J34296) KV38106800 (J34297) Differential side oil seal protector FAX E Installing drive shaft LH: KV38106700 (J34296) RH: KV38106800 (J34297) F G NT147 KV40107500 ( — ) Drive shaft attachment H Removing drive shaft (VQ35DE) I ZZA1230D Commercial Service Tools EDS001D5 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts J K L PBIC0190E M Revision: March 2005 FAX-3 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EDS001D6 Symptom WHEEL HUB Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart. Refer to WHEEL HUB in this chart. FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WHEEL HUB SUSPENSION TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES STEERING FAX-6 Wheel bearing damage — × Parts interference Shake FAX-6 × DRIVE SHAFT DRIVE SHAFT Improper installation, looseness × Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS — FAX-18 Joint sliding resistance Noise, Vibration Reference page Imbalance — Excessive joint angle Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × Noise × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × Vibration × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × × × Shudder × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: March 2005 FAX-4 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE On-vehicle Service PFP:40202 A EDS001D7 Check front axle and front suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or other damage. ● Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play. ● Make sure that cotter pin is inserted. ● Retighten all axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . B C FAX SMA525A E FRONT WHEEL BEARING ● ● Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. Check axial end play. Axial end play F : 0.07 mm (0.0030 in) or less G If out of specification or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly, replace wheel bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . H LDIA0001E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FAX-5 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Removal and Installation EDS001D8 LDIA0002E 1. Drive shaft 2. Sensor rotor (if equipped) 3. Snap ring 4. Steering knuckle 5. ABS wheel sensor (if equipped) 6. Baffle plate 7. Wheel bearing assembly 8. Hub bolt 9. Wheel hub 10. Wheel bearing lock nut 11. Cotter pin 12. Wheel nut 13. Disc rotor Revision: March 2005 FAX-6 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE REMOVAL A CAUTION: Before removing the front axle assembly, remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Then move it away from the front axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the ABS wheel sensor becoming inoper- B ative. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . 2. Remove the engine undercover. C 3. Remove the front ABS wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-42, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Before removing the front axle assembly, remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly, then FAX position it aside. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor or sensor wires, rendering it inoperative. 4. Remove the cotter pin, then the wheel bearing lock nut using power tool. E 5. Remove brake caliper assembly and rotor using power tool. ● The brake hose does not need to be disconnected from brake caliper. In this case, suspend caliper assembly aside with F wire. CAUTION: ● Do not stretch or twist brake hose. G ● Do not depress brake pedal, or brake caliper piston will pop out. H SFA701 6. Separate tie rod from knuckle using Tool. Tool number I : HT72520000 (J25730-A) CAUTION: Install stud nut on stud bolt to prevent damage to stud bolt. J K WGIA0101E 7. Separate drive shaft from knuckle by lightly tapping it. If it is hard to remove, use a suitable puller. CAUTION: Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them when removing drive shaft. M LDIA0004E Revision: March 2005 FAX-7 L 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE 8. Remove lower strut mounting bolts. AFA047 9. Loosen lower ball joint nut. 10. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud using Tool. Tool number : HT72520000 (J25730-A) 11. Remove lower ball joint nut, then knuckle from transverse link. WDIA0092E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Wheel Hub ● Check wheel hub for cracks by a magnetic exploration or dyeing test, and replace if cracked. Knuckle ● Check for deformity, cracks (by magnetic exploration or dyeing test) and damage on steering knuckle, replace if necessary. Snap Ring ● Check for wear and damage on snap ring, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten to specification. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . Disassembly and Assembly EDS001D9 DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: ● When removing wheel hub or wheel bearing from knuckle, replace wheel bearing assembly (outer race, inner races and grease seals) with a new one. ● When replacing wheel bearing, replace complete wheel bearing assembly (inner races and outer race). 1. Press out wheel hub from knuckle using suitable tool. AFA130 Revision: March 2005 FAX-8 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE 2. Remove snap rings. A B C LDIA0005E 3. FAX Press out wheel bearing from knuckle using suitable tool. E F G SFA496A H ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Install inner snap ring into groove of knuckle. Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle until it contacts snap ring. Maximum load P I : 50 kN (5.1 ton, 5.6 US ton, 5.02 Imp ton) 3. CAUTION: ● Do not press inner race of wheel bearing assembly. ● Do not apply oil or grease to mating surfaces of wheel bearing outer race and knuckle. Install outer snap ring into groove of knuckle. 4. Press wheel hub into knuckle. J K SFA655A L Maximum load P 5. : 50 kN (5.1 ton, 5.6 US ton, 5.02 Imp ton) M Check bearing operation. SFA658A Revision: March 2005 FAX-9 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE a. Add load P with press. Load P : 35-50 kN (3.6 - 5.1 ton, 3.9 - 5.6 US ton, 3.51 - 5.02 Imp ton) SFA659A b. c. Spin knuckle several turns in both directions. Make sure that wheel bearings operate smoothly. SFA182A Revision: March 2005 FAX-10 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Removal and Installation PFP:39100 A EDS001DA B C FAX E F G H I J K L WDIA0292E 1. LH drive shaft 2. RH drive shaft 3. Center support bracket REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the wheel and tire. Remove the cotter pin and wheel bearing lock nut using power tool. NOTE: Brake caliper does not need to be disconnected. CAUTION: Do not twist or stretch brake hose when moving components. Remove the engine undercover. Revision: March 2005 FAX-11 2005 Altima M FRONT DRIVE SHAFT 4. Loosen the lower ball joint nut and separate the lower ball joint transverse link using Tool. Tool number : HT72520000 (J25730-A) WDIA0092E 5. Disconnect the connecting rod from the strut. SFA796B 6. Separate drive shaft from knuckle by lightly tapping it. If it is hard to remove, use a puller. CAUTION: Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them when removing drive shaft. 7. Remove support bearing bolts using power tool, and pull righthand drive shaft from transaxle using suitable tool as shown. SFA989 8. Remove lefthand drive shaft from transaxle. — For QR25DE M/T models — ● Pry off drive shaft from transaxle using a suitable tool as shown. SFA991 Revision: March 2005 FAX-12 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT — For QR25DE A/T models — ● Insert screwdriver into transaxle opening for right drive shaft and strike with a hammer. ● Be careful not to damage pinion mate shaft and side gear. A B C FAX E F G SFA730 H — For VQ35DE models — ● Remove drive shaft from transaxle using Tool and drive shaft puller or suitable tool. – Set Tool and a drive shaft puller or suitable tool between drive shaft (slide joint side) and transaxle as shown, then remove drive shaft. Tool number : KV40107500 ( — I J ) K WDIA0098E L 9. Remove oil seal from transaxle case. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● M Check for halting movement or a noticeable rattle by moving a joint part vertically, horizontally and to axial direction. Check for crack damage and grease leak of boot. SFA108A INSTALLATION Transaxle Side 1. Drive a new oil seal into transaxle case. Refer to MT-76, "SIDE OIL SEAL" or AT-268, "Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement" . Revision: March 2005 FAX-13 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT 2. Set Tool along the inner circumference of oil seal. Tool number : KV38106800 (J34297) WDIA0094E 3. 4. Install a new circlip on the drive shaft. CAUTION: Always use a new circlip for installation. Insert drive shaft into transaxle. Be sure to properly align the serrations and then withdraw Tool. Tool number 5. 6. 7. : KV38106800 (J34296) Push drive shaft, then press-fit circular clip on the drive shaft into circlip groove of side gear. After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the side gear. Install remaining components in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . WDIA0095E Wheel Side 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install drive shaft into knuckle. Tighten support bearing bolts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . Tighten upper knuckle nut and wheel bearing lock nut. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . Install a new cotter pin to secure the wheel bearing lock nut. CAUTION: Always use a new cotter pin for installation. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . Revision: March 2005 FAX-14 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly EDS001DB A B C FAX E F G H I J K L M WDIA0106E 1. Dust shield 2. Sensor rotor (if equipped) 3. Joint assembly 4. Boot 5. Boot band 6. Circlip 7. Drive shaft 8. Dynamic damper 9. Dynamic damper band 10. Boot 11. Boot band 12. Spider assembly 13. Snap ring 14. Slide joint assembly 15. Dust shield 17. Ball 18. Inner race 16. Circlip Revision: March 2005 FAX-15 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT 19. Cage 20. Slide joint housing with extension shaft 21. Snap ring 22. Dust shield 23. Support bearing 24. Support bearing retainer 25. Center support bracket 26. Snap ring 27. Dust shield 28. Differential side oil seal DISSASSEMBLY Transaxle Side (BJ type) 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove boot bands. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and inner race, before separating joint assembly. Remove stopper ring with a screwdriver, and pull out slide joint housing. Put matching marks on inner race and drive shaft. SFA476 5. 6. Remove snap ring, then remove ball cage, inner race and balls as a unit. Draw out boot. Cover drive shaft serrations with tape so as not to damage the boot. SFA514A Transaxle Side (SFJ type) 1. 2. 3. Remove boot bands. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and drive shaft before separating joint assembly. Put matching marks on spider assembly and drive shaft. SFA963 Revision: March 2005 FAX-16 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT 4. 5. Remove snap ring, then remove spider assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble spider assembly. Draw out boot. CAUTION: Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to the boot. A B C SFA612 FAX Wheel Side CAUTION: The joint on the wheel side cannot be disassembled. 1. Before separating joint assembly, put matching marks on drive shaft and joint assembly. 2. Separate joint assembly using suitable tool. Be careful not to damage threads on drive shaft. 3. Remove boot bands. 4. Draw out boot. E F G H SFA092A Support Bearing 1. I Remove dust shield. J K L SFA442B 2. M Remove snap ring using suitable tool. SFA692 Revision: March 2005 FAX-17 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT 3. Press support bearing assembly off drive shaft. SFA693 4. Separate support bearing from retainer using suitable tool. SFA617 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent, and dry with compressed air. Check parts for evidence of deformation or other damage. Shaft Replace drive shaft if it is twisted or cracked. Boot and Boot Band Check boot for fatigue, cracks or wear. Replace boot with new boot bands. Joint Assembly (Transaxle side) ● ● ● ● ● Check spider assembly for needle bearing and washer damage. Replace if necessary. (SFJ type) Check roller surfaces for scratches, wear or other damage. Replace if necessary. (SFJ type) Replace any parts of double offset joint which show signs of scorching, rust, wear or excessive play. (BJ type) Check serration for deformation. Replace if necessary. Check slide joint housing for any damage. Replace if necessary. Joint Assembly (Wheel side) Replace joint assembly if it is deformed or damaged. Housing (Slide joint) ● ● ● Check for damage or abnormal wear on ball rolling surface. Check for wear on shaft bolts. Check for deformity on boot install part. Ball cage ● Check for damage or abnormality on sliding surface. Steel ball ● Check for damage or abnormal wear. Inner race ● ● Check for damage or abnormality on ball rolling surface. Check for damage on serration part. Revision: March 2005 FAX-18 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Support Bearing A Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: ● After drive shaft has been assembled, ensure that it moves smoothly over its entire range without binding. ● Use Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent after every overhaul. B C Transaxle Side (BJ type) 1. Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft. CAUTION: Cover drive shaft serration with tape so as not to damage boot during installation. FAX E F SFA800 2. 3. 4. Grease capacity 5. G Install ball cage, inner race and balls as a unit, making sure the marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. Install new snap ring. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease. H I : 115 – 135 g (4.06 – 4.76 oz) Install slide joint housing, then install new snap ring. J SFA514A 6. Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft groove. Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is “L2”. Length “L2” K L : 95.1 – 97.9 mm (3.74 – 3.85 in) M SFA149A 7. Lock new larger and smaller boot bands securely with a suitable tool. SFA395 Revision: March 2005 FAX-19 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Transaxle Side (SFJ type) 1. Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft. CAUTION: Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to boot during installation. SFA800 2. 3. Install spider assembly securely, making sure the marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. Install new snap ring. SFA023A 4. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease. Grease capacity : 180 – 200 g (6.35 – 7.05 oz) 5. Install slide joint housing. 6. Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is “L2”. Length “L2” : 96.9 – 99.7 mm (3.81 – 3.93 in) Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft groove. SFA993 Revision: March 2005 FAX-20 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT 7. Lock new larger and smaller boot bands securely with a suitable tool. A B C SFA395 FAX ● Install snap ring. E F G SFA444B ● Wheel Side 1. 2. H Install new dust shield. I Press in sensor rotor to joint sub-assembly using suitable drift, if equipped. CAUTION: Always install a new sensor rotor. Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft. CAUTION: Cover drive shaft serration with tape so as not to damage boot during installation. J K L M SFA800 3. Set joint assembly onto drive shaft by lightly tapping it. Install joint assembly securely, ensuring marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure circlip engages inside joint assembly and the drive shaft does not pull out. SFA942A Revision: March 2005 FAX-21 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT 4. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease. Grease capacity QR25DE VQ35DE 5. : 115 – 135 g (4.06 – 4.76 oz) : 145 – 165 g (5.11 – 5.82 oz) Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft groove. Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is “L1”. Length “L1” QR25DE VQ35DE : 114.3 – 117.1 mm (4.50 – 4.61 in) : 126.7 – 129.9 mm (4.99 – 5.11 in) SFA592B 6. Lock new larger and smaller boot bands securely using suitable tool. RAC1133D 7. Measure criped area of boot bands after installation. CAUTION: Secure boot band so that dimemsion "M" meets specification as shown. Dimension "M" : 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.39 – 0.157) DSF0047D Dynamic Damper 1. 2. Use new damper bands when installing. Install dynamic damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely. Unit: mm (in) Applied model RH LH Engine QR25DE VQ35DE QR25DE VQ35DE "A" 207 - 213 (8.1 - 8.4) — 207 - 213 (8.1 - 8.4) 207 - 213 (8.1 - 8.4) “B” 50 (2.0) — 50 (2.0) 50 (2.0) SFA313B Revision: March 2005 FAX-22 2005 Altima FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Support Bearing ● A Press bearing into retainer using suitable tool. B C SFA618 ● Press drive shaft into bearing using suitable tool. FAX E F G SFA694 H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FAX-23 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Drive Shaft Applied model Capacity g (oz) Transaxle side “L2 ” mm (in) VQ35DE NISSAN Genuine Grease or equivalent Wheel side (BJ type) 115 - 135 (4.06 - 4.76) Wheel side (SFJ type) 180 - 200 (6.35 - 7.05) Wheel side Boot length EDS001DC QR25DE Quality Grease PFP:00030 Wheel side “L1 ” 115 - 135 (4.06 - 4.76) 145 - 165 (5.11 - 5.82) 96.9 - 99.7 (3.81 - 3.93) 95.1 - 97.9 mm (3.74 - 3.85 in) 114.3 - 117.1 (4.50 - 4.61) 126.7 - 129.9 (4.99 - 5.11) SFA961AA SFA962A Wheel Bearing (Front) EDS001DD Wheel bearing axial end play limit 0.07 mm (0.0030 in) or less Wheel bearing lock nut tightening torque Revision: March 2005 236 - 313 N·m (24 - 31 kg-m, 174 - 230 ft-lb) FAX-24 2005 Altima B ENGINE SECTION FL FUEL SYSTEM A FL C D E CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Special Service Tools ............................................... 2 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................... 3 Checking Fuel Lines ................................................. 3 General Precautions ................................................ 3 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ........................................... 5 Removal and Installation For All Models Except PZEV ........................................................................ 5 REMOVAL ............................................................. 5 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .................. 8 Removal and Installation For PZEV Models Only..... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 10 INSTALLATION ................................................... 10 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 11 FUEL TANK .............................................................. 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 15 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 16 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 17 Standard and Limit .................................................. 17 QR25DE .............................................................. 17 VQ35DE .............................................................. 17 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FL-1 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00J8B The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV991J0090 (J-46214) Fuel tank lock ring wrench Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring LBIA0353E Commercial Service Tools EBS00J8C Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: March 2005 FL-2 2005 Altima FUEL SYSTEM FUEL SYSTEM Checking Fuel Lines PFP:17503 A EBS00J8D Inspect fuel lines, filler cap and tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts as necessary. FL C D SMA803A E General Precautions EBS00J8E WARNING: When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following. ● Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the work area. F Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and have a CO2 fire extinguisher. ● Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in safe area. – Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE), EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (VQ35DE). – Disconnect the battery ground cable. ● Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones. ● Do not kink or twist tubes when they are being installed. ● Do not tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. Tighten high-pressure rubber hose clamp so that clamp end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from hose end. Tightening torque specifications are the same for all rubber hose clamps. Ensure that screw does not contact adjacent parts. ● G H I J K L M MMA104A Revision: March 2005 FL-3 2005 Altima FUEL SYSTEM ● – – ● ● ● ● After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure the quick connectors are secure. Check that the connector and resin tube do not contact any adjacent parts. a) Apply fuel pressure to the fuel system by turning the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine). Then check for fuel leaks at the fuel tube connections. b) Start the engine and rev the engine, then check for fuel leaks at the fuel tube connections. After installing the tubes, run the engine and check for fuel leaks at the connections. Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" (QR25DE), EC651, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" (VQ35DE). For servicing “On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)” parts, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" (QR25DE), EC-660, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" (VQ35DE). PBIC0199E Revision: March 2005 FL-4 2005 Altima FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation For All Models Except PZEV PFP:17042 A EBS00J8F FL C D E F G H I WBIA0448E 1. Lock ring 4. Fuel tank 2. Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly 3. J Ring seal K REMOVAL WARNING: Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" . 1. Unscrew the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank. 2. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE), EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (VQ35DE). 3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 4. Remove the rear seat bottom. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Turn the four retainers 90° in a clockwise direction and remove the fuel pump inspection hole cover. LBIA0337E Revision: March 2005 FL-5 2005 Altima L M FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 6. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, EVAP hose quick connector, and the fuel feed hose quick connector from the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. LBIA0338E Remove the quick connector as follows: ● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. SFE562A ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal. ● Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. ● When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer). ● To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags or something similar. PBIC0163E 7. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) CAUTION: Discard the lock ring, do not reuse the lock ring. ● Discard the ring seal, do not reuse the ring seal. ● WBIA0284E Revision: March 2005 FL-6 2005 Altima FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 8. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not bend the float arm during removal. ● Discard the ring seal, do not reuse the ring seal. A FL C LBIA0339E D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump for any defects and foreign materials. Replace as necessary. E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle as shown. Use a new ring seal. F G H LBIA0338E ● – – ● – Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by performing the following checks: Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. I J K L PBIC1653E M Revision: March 2005 FL-7 2005 Altima FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY – Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. PBIC0199E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to apply fuel pressure to the fuel system, then check the connections for fuel leaks. 2. Start the engine and let it idle and check for fuel leaks at the fuel system connections. Removal and Installation For PZEV Models Only EBS00J8G WBIA0525E Revision: March 2005 FL-8 2005 Altima FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 1. Lock ring 4. Fuel tank 2. Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly 3. Ring seal A REMOVAL FL WARNING: Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" . 1. Unscrew the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank. 2. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 4. Remove the rear seat bottom. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Turn the four retainers 90° in a clockwise direction and remove the fuel pump inspection hole cover. C D E F G LBIA0337E 6. H Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, EVAP hose quick connector, and the fuel feed hose quick connector from the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. I J K WBIA0522E Remove the quick connector as follows: ● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. SFE562A ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal. ● Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. ● When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer). Revision: March 2005 FL-9 2005 Altima L M FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ● To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags or something similar. PBIC0163E 7. Remove the six screws and remove the lock ring as shown. WBIA0523E 8. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not bend the float arm during removal. ● Discard the ring seal, do not reuse the ring seal. LBIA0339E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump for any defects and foreign materials. Replace as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly with the positioning pegs seated in the fuel tank (and the quick connector pointing to the front) as shown. Use a new ring seal. LBIA0402E Revision: March 2005 FL-10 2005 Altima FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ● – – ● – Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by performing the following checks: Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. A FL C PBIC1653E D – Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. E F G H I J PBIC0199E K INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to apply fuel pressure to the fuel system, then check the connections for fuel leaks. 2. Start the engine and let it idle and check for fuel leaks at the fuel system connections. L M Revision: March 2005 FL-11 2005 Altima FUEL TANK FUEL TANK Removal and Installation PFP:17202 EBS00J8H All Except PZEV Models WBIA0449E 1. Fuel filler cap 2. Grommet 3. Fuel filler tube 4. Fuel tank 5. Fuel filler hose 6. Fuel tank protector 7. Fuel tank mounting straps 8. Ring seal 9. Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly 10. Lock ring Revision: March 2005 FL-12 2005 Altima FUEL TANK PZEV Models Only A FL C D E F G H WBIA0450E 1. Lock ring 2. Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly 3. Ring seal 4. Fuel tank 5. Fuel filler hose 6. Fuel tank mounting straps 7. Fuel tank protector 8. Fuel filler tube 9. Grommet 10. Fuel filler cap J K REMOVAL WARNING: Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" . 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Check the fuel level with the vehicle on a level surface. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (7/8 full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates a level at or below as shown (7/8 full). ● In case the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure. a. Insert fuel tubing of less than 25mm (0.98in) diameter into the fuel filler tube through the fuel filler opening to drain fuel from the fuel filler tube. b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler tube. SBIA0393E c. Insert fuel tubing into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain fuel from the fuel tank. ● As a guide, the fuel level reaches or is less than the level on the fuel gauge as shown, when approximately 10 (2 5/8 US gal, 2 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel is drained from a full fuel tank. 3. Open the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank. 4. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE), EC714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (VQ35DE). Revision: March 2005 I FL-13 2005 Altima L M FUEL TANK 5. 6. Remove rear seat bottom. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the fuel pump inspection hole cover. LBIA0337E 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, EVAP hose quick connector, and fuel feed hose quick connector. ● For non-PZEV models. LBIA0338E ● For PZEV models. WBIA0522E a. Disconnect the quick connectors as follows: ● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. SFE562A ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal. ● Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. ● When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer). Revision: March 2005 FL-14 2005 Altima FUEL TANK ● To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags or something similar. A FL C PBIC0163E D 8. Remove the center exhaust tube, with muffler(s). Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" . 9. Disconnect the fuel filler hose and the recirculation hose at the fuel tank side. 10. Disconnect the three parking brake cable mounting brackets on each cable and position the cables out of the way. Refer to PB-2, "Removal and Installation" . 11. Remove the fuel tank protector. 12. Disconnect the fuel tank mounting straps while supporting the fuel tank. 13. Remove the fuel tank. 14. If replacing the fuel tank, remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly to transfer to the new fuel tank. E F G INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal paying attention to the following. ● Before tightening the fuel tank mounting straps, temporarily install the filler hose and the recirculation hose. Tighten all fuel tank mounting strap bolts to specification, then tighten the hose clamps. ● Connect the quick connector as follows: – Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. – Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. – After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. SFE562A H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FL-15 2005 Altima FUEL TANK ● Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. PBIC0199E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● 1. 2. Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON (without starting the engine). Then check the connections for fuel leaks by applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. Run the engine and check for fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Revision: March 2005 FL-16 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00030 A EBS00J8I QR25DE Unit: Fuel tank capacity (US gal, Imp gal) 75.6 (20, 16 5/8) FL VQ35DE Unit: Fuel tank capacity (US gal, Imp gal) C 75.6 (20, 16 5/8) D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FL-17 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: March 2005 FL-18 2005 Altima E SUSPENSION SECTION FSU FRONT SUSPENSION A B C D FSU CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 5 Components ............................................................. 5 On-vehicle Service ................................................... 6 FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS ............................. 6 Front Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6 DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 6 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6 CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ...................................................................... 7 TOE-IN .................................................................. 7 FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE ..................... 8 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ................. 9 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 Disassembly ............................................................. 9 Inspection ............................................................... 10 Revision: March 2005 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ....................... 10 MOUNTING INSULATOR AND RUBBER PARTS... 10 STRUT BEARING ............................................... 10 COIL SPRING ..................................................... 10 Assembly ................................................................ 10 STABILIZER BAR ..................................................... 11 Removal and Installation ........................................ 11 REMOVAL ........................................................... 11 INSTALLATION ................................................... 11 Inspection ............................................................... 12 TRANSVERSE LINK ................................................. 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 14 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ............................. 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 15 REMOVAL ........................................................... 15 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 18 General Specifications (Front) ................................ 18 Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ....................... 18 Lower Ball Joint ...................................................... 18 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ................................. 19 FSU-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● PFP:00001 EES0016W When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Lock nuts are unreusable parts; always use new ones. When replacing, do not wipe the oil off the new lock nut before tightening. Revision: March 2005 FSU-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EES0016X The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B HT72520000 (J25730-A) Ball joint remover Removing outer tie-rod end and lower ball joint C D NT146 KV101J0010 (J-47242) Engine support table FSU Front suspension member removal F G WBIA0658E Commercial Service Tools EES0016Y Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts H I J PBIC0190E Attachment wheel alignment Measuring wheel alignment a: Screw M24 x 1.5 pitch b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. d: 56 mm (2.20 in) e: 12 mm (0.47 in) K L NT148 Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring NT717 Revision: March 2005 FSU-3 2005 Altima M FSU-10 Bushing or mounting deterioration Parts interference Noise × × × × Shake × × × × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Shudder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × Revision: March 2005 × FSU-5 FSU-6 FSU-12 FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Incorrect wheel alignment Stabilizer bar fatigue DRIVE SHAFT AXLE TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES STEERING × Suspension looseness × FSU-10 × Spring fatigue — FSU-10 Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS FSU-5 Reference page Improper installation, looseness Symptom NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × FSU-4 × × PFP:00003 EES0016Z Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × ×: Applicable 2005 Altima FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Components PFP:54010 A EES00170 B C D FSU F G H I J K L M WEIA0148E 1. Gasket 2. Shock absorber mounting insulator and bearing assembly 3. Shock absorber bushing 4. Upper rubber seat and spring upper seat 5. Dust cover 6. Lower rubber seat 7. Coil spring 8. Shock absorber 9. Front suspension member 10. Cup 11. Member pin stay 13. Cotter pin 14. Transverse link 15. Connecting rod 16. Stabilizer bar 17. Driveshaft ⇐ Revision: March 2005 FSU-5 12. Wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly Front 2005 Altima FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY On-vehicle Service EES00171 FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS Check the front axle and front suspension parts for any excessive play, cracks, wear, or other damage. ● Raise the vehicle on a hoist and shake each front wheel to check for excessive play. ● Make sure that the cotter pin is inserted in the lower ball joint. ● Retighten all of the axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Tightening torques : Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . SMA525A ● ● Check the strut for any oil leakage or other damage. Check the suspension ball joint for grease leakage and the ball joint dust cover for any cracks or other damage. If the ball joint dust cover is cracked or damaged, replace the transverse link. SFA392B ● – – Measure the wheelarch height “Hf” and “Hr” from the top of the wheelarch to the ground. For proper measurement of the vehicle height, the vehicle must be unladen*, parked on a level surface, and tires checked for proper inflation and wear (the tread wear indicators must not be showing). *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times before measuring the height. SFA818A Standard height – : Refer to FSU-19, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" . The wheelarch height is not adjustable. If the height is out of specification, check for worn springs or suspension parts. Front Wheel Alignment EES00172 DESCRIPTION NOTE: Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection with the vehicle Unladen*. *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ● ● Check the tires for wear and improper inflation. Check the wheel runout. Wheel runout ● ● : Refer to FSU-10, "Inspection" . Check the front wheel bearings for looseness. Check the front suspension for looseness. Revision: March 2005 FSU-6 2005 Altima FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ● ● ● Check the steering linkage for looseness. Check that the front struts work properly. Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to FSU-6, "FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS" . A B CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION NOTE: Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. 1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the right and left wheels using suitable commercialy available attachment tool and alignment gauge. C D Camber, caster and kingpin inclination 2. : Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . FSU If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension parts. Replace any damaged or worn out parts. F SRA096A TOE-IN G WARNING: ● Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. ● Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the hub center height as shown. These marks are measuring points. H I J K AFA050 4. 5. 6. Measure the distance “A” on the rear side of the front tires as shown. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. Measure the distance “B” on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in Revision: March 2005 : Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . FSU-7 L M SFA234AC 2005 Altima FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 7. a. b. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tierods. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length “L” c. : Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque. Lock nut : Refer to PS-13, "Removal and Installation" . SFA486A FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. 2. Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the vehicle forward until the front wheels rest on the turning radius gauge as shown. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure the turning angles “A” and “B” as shown. Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . SFA439BA Revision: March 2005 FSU-8 2005 Altima COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation PFP:56210 A EES00173 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Disconnect the ABS sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front strut. Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool. Support the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly with a suitable wire. Remove the strut lower bolts and nuts using power tool. Remove the three upper strut mounting nuts using power tool. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. Remove the strut assembly. B C D FSU F SFA956A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . ● When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown. ● Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification using power tool. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . WARNING: ● Always replace the strut lower mounting nuts. ● When installing strut to steering knuckle, be sure to hold bolts when tightening nuts. ● Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . G H I J K WSU003 Disassembly 1. 2. EES00174 Set the strut in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. Compress the spring using commercial service tool so that the shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. Revision: March 2005 FSU-9 L M SSU002 2005 Altima COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER 3. Remove the strut rod lock nut. SSU003 Inspection EES00175 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ● ● ● Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. Check strut rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. MOUNTING INSULATOR AND RUBBER PARTS Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. STRUT BEARING Check the strut bearing for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction and replace if necessary. COIL SPRING Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Assembly 1. EES00176 When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown. SFA508A 2. Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer side of vehicle, in line with strut-to-knuckle attachment points. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. SFA564B Revision: March 2005 FSU-10 2005 Altima STABILIZER BAR STABILIZER BAR Removal and Installation PFP:54611 A EES00177 B C D FSU F WEIA0147E 1. Stabilizer bar 2. Bracket 4. Connecting rod ⇐ Front 3. Bushing G REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER" . Support suspension member using suitable jack support. Disconnect the connecting rod end at the stabilizer bar using power tool. ● Prevent the stabilizer connecting rod from turning by inserting a hex wrench into the end of the ball stud, then remove nut. Remove the two stabilizer bar clamps from the front suspension member using power tool. Remove the front stabilizer bar. ● Remove the two stabilizer bushings as necessary. I J K SFA796B INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing stabilizer, make sure that the clamps are facing in the correct direction as shown. M WEIA0073E Revision: March 2005 FSU-11 L 2005 Altima STABILIZER BAR ● ● Make sure that slit in bushing is in the position as shown. Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the bushing using a silicone lubricant. SFA604B Inspection ● ● ● EES00178 Check the stabilizer bar for deformation or cracks and replace if necessary. Check the bushings for deterioration or cracks. Replace if necessary. Check that the ball joint can rotate in all directions. If movement is not smooth and free, replace stabilizer bar connecting rod. ARA027 Revision: March 2005 FSU-12 2005 Altima TRANSVERSE LINK TRANSVERSE LINK Removal and Installation PFP:54500 A EES00179 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Remove the lower ball joint cotter pin and remove the lower ball joint nut using power tool. CAUTION: Discard the cotter pin and use a new cotter pin for installation. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle using Tool as shown. Tool number B C : HT72520000 (J25730-A) D FSU F WEIA0103E 4. 5. 6. Remove the member stay pin nut and two bolts using power tool, and remove the member stay pin. Remove the two transverse link pivot bolts using power tool. Remove the transverse link bolt and remove the transverse link from the front suspension member. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Visual Check ● ● G H Check the transverse link for damage, cracks or deformation. Replace it if necessary. Check the bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace the transverse link if necessary. I Lower Ball Joint ● ● ● ● Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the transverse link assembly if any of the following exists: Lower ball joint stud is worn. Lower ball joint is hard to swing. Lower ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. J K Swinging Force NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Swinging force “A” (measuring from cotter pin hole of ball stud) : 7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f, 1.8 - 12.3 lb-f) M SFA858A Turning Force NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Revision: March 2005 FSU-13 L 2005 Altima TRANSVERSE LINK Turning torque “B” : 0.49 - 3.43 N·m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 30.4 in-lb) SFA858A Vertical End Play Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play “C” : 0 mm (0 in) SFA858A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Tighten the transverse link mounting bolts to specified torque. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . During installation, the final tightening must be done with the vehicle in unladen* condition and the tires on the ground. *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. CAUTION: Discard the old cotter pin and use a new cotter pin for installation of the lower ball joint nut. ● Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . ● After installation, check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . Revision: March 2005 FSU-14 2005 Altima FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER Removal and Installation PFP:54401 A EES0017A B C D FSU F G H I J WEIA0105E 1. Front engine mount 2. Rear engine mount 3. Member pin stay, RH 4. Member pin stay, LH 5. Front suspension member 6. Cup 7. LH transaxle mounting insulator (VQ35DE) K L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove wheels and tires using power tool. Remove engine cover and undercover. For vehicles equipped with the VQ35DE engine, install the engine slingers into the front of the left cylinder head, and the right rear cylinder head as shown. Then support the engine from the engine slingers using suitable tool. M SEM807G Revision: March 2005 FSU-15 2005 Altima FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER SEM808G 4. 5. Remove the splash shields. For vehicles equipped with the VQ35DE engine, remove the two LH transaxle mounting insulator bolts. WEIA0106E 6. 7. Remove the lower ball joint cotter pin and remove the lower ball joint nut using power tool. CAUTION: Discard the cotter pin and use a new cotter pin for installation. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle using Tool as shown. Tool number : HT2520000 (J25730-A) WEIA0103E 8. 9. 10. 11. Remove the front exhaust tube using power tool. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the power steering line bracket from the front suspension member. Remove the mounting bolts on the lower side of the steering gear. Disconnect the front and rear engine mount electrical connectors, if equipped. 12. Disconnect the connecting rod from the front strut using power tool. SFA796B Revision: March 2005 FSU-16 2005 Altima FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER 13. Set Tool under the front suspension member, then remove the mounting nuts from the front suspension member using power tool. Tool number A : KV101J0010 (J-47242) 14. Remove the mounting bolts from the front suspension member pin stay on the vehicle body side using power tool. 15. Remove the through bolts from the front and rear engine mounts. 16. Lower the suspension member slowly. ● If necessary, remove the exhaust hanger bracket from the front suspension member. ● If necessary, remove the front and rear engine mounts. ● If necessary, remove the transverse link. B C D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FSU ● For vehicles equipped with the VQ35DE engine, tighten the two LH transaxle mounting insulator bolts to specification. ● Install the stabilizer bar bushings and clamps in the specified orientation. Refer to FSU-11, "INSTALLAF TION" . ● Tighten the stabilizer bar and connecting rod nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-11, "Removal and Installation" . G ● Tighten the steering gear mounting bolts to specification. Refer to PS-13, "Removal and Installation" . ● Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" . ● Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FSU-17 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications (Front) Suspension type PFP:00030 EES0017B Independent MacPherson strut Shock absorber type Double-acting hydraulic Stabilizer bar Standard equipment Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) EES0017C Tire size 215/60R16 Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum −1°00′ (−1.00°) Nominal −0°15′ (−0.25°) Maximum 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 2°05′ (2.08°) Nominal 2°50′ (2.83°) Maximum 3°35′ (3.58°) Left and right difference Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance (A − B) mm (in) Angle (left, right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Wheel turning angle Full turn*2 Inside Degree minute (Decimal degree) Outside Degree minute (Decimal degree) 225/45R18 0°30′ (0.50°) Left and right difference Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) 215/55R17 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 13°50′ (13.83°) Nominal 14°35′ (14.58°) Maximum 15°20′ (15.33°) Minimum −0.5 (−0.02) Nominal 0.5 (0.02) Maximum 1.5 (0.06) Minimum −0° 4′ (−0.07°) Nominal 0° 2′ (0.03°) Maximum 0° 8′ (0.13°) Minimum 34°30′ (34.5°) 32°00′ (32.0°) 32°00′ (32.0°) Nominal 38°00′ (38.0°) 35°30′ (35.5°) 35°30′ (35.5°) Maximum 39°00′ (39.0°) 36°30′ (36.5°) 36°30′ (36.5°) Nominal 30°30′ (30.5°) 29°00′ (29.0°) 29°00′ (29.0°) *1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) with engine idle. Lower Ball Joint Swinging force “A” (Measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud) Turning torque “B” Vertical end play “C” EES0017D 7.8 - 54.9 (0.8 - 5.6, 1.8 - 12.3) N (kg-f, lb-f) N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.49 - 3.43 (5.0 - 35.0, 4.3 - 30.4) mm (in) Revision: March 2005 0 (0) FSU-18 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) EES0017E A B C SFA818A Engine QR25DE Model All SL VQ35DE SE SE-R Tire size 215/60R16 215/60R16 215/55R17 225/45R18 Front (Hf) mm (in) 722 (28.43) 717 (28.23) 721 (28.39) 721 (28.39) Rear (Hr) mm (in) 695 (27.36) 696 (27.40) 698 (27.48) 695 (27.36) D FSU *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 FSU-19 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: March 2005 FSU-20 2005 Altima QUICK REFERENCE INDEX Edition: February 2004 Revision: March 2005 Publication No. SM5E-1L31U2 A GENERAL INFORMATION GI General Information B ENGINE EM Engine Mechanical LU Engine Lubrication System CO Engine Cooling System EC Engine Control System FL Fuel System EX Exhaust System ACC Accelerator Control System TRANSMISSION/ TRANSAXLE CL Clutch MT Manual Transaxle AT Automatic Transaxle D DRIVELINE/AXLE FAX Front Axle RAX Rear Axle FSU Front Suspension RSU Rear Suspension WT Road Wheels & Tires BR Brake System PB Parking Brake System BRC Brake Control System C E SUSPENSION F BRAKES G STEERING PS Power Steering System H RESTRAINTS SB Seat Belts SRS I BODY J AIR CONDITIONER K ELECTRICAL Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) BL Body, Lock & Security System GW Glasses, Window System & Mirrors RF Roof EI Exterior & Interior IP Instrument Panel SE Seat ATC Automatic Air Conditioner MTC Manual Air Conditioner SC Starting & Charging System LT Lighting System DI Driver Information System WW Wiper, Washer & Horn BCS Body Control System LAN LAN System AV ACS Audio Visual & Telephone System Auto Cruise Control System PG Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements L MAINTENANCE MA Maintenance M INDEX IDX Alphabetical Index © 2005 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gardena, California. -1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the 2005 NISSAN ALTIMA. In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice. IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle. The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately. Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected. -2 PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER! Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals. Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals. Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to: Nissan North America, Inc. Technical Service Information 39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200 Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331 FAX: (248) 488-3910 SERVICE MANUAL: Model: Year: PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ): Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail: Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. Page number(s) Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer) YES NO Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. If no, what page number(s)? Please describe the issue or problem in detail: Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer) YES NO Please comment: What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or repairing customer vehicles? DATE: DEALER: CITY: YOUR NAME: DEALER NO.: STATE/PROV./COUNTRY: POSITION: ADDRESS: ZIP/POSTAL CODE: QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) 2005 QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) PFP:00000 Engine Tune-Up Data ELS0012S Cylinder arrangement Displacement cm Bore and stroke 3 In-line 4 2,488 (151.82) (cu in) mm (in) 89.0 x 100 (3.50 x 3.94) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-3-4-2 Number of piston rings Compression 2 Oil 1 Compression ratio Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / 250 rpm 9.5:1 Standard 1,250 (12.8, 181.3) Minimum 1,060 (10.8, 153.7) Differential limit between cylinders 100 (1.0, 14) Idle speed rpm No-load *1, A/T (in P or N position), M/T (in neutral position) 700 ± 50 Ignition timing (BTDC at idle speed) 15° ± 5° Radiator cap relief pressure Standard kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Limit Cooling system leakage testing pressure 78 – 98 (0.8 – 1.0, 11 – 14) 59 (0.6, 9) 157 (1.6, 23) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) *1: Under the following conditions: ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electric load: OFF (lights, heater fan, and rear window defogger) ● Steering wheel: kept in straight-ahead position Drive Belt Deflection and Tension Tension of drive belts Auto adjustment by auto-tensioner Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped) Make Type Plug gap (nominal) NGK Standard PLFR5A-11 Hot PLFR4A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 1.1 mm (0.043 in) QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) 2005 Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ELS001FB SFA234AC Tire size 215/60R16 Model Base / S Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum −1°00′ (−1.00°) Nominal −0°15′ (−0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum 2°05′ (2.08°) Nominal 2°50′ (2.83°) Maximum 3°35′ (3.58°) Left and right difference Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance (A − B) mm (in) Angle (left, right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Wheel turning angle Full turn*2 Inside Degree minute (Decimal degree) Outside Degree minute (Decimal degree) 0°30′ (0.50°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 13°50′ (13.83°) Nominal 14°35′ (14.58°) Maximum 15°20′ (15.33°) Minimum −0.5 (−0.02) Nominal 0.5 (0.02) Maximum 1.5 (0.06) Minimum −0° 4′ (−0.07°) Nominal 0° 2′ (0.03°) Maximum 0° 8′ (0.13°) Minimum 34°30′ (34.5°) Nominal 38°00′ (38.0°) Maximum 39°00′ (39.0°) Nominal 30°30′ (30.5°) *1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: With power steering, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 - 147 N (10 - 15 kg, 22 - 33 lb) with engine at idle. QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) 2005 Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ELS001FC SFA234AC Tire size 215/60R16 Model Base / S Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Distance (A − B) mm (in) Total toe-in Distance difference between RH and LH side mm (in) Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum −0° 04′ (−0.07°) Nominal −0° 34′ (−0.57°) Maximum −0° 64′ (−1.07°) Minimum 2.4 (0.09) Nominal 3.9 (0.15) Maximum 5.4 (0.21) Minimum −2 (−0.08) Nominal 0 (0) Maximum 2 (0.08) Minimum 0° 6′ (0.10°) Nominal 0° 10′ (0.17°) Maximum 0° 14′ (0.23°) *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Brake ELS0012V Unit: mm (in) Brake model Front brake CLZ25VD disc brake Cylinder bore diameter 57.2 (2.25) Pad Length × width × thickness Rotor outer diameter × thickness Brake model Rear brake 125.6 × 46 × 11 (4.94 × 1.81 × 0.43) 296 × 24 (11.7 × 0.94) AD9V disc brake Cylinder bore diameter 34.9 (1.3740) Pad Length × width × thickness Rotor outer diameter × thickness 89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.31) 292 × 9 (11.5 × 0.35) Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter Control valve Screw in type 30 × 0.4 (1.18 × 0.02) Booster model M215T Brake booster Recommended brake fluid Diaphragm diameter 23.81 (15/16) Primary 230 (9.06) Secondary 205 (8.07) Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 16) QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE) 2005 Disc Brake - Repair Limits Unit: mm (in) Brake model Pad wear limit Rotor repair limit CLZ25VD (Front) AD9V (Rear) 2.0 (0.079) 1.5 (0.059) Maximum runout 0.07 (0.0028) 0.07 (0.0028) Minimum thickness 22.0 (0.866) 8.0 (0.31) Minimum thickness Maximum thickness variation (at least 8 positions) 0.015 (0.0006) Brake Pedal Unit: mm (in) WFIA0022E Free height “H”* M/T 164.1 - 174.1 (6.46 - 6.85) A/T 173.1 - 183.1 (6.81 - 7.21) Clearance “C1 or C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD switch 0.74 - 1.96 (0.0291 - 0.0772) *: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad Refill Capacities ELS0012W Capacity (Approximate) Description Liter Fuel US measure Imp measure 75.6 20 gal 16 5/8 gal With oil filter change 4.2 4 1/2 qt 3 3/4 qt Without oil filter change 4.0 4 1/4 qt 3 1/2 qt 4.6 4 7/8 qt 4 qt 7.6 2 gal 1 5/8 gal Manual transaxle fluid (MTF) 2.2 2 3/8 qt 2 qt Automatic transaxle (4A/T) fluid (ATF) 9.2 9 3/4 qt 8 1/8 qt Engine oil Drain and refill Dry engine (engine overhaul) Cooling system Power steering fluid (PSF) Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricant With reservoir 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt 0.50 ± 0.025 kg 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 5.03 fl oz 5.01 fl oz 150 m QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ ENGINE) 2005 QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ ENGINE) PFP:00000 Engine Tune-Up Data ELS0012X Cylinder arrangement Displacement cm Bore and stroke 3 V-6 3 3,498 (213.45) (in ) mm (in) 95.5 x 81.4 (3.76 x 3.205) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order Number of piston rings 1-2-3-4-5-6 Compression 2 Oil 1 Number of main bearings 4 Compression ratio Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / 250 rpm 10.0:1 Standard 1,275 (13.0, 185) Minimum 981 (10.0, 142) Differential limit between cylinders Idle speed rpm No-load*1, A/T (in P or N position), M/T (in neutral position) 98 (1.0, 14) A/T 675 ± 50 M/T 625 ± 50 Ignition timing (BTDC at idle speed) 15° ± 5° Radiator cap relief pressure Standard kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Limit Cooling system leakage testing pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) *1: Under the following conditions: ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electric load: OFF (lights, heater fan and rear window defogger) ● Steering wheel: kept in straight-ahead position 78 - 98 (0.8 - 1.0, 11 - 14) 59 (0.6, 9) 157 (1.6, 23) QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ ENGINE) 2005 Drive Belt Deflection and Tension LBIA0076E Deflection adjustment Unit: mm (in) Used belt Alternator and air conditioning compressor Power steering pump Applied pushing force Limit After adjustment 7 (0.28) 4.2 - 4.6 (0.17 - 0.18) 11 (0.43) 7.3 - 8 (0.29 - 0.30) 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) New belt Tension adjustment* Unit: N (kg, lb) Used belt New belt Limit After adjustment 3.7 - 4.1 (0.15 - 0.16) 294 (30, 66) 730 - 818 (74.5 - 83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.5 - 94.5, 188 - 208) 6.5 - 7.2 (0.26 - 0.28) 196 (20, 44) 495 - 583 (50.5 - 59.5, 111 - 131) 603 - 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.4) — *: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt. Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped) Make NGK Standard Type Gap (nominal) PLFR5A-11 Hot PLFR4A-11 Cold PLFR6A-11 1.1 mm (0.043 in) QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ ENGINE) 2005 Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ELS001FG SFA234AC Tire size Model Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) 215/60R16 215/55R17 225/45R18 SL SE SE-R Minimum −1°00′ (−1.00°) Nominal −0°15′ (−0.25°) Maximum Left and right difference Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Minimum 2°05′ (2.08°) Nominal 2°50′ (2.83°) Maximum 3°35′ (3.58°) Left and right difference Kingpin inclination Degree minute (Decimal degree) Total toe-in Distance (A − B) mm (in) Angle (left, right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Wheel turning angle Full turn*2 Inside Degree minute (Decimal degree) Outside Degree minute (Decimal degree) 0°30′ (0.50°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 13°50′ (13.83°) Nominal 14°35′ (14.58°) Maximum 15°20′ (15.33°) Minimum −0.5 (−0.02) Nominal 0.5 (0.02) Maximum 1.5 (0.06) Minimum −0° 4′ (−0.07°) Nominal 0° 2′ (0.03°) Maximum 0° 8′ (0.13°) Minimum 34°30′ (34.5°) 32°00′ (32.0°) 32°00′ (32.0°) Nominal 38°00′ (38.0°) 35°30′ (35.5°) 35°30′ (35.5°) Maximum 39°00′ (39.0°) 36°30′ (36.5°) 36°30′ (36.5°) Nominal 30°30′ (30.5°) 29°00′ (29.0°) 29°00′ (29.0°) *1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) with engine idle. QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ ENGINE) 2005 Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ELS001FH SFA234AC 215/60R16 (SL) 215/55R17 (SE) Tire size Model Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Distance (A − B) mm (in) Total toe-in Distance difference between RH and LH side mm (in) Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) 225/45R18 SL / SE SE-R Minimum −0° 2′ (−0.03°) −0° 13′ (−0.22°) Nominal −0° 32′ (−0.53°) −0° 43′ (−0.72°) Maximum −1° 2′ (−1.03°) −1° 13′ (−1.22°) Minimum 2.4 (0.09) 2.3 (0.09) Nominal 3.9 (0.15) 3.8 (0.15) Maximum 5.4 (0.21) 5.3 (0.21) −2 (−0.08) Minimum Nominal 0 (0) Maximum 2 (0.08) Minimum 0° 6′ (0.10°) Nominal 0° 10′ (0.17°) Maximum 0° 14′ (0.23°) *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Brake ELS001FI Unit: mm (in) Brake model CLZ25VD disc brake Cylinder bore diameter Front brake 57.2 (2.25) Pad Length × width × thickness Rotor outer diameter × thickness Brake model 125.6 × 46 × 11 (4.94 × 1.81 × 0.43) 111.0 × 62.5 × 9.5 (4.37 × 2.46 × 0.37) 296 × 24 (11.7 × 0.94) 320 × 28 (12.6 × 1.10) AD9V disc brake Cylinder bore diameter Rear brake CLZ25VE disc brake 34.9 (1.3740) Pad Length × width × thickness 89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.31) Rotor outer diameter × thickness 292 × 9 (11.5 × 0.35) Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter Control valve Screw in type 30 × 0.4 (1.18 × 0.02) Booster model M215T Brake booster Diaphragm diameter Recommended brake fluid 23.81 (15/16) Primary 230 (9.06) Secondary 205 (8.07) Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ ENGINE) 2005 Disc Brake - Repair Limits Unit: mm (in) Brake model Pad wear limit Rotor repair limit CLZ25VD CLZ25VE AD9V 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) 1.5 (0.059) Maximum runout 0.07 (0.0028) 0.07 (0.0028) 0.07 (0.0028) Minimum thickness 22.0 (0.866) 26.0 (1.02) 8.0 (0.31) Minimum thickness Maximum thickness variation (at least 8 positions) 0.015 (0.0006) Brake Pedal Unit: mm (in) WFIA0022E Free height “H”* M/T 164.1 - 174.1 (6.46 - 6.85) A/T 173.1 - 183.1 (6.81 - 7.21) Clearance “C1 or C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD switch 0.74 - 1.96 (0.0291 - 0.0772) *: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad. Refill Capacities ELS00131 Capacity (Approximate) Description Liter Fuel US measure Imp measure 75.6 20 gal 16 5/8 gal With oil filter change 4.2 4 1/2 qt 3 3/4 qt Without oil filter change 4.0 4 1/4 qt 3 1/2 qt 4.6 4 7/8 qt 4 qt 8.2 2 1/8 gal 1 3/4 gal Manual transaxle fluid (MTF) 2.2 2 3/8 qt 2 qt Automatic transaxle (5A/T) fluid (ATF) 7.3 7 3/4 qt 6 3/8 qt Engine oil Drain and refill Dry engine (engine overhaul) Cooling system Power steering fluid (PSF) Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricant With reservoir 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt 0.50 ± 0.025 kg 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 5.03 fl oz 5.01 fl oz 150 m A GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION GI GENERAL INFORMATION GI B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Description ............................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If Equipped) ................................................................. 3 General Precautions ................................................ 4 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst ......................... 5 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended) ........................................................ 5 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System ............................................ 6 Precautions for Hoses .............................................. 6 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 6 HOSE CLAMPING ................................................ 6 Precautions for Engine Oils ...................................... 7 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ............. 7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ................................................................... 7 Precautions for Air Conditioning ............................... 7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................... 8 Description ............................................................... 8 Terms ....................................................................... 8 Units ......................................................................... 8 Contents ................................................................... 8 Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ..... 9 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses ............................ 9 DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 9 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ............................................... 10 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION ....................................... 10 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES ............................... 12 How to Read Wiring Diagrams ............................... 14 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS ................................... 14 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - ......... 15 Revision: March 2005 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 16 Abbreviations .......................................................... 21 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ......................................................................... 23 How to Check Terminal ........................................... 23 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT ............ 23 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS ...................... 23 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident ................................................................... 26 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 26 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS ........................ 26 CIRCUIT INSPECTION ....................................... 29 Control Units and Electrical Parts ........................... 34 PRECAUTIONS .................................................. 34 CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM .......................... 36 Description .............................................................. 36 Function and System Application ........................... 36 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement ............ 37 Checking Equipment .............................................. 38 CONSULT-II Start Procedure .................................. 38 Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ......... 39 LIFTING POINT ......................................................... 40 Special Service Tools ............................................. 40 Garage Jack and Safety Stand ............................... 41 2-pole Lift ................................................................ 42 Board-on Lift ........................................................... 42 TOW TRUCK TOWING ............................................. 43 Tow Truck Towing ................................................... 43 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 43 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ... 44 Tightening Torque Table ......................................... 44 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS ............................................................... 45 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants... 45 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ............................ 46 Model Variation (Early production) ......................... 46 Model Variation (Late production) ........................... 47 Identification Number .............................................. 48 Identification Plate .................................................. 49 Engine Serial Number ............................................ 50 GI-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M Automatic Transaxle Number ................................. 50 Manual Transaxle Number ..................................... 50 Dimensions ............................................................. 50 Wheels & Tires ....................................................... 51 Revision: March 2005 TERMINOLOGY ........................................................52 SAE J1930 Terminology List ...................................52 GI-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Description PFP:00001 GI EAS0018O Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not described in each individual section. Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” B EAS0018P The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS) (If Equipped) EAS001QJ NVIS/IVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS). Both of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS/IVIS (NATS) registered. The security indicator is located on the instrument panel. The indicator blinks when the immobilizer system is functioning. Therefore, NVIS/IVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system. ● When NVIS/IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition switch is in "ON" position. This lighting up indicates that the anti-theft is not functioning, so prompt service is required. ● When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software is necessary. Regarding the procedures of NVIS/IVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, NVIS/IVIS (NATS). Therefore, CONSULT-II NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software (program card and operation manual) must be kept strictly confidential to maintain the integrity of the anti-theft function. ● When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. A maximum of four or five key IDs can be registered into NVIS/IVIS (NATS). ● When failing to start the engine first time using the key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS), start as follows. 1. Leave the ignition key in "ON" position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn ignition key to "OFF" or "LOCK" position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while keeping the key separate from any others on key-chain. Revision: March 2005 GI-3 2005 Altima C D E F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS General Precautions ● EAS0018Q Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without proper exhaust ventilation. Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials. Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. SGI285 ● ● Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle. These operations should be done on a level surface. When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially the brake tubes and master cylinder. SGI231 ● ● Before starting repairs which do not require battery power: Turn off ignition switch. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of radio and each control unit is erased. SEF289H ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an appropriate manner. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent SGI233 prior to inspection or assembly. Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones. Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set. Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence. Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM). Static electricity may damage internal electronic components. After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection. Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual. Revision: March 2005 GI-4 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required. Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs. When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems, check all affected lines for leaks. GI B C PBIC0190E ● Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint. D E F G SGI234 H WARNING: To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module) system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections. I Precautions for Three Way Catalyst J EAS0018R If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. ● Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. ● When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. ● Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended) EAS001IC Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN/INFINITI recommend the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Revision: March 2005 GI-5 2005 Altima K L M PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System ● ● ● EAS0018T Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the multiport fuel injection system or ECM: Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect negative battery terminal. Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM. Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure. Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow sensor. SGI787 Precautions for Hoses EAS0018U HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ● To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with tapered tool or screwdriver. SMA019D ● To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose stopper.) SMA020D HOSE CLAMPING ● ● If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at that position. Discard old clamps; replace with new ones. SMA021D Revision: March 2005 GI-6 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS ● After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around. GI B C SMA022D D Precautions for Engine Oils EAS0018V Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. E HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. Do not put oily rags in pockets. Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. F G H I J K ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Precautions for Air Conditioning EAS0018W Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to ATC/MTC section “HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure”, “REFRIGERANT LINES” for specific instructions. Revision: March 2005 GI-7 2005 Altima L M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Description PFP:00008 EAS0018X This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”. Terms ● EAS0018Y The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury and/or damage to some part of the vehicle. WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed. CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed. BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information. Standard value:Tolerance at inspection and adjustment. Limit value:The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment. Units ● EAS0018Z The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system. “Example” Outer Socket Lock Nut : 59 - 78 N-m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb) Contents EAS001QT ● ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for. ● A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g. ) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab. THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section. THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system. THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section and a number (e.g. “BR-5”). THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations. Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary. ● ● ● ● Revision: March 2005 GI-8 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions EAS001QU The following sample explains the ralationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in the text and the service procedures. GI B C D E F G H I J SAIA0519E How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses EAS00192 DESCRIPTION NOTICE: Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the “Work Flow”. 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Revision: March 2005 K GI-9 2005 Altima L M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SAIA0256E 1. 2. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V b. Voltage : Approximately 0V → Less than 1V 3. 4. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in GI Section and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES" below. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Revision: March 2005 GI-10 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration ● ● ● GI Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. B C D E F G AGI070 H TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text I J K L M SGI144A Revision: March 2005 GI-11 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES SAIA0750E Revision: March 2005 GI-12 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GI B C D E F G H I J K L M SAIA0751E Revision: March 2005 GI-13 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagrams EAS00193 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. ● Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. ● Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”. SAIA0257E ● Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SGI363 Revision: March 2005 GI-14 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL ● GI For detail, refer to following “DESCRIPTION”. B C D E F G H I J K L M SGI091A Revision: March 2005 GI-15 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Optional Splice SGI942 DESCRIPTION Number Item 1 Power condition 2 Fusible link 3 Fusible link/fuse location 4 Fuse 5 6 Current rating Connectors Description ● This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated). ● The double line shows that this is a fusible link. ● The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. ● This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For arrangement, refer to PG section, POWER SUPPLY ROUTING. ● The single line shows that this is a fuse. ● The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. ● This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse. ● This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male. ● The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors. ● Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector. Refer to PG section, SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION). 7 Optional splice ● The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application. 8 Splice ● The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle. 9 Page crossing ● This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page. ● The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page. 10 Common connector ● The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector. 11 Option abbreviation ● This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application. 12 Relay ● This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to PG section, STANDARDIZED RELAY. 13 Connectors ● This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut. Revision: March 2005 GI-16 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Number Item Description ● 14 Wire color GI This shows a code for the color of the wire. BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (Violet) = Purple GY or GR = Gray SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green B C When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe 15 Option description 16 Switch 17 Assembly parts 18 Cell code 19 20 ● This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page. ● This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position. ● Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly. ● This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram page number. ● Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow. ● A double arrow “ cuit operation. ● This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section and system). ● This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code. D E F G Current flow arrow System branch ” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on cir- 21 Page crossing ● The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding pages. 22 Shielded line ● The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire. 23 Component box in wave line ● This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated by wave line) within the system. 24 Component name ● This shows the name of a component. ● This shows the connector number. ● The letter shows which harness the connector is located in. ● Example: M : main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to PG section "Main Harness", “Harness Layout”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in locating connectors. ● The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the grounded connector. ● This shows the ground connection. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in PG section. ● This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the page. ● Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component. ● This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color codes, Number 14 of this chart. ● This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section. The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out. ● This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors (J/C) exists on the PG section. Refer to "Reference Area" for details. 25 Connector number 26 Ground (GND) 27 Ground (GND) 28 Connector views 29 Common component 30 Connector color 31 Fusible link and fuse box 32 Reference area Revision: March 2005 GI-17 H I J K L 2005 Altima M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Harness Indication ● ● Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. AGI070 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition. A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when: ● ignition switch is “OFF”, ● doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ● pedals are not depressed, and ● parking brake is released. SGI860 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. Revision: March 2005 GI-18 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● ● A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. GI B C D E F G SGI862-B Multiple Switch H The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ● The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. I J K L M Revision: March 2005 GI-19 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. SGI875 Revision: March 2005 GI-20 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the GI end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. B C D E F G H I J K L M SGI092A Abbreviations EAS00194 The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION A/C Air Conditioner A/T Automatic Transaxle/Transmission ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid D1 Drive range 1st gear D2 Drive range 2nd gear Revision: March 2005 GI-21 2005 Altima HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION D3 Drive range 3rd gear D4 Drive range 4th gear FR, RR Front, Rear LH, RH Left-Hand, Right-Hand M/T Manual Transaxle/Transmission OD Overdrive P/S Power Steering SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. SDS Service Data and Specifications SST Special Service Tools 2WD 2-Wheel Drive 22 2nd range 2nd gear 21 2nd range 1st gear 12 1st range 2nd gear 11 1st range 1st gear Revision: March 2005 GI-22 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal PFP:00000 GI EAS00195 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. C Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J38751-95NI) Connector and terminal pin kit (NISSAN) (J38751-95INF) Connector and terminal pin kit (INFINITI) (J42992-98KIT) OBD and terminal repair kit (J42992-2000UPD) OBD-II Connector Kit Update B Description D E F G WAIA0004E WAIA0005E H HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator clip. I J Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with “T” pin. ● If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ● Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. K L M SGI841 Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL ● There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the “T” pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. SEL265V Revision: March 2005 GI-23 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ● Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. SEL266V MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin. Do not bend terminal. SEL267V How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. SEL270V 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. SEL271V Revision: March 2005 GI-24 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. GI B C SEL272V D ● If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. E F G SEL273V Waterproof Connector Inspection H If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. I RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION ● Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. ● The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. J K L SEL275V M WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. SEL330V Revision: March 2005 GI-25 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident EAS00196 WORK FLOW SGI838 STEP DESCRIPTION Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred. The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis: STEP 1 STEP 2 WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio). WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency. WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation. HOW System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction). Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed. Operate the system, road test if necessary. Verify the parameter of the incident. If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”. Get the proper diagnosis materials together including: STEP 3 ● Power Supply Routing ● System Operation Descriptions ● Applicable Service Manual Sections ● Check for any Service Bulletins Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments. STEP 4 Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage. Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts. STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component. STEP 6 Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps. INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: ● Vehicle vibration ● Heat sensitive Revision: March 2005 GI-26 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Freezing GI ● Water intrusion ● Electrical load ● Cold or hot start up B Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. ● Vehicle Vibration C The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. D E F G H I J K SGI839 ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ● Connectors not fully seated. ● Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ● Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ● Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ● Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS Revision: March 2005 GI-27 2005 Altima L M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. SGI842 Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. SGI843 Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. SGI844 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. SGI845 Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Revision: March 2005 GI-28 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction GI In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN C A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. D There are two types of shorts. SHORT B ● SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ● SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. E NOTE: Refer to “How to Check Terminal” to probe or check terminal. F Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. G H I J SGI846-A K CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. ● Disconnect the battery negative cable. ● Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) ● Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. ● Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) ● Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) ● Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. Revision: March 2005 GI-29 2005 Altima L M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. ● Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. ● With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). ● Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). ● Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. ● Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. SGI847-A RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD ● Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. ● Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. ● Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. ● With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. ● Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. ● Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD ● Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. ● Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). ● With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. ● With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). Revision: March 2005 GI-30 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. GI ● With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. B Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: ● Remove the ground bolt or screw. ● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. ● Clean as required to assure good contact. ● Reinstall bolt or screw securely. ● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. ● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section. C D E F G H I J K L M SGI853 Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: ● Undersized wiring (single strand example) ● Corrosion on switch contacts ● Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — ACCUMULATED METHOD Revision: March 2005 GI-31 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. ● Operate the circuit. ● The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. ● SGI974 MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in “Computer Controlled Systems”). Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. SAIA0258E Revision: March 2005 GI-32 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Control Unit Circuit Test GI System Description:When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp. B C D MGI034A E INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Pin No. 1 Item Switch 2 Lamp Voltage value [V] Condition In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Battery voltage Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 Switch ON Battery voltage Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 F G The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. H I J K MGI035A L INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Pin No. Item 1 Lamp 2 Switch Condition Voltage value [V] In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Approx. 0 Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Battery voltage Battery voltage Switch ON Approx. 0 Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 5 Approx. 5 The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Revision: March 2005 GI-33 2005 Altima M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Control Units and Electrical Parts EAS00197 PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. Install only parts specified for a vehicle. Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. SAIA0251E ● Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. SAIA0252E ● For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. SAIA0253E ● For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. SAIA0254E Revision: March 2005 GI-34 2005 Altima SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ● ● ● ● ● Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. GI B C SAIA0255E D ● ● When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. E F G H I J SEF348N K L M Revision: March 2005 GI-35 2005 Altima CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:00000 EAS001QS CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. Refer to “CONSULT-II Operator's Manual” for more information. Function and System Application ENGINE TRANSMISSION (A/T) ABS AIR BAG BCM IPDM E/R NVIS (NATS)*1 NVIS (NATS BCM OR S/ENT)*1 EAS00199 Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-II. x x - - x - - - Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. x x x x x x x x Trouble diagnostic record Current self-diagnostic results and all trouble diagnostic records previously stored can be read. - - - x - - - - Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. x x x - - x - - Data monitor (spec) Data monitor specification can be read. x - - - - - - - CAN diagnosis support monitor The communication condition of CAN communication line can be read. x x x - x x - - Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. x x x - - x - - Function test This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engines, more practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available. x x x x - - - - DTC & SRT confirmation The results of SRT (System Readiness Test) and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. x - - - - - - - DTC work support The operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes can be selected. x x*2 - - - - - - ECM/ECU part number ECM/ECU part number can be read. x x x - x - - - ECU discriminated No. Classification number of a replacement ECU can be read to prevent an incorrect ECU from being installed. - - - x - - - - Configuration ECM checks its own NATS communication interface. - - - - x - - - Pin read*1 This mode shows the BCM-specific 5-digit code. - - - - - - - x Control unit All registered ignition key IDs in NATS components can be initialized and new IDs can be registered. - - - - - - x - Diagnostic test mode initialization*1 Function x: Applicable *1: NVIS (NATS) [NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (Nissan Anti-Theft System)] *2: 4-speed A/T Revision: March 2005 GI-36 2005 Altima CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement EAS0019A CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. GI B C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 GI-37 2005 Altima CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Checking Equipment EAS0019B When ordering the following equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. Tool name Description NISSAN CONSULT-II (J-44200) 1. CONSULT-II unit (Tester internal soft: Resident version 3.3.0) and accessories. 2. Program cards UED04D-1 and AEN04A-1 (For NATS) or later. To confirm the best combination of these software, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual. 3. CONSULT-II CONVERTER. 4. "CONSULT-II Pigtail" cable. SAIA0363E CAUTION: ● Previous CONSULT-II “I” and “Y” DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. ● If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. ● If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters “FAIL SAFE MODE” which will “LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT” and /or “COOLING FAN ROTATING” when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: ● The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. ● Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned off before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure EAS0019C NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. PAIA0070E 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” or “System Shortcut” (e.g.: ENGINE) on the screen. BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 GI-38 2005 Altima CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit EAS001QA GI B C SGI125A Symptom CONSULT-II cannot access any system. CONSULT-II cannot access individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.) D Check item ● CONSULT-II DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4). For detailed circuit, refer to EC-623, "Wiring Diagram" (4-cylinder) or EC-1346, "Wiring Diagram" (6-cylinder). ● CONSULT-II DLC cable and CONSULT-II CONVERTER. ● CONSULT-II program card (Check the appropriate CONSULT-II program card for the system. Refer to "Checking Equipment".) ● Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) ● Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-II DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) ● Open or short circuit in CAN, K or L communication line. Refer to LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . NOTE: The preceding schematic is an example and may not be a true representation of the vehicle. The actual DDL1 circuits (CAN lines) from DLC pins 6 and 14, the DDL2 circuit (K-line) from DLC pin 7, and the L-line from DLC pin 9 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 GI-39 2005 Altima LIFTING POINT LIFTING POINT Special Service Tools PFP:00000 EAS0019E The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description LM4086-0200 ( - ) Board on attachment S-NT001 LM4519-0000 ( - ) Safety stand attachment S-NT002 CAUTION: ● Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition. ● Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine, transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. ● Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. ● Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts. Revision: March 2005 GI-40 2005 Altima LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand EAS0019F WARNING: ● Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes, etc. under the vehicle. ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when you have to get under the vehicle. ● Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. ● Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in center line of wheels. GI B C D E F G H I J K WAIA0035E L M Revision: March 2005 GI-41 2005 Altima LIFTING POINT 2-pole Lift EAS0019G WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler. LAIA0018E Board-on Lift EAS0019H CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. ● The board-on lift attachment (LM4086-0200) set at front end of vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. ● Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. AGI016 Revision: March 2005 GI-42 2005 Altima TOW TRUCK TOWING TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing PFP:00000 GI EAS0019I CAUTION: ● Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. ● Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as illustrated. CAUTION: ● Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the ground. ● When towing manual transaxle models with the front wheels on the ground (if a towing dolly is not used), turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. B C D E F G H I SGI986 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) EAS0019J Front ● Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. ● Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook. ● The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle. ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Rear LAIA0025E ● Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. ● Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. ● Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. ● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Revision: March 2005 GI-43 J 2005 Altima K L M TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS Tightening Torque Table Grade 4T Bolt size M6 6.0 M8 8.0 M10 M12 7T 10.0 12.0 EAS0019K Tightening torque (Without lubricant) Pitch mm Hexagon head bolt N·m kg-m Hexagon flange bolt ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb 1.0 5.1 0.52 3.8 45.1 6.1 0.62 4.5 53.8 1.25 13 1.3 9 — 15 1.5 11 — 1.0 13 1.3 9 — 16 1.6 12 — 1.5 25 2.5 18 — 29 3.0 22 — 1.25 25 2.6 19 — 30 3.1 22 — 1.75 42 4.3 31 — 51 5.2 38 — 1.25 46 4.7 34 — 56 5.7 41 — M14 14.0 1.5 74 7.5 54 — 88 9.0 65 — M6 6.0 1.0 8.4 0.86 6.2 74.6 10 1.0 7 87 M8 8.0 1.25 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.5 18 — 1.0 22 2.2 16 — 26 2.7 20 — 1.5 41 4.2 30 — 48 4.9 35 — 1.25 43 4.4 32 — 51 5.2 38 — 1.75 71 7.2 52 — 84 8.6 62 — 1.25 77 7.9 57 — 92 9.4 68 — M10 M12 9T Bolt diameter * mm PFP:00000 10.0 12.0 M14 14.0 1.5 127 13.0 94 — 147 15.0 108 — M6 6.0 1.0 12 1.2 9 — 15 1.5 11 — M8 8.0 1.25 29 3.0 22 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.0 31 3.2 23 — 37 3.8 27 — 1.5 59 6.0 43 — 70 7.1 51 — 1.25 62 6.3 46 — 74 7.5 54 — 1.75 98 10.0 72 — 118 12.0 87 — 1.25 108 11.0 80 — 137 14.0 101 — 1.5 177 18.0 130 — 206 21.0 152 — M10 M12 M14 10.0 12.0 14.0 *: Nominal diameter 1. Special parts are excluded. 2. This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head. MGI044A Revision: March 2005 GI-44 2005 Altima RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants PFP:00000 GI EAS0019L Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant. Product Description 1 2 3 Purpose 999MP-AM000P 99998-50505 Permatex 81844 Anaerobic Liquid Gasket For metal-to-metal flange sealing. Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most powertrain applications. 999MP-AM001P 99998-50503 Permatex 51813 and 51817 High Performance Thread Sealant Provides instant sealing on any threaded straight or parallel threaded fitting. (Thread sealant only, no locking ability.) 999MP-AM002P 999MP-AM002P Permatex 56521 Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Blue) Revision: March 2005 C D 99998-50506 (Ultra Grey) Permatex Ultra Grey 82194; Three Bond 1207,1215, 1216, 1217F and 1217G; Nissan RTV Part No. 999MP-A7007 F Do not use on plastic. 999MP-AM003P (Ultra Grey) Silicone RTV High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) B E Threadlocker Threadlocker (service tool removable) G H I Gasket Maker for Maxima/ Quest 5-speed automatic transmission (RE5F22A) 6 Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos. Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to windows. Gasket Maker 5 Nissan Canada Part No. (Canada) Rear View Mirror Adhesive ● 4 Nissan North America Part No. (USA) – – Three Bond 1281B or exact equivalent in its quality J 999MP-AM004P 999MP-AM005P GI-45 999MP-AM004P Permatex 27200; Three Bond 1360, 1360N, 1305 N&P, 1307N, 1335, 1335B, 1363B, 1377C, 1386B, D&E and 1388 999MP-AM005P Permatex 24200, 24206, 24240, 24283 and 09178; Three Bond 1322, 1322N, 1324 D&N, 1333D, 1361C, 1364D, 1370C and 1374 2005 Altima K L M IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Model Variation (Early production) Body Engine PFP:00010 EAS0019M Grade California Canada M/T BDBALAF-EUA BDBALAF-EVA — Base (Special Fleet only) A/T BDBALBA-EUA BDBALBA-EVA — M/T S A/T BDBALBF-EUA BDBALBF-EVA BDBALBF-ENA BDBALCF-EUA BDBALCF-EVA BDBALCF-ENA BDBALBA-EUA BDBALBA-EVA BDBALBA-ENA BDBALCA-EUA BDBALCA-EVA BDBALCA-ENA BDBALDA-EUA BDBALDA-EVA BDBALDA-ENA SL A/T S A/T — BLJALBN-ENA M/T BLJALCF-EUA BLJALCF-ENA A/T BLJALCN-EUA BLJALCN-ENA SE VQ35DE Federal Base QR25DE Sedan Destination Transmission SL SE-R A/T BLJALDN-EUA BLJALDN-ENA M/T BLJALEY-EUA BLJALEY-ENA A/T BLJALEN-EUA BLJALEN-ENA Prefix and suffix designations: Position Character 1 B Qualifier Body type 2 3 Definition B: 4-Door DB: QR25DE DB Engine LJ: VQ35DE 4 A Axle A: 2WD 5 L Drive L: LH A: 2.5 Base B: S 6 A Grade C: Convenience D: SL E: SE-R A: 4 A/T F: 5 M/T 7 F Transmission N: 5 A/T Y: 6 M/T 8 9 L31 Model L31: Altima E Intake E: EGI 10 11 N: Canada 12 U Zone U: Federal V: California 13 A Revision: March 2005 Equipment A: Standard GI-46 2005 Altima IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Position Character Qualifier Definition GI 14 15 16 XXXXX Option Codes Option Codes B 17 18 C Model Variation (Late production) EAS001QD Destination Body Engine Grade Transmission M/T S QR25DE A/T Sedan SL A/T S A/T SE VQ35DE SL SE-R USA California Canada — BDBALBF-EVA BDBALBF-ENA — BDBALCF-EVA BDBALCF-ENA — BDBALBA-EVA BDBALBA-ENA — BDBALCA-EVA BDBALCA-EVA BDBALDA-EUA BDBALDA-EVA BDBALDA-ENA — BLJALBN-ENA M/T BLJALCF-EUA BLJALCF-ENA A/T BLJALCN-EUA BLJALCN-ENA A/T BLJALDN-EUA BLJALDN-ENA M/T BLJALEY-EUA BLJALEY-ENA A/T BLJALEN-EUA BLJALEN-ENA Prefix and suffix designations: Position Character 1 B 2 DB D E F G H I Qualifier Body type Engine 3 Definition B: 4-Door J DB: QR25DE LJ: VQ35DE 4 A Axle A: 2WD 5 L Drive L: LH K A: 2.5 Base L B: S 6 A Grade C: Convenience D: SL M E: SE-R A: 4 A/T 7 F Transmission F: 5 M/T N: 5 A/T Y: 6 M/T 8 9 L31 Model L31: Altima E Intake E: EGI 10 11 N: Canada 12 U Zone U: Federal 13 A Equipment A: Standard V: California Revision: March 2005 GI-47 2005 Altima IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Position Character Qualifier Definition 14 15 16 XXXXX Option Codes Option Codes 17 18 Identification Number EAS001QE LAIA0020E Revision: March 2005 GI-48 2005 Altima IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Vehicle Identification Number Arrangement GI B C D E F G H WAIA0083E Identification Plate I EAS001QF J K L M LAIA0027E Revision: March 2005 GI-49 2005 Altima IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Engine Serial Number EAS001QG LAIA0024E LAIA0026E Automatic Transaxle Number EAS001QH AGI072 Manual Transaxle Number EAS001QI SGI334 Dimensions EAS0019N Unit:mm (in) Overall length 4,884.4 (192.3), SE-R 4889.5 (192.5) Overall width 1,788 (70.4) Overall height 1,471 (57.9), SE-R 1458 (57.4) Front tread 1,549 (61.0) Revision: March 2005 GI-50 2005 Altima IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Rear tread 1,554 (61.2) Wheelbase 2,799 (110.2) GI Wheels & Tires EAS0019O Conventional B Spare Road wheel/offset mm (in) 16 X 6.5 Steel/40 (1.57) 16 X 6.5 Cast Aluminum/40 (1.57 17 X 7JJ Cast Aluminum/45 (1.77) 18 X 8JJ Forged Aluminum/45 (1.77) 16 X 4t C Tire size 215/60R16 215/55R17 225/45R18 T135/70R16 T135/90R16 (when equipped with TCS) T155/80R17 D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 GI-51 2005 Altima TERMINOLOGY TERMINOLOGY SAE J1930 Terminology List PFP:00011 EAS0019P All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart. NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Air cleaner ACL Air cleaner Barometric pressure BARO *** Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD BAROS-BCDD BCDD Camshaft position CMP *** Camshaft position sensor CMPS Crank angle sensor Canister *** Canister Carburetor CARB Carburetor Charge air cooler CAC Intercooler Closed loop CL Closed loop Closed throttle position switch CTP switch Idle switch Clutch pedal position switch CPP switch Clutch switch Continuous fuel injection system CFI system *** Continuous trap oxidizer system CTOX system *** Crankshaft position CKP *** Crankshaft position sensor CKPS *** Data link connector DLC *** Data link connector for CONSULT-II DLC for CONSULT-II Diagnostic connector for CONSULT-II Diagnostic test mode DTM Diagnostic mode Diagnostic test mode selector DTM selector Diagnostic mode selector Diagnostic test mode I DTM I Mode I Diagnostic test mode II DTM II Mode II Diagnostic trouble code DTC Malfunction code Direct fuel injection system DFI system *** Distributor ignition system DI system Ignition timing control Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater EFE-mixture heater Mixture heater Early fuel evaporation system EFE system Mixture heater control Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM *** Electronic ignition system EI system Ignition timing control Engine control EC *** Engine control module ECM ECCS control unit Engine coolant temperature ECT Engine temperature Engine coolant temperature sensor ECTS Engine temperature sensor Engine modification EM *** Engine speed RPM Engine speed Erasable programmable read only memory EPROM *** Evaporative emission canister EVAP canister Canister Evaporative emission system EVAP system Canister control solenoid valve Exhaust gas recirculation valve EGR valve EGR valve Revision: March 2005 GI-52 2005 Altima TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM GI Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT valve EGRC-BPT valve BPT valve Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid valve EGRC-solenoid valve EGR control solenoid valve EGRT sensor Exhaust gas temperature sensor C Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory FEEPROM *** D Flash erasable programmable read only memory FEPROM *** Flexible fuel sensor FFS *** Flexible fuel system FF system *** Fuel pressure regulator *** Pressure regulator Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid valve *** PRVR control solenoid valve Fuel trim FT *** Heated Oxygen sensor HO2S Exhaust gas sensor Idle air control system IAC system Idle speed control Idle air control valve-air regulator IACV-air regulator Air regulator Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control valve IACV-AAC valve Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve IACV-FICD solenoid valve FICD solenoid valve Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve IACV-idle up control solenoid valve Idle up control solenoid valve Idle speed control-FI pot ISC-FI pot FI pot Idle speed control system ISC system *** Ignition control IC *** Ignition control module ICM *** Indirect fuel injection system IFI system *** Intake air IA Air Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor B EGR temperature sensor E F G H I J K L Intake air temperature sensor IAT sensor Air temperature sensor Knock *** Detonation Knock sensor KS Detonation sensor Malfunction indicator lamp MIL Check engine light Manifold absolute pressure MAP *** Manifold absolute pressure sensor MAPS *** Manifold differential pressure MDP *** Manifold differential pressure sensor MDPS *** Manifold surface temperature MST *** Manifold surface temperature sensor MSTS *** Manifold vacuum zone MVZ *** Manifold vacuum zone sensor MVZS *** Mass air flow sensor MAFS Air flow meter Mixture control solenoid valve MC solenoid valve Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve Multiport fuel injection System MFI system Fuel injection control Revision: March 2005 GI-53 M 2005 Altima TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM *** On board diagnostic system OBD system Self-diagnosis Open loop OL Open loop Oxidation catalyst OC Catalyst Oxidation catalytic converter system OC system *** Oxygen sensor O2S Exhaust gas sensor Park position switch *** Park switch Park/neutral position switch PNP switch Park/neutral switch Inhibitor switch Neutral position switch Periodic trap oxidizer system PTOX system *** Positive crankcase ventilation PCV Positive crankcase ventilation Positive crankcase ventilation valve PCV valve PCV valve Powertrain control module PCM *** Programmable read only memory PROM *** Pulsed secondary air injection control solenoid valve PAIRC solenoid valve AIV control solenoid valve Pulsed secondary air injection system PAIR system Air induction valve (AIV) control Pulsed secondary air injection valve PAIR valve Air induction valve Random access memory RAM *** Read only memory ROM *** Scan tool ST *** Secondary air injection pump AIR pump *** Secondary air injection system AIR system *** Sequential multiport fuel injection system SFI system Sequential fuel injection Service reminder indicator SRI *** Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system *** Simultaneous fuel injection Smoke puff limiter system SPL system *** Supercharger SC *** Supercharger bypass SCB *** System readiness test SRT *** Thermal vacuum valve TVV Thermal vacuum valve Three way catalyst TWC Catalyst Three way catalytic converter system TWC system *** Three way + oxidation catalyst TWC + OC Catalyst Three way + oxidation catalytic converter system TWC + OC system *** Throttle body TB Throttle chamber SPI body Throttle body fuel injection system TBI system Fuel injection control Throttle position TP Throttle position Throttle position sensor TPS Throttle sensor Throttle position switch TP switch Throttle switch Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TCC solenoid valve Lock-up cancel solenoid Lock-up solenoid Revision: March 2005 GI-54 2005 Altima TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Transmission control module TCM A/T control unit Turbocharger TC Turbocharger Vehicle speed sensor VSS Vehicle speed sensor Volume air flow sensor VAFS Air flow meter Warm up oxidation catalyst WU-OC Catalyst Warm up oxidation catalytic converter system WU-OC system *** Warm up three way catalyst WU-TWC Catalyst Warm up three way catalytic converter system WU-TWC system *** Wide open throttle position switch WOTP switch Full switch GI B C D E ***: Not applicable F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 GI-55 2005 Altima TERMINOLOGY Revision: March 2005 GI-56 2005 Altima I BODY SECTION GW GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Handling for Adhesive and Primer ........................... 3 Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5 Work Flow ................................................................ 5 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7 DOORS ................................................................. 7 TRUNK .................................................................. 8 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8 SEATS ................................................................... 8 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9 WINDSHIELD GLASS ...............................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING ............... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM .................................... 15 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 15 System Description ................................................ 15 AUTO OPERATION ............................................ 15 Revision: March 2005 POWER WINDOW LOCK ................................... 15 DELAYED POWER OPERATION ....................... 15 ANTI-PINCH DETECTION FUNCTION ............... 16 Schematic (With Left Front Only Power Window Anti-pinch System) ................................................. 17 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left Front Only Power Window Anti-pinch System) ................ 18 Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch ......................... 22 Schematic (With Left and Right Front Power Window Anti-pinch System) .......................................... 23 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left and Right Front Power Window Anti-pinch System) ............... 24 Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch ......................... 28 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 29 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 30 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 31 Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Driver side) ....... 31 Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Passenger side with left and right front power window anti-pinch system) ........................................................................ 33 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............. 34 Removal and Installation ........................................ 34 FRONT DOOR GLASS ....................................... 34 FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ................ 35 FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION ................................................... 36 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............... 37 Removal and Installation ........................................ 37 REAR DOOR GLASS .......................................... 37 INSTALLATION ................................................... 38 REAR DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ................... 38 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 39 INSTALLATION ................................................... 39 FITTING INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION... 39 INSIDE MIRROR ....................................................... 40 Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR — ................................. 40 Removal and Installation ........................................ 41 INSIDE MIRROR ................................................. 41 GW-1 2005 Altima F G H GW J K L M REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .................................. 42 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 42 System Description ................................................. 42 CAN Communication System Description .............. 43 Wiring Diagram — DEF — ..................................... 44 Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — ................................ 45 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 47 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 47 Work Flow ............................................................... 47 Preliminary Check .................................................. 47 FUSE CHECK ..................................................... 47 CONSULT–II Function (BCM) ................................. 48 CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE .................................................................. 48 DATA MONITOR .................................................. 49 Revision: March 2005 ACTIVE TEST ......................................................49 Trouble Diagnosis ...................................................50 Filament Check .......................................................53 Filament Repair .......................................................54 REPAIR EQUIPMENT .........................................54 REPAIRING PROCEDURE .................................54 DOOR MIRROR .........................................................56 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — ..............................56 Removal and Installation .........................................57 REMOVAL ............................................................57 INSTALLATION ....................................................57 Door Mirror Glass ....................................................57 REMOVAL ............................................................57 INSTALLATION ....................................................57 GW-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EIS003KH The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Handling for Adhesive and Primer B C D E F EIS003KI Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after G the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. ● Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. ● Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder. H ● Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found, do not use it. ● If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with GW soap. ● When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual. J Trouble Diagnosis Precaution EIS003KJ ● When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. K L M Revision: March 2005 GW-3 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EIS003KK The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear Locating the noise SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit Repairing the cause of noise SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tool EIS003KL (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E ( — ) Suction Lifter Holding door glass LIIA1991E Revision: March 2005 GW-4 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 A EIS0048A B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. GW ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer J is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when K defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. M ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: March 2005 GW-5 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to GW-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) ● Revision: March 2005 GW-6 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR A B C D E Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0048B F Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL G Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel H 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield GW 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint J These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK ness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will L not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. M DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: March 2005 GW-7 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: March 2005 GW-8 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS0048C A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0276E Revision: March 2005 GW-9 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SBT844 Revision: March 2005 GW-10 2005 Altima WINDSHIELD GLASS WINDSHIELD GLASS Removal and Installation PFP:72712 A EIS003KP B C D E F LIIA0011E G REMOVAL 1. 2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge). Refer to EI-36, "HEADLINING" . H Remove the front wiper arms. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" . 3. Remove drip molding. Refer to EI-26, "DRIP MOLDING" . GW 4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. After removing moldings, remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. J ● If a windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. K CAUTION: When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. L NOTE: ● Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. ● Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. M PIIA0186E INSTALLATION ● ● ● Use a genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. Revision: March 2005 GW-11 2005 Altima WINDSHIELD GLASS Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: ● Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. ● The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. ● Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. ● Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: ● Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. ● Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. ● Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. ● The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperature and lower humidity. ● LIIA0012E Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Revision: March 2005 GW-12 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:79712 A EIS003KQ B C D E F LIIA0013E G REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear of the headliner. Refer to EI-36, "HEADLINING" . Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER" . Remove the connectors and grounds for the rear window defogger and printed antenna. ● After removing moldings, remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. ● If a windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: ● When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. ● Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. ● Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. H GW J K SBF034B M INSTALLATION Use a genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. ● While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. ● The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. ● Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: ● Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. ● The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. ● Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. ● Revision: March 2005 GW-13 L 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: ● Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. ● Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. ● Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. ● The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperature and lower humidity. ● LIIA0014E Revision: March 2005 GW-14 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:25401 A EIS003KR B C D E F G H GW J LIIA1461E K System Description EIS003KS Power is supplied at all times ● through BCM terminal 69 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5 (16). With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through BCM terminal 68 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (17), ● to front power window switch RH terminal 2 (13), ● to rear power window switch LH and RH terminal 5. ( ): with left and right front power window anti-pinch system. L M AUTO OPERATION The power window AUTO feature enables the driver (driver and passenger) to open or close the window without holding the window switch in the down or up position. POWER WINDOW LOCK The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver's window. When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the sub-switches in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating. DELAYED POWER OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, power windows will still operate for approximately 45 seconds unless either of the front doors is opened. Revision: March 2005 GW-15 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ANTI-PINCH DETECTION FUNCTION During raising operation of driver or passenger power window (if equipped), if door control module detects that foreign object is pinched, power window lowers approximately 150 mm (5.91 in). NOTE: Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to power window, it may lower. Operation conditions ● ● ● Driver and passenger door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (when the limit switch is ON). During automatic operation when ignition switch is turned ON. During automatic or manual operation when ignition switch is other than ON position (when the timer operates). Revision: March 2005 GW-16 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Schematic (With Left Front Only Power Window Anti-pinch System) EIS003KT A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0400E Revision: March 2005 GW-17 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left Front Only Power Window Anti-pinch System) EIS003KU WIWA0978E Revision: March 2005 GW-18 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0402E Revision: March 2005 GW-19 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIWA0979E Revision: March 2005 GW-20 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0404E Revision: March 2005 GW-21 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch EIS003KV With left front only power window anti-pinch system. Wire Color 1 L/W Front power window LH DOWN signal DOWN operation. 0 → Battery voltage 2 L/R Front power window LH UP signal UP operation. 0 → Battery voltage 3 Y Front power window RH DOWN signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch front power window RH DOWN operation. 0 → Battery voltage 4 G Front power window RH UP signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch front power window RH UP operation. 0 → Battery voltage 5 W/R Battery power supply — Battery voltage 7 G/R Encoder power supply — 5 – Battery voltage 8 W/B Limit switch encoder ground — 0 9 G/W Item Limit switch signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Terminal Driver door window is between fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON). 0 Driver door window is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF). 5 10 R/Y Rear power window RH UP signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window RH UP operation. 0 → Battery voltage 11 Y/B Rear power window RH DOWN signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window RH DOWN operation. 0 → Battery voltage 12 W/L RAP signal 14 V Rear power window LH UP signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window LH UP operation. Battery voltage 15 L Rear power window LH DOWN signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window LH DOWN operation. Battery voltage 16 G/Y Encoder pulse signal Power window motor operation. Power window UNLOCK signal Power window lock switch in UNLOCK position Battery voltage Power window LOCK signal Power window lock switch in LOCK position Battery voltage — 0 — Battery voltage OCC3383D 17 P 18 BR 19 B Revision: March 2005 Ground GW-22 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Schematic (With Left and Right Front Power Window Anti-pinch System) EIS003KW A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0405E Revision: March 2005 GW-23 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left and Right Front Power Window Antipinch System) EIS003KX WIWA0980E Revision: March 2005 GW-24 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0407E Revision: March 2005 GW-25 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIWA0981E Revision: March 2005 GW-26 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0409E Revision: March 2005 GW-27 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch EIS003KY With left and right front power window anti-pinch system. Wire Color 1 L Rear power window LH DOWN signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window LH DOWN operation. Battery voltage 2 V Rear power window motor LH UP signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window LH UP operation. Battery voltage 4 P/L Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) lock signal Key position (Neutral → Locked) 5→0 5 W/L Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) unlock signal Key position (Neutral → Unlocked) 5→0 6 Y/B Rear power window RH DOWN signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window RH DOWN operation. 0 → Battery voltage 7 R/Y Rear power window RH UP signal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch rear power window RH UP operation. 0 → Battery voltage 8 9 W/G G/W 11 B 12 G/Y Item Power window lock Limit switch signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Terminal Power window lock switch UNLOCK operation Battery voltage Power window lock switch LOCK operation Battery voltage Driver door window is between fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON). 0 Driver door window is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF). 5 — 0 Ground Encoder pulse signal Power window motor operation. OCC3383D 13 G/R Encoder power supply — 14 Y/G Power window serial link — 5 → Battery voltage OCC3383D 15 W/B Limit switch encoder ground — 0 16 W/R Battery power supply — Battery voltage 17 W/L RAP signal — Battery voltage Revision: March 2005 GW-28 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Item Voltage (V) (Approx.) Terminal Wire Color Condition 18 L/W Front power window motor LH DOWN signal DOWN operation. 0 → Battery voltage 19 L/R Front power window motor LH UP signal UP operation. 0 → Battery voltage CONSULT-II Function (BCM) A B EIS003KZ C CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content D Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. E F G CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. H GW J K BBIA0002E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. L M BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 GW-29 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. Touch "BCM". BCIA0030E 4. Touch "RETAINED PWR". LIIA0163E 5. Select diagnosis mode. "ACTIVE TEST" is available for the power window. BCIA0031E ACTIVE TEST Test Item Description This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM (body control module) to power window system and power sunroof system (if equipped). Those systems can be operated when turning on "RETAINED PWR" on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF. RETAINED PWR Revision: March 2005 NOTE: During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF" position. "RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF. GW-30 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses EIS003L0 A Symptom None of the power windows can be operated using any switch. Driver side power window cannot be operated but other windows can be operated. Possible cause 1. Power source Battery or RAP 1. Power source Battery or RAP 2. Front power window LH circuit 3. Front power window motor LH and regulator 4. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Repair order 1. Check the following – Check harness between BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock switch for open or short. – Check harness between BCM and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH and rear power window switch LH and RH for open or short. B C 1. Check harness between BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock switch for open or short. 2. Check harness between main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH for open or short circuit. D 3. Check front power window motor LH and regulator. E 4. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. One or more power windows except driver's side window cannot be operated. 1. Power source RAP 2. Power window switches 1. Check harness between BCM and power window subswitches for open or short circuit. 3. Power window motors and regulators 2. Check front power window switch RH and rear power window switch LH and RH. 4. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch 3. Check power window motors and regulators. 5. Power window circuit F G 4. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 5. Check harnesses between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, rear power window switch LH and RH and power window motors for open/short circuit. H GW Power windows except driver's side window cannot be operated using main power window and door lock/ unlock switch but can be operated by power window sub-switch. 1. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch 1. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Driver side power window automatic operation does not function properly. 1. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch 1. Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 2. Encoder and limit switch 2. Check encoder and limit switch. Refer to GW-31, "Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Driver side)" . Passenger side power window automatic operation does not function properly. 1. Power window and door lock/ unlock switch RH 1. Check front power widow switch RH. L 2. Check encoder and limit switch. Refer to GW-33, "Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Passenger side with left and right front power window anti-pinch system)" . M J 2. Encoder and limit switch Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Driver side) K EIS003L1 1. CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM Check the following. ● Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc. ● Worn or deformed glass molding. ● Door sash tilted too far inward or outward. ● Door window regulator. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism. Revision: March 2005 GW-31 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and ground. Terminals (+) Connector D7 Voltage (Approx.) Condition (–) Terminal 9 (G/W) Ground Driver door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Driver door window is between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF) 5 LIIA1582E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness between main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH. ● OK: Replace front power window motor LH. ● NG: Replace or repair harness. 3. CHECK ENCODER Measure voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 16 (12) and ground with oscilloscope when power window is in automatic closing operation. Terminals (+) D7 16 (G/Y), 12 (G/Y) Condition Voltage (–) Ground Front power window motor LH operation. OCC3383D ( ): with left and right front power window anti-pinch system OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. NG >> Replace front power window motor LH. LIIA1583E Revision: March 2005 GW-32 2005 Altima POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Passenger side with left and right front power window anti-pinch system) EIS003L2 A 1. CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM B Check the following. ● Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc. ● Worn or deformed glass molding. ● Door sash tilted too far inward or outward. ● Door window regulator. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism. C D 2. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16 and ground. Terminals (+) Connector D105 (–) G Voltage (Approx.) Condition F Terminal 16 (G/W) Ground H Passenger door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Passenger door window is between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF) 5 GW LIIA1584E J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness between main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor RH. ● OK: Replace front power window motor RH. ● NG: Replace or repair harness. K L 3. CHECK ENCODER M Measure voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 19 and ground with oscilloscope when power window is in automatic closing operation. Terminals (+) D105 19 (G/Y) Condition Voltage (–) Ground Front power window motor RH operation. OCC3383D LIIA1585E OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. NG >> Replace front power window motor RH. Revision: March 2005 GW-33 2005 Altima FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation PFP:80300 EIS003L3 WIIA0709E 1 Door glass 4 Module assembly 2 Door glass run 3 Regulator assembly FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the door speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Door Speaker" . Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. Remove the door glass bolts. SIIA0264E Revision: March 2005 GW-34 2005 Altima FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR 5. While holding the door glass, raise it at the rear end to pull the door glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. A B C SIIA0286J D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to GW-36, "Fitting Inspection and Setting After Installation" . E FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Removal 1. 2. Remove the door speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Door Speaker" . Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the door glass bolts. F G H GW J SIIA0264E 4. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool. K L M PIIB1811E 5. 6. Remove the module assembly bolts and the module assembly. Disconnect the harness connector for the module assembly, and disconnect the harness clip from the back. SIIA0287E Revision: March 2005 GW-35 2005 Altima FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. ● Excessive cable wear. ● Regulator channel deformation. ● Apply grease for each sliding part. Apply grease at the application points indicated by the arrows as shown. SIIA0297J Disassembly Remove the regulator motor and guide rail from the module assembly. SIIA0298E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to GW-36, "Fitting Inspection and Setting After Installation" . FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Fitting ● ● Check that the door glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. Lower the door glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the door glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and door glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). ● Removal and installation of the regulator. ● Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. ● Removal and installation of the door glass. ● Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raise the door glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. SIIA0347E Revision: March 2005 GW-36 2005 Altima REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation PFP:82300 A EIS003L4 B C D E F G H GW WIIA0710E 1 Partition glass 2 Door glass run 3 Door glass 4 Regulator assembly 5 Frame assembly 6 Partition sash J REAR DOOR GLASS Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Rear Door" . Remove the plastic vapor barrier, being careful not to tear/damage it. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. Remove the door glass bolts. SIIA0290E 6. Remove the door glass. Revision: March 2005 GW-37 2005 Altima L M REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR 7. Remove the partition sash from the glass run. ● Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. LIIA0027E 8. Remove the partition glass from the inside of the panel. LIIA0028E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to GW-39, "Fitting Inspection After Installation" . REAR DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Rear Door" . Remove the plastic vapor barrier, being careful not to tear/damage it. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door glass until the bolts can be seen. Remove the door glass bolts. SIIA0290E 6. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool. PIIB1817E Revision: March 2005 GW-38 2005 Altima REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR 7. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. A B C SIIA0291E D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace it. The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. ● Wire wear ● Regulator deformation ● Grease condition for each sliding part E F G SIIA0294J H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal Refer to GW-39, "Fitting Inspection After Installation" . GW FITTING INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● Check that the door glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. Lower the door glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the door glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and door glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the door glass position. J K L M Revision: March 2005 GW-39 2005 Altima INSIDE MIRROR INSIDE MIRROR Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR — PFP:96321 EIS003L5 WIWA0429E Revision: March 2005 GW-40 2005 Altima INSIDE MIRROR Removal and Installation EIS003L6 INSIDE MIRROR A 1. 2. 3. B Remove inside mirror finisher (if equipped). Slide the mirror upward to remove. Disconnect the connector (if equipped). C D E F G SIIA0828E 1. Inside mirror 2. H Inside mirror finisher (if equipped) Installation is in the reverse order of removal. GW J K L M Revision: March 2005 GW-41 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:25350 EIS003L7 LIIA2131E System Description EIS003L8 The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM and rear window defogger relay is controlled by IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). The rear window defogger operates for approximately 15 minutes. Power is supplied at all times ● to rear window defogger relay terminal 3 ● through 20A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R), ● to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 ● through 20A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R), and ● to BCM terminal 70 ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● to BCM terminal 38 ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to rear window defogger relay terminal 1, and Ground is supplied ● to terminal 67 of the BCM ● through body grounds F14, M57 and M61, and Revision: March 2005 GW-42 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER to rear window defogger terminal – ● through body ground B202. BCM is connected to IPDM E/R as DATA LINE (CAN-H and CAN-L). When the rear window defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 9 ● through terminal 22 of the front air control. BCM outputs rear window defogger switch signal to IPDM E/R via DATA LINE (CAN H line and CAN L line). Ground is then supplied to terminal 2 of the rear window defogger relay through IPDM E/R terminal 52. With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized. Power is supplied ● through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay ● to the rear window defogger, and ● to terminal 23 of the front air control. The rear window defogger has an independent ground. With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger switch. ● CAN Communication System Description A B C D E F EIS003L9 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . G H GW J K L M Revision: March 2005 GW-43 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Wiring Diagram — DEF — EIS003LA WIWA1939E Revision: March 2005 GW-44 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — EIS003LB A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0413E Revision: March 2005 GW-45 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER WIWA0983E Revision: March 2005 GW-46 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Terminal and Reference Value for BCM EIS003LC A Terminal Wire Color 9 GY Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch is ON. 0 Rear window defogger switch is OFF. 5 Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery voltage 38 R Ignition switch (ON or START) 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 67 B 70 W/B B Rear window defogger switch signal C Ground — 0 Battery power supply — Battery voltage D Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R EIS003LD Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger power supply — Battery voltage L Rear window defogger power supply — Battery voltage 48 L CAN-H — — 49 P CAN-L — — Terminal Wire Color 5 W 6 52 G/R Item Rear window defogger relay control signal F 5. 6. G H Rear window defogger switch is ON. 0 Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Battery voltage Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. E EIS003LE Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-42, "System Description" . Perform the preliminary check. Refer to GW-47, "Preliminary Check" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-50, "Trouble Diagnosis" . Does rear window defogger operate normally? OK: GO TO 6, NG: GO TO 4 Inspection End. Preliminary Check EIS003LF GW J K L FUSE CHECK 1. FUSE INSPECTION ● M Check if any of the following fuses for BCM and IPDM E/R are blown. COMPONENT PARTS BCM IPDM E/R TERMINAL NO. (SIGNAL) AMPERE FUSE NO. 38 (Ignition power supply) 10A 1 70 (Battery power supply) 50A f 5 (Battery power supply) 20A 37 6 (Battery power supply) 20A 32 NOTE: Refer to GW-42, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: March 2005 GW-47 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONSULT–II Function (BCM) EIS003LG CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT–II and CONSULTII CONVERTER to the data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 GW-48 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 4. Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. A B C LIIA0153E D DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "REAR DEFOGGER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors only the specified item. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". If "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the item desired to monitor. If "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all items are monitored. During monitoring, touching "COPY" will print the monitored item status. E F G H Display Item List Monitor item "OPERATION" GW Content REAR DEF SW "ON/OFF" Displays "ON/OFF" status determined with the rear window defogger switch position. IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "ON/OFF" status determined with the ignition switch position. J ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. K Touch "REAR DEFOGGER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. During the operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation. L Display Item List Test item REAR DEFOGGER Revision: March 2005 M Content Touching "ON" sends a drive signal to activate the rear window defogger. GW-49 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Trouble Diagnosis EIS003LH Rear window defogger does not activate. 1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK ● ● ● With CONSULT–II Select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. Select “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Check display content in self-diagnostic results. CONSULT-II display code Diagnosis item INITIAL DIAG TRANSMIT DIAG U1000 ECM IPDM E/R METER/M&A Contents displayed No malfunction>> GO TO 2. Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitored items, go to “CAN System”. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . 2. REAR DEFOGGER OPERATES INSPECTION BY ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT–II ● Check operation with "REAR DEFOGGER" in the ACTIVE TEST. Refer to GW-49, "ACTIVE TEST" . Does rear window defogger operate properly? LIIA0154E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. 3. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION INSPECTION BY DATA MONITOR With CONSULT–II Check operation with "REAR DEF SW" in the DATA MONITOR". Refer to GW-49, "DATA MONITOR" . Does rear window defogger switch operate properly? ● WIIA0111E Revision: March 2005 GW-50 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 4. A 4. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH HARNESS CONTINUITY INSPECTION B Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 9 and front air control harness connector M50 terminal 22 and between BCM connector terminal 9 and ground. C Terminals (+) Connector M18 (–) Continuity Terminal Connector Terminal 9 (GY) M50 22 (GY) 9 (GY) D Yes Ground E No OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair or replace harness. F LIIA1411E 5. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● G Turn the ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear window defogger relay harness connector B4 terminal 1 and ground. H Terminals (+) Voltage (–) Connector Terminal B4 1 (G) Ground GW Battery voltage J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0157E K 6. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY INSPECTION ● ● Remove rear window defogger relay. Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. L Terminal (+) (–) Terminal Terminal 3 5 6 7 Condition M Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 to 2 Yes No current supply No 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 to 2 Yes No current supply No SEC202B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace rear window defogger relay. Revision: March 2005 GW-51 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 7. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FILAMENT CHECK Check rear window defogger filament. Refer to GW-53, "Filament Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair rear window defogger filament. Refer to GW-54, "Filament Repair" . 8. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND HARNESS INSPECTION Check continuity between rear window defogger connector B201 terminal – and body harness. Terminals (+) Continuity Connector Terminal B201 – (B) (–) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0158E 9. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS INSPECTION Check continuity between rear window defogger relay harness connector B4 terminal 5 and 7 and rear window defogger condenser, and between rear window defogger relay harness connector B4 terminal 5 and 7 and ground. Terminals (+) Connector (–) Terminal Connector Terminal 5 (R) B21 + (R) 5 (R) B4 Continuity 7 (R) 7 (R) Ground B21 + (R) Ground Yes No LIIA1463E Yes No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: March 2005 GW-52 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 10. IPDM E/R HARNESS INSPECTION A Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E119 terminal 6 and 5 and rear window defogger relay connector B4 terminal 3 and 6, and IPDM E/R harness connector E119 terminal 6, 5 and body ground. B Terminals (+) (–) C Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E119 5 (W) B4 6 (W) E119 5 (W) E119 6 (L) E119 6 (L) Ground B4 No 3 (L) Ground Yes D LIIA1241E Yes E No OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Filament Check 1. F EIS003LI G When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe.Then press the foil against the wire with your finger. H GW SEL122R 2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of each filament. J K L M SEL263 Revision: March 2005 GW-53 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. 4. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery voltage. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point. SEL265 Filament Repair EIS003LJ REPAIR EQUIPMENT ● ● ● ● ● ● Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long Drawing pen Heat gun Alcohol Cloth REPAIRING PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth dampened in alcohol. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen. Shake silver composition container before use. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break. PIIA0215E 4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is deposited. Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted. SEL012D Revision: March 2005 GW-54 2005 Altima REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24 hours. A B C SEL013D D E F G H GW J K L M Revision: March 2005 GW-55 2005 Altima DOOR MIRROR DOOR MIRROR Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — PFP:96301 EIS003LK WIWA0984E Revision: March 2005 GW-56 2005 Altima DOOR MIRROR Removal and Installation EIS003LL A B C D E F WIIA0706E 1. Mirror glass and holder 2. Mirror assembly 3. G Mirror body REMOVAL NOTE: Be careful not to damage the mirror bodies. 1. Remove the front door sash cover. Refer to EI-30, "Front Door" . 2. Remove the door mirror harness connector. 3. Remove the door mirror nuts and the door mirror assembly. H GW INSTALLATION J Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Door Mirror Glass EIS003LM REMOVAL K 1. 2. 3. L 4. Set mirror assembly mirror glass upward. Apply protective tape to mirror housing. Insert a screwdriver as shown and remove mirror glass by pushing up two hooks. Disconnect two electrical connectors from mirror holder. M WIIA0160E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set mirror holder bracket and mirror assembly in the horizontal position. Connect two electrical connectors to the back of the mirror holder. Heat lower hooks with a hair dryer to prevent breaking the hooks. Align upper hooks to bracket. Align lower hooks to bracket and push lower part of mirror glass down into bracket until you hear a click. Ensure that mirror glass is secure in door mirror. Revision: March 2005 GW-57 WIIA0159E 2005 Altima DOOR MIRROR Revision: March 2005 GW-58 2005 Altima M INDEX SECTION IDX ALPHABETICAL INDEX A B C D E F G H I J K L IDX IDX-1 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Numerics 2nd brake ......................................................... AT-652 2nd coast brake ............................................... AT-652 2nd coast brake hub ........................................ AT-658 3METER - Wiring diagram .................................. DI-21 A A/C - Wiring diagram ........................ ATC-33, MTC-33 A/C compressor clutch removal and installation .. ATC108, MTC-94 A/C compressor mounting . ATC-107, ATC-108, MTC93, MTC-94 A/C compressor precaution .............. ATC-10, MTC-10 A/C compressor special service tool . ATC-13, MTC-13 A/C diagnostic work flow (auto A/C) ................ ATC-28 A/C diagnostic work flow (manual A/C) .......... MTC-28 A/C evaporator .............................. ATC-114, MTC-100 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system identification .... ATC-6, MTC-6 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system precaution ....... ATC-4, MTC-4 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure ATC103, MTC-89 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service tools .. ATC-13, MTC-13 A/C HFC134a system service equipment precaution ... ATC-10, MTC-10 A/C lubricant (R134a) ....................... ATC-19, MTC-19 A/C lubrication oil .............................. ATC-19, MTC-19 A/C operational check ....................... ATC-39, MTC-40 A/C performance chart ...................... ATC-70, MTC-67 A/C service data specification ........................ ATC-120 A/C symptom chart (auto A/C) ......................... ATC-28 A/C symptom chart (manual A/C) ................... MTC-28 A/C trouble diagnoses (auto A/C) .................... ATC-28 A/C trouble diagnoses (manual A/C) .............. MTC-28 A/C, A - Wiring diagram ................................... ATC-33 A/C, M - Wiring diagram .................. MTC-33, MTC-35 A/F - Wiring diagram ... EC-445, EC-450, EC-455, EC462, EC-470, EC-476, EC-485 A/FH - Wiring diagram ..................................... EC-374 A/T - Wiring diagram .......................................... AT-19 A/T fluid checking .............................. AT-396, AT-435 A/T fluid replacement ....................................... AT-396 A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111, AT-476, AT-481 A/T IND - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-42 A/T indicator ........................................................ DI-42 A/T self-diagnoses AT-44, AT-54, AT-55, AT-456, AT461 A/T shift lock system .......................... AT-258, AT-614 A/T shift lock system - Wiring diagram AT-259, AT-615 A/T trouble diagnoses ...................................... AT-425 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 1ST ............. AT-128, AT-497 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 2ND ............ AT-133, AT-501 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 3RD ............ AT-138, AT-507 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 4TH ............ AT-143, AT-513 A/T Wiring diagram AT - 5TH .......................... AT-518 A/T Wiring diagram AT - BA/FTS ..................... AT-194 A/T Wiring diagram AT - CAN ............ AT-190, AT-465 A/T Wiring diagram AT - ENG SS .................... AT-123 A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTS ............. AT-113, AT-477 A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTSP ........................ AT-482 A/T Wiring diagram AT - LPSV ........................ AT-163 A/T Wiring diagram AT - MAIN ........................ AT-102 A/T Wiring diagram AT - MMSW ...................... AT-580 A/T Wiring diagram AT - NONDTC .................. AT-211 A/T Wiring diagram AT - OVRCSV .................. AT-185 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/A ......................... AT-526 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/B ......................... AT-561 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/C ......................... AT-570 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/CS ...................... AT-575 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PNP/SW ..... AT-107, AT-472 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PWR/IN .................... AT-586 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SFTFNC ................... AT-566 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/A ......... AT-169, AT-531 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/B ......... AT-174, AT-536 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/C ....................... AT-541 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/CS .................... AT-546 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/D ....................... AT-551 A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/E ....................... AT-556 A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCCSIG ...... AT-155, AT-523 A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCV .......................... AT-150 A/T Wiring diagram AT - TPS .......................... AT-180 A/T Wiring diagram AT - TRSC ........................ AT-487 A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSS A/T .................... AT-119 A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSSATC ................... AT-491 A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSSMTR .... AT-201, AT-204 ABS - Wiring diagram ..................................... BRC-13 ABS (anti-lock brake system) ............................ BRC-5 Accelerator control system ................................ ACC-2 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor EC-542, EC549, EC-564, EC-1258, EC-1265, EC-1279 Accelerator pedal released position learning .. EC-711 Active damper suspension system - Wiring diagram .... FSU-4 AF1B1-Wiring diagram . EC-1134, EC-1142, EC-1150, EC-1159, EC-1169, EC-1178, EC-1190 AF1B2-Wiring diagram . EC-1136, EC-1144, EC-1152, EC-1161, EC-1171, EC-1180, EC-1192 AF1HB1-Wiring diagram ............................... EC-1047 AF1HB2-Wiring diagram ............................... EC-1049 Aiming adjustment ............................................. LT-28 Air bag ............................................................... SRS-3 Air bag precautions ............................................... GI-3 Air bleeding (hydraulic clutch)Air bleeding (hydraulic clutch) .................................................................. CL-7 Air bleeding for brake systemAir bleeding for brake system ...................................................................... BR-8 Air cleaner and air duct ....................... EM-17, EM-120 Air cleaner filter replacement ................ MA-18, MA-25 Air conditioner - Wiring diagram ....... ATC-33, MTC-33 Air conditioner cut control ............................... EC-647 Air flow meter - See Mass air flow sensor EC-178, EC187, EC-806, EC-815 Air fuel ratio sensor 1 .. EC-443, EC-448, EC-453, EC460, EC-467, EC-473, EC-482, EC-1132, EC-1140, EC- IDX-2 ALPHABETICAL INDEX 1148, EC-1157, EC-1166, EC-1175, EC-1187 Air fuel ratio sensor 1 heater ........... EC-373, EC-1045 Ambient sensor ............................................... ATC-88 Angular tightening application .............. EM-6, EM-110 Anti-lock brake system - See ABS .................... BRC-5 Anti-lock brake system - Wiring diagram ......... BRC-13 APPS1 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-544, EC-1260 APPS2 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-551, EC-1267 APPS3 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-566, EC-1281 ASC/BS - Wiring diagram ................ EC-513, EC-1229 ASC/SW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-506, EC-1222 ASCBOF - Wiring diagram .............. EC-612, EC-1334 ASCD .................................................. EC-34, EC-648 ASCD (automatic speed control device) ........... ACS-2 ASCIND - Wiring diagram ............... EC-621, EC-1344 Audio ................................................................... AV-6 AUDIO - Wiring diagram ......................... AV-7, AV-13 Auto air conditioner - Wiring diagram .............. ATC-33 Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror ........... GW-40, GW-41 Automatic amplifier ATC-37, ATC-41, MTC-38, MTC-42 Automatic transaxle number .............................. GI-46 Automatic transmission fluid replacement ......... MA-31 AV and NAVI control unit .................................. AV-65 AV communication line ...................................... AV-88 B B/COMP - Wiring diagram ................................... DI-63 B5 brake ........................................................... AT-660 Back door trim ..................................................... EI-30 BACK/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-98 Back-up lamp switch (M/T)Back-up lamp switch ... MT13, MT-77 Basic inspection .................................. EC-75, EC-693 Battery ................................................................. SC-4 Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester SC-6, SC-13, SC-23 Baulk ring (M/T) ..................................... MT-21, MT-85 BCM (Body control module) .............................. BCS-3 Block heater ....................................... EM-75, EM-224 Blower motor ....... ATC-55, ATC-93, MTC-53, MTC-79 Blower unit ....................................... ATC-92, MTC-78 Board-on lift ........................................................ GI-40 Body alignment ................................................ BL-140 Body component parts ..................................... BL-129 Body construction ............................................. BL-139 Body exterior paint color .................................. BL-128 Body repair ....................................................... BL-128 Body sealing ..................................................... BL-136 Brake boosterBrake booster ............................. BR-15 Brake control valve (Proportioning valve)Brake control valve (Proportioning valve) ................................ BR-39 Brake fluid changeBrake fluid change ................. BR-8 Brake fluid level ................................................. MA-34 Brake fluid level and line checkBrake fluid level and line check ................................................................... BR-8 Brake hydraulic lineBake hydraulic line ............... BR-9 Brake inspection ................................................ MA-35 Brake lines and cables inspection ..................... MA-34 Brake master cylinderBrake master cylinder ..... BR-12 Brake pedalBrake pedal ...................................... BR-6 Brake switch .................................... EC-537, EC-1253 BRK/SW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-538, EC-1254 Bulb specifications ............................................ LT-144 Bumper, front ....................................................... EI-14 Bumper, rear ........................................................ EI-16 C A B C Cabin air filter ...................... ATC-94, MTC-80, MA-28 Camshaft ............................................ EM-37, EM-182 D Camshaft inspection .............. EM-39, EM-44, EM-187 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) .. EC-280, EC-928 CAN - Wiring diagram EC-167, EC-791, LAN-34, LANE 51, LAN-70, LAN-91, LAN-115, LAN-136, LAN-160, LAN-186, LAN-212, LAN-239 CAN (Controller Area Network) ....................... LAN-21 F CAN communication .... EC-166, EC-790, AT-188, AT416, AT-464, BRC-7, BRC-50, LAN-21 Canister-See EVAP canister ............... EC-40, EC-656 CHARGE - Wiring diagram ................................ SC-22 G Charging system ................................................ SC-21 Chassis and body maintenance ........................ MA-28 Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 1 ........ MA-9 H Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 2 ...... MA-11 CHIME - Wiring diagram ..................................... DI-47 CIGAR - Wiring diagram .................................. WW-32 I Cigarette lighter ............................................... WW-32 Circuit breaker ................................................... PG-65 Clearance lamp ................................................ LT-100 J Closed loop control ................ EC-30, EC-420, EC-644 Clutch coverClutch cover ................................... CL-18 Clutch discClutch disc ....................................... CL-18 Clutch fluid level ................................................ MA-28 K Clutch master cylinderClutch master cylinder ..... CL-8 Clutch operating cylinderClutch operating cylinder CL11 L Clutch pedalClutch pedal ..................................... CL-5 Clutch release mechanismClutch release mechanism . CL-14 Coil spring (front) ............................................... FSU-9 IDX Coil spring (rear)Coil spring .............................. RSU-9 Collision diagnosis ........................................... SRS-57 Combination lamp, front, removal and installation .. LT30 Combination lamp, rear, removal and installation LT-97 Combination meter ..................................... DI-4, DI-18 Combination meter removal and installation - See Instrument panel .......................................................... DI-18 Combination switch ............................................ LT-89 COMM - Wiring diagram .................................... AV-88 Component Location (auto A/C) ...................... ATC-29 Component Location (manual A/C) ................ MTC-29 Compressor clutch removal and installation . ATC-108, MTC-94 Compressor mounting .. ATC-107, ATC-108, MTC-93, MTC-94 Compressor precaution .................... ATC-10, MTC-10 IDX-3 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Compressor special service tool ....... ATC-13, MTC-13 Condenser ...................................... ATC-113, MTC-99 Connector inspection .......................................... GI-23 Console box - See Instrument panel .................. IP-10 CONSULT for ABS ......................................... BRC-16 CONSULT for engine ....................................... EC-128 CONSULT for TCS ......................................... BRC-59 CONSULT general information ........................... GI-36 CONSULT-II for engine ................................... EC-750 Control units (terminal arrangement) ................. PG-69 Controller Area Network (CAN) ....................... LAN-21 Converter housing installation ......................... AT-369 COOL/F - Wiring diagram ................ EC-425, EC-1115 Coolant mixture ratio ......................................... MA-14 Coolant replacement ......................................... MA-15 Coolant replacementVQ35DE .......................... MA-22 Cooling circuit (engine) ..................................... CO-26 Cooling fan motor ............................ EC-432, EC-1122 Cooling unit (A/C evaporator) ATC-95, ATC-114, MTC81, MTC-100 Corrosion protection ........................................ BL-133 Coupling sleeve (M/T) ........................... MT-21, MT-85 Crankcase ventilation system - See Positive crankcase ventilation ............................................. EC-50, EC-665 Crankshaft ........................................................ EM-76 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ..... EC-273, EC-921 Crash zone sensor .......................................... SRS-52 Cylinder block ..................................... EM-75, EM-224 Cylinder block boring ........................................ EM-94 Cylinder head ...................................... EM-59, EM-200 Cylinder head bolt tightening .......................... EM-206 D Data link connector .......................................... EC-623 Daytime light system ........................................... LT-33 Daytime running light - See Daytime light system .. LT33 DEF - Wiring diagram ....................................... GW-44 Diagnosis sensor unit ..................................... SRS-55 Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for OBD system EC-15, EC-56, EC-627, EC-669 Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) inspection priority chart EC-105, EC-722 Differential gear (FF A/T) ................................. AT-665 Differential gear (FF M/T) .................................. MT-24 Dimensions ......................................................... GI-46 Display Control Unit ......................................... AV-156 Display Unit ...................................................... AV-156 DLC - Wiring diagram ...................................... EC-623 Door glass ........................................... GW-34, GW-37 Door glass Fitting Adjustment(Front) ................ GW-36 Door mirror ........................................................ GW-57 Door trim ............................................................. EI-30 Door, front ............................................. BL-72, GW-34 Door, rear .............................................. BL-72, GW-37 Drive belt ........................................................... EM-15 Drive belt inspectionQR25DE ........................... MA-15 Drive belt inspectionVQ35DE ........................... MA-22 Drive shaft (front) ............................................ FAX-11 Driver air bag .................................................. SRS-43 Dropping resistor (A/T) ..................................... AT-161 DTC work support ............................. EC-138, EC-761 DTRL - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-38 Duct and grilles .............................. ATC-101, MTC-87 E ECM input/output signal .................................. EC-120 ECM power supply EC-159, EC-378, EC-783, EC-1053 ECM/PW - Wiring diagram .............. EC-379, EC-1054 ECTS - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-201, EC-828 EGR function ................................... EC-937, EC-1199 EGR temperature sensor ................................ EC-952 EGR volume control valve .............................. EC-945 EGR/TS - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-955 EGRC1 - Wiring diagram ................ EC-941, EC-1203 EGVC/V - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-947 Electric sunroof .................................................. RF-10 Electric throttle control actuator EC-386, EC-388, EC399, EC-1066, EC-1068 Electrical diagnoses ............................................ GI-23 Electrical load signal circuit ............. EC-610, EC-1332 Electronic ignition (EI) system ............. EC-31, EC-645 EMNT - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-1323 Engine control circuit diagram ........... EC-118, EC-738 Engine control component parts location ........ EC-112 Engine control module (ECM) ......... EC-370, EC-1042 Engine control system diagram and chart . EC-28, EC642 Engine coolant .................................................. CO-28 Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) .. EC-199, EC-211, EC-826, EC-838 Engine fail-safe system ..................... EC-107, EC-724 Engine mounting control (Front) ................... EC-1322 Engine oil ........................................................... LU-20 Engine oil filter replacementQR25DE ... MA-19, MA-26 Engine oil precautions .................................. GI-3, GI-7 Engine oil replacementQR25DE ........... MA-18, MA-25 Engine removal ................................... EM-71, EM-219 Engine serial number .......................................... GI-46 ETC1 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-389, EC-1069 ETC2 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-396, EC-1076 ETC3 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-400, EC-1080 EVAP canister ..................................... EC-40, EC-656 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve .... EC-306, EC-491, EC-977, EC-1206 EVAP canister vent control valve EC-312, EC-498, EC984, EC-1214 EVAP control system (small leak) diagnosis .. EC-298, EC-335, EC-343, EC-969, EC-1008 EVAP control system pressure sensor ... EC-319, EC322, EC-328, EC-991, EC-994, EC-1000 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring diagnosis . EC-292, EC-964 EVAP vapor lines inspection ................. MA-21, MA-27 Evaporative emission (EVAP) system EC-37, EC-651 Evaporator ................................... ATC-114, MTC-100 IDX-4 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Exhaust manifold ............................................. EM-134 Exhaust system ......................................... EX-3, EX-6 Exhaust system inspection ............ EX-3, EX-6, MA-28 Expansion valve ........................... ATC-115, MTC-101 F F/PUMP - Wiring diagram ............... EC-599, EC-1317 Fan control amp. ............................ ATC-100, MTC-86 Final drive (FF M/T) ........................................... MT-24 Flow charts ......................................................... GI-26 Fluid temperature sensor (A/T) .. AT-111, AT-476, AT481 Fluids ................................................................. MA-12 Fluorescent leak detector ............. ATC-116, MTC-102 Flywheel (clutch)Flywheel (clutch) ..................... CL-18 Foot lamp ......................................................... LT-115 Fork rod (M/T) ....................................... MT-23, MT-87 Freeze frame data ............................... EC-57, EC-674 Front bumper ....................................................... EI-14 Front combination lamp removal and installation LT-30 Front disc brakeFront disc brake ........... BR-19, BR-25 Front door ............................................. BL-72, GW-34 Front Door Trim ................................................... EI-30 Front passenger air bag .................................. SRS-47 Front seat .......................................................... SE-15 Front seat belt ..................................................... SB-4 Front seat belt pre-tensioner .... SB-2, SRS-3, SRS-54 FTTS - Wiring diagram EC-248, EC-252, EC-892, EC896 FUEL - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-235, EC-242 Fuel cut control (at no load high engine speed) EC-32, EC-646 Fuel gauge ............................................................ DI-4 Fuel injection system ......................... EC-233, EC-240 Fuel injection system (Bank 1) .......... EC-868, EC-879 Fuel injection system (Bank 2) .......... EC-868, EC-879 Fuel injector and fuel tube .................. EM-32, EM-147 Fuel level sensor EC-353, EC-355, EC-357, EC-1025, EC-1027, EC-1029 Fuel line inspection ..................... FL-3, MA-17, MA-24 Fuel precautions .......................................... GI-3, GI-5 Fuel pressure check ............................ EC-95, EC-714 Fuel pressure release ......................... EC-95, EC-714 Fuel pump ....................................... EC-598, EC-1316 Fuel system .......................................................... FL-3 Fuel systemCommercial Service Tools ................ FL-2 Fuel systemPREPARATION ................................ FL-2 Fuel systemSpecial Service Tools ....................... FL-2 Fuel tank temperature sensor ... EC-246, EC-251, EC890, EC-895 Fuel tank vacuum relief valve .............. EC-40, EC-656 FUELB1 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-870, EC-881 FUELB2 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-871, EC-882 Fuse ...................................................... PG-65, PG-73 Fuse block ......................................................... PG-72 Fusible link ............................................ PG-65, PG-73 G Garage jack and safety stand ............................. GI-40 Gear components (M/T) ....................... MT-21, MT-85 Generic scan tool (GST) .................... EC-140, EC-763 Glass ........................ GW-11, GW-13, GW-34, GW-37 Glove box lamp ................................................. LT-143 GPS antenna ..................................................... AV-64 Grease ............................................................... MA-12 Ground distribution ............................................ PG-28 H A B C D H/LAMP - Wiring diagram ..................................... LT-9 H/MIRROR - Wiring diagram ............................ GW-45 E Handling precautions for plastics ...................... BL-151 Harness connector ............................................ PG-66 Harness connector inspection ............................ GI-23 F Harness layout ................................................... PG-39 Hazard warning lamp .......................................... LT-72 Headlamp ............................................................. LT-6 Headlamp removal and installation .................... LT-30 G Heated oxygen sensor 2 ..... EC-219, EC-225, EC-404, EC-412 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) .... EC-846, EC-856, H EC-1084, EC-1096 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) .... EC-846, EC-856, EC-1084, EC-1096 I Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ...................... EC-173 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) ........ EC-797 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) ........ EC-797 Heated seat ....................................................... SE-12 J Heater and cooling unit (Heater core) ATC-95, ATC-96, MTC-81, MTC-82 Heater unit (heater core) .. ATC-95, ATC-96, MTC-81, K MTC-82 Height (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-46 HFC134a (R134a) system identification ATC-6, MTC-6 L HFC134a (R134a) system precaution .. ATC-4, MTC-4 HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure ATC-103, MTC-89 HFC134a (R134a) system service tools ATC-13, MTC- IDX 13 HFC134a system service equipment precaution . ATC10, MTC-10 HO2S2 - Wiring diagram .... EC-221, EC-228, EC-407, EC-415 HO2S2H - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-175 Homelink universal transceiver ......................... BL-126 Horn ................................................................. WW-36 HORN - Wiring diagram ................................... WW-36 How to erase DTC for OBD system ................... EC-65 HSEAT - Wiring diagram ................................... SE-13 I IATS - Wiring diagram ....................... EC-196, EC-823 Identification plate ............................................... GI-46 Idle air volume learning ....................... EC-93, EC-712 IDX-5 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Idle mixture ratio .................................. EC-81, EC-700 Idle speed .............................................. EC-75, EC-81 Idle speed control (ISC) ... EC-361, EC-363, EC-1033, EC-1035 Ignition coil ........... EM-29, EM-144, EC-572, EC-1287 Ignition control system ..................... EC-572, EC-1287 Ignition key hole illumination ............................. LT-134 Ignition timing ......................................... EC-75, EC-81 IGNSYS - Wiring diagram ................ EC-573, EC-1288 ILL - Wiring diagram ......................................... LT-139 Illumination ........................................................ LT-135 Illumination control ............................................ LT-143 In vehicle sensor .............................................. ATC-89 In-cabin Microfilter ............... ATC-94, MTC-80, MA-28 INJECT - Wiring diagram ................. EC-593, EC-1309 Injector ............................................. EC-592, EC-1308 Input shaft (FF M/T) .............................. MT-21, MT-85 Instrument panel ................................................. IP-10 Intake air temperature sensor ... EC-194, EC-214, EC822, EC-841 Intake door motor ATC-54, ATC-97, MTC-52, MTC-83 Intake manifold ................................... EM-19, EM-129 Intake sensor ...... ATC-84, ATC-91, MTC-73, MTC-77 Intake valve timing control ............................... EC-169 Intake valve timing control (Bank 1) ................. EC-793 Intake valve timing control (Bank 2) ................. EC-793 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ....... EC-382 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 1) EC1057 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 2) EC1057 Integrated homelink transmitter ....................... BL-126 Integrated homelink transmitter - See Homelink universal tranceiver ................................................... BL-126 Interior ................................................................. EI-32 Interior lamp ...................................................... LT-115 Interior lamp on-off control ................................ LT-115 IPDM (Intelligent power distribution module engine room) ................................................................. PG-15 IVC - Wiring diagram ....................................... EC-383 IVCB1 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-1058 IVCB2 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-1060 IVIS (Infiniti vehicle immobilizer system) precautions ... GI-3 J Jacking points ..................................................... GI-40 Junction box (J/B) .............................................. PG-72 K Key illumination ................................................. LT-115 Keyless entry system - See Multi-remote control system BL-46 Knock sensor (KS) ............................. EC-269, EC-916 KS - Wiring diagram ........................... EC-270, EC-917 L LAN system circuit ........................... ATC-42, MTC-44 Length (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-46 License lamp .................................................... LT-100 Lifting points ........................................................ GI-40 Line pressure solenoid valve ........................... AT-161 Line pressure test (A/T) ....................... AT-71, AT-437 Liquid gasket application EM-6, EM-110, LU-2, LU-15, CO-3, CO-21 Location of electrical units ................................. PG-62 Lubricant (R134a) A/C ..................... ATC-19, MTC-19 Lubricants ......................................................... MA-12 Lubrication circuit (engine) ................................. LU-18 Lubrication oil A/C ............................ ATC-19, MTC-19 Lubrication-locks, hinges and hood latches ...... MA-37 Luggage compartment trim ................................. EI-37 M M/T major overhaul ............................... MT-24, MT-88 M/T oil replacementM/T oil replacement MT-11, MT-75 M/T removal and installationM/T removal and installation MT-17 MAFS - Wiring diagram EC-181, EC-189, EC-809, EC817 Magnet clutch ................................. ATC-108, MTC-94 MAIN - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-159, EC-783 Mainshaft (M/T) ..................................... MT-21, MT-85 Maintenance ....................................................... MA-5 Maintenance (engine)QR25DE ......................... MA-15 Maintenance (engine)VQ35DE ......................... MA-22 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ......... EC-67, EC-685 Manual air conditioner - Wiring diagram ......... MTC-33 Manual transaxle number ................................... GI-46 Manual transmission oil replacement ................ MA-29 Map lamp ......................................................... LT-115 Mass air flow sensor (MAFS) .... EC-178, EC-187, EC806, EC-815 Master cylinder (brake)Master cylinder (brake) BR-12 Master cylinder (clutch)Master cylinder (clutch) ... CL-8 METER - Wiring diagram ...................................... DI-9 MIL data link connectors circuit ..................... EC-1346 MIL/DL - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-1346 Mirror, door ...................................................... GW-57 Mirror, out side ................................................. GW-57 Misfire ............................................... EC-262, EC-906 Mode door motor .............................. ATC-98, MTC-84 Model variation .................................................... GI-46 Multiport fuel injection (MFI) system ... EC-29, EC-643 Multiport fuel injection precautions ............... GI-3, GI-6 Multi-remote control system ............................... BL-46 Multi-remote control system - See Remote keyless entry system ................................................................ BL-16 N NATS - Wiring diagram .................................... BL-110 NAVI - Wiring diagram ....................................... AV-81 IDX-6 ALPHABETICAL INDEX NAVI Control Unit ............................................ AV-156 NVH troubleshooting (BR)NVH troubleshooting (BR) .. BR-5 NVH troubleshooting (CL)NVH troubleshooting (CL) ... CL-4 NVH troubleshooting (EM) ................. EM-13, EM-117 NVH troubleshooting (FA) ................................. FAX-4 NVH troubleshooting (RA) ................................. RAX-4 NVH troubleshooting (RSU)NVH Troubleshooting (RSU) RSU-4 NVH troubleshooting (ST) ................................... PS-4 NVH troubleshooting (WT)NVH troubleshooting (WT) . WT-2 NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system) precautions GI-3 O O2H2B1 - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-799 O2H2B2 - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-801 O2S2B1 - Wiring diagram EC-848, EC-859, EC-1087, EC-1099 O2S2B2 - Wiring diagram EC-850, EC-861, EC-1089, EC-1101 Oil change (capacity)QR25DE .......................... MA-12 Oil change (capacity)VQ35DE .......................... MA-13 Oil filter ............................................................... LU-23 Oil pan (engine) ................................................. EM-26 Oil pressure (engine) ............................................ LU-8 Oil pump (A/T) .................................................. AT-652 Oil pump (engine) ................................... LU-11, LU-24 Oil seal replacement (engine) ............ EM-56, EM-195 On board diagnostic system ............................ EC-668 One-way clutch No.1 ........................................ AT-658 One-way clutch outer race sub assembly ........ AT-658 Operating cylinder (clutch)Operating cylinder (clutch) . CL-11 ORVR (On-board Refueling Vapor Recovery) . EC-44, EC-660 Out side mirror ................................................. GW-57 Overdrive control switch ................................... AT-252 Overheat ......................................... EC-421, EC-1111 Overrun clutch solenoid valve .......................... AT-183 P Park/Neutral position switch ............ EC-524, EC-1240 Park/neutral position switch (A/T) ...... AT-105, AT-471 Park/neutral position switch (M/T)Park/neutral position switch (M/T) ........................................... MT-13, MT-77 Parking brake controlParking brake control ........ PB-2 Parking drum brakeParking drum brake ............. PB-5 Parking lamp .................................................... LT-100 PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) ... EC-50, EC-665 Periodic maintenance .......................................... MA-7 Personal lamp .................................................. LT-115 PGC/V - Wiring diagram EC-308, EC-493, EC-979, EC1208 PHASE - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-282 PHSB1 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-930 PHSB2 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-932 Piston ring inspection ...................................... EM-234 Piston to bore clearance .................................... EM-94 PNP/SW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-526, EC-1242 POS - Wiring diagram ........................ EC-275, EC-923 POWER - Wiring diagram .................................... PG-6 Power door lock .................................................. BL-16 Power seat ......................................................... SE-10 Power steering fluid level ................................... MA-36 Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor ........... EC-365 Power supply routing ........................................... PG-4 Power window .................................................. GW-15 PRE/SE - Wiring diagram ... EC-324, EC-330, EC-996, EC-1002 Precautions (General) ................................. GI-3, GI-4 Precautions in repairing high strength steel ..... BL-154 Pressure control solenoid valve A ................... AT-525 Pressure control solenoid valve B ................... AT-560 Pressure control solenoid valve C ................... AT-569 Pressure test (A/T) ............................... AT-71, AT-437 PS/SEN - Wiring diagram ................ EC-366, EC-1038 A B C D E F G R Radiator ............................................................. CO-30 Radio - See Audio ............................................... AV-6 Rear bumper ........................................................ EI-16 Rear combination lamp removal and installation LT-97 Rear disc brakeRear disc brake ........................ BR-32 Rear door .............................................. BL-72, GW-37 Rear seat ........................................................... SE-22 Rear seat belt ...................................................... SB-5 Rear suspensionRear suspension .................... RSU-5 Rear window ..................................................... GW-13 Rear window defogger ...................................... GW-42 Refrigerant connection precaution ........ ATC-6, MTC-6 Refrigerant discharging evacuating charging ATC-103, MTC-89 Refrigerant general precaution ............. ATC-5, MTC-5 Refrigerant lines ............................. ATC-103, MTC-89 Refrigerant pressure sensor . EC-605, EC-1327, ATC113, MTC-99 Remote keyless entry system ................. BL-16, BL-46 Removal and installation (A/T) ........................ AT-624 Reverse idler shaft (M/T) ...................... MT-21, MT-85 Reverse main gear (M/T) ...................... MT-21, MT-85 Revolution sensor (A/T) ...................... AT-117, AT-490 Road wheel size ................................................. GI-46 Rocker cover ...................................... EM-35, EM-150 Room lamp ......................................... LT-115, LT-133 Room lamp - See Interior lamp ......................... LT-115 ROOM/L - Wiring diagram .................. LT-120, LT-123 RP/SEN - Wiring diagram ................ EC-606, EC-1328 S SAE J1930 terminology list ................................. GI-52 SAE J1979 - Service $01 - 09 ............. EC-53, EC-668 IDX-7 H I J K L IDX ALPHABETICAL INDEX SEAT - Wiring diagram ...................................... SE-10 Seat belt inspection ................................ SB-6, MA-38 Seat belt, front ..................................................... SB-4 Seat belt, rear ...................................................... SB-5 Seat, front .......................................................... SE-15 Seat, rear ........................................................... SE-22 SEN/PW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-439, EC-1128 SHIFT - Wiring diagram ..................... AT-259, AT-615 Shift control components (M/T) ............. MT-23, MT-87 Shift control components (M/T)Shift control components (M/T) ..................................................... MT-14, MT-78 Shift fork (M/T) ...................................... MT-23, MT-87 Shift lock system ................................ AT-258, AT-614 Shift schedule .................................... AT-376, AT-444 Shift solenoid valve A (A/T) ............... AT-167, AT-530 Shift solenoid valve B (A/T) ............... AT-172, AT-535 Shift solenoid valve C (A/T) ............................. AT-540 Shift solenoid valve D (A/T) ............................. AT-550 Shift solenoid valve E (A/T) ............................. AT-555 Shock absorber (front) ..................................... FSU-10 Shock absorber (rear)Shock absorber (rear) .... RSU-8 Side air bag (satellite) sensor ......................... SRS-53 Side curtain air bag ......................................... SRS-50 Side trim .............................................................. EI-32 Spare tire size ..................................................... GI-46 Spark plug ....................................................... EM-145 Spark plug replacementQR25DE ......... MA-19, MA-26 Specification value ............................. EC-148, EC-772 Speedometer ........................................................ DI-4 Spiral cable ..................................................... SRS-45 Spot lamp .......................................................... LT-133 SROOF - Wiring diagram ................................... RF-12 SRS - See Supplemental Restraint System ..... SRS-5 SRS - Wiring diagram ..................................... SRS-13 SRS Trouble diagnoses .................................... SRS-9 Stabilizer bar (front) ......................................... FSU-11 Stall test (A/T) ...................................... AT-68, AT-435 Standardized relay ............................................. PG-70 START - Wiring diagram .................................... SC-10 Starting system .................................................... SC-9 Steering gear and linkage inspection ................ MA-35 Steering knuckle ................................................ FAX-6 Step lamp .......................................................... LT-115 Stop lamp switch .............................. EC-537, EC-1253 STOP/L - Wiring diagram .................................... LT-95 Strut (front) ......................................................... FSU-9 Sun roof, electric ................................................ RF-10 Sunload sensor ................................................ ATC-90 Sunroof .............................................................. RF-24 Supplemental Restraint System ....................... SRS-5 Symbols and abbreviations ........................ GI-8, GI-21 Symptom matrix chart ........................ EC-108, EC-725 Synchronizer (M/T) ............................... MT-21, MT-85 System readiness test (SRT) code ...... EC-58, EC-674 TAIL/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-103 TCM circuit diagram ............................. AT-19, AT-434 TCM inspection table ........................... AT-99, AT-453 TCS - Wiring diagram ..................................... BRC-56 TCS (traction control system) ......................... BRC-47 TCS actuator .................................... BRC-49, BRC-89 TCS component parts and connector location BRC-54 TCS control unit ............................... BRC-49, BRC-89 TCS self-diagnosis ........................... BRC-59, BRC-65 TCS system components ................................ BRC-48 TCS wheel sensors .......................... BRC-54, BRC-87 Thermostat ........................................................ CO-16 Three way catalyst .......................................... EM-134 Three way catalyst function ............................ EC-287 Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) .............. EC-959 Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) .............. EC-959 Three way catalyst precautions ................... GI-3, GI-5 Throttle control motor .................................... EC-1079 Throttle control motor relay ............. EC-394, EC-1074 Throttle position sensor (TPS) .. EC-204, EC-255, EC434, EC-436, EC-557, EC-831, EC-899, EC-1123, EC1125, EC-1272 Throttle position switch .................................... AT-252 Tightening torque of standard bolts .................... GI-44 Time lag test .................................................... AT-436 Timing chain ........................................ EM-48, EM-161 Tire rotation ....................................................... MA-34 Tire size .............................................................. GI-46 Torque converter installation AT-274, AT-369, AT-625 Torque convertor clutch solenoid valve ... AT-148, AT522 Tow truck towing ................................................. GI-43 Towing point ........................................................ GI-43 TPS1 - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-257, EC-901 TPS2 - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-206, EC-833 TPS3 - Wiring diagram .................... EC-559, EC-1274 Traction control system - See TCS ................. BRC-47 Traction control system - Wiring diagram ....... BRC-56 Transaxle case cover ....................................... AT-660 Transaxle serial number ..................................... GI-46 Transmission case (M/T) ...................... MT-20, MT-84 TRANSMT - Wiring diagram ............................ BL-126 Tread-FR&RR (Dimensions) ............................... GI-46 Trim ..................................................................... EI-32 Triple meter ......................................................... DI-19 Trouble diagnoses ................................................ GI-9 Trunk lid trim ....................................................... EI-37 Trunk room trim ................................................... EI-37 Turbine revolution sensor ................................ AT-486 TURN - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-76 Turn signal lamp ................................................ LT-72 Two trip detection logic ....................... EC-53, EC-668 Two-pole lift ......................................................... GI-40 V T Tachometer ........................................................... DI-4 Tail lamp ........................................................... LT-100 Vacuum hose (brake system)Vacuum hose (brake system) ................................................................... BR-17 Vacuum hose drawing (Engine control) .. EC-117, EC- IDX-8 ALPHABETICAL INDEX 736 Valve clearance .................................. EM-45, EM-191 Valve guide ........................................ EM-66, EM-215 Valve seat .......................................... EM-68, EM-217 Valve spring ....................................... EM-69, EM-218 Variable induction air control system (VIAS) .. EC-532, EC-583, EC-1248, EC-1300 Vehicle identification number ............................. GI-46 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .......... GI-43 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) ........... EC-359, EC-1031 VENT/V - Wiring diagram ... EC-314, EC-500, EC-986, EC-1216 VIAS - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-585, EC-1302 VIAS/V - Wiring diagram ................. EC-533, EC-1249 VIN registration ................................... EC-92, EC-711 Viscosity number (SAE) .................................... MA-14 W A B C D E F W/ANT - Wiring diagram ................................... AV-60 WARN - Wiring diagram ...................................... DI-34 Warning chime .................................................... DI-45 Warning lamps .................................................... DI-30 Water pump ....................................................... CO-37 Water temperature gauge ..................................... DI-4 Wheel alignment (rear)Wheel alignment (rear) . RSU-6 Wheel balance .................................................. MA-32 Wheel bearing (front axle) ................................. FAX-5 Wheel bearing (rear) ......................................... RAX-5 Wheel hub (front) .................................. FAX-5, FAX-6 Wheel hub (rear) ............................................... RAX-5 Wheel sensors (ABS) ......................... BRC-7, BRC-42 Wheel sensors (TCS) ....................... BRC-50, BRC-87 Wheel size .......................................................... GI-46 Wheelarch heightWheelarch height . FSU-19, RSU-13 Wheelbase (Dimensions) ................................... GI-46 Width (Dimensions) ............................................ GI-46 WINDOW - Wiring diagram .............................. GW-18 Window antenna ............................................... AV-59 Window, door ...................................... GW-34, GW-37 Window, rear .................................................... GW-13 Windshield ........................................................ GW-11 WIPER - Wiring diagram ................................... WW-8 Wiper and washer ............................................. WW-4 Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list .......................... PG-59 Wiring diagrams ........................................ GI-8, GI-14 IDX-9 G H I J K L IDX I BODY SECTION IP INSTRUMENT PANEL A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 7 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ......................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 11 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 15 CENTER CONSOLE ........................................... 15 F G H IP J K L M Revision: March 2005 IP-1 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS003N1 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: March 2005 IP-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EIS003N2 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D E F SBT839 — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit Repairing the cause of noise G H IP SBT840 Commercial Service Tools EIS003N3 (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise J K L M SIIA0995E Power Tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0191E Revision: March 2005 IP-3 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS003N4 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. – Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. – Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. – Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. – Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. – Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. – Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. – Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: March 2005 IP-4 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1. Close a door. 2. Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3. Rev the engine. 4. Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5. At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E F CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. G LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool H (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: IP ● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. ● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. J Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. ● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing K the noise. ● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. ● Looking for loose components and contact marks. L Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. ● Revision: March 2005 IP-5 2005 Altima M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0058V Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Revision: March 2005 IP-6 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. A TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING B C D E Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. F G OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of H these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. IP 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. J SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: March 2005 IP-7 2005 Altima K L M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic Worksheet EIS0058W LIWA0276E Revision: March 2005 IP-8 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H IP J K L M SBT844 Revision: March 2005 IP-9 2005 Altima INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:68200 EIS003N7 WIIA0696E Revision: March 2005 IP-10 2005 Altima INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY 1. Steering member assembly 2. Bolt cap 3. Instrument stay driver 4. Instrument stay LH 5. Lower knee protector LH 6. Cluster lid A 7. Instrument mask LH A 8. Instrument panel assembly 9. Side ventilator grille LH 10. Combination meter 11. Instrument lower cover LH 12. Fuse block cover 13. M/T finisher 14. Center console side finisher RH 15. A/T finisher 16. Center console mask 17. Console body front 18. Console body rear 19. Center ventilator grille LH 20. Cluster lid D (without NAVI) 21. Cluster lid D (with SE-R) 22. Storage bin 23. Center ventilator grille RH 24. Cluster lid D (with NAVI) 25. Audio/display assembly 26. Steering column cover lower 27. Steering column cover upper B 28. Key cylinder escutcheon 29. Front air control 30. Cluster lid C 31. Passenger front air bag bracket screw 32. Glove box assembly 33. Glove box striker 36. Instrument mask RH 34. Side ventilator grille RH 35. Passenger front air bag 37. Instrument stay RH 38. Instrument member bracket RH C D E REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Work Steps F When removing instrument panel and pad, combination meter, console assembly, or steering member take steps in the order shown by the numbers below. Parts Instrument panel and pad Combination meter Steering member Console assembly Negative battery cable 1 1 1 Cluster lid C 2 2 2 Fuse block cover 3 3 3 Instrument lower cover LH 4 4 4 Lower knee protector LH 5 5 Steering column covers 6 6 Cluster lid A 7 1 7 Combination meter 8 2 8 Front air control 9 9 Cluster lid D 10 10 A/T finisher or M/T finisher 11 11 6 Console body rear 12 12 7 Console body front 13 13 8 Glove box assembly 14 14 Audio/display assembly 15 15 Front passenger air bag bracket screw 16 16 Instrument mask RH 17 17 Instrument mask LH 18 18 Front pillar finishers LH/RH 19 19 Instrument panel assembly 20 20 Bolt cap 21 Steering member 22 IP-11 H IP J 5 K L M Number indicates step in removal procedures Revision: March 2005 G 2005 Altima INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Cluster Lid C Pull lid toward rear of vehicle to release clips. ● Disconnect electrical connectors if equipped. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LIIA1404E Cluster Lid D 1. 2. 3. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid C" . Remove front air control. ● Remove screws using power tool. Remove cluster lid D. LIIA1405E Pull lid toward rear of vehicle to release clips. ● Disconnect electrical connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Instrument Lower Cover LH 1. 2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid C" . Remove fuse box cover. LIIA0093E Revision: March 2005 IP-12 2005 Altima INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY 3. Remove screws using power tool, and instrument lower cover LH. ● Pull toward rear of vehicle to release clips. ● Disconnect electrical connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C LIIA0095E D Cluster Lid A Pull up to release clips and remove cluster lid A. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E F G LIIA1406E H Combination Meter 1. 2. Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid A" . Remove screws from combination meter using power tool. ● Disconnect electrical connectors. ● Remove combination meter. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. IP J K L LIIA1407E A/T Finisher M 1. 2. Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Pull up to release clips and remove A/T finisher. ● Disconnect electrical connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LIIA1409E Revision: March 2005 IP-13 2005 Altima INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY M/T Finisher 1. Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . 2. Pull up to release clips and remove M/T finisher. ● Disconnect electrical connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LIIA1410E Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box WIIA0273E 1. Glove box housing 4. Damper clip 7. Glove box striker 2. Glove box lamp 3. Glove box damper 5. Trunk cancel switch harness 6. Trunk cancel switch 8. Glove box pin 9. Glove box latch 10. Glove box door 1. 2. Remove screws from glove box striker and glove box using power tool. Remove screws and remove glove box housing and glove box door. ● Remove glove box lamp and harness from glove box housing. ● Disconnect harness and remove trunk cancel switch. 3. Remove damper clip from glove box door. 4. Remove glove box pins and remove glove box door from glove box housing. 5. Remove screws and remove glove box latch. 6. Remove screws and remove glove box damper. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 IP-14 2005 Altima INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly EIS003N8 A CENTER CONSOLE B C D E F G H IP J K L M LIIA1402E 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. A/T finisher 2. M/T finisher 3. Center console side finisher RH 4. Console mask 5. Console body front 6. Console body rear 7. Console bracket front 8. Console bracket rear 9. Rear console finisher 10. Power point assembly 11. Power point cover 12. Cup holder assembly 13. Cup holder insert 14. Bin mat 15. Console lid assembly 16. Storage tray Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Work Steps" . Remove rear console finisher. Remove cup holder insert. Remove cup holder assembly. Revision: March 2005 IP-15 2005 Altima INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY 5. Remove storage tray and bin mat. 6. Remove console lid assembly. 7. Remove console bracket rear. 8. Remove console bracket front. 9. Remove power point assembly. Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: March 2005 IP-16 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION LAN LAN SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS CAN PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ..................... 4 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ......... 4 Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 4 CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 4 Precautions For Harness Repair .............................. 5 CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 5 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW .................... 6 When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors ....................................................................... 6 WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ....................... 6 WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ........ 6 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART ............... 7 Diagnosis Procedure ................................................ 8 SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE) ............................. 8 ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II ............ 9 HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE .............. 10 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor ........................... 16 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ECM ............................... 16 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR TCM ............................... 17 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR BCM ............................... 18 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) ................... 18 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R ....................... 19 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT .................................................................... 20 Revision: March 2005 CAN COMMUNICATION ........................................... 21 System Description ................................................. 21 CAN Communication Unit ....................................... 21 TYPE1/TYPE2 ..................................................... 21 TYPE3/TYPE4 ..................................................... 23 TYPE5/TYPE6 ..................................................... 25 TYPE7/TYPE9 ..................................................... 27 TYPE8/TYPE10 ................................................... 29 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) ........................................... 32 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 32 Schematic ............................................................... 33 Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 34 CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 37 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 38 ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 43 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 43 BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 44 Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 44 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 45 CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 45 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) ........................................... 49 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 49 Schematic ............................................................... 50 Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 51 CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 54 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 56 ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 62 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ......................... 62 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 63 BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 63 Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 64 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 64 CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 65 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) ........................................... 68 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 68 Schematic ............................................................... 69 Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 70 CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 73 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 74 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and LAN-1 2005 Altima F G H I J LAN L M ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ......... 81 ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 82 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ......................... 82 BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 83 Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 83 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ..................................................................... 84 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 84 CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 85 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................... 88 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) ........................................... 89 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 89 Schematic ............................................................... 90 Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 91 CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 94 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 96 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 104 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 105 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 106 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 106 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 107 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 107 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 108 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 108 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 109 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 112 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) ......................................... 113 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 113 Schematic ............................................................. 114 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 115 CHECK SHEET .................................................... 118 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 119 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 126 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 127 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 127 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 128 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 128 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 129 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 129 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 130 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 133 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) ......................................... 134 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 134 Schematic ............................................................. 135 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 136 CHECK SHEET .................................................... 139 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 141 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 149 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 150 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 150 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 151 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 151 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 152 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 152 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 153 Revision: March 2005 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 154 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 157 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) .......................................... 158 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.158 Schematic ............................................................. 159 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 160 CHECK SHEET .................................................... 163 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 165 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 174 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 175 ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 176 TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 176 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 177 BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 177 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 178 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check .................................................................... 178 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 179 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 180 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 183 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) .......................................... 184 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.184 Schematic ............................................................. 185 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 186 CHECK SHEET .................................................... 189 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 191 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 200 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 201 ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 202 TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 202 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 203 BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 203 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 204 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check .................................................................... 204 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 205 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 206 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 209 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) .......................................... 210 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.210 Schematic ............................................................. 211 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 212 CHECK SHEET .................................................... 215 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 217 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 227 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 228 ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 229 TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 229 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 230 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 230 BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 231 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 231 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit LAN-2 2005 Altima Check ................................................................... 232 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 232 CAN Communication Circuit Check ..................... 233 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 236 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) ....................................... 237 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 237 Schematic ............................................................ 238 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ....................................... 239 CHECK SHEET .................................................... 242 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 244 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector ................................................................... 254 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ...... 255 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 256 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 256 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ....................... 257 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 257 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 258 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 258 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 259 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 259 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 260 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 263 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [CAN] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UKS001OF The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II UKS001R6 When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II 1. – – 2. – – 3. 4. 5. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? If YES, GO TO 2. If NO, GO TO 5. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? If YES, GO TO 3. If NO, GO TO 4. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis results. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis UKS001OG CAN SYSTEM ● ● ● Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement terminals. Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less. Be sure to turn ignition switch off and disconnect negative battery terminal before checking the circuit. Revision: March 2005 LAN-4 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [CAN] Precautions For Harness Repair UKS001OH A CAN SYSTEM ● Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in)] B C D PKIA0306E ● E Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.) F G H PKIA0307E I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-5 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors PFP:00004 UKS001YO WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ● ● ● CAN communication line is open. (CAN H, CAN L, or both) CAN communication line is shorted. (Ground, between CAN lines, or other harnesses) The areas related to CAN communication of unit is malfunctioning. WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ● ● ● Removal and installation of parts : When the units that perform CAN communication or the sensors related to CAN communication are removed and installed, malfunction may be detected (or DTC other than CAN communication may be detected). Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may be stopped at such time. Low voltage : If the voltage decreases because of battery discharge when IGN is ON, malfunction may be detected by self-diagnosis according to the units. Revision: March 2005 LAN-6 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART A B C D E F G H I J LAN L SKIB0596E ● ● ● ● ● Step 1 : Refer to LAN-8, "SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE)" . Step 2 : Refer to LAN-9, "ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II" . Step 3 : Refer to LAN-10, "HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE" . Step 4 : Refer to LAN-11, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced" . Step 5 : Check and repair according to system diagnosis. Revision: March 2005 LAN-7 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] Diagnosis Procedure UKS001YP SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE) Determine CAN system type from the equipment of the vehicle to select applicable check sheet. SKIB0597E Revision: March 2005 LAN-8 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II Attach the data acquired by CONSULT-II on the check sheet determined according to CAN system type.(For display control unit, transfer the data from the LCD monitor screen of the vehicle to the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" .) A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M SKIB0598E Revision: March 2005 LAN-9 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE SKIB0616E 1. 2. Unit names displayed on CONSULT-II “No indication” : Put a check mark to it if the unit name described in step 1 is not displayed on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen of CONSULT-II. (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II via CAN communication line) “–” : Column not used (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II excluding CAN communication line) 3. “NG” : Display “NG” when malfunction is detected in the initial diagnosis of the diagnosed unit. Replace the unit if “NG” is displayed. “–” : Column not used (Initial diagnosis is not performed.) 4. “UNKWN” : Display “UNKWN” when the diagnosed unit does not transmit the data normally. Put a check mark to it if “UNKWN” is displayed on CONSULT-II. 5. “UNKWN” : Display “UNKWN” when the diagnosed unit does not receive the data normally. Put a check mark to it if “UNKWN” is displayed on CONSULT-II. “–” : Column not used (It is not necessary for CAN communication trouble diagnosis.) NOTE: CAN communication diagnosis checks if CAN communication works normally. (Contents of data are not diagnosed.) ● Refer to LAN-11, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced" when the initial conditions are reproduced. ● Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" when the initial conditions are not reproduced. Revision: March 2005 LAN-10 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced A B C D E F G H SKIB0617E 1. 2. 3. I Put a check mark to “No indication” if some of unit names listed on the column of diagnosis system selection screen of a check sheet table are not displayed on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen attached to the check sheet. J NOTE: Put a check mark to “No indication” of IPDM E/R because IPDM E/R is not displayed on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. LAN Confirm the unit name that “UNKWN” is displayed from the copy of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen of “ENGINE” attached to the check sheet, and then put a check mark to the check sheet table. NOTE: L In “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen, “UNKWN” is displayed on “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “ICC”, “IPDM E/R” and “AWD/4WD/e4WD”. But put a check mark to “VDC/TCS/ABS” and “IPDM E/R” because “UNKWN” is listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table. M Confirm the unit name that “UNKWN” is displayed on the copy of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen of “TRANSMISSION” as well as “ENGINE”. And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table. NOTE: ● For “TRANSMISSION”, “UNKWN” is displayed on “VDC/TCS/ABS”. Put a check mark to it. Revision: March 2005 LAN-11 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] SKIB0618E 4. Display control unit reads the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B) AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" transferred from the LCD monitor screen(A). The transferred CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet is copied to the Check sheet, and conversed according to the Display control unit Translation Sheet. And then put a check mark to the check sheet table. NOTE: In the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B), check marks are put to “CAN CIRC 4”, “CAN CIRC 6”, “CAN CIRC 7”, “CAN CIRC 8” and “CAN CIRC 9”. But, in the column of the check sheet table indication in Display control unit Translation Sheet (C), “IPDM E/R” is listed only for “CAN CIRC 7”. Therefore, put a check mark to “IPDM E/R” because “UNKWN” is listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table. SKIB0619E 5. Confirm the unit name that “UNKWN” is displayed on the copy of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen of “BCM” and “ABS” as well as “ENGINE”. And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table. Revision: March 2005 LAN-12 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] NOTE: ● For “BCM”, “UNKWN” is displayed on “IPDM E/R”. Put a check mark to it. ● For “ABS”, “UNKWN” is displayed on “ECM” and “TCM”. Put a check mark to it. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M SKIB0620E NOTE: There is a check mark in VDC/TCS/ABS of “A/T” in “The arranged results of CAN diagnosis support monitor” sheet. Also, there is a mark of “–” both in VDC/TCS/ABS of “A/T” in the check sheet results (example). Therefore, neglect a check mark both in VDC/TCS/ABS of “A/T” in “The arranged results of CAN diagnosis support monitor” sheet. 6. Perform system diagnosis for possible causes identified. 7. Perform diagnosis again after inspection and repair. Make sure that repair is completely performed, and then end the procedure. Start CAN system trouble diagnosis if this procedure can be confirmed. LAN-21, "CAN Communication Unit" Revision: March 2005 LAN-13 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced SKIB0621E 1. See “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of all units attached to the check sheet. If “CAN COMM CIRCUIT”, “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” or “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]” is displayed, put a check mark to the applicable column of self-diagnostic results of the check sheet table. NOTE: ● For “ENGINE”, “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]” are displayed. Put a check mark to it. ● For “BCM”, “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. ● For “ABS”, “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. ● For “IPDM E/R”, “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” is displayed. Put a check mark to it. Revision: March 2005 LAN-14 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] A B C D E F G H I SKIB0622E J NOTE: There is a case that some of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” and “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” are not needed for diagnosis. In the case, “UNKWN” and “CAN COMM CIRCUIT(U1000)” in “Check sheet results (example)” LAN change to “–”. Then, ignore check marks on the Check sheet table. 2. For the selected possible causes, it is expected that malfunctions have been found in the past. L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-15 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor UKS001YQ DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ECM SKIB0591E “SELECT SYSTEM” screen ENGINE “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen Description Present INITIAL DIAG Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally. OK/NG TRANSMIT DIAG Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN TCM Make sure of normal reception from TCM. OK/UNKWN VDC/TCS/ABS Make sure of normal reception from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). OK/UNKWN METER/M&A Make sure of normal reception from combination meter. OK/UNKWN ICC ICC is not diagnosed. UNKWN BCM/SEC Make sure of normal reception from BCM. OK/UNKWN IPDM E/R Make sure of normal reception from IPDM E/R. OK/UNKWN AWD/4WD/e4WD AWD/4WD/e4WD is not diagnosed. UNKWN EPS EPS is not diagnosed. UNKWN Display Results (Present) ● OK : Normal ● NG : Malfunction ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. Revision: March 2005 LAN-16 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR TCM 4A/T models A B C SKIB0628E “SELECT SYSTEM” screen A/T “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen Description D Present E INITIAL DIAG Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally. OK/NG TRANSMIT DIAG Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN ECM Make sure of normal reception from ECM. OK/UNKWN VDC/TCS/ABS VDC/TCS/ABS is not diagnosed. UNKWN METER/M&A Make sure of normal reception from combination meter. OK/UNKWN ICC/e4WD ICC/e4WD is not diagnosed. UNKWN F G Display Results (Present) H ● OK : Normal ● NG : Malfunction ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. I 5A/T models J LAN L SKIB0592E “SELECT SYSTEM” screen TRANSMISSION “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen Description Present INITIAL DIAG Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally. OK/NG TRANSMIT DIAG Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN ECM Make sure of normal reception from ECM. OK/UNKWN VDC/TCS/ABS Make sure of normal reception from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). OK/UNKWN METER/M&A Make sure of normal reception from combination meter. OK/UNKWN Display Results (Present) ● OK : Normal ● NG : Malfunction ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. Revision: March 2005 LAN-17 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR BCM SKIB0593E “SELECT SYSTEM” screen BCM “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen Description Present INITIAL DIAG Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally. OK/NG TRANSMIT DIAG Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN ECM Make sure of normal reception from ECM. OK/UNKWN IPDM E/R Make sure of normal reception from IPDM E/R. OK/UNKWN METER/M&A Make sure of normal reception from combination meter. OK/UNKWN I-KEY I-KEY is not diagnosed. OK Display Results (Present) ● OK : Normal ● NG : Malfunction ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) ABS models PKIA8949E “SELECT SYSTEM” screen ABS “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen Description Present INITIAL DIAG Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally. OK/NG TRANSMIT DIAG Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN ECM Make sure of normal reception from ECM. OK/UNKWN Display Results (Present) ● OK : Normal ● NG : Malfunction ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. Revision: March 2005 LAN-18 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] TCS models A B C SKIB0594E “SELECT SYSTEM” screen ABS D “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen Description Present INITIAL DIAG Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally. OK/NG TRANSMIT DIAG Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN ECM Make sure of normal reception from ECM. OK/UNKWN TCM Make sure of normal reception from TCM. OK/UNKWN E F Display Results (Present) ● OK : Normal ● NG : Malfunction ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. G H DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R I J SKIB0595E “SELECT SYSTEM” screen IPDM E/R “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen Description Present TRANSMIT DIAG Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN/– ECM Make sure of normal reception from ECM. OK/UNKWN/– BCM/SEC Make sure of normal reception from BCM. OK/UNKWN/– Past L OK/0/1~39/– M Display Results (Present) ● OK : Normal ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. ● – : There is no received unit or the unit is not in the condition that reception diagnosis is performed Display Results (Past) ● OK : Normal ● 0 : There is malfunction now. ● 1 ~ 39 : Displays when it is normal at present and finds malfunction in the past. It increases like 0→1→2...38→39 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF→ON. If it is over 39, it is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnostic results are erased. It returns to 0 when malfunction is detected again in the process. ● – : Undiagnosed Revision: March 2005 LAN-19 LAN 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN] DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT SKIB0645E Unit name Display control unit Diagnosis item Description “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” screen CAN COMM Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally. OK/NG CAN CIRC 1 Make sure of normal transmission. OK/UNKWN CAN CIRC 2 Make sure of normal reception from BCM. OK/UNKWN CAN CIRC 3 Make sure of normal reception from ECM. OK/UNKWN CAN CIRC 4 CAN CIRC 4 is not diagnosed. UNKWN CAN CIRC 5 Make sure of normal reception from combination meter. OK/UNKWN CAN CIRC 6 CAN CIRC 6 is not diagnosed. UNKWN CAN CIRC 7 Make sure of normal reception from IPDM E/R. OK/UNKWN CAN CIRC 8 CAN CIRC 8 is not diagnosed. UNKWN CAN CIRC 9 CAN CIRC 9 is not diagnosed. UNKWN Error counter (Reference) 0/1~50 Display Results (Present) ● OK : Normal ● NG : Malfunction ● UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally. ● – : There is no received unit or the unit is not in the condition that reception diagnosis is performed. Display Results : Error Counter (Reference) ● 0 : It is normal now. ● 1 ~ 50 : Displays when it finds malfunction in the past even if it is normal or there is a malfunction at present. Also, displays when diagnosis is not performed. It increase like 0→1→2...49→50 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF→ON. If it is over 50, it is fixed to 50 until the self-diagnostic results are erased. Keep this condition until resetting it. Revision: March 2005 LAN-20 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 A UKS001OC CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Unit Body type D Sedan Axle 2WD QR25DE E VQ35DE Transmission Brake control C UKS001OE Go to CAN system, when selecting your CAN system type from the following table. Engine B QR25DE VQ35DE 4A/T 5A/T M/T No ABS ABS No ABS ABS × TCS × ABS × ABS TCS × ABS TCS × × CAN system type 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 9 10 CAN system trouble diagnosis LAN-37 LAN -49 LAN -32 LAN -54 LAN -73 LAN -94 LAN -118 LAN -134 LAN -113 LAN -139 LAN -163 LAN -189 LAN -215 LAN -242 Navigation system × No ABS F G H ×: Applicable Vehicles equipped with TCS can be identified by the presence of a TCS ON/OFF switch. I J LAN SKIB0626E L TYPE1/TYPE2 System diagram ● Type1 M SKIB0535E Revision: March 2005 LAN-21 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] ● Type2 SKIB0536E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Combination meter ECM Display control unit* Engine speed signal T R Engine coolant temperature signal T R T R Signals Fuel consumption monitor signal BCM IPDM E/R R R T A/C switch signal R T A/C compressor signal R T A/C compressor request signal T R Blower fan switch signal R Cooling fan motor operation signal R Cooling fan speed request signal T T T R Position lights request T Low beam request T Low beam status T T R R T R R T Front fog light request Vehicle speed signal R R R High beam request High beam status R R R T Oil pressure switch signal R T Sleep request1 T Sleep request2 T Seat belt buckle switch signal R T T R Turn indicator signal T R Buzzer output signal T R Trunk switch signal T R Wiper stop position signal R T Rear window defogger switch signal T R R T Door switch signal Rear window defogger control signal Revision: March 2005 R R R LAN-22 R R R 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM Display control unit* BCM Combination meter IPDM E/R Hood switch signal R T Theft warning horn status signal R T Distance to empty signal R T Fuel level low warning signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R Fuel level sensor signal R T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R A B C D E NOTE: *:Navigation system only F TYPE3/TYPE4 System diagram ● TYPE3 G H I J LAN SKIB0537E ● L TYPE4 M SKIB0538E Revision: March 2005 LAN-23 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Combination meter ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) R R ECM Display control unit* Engine speed signal T R Engine coolant temperature signal T R T R Signals Fuel consumption monitor signal BCM R IPDM E/R T A/C switch signal R T A/C compressor signal R T A/C compressor request signal T R Cooling fan motor operation signal R T Cooling fan speed request signal T R Position lights request T Low beam request T Low beam status R T T R R R T Front fog light request T R R Vehicle speed signal R R High beam request High beam status R R R R Oil pressure switch signal T T R T Sleep request1 T Sleep request2 T Seat belt buckle switch signal R T T R Turn indicator signal T R Buzzer output signal T R Trunk switch signal T R Wiper stop position signal R T Door switch signal R Rear window defogger switch signal R R R T R R T Hood switch signal R T Theft warning horn status signal R T Rear window defogger control signal R R Distance to empty signal R T Fuel level low warning signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R Blower fan switch signal R Fuel level sensor signal R T T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R NOTE: *:Navigation system only Revision: March 2005 LAN-24 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE5/TYPE6 System diagram ● A TYPE5 B C D E F SKIB0539E ● TYPE6 G H I J LAN L SKIB0540E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM TCM Display control unit* BCM R Combination meter Engine speed signal T Engine coolant temperature signal T R T R Fuel consumption monitor signal R R T A/T check indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator signal T R A/C switch signal R IPDM E/R T A/C compressor signal R T A/C compressor request signal T R Blower fan switch signal R Cooling fan motor operation signal R Revision: March 2005 T T LAN-25 2005 Altima M CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] BCM Combination meter IPDM E/R Position lights request T R R Low beam request T Signals Cooling fan speed request signal Low beam status ECM TCM Display control unit* T R R T High beam request High beam status T R R R T Front fog light request Vehicle speed signal R T R R R Oil pressure switch signal R T R T Sleep request1 T Sleep request2 T Seat belt buckle switch signal R T T R Turn indicator signal T R Buzzer output signal T R Trunk switch signal T R Wiper stop position signal R T Rear window defogger switch signal T R R T Hood switch signal R T Theft warning horn status signal R T Door switch signal Rear window defogger control signal R R R R R Distance to empty signal R T Fuel level low warning signal R T R Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R 3rd position switch signal R Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Stop lamp switch signal Engine and A/T integrated control signal R T R R T T T A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T Fuel level sensor signal R T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R NOTE: *:Navigation system only Revision: March 2005 LAN-26 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE7/TYPE9 System diagram ● A TYPE7 B C D E F SKIB0541E ● TYPE9 G H I J LAN L SKIB0542E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive ECM TCM Display control unit* Engine speed signal T R R Engine coolant temperature signal T R Signals BCM Combination meter R R R T A/T warning lamp signal T R A/T position indicator signal T R R A/C switch signal R A/C compressor signal R Revision: March 2005 IPDM E/R R T Fuel consumption monitor signal ABS operation signal ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) T T T LAN-27 2005 Altima M CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Display control unit* BCM Combination meter ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) IPDM E/R A/C compressor request signal T R Cooling fan motor operation signal R T Cooling fan speed request signal T R Position lights request T Low beam request T Low beam status R T T R R R T Front fog light request T R R Vehicle speed signal R R High beam request High beam status R R R R R Oil pressure switch signal T R Sleep request1 T Sleep request2 T Seat belt buckle switch signal T T R R R T T R Turn indicator signal T R Buzzer output signal T R Trunk switch signal T R Wiper stop position signal R T Rear window defogger switch signal T R R T Door switch signal Rear window defogger control signal R R R R Hood switch signal R T Theft warning horn status signal R T Distance to empty signal R T Fuel level low warning signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R ASCD operation signal T R ASCD OD cancel request signal T R T R Manual mode indicator signal Electric throttle control signal T Stop lamp switch signal R R T Blower fan switch signal R A/T self-diagnostic signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T Turbine revolution signal R T Fuel level sensor signal R T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R Revision: March 2005 T LAN-28 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] NOTE: *:Navigation system only A TYPE8/TYPE10 System diagram ● B TYPE8 C D E F G SKIB0541E ● TYPE10 H I J LAN L SKIB0542E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive ECM TCM Display control unit* Engine speed signal T R R Engine coolant temperature signal T R Accelerator pedal position signal T Signals Fuel consumption monitor signal BCM Combination meter ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) R R R R T R R T A/T warning lamp signal T R A/T position indicator signal T R Revision: March 2005 IPDM E/R LAN-29 R 2005 Altima M CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM ABS operation signal TCM Display control unit* BCM Combination meter R ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) IPDM E/R T A/C switch signal R T A/C compressor signal R T A/C compressor request signal T R Cooling fan motor operation signal R T Cooling fan speed request signal T R Position lights request T Low beam request Low beam status T R T T R R R T Front fog light request T R R Vehicle speed signal R R High beam request High beam status R R R R R Oil pressure switch signal T T R T Sleep request1 T Sleep request2 T Seat belt buckle switch signal R T T R Turn indicator signal T R Buzzer output signal T R Trunk switch signal T R Wiper stop position signal R T Rear window defogger switch signal T R R T Hood switch signal R T Theft warning horn status signal R T Door switch signal Rear window defogger control signal R R R R R Distance to empty signal R T Fuel level low warning signal R T Theft warning horn request signal Horn chirp signal ASCD operation signal T R ASCD OD cancel request signal T R Manual mode indicator signal Electric throttle control signal Stop lamp switch signal Blower fan switch signal T R T R T T R R R T R T A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T Turbine revolution signal R T Fuel level sensor signal R T ASCD SET lamp signal T R Revision: March 2005 R LAN-30 2005 Altima CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Display control unit* BCM Combination meter ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A IPDM E/R B C NOTE: *:Navigation system only D E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-31 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 UKS001YE BKIA0023E Revision: March 2005 LAN-32 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Schematic UKS001YF A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0118E Revision: March 2005 LAN-33 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001YG BKWA0119E Revision: March 2005 LAN-34 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0120E Revision: March 2005 LAN-35 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] BKWA0121E Revision: March 2005 LAN-36 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RW A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIA8886E Revision: March 2005 LAN-37 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-43, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIA8943E PKIA9032E Revision: March 2005 LAN-38 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 2 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-43, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8944E E F G H I PKIA9033E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-39 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 3 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-44, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIA8971E PKIA9034E Revision: March 2005 LAN-40 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 4 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-44, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8972E E F G H I PKIA9035E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-41 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 5 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-45, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . PKIA8973E PKIA9036E Case 6 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-45, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIA8974E Revision: March 2005 LAN-42 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS001YH 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, connector side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) F G : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector. H I SKIB0567E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001YI 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIA6868E Revision: March 2005 LAN-43 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] BCM Circuit Check UKS001YJ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001YK 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIB0569E Revision: March 2005 LAN-44 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001YL 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, connector side and harness side). – IPDM E/R connector – Harness connector E28 – Harness connector M7 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) F G : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector. H I SKIA6873E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001YM 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). L – ECM – BCM – Combination meter M – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-45 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. SKIA6865E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. SKIB0571E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 Revision: March 2005 LAN-46 SKIA6868E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT A Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground B : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 C D SKIA6874E E 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT F 1. 2. G Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Continuity should not exist. H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. I SKIA6873E J 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT LAN Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. M SKIA6879E Revision: March 2005 LAN-47 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – BCM – Combination meter – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. Revision: March 2005 LAN-48 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 A UKS001Y3 B C D E F BKIA0025E G H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-49 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Schematic UKS001Y4 BKWA0114E Revision: March 2005 LAN-50 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001Y5 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0115E Revision: March 2005 LAN-51 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] BKWA0116E Revision: March 2005 LAN-52 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0117E Revision: March 2005 LAN-53 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RV NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. PKIA8887E Revision: March 2005 LAN-54 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] A B C D E F G H PKIA8897E I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-55 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-62, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIA8901E PKIA9037E Revision: March 2005 LAN-56 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 2 A Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-62, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8902E E F G H I PKIA9038E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-57 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 3 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-63, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIA8903E PKIA9039E Revision: March 2005 LAN-58 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 4 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-63, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8904E E F G H I PKIA9040E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-59 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 5 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-64, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . PKIA8905E PKIA9041E Revision: March 2005 LAN-60 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 6 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-64, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8906E E F G H I PKIA9042E J Case 7 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-65, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . LAN L M PKIA8907E Revision: March 2005 LAN-61 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS001Y6 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, connector side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector. SKIB0567E Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001Y7 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and display control unit. SKIA6884E Revision: March 2005 LAN-62 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001Y8 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. F G SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check H UKS001Y9 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and J harness side). OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. SKIA6869E Revision: March 2005 LAN-63 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001YA 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIB0569E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001YB 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, connector side and harness side). – IPDM E/R connector – Harness connector E28 – Harness connector M7 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector. SKIA6873E Revision: March 2005 LAN-64 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001YC 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E F 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – 2. G Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) H : Continuity should not exist. I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. J LAN SKIA6865E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT L Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. SKIB0571E Revision: March 2005 LAN-65 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. Display control unit connector BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 SKIA6868E 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 SKIA6874E 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. SKIA6873E Revision: March 2005 LAN-66 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT A Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground B : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. C D SKIA6879E 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. E Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 F Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) G 108 - 132 H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E I 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. J 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . L UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION 10. Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. Revision: March 2005 LAN-67 2005 Altima M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 UKS001XR BKIA0024E Revision: March 2005 LAN-68 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Schematic UKS001XS A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0110E Revision: March 2005 LAN-69 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001XT BKWA0111E Revision: March 2005 LAN-70 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0112E Revision: March 2005 LAN-71 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] BKWA0113E Revision: March 2005 LAN-72 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RU A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIA8888E Revision: March 2005 LAN-73 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” , replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN-81, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" . PKIA8976E PKIA9043E Revision: March 2005 LAN-74 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 2 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-82, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8977E E F G H I PKIA9044E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-75 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 3 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-82, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIA8978E PKIA9045E Revision: March 2005 LAN-76 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 4 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-83, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8979E E F G H I PKIA9046E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-77 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 5 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-83, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . PKIA8980E PKIA9047E Revision: March 2005 LAN-78 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 6 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-84, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . A B C D PKIA8981E E F G H I J PKIA9048E LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-79 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 7 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-84, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . PKIA8982E PKIA9049E Case 8 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-85, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIA8983E Revision: March 2005 LAN-80 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 9 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-88, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D PKIA8984E E Case 10 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-88, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . F G H I PKIA8985E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) UKS001XU J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). L – Harness connector M7 – Harness connector E28 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector M7. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P). 6 (L) - 10 (L) 14 (P) - 9 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0565E Revision: March 2005 LAN-81 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P). 10 (L) - 30 (L) 9 (P) - 29 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0566E ECM Circuit Check UKS001XV 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, connector side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector. SKIB0567E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001XW 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-82 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. C D SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001XX 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) I J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. LAN L SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001XY 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-83 2005 Altima M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIB0569E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001XZ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P). 30 (L) - 29 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). SKIB0570E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001Y0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-84 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) B : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. C D SKIA6873E E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001Y1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – 2. H I J L M : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. SKIA6865E Revision: March 2005 G LAN Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) F LAN-85 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. SKIB0571E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 SKIA6868E 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 Revision: March 2005 LAN-86 SKIA6874E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) B : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R C D SKIA6873E E 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT F Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground G : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R H I SKIA6879E J 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 LAN L Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) M 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-87 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001Y2 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-88 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 A UKS001VN B C D E F BKIA0026E G H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-89 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Schematic UKS001VO BKWA0106E Revision: March 2005 LAN-90 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001VP A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0107E Revision: March 2005 LAN-91 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] BKWA0108E Revision: March 2005 LAN-92 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0109E Revision: March 2005 LAN-93 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RT NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. PKIA8889E Revision: March 2005 LAN-94 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] A B C D E F G H PKIA8898E I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-95 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN104, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" . PKIA8909E PKIA9050E Revision: March 2005 LAN-96 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 2 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-105, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8910E G H I J LAN PKIA9051E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-97 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 3 Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIA8911E PKIA9052E Revision: March 2005 LAN-98 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 4 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8912E G H I J LAN PKIA9053E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-99 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 5 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIA8913E PKIA9054E Revision: March 2005 LAN-100 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 6 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8914E G H I J LAN PKIA9055E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-101 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 7 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIA8915E PKIA9056E Revision: March 2005 LAN-102 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 8 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8916E G H I J LAN PKIA9057E L Case 9 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-109, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . M PKIA8917E Revision: March 2005 LAN-103 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 10 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-112, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA8918E Case 11 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-112, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA8919E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) UKS001VQ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M7 – Harness connector E28 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-104 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector M7. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P). 6 (L) - 10 (L) 14 (P) - 9 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D SKIB0565E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P). 10 (L) - 30 (L) 9 (P) - 29 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. I SKIB0566E ECM Circuit Check UKS001VR J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, connector side and harness side). L – ECM connector – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-105 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector. SKIB0567E Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001VS 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and display control unit. SKIA6884E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001VT 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-106 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. C D SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001VU 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) I J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. LAN L SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001VV 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-107 2005 Altima M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIB0569E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001VW 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P). 30 (L) - 29 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). SKIB0570E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001VX 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-108 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) B : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. C D SKIA6873E E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001VY 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) H I J LAN M : Continuity should not exist. SKIA6865E LAN-109 G L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. Revision: March 2005 F 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F59. SKIB0571E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. Display control unit connector BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 SKIA6868E 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 Revision: March 2005 LAN-110 SKIA6874E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) B : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R C D SKIA6873E E 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT F Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground G : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R H I SKIA6879E J 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 LAN L Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) M 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-111 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001VZ Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-112 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 A UKS001VB B C D E F BKIA0027E G H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-113 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Schematic UKS001VC BKWA0098E Revision: March 2005 LAN-114 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001VD A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0099E Revision: March 2005 LAN-115 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] BKWA0100E Revision: March 2005 LAN-116 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0101E Revision: March 2005 LAN-117 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RS NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. PKIA8890E Revision: March 2005 LAN-118 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-126, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . B C D E PKIA8986E F G H I J LAN PKIA9058E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-119 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 2 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-127, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIA8987E PKIA9059E Revision: March 2005 LAN-120 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 3 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-127, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8988E E F G H I PKIA9060E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-121 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 4 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-128, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIA8989E PKIA9061E Revision: March 2005 LAN-122 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 5 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-128, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8990E E F G H I PKIA9062E J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-123 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 6 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-129, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . PKIA8991E PKIA9063E Revision: March 2005 LAN-124 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 7 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-129, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D PKIA8992E E F G H I PKIA9064E J Case 8 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-130, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . LAN L M PKIA8993E Revision: March 2005 LAN-125 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 9 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-133, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA8994E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001VE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L), 6 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P). 5 (L) - 23 (L) 6 (P) - 22 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0623E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 23 (L) - 6 (L) 22 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0564E Revision: March 2005 LAN-126 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS001VF 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) C E : Approx. 108 - 132Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and ECM. G H SKIB0567E TCM Circuit Check UKS001VG 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (P). 5 (L) - 6 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace TCM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and TCM. SKIB0624E Revision: March 2005 LAN-127 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001VH 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001VI 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. SKIA6869E Revision: March 2005 LAN-128 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001VJ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. G H SKIB0569E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001VK 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). LAN – IPDM E/R connector – Harness connector E28 – Harness connector M7 L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector. SKIA6873E Revision: March 2005 LAN-129 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001VL 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – TCM – BCM – Combination meter – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector TCM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 SKIA6865E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 Revision: March 2005 LAN-130 SKIB0571E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. A Disconnect following connectors. BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B C : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 D E SKIA6868E G 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground F H : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 I J SKIA6874E LAN L 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. SKIA6873E Revision: March 2005 LAN-131 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. SKIA6879E 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – TCM – BCM – Combination meter – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. Revision: March 2005 LAN-132 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001VM Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-133 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 UKS001T6 BKIA0029E Revision: March 2005 LAN-134 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Schematic UKS001T7 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0094E Revision: March 2005 LAN-135 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001T8 BKWA0095E Revision: March 2005 LAN-136 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0096E Revision: March 2005 LAN-137 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] BKWA0097E Revision: March 2005 LAN-138 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RR A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIA8891E Revision: March 2005 LAN-139 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] PKIA8899E Revision: March 2005 LAN-140 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-149, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . B C D E F G PKIA8920E H I J LAN L M PKIA9065E Revision: March 2005 LAN-141 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 2 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-150, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIA8921E PKIA9066E Revision: March 2005 LAN-142 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 3 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-150, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8922E G H I J LAN PKIA9067E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-143 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 4 Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-151, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIA8923E PKIA9068E Revision: March 2005 LAN-144 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 5 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-151, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8924E G H I J LAN PKIA9069E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-145 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 6 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-152, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIA8925E PKIA9070E Revision: March 2005 LAN-146 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 7 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-152, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8926E G H I J LAN PKIA9071E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-147 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 8 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-153, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . PKIA8927E PKIA9072E Case 9 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-154, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIA8928E Revision: March 2005 LAN-148 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 10 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-157, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIA8929E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001T9 G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L), 6 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P). 5 (L) - 23 (L) 6 (P) - 22 (P) J LAN M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. SKIB0623E LAN-149 I L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. Revision: March 2005 H 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 23 (L) - 6 (L) 22 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0564E ECM Circuit Check UKS001TA 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and ECM. SKIB0567E TCM Circuit Check UKS001TB 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-150 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (P). 5 (L) - 6 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace TCM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and TCM. C D SKIB0624E E Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001TC 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and display control unit. LAN L SKIA6884E M Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001TD 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-151 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001TE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001TF 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-152 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. C D SKIB0569E E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001TG 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – IPDM E/R connector – Harness connector E28 – Harness connector M7 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. H I LAN : Approx. 108 - 132Ω L OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector. M SKIA6873E Revision: March 2005 G J Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) F LAN-153 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001TH 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – TCM – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector TCM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 SKIA6865E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 Revision: March 2005 LAN-154 SKIB0571E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – – 2. A Disconnect following connectors. Display control unit connector BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B C : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 D E F SKIA6868E G H 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground I : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 J LAN SKIA6874E M 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. SKIA6873E Revision: March 2005 LAN-155 L 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. SKIA6879E 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-156 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION A Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – TCM – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check B C D E F G UKS001TI Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-157 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 UKS001SS BKIA0028E Revision: March 2005 LAN-158 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Schematic UKS001ST A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0331E Revision: March 2005 LAN-159 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001SU BKWA0087E Revision: March 2005 LAN-160 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0088E Revision: March 2005 LAN-161 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] BKWA0089E Revision: March 2005 LAN-162 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RQ A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIA8892E Revision: March 2005 LAN-163 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] PKIA8900E Revision: March 2005 LAN-164 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-174, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . B C D E F G PKIA8995E H I J LAN L M PKIA9073E Revision: March 2005 LAN-165 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN175, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" . PKIA8996E PKIA9074E Revision: March 2005 LAN-166 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 3 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-176, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8997E G H I J LAN PKIA9075E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-167 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 4 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-176, "TCM Circuit Check" . PKIA8998E PKIA9076E Revision: March 2005 LAN-168 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 5 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-177, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8999E G H I J LAN PKIA9077E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-169 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 6 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-177, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIA9000E PKIA9078E Revision: March 2005 LAN-170 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 7 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-178, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9001E G H I J LAN PKIA9079E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-171 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 8 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-178, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIA9002E PKIA9080E Revision: March 2005 LAN-172 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 9 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-179, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9003E G H I J LAN PKIA9081E L Case 10 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-180, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . M PKIA9004E Revision: March 2005 LAN-173 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 11 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-183, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA9005E Case 12 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-183, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA9006E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001SV 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-174 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P). 3 (L) - 23 (L) 4 (P) - 22 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D SKIB0563E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 23 (L) - 6 (L) 22 (P) - 14 (P) F : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. H SKIB0564E I Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) UKS001SW 1. CHECK CONNECTOR J 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). L – Harness connector M7 – Harness connector E28 OK or NG M OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector M7. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P). 6 (L) - 10 (L) 14 (P) - 9 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0565E Revision: March 2005 LAN-175 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P). 10 (L) - 30 (L) 9 (P) - 29 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0566E ECM Circuit Check UKS001SX 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and ECM. SKIB0567E TCM Circuit Check UKS001SY 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-176 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P). 3 (L) - 4 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace TCM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and TCM. C D SKIB0568E E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001SZ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT F G H I Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. LAN L SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001T0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-177 2005 Altima M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001T1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIB0569E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001T2 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-178 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P). 30 (L) - 29 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). C D SKIB0570E E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001T3 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) F J : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. LAN L SKIA6873E M Revision: March 2005 LAN-179 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001T4 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – TCM – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector TCM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 SKIA6865E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 Revision: March 2005 LAN-180 SKIB0571E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. A Disconnect following connectors. BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B C : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 D E SKIA6868E G 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground F H : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 I J SKIA6874E LAN L 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R Revision: March 2005 LAN-181 SKIA6873E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R SKIA6879E 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-182 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION A Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – TCM – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check B C D E F G UKS001T5 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-183 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 UKS001SE BKIA0028E Revision: March 2005 LAN-184 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Schematic UKS001SF A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0331E Revision: March 2005 LAN-185 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001SG BKWA0192E Revision: March 2005 LAN-186 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0193E Revision: March 2005 LAN-187 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] BKWA0194E Revision: March 2005 LAN-188 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RP A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIA8893E Revision: March 2005 LAN-189 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] PKIA8900E Revision: March 2005 LAN-190 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-200, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . B C D E F G PKIA9007E H I J LAN L M PKIA9073E Revision: March 2005 LAN-191 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN201, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" . PKIA9008E PKIA9074E Revision: March 2005 LAN-192 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 3 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9009E G H I J LAN PKIA9075E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-193 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 4 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "TCM Circuit Check" . PKIA9010E PKIA9076E Revision: March 2005 LAN-194 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 5 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9011E G H I J LAN PKIA9077E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-195 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 6 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIA9012E PKIA9078E Revision: March 2005 LAN-196 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 7 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9013E G H I J LAN PKIA9079E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-197 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 8 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIA9014E PKIA9080E Revision: March 2005 LAN-198 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 9 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-205, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9015E G H I J LAN PKIA9081E L Case 10 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-206, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . M PKIA9016E Revision: March 2005 LAN-199 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 11 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-209, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA9017E Case 12 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-209, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA9018E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001SH 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-200 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P). 3 (L) - 23 (L) 4 (P) - 22 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D SKIB0563E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 23 (L) - 6 (L) 22 (P) - 14 (P) F : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. H SKIB0564E I Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) UKS001SI 1. CHECK CONNECTOR J 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). L – Harness connector M7 – Harness connector E28 OK or NG M OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector M7. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P). 6 (L) - 10 (L) 14 (P) - 9 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0565E Revision: March 2005 LAN-201 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P). 10 (L) - 30 (L) 9 (P) - 29 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0566E ECM Circuit Check UKS001SJ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and ECM. SKIB0567E TCM Circuit Check UKS001SK 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-202 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P). 3 (L) - 4 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace TCM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and TCM. C D SKIB0568E E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001SL 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT F G H I Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. LAN L SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001SM 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-203 2005 Altima M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001SN 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIB0569E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001SO 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-204 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P). 30 (L) - 29 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). C D SKIB0570E E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001SP 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) F J : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. LAN L SKIA6873E M Revision: March 2005 LAN-205 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001SQ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – TCM – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector TCM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 SKIA6865E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 Revision: March 2005 LAN-206 SKIB0571E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. A Disconnect following connectors. BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B C : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 D E SKIA6868E G 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground F H : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 I J SKIA6874E LAN L 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R Revision: March 2005 LAN-207 SKIA6873E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R SKIA6879E 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-208 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION A Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – TCM – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check B C D E F G UKS001SR Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-209 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 UKS001SD BKIA0030E Revision: March 2005 LAN-210 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Schematic UKS001RY A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0082E Revision: March 2005 LAN-211 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001RZ BKWA0083E Revision: March 2005 LAN-212 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0084E Revision: March 2005 LAN-213 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] BKWA0085E Revision: March 2005 LAN-214 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RO A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIA8894E Revision: March 2005 LAN-215 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] PKIA8900E Revision: March 2005 LAN-216 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) A NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-227, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . B C D E F G PKIA9019E H I J LAN L M PKIA9082E Revision: March 2005 LAN-217 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN228, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" . PKIA9020E PKIA9083E Revision: March 2005 LAN-218 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 3 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9021E G H I J LAN PKIA9084E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-219 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 4 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "TCM Circuit Check" . PKIA9022E PKIA9085E Revision: March 2005 LAN-220 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 5 A Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9023E G H I J LAN PKIA9086E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-221 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 6 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIA9024E PKIA9087E Revision: March 2005 LAN-222 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 7 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA9025E G H I J LAN PKIA9088E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-223 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 8 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . PKIA9026E PKIA9089E Revision: March 2005 LAN-224 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 9 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIA9027E G H I J LAN L PKIA9090E M Revision: March 2005 LAN-225 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 10 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . PKIA9028E PKIA9091E Case 11 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-233, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIA9029E Revision: March 2005 LAN-226 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 12 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-236, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIA9030E Case 13 G Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-236, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . H I J LAN L PKIA9031E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001S0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-227 2005 Altima M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P). 3 (L) - 23 (L) 4 (P) - 22 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0563E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 23 (L) - 6 (L) 22 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0564E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) UKS001S1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M7 – Harness connector E28 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector M7. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P). 6 (L) - 10 (L) 14 (P) - 9 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0565E Revision: March 2005 LAN-228 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P). 10 (L) - 30 (L) 9 (P) - 29 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. D SKIB0566E E ECM Circuit Check UKS001S2 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) F J : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and ECM. LAN L SKIB0567E M TCM Circuit Check UKS001S3 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-229 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P). 3 (L) - 4 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace TCM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and TCM. SKIB0568E Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001S4 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and display control unit. SKIA6884E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001S5 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-230 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. C D SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001S6 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) I J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. LAN L SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001S7 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-231 2005 Altima M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIB0569E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001S8 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P). 30 (L) - 29 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). SKIB0570E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001S9 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-232 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) B : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. C D SKIA6873E E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001SA 1. CHECK CONNECTOR F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, G control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – TCM H – Display control unit – BCM I – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R J – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. LAN NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. L Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector TCM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 Revision: March 2005 M LAN-233 SKIA6865E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 SKIB0571E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. Display control unit connector BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 Revision: March 2005 LAN-234 SKIA6868E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT A Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground B : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 C D SKIA6874E E F 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. G Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) H : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R I J SKIA6873E LAN 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT L Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R Revision: March 2005 LAN-235 M SKIA6879E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – TCM – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001SB Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-236 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:23710 A UKS001SC B C D E F BKIA0030E G H I J LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-237 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Schematic UKS001R8 BKWA0082E Revision: March 2005 LAN-238 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001R9 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0195E Revision: March 2005 LAN-239 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] BKWA0196E Revision: March 2005 LAN-240 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0197E Revision: March 2005 LAN-241 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] CHECK SHEET UKS001RA NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. PKIA8895E Revision: March 2005 LAN-242 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIA8900E Revision: March 2005 LAN-243 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-254, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . PKIA8930E PKIA9082E Revision: March 2005 LAN-244 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN255, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" . A B C D E F PKIA8931E G H I J LAN L PKIA9083E M Revision: March 2005 LAN-245 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 3 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-256, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIA8932E PKIA9084E Revision: March 2005 LAN-246 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 4 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-256, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8933E G H I J LAN PKIA9085E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-247 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 5 Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-257, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIA8934E PKIA9086E Revision: March 2005 LAN-248 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 6 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-257, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8935E G H I J LAN PKIA9087E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-249 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 7 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-258, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIA8936E PKIA9088E Revision: March 2005 LAN-250 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 8 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-258, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8937E G H I J LAN PKIA9089E L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-251 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 9 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-259, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIA8938E PKIA9090E Revision: March 2005 LAN-252 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 10 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-259, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIA8939E G H I J LAN PKIA9091E L Case 11 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-260, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . M PKIA8940E Revision: March 2005 LAN-253 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 12 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-263, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA8941E Case 13 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-263, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIA8942E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001RB 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F59 – Harness connector M71 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-254 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P). 3 (L) - 23 (L) 4 (P) - 22 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D SKIB0563E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L), 22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 23 (L) - 6 (L) 22 (P) - 14 (P) F : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. H SKIB0564E I Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) UKS001RC 1. CHECK CONNECTOR J 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). L – Harness connector M7 – Harness connector E28 OK or NG M OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector M7. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P). 6 (L) - 10 (L) 14 (P) - 9 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0565E Revision: March 2005 LAN-255 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P). 10 (L) - 30 (L) 9 (P) - 29 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness. SKIB0566E ECM Circuit Check UKS001RD 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and ECM. SKIB0567E TCM Circuit Check UKS001RE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-256 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P). 3 (L) - 4 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace TCM. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and TCM. C D SKIB0568E E Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001RI 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and display control unit. LAN L SKIA6884E M Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001RF 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-257 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. SKIA6868E BCM Circuit Check UKS001RH 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM. SKIA6869E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001RG 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-258 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P). 26 (L) - 27 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. C D SKIB0569E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check E UKS001RJ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P). 30 (L) - 29 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). LAN L SKIB0570E M IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001RK 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: March 2005 LAN-259 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R. SKIA6873E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001RL 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, control unit side, meter side, and harness side). – ECM – TCM – Display control unit – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R – Between ECM and IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – 2. Disconnect following connectors. ECM connector TCM connector Harness connector F59 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 Revision: March 2005 LAN-260 SKIA6865E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT A Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L), 86 (P) and ground. 94 (L) - Ground 86 (P) - Ground B : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59 ● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59 C D SKIB0571E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. – – – – 2. E Disconnect following connectors. Display control unit connector BCM connector Combination meter connector Harness connector M7 Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) F G H : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 I J SKIA6868E LAN L M Revision: March 2005 LAN-261 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M71 ● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit ● Harness between data link connector and BCM ● Harness between data link connector and combination meter ● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7 SKIA6874E 6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P). 48 (L) - 49 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R SKIA6873E 7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground. 48 (L) - Ground 49 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness. ● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R Revision: March 2005 LAN-262 SKIA6879E 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. A Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 48 - 49 B Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) C 108 - 132 D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R. LKIA0037E E 9. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet. 2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" . 10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION F G H Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I 2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the unit connector. J 4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal. 5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it with the symptom related to removed unit.) LAN 6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced. – TCM – Display control unit L – BCM – Combination meter – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) M – ECM – IPDM E/R Inspection results Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit. Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit. IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001RM Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: March 2005 LAN-263 2005 Altima CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Revision: March 2005 LAN-264 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION LT LIGHTING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 General precautions for service operations ............. 4 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ............................................ 6 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 6 System Description .................................................. 6 OUTLINE ............................................................... 6 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL .............................. 7 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................... 7 XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED) .................. 7 CAN Communication System Description ................ 8 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — ................................. 9 HALOGEN ............................................................. 9 XENON ................................................................11 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 13 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ..... 14 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 14 Preliminary Check .................................................. 14 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 14 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 16 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 16 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 17 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 17 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 18 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 18 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 19 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 19 Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ..... 20 Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....... 22 High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate ... 23 Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 23 Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ...... 25 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF ................................ 26 One Xenon Headlamp Does Not Illuminate At Full Brightness .............................................................. 27 One Xenon Headlamp Flickers .............................. 27 Revision: March 2005 Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 28 LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM ........................... 28 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 29 HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (XENON) ............................................................. 29 HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (HALOGEN) ........................................................ 29 HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM... 30 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP ............................ 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 30 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 31 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 31 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 32 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - .................................................................. 33 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 33 System Description ................................................. 33 HEADLAMP OPERATION ................................... 34 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ............................. 35 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................. 35 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION ........................... 35 XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED) ................. 35 OPERATION ........................................................ 35 CAN Communication System Description .............. 36 Schematic ............................................................... 37 Wiring Diagram — DTRL — ................................... 38 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 41 Preliminary Check .................................................. 41 CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 41 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 42 Removal and Installation of Daytime Light Control Unit ......................................................................... 43 AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM ............................................. 44 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 44 System Description ................................................. 44 OUTLINE ............................................................. 44 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ............................. 45 SHUT OFF DELAY .............................................. 45 CAN Communication System Description .............. 45 Major Components and Functions .......................... 45 LT-1 2005 Altima F G H I J LT L M Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L — ................................ 46 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 48 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 49 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 50 Preliminary Check .................................................. 50 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS ....................... 50 CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 50 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 50 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 52 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 52 WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 53 DATA MONITOR .................................................. 53 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 54 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) .......................... 55 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 55 DATA MONITOR .................................................. 56 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 56 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 57 Lighting Switch Inspection ...................................... 57 Auto Light Sensor System Inspection ..................... 58 FRONT FOG LAMP .................................................. 60 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 60 System Description ................................................. 60 OUTLINE ............................................................. 60 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ............................. 61 CAN Communication System Description .............. 61 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — .................................. 62 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 63 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 64 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 64 Preliminary Check .................................................. 65 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 65 CONSULT-II Function ............................................. 66 Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 66 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ... 67 Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 68 ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS ............................. 68 SE-R MODELS .................................................... 68 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 70 ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS ............................. 70 SE-R MODELS .................................................... 70 Removal and Installation ........................................ 70 ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS ............................. 70 SE-R MODELS .................................................... 71 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS... 72 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 72 System Description ................................................. 72 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION ............................... 72 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION ............................. 73 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION .................................................................... 74 CAN Communication System Description .............. 74 Schematic ............................................................... 75 Wiring Diagram — TURN — ................................... 76 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 79 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 80 Preliminary Check .................................................. 81 Revision: March 2005 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .....................................................................81 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................82 CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................82 DATA MONITOR .................................................83 ACTIVE TEST ......................................................83 Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ......................83 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamps Operate ............................................85 Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate .......86 Bulb Replacement ...................................................86 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP .............................86 REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP ...............................86 Removal and Installation .........................................86 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP .............................86 REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP ...............................86 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ................87 Removal and Installation .........................................87 Switch Circuit Inspection .........................................87 HAZARD SWITCH .....................................................88 Removal and Installation .........................................88 COMBINATION SWITCH ..........................................89 Wiring Diagram — COMBSW — ............................89 Combination Switch Reading Function ...................90 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................90 CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................90 DATA MONITOR ..................................................91 Combination Switch Inspection ...............................92 Removal and Installation .........................................94 Switch Circuit Inspection .........................................94 STOP LAMP ..............................................................95 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — ................................95 Bulb Replacement for High-mounted Stop Lamp ...97 WITH REAR AIR SPOILER .................................97 WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER ..........................97 Bulb Replacement for Rear Combination Lamp .....97 REMOVAL ............................................................97 INSTALLATION ....................................................97 Removal and Installation for High-mounted Stop Lamp .......................................................................97 WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-SE-R .......................97 WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-EXCEPT SE-R ........97 WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER ..........................97 Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp .......................................................................97 REMOVAL ............................................................97 INSTALLATION ....................................................97 BACK-UP LAMP .......................................................98 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — ................................98 Bulb Replacement ...................................................99 Removal and Installation .........................................99 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS .... 100 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.100 System Description ............................................... 100 OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH ............... 100 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ........................... 101 CAN Communication System Description ............ 101 Schematic ............................................................. 102 Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — ................................. 103 LT-2 2005 Altima Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ........... 106 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ... 107 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis .............. 107 Preliminary Check ................................................ 108 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................. 108 CONSULT-II Functions ......................................... 109 Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate .............................................................. 109 Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) ............................113 Bulb Replacement .................................................114 LICENSE PLATE LAMP .....................................114 FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP .......114 TAIL LAMP .........................................................114 Removal and Installation .......................................114 LICENSE PLATE LAMP .....................................114 FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP .......114 REAR COMBINATION LAMP ............................114 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP .........................................115 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..115 System Description ...............................................115 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND .....................115 SWITCH OPERATION .......................................116 ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION ...................117 INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL..118 Schematic .............................................................119 Wiring Diagram — INT/L — ................................. 120 Models With Vanity Lamps ................................... 123 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ........... 124 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis .............. 125 Preliminary Check ................................................ 125 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........................................... 125 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ............................... 126 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................. 126 WORK SUPPORT ............................................. 127 DATA MONITOR ............................................... 127 ACTIVE TEST ................................................... 128 Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate ... 129 Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not Operate ................................................................. 130 All Step Lamps Do Not Operate ........................... 132 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate ............. 133 Bulb Replacement ................................................ 133 ROOM OR SPOT LAMP ................................... 133 STEP LAMP ...................................................... 133 VANITY MIRROR LAMP ................................... 133 TRUNK ROOM LAMP ....................................... 133 Removal and Installation ...................................... 134 ROOM LAMP .................................................... 134 IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP .... 134 STEP LAMP ...................................................... 134 TRUNK ROOM LAMP ....................................... 134 ILLUMINATION ....................................................... 135 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 135 System Description ............................................... 135 ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH ............................................................ 136 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ........................... 137 CAN Communication System Description ............ 137 Schematic ............................................................. 138 Wiring Diagram — ILL — ...................................... 139 Removal and Installation ...................................... 143 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH ................ 143 GLOVE BOX LAMP ........................................... 143 BULB SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 144 Headlamp ............................................................. 144 Exterior Lamp ....................................................... 144 Interior Lamp/Illumination ..................................... 144 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS008LD The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. General precautions for service operations ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EKS008LE Never work with wet hands. The xenon headlamp system includes a high voltage generating part. Be sure to disconnect battery negative cable (negative terminal) or power fuse before removing, installing, or touching the xenon headlamp (including lamp bulb). Turn the lighting switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector. When turning the xenon headlamp on and while it is illuminated, never touch the harness, bulb, and socket of the headlamp. When checking the headlamp on/off operation, check it on vehiPKIA0183E cle and with the power connected to the vehicle-side connector. Do not touch the headlamp bulb glass surface with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it. Do not touch the headlamp bulb just after the headlamp is turned off, because it is very hot. Install the xenon headlamp bulb socket correctly. If it is installed improperly, high-voltage leak or corona discharge may occur that can melt the bulb, connector, and housing. Do not illuminate the xenon headlamp bulb out of the headlamp housing. Doing so can cause fire and harm your eyes. When the bulb has burned out, wrap it in a thick vinyl bag and discard. Do not break the bulb. Leaving the bulb removed from the headlamp housing for a long period of time can deteriorate the performance of the lens and reflector (dirt, clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it EL-3422D on hand when replacing the bulb. When adjusting the headlamp aiming, turn the aiming adjustment screw only in the tightening direction. (If it is necessary to loosen the screw, first fully loosen the screw, and then turn it in the tightening direction.) Do not use organic solvent (paint thinner or gasoline) to clean lamps and to remove old sealant. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EKS008LF When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" Revision: March 2005 LT-4 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" A B C D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-5 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26010 EKS008LG WKIA4084E System Description EKS008LH Control of the headlamp system operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 2ND position, the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the headlamps (and tail lamps) to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high and headlamp low relay coils. When energized, these relays direct power to the respective headlamps, which then illuminate. OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times ● to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 38. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied Revision: March 2005 LT-6 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ● ● to BCM terminal 67 through grounds F14, M57 and M61. A Low Beam Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power ● through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 20 ● to headlamp RH terminal 1, and ● through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 30 ● to headlamp LH terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to headlamp RH terminal 2 ● to headlamp LH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate. B C D E F High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation G With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator. H The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power ● through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 27 I ● to headlamp RH terminal 1, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 28 J ● to headlamp LH terminal 1. Ground is supplied LT ● to headlamp RH terminal 2 ● to headlamp LH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24. L With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate. BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON) and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps are turned off. AUTO LIGHT OPERATION Refer to LT-44, "System Description" for auto light operation. XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED) The low beam headlamps may be equipped with xenon type bulbs. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament. Instead, they produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a mixture of xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to added lighting power, electronic control of the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color. Following are some of the advantages of the xenon type headlamp. ● The light produced by the headlamps is a white color comparable to sunlight that is easy on the eyes. ● Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination. Revision: March 2005 LT-7 2005 Altima M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ● ● The light features a high relative spectral distribution at wavelengths to which the human eye is most sensitive. This means that even in the rain, more light is reflected back from the road surface toward the vehicle for added visibility. Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load. CAN Communication System Description EKS008LI Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 LT-8 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — EKS008LJ A HALOGEN B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1360E Revision: March 2005 LT-9 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) WKWA1361E Revision: March 2005 LT-10 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) XENON A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1301E Revision: March 2005 LT-11 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) WKWA1362E Revision: March 2005 LT-12 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS008LK A Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 L Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) B C Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 D SKIA5291E E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 F SKIA5292E G 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 H SKIA5291E 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 11 PU Ignition switch (ACC) I ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 J SKIA5292E ACC — LT Battery voltage L 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 M SKIA5291E 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 G/R Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: March 2005 LT-13 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 G/B Combination switch output 2 36 G/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 38 R Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS008LL Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 20 R/Y 27 L/W Signal name Ignition switch Headlamp low (RH) ON Headlamp high (RH) ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage 0V G Headlamp high (LH) ON Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 28 ON Battery voltage 0V L Headlamp low (LH) ON Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 30 ON Battery voltage 48 L CAN-H — — — 49 P CAN-L — — — How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008LM Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-6, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-14, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do the headlamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check EKS008LN CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit BCM Revision: March 2005 Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ACC or ON position 6 Ignition switch ON or START position 1 LT-14 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Unit Power source Fuse No. A 36 IPDM E/R 38 Battery 40 B 45 Refer to LT-9, "Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . C D 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. BCM Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) G Terminal (Wire color) OFF ACC ON 11 (PU) 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage M18 38 (R) M20 F Ground 70 (W/B) H I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. J LT WKIA2044E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and ground. M BCM Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. Revision: March 2005 LIIA0915E LT-15 L 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS008LO CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E LKIA0070E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 LT-16 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. A B C PKIA5226E D DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of light switch judged from lighting switch signal. PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Tail light relay output Revision: March 2005 G H Contents IGN ON SW Test item F I Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" 1. 2. 3. 4. E Display on CONSULT-II screen TAIL LAMP Description Allows tail light relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option. LT-17 2005 Altima J LT L M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Test item Display on CONSULT-II screen Headlamp relay output Front fog lamp relay output Description HEAD LAMP Allows headlamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option. FR FOG LAMP Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option. CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) EKS008LP CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 LT-18 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. A B C BCIA0031E D DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. F ALL SIGNALS All items will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitor the predetermined item. SELECTION FROM MENU Select any item for monitoring. 3. 4. 5. E G Touch "START". Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". H I All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu Monitor item selection CONSULT-II screen display Display or unit TAIL&CLR REQ Headlamp low beam request Headlamp high beam request Item name Parking, license plate and tail lamps request Front fog lamps request ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL LO REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL HI REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM FR FOG REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM LT NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. Touch "START". Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Test item Tail lamp relay output Revision: March 2005 J CONSULT-II screen display TAIL LAMP Description Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option LT-19 2005 Altima L M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Test item CONSULT-II screen display Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output LAMPS Front fog lamp relay (FOG) output Description Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Head lamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1 second). Allows fog lamp relay (FOG) to operate by switching operation ONOFF at your option Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) EKS008LQ 1. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch “HI” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure HI beam headlamps operate. HI beam headlamps should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. SKIA5774E 2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis. Displayed results of self-diagnosis NO MALFUNCTION DETECTED>> GO TO 3. CAN COMMUNICATION OR CAN SYSTEM>> Inspect the BCM CAN communications system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OPEN DETECT 1 - 5>> Inspect combination switch system. Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . LKIA0073E 3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select “BCM” on CONSULT-II. With “HEAD LAMP” data monitor, make sure “HI BEAM SW” turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in HIGH position : HI BEAM SW ON OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-87, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 LT-20 SKIA4193E 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect headlamp RH and LH (high) connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “IPDM E/R” on CONSULT-II, and select “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Select “LAMPS” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “HI” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When headlamp high beam is operating, check voltage between headlamp RH and LH (high) harness connector terminals and ground. B C D WKIA1252E E Headlamp (high) (+) Voltage (Approx.) (–) Terminal (Wire color) Connector RH E110 1 (L/W) LH E11 1 (G) F Ground Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. H 5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and headlamp RH and LH (high) harness connector terminals. A IPDM E/R connector E122 J B Terminal (wire color) Headlamp (high) connector Terminal (wire color) 27 (L/W) RH E110 1 (L/W) 28 (G) LH E11 1 (G) LT Continuity Yes WKIA4025E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. M 6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. Check continuity between headlamp RH (high) harness connector E110 terminal 2 (B) and ground. 2 (B) - Ground 2. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between headlamp LH (high) harness connector E11 terminal 2 (B) and ground. 2 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check headlamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 LT-21 L WKIA1050E 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) EKS008LR 1. BULB INSPECTION Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM" . 2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP 1. 2. 3. Disconnect inoperative headlamp (high) connector. Turn the high beam headlamps ON. Check voltage between inoperative headlamp (high) connector terminal and ground. Headlamp (high) (+) Connector (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage Terminal (Wire color) RH E110 1 (L/W) LH E11 1 (G) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. WKIA1252E 3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. Turn the high beam headlamps OFF. Check continuity between inoperative headlamp (high) connector terminal and ground. Headlamp (high) Connector RH E110 LH E11 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 2 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Check headlamp (high) connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground. Revision: March 2005 LT-22 WKIA1050E 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS 1. 2. A Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and headlamp connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and inoperative headlamp harness connector terminals. A IPDM E/R connector E122 B B Terminal (wire color) Headlamp (high) connector Terminal (wire color) 27 (L/W) RH E110 1 (L/W) 28 (G) LH E11 1 (G) Continuity C Yes D OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and WKIA4025E Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair as necessary. E High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate F EKS008LS 1. BULB INSPECTION G Inspect CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Repair as necessary. Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) H EKS008LT 1. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. I Select “IPDM E/R” on CONSULT-II, and select “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Select “LAMPS” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “LO” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure low beam headlamps operate. J LT Low beam headlamps should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. L SKIA5774E 2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM M Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis. Displayed results of self-diagnosis NO MALFUNCTION DETECTED>> GO TO 3. CAN COMMUNICATION OR CAN SYSTEM>> Inspect the BCM CAN communications system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OPEN DETECT 1 - 5>> Inspect combination switch system. Refer to LT-90, "Combination Switch Reading Function" . HEAD LAMP 1 SW or HEAD LAMP 2 SW>> Replace combination switch. Refer to LT-94, "Removal and Installation" . LKIA0073E Revision: March 2005 LT-23 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select “BCM” on CONSULT-II. With “HEAD LAMP” data monitor, make sure “HEAD LAMP SW 1” and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in 2ND position : HEAD LAMP SW 1 ON : HEAD LAMP SW 2 ON OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace combination switch. Refer to LT-94, "Removal and Installation" . SKIA4194E 4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect headlamp RH and LH (low) connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “IPDM E/R” on CONSULT-II, and select “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Select “LAMPS” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “LO” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When headlamp low beam is operating, check voltage between headlamp RH and LH (low) harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals (+) Headlamp (low) connector (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage Terminal (Wire color) RH E107 1 (R/Y) LH E13 1 (L) WKIA4027E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and headlamp RH and LH (low) harness connector terminals. A IPDM E/R connector E122 B Terminal (Wire color) Headlamp (low) connector Terminal (Wire color) 20 (R/Y) RH E107 1 (R/Y) 30 (L) LH E13 1 (L) Continuity Yes WKIA4029E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 LT-24 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between headlamp RH and LH (low) harness connector terminals and ground. B Terminals Headlamp (low) connector RH E107 LH E13 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 2 (B) Ground C Yes D OK or NG OK >> Check headlamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) WKIA4030E E EKS008LU 1. BULB INSPECTION Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-29, "HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (HALOGEN)" . F G H 2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP 1. 2. 3. I Disconnect inoperative headlamp (low) connector. Turn the low beam headlamps ON. Check voltage between inoperative headlamp (low) connector terminal and ground. J Terminals (+) Headlamp (low) connector RH LH E107 (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage LT Terminal L 1 (R/Y) E13 1 (L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 WKIA4027E LT-25 2005 Altima M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. Turn the low beam headlamps OFF. Check continuity between inoperative headlamp (low) connector terminal and ground. Terminals Headlamp (low) connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) RH E107 LH E13 2 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Check headlamp (low) and IPDM E/R connector. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground. WKIA4030E 4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and inoperative headlamp (low) harness connector terminal. A IPDM E/R connector E122 B Terminal (Wire color) Headlamp (low) connector Terminal (Wire color) 20 (R/Y) RH E107 1 (R/Y) 30 (L) LH E13 1 (L) Continuity Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and WKIA4029E Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair as necessary. Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF EKS008LV 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select “BCM" on CONSULT-II. With “HEAD LAMP” data monitor, make sure “HEAD LAMP SW 1” and “HEAD LAMP SW 2” turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in OFF position : HEAD LAMP SW 1 OFF : HEAD LAMP SW 2 OFF OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 2. SKIA5200E 2. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-90, "Combination Switch Reading Function" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-94, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 LT-26 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 3. CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN BCM AND IPDM E/R A Select “BCM” on CONSULT-II and perform self-diagnosis for BCM. Display of self-diagnosis results NO DTC>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . B C D SKIA1039E One Xenon Headlamp Does Not Illuminate At Full Brightness EKS008LW 1. COMPONENT INSPECTION Check the inoperative headlamp subharness for open or short circuits. OK or NG OK >> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-29, "Bulb Replacement" . Check operation of headlamp. If headlamp still does not illuminate at full brightness, replace ballast and check operation. Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" . If headlamp still does not illuminate at full brightness, replace ignitor. Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" . NG >> Replace headlamp subharness. E F G H One Xenon Headlamp Flickers EKS008LX 1. CHECK SYSTEM OPERATION I Turn the low beam headlamps ON and check operation. NOTE: Xenon headlamps may flicker momentarily when the headlamps are turned ON. This is normal and does not indicate a fault. Diagnosis of flickering headlamps should only be performed if the headlamps continue to J flicker for more than 3 seconds after turning headlamps ON. OK or NG LT OK >> System is operating correctly. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. COMPONENT INSPECTION L Check the inoperative headlamp subharness for open or short circuits. OK or NG OK >> Replace ballast. Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" . Check operation of headlamp. If headlamp still flickers, replace igniter and check operation. If headlamp still flickers, replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-29, "Bulb Replacement" . NG >> Replace headlamp subharness. Revision: March 2005 LT-27 2005 Altima M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Aiming Adjustment EKS008LY LKIA0054E For details, refer to the regulations in your state. Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following. 1. Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure. 2. Place vehicle on flat surface. 3. Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position). Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level and fuel tank full. LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM 1. 2. Turn headlamp low beam on. Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment. Revision: March 2005 LT-28 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ● First loosen the adjusting screw all the way and then make adjustment by tightening the screw. A B C D E F G H LKIA0068E If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming. Use the aiming chart shown in the figure. ● Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart. Adjust headlamps accordingly. Bulb Replacement EKS008LZ HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (XENON) 1. Remove headlamp assembly. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Turn the plastic cap counterclockwise to unlock it from the headlamp. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 4. Unlock the retaining spring and remove the bulb from the headlamp. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Confirm headlamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-28, "Aiming Adjustment" . CAUTION: After installing a headlamp bulb, be sure to install the plastic cap securely to ensure watertightness. HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (HALOGEN) 1. For LH side, remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). For RH side, remove washer tank inlet and position coolant reservoir aside. 2. Turn the plastic cap counterclockwise to unlock it from the headlamp. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Unlock the retaining spring and remove the bulb from the headlamp. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installing a headlamp bulb, be sure to install the plastic cap securely to ensure watertightness. Revision: March 2005 LT-29 2005 Altima I J LT L M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM 1. For LH side, remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP 1. For LH side, remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 3. Pull the bulb to remove it. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installing a headlamp bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness. Removal and Installation EKS008M0 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the front fascia. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER" . Ensure lighting switch is OFF. Disconnect the negative battery cable (xenon only). Remove the headlamp mounting bolts. Pull the headlamp toward the front of the vehicle, disconnect connectors and remove from vehicle. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Headlamp mounting bolts: : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb) Confirm headlamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-28, "Aiming Adjustment" . LKIA0053E Revision: March 2005 LT-30 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Disassembly and Assembly EKS008M1 A DISASSEMBLY Xenon B C D E F G WKIA1980E 1. Ignitor 2. Halogen bulb (high beam) 3. Headlamp assembly 4. Ballast 5. Xenon bulb (low beam) 6. Plastic cap 7. Turn/park bulb socket 8. Turn/park bulb H I Halogen J LT L M WKIA1981E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. Turn/park bulb 2. Halogen bulb (high beam) 4. Halogen bulb (low beam) 5. Turn/park bulb socket 3. Headlamp assembly Turn the low beam plastic cap counterclockwise to unlock and remove it. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove it (xenon). Disconnect the electrical connectors from the bulb terminals (halogen). Unlock the retaining springs and remove the low beam bulb. Release the ignitor and remove from the plastic cap (xenon). Turn the high beam lamp socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove it. Revision: March 2005 LT-31 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 7. 8. Turn the front turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. Remove the front turn signal lamp bulb from its socket. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION: ● After installing the xenon bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket and plastic cap securely to ensure watertightness. Revision: March 2005 LT-32 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26010 A EKS008M2 B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKIA4085E System Description EKS008M3 The headlamp system for Canada vehicles is equipped with a daytime light control unit that activates the high beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake is applied. Battery saver system is controlled by the BCM (body control module). Power is supplied at all times ● to headlamp high relay located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. Revision: March 2005 LT-33 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to daytime light control unit terminal 3, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 38. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 11. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 9, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to daytime light control unit terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● to daytime light control unit terminals 13, 14 and 16 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. HEADLAMP OPERATION Low Beam Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power ● through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 20 ● to RH headlamp terminal 1, and ● through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 30 ● to LH headlamp terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to RH headlamp terminal 2 ● to LH headlamp terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate. High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power ● through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 27 ● to daytime light control unit terminal 4 ● through daytime light control unit terminal 7 ● to RH headlamp terminal 1, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 28 ● to daytime light control unit terminal 5 ● through daytime light control unit terminal 6 ● to LH headlamp terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to RH headlamp terminal 2 Revision: March 2005 LT-34 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM to daytime light control unit terminal 9 ● through daytime light control unit terminal 14 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to LH headlamp terminal 2 ● to daytime light control unit terminal 10 ● through daytime light control unit terminal 13 ● through grounds E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate. ● A B C BATTERY SAVER CONTROL With the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON) and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps are turned off. D E AUTO LIGHT OPERATION F For auto light operation, refer to LT-44, "System Description" . DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is G supplied ● through daytime light control unit terminal 7 ● to RH headlamp terminal 1 H ● through RH headlamp terminal 2 ● to daytime light control unit terminal 9, and ● through daytime light control unit terminal 6 I ● to LH headlamp terminal 1 ● through LH headlamp terminal 2 J ● to daytime light control unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied ● to daytime light control unit terminals 13, 14 and 16 LT ● through grounds E15 and E24. Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination. XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED) L The low beam headlamps may be equipped with xenon type bulbs. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament. Instead, they produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a mixture of xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to added lighting power, electronic control of the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color. Following are some of the advantages of the xenon type headlamp. ● The light produced by the headlamps is a white color comparable to sunlight that is easy on the eyes. ● Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination. ● The light features a high relative spectral distribution at wavelengths to which the human eye is most sensitive. This means that even in the rain, more light is reflected back from the road surface toward the vehicle for added visibility. ● Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load. OPERATION After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the "OFF" or 1ST position, the headlamp high beam automatically turns on. Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as conventional light systems. Revision: March 2005 LT-35 2005 Altima M HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Engine With engine stopped OFF Lighting switch With engine running 1ST 2ND OFF 1ST 2ND Hi Lo P Hi Lo P Hi Lo P Hi Lo P Hi Lo P Hi Lo P High beam – – – – – × × – × ●* ●* × ●* ●* × × – × Low beam – – – – – × × × × – – × – – × × × × Tail lamp – – – × × × × × × – – – × × × × × × License and instrument illumination lamp – – – × × × × × × – – – × × × × × × Headlamp ● Hi: "HIGH BEAM" position ● Lo: "LOW BEAM" position ● P: "FLASH TO PASS" position ● ×: Lamp "ON" ● –: Lamp "OFF" ● ●: Lamp dims. (Added functions) ● *: When starting the engine with the parking brake released, the daytime lights will operate. When starting the engine with the parking brake pulled, the daytime lights will not operate. CAN Communication System Description EKS008M4 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 LT-36 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Schematic EKS008M5 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1364E Revision: March 2005 LT-37 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — DTRL — EKS008M6 WKWA1365E Revision: March 2005 LT-38 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2971E Revision: March 2005 LT-39 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - WKWA1367E Revision: March 2005 LT-40 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008M7 A Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-33, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-41, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the daytime light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check B C EKS008M8 CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION D 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION Confirm BCM configuration for "DTRL" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-14, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO Trouble Diagnosis. Refer to LT-42, "Trouble Diagnosis" . NG >> Change BCM configuration for "DTRL" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . E F G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-41 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis EKS008M9 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT Terminal No. Wire color Item 1 BR/Y Generator Condition When turning ignition switch to "ON" When engine is running When turning ignition switch to "START" 3 BR G Start signal Power source 5 6 L/W G L LH HI fuse RH HI fuse LH HI beam When turning ignition switch to "OFF" Less than 1V When turning ignition switch to "ON" Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to "START" Battery voltage RH HI beam Battery voltage When lighting switch is turned to "FLASH TO PASS" position with ignition switch "ON" position Battery voltage When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position Battery voltage When lighting switch is turned to "FLASH TO PASS" position with ignition switch "ON" position Battery voltage When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position Battery voltage When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation) When turning lighting switch to the 2ND position with "HI BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position G RH HI beam (ground) When turning lighting switch to the 2ND position with "HI BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position Y/G LH HI beam (ground) Battery voltage Battery voltage Less than 1V When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation) CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position. 10 Half battery voltage When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation) CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position. 9 Less than 1V When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position Y Battery voltage Less than 1V CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position. 7 Less than 1V When turning ignition switch to "ON" from "START" When turning ignition switch to "OFF" 4 Less than 1V Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to "OFF" 2 Voltage (Approx.) Half battery voltage Less than 1V When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation) CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position. 13 B Ground (LH HI) 14 B Ground (RH HI) — — 16 B Ground — — Revision: March 2005 — Less than 1V LT-42 — 2005 Altima HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Terminal No. Wire color Item 17 G Parking brake switch Condition When parking brake is released When parking brake is set Removal and Installation of Daytime Light Control Unit Voltage (Approx.) A Battery voltage Less than 1V B EKS008MA 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . 3. Remove screw. 4. Disconnect harness connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. C D E F WKIA2558E G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-43 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28491 EKS008MB WKIA4086E System Description EKS008MC This system automatically turns the parking lamps and the headlamps on and off in accordance with ambient light. Timing for when the lamps turn on/off can be selected using four modes. OUTLINE The auto light control system uses an optical sensor that detects the brightness of outside light. When the lighting switch is in AUTO position, it automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps (and fog lamps, if equipped) in accordance with the ambient light. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four steps. For the details of the setting, refer to LT-50, "SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS" . When the lighting switch is in "AUTO" position, power is supplied ● through BCM (body control module) terminal 17 ● to auto light sensor terminal 1. When lighting switch is in "AUTO" position, ground is supplied ● to auto light sensor terminal 3 ● through BCM terminal 18. When ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START" position and when outside brightness is darker than prescribed level, input is supplied ● through auto light sensor terminal 2 ● to BCM terminal 14. The headlamps will then illuminate. For a description of headlamp operation, refer to LT-6, "System Description" . Revision: March 2005 LT-44 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the AUTO position, and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, and one of the doors is opened, the battery saver feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps are turned off. A B SHUT OFF DELAY When the ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF while the auto light system is activated and the headlamps are illuminated, the shut off delay feature is activated. Under this condition, the BCM no longer receives a voltage signal at terminal 38 and this starts the auto light shut off delay timer. The shut off delay timer is active until one of the doors is opened or the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If one of the doors is opened, the shut off delay feature is deactivated and the battery saver control feature is activated. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, the headlamps are turned off. C CAN Communication System Description E EKS008MD D Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Major Components and Functions EKS008ME Components F Functions ● BCM Turns on/off circuits of tail light and headlamp according to signals from light sensor, lighting switch (AUTO), front door switch LH, ignition switch (ON, OFF), and vehicle signal from combination meter. Auto light sensor ● Converts ambient light (lux) to voltage and sends it to BCM. (Detects light from 50 to 1,300 lux) Combination meter ● Sends vehicle signal to BCM via CAN communication line. G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-45 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L — EKS008MF WKWA1303E Revision: March 2005 LT-46 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1368E Revision: March 2005 LT-47 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS008MG Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 L Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 11 PU Ignition switch (ACC) ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E ACC — 12 P/L Front door switch RH signal OFF Front door switch RH 13 R/W Rear door switch RH signal OFF Rear door switch RH 14 W/R Auto light sensor signal ON Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage When auto light sensor is illuminated 3.1 V or moreNote When auto light sensor is not illuminated 0.6 V or less 17 R Auto light sensor power supply ON — 5V 18 P Sensor ground ON — 0V 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: March 2005 LT-48 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Terminal No. Measuring condition Wire color Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) A B 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON C SKIA5292E D 34 G/R Combination switch output 3 Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON E SKIA5291E 35 G/B G/W G Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON 36 Combination switch output 1 SKIA5292E 38 R Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 47 SB Front door switch LH signal OFF Front door switch LH 48 R/B Rear door switch LH signal OFF Rear door switch LH 67 B 70 W/B F Combination switch output 2 I ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage J LT Ground ON — 0V Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage L NOTE: Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If the optical sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy standard. Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS008MH Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 0V R/Y Headlamp low (RH) ON Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 20 ON Battery voltage 0V L/W Headlamp high (RH) ON Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 27 ON Battery voltage 0V G Headlamp high (LH) ON Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 28 ON Battery voltage Revision: March 2005 Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition LT-49 H Reference value (Approx.) 2005 Altima M AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Measuring condition Reference value (Approx.) Terminal No. Wire color 30 L Headlamp low (LH) ON 48 L CAN-H — — — 49 P CAN-L — — — Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008MI Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-44, "System Description" . Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-50, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to LT-57, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . Does the auto light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check EKS008MJ SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS ● Sensitivity of auto light system can be adjusted using CONSULT-II. Refer to LT-53, "WORK SUPPORT" . CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION Confirm BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-14, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-50, "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . NG >> Change BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit BCM Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ACC or ON position 6 Ignition switch ON or START position 1 36 38 IPDM E/R Battery 40 45 Refer to LT-46, "Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: March 2005 LT-50 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. BCM Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) C Terminal (Wire color) OFF ACC ON 11 (PU) 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage M18 38 (R) M20 B Ground 70 (W/B) D E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link. G WKIA2044E H 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and ground. I BCM Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) J Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. LT LIIA0915E L M Revision: March 2005 LT-51 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS008MK CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E LKIA0070E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 LT-52 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. A B C PKIA5226E D WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. E Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item setting to be changed on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch the item setting desired. Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". F G H Work Support Setting Item Work Support item Description Mode On BATTERY SAVER SET Function is not enabled, battery saver operation cannot be changed. CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING ILL DELAY SET Sensitivity of auto light can be selected and set from four modes. The timer that turns off the headlamps (and fog lamps, if turned on) after the last door is closed can be selected and set from 8 modes. Off Setting status I Function is not enabled, battery saver operation cannot be changed. J Mode1 Factory setting Mode 2 More sensitive setting compared to factory setting (The time required for lamp light-up is shorter than "Normal"). Mode 3 Less sensitive setting compared to factory setting (The time required for lamp light-up is longer than "Normal"). Mode 4 Less sensitive setting compared to Mode 3 (The time required for lamp light-up is longer than Mode 3). Mode 1 45 seconds (Factory setting) Mode 2 0 seconds (immediate shutoff) Mode 3 30 seconds Mode 4 60 seconds Mode 5 90 seconds Mode 6 120 seconds Mode 7 150 seconds Mode 8 180 seconds Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal. Revision: March 2005 LT-53 L M DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. LT 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW “ON/OFF” Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of light switch judged from lighting switch signal. AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF) PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays status of the passenger door as judged from the passenger door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF” Displays status of the rear door RH as judged from the rear door switch RH signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RL “ON/OFF" Displays status of the rear door LH as judged from the rear door switch LH signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) OPTICAL SENSOR [0 - 5V] Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when light/close to 0V when dark)" judged from auto light sensor signal. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Headlamp relay output Revision: March 2005 Display on CONSULT-II screen HEAD LAMP Description Allows headlamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option. LT-54 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) EKS008ML A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. B Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. C CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. D E F G BBIA0002E 2. H Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". I J LT BCIA0029E L 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . M BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 LT-55 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. BCIA0031E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS All items will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitor the predetermined item. SELECTION FROM MENU Select any item for monitoring. 3. 4. 5. Touch "START". Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu Monitor item selection CONSULT-II screen display Display or unit TAIL&CLR REQ Headlamp low beam request Headlamp high beam request Item name Parking, license plate and tail lamps request ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL LO REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL HI REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. Touch "START". Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Test item Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output Front fog lamp relay output Revision: March 2005 CONSULT-II screen display LAMPS Description Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Headlamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1 second). Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. LT-56 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom EKS008MM A Trouble phenomenon ● ● ● Malfunction system and reference Parking lamps and headlamps will not illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) Parking lamps and headlamp will not go out when outside of the vehicle becomes light. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) Headlamps go out when outside of the vehicle becomes light, but parking lamps stay on. Parking lamps illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark, but headlamps stay off. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) Auto light adjustment system will not operate. (Lighting switch AUTO, 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) Auto light adjustment system will not operate. Shut off delay feature will not operate. ● Refer to LT-53, "WORK SUPPORT" . ● Refer to LT-57, "Lighting Switch Inspection" . ● Refer to LT-58, "Auto Light Sensor System Inspection" . B C If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . D ● Refer to LT-53, "WORK SUPPORT" . ● Refer to LT-58, "Auto Light Sensor System Inspection" . If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . ● E Refer to LT-58, "Auto Light Sensor System Inspection" . If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . F ● CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . ● CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . ● Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch Check" . If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Lighting Switch Inspection I With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "AUTO LIGHT SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. J : AUTO LIGHT SW ON Without CONSULT-II Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . Revision: March 2005 H EKS008MN 1. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL When lighting switch is in AUTO position G LT-57 LT L SKIA4196E 2005 Altima M AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Auto Light Sensor System Inspection EKS008MO 1. OUTPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" in CONSULT-II. Using "OPTICAL SENSOR" data from "DATA MONITOR", check difference in the voltage when the auto light sensor is illuminated and not illuminated. Light sensor illuminated Light sensor not illuminated : 3.1V or more : 0.6V or less NOTE: If the auto light sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy the standard. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 2. WKIA0486E 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect BCM and auto light sensor connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 17 (R) and auto light sensor harness connector M15 terminal 1 (R). 17 (R) - 1 (R) 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 17 (R) and ground. 17 (R) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA2049E 3. OUTPUT CIRCUIT CONTINUITY INSPECTION 1. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 14 (W/R) and auto light sensor harness connector M15 terminal 2 (W/R). 14 (W/R) - 2 (W/R) 2. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 14 (W/R) and ground. 14 (W/R) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 WKIA2050E LT-58 2005 Altima AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM 4. GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY INSPECTION 1. 18 (P) - 3 (P) 2. A Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 18 (P) and auto light sensor harness connector M15 terminal 3 (P). B : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 18 (P) and ground. 18 (P) - Ground C : Continuity should not exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA2051E E 5. SENSOR VOLTAGE INSPECTION 1. 2. Connect BCM connector. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 17 (R) and ground. 17 (R) - Ground F : Should be approx. 5V. G OK or NG OK >> Replace the auto light sensor. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . H I SKIA5894E J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-59 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP FRONT FOG LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26150 EKS00A85 WKIA4087E System Description EKS008MP Control of the fog lamps is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). The lighting switch must be in the AUTO position (with auto light system) or headlamps position (LOW beam is ON) for front fog lamp operation. When the lighting switch is placed in the fog lamp position, the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the fog lamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the front fog lamp relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power to the front fog lamps. OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times ● through 15A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to front fog lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 38. When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. Revision: March 2005 LT-60 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP FOG LAMP OPERATION The fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch can only be in AUTO position (with auto light system) or headlamps position (low beam is ON) and the fog lamp switch must be ON for fog lamp operation. With the fog lamp switch in the ON position, the CPU of the IPDM E/R grounds the coil side of the fog lamp relay. The fog lamp relay then directs power ● through IPDM E/R terminal 37 ● to front fog lamp LH terminal 1, and ● through IPDM E/R terminal 36 ● to front fog lamp RH terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to front fog lamp LH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to front fog lamp RH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24. With power and grounds supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate. A B C D E F BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the fog lamp switch is ON and the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF, or if the ignition switch is in the OFF position when the fog lamp switch is turned ON, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the fog lamps (and headlamps) remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the fog lamps (and headlamps) are turned off. CAN Communication System Description G H EKS008MQ I Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-61 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — EKS008MR WKWA1369E Revision: March 2005 LT-62 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS008MS A Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 L Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) B C Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 D SKIA5291E E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 F SKIA5292E G 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 H SKIA5291E 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 11 PU Ignition switch (ACC) I ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 J SKIA5292E ACC — LT Battery voltage L 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 M SKIA5291E 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 G/R Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: March 2005 LT-63 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 G/B Combination switch output 2 36 G/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch ON Reference value (Approx.) Operation or condition Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 38 R Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS008MT Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color Signal name 36 W/R Front fog lamp (RH) ON Front fog lamp (LH) ON 37 W/R Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) Operation or condition Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the front fog lamp switch must be ON OFF 0V ON Battery voltage Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the front fog lamp switch must be ON OFF 0V ON Battery voltage 48 L CAN-H — — — 49 P CAN-L — — — How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008MU Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-60, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-65, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do the front fog lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 LT-64 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP Preliminary Check EKS008MV A CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK B Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ACC or ON position 6 Ignition switch ON or START position 1 Battery 43 BCM IPDM E/R C D Refer to LT-62, "Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . E F 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. G H BCM Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) OFF ACC ON I 11 (PU) 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage J 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage M18 38 (R) M20 Ground 70 (W/B) LT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link. L M WKIA2044E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and ground. BCM Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. Revision: March 2005 LIIA0915E LT-65 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP CONSULT-II Function EKS008MW Refer to LT-16, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Refer to LT-18, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) EKS008MX 1. FOG LAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "FOG" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure fog lamps operate. Fog lamps should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. SKIA5774E 2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis. Displayed results of self-diagnosis NO MALFUNCTION DETECTED>> GO TO 3. CAN COMMUNICATION OR CAN SYSTEM>> Inspect the BCM CAN communications system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OPEN DETECT 1 - 5>> Inspect combination switch system. Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . LKIA0073E 3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "FR FOG SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in FOG position : FR FOG SW ON OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-87, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 LT-66 SKIA5897E 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP 4. IPDM E/R INSPECTION A Start auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . When front fog lamp relay is operating, check voltage between left/right front fog lamp connector terminals and ground. B Terminals (+) Front fog lamp connector RH E101 LH E2 Voltage (Approx.) C Terminal (Wire color) (–) 1 (W/R) Ground Battery voltage D WKIA4033E OK or NG OK >> Check front fog lamp bulbs and replace as necessary. NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) E EKS008MY 1. BULB INSPECTION Inspect bulb of lamp which does not illuminate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace lamp bulb. Refer to LT-70, "Bulb Replacement" . F G H 2. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND FRONT FOG LAMPS 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative front fog lamp connector. Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM E/R and harness connector terminal of front fog lamps. A IPDM E/R Connector E124 I J B Terminal (wire color) Front fog lamp Connector 36 (W/R) RH E101 37 (W/R) LH E2 Terminal (wire color) Continuity 1 (W/R) Yes LT OK or NG OK >> Check ground circuit. If OK, replace IPDM E/R. Refer to WKIA4034E PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . If NG, repair harness or connector. NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and front fog lamps. Revision: March 2005 LT-67 2005 Altima L M FRONT FOG LAMP Aiming Adjustment EKS008MZ ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following. ● Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure. ● Place vehicle on level ground. ● See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat. Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting screw. WKIA1065E 1. 2. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog lamp lens as shown. Turn front fog lamps ON. MEL327G 3. ● Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of the fog lamp centers as shown. When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp. MEL328G SE-R MODELS The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following. ● Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure. Revision: March 2005 LT-68 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP Place vehicle on level ground. ● See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat. Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting screw. ● A B C D LKIA0598E E 1. 2. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog lamp lens as shown. Turn front fog lamps ON. F G H MEL327G 3. ● Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of the fog lamp centers as shown. When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp. I J LT L M MEL328G Revision: March 2005 LT-69 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP Bulb Replacement EKS008N0 ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS Removal The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. CAUTION: ● Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. ● Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. 1. Position the front fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. WKIA1066E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SE-R MODELS Removal The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. CAUTION: ● Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. ● Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. 1. Remove the engine undercover using power tools. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. LKIA0599E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation EKS008N1 ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS Removal The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Revision: March 2005 LT-70 2005 Altima FRONT FOG LAMP CAUTION: ● Do not leave fog lamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the fog lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly just before replacement bulb is installed. ● Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. 1. Remove inner splash shield. 2. Position the fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Disconnect electrical connector. 4. Remove bolt from top of fog lamp. 5. Remove fog lamp. A B C D E F WKIA1067E G Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Confirm fog lamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-68, "Aiming Adjustment" . H SE-R MODELS Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the engine under cover using power tools. Disconnect electrical connector. Remove the fog lamp bolts from top and bottom of fog lamp. Remove fog lamp. I J LT L LKIA0600E M Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Confirm fog lamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-68, "Aiming Adjustment" . Revision: March 2005 LT-71 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26120 EKS00A86 WKIA4088E System Description EKS008N2 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM (body control module) terminal 38, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 22. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. LH Turn When the turn signal switch (combination switch) is moved to the L position, the BCM receives input requesting the left turn signals to flash. The BCM then supplies power Revision: March 2005 LT-72 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3 ● to rear turn signal lamp LH (part of the rear combination lamp LH) terminal 3. Ground is supplied ● to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 5 ● through grounds B7 and B19. The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed by the CPU (central processing unit) of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the left turn signal indicator lamp. With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps. ● A B C D RH Turn When the turn signal switch (combination switch) is moved to the R position, the BCM receives input requesting the right turn signals to flash. The BCM then supplies power ● to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3 ● to rear turn signal lamp RH (part of the rear combination lamp RH) terminal 3. Ground is supplied ● to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 5 ● through grounds B7 and B19. The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed by the CPU of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the right turn signal indicator lamp. With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps. F G H I HAZARD LAMP OPERATION Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 21. Ground is supplied ● to hazard switch terminal 3 ● to BCM terminal 67 ● to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. When the hazard switch is depressed, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 29 ● through hazard lamp switch terminal 2. The BCM then supplies power ● to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3 ● to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3 ● to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 3 ● to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 3. Ground is supplied ● to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 ● to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 5 ● to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 5 Revision: March 2005 E LT-73 J LT L M 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS through grounds B7 and B19. The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed by the CPU of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the left and right turn signal indicator lamps. With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps. ● REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 21. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. When the remote keyless entry system is triggered by input from the keyfob, the BCM supplies power ● to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3 ● to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3 ● to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 3 ● to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 3. Ground is supplied ● to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 ● to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 5 ● to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 5 ● through grounds B7 and B19. The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed by the CPU of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the left and right turn signal indicator lamps. With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps when keyfob is used to activate the remote keyless entry system. CAN Communication System Description EKS008N3 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 LT-74 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Schematic EKS008N4 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1370E Revision: March 2005 LT-75 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram — TURN — EKS008N5 WKWA1537E Revision: March 2005 LT-76 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1538E Revision: March 2005 LT-77 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS WKWA2972E Revision: March 2005 LT-78 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS008N6 A Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 L Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) B C Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 D SKIA5291E E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 F SKIA5292E G 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 H SKIA5291E I 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 11 PU Ignition switch (ACC) ACC 29 G/R Hazard switch signal OFF 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 J SKIA5292E — Hazard switch LT Battery voltage ON 0V OFF 5V L M Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E Revision: March 2005 LT-79 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Terminal No. Wire color 34 G/R Measuring condition Signal name Combination switch output 3 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 35 36 G/B G/W Combination switch output 2 Combination switch output 1 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 38 R Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 60 G/B Flasher output (left) ON Combination switch Turn left ON SKIA3009J 61 G/Y 67 B 70 W/B Combination switch Flasher output (right) ON Turn right ON Ground ON — 0V Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage SKIA3009J How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS008N7 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-72, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-81, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do the turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 LT-80 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Preliminary Check EKS008N8 A CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK B Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ACC or ON 6 Ignition switch ON or START position 1 BCM C Refer to LT-76, "Wiring Diagram — TURN —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . D E 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F 1. 2. G Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. BCM Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) 11 (PU) M20 ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage I 38 (W/L) M18 OFF H Ground 70 (W/B) J LT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link. L WKIA2044E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and ground. BCM Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. Revision: March 2005 LIIA0915E LT-81 2005 Altima M TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS008N9 CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E LKIA0070E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 LT-82 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. A B C LKIA0283E D DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List E F G H I Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. HAZARD SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Hazard ON (ON)/Hazard OFF (OFF)" status, determined from hazard switch signal. TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. J LT ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure L 1. 2. 3. 4. M Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Description FLASHER (RH) Turn signal lamp (right) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. FLASHER (LH) Turn signal lamp (left) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate EKS008NA 1. BULB INSPECTION Check each turn signal lamp bulb to make sure correct bulbs are installed. Refer to LT-144, "Exterior Lamp" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" or LT-97, "Bulb Replacement for Rear Combination Lamp" . Revision: March 2005 LT-83 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS 2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis. Displayed results of self-diagnosis Diagnosis system 1 - 5>> Combination switch system malfunction. Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . No malfunction detected>> GO TO 3. LKIA0073E 3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, check that "TURN SIGNAL R" and "TURN SIGNAL L" turn ON-OFF according to operation of turn signal switch. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-87, "Removal and Installation" . LKIA0083E 4. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN BCM AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS 1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "FLASHER" active test. 2. Check that "FLASHER RH" and "FLASHER LH" operate. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 5. SKIA6190E 5. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN BCM AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and all turn signal lamp connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. BCM Connector LH RH Continuity Terminal (wire color) 60 (G/B) M20 61 (G/Y) Ground No OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and InstallaWKIA2053E tion of BCM" . NG >> Check for short circuit in harnesses between BCM and each turn signal and repair as necessary. Revision: March 2005 LT-84 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamps Operate EKS008NB 1. CHECK BULB A Make sure bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-144, "Exterior Lamp" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" or LT-97, "Bulb Replacement for Rear Combination Lamp" . B C 2. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL D With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make sure "HAZARD SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of hazard switch. When hazard switch is in ON position E : HAZARD SW ON F G SKIA4500E H Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminal 29 (G/R) and ground. I BCM (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 29 (G/R) Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition Hazard switch is ON 0V Hazard switch is OFF 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. J LT SKIA5911E L 3. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and hazard switch connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 29 (G/R) and hazard switch harness connector M203 terminal 2 (G/R). 29 (G/R) - 2 (G/R) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 SKIA5912E LT-85 2005 Altima TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS 4. CHECK GROUND Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector M203 terminal 1 (B) and ground. 1 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. SKIA5913E 5. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH Check continuity of hazard switch. Hazard switch Condition Terminal 1 2 Continuity Hazard switch is ON Yes Hazard switch is OFF No OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace hazard switch. Refer to LT-88, "Removal and Installation" . Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate SKIA5914E EKS008NC 1. CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . NG >> Repair as necessary. Bulb Replacement EKS008ND FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" . REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP Refer to LT-114, "TAIL LAMP" . Removal and Installation EKS008NE FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP Refer to LT-114, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP" . Revision: March 2005 LT-86 2005 Altima LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation PFP:25540 A EKS008NF 1. Remove the steering column cover. Refer to PS-9, "STEERING COLUMN" 2. Pinch tabs and slide out lighting and turn signal switch (combination switch). Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B C D LKIA0013E Switch Circuit Inspection EKS008NG E Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . F G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-87 2005 Altima HAZARD SWITCH HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation PFP:25290 EKS008NH 1. Remove front air control finisher. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . 2. Remove A/T or M/T finisher. Refer to IP-13, "A/T Finisher" or IP-14, "M/T Finisher" . 3. Remove screws and remove hazard switch from finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1983E Revision: March 2005 LT-88 2005 Altima COMBINATION SWITCH COMBINATION SWITCH Wiring Diagram — COMBSW — PFP:25567 A EKS008NI B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1379E Revision: March 2005 LT-89 2005 Altima COMBINATION SWITCH Combination Switch Reading Function EKS008NJ Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS008NK CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 LT-90 2005 Altima COMBINATION SWITCH 4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. A B C LKIA0283E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. D E F ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Contents TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn Right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L “ON/OFF” Displays "Turn Left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays "Headlamp switch 1 (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal. PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Auto light switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. FR FOG SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front fog lamp switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. FR WIPER HI "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER LOW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. Revision: March 2005 H I Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" INT VOLUME G [1 - 7] Displays intermittent operation knob setting (1 - 7), determined from wiper switch signal. LT-91 2005 Altima J LT L M COMBINATION SWITCH Combination Switch Inspection EKS008NL 1. SYSTEM CHECK Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs. System 1 System 2 System 3 System 4 System 5 — FR WASHER FR WIPER LO TURN LH TURN RH FR WIPER HI — FR WIPER INT PASSING HEAD LAMP1 INT VOLUME 1 — — HEAD LAMP2 HI BEAM — INT VOLUME 3 AUTO LIGHT — TAIL LAMP INT VOLUME 2 — — FR FOG — >> GO TO 2. 2. SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-II CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, turn ON-OFF normally. SKIA7075E Without CONSULT-II Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally. Check results Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.>>Replace lighting switch or wiper switch. Refer to LT-87, "Removal and Installation" (for lighting switch) or WW-30, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally.>>GO TO 3. Revision: March 2005 LT-92 2005 Altima COMBINATION SWITCH 3. HARNESS INSPECTION 1. 2. Suspect system BCM 2 3 M18 4 5 Connector Terminal (Wire color) Input 1 6 (R/W) 10 (R/W) Output 1 36 (G/W) 13 (G/W) Input 2 5 (R/B) 15 (R/B) Output 2 35 (G/B) 12 (G/B) Input 3 4 (R/G) Continuity C D E 5 (R/G) M28 Output 3 34 (G/R) 16 (G/R) Input 4 3 (R/Y) 6 (R/Y) Output 4 33 (G/Y) 11 (G/Y) Input 5 2 (L) 7 (L) Output 5 32 (L/W) 14 (L/W) Yes WKIA2054E F G Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system and ground. Suspect system H BCM Connector 1 2 3 B Combination switch Terminal (Wire color) Connector 1 3. A Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals. M18 4 5 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) Input 1 6 (R/W) Output 1 36 (G/W) Input 2 5 (R/B) Output 2 35 (G/B) Input 3 4 (R/G) Output 3 34 (G/R) Input 4 3 (R/Y) Output 4 33 (G/Y) Input 5 2 (L) Output 5 32 (L/W) I J Ground No LT L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit. Revision: March 2005 LT-93 2005 Altima COMBINATION SWITCH 4. BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF. Set wiper dial to position 4. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system. Combination switch Suspect system (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) 1 Input 1 10 (R/W) 2 Input 2 15 (R/B) 3 Input 3 5 (R/G) 4 M28 Input 4 6 (R/Y) 5 Input 5 7 (L) Ground OK or NG OK >> Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WKIA2055E 5. COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection. Procedure 1 Replace lighting switch. 2 Confirm check results. 3 OK NG Inspection End Replace wiper switch. 4 Confirm check results. 5 OK Inspection End NG Replace switch base. 6 Confirm check results. 7 OK Inspection End NG Confirm symptom again. >> Inspection End. Removal and Installation EKS008NM For details, refer to LT-87, "Removal and Installation" . Switch Circuit Inspection EKS008NN For details, refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . Revision: March 2005 LT-94 2005 Altima STOP LAMP STOP LAMP Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — PFP:26550 A EKS008NO B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1539E Revision: March 2005 LT-95 2005 Altima STOP LAMP WKWA1372E Revision: March 2005 LT-96 2005 Altima STOP LAMP Bulb Replacement for High-mounted Stop Lamp EKS008NP A WITH REAR AIR SPOILER When this vehicle is equipped with a rear air spoiler, the high-mounted stop lamp uses an LED circuit board instead of a bulb. The LED circuit board is not serviceable and must be replaced as an assembly. B WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove high-mounted stop lamp assembly. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for High-mounted Stop Lamp" . Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove from lamp assembly. Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from socket. C D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E Bulb Replacement for Rear Combination Lamp EKS008NQ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" . Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove from combination lamp assembly. Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from bulb socket. INSTALLATION F G Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation for High-mounted Stop Lamp EKS008NR WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-SE-R H The high-mounted stop lamp is part of the rear air spoiler. Refer to EI-24, "REAR AIR SPOILER" . WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-EXCEPT SE-R I For rear air spoiler removal and installation procedures, refer to EI-24, "Removal and Installation" . WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER Removal 1. 2. 3. J Slide high-mounted stop lamp assembly rearward on parcel shelf to give clearance to front tabs. Lift front of lamp assembly up and bring forward to give clearance to rear tabs. Disconnect connector, and remove from vehicle. LT L M LKIA0063E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp EKS008NS REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Displace trunk room trim as needed. Refer to EI-37, "Removal and Installation" . From trunk, remove nuts securing rear combination lamp assembly. Disconnect connectors and remove assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear combination lamp mounting nut: : 2.5 - 3.7 N·m (0.25 - 0.38 kg-m, 22 - 33 in-lb) Revision: March 2005 LT-97 2005 Altima BACK-UP LAMP BACK-UP LAMP Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — PFP:26550 EKS008NT WKWA1373E Revision: March 2005 LT-98 2005 Altima BACK-UP LAMP Bulb Replacement EKS008NU 1. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" . 2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove. 3. Pull bulb from socket to remove. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation A B EKS008NV The back-up lamp is part of the rear combination lamp assembly. For removal and installation, refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" . C D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-99 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26550 EKS00A88 WKIA4089E System Description EKS008NW Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power to the parking, license plate, and tail lamps, which then illuminate. Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 38. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH With the lighting switch in the 1st or 2nd position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communiRevision: March 2005 LT-100 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS cated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power ● through terminal 22 of the IPDM E/R ● to front combination lamp LH terminal 1 ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 1 ● to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2 ● to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2 ● to license lamp LH terminal + ● to license lamp RH terminal +. Ground is supplied ● to front combination lamp LH terminal 2 ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 2 ● through grounds E15 and E24, and ● to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 ● to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 ● to license lamp LH terminal – ● to license lamp RH terminal – ● through grounds B7 and B19. With power and ground supplied, the parking, license and tail lamps illuminate. A B C D E F G BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the parking, license plate, and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the parking, license plate and tail lamps are turned off. CAN Communication System Description H I EKS008NX J Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-101 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Schematic EKS008NY WKWA2973E Revision: March 2005 LT-102 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — EKS008NZ A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1317E Revision: March 2005 LT-103 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS WKWA0193E Revision: March 2005 LT-104 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1374E Revision: March 2005 LT-105 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS008O0 Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 L Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 11 PU Ignition switch (ACC) 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E ACC ON — Battery voltage Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 G/R Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: March 2005 LT-106 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 G/B Combination switch output 2 36 G/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) A B Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON C SKIA5292E 38 R Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage D E Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS008O1 F Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color Signal name 22 R/L Parking, license, and tail lamp ON Ignition switch Operation or condition Lighting switch 1ST position Reference value (Approx.) OFF 0V ON Battery voltage 48 L CAN-H — — — 49 P CAN-L — — — H I How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G EKS008O2 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-100, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-108, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do the parking, license plate and tail lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-107 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Preliminary Check EKS008O3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ACC or ON 6 Ignition switch ON or START position 1 Battery 41 BCM IPDM E/R Refer to LT-103, "Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. BCM Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) OFF ACC ON 38 (W/L) 0V 0V Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage M18 11 (PU) M20 Ground 70 (W/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link. WKIA2044E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and ground. BCM Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. Revision: March 2005 LIIA0915E LT-108 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS CONSULT-II Functions EKS008O4 A Refer to LT-16, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Refer to LT-18, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate EKS008O5 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "LIGHT SW 1ST" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in 1ST position C D : LIGHT SW 1ST ON Without CONSULT-II Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" . B E F SKIA5956E G 2. ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-II 1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. 4. Make sure parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamp operation. H I J Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamp should operate. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Make sure parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps operate. LT SKIA5957E L Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamp should operate. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: March 2005 LT-109 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS 3. CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "TAIL&CLR REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in 1ST position. When lighting switch is in 1ST position : TAIL&CLR REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Revision: March 2005 LT-110 SKIA5958E 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS 4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front combination lamp, license plate lamp and rear combination lamp connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. (+) RH E109 LH E12 Terminal (Wire color) (–) Voltage (Approx.) 1 (R/L) Ground Battery voltage B33 LH B31 + (R/L) I J (–) Terminal (Wire color) RH E H License plate lamp Connector D G WKIA4037E (+) C F Terminals Front combination lamp connector B Voltage (Approx.) LT Ground Battery voltage L WKIA1076E M Terminals (+) Rear combination lamp connector RH B36 LH B35 Terminal (Wire color) (–) Voltage (Approx.) 2 (R/L) Ground Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: March 2005 WKIA4038E LT-111 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS 5. CHECK PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector. A B IPDM E/R connector Terminal (Wire color) E122 22 (R/L) Front combination lamp connector RH E109 LH E12 Terminal (Wire color) Continuity 1 (R/L) Yes WKIA4039E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and license plate lamp harness connector. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal (Wire color) E122 22 (R/L) License plate lamp Connector RH B33 LH B31 Terminal (Wire color) Continuity + (R/L) Yes WKIA1078E 5. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and rear combination lamp harness connector. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal (Wire color) E122 22 (R/L) Rear combination lamp Connector RH B36 LH B35 Terminal (Wire color) Continuity 2 (R/L) Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 LT-112 WKIA1258E 2005 Altima PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS 6. CHECK GROUND 1. A Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground. B Terminals Front combination lamp connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) RH E109 2 (B/W) LH E12 2 (B) C Ground Yes D WKIA4040E 2. Check continuity between license lamp plate harness connector and ground. E License plate lamp Connector RH B33 LH B31 Terminal (Wire color) – (B) Ground Continuity F Yes G WKIA1080E 3. Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. H I Rear combination lamp Connector RH B36 LH B35 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 5 (B) J Ground Yes LT OK or NG OK >> Check bulbs. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1259E L Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) EKS008O6 1. CHECK IPDM E/R 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn the combination switch (lighting switch) to the OFF position. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Verify that the parking, license plate, and tail lamps turn on and off after approximately 10 minutes. OK or NG OK >> Ignition relay malfunction. Refer to PG-16, "Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction" . NG >> Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 LT-113 2005 Altima M PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Bulb Replacement EKS008O7 LICENSE PLATE LAMP 1. Position trunk lid finisher aside. 2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove. 3. Pull bulb to remove from socket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA3384E FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP For bulb replacement, refer to LT-86, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" . TAIL LAMP 1. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" . 2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove. 3. Pull bulb to remove from socket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation EKS008O8 LICENSE PLATE LAMP 1. Remove the license plate finisher. Refer to EI-23, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Disconnect the license plate lamp connector. 3. Remove the license plate lamp mounting screw and remove the license plate lamp from the vehicle. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. License plate lamp mounting screw: : 1.3 - 1.8 N·m (0.13 - 0.18 kg-m, 11 - 16 in-lb) PKIA0059E FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP For front turn signal (parking) lamp removal and installation procedures, refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . REAR COMBINATION LAMP For rear combination lamp removal and installation procedures, refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" . Revision: March 2005 LT-114 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26410 A EKS008O9 B C D E F G H I J LT L WKIA3163E System Description EKS008OA When room lamp switch is in DOOR position, room lamp ON/OFF is controlled by timer according to signals from switches including key switch and key lock solenoid, front dor switch LH, unlock signal from keyfob (with remote keyless entry system), door lock/unlock switch, front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), and ignition switch. When room lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When room lamp turns OFF, there is a gradual dimming over 1 second. The room lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module). Room lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-II. Ignition keyhole illumination turns ON when driver door is opened (door switch ON) or key is removed from key cylinder. Illumination turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON or by room lamp timer. Step lamp turns ON when driver door, passenger or rear doors are opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF when driver, passenger and rear doors are closed (all door switches OFF). POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)] Revision: March 2005 LT-115 2005 Altima M INTERIOR ROOM LAMP to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 ● to BCM terminal 57, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. When the key is inserted in ignition switch, power is supplied ● through the key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 ● to BCM terminal 37. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through case ground of front door switch LH. When the passenger side door is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through case ground of front door switch RH. When the rear door LH is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 48 ● through case ground of rear door switch LH. When the rear door RH is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 13 ● through case ground of rear door switch RH. The BCM also receives a ground signal when ● the driver or passenger side door is unlocked with the lock/unlock switch ● the doors are unlocked with keyfob (with remote keyless entry system) ● the driver side door is unlocked with key (key cylinder unlock signal). When a signal, or combination of signals is received by BCM, ground is supplied ● to interior room lamp terminal 2 ● through BCM terminal 63, and ● to trunk room lamp terminal – ● through BCM terminal 49, and ● to step lamp RH and LH terminal – ● through BCM terminal 62, and ● to ignition keyhole illumination lamp terminal + ● through BCM terminal 1. With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate. ● SWITCH OPERATION When driver door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied ● to ignition keyhole illumination terminal + ● through BCM terminal 1. And power is supplied ● through BCM terminal 56 ● to ignition keyhole illumination terminal –. When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied ● to front step lamp LH and RH terminal – Revision: March 2005 LT-116 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP through BCM terminal 62. And power is supplied ● through BCM terminal 56 ● to step lamp LH and RH terminal +. When spot lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied ● to spot lamp terminal – ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. And power is supplied ● through BCM terminal 56 ● to spot lamp terminal +. When vanity mirror lamp (driver side and passenger side) is ON, ground is supplied ● to vanity mirror lamp (driver side and passenger side) terminal 2 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. And power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to vanity mirror lamp (driver side and passenger side) terminal 1. When trunk room lamp is ON, ground is supplied ● to trunk room lamp terminal – ● through BCM terminal 49. And power is supplied ● from BCM terminal 56 ● to trunk room lamp terminal +. ● A B C D E F G H ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION I When interior room lamp switch is in DOOR position and when all conditions below are met, BCM performs timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room lamp ON/OFF. Power is supplied J ● through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3. Key is removed from ignition key cylinder (key switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM terminal 37. LT Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 22 (with left and right front power window anti-pinch system) or terminals 7, 8, 45 and 46 (with left front only power window anti-pinch system) L ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door lock/unlock switch RH and front door lock assembly (key cylinder switch). At the time that driver or passenger door is opened, BCM detects that door is unlocked. It determines that inteM rior room lamp timer operation conditions are met and turns the interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds. When key is in ignition key cylinder (key switch ON), power is supplied ● through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 ● to BCM terminal 37. When key is removed from key switch (key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is terminated. BCM detects that key has been removed, determines that interior room lamp timer conditions are met and turns the interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds. When driver door opens → closes and the key is not inserted in the key switch (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47 changes between 0V (door open) → 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for interior room lamp operation are met and turns the interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds. Timer control is canceled under the following conditions. ● Driver door is locked [when locked with keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, or front door lock assembly (key cylinder switch)] ● Driver door is opened (driver door switch turns ON) ● Ignition switch ON. Revision: March 2005 LT-117 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL If interior lamp is left ON, it will not be turned out even when door is closed. BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned OFF. BCM controls interior lamps listed below: ● Step lamp ● Spot lamp ● Trunk room lamp ● Interior room lamp ● Ignition keyhole illumination lamp After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when ● signal received from keyfob or main power window and door lock/unlock switch, or front door lock assembly (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked ● door is opened or closed ● key is removed from or inserted in ignition key cylinder. Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. Revision: March 2005 LT-118 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Schematic EKS008OB A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1393E Revision: March 2005 LT-119 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Wiring Diagram — INT/L — EKS008OC WKWA1319E Revision: March 2005 LT-120 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1394E Revision: March 2005 LT-121 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP WKWA1395E Revision: March 2005 LT-122 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Models With Vanity Lamps EKS009Y8 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2974E Revision: March 2005 LT-123 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Terminals and Reference Values for BCM Terminal No. 1 7 8 12 13 22 Measuring condition Wire color Signal name Ignition switch R/Y Ignition keyhole illumination signal OFF W/L P/L P/L R/W Y/G EKS008OD Front door key cylinder switch LH (unlock) OFF Front door key cylinder switch LH (lock) OFF Front door switch RH signal OFF Rear door switch RH signal Power window switch serial link OFF — Operation or condition Door is locked. (SW OFF) Reference value (Approx.) Battery voltage Door is unlocked. (SW ON) 0V OFF (neutral position) 5V ON (unlocked position) 0V OFF (neutral position) 5V ON (locked position) 0V Front door switch RH Rear door switch RH ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates PIIA2344J 37 B/R Key-in switch detection signal OFF Vehicle key is removed. 0V Vehicle key is inserted. Battery voltage 38 R Ignition power supply ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 42 PU/W 45 46 BR P Trunk lamp switch signal Lock switch signal Unlock switch signal OFF OFF OFF ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage OFF (neutral position) Battery voltage ON (locked position) 0V OFF (neutral position) Battery voltage ON (unlocked position) 0V Trunk lid Door lock and unlock switch Door lock and unlock switch 47 SB Front door switch LH signal OFF Front door switch LH 48 R/B Rear door switch LH signal OFF Rear door switch LH 49 PU Trunk room lamp signal OFF 56 P/B Battery saver output signal ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage Trunk lid is open (ON) 57 W 62 R/W OFF Trunk lid is closed (OFF) 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF 0V Battery voltage 0V ON — Battery voltage Battery power supply (fuse) OFF — Battery voltage Step lamp signal OFF Any door is open (ON) All doors are closed (OFF) Revision: March 2005 LT-124 0V Battery voltage 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Terminal No. Measuring condition Wire color 63 Ignition switch Signal name R Interior room lamp output signal 67 B 70 W/B OFF Operation or condition Interior room lamp switch: DOOR position Any door switch B ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage Ground ON — 0V Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage C D How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Reference value (Approx.) EKS008OE Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-115, "System Description" . Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-125, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check E F EKS008OF G INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK H Check for blown BCM fuses or fusible link. Unit Power source Battery BCM Fuse or fusible link No. I f 21 Ignition switch ON or START position 1 J Refer to LT-120, "Wiring Diagram — INT/L —" . OK or NG LT OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . L CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM connector terminals and ground. BCM Ignition switch position (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) OFF ON M18 38 (R) 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage M20 M 57 (W) 70 (W/B) Ground WKIA1478E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. Revision: March 2005 LT-125 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector terminal and ground. BCM Connector Terminal (Wire color) M19 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check harness ground circuit. LIIA0915E CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS008OG CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E LKIA0070E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E Revision: March 2005 LT-126 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . A B C BCIA0030E D 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. E F G PKIA5226E WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. H Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. I Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON", "ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET" or "ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. J Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. LT Touch "END". Display Item List Item Description CONSULT-II The 30 seconds glowing function the interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination can be selected when front door LH is released (unlocked). ON/OFF ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET The time in order to escalate illumination can be adjusted when the interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned on. MODE 1 - 7 ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET The time in order to diminish illumination can be adjusted when the interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned off. MODE 1 - 7 SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON M Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF". MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Time (sec.) 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 0 DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. Revision: March 2005 LT-127 L 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. KEY ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Key inserted (ON)/key removed (OFF)" status judged from the key switch signal. DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from passenger door switch signal. DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch RH signal. DOOR SW-RL "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch LH signal. BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from back door switch signal. KEY CYL LK-SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door locked (ON)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver door. KEY CYL UN-SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver door. CDL LOCK SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door locked (ON)/Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in driver door. CDL UNLOCK SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in passenger door. KEYLESS LOCK "ON/OFF" Displays "Locked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lock signal. KEYLESS UNLOCK "ON/OFF" Displays "Unlocked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from unlock signal. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Description INT LAMP Interior room lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. IGN ILLUM Ignition keyhole illumination can be operated by ON-OFF operation. STEP LAMP TEST LUGGAGE LAMP TEST Revision: March 2005 Step lamp can be operated by ON-OFF operation. Trunk room lamp can be operated by ON-OFF operation. LT-128 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate EKS008OH 1. CHECK EACH SWITCH A Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-128, "Display Item List" for switches and their functions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. B C D SKIA5930E E 2. ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "INT LAMP" active test. When room lamp switch is in "DOOR" position, use active test to make sure room lamp operates. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. F G H LKIA0092E I 3. CHECK ROOM LAMP INPUT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between room lamp harness connector R8 terminal 1 (P/B) and ground. 1 (P/B) - Ground J LT : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. L WKIA2062E 4. CHECK ROOM LAMP 1. 2. Disconnect room lamp connector. Check continuity between room lamp terminals. Room lamp Condition Continuity Room lamp switch is DOOR Yes Room lamp switch is OFF No Terminal 1 2 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace room lamp. Refer to LT-133, "ROOM OR SPOT LAMP" . Revision: March 2005 LT-129 WKIA2063E 2005 Altima M INTERIOR ROOM LAMP 5. CHECK ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 (P/B) and room lamp harness connector R8 terminal 1 (P/B). 56 (P/B) - 1 (P/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if interior lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA2064E 6. CHECK ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and room lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 63 (R) and room lamp harness connector R8 terminal 2 (R). 63 (R) - 2 (R) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if interior lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA2065E Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not Operate EKS008OI 1. CHECK EACH SWITCH Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-128, "Display Item List" for switches and their functions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. SKIA5930E 2. ACTIVE TEST 1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "INT LAMP". 2. Select "IGN ILLUM" active test to make sure lamp operates. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. SKIA3992E Revision: March 2005 LT-130 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP 3. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION INPUT A Check voltage between ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25 terminal + (P/B) and ground. + (P/B) - Ground B : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. C D WKIA1909E 4. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION BULB 1. 2. E Disconnect ignition keyhole illumination connector. Check continuity between ignition keyhole illumination terminals + and –. + - – F : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace ignition keyhole illumination bulb. Refer to LT134, "IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP" . H WKIA1910E 5. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 1 (R/Y) and ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25 terminal – (R/Y). – (R/Y) - 1 (R/Y) LT : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. L WKIA1911E M 6. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and ignition keyhole illumination connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 (P/B) and ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25 terminal + (P/B). + (P/B) - 56 (P/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 LT-131 WKIA1912E 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP All Step Lamps Do Not Operate EKS008OJ 1. CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed below turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Switch name CONSULT screen Front door switch LH DOOR SW-DR Front door switch RH DOOR SW-AS Rear door switch RH DOOR SW-RR Rear door switch LH DOOR SW-RL OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. SKIA5930E 2. CHECK STEP LAMP INPUT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal + (P/B) and ground. + (P/B) - Ground : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. LKIA0306E 3. CHECK STEP LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 62 (R/W) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal – (R/W). – (R/W) - 62 (R/W) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1484E 4. CHECK STEP LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and step lamp LH connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 (P/B) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal + (P/B). + (P/B) - 56 (P/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 LT-132 WKIA1485E 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate EKS008OK 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. 2. 3. B All interior room lamps switch are OFF. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 (P/B) and ground. 56 (P/B) - Ground C : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair harness or connector. In a case of making a short circuit, be sure to disconnect battery negative cable after repairing harness, and then reconnect. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Bulb Replacement D WKIA1486E E EKS008OL ROOM OR SPOT LAMP F 1. Insert a thin screwdriver in the notch and carefully remove the lens. 2. Remove the bulb. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G STEP LAMP 1. Carefully remove lamp assembly from door finisher. 2. Remove the bulb. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H VANITY MIRROR LAMP I 1. Insert a thin screwdriver in the notch and carefully remove the lens. 2. Remove the bulb. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J LT L PKIA0188E TRUNK ROOM LAMP M 1. Unfold tab A and open the lens. 2. Remove the bulb. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LKIA0066E Revision: March 2005 LT-133 2005 Altima INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Removal and Installation EKS008OM ROOM LAMP 1. Carefully remove the lens. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Disconnect the connector and remove the room lamp. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Room lamp mounting screw: : 2.5 - 3.4 N·m (0.25 - 0.35 kg-m, 22 - 30 in-lb) IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP 1. Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LKIA0065E STEP LAMP 1. Carefully remove lamp assembly from door finisher. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. TRUNK ROOM LAMP 1. 2. Unfold tab A and open the lens. Remove the trunk room lamp while pressing tab B in the direction of the arrow. 3. Disconnect the trunk room lamp connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LKIA0066E Revision: March 2005 LT-134 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:27545 A EKS00A87 B C D E F G H I J LT L WKIA4090E System Description EKS008ON Control of the illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated) the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power to the illumination lamps, which then illuminate. Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 38. Revision: March 2005 LT-135 2005 Altima M ILLUMINATION With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives input requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil which, when energized, directs power ● through IPDM E/R terminal 22 ● to illumination control switch terminal 1 ● to combination meter terminal 31 ● to A/T device terminal 15 (with A/T) ● to TCS ON/OFF switch terminal 3 (with TCS) ● to audio unit terminal 8 ● to hazard switch terminal 3 ● to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 1 (with heated seats) ● to front air control terminal 12 ● to AV switch terminal 3 (with NAVI) ● to glove box lamp terminal +. With the ignition switch in ON or START, power is also supplied ● through BCM terminal 68 ● to rear power window switch LH terminal 5 ● to rear power window switch RH terminal 5 ● to front power window switch RH terminal 5 (with left front only power window anti-pinch system) or terminal 13 (with left and right front power window anti-pinch system) ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (with left front only power window antipinch system) or terminal 17 (with left and right front power window anti-pinch system). Ground is supplied ● to illumination control switch terminal 3 ● to glove box lamp terminal – ● to combination meter terminal 24 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61, and ● to rear power window switch RH terminal 8 ● through ground B117, and ● to rear power window switch LH terminal 8 ● through grounds B7 and B19. The main power window and door lock/unlock switch and the front power window switch RH illumination circuits are case grounded. Controlled ground is supplied ● through illumination control switch terminal 2 ● to combination meter terminal 32 ● to A/T device terminal 16 (with A/T) ● to TCS ON/OFF switch terminal 4 (with TCS) ● to audio unit terminal 7 ● to hazard switch terminal 4 ● to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 2 (with heated seats) ● to front air control terminal 11 Revision: March 2005 LT-136 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION to AV switch terminal 4 (with NAVI). With power and ground supplied, illumination lamps illuminate. ● A BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated) and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 30 minutes unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the illumination lamps are turned off after a 30 second delay. When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated) after illumination lamps have been turned off by the battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again. CAN Communication System Description EKS008OO B C D Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . E F G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-137 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION Schematic EKS008OP WKWA1375E Revision: March 2005 LT-138 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram — ILL — EKS008OQ A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1321E Revision: March 2005 LT-139 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION WKWA1839E Revision: March 2005 LT-140 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1840E Revision: March 2005 LT-141 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION WKWA1324E Revision: March 2005 LT-142 2005 Altima ILLUMINATION Removal and Installation EKS008OR A ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH 1. 2. Remove driver lower instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Carefully release the illumination control switch retaining tabs and remove the unit from the driver lower instrument panel. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B C D WKIA1984E E GLOVE BOX LAMP 1. Through the passenger air bag connector access in the top of the glove box, remove bulb socket by turning counterclockwise. 2. Pull the bulb from the socket to remove. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I J LT L M Revision: March 2005 LT-143 2005 Altima BULB SPECIFICATIONS BULB SPECIFICATIONS Headlamp PFP:26297 EKS008OS Item Wattage (W)* Low (halogen) 55 (H1) Low (xenon) 35 (D2R) High 60W (HB3) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Exterior Lamp EKS008OT Item Front combination lamp Wattage (W)* Turn signal lamp/parking lamp Stop/Tail lamp Rear combination lamp 27/8 (amber) 27/8 Turn signal lamp 27 Back-up lamp 13 Side marker lamp 5 Fog lamp 55 (H11) License plate lamp 5 High-mounted stop lamp (parcel shelf mount) 18 High-mounted stop lamp (rear air spoiler mount) * *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Interior Lamp/Illumination EKS008OU Item Wattage (W)* Glove box lamp 3.4 Ignition keyhole illumination lamp 0.74* Spot lamp 10 Room lamp 8 Step lamp 3.8 Trunk room lamp 3.4 Vanity mirror lamp 1.4* *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 LT-144 2005 Altima B ENGINE SECTION LU ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM A LU C D E CONTENTS QR25DE PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 2 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 2 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................................ 5 Lubrication Circuit .................................................... 5 System Drawing ....................................................... 6 ENGINE OIL ............................................................... 7 Inspection ................................................................. 7 OIL LEVEL ............................................................ 7 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE ................................ 7 OIL LEAKAGE ....................................................... 7 OIL PRESSURE CHECK ...................................... 8 Changing Engine Oil ................................................ 8 OIL FILTER ............................................................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 REMOVAL ........................................................... 10 INSTALLATION ................................................... 10 OIL PUMP ..................................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................11 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................11 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................11 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 13 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 14 Oil Pressure ........................................................... 14 Oil Pump ................................................................ 14 Regulator Valve ...................................................... 14 Oil Capacity ............................................................ 14 PREPARATION ......................................................... 16 Special Service Tools ............................................. 16 Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 16 LUBRICATION SYSTEM .......................................... 18 Lubrication Circuit ................................................... 18 System Drawing ..................................................... 19 ENGINE OIL .............................................................. 20 Inspection ............................................................... 20 OIL LEVEL .......................................................... 20 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE .............................. 20 OIL LEAKAGE ..................................................... 20 OIL PRESSURE CHECK .................................... 21 Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 21 OIL FILTER ............................................................... 23 Removal and Installation ........................................ 23 REMOVAL ........................................................... 23 INSTALLATION ................................................... 23 OIL PUMP ................................................................. 24 Removal and Installation ........................................ 24 REMOVAL ........................................................... 24 INSTALLATION ................................................... 24 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 24 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 24 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 26 OIL COOLER ............................................................ 27 Removal and Installation ........................................ 27 REMOVAL ........................................................... 27 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 27 INSTALLATION ................................................... 28 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 28 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 29 Oil Pressure ............................................................ 29 Regulator Valve ...................................................... 29 Oil Pump ................................................................. 29 Oil Capacity ............................................................ 29 VQ35DE PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 15 Precautions for Liquid Gasket ................................ 15 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ........ 15 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE... 15 Revision: March 2005 LU-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [QR25DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Liquid Gasket PFP:00001 EBS00M6W REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket sealing. Tool number ● ● : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as shown. In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove it. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper. ● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. PBIC0003E 3. Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool. Tool number 4. : WS39930000 ( — ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. ● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove. WBIA0567E As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of service manual. ● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. ● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation. ● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. ● Revision: March 2005 LU-2 SEM159F 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR25DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00J6J The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent Moore No.) Tool name Description ST25051001 (J-25695-1) Oil pressure gauge Measuring oil pressure Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25 kg/cm2 , 356 psi) LU C D S-NT050 ST25052000 (J-25695-2) Hose E Adapting oil pressure gauge to cylinder block F G S-NT559 KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter wrench Removing and installing oil filter H I S-NT772 KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case J K S-NT046 WS39930000 (—) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket L M S-NT052 Commercial Service Tools Revision: March 2005 EBS00J6K LU-3 2005 Altima PREPARATION [QR25DE] Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Deep socket Removing and installing oil pressure sensor Deep socket 26 mm, 3/8 drive NT818 Revision: March 2005 LU-4 2005 Altima LUBRICATION SYSTEM [QR25DE] LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Circuit PFP:15010 A EBS00J6L LU C D E F G H I WBIA0138E J K L M Revision: March 2005 LU-5 2005 Altima LUBRICATION SYSTEM [QR25DE] System Drawing EBS00J6M WBIA0139E Revision: March 2005 LU-6 2005 Altima ENGINE OIL [QR25DE] ENGINE OIL Inspection PFP:KLA92 A EBS00J6N OIL LEVEL ● ● ● Before starting the engine, check the oil level. If the engine is already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking. Check that the oil level is within the range on the dipstick. If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . LU C D PBIC0249E E ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE ● ● Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination. If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. OIL LEAKAGE F G Check for oil leakage around the following areas: ● Oil pan ● Oil pan drain plug ● Oil pressure sensor ● Oil filter ● IVTC cover ● Front cover ● Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head ● Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover ● Crankshaft oil seal H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 LU-7 2005 Altima ENGINE OIL [QR25DE] OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ● For M/T models, put the gearshift lever in the Neutral "N" position. For A/T models, put the selector lever in the Park “P” position. 1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" . 2. Remove undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect oil pressure sensor harness connector at oil pressure sensor, and remove oil pressure sensor. CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure sensor. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load, using Tool Tool numbers : ST25051001 (J-25695-1) : ST25052000 (J-25695-2) NOTE: When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure becomes high. WBIA0571E Engine oil pressure [Oil temperature 80 °C (176 °F)] Engine speed (rpm) Idle speed Engine pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 6. a. b. Approx. 98 (1.0, 14) or more 6,000 Approx. 294 (3.0, 43) or more Approx. 392 (4.0, 57) or more If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks. After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows: Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Oil pressure sensor torque c. 2,000 : 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine. Changing Engine Oil EBS00J6O WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer: try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Make sure vehicle is on level surface, then warm up engine. 2. Check for oil leakage from engine components. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain oil and refill with new engine oil. Oil specification and viscosity ● Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Oil capacity (Approximate): With oil filter change 4.2 (4 1/2 qt.) Without oil filter change 4.0 (4 1/4 qt.) 4.6 (4 7/8 qt.) Drain and refill Dry engine (engine overhaul) Revision: March 2005 LU-8 2005 Altima ENGINE OIL [QR25DE] CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean the drain plug and install using a new washer. Oil pan drain plug A : 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for LU reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Warm up the engine and check the area around the drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. C Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the oil level using the dipstick. ● 6. 7. 8. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 LU-9 2005 Altima OIL FILTER [QR25DE] OIL FILTER Removal and Installation PFP:15208 EBS00J6P REMOVAL 1. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: ● Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. ● The oil filter has a built in pressure relief valve. Use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent ● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil leakage or spillage. ● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ● Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. WBIA0589E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Clean off any foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. Apply engine oil to the oil seal surface of the new oil filter. SMA010 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification below. Oil filter : 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) SMA229B 4. 5. After warming up the engine, check for oil leaks. Check oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to LU-7, "ENGINE OIL" . ALC094 Revision: March 2005 LU-10 2005 Altima OIL PUMP [QR25DE] OIL PUMP Removal and Installation ● PFP:15010 A EBS00J6Q Remove the front cover. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" . LU Disassembly and Assembly EBS00J6R C D E F G KBIA0153E 1. Front cover 2. Outer rotor 3. Inner rotor 4. Oil pump cover 5. Regulator valve 6. Spring 7. Regulator plug H I CAUTION: Before installation, apply new engine oil to the parts as instructed in the figure above. J DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove the oil pump cover. Remove inner rotor and outer rotor from front cover. After removing regulator plug, remove regulator spring and regulator valve. K INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY L Measure the clearance of the oil pump parts. ● Measure clearance with feeler gauge. ● Clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 1). M Standard ● : 0.114 - 0.179 mm (0.0045 - 0.0070 in) Tip clearance between inner rotor and outer rotor (position 2). Standard : Below 0.220 mm (0.0087 in) SLC932A Revision: March 2005 LU-11 2005 Altima OIL PUMP [QR25DE] ● ● Measure clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge. Side clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body (position 3). Standard ● : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) Side clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 4). Standard : 0.060 - 0.110 mm (0.0024 - 0.0043 in) PBIC0252E ● 1. Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body as follows: Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor (Position 5). PBIC0253E 2. Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside micrometer (Position 6). (Clearance) = (Inner diameter of oil pump body) – (Outer diameter of inner rotor). Standard : 0.035 - 0.070 mm (0.0014 - 0.0028 in) PBIC0254E ● Regulator valve clearance: (Clearance) = D1(Valve hole diameter) – D2 (Outer diameter of valve) Standard : 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in) CAUTION: Coat regulator valve with engine oil. Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. KBIA0043E Revision: March 2005 LU-12 2005 Altima OIL PUMP [QR25DE] ASSEMBLY ● ● A Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Install the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punched marks on the oil pump cover side. LU C PBIC0255E D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 LU-13 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Oil Pressure PFP:00030 EBS00J6S Engine speed rpm Approximate discharge pressure Idle speed More than 98 (1.0, 14) 2,000 294 (3.0, 43) 6,000 392 (4.0, 57) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Oil Pump EBS00J6T Unit: mm (in) Body to outer rotor radial clearance 0.114 - 0.179 (0.0045 - 0.0070) Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance Below 0.220 (0.0087) Body to inner rotor axial clearance 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Body to outer rotor axial clearance 0.060 - 0.110 (0.0024 - 0.0043) Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 0.035 - 0.070 (0.0014 - 0.0028) Regulator Valve EBS00J6U Unit: mm (in) Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038) Oil Capacity EBS00J6V Unit: Drain and refill With oil filter change Approximately 4.2 (4 1/2, 3 3/4) Without oil filter change Approximately 4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2) Dry engine (engine overhaul) Revision: March 2005 (US qt, IMP qt) Approximately 4.6 (4 7/8, 4) LU-14 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [VQ35DE] PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Liquid Gasket PFP:00001 A EBS00M6X REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket seal- LU ing. Tool number ● ● : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as shown. In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove it. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. C D E WBIA0566E F LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper. ● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. G H I PBIC0003E J 3. Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool. Tool number 4. : WS39930000 ( — ) K Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. ● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove. L M WBIA0567E As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of service manual. ● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. ● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation. ● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. ● Revision: March 2005 LU-15 SEM159F 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ35DE] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00J6X The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST25051001 (J-25695-1) Oil pressure gauge Measuring oil pressure Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25 kg-cm2 , 356 psi) NT050 ST25052000 (J-25695-2) Hose Adapting oil pressure gauge to upper oil pan S-NT559 KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter wrench Removing and installing oil filter S-NT772 KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case S-NT046 WS39930000 ( — Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket ) NT052 Commercial Service Tool Revision: March 2005 EBS00J6Y LU-16 2005 Altima PREPARATION [VQ35DE] Tool name Description Deep socket Removing and installing oil pressure switch Deep socket 26 mm, 3/8 drive A LU C NT818 Power tools Loosening nuts and bolts D E PBIC0190E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 LU-17 2005 Altima LUBRICATION SYSTEM [VQ35DE] LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Circuit PFP:15010 EBS00J6Z WBIA0140E Revision: March 2005 LU-18 2005 Altima LUBRICATION SYSTEM [VQ35DE] System Drawing EBS00J70 A LU C D E F G H WBIA0141E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 LU-19 2005 Altima ENGINE OIL [VQ35DE] ENGINE OIL Inspection PFP:KLA92 EBS00J71 OIL LEVEL NOTE: ● Before starting the engine, check the oil level. If the engine is already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking. ● Check that the oil level is within the range as indicated on the dipstick. ● If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . JMA122D ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE ● ● Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination. If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: ● Oil pan ● Oil pan drain plug ● Oil pressure sensor ● Oil filter ● Oil cooler ● IVTC cover ● Intake valve timing control cover ● Front cover ● Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head ● Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover ● Crank oil seal (front and rear) Revision: March 2005 LU-20 2005 Altima ENGINE OIL [VQ35DE] OIL PRESSURE CHECK A WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ● For M/T models, put the gearshift lever in the Neutral "N" position. For A/T models, put the selecLU tor lever in the Park “P” position. 1. Check the oil level. 2. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector. C 3. Remove oil pressure sensor. 4. 5. 6. Install the pressure gauge. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load, using Tool D E Tool numbers : ST25051001 (J-25695-1) : ST25052000 (J-25695-2) Engine speed rpm Approximate discharge pressure Idle speed More than 98 (1.0, 14) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 2,000 7. a. b. F WBIA0571E G 294 (3.0, 43) If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks. After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows: Remove the old sealant adhering to switch and engine. Apply thread sealant and tighten the oil pressure switch to specification. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . H I J Oil pressure switch : 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) Changing Engine Oil EBS00J72 WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Make sure vehicle is on level surface, then warm up engine. 2. Check for oil leakage from engine components. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug and refill with new engine oil. ● Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Oil capacity (Approximate): With oil filter change Approximately 4.0 (4 1/4 qt.) Without oil filter change Approximately 3.7 (3 7/8 qt.) Approximately 5.0 (5 1/4 qt.) Drain and refill Dry engine (engine overhaul) CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug Revision: March 2005 : 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) LU-21 2005 Altima K L M ENGINE OIL [VQ35DE] The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ● Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check oil level. ● 7. 8. 9. Revision: March 2005 LU-22 2005 Altima OIL FILTER [VQ35DE] OIL FILTER Removal and Installation PFP:15208 A EBS00J73 REMOVAL 1. Remove the oil filter using Tool as shown. Tool number LU : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: ● The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. ● Be careful not to get burned, the engine oil may be hot. ● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil leakage or spillage. ● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ● Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. C D WBIA0590E INSTALLATION 1. 2. E F Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter. G H I SMA010 J 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn, or tighten to specification. Oil filter K : 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) L M SMA229B 4. 5. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leakage. Check oil level and add engine oil. Refer to LU-20, "ENGINE OIL" . Revision: March 2005 LU-23 2005 Altima OIL PUMP [VQ35DE] OIL PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:15010 EBS00J74 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" . Remove oil pump assembly. INSTALLATION ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly EBS00J75 WBIA0064E ● ● Disassemble as shown. Assembly is in the reverse order of Disassembly. When assembling the oil pump, apply engine oil to the rotors. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Clearance of Oil Pump Parts ● Measure clearance with feeler gauge. Clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 1) Standard : 0.114 - 0.200 mm (0.0045 - 0.0079 in) Tip clearance between inner rotor and outer rotor (position 2) Standard : Below 0.180 mm (0.0071 in) SLC932A Revision: March 2005 LU-24 2005 Altima OIL PUMP [VQ35DE] ● Measure clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge. Side clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body (position 3). Standard A : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) LU Side clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 4). Standard : 0.050 - 0.110 mm (0.0020 - 0.0043 in) C SLC933A D ● 1. 2. Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body as follows. Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor (position A). Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside micrometer (position B). (clearance 5) = (inner diameter of oil pump body B) – (outer diameter of inner rotor A) Standard E F : 0.045 - 0.091 mm (0.0018 - 0.0036 in) G SLC934AB H Regulator Valve 1. 2. Visually inspect components for wear and damage. Check oil pressure regulator valve sliding surface and valve spring. 3. Coat regulator valve with engine oil. Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. If damaged, replace regulator valve set or oil pump body. I J K SLC251B Regulator Valve Clearance L (Clearance 6) = D (Valve hole diameter) – E (Outer diameter of valve) Standard M : 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in) If it exceeds the standard, replace the oil pump body. CAUTION: Coat regulator valve with engine oil. Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. SLC935AA Revision: March 2005 LU-25 2005 Altima OIL PUMP [VQ35DE] ASSEMBLY ● ● Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Assemble the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punched marks on the oil pump cover side. SLC324B Revision: March 2005 LU-26 2005 Altima OIL COOLER [VQ35DE] OIL COOLER Removal and Installation PFP:21305 A EBS00J76 LU C D E F G H I J K L LBIA0348E 1. Oil filter 4. Oil inlet hose 5. Oil cooler 6. O-ring 7. Oil pan 8. Oil outlet pipe 9. Relief valve 10. Drain plug 2. Oil cooler bolt 11. Copper gasket 3. Oil inlet pipe 12. Water connector REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" . Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . ● Do not spill coolant on the drive belt. Remove the oil filter and the oil cooler. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. 2. Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly. Revision: March 2005 LU-27 2005 Altima M OIL COOLER [VQ35DE] Oil Pressure Relief Valve Inspect oil pressure relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it. INSTALLATION ● ● Installation is in reverse order of removal. When installing the oil cooler, align the oil cooler stopper with the stopper of the oil pan. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Start engine and check there are no leaks of engine oil or coolant. Revision: March 2005 LU-28 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Oil Pressure PFP:00100 A EBS00J77 Engine speed rpm Approximate discharge pressure Idle speed More than 98 (1.0, 14) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 2,000 LU 294 (3.0, 43) C Regulator Valve EBS00J78 Unit: mm (in) Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance D 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038) Oil Pump EBS00J79 Unit: mm (in) Body to outer rotor radial clearance Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance Below 0.18 (0.0071) Body to inner rotor axial clearance 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Body to outer rotor axial clearance 0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043) Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036) Oil Capacity F G EBS00J7A Unit: Drain and refill E 0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079) With oil filter change Approximately 4.2 (4 1/4, 3 3/4) Without oil filter change Approximately 4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2) Dry engine (engine overhaul) (US qt, Imp qt) H I Approximately 4.6 (4 7/8, 4) J K L M Revision: March 2005 LU-29 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE] Revision: March 2005 LU-30 2005 Altima L MAINTENANCE SECTION MA MAINTENANCE A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE ....................................... 5 Explanation of General Maintenance ....................... 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................... 7 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ....................... 7 SCHEDULE 1 ........................................................... 7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 7 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............... 9 SCHEDULE 2 ......................................................... 10 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 10 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ..............11 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 12 Fluids and Lubricants ............................................. 12 QR25DE .............................................................. 12 VQ35DE .............................................................. 13 SAE Viscosity Number ........................................... 14 GASOLINE ENGINE OIL .................................... 14 ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO ..... 14 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) ........ 15 Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 15 Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 15 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 15 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ........................ 16 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 17 Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 17 Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 18 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 18 CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER .......... 18 Changing Engine Oil .............................................. 18 Changing Oil Filter ................................................. 19 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type) ... 19 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 21 Revision: March 2005 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) ......... 22 Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 22 Changing Engine Coolant ....................................... 22 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT .......................... 22 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 23 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 24 Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 24 Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 25 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 25 CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER ................... 25 Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 25 Changing Oil Filter .................................................. 26 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type) ... 26 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 27 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ................... 28 Changing In-cabin Microfilter .................................. 28 Checking Exhaust System ...................................... 28 Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks ................. 28 Checking M/T Oil .................................................... 28 Changing M/T Oil .................................................... 29 DRAINING ........................................................... 29 FILLING ............................................................... 29 Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 30 Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 31 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type) ............. 32 REMOVAL ........................................................... 32 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ..................... 32 Tire Rotation ........................................................... 34 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks .................. 34 Checking Brake Lines and Cables ......................... 34 Checking Disc Brake .............................................. 35 ROTOR ................................................................ 35 CALIPER ............................................................. 35 PAD ..................................................................... 35 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ..................... 35 STEERING GEAR ............................................... 35 STEERING LINKAGE ......................................... 35 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines .............. 36 Axle and Suspension Parts .................................... 36 Drive Shaft .............................................................. 37 MA-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K MA M Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch ............ 37 Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors Revision: March 2005 and Adjusters ..........................................................38 MA-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ELS0014S The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. B C D E F G H I J K MA M Revision: March 2005 MA-3 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 ELS0014T The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter cap wrench Removing oil filter a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in) NT375 KV991J0010 (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant WBIA0539E KV991J0070 (J-45695) Coolant Refill Tool Refilling engine cooling system LMA053 Commercial Service Tool ELS0014U Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Description Belt tension gauge (BT-3373-F) Checking drive belt tension AMA126 Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plugs S-NT047 Power Tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: March 2005 MA-4 2005 Altima GENERAL MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE Explanation of General Maintenance PFP:00000 A ELS0014V General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform checks and inspections themselves or have their NISSAN dealers do them. B OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Item Tires Wheel nuts Check the pressure including the spare, at least once a month and always prior to a long distance trip with a gauge. Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. C Reference page WT-6, "Tire" When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. WT-5, "Rotation" Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary. GW-11, "WINDSHIELD GLASS" Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles). Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades Doors and engine hood Lamps Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. E WT-5, "Rotation" F FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" and MA-32, "Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)" G — H Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk lid and back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlamp aim. Clean the headlamps on a regular basis. LT-28, "Aiming Adjustment" INSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Item Reference page Warning lamps and chimes Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. — Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. — Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches lock securely for folding-down rear seatbacks. Seat belts Clutch pedal Revision: March 2005 DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS", DI-45, "WARNING CHIME" PS-7, "STEERING WHEEL" — Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. MA-38 Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has proper free play. CL-6, "On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment" MA-5 D 2005 Altima I J K MA M GENERAL MAINTENANCE Item Reference page Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. — Brakes Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. — Brake pedal and booster Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep the floor mats away from the pedal. BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" and BR-15, "BRAKE BOOSTER" Parking brake Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. PB-3, "Inspection" Automatic transaxle “Park” mechanism Check that the lock release button on the selector lever operates properly and smoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the “P” position without applying any brakes. — UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Item Reference page Windshield washer fluid Engine coolant level Radiator and hoses Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. Brake and clutch fluid levels Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoirs. Battery Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. — MA-16 QR25DE or MA-23 VQ35DE — MA-34 (brakes), MA-28 (clutch) — Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. MA-15 QR25DE or MA-22 VQ35DE Engine oil level Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. MA-18 QR25DE or MA-25 VQ35DE Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. MA-36 Automatic transaxle fluid level Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the engine idling. MA-30 Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. MA-28 The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt can easily accumulate. — Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and correct it immediately. — Engine drive belts Underbody Fluid leaks Revision: March 2005 MA-6 2005 Altima PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PERIODIC MAINTENANCE Introduction of Periodic Maintenance PFP:00026 A ELS0014W Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if the driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: Schedule 1 ● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. ● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. ● Driving in dusty conditions. ● Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. ● Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier. Emission Control System Maintenance MA-7 C Chassis and Body Maintenance D MA-9 E Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits. Schedule 2 F Emission Control System Maintenance MA-10 Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-11 SCHEDULE 1 Abbreviations: R = Replace. Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. H I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Air cleaner filter [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.50 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 Engine oil Revision: March 2005 Reference Section Page or Content Title NOTE (1) NOTE (2) MA18(QR25DE) or MA-25 (VQ35DE) [R] Fuel lines Engine coolant 30 (48) 24 MA15(QR25DE) or MA-22 (VQ35DE) EVAP vapor lines Fuel filter G ELS0014X EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Drive belts B I* MA-21 (QR25DE) or MA-27 (VQ35DE) I* MA17(QR25DE) or MA-24 (VQ35DE) NOTE (3) — NOTE (4) MA15(QR25DE) or MA-22 (VQ35DE) R R R MA-7 R R R R R MA-18 (QR25DE) or (VQ35DE) 2005 Altima I J K MA M PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208 9E000 (for QR25DE engine), 15208 65F01 (for VQ35DE engine) or equivalent.) 3.75 (6) 3 R Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* 7.50 (12) 6 R R 15 (24) 12 R 18.75 (30) 15 R 22.5 (36) 18 R 26.25 (42) 21 R 30 (48) 24 R MA-19 (QR25DE) or MA-26 (VQ35DE) EM-100, "Valve Clearance" (QR25DE) or EM-247, "Valve Clearance" (VQ35DE) NOTE (5) MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Reference Section Page or Content Title MA-19 (QR25DE) or MA-26 (VQ35DE) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. 11.25 (18) 9 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title I* MA-15 (QR25DE) or MA-22 (VQ35DE) [R] MA-18 (QR25DE) or MA-25 (VQ35DE) EVAP vapor lines I* MA-21 (QR25DE) or MA-27 (VQ35DE) Fuel lines I* MA-17 (QR25DE) or MA-24 (VQ35DE) Drive belts Air cleaner filter Fuel filter Engine coolant Engine oil Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-9E000 (for QR25DE engine), 15208 65F01 (for VQ35DE engine) or equivalent. Revision: March 2005 NOTE (1) NOTE (2) NOTE (3) — NOTE (4) R* MA-15 (QR25DE) or MA-22 (VQ35DE) R MA-18 (QR25DE) or MA-25 (VQ35DE) R MA-19 (QR25DE) or MA-26 (VQ35DE) R R R R MA-8 R R R R R R R R R R 2005 Altima PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 MA-19 (QR25DE) or MA-26 (VQ35DE) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). Intake & exhaust valve clearance* Reference Section Page or Content Title EM-100, "Valve Clearance" (QR25DE) or EM-247, "Valve Clearance" (VQ35DE) NOTE (5) NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading of QR25DE engine reaches the maximum limit. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to the FL section. (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. A B C D E F G H CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. 3.75 (6) 3 7.50 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 Brake lines & cables 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 Reference Section Page or Content Title I MA-34 I MA-35 I MA-31 (A/T) or MA-29 (M/T) I MA-35, MA36 I Brake pads & rotors I Automatic transaxle fluid & manual transaxle gear oil I NOTE (1) I Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts I Tire rotation I I I NOTE (2) MA-34 Exhaust system I I I I MA-28 Front drive shaft boot I I I I MA-37 R MA-28 In-cabin microfilter R MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 Brake lines & cables I Revision: March 2005 I NOTE (1) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 I Brake pads & rotors Automatic transaxle fluid & manual transaxle gear oil 45 (72) 36 I I I I NOTE (2) I 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I MA-34 I MA-35 I MA-31 (A/T) or MA-29 (M/T) I MA-35, MA-36 MA-34 MA-9 2005 Altima I J K MA M PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 Exhaust system I Front drive shaft boots I 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 In-cabin microfilter 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 I I I I 56.25 (90) 45 R 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I MA-28 I MA-37 R MA-28 NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Refer to MA-5, "GENERAL MAINTENANCE" . SCHEDULE 2 ELS0014Y EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Drive belts MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 Engine oil filter (Use part No. 15208-9E000 (for QR25DE engine), 15208 65F01 (for VQ35DE engine) or equivalent. Revision: March 2005 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 I* Fuel lines Engine oil 37.5 (60) 30 [R] EVAP vapor lines Engine coolant 30 (48) 24 NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter Fuel filter [ ]: At the mileage intervals only I* 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I* MA-15 (QR25DE) or MA-22 (VQ35DE) [R] MA-18 (QR25DE) or MA-25 (VQ35DE) I* MA-21 (QR25DE) or MA-27 (VQ35DE) I* MA-17 (QR25DE) or MA-24 (VQ35DE) NOTE (2) — NOTE (3) R* MA-15 (QR25DE) or MA-22 (VQ35DE) R MA-18 (QR25DE) or MA-25 (VQ35DE) R MA-19 (QR225DE) or MA-26 (VQ35DE) R R R R MA-10 R R R R R R R R R R 2005 Altima PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title MA-19 (QR25DE) or MA-26 (VQ35DE) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). EM-100, "CYLINDER HEAD" (QR25DE) or EM-247, "CYLINDER HEAD" (VQ35DE) NOTE (4) NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading of QR25DE engine reaches the maximum limit. (2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to FL section. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. A B C D E F G CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or Content Title Brake lines & cables I I I I MA-34 Brake pads & rotors I I I I MA-35 Automatic transaxle fluid & manual transaxle gear oil I I I I MA-30 (A/T) or MA-28 (M/T) I MA-35, MA-36 Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation I NOTE (1) I J K MA-34 Exhaust system I I MA-28 Front drive shaft boots I I I I MA-37 In-cabin microfilter R R R R MA-28 NOTE: (1) Refer to MA-5, "GENERAL MAINTENANCE" . Revision: March 2005 H MA-11 2005 Altima MA M RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids and Lubricants PFP:00000 ELS0014Z QR25DE Capacity (Approximate) Description Liter US measure Imp measure 75.6 20 gal 16 5/8 gal With oil filter change 4.2 4 1/2 qt 3 3/4 qt Without oil filter change 4.0 4 1/4 qt 3 1/2 qt Dry engine (engine overhaul) 4.6 4 7/8 qt 4 qt Cooling system 7.6 2 gal 1 5/8 gal Fuel Engine oil Drain and refill With reservoir Manual transaxle fluid (MTF) 2.2 2 3/8 qt Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) ● API Certification Mark *1 ● API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *1 ● ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II, or GFIII *1 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze / Coolant or equivalent 2 qt Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 Automatic transaxle (4A/T) fluid (ATF) 9.2 9 3/4 qt 8 1/8 qt Genuine NISSAN Matic “D” ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *2 Power steering fluid (PSF) 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *3 Brake and clutch fluids — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Brake grease — — — PBC (poly butyl cuprysil) Brake pad plate grease — — — Molykote AS880N grease Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent 0.50 ± 0.025 kg 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 5.03 fl oz 5.01 fl oz Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricant 150 m HFC-134a (R-134a) *5 NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent *5 *1: For further details, see “SAE Viscosity Number”. *2: DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III / Mercon Transmission Fluid. TM Automatic *3: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used. *4: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer. *5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”. Revision: March 2005 MA-12 2005 Altima RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS VQ35DE Liter Fuel Engine oil Drain and refill A Capacity (Approximate) Description US measure Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Imp measure 75.6 20 gal 16 5/8 gal With oil filter change 4.2 4 1/2 qt 3 3/4 qt Without oil filter change 4.0 4 1/4 qt Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91), or for improved performance an octane rating of 91 AKI (RON 96) B ● API Certification Mark *1 C ● API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API Grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *1 D ● ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II, or GFIII *1 3 1/2 qt Dry engine (engine overhaul) 4.6 4 7/8 qt 4 qt Cooling system 8.2 2 1/8 gal 1 3/4 gal Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant or equivalent E Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 F G With reservoir Manual transaxle fluid (MTF) 2.2 2 3/8 qt 2 qt Automatic transaxle (5A/T) fluid (ATF) 7.3 7 3/4 qt 6 3/8 qt Genuine NISSAN Matic “K” ATF *2 Power steering fluid (PSF) 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *3 Brake and clutch fluids — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*4 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Brake grease — — — PBC (poly butyl cuprysil) Brake pad plate grease — — — Molykote AS880N grease Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent Windshield washer fluid Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricant — — — 0.50 ± 0.025 kg 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 1.10 ± 0.055 lb 5.03 fl oz 5.01 fl oz 150 m HFC-134a (R-134a) *5 *3: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used. *4: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer. *5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”. MA-13 I J K NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent *5 *1: For further details, see “SAE Viscosity Number”. *2: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic “K” ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty. Revision: March 2005 H 2005 Altima MA M RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS SAE Viscosity Number ELS00150 GASOLINE ENGINE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy. MMA117AA ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. Protection for outside temperature down to: °C °F -35° -30° Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze / Coolant or equivalent Demineralized water or distilled water 50% 50% CAUTION: ● When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze / Coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or distilled water. ● Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. Revision: March 2005 MA-14 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) Checking Drive Belts PFP:10001 A ELS00151 B C D E F SBIA0234E WARNING: Be sure to perform engine maintenance when the engine is stopped. NOTE: On vehicles not equipped with A/C, there is an idler pulley in the position for the drive belt routing. ● Remove the under cover using power tool, when inspecting the power steering pump belt. ● Make sure that the indicator (single line notch) of each automatic tensioner is within the allowable working range (between the three line notches). NOTE: ● Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator when the engine is cold. ● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be “A”. ● Visually check the entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. ● If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . ● Belt tension adjustment is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto-tensioner. Changing Engine Coolant DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT Remove the engine undercover using power tool. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only). ● Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts. LBIA0063E Revision: March 2005 H I J K MA ELS00152 WARNING: ● To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ● Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove. 1. 2. G MA-15 2005 Altima M ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) 3. 4. 5. Follow this step for heater core removal/replacement only. Disconnect the upper heater hose at the engine side and apply moderate air pressure [103.46 kPa (15 psi, 1.055 kg/cm2 ) maximum air pressure] into the hose for 30 seconds to blow the excess coolant out of the heater core. When draining all of the coolant in the system, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before installation. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, open the drain plug on the cylinder block. KBIA0163E 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-17, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" . REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Install the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank and cylinder block drain plug, if removed for a total system drain or for engine removal or repair. ● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. ● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Radiator drain plug Cylinder block drain plug 2. 3. 4. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number 5. : KV991J0070 (J-45695) Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. ● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO". Engine coolant capacity (with reservoir tank) 6. : Refer to CO-11, "Removal and Installation" . : Refer to EM-71, "Removal and Installation" . : Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 , 80 - 120 psi) LLIA0058E Revision: March 2005 MA-16 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) 7. 8. CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level 0 - 100 m (328 ft) 300 m (984 ft) 500 m (1,641 ft) 1,000 m (3,281 ft) A B C Vacuum gauge reading : 28 inches of vacuum : 27 inches of vacuum : 26 inches of vacuum : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum D E LLIA0057E 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. F G H I FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. J Fill the radiator from the filler cap above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank, with water and reinstall the filler cap above the radiator upper hose. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. K Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. MA Drain the water. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Checking Fuel Lines ELS00153 Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improperly attached hoses, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace any damaged parts. SMA803A Revision: March 2005 MA-17 2005 Altima M ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) Changing Air Cleaner Filter ELS00154 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between specified replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" . LLIA0016E CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER 1. 2. 3. 4. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and raise the air cleaner case (upper). Remove the air cleaner filter. Install a new air cleaner filter. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Changing Engine Oil ELS00155 WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. The vehicle must be level on the hoist. 2. Warm up the engine, and check for oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait at least 10 minutes. 4. Remove the drain plug and oil filler cap. LLIA0011E 5. 6. Drain the engine oil. Install the drain plug and refill the engine with new engine oil. ● Oil specification and capacity. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Oil pan drain plug 7. 8. : Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean the drain plug and install it with a new washer. ● The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use the specifications for reference only. ● Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Warm up the engine and check the area around the drain plug and oil filter for any oil leaks. Stop the engine and wait at least 10 minutes. Revision: March 2005 MA-18 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) 9. Check the oil level. A B C PBIC0249E D Changing Oil Filter 1. ELS00156 Remove the oil filter using Tool as shown. Tool number E : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: ● The oil filter contains an internal relief valve. Use a genuine NISSAN oil filter. ● Be careful not to get burned as the engine and engine oil are hot. ● When removing the oil filter, position a shop cloth to absorb any oil leakage or spillage. ● Do not allow the engine oil to spill on the drive belts. ● Completely wipe off any oil that spills on the engine or on the vehicle. 2. F G KBIA0303E H Clean the oil filter mounting surface on the cylinder block. ● Coat the oil filter rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil as shown. I J K SMA010 3. MA Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the engine block installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn, or tighten to specification. Oil filter M : Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" . SMA229B 4. 5. Check the oil level and add engine oil as necessary. After warming up the engine, check for engine for oil leaks, correct as necessary. Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type) 1. ELS00157 Remove the engine cover using power tool. Revision: March 2005 MA-19 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) 2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" . LLIA0013E 3. 4. Remove the spark plugs. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" . Install the new spark plugs, check that the gap is within specification before installing. The gap is not adjustable, replace the spark plug as necessary. Spark plug Gap (nominal) : Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" . : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Spark Plug Types Standard type PLFR5A-11 Hot type PLFR4A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 ● ● – – ● – – ● Use the standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. The hot type spark plug is suitable (when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug) under conditions such as: frequent engine starts low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable (when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug) under conditions such as: extended highway driving frequent high engine revolution Do not use a wire brush for cleaning the spark plug electrode. SMA673B ● If the spark plug electrode is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time Revision: March 2005 : Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) : Less than 20 seconds MA-20 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) ● Checking and adjusting the spark plug gap is not required between change intervals, replace the spark plug as necessary. A B C SMA806CA D 5. Install the ignition coils. Ignition coil bolt : Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" . Checking EVAP Vapor Lines 1. 2. E ELS00158 Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging and sticking. F G H I J K MA M Revision: March 2005 MA-21 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) Checking Drive Belts PFP:10001 ELS00159 LBIA0076E WARNING: Inspect and check drive belts with the engine off. 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one. 2. Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway between pulleys. 3. Rotate the crankshaft pulley two times then check the drive belt tension using Tool. Tool number : — (BT-3373-F) NOTE: Inspect the drive belt deflection and tension when the engine is cold. ● Adjust if the belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. ● Belt Deflection and Tension Deflection adjustment Tension adjustment* Used belt Description After adjustment Alternator, Air conditioner compressor oil pump 7.0 (0.28) 4.2 - 4.6 (0.17 - 0.18) Power steering oil pump 11.0 (0.43) 7.3 - 8.0 (0.29 - 0.31) Unit: N (kg, lb) Used belt New belt Limit Applied pushing force Unit: mm (in) After adjustment New belt Limit 3.7 - 4.1 (0.15 - 0.16) 294 (30, 66) 730 -818 (74.5 - 83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.5 - 94.5, 188 - 208) 6.5 - 7.2 0.26 - 0.28) 196 (20, 44) 495 - 583 (50.5 - 59.5, 111 - 131) 603 - 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.4) 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) — *: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt. Changing Engine Coolant ELS0015A WARNING: ● To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ● Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Remove engine undercover, using power tools. Revision: March 2005 MA-22 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial cooling system drain. If removing the heater core, remove the upper heater hose from the engine coolant outlet and apply moderate air pressure of 15 psi (103.46 kPa, 1.055 kg-cm2 ) maximum for 30 seconds into the hose to blow out excess coolant from the core. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before installation. LBIA0063E ● Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts. When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair), remove the cylinder block front drain plug and the cylinder block RH drain plug. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. ● If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-24, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" . A B C D E REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain plugs. ● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. ● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Radiator drain plug Cylinder block front drain plug Cylinder block RH drain plug 2. 3. 4. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. ● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO" . 7. K M : Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 , 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: LLIA0058E The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Revision: March 2005 J MA Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure I : KV991J0070 (J-45695) Engine coolant capacity (with reservoir tank) 6. G H If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number 5. : Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" . : Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" . : Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" . F MA-23 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) 8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level 0 - 100 m (328 ft) 300 m (984 ft) 500 m (1,641 ft) 1,000 m (3,281 ft) Vacuum gauge reading : 28 inches of vacuum : 27 inches of vacuum : 26 inches of vacuum : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum LLIA0057E 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and reinstall radiator filler cap. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. Drain the water from the system. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Checking Fuel Lines ELS0015B Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improper hose attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts. SMA803A Revision: March 2005 MA-24 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) Changing Air Cleaner Filter ELS0015C VISCOUS PAPER TYPE A The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" . B C D LLIA0016E CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER 1. 2. 3. 4. Changing Engine Oil Oil pan drain plug F ELS0015D WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Position the vehicle so it is level on the hoist. 2. Warm up the engine, and check for oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait at least 10 minutes. 4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain the engine oil. 6. Install the oil drain plug and refill the engine with new engine oil. Oil Specification and Capacity ● Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . 7. 8. 9. E Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and lift up the air cleaner case (upper). Remove the air cleaner filter. Install a new air cleaner filter. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I J SMA096D K MA : Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean the drain plug and install using a new washer. ● The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ● Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Warm up the engine and check the oil drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks. Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes. Check engine oil level. SMA954C Revision: March 2005 MA-25 2005 Altima M ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) Changing Oil Filter 1. ELS0015E Remove the oil filter using Tool as shown. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter. ● Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. ● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil leakage or spillage. ● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ● Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. ● 2. SMA097D Clean oil filter mounting surface on cylinder block. ● Coat rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil. SMA010 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the engine block installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn, or tighten to specification. Oil filter : Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" . SMA229B 4. 5. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks, correct as necessary. Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ELS0015F Remove the engine cover using power tool. Remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-130, "REMOVAL" . Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-144, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the spark plugs. Refer to EM-145, "Removal and Installation" . Install the new spark plugs. Check the gap before installing the new spark, the gap is not adjustable, replace the spark plug as necessary. Spark plug Gap (nominal) : Refer to EM-145, "Removal and Installation" . : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Spark Plug Types Standard type PLFR5A-11 Hot type PLFR4A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 ● Use the standard type spark plugs for normal driving conditions. Revision: March 2005 MA-26 2005 Altima ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) ● – – ● – – ● The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: frequent engine starts low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: extended highway driving frequent high engine revolution Do not use a wire brush for cleaning the spark plug tip. A B C D E F SMA673B ● G If the spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure : Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) Cleaning time : Less than 20 seconds ● H Checking and adjusting the spark plug gap is not required between change intervals, replace the spark plug as necessary. I J K SMA806CA 6. MA Install the ignition coils. Ignition coil bolt : Refer to EM-144, "Removal and Installation" . Checking EVAP Vapor Lines 1. 2. ELS0015G Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, and sticking. Revision: March 2005 MA-27 2005 Altima M CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Changing In-cabin Microfilter PFP:00100 ELS0015H 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the glove box pins. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Press in the sides of the glove box door to release the glove box door from the glove box housing. Disconnect the glove box damper cord to remove the glove box door. Disengage the two filter cover tabs to remove the filter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilter from the blower unit. Install the new in-cabin microfilter into the blower unit. CAUTION: ● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow in the correct orientation. ● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow side of the filter facing the rear of the vehicle. 7. Install the filter cover on the blower unit. LJIA0013E 8. Connect the glove box damper cord to the glove box door. 9. Press in the sides of the glove box door to install the glove box door into the glove box housing. 10. Install the glove box pins. Checking Exhaust System ELS0015I Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and exhaust mounts for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, chafing, or deterioration. SMA211A Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks ELS0015J If the clutch fluid level is extremely low or below the “MIN” level in the reservoir, check the clutch system for leaks. SMA449C Checking M/T Oil 1. 2. ELS0015K Check for any oil leaks. Remove the speedometer pinion gear. Revision: March 2005 MA-28 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 3. Measure the oil level using a suitable gauge as shown. Check that the oil level is at specification “L”. Add oil as necessary through the opening for the speedometer pinion gear. Oil level “L” A : 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in) B CAUTION: Never start the engine while checking the oil level. C SMT512C D 4. Install a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, and install the speedometer pinion gear in the transaxle case. Speedometer pinion gear bolt : Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" (RS5F51A), MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" (RS6F51A). F CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. Changing M/T Oil ELS0015L DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle. Stop the engine. Drain the oil by removing the drain plug. Install a new gasket on the drain plug and install the drain plug in the transaxle case. Drain plug E G H : Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" (RS5F51A), MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" (RS6F51A). I CAUTION: Do not reuse the gasket. J FILLING 1. Remove the speedometer pinion gear and fill the transaxle with new gear oil through the opening for the speedometer pinion gear. Oil grade and capacity 2. : Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . MA Check the oil level using a suitable gauge as shown. Check that the oil level is at specification “L”. Add oil as necessary through the opening for the speedometer pinion gear. Oil level “L” : 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in) M CAUTION: Never start the engine while checking the oil level. SMT512C 3. Install a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, and install the speedometer pinion gear in to the transaxle case. Speedometer pinion gear bolt : Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" (RS5F51A), MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" (RS6F51A). CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. Revision: March 2005 K MA-29 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking A/T Fluid 1. 2. 3. ELS0015M Warm up the engine. Check for any transaxle fluid leaks. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the “COLD” range on the A/T fluid level gauge. 4 A/T temperature range COLD : 30° – 50° C (86° – 122° F) HOT : 50° – 80° C (122° – 176° F) 5 A/T temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) WLIA0013E WLIA0014E a. b. c. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake. Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the “P” park position. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. CAUTION: Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge. WLIA0008E LLIA0065E d. e. f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the reading is at or below the low side of the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and then re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge. Revision: March 2005 MA-30 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 4. 5. CAUTION: ● Do not overfill the transaxle. ● Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the “HOT” range on the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. A B C D E WLIA0013E F 4 A/T temperature range COLD : 30° – 50° C (86° – 122° F) HOT : 50° – 80° C (122° – 176° F) 5 A/T temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) G H I WLIA0014E 6. ● ● Check the fluid for the following conditions: If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the AT section for checking the operation of the transaxle. Flush the AT fluid cooling system after repairing the transaxle. If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to the transaxle. Refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" (QR25DE) CO-30, "RADIATOR" (VQ35DE). J K MA SMA853B Changing A/T Fluid 1. ELS0015N Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature “HOT”. 4 A/T temperature range COLD : 30° – 50° C (86° – 122° F) HOT : 50° – 80° C (122° – 176° F) 5 A/T temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) 2. 3. Stop the engine. Remove the engine undercover. Revision: March 2005 MA-31 2005 Altima M CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 4. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer. Drain plug 4 A/T : Refer to AT-273, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 5 A/T : Refer to AT-624, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . WLIA0009E LLIA0066E 5. Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. Fluid grade and capacity 6. 7. : Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If the fluid is still contaminated, repeat step 2 through 5. Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type) ELS0015O REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the inner and outer balance weights from the road wheel. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. Use a releasing agent to remove the double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. ● After removing the double-faced adhesive tape, wipe off any traces of the releasing agent from the road wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT NOTE: If a tire balance machine has an adhesion balance weight mode setting and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust in the drive-in weight mode suitable for the road wheels. 1. Set the road wheel on the wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. Revision: March 2005 MA-32 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 2. a. b. When the inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value, then install it at the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle position on the road wheel. Outer balance weight calculation: Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = outer balance weight Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) outer balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) SMA054D NOTE: The selected balance weight value must be the closest balance weight available to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 = 35 g (1.23 oz) 37.5 = 40 g (1.41 oz) CAUTION: ● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the road wheel. A B C D E F G Install the balance weight in the position as shown. When installing the balance weight to the road wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown, so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ● Always use genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight. H I J K MA M SMA055D c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. SMA056D 3. Start the wheel balancer. Revision: March 2005 MA-33 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 4. 5. Install the drive-in balance weight on the inner side of the road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights in one position (angle). Start the wheel balancer. Make sure that the inner and outer residual unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or less. ● If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat the installation procedures. Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Unbalance) Dynamic (at rim flange) Maximum allowable unbalance Static 10 g (0.35 oz) Tire Rotation ● ● ● 5 g (0.18 oz) (one side) ELS0015P Do not include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires. After rotating the tires as shown, adjust the tire pressure to specification. Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven the first 1,000 km (600 miles). Also retighten the wheel nuts after a flat tire repair, or any type of service where the wheels have been removed and installed. Wheel nut : 98.1 - 117 N·m (10 - 12 kg-m, 73 - 86 ft-lb) SMA829C Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks ● ● ● ELS0015Q Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir tank. If the brake fluid level is extremely low or below the “MIN” level, check the brake system for leaks. Release the parking brake lever and check that the brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check the brake system for leaks. LFIA0096E Checking Brake Lines and Cables ELS0015R Check the brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, and damage. Repair or replace parts as necessary. SBR389C Revision: March 2005 MA-34 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking Disc Brake ELS0015S ROTOR A Check the rotor condition and thickness using a suitable tool as shown. Resurface or replace the rotor as necessary. Refer to BR-40, "Disc Brake" . B C D SMA260A CALIPER E Check the caliper for leakage. F G H SMA922A PAD I Check the brake pads for damage or wear as shown. Refer to BR40, "Disc Brake" . J K BRA0010D Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ELS0015T STEERING GEAR ● ● ● M Check the gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and power steering fluid leaks. Check the power steering hose connections for leaks. Check the steering column for looseness. WGIA0004E STEERING LINKAGE Check the ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage. Revision: March 2005 MA MA-35 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines ELS0015U Check the power steering fluid level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Use the “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° 176°F) or the “COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° 86°F). CAUTION: ● Do not overfill the power steering reservoir tank. LGIA0021E ● ● ● Use the specified power steering fluid. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Check the power steering hoses for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. Check the steering rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating an internal leak. WGIA0004E Axle and Suspension Parts ELS0015V Check the front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear, or other damage. ● Shake each wheel as shown to check for excessive play. ● Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise. SMA525A ● Check the strut mount nuts for looseness. SMA614 Revision: March 2005 MA-36 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ● Check the axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness. A B C LLIA0019E D ● ● Check the struts for oil leakage or other damage. Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. E F G SFA392B Drive Shaft ● ELS0015W H Check the boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and grease leakage as shown. I J K SFA108A Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch ELS0015X MA M LLIA0017E Revision: March 2005 MA-37 2005 Altima CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters ELS0015Y LLIA0022E Revision: March 2005 MA-38 2005 Altima C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SECTION MT MANUAL TRANSAXLE A B MT D E CONTENTS RS5F51A PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Caution ..................................................................... 4 PREPARATION ........................................................... 5 Special Service Tools ............................................... 5 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 8 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 8 DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 9 Cross-sectional View ................................................ 9 DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER .................... 10 TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER ...................... 10 REVERSE GEAR ................................................ 10 M/T OIL ......................................................................11 Replacement ...........................................................11 DRAINING ............................................................11 FILLING ................................................................11 Checking .................................................................11 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ..........................11 SIDE OIL SEAL ........................................................ 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 12 INSTALLATION ................................................... 12 POSITION SWITCH .................................................. 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 Checking ................................................................ 13 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH .................................. 13 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ............... 13 CONTROL LINKAGE ............................................... 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 Cable Adjustment ................................................... 15 AIR BREATHER HOSE ............................................ 16 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ........................................ 17 Removal and Installation ........................................ 17 REMOVAL ........................................................... 17 INSTALLATION ................................................... 19 Component Parts ................................................... 20 CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS ............. 20 Revision: March 2005 GEAR COMPONENTS ....................................... 21 SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS ..................... 23 FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS ........................... 24 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 24 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 24 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 28 Adjustment .............................................................. 34 INPUT SHAFT END PLAY .................................. 34 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ...... 35 MAINSHAFT END PLAY ..................................... 36 REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY .................. 37 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS .................................... 39 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 39 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 39 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 40 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 42 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS ....................................... 47 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 47 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 47 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 48 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 51 REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS .................. 56 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 56 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 56 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 56 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 57 FINAL DRIVE ............................................................ 58 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 58 PRE-INSPECTION .............................................. 58 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 58 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 59 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 59 SHIFT CONTROL ..................................................... 62 Inspection ............................................................... 62 SHIFT FORK ....................................................... 62 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 63 General Specifications ............................................ 63 TRANSAXLE ....................................................... 63 FINAL GEAR ....................................................... 64 Gear End Play ........................................................ 64 MT-1 2005 Altima F G H I J K L M Baulk Ring Clearance ............................................. 64 Available Snap Rings .............................................. 65 INPUT SHAFT SPACER ..................................... 65 5TH MAIN GEAR ................................................. 65 Available C-Rings ................................................... 65 MAINSHAFT C-RING .......................................... 65 Available Thrust Washer ......................................... 65 INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER ..................... 65 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHER ... 66 Available Adjusting Shims ...................................... 66 MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM ........................ 66 INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM .................................................................... 66 MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM .................................................................... 67 REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIMS ... 67 Available Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shims ...................................................... 67 BEARING PRELOAD .......................................... 67 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS ................................................................. 67 RS6F51A PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 68 Caution ................................................................... 68 PREPARATION ......................................................... 69 Special Service Tools ............................................. 69 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 71 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 72 NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 72 DESCRIPTION .......................................................... 73 Cross-sectional View .............................................. 73 DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER .................... 74 TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER ....................... 74 REVERSE GEAR ................................................ 74 M/T OIL ...................................................................... 75 Replacement .......................................................... 75 DRAINING ........................................................... 75 FILLING ............................................................... 75 Checking ................................................................. 75 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ......................... 75 SIDE OIL SEAL ......................................................... 76 Removal and Installation ........................................ 76 REMOVAL ........................................................... 76 INSTALLATION .................................................... 76 POSITION SWITCH .................................................. 77 Checking ................................................................. 77 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ................................... 77 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ................ 77 CONTROL LINKAGE ................................................ 78 Removal and Installation of Control Device and Cable ...................................................................... 78 AIR BREATHER HOSE ............................................. 80 Removal and Installation ........................................ 80 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ........................................ 81 Removal and Installation ........................................ 81 Revision: March 2005 REMOVAL ............................................................81 INSTALLATION ....................................................83 Component Parts ....................................................84 CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS ..............84 GEAR COMPONENTS ........................................85 SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS .....................87 FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS ............................88 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................88 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................88 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................92 Adjustment ..............................................................99 INPUT SHAFT END PLAY ...................................99 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ..... 100 MAINSHAFT END PLAY .................................... 101 REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY ................ 102 INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS ................................... 104 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 104 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 104 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 105 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 107 MAINSHAFT AND GEARS ..................................... 112 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 112 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 112 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 113 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 115 REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS ................ 121 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 121 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 121 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 121 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 122 FINAL DRIVE .......................................................... 123 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 123 PRE-INSPECTION ............................................ 123 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 123 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 124 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 124 SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 127 Inspection .............................................................. 127 SHIFT FORK ...................................................... 127 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 128 General Specifications .......................................... 128 TRANSAXLE ...................................................... 128 FINAL GEAR ...................................................... 129 Gear End Play ....................................................... 129 Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear ............ 129 4TH, 5TH, 6TH & REVERSE BAULK RING ...... 129 1ST, 2ND AND 3RD BAULK RING .................... 130 Available Snap Rings ............................................ 130 6TH BUSHING ................................................... 130 Available C-rings ................................................... 130 MAINSHAFT C-RING ........................................ 130 Available Thrust Washers ..................................... 131 INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER ................... 131 Available Adjusting Shims ..................................... 131 MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM ....................... 131 INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM .................................................................. 131 MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM .................................................................. 132 MT-2 2005 Altima REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM ... 132 6TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM ............... 132 Available Shims .................................................... 132 BEARING PRELOAD ........................................ 132 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM(S) ............................................................. 132 A B MT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 MT-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RS5F51A] PRECAUTIONS Caution ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 ECS0093X Do not reuse transaxle oil, properly dispose of it after it has been drained out. Check the oil level or replace the oil only with the vehicle parked on level ground. During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clear of dust or dirt. Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If mating marks are required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied. In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, use it. Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces. Revision: March 2005 MT-4 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RS5F51A] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS0093Y The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV381054S0 (J-34286) Puller ● Removing side bearing outer race ● Removing mainshaft front bearing MT D ZZA0601D ST35321000 ( — ) Drift ZZA1000D ST30720000 (J-25405) Drift E ● Installing input shaft oil seal ● Installing reverse main gear ● Installing 1st bushing ● Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub ● Installing 2nd bushing ● Installing 3rd main gear F G a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. ● Installing differential oil seal ● Installing differential side bearing outer race ● Installing mainshaft rear bearing ● Installing differential side bearing H I a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. ZZA0811D ST33200000 (J-26082) Drift ● Installing mainshaft front bearing ● Installing 4th main gear ● Installing 5th main gear K a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. L ZZA1002D ST33061000 (J-8107-2) Drift ● Installing bore plug ● Removing differential side bearing M a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. ZZA1000D ST33052000 ( — ) Drift ● Installing welch plug ● Removing input shaft rear bearing ● Removing input shaft bearing spacer and 5th stopper ● Removing 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th gear bushing, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd input gear ● Installing input shaft front bearing ● Removing mainshaft rear bearing ● Removing 4th main gear and 5th main gear ZZA1023D a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. Revision: March 2005 MT-5 J 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RS5F51A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV40105020 ( — ) Drift ZZA1133D KV40105710 ( — ) Press stand ZZA1058D ST38220000 ( — ) Press stand ● Removing 5th input gear and synchronizer hub ● Removing 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub, 1st main gear, reverse main gear and 1st bushing a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia. b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. c: 15 mm (0.59 in). ● Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub ● Installing 4th bushing ● Installing 5th bushing ● Installing 5th synchronizer hub ● Installing 2nd bushing ● Installing 3rd main gear a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in). ● Installing reverse main gear ● Installing 1st bushing ● Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub a: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in). ZZA1058D ST30032000 (J-26010-01) Drift ● Installing 5th stopper and input shaft bearing spacer ● Installing input shaft front bearing a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. c: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia. ZZA0978D ST30901000 (J-26010-01) Drift ZZA0978D ST30031000 (J-22912-01) Puller ● Installing input shaft rear bearing ● Installing 4th main gear ● Installing 5th main gear ● Installing mainshaft rear bearing a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia. Measuring wear of 1st and 2nd baulk ring ZZA0537D KV40101630 (J-35870) Drift Installing reverse main gear a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. ZZA1003D Revision: March 2005 MT-6 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RS5F51A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name A Description KV38102510 ( — ) Drift ● Installing 1st bushing ● Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub ● Installing differential side bearing B a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. MT ZZA0838D — (J-39713) Preload adapter Checking differential side gear end play D E NT087 F Commercial Service Tools ECS0093Z Tool name Description Puller Removing each bearing gear and bushing G H I ZZB0823D Puller Removing each bearing gear and bushing J K NT077 Pin punch Removing and installing each retaining pin Tip diameter: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia. L M ZZA0815D Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: March 2005 MT-7 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [RS5F51A] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 ECS00940 Jumps out of gear Revision: March 2005 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 MT-8 MT-62 1 Insert Spring (Damaged) 1 2 MT-40 Hard to shift or will not shift 2 Baulk Ring (Worn or damaged) MT-40 Check Plug Return Spring and Check Ball (Worn or damaged) 1 MT-40 MT-14 Shift Control Linkage (Worn) 3 Bearing (Worn or damaged) MT-11 O-Ring (Worn or damaged) Oil leakage MT-40 MT-11 Oil Seal (Worn or damaged) 2 MT-62 MT-11 Gasket (Damaged) 1 Gear (Worn or damaged) Symptoms (Wrong oil) Noise (Oil level is low.) Suspected Parts (Possible cause) Shift Fork (Worn) MA-28, "Checking M/T Oil" (Oil level is high.) Reference page GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" MA-28, "Checking M/T Oil" Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. 2 3 3 2005 Altima DESCRIPTION [RS5F51A] DESCRIPTION Cross-sectional View PFP:00000 A ECS00941 B MT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0342E Revision: March 2005 MT-9 2005 Altima DESCRIPTION [RS5F51A] DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER Double-cone synchronizer is adopted for 1st and 3rd gears to reduce operating force of the shift lever. TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER Triple cone synchronizer is adopted for 2nd gear to reduce operating force of the shift lever. PCIB0774E REVERSE GEAR See figure for description of reverse gear components. SCIA0751E Revision: March 2005 MT-10 2005 Altima M/T OIL [RS5F51A] M/T OIL Replacement PFP:KLD20 A ECS00942 DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle oil. Stop the engine. Remove drain plug and drain oil. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it in transaxle case. Drain plug B : 30 - 39 N·m (3.1 - 4.0 kg-m, 23 - 28 ft-lb) MT CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. D FILLING 1. Remove speedometer pinion gear. Fill the transaxle with new oil. Oil grade and capacity 2. E : Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in transaxle case. Speedometer pinion gear F : 4.9 - 6.8 N·m (0.5 - 0.7 kg-m, 43 - 61 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. G Checking ECS00943 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ● ● ● H Check that oil is not leaking from transaxle. Remove speedometer pinion gear. Measure oil level using suitable gauge as shown, and check if "L" is within the specifications. Oil level “L” I : 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in) CAUTION: Never start engine while checking oil level. J K SMT512C ● L Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in transaxle case. Speedometer pinion gear : 4.9 - 6.8 N·m (0.5 - 0.7 kg-m, 43 - 61 in-lb) M CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. Revision: March 2005 MT-11 2005 Altima SIDE OIL SEAL [RS5F51A] SIDE OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:32113 ECS00944 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the drive shaft from the transaxle case. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the transaxle case surface when removing the oil seal. WCIA0023E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Using Tool, drive the oil seal straight in until it protrudes from the transaxle case end equal to dimension “A” as shown. Dimension “A” Tool number : Within 0.5 mm (0.02 in) flush with case. : ST30720000 (J-25405) CAUTION: ● Before installing oil seals, apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. ● Do not reuse oil seals. ● SCIA1010E Check the transaxle oil level after installation. Refer to MT-11, "Checking" . Revision: March 2005 MT-12 2005 Altima POSITION SWITCH [RS5F51A] POSITION SWITCH Removal and Installation PFP:32005 A ECS00945 Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" . B Checking ECS00946 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ● Check continuity. MT Gear position Continuity Reverse Yes Except reverse No D E SCIA0708E F PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ● Check continuity. Gear position Continuity Neutral Yes Except neutral No G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 MT-13 2005 Altima CONTROL LINKAGE [RS5F51A] CONTROL LINKAGE Removal and Installation PFP:34103 ECS00947 WCIA0203E 1. Snap pin 2. Washer 3. Cable 4. Manual lever 5. Shift cable 6. Lock plate 7. Control device assembly 8. Lock plate 9. Select cable 10. Shift cable Revision: March 2005 11. Control lever knob MT-14 12. Control lever 2005 Altima CONTROL LINKAGE [RS5F51A] 13. Control device assembly 14. Cover plate 15. Select cable 16. Floor pan 17. Control lever 18. Shift cable 19. Washer 20. Clutch housing 21. Cable mounting bracket 22. Select cable 23. Shift cable 24. Lock plate A B 25. Lock plate CAUTION: ● Note that the select side lock plate for securing the control cable is different from the one on the MT shift side. ● After assembly, make sure selector lever automatically returns to Neutral when it is moved to 1st, 2nd, or Reverse. D Cable Adjustment ECS00948 NOTE: After installation of the select cable, the cable must be adjusted for proper operation. This adjustment is performed before installing the interior console and shift boot. 1. Slide clip “B” from under clip “A” as shown. E F G H LCIA0303E I 2. 3. Shift the control lever to the neutral position. CAUTION: Do not move the control lever when adjusting the cables. Push clip “A” into the cable end case until it snaps into place as shown. J K L M LCIA0304E 4. Slide clip “B” back over clip “A” until it snaps into place and holds clip “A” in place as shown. LCIA0305E Revision: March 2005 MT-15 2005 Altima AIR BREATHER HOSE [RS5F51A] AIR BREATHER HOSE Removal and Installation PFP:31098 ECS00949 Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation information. QR25DE Engine LCIA0033E VQ35DE Engine LCIA0034E CAUTION: ● Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or twisting when installing it. ● Be sure to insert hose into the transaxle tube until overlap area reaches the spool. Revision: March 2005 MT-16 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:32010 A ECS0094A B MT D E F G H I WCIA0194E J REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-120, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE). Remove the battery tray and battery. Remove air breather hose from the transaxle. Remove the clutch operating cylinder and position it aside without disconnecting the hydraulic lines. Refer to CL-11, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Do not depress clutch pedal during removal procedure. Remove the two shift cables from the transaxle. Refer to MT-14, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect and remove the harnesses for the back-up lamp switch and ground straps. Remove the starter motor using power tool. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . Raise vehicle and remove the engine undercover and splash shields using power tool. Drain the gear oil from the transaxle. Refer to MT-11, "Replacement" . Disconnect and remove the harnesses for: ● Vehicle speed sensor ● PNP switch ● Crankshaft position sensor Remove the bolt and heated oxygen sensor harness clamp bracket, then remove the crankshaft position sensor. Remove the exhaust front tube using power tool. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EX-7, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE). Remove the drive shafts using power tool. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 MT-17 2005 Altima K L M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 14. Lower vehicle, then install a suitable engine slinger on the front of the left bank cylinder head, and on the rear of the right bank cylinder head as shown. SEM807G SEM808G 15. Support the engine using an engine support fixture or suitable tool. 16. Remove the five upper bolts that mount the transaxle to the engine using power tool. 17. Disconnect the LH transaxle mounting insulator using power tool. 18. Raise vehicle, then remove front suspension member, LH engine insulator, and LH engine mount bracket. Refer to EM-71, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-219, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE). 19. Place a suitable jack support under the transaxle. CAUTION: When setting the jack, be careful not to bring it into contact with the switches. 20. Remove the five lower bolts that mount the transaxle to the engine using power tool. 21. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle. Revision: March 2005 MT-18 MTD0062D 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing the transaxle to the engine, use the specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence shown below: B CAUTION: When installing the transaxle, do not allow the transaxle input shaft to make contact with the clutch cover. MT QR engine models: Bolt No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Bolt length “ ” mm (in) 40 (1.57) 82 (3.2 3) 47 (1.8 5) 47 (1.8 5) 52 (2.0 5) 40 (1.5 7) 40 (1.5 7) 40 (1.5 7) 30 (1.1 8) 30 (1.1 8) Tightening torque N·m (kgm, ft-lb) 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29) D E 70 - 80 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 59) 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29) F G H I LCIA0036E J VQ engine models: Bolt No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 K Bolt length “ ” mm (in) 52 (2.05 ) 113 (4.4 5) 113 (4.4 5) 52 (2.0 5) 52 (2.0 5) 52 (2.0 5) 40 (1.5 7) 40 (1.5 7) 40 (1.5 7) 40 (1.5 7) L Tightening torque N·m (kgm, ft-lb) ● 70 - 80 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 59) M 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29) After installation, check oil level, and look for leaks and loose mechanisms. LCIA0037E Revision: March 2005 MT-19 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] Component Parts ECS0094B CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS WCIA0430E 1. Differential oil seal 2. Ball pin 3. Washer 4. Back-up lamp switch 5. Oil gutter 6. Baffle plate 7. Transaxle case 8. Filler plug 9. Gasket 10. Welch plug 11. Bore plug 12. Drain plug 13. Gasket 14. Differential oil seal 15. Park/Neutral position switch 16. Air breather tube 17. Input shaft oil seal 18. Oil channel 19. Magnet 20. Clutch housing 21. Speedometer pinion gear 22. O-ring Revision: March 2005 MT-20 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] GEAR COMPONENTS A B MT D E F G H WCIA0431E 1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. Needle bearing 4. 3rd input gear 5. 3rd inner baulk ring 6. 3rd gear synchronizer cone 7. 3rd outer baulk ring 8. Spread spring 9. 3rd and 4th synchronizer hub 10. 3rd and 4th shifting insert 11. 4th baulk ring 12. 3rd and 4th coupling sleeve 13. Bushing 14. Needle bearing 15. 4th input gear 16. Thrust washer 17. Bushing 18. Needle bearing 19. 5th input gear 20. 5th baulk ring 21. 5th shifting insert 22. 5th synchronizer hub 23. 5th coupling sleeve 24. 5th stopper 25. Input shaft bearing spacer 26. Snap ring 27. Input shaft rear bearing 28. Oil channel 29. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim 30. Lock pin L Reverse idler shaft 32. Thrust needle bearing 33. Needle bearing 34. Reverse idler gear (front) 35. Reverse baulk ring 36. Reverse coupling sleeve 37. Insert spring 38. Reverse idler gear (rear) 3rd gear synchronizer cone 39. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim 3rd outer baulk ring MT-21 J K 31. Revision: March 2005 I 2005 Altima M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] SCIA0386E 1. Mainshaft front bearing 2. Mainshaft bearing retainer 3. Mainshaft 4. Reverse main gear 5. 1st main gear 6. Bushing 7. Needle bearing 8. 1st inner baulk ring 9. 1st gear synchronizer cone 10. 1st outer baulk ring 11. Spread spring 12. 1st & 2nd shifting insert 13. 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub 14. 2nd outer baulk ring 15. 2nd gear synchronizer cone 16. 2nd inner baulk ring 17. 1st & 2nd coupling sleeve 18. Bushing 19. Needle bearing 20. 2nd main gear 21. 3rd main gear 22. 3rd & 4th mainshaft spacer 23. 4th main adjusting shim 24. 4th main gear 25. 5th main gear 26. Snap ring 27. Mainshaft rear bearing 28. Mainshaft C-ring 29. C-ring holder 30. Snap ring 31. Snap ring 32. Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim Revision: March 2005 MT-22 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS A B MT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0260E 1. Stopper ring 2. 5th & reverse bracket 3. 4. Shifter cap 5. Reverse shift fork 6. Reverse lever assembly Reverse fork rod 7. Check plug 8. Check spring 9. Shift check sleeve 10. Check ball 11. 3rd & 4th fork rod 12. 5th and reverse fork rod 13. 5th shift fork 14. Retaining pin 15. Stopper bolt 16. Shift check 17. Control rod assembly 18. O-ring 19. 1st and 2nd fork rod 20. Interlock pin 21. 1st and 2nd bracket 22. 1st and 2nd shift fork 23. 3rd and 4th shift fork 24. 3rd and 4th bracket Revision: March 2005 MT-23 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS WCIA0208E 1. Differential side bearing outer race 2. Differential side bearing 3. Speedometer drive gear 4. Differential case 5. Final gear 6. Differential side bearing 7. Differential side bearing outer race 8. Differential side bearing adjusting shim 9. Pinion mate shaft 10. Side gear 11. Side gear thrust washer 13. Pinion mate gear washer 14. Retaining pin Disassembly and Assembly 12. Pinion mate gear ECS0094C DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove drain plug and filler plug. Remove park/neutral position switch and back-up lamp switch. SCIA0389E 3. After removing shift check and stopper bolt, remove control assembly. Revision: March 2005 MT-24 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 4. Remove check plugs (3 pieces), check springs (3 pieces), check balls (3 pieces) and shift check sleeve (1 piece). A B MT SCIA0396E D 5. Remove transaxle case bolts. E F G SCIA0983E 6. Remove the bore plug. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case. 7. While spreading the snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing located at bore plug hole, remove transaxle case. 8. Remove the oil gutter and baffle plate. 9. Remove snap ring, mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim and input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case. 10. Remove differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case side) and then adjust shim. Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) H I J K L M WCIA0270E 11. Remove welch plug. SCIA0402E Revision: March 2005 MT-25 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 12. Remove differential oil seal. SCIA0397E 13. Remove magnet from clutch housing. 14. With shift lever in 5th position, remove bracket bolts from reverse lever assembly. Lift reverse lever assembly to remove. CAUTION: Be careful not to lose shifter cap. SCIA0390E 15. Pull out reverse fork rod then remove reverse shift fork. 16. Shift 3rd & 4th fork rod to 3rd position. Remove retaining pin of 5th shift fork using pin punch. SCIA0391E 17. Remove stopper rings for 5th & reverse bracket. SCIA0392E 18. Pull out 5th & reverse fork rod and remove 5th shift fork and 5th & reverse bracket. 19. Remove check balls (2 pieces) and interlock pin. Revision: March 2005 MT-26 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 20. Remove retaining pin of 3rd & 4th bracket using pin punch. A B MT SCIA0393E D 21. 22. 23. 24. Remove stopper rings for 3rd & 4th shift fork. Pull out 3rd & 4th fork rod and remove 3rd & 4th shift fork and bracket. Remove shift check sleeve from clutch housing. Remove retaining pin of 1st & 2nd shift fork using pin punch. E F G H SCIA0394E 25. 26. 27. 28. a. Pull out 1st & 2nd with bracket. Remove 1st & 2nd shift fork. Remove retaining pin of 1st & 2nd bracket using pin punch and separate 1st & 2nd fork rod and bracket. Remove gear components from clutch housing in the following procedure. While tapping input shaft with plastic hammer, remove input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly and reverse idler gear assembly as a set. CAUTION: Always withdraw mainshaft straight out. Failure to do so can damage resin oil channel on clutch housing side. SCIA0395E b. Remove final drive assembly. 29. Remove the mainshaft bearing retainer and then the mainshaft front bearing. Tool number :KV381054S0 (J-34286) WCIA0271E 30. Remove the oil channel on the mainshaft side. 31. Remove the differential oil seal (clutch housing side). Revision: March 2005 MT-27 2005 Altima I J K L M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 32. Remove differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing side). Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) WCIA0272E 33. Remove input shaft oil seal. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage clutch housing. SCIA0398E ASSEMBLY 1. Using a drift, install a new input shaft oil seal from the clutch housing end of side to the depth of 1.8 - 2.8 mm (0.071 - 0.110 in). CAUTION: Oil seals are not reusable. SCIA1022E 2. Using a drift, install a new differential oil seal. CAUTION: Oil seals are not reusable. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) WCIA0273E 3. Install oil channel on mainshaft side as shown. CAUTION: Use the correct orientation for installation as shown. SCIA0986E Revision: March 2005 MT-28 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 4. Using a drift, install mainshaft front bearing. CAUTION: Use the correct orientation for installation as shown. Tool number A : ST33200000 (J-26082) B MT WCIA0274E 5. Install bearing retainer. CAUTION: Install with the punched surface facing up. D E F G SCIA0400E 6. Install differential side bearing outer race. Tool number H : ST30720000 (J-25405) I J WCIA0275E 7. K Install final drive assembly into clutch housing. L M SCIA0888E 8. Install input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse idler gear assembly into clutch housing. CAUTION: Be sure not to damage input shaft oil seal. SCIA0395E Revision: March 2005 MT-29 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 9. Install 1st-2nd fork rod bracket onto 1st-2nd fork rod, and then install retaining pin. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them. SCIA0889E 10. Install 1st-2nd fork rod and 1st-2nd shift fork, and then install retaining pin. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them. SCIA0394E 11. Install shift check sleeve. 12. Install 3rd-4th bracket, 3rd-4th shift fork, and 3rd-4th fork rod with interlock pin. SCIA0393E 13. Install stopper ring onto 3rd-4th shift fork. CAUTION: Stopper rings are not reusable. Never reuse them. 14. Install retaining pin onto 3rd-4th bracket. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them. 15. Install 2 check balls. 16. Install 5th-reverse bracket, 5th shift fork, and 5th-reverse fork rod. SCIA0392E 17. Install stopper ring onto 5th-reverse bracket. Revision: March 2005 MT-30 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] CAUTION: Stopper rings are not reusable. Never reuse them. 18. Install retaining pin onto 5th shift fork. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them. A B MT D SCIA0391E 19. Install reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod. 20. Install reverse lever assembly following procedures below. a. Install shifter cap onto reverse lever assembly cam, and then install them onto reverse shift fork. CAUTION: Do not drop shifter cap. b. While lifting reverse shift fork, align cam with 5th-reverse bracket. E F G H I SCIA0890E J c. Tighten mounting bolts to specified torque, and then install reverse lever assembly. Bracket bolts : 11.8 – 15.6 N·m (1.2 – 1.5 kg-m, 9 – 11 ft-lb) K L M SCIA0390E 21. Install the magnet onto clutch housing. 22. Install the selected input shaft adjusting shim onto the input shaft. ● For selection of adjusting shims, refer to MT-66, "Available Adjusting Shims" . 23. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim and differential side bearing outer race. For selection adjusting shim, refer to MT-35, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD" . 24. Install baffle plate and oil gutter. 25. Install transaxle case using the following procedure: a. Install selected mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim into transaxle case. ● For selection of adjusting shims, refer to MT-66, "Available Adjusting Shims" . b. Temporarily install a new snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing into transaxle case. CAUTION: Do not reuse the snap ring. Revision: March 2005 MT-31 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] c. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent to mating surfaces of transaxle case and clutch housing. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. SCIA0891E d. With snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing temporarily installed, place transaxle case over clutch housing. SCIA0892E e. Through bore plug mounting hole, with snap ring stretched, lift up mainshaft assembly from the control assembly mounting hole. SCIA0893E f. Securely install snap ring onto mainshaft rear bearing. Revision: March 2005 MT-32 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] g. Tighten the bolts “A” and the new bolts “B”. Bolt “A” Bolt “B” A : 50.0 - 53.9 N·m (5.1 - 5.4 kg-m, 37 - 39 ft-lb) : 63.0 - 66.9 N·m (6.5 - 6.8 kg-m, 47 - 49 ft-lb) CAUTION: Always replace bolts “B” because they are self-sealing bolts. B MT SCIA1064E D h. Apply gear oil to the O-ring and install it to the control assembly. Then install control assembly to transaxle case. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to MT-23, "SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. i. Install shift check and a new stopper bolt. CAUTION: Shift check and stopper bolt are not reusable. 26. Using Tool, install a new bore plug as shown. CAUTION: Bore plugs are not reusable. Tool number E F G : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) H I WCIA0276E J 27. Using Tool, install a welch plug as shown. Tool number : ST33052000 ( — ) K L M WCIA0277E 28. Install 1 shift check sleeve, 3 check balls, 3 check springs, and 3 check ball plugs. CAUTION: Check ball plugs are not reusable. Never reuse them. SCIA0396E Revision: March 2005 MT-33 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 29. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent to threads of Park/ Neutral position switch and Back-up lamp switch, then install them into transaxle case. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SCIA0895E 30. Install gaskets onto drain plug and filler plug, then install them into transaxle case. CAUTION: ● Gaskets are not reusable. Never reuse them. ● After oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specified torque. Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" . Adjustment ECS0094D INPUT SHAFT END PLAY ● ● When adjusting input shaft end play, select adjusting shim for input shaft bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance between transaxle case and input shaft rear bearing. Calculate dimension “O” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for input shaft rear bearing. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “O” = (“O1 ” - “O2 ”) – End play “O” : Thickness of adjusting shim : Distance between transaxle case end face “O1 ” and mounting face of adjusting shim : Distance between clutch housing case end “O2 ” face and end face of input shaft rear bearing SCIA1006E Adjusting Shim Shim thickness Part number Shim thickness Part number Shim thickness Part number 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) 0.44 mm (0.0173 in) 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 32225 8H500 32225 8H501 32225 8H502 32225 8H503 32225 8H504 32225 8H505 32225 8H506 32225 8H507 32225 8H508 32225 8H509 32225 8H510 32225 8H511 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.00 mm (0.0394 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 1.12 mm (0.0441 in) 1.16 mm (0.0457 in) 1.20 mm (0.0472 in) 1.24 mm (0.0488 in) 1.28 mm (0.0504 in) 1.32 mm (0.0520 in) 32225 8H512 32225 8H513 32225 8H514 32225 8H515 32225 8H516 32225 8H517 32225 8H518 32225 8H519 32225 8H520 32225 8H521 32225 8H522 32225 8H523 1.36 mm (0.0535 in) 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) 1.44 mm (0.0567 in) 1.48 mm (0.0583 in) 1.52 mm (0.0598 in) 1.56 mm (0.0614 in) 1.60 mm (0.0630 in) 1.64 mm (0.0646 in) 1.68 mm (0.0661 in) 1.72 mm (0.0677 in) 32225 8H524 32225 8H560 32225 8H561 32225 8H562 32225 8H563 32225 8H564 32225 8H565 32225 8H566 32225 8H567 32225 8H568 CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. Revision: March 2005 MT-34 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 1. Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension “O1 ” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim as shown. A B MT SCIA1002E D 2. Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension “O2 ” between clutch housing case end face and end face of input shaft rear bearing as shown. E F G SCIA1004E 3. Install selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto input shaft. H DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ● ● When adjusting differential side bearing preload, select adjusting shim for differential side bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance “L” between transaxle case and differential side bearing outer race. Calculate dimension “L” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to satisfy specification of preload for differential side bearing. Preload : 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in) Dimension “L” = (“L1 ” - “L2 ”) + Preload “L” : Thickness of adjusting shim “L1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim “L2 ” : Distance between differential side bearing and clutch housing end face I J K SCIA0896E L M Adjusting Shim Shim thickness Part number 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 31438 80X00 31438 80X01 31438 80X02 31438 80X03 31438 80X04 31438 80X05 31438 80X06 31438 80X07 31438 80X08 31438 80X09 31438 80X10 31438 80X11 CAUTION: Up to 2 adjusting shims can be selected. Revision: March 2005 MT-35 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] 1. Using depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension “L1 ” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim as shown. SCIA1078E 2. 3. Install outer race onto differential side bearing on final gear side. Holding lightly the outer race horizontally by hand, rotate final gear five times or more (for smooth movement of bearing roller). Using depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension “L2 ” between differential side bearing outer race and clutch housing end face as shown. SCIA1079E 4. Install selected adjusting shim and then differential side bearing outer race using Tool as shown. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) WCIA0278E MAINSHAFT END PLAY ● ● When adjusting mainshaft end play, select adjusting shim for mainshaft rear bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance “M” between transaxle case and mainshaft rear bearing. Calculate dimension “P” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for mainshaft rear bearing. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “P” = “M” – End play “P” : Thickness of adjusting shim “M” : Distance between mainshaft rear bearing and transaxle case Revision: March 2005 MT-36 SCIA0904E 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] Adjusting Shim Shim thickness Part number 0.44 mm (0.0173 in) 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.00 mm (0.0394 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 32238 8H510 32238 8H511 32238 8H512 32238 8H513 32238 8H514 32238 8H515 32238 8H516 32238 8H517 32238 8H518 32238 8H519 32238 8H520 32238 8H521 32238 8H522 32238 8H523 32238 8H524 32238 8H560 32238 8H561 A B MT D E F CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. 1. 2. 3. 4. Install mainshaft assembly to clutch housing. Install snap ring to transaxle case. Install transaxle case to clutch housing, and temporarily assemble them with the bolts. Install temporarily snap ring to mainshaft rear bearing. Install dial gauge to snap ring access hole, and expand snap ring. Lift mainshaft assembly through control assembly installation hole, and push it against transaxle case. This state shall be defined as base. Moving distance of mainshaft assembly, with snap ring fit on main bearing, becomes “M”. G H I J K SCIA1017E REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY ● ● L When adjusting reverse idler gear end play, select adjusting shim for reverse idler gear. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance between transaxle case and reverse idler gear. Calculate dimension “Q” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for reverse idler gear. End play : 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in) Dimension “Q” = (“Q1 ” - “Q2 ”) – End play “Q” : Thickness of adjusting shim “Q1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim “Q2 ” : Distance between clutch housing case end face and end face of reverse idler gear Revision: March 2005 MT-37 M SCIA1007E 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS5F51A] Adjusting Shim Shim thickness mm (in) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.80 (0.0709) 1.84 (0.0724) 1.88 (0.0740) 1.92 (0.0756) 1.96 (0.0772) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.04 (0.0803) 2.08 (0.0819) 2.12 (0.0835) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.20 (0.0866) Part number Shim thickness 32237 8H800 32237 8H801 32237 8H802 32237 8H803 32237 8H804 32237 8H805 32237 8H806 32237 8H807 32237 8H808 32237 8H809 32237 8H810 32237 8H811 mm (in) 2.24 (0.0882) 2.28 (0.0898) 2.32 (0.0913) 2.36 (0.0929) 2.40 (0.0945) 2.44 (0.0961) 2.48 (0.0976) 2.52 (0.0992) 2.56 (0.1008) 2.60 (0.1024) 2.64 (0.1039) Part number 32237 8H812 32237 8H813 32237 8H814 32237 8H815 32237 8H816 32237 8H817 32237 8H818 32237 8H819 32237 8H820 32237 8H821 32237 8H822 CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. 1. Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension “Q1 ” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim as shown. SCIA1003E 2. Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension “Q2 ” between clutch housing case end face and end face of reverse idler gear as shown. SCIA1005E 3. Install selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto reverse idler gear. Revision: March 2005 MT-38 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32200 A ECS0094E DISASSEMBLY 1. Before disassembling, measure end play for 3rd, 4th, and 5th input gears. B End play standard value 3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in) 4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) CAUTION: If measurement is outside the standard range, disassemble to check contact surfaces of gear, shaft, and hub. Adjust with snap ring at assembly. 2. 3. MT D SCIA0914E Remove oil channel. Remove input shaft rear bearing. Tool number E F A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool G H WCIA0279E 4. I Remove the snap ring. J K L SCIA0916E 5. M Remove input shaft bearing spacer and 5th stopper simultaneously. Tool number A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool WCIA0280E Revision: March 2005 MT-39 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] 6. Remove 5th input gear and synchronizer hub assembly simultaneously. Tool number A: KV40105020 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool WCIA0281E 7. 8. Remove 5th needle bearing. Remove 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th needle bearing, 4th gear bushing, 4th baulk ring, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly, 3rd gear synchronizer assembly, and 3rd input gear simultaneously. Tool number A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool WCIA0282E 9. Remove 3rd needle bearing. 10. Remove input shaft front bearing. SCIA0920E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Input Shaft and Gears Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, etc. of shaft ● Excessive wear, damage, peeling, etc. of gears LCIA0306E Revision: March 2005 MT-40 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] Synchronizer A Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and excessive wear of contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly. B MT SMT387A ● If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it. D E F G SMT867D H Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (4th and 5th) Press baulk ring against cone, and measure clearance between baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it with a new one. Clearance Standard value 4th 5th Limit value I J : 0.8 - 1.45 mm (0.035 - 0.057 in) : 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.037 - 0.055 in) : 0.7 mm (0.028 in) K SMT140 Baulk Ring Clearance for Double Cone Synchronizer (3rd) L Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, inner baulk ring. CAUTION: Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring determine the clearances “A” and “B” as an assembly. Replace the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring as an assembly if either of the clearances “A” or “B” exceed the limit value. M SCIA0950E Revision: March 2005 MT-41 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] ● Measure clearance “A” at two or more points diagonally opposite using a dial indicator, and calculate average value. Tool number Clearance “A” Standard value Limit value A: ST30031000 (J-22912-01) : 0.6 – 0.8 mm (0.024 – 0.031 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) WCIA0283E ● Measure clearance “B” at two or more points diagonally opposite using a feeler gauge, and calculate average value. Clearance “B” Standard value Limit value : 0.6 – 1.1 mm (0.024 – 0.043 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) SCIA1084E Bearing Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and rough rotation of bearing MTF0041D ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Install 3rd needle bearing. Install 3rd input gear and 3rd gear synchronizer assembly. Install spread spring, shifting insert and 3rd-4th synchronizer hub onto 3rd-4th coupling sleeve. CAUTION: ● Be careful with orientation of synchronizer hub. ● Do not reuse the 3rd-4th synchronizer hub. SCIA0921E Revision: March 2005 MT-42 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] ● Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve. A B MT SCIA0993E D ● Be sure not to hook ends of 2 spread springs (front and back have two each) on same shifting insert. E F G SCIA1083E 4. Install 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly. Tool number H : KV40105710 ( — ) CAUTION: Align grooves of shifting insert and 3rd baulk ring. I J WCIA0284E 5. K Install 4th bushing. Tool number : KV40105710 ( — ) L M WCIA0285E 6. 7. Install 4th baulk ring. Install 4th input gear and 4th needle bearing. Revision: March 2005 MT-43 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] 8. Select thrust washer so that dimension “C2 ” satisfies standard below. Then install it onto input shaft. Standard for dimension “C2 ” : 154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094 in) SCIA0925E Thrust Washer Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 3.84 mm (0.1512 in) 3.90 mm (0.1535 in) 3.96 mm (0.1559 in) 32347 8H500 32347 8H501 32347 8H502 4.02 mm (0.1583 in) 4.08 mm (0.1606 in) 4.14 mm (0.1630 in) 32347 8H503 32347 8H504 32347 8H505 CAUTION: Only one thrust washer can be selected. 9. Install 5th bushing. Tool number : KV40105710 ( — ) WCIA0286E 10. Install 5th needle bearing and 5th input gear. 11. Install 5th baulk ring. 12. Install spread spring, shifting insert and 5th synchronizer hub onto 5th coupling sleeve. CAUTION: ● Be careful with orientation of synchronizer hub and shifting insert. SCIA0927E Revision: March 2005 MT-44 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] ● Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve. A B MT SCIA0994E D ● Be sure not to hook ends of 2 spread springs (front and back have two each) on same shifting insert. E F G SCIA1083E 13. Install 5th synchronizer hub assembly. Tool number H : KV40105710 ( — ) CAUTION: Align grooves of 5th shifting insert and 5th baulk ring. I J WCIA0287E K 14. Install 5th stopper and then input shaft bearing spacer. Tool number : ST30032000 (J-26010-01) L M WCIA0288E 15. Install snap ring onto input shaft, and check that end play (gap between snap ring and groove) of input shaft bearing spacer satisfies standard. End play standard value ● : 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) If measurement is outside the standard range, select snap ring. SCIA0930E Revision: March 2005 MT-45 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] Snap Rings Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 1.71 mm (0.0673 in) 1.76 mm (0.0693 in) 1.81 mm (0.0713 in) 1.86 mm (0.0732 in) 1.91 mm (0.0752 in) 1.96 mm (0.0772 in) 32204 8H510 32204 8H511 32204 8H512 32204 8H513 32204 8H514 32204 8H515 2.01 mm (0.0791 in) 2.06 mm (0.0811 in) 2.11 mm (0.0831 in) 2.16 mm (0.0850 in) 2.21 mm (0.0871 in) 2.26 mm (0.0890 in) 32204 8H516 32204 8H517 32204 8H518 32204 8H519 32204 8H520 32204 8H521 16. Install input shaft rear bearing. Tool number : ST30901000 (J-26010-01) CAUTION: Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing the input gear side. WCIA0289E 17. Install input shaft front bearing. Tool number A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: ST30032000 (J-26010-01) WCIA0290E 18. Install oil channel onto input shaft. 19. Check end play of 3rd, 4th, and 5th input gears. End play standard value 3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in) 4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) SCIA0914E Revision: March 2005 MT-46 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] MAINSHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32241 A ECS0094F DISASSEMBLY 1. Before disassembling, measure end play of 1st and 2nd main gears. B End play standard value 1st gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 2nd gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) MT CAUTION: If measurement is outside the standard range, disassemble to check contact surfaces of gear, shaft, and hub. Adjust with snap ring at assembly. D SCIA0933E 2. 3. Remove the snap ring. Remove C-ring holder, and then mainshaft C-ring. E F G H SCIA0934E I 4. Remove mainshaft rear bearing. Tool number A: Commercial service tool B: Commercial service tool C: ST33052000 ( — ) J K L WCIA0291E 5. Remove the snap ring. M SCIA0936E Revision: March 2005 MT-47 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] 6. Remove 4th main gear and 5th main gear simultaneously. Tool number 7. 8. A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool Remove adjusting shim. Remove 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer. WCIA0292E 9. Remove 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd needle bearing, 2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly, 1st main gear, reverse main gear, 1st needle bearing, and 1st bushing simultaneously. Tool number : KV40105020 ( — ) WCIA0293E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Mainshaft and Gears Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other nonstandard conditions of the shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard conditions of the gears. LCIA0307E Synchronizer Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly. SMT387A Revision: March 2005 MT-48 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] ● If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it. A B MT SMT867D D Baulk Ring Clearance for Double Cone Synchronizer (1st) Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring. CAUTION: Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring determine the clearances “A” and “B” as an assembly. Replace the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring as an assembly if either of the clearances “A” or “B” exceed the limit value. E F G SCIA0950E ● H Using a dial gauge, measure clearance “A” at 2 or more points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value. Tool number Clearance “A” Standard value Limit value : ST30031000 (J-22912-01) I : 0.6 - 0.8 mm (0.024 - 0.031 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) J K WCIA0283E ● Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance “B” at 2 or more points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value. Clearance “B” Standard value Limit value L : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) M SCIA1084E Revision: March 2005 MT-49 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] Baulk Ring Clearance for Triple Cone Synchronizer (2nd) Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, inner baulk ring. CAUTION: Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring determine the clearances “A”, “B” and ”C” as an assembly. Replace the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring as an assembly if any of the clearances “A”, “B” and “C” exceed the limit value. PCIB0603E ● Measure clearance “A” at two points or more on the opposite side using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward clutch gear taper cone, then calculate the average. Clearance “A” Standard value Limit value : 0.6 - 1.2 mm (0.024 - 0.047 in) : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) PCIB0808E ● Measure clearance “B” at two points or more on the opposite side using a feeler gauge, then calculate the average. Clearance “B” Standard value Limit value : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) PCIB0605E ● Measure clearance “C” at two points or more on the opposite side using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward clutch gear taper cone, then calculate the average. Clearance “C” Standard value Limit value : 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in) : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) PCIB0809E Revision: March 2005 MT-50 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] Bearing A Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and rough rotation of bearing B MT MTF0041D D ASSEMBLY 1. Install reverse main gear. Tool number E A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV40101630 (J-35870) C: ST38220000 ( — ) F G WCIA0294E CAUTION: Be careful with orientation of reverse main gear. H I J K SCIA0992E 2. Install 1st bushing. Tool number 3. A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV38102510 ( — ) C: ST38220000 ( — ) M Install needle bearing, and then 1st main gear. WCIA0295E 4. L Install spread spring, shifting insert and 1st-2nd synchronizer hub onto 1st-2nd coupling sleeve. Revision: March 2005 MT-51 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] CAUTION: ● Be careful with orientation of synchronizer hub. SCIA0921E ● Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve. SCIA0989E ● Be sure not to hook ends of 2 spread springs (front and back have two each) on same shifting insert. SCIA1083E 5. Install 1st gear synchronizer assembly onto mainshaft, and synchronizer hub assembly onto mainshaft. Tool number A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV38102510 ( — ) C: ST38220000 ( — ) CAUTION: Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring on 2nd gear-side must have been removed. ● Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve. ● WCIA0296E Revision: March 2005 MT-52 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] 6. Install 2nd bushing. Tool number 7. 8. A A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV40105710 ( — ) Install outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring on 2nd gear-side. Install 2nd needle bearing and 2nd gear. B MT WCIA0297E D 9. Install 3rd main gear. Tool number A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV40105710 ( — ) E CAUTION: Be careful with orientation of 3rd main gear. 10. Install 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer. F G WCIA0298E 11. Select suitable adjusting shim so that dimension “C1 ” satisfies standard value below, and install it onto mainshaft. Standard for dimension “C1 ” H : 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848 in) I J K L M SCIA0944E Adjusting Shim Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 32238 8H500 32238 8H501 32238 8H502 32238 8H503 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 1.00 mm (0.0394 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 32238 8H504 32238 8H505 32238 8H506 32238 8H507 CAUTION: Only one adjusting shim can be selected. Revision: March 2005 MT-53 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] 12. Install 4th main gear. Tool number A: ST33200000 (J-26082) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) CAUTION: Be careful with orientation of 4th main gear. WCIA0299E 13. Install 5th main gear. Tool number A: ST33200000 (J-26082) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) CAUTION: Be careful with orientation of 5th main gear. WCIA0300E 14. Install snap ring onto mainshaft, and check that end play of 5th main gear satisfies standard value. End play standard value ● : 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) If measurement is outside the standard range, reselect snap ring. SCIA0947E Snap Rings Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 1.85 mm (0.0728 in) 1.90 mm (0.0748 in) 1.95 mm (0.0768 in) 2.00 mm (0.0787 in) 32204 8H500 32204 8H501 32204 8H502 32204 8H503 2.05 mm (0.0807 in) 2.10 mm (0.0827 in) 2.15 mm (0.0846 in) 2.20 mm (0.0866 in) 32204 8H504 32204 8H505 32204 8H506 32204 8H507 15. Install mainshaft rear bearing. Tool number A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) WCIA0301E Revision: March 2005 MT-54 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] 16. Install C-ring onto mainshaft, and check that end play of mainshaft rear bearing satisfies standard value. End play standard value ● A : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) If measurement is outside the standard range, reselect C-ring. B MT SCIA0949E D C-ring Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 2.535 mm (0.0998 in) 2.565 mm (0.1010 in) 2.595 mm (0.1022 in) 2.625 mm (0.1033 in) 2.655 mm (0.1045 in) 2.685 mm (0.1057 in) 2.715 mm (0.1069 in) 2.745 mm (0.1081 in) 2.775 mm (0.1093 in) 2.805 mm (0.1104 in) 32348 8H800 32348 8H801 32348 8H802 32348 8H803 32348 8H804 32348 8H805 32348 8H806 32348 8H807 32348 8H808 32348 8H809 2.835 mm (0.1116 in) 2.865 mm (0.1128 in) 2.895 mm (0.1140 in) 2.925 mm (0.1152 in) 2.955 mm (0.1163 in) 2.985 mm (0.1175 in) 3.015 mm (0.1187 in) 3.045 mm (0.1199 in) 3.075 mm (0.1211 in) 32348 8H810 32348 8H811 32348 8H812 32348 8H813 32348 8H814 32348 8H815 32348 8H816 32348 8H817 32348 8H818 17. Fit the C-ring holder, and install the snap ring. E F G H I J SCIA0934E K 18. Check the end play of the 1st and 2nd main gears. L End play standard value 1st gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 2nd gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) M SCIA0933E Revision: March 2005 MT-55 2005 Altima REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32281 ECS0094G DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove reverse idler gear adjusting shim. Remove reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling sleeve and insert spring simultaneously. Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing. Remove thrust needle bearing. Remove reverse baulk ring. Remove reverse idler gear (front). Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing. Remove thrust needle bearing. Pull off locking pin from reverse idler shaft. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Reverse Idler Shaft and Gears Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other nonstandard conditions of the shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard conditions of the gears. SCIA0953E Synchronizer Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and insert spring. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly. SMT637A ● If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it. SMT867D Revision: March 2005 MT-56 2005 Altima REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS [RS5F51A] Baulk Ring Clearance ● A Press baulk ring against cone, and measure clearance between baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it with a new one. Clearance Standard Limit value B : 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in) : 0.7 mm (0.028 in) MT SMT140 D Bearing Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and rough rotation of bearing. E ASSEMBLY F Paying attention to following work, assemble in reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION: ● Be careful with orientation of insert spring. G H I SCIA0954E J K L M Revision: March 2005 MT-57 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS5F51A] FINAL DRIVE Disassembly and Assembly PFP:38411 ECS0094H PRE-INSPECTION Check the clearance between side gear and differential case using Tool and a dial indicator as follows: Tool number : — (J-39713) WCIA0261E 1. 2. 3. Clean final drive assembly sufficiently to prevent side gear thrust washer, differential case, side gear, and other parts from sticking by gear oil. Upright the differential case so that the side gear to be measured faces upward. Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gear. Move side gear up and down, and measure the clearance. Clearance between side gear and differential case : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) CAUTION: There should be no resistance with the gears rotating freely. SMT611A 4. 5. If not within specification, adjust the clearance by changing thrust washer thickness. Turn differential case upside down, and measure the clearance between side gear and differential case on the other side in the same way. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove mounting bolts. Then, separate the final gear from differential case. Remove speedometer drive gear. Remove the differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using the pullers and Tool as shown. Tool number A: Commercial service tool B: Commercial service tool C: ST33061000 (J-8107-2) WCIA0302E Revision: March 2005 MT-58 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS5F51A] 4. Remove the differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using the pullers and Tool as shown. Tool number A A: Commercial service tool B: Commercial service tool C: ST33061000 (J-8107-2) B MT WCIA0303E 5. D Pull out the lock pin and pinion mate shaft using a pin punch. E F G SCIA0908E 6. Rotate pinion mate gears, and remove pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers, side gears, and side gear thrust washers from the differential case. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case ● H I Check side gears, side gear thrust washers, pinion mate shaft, pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers and differential case. If necessary, replace with a new one. J K L MTK0135D Bearing M Check for bearing damage and rough rotation. If necessary, replace with a new one. CAUTION: When replacing tapered roller bearing, replace outer and inner races as a set. ● SPD715 ASSEMBLY 1. Apply gear oil to sliding area of differential case, each gear, and thrust washer. Revision: March 2005 MT-59 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS5F51A] 2. Install side gear thrust washers and side gears into differential case. SMT839 3. 4. While rotating pinion mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears, aligning them diagonally, install them into differential case. Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case. CAUTION: Be sure not to damage pinion mate thrust washers. MTK0132D 5. Measure end play of side gears using the procedure below, then select a side gear thrust washer. Tool number a. b. : — (J-39713) Upright the differential case so that its side gear to be measured face upward. Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gears. WCIA0261E c. Move side gears up and down to measure end play, and select thrust washer so that it satisfies standard. End play standard : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) CAUTION: There should be no resistance with the gears rotating freely. ● Place differential case upside down. Be sure to measure end play for opposite side-gears likewise. ● SMT611A Thrust washer Thickness Part number 0.75 mm (0.0295 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.85 mm (0.0335 in) 0.90 mm (0.0354 in) 0.95 mm (0.0374 in) 38424 81X00 38424 81X01 38424 81X02 38424 81X03 38424 81X04 CAUTION: Only one thrust washer can be selected. Revision: March 2005 MT-60 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS5F51A] 6. Drive a new lock pin into the pinion mate shaft using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse the lock pin. A B MT SCIA0908E D 7. Install differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using Tools as shown. Tool number A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: KV38102510 ( — ) E F G WCIA0304E 8. Align and install speedometer drive gear onto differential case. H I J SMT842D 9. K Install differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using Tools as shown. Tool number L A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: KV38102510 ( — ) M WCIA0305E 10. Install differential gear into differential case, and tighten final gear bolts. Final gear bolts : Refer to MT-24, "FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS" . SCIA0912E Revision: March 2005 MT-61 2005 Altima SHIFT CONTROL [RS5F51A] SHIFT CONTROL Inspection PFP:32982 ECS0094I Check contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage, bending, etc. If necessary, replace parts. ● SCIA0913E SHIFT FORK Check if the width of shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling sleeve) is within allowable specification below. ● Item One-side wear specification Sliding width of new part 1st & 2nd 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 3rd & 4th 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 5th 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 6.10 - 6.23 mm (0.2402 - 0.2453 in) Reverse 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 12.80 - 12.93 mm (0.5039 - 0.5091 in) Revision: March 2005 MT-62 SMT801D 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F51A] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A ECS0094J TRANSAXLE Engine QR25DE VQ35DE Transaxle model B RS5F51A Model code number 9J506 9J504 Number of speed MT 5 Synchromesh type Warner D Shift pattern E SCIA0821E Gear ratio 1st 3.416 3.153 2nd 1.944 1.842 3rd 1.258 4th 0.947 5th 0.772 Reverse Number of teeth Input gear 3.002 1st 12 13 2nd 18 19 31 4th 38 5th 44 Reverse Main gear Reverse idler gear G 3.252 3rd 12 H I J 13 1st 41 2nd 35 3rd 39 4th 36 5th 34 Reverse 38 Front 37 Rear 38 Oil capacity (Reference) F 2.2 K L M (2-3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt) Oil level 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in) Oil type Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed Double cone synchronizer 1st & 3rd Triple cone synchronizer Revision: March 2005 2nd MT-63 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F51A] FINAL GEAR Engine QR25DE Transaxle model VQ35DE RS5F51A Model code number 9J506 9J504 Final gear ratio 4.133 3.812 Final gear/Pinion 62/15 61/16 Side gear/Pinion mate gear 14/10 14/10 Number of teeth Triple cone synchronizer 2nd Gear End Play ECS0094K Unit: mm (in) Gear End play 1st main gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) 2nd main gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) 3rd input gear 0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122) 4th input gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) 5th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) Baulk Ring Clearance ECS0094L Unit: mm (in) Measurement point 1st and 3rd (Double-cone synchronizer) Standard ● Clearance between synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring end face “A” ● Clearance between outer baulk ring paul and synchronizer cone “B” Limit Value A: 0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031) B: 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) 0.2 (0.008) 0.2 (0.008) A: 0.6 - 1.2 (0.024 - 0.047) B: 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) C: 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) 0.3 (0.012) 0.2 (0.008) 0.3 (0.012) 4th 0.8 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.057) 0.7 (0.028) 5th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) Reverse 0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) PCIB0249E 2nd (Triple-cone synchronizer) ● Clearance between synchronizer cone and clutch gear end face “A” ● Clearance between outer baulk ring paul and synchronizer cone “B” ● Clearance between inner baulk ring and clutch gear end face “C” PCIB0772E Revision: March 2005 MT-64 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F51A] Available Snap Rings ECS0094M A INPUT SHAFT SPACER End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Thickness mm (in) 1.71 (0.0673) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.81 (0.0713) 1.86 (0.0732) 1.91 (0.0752) 1.96 (0.0772) Part number* Thickness 32204 8H510 32204 8H511 32204 8H512 32204 8H513 32204 8H514 32204 8H515 mm (in) 2.01 (0.0791) 2.06 (0.0811) 2.11 (0.0831) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.21 (0.0871) 2.26 (0.0890) Part number* B 32204 8H516 32204 8H517 32204 8H518 32204 8H519 32204 8H520 32204 8H521 MT *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. D 5TH MAIN GEAR End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Thickness mm (in) 1.85 (0.0728) 1.90 (0.0748) 1.95 (0.0768) 2.00 (0.0787) Part number* Thickness 32204 8H500 32204 8H501 32204 8H502 32204 8H503 mm (in) 2.05 (0.0807) 2.10 (0.0827) 2.15 (0.0846) 2.20 (0.0866) E Part number* 32204 8H504 32204 8H505 32204 8H506 32204 8H507 F *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. G Available C-Rings ECS0094N MAINSHAFT C-RING End play H 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness mm (in) 2.535 (0.0998) 2.565 (0.1010) 2.595 (0.1022) 2.625 (0.1033) 2.655 (0.1045) 2.685 (0.1057) 2.715 (0.1069) 2.745 (0.1081) 2.775 (0.1093) 2.805 (0.1104) Part number* Thickness 32348 8H800 32348 8H801 32348 8H802 32348 8H803 32348 8H804 32348 8H805 32348 8H806 32348 8H807 32348 8H808 32348 8H809 mm (in) 2.835 (0.1116) 2.865 (0.1128) 2.895 (0.1140) 2.925 (0.1152) 2.955 (0.1163) 2.985 (0.1175) 3.015 (0.1187) 3.045 (0.1199) 3.075 (0.1211) Part number* 32348 8H810 32348 8H811 32348 8H812 32348 8H813 32348 8H814 32348 8H815 32348 8H816 32348 8H817 32348 8H818 I J K *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Available Thrust Washer ECS0094O L INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER M SCIA1008E Standard length “C2” Thickness mm (in) 3.84 (0.1512) 3.90 (0.1535) 3.96 (0.1559) 154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094in) Part number* Thickness 32347 8H500 32347 8H501 32347 8H502 mm (in) 4.02 (0.1583) 4.08 (0.1606) 4.14 (0.1630) Part number* 32347 8H503 32347 8H504 32347 8H505 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 MT-65 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F51A] DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHER Allowable clearance between side gear and differential case with washer Thickness 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) mm (in) Part number* 0.75 (0.0295) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.85 (0.0335) 0.90 (0.0354) 0.95 (0.0374) 38424 81X00 38424 81X01 38424 81X02 38424 81X03 38424 81X04 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Available Adjusting Shims ECS0094P MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM SCIA1009E Standard length “C1” Thickness 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848in) mm (in) Part number* 0.52 (0.0205) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.76 (0.0299) Thickness 32238 8H500 32238 8H501 32238 8H502 32238 8H503 mm (in) Part number* 0.84 (0.0331) 0.92 (0.0362) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.08 (0.0425) 32238 8H504 32238 8H505 32238 8H506 32238 8H507 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play Thickness 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) mm (in) 0.40 (0.0157) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) Part number* 32225 8H500 32225 8H501 32225 8H502 32225 8H503 32225 8H504 32225 8H505 32225 8H506 32225 8H507 32225 8H508 32225 8H509 32225 8H510 32225 8H511 Thickness mm (in) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) 1.12 (0.0441) 1.16 (0.0457) 1.20 (0.0472) 1.24 (0.0488) 1.28 (0.0504) 1.32 (0.0520) Part number* 32225 8H512 32225 8H513 32225 8H514 32225 8H515 32225 8H516 32225 8H517 32225 8H518 32225 8H519 32225 8H520 32225 8H521 32225 8H522 32225 8H523 Thickness mm (in) 1.36 (0.0535) 1.40 (0.0551) 1.44 (0.0567) 1.48 (0.0583) 1.52 (0.0598) 1.56 (0.0614) 1.60 (0.0630) 1.64 (0.0646) 1.68 (0.0661) 1.72 (0.0677) Part number* 32225 8H524 32225 8H560 32225 8H561 32225 8H562 32225 8H563 32225 8H564 32225 8H565 32225 8H566 32225 8H567 32225 8H568 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 MT-66 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS5F51A] MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play A 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness mm (in) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) Part number* Thickness 32238 8H510 32238 8H511 32238 8H512 32238 8H513 32238 8H514 32238 8H515 32238 8H516 32238 8H517 32238 8H518 mm (in) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) Part number* 32238 8H519 32238 8H520 32238 8H521 32238 8H522 32238 8H523 32238 8H524 32238 8H560 32238 8H561 B MT D *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIMS End play E 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in) Thickness mm (in) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.80 (0.0709) 1.84 (0.0724) 1.88 (0.0740) 1.92 (0.0756) 1.96 (0.0772) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.04 (0.0803) 2.08 (0.0819) 2.12 (0.0835) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.20 (0.0866) Part number* Thickness 32237 8H800 32237 8H801 32237 8H802 32237 8H803 32237 8H804 32237 8H805 32237 8H806 32237 8H807 32237 8H808 32237 8H809 32237 8H810 32237 8H811 mm (in) 2.24 (0.0882) 2.28 (0.0898) 2.32 (0.0913) 2.36 (0.0929) 2.40 (0.0945) 2.44 (0.0961) 2.48 (0.0976) 2.52 (0.0992) 2.56 (0.1008) 2.60 (0.1024) 2.64 (0.1039) Part number* F 32237 8H812 32237 8H813 32237 8H814 32237 8H815 32237 8H816 32237 8H817 32237 8H818 32237 8H819 32237 8H820 32237 8H821 32237 8H822 G H I *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Available Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shims ECS0094Q BEARING PRELOAD Differential side bearing preload: L* J 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083) K *: Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “L” in thickness. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) Part number* Thickness 31438 80X00 31438 80X01 31438 80X02 31438 80X03 31438 80X04 31438 80X05 mm (in) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) Part number* L 31438 80X06 31438 80X07 31438 80X08 31438 80X09 31438 80X10 31438 80X11 M *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 MT-67 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS [RS6F51A] PRECAUTIONS Caution ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 ECS0094R Do not reuse transaxle oil. Drain, fill and check transaxle oil with the vehicle on level ground. During removal and installation, keep inside of transaxle clean of dust and dirt. Check for the correct installation orientation prior to removal or disassembly. If mating marks are required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to. In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally and from inside to outside as applicable. If a tightening sequence is specified, follow it. Be careful not to damage the sliding surfaces and mating surfaces of parts. Revision: March 2005 MT-68 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RS6F51A] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS0094S The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV381054S0 (J-34286) Puller Removing side bearing outer race Removing mainshaft front bearing MT D ZZA0601D ST35321000 ( — ) Drift ZZA1000D ST30720000 (J-25405) Drift E Installing input shaft oil seal Installing reverse main gear Installing 1st bushing Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub Installing 2nd bushing Installing 3rd main gear a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. Installing differential oil seal Installing differential side bearing outer race Installing mainshaft rear bearing Installing differential side bearing a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia. F G H I ZZA0811D ST33200000 (J-26082) Drift Installing mainshaft front bearing Installing 6th bushing Installing 4th main gear Installing 5th main gear Installing 6th main gear a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. J K ZZA1002D ST33061000 (J-8107-2) Drift Installing bore plug Removing differential side bearing a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia. L M ZZA1000D ST33052000 ( — ) Drift ZZA1023D Revision: March 2005 MT-69 Installing welch plug Removing input shaft rear bearing Removing 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th gear bushing, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd input gear Installing input shaft front bearing Removing 6th input gear and 6th bushing Removing mainshaft rear bearing Removing 4th main gear and 5th main gear Removing 6th main gear a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia. 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RS6F51A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV40105020 ( — ) Drift ZZA1133D Removing 5th input gear and synchronizer hub Removing 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub, 1st main gear, reverse main gear and 1st bushing a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia. b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. c: 15 mm (0.59 in) ZZA1058D Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub Installing 4th bushing Installing 5th bushing Installing 5th-6th synchronizer hub Installing 2nd bushing Installing 3rd main gear a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) KV40105710 ( — ) Press stand ST38220000 ( — ) Press stand Installing reverse main gear Installing 1st bushing Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub a: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in) ZZA1058D Installing input shaft front bearing a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. c: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia. ST30032000 (J-26010-01) Drift ZZA0978D ST30901000 (J-26010-01) Drift ZZA0978D ST30031000 (J-22912-01) Puller Installing input shaft rear bearing Installing 4th main gear Installing 5th main gear Installing 6th main gear Installing mainshaft rear bearing a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia. Measuring wear of 1st and 2nd baulk ring ZZA0537D KV40101630 (J-35870) Drift Installing reverse main gear a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. ZZA1003D Revision: March 2005 MT-70 2005 Altima PREPARATION [RS6F51A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name A Description KV38102510 (J-35870) Drift Installing 1st bushing Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub Installing differential side bearing a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. B MT ZZA0838D — (J-39713) Drift Measuring end play of side gear D E NT087 F Commercial Service Tools ECS0094T G Tool name Description Puller Removing each bearing gear and bushing H I ZZB0823D Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts J K PBIC0190E Puller Removing each bearing gear and bushing L M NT077 Pin punch Removing and installing each retaining pin Tip: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia. ZZA0815D Revision: March 2005 MT-71 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING [RS6F51A] NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 ECS0094U 3 1 Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 Jumps out of gear Revision: March 2005 2 MT-84 MT-88 Bearing (worn or damaged) 3 3 2 2 1 MT-72 Shift fork (worn) O-Ring (worn or damaged) Oil seal (worn or damaged) Gasket (damaged) 2 3 Insert spring, shifting insert (damaged) Oil leakage 3 Baulk ring (worn or damaged) Symptom Gear (worn or damaged) Noise Check plug return spring and check ball (worn or damaged) MT-78 MT-75 (oil level is high) 2 Suspected parts (possible cause) Control device and cable (worn) MT-75 (wrong oil) 1 MT-76 MT-75 Reference page (oil level is low) Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. 2 3 3 2005 Altima DESCRIPTION [RS6F51A] DESCRIPTION Cross-sectional View PFP:00000 A ECS0094V B MT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0263E Revision: March 2005 MT-73 2005 Altima DESCRIPTION [RS6F51A] 1. Input shaft rear bearing 4. 5th input gear 5. 4th input gear 6. 3rd & 4th synchronizer 7. 3rd input gear 8. Reverse idler gear (rear) 9. Reverse synchronizer 10. Reverse idler gear (front) 2. 6th input gear 11. Reverse idler shaft 3. 5th & 6th synchronizer 12. Clutch housing 13. Input shaft front bearing 14. Input shaft 15. Mainshaft 16. Mainshaft front bearing 17. Differential side bearing (front) 18. Final gear 19. Differential case 20. Differential side bearing (rear) 21. Reverse main gear 22. 1st main gear 23. 1st & 2nd synchronizer 24. 2nd main gear 25. 3rd main gear 26. 4th main gear 27. 5th main gear 28. 6th main gear 29. Mainshaft rear bearing DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER The 3rd gear is equipped with a double-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the shift lever as shown. WCIA0407E TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER The 1st and 2nd gears are equipped with a triple-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the control lever as shown. WCIA0204E REVERSE GEAR Description of reverse gear components is as shown. SCIA0751E Revision: March 2005 MT-74 2005 Altima M/T OIL [RS6F51A] M/T OIL Replacement PFP:KLD20 A ECS0094W DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle oil. Stop the engine. Remove drain plug and drain oil. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it in the transaxle case. Drain plug B : 34.5 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) MT CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. D FILLING 1. Remove speedometer pinion gear. Fill transaxle with new oil. 2. E : Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Oil grade and capacity After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in transaxle case. Speedometer pinion gear F : 5.6 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 50 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. G Checking ECS0094X OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ● ● ● H Check that oil is not leaking from transaxle. Remove speedometer pinion gear. Measure oil level using suitable gauge as shown, and check if "L" is within the specifications. Oil level “L” I : 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in) CAUTION: Never start engine while checking oil level. J K SMT512C ● L Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in the transaxle case. Speedometer pinion gear : 5.6 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 50 in-lb) M CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. Revision: March 2005 MT-75 2005 Altima SIDE OIL SEAL [RS6F51A] SIDE OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:32113 ECS0094Y REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the drive shaft from the transaxle case. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the oil seal with a slotted screwdriver as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the transaxle case surface when removing the oil seal. WCIA0023E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Using Tool, drive the oil seal straight in until it protrudes from the transaxle case end equal to dimension “A” as shown. Dimension “A” Tool number : Within 0.5 mm (0.02 in) or flush with the case. : ST30720000 (J-25405) CAUTION: ● Before installing oil seal, apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. ● Do not reuse oil seal. ● SCIA1010E Check the transaxle oil level after installation. Refer to MA-28, "Checking M/T Oil" . Revision: March 2005 MT-76 2005 Altima POSITION SWITCH [RS6F51A] POSITION SWITCH Checking PFP:32005 A ECS0094Z NOTE: For removal and installation of the switches. Refer to MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" . B BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ● Check continuity. MT Gear position Continuity Reverse Yes Except reverse No D E SCIA0708E F PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ● Check continuity. Gear position Continuity Neutral Yes Except neutral No G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 MT-77 2005 Altima CONTROL LINKAGE [RS6F51A] CONTROL LINKAGE Removal and Installation of Control Device and Cable PFP:34103 ECS00950 WCIA0203E 1. Snap pin 2. Washer 3. Cable 4. Manual lever 5. Shift cable 6. Lock plate 7. Control device assembly 8. Lock plate 9. Select cable 10. Shift cable Revision: March 2005 11. Control lever knob MT-78 12. Control lever 2005 Altima CONTROL LINKAGE [RS6F51A] 13. Control device assembly 14. Cover 15. Select cable 16. Floor 17. Pin 18. Shift cable 19. Washer 20. Clutch housing 21. Cable mounting bracket 22. Select cable 23. Shift cable 24. Lock plate A B 25. Lock plate CAUTION: ● Note that the select side lock plate for securing the control cable is different from the one on the MT shift side. ● After assembly, make sure selector lever automatically returns to Neutral when it is moved to 1st, 2nd, or Reverse. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 MT-79 2005 Altima AIR BREATHER HOSE [RS6F51A] AIR BREATHER HOSE Removal and Installation PFP:31098 ECS00951 LCIA0034E CAUTION: ● Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or winding when installing it. ● Insert the air breather hose into the transaxle tube until the overlap area reaches the spool. Revision: March 2005 MT-80 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:32010 A ECS00952 B MT D E F G H I WCIA0194E REMOVAL J 1. 2. 3. 4. K 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Remove the battery tray and battery. Remove air breather hose from the transaxle. Remove the clutch operating cylinder and position it aside without disconnecting the hydraulic lines. Refer to CL-11, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Do not depress clutch pedal during removal procedure. Remove the two shift cables from the transaxle. Refer to MT-14, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect and remove the harnesses for the back-up lamp switch and ground straps. Remove the starter motor using power tool. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" . Raise vehicle and remove the engine undercover and splash shields using power tool. Drain the gear oil from the transaxle. Refer to MT-11, "Replacement" . Disconnect and remove the harnesses for: ● Vehicle speed sensor ● PNP switch ● Crankshaft position sensor Remove the bolt and heated oxygen sensor harness clamp bracket, then remove the crankshaft position sensor. Remove the exhaust front tube using power tool. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the drive shafts using power tool. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 MT-81 2005 Altima L M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 14. Lower vehicle, then install suitable engine slinger on the front of the left bank cylinder head, and the rear of the right bank cylinder head as shown. SEM807G SEM808G 15. Support the engine using an engine support fixture or suitable tool. 16. Remove the five upper bolts that mount the transaxle to the engine using power tool. 17. Disconnect the LH transaxle mounting insulator using power tool. 18. Raise vehicle, then remove front suspension member, LH engine insulator, and LH engine mount bracket. Refer to EM220, "REMOVAL" . 19. Place a suitable jack support under the transaxle. CAUTION: When setting the jack, be careful not to bring it into contact with the switches. 20. Remove the five lower bolts that mount the transaxle to the engine using power tool. 21. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle. Revision: March 2005 MT-82 MTD0062D 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing the transaxle to the engine, use the specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence shown below: CAUTION: When installing the transaxle, do not allow the transaxle input shaft to make contact with the clutch cover. A B MT Bolt No. Bolt length “ mm (in) ” Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 40 (1.57) 82 (3.23) 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 52 (2.05) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29) 70 - 80 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 59) D 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29) E F G H I J K LCIA0036E L M Revision: March 2005 MT-83 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] Component Parts ECS00953 CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS WCIA0432E 1. Differential oil seal 2. Ball pin 3. Washer 4. Back-up lamp switch 5. Oil gutter 6. Baffle plate 7. Transaxle case 8. Filler plug 9. Gasket 10. Welch plug 11. Bore plug 12. Drain plug 13. Gasket 14. Differential oil seal 15. Park/Neutral position switch 16. Air breather tube 17. Input shaft oil seal 18. Oil channel 19. Magnet 20. Clutch housing 21. Speedometer pinion gear 22. O-ring Revision: March 2005 MT-84 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] GEAR COMPONENTS A B MT D E F G H WCIA0433E 1. Input shaft front bearing 2. Input shaft 3. Needle bearing 4. 3rd input gear 5. 3rd inner baulk ring 6. 3rd gear synchronizer cone 7. 3rd outer baulk ring 8. Spread spring 9. 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub 10. 3rd & 4th shifting insert 11. 4th baulk ring 12. 3rd & 4th coupling sleeve 13. Bushing 14. Needle bearing 15. 4th input gear I J K 16. Thrust washer 17. Bushing 19. 5th input gear 20. 5th baulk ring 21. 5th & 6th shifting insert 22. 5th & 6th synchronizer hub 23. 5th & 6th coupling sleeve 24. Baulk ring 25. 6th input gear 26. Needle bearing 27. Bushing 28. Snap ring 29. Input shaft rear bearing 30. Oil channel 31. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim 32. Retaining pin 33. Reverse idler shaft 34. Thrust bearing 35. Needle bearing 36. Reverse idler gear (Front) 37. Reverse baulk ring 38. Reverse coupling sleeve 39. Insert spring 40. Reverse idler gear (Rear) 41. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim Revision: March 2005 18. Needle bearing MT-85 L M 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] SCIA0957E 1. Mainshaft front bearing 2. Mainshaft bearing retainer 3. Mainshaft 4. Reverse main gear 5. 1st main gear 6. Bushing 7. Needle bearing 8. 1st inner baulk ring 9. 1st gear synchronizer cone 10. 1st outer baulk ring 11. Spread spring 12. 1st & 2nd shifting insert 13. 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub 14. 2nd outer baulk ring 15. 2nd gear synchronizer cone 16. 2nd inner baulk ring 17. 1st & 2nd coupling sleeve 18. Bushing 19. Needle bearing 20. 2nd main gear 21. 3rd main gear 22. 3rd & 4th mainshaft spacer 23. 4th main adjusting shim 24. 4th main gear 25. 5th main gear 26. 6th main gear 27. Mainshaft rear bearing 28. Mainshaft C-ring 29. C-ring holder 30. Snap ring 31. Snap ring 32. Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim 33. 5th & 6th mainshaft spacer 34. 6th main adjusting shim Revision: March 2005 MT-86 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS A B MT D E F G H I J WCIA0412E 1. Reverse shift fork 2. Shifter cap 3. Reverse fork rod 4. Reverse lever assembly 5. 5th & 6th bracket 6. 5th & 6th fork rod 7. 5th & 6th shift fork 8. Retaining pin 9. 3rd & 4th bracket 10. 3rd & 4th shift fork 11. 3rd & 4th fork rod 12. 1st & 2nd shift fork 13. 1st & 2nd bracket 14. 1st & 2nd fork rod 15. Shift check sleeve 16. Inter lock pin 17. Check ball 18. Shift check sleeve 19. Check spring 20. Check plug 21. Control assembly 22. O-ring 23. Shift check 24. Stopper bolt 25. Stopper ring 26. Reverse bracket fork rod 27. Reverse bracket Revision: March 2005 MT-87 K L M 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS WCIA0268E 1. Differential side bearing outer race 4. Differential case 7. Differential side bearing outer race 10. Side gear 13. Pinion mate thrust washer 2. Differential side bearing 3. Speedometer drive gear 5. Final gear 6. Differential side bearing 8. Differential side bearing adjusting shim 9. Pinion mate shaft 11. Side gear thrust washer 12. Pinion mate gear 14. Lock pin Disassembly and Assembly ECS00954 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove the drain plug and filler plug. Remove the park/neutral position switch and back-up lamp switch. After removing the shift check and stopper bolt, remove the control assembly. SCIA0389E Revision: March 2005 MT-88 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 4. Remove the 2 check ball plugs, 2 check springs, 2 check balls as shown. Discard the check ball plugs. CAUTION: Check ball plugs are not reusable. A B MT LCIA0302E D 5. Remove the transaxle case fixing bolts as shown. E F G SCIA0983E 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the bore plug. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case. While spreading the snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing located at bore plug hole, remove the transaxle case. Remove the oil gutter and baffle plate. Remove the snap ring, mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, and input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim from the transaxle case. 10. Remove the differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case side) using Tool as shown, and then remove the adjusting shim. Tool number H I J K : KV381054S0 (J-34286) L M WCIA0270E 11. Remove the welch plug with a suitable punch and hammer as shown. SCIA0402E Revision: March 2005 MT-89 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 12. Remove the differential oil seal with a suitable tool as shown. SCIA0397E 13. Remove the magnet from the clutch housing. 14. Remove the reverse check ball plug, reverse check spring, reverse shift check sleeve, and check ball. Discard the check ball. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the check ball plug. ● Do not drop the check ball. 15. With the shift lever in 5th position, remove the bracket bolts from the reverse lever assembly as shown. Lift the reverse lever assembly to remove. CAUTION: Retain the shifter cap for installation. SCIA0960E 16. Pull out the reverse fork rod then remove the reverse shift fork. 17. Remove the retaining pin of the reverse bracket. SCIA0961E 18. Pull out the reverse lever and the reverse bracket fork rod. 19. Remove the check ball (2 pieces) and the interlock pin. 20. Shift the 3rd-4th fork rod to the 3rd position. Remove the retaining pin of the 5th-6th shift fork using a pin punch. SCIA0962E Revision: March 2005 MT-90 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 21. Remove the stopper rings for the 5th-6th bracket. A B MT SCIA0963E D 22. 23. 24. 25. Pull out the 5th-6th fork rod and remove the 5th-6th shift fork and the 5th-6th bracket. Remove the check balls (2 pieces) and interlock pin. Remove the retaining pin of 3rd-4th bracket using pin punch. Remove the stopper rings for 3rd-4th shift fork. E F G SCIA0393E 26. Pull out the 3rd-4th fork rod and remove 3rd-4th shift fork and bracket. 27. Remove the shift check sleeve from the clutch housing. 28. Remove the retaining pin of 1st-2nd shift fork using a suitable pin punch. H I J K L SCIA0394E 29. Pull out the 1st-2nd fork rod with bracket. 30. Remove the 1st-2nd shift fork. 31. Remove the retaining pin of 1st-2nd bracket using a suitable pin punch and separate the fork rod and bracket. 32. Remove the gear components from the clutch housing. a. While tapping the input shaft with a plastic hammer, remove the input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse idler gear assembly as a set. CAUTION: Always withdraw the mainshaft straight out. Failure to do so can damage the resin oil channel on the clutch housing side. b. Remove the final drive assembly. SCIA0964E Revision: March 2005 MT-91 2005 Altima M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 33. Remove the bearing retainer and then the mainshaft front bearing as shown. 34. Remove the oil channel on the mainshaft side. SCIA0400E 35. Remove the differential oil seal (clutch housing side). 36. Remove the differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing side) using Tool as shown. Tool number : KV381054S0 (J-34286) WCIA0272E 37. Remove the input shaft oil seal using a suitable tool as shown. CAUTION: Do not damage the clutch housing sealing surface. SCIA0398E ASSEMBLY 1. Install a new input shaft oil seal from the clutch housing end of the side, to the depth of 1.8 - 2.8 mm (0.071 - 0.110 in) using Tool as shown. Tool number : ST35321000 ( — ) CAUTION: Oil seals are not reusable. SCIA1022E Revision: March 2005 MT-92 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 2. Install a new differential oil seal using Tool as shown. Tool number A : ST30720000 (J-25405) CAUTION: Oil seals are not reusable. B MT WCIA0273E D 3. Install the oil channel on the mainshaft side as shown. CAUTION: Position the oil channel with the orientation as shown, for installation. E F G SCIA0986E 4. Install the mainshaft front bearing using Tool as shown. Tool number H : ST33200000 (J-26082) CAUTION: Position the mainshaft front bearing with the orientation as shown, for installation. I J WCIA0274E 5. Install the mainshaft front bearing retainer. CAUTION: Install the bearing retainer with the punched surface facing up. Retainer bolt L : 6.27 - 8.33 N·m (0.64 - 0.84 kg-m, 56 - 73 in-lb) M SCIA0400E 6. Install the differential side bearing outer race using Tool as shown. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) WCIA0275E Revision: March 2005 MT-93 K 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 7. Install the final drive assembly into the clutch housing. SCIA0888E 8. Install the input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse idler gear assembly into the clutch housing. CAUTION: Do not damage the input shaft oil seal. SCIA0964E 9. Install the 1st-2nd fork rod bracket onto the 1st-2nd fork rod, and then install a new retaining pin as shown. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. SCIA0889E 10. Install the 1st-2nd fork rod and the 1st-2nd shift fork, and then install a new retaining pin. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. SCIA0394E 11. Install the shift check sleeve. 12. Install the 3rd-4th bracket, 3rd-4th shift fork, and 3rd-4th fork rod with the interlock pin. Revision: March 2005 MT-94 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 13. Install the new stopper rings onto the 3rd-4th shift fork. CAUTION: Stopper rings are not reusable. 14. Install a new retaining pin onto the 3rd-4th bracket. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. A B MT SCIA0393E D 15. Install the 2 check balls. 16. Install the 5th-6th bracket, 5th-6th shift fork, and 5th-6th fork rod. 17. Install new stopper rings onto the 5th-6th bracket with interlock pin. CAUTION: Stopper rings are not reusable. E F G SCIA0963E 18. Install a new retaining pin onto the 5th-6th shift fork. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. H I J K SCIA0962E 19. Install the two check balls. 20. Install the 5th-6th check ball, 5th-6th shift check sleeve, 5th-6th check spring, and the 5th-6th check ball plug. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the check ball plug. ● Do not drop the check ball. 21. Install the reverse bracket fork rod and reverse lever bracket. 22. Install a new retaining pin onto the reverse bracket. CAUTION: Retaining pins are not reusable. SCIA0961E 23. Install the reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod. Revision: March 2005 MT-95 2005 Altima L M TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 24. Install the reverse lever assembly using the following steps: a. Install the shifter cap onto the reverse lever assembly cam, and then install them onto the reverse shift fork. CAUTION: Do not drop the shifter cap. b. While lifting the reverse shift fork, align the cam with the reverse bracket. SCIA0965E c. Tighten the bracket bolts to specification, and install the reverse lever assembly. Bracket bolts : 13.7 N·m (1.4 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) SCIA0960E 25. Install the check ball, reverse shift check sleeve, reverse check spring, and the reverse check ball plug. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the check ball plug. ● Do not drop the check ball. 26. Install the magnet onto the clutch housing. 27. Install the selected input shaft adjusting shim onto the input shaft. Refer to MT-99, "INPUT SHAFT END PLAY" . 28. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim and differential side bearing outer race. Refer to MT-100, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD" . 29. Install the baffle plate and oil gutter. 30. Install the transaxle case using the following steps: a. Install the selected mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim into the transaxle case. Refer to MT-101, "MAINSHAFT END PLAY" . b. Temporarily install the snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing into the transaxle case. CAUTION: Do not reuse the snap ring. c. Apply sealant to the mating surfaces of the transaxle case and clutch housing as shown. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the sealant application and mounting surfaces. SCIA0891E Revision: March 2005 MT-96 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] d. Using a snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing temporarily, install the transaxle case over the clutch housing as shown. A B MT SCIA0892E D e. f. Through the bore plug mounting hole, with the snap ring stretched, lift up the mainshaft assembly from the control assembly mounting hole. Securely install the snap ring onto the mainshaft rear bearing as shown. E F G H I J SCIA0893E g. : 52.0 N-m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) : 65.0 N-m (6.6 kg-m, 48 ft-lb) L CAUTION: Always replace the “B” bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. M “A” Bolt “B” Bolt SCIA1064E h. i. K Tighten the “A” bolts (gold) and new “B” bolts (black) to specification. Apply gear oil to the O-ring and install it to the control assembly. Then install control assembly to transaxle case. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to MT-87, "SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. Install a new shift check and a new stopper bolt. CAUTION: Shift check and stopper bolt are not reusable. Revision: March 2005 MT-97 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 31. Install a new bore plug using Tool as shown. Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) CAUTION: Bore plugs are not reusable. WCIA0276E 32. Install the new welch plug using Tool as shown. Tool number : ST33052000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse the welch plug. WCIA0277E 33. Install the 2 check balls, 2 check springs, and the 2 new check ball plugs. CAUTION: Check ball plugs are not reusable. LCIA0302E 34. Apply sealant to the threads of the park/neutral position switch and back-up lamp switch. Then install them into the transaxle case. Refer to MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" . Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . SCIA0895E 35. Install new gaskets onto the drain plug and filler plug, and then install them into the transaxle case. CAUTION: ● Gaskets are not reusable. ● After oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specification. Refer to MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" . Revision: March 2005 MT-98 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] Adjustment ECS00955 A INPUT SHAFT END PLAY ● ● When adjusting the input shaft end play, select the adjusting shim for the input shaft bearing. To select the correct thickness for the adjusting shim, measure the clearance between the transaxle case and input shaft rear bearing. Calculate the dimension “O” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following steps to adjust the input shaft rear bearing for the specified end play. B MT D SCIA1001E E CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “O” = (O1 - O2 ) – End play “O” : Thickness of adjusting shim “O1” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim “O2” : Distance between clutch housing case end face and end face of input shaft rear bearing Shim thickness Part number Shim thickness Part number Shim thickness Part number 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) 0.44 mm (0.0173 in) 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 32225 8H500 32225 8H501 32225 8H502 32225 8H503 32225 8H504 32225 8H505 32225 8H506 32225 8H507 32225 8H508 32225 8H509 32225 8H510 32225 8H511 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.00 mm (0.0394 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 1.12 mm (0.0441 in) 1.16 mm (0.0457 in) 1.20 mm (0.0472 in) 1.24 mm (0.0488 in) 1.28 mm (0.0504 in) 1.32 mm (0.0520 in) 32225 8H512 32225 8H513 32225 8H514 32225 8H515 32225 8H516 32225 8H517 32225 8H518 32225 8H519 32225 8H520 32225 8H521 32225 8H522 32225 8H523 1.36 mm (0.0535 in) 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) 1.44 mm (0.0567 in) 1.48 mm (0.0583 in) 1.52 mm (0.0598 in) 1.56 mm (0.0614 in) 1.60 mm (0.0630 in) 1.64 mm (0.0646 in) 32225 8H524 32225 8H560 32225 8H561 32225 8H562 32225 8H563 32225 8H564 32225 8H565 32225 8H566 J K M SCIA1002E MT-99 I L Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “O1” between the transaxle case end face and mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown. Revision: March 2005 G H Adjusting Shims 1. F 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 2. Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “O2 ” between the clutch housing case end face and end face of the input shaft rear bearing as shown. SCIA1004E 3. Install the selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto the input shaft. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ● ● When adjusting differential side bearing preload, select adjusting shim for differential side bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance “L” between transaxle case and differential side bearing outer race. Calculate dimension “L” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to meet specification of preload for differential side bearing. Preload : 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in) Dimension “L” = (“L1 ” - “L2 ”) + Preload “L” : Thickness of adjusting shim “L1” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim “L2” : Distance between differential side bearing and clutch housing end face SCIA0896E CAUTION: Up to only 2 adjusting shims can be selected. Adjusting Shim 1. Shim thickness Part number 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 31438 80X00 31438 80X01 31438 80X02 31438 80X03 31438 80X04 31438 80X05 31438 80X06 31438 80X07 31438 80X08 31438 80X09 31438 80X10 31438 80X11 Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “L1 ” between the transaxle case end face and mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown. SCIA1078E Revision: March 2005 MT-100 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] 2. 3. Install the outer race onto the differential side bearing on the final gear side. Holding the outer race horizontally by hand, rotate the final gear five times or more (for smooth movement of the bearing roller). Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “L2 ” between the differential side bearing outer race and clutch housing end face as shown. A B MT D SCIA1079E 4. Install the selected adjusting shim and then the differential side bearing outer race using Tool as shown. Tool number E : ST30720000 (J-25405) F G WCIA0278E H MAINSHAFT END PLAY ● ● When adjusting the mainshaft end play, select the adjusting shim for the mainshaft rear bearing. To select the adjusting shim, measure clearance “M” between the transaxle case and mainshaft rear bearing. Calculate the dimension “P” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following procedure to meet specification of end play for mainshaft rear bearing. End play : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Dimension “P” = “M” – End play “P” : Thickness of adjusting shim “M” : Distance between mainshaft rear bearing and transaxle case I J K SCIA0904E CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. Revision: March 2005 L M MT-101 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] Adjusting Shim 1. 2. 3. 4. Shim thickness Part number 0.44 mm (0.0173 in) 0.48 mm (0.0189 in) 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.64 mm (0.0252 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.72 mm (0.0283 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.00 mm (0.0394 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 32238 8H510 32238 8H511 32238 8H512 32238 8H513 32238 8H514 32238 8H515 32238 8H516 32238 8H517 32238 8H518 32238 8H519 32238 8H520 32238 8H521 32238 8H522 32238 8H523 32238 8H524 32238 8H560 32238 8H561 Install the mainshaft assembly to the clutch housing. Install the snap ring to the transaxle case. Install the transaxle case to clutch housing, and temporarily assemble them with bolts. Temporarily install the snap ring to the mainshaft rear bearing. Install the dial gauge to the snap ring access hole, and expand the snap ring as shown. Lift the mainshaft assembly through the control assembly installation hole, and push it against the transaxle case. This state shall be defined as base. Moving the distance of the mainshaft assembly, with the snap ring installed on the main bearing, becomes “M”. SCIA1017E REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY ● ● When adjusting the reverse idler gear end play, select the adjusting shim for the reverse idler gear. To select the correct thickness of adjusting shim, measure the clearance between the transaxle case and reverse idler gear. Calculate the dimension “Q” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the following steps to adjust the end play of the reverse idler gear to specification. End play : 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in) Dimension “Q” = (“Q1 ” - “Q2 ”) – End play “Q” : Thickness of adjusting shim “Q1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim “Q2 ” : Distance between clutch housing case end face and end face of reverse idler gear SCIA1007E CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. Revision: March 2005 MT-102 2005 Altima TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY [RS6F51A] Adjusting Shim Shim thickness mm (in) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.80 (0.0709) 1.84 (0.0724) 1.88 (0.0740) 1.92 (0.0756) 1.96 (0.0772) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.04 (0.0803) 2.08 (0.0819) 2.12 (0.0835) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.20 (0.0866) 1. Part number Shim thickness 32237 8H800 32237 8H801 32237 8H802 32237 8H803 32237 8H804 32237 8H805 32237 8H806 32237 8H807 32237 8H808 32237 8H809 32237 8H810 32237 8H811 mm (in) 2.24 (0.0882) 2.28 (0.0898) 2.32 (0.0913) 2.36 (0.0929) 2.40 (0.0945) 2.44 (0.0961) 2.48 (0.0976) 2.52 (0.0992) 2.56 (0.1008) 2.60 (0.1024) 2.64 (0.1039) A Part number 32237 8H812 32237 8H813 32237 8H814 32237 8H815 32237 8H816 32237 8H817 32237 8H818 32237 8H819 32237 8H820 32237 8H821 32237 8H822 B MT D CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. E Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “Q1 ” between the transaxle case end face and the mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown. F G H SCIA1003E 2. I Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the dimension “Q2 ” between the clutch housing case end face and the end face of reverse idler gear as shown. J K SCIA1005E 3. L Install the selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto the reverse idler gear. M Revision: March 2005 MT-103 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32200 ECS00BT6 DISASSEMBLY 1. Before disassembling, measure the end play for the 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th input gears. End play standard values 3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in) 4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) 6th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) CAUTION: If the measurement is outside the standard value, disassemble to check the contact surfaces of the gear, shaft, and hub. Adjust using the correct size snap ring for assembly. 2. 3. Remove the oil channel. Remove the input shaft rear bearing using Tool as shown. Tool number 4. SCIA0966E A: Commercial service tool B: ST33052000 ( — ) Remove the snap ring. WCIA0306E 5. Remove the 6th input gear, 6th bushing, and 6th needle bearing using Tool as shown. Tool number 6. A: Commercial service tool B: ST33052000 ( — ) Remove the 6th baulk ring, 5th-6th coupling sleeve, and shifting insert. WCIA0307E 7. Remove the 5th input gear and synchronizer hub assembly simultaneously using Tool as shown. Tool number 8. A: KV40105020 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool Remove the 5th needle bearing. WCIA0281E Revision: March 2005 MT-104 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 9. Remove the 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th needle bearing, 4th bushing, 4th baulk ring, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly, 3rd baulk ring, and 3rd input gear simultaneously using Tool as shown. Tool number A B A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool 10. Remove the 3rd needle bearing. MT WCIA0282E D 11. Remove the input shaft front bearing using Tool as shown. E F G SCIA0920E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Input Shaft and Gear H Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, or bending of the input shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage, or peeling of the input gears. I J K SMT636A Synchronizer L Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and excessive wear of the contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as shown. M SMT387A Revision: March 2005 MT-105 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] ● If any cracks, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam face of baulk ring or working face of the insert as shown, replace it. SMT867D Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (4th, 5th and 6th) ● Press the baulk ring against cone, and measure clearance between baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it with a new one. Clearance - standard 4th : 0.9 - 1.45 mm (0.035 - 0.0571 in) 5th and 6th : 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in) Limit : 0.7 mm (0.028 in) SMT140 Baulk Ring Clearance for Double-cone Synchronizer (3rd) ● Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring. CAUTION: Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring act as a set to control the clearances “A” and “B”. If the measurement exceeds the service limit value, replace all of them as a set. SMT138E 1. Using a dial gauge and Tool, measure clearance “A” at two or more points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value. Tool number Clearance “A” Standard Limit value : ST30031000 (J-22912-01) : 0.6 - 0.8 mm (0.024 - 0.031 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) WCIA0283E Revision: March 2005 MT-106 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 2. Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance “B” at two or more points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value as shown. Clearance “B” Standard Limit value A : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) B MT SCIA1084E D Bearing Check the item listed. If necessary, replace it with a new one. ● Damage and rough rotation of the bearing as shown. E F G MTF0041D ASSEMBLY H 1. 2. 3. I Install the 3rd needle bearing. Install the 3rd input gear and 3rd baulk ring. Install the spread spring, shifting insert, and a new 3rd-4th synchronizer hub onto the 3rd-4th coupling sleeve. CAUTION: ● Install with the orientation of the new synchronizer hub as shown. ● Do not reuse the 3rd-4th synchronizer hub. J K L SCIA0921E ● Install with the orientation of the coupling sleeve as shown. SCIA0993E Revision: March 2005 MT-107 2005 Altima M INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] ● Do not hook the ends of the two spread springs (front and back have two each) on the same shifting insert. SCIA1083E 4. Install the 3rd-4th synchronizer assembly using Tool as shown. Tool number : KV40105710 ( — ) CAUTION: Align grooves of the shifting insert and 3rd baulk ring. WCIA0284E 5. Install the 4th bushing using Tool as shown. Tool number 6. 7. : KV40105710 ( — ) Install the 4th baulk ring. Install the 4th input gear and 4th needle bearing. WCIA0285E 8. Measure the dimension "C2 " as shown. Select a suitable thrust washer so that dimension "C2 " satisfies the standard dimension specification. Then install the thrust washer onto the input shaft. Standard for dimension "C2" : 154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094 in) CAUTION: Only 1 thrust washer can be selected. SCIA0925E Revision: March 2005 MT-108 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] Thrust Washer 9. Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 3.84 mm (0.1512 in) 3.90 mm (0.1535 in) 3.96 mm (0.1559 in) 32347 8H500 32347 8H501 32347 8H502 4.02 mm (0.1583 in) 4.08 mm (0.1606 in) 4.14 mm (0.1630 in) 32347 8H503 32347 8H504 32347 8H505 A B Install the 5th bushing using Tool as shown. Tool number MT : KV40105710 ( — ) 10. Install the 5th needle bearing and 5th input gear. 11. Install the 5th baulk ring. D E WCIA0286E F 12. Install the synchronizer assembly onto a new 5th-6th synchronizer hub. CAUTION: ● Install with the orientation of the new synchronizer hub as shown. ● Do not reuse the 5th-6th synchronizer hub. G H I SCIA0921E ● Do not to hook the ends of the 2 spread springs (front and back have two each) on the same shifting insert. J K L SCIA1083E M 13. Install the 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly using Tool as shown. Tool number : KV40105710 ( — ) CAUTION: Align the grooves of the 5th-6th shifting insert and the 5th6th baulk ring. WCIA0287E Revision: March 2005 MT-109 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 14. Install the needle bearing, 6th input gear and then 6th bushing using Tool as shown. Tool number : ST33200000 (J-26082) WCIA0309E 15. Install the snap ring onto the input shaft, and measure to check that end play (gap between snap ring and groove) of the 6th bushing is within specification. End play standard value ● : 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) If the measurement is outside the standard value, select the appropriate size snap ring. SCIA0970E Snap Rings Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 1.76 mm (0.0693 in) 1.81 mm (0.0713 in) 1.86 mm (0.0732 in) 1.91 mm (0.0752 in) 1.96 mm (0.0772 in) 32204 8H511 32204 8H512 32204 8H513 32204 8H514 32204 8H515 2.01 mm (0.0791 in) 2.06 mm (0.0811 in) 2.11 mm (0.0831 in) 2.16 mm (0.0850 in) 2.21 mm (0.0871 in) 32204 8H516 32204 8H517 32204 8H518 32204 8H519 32204 8H520 16. Install the input shaft rear bearing using Tool as shown. Tool number : ST30901000 (J-26010-01) CAUTION: Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing the input gear side. WCIA0310E 17. Install the input shaft front bearing using Tool as shown. Tool number A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: ST30032000 (J-26010-01) 18. Install the oil channel onto the input shaft. WCIA0311E Revision: March 2005 MT-110 2005 Altima INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 19. Check the end play of the 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th input gears as shown. A End play standard values 3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in) 4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) 6th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) B MT SCIA0966E D E F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 MT-111 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] MAINSHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32241 ECS00BT7 DISASSEMBLY 1. Before disassembling, measure the end play of the 1st and 2nd main gears as shown. End play standard values 1st gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 2nd gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) CAUTION: If the measurement is outside the standard value, disassemble to check the contact surfaces of the gear, shaft, and hub. Adjust with the snap ring at assembly. SCIA0973E 2. 3. Remove the snap ring. Remove the C-ring holder, and then mainshaft C-ring as shown. SCIA0974E 4. Remove the mainshaft rear bearing, adjust shim, and 6th main gear using Tool as shown. Tool number 5. A: Commercial service tool B: ST33052000 ( — ) Remove the 5th-6th mainshaft spacer. WCIA0312E 6. Remove the 4th main gear and 5th main gear simultaneously using Tool as shown. Tool number 7. 8. A: ST33052000 ( — ) B: Commercial service tool Remove the adjusting shim. Remove the 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer. WCIA0292E Revision: March 2005 MT-112 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 9. Remove the 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd gear needle bearing, 2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly, 1st main gear, reverse main gear, 1st gear needle bearing, and 1st bushing simultaneously using Tool as shown. Tool number : KV40105020 ( — A B ) MT WCIA0293E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Mainshaft and Gears D Check the items listed as shown. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, and bending of the mainshaft. ● Excessive wear, damage and peeling of the mainshaft gears. E F G SMT640A H Synchronizer Check the items listed as shown. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, excessive wear on contact surfaces of the coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as shown. I J K SMT387A L ● If any cracks, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam face of baulk ring or working face of the insert as shown, replace it. M SMT867D Revision: March 2005 MT-113 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] Triple Cone Synchronizer (1st and 2nd) ● 1. Check the clearance of the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring of the 1st and 2nd triple cone synchronizers, using the following procedure. CAUTION: The outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring operate as a set to control the clearances “A”, “B”, and “C”. If the measured clearances exceed the service limit value, replace the components as a set. NOTE: To calculate the mean value of two or more measured values, add the highest and lowest measured values and divide by two. WCIA0195E Press the baulk ring on to the clutch gear taper cone by hand, then measure the clearance “A” at two or more points diagonally opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value. Clearance “A” Standard : 0.6 - 1.2 mm (0.024 - 0.047 in) Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) LCIA0298E 2. Measure clearances “B” at two or more points diagonally opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value. Clearance “B” Standard : 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in) Limit : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) SCIA1084E 3. Press the baulk ring on to the clutch gear taper cone by hand, then measure the clearance “C” at two or more points diagonally opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value. Clearance “C” Standard : 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in) Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) LCIA0300E Revision: March 2005 MT-114 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] Bearing A Check the item listed. If necessary, replace it with a new one. ● Damage and rough rotation of the bearing as shown. B MT MTF0041D D ASSEMBLY 1. Install the reverse main gear using Tools as shown. Tool number E A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV40101630 (J-35870) C: ST38220000 ( — ) F G WCIA0294E CAUTION: Install with the orientation of reverse main gear as shown. H I J K SCIA0992E 2. Install the 1st bushing using Tool as shown. Tool number 3. A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV38102510 (J-35870) C: ST38220000 ( — ) M Install the needle bearing, and then the 1st main gear. WCIA0295E 4. L Install the spread spring, shifting insert, and a new 1st-2nd synchronizer hub onto the 1st-2nd coupling sleeve. Revision: March 2005 MT-115 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] CAUTION: ● Install with the orientation of the new synchronizer hub as shown. ● Do not reuse 1st-2nd synchronizer hub SCIA0921E ● Install with the orientation of coupling sleeve as shown. SCIA0989E ● Do not hook the ends of the two spread springs (front and back have two each) on the same shifting insert. SCIA1083E 5. Install the 1st gear synchronizer assembly onto the mainshaft, and the synchronizer hub assembly onto the mainshaft using Tool as shown. Tool number A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV38102510 (J-35870) C: ST38220000 ( — ) CAUTION: Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring on the 2nd gear-side must have been removed. ● Install the coupling sleeve with the proper orientation. ● Revision: March 2005 MT-116 WCIA0296E 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 6. Install the 2nd bushing using Tool as shown. Tool number 7. 8. A A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV40105710 ( — ) Install the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring on 2nd gear-side. Install the 2nd needle bearing and 2nd gear. B MT WCIA0297E D 9. Install the 3rd main gear. Tool number A: ST35321000 ( — ) B: KV40105710 ( — ) E CAUTION: Install the 3rd main gear with the orientation as shown. 10. Install the 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer. F G WCIA0298E 11. Measure the dimension "C1" . Select a suitable adjusting shim so that the dimension "C1 " satisfies the standard dimension specification, and install it onto the mainshaft. Standard for dimension "C1" H : 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848 in) I CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. J K L M SCIA0944E Adjusting Shim Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) 0.60 mm (0.0236 in) 0.68 mm (0.0268 in) 0.76 mm (0.0299 in) 32238 8H500 32238 8H501 32238 8H502 32238 8H503 0.84 mm (0.0331 in) 0.92 mm (0.0362 in) 1.00 mm (0.0394 in) 1.08 mm (0.0425 in) 32238 8H504 32238 8H505 32238 8H506 32238 8H507 Revision: March 2005 MT-117 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 12. Install the 4th main gear with the specified orientation, using Tool as shown. Tool number A: ST33200000 (J-26082) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) CAUTION: Install the 4th main gear with the orientation as shown. WCIA0299E 13. Install the 5th main gear with the specified orientation, using Tool as shown. Tool number A: ST33200000 (J-26082) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) CAUTION: Install the 5th main gear with the orientation as shown. 14. Install the 5th-6th mainshaft spacer. WCIA0300E 15. Install the 6th main gear using Tool as shown. Tool number A: ST33200000 (J-26082) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) WCIA0313E 16. Select the 6th main adjusting shim and then install it onto the mainshaft. ● Calculate thickness “S” of 6th main adjusting shim by procedure below so that end play dimension between 6th main gear and mainshaft rear bearing becomes the dimension specified. End play : 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Dimension "S" = ("S1 " - "S2 ") - End play "S" : Thickness of adjusting shim "S1" : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to mainshaft rear bearing press-fit end face "S2" : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to 6th main gear end face CAUTION: Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected. SCIA0995E Revision: March 2005 MT-118 2005 Altima MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] Adjusting Shim Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 0.88 mm (0.0346 in) 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) 1.04 mm (0.0409 in) 1.12 mm (0.0441 in) 32237 8H560 32237 8H561 32237 8H562 32237 8H563 1.20 mm (0.0472 in) 1.28 mm (0.0504 in) 1.36 mm (0.0535 in) 32237 8H564 32237 8H565 32237 8H566 a. Using a height gauge, measure the dimension “S1 ” and “S2 ” as shown. b. Install the selected 6th main adjusting shim to the mainshaft. 17. Install the mainshaft rear bearing using Tool as shown. Tool number A B MT A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) D E F WCIA0314E 18. Install the C-ring onto the mainshaft, and check that the end play of mainshaft rear bearing meets specifications. End play standard value ● G : 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) H If the measurement is outside the specified standard value, reselect a new C-ring. I SCIA0979E J C-Ring Thickness Part number Thickness Part number 2.535 mm (0.0998 in) 2.565 mm (0.1010 in) 2.595 mm (0.1022 in) 2.625 mm (0.1033 in) 2.655 mm (0.1045 in) 2.685 mm (0.1057 in) 2.715 mm (0.1069 in) 2.745 mm (0.1081 in) 2.775 mm (0.1093 in) 2.805 mm (0.1104 in) 32348 8H800 32348 8H801 32348 8H802 32348 8H803 32348 8H804 32348 8H805 32348 8H806 32348 8H807 32348 8H808 32348 8H809 2.835 mm (0.1116 in) 2.865 mm (0.1128 in) 2.895 mm (0.1140 in) 2.925 mm (0.1152 in) 2.955 mm (0.1163 in) 2.985 mm (0.1175 in) 3.015 mm (0.1187 in) 3.045 mm (0.1199 in) 3.075 mm (0.1211 in) 32348 8H810 32348 8H811 32348 8H812 32348 8H813 32348 8H814 32348 8H815 32348 8H816 32348 8H817 32348 8H818 19. Fit the C-ring holder, and install the snap ring as shown. SCIA0974E Revision: March 2005 MT-119 2005 Altima K L M MAINSHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] 20. Check the end play of the 1st and 2nd main gears as shown. End play standard values 1st gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in) 2nd gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in) SCIA0973E Revision: March 2005 MT-120 2005 Altima REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS Disassembly and Assembly PFP:32281 A ECS00BT8 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the reverse idler gear adjusting shim. Remove the reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling sleeve and insert spring simultaneously. Remove the reverse idler gear needle bearing. Remove the thrust needle bearing. Remove the reverse baulk ring. Remove the reverse idler gear (front). Remove the reverse idler gear needle bearing. Remove the thrust needle bearing. Pull off the locking pin from the reverse idler shaft. B MT D E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Reverse Idler Shaft and Gears Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear and bending of the reverse idler shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage and peeling, of the reverse idler gears. F G H SCIA0953E I Synchronizer Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage and excessive wear on contact surfaces of coupling sleeve, synchronizer hub, and insert spring. ● Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as shown. J K L SMT637A ● If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam face of the baulk ring or working face of the insert as shown, replace it. SMT867D Revision: March 2005 MT-121 2005 Altima M REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS [RS6F51A] Baulk ring clearance ● Press the baulk ring against the cone, and measure the clearance between the baulk ring and cone as shown. If the measurement is below the specified limit, replace it with a new one. Baulk ring to gear clearance Standard : 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in) Limit value : 0.7 mm (0.028 in) SMT140 Bearing Check the item listed. If necessary, replace it with a new one. ● Damage and rough rotation of the bearing. MTF0041D ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION: ● Install the insert spring with the orientation as shown. SCIA0954E Revision: March 2005 MT-122 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS6F51A] FINAL DRIVE Disassembly and Assembly PFP:38411 A ECS00BT9 PRE-INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Clean final drive assembly sufficiently to prevent side gear thrust washer, differential case, side gear, and B other parts from sticking by gear oil. Upright the differential case so that the side gear to be measured faces upward. Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gears using MT Tool as shown. Tool number : — (J-39713) D E WCIA0261E 4. F Move side gears up and down, and measure the clearance as shown. Clearance between side gear and differential case G : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) CAUTION: There must be no resistance and the gears must rotate freely. H I SMT611A 5. 6. If the clearance measured is not within specification, adjust the clearance by changing the thrust washer thickness. Turn the differential case upside down, and measure the clearance between the side gear and differential case on the other side to the same specifications, adjust using a thrust washer as necessary. J K DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove the mounting bolts and then separate the final gear from the differential case. Remove speedometer drive gear. Remove the differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using tool and puller as shown. Tool number L M : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) WCIA0302E Revision: March 2005 MT-123 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS6F51A] 4. Remove the differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using tool and puller as shown. Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) WCIA0303E 5. Using a pin punch, pull out lock pin and pinion mate shaft as shown. SCIA0908E 6. Rotate pinion mate gears, and remove pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers, side gears, and side gear thrust washers from differential case. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case Check side gears, side gear thrust washers, pinion mate shaft, pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers and differential case as shown. If necessary, replace with new parts. MTK0135D Bearing Check for bearing damage and rough rotation as shown. If necessary, replace with new parts. CAUTION: When replacing the tapered roller bearing, replace the outer and inner races as a set. SPD715 ASSEMBLY 1. Apply gear oil to sliding area of differential case, each gear, and thrust washer. Revision: March 2005 MT-124 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS6F51A] 2. Install side gear thrust washers and side gears into differential case as shown. A B MT SMT839 D 3. While rotating pinion mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears, and aligning them diagonally, install them into differential case. 4. Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case as shown. CAUTION: Be sure not to damage pinion mate thrust washers. E F G H MTK0132D 5. a. b. Measure end play of side gears, using the procedure below. Then select side gear thrust washer. Upright the differential case so that the side gear to be measured faces upward. Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gears using tool as shown. Tool number : — I J (J-39713) K WCIA0261E L c. Move side gears up and down to measure end play, and select thrust washer so that it meets specification. End play standard value : 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) M CAUTION: ● There must be no resistance and the gears must rotate freely. ● Place differential case upside down. Measure the end play for opposite side-gears using the same procedure. ● Only one thrust washer can be selected. SMT611A Thrust washers Thickness Part number 0.75 mm (0.0295 in) 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) 0.85 mm (0.0335 in) 0.90 mm (0.0354 in) 0.95 mm (0.0374 in) 38424 81X00 38424 81X01 38424 81X02 38424 81X03 38424 81X04 Revision: March 2005 MT-125 2005 Altima FINAL DRIVE [RS6F51A] 6. Drive a new lock pin into the pinion mate shaft using a pin punch as shown. CAUTION: Do not reuse the lock pin. SCIA0908E 7. Install differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using Tool as shown. Tool number A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: KV38102510 (J-35870) WCIA0304E 8. Align and install the speedometer drive gear onto the differential case as shown. SMT842D 9. Install differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using Tool as shown. Tool number A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: KV38102510 (J-35870) WCIA0305E 10. Install the final gear into the differential case, and tighten the final gear bolts to specification. Final gear bolts : 122.5 - 137.5 N·m (13 - 14 kg-m, 91 - 101 ft-lb) SCIA0912E Revision: March 2005 MT-126 2005 Altima SHIFT CONTROL [RS6F51A] SHIFT CONTROL Inspection ● PFP:32982 A ECS0095A Check the contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage, or bending as shown. If necessary, replace the parts. B MT D E F G H SCIA0913E SHIFT FORK ● Check if the width of the shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling sleeve) is within specification, as shown. I J K SMT801D L Shift Fork Item One-side wear specification Sliding width of new part 1st & 2nd 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 3rd & 4th 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 7.80 - 7.93 mm (0.3071 - 0.3122 in) 5th & 6th 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 6.10 - 6.23 mm (0.2402 - 0.2453 in) Reverse 0.2 mm (0.008 in) 12.80 - 12.93 mm (0.5039 - 0.5091 in) Revision: March 2005 MT-127 2005 Altima M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51A] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS0095B TRANSAXLE Engine VQ35DE Transaxle model RS6F51A Model code number 7Y466 Number of speeds 6 Synchromesh type Warner Shift pattern SCIA0955E Gear ratio Number of teeth 1st 3.153 2nd 1.944 3rd 1.392 4th 1.055 5th 0.809 6th 0.630 Reverse 3.002 Input gear Main gear Reverse idler gear 1st 13 2nd 18 3rd 28 4th 36 5th 42 6th 46 Reverse 13 1st 41 2nd 35 3rd 39 4th 38 5th 34 6th 29 Reverse 38 Front 37 Rear 38 Oil capacity (Reference) 2.2 (2 3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt) Oil Level 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in) Oil type Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed Double cone synchronizer 3rd Triple cone synchronizer Revision: March 2005 1st and 2nd MT-128 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51A] FINAL GEAR A Engine VQ35DE Transaxle model RS6F51A Model code number 7Y466 Final gear ratio 4.133 Number of teeth Final gear/Pinion B 62/15 Side gear/Pinion mate gear MT — Gear End Play ECS0095C Unit: mm (in) Gear D End play 1st main gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) 2nd main gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) 3rd input gear 0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122) 4th input gear 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) 5th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) 6th input gear 0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063) E F G Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear ECS0095D 4TH, 5TH, 6TH & REVERSE BAULK RING Unit: mm (in) Baulk ring Standard Wear limit 4th 0.9 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.0571) 0.7 (0.028) 5th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) 6th 0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) Reverse 0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055) 0.7 (0.028) H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 MT-129 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51A] 1ST, 2ND AND 3RD BAULK RING Unit: mm (in) 1st, 2nd and 3rd Double Baulk Ring SMT138E 1st and 2nd Triple Baulk Ring WCIA0195E Dimension Standard Wear limit Double baulk ring Triple baulk ring Double baulk ring Triple baulk ring A 0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031) 0.6 - 1.2 (0.024 - 0.047) 0.2 (0.008) 0.3 (0.012) B 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043) 0.2 (0.008) 0.2 (0.008) C — 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043) — 0.3 (0.012) Available Snap Rings ECS0095E 6TH BUSHING End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Thickness mm (in) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.81 (0.0713) 1.86 (0.0732) 1.91 (0.0752) 1.96 (0.0772) Part number* Thickness 32204 8H511 32204 8H512 32204 8H513 32204 8H514 32204 8H515 mm (in) 2.01 (0.0791) 2.06 (0.0811) 2.11 (0.0831) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.21 (0.0871) Part number* 32204 8H516 32204 8H517 32204 8H518 32204 8H519 32204 8H520 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Available C-rings ECS0095F MAINSHAFT C-RING End play Thickness 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) mm (in) 2.535 (0.0998) 2.565 (0.1010) 2.595 (0.1022) 2.625 (0.1033) 2.655 (0.1045) 2.685 (0.1057) 2.715 (0.1069) 2.745 (0.1081) 2.775 (0.1093) 2.805 (0.1104) Part number* Thickness 32348 8H800 32348 8H801 32348 8H802 32348 8H803 32348 8H804 32348 8H805 32348 8H806 32348 8H807 32348 8H808 32348 8H809 mm (in) 2.835 (0.1116) 2.865 (0.1128) 2.895 (0.1140) 2.925 (0.1152) 2.955 (0.1163) 2.985 (0.1175) 3.015 (0.1187) 3.045 (0.1199) 3.075 (0.1211) Part number* 32348 8H810 32348 8H811 32348 8H812 32348 8H813 32348 8H814 32348 8H815 32348 8H816 32348 8H817 32348 8H818 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 MT-130 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51A] Available Thrust Washers ECS0095G A INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER B MT D SCIA1008E Standard length “C2” Thickness 154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094in) mm (in) Part number* 3.84 (0.1512) 3.90 (0.1535) 3.96 (0.1559) Thickness 32347 8H500 32347 8H501 32347 8H502 mm (in) E Part number* 4.02 (0.1583) 4.08 (0.1606) 4.14 (0.1630) 32347 8H503 32347 8H504 32347 8H505 F *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. G Available Adjusting Shims ECS0095H MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM H I J K SCIA1009E Standard length “C1” Thickness 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848in) mm (in) Part number* 0.52 (0.0205) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.76 (0.0299) Thickness 32238 8H500 32238 8H501 32238 8H502 32238 8H503 mm (in) Part number* 0.84 (0.0331) 0.92 (0.0362) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.08 (0.0425) 32238 8H504 32238 8H505 32238 8H506 32238 8H507 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.40 (0.0157) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 32225 8H500 32225 8H501 32225 8H502 32225 8H503 32225 8H504 32225 8H505 32225 8H506 32225 8H507 32225 8H508 32225 8H509 32225 8H510 32225 8H511 Revision: March 2005 Thickness mm (in) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) 1.12 (0.0441) 1.16 (0.0457) 1.20 (0.0472) 1.24 (0.0488) 1.28 (0.0504) 1.32 (0.0520) Part number* 32225 8H512 32225 8H513 32225 8H514 32225 8H515 32225 8H516 32225 8H517 32225 8H518 32225 8H519 32225 8H520 32225 8H521 32225 8H522 32225 8H523 MT-131 Thickness mm (in) 1.36 (0.0535) 1.40 (0.0551) 1.44 (0.0567) 1.48 (0.0583) 1.52 (0.0598) 1.56 (0.0614) 1.60 (0.0630) 1.64 (0.0646) Part number* 32225 8H524 32225 8H560 32225 8H561 32225 8H562 32225 8H563 32225 8H564 32225 8H565 32225 8H566 2005 Altima L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RS6F51A] *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in) Thickness mm (in) 0.44 (0.0173) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) Part number* Thickness 32238 8H510 32238 8H511 32238 8H512 32238 8H513 32238 8H514 32238 8H515 32238 8H516 32238 8H517 32238 8H518 mm (in) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.08 (0.0425) Part number* 32238 8H519 32238 8H520 32238 8H521 32238 8H522 32238 8H523 32238 8H524 32238 8H560 32238 8H561 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in) Thickness mm (in) 1.76 (0.0693) 1.80 (0.0709) 1.84 (0.0724) 1.88 (0.0740) 1.92 (0.0756) 1.96 (0.0772) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.04 (0.0803) 2.08 (0.0819) 2.12 (0.0835) 2.16 (0.0850) 2.20 (0.0866) Part number* Thickness 32237 8H800 32237 8H801 32237 8H802 32237 8H803 32237 8H804 32237 8H805 32237 8H806 32237 8H807 32237 8H808 32237 8H809 32237 8H810 32237 8H811 mm (in) 2.24 (0.0882) 2.28 (0.0898) 2.32 (0.0913) 2.36 (0.0929) 2.40 (0.0945) 2.44 (0.0961) 2.48 (0.0976) 2.52 (0.0992) 2.56 (0.1008) 2.60 (0.1024) 2.64 (0.1039) Part number* 32237 8H812 32237 8H813 32237 8H814 32237 8H815 32237 8H816 32237 8H817 32237 8H818 32237 8H819 32237 8H820 32237 8H821 32237 8H822 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. 6TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM End play 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in) Thickness mm (in) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.12 (0.0441) Part number* Thickness 32237 8H560 32237 8H561 32237 8H562 32237 8H563 mm (in) 1.20 (0.0472) 1.28 (0.0504) 1.36 (0.0535) Part number* 32237 8H564 32237 8H565 32237 8H566 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Available Shims ECS0095I — Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim — BEARING PRELOAD Differential side bearing preload: L* 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in) *: Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “L” in thickness. DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM(S) End play 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) Thickness mm (in) 0.48 (0.0189) 0.52 (0.0205) 0.56 (0.0220) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.64 (0.0252) 0.68 (0.0268) Part number* Thickness 31438 80X00 31438 80X01 31438 80X02 31438 80X03 31438 80X04 31438 80X05 mm (in) 0.72 (0.0283) 0.76 (0.0299) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.84 (0.0331) 0.88 (0.0346) 0.92 (0.0362) Part number* 31438 80X06 31438 80X07 31438 80X08 31438 80X09 31438 80X10 31438 80X11 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: March 2005 MT-132 2005 Altima J AIR CONDITIONER SECTION MTC MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 4 Contaminated Refrigerant ........................................ 4 General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 5 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ......................... 5 A/C Identification Label ............................................ 6 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 6 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ...................................................... 6 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 7 Precautions for Servicing Compressor ................... 10 Precautions for Service Equipment ........................ 10 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT ............ 10 ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ...................... 10 VACUUM PUMP ..................................................11 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET .....................................11 SERVICE HOSES ................................................11 SERVICE COUPLERS ........................................ 12 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE ...................... 12 CHARGING CYLINDER ...................................... 12 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 12 PREPARATION ......................................................... 13 Special Service Tools ............................................. 13 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 13 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 16 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 17 Refrigerant Cycle ................................................... 17 REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 17 Refrigerant System Protection ............................... 17 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ............. 17 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE .............................. 17 Component Layout ................................................. 18 LUBRICANT ............................................................. 19 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 19 LUBRICANT ........................................................ 19 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ........................... 19 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ............................... 21 Revision: March 2005 Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System ...... 21 System Construction .............................................. 21 OPERATION ....................................................... 21 TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER ............................................................... 22 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL ................................. 22 FAN SPEED CONTROL ..................................... 23 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL ................................. 23 MODE DOOR CONTROL ................................... 23 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL ........................... 23 Overview of Control system .................................... 23 Control Operation ................................................... 24 AIR CONDITIONER (A/C) SWITCH .................... 25 TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ............................................... 25 FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH ..................................... 25 RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH ..................... 25 DEFROSTER SWITCH ....................................... 25 MODE DIAL ......................................................... 25 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 25 Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 26 System Description ................................................. 27 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION... 27 CAN Communication System Description .............. 27 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 28 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 28 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 28 SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 28 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 29 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 29 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 31 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 32 Wiring Diagram — HEATER — .............................. 33 Wiring Diagram — A/C,M — ................................... 35 Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value... 38 INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL .......... 38 FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT ................................... 38 FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE ... 38 MTC-1 2005 Altima F G H I MTC K L M Operational Check .................................................. 40 CONDITIONS: ..................................................... 40 PROCEDURE: ..................................................... 40 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control ........................................................................... 42 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 42 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 42 LAN System Circuit ................................................ 44 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 44 Mode Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 47 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 47 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 48 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 48 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 48 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ...................................... 49 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 49 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 50 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 50 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 50 Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 51 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 51 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 52 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 52 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 52 Blower Motor Circuit ............................................... 53 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 53 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 54 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 54 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 54 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 58 Magnet Clutch Circuit ............................................. 59 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 59 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 60 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 60 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 62 Insufficient Cooling ................................................. 64 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 64 PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS .................... 65 PERFORMANCE CHART ................................... 67 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE ......................................................... 67 Insufficient Heating ................................................. 71 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 71 Noise ...................................................................... 72 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 72 Intake Sensor Circuit .............................................. 73 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 73 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 73 CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 76 Removal and Installation ........................................ 76 FRONT AIR CONTROL ....................................... 76 INTAKE SENSOR ..................................................... 77 Removal and Installation ........................................ 77 REMOVAL ........................................................... 77 INSTALLATION .................................................... 77 BLOWER UNIT ......................................................... 78 Removal and Installation ........................................ 78 REMOVAL ........................................................... 78 INSTALLATION .................................................... 78 Revision: March 2005 BLOWER MOTOR .....................................................79 Removal and Installation .........................................79 REMOVAL ............................................................79 INSTALLATION ....................................................79 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ..........................................80 Removal and Installation .........................................80 FUNCTION ..........................................................80 REPLACEMENT TIMING ....................................80 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................80 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY .................81 Removal and Installation .........................................81 REMOVAL ............................................................81 INSTALLATION ....................................................81 HEATER CORE .........................................................82 Removal and Installation .........................................82 REMOVAL ............................................................82 INSTALLATION ....................................................82 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ............................................83 Removal and Installation .........................................83 REMOVAL ............................................................83 INSTALLATION ....................................................83 MODE DOOR MOTOR ..............................................84 Removal and Installation .........................................84 REMOVAL ............................................................84 INSTALLATION ....................................................84 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ...........................................85 Removal and Installation .........................................85 REMOVAL ............................................................85 INSTALLATION ....................................................85 FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER .....................................86 Removal and Installation .........................................86 REMOVAL ............................................................86 INSTALLATION ....................................................86 DUCTS AND GRILLES .............................................87 Removal and Installation .........................................87 REMOVAL ............................................................87 INSTALLATION ....................................................88 REFRIGERANT LINES .............................................89 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ..................89 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................................89 Components ............................................................91 Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models .....................................................93 REMOVAL ............................................................93 INSTALLATION ....................................................93 Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models .....................................................94 REMOVAL ............................................................94 INSTALLATION ....................................................94 Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch ...94 REMOVAL ............................................................94 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................96 INSTALLATION ....................................................96 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................97 BREAK-IN OPERATION ......................................97 Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose ........................................................................98 REMOVAL ............................................................98 MTC-2 2005 Altima INSTALLATION ................................................... 98 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose ....................................................................... 98 REMOVAL ........................................................... 98 INSTALLATION ................................................... 98 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe ... 98 REMOVAL ........................................................... 98 INSTALLATION ................................................... 98 Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor .................................................................... 99 REMOVAL ........................................................... 99 INSTALLATION ................................................... 99 Removal and Installation for Condenser ................ 99 REMOVAL ........................................................... 99 INSTALLATION ................................................. 100 Removal and Installation for Evaporator .............. 100 REMOVAL ......................................................... 100 INSTALLATION ................................................. 101 Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve ...... 101 REMOVAL ......................................................... 101 INSTALLATION ................................................. 102 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks ............................ 102 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector ....................................................... 102 Dye Injection ......................................................... 102 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 103 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK DETECTOR ....................................................... 103 CHECKING PROCEDURE ............................... 104 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 106 Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ................ 106 COMPRESSOR ................................................ 106 LUBRICANT ...................................................... 106 REFRIGERANT ................................................. 106 ENGINE IDLING SPEED .................................. 106 BELT TENSION ................................................. 106 A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-3 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EJS002RO The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) EJS002RP WARNING: ● CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier. ● Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ● The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed: – When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. – When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. – Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used. – Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. – Do not allow A/C lubricant to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. Contaminated Refrigerant EJS002RQ If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: ● Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. ● Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. ● Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. ● If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility Revision: March 2005 MTC-4 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS ● does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. General Refrigerant Precautions Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● B EJS002RR WARNING: ● Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. ● Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ● Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). ● Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. ● Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ● Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ● Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. ● Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. ● A C D E F G H EJS002RS The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet I (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. MTC A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a K future service. Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period L of time cannot be removed . Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. M Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. Revision: March 2005 MTC-5 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS A/C Identification Label EJS002RT Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this green identification label on the underside of hood. WJIA0713E Precautions for Refrigerant Connection EJS002RU A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations. ● Expansion valve to cooling unit ● Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit) ● Refrigerant pressure sensor FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ● ● The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics. The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections. SHA815E Revision: March 2005 MTC-6 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION A QR25DE B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0981E Revision: March 2005 MTC-7 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS VQ35DE WJIA0982E CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or around, the connection. Revision: March 2005 MTC-8 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications O-ring size Part number* D New 8 92471 N8210 6.8 (0.268) 1.85 (0.0728) Former 10 J2476 89956 9.25 (0.3642) 1.78 (0.0701) 92472 N8210 10.9 (0.429) 2.43 (0.0957) 92475 71L00 11.0 (0.433) 2.4 (0.094) 92473 N8210 13.6 (0.535) 2.43 (0.0957) Former 92475 72L00 14.3 (0.563) 2.3 (0.091) New 92474 N8210 16.5 (0.650) 2.43 (0.0957) 92477 N8200 17.12 (0.6740) 1.78 (0.0701) 92195 AH300 21.8 (0.858) 2.4 (0.094) New 12 Former New SHA814E A Connection type 16 19 Former New 24 mm (in) W mm (in) B C D E *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. WARNING: Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is F less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. CAUTION: When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. G ● When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber. ● When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench. H ● After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture. ● When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for I connection. ● Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. MTC ● Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. ● Always replace used O-rings. ● When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not K to apply lubricant to threaded portion. Lubricant name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 L ● O-ring must be closely attached to grooved portion of tube. ● When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube. ● Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that M the O-ring is installed to tube correctly. Revision: March 2005 MTC-9 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS ● After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections. When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque. RHA861F Precautions for Servicing Compressor ● ● ● ● ● ● EJS002RV Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering. When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" . Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner. After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour. After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation. [Gap between clutch disc and pulley is 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)] Precautions for Service Equipment EJS002RW RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance. Revision: March 2005 MTC-10 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS VACUUM PUMP A The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it. To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the hose-to-pump connection, as follows. ● Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump. ● For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the hose from the pump. ● If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate. Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended. B C D E F G RHA270D H MANIFOLD GAUGE SET Be certain that the gauge face indicates R-134a or 134a. Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant. I MTC K SHA533D SERVICE HOSES L Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described (colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses opposite the manifold gauge. M RHA272D Revision: March 2005 MTC-11 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS SERVICE COUPLERS Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur. Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve Clockwise Open Counterclockwise Close RHA273D REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME. RHA274D CHARGING CYLINDER Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EJS002RX When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision: March 2005 MTC-12 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EJS003GJ The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B — (J-38873-A) Drive plate installer Installing pulley and drive plate C D E WJIA0367E KV99233130 (J-29884) Pulley puller Removing pulley F G LHA172 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment EJS003GK H Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its lubricant. Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubriI cant. Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant. MTC Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and compressor failure will result. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — ( — ) Refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) Container color: Light blue Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a) Fitting size: Thread size ● K large container 1/2 in -16 ACME S-NT196 KLH00-PAGS0 ( — ) Genuine NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS Type: Poly alkaline glycol oil (PAG), type DH-PS Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) vane rotary compressors (NISSAN only) Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz) S-NT197 K991J0130 (ACR2005-NI) ACR A/C Service Center Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging WJIA0293E Revision: March 2005 MTC-13 2005 Altima L M PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-41995) Electronic refrigerant leak detector Power supply: ● DC 12V (Battery terminal) AHA281A — (J-43926) Refrigerant dye leak detection kit Kit includes: (J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety goggles (J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector (J-41447) qty. 24 HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal) ZHA200H — (J-42220) Fluorescent dye leak detector Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal) For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system. Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles SHA438F — (J-41447) HFC-134a (R-134a) Fluorescent leak detection dye (Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle (Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.) SHA439F — (J-41459) HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce bottle For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak detection dye into A/C system. SHA440F — (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner For cleaning dye spills. SHA441F Revision: March 2005 MTC-14 2005 Altima PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39183-C) Manifold gauge set (with hoses and couplers) Identification: A ● The gauge face indicates R-134a. Fitting size: Thread size ● 1/2 in -16 ACME B C D RJIA0196E Service hoses ● (J-39500-72B) High side hose ● (J-39500-72R) Low side hose ● (J-39500-72Y) Utility hose S-NT201 (J-39500-20A) High side coupler ● (J-39500-24A) Low side coupler ● Low side hose: Blue with black stripe ● High side hose: Red with black stripe ● Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green with black stripe Hose fitting to gauge: ● 1/2 in -16 ACME F G Hose fitting to service hose: Service couplers ● E Hose color: ● M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached. H I S-NT202 — (J-39649) Vacuum pump (Including the isolator valve) Capacity: ● Air displacement: 4 CFM ● Micron rating: 20 microns ● Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz) Fitting size: Thread size ● 1/2 in -16 ACME MTC K S-NT203 L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-15 2005 Altima PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools EJS003GL Tool number Tool name Description J-41810-NI Refrigerant identifier equipment HFC 134a (R-134a) Checking refrigerant purity and system contamination RJIA0197E Power tool Removing bolts and nuts PBIC0190E J-44614 Clutch disc holding tool Holding clutch disc for removal and installation WHA230 Revision: March 2005 MTC-16 2005 Altima REFRIGERATION SYSTEM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Refrigerant Cycle PFP:KA990 A EJS002S1 REFRIGERANT FLOW The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank, through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil is controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case. Refrigerant System Protection EJS002S2 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM then signals the BCM (via CAN communication lines) to cease suppling power to the A/C relay which disengages and stops the compressor. This occurs when pressure on the high pressure side (as detected by refrigerant pressure sensor) is over approximately 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2 , 398 psi), or below approximately 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2 , 17.4 psi). PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE B C D E F The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the refrigerant pressure in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 3,727 kPa (38 kg/cm2 , 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the atmosphere. G H I MTC K L M LJIA0015E Revision: March 2005 MTC-17 2005 Altima REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Component Layout EJS002S3 WJIA0979E Revision: March 2005 MTC-18 2005 Altima LUBRICANT LUBRICANT Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor PFP:KLG00 A EJS002S4 The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: ● Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor ● Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) B C LUBRICANT Lubricant type Part number D : NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent : KLH00-PAGS0 E CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition ● Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm ● A/C switch: On ● Blower speed: Max. position ● Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).] ● Intake position: Recirculation ( ) ● Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the following table. F G H I Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. MTC Amount of Lubricant to be Added Lubricant to be added to system Part replaced m Amount of lubricant (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) K Remarks Evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Condenser 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Liquid tank 5 (0.2, 0.2) Add if compressor is not replaced. 30 (1.0, 1.1) Large leak — Small leak *1 In case of refrigerant leak ● *1: L M If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed. Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. Drain the lubricant from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. Drain the lubricant from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container. Revision: March 2005 MTC-19 2005 Altima LUBRICANT 7. 8. 9. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor and not the liquid tank. RHA065DD Revision: March 2005 MTC-20 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System PFP:27500 A EJS002S5 The LAN (local area network) system consists of front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and mode door motor. A configuration of these components is shown in the diagram below. B C D E WJIA0876E System Construction EJS002S6 F A small network is constructed between the front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and mode door motor. The front air control and motors are connected by data transmission lines and motor power supply G lines. The LAN network is built through the ground circuits of the two motors. Addresses, motor opening angle signals, motor stop signals and error checking messages are all transmitted through the data transmission lines connecting the front air control and each motor. The following functions are contained in LCUs built into the air mix door motor, intake door motor, and the H mode door motor. ● Address ● Motor opening angle signals I ● Data transmission ● Motor stop and drive decision MTC ● Opening angle sensor (PBR function) ● Comparison ● Decision (front air control indicated value and motor opening angle comparison) K L M WJIA0877E OPERATION The front air control receives signals from its various dials and switches. The front air control then sends air mix door, mode door and intake door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor LCU. The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subse- Revision: March 2005 MTC-21 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL quently, HOT/COLD, DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the front air control. WJIA0878E TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER Front air control data is transmitted consecutively to each of the door motors following the form shown in figure below. Start: Initial compulsory signal sent to each of the door motors. Address: Data sent from the front air control is selected according to data-based decisions made by the air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor. If the addresses are identical, the opening angle data and error check signals are received by the door motor LCUs. The LCUs then make the appropriate error decision. If the opening angle data is normal, door control begins. If an error exists, the received data is rejected and corrected data received. Finally, door control is based upon the corrected opening angle data. Opening angle: Data that shows the indicated door opening angle of each door motor. Error check: Procedure by which sent and received data is checked for errors. Error data is then compiled. The error check prevents corrupted data from being used by the air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor. Error data can be related to the following problems. ● Abnormal electrical frequency ● Poor electrical connections ● Interference from other signal transmission lines ● Signal level fluctuation Stop signal: At the end of each transmission, a stop operation, in-operation, or internal problem message is delivered to the front air control. This completes one data transmission and control cycle. WJIA0882E AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL The air mix door is controlled by the front air control based on input from the temperature dial setting. Revision: March 2005 MTC-22 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL FAN SPEED CONTROL A Blower speed is controlled by the front air control based on the position of the fan dial. With the fan dial set to any position except OFF, the blower will begin to operate. INTAKE DOOR CONTROL The intake door is controlled by the front air control based on input from the recirculation switch setting, and the MAX A/C switch setting. MODE DOOR CONTROL B C The mode door is controlled by the front air control based on input from the mode dial setting. MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL D E F G H I WJIA0904E The ECM controls compressor operation using input signals from the throttle position sensor and front air con- MTC trol. Overview of Control system EJS002S7 K The control system consists of an input sensor, switches, the front air control and outputs. L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-23 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL The relationship of these components is shown in the diagram below: WJIA0905E Control Operation EJS002S8 WJIA0906E Revision: March 2005 MTC-24 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL AIR CONDITIONER (A/C) SWITCH The air conditioner switch controls the A/C system. When the switch is pressed with the fan ON, the compressor will turn ON. The indicator lamp will also illuminate. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. A TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) B Increases or decreases the set temperature. FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH C Manually controls the blower speed. In the off position, the compressor and blower are OFF, the intake door is set to the outside air position, and the air mode doors are set to the foot (80% foot and 20% defrost) position. D RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. E DEFROSTER SWITCH Positions the air mode doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position. The compressor remains ON until the ignition is turned OFF. F MODE DIAL Controls the air discharge through control of mode door, also controls MAX A/C function. G REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH This switch turns the rear window defogger ON and OFF. H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-25 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Discharge Air Flow EJS002S9 WJIA1185E Revision: March 2005 MTC-26 2005 Altima AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL System Description EJS002SA A SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION B C D E F RHA044GA G H I MTC K L M WJIA0907E CAN Communication System Description EJS002SB Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-27 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00004 EJS002SC WORK FLOW SHA900E *1: MTC-40 SYMPTOM TABLE Reference Page Symptom ● A/C system does not come on. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C system. MTC-42 ● Air outlet does not change. ● Mode door motor does not operate normally. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. (LAN) MTC-47 ● Discharge air temperature does not change. ● Air mix door motor does not operate normally. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. (LAN) MTC-49 ● Intake door does not change. ● Intake door motor does not operate normally. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. (LAN) MTC-51 ● Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor. MTC-53 ● Magnet clutch does not engage. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch. MTC-59 ● Insufficient cooling. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling. MTC-64 ● Insufficient heating. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating. MTC-71 ● Noise. ● Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise. MTC-72 Revision: March 2005 MTC-28 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EJS002SD A ENGINE COMPARTMENT QR25DE Models B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0136E Revision: March 2005 MTC-29 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS VQ35DE Model WJIA0137E Revision: March 2005 MTC-30 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1559E Revision: March 2005 MTC-31 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Circuit Diagram EJS002SE WJWA0137E Revision: March 2005 MTC-32 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — HEATER — EJS002SF A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0138E Revision: March 2005 MTC-33 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJWA0275E Revision: March 2005 MTC-34 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — A/C,M — EJS003GP A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0140E Revision: March 2005 MTC-35 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJWA0177E Revision: March 2005 MTC-36 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0142E Revision: March 2005 MTC-37 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value EJS002SG INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL ● Measure voltage between each terminal and body ground by following “FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE”. MTC38, "FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE" WJIA0909E FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT WJIA0020E FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE Terminal No. Wire color Item 1 G Power supply for IGN 2 Y/R Power supply for BAT 3 B Ground 4 G/Y Compressor ON signal Ignition switch Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) — 12 12 — — 0 ON 0 OFF 5 Compressor 5 L/R Power supply for mode door motor, intake door motor, and air mix door motor — 12 11 R/Y Light (-) — 0 12 R/L Light (+) 15 L/B A/C LAN signal 17 L/Y Fan control AMP. control signal Lighting switch L/W Blower motor feed back 19 L/W Fan ON signal 20 W/L Revision: March 2005 0 12 — 2.5 - 3 High 9.- 10 Low 7.0 - 10.0 ON 0 OFF 5 Fan Power supply for IGN — MTC-38 5.5 Any speed except high Fan speed 18 OFF 1st position 12 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal No. Wire color Item Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) 22 GY Rear defrost ON signal 24 B/Y Sensor ground — 0 25 R/W Intake sensor — 0-5 30 B AC PD cut Condition Defroster switch — ON 0 OFF 5 — A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-39 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operational Check EJS002SH The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. CONDITIONS: ● Engine running and at normal operating temperature. PROCEDURE: 1. Check Blower 1. 2. Turn fan dial clockwise, blower should operate on low speed. Continue turning fan dial clockwise, and continue checking blower speeds until all speeds are checked. 3. Leave blower on HI speed. If NG, go to MTC-53, "Blower Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. WJIA0911E 2. Check Discharge Air 1. Turn mode switch clockwise five positions. WJIA0912E 2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-26, "Discharge Air Flow" . NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (audio or visual inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF is selected. Intake door position is checked in the next step. If NG, go to MTC-47, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. WJIA0910E 3. Check Recirculation 1. Press REC Revision: March 2005 switch. MTC-40 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Recirculation indicator should illuminate. 2. Press REC switch a second time. Recirculation indicator should turn off. 3. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound change slightly). If NG, go to MTC-51, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. A B 4. Check Temperature Decrease C 1. Turn the temperature dial fully counterclockwise. 2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets. If NG, go to MTC-64, "Insufficient Cooling" . If OK, continue with next check. D E F WJIA0913E 5. Check Temperature Increase 1. Turn the temperature dial fully clockwise. 2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets. If NG, go to MTC-71, "Insufficient Heating" . If OK, continue with next check. G H I WJIA0914E MTC 6. Check Air Conditioner Switch 1. 2. Turn fan dial to the desired position and push the air conditioner switch (if equipped) to turn ON the air conditioner. Confirm that the A/C indicator lamp illuminates and that the compressor clutch engages (audio or visual inspection). K L If NG, go to MTC-42, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control" , then if necessary, MTC-59, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" . If all operational checks are OK (symptom can not be duplicated), go to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" and perform tests as outlined to simulate driving condition environment. If symptom appears, refer to MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures. Revision: March 2005 MTC-41 M WJIA0915E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control EJS002SI SYMPTOM: ● A/C system does not come on. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA0916E *1: MTC-42 *2: MTC-40 *3: MTC-42 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION FRONT AIR CONTROL The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from intake sensor, temperature dial, and various switches needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. WJIA0917E POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL (PTC) The PTC is built into the front air control. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: ● A/C system does not come on. WJIA0793E Revision: March 2005 MTC-42 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL A 1. 2. 3. B Disconnect front air control connector M49. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminals 1 (G), 2 (Y/R), and 20 (W/L), and ground. C Terminals (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) (-) Connector - Terminal Wire colors M49-1 G M49-2 Y/R M49-20 W/L D Body ground 12V E WJIA1192E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [Nos. 12 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. ● If fuses are OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. ● If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. F G H 2. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front air control connector M49 terminal 3 (B) and ground. MTC Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal M49-3 Continuity (-) K Wire colors B Body ground Yes OK or NG OK >> ● Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . ● Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: March 2005 MTC-43 L WJIA1186E M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS LAN System Circuit EJS002SJ SYMPTOM: Mode door motor, intake door motor and/or air mix door motor do not operate normally. WJIA0883E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR MOTORS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 5 (L/R) and ground. Terminals (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector Wire color M49-5 L/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . WJIA1187E 2. CHECK SIGNAL FOR DOOR MOTORS Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 15 (L/B) and ground. Terminals (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground 5.5V (+) Connector Wire color M49-15 L/B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-44 WJIA1196E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MOTOR A Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground, and between intake door motor connector M58 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground. B Terminals (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Door motors Connector wire colors Mode M40-1 L/R Air mix M39-1 L/R Intake M58-1 L/R C D WJIA0038E E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace harness or connector. F 4. CHECK SIGNAL FOR MOTOR Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground, and between intake door motor connector M58 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground. G H Terminals (+) Door motors (-) Connectors wire colors Mode M40-3 L/B Air mix M39-3 L/B Intake M58-3 L/B Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 5.5V I WJIA1188E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace harness or connector. K 5. CHECK MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door motor connectors. Check continuity between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 2 (B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 2 (B) and ground, and between intake door motor connector M58 terminal 2 (B) and ground. M Terminals Door motors (+) (-) Connector wire colors Mode M40-2 B Air mix M39-2 B Intake M58-2 B Continuity Body ground Yes WJIA0884E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 MTC MTC-45 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. CHECK MOTOR OPERATION Disconnect and reconnect the motor connectors and confirm the motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Returns to normal operation.) ● Motor connector contacts dirty or damaged NG >> (Does not operate normally.) ● GO TO 7. 7. CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR OPERATION 1. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor connector. Reconnect the mode door motor connector and air mix door motor connector, confirm the mode door motor and air mix door motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor operate normally.) ● Replace the intake door motor. refer to ATC-97, "Removal and Installation" NG >> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor do not operate normally.) ● GO TO 8. 8. CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION 1. 2. Disconnect mode door motor connector. Reconnect the intake door motor connector, confirm the air mix door motor and intake door motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor operate normally.) ● Replace mode door motor. Refer toATC-98, "Removal and Installation" NG >> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor do not operate normally.) ● GO TO 9. 9. CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR AND MODE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION 1. Disconnect air mix door motor connector. 2. Reconnect mode door motor connector, confirm the intake door motor and mode door motor operation. OK or NG OK >> (Intake door motor and mode door motor operate normally.) ● Replace air mix door motor. refer to MTC-85, "Removal and Installation" NG >> (Intake door motor and mode door motor do not operate normally.) ● Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-46 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Mode Door Motor Circuit EJS002SK A SYMPTOM: ● Air outlet does not change. ● Mode door motor does not operate normally. B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0919E *1 MTC-26, "Discharge Air Flow" *4 MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" Revision: March 2005 *2 MTC-40, "Operational Check" MTC-47 *3 MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Mode door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Mode door motor (LCU) System Operation The front air control receives signals from its various dials and switches. The front air control then sends air mix door, mode door and intake door motor opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor LCU. The mode door motor reads their respective signals according to the address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCU's in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the front air control. WJIA0920E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Mode Door Motor The mode door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. WJIA0042E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Mode door motor and/or air mix door motor does not operate normally. Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-48 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Air Mix Door Motor Circuit EJS002SL A SYMPTOM: ● Discharge air temperature does not change. ● Air mix door motor does not operate. B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1644E *1 MTC-40, "Operational Check" *4 MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" Revision: March 2005 *2 MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" MTC-49 *3 MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Air mix door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Air mix door motor (LCU) System Operation The front air control receives signals from its various dials and switches. The front air control then sends air mix door, mode door and intake door motor opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor LCU. The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the front air control. WJIA0922E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Air Mix Door Motor The air mix door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by PBR built-in air mix door motor. WJIA0044E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Discharge air temperature does not change. Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-50 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Intake Door Motor Circuit EJS002SM A SYMPTOM: ● Intake door does not change. ● Intake door motor does not operate normally. B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1645E *1 MTC-40, "Operational Check" *4 MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" Revision: March 2005 *2 MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" MTC-51 *3 MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Intake door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Intake door motor System Operation The intake door control determines intake door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the front air control is set to DEFROST, or OFF, the front air control sets the intake door at the fresh position. WJIA0924E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake door motor The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. Door position is then fed back to the front air control by PBR built-in air mix door motor. WJIA0047E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Intake door motor does not operate normally. Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-52 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Blower Motor Circuit EJS002SN A SYMPTOM: ● Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1647E *1 MTC-40, "Operational Check" *2 MTC-53, "Blower Motor Circuit" *4 MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" *5 MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" Revision: March 2005 MTC-53 *3 MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Fan speed control system components are: ● Front air control ● Blower motor ● Fan control amplifier System Operation WJIA0926E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Fan Control Amplifier The fan control amplifier is located on the cooling unit. The fan control amp. receives a gate voltage from the front air control to smoothly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 5 to the 12V range (approx.). WJIA0049E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Blower motor is malfunctioning. WJIA0846E Revision: March 2005 MTC-54 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FAN CONTROL AMP. A 1. 2. 3. B Disconnect fan control amp. connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 3 (L/W) and ground. C Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M64-3 L/W D WJIA0855E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 7. E 2. CHECK FAN FEEDBACK CIRCUIT F 1. 2. G Disconnect front air control connector. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 (L/W) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-18 L/W (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. H I WJIA1190E MTC 3. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN CONTROL AMP. 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 1 (B) and ground. Terminal Connector - Terminal Wire color M64-1 B Continuity Body ground M Yes OK or NG OK >> Reconnect fan control amp. harness connector and GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 L MTC-55 WJIA0856E 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 4. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FAN CONTROL AMP. 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn fan dial to any position except OFF or AUTO. Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 2 L/Y and ground. Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M64-2 L/Y OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace fan control amp. 2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal. NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA0847E 5. CHECK FAN CONTROL AMP. CIRCUIT BETWEEN FAN CONTROL AMP. AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control and fan control amp. harness connectors. Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 2 (L/Y) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 17 (L/Y). 4. Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M64-2 L/Y M49-17 L/Y Yes WJIA0848E Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 MTC-56 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 (Y/R) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-2 Y/R (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal. NG >> ● Check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. ● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace an necessary. B C D WJIA1197E E F 7. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition OFF. Disconnect blower motor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between blower motor harness connector M62 terminal 1 (W/L) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M62-1 W/L (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. ● If OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. ● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: March 2005 MTC-57 H I MTC K WJIA0056E L M 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 8. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN CONTROL AMP. 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between blower motor harness connector M62 terminal 2 (L/W) and fan control amp. harness connector M64 terminal 3 (L/W). Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M62-2 L/W M64-3 L/W Continuity Yes WJIA0857E OK or NG OK >> Check blower motor. Refer to MTC-58, "Blower Motor" . 1. If NG, replace blower motor. 2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal. NG >> Repair harness or connector. COMPONENT INSPECTION Blower Motor Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. ● Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit. WJIA0059E Revision: March 2005 MTC-58 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Magnet Clutch Circuit EJS002SO A SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage. INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0927E *1 MTC-40, "Operational Check" *2 MTC-59, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" *3 MTC-62, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" *4 MTC-73, "Intake Sensor Circuit" *5 MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" *6 MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE" Revision: March 2005 MTC-59 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Front air control controls compressor operation by intake sensor signal and signal from ECM. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON. WJIA0854E 1. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY IN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E124 and compressor connector. Check continuity between compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B) and IPDM E/R harness connector E124 terminal 33 (Y/B). Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color F3-1 Y/B Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color E124-33 Y/B Yes WJIA0722E If OK, check harness for short to ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: March 2005 MTC-60 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR 1. 2. 3. A Reconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors. Start engine and press A/C switch. Check voltage between compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B) and ground. Terminal C (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V D (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color F3-1 Y/B B WJIA1193E OK or NG OK >> Check magnet clutch coil. 1. If NG, replace magnet clutch. Refer to MTC-94, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" . 2. If OK, check compressor mounting points for looseness or corrosion and repair as necessary. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK FUSE IN IPDM E/R E F G Check 10A fuse [No. 33 located at the IPDM E/R]. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace fuse and check IPDM E/R for short circuit. Replace if necessary. H 4. CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL I 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector M18 and front air control connector M49. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 27 (G/Y), 28 (L/W) and front air control connector M49 terminals 4 (G/Y), 19 (L/W). Terminals Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M18-27 G/Y M49-4 G/Y M18-28 L/W M49-19 L/W MTC Continuity K Yes L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1201E 5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal 70 (W) and ground. Terminal (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color F54-70 W (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 12V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> 1. Repair harness or connector. 2. Confirm that magnet clutch operation is normal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-61 WJIA0748E 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to MTC-62, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to MTC-99, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" 7. CHECK COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 4 (G/Y) and ground, with A/C compressor ON and with A/C compressor OFF. Terminal (+) (-) Connector - Terminal Wire color M49-4 G/Y Body ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Compressor ON: 0V Compressor OFF: 5V WJIA0859E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> ● When compressor is ON and voltage is not approx. 0V, Replace front air control. Refer to MTC76, "Removal and Installation" . ● When compressor is OFF and voltage is not approx. 5V, BCM is malfunctioning. 8. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS Check CAN communication circuits between BCM to ECM and between ECM to IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> ECM malfunctioning. NG >> Repair or replace component based on the result of diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION Refrigerant Pressure Sensor The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the condenser. ● Refer to MTC-17, "Refrigerant pressure sensor" . BBIA0027E Revision: March 2005 MTC-62 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ● Make sure that the A/C refrigerant pressure and the sensor output voltage are within the specified range as shown in the A/C operating condition figure. A B C SHA315F D E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-63 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Insufficient Cooling EJS002SP SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1194E *1 MTC-40, "Operational Check" *2 MTC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *3 MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART" *4 EC-1327, "Component Description" (VQ) EC-421, "Description" (QR) *5 MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" MTC-65, "PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS" *7 EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR) EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ) Revision: March 2005 MTC-64 *6 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0198E *1 MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART" *2 *4 MTC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" Revision: March 2005 MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART" *3 MTC-65 MTC-67, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJIA0749E *1 MTC-96, "INSTALLATION" *4 MTC-79, "Removal and Installation" Revision: March 2005 *2 MTC-53, "Blower Motor Circuit" MTC-66 *3 EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR) EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ) 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PERFORMANCE CHART Test Condition A Testing must be performed as follows: Vehicle location Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place) Doors Closed Door windows Open Hood Open TEMP. Max. COLD Mode switch B C (Ventilation) set Intake switch D (Recirculation) set Max. speed set (blower) speed Engine speed E Idle speed Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements. Test Reading F Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet Relative humidity % Discharge air temperature at center ventilator °C (°F) Air temperature °C (°F) 50 - 60 60 - 70 25 (77) 10.0 - 12.3 (50 - 54) 30 (86) 13.2 - 15.3 (56 - 60) 35 (95) 17.2 - 21.0 (63 - 70) 25 (77) 12.3 - 14.9 (54 - 59) 30 (86) 15.3 - 19.3 (60 - 67) 35 (95) 21.0 - 24.4 (70 - 76) G H I MTC Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table Ambient air Relative humidity % 50 - 70 Air temperature °C (°F) High-pressure (Discharge side) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Low-pressure (Suction side) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 30 (86) 1,220 - 1,500 (12.44 - 15.30, 176.9 - 217.5) 240 - 295 (2.45 - 3.01, 34.8 - 42.8) 35 (95) 1,360 - 1,690 (13.87 - 17.24, 197.2 - 245.1) 275 - 335 (2.81 - 3.42, 39.9 - 48.6) 40 (104) 1,500 - 1,830 (12.44 - 18.67, 176.9 - 265.4) 310 - 375 (3.16 - 3.83, 45.0 - 54.4) L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE Whenever system's high and/or low side pressure is abnormal, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (normal) pressure range. Since the standard (normal) pressure differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table above. Revision: March 2005 MTC-67 K 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser. Excessive refrigerant charge in refrigeration cycle Air suction by cooling fan is insufficient. Insufficient condenser cooling performance ↓ 1. Condenser fins are clogged. Corrective action Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained. ● Clean condenser. ● Check and repair cooling fan as necessary. 2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan ● Both high and low-pressure sides are too high. ● Low-pressure pipe is not cold. When compressor is stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approximately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2 , 28 psi). It then decreases gradually thereafter. Engine tends to overheat. AC359A ● An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. ● Plates are sometimes covered with frost. Poor heat exchange in condenser (After compressor operation stops, high pressure decreases too slowly.) ↓ Air in refrigeration cycle Evacuate repeatedly and recharge system. Engine cooling systems malfunction. Check and repair each engine cooling system. ● Excessive liquid refrigerant on low-pressure side ● Excessive refrigerant discharge flow ● Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification. Replace expansion valve. ↓ 1. Improper thermal valve installation 2. Improper expansion valve adjustment High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High-pressure side is too high and low-pressure side is too low. Upper side of condenser and high-pressure side are hot, however, liquid tank is not so hot. High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor and condenser are clogged or crushed. ● Check and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. AC360A High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High Gauge indication High-pressure side is too low and low-pressure side is too high. AC356A Revision: March 2005 Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High and low-pressure sides become equal soon after compressor operation stops. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor pickings Replace compressor. No temperature difference between high and low-pressure sides Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor pickings. Replace compressor. MTC-68 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle ● There is a big temperature difference between receiver drier outlet and inlet. Outlet temperature is extremely low. ● Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted. ● Temperature of expansion valve inlet is extremely low as compared with areas near liquid tank. ● ● Both high- and low-pressure sides are too low. Expansion valve inlet may be frosted. Probable cause Liquid tank inside is slightly clogged. Corrective action ● Replace desiccant assembly. ● Check lubricant for contamination. AC353A There is a big temperature difference between expansion valve inlet and outlet while the valve itself is frosted. B C D High-pressure pipe located between receiver drier and expansion valve is clogged. ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side Expansion valve and liquid tank are warm or only cool when touched. A Low refrigerant charge ↓ Leaking fittings or components Expansion valve closes a little compared with the specification. ↓ 1. Improper expansion valve adjustment Check refrigerant for leaks. Refer to Checking Refrigerant Leaks, MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" and MTC-103, "Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector" . E F G H ● ● 2. Malfunctioning thermal valve Remove foreign particles by using compressed air. I Check lubricant for contamination. MTC 3. Outlet and inlet may be clogged. An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Air flow volume is not enough or is too low. Low-pressure pipe is clogged or crushed. ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. ● Check thermo control amp. and intake sensor operation. ● Replace compressor. Evaporator is frozen. Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative Gauge indication Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative. Refrigerant cycle ● ● Air conditioning system does not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air. The system constantly functions for a certain period of time after compressor is stopped and restarted. Probable cause Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically. ↓ Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet. ↓ Water is mixed with refrigerant. Corrective action ● Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. ● Replace desiccant assembly. AC354A Revision: March 2005 MTC-69 2005 Altima K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action Leave the system at rest until no frost is present. Start it again to check whether or not the problem is caused by water or foreign particles. ● If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. ● If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and remove the particles with dry and compressed air (not shop air). ● If either of the above methods cannot correct the problem, replace expansion valve. ● Replace desiccant assembly. ● Check lubricant for contamination. Low-pressure side becomes negative. Liquid tank or front/rear side of expansion valve's pipe is frosted or dewed. High-pressure side is closed and refrigerant does not flow. ↓ Expansion valve or liquid tank is frosted. AC362A Revision: March 2005 MTC-70 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Insufficient Heating EJS002SQ A SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1646E *1 MTC-40, "Operational Check" *4 MTC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *5 *7 MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" Revision: March 2005 *2 MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" *3 CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THER- *6 MOSTAT HOUSING" MTC-71 CO-9, "CHECKING RADIATOR CAP" MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Noise EJS002SR SYMPTOM: Noise INSPECTION FLOW SHA331F Revision: March 2005 MTC-72 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS *1 MTC-94, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *2 MTC-97, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" *4 MTC-40, "Operational Check" *5 EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR) EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ) Intake Sensor Circuit *3 MTC-19, "LUBRICANT" A B EJS002SS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor C The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. After disconnecting intake sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ -15 (5) 12.34 -10 (14) 9.62 -5 (23) 7.56 0 (32) 6.00 5 (41) 4.80 10 (50) 3.87 15 (59) 3.15 20 (68) 2.57 25 (77) 2.12 30 (86) 1.76 35 (95) 1.47 40 (104) 1.23 45 (113) 1.04 D E F WJIA0091E G H I MTC If NG, replace intake sensor. K DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. L M WJIA0870E Revision: March 2005 MTC-73 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND BODY GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake sensor connector M33 terminal 1 (R/W) and ground. Terminal (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Body ground 5V (+) Connector - Terminal Wire color M33-1 R/W WJIA0092E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M50. Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal 2 (B/Y). Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M50-24 B/Y M33-2 B/Y Yes WJIA0873E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR Refer to MTC-73, "Intake Sensor" . OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> 1. Replace intake sensor. 2. Confirm system operation. Revision: March 2005 MTC-74 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 4. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M50. Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 25 (R/W) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal 1 (R/W). A B C Terminals Continuity Connector Terminal Wire color Connector Terminal Wire color M33-1 R/W M50-25 R/W Yes D WJIA0874E If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control, Refer to MTC-76, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Confirm system operation. NG >> Repair harness or connector. E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-75 2005 Altima CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:27500 EJS002ST FRONT AIR CONTROL Removal 1. 2. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . Remove the two screws and remove the front air control. WJIA0763E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-76 2005 Altima INTAKE SENSOR INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:27723 A EJS002SU REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the evaporator. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation for Evaporator" . Remove the intake sensor clip and then the sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface. B C D WJIA0100E E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-77 2005 Altima BLOWER UNIT BLOWER UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:27200 EJS002SV REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Remove the ECM. Disconnect the blower motor, intake door motor and fan control amplifier connector. Remove the two bolts and one screw from the blower unit, then remove it. WJIA0101E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-78 2005 Altima BLOWER MOTOR BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27226 A EJS002SW REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "Removal and Installation" . Release the eight tabs attaching blower motor to blower unit case and then remove it. B C D E F G H WJIA0104E I INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-79 2005 Altima IN-CABIN MICROFILTER IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation PFP:27277 EJS002SX FUNCTION Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean at either recirculation or fresh mode by installing in-cabin microfilter into blower unit. LJIA0012E REPLACEMENT TIMING Replace in-cabin microfilter. Refer to MA-7, "SCHEDULE 1" and MA-10, "SCHEDULE 2" . Caution label is fixed inside the glove box. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the glove box pins. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Press in the sides of the glove box door to release the glove box door from the glove box housing. Disconnect the glove box damper cord to remove the glove box door. Disengage the two filter cover tabs to remove the filter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilter from the blower unit. Install the new in-cabin microfilter into the blower unit. CAUTION: ● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow in the correct orientation. ● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow side of the filter facing the rear of the vehicle. 7. Install the filter cover on the blower unit. LJIA0013E 8. Connect the glove box damper cord to the glove box door. 9. Press in the sides of the glove box door to install the glove box door into the glove box housing. 10. Install the glove box pins. Revision: March 2005 MTC-80 2005 Altima HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:27110 A EJS002SY REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Drain the engine coolant from the cooling system. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (QR25DE) or MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE). Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" . Remove the fasteners and the cowl top. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core pipes. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid entry of contaminants. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the evaporator. Refer to MTC-89, "REFRIGERANT LINES" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid entry of contaminants. Remove the steering member. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the air mix door motor connector. B C D E F G H I MTC WJIA0110E 10. Disconnect the mode door motor connector. 11. Remove the heater and cooling unit. K L M WJIA0200E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Fill the radiator with the specified water and coolant mixture. Refer to MA-16, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" (QR25DE) or MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE). ● Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-81 2005 Altima HEATER CORE HEATER CORE Removal and Installation PFP:27140 EJS002SZ REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit. Refer to MTC-81, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the heater core pipe support screws and then remove it. WJIA0185E 3. Remove the heater core cover screws and then remove it. WJIA0127E 4. Remove the heater core. WJIA0186E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-82 2005 Altima INTAKE DOOR MOTOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27730 A EJS002T0 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the screws and then the intake door motor from the blower unit. B C D E WJIA0105E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-83 2005 Altima MODE DOOR MOTOR MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27731 EJS002T1 REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor connector. Remove the mode door motor screws and then remove the mode door motor. WJIA0200E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-84 2005 Altima AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27732 A EJS002T2 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the driver lower instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Disconnect the air mix door motor connector. Remove the air mix door motor screws and then remove the air mix door motor. B C D E WJIA0110E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-85 2005 Altima FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER Removal and Installation PFP:27761 EJS004O2 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Disconnect the fan control amplifier connector. Remove the screws from the fan control amplifier and then remove the fan control amplifier. WJIA0111E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-86 2005 Altima DUCTS AND GRILLES DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation PFP:27860 A EJS002T4 Ventilator Duct, Defroster Nozzle, Defroster Ducts, and Grilles B C D E F G H I WJIA0983E 1. Center defroster nozzle 2. Side defroster duct LH 3. Side ventilator grille LH 4. Center ventilator grille LH 5. Cluster lid D 6. Center ventilator grille RH 7. Side ventilator grille RH 8. Instrument panel 9. Ventilator duct 10. Side defroster duct CENTER MTC K 11. Side defroster duct RH REMOVAL Center Ventilator Grille RH, LH L 1. 2. 3. M Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" . Remove the two center ventilator grille screws. Release the two tabs and then remove the center ventilator grille. LJIA0149E Side Ventilator Grille LH 1. Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-87 2005 Altima DUCTS AND GRILLES 2. Remove the side ventilator grille LH. LJIA0150E Side Ventilator Grille RH 1. 2. Remove the instrument lower cover RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Remove side ventilator grille RH. LJIA0151E Floor Duct 1. 2. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-35, "FLOOR TRIM" . Release the foam tape and slide the floor duct rearward to release it from the clips. WJIA0115E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-88 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure PFP:92600 A EJS002T5 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. Remove the HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) or J2201 (R-134a recovery equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. Discharging Refrigerant B C D E F G H I WJIA0614E MTC Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant K L M WJIA0615E Revision: March 2005 MTC-89 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Discharging, Evacuating, and Recharging the A/C System WJIA0530E *1 MTC-19, "CHECKING AND ADJUSTING" *3 MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" *2 MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" *4 MTC-65, "PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS" Revision: March 2005 MTC-90 *5 MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Components EJS002T6 A QR25DE Models B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0981E Revision: March 2005 MTC-91 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES VQ35DE Models WJIA0982E NOTE: Refer to MTC-6, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-92 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models EJS002T7 A B C D E F WJIA0182E REMOVAL G 1. 2. 3. 4. H 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer toMTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the compressor connector. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of any contaminants. Remove the compressor bolts, then remove the compressor using power tools. I MTC INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation. ● After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Compressor bolts High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts Revision: March 2005 : 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) MTC-93 2005 Altima K L M REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models EJS002T8 WJIA0117E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" . Remove the coolant pipe bracket bolt using power tools. Remove the compressor mounting stud. Disconnect the compressor connector. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of any contaminants. Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools, and then remove the compressor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Compressor (rear side) bolt Compressor (front side) bolt Compressor (front side) nut High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts : 56.9 - 65.7 N·m (5.8 - 6.8 kg-m, 42 - 48 ft-lb) : 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb) : 59.8 - 69.6 N·m (6.1 - 7.0 kg-m, 45 - 51 ft-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation. ● After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch EJS002T9 REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to MTC-93, "Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models" (QR25DE), MTC-94, "Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models" (VQ35DE). Revision: March 2005 MTC-94 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 2. Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using Tool. Tool number 3. A : (J-44614) Remove the clutch disc. B C WHA228 D 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. E F G RHA072C 5. Remove the pulley assembly using Tool. ● Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the compressor shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter as shown. Tool number H I : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove. MTC WJIA1017E 6. 7. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. K L M WHA212 Revision: March 2005 MTC-95 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 8. Remove the three magnet coil screws and remove the magnet coil. WHA183 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before installation. Coil Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation. INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. WHA213 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : — (J-38873-A) WJIA1016E 4. Install the clutch disc on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down using the drive plate installer. WHA184 Revision: March 2005 MTC-96 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 5. Install the center bolt using Tool. Center bolt Tool number ● A : 12 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb). : (J-44614) After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the pulley rotates smoothly. B C WHA229 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION D Check the clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance E : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer and recheck the clearance. F G H I MTC K WHA194 BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-97 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose EJS002TA REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-91, "Components" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Low-pressure flexible hose (evaporator side) bolt Low-pressure flexible hose (compressor side) bolt Low-pressure flexible hose (in-line connection) bolt : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring on the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it for installation. ● After recharging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose EJS002TB REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-91, "Components" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. High-pressure flexible hose bolt : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it for installation. ● After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe EJS002TC REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to MTC-91, "Components" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 MTC-98 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES High-pressure pipe (evaporator side) bolt : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb) High-pressure pipe (condenser side) bolt : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) A CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. ● After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor B C EJS002TD REMOVAL 1. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Do not damage the condenser fins. D E F G WJIA0123E INSTALLATION H Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refrigerant pressure sensor : 9.8 - 11.7 N·m (1.0 - 1.2 kg-m, 7.3 - 8.6 ft-lb) CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Removal and Installation for Condenser EJS002TE I MTC REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" . CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe and hose with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. Remove the front fascia. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER" . K L M WJIA0124E Revision: March 2005 MTC-99 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 6. 7. Remove the mounting nuts from condenser mounting brackets. Remove the condenser. WJIA0125E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. High-pressure flexible hose and pipe bolt Condenser nuts : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb) : 5.0 - 6.79 N·m (0.51 - 0.69 kg-m, 45 - 60 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them after installing them. ● When charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Removal and Installation for Evaporator EJS003GN REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). NOTE: The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access the expansion valve. Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the expansion valve. Remove the center console side finisher RH. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" . Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . Remove the ECM. ● Disconnect the ECM connector. ● Remove the wire harness from the ECM mounting bracket. ● Remove the two ECM mounting bracket nuts and disconnect WJIA0128E the ground wire. Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "BLOWER UNIT" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-100 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 10. Remove the heater core cover. A B C WJIA0127E D 11. Remove the evaporator cover. E F G WJIA0188E 12. Remove the evaporator. ● Remove the thermo control amplifier. ● Remove the intake sensor. CAUTION: ● Mark the mounting position of the intake sensor and thermo control amplifier. H I MTC WJIA0190E K INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve mounting bolts L : 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve M EJS003GO REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE). NOTE: The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access the expansion valve. Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Revision: March 2005 MTC-101 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 4. Remove the expansion valve. WJIA0128E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve mounting bolts : 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb) CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Checking for Refrigerant Leaks EJS002TH Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage, damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector or fluorescent dye leak detector. If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak detector, move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector EJS002TI 1. Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or TXV) leak. 2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, with the UV lamp for dye residue. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector. NOTE: Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection EJS002TJ NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the A/C system or when the compressor has seized and has been replaced. 1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi). Revision: March 2005 MTC-102 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye into the injector tool (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the dye directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side service valve. Start the engine and switch the A/C ON and fan ON. While the A/C is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool (J-41459), refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from the low-pressure service valve. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the dye with the system lubricant. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from a few minutes to a few days for the dye to penetrate the leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector EJS002TK A B C D E PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK DETECTOR When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument is calibrated and set properly per the manufacturer's operating instructions. The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. F G H AHA281A 1. Position the leak detector probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked. I MTC K L SHA707EA 2. M When testing, circle each fitting completely with the leak detector probe. SHA706E Revision: March 2005 MTC-103 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES 3. Move the leak detector probe along the component at approximately 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in)/sec. SHA708EA CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn engine OFF. 2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service ports. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. c. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above 16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. NOTE: At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) pressure. Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low side (evaporator drain hose to the compressor shaft seal). Refer to MTC-91, "Components" . Clean the component to be checked and move the leak detector probe completely around the connection/component. Perform a leak check for the following areas: ● Compressor ● High and low-pressure hose fittings, relief valve and shaft seal. ● Liquid tank ● Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Service valves NOTE: ● Check that all the service valve caps are secure on the service valves (to prevent leaks). ● After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe any residue from the valves to prevent any false readings by the leak detector. ● Cooling unit (evaporator) NOTE: ● With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the cooling unit. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain hose. ● Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected leak, then repeat check as outlined above. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components. If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10. Start engine. Set the front air control as follows; A/C switch: ON Mode: face Intake position: Recirculation Revision: March 2005 MTC-104 2005 Altima REFRIGERANT LINES d. e. 9. 10. Temperature: MAX cold Fan speed: High Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after stopping the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when pressure is high. A B C D SHA839E 11. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the A/C system, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 12. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the supply tank using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant identifier equipment. 13. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the A/C system using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant identifier equipment. 14. Discharge the A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 15. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm there are no refrigerant leaks. 16. Conduct the A/C performance test to ensure that the system works properly. Refer to MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART" . E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: March 2005 MTC-105 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Service Data and Specifications (SDS) PFP:00030 EJS002TL COMPRESSOR Model CALSONIC KANSEI Type DKS-17D Displacement 175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3 ) / revolution Cylinder bore × stroke 30.5 mm (1.201 in) x 21.4 mm (0.84 in) Direction of rotation Clockwise (viewed from drive end) Drive belt Poly V LUBRICANT Model CALSONIC KANSEI (type DKS-17D) Name NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent Part number KLH00-PAGS0 Total in system 150 m Compressor (service part) charging amount Refer to MTC-19, "Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement" . Capacity (5.03 US fl oz, 5.3 lmp fl oz) REFRIGERANT Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity 0.50 ± 0.025 kg (1.10 ± 0.055 lb) ENGINE IDLING SPEED Refer to EC-80, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (QR25DE) or EC-698, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (VQ35DE). BELT TENSION Refer to MA-15, "ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)" (VQ35DE ENGINE)" . Revision: March 2005 MTC-106 or MA-22, "ENGINE MAINTENANCE 2005 Altima F BRAKES SECTION PB PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 2 REMOVAL ............................................................. 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 3 Inspection ................................................................. 3 Adjustment ............................................................... 3 PARKING BRAKE SHOE ........................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 REMOVAL ............................................................. 5 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 5 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5 SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT .................... 6 Drum and Lining Break-in ......................................... 6 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 7 Parking Brake Control .............................................. 7 Parking Drum Brake ................................................. 7 PB G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 PB-1 2005 Altima PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:36010 EFS0046L WFIA0274E 1. Control lever 4. Grommet 2. Adjusting nut 3. Front cable REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove center console. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" . Remove console floor duct. Refer to ATC-101, "Removal and Installation" (Automatic A/C), MTC-87, "Removal and Installation" (Manual A/C). Disconnect warning lamp connector. Remove all parking brake cable mounting nuts and bolts, loosen and remove adjusting nut. LFIA0092E 5. Remove the rear brake rotor. Refer to BR-34, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 PB-2 2005 Altima PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM 6. 7. Remove the lock plate mounting bolt. Remove the pin, then the parking brake cable. A B C D E PB G LFIA0093E INSTALLATION H Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Adjust the parking brake cable. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" . CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut. Inspection ● ● ● ● ● EFS0046M Check control lever for wear or other damage. Replace if necessary. Check wires for discontinuity or deterioration. Replace if necessary. Check warning lamp and switch. Replace if necessary. Check parts at each connecting portion and, if found deformed or damaged, replace. Check if the control lever stroke is within specification. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" . Adjustment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. I Revision: March 2005 K EFS0046N Fully engage the control lever. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut and fully release the control lever. Adjust clearance of the rear parking brake shoes. Refer to PB6, "SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT" . Depress the brake pedal fully more than five times. Make sure that no drag exists while rotating the rear wheels. Operate control lever 10 times or more with a full stroke [216 mm (8.5 in)]. Adjust control lever by turning adjusting nut. Pull control lever with specified amount of force. Check control lever stroke and ensure smooth operation. Lever stroke (number of notches) Force J M LFIA0094E :7-8 : 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) PB-3 L 2005 Altima PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM 9. After adjustment, check the following. ● There is no drag when control lever is being released. If drag exists, perform the following. – Remove the rear disc rotor, refer to BR-20, "Removal and Installation" . Verify the toggle lever returns to stopper when the parking brake lever is released. LFIA0095E – – If toggle lever does not return to stopper, loosen adjusting nut. Install rear disc rotor and adjust shoe clearance. Refer to PB6, "SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT" . LFIA0094E Revision: March 2005 PB-4 2005 Altima PARKING BRAKE SHOE PARKING BRAKE SHOE Removal and Installation PFP:44060 A EFS0046O REMOVAL WARNING: Clean brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. 1. Remove wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake rotor with the parking brake lever completely disengaged. If the brake rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: a. Secure the brake rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug. b. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the star wheel on the adjuster assembly in the direction as shown to retract the parking brake shoes. 3. Remove the parking brake shoe springs. 4. Remove the parking brake shoes and adjuster. WFIA0018E B C D E PB G INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● Visually inspect the lining for abnormal wear, damage and peeling. Using a micrometer, measure the thickness "A" of the lining. Standard lining thickness Lining wear limit "A" ● H : 3.2 mm (0.126 in) : 1.5 mm (0.059 in) I Visually inspect the inside of the drum for abnormal wear, damage and cracks. Using a pair of vernier calipers, measure the inside diameter of the drum. Standard inner diameter Maximum inner diameter J : 172 mm (6.77 in) : 173 mm (6.81 in) SBR021A CAUTION: If necessary, remove the parking brake shoe and check as follows. ● Check the shoe sliding surface for abnormal wear and damage. ● Check the anchor pin for abnormal wear and corrosion. ● Check the return springs for sagging. ● Check the adjuster for rough operation. L M INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Apply brake grease to the contact areas shown. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . WFIA0019E Revision: March 2005 PB-5 K 2005 Altima PARKING BRAKE SHOE ● Install the parking brake shoe springs as shown. LFIA0090E ● ● The orientation of the adjuster is different from LH to RH brakes. Assemble the adjuster so that the threaded part is expanded when rotating it in the direction as shown. Completely retract the adjuster to assemble. When disassembling the adjuster, apply brake grease to the threads. After installing parking brake shoes and rotor, adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-6, "SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT" . WFIA0021E SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. 3. 4. Make sure the parking brake control lever is fully released and parking brake cable adjusting nut is loosened. Remove the adjuster hole plug on the rotor. Using a screwdriver, turn the adjuster in the direction as shown until the rotor is locked. After locking, turn the adjuster in the opposite direction 5 or 6 notches. Rotate the rotor to make sure that there is no drag. Install the adjuster hole plug. After adjusting the clearance of the rear shoes, adjust the parking brake cable. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" . ● After replacing the shoes or the brake rotor or if the parking brake does not function well, carry out the break-in procedure. WFIA0286E Refer to PB-6, "Drum and Lining Break-in" . Drum and Lining Break-in EFS0046P CAUTION: Do not carry out the break-in procedure excessively. Doing so may cause uneven or premature wear of the brake shoe lining. When new parking brake shoes or brake rotors are installed or when parking brake performance is poor, perform the following break-in procedure. 1. Drive the unloaded vehicle on a safe, level and dry road. 2. Pull the parking brake control lever with a force of 147 N (15 kg, 33 lb). 3. While pulling the lever, continue to drive the vehicle forward 100 meters (328 ft) at approximately 35 km/h (22 MPH). 4. Allow the parking brake to cool down for approximately five minutes. 5. Release the parking brake control lever and drive the vehicle under normal conditions for two minutes to cool down the parking brake. 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 three times and repeat just step 5 once more. 7. After performing the break-in procedure, check the stroke of the parking brake control lever. If it is out of specification, adjust again. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" . Revision: March 2005 PB-6 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Brake Control Control type PFP:00030 A EFS0046Q Hand lever Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)] 7-8 Number of notches when warning lamp switch comes on 1 B Parking Drum Brake EFS0046R Type Brake lining Drum (disc) C DS17HF Standard thickness (new) 3.2 mm (0.126 in) Wear limit thickness 1.5 mm (0.059 in) Standard inner diameter (new) 172 mm (6.77 in) Wear limit of inner diameter 173 mm (6.81 in) D E PB G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 PB-7 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: March 2005 PB-8 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION PG POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ...................... 4 Schematic ................................................................ 4 Wiring Diagram — POWER — ................................. 6 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION ................................................ 6 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON ............................................ 10 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON ...................................................................11 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START ....................................... 12 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ...................................... 15 System Description ................................................ 15 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R ........... 15 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL ......... 15 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL ........................... 16 CAN Communication System Description .............. 16 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction ... 16 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 17 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ...................... 17 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS .......................... 18 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 18 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 20 Auto Active Test ..................................................... 21 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 21 OPERATION PROCEDURE ............................... 21 INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE ... 21 Schematic .............................................................. 23 IPDM E/R TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT ............ 24 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection .......... 25 Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) ........ 26 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R ................... 27 REMOVAL ........................................................... 27 INSTALLATION ................................................... 27 Revision: March 2005 GROUND CIRCUIT ................................................... 28 Ground Distribution ................................................. 28 MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 28 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS ................................ 30 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE) ........ 32 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE) ........ 34 BODY HARNESS ................................................ 36 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS ..................................... 37 HARNESS ................................................................. 39 Harness Layout ...................................................... 39 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT ................. 39 OUTLINE ............................................................. 40 MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 41 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW) .............. 43 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW) ............. 46 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE) ........ 48 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE) ........ 50 BODY HARNESS ................................................ 52 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS ..................................... 54 ROOM LAMP HARNESS .................................... 56 FRONT DOOR LH HARNESS ............................ 57 FRONT DOOR RH HARNESS ............................ 57 REAR DOOR LH HARNESS ............................... 58 REAR DOOR RH HARNESS .............................. 58 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) ...................... 59 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ............................ 62 Electrical Units Location ......................................... 62 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 62 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 63 Fuse ........................................................................ 65 Fusible Link ............................................................ 65 Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) ............................. 65 HARNESS CONNECTOR ......................................... 66 Description .............................................................. 66 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) .................................................................. 66 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) .................................................................. 67 HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) ................................. 68 PG-1 2005 Altima F G H I J PG L M ELECTRICAL UNITS ................................................ 69 Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 69 STANDARDIZED RELAY .......................................... 70 Description .............................................................. 70 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND Revision: March 2005 MIXED TYPE RELAYS ........................................70 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ..................70 FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) .......................72 Terminal Arrangement .............................................72 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX ..............................73 Terminal Arrangement .............................................73 PG-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EKS008UA The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis B C D E F G EKS008UB When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" H I J PG L M Revision: March 2005 PG-3 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Schematic PFP:24110 EKS008UC For detailed ground distribution, refer to PG-28, "Ground Distribution" . WKWA3028E Revision: March 2005 PG-4 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA3029E Revision: March 2005 PG-5 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram — POWER — EKS008UD BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION WKWA1465E Revision: March 2005 PG-6 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA1466E Revision: March 2005 PG-7 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT WKWA1844E Revision: March 2005 PG-8 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA1468E Revision: March 2005 PG-9 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON WKWA2110E Revision: March 2005 PG-10 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA1470E Revision: March 2005 PG-11 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START WKWA3030E Revision: March 2005 PG-12 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA3031E Revision: March 2005 PG-13 2005 Altima POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT WKWA3032E Revision: March 2005 PG-14 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) PFP:284B7 System Description A EKS008UE IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. ● IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc. ● It controls operation of each electrical component via BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R-integrated relays can be individually removed. ● B C D SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control E Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: ● Headlamps (Hi, Lo) F ● Parking lamps ● Tail lamps ● Front fog lamps G 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control H Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control I Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor magnetic clutch). 5. Cooling fan control J Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 6. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. PG CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and read necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control ● When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. ● Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: Controlled system Headlamp Tail and parking lamps Cooling fan Fail-safe mode ● With the ignition switch ON, the headlamp (low) is ON. ● With the ignition switch OFF, the headlamp (low) is OFF. ● With the ignition switch ON, the tail and parking lamps are ON. ● With the ignition switch OFF, the tail and parking lamps are OFF. ● With the ignition switch ON, the cooling fan HI operates. ● With the ignition switch OFF, the cooling fan stops. Front wiper Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper LO and HI remains in the same status it was in just before fail−safe control was initiated. Rear window defogger Rear window defogger relay OFF A/C compressor A/C compressor OFF Front fog lamps Front fog lamp relay OFF Revision: March 2005 PG-15 2005 Altima L M IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status ● CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. ● Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. ● When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status ● Process to stop CAN communication is activated. ● All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status ● IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. ● CAN communication is stopped. ● When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. ● When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description EKS008UF Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction ● ● EKS008UG When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Ignition switch signal Ignition relay status Tail lamp relay ON ON — OFF OFF — ON OFF — OFF ON ON (10 minutes) NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. Revision: March 2005 PG-16 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) EKS008UH A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Inspection Item, Diagnosis Mode Description SELF-DIAG RESULTS The IPDM E/R performs diagnosis of CAN communication and self-diagnosis. DATA MONITOR The input/output data of the IPDM E/R is displayed in real time. ACTIVE TEST The IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to electronic components to check their operation. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. B C CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. D E F G H BBIA0002E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. I J PG BCIA0029E L 3. Touch “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. ● If “IPDM E/R” is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . M BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 PG-17 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. BCIA0031E SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. WKIA1264E Display Item List Display items NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. TIME CONSULT-II display code Malfunction detection — — ● CAN COMM CIRC U1000 ● If CAN communication reception/transmission data has a malfunction, or if any of the control units fail, data reception/transmission cannot be confirmed. When the data in CAN communication is not received before the specified time. Possible causes CRNT PAST — — — Any of items listed below have errors: X X ● TRANSMIT DIAG ● ECM ● BCM/SEC NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: ● CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. ● PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECT FROM MENU” on the “DATA MONITOR” screen. ALL SIGNALS All signals will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitors the predetermined item(s). SELECT FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal(s). 3. 4. Touch “START”. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". Revision: March 2005 PG-18 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) 5. Touch “RECORD” while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch “STOP”. A B C D E F G H I J PG L M Revision: March 2005 PG-19 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) All Signals, Main Signals, Select From Menu Monitor item selection CONSULT-II screen display Item name Display or unit ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECT FROM MENU Description Motor fan request MOTOR FAN REQ 1/2/3/4 X X X Signal status input from ECM Compressor request AC COMP REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from ECM Tail & clear request TAIL & CLR REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM H/L LO request HL LO REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM H/L HI request HL HI REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM FR fog request FR FOG REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM FR wiper request FR WIP REQ STOP/1LO/LO/HI X X X Signal status input from BCM Wiper auto stop WIP AUTO STOP ACT P/STOP P X X X Output status of IPDM E/R Wiper protection WIP PROT OFF/LS/HS/Block X X X Control status of IPDM E/R Starter request ST RLY REQ ON/OFF X X Status of input signal NOTE Ignition relay status IGN RLY ON/OFF X X X Ignition relay status monitored with IPDM E/R Rear defogger request RR DEF REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM Oil pressure switch OIL P SW OPEN/CLOSE X X Signal status input from IPDM E/R Hood switch HOOD SW OFF X Theft warning horn request THFT HRN REQ ON/OFF X X Signal status input from BCM Horn chirp HORN CHIRP ON/OFF X X Output status of IPDM E/R Signal status input from IPDM E/R (function is not enabled) NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is in ACC position, display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG-MODE” screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. Touch “START”. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Test name CONSULT-II screen display Description Tail lamp output TAIL LAMP With a certain ON-OFF operation, the tail lamp relay can be operated. Rear defogger output REAR DEFOGGER With a certain ON-OFF operation, the rear defogger relay can be operated. Front wiper (HI, LO) output FRONT WIPER With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON), the front wiper relay (Lo, Hi) can be operated. Cooling fan output MOTOR FAN With a certain operation (1, 2, 3, 4), the cooling fan can be operated. Lamp (HI, LO, FOG) output LAMPS With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON, FOG ON), the lamp relay (Lo, Hi, Fog) can be operated. Horn output HORN With a certain ON-OFF operation, the horn relay can be operated. Revision: March 2005 PG-20 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Auto Active Test EKS008UI A DESCRIPTION ● – – – – – – – In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger Front wipers Tail and parking lamps Front fog lamps Headlamps (Hi, Lo) A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) Cooling fan B C D OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-30, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE ● E F G H I J When auto active test mode is actuated, the following eight steps are repeated three times. PG L M WKIA4104E Concept of Auto Active Test ● ● IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. If any of systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Revision: March 2005 PG-21 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Symptom Inspection contents Possible cause YES Rear window defogger does not operate. Perform auto active test. Does rear window defogger operate? NO YES Any of front wipers, tail and parking lamps, front fog lamps, and headlamps (Hi, Lo) do not operate. Perform auto active test. Does system in question operate? NO YES A/C compressor does not operate. Perform auto active test. Does magnetic clutch operate? NO YES Cooling fan does not operate. Oil pressure warning lamp does not operate. Perform auto active test. Does cooling fan operate? Perform auto active test. Does oil pressure warning lamp blink? NO YES NO Revision: March 2005 ● BCM signal input circuit ● Rear window defogger relay ● Open circuit of rear window defogger ● IPDM E/R malfunction ● Harness or connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and rear window defogger ● BCM signal input system ● Lamp/wiper motor malfunction ● Lamp/wiper motor ground circuit malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and system in question ● IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction ● BCM signal input circuit ● CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM. ● CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R ● Magnetic clutch malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and magnetic clutch ● IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction ● ECM signal input circuit ● CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R ● Cooling fan motor malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor ● IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and oil pressure switch ● Oil pressure switch malfunction ● IPDM E/R ● CAN communication signal between BCM and Combination Meter ● Combination meter PG-22 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Schematic EKS008UJ A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA1575E Revision: March 2005 PG-23 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT WKIA1609E Revision: March 2005 PG-24 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection EKS00FPL 1. FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION A Check that the following fusible links are not blown. Terminal No. Signal name Fusible link No. 1, 2 Battery power a, b, d B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace fusible link. C 2. POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION D 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. E Terminals F (+) Voltage (Approx.) (-) IPDM E/R connector Terminal E120 1, 2 Ground G Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. WKIA4017E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. I Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. A H J B Connector Terminal Connector Terminal IPDM E/R: E121 60 IPDM E/R: E124 38 Continuity PG Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace ground circuit harness of IPDM E/R. L WKIA4105E M Revision: March 2005 PG-25 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) EKS008UL CAUTION: If a CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on which control unit(s) carry out CAN communication. 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. 2. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "IPDM E/R" on the Diagnosis System Selection screen. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the diagnosis mode selection screen. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. CONSULT-II Display NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. TIME CONSULT-II display code CRNT PAST — — — Details of diagnosis result No malfunction Any of items listed below have errors: CAN COMM CIRC U1000 X X ● TRANSMIT DIAG ● ECM ● BCM/SEC NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: ● CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. ● PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.>>INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC>>Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 PG-26 2005 Altima IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R EKS008UM REMOVAL A 1. 2. 3. 4. B Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove 2 bolts and position coolant reservoir aside. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover. C D WKIA0120E E F G H WKIA0121E 5. 6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and then remove the IPDM E/ R. I J PG WKIA0122E L INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. M Revision: March 2005 PG-27 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT GROUND CIRCUIT Ground Distribution PFP:24080 EKS008UN MAIN HARNESS WKIA4106E Revision: March 2005 PG-28 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3144E Revision: March 2005 PG-29 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT ENGINE ROOM HARNESS WKIA2754E Revision: March 2005 PG-30 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA2755E Revision: March 2005 PG-31 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE) WKIA2756E Revision: March 2005 PG-32 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA2757E Revision: March 2005 PG-33 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE) WKIA3347E Revision: March 2005 PG-34 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA2759E Revision: March 2005 PG-35 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT BODY HARNESS WKIA3145E Revision: March 2005 PG-36 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT BODY NO. 2 HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3146E Revision: March 2005 PG-37 2005 Altima GROUND CIRCUIT WKIA2762E Revision: March 2005 PG-38 2005 Altima HARNESS HARNESS Harness Layout PFP:24010 A EKS008UO HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: ● Main Harness and Console Sub-harness ● Engine Room Harness LH (Engine Compartment) ● Engine Room Harness RH (Engine Compartment) ● Engine Control Harness and Engine Control Sub-Harness (QR25DE) ● Engine Control Harness, Engine Control Sub-harness-1, Engine Control Sub-Harness-2, and Enigne Control Sub-harness-3 (VQ35DE) ● Body Harness ● Body No. 2 Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. B C D SEL252V E F G H CONNECTOR SYMBOL Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated below. Water proof type Connector type ● Cavity: 4 or Less ● Relay connector ● Cavity: From 5 to 8 ● Cavity: 9 or More ● Ground terminal etc. Male I Standard type Female Male Female J PG L — M Revision: March 2005 PG-39 2005 Altima HARNESS OUTLINE WKIA2734E Revision: March 2005 PG-40 2005 Altima HARNESS MAIN HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4107E Revision: March 2005 PG-41 2005 Altima HARNESS WKIA4108E Revision: March 2005 PG-42 2005 Altima HARNESS ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW) A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4109E Refer to PG-46, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness. Revision: March 2005 PG-43 2005 Altima HARNESS WKIA2738E Revision: March 2005 PG-44 2005 Altima HARNESS PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4110E Revision: March 2005 PG-45 2005 Altima HARNESS ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW) WKIA2740E Refer to PG-43, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness. Revision: March 2005 PG-46 2005 Altima HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3356E Revision: March 2005 PG-47 2005 Altima HARNESS ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE) WKIA4111E Revision: March 2005 PG-48 2005 Altima HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4112E Revision: March 2005 PG-49 2005 Altima HARNESS ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE) WKIA4113E Revision: March 2005 PG-50 2005 Altima HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4114E Revision: March 2005 PG-51 2005 Altima HARNESS BODY HARNESS WKIA4115E Revision: March 2005 PG-52 2005 Altima HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3362E Revision: March 2005 PG-53 2005 Altima HARNESS BODY NO. 2 HARNESS WKIA3149E Revision: March 2005 PG-54 2005 Altima HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4116E Revision: March 2005 PG-55 2005 Altima HARNESS ROOM LAMP HARNESS WKIA2748E Revision: March 2005 PG-56 2005 Altima HARNESS FRONT DOOR LH HARNESS A B C D E F G H WKIA4117E I FRONT DOOR RH HARNESS J PG L M WKIA4118E Revision: March 2005 PG-57 2005 Altima HARNESS REAR DOOR LH HARNESS WKIA0095E REAR DOOR RH HARNESS WKIA0096E Revision: March 2005 PG-58 2005 Altima HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) EKS008UP Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring diagram. Code Section AT A/T 1st Signal 2NDSIG AT A/T 2nd Signal 3METER DI Triple Meter 3RDSIG AT A/T 3rd Signal 4THSIG AT A/T 4th Signal 5THSIG AT A/T 5th Signal A/C,A ATC Auto Air Conditioner A/C,M MTC Manual Air Conditioner A/F EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor AF/FH EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor AF1B1 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 1 AF1B2 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 2 AF1HB1 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 1 AF1HB2 EC ABS BRC C D E F Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 2 G Anti-Lock Brake System APPS1 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor APPS2 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor APPS3 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor ASCBOF EC ASCD Brake Switch ASC/BS EC ASCD Brake Switch ASCIND EC ASCD Indicator ASC/SW EC ASCD Steering Switch AT/IND DI A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO AV Audio AUTO/L LT Auto Light System B/COMP DI Board Computer BA/FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and TCM Power Supply BACK/L LT Back-up Lamp BRK/SW EC Brake Switch CAN AT CAN Communication Line CAN EC CAN Communication Line CAN LAN CAN System CHARGE SC Charging System COMBSW LT Combination Switch COMM AV Audio Visual Communication System CHIME DI Warning Chime CIGAR WW Cigarette Lighter COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control D/LOCK BL Power Door Lock DEF GW Rear Window Defogger DTRL LT Headlamp - With Daytime Light System ECM/PW EC ECM Power Supply for Back-Up ECTS EC Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ENGSS AT Engine Speed Signal EGRC1 EC EGR Function EGR/TS EC EGR Temperature Sensor EGVC/V EC EGR Volume Control Valve Revision: March 2005 B Wiring Diagram Name 1STSIG A PG-59 H I J PG L M 2005 Altima HARNESS EMNT EC Engine Mount ETC1 EC Electric Throttle Control Function ETC2 EC Throttle Control Motor Relay ETC3 EC Throttle Control Motor F/FOG LT Front Fog Lamp F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump FLS1 EC Fuel Level Sensor Function (SLOSH) FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor FTSP AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor Failure FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor FUEL EC Fuel Injection System Function FUELB1 EC Fuel Injection System Function (Bank 1) FUELB2 EC Fuel Injection System Function (Bank 2) H/LAMP LT Headlamp H/MIRR GW Door Mirror with Heated Mirror HEATER MTC Heater System HO2S2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) HO2S2H EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Heater HORN WW Horn HSEAT SE Heated Seat I/MIRR GW Inside Mirror (Auto-Anti Dazzling Mirror) IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGNSYS EC Ignition System ILL LT Illumination INJECT EC Injector INT/L LT Spot, Vanity Mirror and Trunk Room Lamps IVC EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve IVCB1 EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 1 IVCB2 EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 2 KEYLES BL Remote Keyless Entry System KS EC Knock Sensor LPSV AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN AT Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER DI Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp., Oil and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL EC Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIRROR GW Door Mirror MMSW AT Manual Mode Switch NATS BL Nissan Anti-Theft System NAVI AV Navigation System NONDTC AT Non-detective Items O2H2B1 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Heater Bank 1 O2H2B2 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Heater Bank 2 O2S2B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Bank 1 O2S2B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Bank 2 OVRCSV AT Over Run Clutch Solenoid Valve PC/A AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve PC/B AT Shift Pressure Solenoid Valve PC/C AT Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Failure PC/CS AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve P/SCKT WW Revision: March 2005 Power Socket PG-60 2005 Altima HARNESS PGC/V EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PHASE EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) PHSB1 EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1) PHSB2 EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2) PNP/SW AT Park/Neutral Position Switch PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch POS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (POS) POWER PG Power Supply Routing PRE/SE EC EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PS/SEN EC Power Steering Oil Pressure Sensor PWR/IN AT TCM Ignition Power RP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor SEAT SE Power Seat SEN/PW EC Sensor Power Supply SFTFNC AT Unusual Shifting SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System SROOF RF Sunroof SRS SRS B C D E F Supplemental Restraint System SSV/A AT Shift Solenoid Valve A SSV/B AT Shift Solenoid Valve B SSV/C AT Shift Solenoid Valve C SSV/CS AT Shift Solenoid Valve Failure SSV/D AT Shift Solenoid Valve D SSV/E AT Shift Solenoid Valve E START SC Starting System STOP/L LT Stop Lamp TLID BL Trunk Lid Opener TAIL/L LT Parking, License and Tail Lamps TCCSIG AT A/T TCC Signal (Lock Up) TCS BRC TCV AT Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve TPS AT Throttle Position Sensor TPS1 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS2 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS3 EC Throttle Position Sensor TRNSCV BL HOMELINK® Universal Transceiver TRSA/T AT Turbine Revolution Sensor TRSC AT Turbine Revolution Sensor G H I J Traction Control System TURN LT Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VEHSEC BL Vehicle Security System VENT/V EC EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VIAS EC Variable Air Induction Control System VIAS/V EC Variable Air Induction Control System Valve VSSA/T AT Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) VSSATC AT Revolution Sensor VSSMTR AT Vehicle Speed Sensor Meter W/ANT AV Audio Antenna WARN DI Warning Lamps WINDOW GW Power Window WIPER WW Front Wiper and Washer Revision: March 2005 A PG-61 PG L M 2005 Altima ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PFP:25230 EKS008UQ ENGINE COMPARTMENT WKIA4119E Revision: March 2005 PG-62 2005 Altima ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4120E Revision: March 2005 PG-63 2005 Altima ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION WKIA2765E Revision: March 2005 PG-64 2005 Altima ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Fuse ● ● ● ● EKS008UR A If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. B C D CEL083 Fusible Link EKS008US A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: ● If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. ● Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) E F G H WKIA0123E EKS008UT I For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: ● Power seat ● Power windows ● Power door locks ● Remote keyless entry system J PG L SBF284E M Revision: March 2005 PG-65 2005 Altima HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR Description PFP:B4341 EKS008UU HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ● The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] ● SEL769DA Revision: March 2005 PG-66 2005 Altima HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. ● The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. ● The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. CAUTION: ● Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. ● Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] ● A B C D E F G H I J PG L M AEL299C Revision: March 2005 PG-67 2005 Altima HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. ● Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. ● Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: ● Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. ● WHIA0103E Revision: March 2005 PG-68 2005 Altima ELECTRICAL UNITS ELECTRICAL UNITS Terminal Arrangement PFP:23710 A EKS008UV B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3348E Revision: March 2005 PG-69 2005 Altima STANDARDIZED RELAY STANDARDIZED RELAY Description PFP:25230 EKS008UW NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. SEL881H TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS SEL882H 1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make 1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break Revision: March 2005 PG-70 2005 Altima STANDARDIZED RELAY A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA0253E Revision: March 2005 PG-71 2005 Altima FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) Terminal Arrangement PFP:24350 EKS008UX WKIA4121E Revision: March 2005 PG-72 2005 Altima FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement PFP:24381 A EKS008UY B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA4122E Revision: March 2005 PG-73 2005 Altima FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Revision: March 2005 PG-74 2005 Altima G STEERING SECTION PS POWER STEERING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions for Steering System .............................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 POWER STEERING FLUID ........................................ 5 Checking Fluid Level ................................................ 5 Checking Fluid Leakage ........................................... 5 Bleeding Hydraulic System ...................................... 6 STEERING WHEEL .................................................... 7 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 7 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY ................ 7 CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL .......................................................... 7 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE .................................................................. 7 FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE ..................... 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 STEERING COLUMN ................................................. 9 Removal and installation .......................................... 9 REMOVAL ........................................................... 10 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 10 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................11 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ............ 12 On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 12 Revision: March 2005 CHECKING STEERING GEAR ........................... 12 CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE ..................... 12 CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT ....... 12 CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE .................. 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSTALLATION ................................................... 15 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 16 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 16 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 16 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 17 Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force ......................... 18 DECREASE ......................................................... 18 INCREASE .......................................................... 19 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ............................... 20 On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 20 CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM .................... 20 Removal and Installation ........................................ 20 REMOVAL ........................................................... 20 INSTALLATION ................................................... 20 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 21 PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION .................... 21 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 22 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 22 Inspection After Disassembly ................................. 24 HYDRAULIC LINE .................................................... 25 Removal and Installation ........................................ 25 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 26 General Specifications ............................................ 26 Steering Wheel ....................................................... 26 Steering Column ..................................................... 26 Power Steering ....................................................... 26 Steering Gear and Linkage ..................................... 27 PS-1 2005 Altima F PS H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EGS000QL The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Steering System ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EGS000QM Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack. Use nylon cloths or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with their operation. Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to hydraulic parts. Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease. Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated. Revision: March 2005 PS-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EGS000QN The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV48102500 (J33914) Pressure gauge adapter B Measuring oil pressure C D S-NT542 ST27180001 (J25726-A) Steering wheel puller E Removing steering wheel F S-NT544 HT72520000 (J25730-A) Ball joint remover PS Removing ball joint a: 33 mm (1.30 in) b: 60 mm (2.36 in) r: 9 mm (0.35 in) radius H I S-NT546 KV48103500 (J26357 and J26357-10) Pressure gauge Measuring oil pressure J K S-NT547 Commercial Service Tool EGS000QO Tool number Description Oil pump attachment Disassembling and assembling oil pump Unit: mm (in) S-NT774 Spring gauge Measuring steering wheel turning force or rack sliding force LST025 Revision: March 2005 PS-3 2005 Altima L M Symptom Shimmy Judder Revision: March 2005 EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" PS-20, "On-Vehicle Service" Steering gear rack sliding force Drive belt looseness Improper steering wheel Improper installation or looseness or tilt lock lever Mounting rubber deterioration × × × × × × × × × × × × × PS-4 × × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WHEEL HUB SUSPENSION TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES PS-12, "CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE" Steering linkage looseness FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" Improper installation or looseness of steering column DRIVE SHAFT PS-10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" Steering column deformation or damage PS-12, "CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT" PS-10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" PS-18, "Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force" PS-7, "CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY" Steering wheel play × PS-5, "Checking Fluid Leakage" × Steering gear fluid leakage × FSU-5, "FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY" × Tie-rod ball joint end play × FSU-5, "FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY" × Tie-rod ball joint rotating torque × FSU-5, "FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY" Vibration Tie-rod ball joint swinging force Shake PS-5, "POWER STEERING FLUID" Noise Air in hydraulic system Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS PS-5, "POWER STEERING FLUID" Reference page Fluid level NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EGS000QP Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2005 Altima POWER STEERING FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level PFP:KLF20 A EGS000QQ Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° to 80°C (122° to 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° to 30°C (32° to 86° F). CAUTION: ● Do not overfill. ● Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . B C D LGIA0021E E Checking Fluid Leakage EGS000QR Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. F PS H I J K L M WGIA0103E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° to 80°C (140° to 176°F). Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. If fluid leakage from power steering pump is noticed, check the power steering pump. Refer to PS-16, "INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY" . Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating a steering gear leak. Revision: March 2005 PS-5 2005 Altima POWER STEERING FLUID Bleeding Hydraulic System 1. 2. EGS000QS Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground. Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent, into the steering fluid reservoir tank to the specified level. Then quickly turn the steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel operation until the fluid level no longer decreases. LGIA0021E 3. Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following symptoms: ● Air bubbles in reservoir tank ● Clicking noise in oil pump ● Excessive buzzing in oil pump If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly. This does not affect the performance or durability of the system. Revision: March 2005 PS-6 2005 Altima STEERING WHEEL STEERING WHEEL On-Vehicle Service PFP:48430 A EGS000QT CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY ● With wheels in a straight-ahead position, check steering wheel play. Steering wheel play ● : 35 mm (1.38 in) or less If it is not within specification, check the following for looseness or worn components. Steering gear assembly Steering column Front suspension and axle Check steering system for looseness while moving the steering wheel in all directions. Axial end play B C D WGIA0034E : 0 mm (0 in) CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL Pre-checking ● ● E F Make sure that wheel alignment is correct. Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . Verify that the steering gear is centered before removing the steering wheel. PS Checking 1. 2. 3. Check that the steering wheel is in neutral position when driving straight ahead. If it is not in neutral position, remove the steering wheel and reinstall it correctly. If the neutral position is between two teeth, loosen tie-rod lock nuts. Turn the tie-rods by the same amount in opposite directions on both left and right sides. H I J WGIA0036E K CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE 1. 2. 3. 4. Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake. Start engine. Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. Make sure the fluid temperature is approximately 60° to 80°C (140° to 176°F). Tires need to be inflated to normal pressure. Check steering wheel turning force when steering wheel has been turned 360° from the neutral position. Steering wheel turning force 5. 6. 7. : 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, check rack sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE" . If rack sliding force is not within specifications, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-18, "Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force" . If rack sliding force is OK, inspect steering column. Refer to PS10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" . Revision: March 2005 PS-7 WGIA0035E 2005 Altima L M STEERING WHEEL FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle. Refer to FSU-18, "General Specifications (Front)" . If it is not within specifications, check rack stroke. Refer to PS27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . SMA127 Removal and Installation EGS000QU REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-43, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the steering wheel center nut. Remove the steering wheel with the Tool. Tool number 5. : ST27180001 (J25726-A) Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. WGIA0097E INSTALLATION 1. ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. LGIA0004E CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position. Also, with the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. (The spiral cable can be turned up to 2.5 turns from the neutral position to both the right and left.) Steering wheel center nut Revision: March 2005 : 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) PS-8 2005 Altima STEERING COLUMN STEERING COLUMN Removal and installation PFP:48810 A EGS000QV B C D E F PS H I J K L M WGIA0099E 1. Driver air bag module 2. Steering wheel 3. Spiral cable 4. Steering wheel side cover 5. Wiper/washer switch 6. Headlamp switch 7. Upper and lower column covers 8. Ignition switch 9. Upper joint Revision: March 2005 PS-9 2005 Altima STEERING COLUMN 10. Steering column (manual tilt/telescope type) 11. Lower joint and shaft assembly 12. Cowl panel 13. Hole cover 14. Shaft lower cover 15. Lower knee protector REMOVAL CAUTION: ● The rotation of the spiral cable (SRS air bag component part) is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed. ● Remove the steering wheel before disconnecting the coupling joint to avoid damaging the spiral cable. 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. If necessary, remove the steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove the instrument column cover and lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . 4. Remove the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" . 5. Remove the cluster lid and center console assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" . 6. Remove the instrument panel screws from the LH side of the instrument panel to allow the ignition switch to clear the instrument panel during removal. 7. Remove lower knee protector. 8. Disconnect the following: ● Headlamp switch ● Wiper switch ● Spiral cable ● Key switch and key lock solenoid ● NATS antenna amplifier ● Illumination lamp ● Ignition switch ● Column harness clips, position aside 9. Remove the shaft lower cover. 10. Remove the pinch bolt. 11. Remove the steering column nuts and steering column. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● 1. 2. ● When the steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows: Check the column bearings for damage or unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose grease. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary. Check the column tube for deformation or breakage. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary. If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, or if noise and rattles are heard during a turn, check the length (L) of the column. On models equipped with telescopic feature, make sure the column is in the forward most position before measuring. If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assembly. Steering column length (L) ● ● ● ● : 496 mm (19.53 in) Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary. Check for wear around the seal edges, replace as necessary. Check for corrosion or pitting around the seal sliding area. Replace the seal and shaft in case of seal edge wear or damage. Revision: March 2005 PS-10 LGIA0020E 2005 Altima STEERING COLUMN ● After installing the steering column, check the tilt mechanism for proper operation. Tilt mechanism range A : 3° per notch at 7 steps CAUTION: Do not exert any load or impact in the axial direction immediately before or after column removal. ● After installation check for smooth steering wheel rotation, without any catches or noise. ● Replace the column if it is depleted of grease, worn, damWGIA0026E aged, or if any scratches or coating separation are present on the shaft seal area. ● The nut on the upper joint may not be reused. ● During lower joint detachment, insert a tool into the yoke groove to prevent gouging damage. ● A washer must be used on all fastener bolts. ● B C D E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F CAUTION: When installing the steering column, finger-tighten all of the lower bracket and joint retaining bolts; then tighten them to specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column. PS NOTE: Align slit of the coupling joint with projection on dust cover. Insert the joint until surface A contacts surface B. H ● After installation, turn steering wheel to make sure it moves smoothly. Ensure the number of turns are the same from the straight-forward position to left and right locks. Be sure that the I steering wheel is in a neutral position when driving straight ahead. J SST491C Disassembly and Assembly ● ● ● EGS000QW Remove the tamper resistant self-shear type screws with a drill or other appropriate tool. Disconnect key interlock cable. Install new tamper resistant self-shear type screws. K L M WGIA0009E Revision: March 2005 PS-11 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE On-Vehicle Service PFP:49001 EGS000QX CHECKING STEERING GEAR ● ● ● ● Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and fluid leakage. Refer to PS-5, "Checking Fluid Leakage" . Check connection with steering column for looseness. Prior to removing the steering gear from the vehicle, check rack sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE" . If rack sliding force is not within specification, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-18, "Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force" . CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE ● Check ball joint, and other component parts for looseness, wear, and damage. CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT 1. Check the movement of steering gear housing during stationary steering on a dry paved surface. ● Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg, 11 lb) to steering wheel to check the gear housing movement. Turn off ignition key while checking. Movement of gear housing 2. : ±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less If movement exceeds the limit, replace or repair as necessary. CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms from the gear. Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature. Pull tie-rod slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check that rack sliding force is within specification. Average rack sliding force Maximum force deviation 4. : 210.7 - 298.9 N (21.49 30.49 kg-f, 47.37 - 67.19 lb-f) : 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) Check sliding force outside the above range at rack speed 40 mm (1.57 in)/s. SST090B Rack sliding force Maximum : Not more than 294 N (30 kg-f, 66 lb-f) Maximum devia: 147 N (15 kg-f, 33 lb-f) tion Revision: March 2005 PS-12 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Removal and Installation EGS000QY A B C D E F PS H I J K L M WGIA0108E 1. Outer tie-rod end 2. Cotter pin 3. Steering gear front insulator (QG25DE) 4. Suspension member 5. Steering gear rear insulator (QG25DE) 6. Steering gear insulator (VQ35DE) 7. Power steering gear and linkage assembly Revision: March 2005 PS-13 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE REMOVAL CAUTION: ● The rotation of the driver air bag spiral cable is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed. ● Remove the steering wheel and spiral cable before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable. 1. Remove the two front tires using power tool. 2. Disconnect the outer tie-rod ends using Tool. Tool number : HT72520000 (J25730-A) WGIA0101E 3. Remove the lower joint pinch bolt. LGIA0002E 4. Disconnect the power steering high and low pressure lines from the steering gear. 5. Remove the two power steering gear mounting bolts. ● Remove steering gear insulators to gain access. ● Do not remove the steering gear mounting bracket from the gear housing. Remove the power steering gear and linkage assembly. 6. WGIA0043E Revision: March 2005 PS-14 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install pipe connector. ● Use the specified tightening torque when installing the highpressure and low-pressure pipe connections. Excessive tightening will damage threads of connection or O-ring. B C D WGIA0008E E ● ● The O-ring in low-pressure pipe connector is larger than that in high-pressure connector. Take care to install the proper O-ring. Initially, tighten nut on tie-rod outer socket and knuckle arm to specification. Then tighten further to align nut groove with first pin hole so that the cotter pin can be installed. Outer tie-rod grooved nut F PS : 29 - 39 N·m (3 - 4 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) CAUTION: Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N·m (5 kg-m, 36 ft-lb). H SST824A I J K L M Revision: March 2005 PS-15 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Disassembly and Assembly EGS000QZ WGIA0010E 1. Steering gear 2. Gear housing fluid tube 3. Boot clamp 4 Dust boot 5. Boot band 6. Tie-rod inner socket 7. Inner tie-rod 8. Outer tie-rod 9. Cotter pin DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle gear housing carefully, as it is made of aluminum. Do not grip cylinder in a vise. 1. Remove the outer tie-rod sockets. 2. Remove the inner tie-rod sockets and boots. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Blow dry with compressed air. Revision: March 2005 PS-16 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Boot ● ● Check condition of boot. If cracked, replace it. Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating steering gear leak, replace the gear. Gear ● A B Thoroughly examine steering gear. If damaged, cracked, leaking, or worn, replace it. Inner and outer tie-rods ● ● ● ● C Check ball joints for swinging force: Tie-rod outer and inner ball joints swinging force A. Refer to PS27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . Check ball joint for rotating torque: Tie-rod outer ball joint rotating torque B. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . Check ball joints for axial end play: Tie-rod outer and inner ball joints axial end play C. Refer to PS27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . Check condition of dust cover. If cracked, replace outer tie-rod. D E F SST468C ASSEMBLY 1. 2. PS Install the inner tie-rods. Install the outer tie-rods to the specified length and tighten the outer socket lock nut. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . Use Genuine High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Outer socket lock nut H I : 37 - 46 N·m (3.8 - 4.7 kg-m, 27 - 34 ft-lb) J SST113C 3. K Measure rack stroke. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" . L M SST086BA 4. Before installing boot, coat the contact surfaces between boot and tie-rod with grease. SST967A Revision: March 2005 PS-17 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 5. Install the boot clamps and crimp securely. AST139 Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force EGS000R0 DECREASE Decrease rack sliding force as follows: 1. Loosen adjusting screw two rotations counter clockwise. CAUTION: ● Do not remove adjusting screw. ● Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations. 2. Tighten adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification. Average rack sliding force Maximum force deviation : 210.7 - 298.9 N (21.49 - 30.49 kg-f, 47.37 - 67.19 lb-f) : 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) NOTE: Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb). LGIA0018E 3. 4. 5. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE" . If rack sliding force is out of specification, adjust rack sliding force again. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification, replace steering gear. Refer to PS-13, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: March 2005 PS-18 2005 Altima POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE INCREASE A Increase rack sliding force as follows: 1. Tighten adjusting screw until it is flush with housing surface. CAUTION: ● Do not remove adjusting screw. ● Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations. B C D LGIA0019E 2. E Loosen adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification. Average rack sliding force Maximum force deviation : 210.7 - 298.9 N (21.49 - 30.49 kg-f, 47.37 - 67.19 lb-f) : 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) F PS NOTE: Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb). LGIA0018E 3. 4. 5. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE" . If rack sliding force is out of specification, adjust rack sliding force again. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification, replace steering gear. H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 PS-19 2005 Altima POWER STEERING OIL PUMP POWER STEERING OIL PUMP On-Vehicle Service PFP:49110 EGS000R1 CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire pressure. 1. Set Tools. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System" . Tool numbers : KV48102500 (J33914), KV48103500 (J26357 and J26357-10) 2. 3. Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in tank rises to 60 to 80°C (140 to 176°F). WARNING: Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine WGIA0105E is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in oil pump increases to maximum. This will raise oil temperature abnormally. Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at 1,000 rpm. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. Oil pump maximum standard pressure : 8,000 - 8,800 kPa (82 - 90 kg/cm, 1,160 - 1,276 psi) If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK. If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow control valve. Refer to PS-20, "On-Vehicle Service" . If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and check pressure again. CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds. ● If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear is damaged. Refer to PS-13, "Removal and Installation" . ● If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. Refer to PS-20, "Removal and Installation" . After checking hydraulic system, remove Tools and add fluid as necessary. Then completely bleed air out of system. Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System" . ● ● 4. 5. Removal and Installation EGS000R2 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen adjust screw and oil pump bolt, then remove belt. Remove oil pump union bolts and hose. Remove oil pump bracket bolts. Remove oil pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Adjust belt tension. Refer to MA-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE), MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ35DE). ● Bleed air after installation. Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System" . Revision: March 2005 PS-20 2005 Altima POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Disassembly and Assembly EGS000R3 A B C D E F PS H I J WGIA0122E 1. Pulley 2. Snap ring 3. Drive shaft 4. Oil seal 5. Suction pipe 6. O-ring 7. Spring 8. Flow control valve 9. O-ring 10. Connector 11. Washer 12. Joint 13. Connector bolt 14. Pump case 15. O-ring 16. O-ring 17. Front side plate 18. Vane 19. Rotor 20. Pin 21. Cam ring 22. Gasket 23. Rear cover 24. Mounting bracket K L M 25. Oil pump bracket PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. ● Oil leak from any point shown in the figure ● Deformed or damaged pulley ● Poor performance SST984A Revision: March 2005 PS-21 2005 Altima POWER STEERING OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: ● Parts which can be disassembled are strictly limited. Never disassemble parts other than those specified. ● Disassemble in as clean a place as possible. ● Clean your hands before disassembly. ● Do not use rags; use nylon cloths or paper towels. ● Follow the procedures and cautions in the Service Manual. ● When disassembling and reassembling, do not let foreign matter enter or contact the parts. 1. Remove snap ring, then draw drive shaft out using press. Be careful not to drop drive shaft. SST010B 2. Remove oil seal using a flat blade screwdriver as shown. Be careful not to damage front housing. SST034A 3. Remove connector and flow control valve with spring. Be careful not to drop flow control valve. SST036A 4. Inspect all of the power steering oil pump components, and repair or replace as necessary. Refer to PS16, "INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY" . ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly, noting the following instructions. ● Install new O-rings and make sure they are properly installed. Revision: March 2005 PS-22 2005 Altima POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ● ● ● Install new oil seal using a drift, and make sure oil seal direction is as shown. Cam ring, rotor and vanes must be replaced as a set if necessary. Coat each part with Genuine NISSAN PSF when assembling. A B C SST038A D ● Pay attention to the direction of rotor. E F PS WST031 ● H When assembling vanes to rotor, rounded surfaces of vanes must face cam ring side. I J K SST843A L M Revision: March 2005 PS-23 2005 Altima POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ● Insert pin 2 into pin groove 1 of front housing and front side plate. Then install cam ring 3 as shown. Cam ring : D1 is less than D2 WST035 Inspection After Disassembly ● ● ● EGS000R4 If pulley is cracked or deformed, replace it. If an oil leak is found around pulley shaft oil seal, replace the seal. If the pulley or pulley shaft is deformed or worn, replace it. Revision: March 2005 PS-24 2005 Altima HYDRAULIC LINE HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation PFP:49721 A EGS000R5 Refer to the illustration for hydraulic line routing. Remove any components to access lines. CAUTION: Be careful not to kink or bend lines. B C D E F PS H I J WGIA0123E 1. Power steering fluid reservoir 2. Power steering oil cooler 3. Power steering gear 4. Power steering pressure switch (QR25DE) 5. Power steering pressure switch (VQ35DE) 6. Power steering oil pump 7. Washer 8. Tube 9. Hose K L M Revision: March 2005 PS-25 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00100 EGS000R6 Power steering Steering model QR25DE VQ35DE Steering gear type PR26AD Steering overall gear ratio 16.1 : 1 Turns of steering wheel (Lock to lock) 2.8 Steering column type 2.6 (SE, SE-R), 2.8 (S, SL) Collapsible, tilt, non-motorized telescoping Steering Wheel EGS000R7 Steering wheel axial play mm (in) Steering wheel play 0 (0) mm (in) Movement of gear housing 35 (1.38) or less ±2 (±0.08) or less mm (in) Steering Column EGS000R8 Applied model Steering column length “L” All mm (in)* 496 (19.53) LGIA0020E *: On models equipped with telescopic feature, make sure the column is in the forward most position before measuring. Power Steering EGS000R9 Applied model All Steering gear type PR26AD Pump type F40 Steering wheel turning force (Measured at one full turn from the neutral position) N (kg-f, lb-f) 39 (4, 9) or less Fluid capacity (Approximate) 1.0 (2 1/8, 1 3/4) Oil pump maximum pressure Revision: March 2005 (US pt., Imp pt.) 8,000 - 8,800 (82 - 90, 1,160 - 1,276) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) PS-26 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering Gear and Linkage EGS000RA A Applied model All Steering gear type PR26AD Swinging force at cotter pin hole: “A” f, lb-f) Tie-rod outer ball joint Rotating torque: “B” Axial end play: “C” Swinging force*: “A” Tie-rod inner ball joint Axial end play: “C” N (kg- N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 6.47 - 64.63 (0.66 - 6.59, 1.46 - 14.53) 0.29 - 2.94 (3.0 - 30.0, 2.6 - 26.0) mm (in) C 0.4 (0.016) or less N (kg-f, lb-f) B 5.69 - 45.60 (0.58 - 4.65, 1.28 - 10.25) mm (in) 0.2 (0.008) or less D *: Measuring point: 172 mm (6.77 in) E F PS SST468C Tie-rod standard length “L” mm (in) 208.8 (8.220) H I J K SGIA0167E Initial tightening torque Retainer adjustment Adjusting screw Retightening torque after loosening (kg-cm, in-lb) L 0.2 (2, 1.7) 4.9 - 5.9 (50 - 60, 43 - 52) M degree 60° - 80° Range within ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) from the neutral position at rack speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s Except for the above range Revision: March 2005 4.9 - 5.9 (50 - 60, 43 - 52) N·m Tightening torque after gear has settled N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) Returning angle Rack sliding force N (kg-f, lbf) Under normal operating oil pressure N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) PS-27 Average force 210.7 - 298.9 (21.49 30.49, 47.37 - 67.19) Maximum force deviation 98 (10, 22) Maximum sliding force 294 (30, 66) Maximum force deviation 147 (15, 33) 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Rack stroke “S” 16 inch tire: 69.5 mm (2.74 in) 17 inch tire: 66.5 mm (2.62 in) mm (in) SST086BA Revision: March 2005 PS-28 2005 Altima D DRIVELINE/AXLE SECTION RAX REAR AXLE A B C RAX E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 WHEEL HUB .............................................................. 5 On-vehicle Service ................................................... 5 REAR WHEEL BEARING ..................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 REMOVAL ............................................................. 6 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 8 Wheel Bearing (Rear) ............................................... 8 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 RAX-1 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 EDS001DE When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes. After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment. Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link. Always torque brake lines when installing. Revision: March 2005 RAX-2 SBR686C 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS001DF The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name ST15310000 ( — Drift B Install ABS sensor rotor a: 84 mm (3.31 in) dia. b: 96 mm (3.78 in) dia. c: 8 mm (0.31 in) d: 20 mm (0.79 in) ) C RAX NT607 E Commercial Service Tools EDS001DG Tool name Description GG94310000 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) F G NT360 Drift H Install ABS sensor rotor a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia. b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia. I J NT371 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts K L PBIC0190E M Revision: March 2005 RAX-3 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EDS001DH RAX-6 RAX-6 RAX-5 WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Improper installation, looseness Parts interference Wheel bearing damage TIRES ROAD WHEEL Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Noise × × × × Shake × × × × Vibration × × × Shimmy × × × Judder × Poor quality ride or handling × Reference page Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Symptom REAR AXLE × × × × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: March 2005 RAX-4 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB WHEEL HUB On-vehicle Service PFP:43202 A EDS001DI Check axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear or damage. ● Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. B C RAX SMA525A E REAR WHEEL BEARING ● Check axial end play. Axial end play ● ● F : 0.1 mm (0.0040 in) or less Check that wheel hub bearings operate smoothly. Replace wheel bearing assembly if there is axial end play or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Refer to RAX-5, "Onvehicle Service" . G H LDIA0009E I J K L M Revision: March 2005 RAX-5 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB Removal and Installation EDS001DJ WDIA0026E 1. Knuckle 2. Baffle plate 3. Wheel hub assembly 4. Brake rotor 5. Wheel nut 6. Anchor block 7. ABS sensor 8. Parking brake cable REMOVAL CAUTION: Wheel hub assembly does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted, replace the wheel hub assembly. ● A growling noise is emitted from the wheel hub assembly while driving. ● The wheel hub assembly drags or turns roughly. 1. Remove the rear wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove the brake caliper assembly using power tool. ● The brake hose does not need to be disconnected from the brake caliper. ● Suspend the brake caliper assembly using wire, do not stretch the brake hose. ● Do not depress the brake pedal, or the caliper piston will pop out. ● Do not twist the brake hose. 3. Remove the brake rotor. Revision: March 2005 RAX-6 2005 Altima WHEEL HUB 4. 5. Remove the rear ABS sensor, then move it away from the wheel hub assembly. CAUTION: Failure to remove the ABS sensor may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor being inoperative. Remove the wheel hub assembly from knuckle. A B INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for any deformity, cracks, or damage on the wheel hub assembly, replace if necessary. C INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Check that the wheel bearings operate smoothly. ● Check that the wheel hub bearing axial end play is within specification. Axial end play RAX E : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less F G LDIA0009E H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 RAX-7 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing (Rear) Wheel bearing axial end play Revision: March 2005 PFP:00030 EDS001DK 0.1 mm (0.0040 in) or less RAX-8 2005 Altima I BODY SECTION RF ROOF A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special service tool .................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 6 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 8 SUNROOF ................................................................ 10 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 10 System Description ................................................ 10 OUTLINE ............................................................. 10 OPERATION ....................................................... 10 Revision: March 2005 RF-1 RETAINED POWER OPERATION ...................... 11 ONE TOUCH SLIDE/TILT OPERATION .............. 11 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE ....................... 11 INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION ........ 11 CAN Communication System Description .............. 11 Wiring Diagram — SROOF — ................................ 12 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 13 Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor Assembly ................................................................ 13 Work Flow ............................................................... 13 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 14 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 14 WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 15 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 15 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 15 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 15 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 16 Sunroof Switch System Check ............................... 17 Sunroof Switch Power Supply Circuit Check .......... 18 Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check .......................................................... 19 Door Switch Check ................................................. 21 Link and Wire Assembly ......................................... 23 Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 23 GAP ADJUSTMENT (A-A, C-C) .......................... 23 GAP ADJUSTMENT (B-B) .................................. 23 HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT .............. 24 Removal and Installation ........................................ 24 SUNROOF UNIT ................................................. 26 GLASS LID .......................................................... 26 SUNSHADE ........................................................ 27 SUNROOF MOTOR ............................................ 27 2005 Altima F G H RF J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS003LN The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions EIS003LO Disconnect both battery cables in advance. ● Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance. ● Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts. ● When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may get in the way with cloth. ● When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape. ● Keep removed parts protected with cloth. ● If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it. ● If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one. ● Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque. ● After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly. ● Remove stains in the following way. Water-soluble stains: Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth. Oil stain: Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain with the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely. Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth. ● Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine. ● Revision: March 2005 RF-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special service tool PFP:00002 A EIS003LP The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit E F Repairing the cause of noise G H SIIA0994E RF Commercial Service Tool EIS003LQ Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) J Description Engine ear (J-39565) Locating the noise K L SIIA0995E M Revision: March 2005 RF-3 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS003LR SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions. Hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: March 2005 RF-4 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle "twist". 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. F LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● G Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: H removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. RF tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. K looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape are available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in) 76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in) 76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) L ● Revision: March 2005 RF-5 2005 Altima M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0048D Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. Revision: March 2005 RF-6 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. A B C D E F G H SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the RF noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder J 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- K ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. L UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: March 2005 RF-7 2005 Altima M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS003LT WIIA0288E Revision: March 2005 RF-8 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H RF J K L M SBT844 Revision: March 2005 RF-9 2005 Altima SUNROOF SUNROOF Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:91210 EIS003LU LIIA1403E System Description EIS003LV OUTLINE Electric sunroof system consists of ● Sunroof switch ● Sunroof motor assembly ● Front door switches ● BCM (body control module) BCM supplies power to the sunroof motor and sunroof switch. Sunroof operation depends on sunroof switch condition. OPERATION Power supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through BCM terminal 69 ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 11. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. TILT UP OPERATION When the tilt switch is operated for tilt up, power is supplied ● to sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof switch terminal 6 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 6 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. Then, the sunroof will tilt up. Revision: March 2005 RF-10 2005 Altima SUNROOF TILT DOWN OPERATION A When the tilt switch is operated for tilt down, power is supplied ● to sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof switch terminal 4 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 6 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. Then, the sunroof will tilt down. B C D SLIDE OPEN OPERATION When the switch is operated for slide open, power is supplied ● to sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof switch terminal 1 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 10. Ground is supplied ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 6 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. Then, the sunroof will slide open. E F G SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION When the switch is operated for slide close, power is supplied ● to sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof switch terminal 3 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 3. Ground is supplied ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 6 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. Then, the sunroof will slide closed. H RF J RETAINED POWER OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds. The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened. RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to RF-14, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" . K L ONE TOUCH SLIDE/TILT OPERATION To fully slide the sunroof open, press and release the sunroof slide switch to the slide open position. To fully tilt the sunroof up, press and release the sunroof tilt switch to the tilt up position. MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE If the battery is disconnected or the sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected, the slide switch will become inoperable and the sunroof motor memory must be reset. To reset the sunroof motor memory from any sunroof position, push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (UP) position until the sunroof is in the fully vented (tilt up) position. The sunroof should now operate normally. INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION The CPU (central processing unit) monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fully-closed or other) by the signals from the sunroof motor. When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following sliding close operations, sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until it reaches full open position. ● automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position ● automatic close operation during retained power operation. CAN Communication System Description EIS003LW Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 RF-11 2005 Altima M SUNROOF Wiring Diagram — SROOF — EIS003LX LIWA0368E Revision: March 2005 RF-12 2005 Altima SUNROOF Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EIS003LY A Terminal Wire Color 12 P/L 38 R 47 SB 67 B 68 W/L Item Front door switch RH signal Ignition power supply Front door switch LH signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) ON (Open) 0 OFF (Closed) Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage ON (Open) 0 OFF (Closed) Battery voltage Ground RAP signal B C — 0 Ignition switch ON Battery voltage D Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF Battery voltage When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 0 E 69 W/R Power window power supply — Battery voltage 70 W/B BAT power supply — Battery voltage Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor Assembly Terminal Wire Color 1 L/R Item Condition Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in TILT UP position Sunroof switch TILT UP signal Other than above 2 OR Sunroof switch TILT DOWN signal 5 6 10 P W/L B Y Sunroof switch CLOSE signal RAP signal Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position Sunroof switch OPEN signal W/R 4. 5. Battery voltage 0 Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF Battery voltage When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 0 — Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch OPEN position BAT power supply 0 — Battery voltage EIS003M0 RF-13 RF J K M Battery voltage Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to RF-10, "System Description" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . Does sunroof system operate normally? If Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3. Inspection End. Revision: March 2005 H L 0 Work Flow 1. 2. 3. Battery voltage Other than above Other than above 11 Battery voltage 0 Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch CLOSE position Ground G Voltage (V) (Approx.) 0 Other than above 3 EIS003LZ F 2005 Altima SUNROOF CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS003M1 CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM". If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 RF-14 2005 Altima SUNROOF 4. Touch "RETAINED PWR" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. A B C LIIA0163E D 5. Select diagnosis mode. "DATA MONITOR", "ACTIVE TEST" and "WORK SUPPORT" are available. E F G BCIA0031E WORK SUPPORT Work item H Description RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s power supply period between two steps. RETAINED PWR SET ● MODE 1 (45 sec.) / MODE 2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.) RF ACTIVE TEST Description J This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM to power window system, power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on "RETAINED PWR" on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF. K Test item NOTE: During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF" position. "RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF. RETAINED PWR M DATA MONITOR Monitored item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom Symptom Sunroof does not operate. Revision: March 2005 L EIS003M2 Diagnostic procedure and repair order Refer to page 1. Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit check RF-19 2. Sunroof switch system check RF-17 3. BCM power supply and ground circuit check RF-16 4. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-27 RF-15 2005 Altima SUNROOF Symptom Retained power operation does not operate properly. Motor does not stop at the sunroof fully-open or fully-closed position. Sunroof does not do the interruption detection. Diagnostic procedure and repair order Refer to page 1. Check the retained power operation mode setting RF-15 2. BCM power supply and ground circuit check RF-16 3. Door switch check RF-21 4. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-27 1. Memory reset procedure RF-11 2. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-27 1. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-27 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS003M3 1. CHECK FUSE Check the following BCM fuse and fusible link. Component Parts BCM Terminal No. (SIGNAL) Ampere No. Location 38 (IGN power supply) 10A 1 Fuse block (J/B) 70 (BAT power supply) 50A f Fuse and fusible link box NOTE: Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM connectors M18 and M20 terminals 38, 70 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) M18 M20 (–) 38 (R) 70 (W/B) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch ON Ground Igniting switch OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0229E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. Connector M20 Terminals (Wire color) 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0230E Revision: March 2005 RF-16 2005 Altima SUNROOF Sunroof Switch System Check EIS003M4 1. CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY INPUT SIGNAL A 1. 2. 3. B Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminals 1, 2, 3, 10 and ground. C Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Sunroof switch in TILT UP position Battery voltage (–) 1 (L/R) Other than above R5 10 (Y) E Battery voltage LIIA1408E Ground 3 (P) 0 Sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position 2 (O/R) D Other than above 0 Sunroof switch in CLOSE position Battery voltage Other than above 0 Sunroof switch in OPEN position Battery voltage Other than above 0 F G H OK or NG OK >> Replace sunroof motor. Refer to RF-27, "SUNROOF MOTOR" . NG >> GO TO 2. RF 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector and sunroof switch connector. Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminals 1, 2, 3, 10 and sunroof switch connector R4 terminals 1, 3, 4, 6. 1 (L/R) - 6 (L/R) 2 (O) - 4 (O) 3 (P) - 3 (P) 10 (Y) - 1 (Y) K : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness between sunroof motor assembly and sunroof switch. Revision: March 2005 J RF-17 L M LIIA1412E 2005 Altima SUNROOF 3. CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH Operate sunroof slide switch and check continuity of the sunroof switch as follows. Connector Terminals (Wire color) 1 (Y) 3 (P) R4 2 (W/R) 4 (OR) 6 (L/R) Condition Continuity Sunroof switch in OPEN position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in CLOSE position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in TILT UP position Yes Other than above No LIIA1413E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace sunroof switch. Sunroof Switch Power Supply Circuit Check EIS003M5 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the sunroof switch connector. Check voltage between sunroof switch connector R4 terminal 2 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) R4 2 (W/R) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) Ground Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF Battery voltage When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 0 LIIA1414E OK or NG OK >> Sunroof switch power supply circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 RF-18 2005 Altima SUNROOF 2. CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 69 (W/R) - 2 (W/R) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and sunroof switch connector R4 terminal 2. B : Continuity should exist. C Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. 68 (W/L) - Ground 69 (W/R) - Ground D : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Sunroof switch power supply circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . NG >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof switch. Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check LIIA1415E F EIS003M6 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the sunroof motor assembly connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminal 5 (W/L), 11 (W/R) and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 5 (W/L) R5 Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF Battery voltage H RF Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) Ground E J K When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 0 LIIA1416E 11 (W/R) Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. M 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminal 6 (B) and ground. 6 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1418E Revision: March 2005 RF-19 2005 Altima SUNROOF 3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. 68 (W/L) - Ground 69 (W/R) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0425E 4. CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/ L), 69 (W/R) and sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminal 5 (W/L), 11 (W/R). 68 (W/L) - 5 (W/L) 69 (W/R) - 11 (W/R) 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/ L), 69 (W/R) and ground. 68 (W/L) - Ground 69 (W/R) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1417E OK or NG OK >> Sunroof motor assembly power supply circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . NG >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly. Revision: March 2005 RF-20 2005 Altima SUNROOF Door Switch Check EIS003M7 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR" and "DOOR SW-AS") in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. B Monitor item Condition Door open : ON Door closed : OFF Door open : ON Door closed : OFF DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS C D E PIIA2464E F Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. Item Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) RH M18 Condition M19 Voltage (V) (Approx.) H (–) 12 (P/L) Ground LH G 47 (SB) Door OPEN (switch closed) 0 Door CLOSED (switch open) Battery voltage Door OPEN (switch closed) 0 Door CLOSED (switch open) Battery voltage RF J WIIA0234E K OK or NG OK >> Door switches are OK. NG >> GO TO 2. L M Revision: March 2005 RF-21 2005 Altima SUNROOF 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front door switches and BCM. Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) terminal 2 and BCM connectors M18, M19 terminals 12, 47. Front door LH 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) Front door RH 2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) terminal 2 (SB or P/L) and ground. 2 (SB or P/L) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly. WIIA0626E 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCH Check continuity between each door switch terminal 2 and body ground part of door switch. Terminal 2 Body ground part of door switch Condition Continuity Door switch pushed No Door switch released Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace malfunctioning door switch. WIIA0289E 4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect BCM connector. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 12, M19 terminal 47 and ground. 12 (P/L) - Ground 47 (SB) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0234E Revision: March 2005 RF-22 2005 Altima SUNROOF Link and Wire Assembly EIS003M8 NOTE: Before replacing a suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of noise being experienced. 1. Check link to determine if coating film has peeled off to such an extent that substrate is visible. Check also to determine if link is the source of noise. If it is, replace it. 2. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of grease has been applied to wire or rail groove. If not, add grease as required. 3. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, replace wire. Fitting Adjustment A B C EIS003M9 D E F G H RF WIIA0101E GAP ADJUSTMENT (A-A, C-C) J 1. Open sunshade assembly. 2. Tilt glass lid up then remove side trim. 3. Loosen glass lid securing bolts, then tilt glass lid down. 4. Manually adjust glass lid from outside of vehicle so gap is within specifications and snug securing bolts. 5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times using sunroof switch to ensure smooth operation. 6. Tilt glass lid up and tighten bolts. NOTE: First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on glass lid to prevent lid from moving while tightening other bolts. Glass lid assembly mounting bolts : 3.0 - 5.0 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) GAP ADJUSTMENT (B-B) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" . Loosen sunroof assembly front end, side rail, and front and rear bracket attaching bolts. Carefully slide sunroof assembly side to side until gap is within specifications and snug securing bolts. Tilt glass lid up and down several times using sunroof switch to ensure smooth operation. Tighten sunroof assembly front end, side rail, and front and rear bracket attaching bolts. Sunroof assembly mounting bolts Sunroof assembly front : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, end bolts 46 - 57 in-lb) Sunroof assembly side : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, rail bolts 46 - 57 in-lb) Revision: March 2005 RF-23 2005 Altima K L M SUNROOF Sunroof assembly front bracket bolts Sunroof assembly rear bracket bolts : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. Tilt glass lid up and down. Check height difference between roof panel and glass lid and compare to "A - A" as shown. WIIA0103E 3. ● ● ● If necessary, adjust height difference by using the following procedure. Loosen glass lid securing bolts. Manually raise/lower glass lid until height difference is within specification. Tighten glass lid securing bolts. Glass lid assembly mounting bolts : 3.0 - 5.0 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) Removal and Installation EIS003MA After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and lid alignment. ● Handle glass lid with care so not to cause damage. ● For easier installation, mark each point before removal. CAUTION: ● Always work with a helper. ● Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly. Then, after removal, do not move the motor assembly. ● Revision: March 2005 RF-24 2005 Altima SUNROOF ● After installing the sunroof and glass lid, check gap adjustment to ensure there is no malfunction. A B C D E F G H RF J K L M WIIA0037E 1. Glass lid assembly 2. Sunshade assembly 3. Drain channel assembly 4. Sunroof assembly 5. Sunroof bracket 6. Drain hose connecting area 7. Sunroof motor 8. Sunroof switch bracket 9. Side trim Revision: March 2005 RF-25 2005 Altima SUNROOF SUNROOF UNIT Removal CAUTION: ● Always work with a helper. ● When taking sunroof unit out, use shop cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage. ● After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid, be sure to check gap adjustment to ensure there is no malfunction. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Disconnect drain hoses. 3. Close glass lid. 4. Remove sunroof switch bracket. 5. Disconnect sunroof motor harness electrical connector. CAUTION: ● Before removing sunroof motor, make sure that sunroof is fully closed. ● After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor as a single unit. 6. Remove bolts on the front end and side rails. 7. Remove front sunroof bracket bolts. 8. Remove rear sunroof bracket bolts and remove sunroof unit from roof panel. ● Remove sunroof unit through the passenger compartment while being careful not to damage the seats and trim. Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts on the rear sunroof brackets. Bring sunroof unit into passenger compartment and place the rear end of the rail onto the rear sunroof brackets. Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts on the front end. Tighten the installation point bolts diagonally excluding the installation point of the sunroof bracket around the roof opening. Tighten the bolts on the front sunroof bracket at the vehicle side and then at the rail side. Tighten the bolts on the rear sunroof bracket at the vehicle side and then at the rail side. Sunroof assembly mounting bolts Sunroof assembly front : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) end bolts Sunroof assembly side : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) rail bolts Sunroof assembly front : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) bracket bolts Sunroof assembly rear : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb) bracket bolts 7. 8. 9. Install sunroof motor switch bracket. Connect drain hoses. Install headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" . GLASS LID Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Open sunroof shade. Ensure glass lid is closed. Carefully pry away trim to access glass lid securing bolts. Remove bolts securing glass lid assembly to sunroof assembly. Installation 1. Position glass lid to sunroof assembly. Revision: March 2005 RF-26 2005 Altima SUNROOF 2. Tighten glass lid assembly bolts to specification. (First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on glass lid to prevent lid from moving while tightening other bolts.) Glass lid assembly mounting bolts 3. 4. A : 3.0 - 5.0 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) B Position and push trim into place. After installation, perform fitting adjustment. C SUNSHADE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before removing or installing the sunshade, be sure to remove the sunroof unit from the vehicle. 1. Remove glass lid. Refer to RF-26, "GLASS LID" . 2. Carefully pry sunshade from sunroof frame. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SUNROOF MOTOR Removal D E F 1. Position sunroof assembly in full open position. 2. Remove map lamp for access to sunroof motor. 3. Remove sunroof motor mounting screws. 4. Disconnect harness connector to remove sunroof motor. CAUTION: ● When removing the sunroof motor, be sure that the sunroof is in the fully open position. ● Never run the removed motor as a single unit. G H RF WIIA0038E J Installation 1. Move the motor laterally little by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof unit and the mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure the motor with screws. Sunroof motor mounting screws : 2.0 - 2.6 N·m (0.20 - 0.27 kg-m, 17 - 23 in-lb) L CAUTION: Before installing the motor, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position. Remainder of installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 RF-27 K 2005 Altima M SUNROOF Revision: March 2005 RF-28 2005 Altima E SUSPENSION SECTION RSU REAR SUSPENSION A B C D RSU CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ............................. 5 Components ............................................................. 5 On-vehicle Service ................................................... 6 Rear Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6 CAMBER ............................................................... 6 TOE-IN .................................................................. 7 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ....................... 8 SHOCK ABSORBER ............................................ 8 SUSPENSION ARM .............................................. 9 RADIUS ROD ........................................................ 9 FRONT LOWER LINK ........................................... 9 REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING ............. 9 STABILIZER BAR ................................................ 10 Inspection ............................................................... 10 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ....................... 10 SUSPENSION ARM ............................................ 10 RADIUS ROD ...................................................... 11 FRONT LOWER LINK ......................................... 11 UPPER AND LOWER RUBBER SEATS ............. 11 REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING ........... 11 STABILIZER BAR ................................................ 11 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 12 General Specifications (Rear) ................................ 12 Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ......................... 12 Ball Joint ................................................................. 12 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ................................. 13 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 RSU-1 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 EES0017F When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. * Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment. Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link. Lock nuts are not reusable parts, always use new ones. When replacing, do not wipe the oil off of the new lock nut before tightening. Revision: March 2005 RSU-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EES0017G The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name HT72520000 (J-25730-A) Ball joint remover B Removing upper ball joint C D NT146 RSU Commercial Service Tools EES0017H Tool name Description Power tool F Loosening bolts and nuts G PBIC0190E H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 RSU-3 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EES0017I Symptom × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × STEERING × BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Shudder BRAKES × WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × × ROAD WHEEL × × WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × × TIRES × Shimmy FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Vibration AXLE × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × DRIVE SHAFT × RSU-10 × Stabilizer bar fatigue Shake RSU-6 × Incorrect wheel alignment × RSU-5 RSU-5 Parts interference × Suspension looseness RSU-11 Bushing or mounting × Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS RSU-11 RSU-8 Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Noise Reference page Spring fatigue RSU-5 Improper installation, looseness Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: March 2005 RSU-4 2005 Altima REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Components PFP:55020 A EES0017J B C D RSU F G H I J K L M WEIA0100E Revision: March 2005 RSU-5 2005 Altima REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 1. Cap 2. Washer 3. Bushing 4. Distance tube 5. Shock absorber mount bracket 6. Bound bumper cover 7. Bound bumper 8. Shock absorber 9. Suspension arm 10. Connecting rod mount bracket 11. Connecting rod 12. Upper rubber seat 13. Coil spring 14. Lower rubber seat 15. Knuckle 16. Rear lower link 17. Front lower link 18. Radius rod 19. Member stay 20. Member stay 21. Stabilizer bar clamp 22. Bushing 23. Stabilizer bar 24. Stabilizer bar clamp 25. Bushing 26. Member stopper 27. Rear suspension member On-vehicle Service ● ● ● ● ● ● EES0017K Check the suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or damage. Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Make sure that the cotter pin is installed. Check the shock absorber for oil leakage or other damage. Check the wheelarch height. Refer to RSU-13, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" . Check the suspension ball joint for grease leakage and the ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. SMA113 Rear Wheel Alignment EES0017L Before checking the rear wheel alignment, make a preliminary inspection. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ● ● ● ● ● ● Check the tires for wear and for improper inflation. Check the wheels for deformation, cracks, and other damage. Remove the wheel and check the wheel runout. Refer to WT-3, "Inspection" . Check the rear wheel bearings for looseness. Check the rear suspension for looseness. Check that the rear shock absorbers work properly. Check the wheelarch height in the unladen condition. Refer to RSU-13, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" . CAMBER ● Measure the camber of both the right and left wheels using a suitable alignment gauge and adjust using the following procedure. Camber ● : Refer to RSU-12, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)" . If the camber is not within specification, adjust the camber by turning the adjusting bolts in the same direction. SFA948A Revision: March 2005 RSU-6 2005 Altima REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate. NOTE: Camber changes about 5° with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. A B C LEIA0008E D RSU F G LEIA0009E 2. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to the specified torque. Adjusting bolt nuts H : Refer to RSU-5, "Components" . TOE-IN Measure the toe-in using the following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts before adjusting. WARNING: ● Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. ● Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. I J K L M SFA614B 4. 5. 6. Measure distance “A” (rear side). Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). ● If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 a turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. Measure distance “B” (front side). Total toe-in : Refer to RSU-12, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)" . SFA234AC Revision: March 2005 RSU-7 2005 Altima REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 7. Adjust toe-in by turning adjusting bolt. NOTE: Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [One side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. LEIA0008E LEIA0009E 8. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to the specified torque. Adjusting bolt nuts : Refer to RSU-5, "Components" . Removal and Installation EES0017M REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Removal CAUTION: Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Remove the center exhaust tube with muffler(s). Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EX-7, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE). 2. Remove the brake caliper assembly and reposition aside, without disconnecting the hydraulic hose, using power tools. Refer to BR-20, "Removal and Installation" . ● Leave the brake hydraulic hose connected to the brake caliper. ● Do not depress the brake pedal, or the caliper piston will pop out. ● Do not pull or twist the brake hydraulic hose. 3. Disconnect the parking brake wire front end. Refer to PB-2, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Remove the rear ABS wheel sensors. Refer to BRC-42, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Set a suitable jack to support the rear suspension assembly. 6. Remove the upper shock absorber nuts using power tools. 7. Remove the suspension member nuts and member stay bolts using power tools. 8. Use the jack to support and lower the rear suspension assembly for removal. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-2, "Precautions" . ● Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" . SHOCK ABSORBER Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the wheel and tire using power tools. Set a suitable jack on the rear lower link to remove the lower shock absorber nut and bolt using power tools. Remove the suitable jack from the rear lower link. Revision: March 2005 RSU-8 2005 Altima REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 4. 5. Remove the upper shock absorber nut and bolt using power tools. Remove the shock absorber. A Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B SUSPENSION ARM Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Remove the rear suspension assembly. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the connecting rod bracket from the suspension arm using power tools. Remove the two suspension arm bolts and nuts from the suspension member side of the suspension arm D using power tools. Remove the ball joint cotter pin and lock nut using power tools. ● Discard the cotter pin, use a new cotter pin for installation. RSU Remove the suspension arm from the knuckle using Tool. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: ● Do not damage ball joint when removing. ● While using Tool, temporarily tighten the nut so as not to damage screw threads. F G Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Discard the cotter pin, use a new cotter pin for installation. ● Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" . RADIUS ROD Removal 1. 2. I Remove the rear suspension assembly. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the radius rod using power tools. J Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" . FRONT LOWER LINK Removal 1. 2. M Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for installation. ● Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" . REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING Removal Loosen the rear lower link bolt and nut from the suspension member side. Support the rear lower link by placing a suitable jack under the knuckle. Revision: March 2005 RSU-9 K L Remove the front lower link nut and bolt from the knuckle side and the adjusting bolt and nut from the suspension member side using power tools. ● Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for installation. Remove the front lower link. LEIA0008E 1. 2. H 2005 Altima REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the suspension member side using power tool. ● Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for installation. Slowly lower the jack to lower the rear lower link and coil spring. Remove the upper rubber seat, coil spring, and lower rubber seat from the rear lower link. Remove rear lower link bolt and nut from the suspension member side using power tool. Remove the rear lower link. LEIA0009E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for installation. ● Check that the projecting part inside the upper rubber seat and the bracket flange are attached as shown. ● Check that the projection part outside the upper rubber seat is directed toward the front of the vehicle. ● Position the hollow of the lower rubber seat with the groove part of the rear lower link. ● Install the coil spring so that the side with the two paint markers is directed toward the lower side. ● Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" . LEIA0011E STABILIZER BAR Removal 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the stabilizer bar from connecting rod, using power tools. Remove the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings using power tools. Remove the stabilizer bar. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection EES0017N SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ● ● ● Check for smooth operation through a full stroke for both compression and extension. Check for oil leakage on the welded or gland packing portions. Check the shock absorber piston rod for cracks, deformation, or other damage and replace if necessary. SUSPENSION ARM ● ● Check the suspension arm for damage, cracks, deformation and replace if necessary. Check the rubber bushings for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace suspension arm if necessary. Revision: March 2005 RSU-10 2005 Altima REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ● – – – Check the ball joint. Replace the suspension arm assembly if any of the following conditions exist: swinging force, turning force, and vertical end play. Replace suspension arm if it is not within specifications. Ball stud is worn. Joint is hard to swing. Check if the swinging force “A”, turning force “B”, or vertical end play “C” is out of specification. NOTE: Before checking specifications, turn the ball joint at least 10 revolutions so the ball joint is properly broken in. Swinging force “A” Turning force “B” Vertical end play “C” A B C SFA858A D : Refer to RSU-12, "Ball Joint" . : Refer to RSU-12, "Ball Joint" . : Refer to RSU-12, "Ball Joint" . RSU RADIUS ROD ● ● Check the radius rod for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. After installing the radius rod, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" . G FRONT LOWER LINK ● Check the front lower link for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. UPPER AND LOWER RUBBER SEATS ● H Check the upper and lower rubber seats for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary. REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING ● Check the rear lower link and coil spring for any deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary. STABILIZER BAR ● ● F I J Check the stabilizer bar and clamps for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. Check the rubber bushings for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary. K L M Revision: March 2005 RSU-11 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications (Rear) PFP:00030 EES0017O Suspension type Multi-link independent suspension Shock absorber type Double-acting hydraulic Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) EES0017P SFA234AC Tire size 215/60R16 (SL) 215/55R17 (SE) 215/60R16 225/45R18 Engine QR25DE Model Base / S SL / SE SE-R Minimum −0° 04′ (−0.07°) −0° 2' (−0.03°) −0° 13′ (−0.22°) Nominal −0° 34′ (−0.57°) −0° 32′ (−0.53°) −0° 43′ (−0.72°) Maximum −0° 64′ (−1.07°) −1° 2′ (−1.03°) −1° 13′ (−1.22°) Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) Distance (A − B) mm (in) Total toe-in Distance difference between RH and LH side mm (in) Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) VQ35DE Minimum 2.4 (0.09) 2.3 (0.09) Nominal 3.9 (0.15) 3.8 (0.15) Maximum 5.4 (0.21) 5.3 (0.21) Minimum −2 (−0.08) Nominal 0 (0) Maximum 2 (0.08) Minimum 0° 6′ (0.10°) Nominal 0° 10′ (0.17°) Maximum 0° 14′ (0.23°) *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Ball Joint EES0017Q SFA858A Swinging force “A” (Measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud) Turning torque “B” Vertical end play “C” 7.8 - 54.9 (0.8 - 5.6, 1.8 - 12.3) N (kg-f, lb-f) N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.49 - 3.43 (5.0 - 35.0, 4.3 - 30.4) mm (in) Revision: March 2005 0 (0) RSU-12 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) EES001C1 A B C D SFA818A Engine QR25DE VQ35DE Model Base / S SL SE SE-R Tire size 215/60R16 215/60R16 215/55R17 225/45R18 Front (Hf) mm (in) 722 (28.43) 717 (28.23) 722 (28.43) 721 (28.39) Rear (Hr) mm (in) 695 (27.36) 696 (27.40) 701 (27.60) 695 (27.36) RSU F *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 RSU-13 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: March 2005 RSU-14 2005 Altima H RESTRAINTS SECTION SB SEAT BELTS A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precaution for Seat Belt Service .............................. 2 AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 3 SEAT BELTS .............................................................. 4 Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt ............. 4 REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ............ 4 INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR..... 4 REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE .................... 5 INSTALLTION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE .............. 5 Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt ............. 5 REMOVAL ............................................................. 5 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5 Seat Belt Inspection .................................................. 6 AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 6 PRELIMINARY CHECKS ...................................... 6 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK .................................................................. 7 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK .................................................................. 7 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM ................................................. 9 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ............. 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 F G SB I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SB-1 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EHS000ZV The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Seat Belt Service EHS000ZW CAUTION: ● Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector. ● After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . ● Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly. ● Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. ● Never oil tongue and buckle. ● If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt assembly. ● If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly. ● When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. Revision: March 2005 SB-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: ● The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). ● The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). ● The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. ● Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. ● The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. A B C D E F G SB I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SB-3 2005 Altima SEAT BELTS SEAT BELTS Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt PFP:86884 EHS000ZX LHIA0001E CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the adjuster cover on the seat belt anchor. NOTE: Insert a screwdriver wound with cloth into the slot of the release button to disengage the tab and remove the release button. Remove the anchor bolt. If equipped, disconnect belt tension sensor. Slide up outer anchor cover, and remove the anchor bolt. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" . LHIA0002E 5. 6. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner retractor screw and anchor bolt, and then remove the seat belt retractor. WHIA0058E INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 SB-4 2005 Altima SEAT BELTS REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE 1. 2. 3. A Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-15, "Components" . Remove the screws, and remove the inner seat cushion finisher. Remove the anchor bolt, and remove the buckle. ● Disconnect electrical connector. B C D LHIA0004E E INSTALLTION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt EHS000ZY F G SB I J K LHIA0005E L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the rear seat. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the outer anchor and floor anchor bolt. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" . Remove seat belt retractor mounting screw and anchor bolt, and remove the seat belt assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: March 2005 SB-5 2005 Altima M SEAT BELTS Seat Belt Inspection EHS000ZZ AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: ● The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). ● The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). ● The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. ● Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. ● The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. c. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. Check retractor operation: Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET” and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt though-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass a thin wire though the though-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the though-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. Revision: March 2005 SB-6 2005 Altima SEAT BELTS SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) A NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. B C D ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. E ALR Function Stationary Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. F G SB ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. I J K L SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. 2. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. Revision: March 2005 SB-7 2005 Altima M SEAT BELTS WHIA0005E 15 degrees or less tilt 27 degrees or more tilt : Belt can be pulled out. : Belt locks and cannot be pulled out. If NG, replace the retractor assembly. Revision: March 2005 SB-8 2005 Altima LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:75466 A EHS00100 NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable. B C D E F G SB I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SB-9 2005 Altima TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation PFP:88000 EHS00101 NOTE: The top tether strap child restraint is not serviceable. Revision: March 2005 SB-10 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION SC STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 BATTERY .................................................................... 4 How to Handle Battery ............................................. 4 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE ............................................................... 4 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL .................... 4 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK ............................... 5 CHARGING THE BATTERY ................................. 6 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester .......................................................... 6 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART .................. 8 STARTING SYSTEM .................................................. 9 System Description .................................................. 9 M/T MODELS ........................................................ 9 A/T MODELS ........................................................ 9 CAN Communication System Description ................ 9 Wiring Diagram — START — ................................. 10 M/T MODELS ...................................................... 10 4 A/T MODEL .......................................................11 5 A/T MODEL ...................................................... 12 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester ........................................................ 13 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 13 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 14 Revision: March 2005 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 15 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 16 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE ......................................................... 17 Removal and Installation ........................................ 17 M/T MODELS ...................................................... 17 Removal and Installation ........................................ 17 4-SPEED A/T MODELS ...................................... 17 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 5-SPEED A/T MODELS ...................................... 18 Pinion/Clutch Check ............................................... 20 CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................... 21 System Description ................................................. 21 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — ............................. 22 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester ......................................................... 23 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 24 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 25 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 26 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 27 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 28 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR .............................. 29 Removal and Installation ........................................ 29 QR25DE .............................................................. 29 VQ35DE .............................................................. 29 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 31 Battery .................................................................... 31 Starter ..................................................................... 31 Generator ............................................................... 31 SC-1 2005 Altima F G H I J SC L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS008KU The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EKS008KV When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Revision: March 2005 SC-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EKS008KW Tool number Tool name Description B J-44373 Model 620 Battery/Starting/Charging system tester C D SEL403X E F Commercial Service Tools EKS008KX Tool number Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts G H I PBIC0190E J SC L M Revision: March 2005 SC-3 2005 Altima BATTERY BATTERY How to Handle Battery PFP:AYBGL EKS008KY CAUTION: ● If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery. ● After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. ● Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. ● The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. ● The terminal connections should be clean and tight. ● At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance” and “maintenance-free”. MEL040F ● When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. MEL041F ● Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge. MEL042F CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL WARNING: Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Revision: March 2005 SC-4 2005 Altima BATTERY Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. ● ● A B C MEL043F D Sulphation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulphated batteries. A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test. E F G SEL709E SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK 1. 2. H Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. I J SC MEL042FA Hydrometer Temperature Correction L Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading 71 (160) 0.032 66 (150) 0.028 60 (140) 0.024 54 (130) 0.020 49 (120) 0.016 43 (110) 0.012 38 (100) 0.008 32 (90) 0.004 27 (80) 0 21 (70) −0.004 16 (60) −0.008 10 (50) −0.012 4 (40) −0.016 −1 (30) −0.020 −7 (20) −0.024 Revision: March 2005 SC-5 M 2005 Altima BATTERY Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading −12 (10) −0.028 −18 (0) −0.032 Corrected specific gravity Approximate charge condition 1.260 - 1.280 Fully charged 1.230 - 1.250 3/4 charged 1.200 - 1.220 1/2 charged 1.170 - 1.190 1/4 charged 1.140 - 1.160 Almost discharged 1.110 - 1.130 Completely discharged CHARGING THE BATTERY CAUTION: ● Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery. ● Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. ● When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. ● If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60°C (140°F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 60°C (140°F). Charging Rates Amps Time 50 1 hour 25 2 hours 10 5 hours 5 10 hours Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. ● If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than .050, the battery should be replaced. Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS008KZ CAUTION: When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye protection. NOTE: ● To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. ● If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester will prompt you to turn on the headlights to remove the surface charge. ● If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C (32°F). Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button, then press “ENTER” to make the selection. Revision: March 2005 SC-6 2005 Altima BATTERY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or repair as necessary. Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends with ignition switch in “OFF” position. NOTE: The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends and tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean the battery post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the test. Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery terminal, and the black to the negative terminal. The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys, select “IN-VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER” key. A B C SEL404X D E F G SEL405X 5. 6. 7. Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the top case of the battery to be tested. NOTE: The battery type and rating will have either of the following. CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.) JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard. Battery is stamped with a number such as: 80D26L: 80 (rank of output), D (physical size-depth), 26 (width in cm). The last character L (post configuration) is not input into the tester. The tester requires the rating for the battery be entered exactly as it is written or stamped on the battery. Do not attempt a CCA conversion for JIS stamped batteries. JIS must be input directly. Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating. NOTE: The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use CCA or JIS. Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-8, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . I J SC SEL406X L M SEL407X Revision: March 2005 SC-7 H 2005 Altima BATTERY 8. 9. Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. NOTE: ● If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press the “ENTER” button to make the selection. ● When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently been driven, select “BEFORE CHARGE”. SEL576X ● If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE & RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item Service procedure GOOD BATTERY Battery is OK. Refer to SC-13, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . REPLACE BATTERY Replace battery. Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is “Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. BAD CELL-REPLACE Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. GOOD-RECHARGE Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. CHARGE & RETEST Revision: March 2005 NOTE: If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. SC-8 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM STARTING SYSTEM System Description PFP:23300 A EKS008L0 M/T MODELS Power is supplied at all times: ● through 40A fusible link (letter m , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to ignition switch terminal B. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: ● from ignition switch terminal ST ● to intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R) terminal 4. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to IPDM E/R terminal 53. When the clutch pedal is depressed, ground is supplied to IPDM E/R terminal 50 through the clutch interlock switch and body grounds E15 and E24. Provided that the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN lines, the IPDM E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied: ● from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R ● to terminal S of the starter motor windings. The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. In the event that the CAN communication line fails between the IPDM E/R and the BCM, the IPDM E/R will default to a starter relay request ON signal as long as the ignition switch remains in the START or ON position. B C D E F G H A/T MODELS Power is supplied at all times: I ● through 40A fusible link (letter m , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to ignition switch terminal B. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: J ● from ignition switch terminal ST ● to IPDM E/R terminal 4. SC With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to park/neutral (PNP) switch terminal 1 (with 4 A/T) or terminal 5 (with 5 A/T). L With the selector lever in P or N position, power is supplied: ● through PNP switch terminal 2 (with 4 A/T) or terminal 1 (with 5 A/T) ● to IPDM E/R terminal 53. M Provided the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN lines, the IPDM E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied: ● from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R ● to terminal S of the starter motor windings. The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. In the event that the CAN communication line fails between the IPDM E/R and the BCM, the IPDM E/R will default to a starter relay request ON signal as long as the ignition switch remains in the START or ON position. CAN Communication System Description EKS008L1 Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: March 2005 SC-9 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — START — EKS008L2 M/T MODELS WKWA2905E Revision: March 2005 SC-10 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM 4 A/T MODEL A B C D E F G H I J SC L M WKWA2159E Revision: March 2005 SC-11 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM 5 A/T MODEL WKWA2160E Revision: March 2005 SC-12 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS008L3 NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-6, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/ Charging System Tester" . 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test. A B C D E SEL408X 4. Start the engine. F G H SEL409X 5. Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-13, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . NOTE: ● If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start, perform engine diagnosis. ● For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION” incidents, refer to SC-16, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" . I J SC L SEL410X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART M Diagnostic item Service procedure CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . CHARGE BATTERY Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-6, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . REPLACE BATTERY Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-6, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. Revision: March 2005 SC-13 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM WORK FLOW WKIA3559E *1 SC-13 *4 SC-16 Revision: March 2005 *2 SC-15 *3 SC-14 SC-16 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Check Starter Motor Circuit A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO STARTER MOTOR B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check that the starter motor connector F27 terminal B (B/R) connection is clean and tight. Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester. C D Battery voltage should exist. E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for open circuit. F WKIA0137E G 2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. H Turn the ignition switch to START. Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B (B/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START. I : Less than 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity. J SC WKIA0138E 3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT L 1. 2. M Turn the ignition switch to START. Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START. : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Starter motor ground circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . NG >> Check for poor continuity between the starter motor case and battery negative terminal. WKIA0139E Revision: March 2005 SC-15 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check Magnetic Switch Circuit 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MAGNETIC SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect starter motor connector F28. Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S (B/W) and ground using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START. : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 40A fusible link (letter m , located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Starter relay [within the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R)] ● Harness for open or short WKIA1549E 2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON MAGNETIC SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Connect starter motor connector F28. Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S (B/W) and battery positive terminal using a digital tester. Ignition switch in START. : Less than 1V OK or NG OK >> Magnetic switch circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" . NG >> Check harness between the battery and the magnetic switch for poor continuity. WKIA1550E Revision: March 2005 SC-16 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE Voltage V Engine coolant temperature QR25DE VQ35DE −30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F) 8.7 8.4 −19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F) 9.2 8.9 −9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F) 9.6 9.3 More than 1°C (More than 34°F) 10.0 9.7 B C Removal and Installation EKS008L4 M/T MODELS REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the air cleaner cover and the air cleaner to intake manifold collector duct. Remove the harness protector from the starter motor engine room harness. Disconnect the starter motor harness connectors. Remove the two starter motor bolts, using power tools. Remove the starter motor. D E F G WKWA0065E H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. I J SC WKIA0394E Removal and Installation 4-SPEED A/T MODELS REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. M Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the air cleaner case (upper) and the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Remove the harness protector from the starter engine room harness. Disconnect the starter harness connectors. Revision: March 2005 L EKS00C2R SC-17 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM 5. 6. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. Remove the starter. WKIA2058E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation EKS00C2Q 5-SPEED A/T MODELS REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the starter insulator. WKIA0400E 3. 4. Remove the harness bracket and harness protector from the starter engine room harness. Disconnect the starter harness connectors. Revision: March 2005 SC-18 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM 5. 6. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. Remove the starter. A B C D E F G WKIA0397E INSTALLATION H Installation is in the reverse order of removal. I J SC L M Revision: March 2005 SC-19 2005 Altima STARTING SYSTEM Pinion/Clutch Check 1. 2. 3. EKS008L5 Inspect pinion assembly teeth. ● Replace pinion assembly if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of ring gear teeth.) Inspect planetary gears/planetary gear teeth. ● Replace planetary gears/planet gears if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of pinion shaft/drive shaft gear teeth.) Check to see if pinion assembly locks in one direction and rotates smoothly in the opposite direction. ● If it locks or rotates in both directions, or if unusual resistance is evident, replace. Revision: March 2005 SC-20 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM CHARGING SYSTEM System Description PFP:23100 A EKS008L6 The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged. The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator. Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal B through: ● 120A fusible link (letter a , located in the fusible link box). Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal S through: ● 10A fuse (No. 26, located in the fuse and fusible link box). Terminal B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal S detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by the 120A fusible link. The generator is grounded to the engine block. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 22 for the charge warning lamp. Ground is supplied to terminal 14 of the combination meter through terminal L of the generator. With power and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a fault is indicated. B C D E F G H I J SC L M Revision: March 2005 SC-21 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — EKS008L7 WKWA1355E Revision: March 2005 SC-22 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS008L8 NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/ Charging system tester. 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test. 4. Start engine. A B C D E SEL417X 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is displayed. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: ● If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display. ● Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting, particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect this without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue on with the testing process. The final results will not be affected. The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the DIODE/RIPPLE check. When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads. ● Heater fan set to highest speed. Do not run the A/C or windshield defroster. ● Headlamp high beam ● Rear window defogger NOTE: Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads. F G H SEL418X J SC L SEL419X Press “ENTER” to continue. SEL420X Revision: March 2005 SC-23 I 2005 Altima M CHARGING SYSTEM 10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press “ENTER” to restart the test. SEL421X 11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-24, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . SEL422X 12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. 13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. SEL577X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL Service procedure Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result. NO CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" . LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" . HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" . DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result. EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED Replace the generator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" . Revision: March 2005 SC-24 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM WORK FLOW A B C D E F G H I J SC L M WKIA4022E Revision: March 2005 SC-25 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit 1. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT CONNECTION Check to see if terminal "L" is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal "L" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. 2. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect F1 connector from generator. Apply ground to connector F1 terminal L (BR/Y) with the ignition switch in the ON position. CHARGE lamp should light up. OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● CHARGE lamp ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator Revision: March 2005 SC-26 WKIA0142E 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check Battery Circuit A 1. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION B Check to see if terminal "B" is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal "B" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. C D 2. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester. E Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 120A fusible link (letter a , located in fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link F G WKIA0143E H 3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B (B/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital tester. With engine running at idle and warm I : Less than 0.2V J OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. SC WKIA0144E L M Revision: March 2005 SC-27 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Check Voltage Regulator Circuit 1. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT CONNECTION Check to see if terminal "S" is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal "S" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. 2. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S (Y/B) and ground using a digital circuit tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse (No. 26, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between generator and fuse WKIA0145E 3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S (Y/B) and battery positive terminal using a digital tester. With engine running at idle and warm. : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. Revision: March 2005 SC-28 WKIA0146E 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INDICATOR The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur while generator is operating: ● Excessive voltage is produced. ● No voltage is produced. Removal and Installation A B EKS008L9 QR25DE Removal C 1. 2. 3. D 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the engine cover. Remove the front/right-side engine undercover, using power tools. Remove the drive belt. Disconnect the generator harness connector. Disconnect the engine ground wire from top mount. Remove the generator upper and lower mounting bolts, using power tools. Set the generator aside and remove the generator top mount. Slide the generator out and remove. E F LKWA0051E G Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H I J LKWA0052E VQ35DE Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. L Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove radiator, refer CO-30, "Removal and Installation" . Remove front/right-side engine undercover. Remove the drive belt, refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . Remove idler pulley. Remove the generator adjustable top mount, using power tools. Remove the generator lower mount bolt and nuts, using power tools. Remove the generator lower front bracket bolt, using power tools. Disconnect the generator harness connectors. Slide the generator out and remove. Revision: March 2005 SC-29 SC M 2005 Altima CHARGING SYSTEM Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LKWA0070E Revision: March 2005 SC-30 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Battery PFP:00030 A EKS008LA Type GR.24F (BCI) Capacity (20 HR) minimum Cold cranking current (For reference value) V-AH B 12-63 A 550 @ -18°C (0°F) C Starter EKS008LB QR25DE Application Manufacturer VQ35DE M/T model A/T model M/T model A/T model Mitsubishi M001T87181ZC Mitsubishi M001T68781ZC Mitsubishi M000T87281ZC Mitsubishi M000T87181ZC Type Reduction gear type System voltage E 12V Terminal voltage No-load D 11V Current 90A Max. Revolution 2,750 rpm Min. Minimum diameter of commutator Minimum length of brush Brush spring tension F 2,800 rpm Min. G 28.8 mm 5.5mm 7.0 mm 15.0-20.4 N (1.53-2.08 kg, 3.37-4.59 lb) 18.3-24.8 N (1.87-2.53 kg, 4.11-5.58 lb) Clearance between pinion front edge and pinion stopper H 0.5-2.0 mm I Generator EKS008LC Application Type QR25DE VQ35DE LR1110-721 LR1110-726 HITACHI J SC Nominal rating 12V-110A Ground polarity Negative Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 volts is applied) 1100 rpm L More than 35A/1,300 rpm More than 91A/2,500 rpm More than 110A/5,000 rpm M Hot output current (When 13.5 volts is applied) Regulated output voltage 14.1 - 14.7V Minimum length of brush 6 mm (0.236 in) Brush spring pressure 1.000 - 3.432 N (0.102 - 0.350 kg, 0.225 - 0.772 lbs) Slip ring minimum outer diameter 26.0 mm (1.024 in) Rotor (Field coil) resistance Revision: March 2005 2.31 ohms SC-31 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: March 2005 SC-32 2005 Altima I BODY SECTION SE SEAT A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions for Work ................................................ 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 7 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 POWER SEAT ........................................................... 10 Wiring Diagram — SEAT — ................................... 10 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 11 HEATED SEAT .......................................................... 12 Description .............................................................. 12 Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — ................................. 13 FRONT SEAT ............................................................ 15 Components ........................................................... 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 REMOVAL ........................................................... 18 INSTALLATION ................................................... 18 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 18 SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD ............................... 18 SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD ....................... 20 REAR SEAT .............................................................. 22 Removal and Installation ........................................ 22 REMOVAL ........................................................... 22 INSTALLATION ................................................... 22 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 22 F G H SE J K L M Revision: March 2005 SE-1 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS003N9 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Work ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – ● ● EIS003NA When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth. When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it. Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them. Replace a deformed or damaged clip. If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one. Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque. After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally. Follow the steps below to clean components. Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the fouled area. Then rub with a soft and dry cloth. Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe the fouled area. Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub with a soft and dry cloth. Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, or gasoline. For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner. Revision: March 2005 SE-2 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EIS003NB The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit E F Repairing the cause of noise G H SIIA0994E SE Commercial Service Tool EIS003NC (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name J Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise K L SIIA0995E M Revision: March 2005 SE-3 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS00480 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to SE-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: March 2005 SE-4 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. F LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● G Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: H removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. SE tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. K looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to SE-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) L ● Revision: March 2005 SE-5 2005 Altima M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS00481 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: March 2005 SE-6 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING A B C D Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. E F OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS G H SE When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J K L UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: March 2005 SE-7 2005 Altima M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS00482 LIWA0276E Revision: March 2005 SE-8 2005 Altima SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H SE J K L M SBT844 Revision: March 2005 SE-9 2005 Altima POWER SEAT POWER SEAT Wiring Diagram — SEAT — PFP:87016 EIS003NG LIWA0464E Revision: March 2005 SE-10 2005 Altima POWER SEAT Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EIS003NH A CONDITION VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) Ground — 0 W/R Battery power supply — Battery voltage W/B Battery power supply (Fusible link) — Battery voltage TERMINAL WIRE COLOR 67 B 69 70 ITEM B C D E F G H SE J K L M Revision: March 2005 SE-11 2005 Altima HEATED SEAT HEATED SEAT Description ● ● ● PFP:87335 EIS003NI When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit. To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated. Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim. WIIA0031E Revision: March 2005 SE-12 2005 Altima HEATED SEAT Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — EIS003NJ A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0418E Revision: March 2005 SE-13 2005 Altima HEATED SEAT WIWA0419E Revision: March 2005 SE-14 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT FRONT SEAT Components PFP:87000 A EIS003NK Driver Seat B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIIA0701E 1. Seatback board 2. Seatback frame 3. 4. Headrest assembly 5. Headrest holder (free) 6. Headrest holder (locked) 7. Seatback pad 8. Seatback heating element 9. Seatback trim Revision: March 2005 SE-15 Seatback silk film bag 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT 10. Seatback assembly (if equipped with side air bags) 11. Lumbar support lever 12. Seat cushion trim 13. Seat cushion heating element 14. Seat cushion pad 15. Seat cushion silk film bag 16. Seat cushion frame 17. Seat belt buckle assembly 18. Power seat cushion front finisher 19. Power seat cushion inner finisher 20. Driver seat power frame assembly 21. Power seat switch 22. Power seat switch escutcheon 23. Power seat cushion outer finisher 24. Driver seat wire harness 25. Manual seat cushion inner finisher 26. Driver seat manual frame 27. Manual seatback recliner lever 28. Manual seat cushion outer finisher 29 Seat cushion adjusting knobs Revision: March 2005 SE-16 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT Passenger Seat A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIIA0400E 1. Seatback board 2. Seatback frame 3. Headrest 4. Headrest holder (free) 5. Headrest holder (locked) 6. Seatback pad 7. Seatback trim 8. Seatback heating element 9. Seat cushion trim 10. Seat cushion pad 11. Seat cushion heating element 12. Silk film bag 13. Seat cushion frame 14. Seat cushion inner finisher 15. Passenger seat frame assembly Revision: March 2005 SE-17 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT 16. Seat cushion front finisher 17. Seat cushion outer finisher 18. Seatback recline handle 19. Silk film bag 20. Seat cushion assembly (if equipped with Occupant Classification System) 21. Seatback assembly (if equipped with side air bags) Removal and Installation EIS007MS REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait and least 3 minutes. ● When checking the power seat circuit for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse its connector with the side air bag module connector. Such an error may cause the air bag to deploy. ● Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while installing the seat. Always handle it with care. ● After front side air bag module inflates, front seatback assembly must be replaced. ● Some front seats are equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. ● Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly if equipped with Occupant Classification System. NOTE: When removing or installing the seat trim, handle it carefully to keep dirt out and avoid damage. 1. Slide the seat until the four body mounting bolts are visible and a tool can be inserted. NOTE: When disassembling the driver seat after removal, set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position. 2. Disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the harness connector for the side air bag module. 4. Remove the four body mounting bolts and the seat belt anchor bolt. To remove the seat belt anchor bolt, refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . 5. Remove the power seat harness connector and vehicle harness fixing clip from the vehicle. NOTE: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect the parts from damage where they may interfere with other parts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Be sure to insert the rear end tab of the rear leg cover under the rail. Disassembly and Assembly EIS003NL SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD Disassembly NOTE: ● Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags. ● Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position. 1. Remove the seatback finisher from the back of the seatback. a. Bend both top corners inward (one at a time) to release the top hooks. b. Shift the seatback finisher to the Left and Right to release the middle hooks. c. Separate the trim clips from the seatback frame to remove the seatback finisher. LIIA1556E Revision: March 2005 SE-18 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the headrest. Remove the harness connectors for the reclining motor and lumbar support motor (driver seat only). Pull out the harness connector for the side air bag from the seat cushion (driver seat only). Remove the reclining device mounting bolts (2 for each side) on the seatback frame, and remove the seatback assembly (driver seat only). NOTE: When assembling the seatback frame, make sure that the reclining device is locked on both sides, and be sure to temporarily tighten the bolts, then finish tightening them. From the back of the seatback, press the headrest holder tabs at the base of the stay pipe to disengage. Then pull the headrest holder up to remove. NOTE: Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/ rear and right/left). A B C D E F LRS023 7. G Remove the snap ring and the lumbar support lever knob. H SE J PIIA1156E 8. Remove the retainer. K L M SIIA0113E 9. Remove the seat heater harness connector. After removing the seatback trim and pad, remove the hog ring to separate the trim from the pad and the seatback heater unit. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: March 2005 SE-19 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD Disassembly CAUTION: ● Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. ● Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly. ● When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage. ● During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in. Do not add additional clips. ● The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion assembly. NOTE: If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer to SRS-57, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . 1. Remove the power seat switch knob (or recline knob on manual seat). 2. Remove the front seat cushion finisher (inner). LIIA0285E 3. 4. Remove the three power seat switch assembly screws (or lift knobs on manual seats). Remove four bolts retaining the seat cushion assembly, remove seat cushion assembly. SIIA0503E 5. 6. Remove the retainer on the seat cushion frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat heater. On seats not equipped with Occupant Classification System, after removing the seat cushion trim and pad, remove the hog rings to separate the trim from the pad and seat cushion heater unit. Revision: March 2005 SE-20 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT Assembly A Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. ● Tighten the LH seat cushion to frame bolts in the order as shown. ● ⇐: Vehicle front B C D WIIA0704E E F G H SE J K L M Revision: March 2005 SE-21 2005 Altima REAR SEAT REAR SEAT Removal and Installation PFP:88300 EIS003NM REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the rear seat cushion trim and pad. ● Pull the lock at the front bottom of the seat cushion forward (1 for each side), and pull the seat cushion upward to release the wire from the plastic hook, then pull the seat cushion forward to remove. Remove the seat belt webbing from the guides. Fold seatbacks forward. Remove covers. Remove bolts Lock seatbacks in upright position. Remove the seatback hinge anchor bolts and nut. Remove the seatback assembly. SIIA0511E INSTALLATION ● Install in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly EIS003NN WIIA0401E 1. Rear seat side bolster assembly 2. Passenger seatback trim and pad 3. Driver seatback trim and pad 4. Rear seatback hinge assembly 5. Rear seat cushion trim and pad 6. Rear seat armrest 7. Seatback latch cover Revision: March 2005 SE-22 2005 Altima REAR SEAT Center Seatback Assembly A B C D E F G H WIIA0277E 1. Passenger seatback trim and pad 2. Rear seat armrest 4. Rubber mat 5. Clips 3. SE Cup holder bracket J K L M Revision: March 2005 SE-23 2005 Altima REAR SEAT Revision: March 2005 SE-24 2005 Altima H RESTRAINTS SECTION SRS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service ..................................... 3 Occupant Classification System Precaution ............ 3 Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ....... 5 SRS Configuration ................................................... 5 Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ..... 6 Front Side Air Bag .................................................... 6 Side Curtain Air Bag ................................................. 6 Occupant Classification System ............................... 6 Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors ........... 8 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 9 Trouble Diagnoses Introduction ............................... 9 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ....................................... 9 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR ............... 9 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 10 SRS Components Parts Location ............................11 Schematic .............................................................. 12 Wiring Diagram — SRS — ..................................... 13 CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG) ........................... 19 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II .............................................. 19 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 19 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) .................................................................. 20 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE... 20 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 20 SRS Operation Check ............................................ 20 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 20 Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II ..................... 23 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 23 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 28 Revision: March 2005 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) .............. 30 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ........................... 30 Trouble diagnosis without CONSULT-II. ................. 36 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 36 WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART ........... 37 Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off ............................................................ 41 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 41 Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On ............................................................ 42 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 ........................... 42 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE .................................... 43 Removal and Installation ........................................ 43 REMOVAL ........................................................... 43 INSTALLATION ................................................... 44 SPIRAL CABLE ........................................................ 45 Removal and Installation ........................................ 45 REMOVAL ........................................................... 45 INSTALLATION ................................................... 46 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .............. 47 Removal and Installation ........................................ 47 REMOVAL ........................................................... 47 INSTALLATION ................................................... 47 WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION .................. 48 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ........................ 50 Removal and Installation ........................................ 50 REMOVAL ........................................................... 50 INSTALLATION ................................................... 51 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................................... 52 Removal and Installation ........................................ 52 REMOVAL ........................................................... 52 INSTALLATION ................................................... 52 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ................... 53 Removal and Installation ........................................ 53 REMOVAL ........................................................... 53 INSTALLATION ................................................... 53 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ................... 54 Removal and Installation ........................................ 54 SRS-1 2005 Altima F G SRS I J K L M DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..................................... 55 Removal and Installation ........................................ 55 REMOVAL ........................................................... 55 INSTALLATION .................................................... 55 ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. ................................. 55 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT ................................................................ 56 Removal and Installation ........................................ 56 Revision: March 2005 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS ..........................................57 For Frontal Collision ................................................57 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) ...................................................................57 For Side Collision ....................................................58 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) ......58 SRS-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EHS00102 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. B C D E F G Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service EHS00103 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt I pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark “⇐” pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or J rust before installation and replace as required. The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to K turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear. Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing L down. Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components. After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. M Occupant Classification System Precaution EHS0013F Replace occupant classification system control unit and passenger front seat cushion as an assembly. Trouble Diagnosis Precaution EHS00104 When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" in PG section When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section ● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. Revision: March 2005 SRS-3 2005 Altima PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EHS00105 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-44615) Air bag lock master key set Removing and installing air bag lock LRS191 Revision: March 2005 SRS-4 2005 Altima SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) SRS Configuration PFP:28556 A EHS00106 B C D E F G SRS I WHIA0272E J The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit activates while the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module and front passenger air bag module are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision. SRS configurations which are activated for some collision modes are as follows; SRS configuration Frontal collision Left side collision Right side collision Driver air bag module × — — Front passenger air bag module × — — Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner × — — Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner × — — Front LH side air bag module (if equipped) — × — Front RH side air bag module (if equipped) — — × LH side curtain air bag module (if equipped) — × — RH side curtain air bag module (if equipped) — — × Revision: March 2005 SRS-5 2005 Altima K L M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining force. Front Side Air Bag EHS00107 SRS444 EHS00108 Front side air bag is built-in type. The front seatbacks with built-in type side air bag have the labels as shown. WHIA0008E Side Curtain Air Bag EHS00109 The side curtain air bags have the labels as shown. WHIA0041E Occupant Classification System EHS0013G The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the occupant classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sen- Revision: March 2005 SRS-6 2005 Altima SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) sor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator. A B C D WHIA0187E E F G SRS I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-7 2005 Altima SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors EHS0010A The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors. ● Driver air bag module ● Front passenger air bag module ● LH side curtain air bag module ● RH side curtain air bag module ● Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner ● Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. WHIA0103E Revision: March 2005 SRS-8 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses Introduction PFP:00004 A EHS0010B CAUTION: ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. ● Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged, replace it with a new one. ● Keep ground portion clean. B C DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION D The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-II. The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp. The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part. The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-II are as follows: E User mode Diagnosis mode Display type “AIR BAG” warning lamp X X ON-OFF operation CONSULT-II — X Monitoring F G HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the sympSRS toms or conditions for a customer complaint. Information From Customer WHAT..... Vehicle model WHEN..... Date, Frequencies WHERE..... Road conditions HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms I J Preliminary Check Check that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery (Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery" .) ● Fuse (Refer to SRS-12, "Schematic" .) ● System component-to-harness connections K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-9 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW SHIA0175E *1: SRS-9 *2: SRS-20 *3: SRS-30 *4: SRS-30 Revision: March 2005 SRS-10 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Components Parts Location EHS0010C A B C D E F G SRS I J WHIA0273E 1. Driver air bag module 2. Spiral cable 3. Front passenger air bag off indicator (if equipped) 4. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit 5. LH side air bag (satellite) sensor (if equipped) 6. Crash zone sensor 7. Occupant classification system sen- 8. sor (if equipped) Belt tension sensor (if equipped) 9. Occupant classification system control unit (if equipped) 10. Air bag warning lamp 11. Side curtain air bag modules (if equipped) 12. Front LH seatbelt pre-tensioner 13. Seat belt buckle switches 14. Front RH seatbelt pre-tensioner 15. RH side air bag (satellite) sensor (if equipped) 16. Front side air bag modules (if equipped) 17. Front passenger air bag module Revision: March 2005 SRS-11 2005 Altima K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Schematic EHS0010D WHWA0173E Revision: March 2005 SRS-12 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — SRS — EHS0010E A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0174E Revision: March 2005 SRS-13 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHWA0100E Revision: March 2005 SRS-14 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0095E Revision: March 2005 SRS-15 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHWA0096E Revision: March 2005 SRS-16 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0099E Revision: March 2005 SRS-17 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHWA0175E Revision: March 2005 SRS-18 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG) EHS0013H A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. AIR BAG diagnostic mode Description A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs. B SELF-DIAG [CURRENT] Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The stored results will remain until memory erasing is executed. C SELF-DIAG [PAST] TROUBLE DIAG RECORD ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, as shown. When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-II screen. For NISSAN MODEL L31, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit discriminated numbers assigned are F617 (for models without side air bags) and F618 (for models with side air bags). D E F G ARS366 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode SRS After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis mode. I J K L SRS803 From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode M To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode. SRS804 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS ● “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” Revision: March 2005 SRS-19 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ● ● A current Self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-II screen by touching “BACK” key of CONSULT-II and select “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” mode. NOTE: If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased. SRS701 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) ● ● EHS0010G The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis mode”. After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared. HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE SHIA0183E HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared. SRS Operation Check EHS0010H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp-User Mode 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks. Revision: March 2005 SRS-20 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. Compare the SRS air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the examples. A B C BF-1845D D E F G SRS I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-21 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Warning lamp examples “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation-User mode- SRS condition ● No malfunction is detected. ● No further action is necessary. ● The system is malfunctioning and need to be repaired as indicated. ● Air bag is deployed. ● Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed. ● Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. ● Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning. ● SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning. ● Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. ● Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning. Reference item — SHIA0011E Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" or SRS-36, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6" . SHIA0012E Go to SRS-57, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . Go to SRS-41, "Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off" . SHIA0013E Go to SRS-42, "Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On" . SHIA0014E Revision: March 2005 SRS-22 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II EHS0010I A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. B C D E BBIA0002E 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. G SRS I BCIA0029E 5. J Touch “AIR BAG”. K L M BCIA0030E 6. Touch "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]". BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 SRS-23 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. Diagnostic code is displayed on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]". WHIA0151E If no malfunction is detected on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]" even though malfunction is detected in "SRS Operation Check", refer to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" , to diagnose the following cases: ● Self-diagnostic result "SELF-DIAG [PAST]" (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. ● The SRS system malfunctions intermittently. SRS701 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]") Diagnostic item When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in User mode. ● Low battery voltage (Less than 9V) ● Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . ● Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. ● Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" . ● ● Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . NO DTC IS DETECTED ● No malfunction is detected. DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] or [B1054] ● Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] or [B1055] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] or [B1056] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] or [B1057] ● Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. Revision: March 2005 Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement Explanation — 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace driver air bag module. 4. Replace the spiral cable. 5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 6. Replace the related harness. SRS-24 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] or [B1070] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] or [B1071] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] or [B1072] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] or [B1073] ● Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 5. Replace the related harness. ● Crash zone sensor 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. A Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] [B1033] or [B1034] CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] [B1035] B 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front passenger air bag module. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. C D E F 3. Replace the crash zone sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. G 5. Replace the related harness. Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] ● SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] ● SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] ● SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] ● Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] ● Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. ● LH side air bag (satellite) sensor Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module). I 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. J K 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. SRS-25 L 3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module). 5. Replace the related harness. SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] Revision: March 2005 SRS 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation ● RH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] ● PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] ● PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] ● PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] ● The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] ● The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1150] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1151] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1152] ● CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1153] ● Revision: March 2005 The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. SRS-26 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1145] ● The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1146] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1147] ● The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1148] ● The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. ● Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. B C 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. ● Occupant classification system is malfunctioning. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] [B1022] A 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 5. Replace the related harness. CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] [B1017], [B1020] or [B1021] Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. D E F G SRS I 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1018] ● Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. BELT TENSION SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1019] K L 3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly. 4. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [B1023] 3. Replace front passenger air bag off indicator. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. NOTE: Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required. Revision: March 2005 J SRS-27 2005 Altima M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Final checking after repairing SRS by using CONSULT-II — Diagnosis mode CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. After repairing SRS, connect both battery cables. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0002E 4. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 5. Touch “AIR BAG”. BCIA0030E 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. BCIA0031E Revision: March 2005 SRS-28 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 8. If any malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" , and repair malfunctioning part completely. A B C SRS701 D 8. Touch “ERASE”. NOTE: Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”). If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. E F G WHIA0152E 9. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II to “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. SRS I J BCIA0031E 10. Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. 11. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode. 12. Turn ignition switch OFF then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II. 13. Go to SRS-20, "Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp-User Mode" . L M SRS702 Revision: March 2005 SRS-29 K 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record 1. CONSIDER POSSIBILITY OF NOT ERASING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT AFTER REPAIRING Is it the first time for maintenance of SRS? Yes or No Yes >> Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" . No >> Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 Inspecting SRS intermittent malfunction by using CONSULT-II — Diagnosis mode CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. BBIA0002E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 5. Touch “AIR BAG”. BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 SRS-30 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. A B C BCIA0031E D 7. If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go to step 10. E F G WHIA0152E If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch “BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG MODE”. SRS I J SRS702 8. Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. NOTE: With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed. K L M BCIA0031E 9. Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. 10. Touch “PRINT”. 11. Compare diagnostic codes to SRS-32, "CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD")" . 12. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears. 13. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II, and both battery cables. WHIA0153E Revision: March 2005 SRS-31 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 14. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”, that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component. 15. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" , for final checking. CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD") Diagnostic item Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement Explanation When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in User mode. ● Low battery voltage (Less than 9V) ● Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . ● Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. ● Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" . ● ● Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . NO DTC IS DETECTED ● No malfunction is detected. — DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] or [B1054] ● Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] or [B1055] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] or [B1056] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] or [B1057] ● Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] or [B1070] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] or [B1071] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] or [B1072] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] or [B1073] ● Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 5. Replace the related harness. ● Crash zone sensor 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace driver air bag module. 4. Replace the spiral cable. 5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 6. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] [B1033] or [B1034] CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] [B1035] 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front passenger air bag module. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the crash zone sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. Revision: March 2005 SRS-32 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] ● SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] ● Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] ● Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. ● LH side air bag (satellite) sensor Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module). B C 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. D E F 3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module). 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. G 5. Replace the related harness. SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] SRS 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. I 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. ● RH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] ● The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] ● The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] ● The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] ● The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. Revision: March 2005 A 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. SRS-33 2005 Altima J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] ● The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1150] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1151] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1152] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1153] ● The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1145] ● The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1146] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1147] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1148] ● The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. ● Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] [B1017], [B1020] or [B1021] Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. ● Occupant classification system is malfunctioning. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] [B1022] 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1018] Revision: March 2005 ● Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning. SRS-34 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation ● Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning. Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. BELT TENSION SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1019] A 3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly. B C 4. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [B1023] D E 3. Replace front passenger air bag off indicator. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. F 5. Replace the related harness. G SRS I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-35 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble diagnosis without CONSULT-II. EHS0010J DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using "AIR BAG" warning lamp—Diagnosis mode NOTE: SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode. 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second. 3. Wait more than 3 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 two times. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. SRS is now in Diagnosis mode. "AIR BAG" warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows: Revision: March 2005 SRS-36 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART A B C SHIA0026E D E F G WHIA0260E SRS I J K WHIA0198E L M WHIA0261E Revision: March 2005 SRS-37 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHIA0200E WHIA0262E WHIA0263E WHIA0203E Revision: March 2005 SRS-38 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C WHIA0204E D E F G WHIA0264E SRS I J K WHIA0265E L M WHIA0266E Revision: March 2005 SRS-39 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHIA0267E WHIA0211E WHIA0212E Revision: March 2005 SRS-40 2005 Altima TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off EHS0010K A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 1. CHECK TO SEE IF ANY AIR BAG MODULES ARE DEPLOYED B Are any air bag modules deployed? Yes or No Yes >> Refer to SRS-57, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . No >> GO TO 2. C 2. CHECK THE AIR BAG FUSE D Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. E 3. CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN F Replace “AIR BAG” fuse and turn ignition switch ON. Does the “AIR BAG” fuse blow again? Yes >> Repair harness. No >> Inspection End. G SRS 4. CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-II? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Visually check the wiring harness connection of diagnosis sensor unit. If the harness connection check result is OK, replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-55, "Removal and Installation" . J K 5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION Is harness connection between warning lamp and air bag diagnosis sensor unit OK? OK or NG OK >> Replace diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-55, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Connect “AIR BAG” warning lamp and air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector properly. If “AIR BAG” warning lamp still does not go off, replace harness. Revision: March 2005 I SRS-41 2005 Altima L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On EHS0010L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 1. CHECK “METER” FUSE Check the 10A meter fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK “METER” FUSE AGAIN Replace 10A meter fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON. Does the meter fuse blow again? Yes >> Repair harness. No >> Inspection End. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND COMBINATION METER Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connectors and turn ignition switch ON. Does "AIR BAG" warning lamp turn on? Yes >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-55, "Removal and Installation" . No >> Check the ground circuit of “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Revision: March 2005 SRS-42 2005 Altima DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:K8510 A EHS0010M B C D E F LHIA0051E 1. Driver air bag module 2. G Steering wheel SRS REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced. ● Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove the side lids. 2. Remove the left and right side bolts. I J K L M LHIA0074E 3. 4. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel. Disconnect the air bag harness connectors and remove the driver air bag module. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. ● Revision: March 2005 SRS-43 2005 Altima DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ● ● ● ● ● Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. Do not disassemble air bag module. Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts. Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). PHIA0291E ● ● Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. SBF814E INSTALLATION Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . Revision: March 2005 SRS-44 2005 Altima SPIRAL CABLE SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation PFP:25554 A EHS0010N B C D E F WHIA0109E 1. Steering wheel 2. Lighting and turn signal switch 3. Wiper and washer switch 4. Spiral cable 5. Driver air bag module connector 6. Column cover upper 7. Column assembly 8. Column cover lower 9. Screw (Do not remove) G SRS 10. Screw I REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-43, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Set the steering wheel to the neutral position. 3. Remove the column cover upper and lower. 4. Disconnect the horn connector. CAUTION: Do not tap or bump the steering wheel. 5. Remove steering wheel with steering wheel puller. Be careful not to over-tighten puller on steering wheel. PHIA0100E 6. Remove the spiral cable screws and remove the spiral cable. CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble spiral cable. ● Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. Revision: March 2005 SRS-45 2005 Altima J K L M SPIRAL CABLE 7. Remove the horn switch connector and the spiral cable connector. CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. SHIA0193E INSTALLATION Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . CAUTION: ● The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. ● With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. PHIA0275E Revision: March 2005 SRS-46 2005 Altima FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:K8515 A EHS0010O The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Refer to SRS-48, "WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION" for wiring harness modification procedure. B C REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module con- D nectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least E 3 minutes. ● Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. 1. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" . F 2. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember. 3. Disconnect the air bag module electrical connectors. G ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . SRS 4. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove air I bag module from the instrument panel assembly. WHIA0110E CAUTION: ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. ● Always place front passenger air bag module with caution label side facing upward. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. ● Do not disassemble air bag module. ● Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. ● Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). ● ● ● J K L M WHIA0111E Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . SBF814E INSTALLATION Original Passenger Air Bag Module Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal. Revision: March 2005 SRS-47 2005 Altima FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . CAUTION: ● Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . ● Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module 1. Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument panel pad assembly. WHIA0110E 2. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket. CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . ● WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. NOTE: The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is not required. CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . 1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors. 2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors. 3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end. Revision: March 2005 SRS-48 2005 Altima FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE 4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used vehicle wiring harness. A B C LHIA0017E D 5. Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in the heat shrink tubing. E F G WHIA0062E SRS 6. 7. 8. Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire. Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness. Locate the front passenger air bag service replacement connector that is taped back to the main harness. Unwrap the tape to access the yellow service replacement connector and remove the dust cover from the connector. 9. Connect service connector to passenger air bag module. 10. Clip to service connector clpping point as shown. I J K WHIA0156E L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-49 2005 Altima SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:985P0 EHS0010Q LHIA0076E REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect side curtain air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Always work from the side of the side curtain air bag module. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove three rearmost side curtain air bag inflator fixing bolts, and unhook the side curtain air bag inflator. 3. Disconnect side curtain air bag connector. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . 4. Unclip wiring harness from side curtain air bag module bracket. 5. Remove side curtain air bag module fixing bolts and remove the side curtain air bag module. CAUTION: Always place the side curtain air bag module with the warning label facing upward. ● Do not attempt to disassemble side curtain air bag module. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module connector. ● WHIA0022E Revision: March 2005 SRS-50 2005 Altima SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ● ● ● Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the side curtain air bag module. A B C SBF814E D INSTALLATION Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . CAUTION: ● Always work from the side of the side curtain air bag module. ● After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . E F G SRS I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-51 2005 Altima CRASH ZONE SENSOR CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:98531 EHS0010R REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove crash zone sensor connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor fixing nuts. LHIA0077E CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. ● Do not attempt to disassemble crash zone sensor. ● INSTALLATION Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal. CAUTION: ● Check crash zone sensor for proper installation. ● After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . Revision: March 2005 SRS-52 2005 Altima SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:98830 A EHS0010S REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor fixing nuts. 3. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector. B C D E WHIA0149E F CAUTION: Do not use old nuts; replace with new ones. G ● Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. ● Do not attempt to disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. SRS ● Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. ● INSTALLATION I Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal. CAUTION: ● Check side air bag (satellite) sensor for proper installation. ● After replacement of side air bag (satellite) sensor, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . J K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-53 2005 Altima FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Removal and Installation PFP:86884 EHS0010T For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . Revision: March 2005 SRS-54 2005 Altima DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:28556 A EHS0010U REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect each harness connector for the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connectors. 4. Remove special hex bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: ● Do not use old bolts. Replace with new ones. ● Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible LHIA0078E signs of damage, replace with new one. ● Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. B C D E F G INSTALLATION Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal. NOTE: SRS The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "⇐" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. CAUTION: I ● Check the diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. ● After replacement of diagnosis sensor unit, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . J ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to SRS-19, "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)" . K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-55 2005 Altima OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:98852 EHS0013I The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to SE-15, "Components" to remove the seat, and SE-20, "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. Revision: March 2005 SRS-56 2005 Altima COLLISION DIAGNOSIS COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Frontal Collision PFP:00015 A EHS0013J Check the SRS components using the following table. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Part Air bag module (driver and front passenger air bag module) SRS is activated REPLACE Install with new fasteners. B C SRS is NOT activated 1. Remove air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. 3. Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the instrument panel. D E 4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 5. If damaged—REPLACE. Install air bag modules with new fasteners. Crash zone sensor REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. 1. Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the crash zone sensor and bracket. F G 3. Install the crash zone sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies REPLACE Install seat belt pretensioner with new fasteners. 5. If damaged—REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. SRS 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. I 2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting. 3. Check retractor for smooth operation. 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. J 5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 6. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners. Diagnosis sensor unit REPLACE Install with new fasteners. K 1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Steering wheel L 1. Visually check steering wheel for deformities. 2. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. M 3. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. 4. Check steering wheel for excessive free play. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall. 6. If damaged—REPLACE. Spiral cable REPLACE the spiral cable. 1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage. 2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage. 3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall. 5. If damaged—REPLACE. Occupant classification system (Passenger seat) 1. Remove passenger seat. 2. Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities. 3. Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities. 4. Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners. 6. If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners. Revision: March 2005 SRS-57 2005 Altima COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part Harness and connectors SRS is activated SRS is NOT activated 1. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities. 2. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness. 1. Visually check instrument panel for damage. Instrument panel REPLACE the instrument panel assembly. 2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel. For Side Collision EHS0013K Check the SRS components using the following table. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" . SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) Part (LH or RH) side curtain air bag module SRS is activated Replace the side curtain air bag module. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) SRS is NOT activated 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side. 2. If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module. 3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. 6. If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. Front (LH or RH) side air bag module REPLACE front seatback assembly. 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on the collision side. 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly. (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor Diagnosis sensor unit REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side with new fasteners. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) 1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag (satellite) sensor. 3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. 5. If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly 1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly. If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly, – Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. – If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 6. If damaged—REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners. Revision: March 2005 SRS-58 2005 Altima COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part Seat (with front side air bag) SRS is activated REPLACE front seatback assembly. SRS is NOT activated A 1. Visually check the seat on the collision side. 2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities. B – Harness, connectors and terminals – Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat) C 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front seat back is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. Center inner pillar D 1. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 2. If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar. Trim/headlining 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side. E 2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts. F G SRS I J K L M Revision: March 2005 SRS-59 2005 Altima COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Revision: March 2005 SRS-60 2005 Altima E SUSPENSION SECTION WT ROAD WHEELS & TIRES A B C D WT CONTENTS NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 2 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 2 WHEEL ....................................................................... 3 Inspection ................................................................. 3 WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY ................................. 4 Balancing Wheels .................................................... 4 REMOVAL ............................................................. 4 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 4 Rotation .................................................................... 5 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 6 Road Wheel .............................................................. 6 Tire ........................................................................... 6 F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 WT-1 2005 Altima NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EES0017S PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" STEERING × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × Judder × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × Noise × × × Shake × × Shimmy, judder × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × TIRES × Refer to TIRES in this chart. BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION BRAKE FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart. MT-8 DIFFERENTIAL (Transaxle) ROAD WHEEL WT-6 × — × Non-uniformity × — × × Deformation or damage × × WT-5 × Uneven tire wear × WT-6 × Incorrect tire pressure × WT-4 × Imbalance × WT-3 ROAD WHEEL × Out-of-round Symptom × × × Vibration TIRES × × × Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS × × Noise Reference page Incorrect tire size Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × ×: Applicable Revision: March 2005 WT-2 2005 Altima WHEEL WHEEL Inspection 1. 2. a. b. A EES0017T Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. Wheel runout (Dial indicator value): 3. 4. PFP:40300 B C Refer to WT-6, "Road Wheel" . Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Check front suspension for looseness. D SFA975B WT F G H I J K L M Revision: March 2005 WT-3 2005 Altima WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY Balancing Wheels PFP:40300 EES0017U REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal procedures. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. ● After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ● 1. 2. a. b. If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz.) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz.) = 40 g (1.41 oz.) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 g = 35 g (1.23 oz.) 37.5 g = 40 g (1.41 oz.) SMA054D Install balance weight in the position shown. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ● Always use genuine Nissan adhesion balance weights. ● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight. SMA055D Revision: March 2005 WT-4 2005 Altima WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY c. 3. 4. 5. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz.), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. Start wheel balancer again. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz.) each or below. ● If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz.), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance): Maximum allowable unbalance Dynamic (At rim flange) Static ● ● B C SMA056D D WT 5 g (0.18 oz.) (one side) 10 g (0.35 oz.) Rotation ● A F EES0017V Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" . Do not include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires. CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Refer to WT-6, "Tire" . G H I J SMA829C K Tightening torque of wheel nut : 98.1 - 117 N·m (10 - 12 kg-m, 73 - 86 ft-lb) L M Revision: March 2005 WT-5 2005 Altima SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel Wheel type Maximum radial runout limit Allowable quantity of residual unbalance PFP:00030 EES0017W Steel Aluminum Inside Outside Lateral mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 1.0 (0.039) or less 0.9 (0.035) or less Radial mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 0.8 (0.031) or less 0.4 (0.016) or less Dynamic (On the ear part) Less than 5 g (0.18 oz.) (per side) Static (On the ear part) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz.) Tire EES0017X Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Air pressure Tire size Conventional tire Spare tire — 420 (4.2, 60) 200 (2.04, 29) — Front 230 (2.35, 33) — Rear 210 (2.14, 30) — 240 (2.45, 35) — T135/70R16 T135/90R16 (when equipped with TCS) T155/80R17 P215/60R16 P215/55R17 P225/45R18 Revision: March 2005 WT-6 2005 Altima K ELECTRICAL SECTION WW WIPER, WASHER & HORN A B C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .................. 4 Components Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................... 4 System Description .................................................. 4 LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION ...................... 5 HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION ........................... 5 INTERMITTENT OPERATION .............................. 5 AUTO STOP OPERATION .................................... 6 WASHER OPERATION ......................................... 6 MIST OPERATION ................................................ 6 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION ......................................... 6 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION..... 6 CAN Communication System Description ................ 7 Wiring Diagram — WIPER — .................................. 8 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 10 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ......11 Work Flow ...............................................................11 Preliminary Inspection .............................................11 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..............................................11 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 13 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 13 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 14 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 14 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 15 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 15 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 16 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 16 Trouble Diagnosis .................................................. 17 FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE ............. 17 FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT .................................................................. 20 ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................................................... 22 ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE... 22 Revision: March 2005 ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE ...................................................................... 24 FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED... 24 WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT WASHER OPERATES ........................................ 25 FRONT WIPERS OPERATE FOR 10 SECONDS, STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES, THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE ......................... 25 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location ............... 27 REMOVAL ........................................................... 27 INSTALLATION ................................................... 27 Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage .......................................................................... 27 REMOVAL ........................................................... 28 INSTALLATION ................................................... 28 Washer Nozzle Adjustment .................................... 29 Washer Tube Layout .............................................. 29 Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch ..................................................................... 30 REMOVAL ........................................................... 30 INSTALLATION ................................................... 30 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank .............. 30 REMOVAL ........................................................... 30 INSTALLATION ................................................... 30 Removal and Installation of Washer Motor ............. 30 REMOVAL ........................................................... 30 INSTALLATION ................................................... 31 CIGARETTE LIGHTER ............................................. 32 Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — ................................. 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 33 REMOVAL ........................................................... 33 INSTALLATION ................................................... 33 POWER SOCKET ..................................................... 34 Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT — ................................ 34 Removal and Installation ........................................ 35 HORN ........................................................................ 36 WW-1 2005 Altima F G H I J WW L M Wiring Diagram — HORN — .................................. 36 Removal and Installation ........................................ 37 REMOVAL (HORN HIGH) ................................... 37 INSTALLATION (HORN HIGH) ............................ 37 REMOVAL (HORN LOW) .................................... 37 INSTALLATION (HORN LOW) ............................ 37 Revision: March 2005 WW-2 2005 Altima PRECAUTION PRECAUTION PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EKS008QF The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis B C D E F G EKS008QG When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" . ● Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . H I J WW L M Revision: March 2005 WW-3 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Components Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28810 EKS008QH WKIA3155E System Description EKS008QI Both front wiper relays are located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) ● Wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals. Terminal combination status is read by BCM (body control module) ● BCM controls front wiper LO, HI, and INT (intermittent) operation ● IPDM E/R operates the wiper motor according to CAN communication signals from the BCM. Power is supplied at all times ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 20A fuse (No. 39, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to front wiper relay, located in the IPDM E/R. With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Revision: March 2005 WW-4 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM to BCM terminal 38, and ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 44 ● to front washer motor terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination switch terminal 9 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61, and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 and ● to front wiper motor terminal E ● through grounds E15 and E24. ● A B C D E LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position and the front wiper switch is turned to low position, the BCM detects a low speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. BCM then sends front wiper (low) request signal over CAN communication lines ● from BCM terminals 39 and 40 ● to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (low) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay. With the front wiper relay energized, power is supplied ● through front wiper relay ● to front wiper HI relay ● through IPDM E/R terminal 21 ● to front wiper motor terminal L. With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed. HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION F G H I J When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position and the front wiper switch is turned to high position, the BCM detects a high speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. BCM then sends front wiper (high) request signal over CAN communication lines WW ● from BCM terminals 39 and 40 ● to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (high) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper and L the front wiper HI relays. With the front wiper and the front wiper HI relays energized, power is supplied ● through front wiper relay M ● to front wiper HI relay ● through IPDM E/R terminal 31 ● to front wiper motor terminal H. With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed. INTERMITTENT OPERATION Wiper intermittent operation delay interval is determined from the combination of the intermittent wiper dial position inputs and vehicle speed. During each intermittent operation delay interval, the BCM sends a front wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R to operate the wipers. When the ignition switch is in ON or START position and the front wiper switch is turned to intermittent position, the BCM detects a front wiper (intermittent) ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. BCM then sends front wiper (intermittent) request signal over CAN communication lines ● from BCM terminals 39 and 40 ● to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. When BCM determines that combination switch status is front wiper intermittent ON, it performs the following operations. ● BCM detects ON/OFF status of intermittent wiper dial position Revision: March 2005 WW-5 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM BCM calculates operation interval from wiper dial position and vehicle speed signal received through CAN communications ● BCM sends front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R at calculated operation interval. When IPDM E/R receives front wiper request signal (INT), it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay. It then sends auto-stop signal to BCM and conducts intermittent front wiper motor operation. ● AUTO STOP OPERATION When the wiper arms are not located at the base of the windshield and the wiper switch is turned OFF, the wiper motor will continue to operate until the wiper arms reach windshield base. When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals E and P are connected. Ground is supplied ● to IPDM E/R terminal 32 ● through front wiper motor terminal P ● through front wiper motor terminal E ● through grounds E15 and E24. The IPDM E/R sends auto stop operation signal to BCM through CAN communication lines. When BCM receives auto stop operation signal, BCM sends wiper stop signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication lines. The IPDM E/R then de-energizes the front wiper relay. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position. WASHER OPERATION When wiper switch is in front wiper washer position, BCM detects front wiper washer signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 44 ● to front washer motor terminal 1. When front wiper switch is turned to washer position, ground is supplied ● to front washer motor terminal 2 ● through combination switch terminal 3 ● through combination switch terminal 9 ● through grounds F14, M57 and M61. With ground supplied, the front washer motor is operated. When BCM detects that front washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, BCM uses CAN communication and sends wiper request signal to IPDM E/R for low speed operation of wipers. When BCM detects that washer switch is OFF, low speed operation cycles approximately 3 times and then stops. MIST OPERATION When the wiper switch is temporarily placed in the mist position, wiper low speed operation cycles once and then stops. For additional information about wiper operation under this condition, refer to WW-5, "LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION" . If the switch is held in the mist position, low speed operation continues. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION BCM includes fail-safe function to prevent malfunction of electrical components controlled by CAN communications if a malfunction in CAN communications occurs. BCM uses CAN communications to stop output of electrical components it controls. Until ignition switch is turned off, front wiper remains in same status as just before fail-safe control was initiated. (If wiper was in low speed operation just before fail-safe, it continues low speed operation until ignition switch is turned OFF.) When fail-safe status is initiated, BCM remains in standby until normal signals are received. When normal signals are received, fail-safe status is canceled. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . Revision: March 2005 WW-6 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description EKS008QJ A Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . B C D E F G H I J WW L M Revision: March 2005 WW-7 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — WIPER — EKS008QK WKWA2908E Revision: March 2005 WW-8 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J WW L M WKWA1348E Revision: March 2005 WW-9 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS008QL Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color Signal name 2 L Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 Reference Value (V) (Approx.) SKIA5291E 3 R/Y Combination switch input 4 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 R/G Combination switch input 3 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 R/B Combination switch input 2 6 R/W Combination switch input 1 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 32 L/W Combination switch output 5 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 G/Y Combination switch output 4 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 G/R Combination switch output 3 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: March 2005 WW-10 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color Signal name 35 G/B Combination switch output 2 36 G/W Combination switch output 1 Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference Value (V) (Approx.) A B ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 C SKIA5292E 38 R Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery 39 L CAN-H ON — — 40 P CAN-L ON — — 67 B Ground — — 0 70 W/B OFF — Battery Battery power D E Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS008QM F Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 21 L 31 32 Signal name Low speed signal L/B High speed signal L/Y 38 B 44 R/W 48 Wiper auto stop signal Ignition switch ON ON Operation or condition Wiper switch Wiper switch ON Reference value (V) (Approx.) OFF 0 LO Battery OFF 0 HI Battery Wiper operating Battery Wiper stopped 0 H I J Ground — — 0 Front washer motor power ON — Battery L CAN-H ON — — 49 P CAN-L ON — — 60 B Ground — — 0 WW L Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G EKS008QN Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand the system description, refer to WW-4, "System Description" . Perform preliminary inspection, refer to WW-11, "Preliminary Inspection" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does wiper function operate normally? If it operates normally, GO TO 6. If not, GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Inspection M EKS008QO INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Inspection procedure 1. CHECK FUSE Check if wiper or washer fuse is blown. Unit Power source Fuse No. Front washer motor Ignition ON or START 47 Front wiper relay Battery 39 Revision: March 2005 WW-11 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Unit BCM Power source Fuse No. Ignition ON or START 1 Battery f OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. BCM Ignition switch position (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (R) M20 70 (W/B) Ground OFF ON 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open or short between BCM and fuse. WKIA1434E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM) Check for continuity between the following terminals on BCM connector and ground. BCM Connector Terminal (wire color) M20 67 (B) Ground Ignition switch condition Continuity OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair/replace BCM ground circuit. Revision: March 2005 WKIA1435E WW-12 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS008QP A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. C Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. D The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. E Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0002E 2. J Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". WW L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 WW-13 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. LKIA0183E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal. IGN SW CAN "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN switch ON (ON)/Other OFF or ACC (OFF)" status as judged from CAN communications. FR WIPER HI "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER LOW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. (1 - 7) Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal. INT VOLUME FR WIPER STOP "ON/OFF" Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto-stop signal. VEHICLE SPEED "0.0 km/h" Displays vehicle speed as received from CAN communication. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s). During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Front wiper HI output Revision: March 2005 Display on CONSULT-II screen FR WIPER (HI) Description Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. WW-14 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Test item Display on CONSULT-II screen Description Front wiper LO output FR WIPER (LO) Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Front wiper INT output FR WIPER (INT) Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) A B EKS008QQ CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR C Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. D E CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0002E J 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". WW L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: March 2005 WW-15 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. BCIA0031E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. MAIN SIGNALS Monitors predetermined items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu Monitor item selection CONSULT-II screen display Display or unit ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description FR WIP REQ STOP/1LO/LO/HI x x x Signal status input from BCM. Wiper auto stop WIP AUTO STOP ACT P/STOP P x x x Output status of IPDM E/R. Wiper protection WIP PROT OFF/LS/HS/BLOCK x x x Control status of IPDM E/R. Item name Front wiper request NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s). During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Front wiper (HI, LO) output Revision: March 2005 CONSULT-II screen display FRONT WIPER Description With a certain operation (OFF, HI, LO) front wiper relays can be operated. WW-16 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis EKS008QR FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE A CAUTION: During IPDM E/R fail-safe control, front wipers may not operate. Refer to PG-15, "CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL" to make sure that it is not in fail-safe status. B Inspection Procedure 1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS C With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 1. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Confirm front wiper operation. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. D E F SKIA3486E G H I J WW L M Revision: March 2005 WW-17 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminals and front wiper motor connector terminals. IPDM E/R Front wiper motor Terminal (wire color) Connector Connector 31 (L/B) E122 21 (L) Terminal (wire color) Continuity H (L/B) E23 32 (L/Y) L (L) Yes P (L/Y) WKIA1564E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminals and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Continuity Terminal (wire color) 31 (L/B) E122 21 (L) Ground No 32 (L/Y) LKIA0383E 5. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminals and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal (wire color) E121 60 (B) E124 38 (B) Continuity Ground Yes WKIA1021E 6. Check continuity between front wiper motor connector terminal E and ground. Front wiper motor Connector Terminal (wire color) E23 E (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper motor and ground. Revision: March 2005 WW-18 WKIA0234E 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION A With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 1. 1. B Without CONSULT-II Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . C D SKIA3486E E When front wiper relay, and front wiper HI relay are operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals and ground. F IPDM E/R (+) Connector (–) Voltage (Approx.) G Terminal (wire color) 21 (L) E122 Condition 31 (L/B) 32 (L/Y) Ground Stopped 0 LO operation Battery voltage Stopped 0 HI operation Battery voltage LO operation Battery voltage Stopped 0 H WKIA0404E I OK or NG OK >> Replace the front wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . 4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT", "FR WIPER LOW" and "FR WIPER HI" turn ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . WW-19 WW L M WKIA1018E Revision: March 2005 J 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 5. BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out self-diagnosis of BCM. Displayed self-diagnosis results NO DTC>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check CAN communication line of BCM. GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . SKIA1039E FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT Inspection Procedure 1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 2. SKIA5301E Revision: March 2005 WW-20 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. IPDM E/R AND FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. IPDM E/R B Front wiper motor Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 32 (L/Y) C Continuity Connector Terminal (wire color) E23 P (L/Y) Yes D WKIA1566E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground. E F IPDM E/R Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 32 (L/Y) Continuity G Ground No H LKIA0321E I 5. Check continuity between front wiper motor connector terminal E and ground. J Front wiper motor Connector Terminal (wire color) E23 E (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> ● Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor. ● Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper motor and ground. Revision: March 2005 WW-21 WW L WKIA0234E M 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 3. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground. IPDM E/R (+) Connector E122 (–) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Wiper operating Battery voltage Wiper stopped 0V Terminal (wire color) 32 (L/Y) Ground WKIA0407E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPERATE Inspection Procedure 1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER LOW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . WKIA1018E ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE Inspection Procedure 1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS With CONSULT-II 1. Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Confirm front wiper operation. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: March 2005 WW-22 SKIA3486E 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and front wiper motor connector terminal. IPDM E/R B Front wiper motor Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 31 (L/B) C Continuity Connector Terminal (wire color) E23 H (L/B) Yes D OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor. WKIA1568E 3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION E F With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. 1. G H Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . I SKIA3486E When front wiper HI relay is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 31 (L/B) and terminals 38 (B), 60 (B). J WW IPDM E/R (+) (–) Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 31 (L/B) Connector Terminal (wire color) E124 38 (B) E121 60 (B) Voltage (Approx.) L Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . Revision: March 2005 WW-23 WKIA0409E 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER HI" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . WKIA1018E ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE Inspection Procedure 1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . WKIA1018E FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED Inspection Procedure 1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "INT VOLUME" changes in order from 1 to 7 according to operation of the intermittent switch dial position. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . WKIA1018E Revision: March 2005 WW-24 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT WASHER OPERATES Inspection Procedure A 1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION B Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of front washer switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . C D WKIA1018E FRONT WIPERS OPERATE FOR 10 SECONDS, STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES, THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE CAUTION: ● When auto stop signal has not varied for 10 seconds or longer while IPDM E/R is operating front wipers, IPDM E/R considers front wipers locked and stops wiper output, which causes this symptom. ● This status can be checked by using IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR". Under this condition, "WIP PROT" reads "BLOCK". E F G H Inspection Procedure 1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR I With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 2. J WW L SKIA5301E M Revision: March 2005 WW-25 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and front wiper motor connector terminal. IPDM E/R Front wiper motor Terminal (wire color) Connector Terminal (wire color) Continuity Connector E122 32 (L/Y) E23 P (L/Y) Yes WKIA1566E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 32 (L/Y) Continuity Ground No OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LKIA0321E 3. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground. IPDM E/R (+) (–) Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 32 (L/Y) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Wiper operating Battery voltage Wiper stopped 0V Ground WKIA0407E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . Revision: March 2005 WW-26 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location EKS008QS A REMOVAL 1. 2. Operate wiper motor and stop it at the auto stop position. Remove the wiper arm caps and mounting nuts and remove wiper arms from vehicle. B INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop). Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before tightening nut. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF". Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance "L1" and "L2". Clearance "L1" Clearance "L2" ● ● C D E : 24.5 - 39.5 mm (0.965 - 1.555 in) : 32.5 - 47.5 mm (1.280 - 1.870 in) SEL543TA Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque. Front wiper arm nuts F G : 19.7 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 174 in-lb) H I SEL024J Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage EKS008QT J WW L M WKIA0988E 1. Wiper link 4. Front wiper motor Revision: March 2005 2. Wiper link 3. WW-27 Wiper frame 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Operate the wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop). Remove wiper arms from the vehicle. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" . Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect wiper motor connector. Remove bracket and wiper frame, link and motor assembly. Remove wiper motor from wiper frame and link assembly. WKIA0067E INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. ● Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to bracket and wiper frame and link assembly, and install assembly to the vehicle. Wiper motor assembly bolts 4. 5. 6. : 4.5 N·m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb) Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). Install cowl top cover. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" . Install wiper arms. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" . Revision: March 2005 WW-28 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Washer Nozzle Adjustment EKS008QU A Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown. ● ±10° Adjustable range: B C D SEL241P *1 350 mm (13.78 in) *5 135 mm (5.31 in) *2 190 mm (7.48 in) *6 230 mm (9.06 in) *3 320 mm (12.60 in) *7 275 mm (10.83 in) *4 135 mm (5.31 in) *8 440 mm (17.32 in) E F G SEL544T Washer Tube Layout H EKS008QV I J WW L M WKIA0069E Revision: March 2005 WW-29 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch EKS008QW REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . Remove wiper washer switch connector. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. WKIA0071E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Washer Tank EKS008QX REMOVAL 1. Pull out washer tank inlet. WKIA0072E 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Remove front washer motor connector and washer fluid level sensor connector (if equipped). Remove washer tank screws. Remove washer hose and remove the washer tank from the vehicle. WKIA0073E INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer tank inlet and check for water leaks. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Washer tank installation screws Tightening torque : 4.5 N·m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb) Removal and Installation of Washer Motor EKS008QY REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Remove front washer motor connector and hose. Revision: March 2005 WW-30 2005 Altima FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 3. Pull out front washer motor in the direction of the arrow as shown and remove the washer motor from the washer tank. A B C WKIA0282E D INSTALLATION CAUTION: When installing front washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E F G H I J WW L M Revision: March 2005 WW-31 2005 Altima CIGARETTE LIGHTER CIGARETTE LIGHTER Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — PFP:35330 EKS008QZ WKWA2970E Revision: March 2005 WW-32 2005 Altima CIGARETTE LIGHTER Removal and Installation EKS008R0 A REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the A/T finisher (A/T models) or M/T finisher (M/T models). Refer to IP-13, "A/T Finisher" or IP-14, "M/T Finisher". Remove console box finisher. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" . Remove socket. Press out ring from the back of console box finisher. B C D E WKIA0075E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I J WW L M Revision: March 2005 WW-33 2005 Altima POWER SOCKET POWER SOCKET Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT — PFP:253A2 EKS008R1 WKWA1358E Revision: March 2005 WW-34 2005 Altima POWER SOCKET Removal and Installation EKS008R2 A 1. Remove the console finisher. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" . 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove socket from the console. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B C D WKIA0076E E F G H I J WW L M Revision: March 2005 WW-35 2005 Altima HORN HORN Wiring Diagram — HORN — PFP:25610 EKS008R3 WKWA1359E Revision: March 2005 WW-36 2005 Altima HORN Removal and Installation EKS008R4 A REMOVAL (HORN HIGH) 1. 2. 3. Remove right headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect horn connector. Remove horn bolt, then remove the horn. B C D WKIA0077E INSTALLATION (HORN HIGH) 1. Horn bolt 2. 3. E Install the horn and tighten horn bolt to specified torque. : 17 N·m (1.7 kg-m, 12.3 ft-lb) F Connect the horn connector. Install right headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . REMOVAL (HORN LOW) 1. 2. 3. G Remove left headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect horn connector. Remove horn bolt, then remove the horn. H I J WKIA0078E INSTALLATION (HORN LOW) 1. Horn bolt 2. 3. WW Install the horn and tighten horn bolt to specified torque. : 17 N·m (1.7 kg-m, 12.3 ft-lb) L Connect the horn connector. Install left headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" . M Revision: March 2005 WW-37 2005 Altima HORN Revision: March 2005 WW-38 2005 Altima